Ir ADV - C9200 - C7200 - Series ServiceManual EN Rev3 PDF

imageRUNNER ADVANCE
C9280 PRO/C9270 PRO/C7280i/C7270i/

C7270/C7260i/C7260
Service Manual Rev.3
Product Overview
Technology
Periodic service
Parts Replacement and Cleaning
Adjustment
Troubleshooting
Error Code
Service Mode
Installation
1
Appendix
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory,
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are
installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the
inconsistent with local law.
products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not
apply to your locality.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks
Corrections
of the individual companies.
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements
or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this
Copyright
manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may
changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new
not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the
edition of this manual.
consent of Canon Inc.
(C) CANON INC. 2013
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential
information.
Explanation of Symbols
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:
The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the
Symbols
Explanation
Check.
Symbols
relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of
Explanation
Remove the claw.
operation.

In the diagrams,
represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name
accompanies the symbol, the arrow
indicates the direction of the electric
signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the
Check visually.
front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with
Insert the claw.
power.
Check the noise.
Use the bundled part.
2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is
"High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low". (The voltage value, however, differs from
circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
Disconnect the connector.
Push the part.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked

in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines
are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC
Connect the connector.
Plug the power cable.
controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product
Remove the cable/wire

from the cable guide or wire
saddle.
improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of
Turn on the power.
Service Information bulletins.

All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service
Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults
Set the cable/wire to the

cable guide or wire saddle.
Remove the screw.
Tighten the screw.
in the machine.
Blank Page
Contents
0 Safety Precautions
2 Technology
CDRH Act------------------------------------------------------------------------0-2
Laser Safety---------------------------------------------------------------------0-2
Handling of Laser System---------------------------------------------------0-3
Turn power switch ON--------------------------------------------------------0-4
Safety of Toner------------------------------------------------------------------0-4
About Toner-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0-4

Toner on Clothing or Skin--------------------------------------------------------- 0-4
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery---------------------------------0-5

Notes Before it Works Serving----------------------------------------------0-5
Points to Note at Cleaning---------------------------------------------------0-5
1 Product Overview
Product lineups-----------------------------------------------------------------1-2
Main unit-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Pickup/delivery options-----------------------------------------------------------Scanning options-------------------------------------------------------------------Expanded-feature options--------------------------------------------------------
1-2
1-2
1-4
1-5
Features--------------------------------------------------------------------------1-7
Product features--------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7

Features on service work--------------------------------------------------------- 1-7
Specifications----------------------------------------------------------------- 1-10
Specifications of main unit-------------------------------------------------------1-10

Power supply specifications----------------------------------------------------- 1-11
Weight - size------------------------------------------------------------------------1-12
Productivity (print speed)--------------------------------------------------------1-12
Paper type---------------------------------------------------------------------------1-13
Name of Parts----------------------------------------------------------------- 1-17
External View-----------------------------------------------------------------------1-17
Sectional View----------------------------------------------------------------------1-19
Operation----------------------------------------------------------------------------1-20
Basic Configuration------------------------------------------------------------2-2
Functional Configuration---------------------------------------------------------- 2-2

Basic Sequence--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-3
Controller System--------------------------------------------------------------2-6
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-6
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-12
Service Operations----------------------------------------------------------------2-29
DCM----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-34
DCM-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-34
Laser Exposure System---------------------------------------------------- 2-60

Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-60
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-64
Servicing-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-71
Image Formation System-------------------------------------------------- 2-72
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-72
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-83
Servicing--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-132
Fixing System--------------------------------------------------------------- 2-135
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-135
Controls---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-139
Servicing--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-157
Pickup / Feed System----------------------------------------------------- 2-159
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-159
Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit---------------------------------------------------- 2-171
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit----------------------------------------------- 2-181
Registration Unit----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-183
Delivery Unit----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-185
Reverse Unit---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-186
Duplex Unit------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-188
Jam Detection-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-193
Service Work---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-196
External and Controls----------------------------------------------------- 2-197

Service Works (External Auxiliary System)-------------------------------- 2-206
MEAP------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-207
Changes---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-207
Preparation for Using SSO-H------------------------------------------------- 2-208
Preparation for Using SMS---------------------------------------------------- 2-210
Login to SMS---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-218
Installing an MEAP Application----------------------------------------------- 2-220
MEAP Specifications------------------------------------------------------------ 2-224
MEAP Application Management--------------------------------------------- 2-226
Enhanced System Application Management----------------------------- 2-235
System Application Management-------------------------------------------- 2-247
Setting the method to login to SMS----------------------------------------- 2-250
MEAP Application System Information------------------------------------- 2-253
MEAP Application Information------------------------------------------------ 2-255
Check License-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-256
Changing SMS Login Password--------------------------------------------- 2-257
MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log
Management---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-257
Maintenance---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-260
Formatting and Replacing the HDD----------------------------------------- 2-264
Reference material-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-284
Option for exclusive individual measure----------------------------------- 2-286
Embedded RDS------------------------------------------------------------ 2-289
Product Overview---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-289

Limitations------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-290
Service cautions------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-291
E-RDS Setup---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-292
FAQ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-300
Troubleshooting------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-302
Error code and strings---------------------------------------------------------- 2-306
Updater----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-309
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-309
Installing MEAP Application/System Option------------------------------- 2-311
Limitations and Cautions------------------------------------------------------- 2-314
Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-316
System Management Operations-------------------------------------------- 2-324
Maintenance----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-331
FAQ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-332
3 Periodic service
Replacement of consumables----------------------------------------------3-2
IR-ADV C9280 PRO/C7280i/C9270 PRO(200V)/
C7270(200V)/C7270i Series----------------------------------------------------- 3-2
IR-ADV C9270 PRO(100V)/C7270(100V,120V)/
C7260/C7260i Series-------------------------------------------------------------- 3-2
Periodically replaced parts---------------------------------------------------3-2
Host machine------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-2
Consumable parts-------------------------------------------------------------3-3
Host machine------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-3

Options-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-4
Periodical maintenance-------------------------------------------------------3-5
Printer engine------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-5

Reader--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-5
ADF------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-5
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning

List of Parts----------------------------------------------------------------------4-2
List of External / Internal Cover------------------------------------------------- 4-2

List of Main Unit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-5
List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations
for Periodical Cleaning-----------------------------------------------------------4-12
List of Clutch / Solenoid----------------------------------------------------------4-24
List of Motor-------------------------------------------------------------------------4-26
List of Fan----------------------------------------------------------------------------4-35
List of Sensor-----------------------------------------------------------------------4-39
Lamp / Heater, others-------------------------------------------------------------4-48
List of Switch------------------------------------------------------------------------4-52
List of PCB---------------------------------------------------------------------------4-55
List of Connectors-----------------------------------------------------------------4-66
Main Controller System----------------------------------------------------- 4-95
Removing the Flat Control Panel----------------------------------------------4-95

Removing the Upright Control Panel---------------------------------------- 4-100
Removing the Upright Control Panel Arm Unit--------------------------- 4-102
Removing the HDD-------------------------------------------------------------- 4-103
Removing the Main Controller PCB 1-------------------------------------- 4-104
Removing the Main Controller PCB 2-------------------------------------- 4-106
Open the Controller Box------------------------------------------------------- 4-108
Removing the DC Controller PCB------------------------------------------- 4-109
Removing the Laser Interface PCB----------------------------------------- 4-110
Removing the Drum ITB Driver PCB-----------------------------------------4-111
Removing the Developing High Voltage PCB Unit---------------------- 4-112
Removing the Main Power Supply Box------------------------------------ 4-113
Removing the AC Driver Box------------------------------------------------- 4-114
Removing the IH Power Supply PCB Box--------------------------------- 4-117
Removing the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB Box-------------- 4-118
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB Unit-------- 4-119
Removing the Pickup Feed Driver PCB Unit------------------------------ 4-120
Removing the Environment Sensor----------------------------------------- 4-121
Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB----------------- 4-122
Removing the Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination
High Voltage PCB---------------------------------------------------------------- 4-123
Removing the Fixing Feed Driver PCB------------------------------------- 4-124
Removing the Primary Transfer PCB--------------------------------------- 4-125
Laser Exposure System-------------------------------------------------- 4-126

Cleaning the Dustproof Glass------------------------------------------------ 4-126
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit------------------------------------------- 4-127
When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit---------------------------------- 4-130
Image Formation System------------------------------------------------ 4-131
Open the Process Unit Inner Cover.---------------------------------------- 4-131

Closing the Process Unit Inner Cover-------------------------------------- 4-132
Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit--------------------- 4-133
Pulling out the ITB Unit--------------------------------------------------------- 4-134
Removing the ITB Unit--------------------------------------------------------- 4-136
Removing the ITB Frame------------------------------------------------------ 4-137
Installing the ITB Unit----------------------------------------------------------- 4-137
Storing the ITB Unit------------------------------------------------------------- 4-139

Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit------------------------------------ 4-140
Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade------------------------------------------ 4-142
After Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit----------------------------- 4-144
Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit--------------------------------------------- 4-145
Removing the ITB---------------------------------------------------------------- 4-147
Installing the ITB----------------------------------------------------------------- 4-152
Cleaning when replacing the ITB-------------------------------------------- 4-156
Removing the Primary Transfer Roller------------------------------------- 4-157
When Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller----------------------------- 4-159
Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller-------------------------- 4-159
Removing the ITB Inner Scraper Holder----------------------------------- 4-161
Cleaning the ITB Inner Scraper---------------------------------------------- 4-162
Removing the Drum Heater Unit--------------------------------------------- 4-162
Removing the ITB Motor------------------------------------------------------- 4-163
Removing the Patch Sensor Unit-------------------------------------------- 4-164
When Replacing the Patch Sensor Unit------------------------------------ 4-166
Cleaning the Patch Sensor Unit---------------------------------------------- 4-167
Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit--------------------------- 4-168
Removing the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator------------------- 4-169
Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller------------------------- 4-170
Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Unit--------------- 4-172
Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit----------------------------- 4-172
Removing the Primary Charging Rail--------------------------------------- 4-173
Removing the Drum Thermopile--------------------------------------------- 4-175
Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit
(including Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB)--------------- 4-176
When Replacing the Potential Sensor
and Potential Control PCB----------------------------------------------------- 4-177
Removing the Drum Thermistor---------------------------------------------- 4-181
Removing the Developing Assembly
Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y)/(M) and (C)/(Bk)--------------- 4-182
Removing the Primary Charging Assembly------------------------------- 4-184
When Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly----------------------- 4-185
Removing the Primary Charging Assembly Shutter Unit-------------- 4-187
Removing the Grid Plate------------------------------------------------------- 4-189
When Replacing the Grid Plate---------------------------------------------- 4-192

Removing the Grid Cleaning Pad-------------------------------------------- 4-192
Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder--------- 4-194
Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider---------- 4-195
Replacing the Primary Charging Wire-------------------------------------- 4-196
Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly--------------------------------- 4-199
When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire----------------------------- 4-200
Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit-------------------------------- 4-200
When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit----------------------- 4-203
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly-------------------------- 4-203
When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly----------------- 4-204
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit--------- 4-205
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder
and the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider------------- 4-207
Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire--------------------------------- 4-210
Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly--------------------------- 4-212
When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire------------------------ 4-213
Removing the Drum Unit (Bk)------------------------------------------------ 4-214
Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit------------------------------------------ 4-218
Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) and
the Side Seal (Front)/(Rear)--------------------------------------------------- 4-219
Removing the Drum (Bk)------------------------------------------------------- 4-221
Cleaning the Toner Catch Tray (Bk)----------------------------------------- 4-224
When Replacing the Drum (Bk)---------------------------------------------- 4-225
Removing the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk)------------------- 4-225
Removing the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk)-- 4-227
Removing the Drum Fur Brush----------------------------------------------- 4-229
Removing the Developing Assembly (Bk)--------------------------------- 4-232
Installing the Developing Assembly (Bk)----------------------------------- 4-234
When Replacement the Developing Assembly--------------------------- 4-237
Cleaning the Developing Assembly Sleeve Cover (Bk)/
Developing Assembly Toner Blocking Sheet (Bk)----------------------- 4-238
Removing the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)------------------------------------ 4-239
Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)
from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)----------------------------------------------- 4-242
Cleaning the Toner Catch Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C)------------------------------ 4-247
When Replacing the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)------------------------------- 4-248

Cleaning the Developing Assembly
Toner Blocking Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C)-------------------------------------------- 4-249
Removing the Toner Container Manually---------------------------------- 4-249
Removing the Hopper Tray (Bk)--------------------------------------------- 4-252
Removing the Hopper Tray (Y)/(M)/(C)------------------------------------- 4-253
Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Bk)----------------------------------------- 4-254
Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)-------------------------------- 4-257
Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk)---------------------------------------------- 4-261
Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)------------------------------------- 4-267
Removing the Developing Drive Unit (Bk)--------------------------------- 4-275
Removing the Developing Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)------------------------ 4-276
Removing the Waste Toner Container-------------------------------------- 4-277
Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed)--------------------------- 4-278
Fixing System--------------------------------------------------------------- 4-285
Removing the Fixing Unit------------------------------------------------------ 4-285

Removing the Fixing Web Unit----------------------------------------------- 4-287
Replacing the Fixing Web----------------------------------------------------- 4-288
Removing the Fixing Web Roller--------------------------------------------- 4-292
Removing the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit----------------------------------- 4-293
Removing the Fixing IH Unit-------------------------------------------------- 4-296
Removing the Fixing Film Unit------------------------------------------------ 4-300
Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit--------------------------------- 4-301
Removing the Fixing Heat Soaking Roller/Bearing--------------------- 4-302
Removing the Fixing Thermistor--------------------------------------------- 4-303
Removing the Fixing Motor---------------------------------------------------- 4-305
Cleaning the Fixing Unit-------------------------------------------------------- 4-306
Pickup Feed System------------------------------------------------------ 4-309
Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.------------------------------------------------- 4-309

Removing the Fixing Feed Unit---------------------------------------------- 4-310
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Roller----------------------------------- 4-312
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller------------------- 4-313
Removing the Right Deck------------------------------------------------------ 4-314
Removing the Right Deck Pickup/Right Deck Feed/
Right Deck Separation Roller------------------------------------------------- 4-315
Removing the Left Deck-------------------------------------------------------- 4-317

Removing the Left Deck Pickup/Left Deck Feed/
Left Deck Separation Roller--------------------------------------------------- 4-318
Removing the Cassette 3------------------------------------------------------ 4-319
Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller------------ 4-320
Removing the Cassette 4------------------------------------------------------ 4-322
Removing the Cassette 4 Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller------------ 4-323
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit--------------------------- 4-325
Removing the Vertical Path Unit--------------------------------------------- 4-326
Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup Unit, Cassette 4 Pickup Unit,
and Right Deck Pickup Unit--------------------------------------------------- 4-326
Removing the Left Deck Pickup Uni---------------------------------------- 4-327
Removing the Cassette Heater Unit---------------------------------------- 4-329
Removing the Delivery Unit--------------------------------------------------- 4-330
Removing the Reverse Unit--------------------------------------------------- 4-331
Removing the Pre-fixing Feed Belt Unit------------------------------------ 4-332
Cleaning the Post-secondary Transfer Sensor
and the Pre-fixing Feed Belt-------------------------------------------------- 4-333
Removing the Registration Unit---------------------------------------------- 4-334
Cleaning the Transparency Sensor/
Registration Sensor / Original Size Sensor - ----------------------------- 4-335
Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit------------------------------ 4-336
Removing the Cassette 3 and 4 Paper Level Detection Units------- 4-337
Removing the Right Deck Paper Level Detection Unit----------------- 4-337
Removing the Left Deck Paper Level Detection Unit------------------- 4-338
External Auxiliary System------------------------------------------------ 4-339

Removing the Upper Front Cover------------------------------------------- 4-339
Removing the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover------ 4-339
Removing the Upper Right Cover 1----------------------------------------- 4-341
Removing the Multi Unit Inner Cover--------------------------------------- 4-341
Removing the Box Right Cover---------------------------------------------- 4-342
Removing the Box Left Cover------------------------------------------------ 4-343
Removing the Box Upper Cover--------------------------------------------- 4-343
Removing the Upper Left Cover--------------------------------------------- 4-344
Removing the Left Middle Cover--------------------------------------------- 4-345
Removing the Lower Left Cover 3------------------------------------------- 4-345
Removing the Lower Rear Cover-------------------------------------------- 4-346

Removing the Fixing Dustproof Filter and the Ozone Filter----------- 4-347
Removing the Primary Charging Dustproof Filter----------------------- 4-349
Options----------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-350
Removing the DADF Unit------------------------------------------------------ 4-350

Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit---------------------------------- 4-352
Removing the the Printer Cover---------------------------------------------- 4-358
Removing the Buffer Path Unit----------------------------------------------- 4-361
5 Adjustment
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------5-2
When replacing parts---------------------------------------------------------5-2
Main Controller---------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-2
Laser Exposure System----------------------------------------------------------- 5-5
Image Formation System--------------------------------------------------------- 5-6
Fixing System-----------------------------------------------------------------------5-13
When clearing RAM--------------------------------------------------------- 5-14
DC controller PCB-----------------------------------------------------------------5-14
6 Troubleshooting
Making Initial Checks---------------------------------------------------------6-2
List of Initial Check Items--------------------------------------------------------- 6-2
Test Print-------------------------------------------------------------------------6-3
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-3
Selecting Test Print TYPE-------------------------------------------------------- 6-3
How to check test print------------------------------------------------------------ 6-4
Image Faults--------------------------------------------------------------------6-7
Developing Sleeve Ghost -------------------------------------------------------- 6-7

Uneven vertical lines on a halftone image due
to the soiled Charging Roller----------------------------------------------------- 6-8
Toner Drops in the Developing Assembly------------------------------------- 6-9
Transfer failure on the trailing edge of the 2nd side
of coated paper---------------------------------------------------------------------6-10
Calibration for color difference on front and back sides------------------ 6-11
Vertical Lines------------------------------------------------------------------------6-13
Error Code--------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-14

E021-xxx due to mismatched phase between the screw
of color Developing Assembly and coupling of main body--------------6-14
Alarm Code-------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-15
How to clear 04-3042, 04-3142 and 04-3242:------------------------------6-15

How to clear 04-3043, 04-3143 and 04-3243:------------------------------6-15
Version upgrade-------------------------------------------------------------- 6-16
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-16
Version Upgrade via SST--------------------------------------------------------6-22
Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device-------------------6-38
Troubleshooting--------------------------------------------------------------------6-52
Version Upgrade via CDS-------------------------------------------------------6-53
Controller Self Diagnosis--------------------------------------------------- 6-99
Controller Self Diagnosis---------------------------------------------------------6-99

Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs--------------------------- 6-108
Debug log---------------------------------------------------------------------6-110
Scope of Application------------------------------------------------------------ 6-110

Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-110
Collecting System Information-------------------------------------------------6-111
When to Obtain Logs----------------------------------------------------------- 6-115
Network Packet Capture------------------------------------------------------- 6-117
7 Error Code
Over View------------------------------------------------------------------------7-2
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-2
Error Code-----------------------------------------------------------------------7-3
Error Code Details------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-3
Jam Code-------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-128
Jam Type--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-128

Main Unit--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-129
Duplex Color Image Reader-F1---------------------------------------------- 7-132
Paper Deck Unit C1----------------------------------------------------------- 7-133
POD Deck Light A1----------------------------------------------------------- 7-133
Multi-drawer Paper Deck A1------------------------------------------------ 7-134
Buffer Path Unit - J1------------------------------------------------------------- 7-135
Insertion Unit -H1---------------------------------------------------------------- 7-136
Professional Puncher - C1/

Professional Puncher Integration Unit - B1------------------------------- 7-137
Insertion Unit -J1----------------------------------------------------------------- 7-138
Paper Folding Unit - G1-------------------------------------------------------- 7-139
Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1-------------------------------------------- 7-140
External Hole Puncher - A1--------------------------------------------------- 7-141
Staple Finisher-K1/Booklet Finisher-K1------------------------------------ 7-142
Staple Finisher-L1/Booklet Finisher-L1------------------------------------- 7-143
Alarm Code------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-144
Alarm Code Details-------------------------------------------------------------- 7-144
8 Service Mode
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------8-2
Entering Service Mode-----------------------------------------------------------Service Mode Menu---------------------------------------------------------------Service mode item explanations-----------------------------------------------I/O information enhancement---------------------------------------------------Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description-----------------------------COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation-------------------------Security features-------------------------------------------------------------------Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)--------------------------------------------Language switch-------------------------------------------------------------------Back-up of service mode----------------------------------------------------------
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-6
COPIER--------------------------------------------------------------------------8-7
DISPLAY------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-7
I/O (I/O display mode)------------------------------------------------------------8-70
ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-116
FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-186
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-211
TEST-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-313
COUNTER------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-317
FEEDER---------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-359
DISPLAY--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-359
ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-360
FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-362
SORTER--------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-364
ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-364
FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-377
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-379
BOARD----------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-383
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-383
9 Installation
How to look at this Installation Procedure-------------------------------9-2
Description on the parts included in the package-------------------------- 9-2
In the case of using the components------------------------------------------ 9-2
Symbol marks in the illustration------------------------------------------------- 9-2
Checking Before Installation------------------------------------------------9-2

Checking Power Supply----------------------------------------------------------Checking the Installation Environment---------------------------------------Checking Installation Space-----------------------------------------------------Points to Note at Installation Work--------------------------------------------Table of options combination----------------------------------------------------Order to Install the Host Machine and the Options------------------------Types of the Accessory Box------------------------------------------------------
9-2
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-5
9-6
Checking the Contents-------------------------------------------------------9-7

Unpacking---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-12
Unpacking---------------------------------------------------------------------------9-12
Installing the Upright Arm--------------------------------------------------------9-14
Installation--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-16
Installation of the Upright Control Panel-------------------------------------9-16

Installation of the Buffer Path Unit---------------------------------------------9-19
Installation of the Pickup Assembly-------------------------------------------9-24
Installation of the Process Unit-------------------------------------------------9-26
Installation of the Black Developing Assembly-----------------------------9-32
Installing the USB Device Port
(only with the products designed for Europe)-------------------------------9-38
Installation of the Noise Reduction Cover-----------------------------------9-41
Securing the Host Machine------------------------------------------------------9-42
Other Installation Work-----------------------------------------------------------9-43
Preparation for the Main Power Connection--------------------------------9-43
Turning ON the Main Power----------------------------------------------------9-44

Installation of the Toner Container---------------------------------------------9-44
Settings at Installation------------------------------------------------------------9-44
Setting the Deck--------------------------------------------------------------------9-45
Setting the Paper Cassette------------------------------------------------------9-46
Auto Gradation Adjustment------------------------------------------------------9-47
Image Position Adjustment------------------------------------------------------9-47
Checking the Network Connection--------------------------------------------9-54
Network Troubleshooting--------------------------------------------------------9-55
Settings to enable "Access Management System"
(North/Middle/South America and Europe only)---------------------------9-56
When moving the host machine to another place

after installation, execute the operation shown below.------------- 9-57
When moving the machine to another floor---------------------------------9-57

When moving the machine by truck-------------------------------------------9-59
Printer Cover-B1------------------------------------------------------------- 9-63

Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-63
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-63
Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-63
Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-64
Operation Check-------------------------------------------------------------------9-69
Copy Tray-P1----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-70

Installation procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-70
Utility Tray-A2----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-73

When installing the USB Keyboard--------------------------------------------9-75
Key Switch Unit-B1---------------------------------------------------------- 9-76

Checking After Installation-------------------------------------------------------9-78
Installation Procedule----------------------------------------------------------- 9-108
Copy Card Reader-F1------------------------------------------------------ 9-79
Cassette Heater Unit-------------------------------------------------------9-113
Points to Note Before Installation----------------------------------------------9-79

Setting After Installation----------------------------------------------------------9-88
Voice Opearion Kit-C2------------------------------------------------------ 9-89

Checking After Installation-------------------------------------------------------9-96
Operation Check-------------------------------------------------------------------9-96
Voice Guidance Kit-F2------------------------------------------------------ 9-97

Checking After Installation ---------------------------------------------------- 9-104
Operation Check----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-104
Additional Memory Type D (512MB)---------------------------------- 9-105
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-105

Points to Note Before Installation-------------------------------------------- 9-105
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-105
Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-105
Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-105
Checking After Installation----------------------------------------------------- 9-107
Reader Heater Unit-------------------------------------------------------- 9-108
Checking the Contents (Asia only)------------------------------------------ 9-108

Checking the Parts to be Installed (Except for Asia)-------------------- 9-108
Checking the Contents (EUR only)------------------------------------------ 9-113

Checking the Parts to be Installed (AUS only)--------------------------- 9-113
Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1----------------------------------------------9-117

Checking Bundled Components--------------------------------------------- 9-117
Paper Deck Heater Unit-------------------------------------------------- 9-126
Checking the Parts to be Installed------------------------------------------- 9-126

Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit------------------------------- 9-132

Installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit------------------------------------ 9-133
Document Scan Lock Kit-B1-------------------------------------------- 9-138

Checking after Installation----------------------------------------------------- 9-141
Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1------------- 9-142

USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2--------------- 9-148
Points to Note at Installation------------------------------------------------- 9-148

Check Items when Turning OFF the Power------------------------------- 9-149

Installing the USB Device Port----------------------------------------------- 9-150
Installing the Card Reader----------------------------------------------------- 9-159
Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer------------------------------------ 9-161
Operation Check (USB Device Port/Multimedia Reader/Writer)----- 9-163
Combination of HDD Options------------------------------------------- 9-168

Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export--------------------- 9-169
Making a Backup of the Data (reference only)--------------------- 9-170
Procedure for Import/Export ALL of User Settings---------------------- 9-170

Backup of MEAP Application-------------------------------------------------- 9-170
Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download
of Disabled License Files and Uninstallation----------------------------- 9-170
User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H
(Single Sign-ON H)-------------------------------------------------------------- 9-171
Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data------------ 9-171
Setting Before Turning OFF the Power

(HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit only)------------------------------- 9-207
After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------- 9-216
Setting for Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-217
[TYPE-5]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-219

Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-176
Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment---------------------------------- 9-176
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption

& Mirroring Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-219
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work
(only when HDD Data Encryption
& Mirroring Kit has been installed)------------------------------------------ 9-232
[TYPE-2]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-177
[TYPE-6]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-233
Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------- 9-172

[TYPE-1]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-173

[TYPE-3]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-190

[TYPE-4]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-205

& Mirroring Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-205

& Mirroring Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-233
Setting Before Turning OFF the Power------------------------------------- 9-234
Checking the Security Version------------------------------------------------ 9-243
Checking the Security Mark--------------------------------------------------- 9-243
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work------ 9-244
[TYPE-7]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-245

(only when HDD Data Encryption
& Mirroring Kit has been installed)------------------------------------------ 9-301

& Mirroring Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-245
[TYPE-10]-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-302

& Mirroring Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-302
[TYPE-8]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-259

& Mirroring Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-259
[TYPE-11]-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-322

& Mirroring Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-322
[TYPE-9]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-282

& Mirroring Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-282
Appendix
Service Tools---------------------------------------------------------------------- II
Special Tools---------------------------------------------------------------------------- II
Solvents and Oils--------------------------------------------------------------------- IV
General Timing Chart----------------------------------------------------------- V
Basic sequence at power ON-------------------------------------------------------V

Basic sequence at printing
<Condition:Full color, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>------------------- VI
Basic sequence at printing
<Condition:Monochrome, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>------------ VII
General Circuit Diagram------------------------------------------------------VIII

Signal Input/Output List----------------------------------------------------------- VIII
General Circuit Diagram-----------------------------------------------------------XX
List of User Mode----------------------------------------------------------------LI
Device Information Delivery Settings-------------------------------------------- LI

Environment Settings--------------------------------------------------------------- LII
Adjustment/Maintenance---------------------------------------------------------LXIII
Function Settings------------------------------------------------------------------ LXV
Set Destination-----------------------------------------------------------------LXXXIII
Management Settings------------------------------------------------------- LXXXIV
Backup Data---------------------------------------------------------------LXXXIX
Detail of HDD partition------------------------------------------------------ XCV
Soft Counter List------------------------------------------------------------ XCVI
Soft counter specifications------------------------------------------------------XCVI
Removal-------------------------------------------------------------------------- CII
Removal-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- CII
Safety Precautions
Act
CDRH
Safety
Laser
of Laser System
Handling
power switch ON
Turn
of Toner
Safety
When Handling a
Notes
Lithium Battery
Before it Works
Notes
Serving
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
to Note at Cleaning C9075 PRO/9070 PRO/9065

Points
PRO/9060 PRO/C7065/7055
Series
0-2
CDRH Act
Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drug Administration put
Laser beam radiation may pose a danger to the human body. A laser scanner mounted on
into force regulations concerning laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply
the machine is sealed with the protection housing and external cover to prevent the laser
to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products
beam from leaking to the outside. The laser beam never leaks out of the scanner as far as
not certified under the regulations is banned within the Untied States. The label shown here
users operate the machine normally
indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations, and its attachment is required on all laser
products that are soled in the United States.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950).
Sicherheit des Lasers
Laserstrahlen knnen fr den menschlichen Krper gefhrlich sein. Aus diesem Grund ist
das optische Lasersystem mit einem Schutzgehuse und einer Auenabdeckung dicht
verschlossen und hat eine Struktur, die keine Laserstrahlen nach auen dringen lsst. Unter
der Voraussetzung, dass der Benutzer dieses Gert normal bedient, ist ein Austritt von
Laserstrahlen daher ausgeschlossen.
F-0-1
A different description may be used for a different product.
0-2
0-3
Handling of Laser System

When servicing the area around the laser assembly, be sure to turn off the main power.
If you must service while the power is turned on, be sure to keep the followings:
- Do not use a screwdriver or tools that have a high level of reflectance in the laser path.
- Remove watches and rings before starting the work. (They can reflect the laser beam,
possibly hitting the eye.)
The machine's covers that can reflect laser light are identified by means of a warning label
(Figure). If you must detach a cover showing the label, be sure to take extra caution during
the work.
Handhabung des Laserteils
Bei servicearbeiten am oder in der Nhe des Laserteils zuerst das Hauptgert abschalten.
Bei Servicearbeiten, die unbedingt bei eingeschaltetem Gert durchgefhrt werden mssen,
auf jeden Fall die folgenden Vorsichtsmanahmen beachten.
F-0-2
Keine stark reflektierenden Schraubenzieher oder hnliche Werkzeuge direkt in den

Lichtpfad des Laserstrahls bringen.
Vor Beginn der Arbeit Uhren, Ringe und hnliche Gegenstnde abnehmen. (Reflektierte
Laserstrahlen knnten sonst in die Augen geraten.)
Abdeckungen, die mglicherweise Laserstrahlen reflektieren, haben in der auf dem Bild
gezeigten Position einen Aufkleber. Bei Servicearbeiten auf der Innenseite von Abdeckungen
mit Aufkleber ist besondere Vorsicht erforderlich.
0-3
0-4
Turn power switch ON
Safety of Toner
The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power
switch.
The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power
mode, sleep mode).
About Toner
The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.
Do not turn off the main power switch while the progress bar is indicated, during which
access is made to the HDD. If deprived of power, the HDD can suffer a fault (E602).
Toner on Clothing or Skin

If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it
off with water.
Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the
fibers of the cloth.
Tonner is easy to react with plastic material, avoid contact with plastic.
F-0-3
0-4
0-5
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery
Notes Before it Works Serving
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.

DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
At servicing, be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and
disconnect the power plug.
CAUTION:
Points to Note at Cleaning
Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr.

Gebrauchte Batterien gem der Anleitung beseitigen.
CAUTION:
When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that
the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling.
F-0-4
0-5
Product Overview
Product Overview
lineups
Product
Features
Specifications
of Parts
Name
Product Overview > Product lineups > Pickup/delivery options > Applicable options for each model
Product lineups
1-2
Pickup/delivery options
Applicable options for each model
Main unit
Connectable pickup/delivery options differ according to the model
Connecting configuration
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO
POD Deck Lite-A1
Document Insertion
Unit-H1
Paper Folding Unit-G1
or
Paper Deck
Unit-C1
or
Booklet Finisher-K1/ Professional Puncher-C1
+ Professional Puncher
Staple Finisher-K1
Integration Unit-B1
F-1-1
Multi-drawer Paper Deck-A1
F-1-2
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO / 9270 PRO / 7270 / 7260
Document Insertion Unit-J1
imageRUNNER
imageRUNNER
imageRUNNER
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE C9280 ADVANCE C9270
ADVANCE C7270 ADVANCE C7260
PRO
PRO
Control Panel
HDD
80ppm
70ppm
Light-Production machine
Target machine: iR5075
Upright Control Panel
F-1-3
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7270 /7260
Underlined (2-digit) numeric figures indicate print speed (ppm: print per minute)
Print speed
Positioning
Buffer Pass Unit-J1
70ppm
60ppm
Office machine
Target machine: iRC6880, iRC5880
Flat Control Panel
* Option: Upright Control Panel
160GB
POD Deck Lite-A1

External
Puncher-A1
or
JPN: 1TB
Other: 160GB
Communication Serial
method with
pickup/delivery
options
Pickup/delivery Some equipments are connected to iR ADV C9280 PRO / C9270 PRO only.
options
Some equipments are connected to iR ADV C7270 / C7260 only.
or
Buffer Pass Unit-J1

Booklet Finisher-L1
Staple Finisher-L1
T-1-1
Paper Deck Unit-C1

Document Insertion
/ Folding Unit-G1
F-1-4
Product Overview > Product lineups > Pickup/delivery options > Applicable options for each model
1-2
Product Overview > Product lineups > Pickup/delivery options > Compulsory options and conditions
Compulsory options and conditions
Delivery options
Product name
Pickup options
Product name
POD Deck Lite-A1
Multi-drawer Paper
Deck-A1
Paper Deck Unit-C1
Cassette Heater Unit

38
Paper Deck Heater

Unit-A1
Paper Deck Warm
Breeze Unit-A1
Document Insertion
Unit-H1

Pickup method: air separation method
Pickup capacity: 3500 sheets (80g/m2)
Paper type: thick paper/thin paper/coated paper
Paper size: B5 to 13X19
Paper basis weight: : 52 to 300g/m2
Double-feed detection: not available
Option for iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO
Pickup method: air separation method
Paper type: thick paper/thin paper/Coated paper
Paper size: A5 to 13X19.2
Double-feed detection: option
Pickup method: retard method
Paper type: thick paper/thin paper
Paper size: A4, B5, LTR
Double-feed detection: not available
Option for cassette in main unit
JPN, ASIA, CN, KR, TW : Standard
EUR : Option
120V-area: not available
Option for Paper Deck Unit - C1
Available for JPN, ASIA, CN, KR, TW only
Other-area: assigned as a service part
Option for Multi-drawer Paper Deck-A1 (upper/middle/lower cassette)
Available for Japanese models only
T-1-2
1-3
Product Overview > Product lineups > Pickup/delivery options > Compulsory options and conditions

Pickup capacity: max. 400 sheets (200-sheet each for the upper deck and
the lower deck)
Paper type: plain paper/recycled paper/color paper/thick paper/coated paper
Paper size: B5 to 13X19.2
Document Insertion
Option for iR ADVANCE C7270/7260
Unit-J1
Connection is available with either this Insertion Unit - J1 or Paper Folding
Insertion Unit - G1
the lower deck)
Document Insertion / Connection is available with either this Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1 or
Folding Unit-G1
Insertion Unit - J1 as an option for iR ADVANCE C7270/7260.
the lower deck)
Professional
Puncher-C1
Professional Puncher Integration Unit-B1 is required
Professional Puncher Option for iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO
Integration Unit-B1
To be used with Professional Puncher-C1
Paper Folding Unit-G1 Option for iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO
Staple Finisher/Saddle Finisher is required at downstream configuration
Folding type: Z-fold, C-fold, Half fold, Accordion Z-fold, Double parallel fold
Paper size: A4R to 11X17 for folding, B5 to 13X19.2 for through-pass
Paper basis weight: 52 to 105g/m2 (Double parallel fold: 52 to 90g/m2)
Staple Finisher-K1
Buffer Path Unit - J1 is required at upstream configuration
Paper basis weight: 52 to 300g/m2
Booklet Finisher-K1
Saddle: irregular saddle stitch with A4 - 13x19.2, 20-sheet saddle stitching,
3-sheet for no-staple V-fold
Staple Finisher-L1
No compulsory options and particular conditions
Paper basis weight: 52 to 300g/m2
Booklet Finisher-L1
Saddle: 16-sheet saddle stitching
Buffer Pass Unit-J1
Necessary when a finisher is connected
1-3
Product Overview > Product lineups > Scanning options > Compulsory options and conditions
Product name
Inner Booklet
Trimmer-A1
Puncher Unit-BE1
Puncher Unit-BF1/
BG1/BH1
External 2 Hole
Puncher-A1
External 2/3 Hole
Puncher-A1
External 2/4 Hole
Puncher - A1
External 4 Hole
Puncher-A1
Staple Cartridge-D2
Staple Cartridge-D3
Staple-P1
Staple-J1
Staple-G1
1-4
Scanning options

Option for Staple Finisher - K1/Booklet Finisher-K1
Option for Staple Finisher - K1/Booklet Finisher-K1.

For Japanese models only.
AB, 2-hole
Option for Staple Finisher - K1/Booklet Finisher-K1.
BF1: Inch, 2/3-hole
BG1: FRN, 2/4-hole BH1: SWE, 4-hole
Option for Staple Finisher - L1/Booklet Finisher - L1.
AB, 2-hole
Inch, 2/3-hole
FRN, 2/4-hole
SWE, 4-hole
Saddle staple CRG. Option for Saddle Finisher - L1
Saddle staple CRG. Option for Saddle Finisher - L1
Saddle staple CRG. Option for Saddle Finisher - K1
Plain staple CRG. Option for Staple Finisher - L1/Saddle Finisher - L1.
Plain staple CRG. Option for Staple Finisher - K1/Saddle Finisher - K1.
Duplex Color Image

Reader Unit-F1
Reader Heater Unit-G1
ADF Access Handle-A1
Printer Cover-B1
T-1-3
F-1-5
Product name
Duplex Color Image

Reader - F1
Simultaneous 2-sided scanning

B/W (1-SIDED/2-SIDED): :600dpi=120/120ipm, 300dpi: 120/200ipm
Color (1-sided/2-sided): :600dpi=70/70ipm, 300dpi: 120/140ipm
Paper basis weight:
<1-sided> AB-configuration: 38 to 220 g/m2 Inch-configuration:50 to 220 g/
m2
<2-sided> 50 to 220 g/m2
In case of the color original or the B/W original under mixed configuration of
color and B/W originals, paper basis weight is 64 to 220 g/m2
Stacking capacity: max. 300 sheets
Reader Heater Kit - G1 For JPN, ASIA, CN, KR, TW only
ADF Access
It is the cover to be installed at the top of the host machine when using this
Handle-A1
equipment as a printer model.
Printer Cover-B1
It is the handle to support opening and closing the Feeder.
T-1-4
Product Overview > Product lineups > Scanning options > Compulsory options and conditions
1-4
Product Overview > Product lineups > Expanded-feature options > Compulsory options and conditions
Expanded-feature options
Hardware products
Product name
Upright Control Panel - B1

Utility Tray-A2
Copy Card Reader-F1

Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2
Voice Operation Kit-C2
Voice
Operation
Unit
Multimedia Reader
/ Writer-A2
Key Switch Unit-B1
2.5inch/160GB HDD-G1
2.5inch/1TB HDD-L1
USB
Device Port-A2
RemovableHDD
Kit-AH1
Voice
Guidance
PCB
Voice
Operation
PCB
Utillity Tray-A2
Key Swecth Unit-B1
Copy Card Reader F1
Upright Control Panel-B1
Voice Guidance
Kit-F2
Voice
Guidance
Unit
HDD Mirroring
Kit-D2
Serial Interface Kit-K1

Copy Control
Interface Kit-A1
HDD Data Encryption

& Mirroring Kit-C7
Additional Memory
Type D(512MB)
ColorPASS-GX400
License Option
Document Scan
Lock Kit-B1
Super G3 FAX Board-AD2
imagePASSA2
1-5
Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board-AD1

Super G3 3rd/4th Line FAX Board-AE1
F-1-6

Equipped as standard with iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO
No particular options and conditions are required.
Copy Card Reader Installation Kit-A2 is required.

Using with Serial Interface Kit-K1 and Control Interface Kit-A1 is not
available.
Copy Card Reader Attachment Required when Card Reader-F1 is installed.
Kit A2
Super G3 FAX Board - AD2
Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board No compulsory options and particular conditions
- AD1
Super G3 3rd/4th LineFAX
Board - AE1
Voice Guidance Kit - F2
Consists of the voice guidance PCB and the voice guidance
assembly.
Voice Operation Kit - C2
Consists of the voice operation PCB and the voice operation panel.
HDD Data Encryption &
Mirroring Kit-C7
USB Device Port - A2
Consists of USB 2-port HUB PCB only.
Additional Memory Type D
Necessary when PS, PDF Direct, PDF/XPS Direct, Trust Stamp,
(512MB)
ImagePASS-A2, or ColorPASS-GX400 is installed.
2.5inch/160GB HDD - G1
This is used when the mirroring function is used with HDD Data
Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C7.
2.5inch/1TB HDD - L1
This is used when the mirroring function is used with HDD Data
Removable HDD Kit - AH1
HDD Mirroring Kit - D2
Multimedia Reader/Writer - A2 USB device port - A2 is required.
Supporting CF, SD memory and memory stick.
imagePASS - A2
Additional memory Type D (512MB) is required.
ColorPASS - GX400
Additional memory Type D (512MB) is required.
eM Controller-C1
Serial Interface Kit-K1
Required when the coin manager is connected.
Using with Copy Card Reader-F1 and Control Interface Kit-A2 is not
available.
Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 Required when the coin manager is connected.
Using with Copy Card Reader-F1 and Serial Interface Kit-K1 is not
available. .
T-1-5
1-5
1-6
License products
At the time of installation, obtain the license number according to the license certificate
included in the package, and enter the license number on the control panel of the main unit.
This operation activates the applicable features.
No physical installation work is required at the time of installation.
Product name
PCL Printer Kit - AS1
PCL International Font Set-A1
PS Printer Kit - AS1
Direct print Kit (for PDF/XPS) H1
Direct print Kit (for PDF) - H1
Direct print Kit (for XPS) - H1
Remote Operation Software Kit
- B1
Barcode Printing Kit-D1
Encryption Secure Print
Software Kit - D1
Secure Watermark - B1
Document Scan Lock Kit - B1
ACCESS MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM Kit - B1
Web Access Software H1
Universal Send Advanced
Feature Set - D1
Universal Send Security
Feature Set - D1
Universal Send Digital User
Signature Kit - C1
Remote FAX Kit - A1
iR-ADV Security Kit-A1 for
IEEE 2600.1 Common Criteria
Certification

T-1-6
1-6
Product Overview > Features > Features on service work > Improvement on operability for version upgrading
Features
Features on service work

New Service Mode
Product features
High productivity
High image quality
8-beam laser
High image quality

30mm(O/D)E-drum/ECO toner
High capacity set-on CRG
High productivity
IH-ODF fixing
1-7
Descriptions of Service Mode items are also displayed
High image quality

84mm(O/D)E-drum/ECOtoner
High capacity set-on CRG
High image quality

Drum rotation
speed control
High image quality

ITB speed control
F-1-8
High productivity
High image quality
Next generation controller
High productivity
Pickup supporting
13 X 19.2 220gsm paper
Features
Natural language description
Items in COPIER > OPTION > BODY are newly classified.
Enhanced I/O information
Descriptions of Error Codes/Alarm Codes are displayed
Simplified screen switching between Level 1 and Level 2
F-1-7
Improvement on operability for version upgrading

Version upgrading for most options (*) is available through the main unit.
As usual, SST (Service Support Tool) is used for version upgrading.
* Professional Puncher is excluded.
Version upgrading for Professional Puncher is performed by connecting with a PC that has
the firmware (built-in downloader) installed.
Product Overview > Features > Features on service work > Improvement on operability for version upgrading
1-7
Product Overview > Features > Features on service work > Display specifications of Jam/Error codes
Display specifications of Jam/Error codes
1-8
Error code
Jam code:
Jam code and Occurrence location code are displayed on the screen (*) when a jam
occurs.
Error code:
In addition to Error code, Occurrence location code is displayed on the screen when an
Exxxxxx-yyyy-aa
error occurs.
xxxxxx : error code

yyyy : sub-code
aa : location
Jam code
aabbbb
aa : location
bbbb : jam code
F-1-10
Advantage on service activity

On receipt of a user call regarding a Jam or Error :
The malfunctioning location (device) can be identified before a technician dispatch.
The cause and remedy can be assumed before a technician dispatch.
Remote service by a phone or e-mail can recover their malfunction depending on the
reported cause of jam such as improper user operation. (A technician dispatch is not
F-1-9
Product Overview > Features > Features on service work > Display specifications of Jam/Error codes
required)
1-8
Product Overview > Features > Features on service work > Improvement of serviceability
Improvement of serviceability
1-9
3) Turn the Stand Control Panel.
Upright Control Panel can be rotated, so that service mode, etc. can be
performed even at the operation on the rear side of the machine.
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Shaft Support Cover left.
4 claws
1 screw
Stand Control Panel
1 rubber cap
F-1-13
Rubber cap
Claw
x4
Claw
Shaft Support
F-1-11
2) Remove the screw of the arm

1 screw
Screw
F-1-12
Product Overview > Features > Features on service work > Improvement of serviceability
1-9
Product Overview > Specifications > Specifications of main unit
Specifications
Specifications of main unit
Installation method of main unit
Photoreceptor
Black
Color
Exposure method
Charging method Black
Color
Developing method
Transfer method
Separation method
Pickup method:
Right/Left deck
Upper/Lower
cassette
Manual feed tray
Drum cleaning
Black
method
Color
ITB cleaning method
Fixing method
Toner type
Toner supplying method
Toner level detecting function
Lead-edge image margin
Left/Right image margin
Warm-up time
Quick
To copy
staring icon
ON
indication
To copy
possibility
Console type
84mm (O/D) OPC drum
30.6mm (O/D) OPC drum
Laser exposure method
Corona + grid charging method
AC roller charging method
Dry, 2-component method
Intermediate belt transfer method (primary transfer,
secondary transfer: transfer roller method)
Curvature separation method + static eliminator
Separation retard method
Separation retard method
Simplified retard method
Cleaning blade + brush roller
Cleaning blade
Cleaning blade
twin belt fixing
Non-magnetic negative toner
Set-on
Available
4.0 mm +1.5/-1.0 mm
2.5 mm +1.5 mm
iR ADV-C9280 PRO/9270 PRO: 10 sec or less
iR ADV-C7270/7260: 7 sec or less
1-10
Maximum printable 1-sided
area
2-sided
Paper size
Pickup capacity:
Right/Left deck
323 x 476.6mm
313 x 476.6mm
A5R to 13X 19.2 (330.2 X 487.7 mm)
1100 sheets (80g/m2)
1250 sheets (64 g/m2)
Upper/Lower
550 sheets (80g/m2)
cassette
680 sheets (64 g/m2)
Manual feed tray
100 sheets (80g/m2)
Duplexing method
Through pass
Memory capacity
For Main Controller 1:
Max. 1GB
For Main Controller 2:
Max. 1.5GB (standard: 1GB Option: 512MB)
HDD capacity
iR ADVANCE C9280 PRP/9270 PRO (JPN): 1TB
Others: 160GB
Temperature range in use environment See Chapter 9, "Checking the Installation Environment."
Humidity range in use environment
See Chapter 9, "Checking the Installation Environment."
Atmospheric pressure range in use
810.6 to 1013.3 hpa (0.8 to 1.0 of atmospheric pressure)
environment
Operational noise
58 db or less
Rated power supply
See "Power supply specifications."
Maximum energy consumption
imageRUNNER ADV-C9280 PRO: 2.5kW or less
imageRUNNER ADV-C9270 PRO/7270/7260: 2kW or less
Dimension
See Chapter 9, "Checking Installation Space."
Mass
Approx. 231.5 kg
T-1-7
30 sec or less
Quick
To copy
31 sec or less
staring possibility
OFF
At the time of sleep 30 sec or less
return
First copy time
Black
imageRUNNER ADV-C9280 PRO/9270 PRO: 4.4 sec
imageRUNNER ADV-C7270/7260: 4.9 sec
Color
imageRUNNER ADV-C9280 PRO/9270 PRO: 6.0 sec
imageRUNNER ADV-C7270/7260: 6.6 sec
Image gradation
256 gradation
Print resolution
Max. 1200 dpi X 1200 dpi
Maximum image guarantee area
313 X 466.6mm
Product Overview > Specifications > Specifications of main unit
1-10
Product Overview > Specifications > Power supply specifications
1-11
Power supply specifications

Product name
Power supply source

(number of cables)
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO/C9270 PRO Power outlet (1or 2 pc.)
Japan
V (V)
I (A)
North America
V (V)
I (A)
100
2.4
120
2.4
230
1.2
230
1.2
230
1.2
Power supply outlet (1)
100
4.0
120
4.0
230
2.0
230
2.0
230
2.0
Insertion Unit - H1
100
1.0
120
1.0
230
1.0
230
1.0
230
1.0
Document Insertion Unit - J1
120
2.8
230
2.8
230
2.8
230
2.8
Staple Finisher - K1
100
2.8
120
2.8
230
2.8
230
2.8
230
2.8
Staple Finisher - L1
Main unit
Saddle Finisher - K1
100
2.8
120
2.8
230
2.8
230
2.8
230
2.8
Saddle Finisher - L1
Main unit
Puncher Unit - BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1
Finisher
External 2-hole Puncher - A1
Finisher
Professional Puncher - C1
Integration Unit - B1
Professional Puncher Integration Unit - B1
120
5.5
230
3.1
230
3.1
230
3.1
Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1
100
1.0
120
1.0
230
1.0
230
1.0
230
1.0
Paper Folding Unit - G1
Finisher
Inner Trimmer - A1
Finisher
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit - F1
Main unit
10
-
15
10
-
220-240
1 pc.
220-240
1 pc.
-
I (A)
20
1 pc.
220-240
1 pc.
220-240
1 pc.
-
V (V)
POD Deck Light-A1
120
15
Aus
I (A)
Main unit
1 pc.
220-240
1 pc.
220-240
1 pc.
-
V (V)
Paper Deck Unit -C1
Power outlet (1or 2 pc.)
15
Asia
I (A)
200
15
1 pc./2 pc.
100
15
2 pc.
-
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7270/C7260
208
EUR
V (V)
15
10
-
T-1-8
Product Overview > Specifications > Power supply specifications
1-11
Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (print speed)
1-12
Weight - size
Product name
iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO/
C9060 PRO
iR ADVANCE C7270/7260
Duplex Color Image Reader - F1
POD Deck Light - A1
Paper Deck Unit - C1
Insertion Unit - H1
Insertion Unit - J1
Professional Puncher Integration Unit - B1
Staple Finisher - K1
Saddle Finisher - K1
Staple Finisher - L1
Saddle Finisher - L1
Buffer Path Unit - J1
External 2-hole Puncher - A1
External 2/3 Hole Puncher - A1
External 2/4 Hole Puncher - A1
External 4 Hole Puncher - A1
Productivity (print speed)

Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm)
Weight
Approx. (Kg)
689
932
1040
231.5
689
633
601
950
323
662
746
662
336
305
250
654
767
649
649
182.7
107
107
107
107
932
603
621
797
583
679
793
679
793
792
792
765
765
656
656
663.3
615
615
615
615
1040
179
570
1040
570
1242
1407
1242
1190
1040
1040
1040
1040
1121
1121
962.8
825
825
825
825
231.5
27.4
50
150
29.4
40
61
76
71
80
40
61
108
48
72
18.75
7.7
7.7
7.7
7.7
Size
Mode
Paper basis
Paper type
weight
(g/m2)
A4 / 1-sided Plain paper

LTR
Thick paper
ImageRUNNER ADVANCE
C9280 PRO
C9270 PRO
Cassette Manual feed Cassette Manual feed
Color BW Color BW Color BW Color BW
52-105
106-220
221-300
52-105
106-220
221-300
52-105
70.0
35.0
23.3
70.0
35.0
35.0
80.0
40.0
26.7
80.0
40.0
40.0
106-220
17.5
20.0
221-300
11.6
13.3
2-sided Plain paper
52-105
35.0
40.0
Thick paper
106-220
17.5
20.0
221-300
2-sided Plain paper

Thick paper
LDR
Thick paper
40.2
20.1
13.4
35.9
17.9
20.7(A3)
/20.1(LDR)
10.3(A3)
/10.0(LDR)
6.9(A3)
/6.7(LDR)
18.4(A3)
/17.9(LDR)
9.2(A3)
/8.9(LDR)
-
65.0
32.5
21.7
65.0
32.5
32.5
70.0
35.0
23.3
70.0
35.0
35.0
16.2
17.5
10.8
11.7
32.5
35.0
16.2
17.5
36.6
18.3
12.2
31.5
15.7
18.8(A3) /
18.3(LDR)
9.4(A3) /
9.1(LDR)
6.2(A3) /
6.1(LDR)
16.2(A3) /
15.7(LDR)
8.1(A3) /
7.8(LDR)
T-1-10
T-1-9
Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (print speed)
1-12
1
Size
Product Overview > Specifications > Paper type
Mode
Paper basis
Paper type
weight
(g/m2)

LTR
Thick paper
2-sided Plain paper
Thick paper
LDR
Thick paper
2-sided Plain paper
Thick paper
1-13
ImageRUNNER ADVANCE
C7270
C7260
Cassette Manual feed Cassette Manual feed
Color BW Color BW Color BW Color BW
52-90
90-105
106-220
221-300
52-90
90-105
106-220
221-300
52-90
60.0
55.0
30.0
20.0
60.0
55.0
30.0
30.0
70.0
65.0
35.0
22.3
70.0
65.0
35.0
35.0
90-105
27.5
32.5
106-220
15.0
17.5
221-300
10.0
11.7
52-90
30.0
35.0
90-105
27.5
32.5
106-220
15.0
17.5
221-300
36.6
36.6
18.3
12.2
31.5
31.5
15.7
18.8(A3)/
18.3(LDR)
18.8(A3)/
18.3(LDR)
9.4(A3) /
9.1(LDR)
6.2(A3) /
6.1(LDR)
16.2(A3)/
15.7(LDR)
16.2(A3)/
15.7(LDR)
8.1(A3) /
7.8(LDR)
-
55.0
60.0
36.6
27.5
18.3
30.0
20.0
18.3
12.2
55.0
60.0
31.5
27.5
-
30.0
-
15.7
-
27.5
30.0
18.8(A3) /
18.3(LDR)
13.7
15.0
9.1
10.0
27.5
30.0
13.7
15.0
9.4(A3) /
9.1(LDR)
6.2(A3) /
6.1(LDR)
16.2(A3) /
15.7(LDR)
Paper type
Usable paper types are shown on the next page and later.
For irregular-sized paper, refer to the table below.
Type
Feeding direction (mm)
Width direction (mm)
Irregular size 1-1

Irregular size 1-2
Irregular size 1-3
Irregular size 1-4
Irregular size 2-1
Irregular size 2-2
Irregular size 2-3
Irregular size 2-4
Irregular size 3-1
Irregular size 3-2
Irregular size 3-3
Irregular size 3-4
Irregular size 4-1
Irregular size 4-2
Irregular size 4-3
Irregular size 4-4
Irregular size 5
182.0 to 209.9
210.0 to 279.2
279.3 to 432.0
432.1 to 487.7
182.0 to 209.9
210.0 to 279.2
279.3 to 432.0
432.1 to 487.7
182.0 to 209.9
210.0 to 279.2
279.3 to 432.0
432.1 to 487.7
182.0 to 209.9
210.0 to 279.2
279.3 to 432.0
432.1 to 487.7
487.8 to 630.0
139.7 to 181.9
182.0 to 210.0
210.1 to 297.0
297.1 to 330.2
139.7 to 330.2
T-1-12
8.1(A3) /
7.8(LDR)
T-1-11
Product Overview > Specifications > Paper type
1-13
Product Overview > Specifications > Paper type > Pickup
1-14
Independent Insertion Unit
Insertion Unit
Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes
Multi Deck
Yes No No No No No No No No No
Paper Deck
Yes No No Yes Yes No No No No Yes

No No No Yes Yes No No No No No
Yes No No Yes Yes No No No No No
POD Deck Light
Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes No No
Cassette 4 of main unit
Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5,

11x17, LGL, LTR, LTRR,
SRA3, 12x18, 13x19
B5R EXEC
"A5R, STMTR, OFFICIO,
E-OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO,
M-OFFICIO, A-OFFICIO,
A-LTR
A-LTRR, GLTR-R, GLTR,
GLGL, AFLS, FLS,
Irregular size1-1, Irregular
size1-2, Irregular size1-3,
Irregular size1-4"
K8 K16
F4A, Irregular size0-1,
size5
size4-3, Irregular size4-4
EXEC-R K16R
Left deck of main unit
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Embossed paper (106

to 150, 151 to 220)
Thick paper (221 to
256)
Embossed paper (221
to 256)
(106 to 150, 151 to 220,
221 to 256)
2-side coated paper
(106 to 150, 151 to 220,
221 to 256)
Size
Right deck of main unit
Insertion Unit
Multi Deck
Paper Deck
POD Deck Light
A4, B5, LTR

A3, B4, A4R, 11x17, LGL,
LTRR, SRA3, 12x18,
13x19
B5R, EXEC
A-LTR
A-LTRR, GLTR-R, GLTR,
GLGL, AFLS, FLS
Irregular size1-4"
K8, K16
K16R
F4A
size0-2, Irregular size5
size4-3, Irregular size4-4
EXEC-R
Thin paper (52 to 63)

Plain paper (64 to 90,
91 to 105)
Recycled paper (64 to
90, 91 to 105)
Color paper (64 to 90)
Thick paper (106 to
150, 151 to 220)
Size
Multi-purpose Tray
Paper type
(g/m2)
Paper type
(g/m2)
Multi-purpose Tray
Pickup
Yes No No No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes

Yes No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes
Yes No No No No No No Yes No No
Yes No No No No No No No No Yes
Yes No No No No No No Yes No Yes
No No No No No No No No No No
1-14
Insertion Unit
Multi Deck
Paper Deck
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No
Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No
POD Deck Light
Yes No No No No No No No No Yes
A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5,

SRA3, 12x18, 13x19
"B5R, A5R, STMTR,
EXEC, OFFICIO,
A-LTR, A-LTRR, GLTR-R,
GLTR
GLGL, AFLS, FLS,
Irregular size4-4"
K8, K16, F4A, Irregular
Irregular size5
EXEC-R, K16R
Yes No No No No No No Yes No Yes
Label paper (151 to

180)
Size
Yes No No No No Yes No Yes No Yes
Paper type
(g/m2)
Multi-purpose Tray
Insertion Unit
Multi Deck
Paper Deck
POD Deck Light
Transparency
A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5,

SRA3, 12x18, 13x19
B5R, EXEC, Irregular
Irregular size4-4
A5R, STMTR, OFFICIO,
GLTR, GLGL, AFLS, FLS,
Irregular size1-4
K8 K16
F4A, Irregular size0-1,
size5
EXEC-R K16R
A4 LTR
A4R LTRR
Thick paper (257 to

300)
Embossed paper (257
to 300)
1-side coated paper
(257 to 300)
2-side coated paper
(257 to 300)
Size
Multi-purpose Tray
Paper type
(g/m2)
1-15
Yes No No No No Yes No Yes No No
1-15
Insertion Unit
Multi Deck
Paper Deck
POD Deck Light
A4, B5
A3, B4, A4R, SRA3, 12x18,
13x19
11x17, LGL, LTRR
GLTR, GLGL, AFLS, FLS,
Irregular size1-4
"
B5R, Irregular size2-1,
size4-4
LTR
EXEC
K8, K16
F4A
size0-2, Irregular size5
K16R
EXEC-R
Tab paper (151 to 220) A4,LTR
Punch paper (64 to 90) A4 LTR
Postcard
Postcard, double (2-pane)
postcard, 4-pane postcard
Envelope
COM10, Monarch, ISO-C5,
ISO-B5, DL, K2 , N3, Y0,
Irregular size 1-1 to 4-4
Bond paper (64 to 90,

91 to 105)
Size
Multi-purpose Tray
Paper type
(g/m2)
1-16
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes

Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes
Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes No No
Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
T-1-13
1-16
Product Overview > Name of Parts > External View > Outer Covers
1-17
Name of Parts
[1]
[3]
[5]
[7]
[9]
[11]
[13]
[15]
[17]
[19]
External View
Outer Covers
[5]
[4]
[3]
Left Middle Cover

Box Upper Cover
Upper Middle Cover
Front Upper Cover
Deck Right Cover
Upper Left Cover
Left Lower Cover 2
Left Lower Cover 1
Reverse Door Face Cover
Box Left Cover
[2]
[4]
[6]
[8]
[10]
[12]
[14]
[16]
[18]
[20]
Left Upper Cover

Upper Cover
Upper Right Cover
Front Cover
Cassette Front Cover
Deck Left Cover
Handle Cover
Reverse Door Cover
Left Lower Cover 3
Box Left Connector Cover
[2]
[1]
[6]
[20]
[19]
[7]
[14]
[8]
[18]
[9]
[17]
[16]
[10]
[15]
[14]
[11]
[13]
[12]
F-1-14
1-17
[3]
1-18
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[17]
[5]
[6]
[6]
[16]
[14]
[7]
[12]
[13]
[15]
[9]
[13]
[9]
[12]
[11]
Right Upper Cover 1

Right Upper Cover 2
Box Right Connector Cover
Noise Reduction Cover
HDD Cover
Right Lower Cover 3
Vertical Path Cover
Right Lower Cover 2
Multi-purpose Tray Cover
[2]
[4]
[6]
[8]
[10]
[12]
[14]
[16]
[8]
[10]
[11]
[10]
F-1-16
F-1-15
[1]
[3]
[5]
[7]
[9]
[11]
[13]
[15]
[17]
[7]
[12]
[8]
[14]
Right Middle Cover

Box Right Cover
Rear Upper Cover
Rear Lower Cover
Waste Toner Container Cover
Handle Cover
Right Lower Cover 1
Multi-purpose Tray
[1]
[3]
Toner Container Replacement Cover (Y)

Toner Container Replacement Cover (C)
[2]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[9]
[11]
[13]
Toner Container Replacement Cover (Bk)

ITB Inner Right Cover
Fixing Feed Right Lower Inner Cover
ITB Inner Middle Cover
ITB Inner Left Cover
[6]
[8]
[10]
[12]
[14]
Toner Container Replacement Cover (M)

Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner
Cover
Front Inner Handle Right Cover
Fixing Feed Right Upper Inner Cover
Process Unit Inner Cover
Fixing Feed Left Inner Cover
Front Inner Handle Left Cover
1-18
Product Overview > Name of Parts > Sectional View
1-19
Sectional View
Switches, I/F, others
Laser Scanner
Unit (M)
ADF
Hopper Unit (M)

Leakage Breaker
Leakage Breaker
Laser Scanner
Unit (Bk)
Laser Scanner
Unit (C)
Reader Unit
Hopper Unit (C)
Environment Heater Switch
Main Switch
Developing
Assembly (Bk)
Laser Scanner
Unit (Y)
Hopper Unit (Bk)
Cassette Heater Switch

F-1-17
Hopper Unit (Y)
Drum Unit (Bk)
This machine is equipped with the Main Power Switch, Control Panel Power Switch and
Environment Heater Switch.
[1] Main Power Switch
This switch is used to turn OFF / ON the power of host machine.
Multi-purpose
Pickup Unit
Process Unit (Y)
[2] Control Panel Power Switch

This switch is to shift the machine to power-save mode or to restore it to normal mode.
[3] Environment Heater Switch
Environment Heater Switch is to supply and shut the power to Cassette Heater and Reader
Heater.
Process Unit (M)

Process Unit (C)
Reverse Delivery
Unit
ITB Unit
Fixing Assembly
Secondary Transfer
Registration Unit
Duplex Feed Unit
Left Deck
Fixing Feed Unit
Pickup Unit
Cassette 4
Cassette 3
Right Deck
F-1-18
Product Overview > Name of Parts > Sectional View
1-19
Product Overview > Name of Parts > Operation > Power Supply Switches
1-20
Operation
Power Supply Switches
Types of power supply switche
The machine has three types of power switches, the main power switch, control panel power
switch and drum heater power switch.
During normal operation (excluding sleep mode), power is supplied by turning the power
switch ON.
Environment heater switch is to supply and stop the power to the drum heater, cassette
heater and reader heater.
How to power ON/ OFF, and precautions to be observed (main unit/

optional devices)
While progress bar is kept displayed at power-on, HDD access is processing; thus, never
turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
To turn off the power, turn off the Main Power Switch. (Conventional shutdown sequence
operation is not required.)
After power-OFF (after the Main Power Switch is turned OFF), do not reactivate the Main
Power Switch until a screen disappears.
Do not turn OFF the power while download is processing.
Product Overview > Name of Parts > Operation > Power Supply Switches
1-20
Product Overview > Name of Parts > Operation > Control Panel
1-21
Control Panel
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7200 Series

[8]
Control Panel
[7]
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9200 Series

[9]
[7]
[1]
[2]
[9]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[10]
[11]
[3]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[4] [5]
[6]
[15]
[16]
F-1-19
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[12]
[14] [13] [15]
[11]
[3]
Main Menu Key

Custom Menu Key
Status Check/Stop Key
FAX Volume Adjustment Key
Screen Brightness Adjustment Dial
Touch Panel Display
Energy Saver Key
Keypad
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
Settings/Registration Key
Counter Check Key
Stop Key
Operation Pen
ID (authentication) Key
Clear Key
Reset Key
Start Key
F-1-20
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Main Menu Key

Custom Menu Key
Status Check/Stop Key
FAX Volume Adjustment Key
Screen Brightness Adjustment Dial
Touch Panel Display
Energy Saver Key
Keypad
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]]
[15]
Settings/Registration Key
Counter Check Key
Stop Key
ID (authentication) Key
Clear Key
Reset Key
Start Key
1-21
1-22
Main Menu
Difference of Main menu

iRC 5180/5185 Series
Copy
Send
Mail BOX
4
Menu change key
Print Job
Scan
----(Help)
Scan and Send

5
iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270

PRO/7270/7260 Series
Copy
Scan and Send
Scan and Store (New)
Access Stored Files (New)
Fax/I-Fax Inbox
----Secured Print
Scanner
Set/Regi. Short Cut (New)
Tutorial
T-1-14
Fax / I-Fax
Inbox
9
F-1-21
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Copy
Scan and Send
Scan and Store
Access Stored Files
Fax/I-Fax Inbox
Secured Print
Scanner
Set/Regi. Short Cut
Tutorial
1-22
1-23
Settings/Registration Menu
Settings/Registration
Select an item to set
TOP
Preferences
Adjustment/Maintenance
Function Settings
Set Destination
1/1
Management Settings
4
5
OK
Log in
F-1-22
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Preferences
Function Settings
Set Destination
Management Settings
Difference of Settings/Registration menu

iRC 5180/5185 Series
Common Settings
Timer Settings
Adjustment/ Cleaning
System Settings
Report Settings
Copy Settings
Communication Settings
Mail Box Settings
Printer Settings
Address Book Settings
iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270

PRO/7270/7260 Series
Preferences
Set Destination
Function Settings
Management Settings
T-1-15
1-23
Technology
Technology
Configuration
Basic
System
Controller
DCM
Exposure System
Laser
Formation System
Image
System
Fixing
/ Feed System
Pickup
and Controls
External
MEAP
RDS
Embedded
Updater
Technology > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration
2-2
Basic Configuration
Functional Configuration
The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional system blocks; document
exposure system block, controller system block, laser exposure system block, image
formation system block, fixing system block and pickup/feed system block.
Document exposure system
Reader
controller
Laser
scanner
unit(Y)
Laser
scanner
unit(M)
Laser
scanner
unit(C)
Drum unit
(Y)
Drum unit
(M)
Drum unit
(C)
Main
controller
1/2
Option
board
Exposure lamp
Laser exposure system
Controller system
HDD
CCD
DC
controller
Laser
scanner
unit
(Bk)
Drum unit
(Bk)
ITB
Image
formation
system
Fixing system
Delivery
Transfer
Fixing
Duplexing feed
Pickup
Pickup/
feed
system
Left deck
Right deck
Cassette3
Flow of paper
Flow of signal
Cassette4
Laser beam
F-2-1
Technology > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration
2-2
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at power ON
2-3
Basic Sequence
Basic sequence at power ON
Main power ON
WMUP(approx. 30 sec)
Purint Unit
Laser
system
WMUPR *Estimated time differs depending on models
STBY
Laser scanner motor(M8083)

Drum motor(M19/M21/M23/M25)
ITB drive motor(M3)
Cleaning
Pre-exposure LED(LED14)
Primary charging AC bias(Color)
Primary charging DC bias(Color)
Primary charging DC bias
(Constant current)(Bk)
Image
formation
system
Grid DC bias(Bk)
Developing AC bias(Color)
Developing DC bias(Color)
Developing stirring motor(M26M29)
Developing sleeve drive motor
(M18/M20/M22/M24)
Pre-primary transfer charging
AC bias(Bk)
DC bias(Bk)
Primary transfer bias
Fixing
system
Pickup/
feed system
Fixing motor(M48)
IH heater/Halogen heater(H5)
Pre-registration multi-purpose
tray drive motor
:Standby speed
F-2-2
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at power ON
2-3
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at printing <Condition:Full color, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>
2-4
Basic sequence at printing <Condition:Full color, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>

Start key ON
Printer unit
PSTBY
Flying start
PINTR
PRINT
LSTR *1
PSTBY
Laser scanner motor

(M8083)
PTOP signal
Laser Y ON
Laser M ON
Laser C ON
Laser Bk ON
Secondary transfer roller
detachment motor(M31)
Drum motor
(M19/M21/M23/M25)
Detachment
Engagement
Detachment
ITB drive motor(M3)

Cleaning pre-exposure
LED(Y)(LED2)
LED(M)(LED3)
LED(C)(LED4)
LED(Bk)(LED1)
Primary charging AC bias(Y)
Primary charging AC bias(M)
Primary charging AC bias(C)
Primary charging DC bias(Y)
Primary charging DC bias(M)
Primary charging DC bias(C)
Grid DC bias(Bk)
Developing AC bias(Y)
Developing AC bias(M)
Image formation system
Developing AC bias(C)
Developing AC bias(Bk)
Developing DC bias(Y)
Developing DC bias(M)
Developing DC bias(C)
Developing DC bias(Bk)
Developing stirring
motor(Y)(M26)
Developing stirring
motor(M)(M28)
Developing stirring
motor(C)(M27)
Developing stirring
motor(Bk)(M29)
Developing sleeve drive
motor(Y)(M20)
motor(M)(M22)
motor(C)(M24)
motor(Bk)(M18)
Pre-primary transfer
charging DC bias(Bk)
charging AC bias(Bk)
Primary transfer bias(Y)
Primary transfer bias(M)
Primary transfer bias(C)
Primary transfer bias(Bk)
Secondary transfer bias
ATVC
Secondary transfer
cleaning bias
Positive bias
Negative bias
Positive bias
Negative bias
Positive bias
Negative bias
Pickup/feed system
Fixing
system
Static eliminator bias

Fixing motor(M48)
IH heater
/Halogen heater(H5)
Cassette 3 pickup motor
(M44)
Right deck vertical path motor
(M40)
Cassette vertical path motor
(M39)
tray drive motor(M36)
Registration motor(M34)
Pre-fixing feed motor(M35)
Reverse motor(M38)
Reverse upper wheel
detachment solenoid(SL3)
Delivery motor(M37)
*1:Auto adjustment may be executed depending on the conditions
:Standby speed
F-2-3
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at printing <Condition:Full color, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>
2-4
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at power ON <Condition:Monochrome, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>
2-5
Basic sequence at power ON <Condition:Monochrome, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>

Start key ON
Laser exposure
system
Printer unit
PSTBY
Flying start
PINTR
PRINT
LSTR *1
PSTBY
Laser scanner motor

(M8083)
PTOP signal
Laser Bk ON
Detachment
Engagement
Detachment
Drum motor(M19)
ITB drive motor(M3)
LED(Bk)(LED1)
Grid DC bias(Bk)
Developing stirring
motor(M29)
motor(M18)
ATVC
Secondary transfer
cleaning bias
Negative bias
Positive bias
Negative bias
Positive bias
Negative bias
Pickup/feed system
Fixing
system

Fixing motor(M48)
IH heater
/Halogen heater(H5)
(M44)
(M40)
(M39)
Reverse motor(M38)
Reverse upper wheel
:Standby speed
F-2-4
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at power ON <Condition:Monochrome, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>
2-5
Technology > Controller System > Overview > Specifications/configuration
Controller System
2-6
Specifications/configuration
PCBs
Overview
Features
Main Controller
PCB 1
Flash PCB
Riser PCB
TPM PCB
Bypass PCB
Using a new controller enables high speed PDL processing, high image quality and high
functionality.
Main Controller PCB 1
Riser PCB
HDD(Standard)
HDD(Option)
Image Processing
Sub PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
F-2-7
Parts name
Function, specifications, features
Main controller
PCB 1
F-2-5
Main controller PCB 1 controls the entire system. Main controller PCB 2 mainly controls
image processing.
Main controller PCBs 1 and 2 are connected through the riser PCB.
This configuration improves installability / removability of the main controller PCBs.
(Slot-in / out)
F-2-6
CPU: 1.66 GHz, Control of the entire system

Various controls (memory, control panel, electric power, voice), I/Fs (PCI, USB
(host), RTC
Flash PCB
Boot program
TPM PCB
To generate and save encryption key
Available only when TPM settings is ON: Management Settings > Data
Management > TPM Settings (default: OFF)
Not available with China models
Main controller
CPU: 400 MHz, Image control
PCB 2
Various image processing (color space conversion, enlarge, reduction,
rotation, composition, compression, rasterizing, resolution conversion, image
binarization), delay memory control between drums, HDD control, I/Fs (reader,
FAX, USB (device))
Image Processing Image processing
Sub PCB
Bypass PCB
Internal bus connection
Remove this PCB when using imagePASS-A2 (to be attached to the main unit)
and install the open I/F PCB.
Riser PCB
I/F (main controller 1 - 2, main controller - HDD, main controller - DC controller)
HDD
2.5 inch SATA I/F Standard: 160 GB (80G usable area)
Up to 2 HDDs can be mounted in the case of mirroring configuration.
BOX data, Address book, security information (password, certificate)
Op.: 2.5 inch / 160 GB HDD-G1, 2.5 inch / 1 TB HDD-H1
T-2-1
2-6
2-7
Memory
Main controller PCB 2

SDRAM
DDR2-SDRAM(M0)
BAT
J13
DDR2-SDRAM(M1)
DDR2-SDRAM(P)
BAT
F-2-9
Parts name
DDR2-SDRAM (M1)
F-2-8
Parts name
SDRAM
2 slot/1 GB (standard)
J2031: 512 MB
J2032: 512 MB
Clock frequency: 333 MHz
Used for saving image, program data
Lithium battery (BAT1)) For RTC
Life: approx. 10 years
T-2-2
1 GB (standard) / clock frequency: 200 MHz

Rasterizing, rendering, resolution conversion, coding / decoding
DDR2-SDRAM (M0)
512 MB (standard / Op.*) / clock frequency: 200 Hz
Product name: Additional Memory Type D (512 MB)
Rasterizing, rendering, resolution conversion, coding / decoding
To be used when using the following options:
PS Printer Kit-AR1, Direct Print Kit (for PDF / XPS)-H1, imagePASS-A2,
ColorPASS-GX400
DDR2-SDRAM (P)
512 MB (standard) / clock frequency: 200MHz
Print image processing, delay processing between drums
SRAM
16 Mbit
To save data in Settings / Registration Mode / Service Mode and image
data management information in HDD
Lithium battery (BAT1) For SRAM backup, Life: approx. 10 years
T-2-3
* The capacity differs according to the location or model
2-7
2-8
I/F, connector
Bypass I/F
/ open I/F J1010
Voice
J13
External I/F
Mini-USB J6
UI
J15
LAN
J7
Flash
J11
TPM
J8
J17
Riser
Riser
J1025
F-2-11
Jack No.
No.
J13
J4
Voice I/F (Op.)

Control panel I/F
J11
J5
J6
Mini-USB I/F (Op.)

Connect USB Device Port-B1
Fan I/F
LAN I/F
1000BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T
Also to be used as I/F for imagePASS-B1
/ ColorPASS-GX400 (Op.)
Riser PCB I/F
J8
J17
J17 FAX (1 line)
PCI
J14
J16
J17
F-2-10
Function, specifications
J14
J16 FAX (2-4 line)
J21 J20
CC-VI
Coin
J15
J7
Internal I/F
J1000 Image analysis I/F

J15 USB (D)
USB(H) J5
No.
External I/F
J3003 Reader
Internal I/F
J4
Fan
Image processing sub PCB

J1020
Flash PCB I/F
USB I/F (Host) *1
For MEAP, For USB keyboard (Op.)
TPM PCB I/F
J1000
J1010
J1025 PCI expansion PCB I/F (Op.)

J21
I/F for control interface kit (Op.)
J20
J3003
J1020
I/F for card reader, I/F for serial interface

kit, I/F for coin manager (all Op.)
Riser PCB I/F
Mini-USB I/F for 2 to 4-lines FAX
FAX-USB I/F for 1-line FAX
Product name: Advanced G3 FAX Board-AE1
Image analysis PCB I/F
Product name: Image Data Analyzer Board-A1
Bypass PCB I/F
Mount the open I/F PCB when using ColorPASS-GX300 / imagePASS-B1
Reader I/F
Image processing sub PCB
T-2-5
T-2-4
*1: There is 1 port on the control panel as well
2-8
2-9
Function expansion options
Main controller PCB1
Open I/F PCB
Voice Operation/
Voice Guidance PCB
Image Analysis PCB
Image Analysis PCB
Open I/F PCB

Voice Operation/
Voice Guidance PCB
F-2-13
F-2-12
Name
Name
Voice Recognition PCB Voice Operation Kit, Voice Guidance Kit (for non-Japanese models only)
Voice Guidance PCB
IPSec PCB
Excluded from the option configuration because it has been installed on the
Main Controller PCB as standard.
T-2-6
Open I/F PCB

F link PCB (main)
F link PCB (sub)
Image analysis PCB

imagePASS-B1 / ColorPASS-GX300
Product name: Image Data Analyzer Board-A1

Scan protection for output original (Copy / SEND / BOX)
T-2-7
2-9
Technology > Controller System > Overview > Boot sequence
2-10
HDD
Boot sequence
The partitions for Advanced Box and the distribution server are added.
Advanced Box area can be increased by installing the high-capacity HDD option.
Main power switch ON
[ ]: program storage location
- Hardware initialization processing

FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
BOOTDEV
CRBDEV
APL_CDS
Image data (Box, etc.)

Universal data (temporary file)
For PDL spooling
FAX data
Address book, filter
MEAP application
Universal data
MEAP saving data
- Initialization process of hardware
System log
- Starting BIOS
[Main controller PCB 1]
Text management table

PDL-related file (font, registration form, etc.)
Job archiving (chasing)
- Starting IPL, OS
[Flash PCB]
Thumbnail
System software (System, language, RUI, etc.)
For Advanced Box
For distribution server
F-2-14
- Starting system software for main/sub CPU

[HDD -> DDR2-SDRAM]
[Main controller PCB 2]
- Starting application
Standby screen display

F-2-15
NOTE :
Due to the high speed startup, the progress bar and the activating PCB are not synchronized.
For this reason, the progress bar cannot be utilized for troubleshooting.
See the following error code list for the troubleshooting.
Technology > Controller System > Overview > Boot sequence
2-10
Technology > Controller System > Overview > Shutdown sequence
2-11
Shutdown sequence
Related Error Codes (major error codes):

Error
Code
E602
0001
0002
0006
E604
1024
E613
1024
1536
E748
2010
2011
Before turning OFF the main power switch, it is necessary to perform HDD completion
Error description
processing (to prevent damage on the HDD), cooling of the internal printer (to prevent fixed
Error in HDD
Failure in recognizing HDD
Boot partition (BOOTDEV) is not found at startup.
There is no system software for the main CPU.
There is no system software for the sub CPU.
Failure in memory (main controller PCB 1)
Capacity shortage of DDR2-SDRAM (1GB required)
Failure in memory (main controller PCB 2)
Capacity shortage of DDR2-SDRAM (M0, M1) (1GB required)
Capacity shortage of DDR2-SDRAM (M0, M1) (1.5GB required)
Error in board (Flash PCB)
IPL (Initial Program Loader) is not found.
OS is not found.
toner due to high temperature) and exhaust (to prevent smeared image due to chemical
reaction of ozone in the machine and photosensitive drum). This sequential processing is
called shutdown sequence and was executed on the legacy models manually (by holding
down the power supply switch on the Control Panel for a specific duration).
When the main power switch is turned OFF on the main body, Main Controller PCB 1 detects
this operation and then the shutdown sequence starts / executes automatically.
In addition, hardware shutdown sequence exists. If shutdown sequence is not executed
normally due to occurrence of software trouble, the machine is shut down in 110 seconds at a
T-2-8
maximum by the timer in the AC Driver PCB. If it is not shut down within 110 seconds, failure
of the AC Driver PCB is suspected.
Technology > Controller System > Overview > Shutdown sequence
2-11
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Image Processing Control
2-12
Controls
Image Processing Control

Copy
Overview
Item
Image processing control
Backup battery
Power save function
Security function
Large capacity HDD (option)
HDD mirroring function (option)
Removable HDD (option)
Control Detail
Convert the image data input from the external
device or reader unit into the video data and send it
to DC controller.
Data backup battery in case of power failure or
disconnection of power plug.
Reduce the power consumption at standby mode.
Encryption key, certificate, protection of password
Reinforcement of advanced box use area
Mirroring processing of HDD data
HDD is installable/removable by user.
Reference
p. 2-12
To DC Controller
HDD
Reader
p. 2-13
HDD
writing/reading
I/F
p. 2-14
p. 2-8
p. 2-12
p. 2-13
p. 2-28
Print type image

processing
Extension processing
Tile raster conversion
T-2-9
Image processing
R
esolution conversion,
I
mage rotation,
JPEG
compression/extension
Image data buffer

(memory)
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 2
Riser PCB
F-2-16
Print
Network
To DC Controller
HDD
Rendering
I/F
HDD
writing/reading
Image data buffer

(memory)
LAN
Controller
Main Controller
PCB 1
Riser PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
F-2-17
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Image Processing Control
2-12
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Backup Battery
2-13
Backup Battery
SEND
Main controller PCB of the host machine has one lithium battery as a data backup battery in
case of power failure or disconnection of the power plug.
HDD
Network
Reader
HDD
writing/reading
Data conversion
Tile raster conversion
JPEG encode
LAN
Controller
Main Controller
PCB 1
Riser PCB
DC controller PCB is not equipped with the battery.
Main Controller PCB1
Image processing
Resolution
conversion,
Image
rotation,
JPEG
compression/extension
Type of battery
Life of battery
Replacement of battery
T-2-10
Image data buffer

(memory)
Main Controller PCB2

Type of battery
Life of battery
Main Controller
PCB 2
Lithium battery (3V, 620 mAh)

Approx 10 years (when the power plug is disconnected)
Battery cannot be replaced independently on service site.
T-2-11
F-2-18
FAX
DC Controller PCB
Type of battery
Life of battery
To DC Controller


HDD
T-2-12
FAX
Caution:
I/F
Be sure to replace the battery correctly; otherwise, it may explode.

HDD
writing/reading
Do not use the other battery than the one specified by the manufacture (same type
name or equivalent).
Image data buffer

(memory)
Follow the instruction of manufacture to dispose of the replaced battery.

Print type image
processing
Extension
processing
raster conversion
Tile
Main Controller
PCB 1
Riser PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
Image processing
Color space conversion,
Image 2 level cell,
Image multi level cell,
Image composition,
Resolution conversion,
Image rotation,
Pixel skipping with 7x7 filter
F-2-19
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Backup Battery
2-13
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
Power-saving function
2-14
Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password

Protection)
Standby
SW turned OFF
or
time is elapsed
SW turned ON
The main controller PCB 1 of the host machine holds a new PCB named TPM PCB. TPM
Sleep
Job
finished
*1
Overview
stands for Trusted Platform Module, which collectively refers to the chip set for generating
Sleep Standby
and storing encryption keys and computing public key encryption.
Job
Sleep 1
Job
finished
*2
Job
*2
TPM PCB
Deep Sleep
F-2-20
Sleep standby
Control panel is turned OFF.
Power supply other than the control panel is the same with Standby mode.
Power-saving
Control panel is turned OFF.
F-2-21
Power supply other than the control panel is the same with Standby mode.
The TPM PCB protects security information (passwords, certificates, and encryption keys)
Deep Sleep
data other than security information.
stored in the HDD and SRAM. Note that this PCB does not protect set, registered or stored
3V for all-night power PCB is only supplied. If a next job is submitted, the machine moves to
Standby mode.
Print job
Control panel power switch is pressed.
2-14
The TPM key embedded in the chip is used to encrypt / decrypt security information.
TPM PCB
2-15
Configuration of Security Information

The security functionality behaves differently depending on the TPM setting on the UI.
TPM Key
This machine provides the two types of TPM settings. See the figure below for the security
information flow in each setting.
- When the TPM setting is ON
HDD / SRAM
TPM Key
TPM PCB
(Temporarily stored in HDD)
Password use
encrypting key
SSL for communication

public key
Public Key
Users
certificate
Backup Key
for TPM failure
F-2-22
Backup
Common
Key
The TPM key is protected from illegal access in a virtually perfect manner, thus the security
information of the host machine is securely protected even in the following conditions.
Backup for
Common Key
When the HDD and / or the main controller PCB is taken out from the host machine and
installed in the MFP with the different serial number (the model information held in the TPM
SRAM
When the system of the host machine is hacked via the network
Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting -> ON (OFF by default)
Password
Password
PCB is specific to the machine originally enabled the TPM setting)
Enable this function in Setting / Registration mode.
USB flash drive
HDD
F-2-23
When the TPM setting is ON, the TPM key is enabled to secure information with the three
keys. Therefore, the security information held in each machine is safely protected.
The security information in this setting can be accessed by the three keys and multiple
passwords stored in the SRAM and HDD.
Each data is stored in the specified location (enclosed with blue dots in the figure above).
Since the data in the upper layer are linked to those in the lower layer, security information is
activated only when data in all the layers are linked.
For the backup purpose, the backup key is temporarily stored also in the HDD to be prepared
for a TPM failure (only for the initial failure after the TPM setting is ON).
This key can be backed up using the USB flash drive. Once backed up, the backup key is
deleted from the HDD.
The common key information is stored in the HDD as well as the SRAM. The common key
stored in the SRAM is cleared when the main controller PCB 2 (SRAM) is replaced or after
MN-CON clear. However, the common key stored in the HDD automatically restores that in
the SRAM so that the security information is decodable even after servicing. Note that the
security information is not decodable correctly in case the HDD is failed or formatted because
2-15
the public key information stored in the HDD is cleared. If this occurs, execute Initialize All
Data / Settings in user mode to set the TPM setting to OFF. This will maintain the password
information in the SRAM even after the password information is initialized.
- When the TPM setting is OFF:

Common
Key
Before installing TPM, ask the user to back up data.

Follow the steps below to back up data.
Management > Import / Export. The following data types should be backed up.
Backup
Address book (see *1)

Device settings (transfer settings, address book, frequently-used Send functions) (see *2)
Setting / Registration
Printer settings can be exported
Password
SRAM
Preparation before Installing TPM
1) From Remote UI, execute Setting / Registration > Management Setting > Data
Backup of
Common Key
Password
2-16
Favorites stored in the web browser (only when the web browser is enabled) (see *3)
HDD
F-2-24
*1 Each of address books can be exported. If the address book is seen as a part of device
When the TPM setting is OFF, the TPM key is disabled. Thus, the security information is
settings, this step can be disregarded.
protected only by the common key.
*2 Among settings in the main menu, only Frequently-used Setting under Scan and
Under this setting, the security information held in this machine is protected at the level
Send can be backed up.
equivalent to the conventional machines.
*3 These are available only in the specific models or configurations.
The security functionality in this setting is configured by the common key and multiple
passwords stored in the SRAM and HDD.
When the TPM setting is set to OFF, the security information is protected by the common key
2) Select Export from Custom Menu of the Remote UI to back up Custom Menu Setting
Information.
and multiple passwords stored in SRAM and HDD.

The common key information is stored in the HDD as well as the SRAM. The common
key stored in the SRAM is cleared when the main controller PCB 2 (SRAM) is replaced or
3) Log in to the system as Administrator from User Management of Advanced Box on Remote
UI. Then, execute Export to back up User Information of Advanced Box.
after MN-CON clear. Since the common key stored in the HDD will automatically restore
the common key in the SRAM, the security information is decodable correctly even after
servicing. Unlike the case that the TPM setting is set to ON, the password information stored
in the HDD is initialized when the HDD is replaced or formatted. However, the password
information is maintained in the SRAM.
TPM Setting for Security Information
The security information can be protected with or without TPM by switching between TPM
settings in Setting / Registration mode.
When the TPM setting is ON
The security functionality is enabled in 4 levels (TPM key, public key, common key and
password).
When the TPM setting is OFF
The security functionality is enabled in 2 levels (common key and password).
2-16
Works before / after introduction

Execute the following in Setting / Registration mode (TPM setting is OFF by default).
1. Enable the feature
2. Backup the TPM key
3. Restore the TPM key
4. Disable the feature
2-17
1. Enable Functionality
MEMO: Setup of System Management PIN
It is recommended for users (administrators) to set the system management PIN
before installing TPM. The TPM key is backed up after the TPM setting is set to ON.
However, the key backup is permitted only once. Unless the key is properly backed up,
users other than administrators may illegally obtain the backup file. To avoid such risks
effectively, the system management PIN should be set.
The works above are basically done by users.

1)Set Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting to ON.
CAUTION:
When the TPM setting is set to ON, advice users on the following:
Setting / Registration
Back up the TPM key swiftly after the setting is ON

Keep the password used at backup securely
Never lose the USB flash drive with the backup TPM key file saved
The TPM key should be restored after the TPM PCB is replaced due to failures or the
like.
(TPM key restoration is enabled only at TPM PCB replacement.)
Unless the key is restored, the security information (passwords, encryption key, and
certificates) cannot be used.
When the key restoration is failed due to the USB flash drive lost or others, Initialize All
Data / Settings should be executed to reactivate TPM functionality. The security may
be undermined if the old Setting / Registration data are maintained as it is.
F-2-25
2) Click Yes, and restart the machine.
F-2-26
This setting is enabled after the machine is restarted.
2-17
2.TPM Key Backup
2-18
3) Click [Password] to enter the password (4-12 digits). Then, enter the password for
The TPM key backup file can be stored only in USB flash drive (supported file system:
confirmation.
FAT32).
Note that this file requires the memory free space of several MBs.
F-2-27
1) Insert the USB flash drive to the machine.

The USB I/F (host) is found at the side of the control panel as well as the main
controller PCB.
CAUTION:
Ensure to insert only one USB flash drive.
If the backup job is started with 2 or more USB flash drives connected, the message is
shown to notify that the backup is failed.
MEMO:
The USB flash drive holds the TPM key backup files by serial number. Thus, backup
files for multiple machines can be saved in a USB flash drive.
F-2-29
4) Click [OK] to initiate TPM key backup.
2)Click [Back up TPM Key] in Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting.
F-2-28
F-2-30
5) Click [OK] on Backup Completion Screen and remove the USB flash drive.
2-18
CAUTION: The following may cause failures in backup.

If any of the following is detected, the backup process is aborted and the message
and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen. Take an appropriate measure to
recover this.
The USB flash drive is not inserted to the machine
2-19
3. Restore of TPM key

Procedure is about the same as the backup work.
Difference between restore work and backup work:
Rebooting is necessary (turn OFF and then ON the main power) after completion of restore
work.
2 or more USB flash drives are inserted to the machine
1) Connect the USB memory that saves TPM key.
The USB flash drive has insufficient free memory space
2) Select the following: Management setting > Data management > TPM setting; and
The USB flash drive is write-protected
click [Restore TPM key].
No key is found
CAUTION: The USB flash drive should be securely stored.

Give advice users on the following points.
The USB flash drive should be securely stored
Once the TPM key backup file is saved in the USB flash drive, never save the
backup file on a server or the like accessible to unanimous users.
MEMO: Name of TPM key backup file

The serial number for the machine is automatically assigned as the backup file name.
F-2-31
3) Enter the password set in the backup process.

4) Click [OK] on Start Restoration Screen. The restoration process is started.
5) Click [OK] on Restoration Completion Screen. Remove the USB flash drive and turn
OFF/ ON the main power switch.
2-19
CAUTION: The following may cause failures in restoration.

If any of the following is detected, the restoration process is aborted and the message
and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen. Take an appropriate measure for
recovery.
2-20
4. Disable the feature

To set OFF for the TPM setting, execute [Initialize All Data / Settings].
The USB flash drive is not inserted to the machine

2 or more USB flash drives are inserted to the machine
The USB flash drive is security-protected
No TPM key is saved in the USB flash drive
The TPM key saved in the USB flash drive is not for the machine
The wrong password is entered
After the TPM key was backed up, [Initialize All Systems/ Settings] was executed
SRAM (the main controller PCB 1) or HDD is crashed
F-2-32
CAUTION: Points to note when disabling functionality

To disable the use of TPM, all data and settings should be initialized. If this is executed,
user information saved in the HDD/ SRAM is totally cleared. Ensure to back up the data
before disabling TPM settings.
List of data to be cleared

Data saved in BOX/ Advanced Box
Data saved in Inbox (Fax Box/ System Box)
Destination data registered in Address Book
Read mode registered using Send function
Mode memory registered using Copy/ Box function
MEAP applications and their license files
Data saved using MEAP applications
Password for MEAP SMS (Service Management Service)
(The password is returned to default if any change is made.)
User authentication information registered by local device authentication via SSO-H (Single
Sign-On H)
Unsent documents (documents for scheduled transmission and reserved transmission)
Job logs
Contents set in Setting / Registration
Image-composite registration form
Registered transfer settings
2-20
Key pair and server certificate registered in Management Setting (Setting/ Registration) >
[Device Management] > [Certificate Settings]
Overview of Actions taken against Troubles
Audit log
Location
with failure
Steps of data restoration after recovery
TPM PCB
To restore data, select the following on UI: Settings/Registration > Management Settings >
Data Management > Import > Import of Settings/Registration.
The data listed below cannot be restored, thus should be set again.
Environment Settings
Paper settings
Display settings in the destination to save
HDD
Time fine-adjustment for timer/ power settings

Date/ time settings (excluding time zone and daylight-saving settings)
User settings for SNMPv3
Context settings
Firewall settings (excluding MAC address filter)
Function Settings
Image-composite form for the common print operation
Printer settings
Transfer settings for the common receipt/ transfer settings
Inbox settings
Frequently-used Copy settings
Registered short-cuts in Other Functions
Frequently-used Send settings
Frequently-used settings for saving/ using files
Address Settings
Address Book
Management Settings
Sheet counts in Department ID Management
Settings for device information distribution
2-21
Main
Controller
PCB 2
(SRAM)
TPM Setting = ON
TPM Setting = OFF
1. Check the TPM PCB connection

2. Replace the TPM PCBs
3. Turn OFF/ ON the power
4. See the section of Restoring TPM
Key to restore the TPM key.
5. Turn OFF/ ON the main power for
recovery
N/A (TPM PCB is

not in use when the
TPM setting is set to
OFF.)
Relevant Error Code
Initially E746-0031 is
shown on the screen.
When the power is turned
OFF/ON after the TPM
PCB is replaced, E7460032 is shown (only when
the TPM setting is set to
ON).
1.Replace the HDDs.
1. Replace the
Initially E602-xxxx is shown
2.Format the HDD.
HDDs.
(the different extension is
3.Download the system software.
2. Format the HDD. shown depends on cases).
4.See the section of Disabling
3. Download the
After the system software
Functionality to execute Initialize
system software. is reinstalled, E746-0033 is
All Data/ Settings.
4. Restore the
shown.
5.Turn OFF/ON the power. The TPM
password
setting is automatically set to OFF.
information stored
6.Set the TPM setting to ON (the
in the HDD.
public key and the common key
are automatically set).
1. Replace the main controller PCB 2. 1. Replace the main E747-xxxx (the different
2. The common key backed up in the controller PCB 2. extension is shown
depends on cases).
HDD will be automatically restored 2. The common
in the SRAM.
key backed up
3. The TPM setting on the control
in the HDD will
panel is reset to OFF. Manually
be automatically
set the TPM setting to ON (the
restored in the
machine is operated in the TPM
SRAM.
setting ON).
3. Restore the
password
4. Restore the password information
stored in the SRAM (see *1).
information stored
in the SRAM (see
*1).
T-2-13
*1 If No is indicated in the field of Backup Column in the table of Security Information

Storage Location, the relevant information should be set manually again.
Certificate settings
License registration
Remote operation settings
Box backup/ restoration
TPM Settings
Setting of audit log collection
2-21
Related Error Code

Error
Code
Security Information Storage Location

Storage
Data Type
Location
Error description, Assumed cause, remedy
E746
Error in encryption
0031 Error in hardware
Assumed cause
The TPM PCB is not mounted; the TPM PCB for the other machine is
mounted; the TPM chip is crashed.
Remedy
Mount the TPM PCB for the machine; replace with the new TPM PCB
0032 Error occurred but the system is recoverable
Assumed cause
Keys are unmatched
Remedy
Restore the TPM key
0033 Error occurred and the system is unrecoverable
Assumed cause
Security information cannot be found in the HDD/ SRAM
Remedy
Execute Initialize All Data/ Settings
0035 TPM version error Install the supported TPM.
T-2-14
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
2-22
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Certificate/
Secret Key
Certificate/
Secret Key
Others
Function
Name of Data
BOX
BOX Password
Yes
BOX
Password for Fax BOX
Yes
SEND
Password for a file destination of Address Book
Yes
MEAP
Authentication information registered by local device Yes

authentication via SSO-H
Device key pair (SSL, AMS)
No
SSL,AMS
Signature User key pair

SEND
User
Key information linked to user (password)
setting
information
Password/ BOX
Password for encryption at BOX backup
PIN
Password/ BOX
Password for SMS server at BOX backup
PIN
Password/ Advanced Password for Advanced BOX backup
PIN
BOX
Password/ Advanced Password for SMS server at Advanced BOX backup
PIN
BOX
Password/ SEND
Password for LDAP server
PIN
Password/ SEND
Password for POP3 server
PIN
Password/ SEND
Password for time-stamped PDF
PIN
Password/ SEND
Password for Adobe ES Rights Management Server
PIN
Password/ SEND
PIN for destination list (in destination setting)
PIN
Password/ UI
Password for service mode
PIN
Password/ Network
Password for IPP authentication
PIN
Password/ Network
Password for FTP authentication
PIN
Password/ Network
User name and password for client in Proxy
PIN
authentication
Password/ Network
Login password for Netware print server
PIN
Backup
Availability
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-22
Technology > Controller System > Controls > High capacity HDD (Option)
Storage
Data Type
Location
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Encryption
key
Function
Name of Data
2-23
Backup
Availability
Network
Policy common key for IPSec
Yes
The HDD capacity mounted on this machine is 160GB as standard. Mounting a 2.5 inch / 1TB
Network
User name and password for PEAP/TTLS

authentication
Password for FAX receipt
Yes
large amounts of data with Advanced Box.
Department management data (including System

Manager password)
Authentication and encryption keys for SNMPv3
Yes
No
SMS login password
Yes
Others
Others
MIB
Password/ MEAP
PIN
HDD-H1 (option) makes 1TB in HDD capacity. High capacity is required in the case of saving
Yes
Mounting this option increases capacity for Advanced Box.

15GB: in the case of 160GB HDD capacity
629GB: in the case of 1TB HDD capacity
T-2-15
Security Information Storage Location (data managed under the

mechanism other than TPM management)
Storage
Data Type
Location
HDD
High capacity HDD (Option)
Function
Password/ Advanced
PIN
BOX
Name of Data
User information in Advanced BOX
Backup
Availability
Yes
T-2-16
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
BOOTDEV
CRBDEV
APL_CDS
Image data (User Box)

Universal data (temporary file)
For PDL spooling
FAX data
Address book, filter
MEAP application
Universal data
MEAP saving data
System log
Text management table
PDL-related file (font, registration form, etc.)
Job archiving (chasing)
Thumbnail
System software (System, language, RUI, etc.)
For Advanced Box
For distribution server
F-2-33
Although simple calculation says: 1TB - 160GB = 840GB, it requires 20% of snapshot area
and the data area to be used for internal processing in the system. Therefore, 629GB can be
actually used for text storage area.
Technology > Controller System > Controls > High capacity HDD (Option)
2-23
Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
HDD mirroring feature (option)
2-24
Works before using this functionality (installation)
Overview
Install the mirroring PCB and LED PCB

for HDD1
This option enables HDD data mirroring (RAID1).

When one HDD is crashed, the other HDD backs up the operation. This minimizes the
Slot.2 (HDD2)
downtime due to crash, thus enhancing the reliability as the document server.
Slot.1 (HDD1)
Mirroring is performed in the following 2 ways depending on HDD capacities (160GB or 1TB).
CH B
The mirroring PCB controls the reading / writing timing of HDD data.
CH A
The LED PCB indicates HDD operation statuses by LED.

Master (HDD1)
160 GB
Standard
Turn ON the main power
HDD Mirroring Kit

Mirroring PCB
Ch A
Backup (HDD2)
HDD1 is connected to Ch A on the

mirroring PCB
LED PCB
Turn ON the mirroring feature
Ch B
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

> W/RAID ---> 1
This Service Mode needs to be specified
before installing the 2nd HDD.
Turn OFF the main power
160 GB
Option
2.5inch/160 GB HDD -G1
Master (HDD1)
1 TB
Option
HDD2 is connected to Ch B on the

mirroring PCB.
Slot.2 (HDD2)
2.5inch/ 1 T B HDD - H1
Slot.1 (HDD1)
HDD Mirroring Kit

Mirroring PCB
Ch A
Backup (HDD2)
Install HDD2
CH B
LED PCB
CH A
Ch B
1 TB
Turn ON the main power
Option
2.5inch/ 1 T B HDD - H1
Start Rebuild
F-2-34
Complete Rebuild
The storage data of the 1st HDD is

automatically copied to the 2nd HDD (this
operation is called Rebuild.
Time needed:
80 GB HDD --- Approx. 20 minutes
1TB HDD ---Approx. 240 minutes
F-2-35
Rebuild progress is shown as messages on the status line of the control panel.
Copying data to HDD. xx%
2-24
2-25
List of operation status (LED)
MEMO:
This machine can be used even during rebuild process (operation is performed with
HDD1)
The HDD will not be damaged even if turning OFF the power during rebuild process.
Rebuild is resumed once the power is turned ON the next time. This does not apply in
the case of blackout or disconnecting the power code during rebuild process
HDD operation statuses are indicated with 4 LEDs mounted on the LED PCB.
The green LED shows that the operation is normally in progress, while the red LED indicates
any failures.
HDD reading / writing operation

At reading:
At writing:
Data is read by HDD1 (master HDD)

only
Mirroring PCB
The same data is written to each HDD at

the same timing
Ch B
(HDD2)
F-2-37
The table below lists HDD statuses indicated by each LED.

For example, when HDD1 is in access, the green LED on the side of HDD1 (ChA) blinks in a
Mirroring PCB
high speed.
HDD 1 (Ch A)
HDD 2 (Ch B)
Green LED Red LED Green LED Red LED
Status
HDD
1
HDD
2
HDD
1
Ch A
(HDD1)
HDD
2
F-2-36
The ACT LED (green) on the LED PCB is lighted up / blinking if reading / writing to each HDD
is performed properly.
In the case of failure:
Normal (standby)
Accessing to HDD1
Accessing to HDD2
HDD1 failed
--A (*1)
-----
------A
----A (*1)
---
---------
HDD2 is faulty
---
---
---
Copying data to HDD1 (Rebuild) --- / A
--- / A
---
Copying data to HDD2 (Rebuild) --- / A
---
--- / A
Degrade
mode
Degrade
mode
Rebuild
mode
Halt mode
Both HDDs failed or Master HDD --- (*2)

failed
--- (*2)
Halt mode
The LED (red) on the LED PCB is blinking. If only one HDD is faulty, the operation is
continued by the other HDD.
Name of
Mode
Mirror mode
T-2-17
--- : Not lit
A : Lit
B : Blinking at an interval of 0.5 seconds
If both two HDDs are faulty, E602 error is shown on the control panel to stop the operation.
*1: The LED is blinking in a high speed
*2: The green LED may be lit
2-25
2-26
Description of Modes
Mode Flow at Start-up
The mirroring system of this machine consists of 4 modes.
Turn ON Main Power Switch
The modes in parentheses show the mirroring system statuses.

The status flows among the modes below during operation.
Flow to Mode at Previous Job Completion
The table below lists descriptions of modes and operational overview.

Name of
Mode
Mirror Mode
Description
Both HDDs are normally

operated
Degrade Mode Any trouble occurred in the
backup HDD suspends mirroring
operation. The machine can
be used under this condition,
however, the backup HDD
should be replaced at the
earliest convenience.
Rebuild mode The data of the master HDD is
copied (rebuilt) to the backup
HDD. The machine can be used
under this condition.
Halt mode
Both HDDs are in trouble (see
*1)
Master HDD Status
Backup HDD Status
In normal operation
In normal operation
In normal operation
With troubles (HDD not

installed/ HDD in trouble)
Halt Mode
Degrade Mode
Mirror Mode
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Trouble
Both HDDs
In which HDD?
Either HDD
Degrade Mode
In normal operation
In trouble (HDD not

installed/ HDD installed
not registered/ HDD
disconnected while the
mirroring board is in
operation)
In recovery from the

trouble (Copying data of
Master HDD)
With troubles (HDD not
installed/ HDD installed
not registered/ HDD
disconnected while the
mirroring board is in
operation)
Rebuild Mode
Trouble
Backup HDD
In which HDD?
Master HDD
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Degrade Mode
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Unable to detect
Master HDD at Start-up
Unable to detect
Master HDD at Start-up
Halt Mode
Halt Mode
Halt Mode
Halt Mode
See Overview of Trouble Recovery
Mirror Mode
T-2-18
*1: Turn OFF/ ON the power in this mode, the mode returns to the previous mode.
F-2-38
2-26
2-27
Overview of Trouble Recovery
Mode Flow during Operation
When any trouble occurs in the mirroring system, take the action for recovery appropriate to
Mirror Mode
each mode.
The HDD in trouble can be located by the red LED on the LED PCB.
Trouble
In case the master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check whether the
In which HDD?
green LED is lit on the LED PCB.
Either HDD
The firstly blinked green LED (ChA or ChB) in a high speed tells the Master HDD, which is
accessed firstly.
Degrade Mode
Both HDDs
The green LED not lit on a channel tells the location of Backup HDD.
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Halt Mode
In which HDD?
Name of
Mode
Master HDD
Backup HDD
Halt Mode
Rebuild Mode
Trouble
Unable to detect
Master HDD
Halt Mode
HDD Status?
Unable to detect
Backup HDD
When successfully
Rebuilt
Degrade Mode
Unable to detect Master HDD
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Halt Mode
Mirror Mode
F-2-39
Status
Action for Recovery
Mirror Mode Normal (at standby)

Degrade
HDD1 in trouble
Mode (see*1)
Under normal operation

1. Check the connection between HDD1 and
Mirroring Board or Main Controller PCB 2.
2. When the trouble is not recovered,
replace the HDD1.
HDD2 in trouble
1. Check the connection between HDD2 and
Mirroring Board or Main Controller PCB 2.
replace HDD2.
Rebuild mode Copying data to HDD1 Copying (under Rebuild)
(Rebuild)
Copying Data to HDD2 Copying (under Rebuild)
(Rebuild)
Halt mode
Both HDDs in trouble 1. Check Master HDD and Backup HDD (see
*2)
replace the two HDDs (format the
replaced HDD and download the system
software).
HDD1 HDD2
(ChA) (ChB)
Red
Red
LED LED
--A
-----
---
---
---
T-2-19
---: Not lit
A: Lit
B: Blinking at an interval of 0.5 seconds
*1: This mode shows the message, Need to replace hard disks (contact your service
engineer), on the control panel. In addition, 310006 is indicated in CODE field of Alarm Log
in service mode (COPIER > DISPLAY > ALARM-2).
*2: Never install the HDD used in the other model. The used HDD holds the ID specific to
the firstly-installed machine, thus this machine is unable to recognize it. If done, you need to
reinstall the HDD recognized in this machine.
2-27
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Removable HDD (option)
Points to Note in Servicing concerning Mirroring Functionality

1. The modes other than Mirror Mode indicate troubles, which require swift recovery.
The power can be turned OFF even during Rebuild process. However, it is recommended
not to turn off the power and wait until the mode flows to Mirror Mode. In addition, HDD
removal after power-OFF is guaranteed only in Mirror Mode.
2. The mirroring board controls Master HDD and Backup HDD. This control is performed
based on the HDD serial number and the model serial number instead of slot locations.
2-28
Removable HDD (option)
With this option, users can easily install or remove the HDD (slot-in/out).
This option is assumed to be used for: enhancing information security at government/public
offices or private companies.
Remove the HDD after the close of work to be kept in a safe.
Install the HDD at the start of work. Make the HDD locked during operation.
If HDDs are replaced in a careless manner during servicing in the field, the Master and
Backup HDDs may be switched.
Ex) When the master HDD is in trouble, the mirroring board automatically recognizes
the backup HDD as the master. Thus, the master and backup HDDs are switched
even without changing the slot locations.
If the Master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check on which channel
the green LED is lit on the LED PCB.
The firstly-blinked LED (ChA or ChB) shows the Master HDD, which is accessed firstly after
power-on.
3. For users who intend to use the removable and mirroring functionality concurrently, instruct
them not to change the removable HDD location in advance.
Change of HDD locations after power-OFF is allowed as specifications only in Mirror Mode.
Otherwise, HDD removal or change of location is not guaranteed.
4. The following conditions are required to replace HDDs at power-ON.
Removable HDD is extended
Removable HDD
Either HDD is in trouble
CAUTION:
F-2-40
Be sure to use a new HDD when replacing the HDD.

NOTE:
5. Upgrading should be done only in Mirror Mode while mirroring in ongoing. Upgrading in
To use this option, no setting is required with the software.

The user needs to prepare a key because there is no key with this kit.
Degrade or Rebuild mode is basically prohibited. Always prioritize Mirror Mode when you
take any actions.
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Removable HDD (option)
2-28
Technology > Controller System > Service Operations > HDD
2-29
Service Operations
Back Up
Backup of SST
MEAP
(Meapback)
HDD
<Procedure of parts replacement>
Refer to Removing HDD
<Procedure of adjustment>
1. Before Replacing
Perform the following operations. Be sure to get an approval from the user beforehand.
Refer to "Back Up" row for data back up.
Back Up
Restore/
Resetting
Backup of Remote UI
Remote UI
data
Settings/
Settings/
Registration > Registration >
Management Management
Settings
Settings >
> Data
Data
> Back Up
>
Restore
Export of Remote UI
Remote UI
settings Settings/
Settings/
Registration > Registration >
Settings
Settings >
> Data
Data
> Export
>
Import
Object Item
Remarlks
Mail Box
Memory RX Inbox
Confidential Fax Inbox
Advanced Box
Form for Composition
Cannot back up Advanced Box

data to the SMB server when an
optional HDD (except 160 GB) is
installed.
Settings/Registration Basic When exporting "Service Mode

Information
Settings", select Copier > Option
Paper Type Management > USER > SMD-EXPT > 1.
Settings
SMD-EXPT cannot be exported,
Forwarding Settings
therefore the settings need to
Box Settings
be made every time the HDD is
Department ID
replaced.
Management Settings
Main Menu Settings
Web Access Settings
Favorite Settings
Address Book
User Access Control for
Advanced Box
Quick Menu Settings
MEAP Application Setting
Information
User Setting Information
iW Function Flow Settings
Service Mode Settings
TPM
Non
Service Non
mode
setting
values
(DC-CON)
Service Non
mode
setting
values
(R-CON)
Restore/
Resetting
SST
(Meapback)
Object Item
Remarlks
MEAP application(SMS) Meapback.bin can be restored

User authentication
after replacement or initialization
information registered
of the HDD.
in the Local Device
[CAUTION]
Authentication user
When the following service
authentication system of mode is executed, Meapback.bin
SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) cannot be restored.
COPIER > FUNCTION >
SYSTEM > CHK-TYPE > 7
COPIER > FUNCTION >
SYSTEM > HD-CLEAR
After restarting TPM setup

the device,
execute
"Initialize All
Data/Settings",
and perform
backup with
TPM [ON].
COPIER>
The set value of the DC
FUNCTION> controller
SYSTEM>
DSRAMBUP
COPIER>
The set value of the
FUNCTION> Reader controller
SYSTEM>
RSRAMBUP
Backup data of the TPM key can

be used only when replacing the
TPM PCB. When replacing the
HDD, perform backup with TPM
[ON] again.
Since the backup data cannot

be saved to a location outside of
the device, it is recommended
to perform backup again after
replacing the HDD.
When the DC Controller PCB
needs to be replaced, in order
to update the data to the latest
one, perform backup again
immediately before replacing the
PCB.
Since the backup data cannot
be saved to a location outside of
the device, it is recommended
to perform backup again after
replacing the HDD.
When the Reader Controller
PCB needs to be replaced, in
order to update the data to the
latest one, perform backup again
immediately before replacing the
PCB.
T-2-20
2-29
2. After Replacing
1) HDD format
1-1) Start with the safe mode. (While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously, turn
ON the main powerswitch.)
1-2) Use SST to format all partitions.
2) Downloading system software
2-1) Use SST to download the system software (System, LANG, RUI and others).
3) Initializing the key, certificate and CA certificate
(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY
4) Turning OFF and ON the main power switch
5) Restoring the backup data
Refer to "Restore/Resetting" row for data restore by a list of "<Procedure of
adjustment>"
6) Resetting/registering the data
While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed before replacement,
reset/register the data.
7) When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA ertificate,
request the user to generate them again.
8) Executing Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust)
Settings/Registration mode: Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto
Adjust Gradation
2-30
When using the Card Reader and imageWARE Accounting Manager
Card ID used for imageWARE Accounting Manager is stored in the HDD, so NSA
collection control is not enabledafter the HDD replacement. After the HDD is replaced,
reinstall the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager using the following
procedures.
1) Go to COPIER > FUNCTION> INSTALL > CARD and enter the numerical value of
the leading card which is used for Department ID. Then, press OK button.(e.g.: If
No.1 to No.1000 cards are used for Department ID, enter 1 of the leading card.)
2) After turning OFF and ON the main power switch, perform the following operations
from Settings/Registration mode.
In Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management > Page
Totals, be sure that ID00000001 to ID00001000 are created.
Set the following: Preferences > Network > TCP / IP Settings > IPv4 Settings> IP
Address Settings > IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask
In Management Settings > User Management> System Manager Information
Settings> System Manager ID and System PIN, register any number for them. Then,
turn OFF and ON the main power switch.
If System Manager ID and System PIN are not registered, card registration
to device cannot be executed for the imageWARE Accounting Manager setting
operation.
3) Download the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager to the Main Body
again.
4) After downloading is completed, go to Management Settings > User Management >
Department ID Management > Page Totals. Be sure that only the downloaded card
ID is displayed.
5) Print using the user card registered from imageWARE Accounting Manager. Be sure
that the card information used for the target devices of imageWARE Accounting
Manager is collected.
CAUTION:Points to Caution when Using the System Software-installed HDD

When using the HDD which was installed the system software of the other achine
(different serial number), be sure to format the HDD after the installation. If the HDD is
not formatted, the operation cannot be guaranteed.
2-30
Technology > Controller System > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 1
2-31

Service part:
Setting unit: Main Controller PCB 1 + Controller Box Frame + Cooling Fan
Parts number differs on a model basis (speed basis).
Cooling Fan
Flash PCB
TPM PCB
F-2-42
Controller Box
Frame
NOTE:
Resetting/registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is replaced.
F-2-41
In order to secure the accuracy of connector connection when slotting in, this service part is
provided with the PCB being installed to the frame.
1) Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB
DDR2-SDRAM (2 pc.)
Flash PCB
TPM PCB
2-31
2-32
When Replacing
1) Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB
Service part:
Option DDR2-SDRAM (1 pc.)
Setting unit: Main Controller PCB 2 + Controller Box Frame
Bypass PCB
Memory PCB
Bypass PCB
Image Processing
Sub PCB
Controller Box
Frame
F-2-43
In order to secure the accuracy of connector connection when slotting in, this service part is
provided with the PCB being installed to the frame.
DDR2-SDRAM
Backup the Settings/Registration data

Data in SRAM on the Main Controller PCB 2 can be backed up to a USB memory device or
an HDD from download mode.
* However, if the HDD Encryption Board is installed, backup to an HDD is not possible. It is
therefore recommended to perform backup to an USB memory device.
Operation method:
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
F-2-44
Prohibited Operation:
Do not transfer the following parts to another model (which has a different serial
number).
If you fail to do so, the Main Body does not activate normally and this might cause to
fail the restoration.
then,
Download Menu > Backup > SRAM(HDD/USB)
Main Controller PCB 2 (with Memory PCB installed)

Memory PCB
Note:
Download Menu is not intended for the "Settings/Registration > Paper Type Management
Settings".
You need back up from:
Remote UI
Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Export
2-32
<Actions after Parts Replacement>

1. Specify and register the data again of the Main Controller PCB 2.
1) While pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch.
2) The restore of backup data:
When Download Menu is displayed, connect USB memory to the main body.
Download Menu 2 > Restore
2-33
DC Controller PCB
Before replacing/clearing RAM
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP
After replacing/clearing RAM:
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES
3) Specify and register the data again.

Import from:
Remote UI
Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import
4) When an encryption key/certificate/CA certificate has been generated or added by the user,
ask the user to execute reinstallation.
TPM PCB
When TPM setting is OFF
Any operation is not necessary at replacement.
When TPM setting is ON
It is necessary to restore the TPM key which was backed up after changing the setting to
ON.
1) Removing the network cable
Until the TPM key is restored, information might be leaked due to the inappropriate access
via network, so be sure to perform this operation appropriately.
2) Connecting the USB Memory after turning ON the main power switch
3) Restoring the TPM key
Management Settings > Data Management >TPM Settings> Restore of TPM Key
4) Turning OFF and ON the main power switch
Flash PCB
Riser PCB
Setting unit as a service part:
Riser PCB + Frame
2-33
Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview
DCM
2-34
1) Perform the import of the DCM data of the service mode earlier.
2) Reboot the Host machine.
3) Import the DCM data of the user mode.
DCM
As for service mode, if the process is not completed within 5 minutes in the case of export
Overview
DCM (Device Configuration Management) is a function to migrate the setting values (of user
mode and service mode). In terms of the description in the Users Guide, it is synonymous
with "Import/Export All". Service mode setting values can be backed up/restored from the top
screen of service mode.
and 15 minutes in the case of import, the item performed at that time is continued until it
ends, but the final result becomes ERROR.
Data to which no password is set when exporting service mode cannot be loaded
from collective import from RUI. When assuming to perform collective import from RUI,
password must be set to data to be exported.
Following limitations are applied to password for DCM data:
By the conventional method for backing up SRAM of the Main Controller 2, data could be
Character string of software keyboard: 0 to 32 characters
backed up/restored only for the same machine. DCM supports the following 3 patterns.
No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is
The same machine (backup for the purpose of providing against emergency)
No space is allowed in the middle of a password.
set is allowed only for service mode.)

A different machine of the same model (setting values are migrated collectively to multiple
machines when replacing a host machine)
A different model (e.g.: the setting values are copied from an old model to a new model)
Where data is stored

Store the backup data in the following location.
User > PC (RUI)
Password is case sensitive.

At the time of following setting, Host matchine does not recognize USB memory.The DCM
function is not usable, too.
Settings/Registration > Preferences > External Interface > USB Settings > Use MEAP
Driver for External USB Device = On
Service > USB memory device/HDD of the machine (top screen of service mode)
Restrictions about import/export
Setting values that can be backed up
An import/export process ends with error while the following specific job is executed;
The values changed by the user under [Settings/Registration] and those specified in service
mode can be backed up.
Only setting values are backed up. Image data such as scanned image cannot be backed up.
Setting values under [Settings/Registration]
Service mode setting values
Send job,
Forwarding job,
FAX reception job,
IFAX reception job
If this function is executed with a print job simultaneously, it affects the operation such as;
UI is locked, or a print job is cleared by reboot after import. So it requires careful operation.
General limitations on DCM
A device rejects an import/ export request during shut-down.
Service mode for FAX cannot be migrated.
If this function is executed with device information distribution or RUI import/ export
With DCM, stored data, MEAP application, and system option license cannot be migrated.
A .dcm file exported to the internal HDD is not deleted even when the machine is restarted.
Only 2 files at a maximum are stored in HDD. When there are more than 2 files, the old
.dcm files are deleted from the oldest.
Continuous import is not guaranteed. After importing a file, the machine must be restarted.
If executing import without restart, NG is displayed and a file is not imported.
When importing DCM file in service mode and user mode separately, perform it in the
following procedures.
(conventional function) simultaneously, the first coming job takes priority and they are
controlled exclusively.
If this function is executed with a firmware update by a CDS Updater simultaneously, a
firmware update process takes priority, and this function is stopped temporarily by reboot.
When error code is issued, this function ends with error.
If the display language differs between export and import, a setting value of a text corrupts
in some cases. The character corruption can be solved by changing the display language
to the appropriate one.
2-34
2-35
Import/Export All from remote UI

The following settings information is available with the Import function in each case
Settings/Registration Basic Information
Box Settings
Department ID Management Settings
Main Menu Settings
Note:
Display/hide of the service mode settings on RUI can be switched by changing the
setting in the following service mode.
Service mode L1 > Copier > Option > USER > SMD-EXPT
[0]: Hide the service mode settings. (Def.)
[1]: Display the service mode settings.
Favorite Settings
Address Book
Forwarding Settings
Quick Menu Settings
MEAP Application Setting Information
Collective Import Using Data Collectively Exported from RUI
Paper Type Management Settings
For the reason of security, it is not appropriate that the user mode can be exported from
User Access Control for Advanced Space
service mode without user's permission. Because of that, it cannot be exported due to the
Web Access Settings

Service Mode Settings(Display/hide of the service mode settings on the export screen)
specification However, it is possible to import the setting values of user mode exported from
RUI.
Preparation
PC and web browser
USB memory device to store the data of reference machine
Overall flow
1. Complete the device setting as a reference machine.
2. Export the data of reference machine including service mode from RUI.
3. Copy the data to the root of the USB memory device using a PC.
4. Connect the USB memory device to the copy destination machine.
5. Execute import by specifying the target files from RESTORE in service mode.
F-2-45
2-35
2-36
The following cases may be possible for the Import All function.
Setting Information
Case A:Importing all to your machine (Restoring the settings information to your machine for
Case A Case B Case C

IPv4 Settings
Use IPv4
Yes
Yes
Yes
IP Address
Yes
No
No
C5250/C5250i/C5240i/C5235i)
Subnet Mask
Yes
Yes
Yes
Case C:Importing all to the different model machine that supports the Import All function
Gateway Address
Yes
Yes
Yes
DHCP
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
RARP
Yes
Yes
Yes
BOOTP
Yes
Yes
Yes
DHCP Option Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use IPv6
Yes
Yes
Yes
Stateless Address
Yes
Settings
Manual Address Settings Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Use DHCPv6
Yes
Yes
Yes
DNS Server Address

Yes
Settings
DNS Host/Domain Name Yes
Settings
DNS Dynamic Update
Yes
Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
backups)
IP Address Settings
Case B:Importing all to the same model machine (imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5255/C5255i/
Setting Information
Preferences
Paper Settings
Paper Settings
Yes
Register Custom Size
Yes
Yes
No
Display Settings Default Screen after Startup/Restoration
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Default Screen (Status Monitor/Cancel)
Timer/Energy
Settings
Network
Copy Screen Display Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display Fax Function
Yes
Yes
Yes
Store Location Display Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Language/Keyboard Switch On/Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Language/Keyboard Switch
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use Keyboard Shift Lock Feature
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display Remaining Paper Message
Yes
Yes
Yes
No. of Copies/Job Duration Status
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display Original Scanning Cleaning Area
Yes
Yes
Yes
Select Paper Screen Priority
Yes
Yes
Yes
mm/Inch Entry Switch
Yes
Yes
Yes
ID/User Name Display On/Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display Remaining Toner Error Message
Yes
Yes
Yes
Time Format
Yes
Yes
Yes
Quick Startup Settings for Main Power
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Reset Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
Restrict Auto Reset Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
Function After Auto Reset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Shutdown Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Sleep Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
Sleep Mode Energy Use
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Sleep Weekly Timer
Yes
Yes
Yes
Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Confirm Network Connection Set. Changes Yes
Yes
Yes
TCP/IP Settings
IPv6 Settings
DNS Settings
WINS Settings
Yes
Yes
LPD Print Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
RAW Print Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
SNTP Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
FTP Print Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
WSD Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use FTP PASV Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multicast Discovery Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use HTTP
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use WebDAV Server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Proxy Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
NetWare Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
AppleTalk Settings
Yes
No
No
SMB Server Settings
Yes
No
No
SNMP Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dedicated Port Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use Spool Function
Yes
Yes
Yes
Startup Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ethernet Driver Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-36
Setting Information
2-37
Firewall Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
External Interface USB Settings
Yes
Yes
Accessibility
Key Repetition Settings
Yes
Reversed Display (Color)
Yes
Function
Settings
Common
Copy

Auto Collate
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Orientation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Select Color Settings for Copy
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Common Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Adjust Image
Quality
Setting Information
Send
E-Mail/I-Fax Settings
Correct Density
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register Unit Name
Yes
Yes
Yes
Full Color Printing Vividness Settings
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fine Adjust Zoom
Yes
No
No
Communication SMTP RX
Settings
POP
Yes
Yes
Yes
Paper Feed Settings
Yes
Yes
No
SMTP Server
Yes
Yes
Yes
E-Mail Address
Yes
No
No
POP Server
Yes
Yes
Yes
POP Login Name
Yes
No
No
POP Password
Yes
No
No
POP Interval
Print Settings
Text/Photo Priority When ACS Is Set to
Black
Output Report Default Settings
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Superimpose Image Quality Priority
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register Characters for Page No./

Watermark
Secure Watermark/Document Scan Lock
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Scan Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Confirm SSL Certificate for SMTP TX
Yes
Yes
Yes
Confirm SSL Certificate for POP RX
Yes
Yes
Yes
Streak Prevention
Yes
Yes
No
Maximum Data Size for Sending
Yes
Yes
Yes
Feeder Black Scan Speed/Image Qlty.

Priority
LTRR/STMT Original Selection
Yes
Yes
No
Default Subject
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Specify Authentication User Dest. to Reply Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote Scan Gamma Value
Yes
Yes
No
Set Authentication User Dest. to Sender
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Online
Yes
Yes
Yes
Allow Unregistered Users to Send E-Mail
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Offline
Yes
Yes
Yes
High Compression Image Quality Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
Compact PDF Settings for Text Original
Yes
Yes
Yes
OCR (Text Searchable) Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Trace & Smooth Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Generate File
Yes
Authent./Encryption
Full Mode TX Timeout
Yes
Yes
Yes
Print MDN/DSN upon Receipt
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use Send via Server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Allow MDN Not via Server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Restrict TX Destination Domain
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
OOXML Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Autocomplete for Entering E-Mail

Addresses
Fax Settings
Include Background Images in Word File
Yes
Yes
Yes
Default Screen
Yes
Yes
Yes
Specify Minimum PDF Version
Yes
Yes
Yes
Change Default Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Format PDF to PDF/A
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register Options Shortcuts
Yes
Yes
Yes
Optimize PDF for Web
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register Sender Name (TTI)
Yes
Yes
Yes
256-bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF
Yes
Yes
Yes
Use Auth. User Name as Sender Name
Yes
Yes
Yes
Document Scan Lock Operational Settings Yes
Yes
Yes
ECM TX
Yes
Yes
Yes
Set Authentication Method
Yes
Yes
Set Pause Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto Redial
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-37
Setting Information
Secure Print
Yes
Yes
Device Information Delivery Settings
Fax TX Report
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register Destinations
Yes
Yes
No
Fax Activity Report
Yes
Yes
Yes
Set Auto Delivery
Yes
Yes
No
Set Line
Yes
Line 1 to Line 2
Yes
Yes
Restrict Receiving Device Information
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register Unit Telephone Yes

Number
Register Unit Name
Yes
No
No
Restrict Receiving for Each Function
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Report Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Select Line Type
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display Job Status Before Authentication
Yes
Yes
Yes
Select TX Line
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display Log
Yes
Yes
Yes
TX Start Speed
Yes
Yes
Yes
Audit Log Retrieval
R-Key Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Confirm Entered Fax Number
Yes
Yes
Yes
Allow Fax Driver TX
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote Fax TX Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote Fax Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fax Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Mail Box Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Advanced Space Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Network Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Memory Media Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Simple Authentication Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Change Default Display of Address Book
Yes
Yes
Yes
Address Book PIN
Yes
Yes
Yes
Manage Address Book Access Numbers
Yes
Yes
Yes
Include Pswd. When Exporting Address Book
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register LDAP Server
Yes
Yes
No
Auto Search When Using LDAP Server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Change Default LDAP Search Conditions
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register/Edit LDAP Search Conditions
Yes
Yes
No
Acquire Remote Acquire Address Book

Address Book
Remote Address Book Server Address
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Communication Timeout
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fax TX Line Auto Select Adjustment
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Make Remote
Make Address Book Open
Add. Book Open
Management Device
Device Information Settings
Settings
Management
Yes
Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs

Set
Destination
Setting Information
Check Dial Tone Before Sending
Receive/Forward Common Settings

Store/Access
Files
2-38
License/Other
Data
Management
Yes
Yes
Yes
Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140-2 Yes
Yes
Yes
Message Board/Support Link
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote Operation Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Back Up/Restore Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
HDD Data Complete Deletion
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Store/Access
Mail Box Settings
Yes
Files
Mail Box (Print) Color Balance (Options) Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Advanced Space Custom (Scan Size)

(Scan)
User
System Manager
Management
Information Settings
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Box Settings Function Settings Receive/ForwardCommon Settings
Access Stored
Files
Scan and Store
Department ID Management
Management Settings
Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Main Menu
Settings
Main Menu
Settings
Setting File
Register PIN
Yes
Yes
Yes
Favorite
Settings
Copy
Register/Edit Favorite Settings
Yes
Yes
No
Send
Yes
Yes
No
Register Options Shortcuts (Regular Copy) Yes
Yes
No
Register Options Shortcuts (Express Copy) Yes
Yes
No
Common Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fax Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Store/Access
Common Settings
Files
Copy Basic
Color Balance (Options)
Features Screen
2-38
Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
Setting Information
Address Book Set Destination

Yes
Yes
Yes
Rename Address List
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register One-Touch
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Forwarding
Settings
Function Settings Receive/ForwardCommon Settings
Quick Menu
Settings
Quick Menu
Settings
MEAP
Application
Setting
Information
iW Function Flow Flow Data File
Button File
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-39
Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
The numbers shown in the Compatibility level are explained in the table below.
Compatibility level (Lv)
Description
Not supported.
Can import to a device of the same model and same SN only.

Usable for the purpose of backup/restore.
No
Yes
Can import to a device of a same model.
Can import to a device of a different model also.

T-2-22
Operation Setting File
Paper Type
Management
Settings
MEAP User
Data
Setting
Information
MEAP Application Data
Setting
Information
Preferences
Paper Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
DCM list for Service Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Initial screen Large
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
ADJ-XY
ADJ-XY
ADJ-XY
ADJ-XY
ADJ-XY
ADJ-XY
ADJ-XY
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Paper Type Management Yes

Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Authentication/Operation Log Management Yes
Yes
Yes
Favorites
Yes
Yes
Yes
Settings
Yes
Yes
Yes
User Access
Control for
Advanced
Space
User Access
User List
Control for
Advanced Space
Web Access
Settings
Web Access
Settings
Integrated Authentication Settings
T-2-21
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
Small
Import
ADJ-X
ADJ-Y
ADJ-Y-DF
STRD-POS
ADJ-X-MG
ADJY-DF2
ADJ-Y-MG
BLANK-T
BLANK-L
BLANK-R
BLANK-B
BLANK-T2
BLANK-B2
W-PLT-X
W-PLT-Y
W-PLT-Z
SH-TRGT
100-RG
100-GB
DFTAR-R
DFTAR-G
DFTAR-B
MTF2-M1
MTF2-M2
MTF2-M3
MTF2-M4
MTF2-M5
MTF2-M6
MTF2-M7
MTF2-M8
MTF2-M9
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
2-39
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
Small
Import
MTF2-S1
MTF2-S2
MTF2-S3
MTF2-S4
MTF2-S5
MTF2-S6
MTF2-S7
MTF2-S8
MTF2-S9
100DF2GB
100DF2RG
DFCH2R2
DFCH2R10
DFCH2B2
DFCH2B10
DFCH2G2
DFCH2G10
CCD-CHNG
MTF-M1
MTF-M2
MTF-M3
MTF-M4
MTF-M5
MTF-M6
MTF-M7
MTF-M8
MTF-M9
MTF-S1
MTF-S2
MTF-S3
MTF-S4
MTF-S5
MTF-S6
MTF-S7
MTF-S8
MTF-S9
DFCH-R2
DFCH-R10
DFCH-B2
DFCH-B10
DFCH-G2
DFCH-G10
MTF2-M10
MTF2-M11
MTF2-M12
MTF2-S10
MTF2-S11
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
2-40
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
COLOR
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
Small
Import
MTF2-S12
MTF-M10
MTF-M11
MTF-M12
MTF-S10
MTF-S11
MTF-S12
DFCH2K2
DFCH2K10
DFCH-K2
DFCH-K10
DFTAR-BW
DFTBK-G
DFTBK-B
DFTBK-R
CCD-CHG2
DFTBK-BW
ADJ-Y
ADJ-M
ADJ-C
ADJ-K
OFST-Y
OFST-M
OFST-C
OFST-K
LD-OFS-Y
LD-OFS-M
LD-OFS-C
LD-OFS-K
MD-OFS-Y
MD-OFS-M
MD-OFS-C
MD-OFS-K
HD-OFS-Y
HD-OFS-M
HD-OFS-C
HD-OFS-K
PL-OFS-Y
PL-OFS-M
PL-OFS-C
PL-OFS-K
PM-OFS-Y
PM-OFS-M
PM-OFS-C
PM-OFS-K
PH-OFS-Y
PH-OFS-M
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
2-40
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COLOR
COLOR
CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
Small
Import
PH-OFS-C
PH-OFS-K
MF-A4R
MF-A6R
MF-A4
MDK1-A4
MDK1-A5R
MDK2-A4
MDK2-A5R
MDK3-A4
MDK3-A5R
REF-Y
REF-M
REF-C
SIGG-Y
SIGG-M
SIGG-C
SIGG-K
HLMT-PTY
HLMT-PTM
HLMT-PTC
LLMT-PTY
LLMT-PTM
LLMT-PTC
DMAX-Y
DMAX-M
DMAX-C
P-TG-Y
P-TG-M
P-TG-C
P-TG-K
ALF-C
P-K-Y
P-K-M
P-K-C
P-K-K
HLMT-PTK
LLMT-PTK
REF-K
DMLMT-HY
DMLMT-HM
DMLMT-HC
DMLMT-LY
DMLMT-LM
DMLMT-LC
CONT-Y
CONT-M
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
2-41
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
DENS
DENS
EXP-LED
EXP-LED
EXP-LED
EXP-LED
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
HV-PRI
HV-PRI
HV-PRI
HV-PRI
HV-PRI
HV-PRI
HV-PRI
HV-PRI
HV-PRI
HV-PRI
HV-PRI
HV-PRI
HV-PRI
HV-PRI
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
Small
Import
CONT-C
CONT-K
PR-EXP-Y
PR-EXP-M
PR-EXP-C
PR-EXP-K
REGIST
ADJ-C1
ADJ-C2
ADJ-C3
ADJ-C4
ADJ-MF
ADJ-DK
ADJ-REFE
REG-THCK
REG-DUP1
REG-DUP2
LP-FEED1
LP-MULT1
LP-DUP1
PFIX-FAN
ADJ-MDK1
ADJ-MDK2
ADJ-MDK3
REG-H2
REG-S
REG-MF
REG-MFH1
REG-MFH2
REG-MFS
PFIX-SPD
EXT-SPD
REG-DUPS
DIS-TGY
DIS-TGM
DIS-TGC
DIS-TGY2
DIS-TGM2
DIS-TGC2
OFSTAC-Y
OFSTAC-M
OFSTAC-C
OFSTACY2
OFSTACM2
OFSTACC2
OFSTACY3
OFSTACM3
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
2-41
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
HV-PRI
HV-PRI
HV-PRI
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
Small
Import
OFSTACC3
PRI-FREQ
DHT-ON
2TR-TGT1
2TR-TGT2
2TR-TGT3
2TR-TGT4
2TR-TGT5
2TR-TGT6
2TR-TGT7
2TR-TGT8
2TR-SHR1
2TR-SHR2
2TR-SHR3
2TR-SHR4
2TR-SHR5
2TR-SHR6
2TR-SHR7
2TR-SHR8
TR-PPR1
TR-PPR2
TR-PPR3
TR-PPR4
TR-PPR5
TR-PPR6
TR-PPR7
TR-PPR8
TR-ENV1
TR-ENV2
TR-ENV3
TR-ENV4
TR-ENV5
TR-ENV6
TR-ENV7
TR-ENV8
TR-CLR1
TR-CLR2
TR-CLR3
TR-CLR4
TR-CLR5
TR-CLR6
TR-CLR7
TR-CLR8
TR-DUP1
TR-DUP2
TR-DUP3
TR-DUP4
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
2-42
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
IMG-REG
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
Small
Import
TR-DUP5
TR-DUP6
TR-DUP7
TR-DUP8
1TR-TGY
1TR-TGM
1TR-TGC
1TR-TGK1
1TR-TGK4
2EL
POSTSW-K
2ELSW
1TR-TGY2
1TR-TGM2
1TR-TGC2
1TR-TK12
1TR-TGY3
1TR-TGM3
1TR-TGC3
1TR-TK13
1TR-TK42
1TR-TK43
REG-H-Y
REG-H-C
REG-H-K
REG-HS-Y
REG-HS-C
REG-V-Y
REG-V-C
REG-V-K
REG-H-M
REG-V-M
REG-HS-M
MAG-V
LSR-H-1
LSR-H-2
LSR-V-Y
LSR-V-M
LSR-V-C
LSR-V-K
SEG-ADJ
K-ADJ
ACS-ADJ
ACS-EN
ACS-CNT
ACS-EN2
ACS-CNT2
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
2-42
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
PASCAL
PASCAL
PASCAL
PASCAL
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
INSTALL
INSTALL
INSTALL
INSTALL
INSTALL
INSTALL
MISC-R
MISC-R
SYSTEM
ACC
ACC
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
OPTION
OPTION
Small
Import
WT-ER-LV
REOS-PG
SEG-ADJ3
K-ADJ3
ACS-ADJ3
ACS-EN3
ACS-CNT3
SH-ADJ
SH-ADJ2
OFST-P-Y
OFST-P-M
OFST-P-C
OFST-P-K
VCONT-K
VBACK-Y
VBACK-M
VBACK-C
VBACK-K
PT-VCT-Y
PT-VCT-M
PT-VCT-C
PT-VCT-K
VDGAIN-Y
VDGAIN-M
VDGAIN-C
LPGAIN-Y
LPGAIN-M
LPGAIN-C
VBACK2-Y
VBACK2-M
VBACK2-C
VBACK2-K
VBACK3-Y
VBACK3-M
VBACK3-C
VBACK3-K
KEY
E-RDS
RGW-PORT
RGW-ADR
CDS-CTL
BIT-SVC
1PCLBUDR
1PCLBOVR
DEBUG-1
COIN
DK-P
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-43
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Small
Import
CARD-SW
STPL-LMT
SC-TYPE
CC-SPSW
UNIT-PRC
DA-PUCT
MIN-PRC
MAX-PRC
MIC-TUN
SRL-SPSW
PDL-THR
CR-TYPE
MODEL-SZ
SCANSLCT
PASCAL
DH-SW
SENS-CNF
CONFIG
RAW-DATA
IFAX-LIM
W/SCNR
SMTPTXPN
SMTPRXPN
POP3PN
ORG-LGL
ORG-LTR
ORG-B5
UI-COPY
UI-BOX
UI-SEND
UI-FAX
SCR-SLCT
TMC-SLCT
DEVL-VTH
FTPTXPN
INTPPR-1
PRN-FLG
SCN-FLG
INTROT-1
INTROT-2
INTROT-T
NWERR-SW
DEVL-PTH
AUTO-DH
STS-PORT
CMD-PORT
MODELSZ2
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-43
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Small
Import
OHP-PTH
UISW-DSP
DFDST-L1
DFDST-L2
NS-CMD5
NS-GSAPI
NS-NTLM
NS-PLNWS
NS-PLN
NS-LGN
T-CRG-SW
MEAP-PN
TNR-DWN
TMIC-BK
SVMD-ENT
DH-MODE
ENVP-INT
PCHINT-1
PCHINT-V
FXWRNLVL
FXMSG-SW
CHNG-STS
CHNG-CMD
ANIM-SW
MEAP-SSL
SC-L-CNT
DH-TMG
MIX-FLG
REPORT-Z
IFXEML-Z
BMLNKS-Z
KSIZE-SW
LPD-PORT
ORG-A4R
PDF-RDCT
REDU-CNT
REBOOTSW
VP-ART
VP-TXT
UI-PRINT
WUEV-SW
WUEV-INT
WUEV-POT
WUEV-RTR
SJB-UNW
IMGC-ADJ
UI-RSCAN
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-44
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Small
Import
UI-EPRNT
UI-WEB
UI-HOLD
WEBV-SW
PASCL-TY
CARD-RNG
WUEN-LIV
COMP-PRT
ARCDT-SW
ADJ-VPP
AST-SEL
REGM-SEL
2TR-RVON
SJOB-CL
TNR-WARN
DHCP-12
DHCP-81
IFX-CHIG
USB-RCNT
UNLMTBND
SCANTYPE
DNSTRANS
MIBCOUNT
DRY-CISU
RMT-CNSL
MEAP-PRI
EVLP-SPD
PROXYRES
WOLTRANS
DF2DSTL1
DF2DSTL2
802XTOUT
IKERETRY
SPDALDEL
NCONF-SW
ABK-TOOL
DMX-OF-Y
DMX-OF-M
DMX-OF-C
DMX-OF-K
IKEINTVL
IPSDEBLV
SP-LINK
W/RAID
PSWD-SW
SM-PSWD
DEV-SP1
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-44
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Small
Import
DEV-SP2
RPT2SIDE
AFS-JOB
AFC-EVNT
UI-SBOX
UI-MEM
ILOGMODE
ILOGKEEP
PSCL-MS
DMX-DISP
UI-NAVI
ERS-SEL
STND-PNL
INVALPDL
IMGCNTPR
CDS-FIRM
CDS-MEAP
CDS-UGW
LOCLFIRM
RSHDW-SW
FX-WUT
TMP-P1-1
TMP-P1-2
TMP-P2-1
TMP-P2-2
TMP-H1-1
TMP-H1-2
TMP-H2-1
TMP-H2-2
TMP-H3-1
TMP-H3-2
TMP-H4-1
TMP-H4-2
TMP-THIN
DWN-TMP
ARC-INT1
ARC-INT2
SCR-SW
DEV-SP3
DEV-SP4
DEV-SP5
DEV-SP6
DEV-SP7
DEV-SP8
IPTBROAD
TMP-R1-1
TMP-R2-1
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-45
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Small
Import
TMP-R1-2
TMP-R2-2
FCOT-DSP
MC-FANSW
PFWFTPRT
BXNUPLOG
TFL-RTC
UI-CUSTM
BUSI-SW
SDLMTWRN
JLK-PWSC
CNTCNFSW
USZ-FEED
IPMTU
DDNSINTV
ITB-TYPE
FAX-INT
PDL-Z-LG
CDS-LVUP
AMSOFFSW
USEUPTNR
UA-OFFSW
MIB-NVTA
MIB-EXT
SCT-BTN
DFEJCLED
SVC-RUI
PSCL-TBL
BGE-OFS
USER-DSP
LCDSFLG
STNDBY-A
SDTM-DSP
BXSHIFT
HOME-SW
NO-LGOUT
T-DLV-BK
JM-ERR-D
JM-ERR-R
LOW-SEQ
FX-WAIT
TMPC1A-2
TMPC1B-2
TMPC1C-2
TMP-C2-1
TMP-C2-2
TMP-C3-1
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-45
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Small
Import
TMP-C3-2
TMP-C4-1
TMP-C4-2
TMPC5A-1
TMPC5A-2
TMPC5B-1
TMPC5B-2
TMPC5C-1
TMPC5C-2
TMPOHT-1
TMPOHT-2
FX-CU-P1
FX-CU-P2
FX-CU-R1
FX-CU-R2
FX-CU-TN
FX-CU-OT
WEB-PRS
WEB-TMP
EF-TMP11
EF-TMP21
EF-TMP22
EF-TMP23
DWN-TMP2
IHOFFTMP
FX-L-CHG
WEB-FEED
CORE-CLN
COL-SHRT
COL-LONG
FX-MIX1
FX-MIX2
FX-MIX3
WEB-CLN
CF-TMP11
CF-TMP12
CF-TMP13
CF-TMP14
CF-TMP21
CF-TMP23
CF-TMP24
CF-TMP25
CF-TMP26
CF-TMP27
FX-CU-13
FIX-MODE
FIX-RCPR
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
2-46
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
INT-FACE
INT-FACE
INT-FACE
INT-FACE
INT-FACE
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Small
Import
FX-MIX4
FX-MIX5
FX-MIX6
FX-MIX7
TR-BND3
TR-BND4
TRCLN3-P
TRCLN4-P
KIN-SW1
KIN-SW2
KIN-SW3
TMPC1A-1
TMPC1B-1
TMPC1C-1
TMP-THN2
U1-NAME
U2-NAME
U3-NAME
U4-NAME
CST3-P1
CST3-P2
CST4-P1
CST4-P2
CST3-U1
CST3-U3
CST4-U1
CST4-U3
IMG-CONT
AP-OPT
AP-ACCNT
AP-CODE
NWCT-TM
COPY-LIM
SLEEP
SIZE-DET
COUNTER1
COUNTER2
COUNTER3
COUNTER4
COUNTER5
COUNTER6
DATE-DSP
MB-CCV
CONTROL
B4-L-CNT
TRY-STP
MF-LG-ST
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-46
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Small
Import
CNT-DISP
COPY-JOB
OP-SZ-DT
NW-SCAN
INS-C-S
HDCR-DSP
JOB-INVL
LGSW-DSP
TAB-ROT
PR-PSESW
IDPRN-SW
CPRT-DSP
PCL-COPY
CNT-SW
TAB-ACC
BCNT-AST
PRJOB-CP
DFLT-CPY
DFLT-BOX
DOC-REM
DPT-ID-7
RUI-RJT
SND-RATE
CTM-S06
FREG-SW
IFAX-SZL
IFAX-PGD
MEAPSAFE
TRAY-FLL
PRNT-POS
AFN-PSWD
PTJAM-RC
PDL-NCSW
SLP-SLCT
PS-MODE
CNCT-RLZ
COUNTER7
COUNTER8
2C-CT-SW
LDAP-SW
FROM-OF
DOM-ADD
FILE-OF
MAIL-OF
IFAX-OF
LDAP-DEF
FREE-DSP
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-47
Middle
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
FEEDER
FEEDER
FEEDER
FEEDER
FEEDER
FEEDER
FEEDER
FEEDER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
Small
Import
TNRB-SW
CLR-TIM
HDCR-DSW
SNMP-COA
SNMP-COU
BWCL-DSP
SCALL-SW
SCALLCMP
USBH-DSP
USBM-DSP
USBI-DSP
CTCHKDSP
USBB-DSP
USBR-DSP
POL-SCAN
JA-SBOX
JA-DFAX
JA-REP
JA-FREP
JA-BOX
JA-FORM
JA-PREV
JA-PULL
JA-PDLB
JA-JOBK
JA-JDF
JA-RUI
JA-WEB
CS-ACC
EXP-CRYP
SLEEP1SW
CNCL-ATH
EZY-SCRP
DMN-MTCH
SNDSTREN
FAXSTREN
DOCST
LA-SPEED
DOCST2
LA-SPD2
ADJMSCN1
ADJMSCN2
ADJSSCN1
ADJSSCN2
PNCH-HLE
PNCH-Y
PF-A3Z1
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-47

SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
Middle
Small
Import
PF-A3Z2
PF-B4Z1
PF-B4Z2
PF-A4RZ1
PF-A4RZ2
PF-LDRZ1
PF-LDRZ2
PF-LGLZ1
PF-LGLZ2
PFLTRRZ1
PFLTRRZ2
PF-A4RC1
PF-A4RC2
PFLTRRC1
PFLTRRC2
PF-A4R31
PF-A4R32
PFLTRR31
PFLTRR32
PF-A4R41
PF-A4R42
PFLTRR41
PFLTRR42
PF-A4R21
PFLTRR21
PRCS-ALG
STP-F1
STP-F2
STP-R1
STP-R2
STP-2P
BFF-SFT
PNCH-X
TRM-RG1
TRM-RG2
TRM-CUT1
TRM-CUT2
BFF-SFT2
SDL-STP
SDL-FLD
SDL-ALG
SDL-RLPT
SDL-RLFD
SDL-RLHD
BFR-UPA4
BFR-UPB5
BFR-UPLT
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
2-48
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Middle
Small
Import
RTR-DWA4
RTR-DWB5
RTR-DWLT
BF-SB-A4
BF-SB-B5
BF-SB-LT
RTR-UPA4
RTR-UPB5
RTR-UPLT
PUNCH-SB
ST-ALG1
ST-ALG2
STP-F3
STP-F4
STP-R3
STP-R4
SW-UP-RL
PRCS-RET
UP-CL
DW-CL
THC-CL
THC-PUSH
OFST-STC
THN-STC
STP-P-CH
TRY-NIS
TRY-SU
FIN-NIS
1SHT-SHF
SDL-SWCH
SDL-ALM
Z-FL-CH
THN-STCL
SW-ADJ
GRP-ALG
PRTN-ALG
BFF-SFT3
BFF-SFT4
BLNK-SW
MD-SPRTN
BUFF-SW
TRY-OVER
PUCH-SW
ALG-IMPR
BUFF-SW2
1SHT-SRT
SD-LMTLS
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-48
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)

SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Middle
Small
Import
SD-STCNB
BUFF-THK
PRCS-SP1
PRCS-SP2
BUFF-MX1
BUFF-MX2
PRCS-MX1
PRCS-MX2
BUF-THK1
PRD-PRTY
STCR-DWN
PRCS-SP3
NSRT-STC
THN-TRSW
THN-SW
SWGUP-SW
CALG-SW
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Yes
Yes
Lev3
2-49
Import/export by service mode (external)
The following shows the procedure for importing and exporting the service mode setting
values in service mode. With export by which data is collected from the machine, service
mode setting values can be backed up. With import, data backed up from service mode and
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
that backed up from remote UI can be restored.

The save destination of backup data can be selected from either a USB memory device or
HDD of the machine.
Export
Preparation
USB memory device
* Required when exporting to an external USB memory device.
It needs to have been formatted to be recognized by the device. No firmware registration is
necessary.
T-2-23
Overall flow
Select the save destination between the internal HDD or external USB memory device
depending on the use case.
Procedure
1. Select external USB memory device as save destination (LIST=1)
2. Register password
3. Export to external USB memory device
4. Remove USB memory device
Exporting data to an external USB memory device

1. Connect the USB memory device and check that it has been mounted. (When using the
external USB memory device)
F-2-46
2-49
2-50
2. Log in to service mode and press BACKUP.
F-2-47
3. Select LIST after the screen moves to <BACKUP>.

F-2-49
5. The names of .dcm files saved in the external USB memory device are displayed.
F-2-48
4. When saving to the external USB memory device, select 1 and press OK.
F-2-50
6. Select PASSWD, enter a password from the software keyboard, and then press OK.
F-2-51
2-50
2-51
Note:
Limitations regarding the DCM data password

No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is
set is allowed only for service mode.)
7. After registering the password, select BACKUP. Press OK to execute export.
Reference:
iAC5255_JWH00003_V0102_0040_2012_0124_193650.dcm
Model
Export
YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS
S/N
Main controller
firm ware version
DCM File format
DCM Job
management number
F-2-52
8. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed.
Press <-.
F-2-54
Import
Preparation
USB memory device
* Required when importing from an external USB memory device.
It needs to have been formatted to be recognized by the device. No firmware registration is
necessary.
When necessary, copy the files which you want to import using a PC in advance.
Be sure to store them in the root folder of the USB memory device.
Do not change the extension from .dcm. (only .dcm files can be recognized.)
It is desirable to connect the USB memory device before entering service mode.
Overall flow
Procedure for restoring data from an external USB memory device.
Procedure
F-2-53
9. After access to the USB memory device has occurred, select LIST=0 and press OK.
Unmount the USB memory device.
It can also be removed by pressing the Remove button on the main menu.
1. Select external USB memory device as save destination (LIST=1)

2. Names of saved DCM data files are displayed
4. Import from external USB memory device
2-51
2-52
5. Remove USB memory device
4. When referring to the external USB memory device, select 1 and press OK.
6. Specification of export file name
Procedure for restoring data from an external USB memory device

1. Connect the USB memory device. (When using the external USB memory device)
2. Log in to service mode and press RESTORE.
F-2-57
5. The names of .dcm files referred to in the external USB memory device are displayed.
F-2-55
3. Select LIST after the screen moves to <RESTORE>.
F-2-58
F-2-56
2-52
2-53
6. Select SELECT.
8. When the correct file is displayed, press ->.
F-2-59
F-2-61
7. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected and press
Note:
OK.
Specification of file selection display
"*" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected in
SELECT.
USB memory device: Up to 8 files are displayed in a screen.
F-2-60
F-2-62
2-53
2-54
Press <-.
F-2-63
Note:
F-2-65
"<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has
been confirmed.
"***" is displayed after the password is entered.
12. After access to the USB memory device has occurred, select LIST=0 and press OK.
Unmount the USB memory device.
It can also be removed by pressing the Remove button on the main menu.
10. After registering the password, select RESTORE. Press OK to execute import.
F-2-66
F-2-64
2-54
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal)
2-55
Import/export by service mode (internal)
When selecting the HDD of the machine at execution of BACKUP from the top screen
of service mode, service mode settings can be saved. Setting values of Main Controller
2, Reader Controller, DC Controller, etc. can be collectively saved. It can be used when
recovering the initial status after having tried multiple setting changes temporarily for
troubleshooting, etc.
Note:
DCM must not be used when replacing a PCB.
Be sure to use a method such as backup of SRAM of the Main Controller 2/service
mode backup of DCON/RCON.
DCM enables to back up only service mode setting values. There is still necessary
information other than setting values when replacing a PCB.
SRAM backup or service mode backup enables to save data other than setting values.
F-2-68
3. When saving to the internal HDD, select 2 and press OK.
Export
Preparation
There is no need to newly prepare for saving data to the HDD of the machine.
Overall flow
Here is a procedure for exporting data of the HDD of the machine.
Procedure
1. Select internal HDD as save destination (LIST=2)
3. Import from the internal HDD
Procedure for backing up data to the HDD of the machine

4. The names of .dcm files saved in the internal HDD are displayed.
F-2-69
F-2-67
2-55
2-56
6. After registering the password, select BACKUP. Press OK to execute export.
F-2-72
Press <-.
F-2-70
F-2-71
Note:
Limitations regarding the DCM data password

No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is set
is allowed only for service mode.)
F-2-73
Reference:
iAC5255_JWH00003_V0102_0040_2012_0124_193650.dcm
Model
Export
YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS
S/N
Main controller
firm ware version
DCM File format
DCM Job
management number
F-2-74
2-56
2-57
Import
3. When referring to the internal HDD, select 2 and press OK.
Preparation
There is no need to newly prepare for saving data to the HDD of the machine.
Overall flow
Here is a procedure for Importing data of the HDD of the machine.
Procedure
1. Select internal HDD as save destination (LIST=2)
3. Import from the internal HDD
Import from the internal HDD

1. Log in to service mode and press RESTORE.
F-2-77
4. The names of .dcm files referred to in the internal HDD are displayed.
F-2-75
2. Select LIST after the screen moves to <RESTORE>.
F-2-78
F-2-76
2-57
5. Select PASSWD.
2-58
7. When the correct file is displayed, press ->.
F-2-79
6. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected.
F-2-81
Note:
" *" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected in
SELECT.
HDD : Up to 2 files are displayed in a screen.
F-2-80
F-2-82
2-58
2-59
Press <-.
OK
F-2-83
Note:
F-2-85

"<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has
been confirmed.
"***" is displayed after the password is entered.
9. After registering the password, select RESTORE. Press OK to execute import.
F-2-84
2-59
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Overview
Laser Exposure System
2-60
<Bk>
Overview
DC Controller PCB
Video signal
Overview
Control signal
Laser Interface PCB
In this machine, it is unnecessary to input correction values for laser magnification and laser
phase among laser scanner units, which needed to be adjusted at the time of replacement of
the laser scanner units in the conventional method.
Laser Driver
PCB
BD Signal
exposed in eight lines in one scanning operation.
Laser Drive Signal
To realize high productivity, eight laser beams are provided by the unit, and simultaneously
Scanner Motor Drive Signal
This machine has four laser scanner units at the upper side of each color station.
Laser A
Laser B
Laser G
Laser H
Cylindrical Lens
Imaging Lens
Reflection Mirror
BD Reflection Mirror
Reflection Mirror
Reflection
Mirror
Imaging Lens
Polygon Mirror
Laser Scanner Motor
BD PCB
La
se
La
se
La r B
se
rA
rH
Photosensitive Drum
F-2-86
2-60
2-61
<CL>
On this machine, the laser is emitted to the image part on the Drum that is negatively charged.
Image area
Non-image area
Non-image area
DC Controller PCB
Video signal
Control signal
Laser Driver
PCB
BD Signal
aser Drive Signal
Scanner Motor Drive Signal
Laser Interface PCB
Laser A
Laser B
Laser G
Laser H
Laser ON
Enlarged view
F-2-88
Cylindrical Lens
Imaging Lens
Reflection Mirror
Polygon
Mirror
Tilt Correction
Lens
Laser Scanner Motor
BD PCB
La
se
La
se
La r B
se
rA
rH
Photosensitive Drum
F-2-87
2-61
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-62
Specifications
Parts Configuration
Item
Wave length
Laser type
Laser output
Number of laser beams
Laser team
Resolution
Scanner motor
Type
Number of rotations
Number of scanner mirror (polygon)

surfaces
Laser ON timing
control
Laser beam intensity
control
Controls
Image position
correction control
Others
Description
Overall Configuration
670nm
Red color laser
7mW
8 beams
1200dpi
Brushless motor
iR-ADV C9xxx Series: Approx. 22700rpm
iR-ADV C7xxx Series: Approx. 19800rpm
5
<Bk>
Laser Driver PCB
Cylindrical Lens
Imaging Lens
Reflection Mirror
Laser ON/OFF control

Main scanning synchronization control
Sub scanning synchronization control
APC control
PWM control
Correction of write start position in horizontal scanning
direction (To be explained in Image Formation.)
Correction of write start position in vertical scanning
direction (To be explained in Image Formation.)
Skew correction in horizontal scanning direction
Correction of magnification in horizontal scanning direction
(To be explained in Image Formation.)
Correction of magnification in vertical scanning direction (To
be explained in Image Formation.)
Duplex print magnification correction
Laser scanner motor control
Polygon Mirror
Laser Scanner Motor
BD PCB
F-2-89
Laser shutter control

T-2-24
Reflection Mirror
Imaging Lens
Reflection Mirror
F-2-90
2-62
2-63
<CL>
Laser Driver PCB
Cylindrical Lens
Imaging Lens
Reflection Mirror
Polygon Mirror
Laser Scanner Motor
Tilt Correction Lens
Tilt Correction Motor
BD PCB
F-2-91
Name
Role
Laser driver
Polygonal mirror
Reflection mirror
Correction lens
Tilt correction motor
BD PCB
BD reflection mirror
Output a laser beam.

Perform scanning with a laser beam in the main scanning direction.
Reflect a laser team to the drum.
Correct a main-scanning tilt of the laser beam coming from the folding mirror.
Correct a main-scanning tilt by moving the correction lens.
Detect a laser beam as a BD signal.
Reflect a laser beam in the direction of the BD detection PCB.
T-2-25
2-63
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser ON Timing Control
2-64
Controls
Laser ON Timing Control

Laser ON/OFF Control
Overview
This control is performed to turn ON/OFF a laser beam according to the combination of laser
control signals.
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Scanner Unit
Laser Mirror
Control signal
Laser ON/OFF Control

Laser
Interface
PCB
Laser Driver PCB

Horizontal scanning synchronous
Control
Laser
Driver
PCB
Video signal
Laser Beam
Vertical Scanning synchronous

Control
APC Control
<Timing of Execution>
Main Controller
PCB 2
PWM Control
Scanner Motor Unit
<Details of the Control>
Skew correction control in horizontal

scanning direction
The DC controller switches the mode among four modes (Forcible OFF mode, APC mode,
Print mode, Standby mode) according to the laser control signal.
Duplex print magnification

correction Control
Mode
Forcible OFF
APC
Print mode
Standby mode
Laser Scanner Motor Control

Laser Shutter Control
Purpose/Description
Turn ON/OFF a laser beam according to the combination of

laser control signals.
Main scanning
Performed to adjust the writing position in the main scanning
synchronization control direction.
Sub scanning
Performed to adjust the writing position in the sub scanning
synchronization control direction.
APC control
Performed to keep a specified level of laser beam for each line.
Laser
beam
intensity
PWM control
control
Skew correction control in horizontal
scanning direction
control
Laser scanner motor control
Laser shutter control
PSTBY
Image formation
ready timing
PINTR
PRINT
LSTR
PSTBY
BD
A Laser
B Laser
C Laser
Determine the laser ON time and the image density according

to the image data.
Based on the skew level, lens is shifted and laser light path is
corrected.
By adding image data, magnification of 1st and 2nd sides is
corrected.
Performed to rotate the scanner mirror at a specified speed.
Prevent irradiation of a laser beam in the machine.
T-2-26
Remarks
Clear the laser beam intensity setting determined by APC.
Adjust the laser beam intensity.
Irradiate a laser beam according to the video signal.
The main unit is placed in the standby status.
T-2-27
Laser ON/OFF control

Laser ON
timing
control
Laser status
OFF
ON
OFF/ON
OFF
Print
instruction
F-2-92
tem
F-2-93
After the power is turned ON
H Laser
Mode name Standby
mode
APC
mode
APC mode/PRINT mode
Forcible
Standby
OFF
mode
mode
F-2-94
2-64
2-65
Main Scanning Synchronization Control
Standard BD
This control is performed to adjust the writing position in the main scanning direction.
Laser A
Timing of Execution
For every eight lines
Details of the Control
1) The laser phase coefficient in the ROM on the laser driver is sent to the video PCB.
Laser B
2) The video PCB forcibly irradiates the laser diode of Laser H in the laser driver PCB by
setting the Laser H laser control signal to APC mode.
3) The Laser H laser beam irradiates into the BD PCB, which is mounted in the scanning light
path.
4) The BD PCB detects the Laser H laser beam, creates a standard BD signal, and sends it to
Laser C
Laser H
the video PCB.

5) The video PCB creates a main scanning synchronization signal for every eight lines based
on the laser phase coefficient and the standard BD signal.
T
F-2-96
6) The video signal sent from the main controller is output to the laser driver PCB according to
the main scanning synchronization signal.
PBD signal
Main
Controller
PCB 2
Video signal
ASIC
Horizontal
scanning
synchronous
signal
generation
assembly
Horizontal
scanning
synchronous
signal
(T)
Laser Interface
PCB
BD signal
Laser
phase
coefficient
BD PCB
E2PROM
Laser H
Laser G
Video signal
Scanner Mirror
Laser
Driver
PCB
Laser B
Laser A
F-2-95
2-65
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Beam Intensity Control
Laser Beam Intensity Control
Sub Scanning Synchronization Control

This control is performed to adjust the writing position in the sub scanning direction.
APC (Auto Power Control) Control
This control is performed to keep laser beam intensity at every 8 beams (every 1BD) at a
For every printing operation
specified level.

Synchronization control in the sub scanning direction is performed based on the PTOP
signal (image formation start signal).
When the machine is ready to form an image, a PTOP signal (image formation start signal)
is created. Based on this signal, each color laser beam is turned on at the delayed timing of
drum interval.
PSTBY
Laser Scanner
Motor (Y,M,C,Bk)
PINTR
PRINT
Every 8 beams (every 1BD)
1) The video PCB outputs a laser control signal to the laser driver IC in the laser driver PCB.
2) The APC mode is set for the laser driver IC, and laser diodes (LD1 to LD8) are emitted
forcibly and sequentially. The laser driver IC also monitors the laser diodes (LD1 to LD8) by
Image formation
ready timing
Print request signal

(Start Key ON)
2-66
the photo diode (PD) at the same time, and adjusts the output of the laser diodes until they
reach a specified level of intensity.
LSTR
Laser Driver PCB
PSTBY
Interval to stabilize
the rotation*1
PTOP signal
Y-TOP signal
PD
Laser Y is ON
LD1
LD2
LD3
LD4
Laser Driver IC
Laser Control
Signal
Laser Interface PCB
LD5
LD6
LD7
LD8
M-TOP signal
Laser M is ON
C-TOP signal
Laser C is ON
Bk-TOP signal
F-2-98
Laser Bk is ON
F-2-97
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Beam Intensity Control
2-66
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Skew correction in horizontal scanning direction
2-67
Skew correction in horizontal scanning direction
PWM Control
This control is performed to determine the laser ON time and the image density according to
the image data.
Based on Bk laser, skew of color laser irradiation is prevented.

<Execution timing >

The laser ON time is selected by the video PCB. One pattern is selected from 16-level
patterns for each pixel.
At the time of recovery from a jam (Fixing temperature at lower than 100 degree C
Paper interval / last rotation (at the time of automatic adjustment when the accumulated
sheet count reached 1000 or more since the last image position adjustment)
100%
<Description of control >

1) DC Controller Interface PCB forms the patch pattern on ITB.
Low
2) DC Controller Interface PCB reads this patch pattern using Patch Sensor and detects the
Image Density
High
degree of skew based on Bk.

3) Based on the foregoing detection result, Skew Correction Motor is driven and Skew
Correction Lens is shifted, so that irradiation angle is corrected.
Laser Lighting Time (t)

Short
Long
F-2-99
NOTE: Relationship between the laser ON time and the density

In this machine, a laser beam irradiates to an image section (dark section), but does not
irradiate to a non-image section (bright section).
When the image density is increased, the laser ON time is increased. On the other
hand, when the image density is decreased, the laser ON time is shortened.
Tilt Correction
Motor
Tilt Correction
Lens
Cam
F-2-100
Related service mode

COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER>LD-ADJ-Y/M/C: Adjusting initial position of Skew Correction
Motor
Related alarm code
34-0004: When the correction count value of Skew Correction Motor exceeds specific
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Skew correction in horizontal scanning direction
2-67
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Duplex print magnification correction
2-68
Vertical scanning direction:
Magnification difference between 1st and 2nd sides due to the different amount of paper
shrinkage between 1st and 2nd sides is corrected.
As for the duplex print, when the paper passes through the fixing assembly after the image
formation on the 1st side, it is shrunk temporarily. After the image is formed on the 2nd side
Rotation speed of Scanner Motor is accelerated to shrink the image.

Since magnification in horizontal scanning direction is changed to be increased,
accommodate magnification by shrinking the image with image data skipping in horizontal
scanning direction.
and the paper is ejected from the main body, the 2nd side image is enlarged when the paper
<Laser Lighting>
size is returned. That is, the image size of the 2nd side becomes larger than the 1st side, so
the magnification mismatch occurs.
Horizontal scanning
Without Correction
Execution timing
When forming the image on the 2nd side at duplex print
Description of control
With Correction
Considering the paper shrinkage level, conduct the following control for the 2nd side image
formation.
Vertical scanning
Horizontal scanning direction:

By skipping the image data pixel, image in horizontal scanning direction is shrunk.
When enlarging the image, enlarge it in horizontal scanning direction by adding image data.
<Laser Lighting>
Horizontal scanning
<Scanner Motor Swing Speed>
Without Correction
<Constant Speed>
With Correction
<Speed Up>
L
Vertical scanning
L > L
>
:Exposure
F-2-102
F-2-101
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Duplex print magnification correction
2-68
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Scanner Motor Control
When magnification is corrected, changing the Scanner Motor speed between sheets might
be slower depending on the speed, so productivity might be reduced.
2-69
Laser Scanner Motor Control
This control is performed to rotate the scanner mirror at a specified speed.
Variable Reproduction = Polygon Speed Reshuffling

Paper
Communi
-cation
Variable Speed
Time
At the time of power-on/start-up
Speed convergence
Time
Paper
1) The motor speed control unit in the DC controller PCB forcibly rotates the motor.
2) When a speed detection signal (FG, BD) is detected, the unit compares it with the standard
signal created by the standard signal creation unit, and controls the acceleration signal
Paper Interval Time
(ACC) and deceleration signal (DEC) to keep a specified speed.
F-2-103
Variable speed Wide

-0.3%
-0.6%
-1.0%
PPM
75ppm
70ppm
65ppm
55ppm
88%
88%
85%
94%
94%
91%
91%
91%
89%
100%
100%
100%
* In the actual use, it is assumed that changing speed over 0.6% is rarely seen.
T-2-28

COPIER>OPTION>DSPLY-SW>IMGC-ADJ: Image adjustment-related items in Settings/
Registration are displayed/not displayed.
Related Settings/Registration mode
Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Type Management Settings
FG
ACC
DEC
Laser Scanner Motor
>Details/Edit > Adjust Image position > Fine Adjust Zoom
Laser Interface PCB
BD PCB
BD
F-2-105
Related Error Code

E100: Failure to detect PLOCK signal during BD rotation
E110: Failure to detect VLOCK signal during FG rotation
F-2-104
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Scanner Motor Control
2-69
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Shutter Control
2-70
Laser Shutter Control

This control is performed to prevent irradiation of a laser beam in the machine.
At the time of power-on/startup
When the front cover is opened, the DC controller stops power supply and an output signal
from the laser driver. This prevents irradiation of a laser beam.
DC5V
Laser Driver PCB
Laser Interface
PCB
DC/DC
DC Power Supply
PCB (12V)
SW1
Front Door Switch 1
SW2
Front Door Switch 2
DC12V
DC Power
Supply Unit
F-2-106
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Shutter Control
2-70
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Servicing > Major Adjustments
2-71
Servicing
When Replacing Parts

Actions Bfor Parts Replacement
Periodically Replaced Parts

None
Consumable Parts
No.
Parts name
Laser Scanner Unit
T-2-30
Actions after Parts Replacement
None
No.
Periodical Servicing List

Parts name
Dust-proof glass
Qty
4
When replacing parts

1) Execute initial position adjustment of Skew Correction Motor.
(COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER>LD-ADJ-Y/M/C)
Cleaning interval
150K
Parts name
Laser Scanner Unit
Remarks
<YMK> Use the cleaning tool for Dust-proof Glass
equipped inside the machine.
<Bk> Use lint-free paper to clean.
Be sure to replace the Dustproof Glass Cleaning
Pad (FL2-4425) when itis soiled.
<Bk>

1) Execute color displacement correction (Settings/Registration >
Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Correct
Color Mismatch).
T-2-31
Major Adjustments
N/A
T-2-29
<CL>
Cleaning hole
Dust-Prevention Glass
Dust -Prevention Glass Cleaning Tool

F-2-107
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Servicing > Major Adjustments
2-71
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications
2-72
Image Formation System
Specifications
Specifications
Overview
Basic Specification
Item
Overview
For the image formation system, this machine uses "four OPC drums (four FLAT4 engines),
fully utilizing conventional color MFP technologies" and "intermediate transfer method".
The machine performs the primary transfer attachment and detachment method, in which
YMC primary transfer rollers are disengaged at Bk single-color mode to prolong the life of the
image formation unit, detects the drum rotation speed, and executes automatic cleaning of
the primary grid plate (Bk) for image stabilization.
For the color process unit, separated process units (the developing assembly and the drum
unit) are introduced to realize high-level durability suitable for a light production machine.
Process Unit (Bk)
Process Unit (Y)
Developing Assembly
Laser
Process Unit (M)

Drum Unit
Laser
ITB Cleaning Unit
Process Unit (C)
Laser
Laser
Patch Sensor
Unit
ITB Unit
ITB
Primary Transfer Roller
Paper
Process unit Configuration

(Bk)
Photosensitive Material
drum
Drum diameter
Cleaning
Process speed
Developing
Developing method
assembly
Toner
Developing cylinder
diameter
Toner density
detection
Primary
Charging method
charging
Cleaning
process
unit(CL)
Function/Method
Drum unit (drum, charging assembly, cleaner) +
Developing assembly
OPC
84
Drum Cleaning Blade
Refer to page 2-73
Dry, 2-component toner projection
Nonmagnetic negative toner
20
Provided (Magnetic sensor)
Indirect corona charging (1 wire + grid plate)

Provided (Cleaning pad)
Cleaning is performed to both of the wire and the
grid plate.
Configuration
P-CRG as a unit (The developing assembly and
the drum unit can be separated.)
Options
Drum heater (Service Parts)
Photosensitive Material
OPC
drum
Drum diameter
30.6
Cleaning
Cleaning blade
Process speed
Refer to page 2-73
Developing
Developing method Dry, 2-component toner projection
assembly
Toner
Nonmagnetic negative toner
Cylinder diameter 20
Toner density
Provided (Magnetic sensor)
detection
Primary
Charging method
Direct roller charging (14)
charging
Cleaning
Provided (Brush roller)
F-2-108
2-72
Item
ITB unit
Others
Waste toner
container
Process Speed
Function/Method
Transfer method
ITB
Material
Circumferential
length/width
Cleaning
Belt displacement
correction
Primary
Transfer method
transfer
Disengagement
mechanism
Patch sensor
Secondary
Transfer method
transfer
Cleaning
assembly
Disengagement
mechanism
Separation method
Process unit presence detection
Process unit old/new detection
Process unit life detection
Toner
container
2-73
Intermediate transfer (ITB)

PI (polyimide), Seamless
1148.3 mm / 360 mm
JP
Model A
Model B
iR-ADV C9280 PRO
Model C
iR-ADV C9270 PRO/

C7270
USA
iR-ADV C9280 PRO iR-ADV C9270 PRO
iR-ADV C7270
EU
iR-ADV C9280 PRO/
iR-ADV C7270i
C2180i
CA
iR-ADV C9280PRO iR-ADV C9270 PRO/
C7270
ASIA
iR-ADV C9280 PRO
iR-ADV C7270
CCN/TW iR-ADV C9280 PRO iR-ADV C9270 PRO
KR
iR-ADV C9280 PRO
iR-ADV C7270
-
Cleaning blade
Provided (Light reception sensor)
Transfer roller (Sponge roller/16)
Provided (Color only)
Provided
Roller (Sponge roller/24.3)
Static electricity cleaning method
Provided
Model D
iR-ADV C7260
iR-ADV C7260
iR-ADV C7260i
iR-ADV C7260
iR-ADV C7260
iR-ADV C7260
T-2-33
"Curvature separation + Static eliminator" method

Not provided
Not provided
Not provided (Life (total charging time) can be
checked in Service Mode)
Container presence Not provided
detection
Old/new detection Not provided
Toner level
Not provided
detection
Capacity
Equivalent to 50,000 images in A4/4-color/5%
image printing
Full level detection Provided
T-2-32
2-73
1/1 speed
1/2 speed
1/3 speed
Thin paper (52 to 63g/m )

Plain paper 1(64 to 90g/m2)
Plain paper 2(91 to 105g/m2)
Recycled paper 1(64 to 90g/m2)
Recycled paper 2(91 to 105g/m2)
Color paper (64 to 90g/m2)
Tracing paper
bond paper
Pre-punched paper
Heavy paper 1(106 to 150g/m2)
Texture paper 1(106 to 150g/m2)
Transparency
Labels
Tab paper 1
Tab paper 2
Postcard
Letter head
Envelope
1-sided coated paper 1(106 to 180g/m2)*
2-sided coated paper 1(106 to 180g/m2)*
1-sided coated paper 2(181 to 220g/m2)
Model A
Model B/C/D
Charging Specifications
Process Unit (Bk)
321mm/sec
280mm/sec
Pre-primary Transfer
Charging High Voltage
PCB (Bk) (UN50)
160mm/sec
140mm/sec
Developing Assembly Inner

Temperature Detection PCB
(C/Bk) (UN15)
DC Controller Interface PCB (UN2)

Relative Humidity / Absolute Moisture Amount
Drum Total Charging Time
Process Speed
Paper Type
Primary Charging
High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN37)
Developing
Developing Toner
Collection
High Voltage PCB
(Bk) (UN51)
Environment Sensor (ENV1)
Primary
Charging Wire
DC Minus
Paper type
2-74
DC Minus
Speed
AC+DC Minus
Primary
Grid Wire
107mm/sec
DC Minus
93mm/sec
93mm/sec
(1/3 speed
slow)
Developing Cylinder
AC+DC Minus
Toner Collection Roller
Pre-Primary Trans Charge Wire
F-2-109
T-2-34
* In Settings/Registration (Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Coated
Productivity/Image Quality Priority), the speed can be changed to 1/2 speed. (It is required
to set the following: COPIER > OPTION > FUC-SW > CKT-LANG: "1".)
2-74
Grid bias
Developing
bias
Toner
collection roller
Primary pretransfer
charging bias
Charging method
Indirect corona charging
DC component rated voltage use range -600 to -1000 A
Absolute water volume (ENV1), Total drum
DC component voltage correction factor
charging time, Process speed
DC component rated voltage use range -500 to -1000 V (Potential control (Bk))
Absolute water volume (ENV1), Process
speed
1600 Vpp (Model A) , 1400 Vpp (Model
AC component standard value
B,C.D)
DC component rated voltage use range -200 to -800 V
Relative humidity (UN15), Total drum
charging time, Charging DC bias
-1300 V (Fixed)
DC component rated voltage use range
Charging method
Corona discharge
5500 Vpp (fixed)
DC component rated voltage use range 0 to -600 A (Constant current)
Absolute water volume (ENV1), Relative
humidity (UN15), Paper type
Primary Charging
High Voltage PCB (Color) (UN38)
AC+DC Minus
Charging Roller
DC Minus
Developing Toner
Collection
High Voltage PCB
(Y) (UN52)
Charging Roller
DC Minus
Developing Toner
Collection
High Voltage PCB
(M) (UN53)
Charging Roller
DC Minus
Developing Toner
Collection
High Voltage PCB
(C) (UN54)
AC+DC Minus
Primary
charging bias
Color Process Unit
Specifications
AC+DC Minus
Item
2-75
AC+DC Minus
Developing High Voltage PCB (CL) (UN40)
T-2-35

Process Speed
Environment Sensor
(ENV1)
Developing Assembly
Inner Temperature
Detection PCB (Y/M)
(C/Bk) (UN14/UN15)
F-2-110
Item
Charging bias Charging method
AC component voltage correction factor

Developing
bias

Toner
collection
sheet bias
Specifications
Direct roller charging
1300 to 2500 Vpp (Discharged current
control)
Absolute water volume (ENV1), Total drum
charging time, Process speed, Machine
Inner Temperature
0 to -1000 V
speed, Machine Inner Temperature
1600 Vpp (Model A) , 1400 Vpp (Model
B,C,D)
-200 to -800V
Relative humidity (UN14/UN15), Total
drum charging time, Charging DC bias
-1300V (Fixed)
T-2-36
2-75
2-76
Transfer Assembly
Item

Process Speed
Potential of Drum Edge
Paper Type
Developing Assembly Inner Temperature

Detection PCB (Y/M) (C/Bk) (UN14/UN15)
Primary
transfer bias
Primary Transfer PCB (UN43)

DC Plus
DC Plus
DC Plus
DC Minus/DC Plus
Secondary
transfer
external roller
cleaning bias
Secondary
transfer bias
ITB Unit
Secondary
post-transfer
static
eliminator bias
Specifications
Transfer method
Roller transfer
Target of transfer
Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)
DC component rated voltage use range 0 to 5000 V (YMC), -1000 to 5000 V (Bk)
Absolute water volume (ENV1), Relative
DC component voltage correction factor humidity (UN14/UN15), Process speed,
Drum dark section potential (Vd)
DC component rated voltage use range -40 to 0 A (Constant current)
DC component voltage correction factor speed
Transfer method
Roller transfer
Target of transfer
Paper (Transfer material)
DC component rated voltage use range 0 to 7000 V
speed, Paper type
DC component rated voltage use range 0 to -4000 V
Absolute water volume (ENV1), Paper
DC component voltage correction factor type
T-2-37
DC Minus
Post-secondary Transfer Static
Elimination High Voltage PCB (UN49)
DCMinus/DC Plus
Secondary Transfer
High Voltage PCB (UN48)
Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5)
F-2-111
2-76
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-77
Parts Configuration
Process Unit (Bk)

Primary
Potential
Charging Assembly
Sensor Encoder
Primary
Developing Blade
Grid Plate
Charging Wire
Overall Configuration
Toner Container (M) Toner Container (C)
Toner Supply Unit (M)
Toner Container (Y)
Toner Supply Unit (Y)
Process Unit (M) Toner Supply Unit (C)
Toner Container (Bk)

Process Unit (C)
Developing Assembly
Toner Supply Unit (Bk)

Process Unit (Bk)
Collection Toner
Feed Assembly
Drum Cleaning Unit

Drum Cleaning Blade
Toner Stirring Screw

Toner Density Sensor
Photosensitive
Drum
Process Unit (Y)
ITB Unit
Laser
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly

Drum Cleaning Brush

Roller
Cleaning Pre-Exposure
LED
Patch Sensor Unit
Primary Charging
Shutter Unit
Secondary Transfer
External Roller
Pre-transfer Charging
Shutter Unit
Waste Toner Container
Potential
Drum Thermistor Sensor Encoder
Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk)1
Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk)2
Drum Thermopile
F-2-112
Encoder
F-2-113
2-77
2-78
Process Unit (CL
Toner Supply Assembly
Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y/M) / (C/Bk)

Drum Unit
Developing Blade
Developing Assembly
Cleaning Roller
Toner Cap Open

/ Close Assembly
Developing Cylinder
Laser
Hopper Unit
Toner Container
Charging Roller
Toner
Feed Screw
Drum Cleaning Unit

Toner Stirring
Screw
Hopper
Drum Cleaning Blade
Toner Density
Sensor
Photosensitive
Drum
Cleaning
Pre-Exposure LED
Light Guide
Toner Collection Sheet
Scoop-Up Sheet
Toner Supply
Pipe Unit
Hopper
Toner
Feed Screw
Toner
Supply Screw
Toner Supply
Pipe Unit
F-2-116
Waste Toner Feed Screw
Drum Heater(Y) / (M)
Transfer Assembly
F-2-114
Primary Transfer Auxiliary Left Roller

ITB Cleaning Blade
Primary Transfer Auxiliary Right Roller

Primary Transfer Roller (Y)
Primary Transfer Roller (C)
Primary Transfer Roller (Bk)
Primary Transfer Roller (M)
Patch Sensor Unit
Patch Sensor
Opposing Roller
ITB Unit
Toner Feed Screw

ITB Drive Roller
Steering Roller
ITB
Secondary Transfer Inner Roller

Pre-Secondary Transfer Idler Roller
Post-Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator
Secondary Transfer External Roller
F-2-115
2-78
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-79
Drive Configuration
Waste Toner Feed Assembly

Front view
Process
ITB Cleaning Unit Unit (Y)
Process
Unit (Bk)
Process Process
Unit (M) Unit (C)
Side view
Process Unit (Bk)
Drum Cleaning Unit

M29
M18
M1
M30
TS1
Toner Stirring Wire

Waste Toner
Feed Screw

ITB Unit
M2
Waste Toner
Waste
Toner
F-2-117
UN18
M19
UN19
F-2-118
Code
Name
Role
M1
Drive the primary charging wire/grid plate

Primary charging wire cleaning motor
cleaning pad.
M2
Primary pre-transfer charging wire cleaning Drive the primary pre-transfer charging wire
motor
cleaning pad.
M18
Developing sleeve drive motor (Bk)
Drive the developing sleeve.
M19
Drum motor (Bk)
Drive the drum.
M29
Developing stirring motor (Bk)
Drive the toner stirring screw.
M30
Drive the drum cleaning fur brush and the
Drum cleaning/water toner feed drive motor
waste toner screw.
UN18 Drum speed detection PCB (Bk) 1
Detect the drum rotation speed.
UN19 Drum speed detection PCB (Bk) 2
T-2-38
<Related Error Codes>

E012: error in drum/ITB drive motor
E021: error in developing sleeve drive motor
E022: error in drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive motor
E023: error in developing stirring motor
2-79
2-80
Process Unit (CL)
Transfer Assembly
M5
M24
M22
M20
UN17
UN21 / UN23 / UN25
UN16
PS3
H2
PS4
H3
PS5
M3
SL1
PS2
M4
PS21
TS2 / TS3 / TS4
M31
F-2-120
Code
M26
M21
UN20 / UN22 / UN24
M27
M23
M28
M3
M4
M5
M25
F-2-119
Code
Parts name
M20/M22/M24
M21/M23/M25
M26/M27M28
Developing sleeve drive motor (Y)/(M)/(C)

Drum motor (Y)/(M)/(C)
Developing stirring motor (Y)/(M)/(C)
Developing assembly inner temperature
UN14/UN15
detection PCB (Y/M)/(C/Bk)
UN20/UN22/UN24 Drum speed detection PCB (Y)/(M)/(C) 1
UN21/UN23/UN25 Drum speed detection PCB (Y)/(M)/(C) 2
Role
Drive the developing sleeve.
Drive the drum.
Detect the temperature in the
developing assembly.
T-2-39

E021: error in developing sleeve drive motor
E023: error in developing stirring motor
Parts name
ITB drive motor
Steering drive motor
Primary Transfer Roller Detachment Motor
M31
Secondary Transfer Roller Detachment

Motor
PS2
ITB displacement sensor
PS3
Stirring drive HP sensor
PS4
Primary transfer roller attachment/
detachment HP sensor
PS5
ITB HP sensor
SL1
Patch shutter open/close solenoid
UN16 ITB drive roller speed detection A
UN17 ITB drive roller speed detection B
H2
Drum heater (Y/M)
H3
Drum heater (M/C)
Role
Drive the ITB drive roller.
Move the steering roller.
Engage/disengage the primary transfer roller
(Y/M/C).
Engage/disengage the secondary transfer
external roller.
Detect the position of the ITB belt.
Detect the position of the steering roller.
Detect the home position of the primary
transfer roller.
HP sensor of the ITB
Open/close the patch shutter.
Detect the rotation speed of the ITB
Detect the rotation speed of the ITB
Heat the drum (Y) and the drum (M).
Heat the drum (M) and the drum (C).
T-2-40

E074: Primary transfer roller detachment/attachment error
E075: error in ITB displacement control
E077: Secondary transfer external roller detachment/attachment error
2-80
2-81

Process
Unit (Bk)
PS81/PS82
/PS83/PS84
Process
ITB Cleaning Unit Unit (Y)
Process
Unit (M)
Drum Cleaning Unit
Process
Unit (C)
M7
M10
M6
M13
M9
M16
M12
Toner Stirring Wire

M30
M15
PS8/PS11
/PS14/PS17
PS9/PS12
/PS15/PS18
TS5/TS6
/TS7/TS8
TS9
F-2-121
Code
ITB Unit
Parts name
Hopper/stirring supply motor (Y)/(M)/

M6/M9/M12/M15
(C)/(Bk)
Toner container drive motor (Y)/(M)/
M7/M10/M13/M16
(C)/(Bk)
M8/M11/M14/M17
Wiper rotation motor (Y)/(M)/(C)/(Bk)
Hopper toner level sensor (Y)/(M)/
TS6/TS7/TS8/TS9
(C)/(Bk)
Release holder shift cam HP sensor
PS8/PS11/PS14/PS17
(Y)/(M)/(C)/(Bk)
Screw rotation sensor (Y)/(M)/(C)/
PS9/PS12/PS15/PS18
(Bk)
Release holder shift cam phase
PS81/PS82/PS83/PS84
sensor (Y)/(M)/(C)/(Bk)
Role
Waste Toner
Drive the toner supply drive unit.
Waste
Toner
Drive the wiper.

Detect the toner level in the hopper.
F-2-122
Code
Parts name
Detect the home position of the

release holder shift cam.
M30
Drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive motor
Drive the toner feed screw.
TS9
Waste toner full level sensor
Detect the release holder shift cam

phase.
T-2-41
Role
Drive the drum cleaning fur brush and the
waste toner feed screw.
Detect the waste toner container full level.
T-2-42

E013-0001: error in waste toner full level

E025-0x00: Toner container drive motor lock error
E025-0x02: Block supply timeout error
E025-0x10: Toner container sealing/release holder shift cam HP sensor timeout error
E025-0x20: Toner container/toner container inserting inlet phase error
2-81
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Printing Process
2-82
Printing Process
Static electricity
formation block
1
Developing block
3
Transfer block
7
Fixing block
ITB cleaning block
Drum cleaning block

10
11
1. Electrostatic latent image

formation Block
Charge the photosensitive drum surface with a uniform

negative potential. The process unit (Y/M/C) uses
the direct charging roller method, in which charges
Primary
are directly applied from the charging roller to the
charging
photosensitive drum. The process unit (Bk) uses the
primary charging method, in which charges are indirectly
applied from the charging wire.
Form a latent image on the photosensitive drum
surface by irradiating a laser beam. When a laser beam
Laser exposure irradiates to the negatively charged photosensitive drum
surface, the negative potential in the irradiated area is
neutralized.
Attach negatively charged toner to the static latent image
on the photosensitive drum surface from the developing
Development
cylinder by dry 2-component toner projection so that it
becomes visualized.
Primary preCharge the toner on the photosensitive drum with a
transfer charging uniform potential.
(Bk)
Apply a positive potential to the primary transfer roller,
Primary transfer and transfer the toner on the photosensitive drum to the
ITB.
Apply a positive charge to the secondary transfer
Secondary
external roller, and transfer the toner on the ITB to the
transfer
paper.
Separate the paper from the ITB by curvature separation.
Application of a negative charge to the static eliminator
Separation
according to the paper type makes it easier to separate
paper from the ITB.
Melt and adhere the toner on paper to the paper by heat
Fixing
and pressure.
Remove the residual toner on the ITB by the cleaning
ITB cleaning
blade.
Remove the drum charging memory on the
Drum cleaning photosensitive drum surface by irradiating light from the
pre-exposure
drum cleaning pre-exposure LED to prevent dirt on the
photosensitive drum.
Remove the residual toner on the photosensitive drum
Drum cleaning
by the cleaning blade
6. Photosensitive drum
cleaning Block
1. Primary Charging
1. Primary Charging
2. Laser exposure
2. Laser exposure
2.Development Block
5. ITB Cleaning Block
11. Drum cleaning
3. Development
11. Drum cleaning
3. Development
4. Primary Transfer Pre-Charging
10. Drum cleaning Pre-exposure
Y
Photosensitive drum
M
Photosensitive drum
C
Photosensitive drum
10. Drum cleaning Pre-exposure

Bk
Photosensitive drum
5. Primary Transfer
5. Primary Transfer
5. Primary Transfer
5. Primary Transfer
9. ITB Cleaning
ITB
3. Delivery Block
Delivery
4. Fixing Block
8. Fixing
6. Secondary
transfer
7. Separation
Registration
Pickup
Rotation of Photosensitive drum/ITB

Flow of paper
F-2-123
T-2-43
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Printing Process
2-82
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Overview
2-83
Controls
Control Name
Primary charging
Overview
Developing bias control
ACR control
Toner Collection Roller bias control
Toner Collection Roller drive control
Toner Container open/close control
Toner supply control/toner level detection
Primary Charging Wire bias control (CL)
Primary Charging Wire Roller cleaning control
Drum cleaning pre-exposure
Drum cleaning control
Developing bias control
ACR control
Toner Collection Sheet bias control
Drum rotation speed control
Drum Heater control*
Primary transfer bias control
Primary Transfer Roller detachment control
Secondary transfer bias control
Post-secondary transfer static Elimination bias control
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller detachment control
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller cleaning control
ITB cleaning control
ITB displacement correction control
ITB speed control
Separation
Primary Charging Wire bias control (Bk)

Primary Charging Wire cleaning control
Toner Container open/close control
Toner supply control/toner level detection
Drum cleaning pre-exposure
CL
Description
Controls to apply the negative charge to Primary Charging

Wire and Grid Plate.
Controls to apply the negative charge to Primary Charging
Roller.
Controls to clean Primary Charging Wire and Grid Plate.
Controls to clean Primary Charging Wire Roller.
Developing
Drum rotation speed control

Drum Heater control
Pre-primary Transfer Charging
bias control
Wire cleaning control
Waste toner delivery control
Waste Toner Container full detection
Automatic control
D-max Pascal control
Potential control (Bk)
D-max control
D-half control
ARCDAT control
Pascal control
Discharge current control
ATR control (supply control)
Image position correction
Primary transfer ATVC
Secondary transfer ATVC
Patch Sensor adjustment
Drum idle rotation
Black band sequence
Black band sequence when using
Transparency
Toner ejection sequence at low duty
Primary Charging Wire cleaning
* The Drum Heater is located in the ITB Unit.
Primary Charging Wire

bias control (Bk)
bias control (CL)
cleaning control
Roller cleaning control
Bk
F-2-124
Developing bias control Common Controls to apply the negative charge to Developing Cylinder
in order to deposit toner on the Developing Cylinder to the
surface of Photosensitive Drum.
Controls to apply the negative charge to Toner Collection

bias control
Roller.
Controls to apply the negative charge to Toner Collection
bias control
Sheet.
ACR control
Common Controls to maintain the ratio (T/D ratio) of toner and carrier
in Developing Assembly.

Charging bias control
Charging Wire cleaning
control
Controls to charge the toner to negative evenly in order to

improve the stability of transfer.
Controls to clean Pre-primary Transfer Charging Wire.
Drum cleaning
Drum cleaning preexposure
Controls to emit Pre-exposure LED in order to remove the

drum memory on the surface of Photosensitive Drum.
Controls to remove the residual toner on Photosensitive
Drum.
Others
Drum rotation speed
control
Drum Heater control
Common Controls to maintain the constant rotation speed in order to

set the same drum rotation speed for each color.
Controls to activate Drum Heater (ON/OFF) according to the

environment.
2-83
Control Name
Transfer
Bk

disengagement control
CL
Description
Controls to apply the positive charge to Primary Transfer
Roller in order to transfer the toner on Photosensitive Drum to
ITB.
Controls to disengage Primary Transfer Roller.
Controls to apply the positive charge to Secondary Transfer

Outer Roller in order to transfer the toner on ITB to the paper.
Post-secondary transfer static
Controls to apply the negative charge to Static Eliminator in
Elimination bias control
order to easily separate the paper from ITB.
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
Controls to engage/disengage Secondary Transfer Outer
Roller to/from ITB.
Controls to remove the residual toner on Secondary Transfer
cleaning control
Outer Roller in order to prevent any failure due to toner stain
from Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
ITB cleaning control
Controls to remove the toner on ITB.
ITB displacement correction control Controls to correct the ITB displacement.
ITB speed control
Controls to maintain the constant ITB rotation speed.
Separation
Controls to separate the paper from ITB.
Toner supply
Toner Container open/close control Controls to open/close the cap of Toner Container.
Toner supply control/toner level
Detects the toner level of Toner Container and Hopper
detection
Assembly, and controls to supply the toner to Hopper
Assembly and Developing Assembly.
Waste toner delivery

Waste toner delivery control
Waste Toner Container full
detection
Controls to deliver the toner collected at Drum cleaning and

ITB cleaning to Waste Toner Container.
Controls to detect whether Waste Toner Container is full.
2-84
Control Name
Automatic control
Bk
CL
D-max Pascal control
Potential control (Bk)
D-max control (Y/M/C)
D-half control
ARCDAT control
Pascal control
ATR control (supply control)

Image position correction

Secondary transfer ATVC
Drum idle rotation

Black band sequence
Black band sequence when using

Transparency
Toner ejection sequence at low
duty
Description
Forms the maximum density patch on the paper, reads this
patch from Reader and corrects the target density of D-max
control.
Optimizes the values of grid voltage, developing DC bias and
laser power in order to set Vbak and Vcont of Process Unit
(Bk) to the target values.
Form a solid patch on the ITB and scan it with the Patch
Sensor to determine the charging bias (Vd), developing bias
(Vdc), and laser power to achieve the target density.
Form a halftone patch on the ITB and scan it with the Patch
Sensor to correct the halftone.
Corrects a whole halftone by referring to the density of 1
halftone patch.
Reads the gradation pattern from Reader to make correction.
Optimizes the charging AC current value in order to reach the
target discharge current value from the Charging Roller of
Process Unit (color) to Drum.
Corrects the target T/D ratio in Developing Assembly in order
to achieve the target image density.
Reads the registration patch from Patch Sensor, detects
the image displacement from Bk and corrects the write start
position in horizontal/vertical scanning direction and image
skew magnification.
Optimizes the primary transfer DC bias value in order to
reach the target primary transfer current.
Optimizes the secondary transfer DC bias value in order to
reach the target secondary transfer current.
Adjusts the light intensity to achieve the target reading
performance of Patch Sensor and performs sampling of ITB
background.
Controls to rotate Drum without applying high voltage in order
to remove the discharge generated on the drum surface.
A control for preventing bend/peel of the ITB cleaning blade
to create solid image on the ITB to be removed by the ITB
cleaning blade.
Controls to form the solid image on ITB to remove the surface
active agent, etc. on ITB when feeding Transparency and
remove using ITB Cleaning Blade.
Controls to form the solid image on ITB and consume (eject)
the toner forcibly when low duty image is continuously
printed.
T-2-44
2-84
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
2-85
Process Unit (Bk)
<Related Service Modes>
Primary Charging
COPIER>DISPLAY > HV-STS >PRI-GRID: display of the primary charging current
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>DPOT-K: display of Bk drum surface potential
Primary Charging Wire Bias Control

The primary charging bias charges the photosensitive drum surface with a uniform negative
potential.
COPIER>DISPLAY > HV-STS >PR-GRI-K: display of the primary charging assembly grid
voltage
The primary charging bias (DC negative) created by the primary charging high voltage PCB
(Bk) (UN37) is applied to the primary charging wire and the grid plate.
Primary charging DC bias: Applied to the primary charging wire (Constant current)
Grid DC bias: Applied to the grid plate
The value of the primary charging DC bias is determined based on the absolute water volume
and process speed.
The value of the grid DC bias is determined by potential control (Bk) based on the fogging
removal potential (Vback) and the contrast potential (Vcont), which are determined based on
the absolute water volume and process speed. (See "Potential Control (Bk)" for the details.)
Absolute Moisture Amount
Process Speed
DC Minus
DC Minus
Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (UN37)

Primary Grid Wire
F-2-125
2-85
2-86
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Control
<Related Service Mode>
This control is performed to prevent a charging failure caused by dirt on the primary charging
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-CLN or WIRE-EX:cleaning of all charging wires (1
wire and the grid plate.
round-trip)
COPIER>OPTION> CLEANING >W-CLN-P:setting for cleaning interval of the post-rotation
At the time of automatic adjustment of paper interval (Every printing of 4000 images on an
charging wire (2000)
accumulation basis)
COPIER>OPTION> CLEANING >INTPPR-1:setting for cleaning interval of paper interval
At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation (Every printing of 2000 images on an
accumulation basi

COPIER>OPTION> CLEANING >W-CLN-PH: ON/OFF for auto-cleaning of the Charging
At the time of multiple initial rotations(Fixing temperature is less than100 deg C/Total
2000-sheet from previous D-half control)
Wire
When "Wire Cleaning" is executed via the user mode
<Related error code>

E060-0011: Primary Charging Wire Shutter error 1 when cleaning the Primary Charging Wire
E060-0012: Primary Charging Wire Shutter error 2 when cleaning the Primary Charging Wire
When the cleaner screw rotates normally/in reverse driven by the primary charging cleaning
Primary Charging Shutter Control
motor (M1), the primary charging cleaning pad and the grid plate cleaning pad move back
To prevent uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum caused by discharge products
and forth, and clean the primary charging wire and the grid plate.
(nitrogen oxide) accumulated on the Primary Charging Assembly.
NOTE:
This machine does not have a HP sensor for the cleaning pad. The position of the
cleaning pad is detected based on the drive time of the primary charging wire cleaning
motor (M1).
NOTE:
In an environment where moisture content is low, the Drum Heater is turned OFF in
sleep mode after a specified period of time has passed to meet energy saving mode.
Discharge product (nitrogen oxide) which is generated at the Charging Assembly when
image is formed is deposited on the drum when the time has passed. When the Drum
Heater is OFF, the discharge product (nitrogen compound) on the drum surface has
Screw
a chemical reaction with the moisture in the air and the resistance value on the drum
surface is decreased, causing the image failure.
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M1)
<Conditions for execution>

Drum Heater is OFF.
During sleep mode
Grid Plate
<Control description>
The shutter is opened or closed by the cleaning mechanism of the Primary Charging Wire.
Grid Plate Cleaning Pad
The Primary Charging Shutter is made of fiber and usually taken up by the bobbin.
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad
The drive of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M1) moves the Cleaning Pad to the
rear and the shutter taken up by the bobbin becomes extended to make the shutter closed.

F-2-126
Because the shutter comes between the Grid Plate and the Photosensitive Drum, discharge
products from the Primary Charging Assembly do not reach the Photosensitive Drum.
The Primary Charging Shutter Position Sensor (PS92) detects open/close of the shutter.
2-86

E060-0001: Primary Charging Assembly Shutter home position open error (The shutter was
not closed.)
E060-0002: Primary Charging Assembly Shutter home position close error (The shutter was
not opened.)
2-87
Development
Developing Bias Control
This control is performed to apply a developing bias (AC component, DC negative
component) to the developing cylinder and attach the toner on the developing cylinder to the
photosensitive drum (bright section) to form a toner image.
Developing DC bias
This bias generates a potential difference against the photosensitive drum.
The bias value is determined by the relative humidity and process speed based on the
charging DC bias (Vd) determined by potential control (Bk).
Developing AC bias
This bias improves an image quality.
The developing AC bias of 1600Vpp, which is a fixed value, is applied.
COPIER>DISPLAY >DENS>DEV-DC-K: display of developing DC bias (Bk)
2-87
2-88
Collection Roller Bias Control
ACR Control
This control is performed to return the toner floating on the photosensitive drum during
The purpose of ACR (Auto Carrier Refresh) control is to keep long life of the developer, and
development to the developing assembly cylinder by the collection roller bias.
developer is supplied from the toner container while gradually discharging developer in the
The collection roller bias (DC negative) created by the developing toner collection high
voltage PCB (Bk) (UN51) is applied to the collection roller.
The exit slot is located at the downstream side of the developer. The developer is discharged
The collection roller bias of -1300V, which is a fixed value, is applied.
when the volume of the developer increases.

Relative Humidity
Process Speed
The same control is performed in the developing assembly of the Process Unit (CL).
Detection PCB (C / Bk) (UN15)
From Hopper Unit
DC Minus
Developing Toner Collection

AC+DC Minus
Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN39)

To Waste Toner Container
Developing Cylinder
F-2-128
F-2-127
2-88
2-89
Primary Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Control

This control is performed to prevent a charging failure caused by dirt on the primary pre-
Primary Pre-transfer Charging bias control

This control is performed to increase transfer efficiency by securing a proper toner charging
volume on the photosensitive drum.
The pre-primary transfer charging AC bias (5500Vpp) and the pre-primary transfer DC bias (0
to -600muA), which are generated on the pre-primary transfer charging high voltage PCB (Bk),
are applied to the pre-primary transfer charging wire.
The primary pre-transfer charging bias value is determined based on the absolute water
volume, relative humidity, and paper type.
Relative Humidity
Paper Type
transfer charging wire.
At the time of automatic adjustment of paper interval (Every printing of 4000 images on an
accumulation basis)
At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation (Every printing of 2000 images on an
accumulation basi
At the time of multiple initial rotations(Fixing temperature is less than100 deg C/Total

Detection PCB (C / Bk) (UN15)
When "Wire Cleaning" is executed via the user mode

When the screw rotates normally/in reverse driven by the primary pre-transfer charging wire
cleaning motor (M2), the primary pre-transfer charging wire cleaning pad moves back and
forth and cleans the primary pre-transfer charging wire.

AC+DC Minus

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-CLN: cleaning of all charging wires (1 round-trip)
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-EX: cleaning of all charging wires (5 round-trip)
COPIER>OPTION> CLEANING >W-CLN-T: setting for cleaning interval of the post-rotation
COPIER>OPTION> CLEANING >INTPPR-1: setting for cleaning interval of paper interval
COPIER>OPTION> CLEANING >W-CLN-PH: ON/OFF for automatic cleaning of the charging
wire
To prevent uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum caused by discharge products
(nitrogen oxide) accumulated on the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
<Execution timing>
To be executed together with the Pre-transfer Charging Wire cleaning control at the same
time.

F-2-129

COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>PRE-TR: display of the pre-primary transfer charging DC
current
2-89
<Control description>
The shutter is opened or closed by the cleaning mechanism of the Pre-transfer Charging
Wire.
The Pre-transfer Charging Shutter is made of fiber and usually taken up by the bobbin.
2-90
Cleaning
Overview
This control is performed to remove residual toner on the photosensitive drum.
M30
The drive of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M2) moves the Cleaning Pad
to the rear and the shutter taken up by the bobbin becomes extended to make the shutter
Drum Cleaning Fur Brush
closed.
Drum Cleaning Unit
Drum Cleaning Blade
Because the shutter comes between the Pre-transfer Charging Wire and the Photosensitive
Drum, discharge products from the Pre-transfer Charging Wire do not reach the
Photosensitive Drum.
The Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS93) detects open/close of the shutter.
E066-0001: Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter home position open error (The shutter was
not closed.)
E066-0002: Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter home position close error (The shutter was
not opened.)
Scoop-Up Sheet
Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED
Patch Sensor Unit

F-2-130
Parts name
Drum cleaning unit
Drum cleaning fur brush
Drum cleaning blade
Waste toner feed screw
Scoop-up sheet
Role
Scrape and collect the residual toner on the drum.
Polish surface of the photosensitive drum to form a thin toner
coated layer.
Scrape the toner adhered to the drum surface.
Feed the waste toner on the drum cleaning unit.
Scoop up the waste toner which dropped from the drum cleaning
unit.
T-2-45
Parts name
M30
LED1
Drum cleaning/waste
toner feed drive motor
Drum cleaning preexposure LED
Role
Drive the drum cleaning fur brush and the waste toner feed screw.
Remove the drum memory on the photosensitive drum surface.
T-2-46
2-90
2-91
Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure
Drum Cleaning Control
This control is performed to emit light from the pre-exposure LED to remove the drum
This control is performed to remove residual toner on the photosensitive drum by the blade
memory on the photosensitive drum surface.
engaged with the drum.
Light is emitted from the drum cleaning pre-exposure LED on the patch sensor unit to remove
1) The drum cleaning fur brush rotates, driven by the drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive
the drum memory on the photosensitive drum surface so that dirt on the surface is prevented.
motor (M30).
2) The drum cleaning fur brush polishes the surface of the photosensitive drum to form a thin
NOTE:
A potential difference at the edges of the toner layer transferred onto the ITB at primary
transfer forms a minute gap between the photosensitive drum and the ITB, making a
discharge symptom occur. This causes drum memory to occur on the photosensitive
drum. The residual toner adhered to the cleaning blade is attracted to the drum memory,
causing dirt on the photosensitive drum.
Drum Cleaning Blade
toner coated layer.

3) The drum cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner on the drum surface.
4) The scraped waste toner is fed to the waste toner container by the waste toner feed screw.
NOTE:
Two sheets of Scoop-up Sheet are used to prevent the toner scraped by the drum
cleaning blade from spilling into the unit.
Drum Cleaning Brush Roller
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>BK-BNDEX: supply of the photosensitive drum toner
Waste Toner
Feed Screw
Drum Memory
< Without Pre-Exposure >
Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED
< With Pre-Exposure >

F-2-131
2-91
2-92
Drum Rotation Speed Control
Drum Heater Control
This control is performed to keep a uniform drum rotation speed in order to increase accuracy
This control is performed to keep the temperature of the photosensitive drum at a specified
of the image position (color displacement).
level and stabilize potential characteristics of charging and exposure, etc.
1) The drum rotates, driven by the drum motors (Y: M19 / M: M20 / C: M21 / Bk: M22).
The temperature of the photosensitive drum is controlled by the drum heater mounted inside
2) There is an encoder on the drum shaft, of which rotation is monitored by the two drum
of the photosensitive drum and by the drum thermo pile and the drum thermistor mounted on
speed detection PCBs (Bk: UN18/19, Y: UN20/21, M: UN22/23, C: UN24/25).
the photosensitive drum surface.
3) The drum speed detection PCB counts the drum count based on a pulse, and feeds back
the drum rotation speed to the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6) to perform speed control.
Flywheel
UN18(UN20/UN22/UN24)
Encoder
UN19(UN21/UN23/UN25)
Operation Condition
Main power SW
Environment heater SW
Gear
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Follow the Environment Control.

Follow the Environment Control.
ON*
OFF
T-2-47
* When a power plug is inserted into the power outlet

Environment Control
When absolute moist volume is 18g or more (high temperature/high humidity environment),
this control is ON at anytime other than when formulating image.
Drum
When absolute moist volume is 5.8g or more and less than 18g (normal temperature/
of pre-rotation by turning ON the main power.
Drum Speed
Detection Signal 2
Drum Speed
Detection Signal 1
M19
(M21/M23/M25)
Drum Drive Signal
normal humidity environment), the control is ON for 2 minutes and 30 seconds in the case
When absolute moist volume is less than 5.8g (normal temperature/low humidity
environment), this control is OFF.
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DHT-ON: Drum Heater (Bk) is ON forcibly.
Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6)

F-2-132
2-92
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (CL)
2-93
Process Unit (CL)

1) The temperature on the drum surface is detected by the thermo pile.
2) The drum heater ON/OFF operation is repeated based on the detected temperature on the
drum surface so that the temperature is kept at a specified level (42.5 degree C).
3) When the upper limit temperature (50 degree C) is detected by the drum thermistor, the
drum heater is turned OFF.
Charging
Primary Charging Roller Bias Control
The primary charging bias (CL) charges the photosensitive drum surface with a uniform
negative potential.
The primary charging bias (AC component, DC negative) created by the primary charging
NOTE:
A thermo pile is an infrared sensor, which generates thermo electromotive force
according to the amount of energy when receiving an infrared ray irradiated from an
individual substance on a noncontact basis. The thermo pile enables accurate detection
of the temperature on the drum surface.
high voltage PCB (CL) (UN38) is applied to the primary charging roller.
Primary charging DC bias (CL): DC bias applied to the primary charging roller
Primary charging AC bias (CL): AC bias applied to the primary charging roller
The primary charging DC bias is determined based on the absolute water volume (ENV1),
total drum charging time, and process speed. The primary charging AC bias is dependent
Drum
on the absolute water volume (ENV1), total drum charging time, and process speed, and the
Drum Heater
bias value is determined by discharged current control. (See "Discharged Current Control (CL)"
for the details.)
Absolute Moisture Amount
Process Speed

(Y/M) (UN14)
Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Color) (UN38)

AC+DC Minus
Environment Heater Switch
Charging Roller
F-2-134
Environment Sensor
F-2-133
2-93

COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS> PRIACV-Y/M/C: display of discharge current control setting AC
voltage
2-94
Development
Developing Bias Control (CL)
This control is performed to apply the developing bias (AC component, DC negative) to the
developing cylinder and to adhere the toner on the developing cylinder to the photosensitive
drum (bright section) to form a toner image.
Developing DC Bias
The developing DC bias generates a potential difference against the photosensitive drum.
The developing DC bias is determined based on the relative humidity (UN14/UN15), total
drum charging time, and charging DC bias.
Developing AC Bias
The developing AC bias improves the image quality.
The developing AC bias of 1600Vpp, which is a fixed value, is applied.
Relative Humidity/Absolute Moisture Amount
Process Speed

(UN14/UN15)
AC+DC Minus
Developing High Voltage PCB (UN40)
F-2-135
2-94
2-95
Toner Collection Sheet Bias Control
COPIER>DISPLAY >DENS>DEV-DC-Y/M/C: display of developing DC voltage
This control is performed to put back the toner floating on the photosensitive drum during
development to the developing cylinder by the toner collection sheet bias.
The toner collection sheet bias (DC negative) created by the developing toner collection high
voltage PCB (Y) / (M) / (C) is applied to the toner collection sheet.
The collection sheet bias of -1300V, which is a fixed value, is applied.
The toner dropped from the toner collection sheet is accumulated in the toner catch sheet
located under the developing assembly.
DC Minus
Developing Toner Collection

High Voltage PCB (UN52 / UN53 / UN54)
Toner Catch Sheet
F-2-136
2-95
2-96
Cleaning
Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure (CL)

This control is performed to prevent reverse transfer of toner on the cleaning blade caused by
Overview
drum memory.
Drum Cleaning Blade

Light is emitted from the drum cleaning pre-exposure LEDs (LED 2 to 4) in the ITB cleaning
Scoop-Up Sheet
unit to remove the drum memory on the photosensitive drum surface and prevent dirt on the
surface.
Drum Cleaning Unit
The light emitted from the drum cleaning pre-exposure LEDs (LED 2 to 4) is exposed to the
drum surface via the light guide.

NOTE:
A potential difference at the edges of toner layer transferred onto the ITB at primary
transfer forms a minute gap between the photosensitive drum and the ITB, making a
discharge symptom occur. This causes drum memory to occur on the photosensitive
drum. When the residual toner adhered to the cleaning blade is attracted to the drum
memory, causing dirt on the photosensitive drum.
Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED

(LED2 / LED3 / LED4)
Light Guide
M21 Drum Motor (Y)
M23 Drum Motor (M)
M25 Drum Motor (C)
F-2-137
Parts name
Drum cleaning assembly
Drum cleaning blade
Scoop-up sheet
Light guide
Role
Scrape and collect the residual toner adhered to the drum.
Scrape the toner adhered to the drum surface.
Feed the waste toner in the drum cleaning unit.
Scoop up the waste toner dropped from the drum cleaning unit.
Carry the light irradiated by the LED to the drum surface.
T-2-48
Parts name
M30
LED1
Drum cleaning/waste
toner feed drive motor
Drum cleaning preexposure LED
Role
Drive the drum cleaning fur brush and the waste toner feed screw.
Remove the drum memory on the photosensitive drum surface.
Drum Memory
< Without Pre-Exposure >
Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED

(LED2 / LED3 / LED4)
< With Pre-Exposure >

F-2-138
T-2-49
2-96
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
Process Unit Presence Detection

This machine does not perform process unit presence detection.
Drum Unit Old/New Detection
2-97
Transfer Assembly
Overview
Toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the paper.
This machine does not have a mechanism to detect whether the drum unit is old or new.
NOTE:
The drum unit potential characteristics (durability) change according to the total drum
charging time.
Therefore, the total charging time is internally maintained and used for bias control, etc.
The charging time can be checked via the following service mode. When replacing the
drum unit, the total charging time needs to be cleared via the service mode.
Photosensitive Drum (Y) Photosensitive Drum(M)

Primary Transfer
Auxiliary Left Roller
ITB Cleaning Unit
Primary Transfer
Roller (Y)
Photosensitive Drum(C)
Primary Transfer
Roller (M)
Photosensitive Drum (Bk)

Primary Transfer
Roller (Bk)
Primary Transfer
Roller (C)
ITB Cleaning Blade
Patch Sensor
Unit
Patch Sensor
Opposing Roller
ITB Unit

COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DRMRSETY/M/C/K: Forcible execution of the drum replacement
Steering Roller
Toner Feed Screw

ITB Drive Roller
mode. Clear the total drum charging time.
ITB
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPC>D-CONT-Y/M/C/K: Display the total drum charging time.
Drum Heater Control

The drum heater is installed in the ITB unit to realize stable charging and exposure to deal
with environmental changes in the machine.
Operation Condition
Same as the operation condition of the Bk drum heater
The drum heater is a self-temperature-control-type heater, of which temperature is controlled
at 70 degree C. The peripheral temperature is controlled at 40 degree C.
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DHT-ON: Drum Heater (Bk) is ON forcibly.
Pre-Secondary Transfer Idler Roller

F-2-139
Parts name
ITB unit
ITB (Intermediate Transfer
Belt)
Primary transfer roller
ITB drive roller
Primary transfer auxiliary roller
(left)
Primary transfer auxiliary roller
(right)
Steering roller
ITB cleaning blade
ITB cleaning screw
Secondary pre-transfer slave
roller
Patch sensor unit
Secondary transfer unit
Secondary transfer external
roller
Secondary transfer static
eliminator
Role
Transfer the toner on the photosensitive drum to the paper.
Transfer the toner on the photosensitive drum.
Attract the toner on the photosensitive drum to the ITB.
Rotate the ITB.
Form the ITB surface against the drum.
Form the ITB surface against the drum (when the primary transfer
roller is disengaged).
Correct the ITB displacement.
Scrape the toner on the ITB.
Feed the waste toner in the ITB cleaning unit.
Stabilize the belt operation by belt displacement control.
Detect the image density and registration patch for the patch
image on the ITB.
Transfer the toner on the ITB to the paper.
Feed the paper transferred. The roller is disengaged from the ITB
when scanning a patch image.
Remove a potential on the paper after secondary transfer is
performed.
T-2-50
2-97
2-98
Primary Transfer
Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Control

To prolong the life of image formation parts (photosensitive drum, ITB), the primary transfer
Primary Transfer Bias Control

This control is performed to transfer the toner on the photosensitive drum to the ITB.
The primary transfer bias (DC positive, DC negative (Bk)) created by the primary transfer high
voltage PCB (UN43 to UN46) is applied to the primary transfer roller.
The primary transfer bias is dependent on the absolute water volume (ENV1), relative
humidity (UN14/UN15), process speed, and drum dark section potential (Vd), and the bias
value is determined by primary transfer ATVC control.
Disengagement: At the timing other than that mentioned above. However, disengagement
operation is not performed when the machine starts up with 4-color mode and the mode is
Mode
Bk
Bk single-color mode
Color mode
(disengagement)
-> Color mode
Color mode -> Bk mode
DC
DC
DC
DC
Primary Transfer
Roller(C)
Engagement: When a color mode is specified
Roller
Developing Assembly
Inner Temperature
Detection PCB
(C / Bk) (UN15)
Primary Transfer PCB (UN43)

Primary Transfer
Roller(M)
Engagement/Disengagement Condition
switched to Bk single-color mode. (High voltage is turned off.)

Process Speed
Potential of Drum Edge
Primary Transfer
Roller(Y)
roller for color is disengaged at Bk single-color mode.
Primary Transfer
Roller(Bk)
(engagement)
-> Color mode
YMC
High voltage
Roller
High voltage
Engagement
Engagement
Engagement
->Engagement
ON
ON
ON->ON
Disengagement
Engagement
Disengagement
-> Engagement
OFF
ON
OFF->ON
Engagement
->Engagement
Engagement
->Engagement
ON->ON
Engagement
->Engagement
Engagement
->Engagement
ON->OFF
ON->ON
OFF->ON
T-2-51
* When the mode is switched from Bk mode (disengagement) to 4-color mode, the drive of
the Bk drum and ITB is stopped and then engagement operation is performed.
Primary Transfer
Auxiliary Left Roller
F-2-140

COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>1TR-DC-Y/M/C/K: display of the primary transfer voltage
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>1ATVC-EX: execution of the primary transfer ATVC
: Attachment
: Detachment
Primary Transfer
Auxiliary Right Roller
F-2-141
2-98
2-99
Secondary Transfer

1) The cam rotates, driven by the primary transfer roller disengagement motor (M5).
Secondary Transfer Bias Control
2) The link lever slides, driven by the rotation force of the cam.
3) The pressure release lever rotates when the link lever slides, and the primary transfer roller
for color is disengaged from the ITB.
4) At the same time, the pressure release cam also rotates. The primary transfer auxiliary
roller (right) moves up and the primary transfer auxiliary roller (left) moves down.
This control is performed to transfer the toner on the ITB to the paper.
The secondary transfer bias (DC positive) created by the secondary transfer high voltage
PCB (UN48) is applied to the secondary transfer external roller.
The secondary transfer bias is dependent on the absolute water volume (ENV1), process
speed, and paper type, and determined by secondary transfer ATVC control.
5) The position of the primary transfer roller is detected by the primary transfer roller
attachment/detachment HP sensor (PS5).
Primary Transfer Auxiliary Left Roller
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>2TR-PPR: display of the secondary transfer ATVC paper shared
Cam
voltage
Link Lever
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT> 2TR-BASE: display of the secondary transfer ATVC base voltage
Pressure Release Lever
Secondary Post-transfer Static Eliminator Bias Control

This control is performed to make it easier to separate the paper from the ITB.
The secondary transfer static eliminator bias (DC negative) created by the secondary post-
Pressure
Release
Cam
transfer static eliminator high voltage PCB (UN49) is applied to the secondary post-transfer
static eliminator.
The secondary transfer static eliminator bias (DC negative) is determined based on the
absolute water volume (ENV1) and paper type.
Only the second side of thin paper (52g to 63g) is applied -3000V under all environments.
Pressure Release Lever

Cam
M5
Attachment and Detachment Motor
Link Lever

COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>2EL: display of the secondary transfer static eliminator voltage

Detachment HP Sensor (PS4)
Pressure Release Cam

F-2-142

E074: Primary transfer roller detachment/attachment error
COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW>T1HP-POS: determine the primary transfer roller engagement/
disengagement HP
<Related User Mode>
Settings/Registration>Adjustment/Maintenance>Adjust Action>First Print Time>B/W Priority
2-99

Process Speed
Paper Type
2-100
1) The detachment cam rotates, driven by the secondary transfer external roller detachment

Detection PCB (UN14/UN15)
motor (M31).
2) When the detachment cam rotates, the secondary transfer external roller is engaged with
and disengaged from the ITB.
Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5)
3) The position of the secondary transfer external roller is detected by the secondary transfer
external roller detachment HP sensor (PS22).
Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination

Secondary Transfer
DC Plus
DC Plus/Minus
Secondary Transfer Roller

Attachment and Detachment
HP Sensor (PS22)

Detachment Motor(M31)
Detached Cam
Secondary Transfer
External Roller
Attachment
Detachment
ITB

<Detached status>
HP Sensor (PS22)
F-2-143
Secondary Transfer External Roller Disengagement Control
Sensor Flag
This control is performed to prevent dirt on the secondary transfer external roller.
<Attached status>
Sensor Flag

HP Sensor (PS22)
ITB
Engagement: At the time of printing, cleaning of the secondary transfer roller

Disengagement: At the timing other than that mentioned above
Secondary
Transfer
Internal Roller
Detachment
ITB
Detached
Cam
Secondary Transfer
Internal Roller
Detached
Cam
Attachment
F-2-144

E077: Secondary transfer external roller detachment/attachment error
2-100
2-101
Secondary Transfer External Roller Cleaning Control

This control is performed to prevent dirt on the backside of paper caused by dirt on the
secondary transfer external roller.
Cleaning
ITB Cleaning Control
This control is performed to remove the residual toner on the ITB.
At the time of initial rotation
1) The toner on the ITB is scraped by the ITB cleaning blade.
At the time of last rotation
2) The scraped toner is fed into the waste toner container.
During printing
ITB Cleaning Blade
ITB Drive Roller

1) The secondary transfer cleaning bias (DC positive, DC negative) created by the secondary
transfer high voltage PCB (UN48) is alternately applied to the secondary transfer external
roller.
2) The toner on the secondary transfer external roller adheres to the ITB, and is collected by
the ITB cleaning unit.
ITB Cleaning Blade
Secondary Transfer Internal Roller
M3
ITB Cleaning Unit
ITB Drive Motor

Cleaning Bias
(DC Minus- DC Plus)
F-2-146

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>TBLT-CLN: cleaning the ITB
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>TB-INSD: cleaning inside the ITB

F-2-145

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>2TR-CLN:Clean of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
2-101
2-102
Separation
ITB Displacement Correction Control
Overview
This control is performed to prevent damage to the ITB caused by ITB displacement.
Paper is separated from the ITB.

Separation is performed with the curvature separation mechanism (mechanical) and static
During ITB rotation
eliminator (electrostatic).
A DC bias is applied to the static eliminator so that an extra potential on paper is absorbed
and paper is easily separated. The DC bias for the static eliminator changes according to the
1) When the ITB is displaced to the front side or rear side, the edge of the ITB activates the
absolute water volume (ENV1), paper type, and process speed.
ITB displacement sensor flag.
A bias is only applied to the static eliminator only when thin paper (weight of 52 to 110g) is
printed.
2) The position of the ITB Displacement sensor flag is detected by the ITB displacement
sensor (PS2) (Refer to <Detection of ITB position>). The ITB steering motor (M4) is driven
The static eliminator bias (-3000V) is applied only for the 2nd side of thin paper (52g to 63g)
at all environments.
according to the position of the ITB.

3) When M4 is driven, the steering cam rotates and the support arm moves up and down. This
An absorption sheet metal is connected to ground so that paper is attracted to the sheet
metal side.
operation tilts the steering roller.

4) When the steering roller tilts, a difference of tension is generated on the ITB, and the ITB
moves to the front side or rear side.
5) The operation from Step 1 to 4 is repeatedly performed to correct ITB displacement.
6) The position of the steering roller is detected by the steering roller HP sensor (PS3).
Roller
7) The HP mark (white) on inside of the ITB is used when correcting unevenness on the edge
Flag
of the ITB that is detected by PS3 (Refer to <Profile of ITB edge shape>).
Secondary Transfer
External Roller
ITB
ITB Steering
Drive Motor(M4)
ITB HP Sensor (PS5)
Static
Charge
Eliminator
Secondary Transfer Internal Roller
ITB
Roller
Paper
Secondary Transfer
External Roller
Static Charge
Feed Guide
Eliminator
Flag Attraction Plate
Attraction Plate
Steering Drive
HP Sensor (PS3)
Feed Guide
Support Arm
F-2-147
COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>2EL: display of the secondary transfer static eliminator voltage
Steering Roller
Steering Cam
ITB Displacement
Sensor (PS2)
ITB Displacement
Sensor Flag
F-2-148
2-102
2-103
<Detection of ITB position>
<Neutral position of Steering Roller>
ITB Displacement Sensor (PS2) consists of LED and 2 Photo Diodes (PD). Due to the
This control shifts ITB by tilting Steering Roller. Neutral position of Steering Roller is
position of ITB Displacement Sensor Flag, photo intensity of 2 PDs in ITB Displacement
memorized and ITB displacement is corrected by tilting Steering Roller. This neutral position
Sensor (PS2) varies. By detecting this photo intensity, the belt position is grasped.
is detected and recorded by executing the service mode.
LED
PD1
PD2
NOTE:
Because the ITB edge shape differs depending on the ITB, a profile for the edge shape
needs to be created via the service mode when replacing the ITB. The ITB HP sensor (PS5)
detects the standard position for profile creation and ITB displacement correction.
ITB displacement is corrected by matching the profile with the result of measurement by
the ITB displacement sensor.
In this control, ITB movement is determined by the tilt of the steering roller. The neutral
position of the steering roller is memorized, and the steering roller is slanted to correct ITB
displacement.
Displacement Sensor Flag

F-2-149
<Profile of ITB edge shape>

ITB edge is shaped in the wavy line, not in the straight line. Therefore, if the ITB position is
detected without considering this ITB edge shape, the correct position cannot be detected.
This edge shape varies in each ITB.
At ITB replacement, the profile of ITB edge shape is created using the service mode and
recorded. By referring to this profile and measurement result by ITB Displacement Sensor,
the correct ITB position is detected.

E075: error in ITB displacement correction control
Acquisition of the profile for the ITB edge shape / Acquisition of the neutral position of the
steering roller
:COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INIT-ITB
ITB HP Sensor (PS5) detects the HP mark (white) on inside of the ITB, creates the profile and
recognizes the standard position at ITB displacement correction.
NOTE:
When replacing the belt, be sure that the HP mark (white) is located on the rear side.
2-103
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Assembly
2-104
ITB Speed Control

This control is performed to keep a constant ITB speed to increase accuracy of the image
position.
To keep a constant ITB speed, the encoder connected to the ITB drive roller is monitored.
The rotation of the encoder is counted by the ITB drive roller speed detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/
UN17) on a pulse basis so that the rotation volume of the ITB drive roller is fed back to the
DC controller interface PCB (UN2) for speed control.
Overview
Toner in the toner container is supplied to the developing assembly.
Open/close operation of Toner Container is executed automatically. Therefore, Toner
Container cannot be normally installed/removed before the toner in the Toner Container runs
out.
Cap Release Holder
Cap Drive Link
Cap
Cap Lock Shaft
ITB Drive Roller Speed

Detection PCB 2(UN17)
Release Holder
Shift Cam
ITB Drive Roller
Toner Supply Plate

Hopper Unit
Encoder
Toner Stirring Plate
ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1(UN16)
ITB Drive Motor(M3)
Developing Assembly
Toner
Encoder
Toner Supply Screw
Toner Feed Screw
Toner
Feed Screw

F-2-150
Toner Feed Screw

F-2-151
2-104
Parts name
Toner supply drive unit
Cap drive link
Cap release holder
Release holder shift cam
Hopper unit
Toner feed screw
Stirring plate
Toner supply screw
Toner container
Cap lock shaft
Toner supply plate
2-105
<Closing Operation>
Role
Supply the toner in the toner container to the hopper unit.
Connect to the toner cap to open/close the toner cap.
Release the connection between the toner cap and the cap drive link.
Send the motor rotation drive to the cap drive link as back-and-forth
movement.
Supply the toner in the hopper unit to the developing assembly.
Feed the toner in the hopper unit.
Stir the toner in the hopper unit.
Supply toner to the developing assembly.
Supply the toner in the toner container to the hopper unit, driven by
the toner supply drive unit.
Lock the toner cap.
Pump the toner in the toner container.
1) When the toner container drive motors (M7/M10/M13/M16) are driven re-clockwise, the cap
drive link and the cap release holder move to the right side (to the toner container side).
2) The toner cap is closed to the toner container. At the same time, the cap release holder
bends the cap release claw, and the cap fixed to the cap drive link is released.
3) The motor is driven, and the cap drive link and the release holder move to the left so that
the toner container can be removed.
Cap Release Holder
Cap
Cap Drive Link
Cap Lock Shaft
Release Holder
Shift Cam
T-2-52
Toner Container Presence Detection

This machine does not perform toner container presence detection.
M7
M10
Toner Cap Automatic Open/Close Control
M13
This control is performed to automatically open and close the toner container cap.
M16
Cap Drive Link
Cap
At the time of replacement of the toner container
Toner Container
Reciprocation HP Sensor
(PS8/PS11/PS14/PS17)
(When Fixing)
<Opening Operation>
1) The toner cap HP sensors (PS8/PS11/PS14/PS17) detect the toner cap position, and the
(When Releasing)
toner cap rotation phase sensors (PS81 to PS84) detect the phase of the toner cap and the
F-2-152
cap release holder against the toner container.

2) When the toner container drive motors (M7/M10/M13/M16) are driven re-clockwise, the cap
drive link and the cap release holder move to the right side (to the toner container side).
3) The toner cap is fixed with the cap drive link. At the same time, the cap lock shaft is
pressed to the right side, and the cap is unlocked.
4) The toner container drive motors (M7/M10/M13/M16) are further driven, and the cap
release holder and the cap drive link move to the left side in this order.
Closed
Moving (Closed =>Opened)
Opened
Moving (Opened =>Closed)
Release holder shift cam HP

sensor
Toner cap rotation phase

sensor
Light shielding
Transmission
Light shielding
Transmission
Light shielding
Transmission
Transmission
Light shielding
T-2-53
E025-0x00: Toner container drive motor lock error

E025-0x10: Toner container sealing/release holder shift cam HP sensor timeout error
E025-0x20: Toner container/toner container inserting inlet phase error
2-105
Toner Level Detection / Toner Supply Control
2-106
Title
Toner supply control
Supply to the
hopper
This control is performed to supply the toner in the toner container to the developing
assembly.
M7 M10 M13 M16
Hopper Toner Level Sensor

(TS5/TS6/TS7/TS8)
Supply to the
developing
assembly
Explanation
Supply timing
Main unit operation
Supply the developer in

When the detection result
the toner container to the by the hopper toner level
hopper unit.
sensors (TS5 to 8) is
changed from H to L
Supply the developer in
When it is judged that
the hopper unit to the
the developer needs to
be supplied based on the
ATR control result
The toner container drive

motors (M7/M10/M13/
M16) are driven for two
seconds. *1
The hopper/stirring supply
motors (M6/M9/M12/M15)
are driven for a specified
period.
T-2-54
Toner Level Detection

Hopper Toner
Level Sensor
Developing Assembly
M7 M10 M13 M16
Toner Feed Screw
Toner
Feed Screw
Rotation Sensor
(PS9/PS12
/PS15/PS18)
Full Line
(Toner surface reaches
this line always.)
Near End Line
End Line
Toner Feed Screw
F-2-154
Toner Stirring
Plate
DC Controller
Interface PCB
(UN2)
Supply Count
Toner Stirring
Plate
Toner Feed Screw
ATR Control
F-2-153
2-106
State
Container full
Near-end
End
Toner Level
100% to 25%
0%
0%
Toner Level
inside.
Toner
Container
100%
100%
25%
25%
2-107
Toner Level and User replacement flow
<Forced replacement mode>
100%
Operation: Pop-up message indicates to prompt the forcible replacement. (Operation cannot
be continued.)
How to clear the pup-up message: Replace the target Toner Container.
<Optional replacement mode>
Operation: Warning message indicates to prompt the optional replacement. (Operation can
be continued.)
Toner Level
inside
Hopper
How to clear the warning message display: Replace the target Toner Container.
Full line
Near-end line
End line
<Halfway replacement mode>

Operation: Even toner remains, Toner Container can be replaced.
LUI Display
None
Detection
Method
The toner container

can be replaced
(continuous print
is available)
Please replace
a toner container
(the main unit
stops the operation) *4
Hopper Toner
Level Sensor *3
Toner Supply Count

*1*2
F-2-155
*1 The counter counts 1 up when Toner Supply Screw rotates once. (Approx. 0.3g)
*2 Estimation based on the toner supply count accumulation value
*3 Detection by Hopper Toner Level Sensor. Even the sensor output changes from H to L and
Toner Container Drive Motor is driven, the sensor output remains to be L. Toner Container
Drive Motor drives for 2 seconds and stops for 1 second, and these operations are
repeated 20 times at maximum. (Repeated operation)
*4 Timing to display the message differs between the Bk toner container and the color toner
container. (See "Toner Level and User replacement flow" for details)
*5 Position of near-end line varies due to the number of prints and image duty during repeated
operation. Approximately 1,500 prints can be made from near-end line to end line (A4; 5%
image).
Optional
replacement mode
Halfway
replacement mode
yes*1*2
yes*3
yes*3
T-2-55
: Not provided yes: Provided

*1 Only when setting in the service mode
*2 When the used Toner Container is replaced, the empty toner warning message 2 (Refer
to Toner Level Detection.) might be displayed without displaying the empty toner warning
message.
*3 Even non-target toner can be replaced optionally.
Mode switch to replace Toner Container in the middle: COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW >

Timing to display the Toner Container preparation message:
COPIER>OPTION> DSPLY-SW > T-LW-LVL (Level2) 5% to 100%
When toner of all colors remains

YMC Near-end line
End line
Job reception after toner
runs out (End line)
BK End
Forcible
replacement mode
T-CRG-SW
<Related User Mode>
Additional Functions > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance > Optional toner replacement
2-107
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feed Assembly
2-108
Waste Toner Full Level Detection
The following two types of detection are performed to detect the volume of the waste toner
Overview
The waste toner in the drum cleaning unit and the ITB cleaning unit is fed to the waste toner
container.
collected into the waste toner bottle.

Detection by the waste toner counter (Count-up Sheets)
Detection by the waste toner full level sensor (TS9)
Process
Unit (Bk)
ITB Cleaning Unit
Process
Unit (Y)
Process
Unit (M)
Message type
Drum Cleaning Unit
Process
Unit (C)
Toner Stirring Wire
Waste Toner
Feed Unit

Drum Cleaning M30
and Waste Toner
Feed Drive Motor
ITB Unit
Waste
toner level
Advanced notice "Waste toner is near full.

for full level
Replacement not yet
waste toner
needed." is displayed on the
Control Panel
80%
Full level waste

toner
100%
Waste Toner
Feed Screw
Waste Toner
Battele Set Sensor
(PS112)
Machine operation
"Waste toner reached the full

level is displayed, and the
machine operation stops.
Detection condition
-In case of reaching stated sheets*1 of
waste toner counter [count-up sheets]
or
-In case of detection of the toner by
waste toner full sensor [TS9]
[5% manuscript notes of average
image duty are equivalent to 50,000
sheets.]
When 1000 sheets are printed after
the advanced notice for full level waste
toner was displayed. Near full counter
(internal counter)
T-2-57
The DC controller checks TS9 and the Near full counter (internal counter) every time when
the power is turned on and the front door is opened/closed, and it sends the two types of
messages (Advanced notice for full level waste toner, Full level waste toner) to the main
Waste Toner
Full Sensor
(TS9)
controller.
Waste Toner
Waste
Toner
When the Waste Toner Bottle is replaced with a new one after it was detected full, the waste
toner counter (COPIER/COUNTER/DRBL-1/WST-TNR) and near full counter (internal
counter) are automatically cleared.
F-2-156
Parts name
Waste toner feed unit
Toner stirring wire
Waste toner container
Role
E013-0001: error in the waste toner feed screw lock detection
Feed the waste toner to the waste toner container.

Loosen the toner fed from the cleaning unit.
Feed the toner in the waste toner feed unit.
Store the waste toner.
T-2-56
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feed Assembly
2-108
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-109
Image Stabilization Control
Waste Toner Container Presence Detection

This machine performs waste toner container presence detection.
Overview
This control is performed to prevent an image failure caused by environmental changes
Detection method
and deterioration of the photosensitive drum, etc. so that stable printing operation can be
performed.
<Bk >
Lp
Laser Scanner Unit
Vd
Potential Sensor
Vdc
Waste Toner Battele

Set Sensor
(PS112)
Patch Sensor
Density Sensor
Battele Detection Lever
DC Controller
Potential Control
Waste Toner Battele OFF
ATR Control
Image Position Correct
Vcont
Waste Toner Battele ON

F-2-157
When printing is performed without a Waste Toner Bottle installed, an alarm (00-0B00)
occurs.
Reader
D-MaxPASCAL Control
By setting COPIER > OPTION > USER > W-TN-DSP to 1 in service mode, the specification
of the machine is switched to that for user replacement, and the procedure for replacing the
ARCDAT Control
PASCAL Control
D-half
target
Also, "Insert the waste toner container." is displayed on the screen.
Changing the specification to that for user replacement of Waste

Toner Container
D-half Control
D-half
Measured
Value
ARCDA
Ttarget
ARCDA
Measured
Value
gamma-LUT
Printer+Reder
PASCAL
Control
gamma-LUT
Waste Toner Container is displayed in the animation.

Main Controller
F-2-158
2-109
<CL>
2-110
< Transfer >
Lp
Laser Scanner Unit

Vdc
Patch Sensor
Vd
Density
Sensor
DC Controller
D-max Control
Vpp
Discharge Current
Control
ATR Control
Target Density
D-MaxPASCAL
Control
Reader
Image Position Correct
D-half Control
ARCDAT Control
PASCAL Control
D-half
target
D-half
Measured
Value
ARCDA
Ttarget
ARCDA
Measured
Value
gamma-LUT
Printer+Reder
PASCAL
Control
Primary
Transfer ATVC
Secondary
TransferATVC
Primary
Transfer Full
Secondary
Transfer Full
Primary
Transfer
Sheet Interval
Secondary
Transfer
Sheet Interval
DC Controller
gamma-LUT
F-2-160
Main Controller
F-2-159
2-110
2-111
Timing of Control
Model A : iR-ADV C9075 / iR-ADV C9070 , Model B : Models other than Model A
A: Execute, B: Not execute the operation if it is already executed with the paper interval adjustment count. C: Normally not execute due to no synchronous. .
A
B
B
A
A
A
ACR toner ejection
A
B
B
Low Duty toner ejection*8
ATR(patch formation)*4
Black band sequence
Cleaning of Primary Charging Wire
A
B
Drum idle rotation
Drum/Developing Assy idle rotation
A
C
C
C
Image position correction*6
ARCDAT control
D-half control
D-max control
5
8
16
48
4
5
6
7
14
40
72
79
101
4
65
84
-
4
7
14
46
3
4
5
6
13
35
67
73
93
3
61
77
-
Potential control
Full correction (Settings/Registration)

Quick correciton (Settings/Registration)
Warm-up rotation auto adjustment (Power ON)
Model B
Auto adjustment of last rotation (after job completion)
Accumulation of 112*1
Depending on average image Duty*5
Depending on average image Duty*5
Full correction
Quick correction
Fixing temperature is less than 100 deg. C.
Total 2000-sheet from previous D-half control
Fixing temperature is 100 deg. C or higher.
Model A
Auto adjustment of paper interval (during job execution)
Condition*7
(In case of plain paper)
Time required
(second)*3
Adjustment name
*10
*11
*12
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
A
A
A
B
B
A
B
B
B
B
B
*13
*14
*15
*16
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
*17
A
A
A
A
A
A
Foregoing controls are not performed.

A
A A A A A A
A A A
A A A
Foregoing controls are not performed.
A
A
T-2-58
*1 Unit: Image
*2 Unit: Image Execute at the last rotation when exceeding the accumulation of image.
*3 Time indicated above does not include the transition time before starting the adjustment (delivery time of preceding paper, last rotation cleaning).
*4 Execute only when the conditions are fulfilled. As for the conditions, refer to the ATR Control. When the average image Duty is high, frequency increases.
*5 Operation may be executed when it is over 120 images(paper INterval) / 100 image (last latation).
*6 To be executed together with other adjustments. (At 1/2 speed and 1/3 speed, the control is executed when the number of papers fed reaches 1/2 or 1/3 of the stack capacity respectively.)
*7 When the length in feeding direction is longer than 215.9mm (LTR), count as 2 images. The same is true on the paper which size is larger than LDR (extra length paper size).
2-111
2-112
*8 Execute when the average image Duty is 1% and less (5% at high temperature).
*9 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD > ARC-INT1 :
Set of ARCDAT interruption interval <set range 0-1000(Def 100)>
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TRCLN2-P :
Set of ITB toner supply intvl: ppr intvl <set range 1-1000(Def 100)>
*10 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > PCHINT-2 :
To adjust the paper interval which patch detection is performed by ATR control. (2nd limit)<set range 100-500(Def 200)>
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > INTROT-1 :
To set the paper interval to execute process auto adjustment (analog patch sequence, etc.) at initial/last rotation. <set range 50-1000(Def 200)>
*11 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > INTPPR-1 :
To set the paper interval for automatic cleaning of the Primary Charging Wire and Pre-transfer Charging Wire.<set range 0-9999(Def 4000)>
*12 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > DEVL-VTH :
To set the threshold value of the image duty, which is the condition to perform the low duty toner ejection sequence. <set range 1-5(Def 1)>
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > DEVL-PTH :
To set the threshold value of the total duty, which is the condition to perform the low duty toner ejection sequence.<set range 50-250(Def 100)>
*13 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD > ARC-INT2 : T
o set the number of sheets which ARCDAT control is not executed, from the start of a job.<set range 0-1000(Def 25)>
*14 COPIER > OPTION/IMG-FIX > PCHINT-1 :
To adjust the paper interval which patch detection is performed by ATR control. (1st limit)<set range 25-200(Def 50)>
*15 COPIER > OPTION/IMG-FIX > TRCLN1-P :
At last rotation, the toner band formed on the ITB is removed by the ITB Cleaning Blade to decrease the friction between them. <set range 1-1000(Def 70)>
*16 COPIER > OPTION/IMG-LSR > CHG-INT :
To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which discharge current control for Y, M, and C is executed at last rotation. <set range 0-10000(Def 400)>
*17 COPIER > OPTION/CLEANING > W-CLN-P :
To set ON/OFF of automatic cleaning of the Primary Charging Wire and Pre-transfer Charging Wire.<set range 50-10000(Def 2000)>
2-112
D-maxPASCAL Control
2-113
1. Measuring the bright section potential
This control is performed to correct the target density for D-max control.
A halftone image (test print) created by the DC controller is formed on the photosensitive
drum.
At the time of PASCAL control (1st page in test print)
While changing the laser emission time (PWM control) by 16 levels (halftone), the potential
For Bk
The DC controller calculates the laser emission time and the bright section potential (VL)
Main Controller
DC Controller
sensor measures the bright section potential.

according to the measurement result.
Drum
Potential (V)
PG
(Vd=)V0
Potential Sensor
Encoder
Vcont
V1
V2
V3
V4
Reader
PG
Paper
Density data
F-2-161
V5
V6
V7
V8
V9
VA
VB
VC
VD
VE
VF
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Light emitting time

F-2-162
2-113
2. Measuring the patch density
2-114
3. Determining the target density "Vcont" for D-max control
A halftone image (test print) created by the main controller is printed.
The bright section potential "VL_target" needed to obtain the target density (1.45) is
While changing the laser emission time by 16 levels, a halftone image is formed.
calculated based on the two characteristics calculated in the above-mentioned procedure.
The halftone image is read by the reader and reported to the DC controller.
Potential (V)
The DC controller calculates the laser emission time and the characteristics of the density.
Vd
Density
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
VL_target
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Light emitting time

F-2-163
1.45
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
Light emitting time
1.6
1.8
Density
F-2-164
2-114
The target density "Vcont" for D-max control is calculated based on VL_target.
2-115
For Color
Vcont=Vd-VL_target-Vback
Main Controller
Vd: Bright section potential
DC Controller
Vback: Voltage to remove fogging in copy operation
Lp
Vd
Potential changes depending

on laser emission
ITB
Patch
Sensor
PG
Vg
Vd
Vback
Vdc
Vg : Grid potential
Vd : Dark area potential
VL : Light area potential
Vdc : Developing DC potential
Vcont : Contrast potential
Vback : Fogging removal potential
Reader
Target Density
PG
Vcont
Paper
VL
F-2-165

COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VCONT-K: display setting value of Bk contrast potential
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VRATE-K: display Vd gain value in Bk specified by
D-maxPASCAL
COPIER>OPTION>FUN-SW> DMX-DISP: ON/OFF of D-max PASCAL control at the time of
auto gradation correction
F-2-166

1. Measuring the patch density
A solid image (test print) created by the main controller is printed.
The solid image is read by the reader and reported to the DC controller.
The DC controller determines the laser power and the charging DC bias so that the density
of 1.45 can be obtained.
2. A patch is formed on the ITB based on the determined laser power and charging DC bias,
and read by the patch sensor.
2-115
2-116
Potential Control (Bk)
3. The DC controller PCB memorizes the read density as the target density.
A potential on the photosensitive drum surface changes due to factors of static latent images
Laser power
such as deterioration in sensitivity of the photosensitive drum and environmental changes,

etc., even when the same voltage is applied.
Changes due to factors of static latent images are corrected by potential control so that stable
printing operation is performed.
In potential control, a laser power where the target contrast potential (Vcont) is obtained
is determined by measuring a potential while changing laser power (Lp) after charging the
photosensitive drum surface with a uniform potential.
<Execution timing>
Charging DC bias
At the time of post-rotation automatic adjustment (on accumulated 1000-image basis)

At the time of warm-up rotation automatic adjustment (fixing temperature is less than100
deg C/Total 2000-sheet from previous D-half control)
1. Determining the grid bias (Vg_target)
Vg_target is the grid bias required to set the target potential on the drum surface (approx.
-650V) to Vd_target. Vd_target varies depending on the environment and process speed.
Vd_rgh is the result of measurement by the potential sensor when Vg_rgh=Vg_target-100
(V) is applied to the primary grid plate.
The grid bias Vg_target is determined based on the ratio of this measurement result and
the target potential.
Vg: Vd=Vg_target: Vd_target=Vg_rgh: Vd_rgh
Vg_target=Vd_target*Vg_rgh/Vd_rgh
F-2-167
Test Print
For automatic gradation correction, test print is performed to 4 sheets. Dmax-Pascal control
is performed, using 1 out of these 4 sheets.
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT >VRATE-Y/M/C: display Vd gain value specified by D-max
2. Determining the laser power (Lp) and the developing DC bias (Vdc)
Exposure is performed while changing the laser power (Lp) by 8 levels (H40 to HB0), and a
potential in the bright section (VL) is measured by the potential sensor.
The laser power (Lp) where the target contrast potential (Vcont) can be obtained is
determined.
VL=Vd_target+(Vcont*+Vback*)
*Determined by D-maxPascal control and the environmental table
2-116
2-117
D-max Control (Only for Y/M/C)
V
Vg_target
This control is performed to determine the charging DC bias (Vd), the developing DC bias
Vd_target
(Vdc), and the laser power (Lp) so that the target density determined by D-maxPascal control
can be obtained.
VcontVback
At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation (For every 15000 images on an
accumulation basis)
At the time of PASCAL control (User mode > Automatic gradation correction > Quick
correction)
At the time of recovery from a jam (Fixing temperature at lower than 100 degree C)
Patch Sensor
(PS21)
ITB
Lp
H40 H50 H60 H70 H80 H90 HA0 HB0
F-2-168
NOTE:
When the laser power (Lp) where the target contrast potential (Vcont) can be obtained
is not available, set the laser power (Lp) by increasing Vd_target and performing Steps
1 and 2 again.

E061: error in potential control
To Primary Charging Assembly / To Developing

Cylinder
Charging Roller
Vd
Primary Charging
High Voltage PCB
(UN37 / UN38)
Vdc
Developing
High Voltage PCB
(UN40)
To Laser
Scanner Unit
Lp
COPIER>DISPLAY >DPOT> LPWR-K: display laser power (Bk)

COPIER>DISPLAY >DENS>DEV-DC-K: display developing DC voltage (Bk)
CMY CMY
Laser Interface PCB

(UN100)
COPIER>DISPLAY > HV-STS >PR-GRI-K: display the primary charging assembly grid
voltage
CMY
Patch image data

D-max Control
DC Controller Interface PCB(UN2)

F-2-169
COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC: execute potential control

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW>PO-CNT: ON/OFF of potential control function
2-117
2-118
D-half Control
Startup
This control is performed to determine appropriate image gradation.
DC Controller PCB (UN1)

Patch pattern formation
At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation (For every 15000 images on an
accumulation basis)
At the time of PASCAL control (User mode > Automatic gradation correction > Quick
Patch Sensor (PS21)

Patch reading
correction)
Photosensitive Drum
Density
Patch
Y10
Target
Y2
Y1

D-max correction table
creation (Y,M,C)
Y3
Patch Sensor
(PS21)
ITB

Vdc
Decide Vd, Vdc, Lp

F-2-170

COPIER>DISPLAY >DPOT> LPWR-Y/M/C: display laser power
COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW>INTROT-2: setting for execution timing of post-rotation auto
gradation correction
10 Blocks
Laser
COPIER>DISPLAY >DENS>DEV-DC-Y/M/C: display developing DC voltage

Laser Scanner Unit
Video data
Laser Interface PCB(UN100)
Screen 3
Screen 2
Bk C M Y
Screen 1
Video data
D-half Control

Density data
Patch image data

F-2-171
2-118
2-119
ARCDAT Control
This control is performed to realize ideal gradation characteristics while attempting to
Startup
decrease downtime.
Output of patch pattern data
At the time of automatic adjustment of paper interval (For every 112 images)
At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation (Every 28 images)
DC Controller
Interface PCB (UN2)
(Y)D-half correction table
Actual gradation
characteristics
100
Y9
Y10
Patch pattern is created
Photosensitive Drum
Patch Sensor (PS21)
Patch Sensor
(PS21)
Patch reading
ITB
Density data (D-CON)
DC Controller
Interface PCB (UN2)
Y2
Y1
Ideal gradation
characteristics
100
0
Data output (MNCON)
Output of density data

D-max correction
table is created(Y,M,C,Bk)
Laser
100
DC Controller
Interface PCB (UN2)
Ideal gradation
characteristics
Laser Scanner Unit
Density data (D-CON)
Output the patch

pattern for ARCDAT
Screen3
Screen2
Bk
C M Y
Screen1
Video data
Laser Interface PCB(UN100)
Patch Sensor(PS21)
Gradation correction
characteristics
Video data
Patch reading
ARCDAT Control
100
0
Data output (MNCON)

Density data
ARCDAT target density value
Patch image data

F-2-173
F-2-172
COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW> DH-SW: ON/OFF of automatic D-half control

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW> DH-TMG: setting for execution interval of D-half control
COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW>INTROT-2: setting for execution timing of post-rotation auto
gradation correction
2-119
2-120
PASCAL Control
Startup
This control is performed to stabilize characteristics of image gradation density.

DC Controller PCB
When "Automatic gradation correction =>Full correction" is selected in the user mode, this
control is executed. The patch pattern printed by test print is read by the reader, and an
Patch pattern formation
image density correction table is created.
Patch Sensor (PS21)
This enables to correct characteristics of image gradation density caused by environmental
Patch pattern scanning
changes and deterioration of the photosensitive drum.
DC Controller PCB
Measurement data (A) transmission
During execution of "Automatic gradation correction =>Full correction" in the user mode
Main Controller
25
10
10
Main Controller
40
100
Data output(D-CON)
Offset value (alpha) determination

(i.e., difference between A and A)
Main Controller
Reflected to
gradation characteristic
table step by step
100
Data output(MNCON)
Density data(D-CON)
Comparison of measurement data (A)

and reference data (A)
Gradation correction
characteristics
50
25
0
10
25
NOTE:
Test Print
1st page: D-maxPASCAL test pattern (Y/M/C: 32-patch, Bk: 64-patch)
2nd page: Test pattern for copy operation (64-patch for each color)
3rd page: Test pattern for photo (64-patch for each color)
4th page: Test pattern for text (64-patch for each color)
Current gradation
characteristics
COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW> DMX-DISP: ON/OFF of D-max PASCAL control at the time of

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW>PASCAL: setting to use/not to use the auto gradation correction
Data input(MNCON)
F-2-174

COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C> TGT-A/B/C-Y/M/C/K: display of target value for each color of
data
COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW>PSCL-MS: selecting the target process speed executing the
ARCDAT screen A/B/C

COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C> SUM- A/B/C-Y/M/C/K: display control difference for each color of
ARCDAT screen A/B/C
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C> SGNL- A/B/C-Y/M/C/K: display patch current value for each color
of ARCDAT screen A/B/C
COPIER>OPTIN>FNC-SW>ARC-INT1: setting for the number of sheets to be interrupted in
ARCDAT (100)
COPIER>OPTIN>FNC-SW>ARC-INT2: setting for the number of sheets to execute at the
time of ARCDAT post-rotation (28)
2-120
Discharged Current Control (CL)
<Automatic Gradation Correction>

Main Controller PCB
PASCAL
DC Controller
This control is performed to obtain an appropriate discharged current according to
Drum
temperature/humidity changes.
PG
1st Sheet
(D-maxPASCAL)
When the charging AC bias (Vpp) is increased, the field is changed from a non-discharge
UN
field to a discharge field. When an AC bias in the discharge field is applied in addition to the
Potential Sensor
BK
Vcont
DC bias, the charging condition becomes stable, but, unless the discharged current volume
Reader
reaches the specified level, it causes an image failure. To prevent it, this control is performed
PG
Paper
ITB
PG
CL
2-121
Vd
Lp
to determine a charging AC current value so that a constant discharged current volume is

secured.
Target
Density
PS
Patch Sensor
At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation (Every time when 400 images are
printed on an accumulation basis).
Reader
At the time of warm-up rotation automatic adjustment .
PG
Paper
Reader
LUT
2nd 4th Sheet
(Gradation
PASCAL)
PG
Standard data
for D-half
PG
Paper
Target
Density Value
Standard data
for ARCDAT
PS
Patch Sensor
PG
Target
Density Value
PS
Patch Sensor
- 10 blocks
- 3 screen x 4 color
- 1 block
- 3 screen x 4 color
F-2-175
2-121
2-122
1) 3 AC biases (Vpps) are output in the non-discharge field, and 3 AC biases (Vpps) in are
output in the discharge field, which totals 6 Vpps. Then, the current value (I) is detected by
the developing high voltage PCBs (UN39 to UN42).
Current monitor signal
*Determined according to the environment.

4) The primary charging bias is corrected so that the current, which runs to the charging roller,
Primary charging AC bias
level* is found, and the current value "I_target" against the Vpp_target is determined.
A difference in these two lines is a discharged current volume.

3) The AC bias (Vpp_target) where the discharged current volume reaches the specified
discharge field.
Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Color) (UN38)
2) The graph of the "VPP" and "I" values is created in each of the non-discharge field and the
becomes the current value I_target determined by discharge current control.

Current
I_target
Discharge current
F-2-177

COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>PRIACV-Y/M/C: display discharge current control setting
Non-discharge area
Discharge area
Vpp
Vpp
F-2-176
voltage
COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>PRISMP-Y/M/C: display sampling point of discharge current
control
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>DISCHG: execute discharge current control
COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW>CHG-INT: setting for the number of sheets to execute at the
time of discharge current control post-rotation
2-122
ATR Control
This control is performed to supply developer so that an ideal ratio of the toner and carrier (T/
2-123
COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS> DENS-S-Y/M/C/K: display patch density created by ATR control
D ratio) can be obtained in the developing assembly.
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P> ATR-EX: forced execution of ATR
Timing of Activation
COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW>PCHINT-2: adjustment of ATR patch interval (the 2nd limit)
COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW>PCHINT-1: adjustment of ATR patch interval (the 1st limit)
a. Control of the supply volume by video count: Executed for each print during printing
b. Correction by the toner density sensor for the developing assembly: Executed for each
print during printing
c. Correction by the patch sensor
At the time of power-on (Fixing temperature at lower than 100 degree C)
Toner Feed Screw

Rotation Sensor
(PS9 / PS12 / PS15 / PS18)
Toner Supply
Screw
Hopper and Stirring
Supply Motor
Developing Cylinder
M6 M9 M12 M15
Last rotation auto adjustment (equivalent to 50 images on an accumulation basis or more

than 3-sheet of A4 size solid images with the accumulation video count)
Paper interval (equivalent to 200 images on an accumulation basis or more than 10-sheet
of A4 size solid images with the accumulation video count)
Toner Stirring Screw Developing Assembly

Developer is supplied to the developing assembly so that an ideal T/D ratio can be obtained.
The DC controller interface PCB (UN2) judges the toner supply volume based on the
following three types of data.
Toner Density Sensor

(TS1 / TS2 / TS3 / TS4)
DC Controller
Interface PCB
(UN2)
Video Count
Density Sensor Result
Patch Sensor (PS21)
Patch Sensor Result
Video count
Density sensor
F-2-178
Patch sensor
<ATR Patch Image>
When the DC controller interface PCB (UN2) judges that toner needs to be supplied, it drives
Color
Monochrome
the hopper stirring/supply motors (M6/M9/M12/M15) and rotates the toner supply screw to
supply toner into the developing assembly. When the number of rotations of the screw is
detected by the toner feed screw rotation sensors (PS9/PS12/PS15/PS18), the toner supply
volume can be detected.
Image
Bk
Image
Bk
F-2-179
2-123
Image Position (Color Displacement) Correction
2-124
<Patch>
This control is performed to correct color displacement caused by uneven irradiation by the
Pattern B
laser scanner unit or uneven rotation of the drum and ITB.
Pattern A
At warm-up rotation
1) At execution of control for the first time in the day
2) When temperature of the Laser Scanner Unit has decreased by 10 deg C since the last
Bk
Bk
Bk
execution of control
At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation(at the time of automatic adjustment
when the accumulated sheet count reached 1000 or more since the last image position
6 set
adjustment)
<Description of control>
6 set
Feed Direction
Base is the Bk pattern. Displacement level of patch pattern (each color) is detected and
F-2-181
image position is corrected.
Patch pattern to be used

Type of the control
ITB
Shutter
Registration
Patch Sensor (Rear)
(PS20)
Patch Sensor
(PS21)
Correction of the writing position in Change the timing of laser writing.

the main scanning direction
Correction of the writing position in Change the timing of writing in the sub
the sub scanning direction
scanning direction (TOP signal).
Change the rotation volume of the tilt
Correction of image tilt
correction motor.
Correction of the magnification in
Increase/decrease the number of pixels in
the main scanning direction
the main scanning direction overall.
Correction of the single
Partially increase/decrease the number of
magnification in the main scanning pixels in the main scanning direction.
direction
Patch pattern to
be used
B
Rear/Front
Rear/Front
Rear/Front
Rear/Front
Rear/Front/
Center
T-2-59
Registration Patch Shutter Solenoid

(SL1)
Registration Patch Sensor (Front)
(PS19)
Patch Sensor
Opposing Roller
Steering Roller
F-2-180
2-124
< Tilt >
Bk
< Vertical Scanning >
< Horizontal Scanning >
Feed Direction
Displacement amount
Feed Direction
< Magnification >
Feed Direction
Feed Direction
Displacement amount
Bk
Bk
Bk
Displacement amount : Bk
Y
Y
F-2-182
2-125
Bk
Bk
Displacement amount : Bk
Y
F-2-183
2-125
2-126
Primary Transfer ATVC Control
< Half magnification ratio >
This control is performed to determine an appropriate transfer bias to prevent a transfer
Image Clock
failure caused by environmental changes and durability variation of the primary transfer roller.
Adequacy
Two types of primary transfer ATVC are performed. One is the primary transfer full ATVC,
which is performed at the time of last rotation or initial rotation, and the other is the primary
transfer paper interval ATVC, which is performed in paper interval.
Distortion
Primary transfer FullATVC: to determine the primary transfer bias to run the target current
Primary transfer paper interval ATVC: transfer bias calculated by the primary transfer
Feed Direction
Y
FullATVC is corrected at paper interval to run the target primary transfer current
M
Bk
Primary Transfer Full ATVC

At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation (Every time 400 images are printed on
an accumulation basis)
At the time of multiple initial rotations (Fixing temperature at lower than 100 degree C)
Y
Bk
F-2-184
<Related Alarm Codes>

34-0001: when the patch sensors detection data exceeds the limit
34-0002: when the patch pattern failed to be detected
34-0003: when the detected number of the patches is insufficient
34-0004: when exceeding the correction range (limiter) of the skew correction motor
34-0005: when exceeding the correction range (limiter) of the write-start position in sub
(vertical) scanning direction
34-0006: when exceeding the correction range (limiter) of the magnification ratio in main
(horizontal) scanning direction
34-0007: when exceeding the correction range (limiter) of the write-start position in main
(horizontal) scanning direction
2-126
2-127
3. Obtaining the target voltage value
1. Determining the target current
The current value, which is obtained when "Irough" when "Vrough" is applied, is measured.
The target current "Itarget" is determined based on the temperature/humidity information
If "Irough" is larger than "Itarget", "Vc = Vrough - Ve (offset value)" is applied, and if it is
obtained from the absolute water volume (ENV1) and relative humidity (UN14/UN15).
smaller than "Itarget", "Vc = Vrough + Ve" is applied, and then the current "Ic" at that point
is measured.
When connecting the two points between "Vrough and lrough", "Vc and lc" with straight
2. Obtaining the approximate voltage value

The current value "la", which is obtained when the voltage "Va" considered close to the
lines, a line-shape graph of the first-order approximation is obtained.
target voltage "Vtarget" is applied, is measured.
The voltage value "Vtr" which corresponds to "ltarget" is obtained based on this graph.
If "la" is larger than the target current "Itarget", "Vb = Va - Vr (offset value)" is applied,
and, if it is smaller than "Itarget", "Vb = Va + Vr" is applied, and then the current "lb" at that
Current(A)
point is measured.
When connecting the two points between "Va" and "la", "Vb" and "lb" with straight lines, a
line-shape graph of the first-order approximation is obtained.
The voltage value "Vrough" which corresponds to "ltarget" is obtained based on this graph.
Ia
Ic
Itarget
Irough
Current(A)
Ib
Ia
Itarget
Vb
Vrough
Vtr
Vc Va
Voltage(V)
F-2-186
Please note that this control is only performed at 1/1 speed. At 1/2 speed and 1/3 speed,
Ib
calculation is performed by multiplying the transfer voltage by the rate at the time of
deceleration.
Vb
Vrough
Va
Voltage(V)
F-2-185

COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>1TR-DC-Y/M/C/K: display the primary transfer voltage
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>1ATVC-EX: execute the primary transfer ATVC control
2-127
2-128
Primary Transfer ATVC Control
Secondary Transfer Full ATVC Control
In printing
At the time of initial rotation
At the time of printing operation, sampling of a transfer current is performed between each
The same control as that for the primary transfer full ATVC is performed.
image. When the transfer current obtained in sampling is displaced from the target transfer
Please note that this control is performed for each of the 1/1 speed, 1/2 speed, and 1/3 speed
current, correction of the transfer current is performed.
and that a transfer voltage suitable for the process speed is determined.
Please note that this control is performed for each of the 1/1 speed, 1/2 speed, and 1/3 speed
and that a transfer voltage suitable for the process speed is determined.
Secondary Transfer Paper Interval ATVC

At paper interval
COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>1ATVC-Y/M/C/K,1ATVC-K1: display the primary transfer paper
The base voltage "Vb" is applied for every 1 out of 5 printed sheets, and sampling of a
interval current
transfer current is performed. When the transfer current obtained in sampling is displaced
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>1TR-DC-Y/M/C/K: display the primary transfer voltage
from the target transfer current, correction of the transfer current is performed.
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>1ATVC-EX: execute the primary transfer ATVC control
Secondary Transfer
High Voltage Sequence
Secondary Transfer ATVC Control
1st Sheet
2nd Sheet
3rd Sheet
4th Sheet
5th Sheet
6th Sheet
This control is performed to determine an appropriate transfer bias to prevent a transfer

failure caused by environmental changes and durability variation of the secondary transfer
roller.
Please note that the primary transfer DC bias is determined based on the sum of the base
voltage "Vb", which is determined by this control, and the paper shared voltage "Vp", which
differs depending on the paper type.
Two types of secondary transfer ATVC are performed. One is the primary transfer full ATVC,
Sheet interval
opposite bias
which is performed at the time of last rotation and initial rotation, and the other is the primary
transfer paper interval ATVC, which is performed at paper interval.
Secondary transfer FullATVC: to determine the secondary transfer bias to run the target
current
Secondary transfer paper interval ATVC: transfer bias calculated by the secondary transfer
FullATVC is corrected at paper interval to run the target secondary transfer current
Secondary transfer sheet

interval ATVC
F-2-187

COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>2ATVC-F1/2/3: display the secondary transfer ATVC target
current (full color)
COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>2ATVC-M1/2/3: display the secondary transfer ATVC target
current (monochrome)
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>2TR-PPR: display the secondary transfer ATVC paper shared
voltage
COPIER>DISPLAY> DPOT > 2TR-BASE: display the secondary transfer ATVC base voltage
2-128
Patch Sensor Adjustment
2-129
Sampling of the ITB Base
Correction of the light intensity in the patch sensor and sampling of the ITB base are
To prevent uneven reflection in the circumference of the ITB, sampling of the ITB base in one
performed so that desired patch reading performance can be obtained.
circumference is performed by the patch sensor in the condition where no patch is formed.
<Execution timing>
of the ITB base.
When an image is read by the patch, correction is performed based on the result of sampling
At the time of multiple initial rotations (Fixing temperature is less than100 deg C)
At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation.
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>PT-LPADJ> execute patch light intensity correction and base
Configuration of the Patch Sensor

Light emitted from the LED is reflected in the patch image and detected by a light reception
element.
The light is filtered into P-wave and S-wave by the polarizing filter so that light intensity is
detected by the light-received elements.
correction
COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS>P-LED-DA: display patch sensor LED light intensity
COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS>P-SENS-P: display base light intensity (P-wave) at the time of
ATR control
COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS>P-SENS-S: display base light intensity (S-wave) at the time of
Patch Sensor
Light receive
element
ATR control
Light receive
element
Light emitting
element
Drum Idling
Drum idling is performed to remove discharge products generated on the drum surface.
At the time of multiple initial rotations (Fixing temperature is less than100 deg C/Total
Polarizing Filter
Polarizing Filter

The machine rotates the drum without applying high voltage to the drum. Discharge products
on the drum are scraped by the drum cleaning blade.
P wave
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>MAIN-DRV: user mode Drum Cleaning, adjusting the
S wave
F-2-188
cleaning time
Adjustment of the light intensity

Light intensity is sequentially switched, using the ITBHP sensor (PS5) as a trigger, so that the
P-wave output becomes 3.5V.
2-129
2-130
Black band sequence
OHP Black Band Sequence
When printing continuously under the condition which toner is not delivered to ITB Cleaning
When the surface acting agent applied to the OHP surface is attached to the ITB during OHP
Blade, ITB Cleaning Blade might be flipped over, so the toner is transferred on the ITB (width
printing, the transfer efficiency in the attached area decreases. To prevent this problem, toner
= whole ITB width; length = 10mm solid black band; 2 ITB cycles with 100mm interval) and
(Width: Entire ITB length, Length: 80mm in 4C mode, 120mm in Bk mode) is supplied to the
supplied to the ITB Cleaning Blade.
ITB cleaning blade, and the acting agent and the toner are scraped by the ITB cleaning blade.
<Execution timing>
At the time of automatic adjustment of paper interval (For every 200 images)
Last rotation after more than 15 OHPs are printed on an accumulation basis
At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation (Fixing temperature is less than100 deg
Paper interval when 15 sheets are printed continuously after the previous execution
C/Total 2000-sheet from previous D-half control)
<4C Mode>
Bk
C
M
Y
<BK Mode>
Bk
10mm
100mm
10mm
80mm
100mm
100mm
10mm
100mm
F-2-190
10mm
COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW> OHP-PTH> setting the threshold (the number of transparency

(OHT) sheets) for ITB cleaning
F-2-189

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>TBLT-CLN: ITB cleaning
2-130
Low Duty Discharge Sequence
2-131
COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW> DEVL-VTH: setting of threshold for toner discharge video
This is performed to prevent a decrease of density caused by an increase in the toner

potential volume when low duty images are continuously printed.
count
toner discharge
COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW>DEVL-PTH: setting of threshold (the number of sheets) for
At last rotation or paper interval after printing specified numbers* of jobs which average
image Duty is lower than the specified value (default: 1%).
(Counting of the number of prints starts at the point when the conditions are satisfied.
When the number of prints reached the specified prints (20 prints), the job is
discontinued and the discharge sequence is executed.): A
* It differs depending on the average image duty.
<Examples>
When the average image Duty is 0.01%, execute toner ejection sequence at
100-sheet.
When the average image Duty is 0.5%, execute toner ejection sequence at 200-sheet.
When the average image Duty is 1.0% and higher, operation is not executed.
If the condition to execute discharging of a color is almost satisfied when the discharge
sequence is executed for another color, the sequence is executed for the two colors at the
same time. : B
When the above-mentioned conditions are satisfied, toner in a corresponding color is
transferred to the ITB.
In the case of A, an A4-size patch is transferred (With: 297mm, Length: 210mm).
In the case of B, an A4 half-size patch is transferred (Width: 297mm, Length: 205mm).
<In case of A>
In case Y/M is A
<In case of B>

In case Y is A and M is B
M
Y
F-2-191
2-131
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Consumable Parts
2-132
Servicing
Consumable Parts
Parts Name

Parts Name
Primary Charging Wire Cleaniner 1
Primary Charging Wire Cleaniner 2
Pre-transfer Charging Wire
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaniner 1
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaniner 2
Grid Plate
Grid cleaning pad
Primary Charging Assembly
Parts Number Piece

FL2-8915
FL2-7750
FL3-7560
FL2-8807
FL2-7750
FL3-7560
FC8-2295
FL3-4090
FM0-0892
FM0-0862
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Expected life
150,000 sheets
150,000 sheets
150,000 sheets
150,000 sheets
150,000 sheets
150,000 sheets
150,000 sheets
150,000 sheets
1,400,000 sheets
1,400,000 sheets
Parts Counter
PRM-WIRE
PRM-CLN
PRM-CLN2
PO-WIRE
PO-CLN
PO-CLN2
PRM-GRID
GRID-PAD
PRM-UNIT
PO-UNIT
Parts Number Piece
Developing Assembly(Y)
Developing Assembly(M)
Developing Assembly(C)
Developing Assembly(Bk)
FM0-2706
FM0-2707
FM0-2708
FM2-2709
1
1
1
1
Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk)
FC8-2281
Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk)
FL2-8652
Edge Scraper 1 (Bk)
FL2-8653
Edge Scraper 2 (Bk)
FL2-8654
ITB
ITB Cleaning Blade
FM4-6624
FL3-4920
FC0-2331
1
1
4

ITB Internal Scraper Holder
Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator
FC7-9325
FL3-9149
FL3-8693
FM3-9841
FM0-4545
1
1
1
1
1
T-2-60
*1 Replace it when the waste toner full alarm is displayed.
Expected life
Parts Counter
500,000 sheets
DV-UNT-Y
500,000 sheets
DV-UNT-M
500,000 sheets
DV-UNT-C
500,000 sheets
DV-UNT-B
A 530,000 sheets
B 550,000 sheets
CLN-BLD
C 500,000 sheets
A 530,000 sheets
B 550,000 sheets
SU-SHT-K
C 500,000 sheets
A 530,000 sheets
B 550,000 sheets EDGE-F-K
C 500,000 sheets
A 530,000 sheets
B 550,000 sheets
C 500,000 sheets
550,000 sheets
TR-BLT
200,000 sheets
ITB-BLD1
550,000 sheets
1TR-RL-Y/M/
C/K
550,000 sheets
2TR-INRL
550,000 sheets
ITB-SCRP
550,000 sheets
2TR-ROLL
550,000 sheets
TR-STC-H
50,000*1
WST-TNR
T-2-61
A : imaga RUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO/C7280i

B : imaga RUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270/C7270i
C : imaga RUNNER ADVANCE C7260 PRO/C7250i
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Consumable Parts
2-132
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Periodical Servicing List
2-133
Operation Interval
Drum Heater Sliding

Portion
Others
14
As needed
Clean it with lint-free paper.
500,000 sheets
13 Catch Sheet
150,000 sheets
Others
5 Registration Sensor
Paper Width
Detection Sensor
7 ITB Drive Roller
8 ITB Steering Roller
9 Post Upper Duct
As needed
Post-secondary
Transfer Sensor
Shield Plate
10 (Primary Charging
Assembly)
Shield Plate (Pre11 transfer Charging
Assembly)
Developing
12 Assembly Under The
Toner Rest Base
500,000 sheets
CL
Remarks
Remarks
When Replacing the Photosensitive Drum

CL CRG (Color)
Clean it with alcohol and lint-free paper.
When Replacing the Photosensitive Drum Unit
CL (Bk)
T-2-62
3 Pre-fixing Feed Belt
Installation
Each
1
150,000 sheets
Developing
1 Assembly Cover
(Color)
Developing
2 Assembly Cover
(Bk)
Piece
No. Parts/Area Name
Installation
No. Parts/Area Name
Operation Interval
Piece
CL: Cleaning, LU: Lubrication, AD: Adjustment, CH: Check
CL
Clean it with lint-free paper.

When Replacing the Secondary Transfer
CL Outer Roller
CL Outer Roller
Clean it with blower brush.
CL Outer Roller
CL Outer Roller
When Replacing the ITB/Secondary Transfer
CL Inner Roller
When Replacing the ITB/Secondary Transfer
CL Inner Roller
When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging
CL Wire
CL
When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire

When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging

CL Wire
When Replacing the Photosensitive Drum Unit
CL (Bk)
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Periodical Servicing List
2-133
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Major Adjustments

No.
1
Parts Name
No.
Processing at Parts Replacement
1) Execution of Charging Wire cleaning

(COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-EX)
Primary Charging Wire 2) Execution of potential control (COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC)
3)Creation of ITB edge profile (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INITITB)
Grid Plate
2) Execution of potential control (COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC)
1) Test print for checking the grid height is output to check the density
difference between front and back sides.
2) In case of uneven density: Adjust with Adjustment Screw.
In case of even density: Go to Procedure 3).
Primary Charging
3) Execution of Charging Wire cleaning (FUNCTION > CLEANING >
Assembly
WIRE-EX)
4) Execution of potential control (COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC)
Assembly
Wire
1) Disable (OFF) the warm-up rotation.
(COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>AINR-OFF)
2) Turn OFF the main power switch. (Replace the Drum.)
3) Turn ON the main power switch.
4) Forcible execution of Drum replacement mode
Drum Unit
(COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DRMRSETY/M/C/K)
5) Enable (ON) the warm-up rotation.
1) Disable (OFF) the warm-up rotation.
2) Execution of initial installation mode for Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly
(COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-Y/M/C/K
2-134
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Major Adjustments
Parts Name
Processing at Parts Replacement
1)Execution of Potential Sensor offset adjustment using the dedicated

When replacing the
tool (COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > OFST)
8 Potential Sensor and
2)Creation of ITB edge profile (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INITPotential Control PCB
ITB)
1) Execution of ITB edge profile/Steering Roller neutral position
9 ITB
measurement mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT-ITB)
Execute the primary transfer ATVC (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC10 Primary Transfer Roller
P>1ATVC-EX)
1) Enter patch sensor alpha value.(COPIER>OPTION>IMG-MCON>PALPHA)
11 Patch Sensor
2) Adjustment of Patch Sensor light intensity (COPIER > FUNCTION
>MISC-P > PT-LPADJ)
12 Waste Toner Container 1) Install a new Waste Toner Container.
13 Waste Toner Sensor
1) Install the Waste Toner Container.
T-2-63
Major Adjustments
Nothing particularly
2-134
Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Specifications
2-135
Fixing System
Specifications
Item
Fixing method
Fixing speed
Overview
Overview
By employing the first-in-class IH-ODF (Induction Heating On Demand Fixing Unit), the
fastest-in-class warm-up time and the top runner of TEC value been achieved.
IHODF
Heating the Fixing Film of low heat capacity with the IH (induction heating) method has
enabled the machine to shorten the warm-up time and achieve the TEC value top runner.
IH Unit
IH Coil
Shift Copper Plate
Fixing Film Unit

PS75
Fixing
Inner Delivery
Sensor
Fixing heater
Control
temperature
Fixing Film
Fixing Film
Electrical power
for heating
Thermistor
Fixing Film
Thermoswitch
PS70
Fixing Inlet
Sensor
Fixing Web Unit
Fixing Uunifiform Roller
Fixing Pressure Roller

F-2-192
Fixing Film
Pressure
Roller
Fixing Film
Separation
mechanism
Disengage mechanism
Cleaning mechanism
Paper Wrapping Prevention
Control
Fixing/pressure roller
displacement control
Edge heat rising prevention
control
Down sequence control
Fixing loop control
Protective Function
Function/method
IH-ODF fixing
iR-ADV C9280 PRO / 7280i
321 mm/sec (1/1 speed)
93.3 mm/sec (1/3 slow speed)
iR-ADV C7270 PRO / C7270 / C7270i / C7260 / C7260i
93.3mm/sec (1/3 speed)
32mm/sec (Standby)
IH Heater
Fixing temperature (Plain paper 1, environment temperature at
23 deg C)
- 174 deg C
1135W to 1500W
(It differs according to the region. See the following for region.)
Main Thermistor (contact)
Sub Thermistor 1 (contact)
Sub Thermistor 2 (contact)
Edge Thermistor 1 (contact)
Edge Thermistor 2 (contact)
1 pc (non-contact)
Separation plate (non-contact)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes(Detection by the Thermistor and the Thermo Switch)
T-2-64
Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Specifications
2-135
Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-136
Parts Configuration
Electric power for heating during printing differs according to the model.
Time
Model
1365 W (100 V imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO

machine)
machine)
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7280i
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7270
machine)
1248 W (120 V imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7270
machine)
1336 W (200 V imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7260
machine)
Country
Cross View
JP
[6]
US, CA, LTN, EU, AU, SG, CIPL, HK,

CN, TW, KR
EU
US, CA, LTN, AU, SG, CIPL, HK, CN,
TW,
EU
JP
JP
JP
US, CA, LTN, AU, SG, CIPL, HK, KR
US, CA, LTN, AU, SG, CIPL, HK, KR
EU
[8]
[2]
[7]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
T-2-65
[11]
Parts name
Fixing Film Unit
1 Fixing Film
2 Inner Core
3 Nip Pad
4 Nip Pad Holder
5 T Stay
IH Unit
6 IH Coil
7 Outer Core
8 Shift Copper Plate
IH Unit
9 Pressure Roller
10 Heat Soaking Roller
11 Web Unit
[10]
[9]
Function/method
F-2-193
30 mm dia. (Ni + silicon rubber + PFA tube)

To increase the heating efficiency of the Fixing Film
To form nip surface
To form nip surface
To form nip surface
To heat the Fixing Film
To increase the heating efficiency of the Fixing Film
To reduce temperature rise at non paper-feed area
dia. 30 mm (countercrown level: 200 micro meter)
dia. 22 mm (AL + PFA coated) To reduce temperature rise
at non paper-feed area
Cleaning the Heat Soaking Roller
T-2-66
Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-136
Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-137
Drive Configuration
Thermistor, Thermoswitch
THM15
M48
THM14
THM13
THM11
M56
PS73
TP2
PS110
THM12
PS100
Fixing Film Unit
PS75
PS70
Fixing Inlet Guide Unit
PS99
THM16
Symbol
Parts name
Fixing Film Unit

THM11 Fixing Main Thermistor
THM12 Fixing Edge Front
Thermistor
THM13 Fixing Sub Thermistor 1
THM14 Fixing Sub Thermistor 2
THM15 Fixing Edge Rear
Thermistor
TP2
Fixing Thermoswitch
Pressure Roller
THM16 Pressure Roller Thermistor
Function/method
PS102
F-2-194
Contact type (temperature control, overheating detection)

Contact type (overheating detection)
M55

M57
F-2-195
Non-contact type (253 deg C)

Non-contact type (temperature control)
T-2-67
2-137
M57
2-138
PS99
PS75
PS100
PS70
PS98
PS102
PS73
PS110
M55
M56
M48
Symbol
M48
M55
Parts name
PS75
PS98
PS99
Fixing Motor
Heat Soaking Roller
disengagement or engagement /
Web Motor
Outer Core Shift/Shift Copper Plate
Motor
Reciprocation Motor
Fixing Inlet Sensor
Fixing Pressure Engagement/
Disengagement Sensor
Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor
Outer Core Shift HP Sensor
Heat Soaking Roller HP Sensor
PS100
PS102
PS110
Web leve sensor
Semi-pressure Sensor
M56
M57
PS70
PS73
Function/method
F-2-196
To control the drive of Fixing/Pressure Roller

To control the drive of Heat Soaking Roller/Web
To control the drive of Outer Core Shift/Shift Copper

Plate
To control the drive of Fixing Recipro.
To detect fixing inlet jam
To detect Engagement/Disengagement position of
Fixing Film
To detect fixing outlet jam
To detect Outer Core position
To detect Heat Soaking Roller Engagement/
Disengagement position
To detect Fixing Unit Reciprocation position
To detect Web leve
To detect Fixing Film semi-engaged.position
T-2-68
2-138
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Overview
Controls
11 Paper dust removal

control
Overview
No.
Controls/Function
1 Heat control
2 Temperature Control
flying start
target control temperature table as a standard.

This control starts initial rotation of the image formation
system when temperature reaches the flying-start temperature
(which is slightly lower than the target temperature). This is
to minimize FPOT in consideration of the time that the paper
reaches the Fixing Unit after the initial rotation of the image
4 Paper interval control
formation system starts.

In case a paper interval is longer than the specified time, the
paper interval temperature control and the paper interval stop
control are executed according to the paper interval time.

5 Fixing Film engagement/ To improve jam removability and prevent deformation of the
Pressure Roller, the Fixing Film is put in a disengaged state, or

in a semi-engaged state in the case of envelops with 110 mm
6 Outer Core and Copper

Plate shift control
When continuously feeding paper while the Heat Soaking

Roller is engaged, it causes paper dust accumulated at the
front side of the Heat Soaking Roller and the web. Therefore,
Overview
IH (Induction Heating) method is used.
Temperature is controlled on the basis of a target temperature
calculation for each environment temperature according to the
3 Temperature control
2-139
or smaller width.
To prevent overheating at non paper-feed area, the position of
12 Mixed media/width
this control feeds the web longer to remove paper dust.

The control for mixed media or media with different paper
control
13 Down sequence
widths
There are the overheating down sequence, the down sequence
to prevent temperature rise of the Core Shift Motor, and the low
14 Fixing Internal Fan

control
temperature down sequence.

It executes ON/OFF control of the Center Fan and the Edge
Fan depending on the condition.
15 Fixing control when feeding Although envelops are normally fed at the same control
envelope
temperature and feeding speed as those of heavy paper 1 and 2,
envelops with 110 mm or smaller width are fed at the same feeding
speed as that of plain paper 1 and 2 under lowered pressure.
16 Paper Wrapping
This control prevents failure of the Fixing Assembly caused by
Prevention Control
paper wrapping around the Fixing Film and the Pressure Roller.
17 Heat Film Unit
To increase jam removability and improve feeding performance of
engagement/semienvelopes, the Heat Film and the Pressure Roller are engaged/
engagement/
semi-engaged/disengaged as needed
18 Protection function
Function to prevent damages to the machine
T-2-69
Copper Plate and the number of Outer Cores to be raised are

controlled at job start-up and during paper feeding according to
7 Heat Soaking
Roller engagement/
the paper width and the converted number of sheets.

To prevent overheating at non paper-feed area, the Heat
Soaking Roller is engaged with the Pressure Roller during
disengagement and web paper feeding at continuous jobs with a specific number of
feeding control
8 Reciprocation control
prints or more.
As a countermeasure against scratches on the edge of Fixing
Film, the whole Fixing Unit is reciprocated during paper
9 Extra-large paper
feeding.
When feeding extra large size plain paper and recycled paper
productivity up sequence with certain models, the productivity is increased in stages

10 Fixing cleaning control
according to the elapsed time since starting paper-feeding.

As a countermeasure against scratches on the edge of the
Fixing Film, cleaning is performed by feeding the web with the
Heat Soaking Roller engaged when a certain number of sheets
were fed while the Heat Soaking Roller was disengaged.
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Overview
2-139
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Temperature Control
2-140
Heat Control
Temperature Control
Overview
Overview
This machine uses the following heating method to enable high-speed full color print despite
Temperature is controlled on the basis of a target temperature calculation for each
the size of an office machine.
environment temperature according to the target control temperature table as a standard
Fixing Film: IH (Induction Heating) method
Temperature control level

Environment temperature
IH (Induction Heating) method
Process speed
Region
This is a method to self-heat the metal by electromagnetic induction.

Applying high-frequency AC power to the coil generates magnetic flux around it. Eddy current
flows in the metal as the magnetic flux passes through the metal, and the current flow in the
Control description
Standby
Level 0
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
temperature temperature temperature temperature temperature
control
control
control
control
Fixing Film Fixing Film Fixing Film Fixing Film Fixing Film
metal generates heat (Joule heat) in the metal part. This is called induction heating.
The Fixing Film of this machine has its metal part coated with silicone rubber so that the
Fixing Film is self-heated using this induction heating.
Flux
High-frequency
Current
Magnetic material
(Ferrite Core)
Thin paper
Plain paper 1
Plain paper 2
Recycled paper
1
Recycled paper
2
Heavy paper 1
Core
Coil
Coil
Exothermic
Heat
Metal
Eddy
Current
Core
F-2-197
179
Paper
Weight
(g)
169
170
185
174
184
194
199
189
177
187
192
182
177
187
192
182
52 to 63
64 to 81.9
82 to 105
64 to 81.9
180
194
187
187
82 to 105
175
185
185
185
Heavy paper 2
175
185
185
185
Heavy paper 3
170
180
180
180
Heavy paper 4
170
180
180
180
Coated paper
1A
Coated paper
1B
Coated paper
1C
Coated paper 2
166
186
186
186
166
186
186
186
166
186
186
186
166
186
186
186
Coated paper 3
166
186
186
186
Coated paper 4
166
186
186
186
Coated paper
5A
166
186
186
186
106 to
150
151 to
220
221 to
256
257 to
300
126 to
128
129 to
150
151 to
180
181 to
220
221 to
256
257 to
300
105 to
128
2-140
Standby
Level 0
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
control
control
control
control
Fixing Film Fixing Film Fixing Film Fixing Film Fixing Film
Coated paper
5B
Coated paper
5C
Transparency
179
166
186
186
2-141
Paper
Weight
(g)
186
166
186
186
186
176
186
186
186
Temperature coefficient by paper type

Thin, Plain, Recycled
Heavy, Coated, Transparency
1.00
1.33
T-2-71
129 to
150
151 to
180
-
When the environment temperature exceeds 30.0 deg C

The control temperature in the 30.0 deg C environment is used.
Level 0 and 1 temperature controls for plain paper 1
When the environment temperature is lower than 7.5 deg C
When the environment temperature is 7.5 deg C or higher and lower than 17.5 deg C
Reference target temperature table (15 deg C environment, PS280, JPN)
The control temperature with linear interpolation performed between the control
temperature in the 7.5 deg C environment in Formula (1) and the control temperature in the
Control description
17.5 deg C environment in Formula (2) (which is described later) is used.
This control changes control temperature according to the paper position and the converted
number of sheets to keep a constant amount of heat applied to the paper.
When the environment temperature is 7.5 deg C or higher and 24.0 deg C or lower The
target temperature is calculated by the formula below.
Temperature control level

From the start of temperature control to the paper type
determination
From the paper type determination to one second before
the top paper reaches the fixing nip
From one second before the top paper reaches the fixing
nip until the converted number of sheets is 999
Converted number of sheets: From 1000 to 1499
Converted number of sheets: 1500 or more
Standby temperature Control
[The control temperature for environment temperature x] =

[Reference temperature] - ([Environment temperature x] - 15) x [Temperature coefficient by
Level 0 control temperature
paper type] ... (Formula (2))
Low temperature offset

T-2-70
Environment temperature
The reference temperature (temperature control table of 15 deg C environment, PS280, JPN)
is offset according to the environment temperature.
Other than plain paper 1
When the environment temperature is 7.5 deg C or higher and 30.0 deg C or lower
The target temperature is calculated by the formula below.
The A4 width or smaller
Larger than the A4 width
16
When the environment temperature exceeds 24.0 deg C

*For Level 0 temperature control with the A4 width or smaller only, 5 deg C is added to the
target temperature calculated above.
* In any environment, the target temperature calculated in Formula (1) is used when the
target temperature calculated in Formula (1) is lower.
Process speed (PS)
[The control temperature for environment temperature x] =
For the PS321mm/s model (image RUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO/C7280i), the target
[Reference temperature] - ([Environment temperature x] - 15) x [Temperature coefficient by
temperature is set 4 deg C higher than that of the PS280mm/s model (iR-ADV C7270 PRO/
paper type] ... (Formula (1))
C7270/C7270i/C7260/C7260i).
Note that the control temperature of coated paper 1 to 4 (93.3 mm/s) with the same PS uses
the same control temperature of the PS280mm/s model.
2-141
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Paper interval control
2-142
Region
To support paper with poor fixing performance used outside Japan, the target temperature of
plain paper 2 for the USA and EUR is set 8 deg C higher.
The flying-start temperature is calculated by the formula below.
Temperature control sequence startup operation
[Flying-start temperature] =
The following shows the temperature control sequence at startup.
[Flying-start temperature in the 15 deg C environment] - ([Environment temperature] - 15) x

[Environment temperature coefficient]
Core shift initial control

Heat Soaking Roller initial control
Film Unit engagement and disengagement initial control
Standby
temperature
control
The flying-start temperature in the 15 deg C environment
Level 0
temperature control
Last
rotation
control
Print temperature control
Startup temperature control
The flying-start temperature in the 7.5 deg C environment is used.

When the environment temperature is 7.5 deg C or higher and 30.0 deg C or lower
iR-ADV C9280 PRO/C7280i

164 deg C
iR-ADV C7270 PRO/C7270/

C7270i/C7260/C7260i
167 deg C
Main Thermistor detection temperature
T-2-72
Environment temperature coefficient

iR-ADV C9280 PRO/C7280i
iR-ADV C7270 PRO/C7270/

C7270i/C7260/C7260i
1.29
1.20
When the environment temperature exceeds 30.0 deg CT-2-73

The flying-start temperature in the 30.0 deg C environment is used.
Paper interval control

Fixing initial rotation time
30 sec after Main Switch ON

Main Switch ON
or
Print signal reception start
In case a paper interval is longer than the specified time, the paper interval temperature
Starts at a timing of whichever is earlier

when Environment Sensor is higher than 17.5 deg C
Print start
control and the paper interval stop control are executed according to the paper-interval time.
Print completion
Last rotation control in case of no print signal after Main Switch ON
F-2-198
Temperature control flying start

This control starts initial rotation of the image formation system when temperature reaches
the flying-start temperature (which is slightly lower than the target temperature). This is to
minimize FPOT in consideration of the time that the paper reaches the Fixing Unit after the
initial rotation of the image formation system starts.
The flying-start temperature is calculated as follows according to the environment
temperature.
Paper interval time

0 sec or more to less than 2 sec
60 sec or more
Paper interval control

None
Control temperature is reduced.
Temperature control is stopped for 1.9 sec.
T-2-74
Paper interval temperature control

When paper interval time is 2 sec or more and less than 10 sec, the target control
temperature is reduced at paper interval.
To be specific, when the preceding sheet passes through the Fixing Unit, the target
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Paper interval control
2-142
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Outer Core and Copper Plate shift control
temperature is changed to the Level 0 control temperature, which is specified based on the
paper type. The temperature is recovered to the normal target temperature 1 second before
the succeeding sheet comes into the fixing nip.
Paper interval stop control

When paper interval time is 10 sec or more, the temperature control according to the paper
interval time.
according to the paper interval time. When the temperature control is stopped, the machine
is at standby state while the Fixing Motor is stopped and the Film is engaged. The target
2-143
200V
Plain paper 2
Distance from paper edge
to Copper Plate
b(mm)
The
converted
number of
sheets
temperature is specified according to the succeeding sheet upon passage of time during
which temperature control is stopped, and then temperature control is resumed.
Fixing Film engagement/disengagement control

To improve jam removability and prevent deformation of the Pressure Roller, the Fixing Film
is put in a disengaged state, or in a semi-engaged state in the case of envelops with 110 mm
or smaller width.
Timing to shift to the engaged state
330 to
320 to
15
15
12
12
12
15
12
9
6
3
0 to
10 to
50 to
150 to
500 to
Paper width (mm)

265 to
210 to
15
12
9
5
5
15
12
9
5
3
155 to 100
15
12
9
5
3
T-2-75
Level 1 low temperature mode

to Copper Plate
b(mm)
The
converted
number of
sheets
0 to
10 to
50 to
150 to
500 to
1000 to
330 to
320 to
15
15
12
12
12
12
15
14
11
9
9
3
Paper width (mm)

265 to
210 to
15
14
11
9
9
7
15
14
11
9
9
5
155 to 100
15
14
11
9
6
5
At Power-on
T-2-76
At recovery from sleep state

At recovery from an error or jam
Timing to shift to the disengaged state

When an error or jam occurs
When shifting to sleep state
At power-off
At front Cover open
Other paper types

to Copper Plate
b(mm)
The
converted
number of
sheets
0 to
10 to
50 to
150 to
500 to
330 to
320 to
15
15
12
12
12
15
14
11
3
3
Paper width (mm)

265 to
210 to
15
14
11
7
7
15
14
11
7
5
155 to 100
15
14
11
7
5
T-2-77
Outer Core and Copper Plate shift control

To prevent overheating at non paper-feed area, the position of Copper Plate and the number
of Outer Cores to be raised are controlled at job start-up and during paper feeding according
to the paper width and the converted number of sheets.
The position of Copper Plate is determined according to the following table on the basis of the
power voltage, paper type, paper width and the converted number of sheets.
* It is configured such that moving the Copper Plate raises an appropriate number of Outer
Cores according to the position of the Copper Plate
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Outer Core and Copper Plate shift control
2-143
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Heat Soaking Roller engagement/disengagement and web feed controls
100V
Heat Soaking Roller engagement/disengagement and web feed
Plain paper 2
to Copper Plate
b(mm)
The
converted
number of
sheets
330 to
320 to
15
15
12
12
12
15
12
11
9
6
0 to
10 to
50 to
150 to
500 to
Paper width (mm)

265 to
210 to
15
14
11
7
7
15
14
11
7
5
controls
155 to 100
more.
In addition, when the Heat Soaking Roller is engaged, the web feed control is executed to
clean the Heat Soaking Roller.
Level 1 low temperature mode

to Copper Plate
b(mm)
0 to
10 to
50 to
150 to
500 to
1000 to
To prevent overheating at non paper-feed area, the Heat Soaking Roller is engaged with the
Pressure Roller during paper feeding at continuous jobs with a specific number of prints or
15
14
11
7
5
T-2-78
The
converted
number of
sheets
Heat Soaking Roller engagement timing

The Heat Soaking Roller is engaged at the point when the converted number of sheets
330 to
15
15
12
12
12
12
Paper width (mm)

320 to
265 to
210 to
15
15
13
9
9
3
15
15
13
9
9
7
15
15
13
9
9
5
exceeds the specified value.

155 to 100
The converted number of sheets to make the Heat Soaking Roller engaged is determined
according to the following table.
15
15
13
9
9
5
T-2-79
Other paper types

to Copper Plate
b(mm)
The
converted
number of
sheets
0 to
10 to
50 to
150 to
500 to
330 to
320 to
15
15
12
12
12
15
15
13
3
3
Paper width (mm)

265 to
210 to
15
15
13
9
9
15
15
13
9
7
155 to 100
15
15
13
9
7
T-2-80
* The control temperature in low temperature mode becomes the control temperature in high
temperature mode from the level 2 temperature control or later; therefore the Cu shift table
becomes uniformly the same as that of the high temperature mode.
2-144
Thin paper
Plain paper 1
Plain paper 2
Recycled paper
1
Recycled paper
2
Heavy paper 1
Heavy paper 2
Heavy paper 3
Heavy paper 4
Coated paper
1A
Coated paper
1B
Coated paper
1C
Coated paper 2
Coated paper 3
Coated paper 4
Heat Soaking
Roller
engagement
timing
(the converted
number of
sheets)
Paper Weight
(g)
27
27
27
27
52 to 63
64 to 90
91 to 105
64 to 90
27
91 to 105
27
27
Not engaged
Not engaged
Not engaged
106 to 150
151 to 220
221 to 256
257 to 300
106 to 128
Not engaged
129 to 150
Not engaged
151 to 180
Not engaged
Not engaged
Not engaged
181 to 220
221 to 256
257 to 300
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Heat Soaking Roller engagement/disengagement and web feed controls
2-144
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Extra-large paper productivity up sequence
Reciprocation control
Heat Soaking
Roller
engagement
timing
(the converted
number of
sheets)
Paper Weight
(g)
27
106 to 128
27
129 to 150
27
151 to 180
27
Coated paper
5A
Coated paper
5B
Coated paper
5C
Transparency
2-145
As a countermeasure against scratches on the edge of Fixing Film, the whole Fixing Unit is
reciprocated during paper feeding.
To be specific, reciprocation is executed by 0.15 mm whenever the paper's trailing edge
passes through the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
When feeding 13-inch paper, however, the Fixing Unit is returned to the HP position and there
will be no reciprocation.
M57
Reciprocation
Motor
T-2-81
To prevent overheating, when the temperature of
any of the thermistors exceeds 220 deg
C for 0.5 sec or more, the Heat Soaking Roller is made to be engaged regardless of the
converted number of sheets.
Heat Soaking Roller disengagement timing
PS100
Reciprocation
Reciprocation HP
Shaft
Sensor
When the Heat Soaking Roller is engaged, the engaged state remains until the job is
completed. After the job completion, the roller shifts to be disengaged at the timing when the
converted number of sheets becomes 0.
Web feed control
F-2-199
Extra-large paper productivity up sequence

Limited to plain paper and recycled paper of image RUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270
To clean the Heat Soaking Roller, this control counts the number of sheets fed while the Heat
(100V machine) and image RUNNER ADVANCE C7260 PRO/C7260i and when feeding
Soaking Roller is engaged, and feeds the web every time the counter is advanced by 2. The
extra-large paper (12 inch, SRA3, 13 inch), the productivity is increased in stages according
web length to be fed is 0.008 mm when feeding paper at normal speed while 0.016 mm when
to the elapsed time since starting paper-feeding.
feeding paper at at 1/2 speed. The web is not fed when feeding paper at 1/3 speed because
Target models: image RUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270 (100V machine), image
the Heat Soaking Roller is not engaged. Note that the count of sheets is executed based on
RUNNER ADVANCE C7260 PRO/C7260i

Target paper types: Plain paper 1, Plain paper 2, Recycled paper 1, Recycled paper 2
the table below.

Length in vertical scanning Number
direction
of sheets
215.9 mm (LTR) or shorter
Longer than 215.9 mm (LTR)
1
2
T-2-82
Color productivity: image RUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270 (100V machine)

0 sec (paper
feeding starts)
12inch
304.8457.2
SRA3
320450
13inch
330.2482.6
120 sec
300 sec
19.4
22.9
28.3
18.2
22.1
28.8
16.4
20.0
26.8
T-2-83
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Extra-large paper productivity up sequence
2-145
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Paper dust removal control
Black & White productivity: image RUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270 (100V machine)
0 sec (paper
feeding starts)
12inch
304.8457.2
SRA3
320450
13inch
330.2482.6
120 sec
300 sec
21.1
24.9
33.1
19.9
24.1
33.6
17.9
21.8
12inch
304.8457.2
SRA3
320450
13inch
330.2482.6
120 sec
T-2-87
Cleaning operation
When feeding paper at normal speed and at 1/2 speed
exceeding 100.
300 sec
33.1
19.9
24.1
33.6
17.9
21.8
31.3
T-2-85
Black & White productivity: image RUNNER ADVANCE C7260 PRO/C7260i
12inch
304.8457.2
SRA3
320450
13inch
330.2482.6
1
2
Cleaning operation is executed when the last rotation is started with the counter value
24.9
120 sec
215.9 mm (LTR) or shorter

Longer than 215.9 mm (LTR)
31.3
21.1
0 sec (paper
feeding starts)
Length in vertical scanning Number

direction
of sheets
T-2-84
Color productivity: image RUNNER ADVANCE C7260 PRO/C7260i

0 sec (paper
feeding starts)
2-146
300 sec
21.1
24.9
33.1
19.9
24.1
33.6
17.9
21.8
31.3
T-2-86
Fixing cleaning control
The web is fed after the Fixing Motor is driven at normal speed and the Heat Soaking Roller
is engaged. The web is fed for 0.016 mm at intervals of 1.5 sec repeatedly for 5 times. The
counter value is reduced by 100 when the web feeding is completed.
When a job is introduced during cleaning operation, the cleaning is stopped to immediately
start the job. The machine memorizes how many times the web-feeding was executed at that
time, and then executes the remaining web-feeding operation at the next last rotation.
When feeding paper at 1/3 speed
When the counter value exceeds 100, the Heat Soaking Roller shifts to be engaged while
paper is fed, and then the web-feeding is executed. The web is fed at the point when paper
passes through the fixing nip, with the web length to be fed being 0.032 mm, and the number
of web-feeding being 5 times.
When the job is completed during cleaning, the remaining web-feeding operation is executed
at the last rotation. The operation at that time is the same as that when feeding paper at
normal speed and at 1/2 speed.
Paper dust removal control

When continuously feeding paper while the Heat Soaking Roller is engaged, it can cause
paper dust accumulated at the front side of the Heat Soaking Roller and the web. Therefore,
As a countermeasure against scratches on the edge of the Fixing Film, cleaning is performed
this control feeds the web longer to remove paper dust.
by feeding the web with the Heat Soaking Roller engaged when a certain number of sheets
To be specific, the number of sheets continuously fed while the Heat Soaking Roller is
were fed while the Heat Soaking Roller was disengaged..
engaged is counted, and the web is fed for the length equivalent to 800 sheets of LTR (approx.
3.2 mm) when the number of sheets fed reaches 2,000. The counting method for the number
Condition to start cleaning

Cleaning is executed when the counter shows 100 or more by counting the number of sheets
of sheets fed is the same as that of the normal web feed control. Note that there is no normal
web feed control during web-feeding operations by the paper dust removal control.
fed while the Heat Soaking Roller is disengaged. The count of sheets is executed based on
the table below. When the paper is fed while the Heat Soaking Roller is engaged, the counter
value is reduced based on the table below.
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Paper dust removal control
2-146
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Mixed media/width control
Mixed media/width control

Mixed media
Thin paper
the following control is executed when the media is switched according to the difference in
the media's control temperature.
When the control temperature is higher after media is switched
The control temperature is switched t sec before the paper, which is used after media
switching, reaches the fixing nip. The timing to switch control temperature is determined
based on the following table.
+25 to
+15 to +19
+10 to +14
+5 to +9
0 to +4
t (sec)
6
4
3
2
0
Paper Type
100
Has information
of "X+n"th sheet come?
z productivity
Thin paper
45
Recycled paper 1
215.9
Recycled paper 1
50
Recycled paper 2
215.9
Recycled paper 2
50
Plain paper 1
215.9
Plain paper 1
50
Plain paper 2
215.9
Plain paper 2
50
Heavy paper 1
215.9
Heavy paper 1
50
Heavy paper 2
215.9
Heavy paper 2
50
Heavy paper 3
215.9
Heavy paper 3
50
Heavy paper 4
215.9
Heavy paper 4
50
Coated paper 1
215.9
Coated paper 1
50
Coated paper 2
215.9
Coated paper 2
50
Coated paper 3
215.9
Coated paper 3
50
Coated paper 4
215.9
Coated paper 4
50
Yes
By increasing paper intervals, it controls to make the paper, which is used after media
switching, reach the fixing nip t sec after the paper, which was used before media switching,
passes through the fixing nip. The control temperature is switched at the point when the
paper before media switching passes through the fixing nip. Paper interval time is determined
based on the following table.
t (sec)
0
0
0
2
2
No
Heat generation width according

to paper size of top (Xth) sheet
Is paper size of top (Xth) sheet

bigger than previous sheet?
No
Yes
Edge Thermistor - Center Thermistor >/= W deg C

Small size
Paper Type
Thin paper
Width of large size > ymm
z productivity
-20
Recycled paper 1
-5
Recycled paper 2
15
Plain paper 1
10
Plain paper 2
15
Heavy paper 1
20
Heavy paper 2
30
Heavy paper 3
30
Heavy paper 4
30
Coated paper 1
30
Coated paper 2
30
Coated paper 3
30
Coated paper 4
30
Paper Type
When the control temperature is lower after media switching
0 to -4
-5 to -9
-10 to -14
-15 to -19
-20 to
y productivity
Yes
No
Yes
Edge TH
- Center TH >/= W deg C
Yes
No
Image priority mode
WW productivity
Yes
Thin paper
155
Recycled paper 1
175
Recycled paper 2
210
Plain paper 1
195
Plain paper 2
210
Heavy paper 1
200 in NN
Heavy paper 2
200 in NN
Heavy paper 3
200 in NN
Heavy paper 4
200 in NN
Coated paper 1
190 in NN
Coated paper 2
200 in NN
Coated paper 3
200 in NN
Coated paper 4
200 in NN
Paper Type
No
Width of large size

- Width of small size >/= zmm
Edge Thermistor >/= WW deg C

Last rotation mode
T-2-88
Difference
in control
temperature
During printing
Width of large size - Width of small size >/= zmm
Large size
Width of large size > ymm

Large size
Paper Type
In the case of a job with mixed media (e.g.: Thin paper => Plain paper 1) fed at normal speed,
Difference
in control
temperature
2-147
Waiting in last rotation mode

Film engagement rotation
Heat Soaking engagement
Edge Fan ON
No
WW High-resolution
Thin paper
130
Recycled paper 1
150
Recycled paper 2
190
Plain paper 1
160
Plain paper 2
200
Heavy paper 1
170 in NN
Heavy paper 2
190 in NN
Heavy paper 3
190 in NN
Heavy paper 4
190 in NN
Coated paper 1
150 in NN
Coated paper 2
190 in NN
Coated paper 3
190 in NN
Coated paper 4
190 in NN
No
Fixing with 0s wait time
Edge TH < WW deg C
Yes
Large size job start
IH ON
Center Fan ON
&
Pickup stop
No
Edge TH >/= Ceter TH -25 deg C
Yes
Pickup start
(Center Fan follows Center Fan control)
F-2-200
T-2-89
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Mixed media/width control
2-147
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Down sequence
2-148
Down sequence
Media with different paper widths

Whenever paper passes through the fixing nip, the Outer Cores and Copper Plate are moved
according to the paper with maximum paper width among the 4 sheets of succeeding paper.
When the paper data of succeeding 4 sheets has not been notified, the paper interval is
controlled to make the succeeding sheet reach the fixing nip 6 seconds after the preceding
one by moving the Outer Cores and Copper Plate according to the paper with the maximum
paper width among the sheets whose data has been notified.
When the paper width is switched from small to large, pickup is stopped until the temperature
at the edge of the Fixing Film reaches below the specified temperature based on the flow
chart below.
Down sequence to avoid overheating

It controls to prevent the Fixing Unit from being overheated to an overheating error
temperature even in the case of a wrong size/weight setting or double feeding.
IH Heater OFF control
When the Main Thermistor detects 240 deg C or higher or when the Edge Thermistor detects
250 deg C or higher, the IH Heater is turned OFF to continue paper feeding. Then, the IH
Heater is turned ON again when the Main Thermistor detects lower than 230 deg C while the
Edge Thermistor detects lower than 240 deg C.
Large size job after a small size job

In the case of executing a job with large-width paper after executing a job with small-width
paper, pickup operation is kept waiting until the temperature at the edge of the Film reaches
above the specified temperature according to the flow chart below.
Productivity down control

When the Main Thermistor detects 240 deg C or higher or when the Edge Thermistor
detects 250 deg C or higher, the machine reduces its productivity as Down Level 1. At that
moment, the temperature should be reduced because the IH Heater OFF control is executed
simultaneously; however, when the Main Thermistor detects 240 deg C or higher, or the Edge
Thermistor detects 250 deg C or higher after the heater is turned ON again, the Down Level
Job start
is increased by 1 to further reduce productivity The step above is repeated until it reaches
Down Level 4. When Down Level is increased, it will not shift to the next Down Level unless 2
or more sheets of paper are fed in the existing state. Productivity is back to the normal state
when the job is completed.
Size of last paper for previous job

> size of first paper for next job
&
Edge TH < Center TH - 25 deg C
No
Yes
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Productivity
23.53 %
17.64 %
11.76 %
7.84 %
T-2-90
Center Fan ON
&
Pickup stop
Edge TH >/= Center TH - 25 deg C
Down Level
No
Yes
Pickup start
(Center Fan follows Center Fan control)
F-2-201
2-148
2-149
(The first 5 sheets are ignored)
Job start
Default x=0
Edge TH >/= 250 deg C

or
Center TH >/= 240 deg C
No
Low temperature down

sequence
Yes
IH OFF
Down Level x=0?

or
Number of sheets fed
with Pstx >/= two-sheet
x=x+1
Outputs at Down Level x
No
Yes
2s Over
(Edge TH >/= 260 deg C
or
Center TH >/= 250 deg C)
Environment Low
temperature temperature
is 7.5 deg C
down
or higher
sequence 1
Environment Low
temperature temperature
is less then
down
7.5 deg C
sequence 2
Yes
No
Edge TH < 240 deg C
and
Center TH < 230 deg C
Job completion?
Yes
6 sheets 30 sheets 100sheets

to
to
to
300 sheets 1,000 sheets

to
to
20 deg
C
20 deg C 20 deg C
20 deg C
13 deg C
12 deg
C
12 deg C 12 deg C
12 deg C
12 deg C
T-2-91
ppm is lowered when the temperature of the Fixing Unit is below the above value as against
the target temperature of the Fixing Unit (refer to the following table).
IH ON
No
0 sheets
to
No
Yes
E001
(High temperature error)
The
converted
number of
sheets
Job completion?
Yes
No
Job completion
F-2-202
Down sequence to avoid temperature rising of Core Shift Motor

In the case of handling media with different paper width, the Outer Cores and the Copper
The following values are deducted.
Delta PPM
Paper length feed direction (mm)

to 216
216.1 to 431.8 431.9 to 630
Initial
Initial
Initial
630.1 to
Initial
ppm0.25
ppm0.25
ppm0.25
The lower limit of PPMn is the initial ppm x 0.25.
ppm0.25
T-2-92
Plate are frequently moved, which can cause temperature rising of the Core Shift Motor.
Therefore, the machine reduces its productivity when the average current value of the Core
Shift Motor in the past 40 sec was 0.12A or more. Productivity is calculated by the formula
below.
[Productivity] = [Current productivity (ppm)] x 0.12/[Average current value in the past 40 sec]
Productivity is updated every 40 sec. Productivity is back to the normal state when the job is
completed.
Low temperature down sequence

Depending on the conditions of output restriction at low pressure, low temperature
environment, large paper weight, etc., this machine has the down sequence to prevent fixing
failure caused by reduced temperature due to power shortage
2-149
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Fixing Internal Fan control
Fixing Internal Fan control
During printing
(operating with initial PPPM0)
Number of sheets fed > 5?
2-150
Center Fan control
No
Yes
Meets all of the following
Power voltage Vin right before IH is ON >/= Rated voltage VXa
Environment temperature Tenv >/= 12.5 deg C
Paper type = Thin, Plain 1, Plain 2
Yes
No
Environment Temperature >/= 7.5 deg C
Yes
No
Center TH <
Detects Control temperature
with offset - Tds 2 deg C
for 1 sec or more
Center TH <
Detects Control temperature
with offset - Tds 1 deg C
for 1 sec or more
No
Yes
No
Yes
Outputs PPM0
Outputs with
PPMn=PPM0 -PPM0
Job completion?
No
Paper interval adjusted?
No
Yes
FM16
Pressure Film
Cooling Fan (Rear)
Outputs the last PPM0 to Red1s
Yes
Follows paper interval fixing control
as Adjusted time-Paper interval of PPMn
Time to judge paper
interval temperature control
Paper Interval
Temperature Control
or
Paper Interval Stop?
FM27
Pre-fixing Feed
Cooling Fan
Job completion
FM15
Pressure Film
Cooling Fan (Front)
Yes
No
No
F-2-204
The ON/OFF control is executed based on the table and flow chart below.
Number of sheets fed with PPMn

>/= two-sheet
Yes
Center TH <
Detects Control temperature with offset
- 5 deg C for 1 sec or more
Paper
Paper
Thin paper
width (mm) length The number of To stop when
(mm) sheets to stop temperature
the Center Fan
difference
during paper
between the
feeding
edge and the
center reaches
X deg C.
No
Yes
No
Center TH <
Detects Control temperature with offset
- Tds 1 deg C for 1 sec or more
Yes
PPMn=PPMn -PPM
No
Outputs with PPMn=PPM0 -PPM0
PPM depends on Vin (table 1)

Vin=V-Vin
V: Rated voltage
Vin: Power voltage right before IH is ON
PPMn </= 0.25xPPM0
Yes
PPMn=0.25xPPM0
Number of sheets fed with PPM0

>/= two-sheet
No
Yes
F-2-203
Postcard
STMTR
A5R
B5R
A5
A4R
LTRR
LGL
100
139.7
148
182
210
210
215.9
215.9
148
215.9
210
257
148
297
279
356
Stopped
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Recycled paper
The number of To stop when
sheets to stop temperature
the Center Fan difference
during paper between the
feeding
edge and
the center
reaches X
deg C.
Stopped
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
2-150
Paper
Paper
Thin paper
width (mm) length The number of To stop when
(mm) sheets to stop temperature
the Center Fan
difference
during paper
between the
feeding
edge and the
center reaches
X deg C.
B5
B4
EXEC
16K
8K
LTR
LDR
A4
A3
1218
1219.2
SRA3
1319
257
257
267
270
270
279.4
279.4
297
297
304.8
304.8
320
330.2
182
364
184
390
195
216
432
210
420
457.2
487.7
450
482.6
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
500
500
500
500
500
500
Stopped
Stopped
0
0
0
0
0
-2
-2
-2
-2
-5
-5
-
2-151
Recycled paper
feeding
edge and
the center
reaches X
deg C.
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
Stopped
Stopped
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
-
Paper
Paper
width (mm) length
(mm)
EXEC
16K
8K
LTR
LDR
A4
A3
1218
1219.2
SRA3
1319
267
270
270
279.4
279.4
297
297
304.8
304.8
320
330.2
184
390
195
216
432
210
420
457.2
487.7
450
482.6
Plain paper 1
Transparency
The number of
sheets to stop
the Center Fan
during paper
feeding
To stop when
temperature
difference
between the
edge and the
center reaches
X deg C.
Stopped
Stopped
Stopped
Stopped
Stopped
Stopped
Stopped
Stopped
Stopped
Stopped
Stopped

feeding
edge and
the center
reaches X
deg C.
5
5
5
2
2
2
2
Stopped
Stopped
Stopped
Stopped
5
5
5
0
0
0
0
T-2-94
T-2-93
Paper
Paper
width (mm) length
(mm)
Postcard
STMTR
A5R
B5R
A5
A4R
LTRR
LGL
B5
B4
100
139.7
148
182
210
210
215.9
215.9
257
257
148
215.9
210
257
148
297
279
356
182
364
Plain paper 1
Transparency
The number of
sheets to stop
the Center Fan
during paper
feeding
To stop when
temperature
difference
between the
edge and the
center reaches
X deg C.
Stopped
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
Stopped
Stopped
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-

feeding
edge and
the center
reaches X
deg C.
Stopped
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
2-151
2-152
Edge Fan control
Power-on or
Print signal ON
The ON/OFF control is executed based on the flow chart below.
ToControl temperature is calculated

from temperature table
During paper feed job
Film Temperature </= 200 deg C?

&
(Moisture content >/= 0g?)
No
Yes
Paper Type=Unknown
or Thin or Plain1 or Recycled1 or OHP?
&
(Paper Width >/= 100mm?)
No
No
Yes
Edge Fan OK
Yes
Center Fan ON?
Yes
No
No
Printing Paper Width </= 215.9mm?
Edge MIN - Center TH

Temperature > 0 deg C

Temperature </= -2 deg C
Yes
Center
Cooling Fan OFF
Yes
Center
Cooling Fan OFF
Center
Cooling Fan ON
Temperature control offset

at center cooling
TtgtTo

at center cooling
TtgtTo -X deg C
Yes
No

or
Edge TH-Center TH >/= 25 deg C

at center cooling
TtgtTo
Yes
Within 1 sec after paper

enters nip?
Within 1 sec after paper
enters nip?
Yes
Yes
No
Edge Cooling Fan ON
Printing Paper Width </= 215.9mm?
No
No
Yes
Edge TH < 220 deg C
&
Edge TH-Center TH < 20 deg C
Yes
No
Yes
Edge Cooling Fan ON
Edge Cooling Fan OFF
No
Edge TH < 230 deg C
No
Yes
No
Edge Fan ON?
No
No
Job completion?
Center Fan ON condition?

Refer to table
(Paper Type=Thin or Plain1 or Recycled1 or OHP)
(Paper Width)
Yes
Yes
No
Number of sheets product < N2?
No
During paper feed job
Yes
F-2-206
Center Fan ON?
No
Edge Cooling Fan control after job
Yes
Temperature > Toff2 deg C
No
Yes

Temperature </= Ton2 deg C
To prevent image failure when feeding large-width paper after continuous feeding of small-
No
width paper, the machine reduces temperature at non paper-feed area by blowing air with
Yes
Center
Cooling Fan OFF
Center
Cooling Fan ON

at center cooling
TtgtTo

at center cooling
TtgtTo -T2 deg C
the Edge Fan after completion of the job with small-size paper. When the following job is
introduced while this control is executed, the machine immediately stops the cooling operation
to start the job.
The control description is described in the flow chart below.
Center
Cooling Fan OFF

at center cooling
TtgtTo
Print completion?
Yes
No
Completion
F-2-205
2-152
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Fixing control when feeding envelope
2-153
Fixing control when feeding envelope
Print completion
Although envelops are normally fed at the same control temperature and feeding speed as
IH OFF
Core shift HP
those of heavy paper 1 and 2, envelops with 110 mm or smaller width are fed at the same
feeding speed as that of plain paper 1 and 2 under lowered pressure.
Paper is fed while the Fixing Film is semi-engaged.
Paper is fed at normal speed (note that the productivity is the same as when feeding paper
Printed paper width </= 300mm?

&
Accumulated number of sheets
for previous job >/= 50 sheet
at 1/2 speed)
No
The control temperature is the same as that of plain paper 2.
Yes
Edge TH Temperature F or R
>/= 180 deg C?
Related error code

Insufficient temperature increase at power-on
No
E000-0001/0101
Yes
Abnormal temperature rising

E001-0001/0002/0003/0011/0012/0013/0014/0015/0102/0103/0111/0112/0113
Edge Cooling Fan ON
Insufficient temperature increase

E002-0002/0003/0004/0005/0006/0102
No
Moisture content >/= 15g?
Fixing Motor Stop

(Heat Soaking Roller and Fixing Film remain engaged)
Abnormal low temperature
Yes
E003-0001/0002/0003/0004
Fixing Motor Normal Speed Rotation

(Heat Soaking Roller and Fixing Film remain engaged)

Output temperature of Fixing Thermistor
COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG>FIX-UC/UE/LC/UC2/UC3/UE2
Fixing control temperature change
Edge TH Temperature F and R

</= 180 deg C?
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-FIX>TMP-XXX
No
XXX-1:Immediately before printing
Yes
XXX-2:During printing
=P1-1/P1-2(plain paper 1 print fixing film temperature control))
=P2-1/P2-2(plain paper 2 print fixing film temperature control)
=R1-1/R1-2(Recycled paper 1 print fixing film temperature control)

=R2-1/R2-2(Recycled paper 2 print fixing film temperature control)
Fixing Motor stop
=H1-1/H1-2(Heavy paper 1 print fixing film temperature control)

Standby
F-2-207

=C1A-1/C1A-2/C1B-1/C1B-2/C1C-1/C1C-2/C2-1/C2-2/C3-1/C3-2/C4-1/C4-2/C5A-1/C5A-2/
C5B-1/C5B-2/C5C-1/C5C-2(Coated paper print fixing film temperature control)
=THIN1/THIN2(Thin paper print fixing film temperature control)
=OHT-1/OHT2(Transparency print fixing film temperature control)
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Fixing control when feeding envelope
2-153
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Heat Film Unit pressure/semi-pressure/disengagement control
Paper Wrapping Prevention Control
2-154
Detection of remaining paper

The Fixing Inlet Sensor (PS70) executes detection of remaining paper to prevent wrapped
Overview
This control prevents failure of the Fixing Assembly caused by paper wrapping around the
paper from being forgotten to be removed at recovery from fixing paper wrapping jam.
Fixing Film and the Pressure Roller.
Control description
This machine uses a sensor to detect paper wrapping around the Heat Film or Pressure
Roller to assume a paper wrapping state
Sensor name
Fixing Inner Delivery
Sensor (PS75)
Condition
Detection condition
The paper's leading edge wraps

Delay in paper feeding -> Detection
around the Heat Film or the Pressure by PS75
Roller.
T-2-95
The DC Controller performs the following remedies once a paper wrapping is detected.
PS70
1. The brake is applied to the Fixing Motor to immediately stop operation of the Fixing Motor. (to
minimize the paper wrapping level).
F-2-209
Heat Film Unit pressure/semi-pressure/disengagement control
2. The Heat Film Unit is Pressure Release from the Pressure Roller.
Overview
3. A jam is displayed. (Jam code: PS75 = 0110)
To increase jam removability and improve feeding performance of envelopes, the Heat Film
applies pressure/semi-pressure to and disengages from the Pressure Roller as needed.
Execution timing
Applying pressure: Printing
Applying semi-pressure: Envelopes
PS75
Releasing pressure: At paper jam, at sleep state or at power-off
Control description
The Pressure Film is pressured/released by the drive of the Fixing Pressure Release Motor
(M47).
1) When the Fixing Pressure Release Motor (M47) rotates clockwise, the drive of the Motor
F-2-208
rotates the Pressure Cam.

2) Rotation of the Pressure Cam lifts the Pressure Film Unit.
3) Lifting of the Film Unit releases the nip pressure with the Pressure Roller.
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Heat Film Unit pressure/semi-pressure/disengagement control
2-154
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Protection function
2-155
Displaying the rotation time equivalent to the time when the Fixing Film Unit is at standby
COPIER>DISPLAY>FIXING>BLT-TM to 8/BLT2-TM 1 to 8
IH Unit
* To be displayed based on the process speed (321, 280, 160, 140, 107, 93, 32 mm/sec)
Displaying the accumulated number of sheets fed through the Fixing Unit
PS73
COPIER>COUNTER>FIXING>FX-CNT
PS110
* The accumulated number of sheet fed (converted into small-size sheet) is displayed.
Protection function
M48
Overview
The protection function of this machine prevents damages to the machine from the following
2 elements.
Abnormal temperature rising of Fixing Film
Fixing Film displacement
Pressure
Pressure Release
Roller Gear
Half Pressure
Detachment
Abnormal temperature rising

1 Power shutdown by CPU
2 Shutdown by hardware circuit
3 Power shutdown by the
Thermoswitch operation
Relay drive OFF => DC12V power shutdown

IH drive I/F OFF => IH drive circuit OFF
Relay drive OFF => +12V shutdown
IH drive I/F OFF => IH drive circuit OFF
Thermoswitch OFF (253 deg C) => DC12V power shutdown
Fixing Film displacement

F-2-210
Pressure/disengagement detection
4 Detection by Thermistor
Detection by temperature difference between the Edge Sub

Thermistors (front and rear)
T-2-96
Whether the Film Unit releases/applies pressure is detected by the Fixing Pressure Release
Sensor (PS73) and the Semi-pressure Sensor (PS110).
Related Error Code

Pressure Unit pressure release error
E009-0500/0501/0502
*The Fixing Pressure Release Sensor (PS73) failed to detect engagement/disengagement of
the Pressure Film.
0500: Pressure Unit pressure release HP search error

Displaying the total number of sheets fed through the Fixing Unit
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-BLT-U
* The accumulated number of sheet fed (converted into small-size sheet) is displayed.
2-155
2-156
Error codes
Thermoswitch
E004
CPU
IH Coil
DC Controller PCB
-0215
+12V
Thermistor (Front)
Thermistor (Rear)
Main Thermistor
Sub Thermistor 1
Sub Thermistor 2
Voltage monitoring
circuit
Fuse
Thermistor
connection setection 1
(Main/Edge Front)
Thermistor
connection detection 2
(Sub 1/Sub 2/Edge Rear)
Hardware
protection circuit
ASIC
Circuit 1
Circuit 2
Fixing Feed Unit

close
Relay drive IF
Relay
Relay
IH drive circuit
IH
Power Supply
PCB
IH drive IF
F-2-211
Related Error Code

Error codes
E001
E003
-0301
-0401
-0501
-0502
-0702
-0000
E009
-0002
-0003
-0500
E840
-0001
Description
-0001 The temperature of Fixing Film Main Thermistor does not reach 120 deg C within
20 sec after the Fixing Film temperature control was started.
-0001 The Fixing Film Main Thermistor exceeds 225 deg C (hardware detection)
-0002 The Fixing Film Sub 1 Thermistor exceeds 225 deg C (hardware detection)
-0003 The Fixing Film Sub 2 Thermistor exceeds 225 deg C (hardware detection)
-0011 The Fixing Film Main Thermistor exceeds 250 deg C consecutively for 2 sec
(software detection)
-0012 The Fixing Film Sub 1 Thermistor detects beyond 250 deg C consecutively for 2
sec. (Software Detection)
-0013 The Fixing Film Sub 2 Thermistor exceeds 250 deg C consecutively for 2 sec
(software detection)
-0014 The Fixing Film Edge Rear Thermistor exceeds 260 deg C consecutively for 2
sec (software detection)
-0015 The Fixing Film Edge Front Thermistor exceeds 260 deg C consecutively for 2
sec (software detection)
-0001 The detected temperature of the Fixing Main Thermistor is 120 deg C or less
consecutively for 1 sec during paper feeding
E005
E008
Relay PCB
Fixing Assembly
E000
-0201
-0202
-0203
-0214
-0215
E841
-0001
E842
-0001
Description
Temperature difference between Sub 1 and Sub 2
Temperature difference between the Main and Sub 2
Temperature difference between the Main and Sub 1
Temperature difference between the Edge Front and the Edge Rear is 50 deg C
or more (Software Detection)
Temperature difference between the edges is changed by 20 deg C or more
during the sequence to check the Fixing Film
IH power supply error
12V error
Thermistor 1 connection error (Main/Edge Front)
Thermistor 1 connection error (Sub 1/Sub 2/Edge Rear)
IH power supply relay error (50V or more at power-off)
Absence of WEB (60,000 sheets after the Web Level Sensor is ON for 10
consecutive sheets)
Fixing Film Unit rotation time error 5,206 hours
Error in the number of sheets fed through the Fixing Film Unit 360,000 sheets
Fixing Film Unit engagement/disengagement HP search error The HP Sensor
cannot be detected within 5 seconds after starting HP detection.
1) When moving the Fixing Core/Shield Plate for initializing the Fixing Unit, HP
cannot be detected even if 200 seconds have passed since the moving started.
* The Fixing Unit is initialized at power-on, at recovery from sleep state, and at
recovery from jam.
2) When moving the Fixing Core/Shield Plate except for initializing the Fixing
Unit, HP cannot be detected even if 8 seconds have passed since the moving
started.
When the Fixing Film initial position checking sequence is executed, the HP
Sensor cannot be detected within 5 seconds after starting HP detection.
Reciprocation HP search error. The HP Sensor cannot be detected within 5
seconds after starting HP detection.
Heat Soaking Roller engagement/disengagement HP search error. The HP
Sensor cannot be detected within 10 seconds after starting HP detection.
T-2-97
2-156
Technology > Fixing System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-157
Servicing

When the foregoing counter clear is executed, the following item is cleared.

None
Consumable Parts
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Parts name
Fixing Film Unit
Pressure Roller Unit
Web Unit
Heat Soaking Roller
Heat Soaking Roller
Bearring
Parts Number
FM0-0413
FM0-0387
FC0-8030
FC0-7967
XG9-0810
Piece
1
1
1
1
2
Expected life
300,000 sheets
300,000 sheets
300,000 sheets
300,000 sheets
300,000 sheets
Remarks
DRBL-1 > FX-BLT-U
DRBL-1 > FX-L
DRBL-1 > FX-WEB
DRBL-1 > FX-UH-RL
T-2-98

None
Technology > Fixing System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-157
Technology > Fixing System > Servicing > Service Note
2-158
Major Adjustments
Service Note
Checking of nip width
None
If the paper wrinkle or fixing failure occurs, check whether the fixing nip width is within the
reference range.
However, fixing nip width of this machine cannot be checked in the field.
1) Set the paper to the Multi-purpose Tray. (plain paper, A4 or letter size)
2) Specify the paper size and the paper type.
3) Execute the fixing nip paper output in service mode.
4) Measure the nip width of output paper and check whether it is within the reference range.
< Reference value >
Center: 9.2 +/- 1.0 mm
Edge: 8.3 +/- 1.0 mm (at 5 mm from the edge)
If the nip width is not within the range, replace the Fixing Assembly.
Nip width
Edge
5 mm
Center
Edge
c
5 mm
Paper feed direction
F-2-212
Technology > Fixing System > Servicing > Service Note
2-158
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview
2-159
Pickup / Feed System

Overview
B&W 80 ppm, and color 70 ppm (for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO)
Adjustment of deck/cassette position is required. Image position can be adjusted in service mode on a paper source basis.
With gentle curve of the feeding path, face-down delivery and duplex print can be done with the following paper types.
- facedown delivery: 256 g/m2 or less
- 2-sided printing: 220 g/m2 or less
the curve of feed path
has been made gentler
Deck/cassette
position adjustment is
longer necessary
F-2-213
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview
2-159
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Specifications
2-160
Specifications
The following shows main specification for pickup feed system:
Item
Function/Method
Paper Storage Method

Pickup Method
Paper Feed Standard
Paper Loading Capacity
Front Loading Method

Separation Retard Method
Center
Left/Right Deck
1100 sheets
(normal paper: 80 g/m2, height: 115.5 mm)
Cassette 3/4
550 sheets
Multi-purpose Tray 100 sheets
Left/Right Deck
A4, B5, LTR
Cassette 3/4
A3, A4, A4R, B4, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17",
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR, EXE, K8, K16,K16-R
304.8 x 457.2 mm (12" x 18")
320 x 450 mm (SRA3)
330.2 x 482.6 mm (13" x 19")
Irregular size (139.7 x 182.0 mm to 330.2 x 487.7 mm)
Multi-purpose Tray Size that can be loaded to cassette, Postcard, Reply Postcard, 4 On 1 Postcard, Envelope,
Irregular size (100 x 148 mm to 330.2 x 487.7 mm)
Left/Right Deck
Normal Paper, Color Paper, Transparency, Heavy Paper, Bond Paper, Recycle Paper
Cassette 3/4
Normal Paper, Color Paper, Transparency, Heavy Paper, Bond Paper, Recycle Paper, Index
Paper
Multi-purpose Tray Normal Paper, Color Paper, Transparency, Heavy Paper, Bond Paper, Recycle Paper, Texture
Paper, Envelope, Labels, Postcard, Coated Paper, Tracing Paper
Left/Right Deck
52 g/m2 to 220 g/m2
Cassette 3/4
52 g/m2 to 220 g/m2
Multi-purpose Tray 52 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
(Coated paper: 106 to 300 g/m2)
Duplex
52 g/m2 to 220 g/m2
(Coated paper: 106 to 220 g/m2)
Left/Right Deck
Service Switching
Cassette 3/4
Auto size detection
Paper Size
Paper Type
Paper Grammage
Paper Size Switching
Multi-purpose Tray Depends on user

Duplex printing method Through path
Transparency detection Available
Remarks
-
Pickup until 630mm paper is possible by service

mode (*1) switch
Facedown Delivery: 256 g/m2 or less
B5/EXEC, A5R/STMTR can be switched in
Settings/Registration or service mode (*2).
T-2-99
*1: (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST (Display/hide of extra long document button)
Setting value
0: hide, 1: display
*2: Refer to Paper Size Detection (p. 2-174)
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Specifications
2-160
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts configuration
2-161
Parts configuration
Switch/Sensor 1
PS57 PS54 PS41 PS51
PS38
PS37
PS52
PS55
PS49
PS56
PS50
PS42
PS61
PS62
PS43
PS44
SW15
SW17
SW14
PS59
PS60
PS67
PS64
SW16
PS65
PS66
PS46 PS45 PS48 PS47
PS37
PS38
PS41
PS42
PS43
PS44
PS45
PS46
PS47
PS48
PS49
PS50
PS51
PS52
PS54
PS55
PS56
PS57
PS59
PS60
PS61
PS62
PS64
PS65
PS66
PS67
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor

Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1
Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1
Right Deck Pickup Sensor
Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor
Right Deck Paper Sensor
Right Deck Paper Height Sensor
Left Deck Pickup Sensor
Left Deck Upper Limit Sensor
Left Deck Paper Sensor
Left Deck Paper Height Sensor
Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor
Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor
Cassette 3 Paper Sensor
Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor
Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 1
F-2-214
2-161
2-162
Sensor 2
PS75 PS70 PS25 PS23 PS91 PS90 PS29 PS28
PS94,PS95
,PS96,PS97
PS111
PS31
PS30
PS26
PS32
PS27
PS33
PS53
PS24
PS34
PS58
PS40
PS63
PS68
PS23
PS24
PS25
PS26
PS27
PS28
PS29
PS30
PS31
PS32
PS33
PS34
PS35
PS40
PS53
PS58
PS63
PS68
PS70
PS75
PS90
PS91
PS94
PS95
PS96
PS97
PS111
Post-secondary Transfer Sensor

Duplex Sensor 1
Duplex Sensor 2
Duplex Sensor 3
Duplex Sensor 4
Registration Sensor
Transparency Sensor
Vertical Path Merging Sensor
Outer Delivery Sensor
Reverse Sensor
Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 1
Vertical Path Sensor 2
Left Deck Pullout Sensor
Fixing Inlet Sensor
Loop Sensor 1
Loop Sensor 2
Original Size Sensor 1
Outer Delivery Transparency Sensor
PS35
F-2-215
2-162
2-163
Roller
[28]
[27]
[25] [26]
[24]
[23]
[22]
[21]
[20]
[18]
[19]
[29]
[35]
[36]
[30]
[13]
[31]
[2]
[33]
[3]
[32]
[14]
[34]
[15]
[8]
[9]
[16]
[11]
[12]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[17]
[1]
[7]
[10]
F-2-216
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
[35]
[36]
Right Deck Pickup Roller

Right Deck Feed Roller
Right Deck Separation Roller
Left Deck Pickup Roller
Left Deck Feed Roller
Left Deck Separation Roller
Cassette 3 Pickup Roller
Cassette 3 Feed Roller
Cassette 3 Separation Roller
Vertical Path Roller 1
Left Deck Pull Out Roller
Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller
Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller
Multi-purpose Pull-out Roller
Registration Front Roller
Registration Roller
Pre-fixing Feed Belt
Fixing Film Unit
Pressure Roller
Inner Delivery Roller 1
Outer Delivery Roller
Outer Delivery Front Roller
Reverse Upper Roller
Reverse Lower Roller
Duplex Roller 1
Duplex Roller 2
Duplex Roller 3
Duplex Roller 4
2-163
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-164
Drive Configuration
SL2
M48
M35
M41
M34
SL4
M37
M32
M36
M54
M38
SL6
M40
M43
M42
SL5
SL7
SL8
M39
M32
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
M41
M42
M43
M44
M45
M48
M54
SL2
SL4
SL5
SL6
SL7
SL8
Duplex Left Motor

Registration Motor
Pre-fixing Feed Motor
Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray
Drive Motor
Delivery Motor
Reverse Motor
Cassette Vertical Path Motor
Right Deck Vertical Path Motor
Left Deck Vertical Path Motor
Left Deck Pickup Motor
Right Deck Pickup Motor
Cassette 3 Pickup Motor
Fixing Motor
Reverse Detachment Motor
Delivery Flapper Solenoid
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid
Right Deck Pickup Solenoid
Left Deck Pickup Solenoid
Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid
M44
M45
F-2-217
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-164
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Paper path
2-165
Paper path
[1] 1-side face-up delivery, duplex face-down
delivery
Delivery Flapper
[2] 1-side face-down delivery, duplex printing

Multi-purpose Tray
Pickup
[1]
Delivery
[4] 1-side face-down delivery
[4]
[2]
Reverse Flapper
[3] Duplex printing
Option Pickup
[3]
Left Deck Pickup
Right Deck Pickup

Paper path
Duplex Flapper
Cassette 3 Pickup
Cassette 4 Pickup
F-2-218
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Paper path
2-165
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Interval speed
2-166
Interval speed
(Unit: mm/s)
iR-ADV C9200
Series
Pickup to Registration Roller

Interval
Pickup Pullout
(Vertical
Path) Roller
Pullout
(Vertical
Path) Roller Registration
Roller
Except Multi-purpose
Tray
Multi-purpose Tray
iR-ADV C7200
Series
Re1/3
1/1
1/2
1/3
1/1
1/2
1/3 marks
Speed
Speed Speed Speed
Speed Speed Speed
Slow
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
323.6
161.8
107.9
94.1
282.2
141.1
94.1
642
642
642
642
642
642
Left Deck and

642
Cassettes 3/4
Right Deck
Paper Deck and POD
Deck Lite
Multiple Decks
750
Duplex
642
Multi-purpose Tray
323.6
750
642
161.8
280 to 642
280 to 750
750
642
107.9
750
642
94.1
750
642
282.2
750
642
141.1
750
642
94.1
T-2-100
F-2-219
2-166
2-167
Registration Control to Fixing Film
(Unit: mm/s)
iR-ADV C9200
Series
Interval
1/3
1/1
1/2
1/3
1/1
1/2
1/3
Speed
Speed Speed Speed
Speed Speed Speed
Slow
Registration Roller Before

600 *1
advancing to Secondary
280
750 *2
Transfer Roller
Before advancing to Secondary
Transfer Roller when passing
through the Secondary Transfer 323.6 161.8
Roller
When passing through
After coming out from
Secondary Transfer Roller Before advancing to Fixing
Roller
When passing through Fixing
Roller
iR-ADV C7200 Series
600 *1
280
280
107.9
94.1
282.2
141.1
750 *2
280
Remarks
When
pickup
from Multipurpose
Tray,
94.1 speed
does not
change.
280
321
160.5
107.0
93.3
280
140
93.3
321
160.5
107.0
93.3
280
140
93.3
321
160.5
107.0
93.3
280
140
93.3
T-2-101
*1: In the case of paper which length is longer than that of A4R, the feeding speed is 600 mm/
sec.
F-2-220
*2: In the case of B&W printing with A4R or smaller size paper, the feeding speed is 750 mm/
sec.
2-167
2-168
Fixing Film to Delivery
(Unit: mm/s)
iR-ADV C9200
Series
Interval
After coming out

from Fixing Film
- Until coming
out from Outer
Delivery Roller
1/3
1/1
1/2
1/3
1/1
1/2
1/3
Speed
Speed Speed Speed
Speed Speed Speed
Slow
FU Delivery:
Buffer Path Unit 642
not equipped
FU Delivery:
Buffer Path Unit 329.5
equipped
FD Delivery
642
(Before
*1
reversing)
FD Delivery
(After
642
reversing)
FU Delivery
321
Before coming
out the trailing
edge from Outer
Delivery Roller FD Delivery
- After coming
out the trailing
edge from Outer
Delivery Roller
iR-ADV C7200
Series
334
Remarks
164.8
109.8
95.8
642
143.8
95.8
164.8
109.8
95.8
287.5
143.8
95.8
321
321
93.3
642
*2
321
321
642
642
642
642
642
642
160.5
107
93.3
321
140
334
334
334
334
334
When
93.3 Buffer
Path
Unit is
installed,
334 speed
does not
change.
T-2-102
F-2-221
*1: In some cases, the feeding speed is 451 mm/sec.

2-168
2-169
Fixing Film to Secondary Transfer Roller
(Unit: mm/s)
iR-ADV C9200
Series
Interval
After coming out from Fixing

Film - Before reversing for
duplex
After reversing for duplex Registration Roller
Registration Roller - Before
advancing to Secondary
Transfer Roller
When passing through
iR-ADV C7200
Series
1/3
1/1
1/2
1/3
1/1
1/2
1/3
Speed
Speed Speed Speed
Speed Speed Speed
Slow
Remarks
642
*1
321
321
93.3
642
*2
321
321
642
642
642
642
642
642
642
600
*3
280
280
280
600
280
280
321
160.5
107.0
93.3
280
140
93.3
T-2-103

*3: In the case of B&W printing with A4R or smaller size paper, the feeding speed is 750 mm/
sec. In the case of paper which length is longer than that of A4R, the feeding speed is 600
mm/sec.
F-2-222
2-169
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Various types of control
2-170
Various types of control

Fixing Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Deck / Cassette Pickup Unit

Secondary Transfer
Unit
Registration Unit
Delivery Unit
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit
Multi-purpose Tray
Pickup Unit
Reverse Unit
Duplex Unit
Registration Unit
Secondary Transfer Unit

Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Unit
Delivery Unit
Reverse Unit
Deck / Cassette
Pickup Unit
Duplex Unit
F-2-223
Jam detection
Basic Movement
Pickup Preceding Control (Left Deck, Cassette 3/4, Multi-drawer
Paper Deck)
Speed Variable Control (Right Deck, Paper Deck, POD Deck Lite)
Deck/Cassette detection
Paper Size Detection
Paper Level Detection
Paper Detection
Lifter Control
Pickup Retry Control
Basic Movement
Paper Detection
Last Paper Detection
Registration Control
Registration Noise Reduction Control
Transparency detection
Paper Size Sensor
Basic Movement
Delivery Speed Reduction Control
Basic Movement
Reverse Flapper Movement
Reverse Detachment Control
Basic Movement
Duplex Flapper Movement
Circulation quantity and limit
Duplex Reverse Control
Jam Code List
Forced Paper Feed Control
T-2-104
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Various types of control
2-170
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Basic Movement
Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit
2-171
Cassette
Basic Movement
When Deck/Cassette is installed, Motor drives to maintain the height which paper surface
attaches to Pickup Roller (This is the height of Pickup Roller when Pickup Solenoid is OFF).
Cassette
Pickup Roller
M44
/M45
Cassette
Feed Roller
PS59
/PS64
If the Pickup Motor (M43/M42/M44/M45) is turned ON, the Pickup Roller will rotate and the
paper will be fed.
When the Pickup Sensor (PS49/PS54/PS59/PS64) detects paper, the Pickup Solenoid (SL5/
SL6/SL7/SL8) will turn ON, and Pickup Roller will draw away from paper surface.
Only 1 sheet of paper is sent to feed path by the Feed Roller and the Separation Roller, and
fed to Vertical Path Roller.
SL7
/SL8
Deck
M43
/M42
Cassette
Separation Roller
F-2-225
Deck Feed Roller

PS49
/PS54
NOTE: Related Service Mode

(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW>
DK1-TURN (ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Right Deck)
DK2-TURN (ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Left Deck)
DK3-TURN (ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Cassette3)
DK4-TURN (ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Cassette4)
Setting Value 0: OFF (Default), 1: ON
SL5
/SL6
Deck Lifter
Cassette Lifter
Deck Separation Roller

Deck Pickup Roller
F-2-224
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Basic Movement
2-171
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Speed Variable Control (Right Deck, Paper Deck,
POD Deck Lite)
Pickup Preceding Control (Left Deck, Cassette 3/4,
2-172
Speed Variable Control (Right Deck, Paper Deck,
Multi-drawer Paper Deck)
POD Deck Lite)
In order for the subsequent paper not to interfere the preceding paper at the registration
If pickup delays or too fast, feed speed will accelerate or decelerate.
control, the difference of pickup operation speed due to paper type, size and environment is
When the difference of pickup operation speed is corrected, in case of paper pickup from
corrected.
Right Deck, the distance from pickup to registration is short, so the pickup preceding control
After the sensor that detects each pickup position detects the paper leading edge, the
cannot be implemented. For this reason, this control is executed.
corresponding motor will stop temporarily in preceding pickup stop position.
Registration Roller
This control is performed on the second paper feeding and after.
Speed Variable
Area
Left Deck
M41 Pull-out Roller
M42
M36
5.7 mm
M40
PS53
PS58
Pickup Area
PS40
M43
57.8 mm
M39
Vertical Path
Roller 3
F-2-227
Pickup position
M44
Right Deck
M45
F-2-226
Pickup position
Left deck
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
Multi-drawer
Paper Deck
Sensor
Stop motor
Stop position
Left Deck Pull Out

Sensor (PS58)
Vertical Path
Sensor 2 (PS40)
Vertical Path
Sensor 2 (PS40)
Pullout Sensor
(Each Deck)
Left Deck Pickup Motor (M42)

Left Deck Vertical Path Motor (M41)
Cassette 3 Pickup Motor (M44)
Cassette Vertical Path Motor (M39)
Cassette Vertical Path Motor(M39)
Pickup Motor (Each Deck)
Pull-out Motor (Each Deck)
5.7 mm downstream from

the Left Deck Pull-out Roller
the Vertical Path Roller 3
the Vertical Path Roller 3
Pull-out Roller (Each Deck)
Paper Deck
POD Deck Lite
Detection sensor
(PS53)
Deck Pull-out Sensor (Paper
Deck)
Deck Pull-out Sensor (POD
Deck Lite)
T-2-105
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Speed Variable Control (Right Deck, Paper Deck,
POD Deck Lite)
Pickup speed
Slower than 500 mm/s
Faster than 500 mm/s
Faster than 500 mm/s
Faster than 500mm/s
The speed after passing

500 to 642 mm/s
280 to 500 mm/s
500 to 750 mm/s
280 to 500 mm/s
500 to 750 mm/s
280 to 500 mm/s
T-2-106
2-172
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Deck/Cassette detection
Deck/Cassette detection
2-173
Cassette
Cassette is detected by Paper Size Detection Switch. When all actuators of the Paper Size
Whether Deck/Cassette is installed is detected.
Detection Switch (SW14/SW16) are not pressed, it is detected as no cassette installed.
Deck
Deck is detected by Paper Level Sensor. When light from 2 Paper Level Sensors is not
blocked, it is detected as no deck installed.
Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 1 (SW14)

Paper Size Detection Lever

Side Slide Guide
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS41)

Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS43)
Paper Level
detection lever 1
Deck
detection lever

Circular Plate
Projection
Trailing Edge Slide Guide
F-2-229
Deck
F-2-228
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Deck/Cassette detection
2-173
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection
2-174
Cassette
Paper size in cassette 3/4 is each detected by 2 paper size detection switches.
Deck
Set in Service Mode.
NOTE:Related Service Mode
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C1 (Right Deck Paper setting)
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C2 (Left Deck Paper setting)
Setting Value
0: A4 (default), 1: B5, 2: LTR
ON/OFF of 4-actuator in the Host Machine changes according to the Paper Size Detection
Circular Plate/Lever Position linked to Trailing Edge/Side Slide Guide. Paper size is detected
by two 4-actuator ON/OFF combinations. And, if all 4-actuator are OFF is detected, it means
no-cassette.
Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 1 (SW14) Paper Size Detection Lever
Side Slide Guide

Circular Plate
Trailing Edge Slide Guide

F-2-230
F-2-231
F-2-232
2-174
2-175
List of size detection switches combination

Paper
Size
SW14/SW16
Width Length
(mm) (mm)
Width (SW14/SW16)
1-A
1-B
1-C
1-D
Length (SW15/SW17)
2-A
2-B
2-C
2-D
B5
EXEC
16K
A5-R
A4
STMT-R
LTR
B5-R
257.0
267.0
270.0
148.5
297.0
139.7
279.4
182.0
182.0
184.0
195.0
210.0
210.0
215.9
215.9
257.0
16K-R
195.0
270.0
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
LTR-R
215.9
279.4
A4-R
LGL
B4
8K
A3
LDR
SRA3
12 x 18
13 x 19
K_LGL
K_LGL-R
G_LTR
G_LTR-R
G_LGL
OFI
E_OFI
M_OFI
B_OFI
A_OFI
FOLIO
FLSP
A_FLSP
A_LTR
A_LTR-R
A_LGL
FA4
FB4
210.0
215.9
257.0
270.0
297.0
279.4
320.0
304.8
330.2
268.0
190.0
267.0
203.0
203.2
216.0
220.0
216.0
216.0
220.0
216.0
216.0
206.0
280.0
220.0
220.0
216.0
216.0
297.0
355.6
364.0
390.0
420.0
431.8
450.0
457.2
483.0
190.0
268.0
203.0
267.0
330.2
317.0
320.0
341.0
355.0
340.0
330.0
330.0
337.0
220.0
280.0
340.0
343.0
330.0
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
1-D
1-C
1-B
1-A
SW15/SW17
2-A
2-B
2-D
2-C
F-2-233
NOTE:
Related Settings/registration
Settings/registration (Top) > Preferences > Paper Settings > A5R/STMTR Original
Selection
Setting value Cassette3: A5R, STMTR, Cassette4: A5R, STMTR
Settings/registration (Top) > Preferences > Paper Settings > B5/EXEC Original Selection
Setting value Cassette3: B5, EXEC, Cassette4: B5, EXEC
Settings/registration (Top) > Preferences > Paper Settings > Register Custom Size
Setting value X: 182.0 to 487.7 mm, Y: 139.7 to 330.2 mm (Maximum 5 pieces)
Related Service Mode
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > CST
> CST3-P1 (Cassette3 paper size setting (A5R/STMTR))
, CST4-P1 (Cassette4 paper size setting (A5R/STMTR))
Setting value 0: A5R, 1: STMTR
, CST3-P2 (Cassette3 paper size setting (B5/EXEC))
, CST4-P2 (Cassette4 paper size setting (B5/EXEC))
Setting value 0: B5, 1: EXEC
T-2-107
2-175
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Level Detection
Paper Level Detection

Paper level is detected by two Paper Level sensors in each cassette.
Deck
Right Deck Paper
Right Deck Paper
Level Sensor 1 (PS41) Level Sensor 2 (PS42)
Left Deck Paper Level Left Deck Paper Level
Sensor 1 (PS43)
Sensor 2 (PS44)
Full
(100% to 50%)
Half
(50% to 25%)
Few
(25% or less)
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Control
Panel
Screen
Display
2-176

Paper Level
Detection Lever 1
Paper Level
Detection Lever 2
- Full (100% to 50%)

ON
Deck Detection Lever
OFF

Deck Lifter
T-2-108
Paper
- Half (50% to 25%)

ON
Paper
- Few (25% or less)

OFF
ON
ON
Paper
F-2-234
2-176
Cassette
2-177
Full (100% to 50%)
Paper Level
Detection Lever
Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS45)


Paper
Cassette Lifter

OFF
OFF
Paper Level Detection Lever
Half (50% to 25%)

Paper
Holding Plate
F-2-236
OFF
ON
F-2-235
Full
(100% to 50%)
Half
(50% to 25%)
Few
(25% or less)
Cassette 3 Paper Level

Sensor 1 (PS45)
Sensor 1 (PS47)

Sensor 2 (PS46)
Sensor 2 (PS48)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Control Panel
Screen Display
Few (25% or less)

Paper
F-2-237
ON
ON
T-2-109
F-2-238
2-177
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Detection
Paper Detection
2-178
Cassette
Cassette 3 Paper Sensor (PS61)
Cassette 4 Paper Sensor (PS66)
If paper is present, the Detection Lever is pushed upward when lifter ascends, and Paper
Sensor is turned OFF.
If paper finishes, the Detection Lever enters lifter hole, and Paper Sensor is turned ON.
Cassette Lifter
Deck
Paper Detection Lever
Right Deck Paper Sensor (PS51)

Left Deck Paper Sensor (PS56)
Paper Detection Lever
Deck Lifter
Holding Plate
F-2-240
F-2-239
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Detection
2-178
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Lifter Control
Lifter Control
2-179
Cassette
Lifter will raise paper to pickup position.

If deck/cassette is set, the Pickup Motor will be driven in reverse direction from pickup
One-way clutch
movement, and lifter will be ascended until the paper surface arrives at the height of pickup
Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor (PS62)

Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor (PS67)
position.
One-way Clutch is equipped to the shaft of both Lifter drive and Pickup Roller drive sides.
Therefore, the Pickup Roller does not operate when the Lifter is operated, and vice versa.
Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor (PS60)

Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor (PS65)
One-way clutch
Cassette lifter
One-way clutch is attached in the Host Machine shaft, hence when deck/cassette is pulled
out, lifter will descend.
Deck
Right Deck Pickup Motor (M43)
Left Deck Pickup Motor (M42)
One-way clutch
Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor (PS50)
Left Deck Upper Limit Sensor (PS55)
Right Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS52)
Left Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS57)
One-way clutch
Lifter wire
Holding plate
F-2-242
Lifter Error Detection

In case due to some reason the lifter keep ascending even the Paper Surface Height Sensor
is turned ON, the Upper Limit Sensor is provided to prevent damage in this equipment due to
the error in ascending.
Lifter wire
And, if the lifter starts ascending, but not detected by the Paper Surface Sensor and the
Upper Limit Sensor within 3 minutes, the alarm corresponds to the concerned Pickup
Cassette will be triggered. The alarm will release if the corresponding deck/cassette is open
Deck lfter
F-2-241
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Lifter Control
or closed, or the power is turned OFF/ON.
2-179
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Pickup Retry Control
2-180
Pickup Retry Control

If paper leading edge is not detected by Pickup sensor within the specified time after pickup
movement starts, it is not immediately determined as jam, and re-pickup movement will be
executed.
During pickup retry, the Pickup Motor will be repeatedly turned ON/OFF with the Pickup Roller
is in descended condition.
Feed Speed
1/1 Speed
1/2 Speed
1/3 Speed
Paper length (mm)

215.9 or less
297 or less
419 or less
431.8 or less
431.9 or more
215.9 or less
297 or less
419 or less
431.8 or less
431.9 or more
215.9 or less
297 or less
419 or less
431.8 or less
431.9 or more
Retry numbers
0
1
Typical Paper Type

B5/A4/LTR
B5-R/A4-R/LTR-R
LGL/B4/8K
A3/LDR
SRA3/12x18/13x19
B5/A4/LTR
B5-R/A4-R/LTR-R
LGL/B4/8K
A3/LDR
SRA3/12x18/13x19
B5/A4/LTR
B5-R/A4-R/LTR-R
LGL/B4/8K
A3/LDR
SRA3/12x18/13x19
T-2-110
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Pickup Retry Control
2-180
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection

The setting is performed the Side Guide Plate and size code setting (or irregular size setting
Basic Movement
1) If the Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid (SL4) is turned ON, the semi-toothed gear will rotate.
2) The holding plate Fixing Members will be released and the holding plate will ascend.
Multi-purpose Tray
feed roller
SL4
assignment) by and the Control Panel Unit.

Paper width is detected by the outputted value from the Variable Resistor Assembly (Multipurpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB (UN26)) which is linked to movement of the Side
Guide Plate.
Multi-purpose Tray
holding plate
Setting of the Side Guide Plate on the Multi-purpose Pickup Tray is executed by users after
paper is set.
Semi-toothed gear
Multi-purpose Tray
pull-out roller
2-181
Multi-purpose Tray Paper

Width Detection PCB (UN26)
Side Guide
Spring
Multi-purpose Tray
separation roller
F-2-243
3) When the Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor drives, the Multi-purpose Pull
Out Roller and the Multi-purpose Feed Roller/Multi-purpose Separation Roller will rotate,
and only 1 sheet of paper will be picked up/fed.
Multi-purpose Tray
feed roller
M36
Side Guide
Multi-purpose Tray
pull-out roller
Multi-purpose Tray
separation roller
F-2-245
F-2-244
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection
2-181
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Last Paper Detection
Paper Detection
2-182
Last Paper Detection
When paper is set, Paper Presence Detection Lever will be pushed, and the Multi-purpose
After the Last Paper Detection Wheel rotates, the Multi-purpose Last Paper Sensor (PS38)
Tray Paper Sensor (PS37) will turn ON.
will detect whether it is last paper or not.

Last Paper Detection Wheel only rotates when the last paper is picked up.
Since there is slit in the Last Paper Detection Wheel, the output of the Multi-purpose Last
Paper Sensor (PS38) is pulse shape. If 5 or more pieces of pulse are detected, it is the last
paper is determined.
Paper
Last Paper
If 5 or more pieces of pulse are detected,
it is the last paper is determined.
Multi-purpose Tray
Detection Lever
Paper Sensor (PS37)
Multi-purpose Tray
Last Paper Sensor (PS38)
F-2-246
Last Paper
Detection Wheel
F-2-247
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Last Paper Detection
2-182
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Registration Noise Reduction Control
Registration Unit
2-183
Registration Noise Reduction Control

Each feed motor stops just before the paper leading edge is pushed-on the Registration Roller
Registration Control
(in this moment, paper leading edge doesn't reach the Registration Roller). After specified
Registration Roller is driven by the Registration Motor (M34).

It controls so that the paper and the image on ITB is conformed in the specified place.
Paper
time, motor drive restarts, and it forms registration arch. Noise reduction measurement is
executed by pushing-on the paper leading edge to the Registration Roller in slow speed.
Multi-purpose
Pull-out Roller
Paper
Multi-purpose
Pull-out Roller
Certain distance
Secondary Transfer
Roller
Registration
Roller
Registration
Front Roller
M34
Registration Roller
M36
PS28

F-2-249
F-2-248
Feed
condition
Multi-purpose
Tray Pickup
Right Deck
Pickup
Left Deck
Pickup
Cassette 3/4
Pickup
Stop motor
Remarks
Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor (M36) Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor (M36)
Right Deck Vertical Path Motor (M40)
Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor (M36)
Left Deck Vertical Path Motor (M41)
Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor (M36)
Right Deck Vertical Path Motor (M40)
Cassette Vertical Path Motor (M39)

(M39) stops only when B4,
A3, LDR, and 13 x 19 size
are fed.
Option Pickup Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor (M36) Duplex printing Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor (M36) Duplex Left Motor (M32)
Left Deck Vertical Path Motor(M41)
stops only when 13 x 19
Duplex Left Motor (M32)
size is fed.
T-2-111
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Registration Noise Reduction Control
2-183
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Transparency detection
Transparency detection
2-184
Touch Panel display at detection (Tentative message)
Whether the fed paper is transparency or not is detected. The detection is performed in the
Transparency Sensor (PS29).
The following condition is jam announcement for paper mistake.
If it is determined that non-transparency paper placed in transparency setting
If it is determined that transparency paper placed in non-transparency setting
Transparency Sensor (PS29)
Registration Roller
F-2-251
Registration Sensor (PS28)
Registration Motor (M34)

F-2-250
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Transparency detection
2-184
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Delivery Unit > Delivery Speed Reduction Control
Delivery Unit
2-185
Delivery Speed Reduction Control
If the Copy Tray is attached, speed reduction is executed to improve paper loading (to
Basic movement
prevent the paper from dashing out).
Face-up delivery
20mm
Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL2) is turned ON, and paper is fed to Delivery Inlet.
PS31 PS111
45mm
Delivery Flapper
PS31
PS111

Outer Delivery
Roller
45mm
M37
M37
M48
SL2
F-2-254
F-2-252
Face-down delivery
Control Description
Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL2) is turned OFF, and paper is fed to the Reverse Unit.
Delivery Flapper
Speed Reduction Start

Speed Reduction Finish
Position Where Speed Change

Paper trailing edge is 45 mm upstream from the Delivery Roller.
Paper trailing edge is 20 mm downstream from the Delivery Roller.
T-2-112
PS32
Reverse Upper
Roller
M38
SL2
M48
F-2-253
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Delivery Unit > Delivery Speed Reduction Control
2-185
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Reverse Unit > Basic Movement
Reverse Unit
2-186
2) In the point when the leading edge of preceding paper exceeds the position 20 mm
lowstream from the Outer Delivery Front Roller, in order to prepare for the following paper
Basic Movement
advancement, the Reverse Upper Wheel Detachment Motor (M54) is turned ON, and The
1) The Reverse Motor (M38) will stop/reverse-rotate when paper trailing edge arrives at the
Reverse Upper Wheel will detach.
reverse stop position (30.0 mm upstream from the Reverse Upper Roller) in the specified

Following Paper
time after the Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 2 (PS34) (Paper length: less than 480 mm) is
turned ON.
If the paper length is 480 mm or more, reverse operation is performed based on the
Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 3 (PS35).
20mm
M37

Following Paper
M54
Reverse Upper Wheel
30mm
M38

Preceding Paper
Preceding Paper
M38
PS34
F-2-256
3) The following paper will be fed to the Reverse Unit direction. Reverse Motor (M38) will stop/
normal-rotates.
Following Paper
PS35
Reverse Lower
Roller
PS34
Preceding Paper
F-2-255
20mm
M38
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Reverse Unit > Basic Movement
PS34
F-2-257
2-186
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Reverse Unit > Reverse Detachment Control
4) In the moment when the trailing edge of the preceding paper exceeds the position 10 mm
upstream of the Outer Delivery Front Roller (for other than LTR paper), the Reverse Upper
2-187
Reverse Flapper Movement
Wheel Detachment Motor (M54) is turned OFF and the Reverse Upper Wheel is attached.
Reverse Flapper
Paper

Preceding Paper
Following paper
LTR or less: 60.9 mm
Larger than LTR: 38.0 mm
Reverse Flapper
Paper
Feed direction
M37
Spring
M54
Reverse Upper Wheel
Spring
Feed direction
M38
F-2-259
Reverse Detachment Control

PS34
The Reverse Upper Roller is detached, to make the preceding paper and the following paper
F-2-258
cross on the Reverse Upper Wheel.

Following Paper
20mm
M54
M38
Reverse Upper Wheel

Preceding Paper
PS34
F-2-260
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Reverse Unit > Reverse Detachment Control
2-187
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Basic Movement
Duplex Unit
2-188
2) Drive the Duplex Left Motor (M32) and the Left Deck Vertical Path Motor (M41) to feed
paper to the duplex re-pickup position.
Basic Movement
1) When the paper trailing edge arrives at the duplex reverse position (43.6 mm upstream
from the Reverse Lower Roller), the Reverse Motor (M38) stops/reverses and the paper
M32
Duplex Roller 1
M41
Duplex Roller 2
will be fed to the Duplex Unit.

Paper
M38
43.6 mm
M38
Paper
F-2-262
F-2-261
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Basic Movement
2-188
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Duplex Flapper Movement
3) Paper stops in duplex re-pickup position (paper leading edge is 198.2 mm downstream of
the Duplex Sensor 1), and after specified time, the Duplex Right Motor (M32) and the Left
2-189
Duplex Flapper Movement
Deck Vertical Path Motor (M41)are driven and paper is fed to the Registration Unit.
Duplex Roller 1
M32
Duplex Roller 2
M41
Duplex Flapper
Paper
Paper
PS24
Spring
198.2 mm
Feed
direction
F-2-264
F-2-265
F-2-263
Duplex Flapper
Feed
direction
Spring
Paper
F-2-266
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Duplex Flapper Movement
2-189
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Duplex Reverse Control
Duplex Reverse Control
2-190
298 mm or more and 390 mm or less in size, 3 sheets in circulation
(reverse position and re-pickup position is the same) (B4, LGL, 8K)
The following is the timing when the paper is fed from duplex reverse position.
Paper whose size is 298 mm or more and 390 mm or less in size doesnt stop in duplex re-
Registration
position
pickup position.
Paper stops/not in
If there is no paper in duplex If there is paper in duplex
duplex re-pickup
re-pickup position
re-pickup position
position
Paper length
less than 298 mm Feed will certainly start

(B5 to A4R)
298 mm or more
390 mm or less
(B4, LGL, 8K)
exceeds 390 mm
(A3 to 19.2 inch)
Feed will start after the

Stop
preceding paper duplex repickup is started
Feed will start in the specified In the specified time
time after the leading edge of after the leading edge of
preceding paper passes the
Registration Roller
Registration Roller.
Feed will certainly start
Feed will start after
Stop
the trailing edge of the
duplex re-pickup position.
Duplex reverse
position
43.6 mm
F-2-268
Exceeds 390 mm in size/3 sheets in circulation (A3 to 19.2 inch)
Less than 298 mm in size/5 sheets in circulation (B5 to A4)

Duplex re-pickup
position
Duplex re-pickup
position
Registration
position
Duplex reverse
position
Registration
position
Duplex reverse
position
43.6 mm
43.6 mm
196.2 mm
F-2-267
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Duplex Reverse Control
F-2-269
2-190
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit
2-191
Circulation quantity and limit

The numbers in white background and the numbers in black background show each the first
Registration
position
page and second page.
Less than 298 mm in size/5 sheets in circulation (B5 to A4)

Registration
position
Duplex re-pickup
position
Registration
position
Duplex re-pickup
position
Duplex re-pickup
position
Duplex reverse
position
Registration
position
F-2-271
Duplex re-pickup
position
Duplex re-pickup
position
F-2-270
2-191
298 mm or more and 390 mm or less in size, 3 sheets in circulation

(reverse position and re-pickup position is the same) (B4, LGL, 8K)
Registration
position
2-192
Exceeds 390 mm in size/3 sheets in circulation (A3 to 19.2 inch)
Registration
position
Registration
position
Duplex reverse
position
Duplex reverse
position
Registration
position
Registration
position
Duplex reverse
position
Registration
position
Registration
position
Duplex re-pickup
position
Registration
position
Registration
position
Registration
position
Registration
position
Registration
position
F-2-273
F-2-272
2-192
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Jam Code List
2-193
Jam Detection
Jam in Feed System

xx = 01: Delay, 02: Stationary, 0A: Residue
Yes: Detects, -: Does not detect
Jam Code List

PS75
PS70
Code
No.
PS23
PS111
PS29
PS31
PS28
PS30
PS32
PS27
PS33
PS53
PS24
PS49
PS34
PS25
PS54
PS58
PS26
PS40
PS63
PS59
PS68
PS64
PS35
F-2-274
xx01
xx02
xx03
xx04
xx05
xx06
xx07
xx08
xx09
xx0A
xx0C
xx0D
xx0E
xx0F
xx10
xx11
xx12
xx13
xx14
xx15
xx16
xx17
xx18
xx19
xx1A
xx1B
xx1C
xx1D
xx1E
xx1F
xx20
xx21
xx22
xx23
xx24
xx25
xx26
xx27
xx28
PS49
PS54
PS59
PS64
PS53
PS58
PS40
PS63
PS68
PS30
PS28
PS23
PS70
PS74
PS75
PS31
PS32
PS33
PS34
PS35
PS24
PS25
PS26
PS27
(PS1)
(PS6)
PS85
PS86
S101
S102
S201
S202
S301
S302
S004
S001
S002
S003
S009/
S010
xx29 S005
Sensor name
Registration Sensor
Fixing Inlet Sensor
Fixing Wrap Sensor
Reverse Sensor
Duplex Sensor 1
Duplex Sensor 2
Duplex Sensor 3
Duplex Sensor 4
Deck Pickup Sensor
Paper Deck Unit/
POD Deck Lite
Deck Pull-out Sensor
Buffer Sensor 1
Buffer Pass Unit
Buffer Sensor 2
Upper Deck Pickup Sensor
Upper Deck Pull-out Sensor
Middle Deck Pickup Sensor
Middle Deck Pull-out Sensor
Lower Deck Pickup Sensor
Lower Deck Pull-out Sensor
Multi-drawer
Lower Deck Feed Sensor
Paper Deck
Vertical Path Upper Sensor
Vertical Path Middle Sensor
Vertical Path Lower Sensor
Double Feed Sensor
(Reception/Option)
Delivery Sensor
Jam type
Delay Sta-tionary Residue
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-113
2-193
Other Jams
Code
No.
Sensor name
0B01
0B02
0B03
0B04
0B05
0B06
0C00
0CA0
0CA2
PS80
PS79
PS39
PS36
PS87
S006
-
Front Cover Sensor

Multi-purpose Tray Cover Sensor
Lower Right Cover Sensor
Lower Left Cover Sensor
Buffer Front Cover Sensor
Deck Left Front Cover Sensor
-
0CA3
0CA4
0CA5
0CA6
0CA7
0CA8
0CA9
0CF1
0D91
0D92 PS29 Transparency Sensor
0D93 PS29 Transparency Sensor
1001
1002
1101
1102
1300
S101
S102
S101
S102
S101
Inlet Sensor
Feed Path Sensor
Inlet Sensor
Feed Path Sensor
Inlet Sensor
Jam Type
2-194
Code
No.
Sensor name
0191 -
0192 -
0193 -
0194 -
0195 -
0196 -
0197 -
0198 -
Finisher power-on
0199 -
Finisher Cover open

Finisher staple jam
Finisher sequence error jam
Finisher, others
Double feed at Multi-drawer Paper Deck
019A -
Door Open Jam
Jam, others
Logical jam
REFEED command is not received. (Former:
E240-0001)
IMAGET_SET command is not received. (Former:
E240-0002)
PAGE_COMPLETE is not returned. (Former:
E240-0004)
PVREQ-K is not received. (Former: E240-0005)
REGON interruption is not received. (Former:
E240-0006)
READY is not received from IP. (Former: E2400007)
IMG2 DMA setting is not finished. (Former: E2400008)
Initial rotation and last rotation are not finished.
(Former: E996-0*00)
Error retry occurs.
Misprint (Paper is too short.)
Misprint (Non-transparency paper in transparency
setting)
Misprint (Transparency paper in non-transparency
setting)
Finisher delay
Finisher stationary
S102 Feed Path Sensor

1400 S129 Front Door Sensor
1500 S131 Staple HP Sensor
1e00
1fxx
28xx S009/ Double Feed Sensor
S010 (Reception/Option)
Jam Type
Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and
image formation timing at Right Deck pickup
(Check the feed path from the Right Deck Pickup
Assembly to the Registration Assembly.)
image formation timing at Left Deck pickup (Check
the feed path from the Left Deck Pickup Assembly
to the Registration Assembly.)
image formation timing at Cassette 3 pickup (Check
the feed path from the Cassette 3 Pickup Assembly
image formation timing at Cassette 4 pickup (Check
the feed path from the Cassette 4 Pickup Assembly
image formation timing at Option Deck pickup
(Check the feed path from the Option Deck Pickup
Assembly to the Registration Assembly of the host
machine.)
image formation timing at Multi-purpose Tray
pickup (Check the feed path from the Multipurpose Tray Pickup Assembly to the Registration
Assembly.)
image formation timing at Multi Deck Upper Deck
pickup (Check the feed path from the Upper
Deck Pickup Assembly of the Multi Deck to the
Registration Assembly of the host machine.)
image formation timing at Multi Deck Middle Deck
pickup (Check the feed path from the Middle
image formation timing at Multi Deck Lower Deck
pickup (Check the feed path from the Lower
image formation timing at 2-sided printing (Check
the feed path around the Registration Assembly of
the host machine.)
T-2-114
2-194
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Forced Paper Feed Control
Forced Paper Feed Control
Condition
If there is paper in the following place after jam is detected, the paper will be forcedly fed to
downstream direction.
This control suppresses paper damage during jam handling.
Between
Reverse Vertical Path
- Duplex Path
2-195
M41
M34
Between
Registration Path
- Vertical Path
M36
M32
PS30
PS53
M40
PS24
PS34
PS26
M42
PS58
Between Left Deck - Duplex Path

F-2-275
If there
is paper
(PS58) is ON
between
Left Deck
Pickup Path
and Duplex
Path
Duplex Sensor 3 (PS26) is
ON
Drive Motor
Left Deck Vertical

Path Motor (M41)
Duplex Right
Motor (M33)
Left Deck Pickup
Motor (M42)
Left Deck Vertical
Path Motor (M41)
Duplex Right
Motor (M33)
If paper
- In case of pickup from
Right Deck
trailing
Right Deck/Cassette 3/
Vertical Path
edge is
Cassette 4
Motor (M40)
between
- Vertical Path Marge
Pre-Registration
Vertical
Sensor (PS30) is ON and Multi-Purpose
Path and
also, Vertical Path Sensor 1 Drive Motor
Registration (PS53) is OFF.
(M36)
Path
Registration
Motor (M34)
If paper
Reverse Vertical Path
Duplex Left Motor
trailing
Sensor 2 (PS34) is OFF
(M32)
edge is
and also, Duplex Sensor 1 Left Deck Vertical
between
(PS24) is ON.
Path Motor (M41)
Reverse
Path and
Duplex
Path
If there is
Pre-Registration
paper that
Multi-Purpose
is being
Drive Motor
picked up
(M36)
from MultiPurpose
Pickup Tray
If paper
In case of pickup from Multi Pre-Registration
trailing
Deck
Multi-Purpose
edge is
(Distance is measured from Drive Motor
in Option
the Deck Delivery Sensor.) (M36)
Pickup Path In case of pickup from POD Registration
Motor (M34)
Deck Lite
(Distance is measured from
the Deck Pullout Sensor.)
In case of pickup from
Paper Deck
(Distance is measured from
the Deck Pullout Sensor.)
Remarks
If delay jam of Vertical Path Marge
Sensor (PS60) occurs on precedent
paper, feeding is not executed.
- If 258 mm to 297 mm (A4R) size paper

stops in the duplex re-pickup position,
the machine feeds the paper that
stops in the duplex re-pickup position
regardless of ON/OFF of the sensor.
- Left Deck Vertical Path Motor (M41) is
driven only when the paper is lager than
297mm (A4R).
- Feeding is not executed in case
of Registration Sensor delay jam at
pickup.
- Feeding is executed not to prevent the
paper damage but to return the drive
parts to the normal position.
In case of paper with 431.9 mm or more
in length (12 x 18, 12 x 19.2, SRA3,
13 x 19), the motor rotates inversely to
return the paper (in order not to reach
the Fixing Roller).
T-2-115
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Forced Paper Feed Control
2-195
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Service Work > Periodic Service
2-196
Service Work
Periodic Service
When it gets close to its duration period, be sure to clean or replace the concerned parts.
Measurement during Parts Replacement
Item
Perform adjustment and clear counters for the below parts replacement.
Parts name
Measure

Clear the corresponding counter.
Reference
T-2-116
Parts name
Periodically
replacement parts
Consumables
Transparency Sensor
Pre-fixing Feed Film
Periodic service Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator
Unit
Lower side of Secondary Transfer Outer
Roller
Interval
-
Measure Reference
-
500K sheets
Replace
120K sheets
Timely
Timely or
per 500K sheet
Timely
Cleaning
p. 4-4
p. 4-7
p. 4-4
p. 4-7
p. 4-4
p. 4-7
p. 4-9
p. 4-12
p. 4-9
p. 4-12
p. 4-9
p. 4-12
p. 4-1
p. 4-2
p. 3-3
p. 3-3
p. 3-2
p. 3-2
p. 3-2
T-2-117
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Service Work > Periodic Service
2-196
Technology > External and Controls
2-197
External and Controls

Counter Control
Overview
The machine is equipped with counters that indicate the counts of output according to types of job. These counters are indicated in response to a press on the Counter Check key on the control
panel.
Display code of each counter (in service mode)/Item
Target
JP model
type1
(Conventional
method)
Counter 1
Total 1
Counter 2
Total
(Black 1)
Counter 3
Counter 4
Copy
(Full Color +
Single Color1)
Total A
(Full Color +
Single Color 1)
Counter 5
*1
Counter 6
*1
Counter 7
*1
Counter 8
*1
101
108
232
149
Total 2
Copy
(Full Color +
Single Color 2)
Total A
(Full Color +
Single Color 2)
Copy
(Black 2)
Total A
(Black 2)
*1
*1
*1
102
231
148
222
133
Total 1
Total
(Black 1)
Copy
(Full Color +
Single Color 1)
Total A
(Full Color +
Single Color 1)
Total
(Single Color 1)
*1
*1
*1
101
108
232
149
118
JP model
type4
(New method)
Total 1
Total
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Small)
Total
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Large)
Total
(Black/Small)
Total
(Black/Large)
Scan
(Total 1)
*1
*1
101
123
122
113
112
501
JP model
type5
(New method)
Total 1
Total
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Small)
Total
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Large)
Total
(Black/Small)
Total
(Black/Large)
Total
(Single Color/
Small)
Total
(Single Color/
Large)
Scan
(Total 1)
101
123
122
113
112
111
110
501
Taiwan model
Total 1
Total
(Black 1)
Copy + Print (Full

Color/Large)
Copy + Print
(Full Color/Small)
Total
(Single Color 1)
*1
*1
*1
101
108
401
402
118
Total 1
Total
(Black 1)
Copy
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Large)
Copy
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Small)
Print
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Large)
Print
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Small)
*1
*1
101
108
229
230
321
322
JP model
type2
(New method)
JP model
type3
(New method)
UL model
type1
(Conventional
method)
Country code
JP
JP
JP
JP
JP
TW
US
2-197
2-198
Target
Counter 1
Counter 2
Copy
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Small)
Counter 5
Print
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Large)
Counter 6
Print
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Small)
Counter 7
*1
Counter 8
Total 2
102
109
229
230
321
322
General model
Total 1
Total
(Black 1)
Copy + Print
(Full Color/Large)
Copy + Print
(Full Color/Small)
Total
(Single Color 1)
Total1
(2-Sided)
*1
*1
101
108
401
402
118
114
UK model
type1
(Conventional
method)
Total
(Black/Large)
Total
(Black/Small)
Total
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Large)
Total
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Small)
Scan
(Total 1)
Print
(Total 1)
*1
*1
112
113
122
123
501
301
240V
UK model
type2
(New method)
Total 1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
101
CA model
TTotal 1
Total
(Black 1)
Copy
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Large)
Copy
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Small)
Print
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Large)
Print
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Small)
*1
*1
101
108
229
230
321
322
FRN mode
type1
(Conventional
method)
Total
(Black/Large)
Total
(Black/Small)
Total
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Large)
Total
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Small)
Scan
(Total 1)
Print
(Total 1)
*1
*1
112
113
122
123
501
301
FRN model
type2
(New method)
Total 1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Copy
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Large)
Counter 4
UL model
type1
(Conventional
method)
GER model
type1
(Conventional
method)
Total
(Black 2)
Counter 3
*1
101
Total
(Black/Large)
Total
(Black/Small)
Total
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Large)
Total
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Small)
Scan
(Total 1)
Print
(Total 1)
*1
*1
112
113
122
123
501
301
Country code
US
SG/KO/CN
GB
GB
AU
FR
FR
DE
2-198
Target
GER model
type2
(New method)
AMS model
type1
(Conventional
method)
AMS model
type2
(New method)
ITA model
type1
(Conventional
method)
ITA model Total
type2
(New method)
2-199
Counter 1
Total 1
Counter 2
*1
Counter 3
*1
Counter 4
*1
Counter 5
*1
Counter 6
*1
Counter 7
*1
Country code
Counter 8
*1
DE
101
Total
(Black/Large)
Total
(Black/Small)
Total
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Large)
Total
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Small)
Scan
(Total 1)
Print
(Total 1)
*1
*1
112
113
122
123
501
301
Total 1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
101
ES/SE/PT/NO/
DK/FI/PL/HU/CZ/
SI/GR/EE/RU/NL/
SK/RO/HR/BG/
TR
Total
(Black/Large)
Total
(Black/Small)
Total
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Large)
Total
(Full Color +
Single Color/
Small)
Scan
(Total 1)
Print
(Total 1)
*1
*1
IT
112
113
122
123
501
301
Total 1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
101
ES/SE/PT/NO/
DK/FI/PL/HU/CZ/
SI/GR/EE/RU/NL/
SK/RO/HR/BG/
TR
IT
<Code description>
Large
Small
Total
Duplex
: Large size paper (if the width in paper feed direction is over 364mm/count up x1)
: Small size paper (if the width in paper feed direction is 364mm or less)
: All (C + P), count up x 1
: At auto duplexing copy, count up x 1
3-digit code in counter column is the setting value of the following service mode items.
COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER1 to 6
Counter2 to 6 can be changed in service mode: COPIER > OPTION > USER.
*1: by default, not indicated; may be changed in service mode.
*2: if '0' is set for the following: COPIER>OPTION>USER>CNT-SW.
*3: if '1' is set for the following: COPIER>OPTION>USER>CNT-SW.
2-199
2-200
Count-up Timing
Count-up timing (timing to advance the counter) di_ers according to the following condition:
Print mode (1-sided, 2nd side of the 2-sided print, 1st side of the 2-sided print)
Delivery location (finisher)
Print mode
Delivery location
1-sided/ 2nd side of 2-sided print
1st side of 2-sided print

Count-up timing
1
2
In the case of host machine only

Finisher Saddle finisher
Tray A (upper tray)
Tray B (lower tray)
Saddle assembly
Reference sensor: Outer Delivery Sensor (PS31)

Reference sensor: upper delivery sensor
Reference sensor: lower delivery sensor
Reference sensor: saddle inlet sensor
Reference sensor: duplex feed sensor 1(PS24)
2-200
2-201
Fan
1) Fan Control
FM3
FM22
FM2
FM18
FM4
FM19
FM5
FM20
FM1
FM6
FM9
FM7
FM8
F-2-276
2-201
2-202
FM16
FM27
[B]
FM15
[A]
[A]
[B]
FM10
FM23
FM12
FM24
FM11
FM13
F-2-277
2-202
No.
FM1
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
FM6
FM7
FM8
FM9
FM10
FM11
FM12
FM13
FM15
FM16
FM17
FM18
FM19
FM20
FM22
FM23
FM24
FM27
2-203
Name
Pre-fixing Feed Suction Fan

Primary Charging Suction Fan
Primary Charging Exhaust Fan
Developing and Pre-transfer Charging Fan
Color Cleaning Fan
Fixing Heat Fan
IH Power Supply Fan
Power Supply Fan 1
Power Supply Fan 2
Delivery Heat Fan 1
Delivery Heat Fan 2
Delivery Heat Fan 3
Delivery Heat Fan 4
Pressure Roller Cooling Fan (Front)
Pressure Roller Cooling Fan (Rear)
Front Cooling Fan
Hopper Cooling Fan
Controller Cooling Fan 1
Hopper Cooling Suction Fan
Anti-adhesion Fan 1
Anti-adhesion Fan 2
Pre-fixing Feed Cooling Fan
Role/function
To suction air around the primary charging assembly
To exhaust air around the primary charging assembly
To cool around the eveloping and Pre-transfer area
To exhaust air around the xing assembly
To cool the IH power supply assembly
To cool the power supply assembly
To cool the power supply assembly
To exhaust air around the delivery area
To cool the Pressure Roller.
To cool the Pressure Roller
To suction air around the hopper assembly
To cool the main controller PCB1
To cool the main controller PCB2
To suction air around the hopper area
To cool paper that passes through the delivery assembly
To cool paper that passes through the delivery assembly
Ecodes
E804-0001
E804-0002
E804-0003
E804-0004
E804-0005
E804-0006
E804-0007
E804-0000
E804-0000
E804-0010
E804-0011
E804-0012
E804-0013
E804-0015
E804-0016
E804-0017
E804-0018
E804-0019
E804-0020
E804-0022
E804-0023
E804-0024
E804-0017
T-2-118
2-203
2-204
Power Control Function
2) Fan Sequence
Print
Name
FM1
Pre-fixing Feed Attraction Fan
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
Color Cleaning Fan
FM6
Fixing Heat Fan
FM7
IH Power Supply Fan
FM8
Power Supply Fan
FM9
Power Supply Fan 2
FM10
Delivery Heat Fan 1
FM11
Delivery Heat Fan 2
FM12
Delivery Heat Fan 3
FM13
Delivery Heat Fan 4
FM15
Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan (Front)
FM16
Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan (Rear)
FM18
Hopper Cooling Fan
FM19
FM20
FM22
FM23
Anti-adhesion Fan 1
FM24
Anti-adhesion Fan 2
FM27
FM30
Decurler Suction Fan
FM31
Decurler Side Exhaust Fan
FM32
Decurler Lower Exhaust Fan
Pre
Rotetion
Standby
Normal
Speed
1/2
Speed
1/3
Speed
Post
Rotetion
JAM
/ERR
Sleep1
Deep
Sleep
Power supply inside the printer

Main Controller PCB
Main Power SW
8.8WMAX
All Night
3.3V
All Night Circuit
Leakage
Breaker
Leakage
Breaker
Relay
12V-200W
NF
FET
limit5A
limit5A
24VA-350W
24VB-350W
limit7A
Drum ITB Driver PCB

Pickup Feed Driver PCB
FET
limit7A
Reder / ADF
Relay board
limit5A
Paper Deck
RMT
RMT
Drum Heater
(Y,M):19W
DH_DRV
DC Controller PCB
Fixing Feed Driver PCB
limit5A
FET
Relay
Relay
Hard Timer
(One minute)
RMT
Relay
INV
2
1
NF
Relay
Symbol
Buffer Pass
2
Drum Heater
(BK):80W
Finisher
Deck Heater
:20W
IH Heater
1300W
:Full Speed
Fixing Unit
:Harf Speed
Cassette Heater
:15W
Reader Heater
20W
:Full speed or half speed depending on the mechanical and process conditions
1:Full speed only in the cases of postcard, reply postcard, 4 on 1postcard, and Catalog Globe No. 8 (envelop)
(Postcard or envelop, 200 mm or less in length in feed direction, and 1/2 speed or 1/3 speed (paper of 105 g or more))
F-2-279
F-2-278
2-204
2-205
Effects of Spanning Tree-supported Hub

If you set the network as a loop, data keeps staying in this loop and efficiency of data transfer
might be decreased. In order to prevent this symptom, some hubs have the function called
spanning tree. If this function is enabled, the device newly connected to the hub can make
data communication with network 10 to 50 seconds (time changes due to the conditions)
after the connection. When the machine enters Deep sleep mode and restores from the sleep
mode, the machine electrically disconnects with the network once. Therefore, if the machine
connects with the spanning tree-installed hub, the machine cannot communicate with network
for approximately 1 minute at a maximum after restoring from the Deep sleep mode.
For this reason, right after restoring from the Deep sleep mode, the following symptoms might
occur: Device status cannot be collected, printing cannot be made, and login using a login
application cannot be made. If such symptoms become any problems, perform the following
operations.
Using user mode, set not to enter the Deep sleep mode.
Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep Mode Energy Use > High
Disable the spanning tree function of hub.
Request users to use the hub which supports Rapid Spanning-Tree
Protocol (RSTP) that resolved such problems.
Protective Function
DC power PCB of the host machine and the power PCB of options have the overcurrent
protective function and the abnormal high voltage protective function to prevent the power
circuit brokerage by stopping the output voltage automatically when overcurrent or abnormal
high voltage occur due to the problems such as short circuit etc on each load.
When an error occurs on 3VB (all-night power), all the power will be stopped.
An error occurs on the power other than above, all the power will be stopped except for 3VB
(all-night power).
When an error occurs on 3VB (all-night power), turn OFF the main power switch on the printer
unit and remove the part where the protective circuit has been activated, and then replace the
all-night power PCB (because the fuse of all-night power PCB is burnt.).
In other cases than above, turn OFF the main power switch of the printer unit and remove the
part where the protective circuit is activated. Wait for 3 min or more and turn ON the power to
reset the protective circuit.
2-205
Technology > External and Controls > Service Works (External Auxiliary System) > When replacing parts
2-206
Service Works (External Auxiliary System)

Periodically replaced parts
Parts name
1
2
3
Parts number
Qty.
Estimated life
FL2-0554
FC5-2486
2
1
500K Sheets
500K Sheets
FC6-2035
500K Sheets
Toner Filter
Primary Charging Ozone
Filter
Fixing Ozone Filter
Remarks
T-2-119
Durable parts
No durable parts are assigned
Periodical services
There are no parts to execute periodical service

[When replacing the DC controller PCB]
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP (LEVEL2)
[Restoration of DC Controller PCB SRAM]
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES (LEVEL2)
Technology > External and Controls > Service Works (External Auxiliary System) > When replacing parts
2-206
Technology > MEAP > Changes > LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication)
MEAP
2-207
An example of the LDAP server management screen
Changes
LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication)
LDAP authentication has been added to the server authentication method using Single SignOn H (hereinafter referred to as SSO-H).
LDAP authentication is a user authentication performed by using an LDAP server on the
network linked with the device.
iR Device
LDAP Server
F-2-282
Local user
An example of the screen for adding an LDAP server
Remote user
F-2-280
Accordingly, the following item and setting screens have been added to the SSO-H
management screen of the remote UI.
Drop-down list for selecting the LDAP server as the authentication server
The LDAP server management screen (when [LDAP Server] is selected from the foregoing
drop-down list)
The screen for adding an LDAP server
An example of the screen showing the drop-down list for selecting LDAP Server
F-2-283
For details, refer to "Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)" in this chapter.
F-2-281
Technology > MEAP > Changes > LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication)
2-207
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > Server authentication management
2-208
Preparation for Using SSO-H
Integrated Authentication Disabling Setting Screen

A user setting screen has been added to the integrated authentication function which allows
the authentication information used for logging into the machine to be shared between MEAP
Outline
applications.
When using Single Sign-On H (hereinafter referred to as SSO-H) for the login service,
From a security standpoint, the setting screen for disabling the function to allow authentication
authentication.
required system environments are different in server authentication or local device
information (Volatile Credential), whose registered information is discarded at the time of

logout or shutdown of the device, to be used has conventionally been included in service
mode.
In addition to this service mode, a screen that allows even users to make the setting has
been added to the remote UI.
This screen can be also used to disable the integrated authentication function for each
authentication protocol.
For details, refer to "Integrated Authentication Function" in this chapter.
See the following for system requirements in each of authentication methods:
Server authentication management

The system requirements necessary when using server authentication by SSO-H vary
depending on the authentication server.
The system requirements for using each authentication server are shown below.
Active Directory authentication

In order to use Active Directory authentication in SSO-H, the following system environments
are required.
1) Authentication server (Active Directory : Windows server )
Active Directory and Domain Name System (DNS) should be installed.
A group named "Canon Peripheral Admins" should be created on the Active Directory.
The OS should be one of the followings.
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP2 *
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 *
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2 *
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1
* 64-bit version is not supported.
2) Users accessing the authentication server (Active Directory: Windows Server)
F-2-284
The user should belong to the "Canon Peripheral Admins" group on the Active Directory.
The user name should contain only single-byte alphanumeric characters, - (hyphen), _ (low
line), and % (percent).
Note:
The difference in time setting between the authentication server (Active Directory) and
the machine (and the computer for login) should be within 5 minutes. (If the difference in
time setting is 5 minutes or longer, an error will occur at the time of login for the server
authentication.)
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > Server authentication management
2-208
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users
Note:
As for the user name for logging into the machine, use the name registered as "User
logon name (pre-Windows 2000)" in the Active Directory.
An example of the user registration screen (Windows Server 2003)
2-209
PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users

The following environment is required to use this machine (managed by SSO-H) from a PC
on the network.
OS of the PC and Other Environments

Classification
Client OS
Operating System
Supported browser Java Runtime Environment
Windows XP Professional SP3 Internet Explorer 7

Internet Explorer 8
Windows Vista SP2
Internet Explorer 7
Internet Explorer 8
Internet Explorer 9
Windows 7 SP1
Internet Explorer 8
Internet Explorer 9
F-2-285
Server OS
LDAP authentication
When using LDAP authentication by SSO-H, the following conditions need to be satisfied.
Windows Server 2003 SP2

Internet Explorer 7
Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 Internet Explorer 8
Windows Server 2008 SP2
Internet Explorer 7
Internet Explorer 8
Internet Explorer 9
Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 Internet Explorer 8
1) LDAP server
Internet Explorer 9
Novell eDirectory V8.8 SP6 for Windows

Lotus Domino V8.5 for Windows
2) OS where the LDAP server runs
Mac OS
Mac OS X v10.5
Mac OS X v10.6
It should comply with the specifications of the LDAP server product.

Operation check has been conducted for the following OS.
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise SP2
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise
Note:
When an LDAP server other than the server shown above is used, SSO-H may not
work properly.
Windows Active Directory works also as an LDAP server, but is not supported.
Mac OS X v10.7
Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
Safari 5.1
Safari 5.1
Java Runtime Environment 1.5

or later *1 *3
or later *1 *3
or later *2 *3
or later *1 *3
or later *2 *3
or later *1 *3
or later *1 *3
or later *2 *3
or later *1 *3
or later *2 *3
Java 2 Standard Edition 5.0 *1
*3
JRE : Java Runtime Environment
T-2-120
J2SE : Java 2 Platform Standard Edition

Note:
*1 Excluding JRE6 update4/5
*2 In order to use JRE1.6 with Internet Explorer 9, JRE1.6.0.24 or later is required.
*3 Refer to the website of JAVA (http://java.com/) for how to obtain the Java
environment.
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users
2-209
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS
2-210
Preparation for Using SMS
Note:
The ActiveX plug-in should be enabled in Internet Explorer.

In Internet Explorer, if [Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins] is disabled in [Internet Options]
> [Security] > [Custom level...], a warning message that JRE has not yet been installed is
displayed.
JavaScript should be enabled in all the browsers.
In the case of an IP v6 environment, JRE1.5 or later is required.
When using Windows XP in an IP v6 environment, IP v6 may need to be installed
manually in some cases.
To use SMS, a PC and browser used to access SMS are required, and the network settings
need to be set up on the device.
Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS

Checking of operation environment
In order to access SMS using password authentication, the PC and browser need to comply
with the following system environment.
Network ports used

Port No.
Connecting
Listening
53
88
1-65535
( default:389)
10000 - 10100
Combination of the Browser and the OS

Application
Communication with DNS server (fixed)

Kerberos authentication with KDC (Key Distribution Center)
Communication with directory service using LDAP (default is 389,
may be changed to any port on LDAP service side)
T-2-121
Operating System
Windows XP Professional SP3
Windows Vista SP2
Windows 7 SP1
Mac OS X v10.5
Mac OS X v10.6
Mac OS X Lion
Supported browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
Safari 5.1
Safari 5.1
T-2-122
In order to access SMS using RLS authentication, the environment should comply with the
environment for using SSO-H as the login service. (For details, refer to "PC Environment of
Administrator Users and General Users".)
PC and Browser Settings

The PC and browser used to access SMS need to satisfy the following conditions.
The supported browser language should be the same with the language of the OS.
Java Script should be enabled.
The supported screen size should be 800 x 600 or larger (recommended size: 1024 x 768).
Session cookie should be enabled.
Only alphanumeric characters and some of the symbols ("-" or ".") should be used as the
machine domain name and host name. If an invalid character string such as a low line ("_")
is included in the host name, cookies cannot be enabled.
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS
2-210
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
Settings on the Device Side

Network configuration process
In order to provide support for the machine via network such as SMS, the network settings
need to be made from the touch panel of the machine. (this setting is [ON] by default).
1) Press [Settings/Registration] button, select [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] >
[Use HTTP] and press [On] button.
2-211
Note:
When using SSL, press [Settings/ Registration] button, select [Management
Settings]>[License / Other] > [MEAP Settings] > [SSL Settings] and press [On] button.
(This setting is applied to SSL setting on RUI. Vice versa, [On] set for SSL on RUI is
also applied to the touch panel.)
When [Use SSL] is set to On, the message dialog, [The Default Key is not set. Check
the Key and Certificate List settings in Certificate Setting.], is shown. Press [OK] button
for this message.
F-2-288
2) Press [OK] button to return to Main Menu screen.

3) Restart this device.
CAUTION:
F-2-286
Note:
In iR-ADV series, the System Manager ID and the System PIN are configured by
default, so Network and the items that follow are grayed out and cannot be selected.
Return to the top screen, press Login button at the lower left of the screen, login as
the system manager, and configure the settings.
The default setting for the System Manager ID is 7654321, and the password is
7654321.
The setting [ Use HTTP ] is not actually enabled/disabled until you have restarted the
device.
You cannot make a connection through a proxy server. If a proxy server is in use,
enter the IP address of the MEAP device in the Exceptions field for the browser.
Open Internet Options dialog of Internet Explorer and select Connections tab, LAN
Settings button, Use a proxy server option, and Advanced button of Proxy server
group. Proxy Settings dialog will opens. The Exceptions field is in the dialog. As
network settings vary among environments, consult the network administrator.
If Cookie and JavaScript are not enabled in the Web browser, you will not be able to
use SMS.
To type text using the Web browser, use the characters compatible with the MEAP
devices touch panel display. The MEAP device may not properly recognize some
characters.
F-2-287
When [Use SSL] is made available, it is necessary to set the key and the certificate
necessary for the SSL communication. Set the key and the certificate by SSL with
[SSL Settings] that exists in [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [SSL
Settings] on the iR device.
2-211
Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL

Communication
2-212
2) Click [ Management Settings ] > [ Device Management ] > [ Certificate Settings ] > [ Key
and Certificate Settings ].
To use SMS via SSL connection, it is required to specify a key pair and server certificate as
the key to be used.
Since a key (default key) that can be used for encrypted SSL communication is installed as
standard on the device, advance setting of the key pair and server certificate is not required.
In order to use an encryption key other than the default key, follow the procedure "Generating
a key pair" shown below to make settings for the key pair and server certificate necessary for
encrypted SSL communication.
Note:
MFP has a server certificate registered as standard.

For detailed procedures of the Default Key setting, refer to [e-Manual > Security].
As for SMS, by setting a Default Key, encrypted SSL communication is always executed
regardless of the following setting: [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings]
(Settings/Registration) > [MEAP Settings] > [SSL Settings]: ON/OFF.
F-2-290
3) Click [ Generate Key... ] button.

Generating a key pair
1) From a PC on the same network as the device, use a web browser to access the remote
UI's portal page. Then, select [ Settings/Registration ] from the menu on the right side of
the screen.
URL to access: http://<device's IP address>:8000/
F-2-291
4) Click [ Network Communication ]
F-2-292
F-2-289
2-212
5) Enter the necessary information, and then click the [ OK ] button.
2-213
6) Check to see that the generated key appears in [ Registered Key and Certificate ].
F-2-294
Default Key Settings

1) Click [ Preferences ] > [ Network Settings ] > [TCP/IP Settings ] > [ SSL Settings ].
F-2-293
Input example
Item name
Type
Key Settings
Key Name
Signature Algorithm
Key Algorithm
Certificate Settings
Validity Start Date
Validity End Date
Country/Region
State
City
Organization
Organization Unit
Common Name
Content
Entry
Compulsory An arbitrary character string

Default Key
Compulsory Selected from:SHA1/SHA256/SHA384/SHA512 RSA
Compulsory Selected from:512/1024/2048/4096
512
Compulsory
Compulsory
Compulsory
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Date
Date
Country or region name
State name
City name
Organization name
Organization unit
Common Name*
15/4/2012
15/4/2036
US
-
F-2-295
T-2-123
Note:
When the IP address of the device has been entered in the [Common Name] entry
field, if you install a server certificate to the browser ( see "Installing a server certificate
(reference information)" ), the message "Certificate Error" that usually appears when
access is made from Internet Explorer 7 or later will not be displayed.
2-213
2) Click [ Key and Certificate...] button.
2-214
Installing a server certificate (reference information)
When you access a device where the key installed as standard [default key] is set as the key
for SSL, "Certificate Error" appears if the version of Internet Explorer (IE) is Version 7 or later.
Error display example
F-2-299
To disable display of "Certificate Error", use the following procedure (for IE8) to set the key
generated in "Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL Communication" (i.e.
the key with the IP address of the device specified as the shared name) as an SSL key.
1) Access SMS from the browser, and then click "Certificate Error" in the URL entry field.
F-2-296
3) Select the generated key, and then click the [ Default Key Settings ] button.
F-2-300
2) Click [ View certificates ].
F-2-297
4) Check that [ SSL ] is displayed in the [ Key Usage ] entry field.
F-2-301
F-2-298
5) Log out from the remote UI, and then restart the device.
2-214
3) Click the [ Install Certificate... ] button on the [ General ] tab.
2-215
5) In [ Certificate Store ], select the [ Place all certificates in the following store ] option, and
then click the [ Browse ] button.
F-2-302
4) [ Certificate Import Wizard ] will appear. Click the [ Next ] button.
F-2-304
6) In [ Select Certificate Store ], select [ Trusted Root Certification Authorities ], and then click
the [ OK ] button.
F-2-305
F-2-303
2-215
7) You will return to the [ Certificate Store ] dialog. Check that "Trusted Root Certification
Authorities" appears in [ Certificate ], and then click the [ Next ] button.
F-2-306
8) [ Completing the Certificate Import Wizard ] will appear. Click the [ Finish ] button.
2-216
9) If the [Security Warning] appears, click the [Yes] button. (It does not appear when installing
the same certificate again.)
F-2-308
10)
A message will appear to indicate that import has been completed successfully. Click
the [ OK ] button.
F-2-309
F-2-307
2-216
Network Port Settings
2-217
4) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field
The default port of the HTTP server used for MEAP and MEAP applications to provide the
is displayed), and press [OK] button.
servlet function is 8000, and the HTTPS server's default port is 8443. In the case that these
ports have already used by the customer who is to introduce this application, the MEAP
application cannot use the HTTP (or HTTPS) server(s).
By changing the following ports to use, however, the MEAP application can be used as well
as the existing system.
1) Start [SERVICE MODE] in Level 2.
2) Press [COPIER] > [Option] > [NETWORK] buttons.
F-2-312
Note:
A port number can be any integer from 0 to 65535. To avoid port numbers that are
frequently used, do not use any integer from 0 to 1023.
Server
HTTP Server
HTTPS Server
Setting value
Default value / Value after RAM clear
1024 to 65535
1024 to 65535
8000
8443
T-2-124
F-2-310
3) To set up the HTTP server port, select [ MEAP-PN ]. To set up the HTTPS server port,
select [MEAP-SSL ].
Note:
If PS Print Server Unit is connected, do not specify port 8080.
If port 8080 is specified, it is not possible to access the remote UI of the device where
the MEAP authentication application is running. (Port 8080 is reserved to allow the PS
Print Server Unit to redirect to the iR device.)
5) Restart the device if the port number is set.
F-2-311
F-2-313
2-217
Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Outline
2-218
Login to SMS
How to Check the Serial Number

When performing MEAP device support, the serial number of the device is necessary in some
cases.
Outline
SMS login may be done by entering a password for authentication, or by authentication via
the Remote Login Service (RLS) login window (RLS authentication). Settings can be changed
Examples of where the serial number is necessary
to allow either only one of these methods or both of them.
When initializing SMS login password (obtaining a switch license)

When obtaining a MEAP application license from LMS
SMS login window (password auth) RLS login window (user name/ password auth)
When obtaining a transfer license of MEAP application

When obtaining a special license for reinstalling MEAP application
If a problem occurs in the MEAP device and you want to contact the support department of
the sales company, you need to provide the serial number. Perform the following procedure to
get the serial number.
Checking from the PC browser

The serial number of the device is displayed on the SMS login screen, SMS screen, and
remote UI portal screen.
F-2-316
Login method
F-2-314
Checking from the device's Touch Panel

You can see the number by pressing the counter key on the Control Panel of the machine.
Authentication
method
Authentication service name
Users who may log in
Password
authentication
Password
authentication
SMS Installer Service (Password Users who know the SMS

Authentication)
login password
RLS login
SSO-H
SMS Installer Service (Remote

Login Service Authentication)
Users registered as
administrators with SSO-H
T-2-125
Note:
If Default Authentication is selected as the device authentication method, RLS
Authentication is not selectable as SMS Login method. Also, if RLS Authentication is
selected, the device authentication method (Default Authentication, SDL, SSO) cannot
be changed.
F-2-315
2-218
2-219
When SMS Cannot Be Accessed
If login is not possible due to exclusive control

Since access to SMS is under exclusive control, you cannot log in if another user has already
If you forgot the password (SMS login password initialization)

After changing the default SMS login password, if you forgot the new password and cannot
log in to SMS, you can use a switch license for password initialization to change the password
back to the default value "MeapSmsLogin".
logged into the SMS of the same iR device.

An example of the exclusive control message
Note that there is no special password for service.

1) Obtain a switch license file for password initialization.
Contact the person in charge of support at the sales company, give the device's serial
number, and have a switch license file for password initialization issued.
2) Load the switch license file.
With nothing entered, click the [ Log in ] button to display the area for specifying a switch
license file for password initialization.
F-2-318
If you cannot log in due to exclusive control, you need to ask the other user to log out before
you can try again.
Note:
If you close the browser without logging out, the session remains active. In that case,
you cannot log in again.
If this problem occurs, you can wait for 5 minutes so that the session is disconnected.
Or, you can restart the device to force the session to disconnect.
F-2-317
3) Specify the switch license file.

Click the [ Browse ] button and specify the switch license file.
4) Initialize the login password.
Click the [ Initialize ] button to display an initialization confirmation page, and click the [ OK
] button.
Note:
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. (The password is case-sensitive.)
If you click [Cancel] button, the Login page opens without initializing the password.
2-219
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Outline
If [Key and Certificate Settings] is not set

If [Key and Certificate Settings] is not set correctly, you cannot access the URL for SMS
(https://<device's IP address>:8443/sms/). In that case, perform the following procedure.
1) Go to http://<device's IP address>:8000/sms/, and check to see that "HTTP 500 Internal
Server Error" appears.
2) If it appears, perform the procedure "Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted
2-220
Installing an MEAP Application

Outline
From the MEAP application installation screen, you can install the MEAP application as well
as the license file.
SSL Communication" in this chapter.

Note:
In the case of SMS, by setting the key to be used, encrypted SSL communication
is always executed regardless of the following setting: [Settings/Registration] >
Management Settings > License/Other > MEAP Settings > [Use SSL] > ON/
OFF.
How to Deal with a Message "Certificate Error" That Appears at the

Time of Access
When accessing from the browser to SMS, a message "Certificate Error" appears in
some cases. In that case, perform the procedure "Installing a server certificate (reference
information)" in this chapter.
F-2-319
Before installing the MEAP application, be sure to check the following items.
Device compatibility with the MEAP application

To find out whether the device is compatible with the MEAP application, check the devices
supported by the MEAP application. Depending on the application, the device's firmware may
require version upgrade.
Resources availability (remaining amount)

The necessary resources (free storage space and free memory available) must be secured
for an MEAP application to run; otherwise, you cannot install the MEAP application.
To check the resource information, see "Device's resources" in this manual.
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Outline
2-220
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications
Procedure to install applications
2-221
CAUTION:
1) Long on to SMS.
You cannot install only the license.
2) Click [ Install MEAP Application ] on the menu.
You will not be able to install the application without using the appropriate license.
Be sure to select its license file.
If you are adding a license to an existing application, see "Procedure adding a
license file".
If you are updating an existing application, stop the application; then, install the new
application or its license file. You will not be able to update an application while it is
running.
Note:
The license file is provided in text file format, enabling to view in a text editor. The
application ID and device serial number shown in the file allow users to confirm which
device to install with the license file.
Note that any changes added to the license file may disable installation. Cares should
be taken when confirming the contents of the license file.
F-2-320
Sample file
3) Check [ Install MEAP Application/License ]page appears.
License File ID
4) Click [ Browse.. ] button, and select the application file and the license file of the application;
Application ID
then, click [ Install ] button.
Serial Number
Validated Period
Note:
Application File: identified by the extension jar.
License File: identified by the extension lic.
Counter informations
F-2-322
F-2-321
2-221
5) Check the contents of the Confirm page; then, click [ OK ] button.
2-222
Note:
As for an application that has just been installed, the status is "Installed". In order to use
the application, it is necessary to click the [Start] button to change the status to [Started].
F-2-323
F-2-326
6) Some applications show a screen to indicate the terms of agreement. Read the terms, and
click [ OK ].
7) Check the message "Installing...Please wait." appears, beginning the installation.
Note:
There are two ways to install an MEAP application. You can install using SMS, or install
using the [Register/Update Software] screen of the remote UI.
Screen example
F-2-324
8) Upon installation completed, click [ To MEAP Application Management ] button shown on

the screen to view MEAP Application Management page.
F-2-327
[Register/Update Software] provides two types of installations. One is [Manual

Installation] where you specify a jar file and a license file and then install. The other is
[Delivered Installation] where you enter a license access number.
For details of the procedures, please refer to the e-Manual.
F-2-325
2-222
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Resource Information
Resource Information
2-223
Device's resources
When 1 MEAP application operates, the resource volume allocated to each device is as
Outline
Application Management page shows [ resource information ] for information of the whole
device resources including Amount Used, Remaining, and Percent Used.
This function enables users to judge the remaining resources before installing the additional
application. Such resource information is shown based on the manifest header stated at the
top of each application, which declares the resources required in the application. Therefore,
the information does not necessarily show the resources actually in use.
follows (loaded resource list). Since the following value is an estimate, when installing the
MEAP applications, it needs to check the available resource of SMS.
Since the indication of SMS resource volume fluctuates by the login service (authentication
function) and configuration (future model), which the user selected, it may show a bigger
value than the following values.
List of Available Resources
The following resource information is shown:
Product Name
Storage
Memory
Thread
Socket
File Descriptor
If the hard disk does not have enough free space for the application, the application cannot
be installed.
iR-ADV C5051 series

iR-ADV C9075 PRO series
iR-ADV 6075 series
iR-ADV 8105 PRO series
iR-ADV C2030/C2020 series Flash model
HDD model
iR-ADV 4045 series
iR-ADV C5255 series
iR-ADV C9280 PRO series
Storage Memory Thread Socket File Description

1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
220MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
Moreover, if the free space of any of the resources (Memory, Thread, Socket, and File
128MB
128MB
128MB
128MB
32MB
128MB
128MB
128MB
128MB
256
256
256
256
162
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
128
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
128
256
256
256
256
T-2-126
Descriptor) is insufficient, the application cannot be started.

Note:
The following procedure shows how to check the resource information.
Among the resources, the free space of Storage is checked when installing an application.
For other resources, the free space is checked when the application is started.
Some applications call for a specific set of conditions for installation. For details, see the
Users Guide that comes with the individual applications.
Maximum installable application is up to 20 even if the remaining resource is adequate.
(However, the Send function consumes 1, it must be 19 in practice.) Authentication
application is not included in this number.
The MEAP application, which can be started simultaneously, is up to 19. (Authentication
application is not included in this number.)
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Click [ MEAP Application Management ].
3) Check [ Resource Information ] for information of the whole device resources.
CAUTION:
To install an application, the user needs to use the following URL when accessing the
license control system to obtain a license file. In doing so, he/she needs to register the
license access number of the application and the serial number of the device.

http://www.canon.com/lms/license/
F-2-328
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Resource Information
2-223
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?
MEAP Specifications
Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable
in all the environments declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in SMS or MEAP
What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?
Enterprise Service Manager, matching of MEAP Specifications is executed on the side of
MEAP Specifications is one of the information required to judge whether MEAP applications
can be operated or not. With MEAP Specifications, you can prevent an application that uses
a specific function of device from being installed onto the device that does not have the
MEAP platform machine. The machine which doesn't support the version declared by the
application rejects installation of such an application.
MEAP Specifications for each model
function.
Product Name
About Name
The displayed name for Meap Specifications differs depending on the screen or the location
where the name is displayed.
iR-ADV C5051
iR-ADV C5045
iR-ADV C5035
iR-ADV C5030
In this document, it is referred to as "Meap Specifications".

The location where the name is displayed/shown
2-224
T-2-127
Mechanism
MEAP platform judges whether MEAP applications can be operated on it using on the 2
information below:
iR-ADV C9075 PRO

iR-ADV C9070 PRO
iR-ADV C9065 PRO
iR-ADV C9060 PRO
iR-ADV C7065
iR-ADV C7055
Device Specification ID
MEAP Specifications
Device Specification ID shows information such as the original functions of MFP (including
print, scan, and copy), and one that differs by model such as maximum copy number,
thus each model has a different ID. (It is easy to determine the IDs for this reason.) MEAP
application declares 1 or more Device Specification ID required for its execution. Declaration
of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the models
declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in (using) SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service
Manager, matching of Device Specification ID is executed on the side of MEAP platform
machine. The machine which doesn't support the ID declared by the application rejects
installation of such an application.
Meanwhile, MEAP Specifications shows other information than defined by Device
Specification ID above, including network and security. Thus each model does not always
have the same version.
Remarks
Ver.37.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46
Ver.38.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 49
Displayed name
Platform Information : SMS > [ System Management] > [ System Information MEAP Specifications
] > [ Platform Information]
System Information Print : Local UI [ Settings/Registration ] > [ Management
Settings ] > [ License/Other ] > [ MEAP Settings ] > [ System Information
Print]
Manifest file of the MEAP application
MeapSpecVersion
SDK documents
Initial MEAP SpecVer

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17,
18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
40, 41, 42, 44, 45
Ver.50.xx or later
5,6,7,9,10,11,13,14,15,17,18,19,25,26,27,29,
30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,41,42,44,4
5,46,47,49,50,51,52,53,54,55,56,57,58,59
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, Ver.37.xx or later
18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
40, 41, 42, 44, 45
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46
Ver.38.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 49
Ver.50.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52,
53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59
iR-ADV 6075
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, Ver.20.xx or later
iR-ADV 6065
18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
iR-ADV 6055
32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
40, 41, 44, 45, 46, 49
39, 40, 41, 44, 45, 46, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54,
55, 56, 57, 58, 59
iR-ADV 8105 PRO 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, Ver.20.xx or later
iR-ADV 8095 PRO 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 1,
iR-ADV 8085 PRO 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40 , 41, 44, 45,
40, 41, 44, 45, 46, 49
46, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59
MEAP application declares 1 or more MEAP Specifications required for its execution.
2-224
2
Product Name
Initial MEAP SpecVer
iR-ADV C2030
iR-ADV C2025
iR-ADV C2020
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17,

18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49
iR-ADV 4045
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17,
iR-ADV 4035
18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
iR-ADV 4025
32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49,
50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57,
58, 59
iR-ADV C5255
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17,
iR-ADV C5250
18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
iR-ADV C5240
32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
iR-ADV C5235
40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49,
50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57,
58, 59, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69,
70, 71, 72, 74, 78, 80
iR-ADV C9280 PRO 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17,
iR-ADV C9270 PRO 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
iR-ADV C7280
32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
iR-ADV C7270
40, 41, 42, 44, 45,46,47, 49, 50,
iR-ADV C7260
51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58,
59, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70,
71, 72 ,74 ,78 ,80 ,82
Remarks
Ver
Ver.10.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19,25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 53
-
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
44
T-2-128
MEAP Specifications List

Ver
1
2
5
6
7
9
10
11
13
14
15
17
18
19
21
25
Description
MEAP basic function
MEAP Spec Version 1 function and SSL/TSL + Proxy
MEAP Spec Version 1 function and CPCA V2 + ERS (Error Recovery Service) + New SSL/TSL
Reserved
MEAP Spec Version 5 function and Compact PDF + OCR PDF (Text Searchable) + USB Host
(Buffering of Interrupt Transfer)
Reserved
MEAP Spec Version 5 function and USB-Host (Exception + Clear Feature + Set Feature+ Hot
Plug) + WINS address acquisition using MIB Agent + Timer Service + SSL client authentication
MEAP Spec Version 5 function and AMS
MEAP Spec Version 5 function and J2ME1.1 Support + Encrypted PDF + Trace and smooth
PDF + CTK2.0
Device signature PDF
IMI + ERS (API addition for IMI) , IPv6, Extended encryption function (AES/RC4)
Acquiring images of JBIG format
Parsing XML documents (XML parser)
Enhancement of IMI function (IMI Version1.2 series)
Reserved
API to access the HID/Mass Storage class devices.
26
27
29
30
31
32
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
2-225
Description
MEAP driver preference function

Symbols that can be used with MibAgent added. (symbols for IPv6 address acquisition)
IMI API added (IMI version 1.2.1 enabled)
Extended address book function. (e-mail/group/i-FAX/file)
Integrated ERS function
Extended Imaging function (function to generate PDF/OOXML (PowerPoint) with visible
signature)
Extended function for imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE series (API for address book/ CTK/
TopMenu)
Extended IMI Box function (v1.3.0)
Extended SIS function (function to check the network cable status, function to check PS print
server unit status)
Reserved
CLS (Contextual Login Service) Supporting API Added
imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE Series administrative privileges supported
MEAP Specifications added according to Jcrypto API Specification Change
ImagingAPI (Creation API of Visible Signature PDF) added
Reserved
Reserved
imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE Series Remote Address Book Supported, RemoteFAX
Supported
Addition of API that allows acquisition of the HID installation status
Multilingualization of the USB keyboard of the System Driver
Addition of API which executes a print order from the MEAP application of the IMI encryption
PDF document
ID expressing the scan function for iR-ADV C2030/C2025/C2020 series
Reserved
SecurityOptionalPackage
IMI function expansion of iR-ADV C5051 series (Ver.50.xx or later) or later
(iR-ADV C5051 series (Ver.50.xx or later)) Addition of registered API to enable SSL
communication setting (On/Off) for each URL
Disclosure of registration/deletion function to/from Quick Menu
Function to notify an event to the application at recovery from the sleep mode.
System account release function
MEAP User Preference Service
MEAP Application Configuration Service
MEAP Application Log Service
Reserved
Integrated authentication service
SFP basic functions
AVS (Lightweight Applet Viewer Service) for LBP
SIS (Lightweight System Interface Service) for LBP
LDT
IMI customization
Extension of MEAP User Preference Service (Ver56) (preference shared among applications)
2-225
2
Ver
66
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
80
82
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application
Description
Reserved
Addition of Office Open XML's Word creation API
Extension of the encryption PDF function (AES 128-bit/256-bit)
Addition of 3 formats (uncompressed searchable PDF, XPS, and linearized searchable PDF)
Reserved
Reserved
IMI: API that supports A4 scanners and allows for specifying of the direction of the original
image
SSL: Support for addition of the CN validation function
Reserved
Addition of the SFP ExtendedTextInputView class
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
2-226
MEAP Application Management

Outline
You can use the MEAP application management screen to perform basic management tasks
of the MEAP application (start, stop, uninstall), or check the device's resource information.
Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application

Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application
1) Log in to the SMS. (Refer to "Login to SMS" in this manual.)
2) Click [ Application List ]. (If the Application List is already being displayed, this operation is
not necessary.)
3) Click [ Start ] or [ Stop ] button shown for the MEAP application to be started or stopped.
API to recover from Sleep 1

T-2-129
F-2-329
2-226
4) Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either [ Started ] or [
Stopped ].
2-227
5) Procedure to uninstall the MEAP application

Before uninstalling the MEAP application, check that the following conditions are met.
The MEAP application has stopped.
The license has been disabled or deleted. (The status is "Not Installed".)
F-2-331
For information on the procedure to stop the MEAP application, see the previous section
"Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application".
For information on the procedure to delete the license file, see the following section
"Managing the License File".
F-2-330
If the MEAP application cannot be started

If the conditions to start the MEAP application are not satisfied, the MEAP application cannot
be started.
Note:
When a user tries to uninstall an application before deleting the license, the following
message is shown.
If the MEAP application cannot be started, check the following items.

Is a valid license installed?
If the license has expired, you cannot start the application. If the license has already expired,
obtain a new license and then update the license. ( See "Managing the License File" in this
manual.)
F-2-332
Are the necessary resources available?

If the resources such as memory capacity or number of threads are not sufficient, the
If the license file of the selected application cannot be deleted, the [Uninstall] button is
grayed out and therefore the application cannot be uninstalled.
application also cannot be started.

Delete any unnecessary data to secure sufficient resources.
If the application still cannot be started after checking the foregoing conditions, contact the
support department of the sales company.
CAUTION:
If the application you are uninstalling is associated with another application, a message
will appear to indicate that the package exported by the application will no loner be
available. Uninstalling such an application may also disable its associated applications.
2-227
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File
1) Log in to SMS to click [ MEAP Application Management ] on the menu.

2) Check that the status of the application you want to uninstall is [ Stop ] and the license has
been disabled. (The status is "Not Installed".)
2-228
Managing the License File
Outline
The license file management functions allow you to perform the following operations related
to the license file necessary for the MEAP application to run.
Update the license which has already expired.
Disable or delete the license file in order to uninstall the MEAP application.
These license management functions can be performed from the [ MEAP Application
Management ] screen.
The main license management functions are as follows:
F-2-333
3) Click [ Uninstall ] button for the application to be uninstalled.

Adding a license
When the license has expired, you can add a license file.
Disabling a License File
Before uninstalling the MEAP application, the license needs to be deleted. In that case, you
must first disable the license file because a license file which has not been disabled cannot
be downloaded or deleted.
Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File
Before uninstalling the MEAP application, you need to delete its license file which has already
been disabled.
By downloading the license file to your PC before it is deleted, you can use it when installing
the application again to the same device.
F-2-334
4) Check the application name to be uninstalled shown on the screen to click [ Yes ] button.
Upon [ Yes ] button clicked, uninstallation process is started.
WARNING:
After deleting the license file which has been disabled, you can no longer download the
license file.
F-2-335
2-228
Procedure adding a license file
2-229
4) Click [ Browse ] button, and select the license file you want to install.
1) Log on to SMS.
2) On MEAP Application Management, click the name of the application to which you want to
add a license file.
F-2-336
3) In [ Application / License Information ] page shown on the screen, click [ License
F-2-338
5) Click [ Install ] button.
Management ] button.
F-2-339
F-2-337
6) Check the content of the confirmation page, and click [ OK ] button.
2-229
Procedure disabling a license file (suspending a license)
2-230
2) Click the name of the application that you want to disable.
CAUTION:
Since the license file cannot be disabled when the application is still running, the
application needs to be stopped before disabling the license file.
Once suspended, the status of the license will be Not Installed, and its application
will no longer be available for use.
You can later restore a suspended license file as long as you are doing so on the
same iR, the device with the same device serial number.
If the machine needs to be replaced due to a device failure, use the transfer license
during the replacement. (See "License for forwarding")
1) Stop the application you want to uninstall on MEAP Application Management page.
F-2-341
3) On Application/ License Information page, click [ License Management ] button.
F-2-342
F-2-340
2-230
2-231
Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file
4) License Management page appears. Click [ Disable ] button.
Note:
The downloaded license file can be used for reinstallation only in the same iR device
(with the same device serial number).
1) Login to SMS.
2) Application List page appears. On MEAP Application Management page , click the name of
the application you want.
F-2-343
5) Click [ Yes ].
F-2-345
3) Check Application/ License Information page appears.

4) On Application / License Information page, click [ License Management ] button.
F-2-344
F-2-346
2-231
5) License Management page appears. To download, click [ Download ] button.
2-232
7) To delete, click [ Delete ] button.
F-2-348
F-2-347
6) When you have selected [ Download ] button, specify where you want to store the file by
following the instructions on the screen.
8) When the dialog to confirm deletion is shown, click [ Yes ] button.
F-2-349
WARNING:
Without the license file, an application cannot be reinstalled even to the MEAP de-vice
that the application had been installed last time. Download and save the license file
before deleting the application.
2-232
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions
Other License File Management Functions
2-233
2) Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender (https:// IP
address of device: 8443/sms/ForwardLicense).
Reusable license
When reinstalling, Disable License file should be downloaded (see Chapter 0, Disabling a
License File . and see Chapter 0, Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File. in
this manual) or a license for reinstallation should be obtained from LMS, before reinstallation.
This specification aims to prevent misuse of applications.
To increase convenience of users, only application with unlimited validity date and application
counter (e.g. Portal Service, SDL, SSO) has been made to be able to install as many times
as needed by the same license file. This kind of license is called 'Reusable license'.
F-2-351
3) Specify the application to be forwarded.
License for forwarding

If the machine needs to be replaced due to a device failure, you can transfer the license
information used in the MEAP application to the new machine and continue its usage. Service
engineers are responsible for license transfer as this task requires the SMS hidden page (not
open to users).
The procedure is shown below.
1) Log in to SMS, stop the application to be forwarded (see Chapter 0, Starting and Stopping
a MEAP Application. in this manual).
F-2-352
4) Click [ Disable ] button on the [ Disable License File ].
F-2-350
F-2-353
2-233
5) The window to confirm whether to create a transfer licence will be displayed. Click [ Yes ].
2-234
8) Specify the download destination, click [ Save ].
F-2-357
F-2-354
6) When [Download] button on the [ Download / Delete Transfer License File ] becomes
9) After downloading the license file for forwarding, click [ Delete ] to display the confirmation
screen and click [ Yes ] to delete the file (in consideration of breakage of license for
effective, click [Download] button.
forwarding, deleting disabled license can be executed after all steps have been completed).
F-2-358
10)
Log out of SMS.
11)
Since this downloaded transfer license is the file only to prove the license invalidation,
it cannot be used for installation to the other device as it is. Send the transfer license to
the service support contact of your nearest sales company to request issuance of the new
license for installation in the new device.
F-2-355
7) The dialogue [ File Download ] is displayed. Click [ Save ].
Note:
When requesting issuance of license for forwarding, inform the sales company of the
name of product name and serial No. of the device as sender, and of the name of
product name and serial No. of the forwarding destination.
12)
Install application using the license for forwarding issued by the sales company.
F-2-356
2-234
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
Enhanced System Application Management
2-235
About Login Service

The login service is started up to authenticate the user when MEAP-enabled iR device is
Outline
[ Enhanced System Application Management ] mainly manages the login services for logging
in to devices.
Installing and uninstalling Enhanced System Application Management (login services, etc.)
Switching login services (switching the method to log in to devices)
Checking installation status of other System Applications
booted up. Login service changes and install/ uninstall are carried out from the [ System
Management ] page.
The preinstalled login applications are Default Authentication and Single Sign On-H, and
Default Authentication is enabled by default.
CAUTION:
This device does not support SDL, conventional SSO and Security Agent.
Default Authentication overview

This login service is selected when the department ID management is enabled or no
authentication function is set. Set the department ID management to [ON] on Setting /
Registration (Additional Functions mode) of this device and register 7-digit ID and PIN by
department. This setting restricts the use of this device only to users keying the registered
ID and PIN. Department IDs/ and PINs can be registered on the touch panel of this device or
Remote UI.
SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview

This is a merger of the existing SDL and SSO login services and has the following features.
F-2-359
The following three authentication methods may be selected from.

Server authentication
Server authentication and local authentication
Local device authentication
Active Directory or LDAP can be used as the server for server authentication.
It is not necessary to prepare a server for Security Agent (SA). (In the case of SSO, SA is
necessary.)
2-235
Environment confirmation
Differences from conventional SSO

Domain B
Domain C
DC
2-236
Domain B
DC
DC
DC
Refer to the section of "Preparation for Using SSO-H" of this manual for system requirements
Domain C
needed in each login service.

DC
Specification of SSO-H
DC
Item
SA
Device
Domain A
SSO
No. of local device users
Up to 5000
Maximum number of domains
Active Directory : 200 domains (this device not included)
IPv6
Authentication provided in IPv6 supports AD/KDC/DNS of

Windows Server 2008 only)
Resource used
Memory : 3584KB
Storage : 25000KB
File Description : 27
Thread : 33
Socket : 33
Device
Domain A
SSO-H
F-2-360
Network ports
used
CAUTION:
When the setting is SSO-H, the card reader for the option controller card cannot be
used.
When the setting is SSO-H, start up takes a little longer when compared to Default
Authentication (because of the time required for object initialization).
To use the SEND function when the setting is for SSO-H, when sending email, mail
addresses need to be programmed against each user. If they are not, email cannot
be sent. Note, however, that when sending i-Fax, the mail addresses set in the
device are used.
The system configuration is different from previous SSO, so individual management
is required.
Data porting of user information that was being used with the earlier SSO local
device authentication and SDL can be done by exporting/ importing. However,
application settings information cannot be ported.
Specification
Connecting
88 KDC
53 DNS
1 - 65535 ( Default : 389) : LDAP
Listening
10000 - 10100
Supported authentication server Active Directory

Windows 2000 Server SP4/ Windows Server 2003 SP1 * /
Windows Server 2003 R2 * / Windows 2008 Server *
*64-bit OS is not supported.
LDAP
Novell eDirectory V8.8 SP6 for Windows
Lotus Domino V8.5 for Window
Supported Active Directory
Windows 2000 Server SP4/ Windows Server 2003 SP1/Windows

Server 2003 R2/ Windows 2008 Server(64BitOS not supported)
Availability of Department
Management Linkage
Available only in local authentication

T-2-130
SSO/SDL handling
This model does not support older versions of SSO or SDL released in the past.
2-236
2-237
Setting the Authentication Method
Conducting Department ID Management When SSO-H Is Used
In the case of SSO-H, it is possible to use a combination of multiple authentication methods.
Department ID Management can be conducted also when SSO-H is used for login service.
The combination can be changed from the SSO-H setting screen. (For details, refer to
e-Manual > MEAP > Menu for Administrators > Setting the SSO-H > "Setting the User
Usage Conditions
Authentication System".)
In order to allow coexistence of SSO-H and Department ID management, the following

conditions need to be satisfied.
Only "Local Device Authentication" can be used as the user authentication method.
The department ID and password have been already set for the SSO-H login user before
enabling department ID management.
The information (the department ID and password) set for the login user coincides with the
information registered in Department ID Management.
Setting Procedure
In order to allow coexistence of SSO-H and Department ID management, the following
F-2-361
Note:
The default settings are shown below.
User authentication method : "Server Authentication + Local Device Authentication"

Type of authentication : "Active Directory"
procedure needs to be performed to enable the setting.

1) Change the authentication method to DA (Default Authentication).
Access SMS, and select [Default Authentication] in [Enhanced System Application
Management] > [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS".)
CAUTION:
To ensure the security, it is recommended to change the password and the user
name of the Local Device Authentication administrator from those at the time of
shipment immediately after you have started using SSO-H.
Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users, distributing
setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server
authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in. If the device
has become unable to be logged in, follow "Remedy to Be Performed When the
Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in" in this manual.
Using an Accounting Product When SSO-H Is Used

SSO-H has collaborative linkage with NetSpot Accountant, imageWARE / iW Accounting
F-2-362
Manager, imageWARE Enterprise Management Console / iW Management Console Access

Management Plug-in, imageWARE Enterprise Management Console / iW Management
Console Accounting Management Plug-in.
For details on the combination, refer to the User's Manual or Service Manual of the product.
2-237
2) Restart the device.
2-238
Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service.
3) Disable Depart ID Management.
6) Change the user registration information of SSO-H.
In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] > [User Management]
Access the URL shown below, and change the content to the information registered in
> [Department ID Management] > [OFF]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/
Department ID Management.
Registration] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [Department ID
Or, import the setting file whose content you want to use.
Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and deselect [Enable Department

ID Management].
SSO-H user registration information edition screen

(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Edit User Information] or
https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Edit).
F-2-363
4) Change the authentication method back to SSO-H authentication.

Access SMS, and select [Single Sign-On H] in [Enhanced System Application Management]
> [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS". )
F-2-365
F-2-364
2-238
SSO-H user registration information import screen
2-239
8) Check that the device can be logged in.
(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Import User Information] or
Log off and then log on to check that the device can be logged in with an environment
(https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Import).
where Local Device Authentication and Department ID Management are enabled.
F-2-368
F-2-366
7) Enable Depart ID Management.

> [Department ID Management] > [ON]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/
Note:
In the case of conventional SSO, department management can be conducted also
when server authentication is used provided that iWAM/iW EMC account management
is used, which is not supported by SSO-H.

Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and select [Enable Department ID
Management].
Setting the Administrator for Server Authentication

When using Server Authentication, the user who satisfies the specified conditions (user
attribute and its match criteria) becomes the administrator (the device administrator and the
SSO-H administrator).
The default user attribute and whether the setting value can be changed or not are shown
below.
Item
Search Criteria:
User Attribute:
Character String:
Default value
Active Directory
LDAP
Exact Match
memberOf
Canon Peripheral Admins
Not Available
Not Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
The settings of the administrator can be changed on the following screen: remote UI >T-2-131
Single
Sign-On H > Configuration (http://device's IP address:8000/sso/ActionSet)
F-2-367
F-2-369
2-239
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Local device authentication
System Manager Linkage (automatic ID allocation to

SystemManagers)
SSO provided the automated function conventionally on Security Agent (hereinafter SA) to
authenticate System Manager by allocating IDs set on SA to domain authentication managers
2-240
Local device authentication

It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H, and is used for an iR device on a
stand-alone basis.
(users belonging to Canon Peripheral Admins group). However, SSO-H does not support this
iR device
function.
Local user
Remote user
F-2-370
Register the user to be authenticated on the database in the device.

User management can be performed from the User Management screen (http://device's IP
address:8000/sso/) or imageWARE Enterprise Management Console. The login destination is
[This device].
User Management screen
F-2-371
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Local device authentication
2-240
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)
Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)
2-241
CAUTION:
Outline
It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H. User authentication is performed
with the device linked with a domain controller on the network in an Active Directory
environment. It is a user authentication where the user is authenticated by the domain on the
network when the user logs into the device. In addition to users belonging to the domain that
Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users, distributing
setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server
authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in. If the device has
become unable to be logged in, follow "Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has
Become Unable to Be Logged in" in this manual.
includes the iR device, users belonging to domains that have a reliable relationship with the
domain (multi-domain) can also be authenticated. The domain name of the login destination
can be selected by the users themselves upon login.
Using one of the options (Net Spot Accountant, imageWARE Accounting Manager, or
imageWARE EMC Accounting Management Plug-in) makes it possible to analyze/manage
the iR device usage.
Dmain A
Domain B
Domain controller
Active Directory
With SSO-H, access to Active Directory within site can be prioritized or restricted, so there
is a setting called 'Access Mode in Sites'. Sites programmed in Active Directory comprise
multiple subnets. In this mode, SSO-H uses site information to access the same site as the
device, or the subnet Active Directory.
The SSO-H default setting is with the site internal access mode OFF.
Access Active Directory within same site only.
Domain controller
Active Directory
Trusting
Access Mode in Sites
If there is no Active Directory within the same site, or if connection fails, there will be an
relationship
authentication error.
Access another site if Active Directory within the same site cannot be located.
If there is no Active Directory within the same site, or if connection fails, an Active Directory
external to the site will be accessed.
If all attempts to access Active Directory fail, there will be an authentication error.
Available
Domain A user
iR Device
Domain B user
The operating specifications of the site internal access mode are as described below.
F-2-372
The protocol used is as follows.
When first logging in to the login service after booting iR, the domain controller (DC) is
obtained from the site list.
Kerberos:LLS/RLS/ILS
However, upon the first login, even if the site functionality is active, connection to DC is
NTLMV2:WLS(Web Service Login Service)
random. (This is because, if connection to DC should fail, the site to which the device belongs
User information acquisition is done by LDAP, so the Active Directory LDAP port needs to be
cannot be ascertained.)
made accessible. If LDAP connection fails, the authentication will end in error.
If the device IP address or the domain name are changed, the site settings are acquired once
No. of supported domains: 200 (unchanged from SSO) Site access supported.
more.
CAUTION:
In this mode, at the first login (first authentication of domain to which the device belongs)
In the case of using Server Authentication (Active Directory authentication), it is

necessary to synchronize the time settings of the Active Directory server and the
machine (and the PC for login). If the difference in time setting is 5 minutes or longer,
an error will occur at the time of login. (The setting of the allowable difference in time
can be changed.)
LDAP-Bind is performed directly to DC and site information acquired by LDAP from DC.
From the acquired site list, the site to which the device subnet belongs is extracted and this
becomes the site to which device belongs. Active Directory address is acquired (retrieved
from DNS)
2-241
2-242
Settings for access mode in sites
Note:

The Active Directory subnet is assumed to be the same subnet as the device sub-net.
In the Active Directory addresses, the Active Directories of the same site are listed.
Active Directories of the same subnet as the device are listed first.
If there is no Active Directory with the same subnet as the device, Active Directories
belonging to different subnets than the device are listed.
The Active Directories within the same site are accessed in order. Note, however, that
where there are multiple Active Directories within the same site, access to those Active
Directories will be in the order in which the address list was obtained.
If there is no Active Directory within the same site, if access outside of the site is
programmed, Active Directories outside of the site will be accessed in the order in which
the address list was obtained.
Switching between site internal access mode/ non site internal access mode, as well as
detailed mode settings, are done via DMS or iWEMC.
Site internal access mode settings window (DMS)
Site list acquisition
specified. In other words, if there is no site list, which site's Active Directory is accessed
depends upon the order of the Active Directory addresses returned by DNS. Therefore, when
acquiring the site list, LDAP may access the Active Di rectory of a different site. Therefore, in
such cases, it is sometimes necessary to access across sites or subnets, which means that
DNS Server A
records:
AD 192.168.1.2
AD 172.24.12.2
AD 172.24.35.2
AD 211.111.1.30
SSO-Tokyo 172.24.12.80
SSO-Osaka 192.168.1.90
SSO-Hakata 211.111.1.3
LDAP protocol needs to have continuity across sites (subnets) (normally, LDAP is port No.
389). Further, if connection with Active Directory fails when acquiring site information, another
Active Directory will be accessed.
Site information, once it has been acquired, is cached within the device. The life settings of
4.Access Active
Directory of same
site
DC-Tokyo/DNS
172.24.12.2
n
In SSO-H, the Active Directory to be accessed when acquiring the site list cannot be
Domain X
io
the site list will be acquired again from Active Directory upon the next login.
at
authentication by Active Directory should fail, an authentication error will be generated and
Sample of Processing Access Mode in Sites
lic
needs to be accessed in LDAP, so SASL-Kerberos-Bind is used by the login user account. If
pl
Active Directory. In order to obtain the site list from the Active Directory, Active Directory
F-2-373
The figure below shows a sample of processing Access Mode in Sites.
Re
After booting up, upon the first login by LLS or ILS/ RLS, the site list is obtained from the
2.Get Active
Directory list
N
WA3. Access Active
Directory of same
subnet
DC-Osaka/DNS
172.168.1.2
Site:Tokyo::
172.24.12.0/24
172.24.35.0/24
Repllic
ation
1. When making initial

settings, obtain site list
and ascertain which
site the device
belongs to.
SSO-Tokyo
172.24.12.80 WAN
Site:Tokyo
172.12.12.0/24
172.24.35.0/24
Site:Osaka::
192.168.1.0/24
Site:Hakata::
211.111.1.0/24
DC-Hakata/DNS
211.111.1.30
the cache can be set so that site information in the cache is updated upon the first login after
the device boots up, or so that the cache is not updated once acquired.
Site:Osaka
192.168.1.0/24
SSO-Tokyo
192.168.1.90
SSO-Tokyo
Site:Hakata
211.111.1.0/24
211.111.1.3
F-2-374
2-242
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)
1) SSO-Tokyo acquires site lists from Active Directories.

Note, however, that the Active Directories accessed in order to acquire site lists are in the
order in which they were returned by DNS, so there is no guarantee that the same Active
Directory will be accessed as in the initial settings (upon device settings or changes to NW
2-243
Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)

It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H. User authentication is performed
with the device linked with the LDAP Server on the network in an LDAP environment.
settings, etc.).
iR Device
LDAP Server
[Site subnet list]

Site: Tokyo: = 172.24.12.0/24, 172.24.35.0/24
Local user
Site: Osaka: = 192.168.1.0/24

Site: Hakata: = 211.111.1.0/24
As a result, since SSO-Tokyo is 172.24.12.80, the subnet is 172.24.12.0/24, and is judged
as belonging to site Tokyo.
2) The DNS server obtains its Active Directory list from the primary or secondary DNS, as set
Remote user
in the device.
[Active Directory]
172.24.12.2, 172.24.35.2, 192.168.1.2, 211.111.1.30
3) Of the Active Directories in 2), above, the ones that belong to the same site (Tokyo) are
172.24.12.2 and 172.24.35.2.
Of these, the Active Directory that is the same subnet as SS-Tokyo is 172.24.12.2.
Therefore, this one will be accessed.
4) If access fails at step 3), above, the other Active Directory of the same site, 172.24.35.2,
will be accessed.
5) If access fails at step 4), above, also, SSO-Osaka and SSO-Hakata will be accessed (the
order will depend on the order of the Active Directories in DNS). Note, however, that this is
an optional operation.
Logging into other domains at multi-domain
At multi-domain, if another domain is logged into, based on the site/ subnet information
retrieved in the home domain, the Active Directories of the login destination domain/ KDC
address list are computed. In the event that the domain controller IP addresses of other
domains are outside of the site access range, and only the domain controller within the site
is programmed for access, an error message will be displayed to the effect that the site
information is incorrect.
F-2-375
LDAP server authentication can be used for devices that support MEAP User Preference
Service (MEAP Specification Ver.56) and MEAP Application Setting Information Management
(MEAP Specification Ver.57).
As for models that do not support MEAP User Preference Service and MEAP Application
Setting Information Management , [LDAP Server] cannot be selected as the type of the
authentication server on the SSO-H Configuration page. Moreover, it is not possible to access
the LDAP Server Management screen and the Add Server screen.
Simple bind (a method where the password is not encrypted) is used as the bind
(authentication) between SSO-H and LDAP server. It is therefore strongly recommended to
always use SSL connection from a security standpoint.
As for the version of LDAP, only Ver.3 is supported.
ON/OFF of SSL connection can be changed on the LDAP Server Management page.
The time-out value of connection is 60 seconds.
In the case of using LDAP server authentication, the characters entered as the user name are
not case-sensitive, but the characters entered as the password are case-sensitive.
In the case of SSO-H, authentication is not allowed when the user name includes "* (asterisk)".
If authentication is performed with "* (asterisk)" used in the user name, an authentication error
occurs.
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)
2-243
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Steps to Change Login Services
Server authentication and local device authentication
2-244
2) A page will appear showing the various selections you can make for the login service. Click
It is a user authentication method provided with both the "server authentication" function and
[SWITCH] button for the login service to be used.
the "local device authentication" function.

It is possible to use server authentication to authenticate the users registered on the
authentication server under normal conditions and use local device authentication when a
user who cannot be added to the authentication server needs to be temporarily authenticated.
If a trouble occurs in the authentication server, local device authentication can be used as an
emergency measure until recovery from the trouble.
Local user
Server authentication
Local
device authentication
F-2-378
3) When login service application you have selected turns to Start after Restart, restart the
Remote user
device.
F-2-376
Steps to Change Login Services

1) Click [ Enhanced System Application Management] on [System Management ].
F-2-379
F-2-377
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Steps to Change Login Services
2-244
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Installation Procedure
2-245
Login Service Installation Procedure
CAUTION:
In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS
authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login
method.
Follow the procedure show below to install login services.

1) Access SMS, and select [System Management] > [Enhanced System Application
Management].
F-2-380
This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which enables to stop SMS
Installer Service (Password Authentication) by changing the login method to Default
Authentication.
When you want to change the login method to a device, log in the SMS with the
password authentication.
F-2-381
2) Click the [Browse] button, and specify the enhanced system application file and license file.
F-2-382
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Installation Procedure
2-245
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Uninstallation Procedure
2-246
Login Service Uninstallation Procedure
3) Click [ Install] button.
Follow the procedure show below to uninstall login services.

In order to uninstall a login service, the service needs to be stopped ("Installed" status).
Default Authentication cannot be uninstalled even when the service is stopped.
1) Access SMS, and select [System Management] > [Enhanced System Application
Management].
F-2-383
F-2-384
2) Click the [Uninstall] button of the login service you want to uninstall.
F-2-385
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Uninstallation Procedure
2-246
Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > Password authentication
System Application Management

This function manages the login services for logging in to SMS.
There are two login methods: one is "password authentication" where you enter the password
2-247
Note:
If you want to change the display language, select the language from the drop-down list
of [Language] at the upper right of the login screen, and click the update button.
for SMS on the SMS login screen and log in, and the other is "RLS authentication" where you
do not use the SMS login screen but enter the user ID and password on the RLS (Remote
Login Service) screen for authentication.
F-2-387
Password authentication
Enter the password on the SMS login screen for authentication. Only one password can be
set for SMS.
The login procedure is shown below.
Note:
If the wrong password is entered, the following window is displayed. The user's system
administrator may have changed the password, so confirm the password with the
system administrator. Note that there is no special password for service.
1) Access SMS from the browser of a PC on the same network as the MEAP device. The URL
is as follows.
URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/
Note:
To encrypt the password information input when logging in, SSL of the login screen
was made effective. However, it is redirected to new URL (effective SSL) even when
accessing with URL (non-SSL) before.
2) Enter the password in the password entry field, and click the [Log In] button. The default
password is MeapSmsLogin. (The password is case-sensitive.)
F-2-388
F-2-386
Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > Password authentication
2-247
Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > RLS Authentication
RLS Authentication
Login without using the SMS login window but by entering the user ID and password for
authentication in the RLS (Remote Login Service) window. The user information (user name
and password) used is the information for server authentication or local device authentication.
The login procedures are as follows.
2-248
Note:
Only the following users may us SMS via RLS.
For local device authentication, users with Administrator or Device Admin authority.
In the case of server authentication, the users who belong to the group (default: Canon
Peripheral Admins) specified as the device administrator on the SSO-H Configuration
screen.
1) Access SMS by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network as the
MEAP device.
URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/rls/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls/
Note:
To encrypt the password information input when logging in, SSL of the login screen was
made effective. However, it is redirected to new URL (effective SSL) even when accessing
with URL (non-SSL) before.
F-2-390
F-2-389
Note:
When the device authentication method used is server authentication, enter the user
name, password and login destination registered with authentication server and then click
Log In.
If the authentication method used is local device authentication, enter the user name,
password and login destination registered in the device and click Log In button.
The user information is set as below for local device authentication by default. Both are
case sensitive.
User Name: Administrator
Password: password
2-248
Note:
SMS Access can be gained also from Remote UI.

Access Remote UI and click on SMS shortcut shown on the lower right of the screen to
gain access to SMS.
When only the password authentication is enabled, the password authentication screen is
shown.
When only the RLS authentication is enabled, no further authentication is needed to
access SMS. This is because users have already authorized upon accessing to Remote
UI.
2-249
CAUTION:
method.
F-2-392
Authentication.
F-2-391
2-249
Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline
2-250
Setting the method to login to SMS
Setting for login by Password Authentication

The procedures for changing the password authentication Start/ stop settings are as follows.
Outline
1) Access SMS login screen by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network
The method to log into SMS can be specified by one of the following methods.
If you want to change the password authentication settings: Use RLS authentication
to log in, and change the settings.
If you want to change the RLS authentication settings: Use password authentication
to log in, and change the settings.

Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls
2) Enter the user name and the password of the user registered as an administrator, select
The following table shows the start/stop combinations of the two login methods.
the login destination, and then click the [Log In] button.
Combination of Login Methods

Start RLS Authentication
as the MEAP device.
Stop RLS Authentication
Start Password Authentication
Login available with either method
Login available only with
Stop Password Authentication
Login available only with RLS

Authentication
Setting unavailable
Login screen (In case authentication method is SSO-H)
T-2-132
CAUTION:
If only login via RLS is programmed, login may be disabled for the following reasons.
Authentication server is down
Network problem, no communication with authentication server
In the event of either of these cases, try the following.
1. If local device authentication is active, try logging in with local device
authentication.
F-2-393
3) Select [System Application Management]
2. If only server authentication is active, launch in MEAP safe mode from the device
service mode.
After launching in MEAP safe mode, the Default Authentication will become active, and
you will be able to login to SMS with password authentication. After logging into SMS,
set the password authentication login to ON (active) and restore the device from MEAP
safe mode to normal mode. Until the problem blocking authentication is resolved, log
into SMS with password authentication.
F-2-394
2-250
2-251
4) Click [Start] or [Stop] button shown in Status field of SMS Installer Service (Password
Authentication) to check if the status is changed.
Setting for login by RLS Authentication

The procedures for changing the RLS authentication Start/ Stop settings are as follows.
1) Access the SMS login screen using the normal method (password authentication). The
URL is shown below.
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls
2) Enter the password in the password entry field, and click the [Log In] button. The default
password is "MeapSmsLogin". (Case sensitive)
Login screen by Password Authentication
F-2-395
5) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly.
When clicking [Stop] to change the status to [Start], another password authentication login
screen is firstly shown. When trying to access the password authentication screen after
clicking [Start] to change the status to [Stop], the user is automatically redirected to RLS
authentication screen.
Password authentication started screen and Password authentication stopped screen
F-2-397
3) Select [System Application Management] on System Management menu.
F-2-396
F-2-398
2-251
2-252
4) Click on [Start] or [Stop] button shown on Status field of SMS Installer Service (Remote
Login Service Authentication) to check if the status is changed.
CAUTION:
method.
F-2-399
5) Log out and then log in again and access via the RLS authentication login window.
When RLS authentication is set to [Start], another RLS login screen is firstly shown. When
accessing to RLS status screen with the setting of [Stop], the user will be redirected to the
F-2-401
Authentication.
password authentication screen.

RLS authentication started screen and RLS authentication stopped screen
F-2-400
2-252
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Checking the System Information
MEAP Application System Information
Initial Display Languages of SMS

SMS supports English and Japanese. Display language can be changed with selecting by the
drop down list on a login page.
information.
Start
No
Refer to the setting of the
Accept-Language header,
which a browser sends out.
Checking the System Information
Refer to the value of

portalLang stored in
Cookie.
Yes
Outline
You can check the device's platform information and the MEAP application's system
The initial display language at the time of accessing SMS depends on the setting.
Logged in by RLS
authentication.
2-253
System information that can be checked from the screen

MEAP Specifications version (MEAP Spec Ver)
Remote UI display English or Japanese

setup language
MEAP Contents version

Java Virtual Machine version
System application information
Except English or Japanese
The name of the installed system application
English or Japanese
Language
priority setting of a
browser
Refer to the setting of a language
displaying in registration/initial
setting [Additional Function].
English or Japanese
Display setting
of a device
The installation date of the installed system application

Application ID of the installed system application
The status of the installed system application
The checking procedure is shown below.

Display in English.
Display in the
language configured.
F-2-402
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [System Information] on System Management menu.
When accessing by SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication)

It is referred in order of the language priority (setting of the Accept-Language header which a
browser sends out) and the display-language setting in the "user mode". When the language
setup is other than English or Japanese, it is displayed in English.
When accessing by SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service

Authentication).
Initial display language is set by the language setting (value of portalLang storing in Cookie)
selected by the remote UI screen. When the setting is other than English or Japanese,
Selection of display language is performed in a similar way with the SMS Installer Service
(Password Authentication) mentioned above.
F-2-403
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Checking the System Information
2-253
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application
Display of System Information Details
2-254
Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application
The system information details can be displayed to check more than one pieces of information
MEAP system information can be printed out with iR device for confirmation.
all at the same time: platform information, system application information, information on the
Note:
The system information of the MEAP application that you checked in the previous
section is exactly the same as the system information of the MEAP application that is
output.
installed MEAP applications, etc.

1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Info] on System Management menu.
3) Click [Display Details] button.
Follow the steps below when confirming information:

1) Select [ Settings/ Registration] > [ Management Settings] > [ License/ Other] > [MEAP
Settings] > [ Print System Information] .
Note:
When System Manager ID and PIN are set, go to Top screen and log in as System
Manager to continue jobs.
2) Press[ Yes] button.
F-2-404
4) System information of each application (including system applications) is shown in an

additional window. Copy and paste all the information in a file to attach to AR reports as
text information. This function is useful to check status information of each application.
F-2-406
Note:
MEAP system information was printed out in PDL format conventionally. However,
the information has been printed out in text format instead of PDL format, enabling iR
devices without PDL installation to print out information (iR C3220 and later).
F-2-405
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application
2-254
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Information > Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information
MEAP Application Information
Content of MEAP system information

Application System Information
Outline
Application Name: C-Cabinet Gateway for MEAP

Application ID/System Application Name: 03a46668-63e4-4636-9cbb-492b6cef05d5
Application Version: 1.0.0
Status: Resolved
Installed on: Tue Oct 21 14:00:11 GMT+09:00 2003
Vendor : Canon Inc.
License Status : Installed
Maximum Memory Usage : 1024
Registered Service :
item
2-255
You can check the MEAP application installed on the device.

The following information can be checked on the MEAP application information screen.
Application Information
Application Name
Version
Application ID
Installed on
content
Application Name
It is the name (bundle-name) declared in a statement within the application

program. It may not necessarily be identical to the name of the program.
Application ID/System Application ID (application-id) items which are declared on the declaration
Application Name
statement in the application program are printed.
Application Version
It is the version of the application (bundle-version) declared in a statement
within the application program.
Status
It indicates the status of the application in question; specifically,
Installed: the application has been installed.
Active: the application is being in use.
Resolved: the application is at rest.
Installed On
It indicates the date on which the application was installed.
Vendor
It is the name of the vendor that developed the application, and is the name
(bundle-vendor) declared in a statement within the application program.
License Status
It indicates the status of the license; specifically,
None: no license is needed.
Not Installed: no license has been installed.
Installed: the appropriate license has been installed.
Invalid: the license has been invalidated.
Overlimt: the license has been used beyond its permitted limit.
License Expires After It indicates the date after which the license expires. If the status of the
license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
License Upper Limit It indicates the limit imposed on individual counter readings. If the status of
the license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
Counter Value
It is the current counter reading of a specific counter. If the status of the
license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
Maximum Memory
It indicates the maximum amount of memory that the application uses. It is
Usage
the amount (maximum memory usage) declared in a statement within the
application program, and is expressed in kilobytes.
Registered Service
It is a list of services that have been registered by the application with the
MEAP framework.Some services may not have printable data.
Description
Manufacturer
Resources Used (Storage, Memory, Threads, Sockets, File Descriptors)
License Information
Status
Serial Number
Expires after
Type of Counter
Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information

1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [MEAP Application Information] on System Management
menu.
T-2-133
F-2-407
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Information > Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information
2-255
Technology > MEAP > Check License > Procedure to Check the License File
3) The MEAP application information screen appears. Scroll the screen and check the
information of the target application.
2-256
Check License
Outline
You can check the contents of the license file.
Procedure to Check the License File

1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [Check License] on System Management menu.
F-2-408
F-2-409
3) Click the [Browse..] button, specify a license file, and click the [Check] button.
F-2-410
Technology > MEAP > Check License > Procedure to Check the License File
2-256
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > Outline
Changing SMS Login Password
2-257
MEAP Application Setting Information Management

and Log Management
Outline
Outline
You can change the password for logging into SMS.

If you forgot the login password and you want to change the password back to the default
value (MeapSmsLogin), see "If you forgot the password (SMS login password initialization)"
in this chapter.
The MEAP Application Setting Information Management page and the MEAP Application Log
Management page provide menu related to "MEAP Application Configuration Service" for
managing MEAP application setting information and menu related to "MEAP Application Log
Service" for managing log information respectively.
Procedure to Change the SMS Login Password

1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [Chage Password] on System Management menu.
F-2-413
MEAP Application Configuration Service

This service is used to manage the MEAP application setting information. It has functions
F-2-411
3) Enter the current password and a new password, and then click the [Change] button.
such as saving setting information to the MEAP area. Ver 57 of MEAP Specifications supports
this service.
MEAP Application Log Service

This service is used to collect MEAP application logs (debug logs and authentication logs).
Ver 58 of MEAP Specifications supports this service.
The collected logs can be downloaded or deleted in user mode.
The settings such as the log level to be saved cannot be made from SMS.
F-2-412
These settings depend on the MEAP application. For detailed information, refer to the manual
for the application.
Note:
The [Reset] button on the [Change Password] screen is used to clear the value entered
in the text field. It is not a button for changing the SMS login password back to the
default value.
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > Outline
2-257
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Setting Information Management
Advantages Obtained When Using the Services
2-258
MEAP Application Setting Information Management
By using MEAP Application Setting Information Management and MEAP Application Log
The setting data (stored on the device) of the MEAP applications which support MEAP
Service, as long as the MEAP application supports these services, you can collectively
Application Setting Information Management can be deleted. The procedure is shown below.
perform data management tasks.

1) Log in to SMS.
Devices and MEAP applications which do not support new functions

App1
Dedicated management tool
App2
Dedicated management tool
Setting and reference
App1
App2
Config data
(App1 format)
Pref data
(App1 format)
Log data
(App1 format)
2) Select [System Management] > [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] on

System Management menu.
Device
Config data
(App2 format)
Pref data
(App2 format)
Log data
(App2 format)
F-2-414
As for devices and MEAP applications that do not support the service, the setting information
and log data are managed on an application-by-application basis.
F-2-416
3) Select an application you want to delete, and click the [Delete] button.
Devices and MEAP applications which support new functions

General-purpose management tool
App1
Configuration
management service
App2
Preference
management service
Device
Log
management service
Config data
Preference data
Log data
(common format)
(common format)
(common format)
Platform
F-2-417
F-2-415
As for devices and MEAP applications that support the service, information can be collectively
managed.
Note:
If a MEAP application that contains setting data which can be shared (not dedicated
to the application) is installed, the application name [Shared Setting Information of
Applications] is displayed.
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Setting Information Management
2-258
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Log Management
MEAP Application Log Management
2-259
4) To download the logs
The log data (stored on the device) of the MEAP applications which support MEAP
The file save dialog for the log file will appear. Specify the destination and save the file.
Application Log Service can be downloaded or deleted. The procedure is shown below.
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [MEAP Application Log Management] on System
Management menu.
F-2-420
5) To delete the logs

The confirmation screen will appear to prompt you to delete the logs. Click the [Yes] button
to delete the logs.
F-2-421
F-2-418
3) Select [Download Application Logs] or [Delete Application Logs].
F-2-419
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Log Management
2-259
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST
Maintenance
Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the
Backup Data Using SST
Outline
2-260
Backup Item Automatically Copied

The following data are backed up using SST:
The following data are backed up (saved as Meapbackup.bin) using SST.
MEAP applications.
Setup data generated by MEAP applications (Note that image data stored in BOX will not
be saved for MEAP applications using BOX function).
When replacing or formatting the HDD, the data in the MEAP application area needs to be
User information data registered for local device authentication in SSO-H
temporarily saved to your PC.
SMS password
This chapter describes information on backing up the data in the MEAP application area and
recovering the backup data.
CAUTION:
In the case of MEAP-installed devices, the application is license-managed, so the application
Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in user mode during the period from backup
using SST to recovery of the data.
needs to be reinstalled and reconfigured when replacing or formatting the HDD.

In that case, a license for reinstallation needs to be downloaded and the customer data and
configuration information need to be recovered, and these procedures pose heavy burdens
on the service technician.
The area used for the MEAP application can be easily saved/recovered by using the backup
function of SST (Service Support Tool).
This greatly reduces the work burden on the service technician.
Please note that the application cannot be illegally copied because the backup data can be
recovered only when the iR device has the same serial number.
WARNING:
F-2-422
You must not perform any other work (including checking operation) until the HDD has
been backed up. This arrangement is to prevent a mismatch of MEAP counter readings
and the HDD contents, and any fault in operation arising as the result of failure to
observe this will not be covered by the guarantee of operation.
Note:
The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the
same license.
When [Initialize All Data/Settings] is executed, the key used to combine encrypted
backup data (SMS password, etc.) is initialized, which makes it impossible to combine
the data.
It means that SMS cannot be accessed even when the backup data has been
recovered using SST.
If you inadvertently executed [Initialize All Data/Settings] and can no longer access
SMS, the SMS login password needs to be initialized by following the procedure shown
in "When SMS Cannot Be Accessed" in "Login to SMS" in this manual.
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST
2-260
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
2-261
Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
Data backed up using SST in the case of iR-ADV devices

In the case of iR-ADV devices, menus are implemented as MEAP application. Therefore the
following items can be also backed up (stored as Meapbackup.bin).
1) Switching Login Service / Backup of Login User Information

If SSO-H is used for the login service, switch to default authentication before backing
Setting items of each menu in the main menu ( Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and
up the user information. Although SST will back up local device user information, it is
Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox, ).
recommended to export the user information just in case. For local device user information
Favorite settings
backup, go to User Management page of SSO-H site and export the data. (The SSO-H
Default settings
login page opens with the URL "https://<device IP address>:8443/sso/").
Settings of option shortcuts

Previous settings
CAUTION:
Settings of quick menu
If a HDD of a system that uses SSO-H is formatted without changing the login
service to the default authentication, the error message The login service must be
set again with SMS appears and the system cannot start up when you attempt to
restart the system after formatting.
Button size information

Wallpaper settings
Quick menu button information
Restrict quick menu use
If this problem occurs, change the login service to SSO-H with SMS. If you cannot
access to SMS since you do not have the IP address of the device, start the system
with FIXIP mode -hold down the numeric keys 1 and 7 and turn the power switch on.
The IP address 172.16.1.100 will be automatically assigned for the device. Then
log in to SMS specifying the address.
Requirements for Backup Using the SST

The following conditions must be met for use of the function:
1) Device Firmware Version
Device Firmware Version for SST (Ver4.2x)
Boot ROM
iR-ADV C2030/C2020 series
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
series other than iR-ADV
C2030/C2020 series
System
2) Starting the device in Download Mode
SST
Boot ROM is not

equipped.
Already supported
since the 1st
version.
The version supporting

the corresponding
devices.
Already supported
since the 1st
version.
Already supported
since the 1st
version.
The version supporting

the corresponding
devices.
T-2-134
Press [2] and [8] buttons at the same time on the control panel and turn on the main power
switch to start the device in Download Mode. Note that SST backup function is enabled
only in Download Mode.
3) Connecting the main unit to the PC to start SST
Connect the main unit to the PC with SST installed using the crossing cable and the like to
start SST on the PC.
2) SST Version
Version 4.2.x or later. An earlier version will not permit the use of the function. If needed,
upgrade the SST.
3) Space for backup
To back up the HDD of the iR, the PC must have approx 1024MB of free space at
maximum. Sizes of backup files depend on actual data capacities to be backed up.
2-261
4) Connecting the device using SST
2-262
6) Saving backup data
When starting SST, select the target device type as Single and click [Start] button.
Upon the backup data transferred to the PC, enter an appropriate file name and click [OK]
to save the backup data on the PC.
F-2-425
When the file is successfully saved, click [OK] button, and then click [Return to Menu]
button.
F-2-423
5) Generating backup data to transfer it to the PC (uploading)

Click [Upload Data] button of SST and select Meapback.bin as the item to be backed up
to click [ Start ] button.
F-2-426
F-2-424
2-262
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedures to Restore Backup Data
2-263
Procedures to Restore Backup Data
CAUTION:
Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in user mode during the period from backup
using SST to recovery of the data.
1) Connecting to the device

Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of the Procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST.
2) Restoring backup file
Click [Download Data] button and select the data backed up in the previous step (Meapback.
bin) to click [Start Restoring Data]. Note that the data backed up in a different version
cannot be restored.
F-2-427
When [Initialize All Data/Settings] is executed, the key used to combine encrypted
backup data (SMS password, etc.) is initialized, which makes it impossible to combine
the data.
It means that SMS cannot be accessed even when the backup data has been
recovered using SST.
F-2-428
3) Transferring Data
When the data is successfully transferred, click the [OK] button shown on the screen. To
continue other jobs, click [Return to Menu] button.
If you inadvertently executed [Initialize All Data/Settings] and can no longer access
SMS, the SMS login password needs to be initialized by following the procedure shown
in "When SMS Cannot Be Accessed" in "Login to SMS" in this manual.
F-2-429
4) Turn off and on the main power switch of the device to gain access in SMS to check that
MEAP applications are surely restored.
5) Restore the backup data and setting saved. Note that the user information of the local
device is included in the backup data, thus does not need to be restored.
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedures to Restore Backup Data
2-263
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Outline
Formatting and Replacing the HDD

Outline
2-264
Formatting the HDD
Procedure to format the hard disk
Follow the following procedure to format the HDD.
If the HDD is broken or does not function correctly due to failure of the system (excluding the
MEAP application), it needs to be formatted or replaced.
When the HDD is formatted or replaced, the files of the MEAP application stored in it will be
lost, so make a backup of the MEAP application area according to Procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST if possible. If a backup cannot be made, the MEAP
application and the license files need to be reinstalled.
As for the MEAP counter information, it will not be lost because it is backed up just like the
conventional counter.
If a backup cannot be made, a special license file (a license file for installation with the
expiration date carried over from the current counter value) is required to reinstall the MEAP
1) Connecting to the device

Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of "Procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST".
2) Formatting the HDD
Select Format HDD from SST menu to format the HDD.
Note:
HDD can be formatted also by starting Download mode using the USB memory and
executing formatting from the displayed menu.
application. This special license file is treated as a service tool and cannot be obtained by a
general user.
In order to obtain a special license file, a service technician needs to contact a person in
charge of support of a sales company.
When contacting the person in charge of support, the service technician also needs to
provide the serial number of the device and the name of the MEAP application installed.
In the support departments of regional headquarters of Canon, all license files of the
applications that have been issued are filed according to device serial numbers, enabling you
to obtain a series of license files through a single screen as long as you can identify the serial
number of the device in question.
Note:
The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the
same license.
2-264
2-265
HDD replacement procedure
If the MEAP application area can be backed up
Outline
If the MEAP application area can be backed up, it can be recovered after replacing the HDD,
The procedure for replacing the HDD differs according to whether the HDD functions normally
so it is not necessary to prepare the special licenses for reinstallation.
or not.
1) Preparation for replacement
If the MEAP application area cannot be backed up
If the HDD does not function correctly due to failure or for other reason, the MEAP application
area cannot be backed up. It is therefore necessary to reinstall the application after replacing
the HDD. The procedure is shown below.
1) Preparation for replacement
Copy a set of license files for reinstalling the MEAP application (special licenses and
reusable licenses) to a laptop for service operation.
Register a set of system files of a target product to SST. Or, prepare USB thumb drive of
the System file transfer settlement.
2) Replacing the drive
Prepare the necessary service parts of the HDD, and replace the drive.
Back up the MEAP application area of the device according to the procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST.
2) Replacing the drive
Prepare the necessary service parts of the HDD, and replace the drive.
3) Formatting HDD
Format the HDD referring to Procedure to format the hard disk.
4) Restorering the backup file
Restore the backup data referring to the Procedures to Restore Backup Data.
5) Importing user information
As necessary, make login service selections and import user information.
3) Formatting HDD
Format the HDD referring to Procedure to format the hard disk.
4) Reinstalling the MEAP application
When the device has started normally, obtain the jar files of the MEAP applications from the
user, and install them using the license files for reinstallation.
Installation method is the same as normal installation.
5) Importing user information
As necessary, make login service selections and import user information.
Note:
When you replace the HDD without uninstalling MEAP applications, make sure to
reinstall the previously installed applications. Unless reinstalling them, MEAP counter
will not be released and the message The number of applications that can be installed
has exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after uninstalling other applications.
is displayed so that the installation of new applications may not be accepted. If you
want to install new applications in this case, once reinstall the applications in-stalled
before formatting and uninstall unnecessary applications.
2-265
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)
MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)
2-266
3) Press
or
button for several times until [MEAPSAFE] button is shown. Click
[MEAPSAFE] button.
Outline
Use safe mode if you need to start up the system without worrying about extra applications. It
will start up only those system software files (including SMS) that normally start up as default
files while preventing MEAP applications and the like from starting up.
When you have made changes and restart the device, the control panel will indicate 'MPSF'
in its lower right corner. The MEAP applications that may have been active before you shut
down the equipment will not start up on their own. Make use of safe mode when restoring
the system software as when MEAP applications or services cause a fault as the result of a
conflict or wrong sequence of registration/use. You can access to SMS in this condition so
that you can take necessary measures, for example, you can stop application that may cause
the trouble.
If default authentication has been selected, the mode of authentication remains valid;
otherwise, the message "The login service must be set again with SMS" ap pears. Change
F-2-431
4) Press the 1 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '1'; then, click [OK]
button.
the login service as necessary.
Starting in Safe Mode

1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] in level 2.
2) Press [COPIER] >[Option] > [USER] buttons.
F-2-432
5) Check that the notation MPSF has appeared in the upper left corner of the screen; then,
restart the device.
F-2-430
F-2-433
2-266
Note:
If accessed to SMS in MEAP SAFE mode, the device started mode is shown on the title
bar of the browser.
2-267
How to cancel MEAP SAFE mode
1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] in level 2.
2) Press [COPIER] >[Option] > [USER] buttons.
An example of the title bar displayed at the time of startup in MEAP SAFE mode
Service Management Service : <Device Name>:<Product Name>: Safe Mode
F-2-434
CAUTION:
F-2-436
If the device has been started in MEAP SAFE mode, all the MEAP applications stop
and the status becomes "Installed".
3) Press
or
button for several times until [MEAPSAFE] button is shown. Click
[MEAPSAFE] button.
This status remains unchanged even if the MEAP SAFE mode is canceled and the
device is started again in normal mode. It is therefore necessary to access SMS after
normal startup and start the MEAP application.
F-2-437
F-2-435
2-267
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs
4) Press the 0 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '0'; then, press [OK]
button.
2-268
Collection of MEAP Console Logs

Overview
When debugging a MEAP application, console logs need to be collected in some cases.
The following shows how to collect MEAP console logs using commercially available terminal
software and service mode.
What to Prepare
PC connected with the same network as the device
Commercially available terminal software
Note:
In the procedure shown in this manual, "Tera Term Pro" and "Hyper Terminal" are used
as the terminal software.
F-2-438
5) Start service mode again after rebooting the device, and check that the displayed setting
value has changed to "0" and that [MPSF] is no longer displayed at the upper left of the
Work Procedure
screen.
Device Setting Procedure

1) Start [ SERVICE MODE ] in Level 1.
2) Press [ COPIER ] > [ Option ] > [ DSPLY-SW ] buttons.
F-2-439
F-2-440
2-268
3) Press [ RMT-CNSL] button.
2-269
PC setting procedure (when Tera Term is used)

1) Install the terminal software on the PC.
2) Start the terminal software, make the following settings, and then click the "OK" button.
F-2-441
4) Press either 1 (activate remote console function) on control panel (the numerical value
F-2-444
input in the field is displayed), and press [ OK ] button.
Connection
Host
Service
TCP port#
: Select [TCP/IP] (Default)

: Device Host Name or IP Address
: Select "Telnet"
: Enter 19001
3) The connection window will open. Select [Terminal] from the [Setup] menu.
F-2-442
5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and restart the device.
F-2-445
F-2-443
2-269
4) The terminal setting screen will appear. Make the following settings, and then click the
2-270
6) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Set the save
"OK" button.
destination path and the file name, and then click the [Save] button.
F-2-446
Terminal ID
New-line Receive
: VT100
: LF
F-2-448
7) Perform the operation whose log you want to collect.
5) Select [Log...] from the [File] menu.
F-2-449
8) Click the [Close] button in the log dialog.
F-2-447
F-2-450
Note:
To suspend log collection, click the [Pause] button.
2-270
2-271
9) Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored correctly.
Note:
While collecting logs, the following operations are available from the [File] menu.
Comment to Log... :
You can add a comment to the log being collected. The added comment is reflected in
the log file.
F-2-454
Note:
Depending on the MEAP application, the log output setting needs to be made in order
to collect logs.
CAUTION:
F-2-451
Show Log dialog... :

The logs that have been collected are pasted on Notepad and displayed.
After collecting logs, the remote console function of the device needs to be disabled
(select [SERVICE MODE] LEVEL1 > [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] > [RMT-CNSL]
> 0, and restart the device).
F-2-452
Change directory... :
The preliminarily set save destination of the log file can be changed.
F-2-453
2-271
PC setting procedure (when Hyper Terminal is used)
2-272
4) Click the "Properties" icon on the Hyper Terminal screen.
1) Start Hyper Terminal, set the connection name in the [Connect Description] dialog that
appears on the screen, and then click the OK button.
F-2-458
5) The [Console Properties] dialog will appear. Select the [Settings] tab, select [VT100] for
[Emulation], and then click the [OK] button.
F-2-455
2) Set [TCP/IP(Winsock)] for [Connect using].

F-2-459
6) Return to the Hyper Terminal window, and select [Transfer] > [Capture Text...] from the
menu.
F-2-456
3) Enter the IP address of the target device in [Host address], and enter "19001" (fixed) in [Port
number].
F-2-460
7) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Specify the save
destination.
F-2-461
F-2-457
2-272
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices
2-273
Using USB Devices
8) Perform the operation whose log you want to collect.
USB Driver
Two types of USB drivers
While the USB driver that can be used in iR series is only the USB driver designed exclusively
for MEAP application (hereinafter referred to as MEAP driver), not only MEAP driver but
also USB system driver (hereinafter referred to as system driver) can be used in iR-ADV
series.
System driver and MEAP driver cannot be used together. When either of them is used, the
other driver cannot be used.
USB driver setting (iR-ADV series):
System driver is active by default in iR-ADV series.
F-2-462
9) Select [Transfer] > [Capture Text...] > [Stop] from the menu.
The driver can be changed in Settings/Registration (user mode).

Usually, It is not necessary to change the setting because it is specified in the MEAP
application side.
Only in the case of a special MEAP application, it is necessary to change the USB driver
setting.
For details, refer to specifications of MEAP application side.
F-2-463
10) Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored correctly.
F-2-464
Note:
Depending on the MEAP application, the log output setting needs to be made in order
to collect logs.
F-2-465
CAUTION:
After collecting logs, the remote console function of the device needs to be disabled
(select [SERVICE MODE] LEVEL1 > [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] > [RMT-CNSL]
> 0, and restart the device).
Note:
The [Use USB Host] menu on the screen is hidden at the time of shipment.
To display this menu, start [SERVICE MODE] in level 2, and then change the value of
[COPIER] > [Option] > [USER] > [USBH-DSP] from 0 to 1.
2-273
Operating mode
Conventional USB
settings [Use MEAP
keyboard enabled MEAP
driver as USB input
application
device]
ON
* MEAP driver
(conventional
compatibility mode)
OFF (*default)
* Native driver
Can use USB keyboard.

Can work only on the
conventional applications
that support the MEAP
application driver.
Cannot use USB
keyboards. (Device cannot
be detected.)
Software keyboard
application
(System Driver/
MEAP Driver)
System driver
supported MEAP
application
Cannot use USB

keyboards. (Device
cannot be detected.)
Cannot use USB

keyboards.
Can use USB

keyboards.
Can use USB

keyboards. Via software
keyboards only.
2-274
Note:
You can display/check the used driver setting at USB device report print described
below regardless of whether it is registered from a manifest file or is registered from
API.
Availability for MEAP application of the USB device A (either HID keyboard or Mass Storage)
plugged to iR device
T-2-135
Note:
When any settings changes are made, the device must be restarted.
Setting the USB driver for each USB device (MEAP driver preference registration)
If it is set to use the system driver, the conventional applications that support the MEAP
application driver cannot use the USB input device.
Therefore, for the USB drivers used by USB devices/MEAP applications, there is setting
function (MEAP driver preference registration) to give priority to the MEAP driver.
If you register the ID of the USB device by using this function, the USB device can use the
MEAP driver despite the Additional Function settings.
Using this function requires the conditions below:
Supported MEAP SpecVer: 26
Describe the idVendeor(VID) and idProdutc(PID) of USB device in the manifest or activate/
deactivate the VID and PID by calling API from MEAP applications.
The driver setting that is used in a manifest file is reflected in the following timing.
Registration
status of
USB device
A
Not
registered
Registered
restarted.
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
T-2-136
NO: USB device not available
Storage) plugged to iR device

Setting to use
MEAP application
Registration
System
System driver
Application
MEAP driver
status of
USB
Native
driver
not supported with VID/PID
(Additional
USB device
device application
supported / conventional
declared in
Functions
B
application
application
Manifest for B
mode)
Registered
Not
registered
Not used
(Native driver to
be used)
To be used
Not used
(Native driver to
be used)
To be used
YES: USB device available
YES
NO
NO
NO
Availability for MEAP applications of USB devices B and C (either HID keyboard or Mass
The registration will be enabled when an application is activated and device is

The registration will be disabled when an application is stopped and device is
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
YES: USB device available
When registering from a manifest file.

restarted.
When the HID keyboard is

MEAP application
installed > USB Settings:
Application
[Use MEAP Driver for USB
System System driver with VID/
Input Device]
Native
driver
not supported/
PID
When the Mass Storage is application
supported conventional declared
installed > USB Settings:
application application in Manifest
[Use MEAP Driver for
for x
External USB Device]
B
C
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
C
B
C
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
B
C
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO: USB device not available
T-2-137
2-274
Specifications for the use of USB keyboards

Characters that could be entered on the software keyboard displayed on the conventional
control panel can be entered using a USB connected keyboard.
When the software keyboard window is displayed, characters can be entered from the USB
keyboard (in-line entry not possible).
When the software keyboard window is not displayed, entered characters will not be
remembered.
The characters, which can be entered from a USB keyboard, is only a character, which can
2-275
Initialization of MEAP driver priority registration
When any trouble occurs regarding USB driver settings and it is necessary to reset the setting
information, you can reset the MEAP driver preference registration by using service mode.
Steps to initialize preference use registration
2) Press [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > buttons.
be entered from the software keyboard.

Even if characters are entered from the USB keyboard, the software keyboard window will
not change (the corresponding key does not invert or change color).
Input from the USB keyboard can be accepted at the same time as input from the software
keyboard or numeric keys.
Since the device supports Plug and Play, the USB keyboard can be disconnected/
connected freely. However, do not disconnect and connect during in deep sleep (when
in sleep with setting "low" at "the power consumption in sleep"). It is out of an operation
guarantee to disconnect and connect the USB keyboard in deep sleep.
When USB device is attached to iR device, iR devices do not shift to deep sleep mode.
Keyboard layout changes according to the keyboard layout settings in the Settings/
Registration screen. In addition, function keys and ten keys which are not displayed in the
software keyboard cannot be used. (Keyboard which the operation check was conducted
is 84-key Keyboard, but this does not mean that the operation of all 84-key Keyboards is
F-2-466
3) Press
or
button for several times until [USBM-CLR] is shown on the screen.
Press [USBM-CLR] button.
guaranteed.)
Note:
The factory shipment default setting is to enable the use of native (main unit
functionality) USB keyboards. Therefore, in order to use MEAP application keyboards,
[Use MEAP driver for USB input device] under [System management settings (initial
settings/ registration)] needs to be set to ON (factory shipment setting is OFF).
Operations change as described below in accordance with ON/ OFF settings.
ON: when using MEAP application keyboard
OFF: when using native (main unit functionality) keyboard (factory shipment default)
F-2-467
2-275
4) Press [OK] button to restart this device.
2-276
3) Press
or
button for several times until [USBH-PRT] is shown. Press [USBH-PRT]
button.
F-2-470
4) When pressing [OK] button, [ACTIVE] blinks on the status field.

F-2-468
USB Device report print

To check the vendor IDs (idVendor) and the product IDs (idProduct) registered in this device
by means of declaration in Manifest file of MEAP applications, output the USB Device repot
report print.
Steps to output the USB Device report print
2) Press [COPIER] > [Function] > [MISC-P] > buttons.
F-2-471
5) When [OK] is shown on the status field, the status print is output. Check the contents of the
print.
F-2-469
F-2-472
2-276
Example of output result
2-277
C : Configure
The configuration information of a USB device is shown. * mark is to know whether it is
********************************
*** USB Device report print ***
********************************
active.
I : Interface
The interface information of a USB device is shown. Interface class and the driver to handle
USB device information
can be recognized.
T: Bus=01 Lev=02 Prnt=03 Port=01 Cnt=01 Dev#= 5 Spd=480 MxCh= 0

D: Ver=2.00 Cls=00(>ifc) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=64 #Cfgs= 1
P: Vendor=066f ProdID=4210 Rev=10.02
S: Manifacturer=SigmaTel, Inc.
S: Product=STIr42xx
S: SerialNumber=0002F0F7261287A5
C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=80 MxPwr=100mA
I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=fe(app.) Sub=02 Prot=00 Driver=irda-usb
E: Ad=81(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=512 Ivl=0ms
E: Ad=01(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=512 Ivl=0ms
The value and the content of Driver are as follows.

Labeling
It is displayed when the USB system driver is assigned to the input device
connected.
usb-storage
It is displayed when storage devices (USB memory storage etc.) are

connected.
irda-usb IrDA
It is displayed when the dongle is connected.
hub
It is displayed when HUB is connected.
gpusb
It is displayed when the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned
to the input device connected.
gpusbex
It is displayed when a USB device, which specific vendor ID/ Product ID are
preferentially registered using a manifest and MEAP API, is connected and
the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned.
F-2-473
USB device information Content

Display the information of the USB device, which the device recognized.
If not displayed, there may be some fault occurred.
Some of standard optional devices are not displayed on a report.
The details of each item are as follows.
T : Topology
Internal hierarchical structure, which a USB device is connected, is shown. The number of
Content
usbhid
T-2-138
E:Endpoint
The Endpoint information of a USB device is shown.
Right or wrong of report output
Connecting device
a connected bus, the hierarchical structure and connection speed can be indicated.
HID
D : Device
Storage
Information of USB devices is shown.
Product information of USB devices is shown. Vendor ID and Product ID can be recognized
here.
S : String
The character string embedded in a USB device is shown. A manufacture name and a
product name can be recognized here.
Report printing
Available
Yes
Available
Yes
Not available
No
IrDA
Not available
Yes
Multimedia Card Reader
Not available
Yes
Not available
Yes
FAX
USB Device Port
P : Product
User installation
IC Card Reader
Image Data Analyzer Board-A1
Not available
No
Hub
Internal Hub*
Not available
No
External Hub
Available
Yes
* USB Device Port-B1 Hub for device ports installed at the introduction
T-2-139
2-277
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Integrated Authentication Function
The content of MEAP preferred device information

Display the information of the application or a USB device, which preferentially registered with
MEAP application.
By seeing this information, it can check which Application ID of the MEAP application is in the
status using a specific USB device.
2-278
Integrated Authentication Function

Sharing the Authentication Information
Separately managing the authentication information at login and the authentication
information for MEAP applications creates inconveniences such as that the authentication
process is executed many times.
In order to solve this problem, the device has an integrated authentication function. This
AppID : Application ID
function allows authentication information to be shared between MEAP applications in a
VID : Vendor ID
MEAP environment.
PID : Product ID
The supported version of MEAP Specifications is Ver.59, which needs to be supported by
Note:
By starting, stopping or uninstalling a MEAP application, the driver settings of the
USB device may be changed. If the device needs to be restarted following this setting
change, a message prompting the user to restart the device is displayed.
both the device and the MEAP application in order to use this function.
There are 2 types of authentication information that can be shared: Volatile Credential whose
registered information is discarded at the time of logout or shutdown of the device and
Persistent Credential whose registered information is not discarded at the time of logout.
Volatile Credential
Volatile Credential is used in cases where the authentication information is shared between
applications which use the same security domain for authentication.
The credential is registered mainly by the login application, therefore the applications which
access the security domain that was used for authentication by the login application can use
the credential.
Persistent Credential
Persistent Credential is used to help entry of authentication information when accessing a
different security domain for authentication.
The credential is registered mainly by general MEAP applications, and the authentication
information can be reused when the same user logs in for the second time or later.
F-2-474
2-278
Comparison of Functions
Select the item you want to disable, and click the [Update] button.
Volatile Credential
Registered
Character strings and arbitrary
information
Java objects
Lifetime Registration At login (the login application), and
at any timing of registration by an
application
Deletion
Can be used until logout/shutdown.
Encryption of
credential data
Store (Save) to
2-279
Persistent Credential
Character strings only User ID/Password/
Domain/Arbitrary character strings
At any timing of registration by an
application
Not supported
Can be used until deletion by the

application or management tool.
Data retained on the HDD is encrypted.
Memory in the device
HDD in the device

T-2-140
Disabling the Integrated Authentication Function

If you do not want Volatile Credential to be used from a security standpoint, the function can
be disabled.
F-2-476
[Disable integrated authentication]: The integrated authentication function is disabled
The function can be disabled from remote UI or service mode.
regardless of the authentication method.
Persistent Credential cannot be disabled.

On the setting screen of remote UI, the function can be disabled on a protocol-by-protocol
[Disable integrated authentication using credentials for local device authentication]: The
integrated authentication function is disabled only at the time of local device authentication.
basis.
[Disable integrated authentication using credentials for LDAP server authentication]:

Remote UI
The integrated authentication function is disabled only at the time of LDAP server
You can access the setting screen on remote UI for disabling integrated authentication as
authentication.
shown below.
Service mode
The location of the service mode setting for disabling integrated authentication:
Setting value: 0 = Enabled, 1 = Disabled
F-2-475
F-2-477
2-279
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Setting
Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for

Main Power] Setting
2-280
In the case of "Schedule: Execute the task every 24 hours"

A schedule is set to start the specified task at the specified time and repeat "fixed-delay
execution".
If some of the MEAP applications are running on the device, the following problems will occur.
If execution is delayed for some reason, the delay time is ignored.
The [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] setting cannot be

enabled.
only once.
If a MEAP application that restricts the device from shifting to deep sleep mode is running,
Problem: If 24 hours have passed since the last execution of the task, the task is executed
=> The task may be executed at a timing other than the time the user expects it to be
executed.
31/Dec
even when the setting of [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] is enabled (On), the device
1/Jan
2/Jan
3/Jan
4/Jan
5/Jan
starts normally instead of quick startup.

In that case, it does not affect the behavior of the MEAP application.
Changes made in the settings of a MEAP application are not

reflected.
Starting
Stopped
(Quick startup standby)
If the startup setting [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] is enabled (On), even when the
The timing the task is expected to be executed

The timing the task was actually executed
Main Power Supply Switch of the machine is turned OFF, a shutdown process is not executed
internally.
F-2-478
Therefore, in the case of a MEAP application where changes in settings are enabled when
the device is restarted, changes in settings are not reflected just by changing the settings.
Follow either of the restart procedures shown below to enable the changes made in the
settings.
Execute restart from remote UI.
Turn OFF the Main Switch, and then turn it ON within 20 seconds.
In the case of "Schedule: Execute the task at 00:00 every day"

A schedule is set to start the specified task at the specified time and repeat "fixed-rate
execution".
If execution was delayed for some reason, two or more tasks are continuously executed to
"make up for the delay".
Problem: The tasks of Jan. 1, Jan. 2, and Jan. 3 are executed after quick startup.
After recovery from quick startup, MEAP applications do not work

properly.
MEAP applications that are scheduled to execute processes at specified times may not work
properly after recovery from quick restart.
Unexpected problems such as that the application executes a task at an unexpected timing
may occur.
Problems may occur in the following two cases.
31/Dec
1/Jan
2/Jan
3/Jan
4/Jan
5/Jan
Starting
Stopped
(Quick startup standby)
The timing the task is expected to be executed
The timing the task was actually executed
F-2-479
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Setting
2-280
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in
Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become
2-281
Note :
Even if the department ID and password registered in the user information of SSO-H
do not coincide with the department ID and password registered in the Department ID
Management, login is possible when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Unable to Be Logged in
Overview
System manager information of the device ([Settings/Registration] > [Management

Settings] > [User Management] > [System Manager Information Settings]) is set.
Login is performed as a user with the administrator right of SSO-H.
Department ID Management and SSO-H (Local Device Authentication) manage user

information separately. Therefore, in order to allow coexistence of Department ID
Management and SSO-H, it is necessary that the information of SSO-H and the information
of Department ID Management are the same.
The user information of SSO-H does not coincide with the user information of Department ID
Management in the following cases:
(1)
User name
Password
(2)
(6)
Role
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
Department ID Management was enabled before changing the department ID and
7654321
1111
2222
password registered in SSO-H to match with the information of Department ID

Management.
(3)
Privilege
elevation
(5)
SSO-H user management information

User name
SSO-H
7654321
1111
2222
7654321
1111
2222
Dept. ID Management info
Role
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
Dept. ID Password
7654321
1234
5678
7654321
1234
5678
Dept. ID Password
Mismatch
1111
2222
3333
(4)
Dept. ID Management Info

Dept. ID Password
Password
Administrator Password
CANONTARO pass
CMJTARO
Makuhari
Dept. ID Management
O K
when Department ID Management was enabled.
Dept. ID Password
7654321
1111
2222
ID : 1111
Password : 1111
CANONTARO pass
User : CANONTARO CMJTARO
Makuhari
Password : pass
Authentication
The user information of SSO-H was different from that of Department ID Management
1111
2222
3333
F-2-481
Only one of information was updated, resulting in mismatch.
Verification
Only the department ID and password registered in SSO-H or those in Department ID

Management were changed.

F-2-480
1) The user enters the ID and password of SSO-H to a device where both SSO-H and
Department ID Management are enabled.
User name
Password
CANONTARO pass
CMJTARO
Makuhari
Role
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
password to the department ID management function.

4) The department ID management function checks the department ID and password sent
from SSO-H with the user information table.
7654321
1234
5678
7654321
1234
5678
Dept. ID Password
Match
7654321
1234
5678
7654321
1234
5678
Only the SSO-H user

information was updated
2) SSO-H checks the entered ID and password with the SSO-H user information table.
3) SSO-H sends the department ID and password which correspond to the entered ID and
Dept. ID Password

USer name
Password
CANONTARO pass
CMJTARO
Makuhari
Role
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
Dept. ID Password
1234567
9999
8888
5) The user is elevated to the corresponding privilege.

6) The user is authenticated.
1234567
9999
8888
Dept. ID Password
Mismatch
7654321
1234
5678
7654321
1234
5678
F-2-482
If the department ID and password registered in the user information of SSO-H do not
coincide with the department ID and password registered in the Department ID Management,
the authentication ends in failure and the user can no longer log in to the device.
2-281
Only the information of Department ID Management was updated, resulting in mismatch.

Only the Department ID Management information was changed in "Import All Function",
2-282
Procedure
1) Change the authentication method to DA (Default Authentication).
resulting in mismatch. (The SSO-H user information cannot be changed in Import All
Access SMS, and select [Default Authentication] in [Enhanced System Application
Function.)
Management] > [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS".)
Device A

Dept. ID Password
1111
2222
3333
Device B
Import All Function (Only the Department

ID Management information was updated.)

User name
PAssword
CANONTARO pass
CMJTARO
Makuhari
Role
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
1111
2222
3333

Dept. ID Password
1234567
9999
8888
1234567
9999
8888
Dept. ID PAssword
Mismatch
1111
2222
3333
1111
2222
3333
F-2-483
Remedy
If the device became unable to be logged in due to mismatch of the department ID/password,
perform the following remedy.
Note :
Since the device can be logged in if all of the following conditions are satisfied,
performing only the step 6 of this section can clear the mismatch of the department ID/
password.
System manager information of the device ([Settings/Registration] > [Management
Settings] > [User Management] > [System Manager Information Settings]) is set.
Login is performed as a user with the administrator right of SSO-H.
F-2-484

3) Disable Depart ID Management.
> [Department ID Management] > [OFF]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/
Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and deselect [Enable Department
ID Management].
F-2-485
2-282
4) Change the authentication method back to SSO-H authentication.
2-283
SSO-H user registration information edition screen:
Access SMS, and select [Single Sign-On H] in [Enhanced System Application Management]
(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Edit User Information] or
> [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS".)
https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Edit).
F-2-486

6) Change the user registration information of SSO-H.
Access the URL shown below, and change the content to the information registered in
Department ID Management.
F-2-487
SSO-H user registration information import screen:

(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Import User Information]
or (https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Import).
Or, import the setting file whose content you want to use.
F-2-488
2-283
Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Glossary
2-284
7) Enable Depart ID Management.

> [Department ID Management] > [ON]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/
Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and select [Enable Department ID
Management].
F-2-489
8) Check that the device can be logged in.

Log off and then log on to check that the device can be logged in with an environment
where Local Device Authentication and Department ID Management are enabled.
Reference material
Glossary
Terms & Acronyms
A program unit to provide users with solutions.
Application ID
An identifier assigned to each application.

A unique ID is assigned to each MEAP application.
Applet (Applet Type

Application)
A MEAP application type created in Java.

This type of applications show buttons on the touch panel display.
Code Sign
Information to check if an application is genuine. An application marketed

in the normal procedure has a code sign assigned by LMS. MEAP platform
rejects applications without Canon code signs for being installed or
executed on the device.
CPCA
(Common Peripheral
Controlling
Architecture)
Common Peripheral Controlling Architecture. CPCA defines an object

model of peripheral deices. A client can control a device by creating or
modifying objects in the device.
CPCA Java CL
(Class Library)
CPCA Java Class Library. A Java class library, which is used to control a
device.
Default Authentication The login service used when the department ID control is used but other
-Department ID
authentication controls are not used. When the Department ID control is
Management
turned on, the login dialog prompts the users to enter the department ID
and password. The dialog appears the initial screen of both the control
panel on the MEAP device and Remote UI
Device Specification
ID
ID allocated to each device type. This represents CPCA API specification

and the version number to use MFP generic functions or obtain information
including maximum allowable copies.
Esplet
(Esplet Type
Application)
A MEAP application type created in Java. This type of applications do

not show user interfaces either on Local UI or Web. Esplet is a coined
word created by Canon, consisting of [Espresso] or Italian coffee and [let]
derived from Applet/Service.
File Description
An identifier for the OS to identify the destination file requested by a

program. A program descriptor includes an identifier and information such
as a file name and size, which helps OS to judge the file to be edited.
HID class
HID stands for Human Interface Device, representing man-machine

interfaces of PC components and peripheral devices. HID class means
USB class classified as HID.
iR Native application
The functionalities that existing imageRUNNER has such as Copy,

Universal Send and Mailbox.
ISV
(Independent
Software Vendor)
Independent Software Vender. Software manufacturer who develops and/or

sells applications and tools but does not entire computer systems. Refers
application developer in this document.
F-2-490
Definitions and Explanations
Application
2-284
Terms & Acronyms
J2ME
Java 2 Platform Micro Edition. One of Java Platforms licensed by Sun
(Java2 Platform Micro Microsystems, Inc. It is applied for MEAP. Other devices such as cellular
Edition)
phones and PDA.
J2RE
(Java 2 Runtime
Environment)
A set of basic programs to run applications developed in the programming

language of Java2. This set includes Java virtual machine providing
runtime environment for Java applications among others. Java applets do
not require J2RE since these are executed on Web browsers using Java
runtime environment provided on browsers. However, standalone Java
applications require Java runtime environment such as J2RE for execution.
Runtime environments can be downloaded for free of charge from the Web
site of Sun Microsystems, the Java developer.
Java
A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems, in the U. S. A.

Low dependent on models and OSes and runs on various platforms. Taking
advantage of this feature, many applications that runs on web servers uses
Java. The MEAP platform uses J2ME - a type of Java.
JavaScript
A script language developed by Netscape Communications, in the U.S. A.,

runs on web browsers such as Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer.
Allows web designers to create interactive pages with HTML files such as
animated buttons and display of timetables.
2-285
Terms & Acronyms
MEAP Specifications MEAP Spec Version, the term used for the SDK. The version number that
(MEAP Spec Version) shows the APIs of the MEAP platform other than CPCA, such as network
and security. The version number is not assigned for each device model.
MEAP Application Runs on MEAP platform. Consists of application files
(*.jar) and the license file (*.lic).
MEAP-enabled iR
device
imageRUNNER (iR) devices with built-in MEAP platform.
MFP
(Multi Function
Peripheral)
Multi Function Peripheral. Peripheral device that supports more than one
function, such as digital copier, printer, scanner, and fax.
OSGi
(Open Service
Gateway Initiative)
Open Service Gateway Initiative. See "http://www.osgi.org/".
Portal Service
The web portal to gain access to a MEAP-enabled device. This service has
been integrated in Remote UI top page in iR ADVANCE series.
Protocol
A set of rules applied to data transmission procedures over network. Major

communication protocols include:
FTP: File Transfer Protocol. This is a communication protocol or
protocolimplemented commands to provide file transfer between a host
and clients over TCP/IP network.
DHCP: An upward compatible protocol of BOOTP. This communication
protocol allocates a dynamic IP address to each client machine upon
communication startup on TCP/IP network and collects the allocated IP
address when communication is completed. The server allocates one of
multiple IP addresses and notifies the setup information to a client.
BOOTP: A communication protocol to automatically load setup
information including IP address and a domain name from the server to a
client on TCP/IP network.
RARP: A communication protocol to request IP address information via
the network adaptor address (MAC address) of a client.
IPP: A communication protocol to execute remote printing between the
print server and clients via Internet.
TCP/IP: A standard communication protocol required to access to
Internet and other large-scale network.
Proxy Server
Provides functions to store data fetched from remote servers. When a

user request to display a web page that has been displayed and stored
in the proxy, the proxy server read the stored data but does not access
the remote server where the original page is present, for efficient access
services. When a proxy server receives a URL from a PC, it searches the
file in the cache and sends it to the PC if the requested file is found. If the
requested file is not stored in the cache, it accesses the remote server of
the URL to acquire the file and, at the same time, stores the acquired file
in the cache so that the proxy server can quickly send the file at the next
request.
Java VM
JAVA Virtual Machine. The Java byte code interpreter. The Virtual Machine
(Java Virtual Machine) acts as an interpreter for processing the byte code using the native
instruction set.
License Access
Number
A number issued for accessing license file. The Licensing server requires
entries of application ID, expiration date/times information, and the number
of access numbers, to issue license access numbers
Licensae File
A software manufacture of a MEAP application provides the users with the

license files. Specifies the terms of agreement that a user concludes with
the manufacturer. Required for installing a MEAP application.
LMS
The license is required for installing a MEAP application in a MEAPenabled
(License Management iR device. LMS is the server issuing [License Files] as well as license
System)
access numbers.
Login Service
Manages user information of MEAP device. Authenticates users with user

names and passwords. Three login services are available for MEAP device
- Default Authentication, which provides department ID control, SDL (Simple
Device Login) and SSO (Single Sign-On).
Mass Storage class
Mass Storage means a storage device with large capacity, generally

secondary storage devices. Mass Storage class means USB class
classified in the secondary storage device group.
MEAP (Multifunction
Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform. Provides an environment
Embedded Application for executing application programs on a peripheral device. Uses the Java
Platform)
platform (J2ME - Java 2 platform Micro Edition) to run Java application for
MEAP.
MEAP Contents
Required to install an MEAP application to a MEAP device.
Redistribution module A built-in module of an application created with SDK. Applications without
this module cannot work on MEAP platform.
2-285
Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2)
Terms & Acronyms
2-286
Option for exclusive individual measure
SDK
(Software
Development Kit)
The kit containing information and tools required for software development.
Service
A functional unit or an application program working on MEAP platform.

[Applications] are generally termed [Services] in Java world.
Servlet
(Servlet Type
Application)
A MEAP application type created in Java. This type of applications is

designed to show user interface on the Web browser.
Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2)

Make a setting as to whether to display/hide the copy screen (copy tab) on the control panel.
This is the specification for users who want to customize hiding it on control panel.
Default value
1: display
SMS
The web-base service to provide user interfaces for application life cycle
(Service Management management.
Service)
Socket
A virtual interface of an application for network communication. A user

only needs to specify a socket as a unit of an address and a port from an
application. This establishes the network connection for data transmission,
eliminating complication related to detailed communication procedures.
SSO-H (Single SignOn H)
Login service providing features of both local device authentication

and domain authentication. The former is the method that iR device
independently authorizes users; whereas the latter is that iR device links to
the domain controller on the network in the Active Directory environment to
authorize users.
Thread
A unit for program execution. A multi-task system allowing multiple

programs to run concurrently assigns a memory space and other resources
independently to each program, providing users with a feel as if only a
program is running. At least one thread is generated upon a program
generated.
URL
(Uniform Resource
Locator)
The method to denote Web page locations on Internet and the like. For
instance, a URL on the Web is denoted as [http://www.w3.org/default. html].
[http] at the beginning means that an address following this is in a web
page on the Internet.
USB
Abbreviation of Universal Serial Bus. This is the interface standard to link

between information devices.
USB system driver
The general-purpose driver that control the behavior of the device, there
are HID class driver, Mass Storage class driver and so on.
Setting range, item

0: hide 1: display
Setting Procedure
2) Press [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] buttons.
F-2-491
3) Press [UI-COPY] button.
T-2-141
F-2-492
Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2)
2-286
Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2)
4) Press either 0 (hide) or 1 (display) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is
displayed), and press [OK] button.
2-287
Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM

screen (level 2)
In the case that operation is restricted by MEAP application, hide the warning screen of error/
JAM (such as JAM screen, door opening, no-toner). In the case that these errors occur, there
will be a display indicating 'call the service personnel' etc.
Note:
Part of the warning screens is displayed if shifting to the device screen.
As for the screens for jam and no-toner, the warning screen (animation) can be displayed
by pressing the followings: [Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
As for the screen for door opening, the warning screen cannot be displayed because
there is no display for [[Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
F-2-493
Default value
1: No activation of warning display
Setting range, item
0: display warning screen 1: hide warning screen
Setting Procedure
2) Press [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] buttons.
F-2-494
2-287
2-288
3) Press [ANIM-SW] button.
F-2-495
4) Press either 0 (display warning screen) or 1 (hide warning screen) on control panel (the
numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.
F-2-496
2-288
Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions
2-289
Embedded RDS
Features and benefits

E-RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front-end processing
Product Overview
of e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware

equipment.
Overview
Embedded RDS (hereinafter referred to as E-RDS) is a monitoring program that runs on the
host machine. When the monitoring option is enabled by making the setting on this machine,
information such as the status change of the machine, counter information, and failure
information are collected. The collected device information is sent to a remote maintenance
server called UGW (Universal Gateway Server) via Internet, thus allowing for e-Maintenance/
imageWARE Remote (Remote Diagnosis System).
Major Functions
Service Call Button
If a user touches service call button on the touch panel display when corrupt image, paper
jams, or/ and other problem has occurred, E-RDS generates an alarm and notifies it to UGW.
Moreover, E-RDS also notifies cancellation and the completion of the request
Service Browser
The following device information/ status can be monitored.

Billing counts
Service browser is a web browsing functionality only for service technicians in charge, and is
Parts counter
used for referring to the FAQ contents which is connected to UGW.
Firmware info
In order to grasp on which devices the service browser is enabled, when the status of the
Service call error log
service browser is changed from disabled (0: OFF) to enabled, E-RDS sends the browser
Jam log
information to the UGW.
Alarm log
Status changes (Toner low/ out, etc.)
Service mode menu Transmission

E-RDS sends the target service mode menu data to UGW in the following cases:
Since high confidentiality is required for the information shown above, it performs
When a specific alarm and service call error are detected
communication between this machine and the UGW using HTTPS/ SOAP protocol.
Customer
Environment
When the setting is changed in service mode

The following shows the transmission timing and the target data for transmission in service
UGW
mode menu:
This machine
Transmission timing
Internet
When the following alarm is detected.
Firewall
Sales Company
DNS Server
Proxy Server
Administrator
The e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system configuration

F-2-497
Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions
Alarm codes for transmission:

0x060002,// Fixing
0x060004 - 0x069999,// Fixing
0x090005 - 0x099999,// Dram
0x100006 - 0016, 0x100022 - 0099,
0x100101 - 9900,// Development
0x300001 - 0x309999// High voltage
Transmitting data
COPIER
Display
Error retry
ANALOG
No
HV-STS
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
2-289
Technology > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
Transmission timing
Transmitting data
When the following service call error is detected. COPIER
Display
Error codes for transmission:

E000 - E00F,// Fixing
E020,// Development ATR
E060 - E06F// High voltage
When a value is set to [COPIER - Adjust]

subordinates Service mode menu.
(Transmission will be done at 60 min, later of
setting)
COPIER
When the first communication test is done.

(For transmission process, 5 minutes after the
execution)
COPIER
Adjust
Error retry
ANALOG
No
HV-STS
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
Yes
2-290
Limitations
Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
1) In the following cases, service mode menu data is not transmitted.
When an unsent alarm log or service call log has been detected by E-RDS at poweron
When an alarm log or service call log to be resent due to a transmission failure is
detected
When transmission of service mode menu executed at the time of detection of an
alarm or a service call error ended in failure
If a new alarm or service call error occurs while service mode menu data is being
obtained after detection of an alarm or a service call error, the data being obtained is
not sent.
Display
ANALOG Yes
HV-STS
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
2) If alarms/service call errors successively occur, and if the time of the host machine is
corrected or changed while the log is being sent, service mode menu data may not be
properly sent. It is because a Link No.* may be applied to the old log although it should be
applied to the new log.
* Link No.:
A common number for linking the service mode menu data with the alarm log/service
call log data to be sent
After completion of log transmission, the service mode menu data is obtained, and is
sent with this number attached.
Adjust
T-2-142
NOTE:
Target transmission data are only the items under LEVEL1 and 2 in the service mode.
3) Transmission of the data of changes made in service mode menu settings is not performed
instantly, but performed when a specified period of 60 minutes elapse after the change of
service mode menu settings is detected or when a communication test is performed at the
time of power-on. (There is a time lag.)
4) When service mode menu settings ([COPIER] > [Adjust]) are made, transmission is
performed even when no change is made in the target data to be transmitted.
Transmission of service mode data is also performed when changes are made in the
service mode setting value not subject to transmission (items other than Level 1, 2) or
when settlement of a value is performed without changing the setting value.
Technology > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
2-290
Technology > Embedded RDS > Service cautions
Service cautions
1) After clearing RAM of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board, initialization of the E-RDS
setting (ERDS-DAT) and a communication test (COM-TEST) need to be performed.
Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become
2-291
NOTE:
*The user can conduct a communication test and seen the communication test result.
If the communication results in failure, an error code (a hexadecimal number, 8 digits)
appears on the touch panel display.
unusual.
Also, after replacing the main controller board, all settings must be reprogrammed.
2) The following settings in service mode must not be change unless there are specific
instructions to do so. Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
Set port number of UGW
[SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-PORT]
Default : 443
URL setting of UGW
[SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-ADR]
Default : https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
3) If the e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote contract of the device is invalid, be sure to turn
OFF the E-RDS setting (E-RDS : 0).
4) Communication tests can be conducted in user mode.* When conducting a communication
test in user mode, pay attention on the following points:
During a communication test in user mode, do not take any actions such as pressing
a key. Actions are not accepted until the communication test is completed (actions are
ignored).
When a communication test is being conducted from service mode or user mode,
do not conduct a communication test from the other. These operations are not
guaranteed.
Technology > Embedded RDS > Service cautions
2-291
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
E-RDS Setup
Confirmation and preparation in advance
To monitor this machine with e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote, the following settings are
required.
2-292
(3) Network settings
Based on the results of the information obtained in (2) Advance preparations, make this
machine network related settings.
See Users Guide for detailed procedures.
CAUTION:
(1) Advance confirmation

Confirm with the UGW administrator that the device to be monitored with e-Maintenance/
When changes are made to the above-mentioned network settings, be sure to reboot
this machine.
imageWARE Remote is registered in the UGW.
(2) Advance preparations

The following network-related information needs to be obtained from the user's system
administrator in advance.
Information item 1
IP address settings
Automatic setting : DHCP, RARP, BOOTP
Manual setting : IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to be set
Information item 2
Is there a DNS server in use?
If there is a DNS server in use, find out the following.
Primary DNS server address
Secondary DNS server address
Information item 3
Is there a proxy server?
If there is a proxy server in use, find out the following.
Proxy server address
Port No. for proxy server
Information item 4
Is proxy server authentication required?
If proxy server authentication is required, find out the following.
User name and password required for proxy authentication
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
2-292
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
Steps to E-RDS settings
2-293
(2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [CA-KEY] and touch the [OK] button.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and touch the [OK] button.
NOTE:
This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values.
For the setting values to be initialized, see the section of "Initializing E-RDS settings".
F-2-499
"OK!" is displayed if the CA certificate is initialized. When "NG!" is displayed, see the
section of "Troubleshooting" to execute the remedy, and then perform initialization of the
CA certificate again and check to see if the CA certificate is initialized.
F-2-498
3. Perform installation or deletion of the CA certificate if necessary, and reboot this machine.
Installation of the CA certificate: Perform installation from SST or Remote UI.
Deletion of the CA certificate: When the following operation is performed, the CA certificate
in the factory setting is automatically installed.
CAUTION:
After following procedure, the registered key and CA certificate are deleted, and only
the CA certificate installed at the time of shipment is registered.
It is therefore necessary to check with the user in advance.
F-2-500
(3) Reboot this machine.

(1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 2.
CAUTION:
If a key and a CA certificate have been registered in order to use a function other than
E-RDS, it is necessary to register again from SST or Remote UI.
2-293
2-294
CAUTION:
5. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [E-RDS].
The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT and RGW-ADR in Service mode must not be
change unless there are specific instructions to do so.
Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
F-2-501
6. Touch the numeric button [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and
touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
7. Select [COM-TEST] and then touch [OK].
NOTE:
This operation enables the communication function with UGW.
NOTE:
This initiates the communication test between the device and the UGW.
F-2-502
F-2-503
2-294
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings
If the communication is successful, "OK!" is displayed. If "NG!" (failed) appears, refer to the
"Troubleshooting" and repeat until "OK!" is displayed.
2-295
Steps to Service Call button settings
Steps for settings to display the service call button
In order to use the "Service Call" button, follow the procedure shown below to display the
"Service Call" button.
2. Select [COPIER] > [Option] > [USER] > [SCALL-SW].
F-2-504
NOTE:
The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the COMLOG. By performing the communication test with UGW, E-RDS acquires schedule
information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation.
F-2-505
3. Touch the numeric button [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and
touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
F-2-506
2-295
NOTE:
When the function is enabled, the [Service Call] button is displayed on the Monitoring
Service screen by touching the [Monitoring Service] button on the Check Counter
screen.
2-296
3. Touch the numeric button [1] or [0] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1
or 0) and touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call completion at this timing, and sends the
alarm to UGW.
F-2-508
Steps for settings of service call completion

When the service technician completes the work for the service call, follow the instruction as
described below to execute the service call completion work.
NOTE:
In the current condition, touching the [OK] button completes the service call regardless
of whether 0 or 1 is set.

2. Select [COPIER] > [Option] > [USER] > [SCALLCMP].
F-2-507
2-296
Steps for service call request
2-297
4. Select the request details and touch the [Request] button.
Users should follow the instructions as described below to request a service call.
1. Touch the [Counter Check] button on the control panel to display the Check Counter
screen.
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call request at this timing, and sends the alarm to
UGW.
2. Touch the [Monitoring Service] button, and touch the [Service Call] button on the Monitoring
Service screen.
F-2-509
3. Touch the [New Request] button on the Service Call screen.
F-2-511
5. If the service call request is successful, "The service call request has been sent."
is displayed. If "Could not send the service call request." appears, refer to the
"Troubleshooting" and repeat until "The service call request has been sent." is displayed.
F-2-510
CAUTION:
When a service call has been already requested, another service call cannot be sent.
The previous service call needs to be canceled, or a service technician needs to
F-2-512
perform processing for service call completion.
2-297
Steps for service call cancellation
2-298
4. "The request has been canceled." is displayed.
To cancel the service call, follow the instructions as described below.

1. Touch the [Counter Check] button on the control panel to display the Check Counter
screen.
2. Touch the [Monitoring Service] button, and touch the [Service Call] button on the Monitoring
Service screen.
F-2-515
F-2-513
3. Touch the [Cancel] button, and touch the [Yes] button in the check screen.
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call cancellation at this timing, and sends the
alarm to UGW.
F-2-514
2-298
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings
Steps to Service Browser settings
2-299
3. Reboot this machine.

2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [BRWS-ACT] and then touch [OK].
4. Make sure that "1 (: ACTIVE)" is set under [COPIER] > [Display] > [USER] > [BRWS-STS].
NOTE:
When the status of the function is changed from disabled to enabled, E-RDS sends the
browser information to the UGW.
F-2-518
5. When the above-shown setting values are enabled, [Service Browser] is displayed in the
Service Mode screen.
F-2-516
If the connection is established with UGW successfully, "OK!" is displayed. When "NG!" is
displayed, perform the steps referring to "Troubleshooting" until connection is established
with UGW.
F-2-519
NOTE:
Generally, once service browsing is enabled (BRWS-STS : 1), it cannot be disabled
(BRWS-STS : 0) again*. To disable service browsing, clear SRAM.
* The function is disabled (BRWS-STS: 2) by executing BRWS-ACT again.
F-2-517
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings
2-299
Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ
2-300
FAQ
Initializing E-RDS settings

It is possible to clear the SRAM data of E-RDS and change the E-RDS setting back to the
default value.
No.1
Q: In what case does a communication test with UGW fail?
A: The following cases can be considered in the becoming "NG!" case.
Initialization procedure
1. Name resolution was failed due to an incorrect host name or DNS server has been
halted.
2. Network cable is blocked off.
2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and then touch [OK].
3. Proxy server settings is not correct.

No.2
Q: When does E-RDS send counter information to UGW? How many data is sent?
A: The schedule of data transmitting, the start time are determined by settings in the UGW
side. The send time cannot be specified on the E-RDS side. Data is sent once every 16
hours.
The data size of counter information is approx. 285 KB.
No.3
Q: Will data which failed to be sent due to an error in communication with UGW be resent?
A: Data shown below will be resent.
Jam log
F-2-520
Setting values and data to be initialized

The following E-RDS settings, internal data, and Alarm filtering information are initialized.
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > E-RDS
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-ADR
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > COM-LOG
Alarm log
Service mode menu
The newest data is resent only when the settings are changed in service mode.
Browser information
It is resent only when the web browser option is enabled.
Data is resent endlessly (after 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, and 30 minutes since the occurrence of
communication error; once 30 minutes have passed, it is resent at 30-minute intervals) until it
is sent successfully. Resend continues even if the power is turned OFF and then ON.
CAUTION:
In case of replacing the CA certificate file, even if initialization of E-RDS is executed, the
status is not returned to the factory default.
When installing the certificate file other than the factory default CA certificate file, it is
required to delete the certificate file after E-RDS initialization and install the factory
default CA certificate file.
For detailed procedures, see "Steps to E-RDS settings - step 3.".
Service call log
No.4
Q: What is the upper limit of the number of COM-LOGs? What is the upper limit of the number
of characters of error information displayed in a COM-LOG?
A: Up to 30 log data can be saved. The data size of error information is maximum 128
characters.
2-300
2-301
No.5
No.10
Q: Although Microsoft ISA as a proxy server is introduced, the authentication check is failed.
Q: Is there any setting to be made on the device side to enable the service mode menu
Can E-RDS adopt with Microsoft ISA?

A: E-RDS must comply with "Basic" while "Integrated" authentication is used for Microsoft ISA
(as default); therefore, authentication with E-RDS is available if you change the setting to
"Basic" authentication on the server.
transmission function? Moreover, what is Service mode menu set as the object of
transmission?
A: No steps peculiar to Transmitting Service mode menu. As for the data that applies to
transmission of the service mode, see the "Service mode menu Transmission".
No.6
No.11
Q: Can I turn this machine power off during the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system
Q: What service browser data is transmitted to UGW by E-RDS in what timing?

A: The service browser data to be transmitted and the transmission timing are shown below.
operation?
A: While operating the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system, the power of the device
must be ON. If power OFF is needed, do not leave the device power OFF for long time.
It will become "Device is busy, try later" errors if the power supply of network equipment
such as HUB is made prolonged OFF.
No.7
Q: Although a Service call error may not be notified to UGW, the reason is what?
A: If a service technician in charge turns off the power supply of this machine immediately
after error occurred once, It may be unable to notify to UGW because data processing does
not take a time from the controller of this machine to NIC though, the data will be saved on
the RAM.
If the power supply is blocked off while starting up, the data will be inevitably deleted.
Transmission timing
Detailed procedure
When the service browser 1) Specify the service browser

is enabled from the
setting in the service mode
disabled state [OFF]
menu.
2) Send browser information to
UGW.
3) Once obtaining OK
response from UGW, enable
the service browser mode
[ACTIVE].
(To use the setting, it is
necessary to reboot this
machine)
Transmission
information
Error occurs
Service browser mode: Retransmission

[Register]
is not performed.
WEB browser option: ("Disabling
[ON] or [OFF] according [OFF]" continues
to the license status
to be set.)
T-2-143
No.8
No.12
Q: How does E-RDS operate while this machine is placed in the sleep mode?
Q: Can I make another service call request when I have already requested a service call?
A: While being in Real Deep Sleep, and if data to be sent is in E-RDS, the system wakes up
A: No, you cannot make another service call request if you have already made a service call
asleep, then starts to send the data to the UGW. The system also waits for completion of
request.
data transmission and let the device to shift to asleep status again.
Touch the [Cancel] button to cancel the service call which youd made. Or the service
However, transition time to the Real Deep Sleep depends on the device, and the transition
technician performs a service call completion process.
to sleep wont be done if the next data transmission will be done within 10 minutes.
No.13
No.9
Q: Is the "Requesting" status cancelled when this machine is rebooted?
Q: Is E-RDS compatible with Department counter?
A: The requesting status is not cancelled even if the device is rebooted. The information
A: No, E-RDS does not support Department counter.
of the notified service call request (the time that the request was made, the service call
request description) is also retained during the "Requesting" status.
2-301
Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting
2-302
Troubleshooting
No.14
Q: Counter information could not be sent at the scheduled send time due to the power of this
machine being turned OFF. Will the counter information be sent later when the power of
this machine is turned ON?
A: Yes. When a scheduled send such as that for counter could not be executed due to the
power of this machine being turned OFF, etc., and the scheduled send time has already
passed at power-on, the send is executed immediately.
Scheduled send
Immediate send
(Service call log / Alarm log / Jam log)
Cause: Initial settings or network conditions is incomplete.

Remedy 1: Check and take actions mentioned below.
1) Check network connections
YES: Proceed to Step 2).
Status of this machine

Power OFF
Sent
Not sent*1
Sleep
Sent
Sent*2
Power ON
Symptom: A communication test (COM-TEST) results NG!
Is the status indicator LED for the HUB port to which this machine is connected ON?
The following shows data send according to the status of this machine.
Send types
No.1
NO: Check that the network cable is properly connected.
Sent*2
2) Confirm loop back address (* In case of IPv4 )

Select [Settings/Registration (User Mode)] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings]
T-2-144
> [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], enter "127.0.0.1", and touch the [Start] button.
*1: Immediately sent if the send time has already passed at power-on.
*2: Sent after recovery from sleep mode.
No.15
Q: Some part of information seems to be suppressed as screens passes: Settings/
Registration > Preferences > Network > TCP/ IP Settings, when the device is connected
with a PS server unit. How the authentication information such as CA certificate is dealt?
A: The certificate-related items are displayed. Even when the device is connected with a PS
Server Unit, E-RDS functions.
F-2-521
Does the screen display "Response from the host."? (See the next figure.)
NO: There is a possibility that this machines network settings are wrong. Check the
details of the IPv4 settings once more.
2-302
2-303
(b) Touch the [Up] button.
F-2-522
F-2-524
3) Confirmation from another PC connected to same network.

Request the user to ping this machine from a PC connected to same network.
Does this machine respond?
(c) Select [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], enter the primary DNS server noted down
in step a) as the IP address, and touch the [Start] button.

NO: Confirm the details of this machines IP address and subnet mask settings.
Does the screen display "Response from the host."?

YES: Proceed to Remedy 2.
4) Confirm DNS connection

(a) Select [Settings/Registration (User Mode)] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP
Settings] > [DNS Settings] > [DNS Server Address Settings], write down the primary
and secondary addresses of the DNS server, and touch the [Cancel] button.
NO: Enter the secondary DNS server noted down in step a) as the IP address,
and then touch the [Start] button.
Does the screen display "Response from the host."?
YES: Proceed to Remedy 2.
NO: There is a possibility that the DNS server address is wrong. Reconfirm the
address with the users system administrator.
F-2-523
2-303
2-304
Remedy 2: Troubleshooting using communication error log (COM-LOG)

1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
3) When each line is selected, the communication error log detailed screen is displayed as
shown in the figure below. (Example: No. 02)
2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [COM-LOG] and touch the blank field on the
right side. The communication error log list screen is displayed.
F-2-526
NOTE:
A detailed description of the error appears below 'Information'. (Max 128 characters)
Touch the [OK] button to return to the communication error log list screen.
4) When a message is displayed, take an appropriate action referring to "Error code and
strings".
No.2
Symptom: A communication test results NG! even if network setting is set properly.
Cause: The network environment is inappropriate, or RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT settings for
F-2-525
NOTE:
Only the initial part of error information is displayed in the communication error log list
screen.
"*" is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test (method
name: getConfiguration or communicationTest) only.
E-RDS have been changed.

Remedy: The following points should be checked.
1) Check network conditions such as proxy server settings and so on.
2) Check the E-RDS setting values.
Check the communication error log from COM-LOG.
Check whether RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT settings has changed. If RGW-ADR or RGWPORT settings has changed, restore initial values. For initial values, see "Service cautions".
2-304
2-305
No.3
No.7
Symptom: There was a log, indicating "Network is not ready, try later" in error details of COM-
Symptom: A service call request cannot be made because the [New Request] button is grayed
out.
LOG list.
Cause: A certain problem occurred in networking.
Remedy: Check and take actions mentioned below.
1) Check networking conditions and connections.
2) Turn on the power supply of this machine and perform a communication test about 60
seconds later.
No.4
Symptom: "Unknown error" is displayed though a communication test (COM-TEST) has done
successfully.
Cause: It could be a problem at the UGW side or the network load is temporarily faulty.
Remedy: Try again after a period of time. If the same error persists, check the UGW status
with a network and UGW administrator.
F-2-527
No.5
Symptom: Enabling Service Browser (BRWS-ACT) results NG!
Cause: A communication test with UGW has not been performed, or a communication test
result is NG!
Remedy: Perform a communication test, and check that the test with UGW finishes
successfully.
Cause: There has been already a service call request.

Remedy: Perform either of the following remedy works:
Touch the [Cancel] button to cancel the service call request that has been made.
A service technician performs a complete processing for the service call request that has
been made.
No.8
No.6
Symptom: The display indicates that the service browser is enabled (BRWS-STS: 1), but the
service browser fails to be activated.
Cause: The main power switch of this machine has not been turned OFF and then ON. ON/
OFF of the service browser is enabled after reboot.
Remedy: Turn OFF and then ON the main power of this machine.
Symptom: Initializing the CA certificate (CA-KEY) results in NG!

Cause: Initialization process of the CA certificate has completed abnormally.
Remedy: Initialize the HDD.
No.9
Symptom: A service call request is failed, and a message "Could not send the service call
request" is displayed.
Cause: A communication test with UGW has not been performed, or a communication test
result is NG!
Remedy: Perform a communication test, and check that the test with UGW finishes
successfully.
2-305
Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings
2-306
Error code and strings
No.10
Symptom: When a communication test (COM-TEST) is repeatedly executed, an error occurs.
Cause: During communication conducted after execution of a COM-TEST, another COMTEST was executed again.
Remedy: When repeatedly executing COM-TEST, execute COM-TEST at intervals of 5
minutes or more.
The following error information is displayed on the communication error log details screen.
(Here, "server" means UGW.)
The error information are displayed in the following form.
[*] [Error strings] [Method name] [Error details provided by UGW]
NOTE:
"*" is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test
(method name: getConfiguration or communicationTest) only.
No.
1
0xxx 0003
0xxx 0003
84xx 0003
8600 0002
8600 0003
8600 0101
8600 0201
8600 0305
8600 0306
8600 0401
8600 0403
8600 0414
8600 0415
8700 0306 SRAM version
unmatch!
Error strings
Code
0000 0000 SUSPEND: mode

changed.
0500 0003 SUSPEND:
Communication test
is not performed.
Cause
Unmatched Operation Mode
Remedy
Initialize the E-RDS setting
(ERDS-DAT).
Perform a communication test
(COM-TEST).
Rebooting the device while

the communication test had
not been performed although
E-RDS is enabled.
Server schedule is Blank schedule data have
Perform and complete a
not exist
been received from UGW.
communication test (COMTEST).
Communication test Communication test has not Perform and complete a
is not performed
completed.
E-RDS switch is
A communication test has
Set E-RDS switch (E-RDS)
setted OFF
been attempted with the
to 1, and then perform a
E-RDS switch being OFF.
Event Registration Processing (event processing) Turn the device OFF/ ON.
is Failed
within the device has failed.
If the error persists, replace
the device system software.
(Upgrade)
8700 0306 SRAM AeRDS

version unmatch!
Improper value is written

in at the head of the Main
Controller PCB 2 SRAM
domain of E-RDS.
Improper value is written
in at the head of the Main
Controller PCB 2 SRAM
domain of Ae-RDS.
Turn the device OFF/ ON.
2-306
2
No.
Code
Error strings
8xxx 0004 Operation is not

supported
10 8xxx 0101 Server response
error (NULL)
11
8xxx 0201
8xxx 0202
8xxx 0203
8xxx 0204
8xxx 0206
Cause
Method which E-RDS is not

supporting attempted.
Communication with UGW has
been successful, but an error
of some sort has prevented
UGW from responding.
When (Null) is displayed
at the end of the message,
this indicates that there has
been an error in the HTTPS
communication method.
Server schedule is During the communication
invalid
test, there has been some
kind of error in the schedule
values passed from UGW.
2-307
Remedy
Contact help desk
Code
Error strings
Cause
Communication attempted
without confirming network
connection, just after booting
up a device in which the
network preparations are not
ready.

error
([Hexadecimal])
[Error detailed in
UGW]*1
22 8xxx 200A Server connection
error
Communication with UGW has

been successful, but an error
of some sort has prevented
UGW from responding.
23 8xxx 200B Server address

resolution error
Server address name

resolution has failed.

When the error occurs, report

the details to the support
section.
After the UGW side
has responded, try the
communication test again.
12 8xxx 0207 Internal Schedule is The schedule data in the
8xxx 0208 broken
inside of E-RDS is not right. (COM-TEST).
13 8xxx 0221 Server specified list Alarm/Alert filtering error: The Alert filtering is not supported
is too big
number of elements of the list by UGW.
specified by the server is over
restriction value.
14 8xxx 0222 Server specified list Alarm filtering error: Unjust
Alert filtering is not supported
is wrong
value is included in the
by UGW.
element of the list specified by
the server.
15 8xxx 0304 Device is busy, try The semaphore consumption Try again a communication test
later
error at the time of a
after a period of time.
communication test.
16 8xxx 0709 Tracking ID is not When upgrading firmware, the Obtain the sublog, and contact
match
TrackingID notified by Updater the support department of the
differs from the thing of UGW sales company.
designates.
17 8xxx 2000 Unknown error
Some other kind of
communication error has
communication test (COMoccurred.
TEST).
18 8xxx 2001 URL Scheme
The header of the URL of the Check that the value of URL of
error(not https)
registered UGW is not in https UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://
format.
a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/
agentif010.
19 8xxx 2002 URL server
A URL different to that
Check that the value of URL of
specified is illegal specified by the UGW has
UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://
been set.
agentif010.
No.
20 8xxx 2003 Network is not

ready, try later
24 8xxx 2014 Proxy connection

error
TCP/IP communication fault

The IP address of device is
not set.
Remedy
Check the network
connection, as per the initial
procedures described in the
troubleshooting.
(COM-TEST) about 60 seconds
later, after turn on the device.
Try again after a period of time.
Check detailed error code
(Hexadecimal) and [Error
details in UGW] from UGW
displayed after the message.
Check the network
troubleshooting.
When proxy is used, make
the settings for proxy, and
check the status of the proxy
server.
Check that the value of URL
of UGW (RGW-ADR) is
https://a01.ugwdevice.net/
ugw/agentif010.
Check that Internet
connection is available in the
environment.
Check proxy server address /
port and re-enter as needed.
Could not connect to proxy

server due to improper
address.
25 8xxx 2015 Proxy address
Could not connect to proxy
Check that the proxy
server name is correct. If
resolution error
server due to name resolution
the proxy server name is
error of proxy address.
correct, check the DNS
troubleshooting.
Specify the IP address as the
proxy server name.
26 8xxx 201E Proxy
Proxy authentication is failed. Check the user name and
authentication error
password required in order to
login to the proxy, and re-enter
as needed.
2-307
2
No.
Code
Error strings
27 8xxx 2028 Server certificate

error

verify error

expired

time out
31 8xxx 2048 Service not found
Cause
Remedy
No route certificate installed

in device.
Certificate other than
that initially registered
in the user's operating
environment is being used,
but has not been registered
with the device.
The date and time of the
device is not correct.
The server certificate
verification error occurred.
Install the latest device

system software. (Upgrade)
Correctly set the date and
time of the device.
Execute CLEAR > CAKEY, and turn OFF and
then ON the device. (The
CA certificate at the time of
shipment is automatically
installed.)
agentif010.
Check that the device time and
date are correctly set.
If the device time and date are
correct, upgrade to the latest
system software.
The route certificate

registered with the device
has expired.
Certificate other than
that initially registered
in the users operating
environment is being used,
but has not been registered
with the device.
The device time and date
is outside of the certificated
period.
Due to network congestion,
etc., the response from UGW
does not come within the
specified time. (HTTPS level
time out)
There is a mistake in the
UGW URL, and UGW cannot
be accessed. (Path is wrong)
32 8xxx 2052 URL error
The data which is not URL is

inputted into URL field.
33 8xxx 2058 Unknown error
SOAP Client fails to obtain

SOAP Response.
Possibility of a problem in
UGW or of a temporary
problem in the network load.
SOAP communication error
has occurred.
34 8xxx 2063 SOAP Fault
2-308
No.
Code
Error strings
35 xxxx xxxx Device internal

error
36 xxxx xxxx SUSPEND:

Initialize Failure!
Cause
An internal error, such as
memory unavailable, etc.,
has occurred during a device
internal error phase.
Internal error occurred at the
initiating E-RDS.
Remedy
Or replace the device system
software. (Upgrade)
T-2-145
*1: [Hexadecimal]: indicates an error code returned from UGW.

[Error details in UGW]: indicates error details returned from UGW.
If this error occurs when the

communication test is being run
or Service Browser is being set,
try again after a period of time.
agentif010.
agentif010.
Check that the value of port

number of UGW (RGW-PORT)
is 443.
2-308
Technology > Updater > Overview > Outline
2-309
Updater
a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-Remote Update)

If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule and update setting
are registered on UGW in advance, full remote firmware update is available on an
Overview
imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device. Upon downloaded from CDS, the firmware is

updated on the device.
Outline
Updater provides functions that enable network communication with Content Delivery System
V1.0 (hereinafter CDS) or Local CDS to install firmware, MEAP applications and system
3) Give a firmware distribution

command to e-ROS.
1) Set up customers,
device types, distribution
schedule and the
command for download
UGW
options.
Sales Company
/ Partner
UGW Operator
Firmware Installation
Updater function enables users to distribute firmware through CDS or Local CDS via
2) Notify distribution
information to CDS.
e-RDS
Internet. Particularly on e-Maintenance/UGW (called NETEYE in Japan)-enabled devices,
4) Download
firmware
firmware can be updated remotely, which effectively slashes costs incurred in field services.
MEAP Application/System Option Installation
By linking devices to CDS and License Management System (providing the function to
manage licenses; hereinafter LMS), applications can be installed in devices via Updater,
regardless of those not embedded (MEAP application) or embedded (system options) in
devices.
Updater
Firmware Upload
Firmware
Canon Inc.
imageRUNNER 5) Writing process is

ADVANCE
automatically started upon
download completed.
F-2-528
b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution / Update)

If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule is registered on UGW in
advance, firmware can be distributed to an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device before
Installing Firmware
With link to Updater, service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 3
methods.
Distribution Method
Download
Downloadable Firmware Versions
Update
Previous
Current
Newer
Commanded
Timing
Ver
Ver
Ver
by:
a. UGW-linked Download / Update

UGW
(Full-remote update)
b. UGW-linked Download
UGW
(Remote Distribution / Update)
c. Manual Download / Update
Local UI
(On-site Update via Service mode)
d. Local CDS Download and Update
iW EMC +
(iW EMC + DFU Plug-in*3)
DFU Plug-in
*3
e. Update by the SST
SST
Auto
No
Yes*1
Yes*2
Manual
Yes
Yes*1
Yes
a service technician actually visits the customer site. This allows the service technician to
update the firmware manually immediately after completing device inspection.
3) Give a firmware distribution
command to e-ROS.
UGW
Auto
Manual
Auto
No
Yes
No
Yes*1
Yes*1
No
Yes*2
Yes
Yes*2
Yes
Yes
Yes
*2: Only the versions for which remote update is allowed can be selected.
*3: Device Firmware Update Plug-in
T-2-146
1) Set up customers,
device types, distribution
schedule and the
command for download
Sales Company
/ Partner
UGW Operator
2) Notify distribution
information to CDS.
e-RDS
*1:You can select the version allowed Remote Update.
CDS
4) Download
firmware
Updater
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
Service
Technician
CDS
Firmware
Firmware Upload
Canon Inc.
5) Writing process is started by

manually executing Updater.
F-2-529
2-309
2-310
c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update via Service Mode)
e. SST update
If an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device has connection with the external network,
In the cases of devices other than imageRUNNER ADVANCE series and devices of
a service technician can gain access to CDS via Service mode to download and update
imageRUNNER ADVANCE series that are not connected with external network, the foregoing
firmware. This allows service technicians to update the firmware as needed on the
three methods cannot be used to distribute firmware. Firmware released in the future will be
customer site even without PCs.
distributed via CDS instead of distribution using a master CD. In the field, these firmware can
1) Manually execute
Updater.
Updater
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
be downloaded from CDS using a PC web browser.
CDS
Firmware
Firmware Upload
Canon Inc.
Updater function available machine

CDS
Firmware
Service
2) Firmware distribution
Technician
1) Firmware Update
Canon Inc.
Update function impossible machine

F-2-530
NOTE:
External network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
d. As preparation for distribution, obtain firmware from the update CDS using
iW EMC + Device Firmware Update Plug-in (DFU Plug-in) and register the firmware in
2) Download firmware to PC
3) Update via SST
The service technician downloads

the firmware from CDS in advance
and executes update using SST.
Sales Company
Service Technician
the local CDS. In service mode of the host machine, make preparations to allow reception
of firmware distributed from the local CDS. The firmware can be updated on the user's
intranet by executing the task from Device Firmware Update Plug-in on iW EMC.
F-2-532
NOTE:
Users are able to gain firmware distribution in the following 4 methods by introducing
CDS. See User Manual for detailed information.
Download
Distribution Method Commanded
by
F-2-531
Manual download/
update via Local UI
Manual download/
upload via Remote UI
Special download/
upload via Remote UI
Periodical update via
Local UI
Local UI
Remote UI
Update
Timing
Auto
Manual
Auto
Manual
Remote UI
Local UI
Auto
Downloadable Firmware Versions

Previous Ver Current Ver Newer Ver
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Specific version only
(Obtain it separately)
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
Yes *1
Yes *1
Yes *1
*1: Only the latest version of Remote update-enabled version is downloadable.
2-310
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option
2-311
Installing MEAP Application/System Option
LAN
The following is the installation method of MEAP application/system option which is enabled
LAN
Sales
Company
LMS
by applying CDS.
User
5) Manuals, etc.
a. LMS-linked MEAP Application/System Option Installation

If an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device is connected to the external network, user or
LAN
service technician can gain access to CDS from User mode to install a MEAP application
2) License
Authentication
CDS
1) Enter LAN
or a system option.
3) Create LF
Manual
Upload
Application
Installing MEAP Application

LAN
User
4) Transmit LF
LAN
Sales
Company
5) Manuals, etc.
LAN
LMS
If a customer enters LAN
purchased from the sales company
to an imageRUNNERADVANCEseries device, a LF can be installed.
2) License
Authentication
CDS
1) Enter LAN
Canon Inc.
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
MEAP
Application
Manual
Upload
3) Create LF
LAN: License Access Number

LF: License File
(DSN: Device Serial Number,
automatically sent to CDS upon LAN
entered.)
F-2-534
Application
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
4) Transmit MEAP
Application/LF
If a customer enters LAN

purchased from the sales company
to an imageRUNNERADVANCEseries device, MEAP application/LF
can be installed.
Canon Inc.
LAN: License Access Number

LF: License File
(DSN: Device Serial Number,
automatically sent to CDS upon LAN
entered.)
F-2-533
Installing System Option
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option
2-311
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > List of Functions
System Configuration
2-312
List of Functions
The figure below schematically shows the system configuration.
The matrix below shows the list of functions provided by Updater.

Category
CDS
Dealer
Manual
Readme
License
Access No.
LMS
Internet
User
Application/License
Updater
MEAP application
Manual
Firmware
eRDS
Sales
Company
CDS
Application
Firmware
Business
Group
Firmware
UGW
Service
Technician
Command for Firmware Distribution
QA
Canon Inc.
F-2-535
Local CDS
MEAP application/
system option
System
Management
Internal system
error notification
Function
Checking firmware compatibility
Checking special firmware
Checking latest firmware
version
Registering/deleting firmware
distribution schedule
Confirming and downloading
firmware
Updating downloaded firmware
Cancelling downloaded
firmware
Acquiring firmware distribution
information registered from
UGW
Notifying firmware version
information
Periodical update
Inquiring license for MEAP
application/system option
Installing MEAP application /
system option
Settings
Testing communications
Displaying update logs
Displaying system logs
Notifying internal system error
occurrence to distribution server
Service
Mode
User
Mode
Remote
UI
UGWlinked
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-147
F-2-536
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > List of Functions
2-312
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > Distribution Flow
Distribution Flow
Local CDS
Category
Function
Firmware
MEAP application/
system option
System
Management
Internal system
error notification
2-313
Firmware Installation Flow
Checking latest firmware version

Registering/deleting firmware distribution schedule
Confirming and downloading firmware
Updating downloaded firmware
Inquiring license for MEAP application/system option
Installing MEAP application / system option
Settings
Testing communications
Displaying update logs
Displaying system logs
Notifying internal system error occurrence to distribution server
xxxxx
Service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 4 methods.

a: UGW-linked download and update
b: UGW-linked download
c: Manual download and update
d: Local CDS Download and Update (iW EMC + DFU Plug-in)
e: Update via SST
: Operator of each company
T-2-148
: User operation
Firmware
Market Release
Automatic update
e
b
c
Distribution
Setting to UGW
(UGW-linked)*1
Automatic download
Firmware acquisition
Register the
firmware in the LCDS
Distribution setting &

Download
Via Service mode
(Local UI)
Scheduled download

Download
Via User mode
(Local UI)

Download
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
Download via SST
Executing the task

from Device
Firmware Update
Apply (Update)
Via Service mode
(Local UI)
Scheduled update
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Local UI)
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
Update via SST
Automatic update
F-2-537
*1: Schedules for UGW-linked distribution are maintained on CDS.
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > Distribution Flow
2-313
Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions
2-314
MEAP Application/System Option Installation Flow

MEAP application/system option installation method using service mode is not provided.
Be sure to use the user mode to install.
: User operation
Limitations and Cautions

Limitations
Changing Date/Time on Device
When a user changes the date/time setting on the device (including change of the setting
according to daylight saving time), the firmware distribution may not be performed as
scheduled.
Application
Market Release
But there is not the problem if it is time adjustment of several minutes with NTP servers.
License Access
Number Acquisition
(packaged with the
product)
Change of Setting from Service mode

Any settings from Service mode will be enabled after restarting the device.
Cautions
Device Serial No.
Acquisition
(from the device)
Concurrent use of Updater functions

Multiple users cannot use Updater functions on a device concurrently by using it together with
Remote UI.
License Key
Acquisition
(from LMS)
License File
Acquisition
(from LMS)
Coexistence of Remote UI and other tools

Users logged in SMS (Service Management Service) are unable to use Update functions
from Remote UI.
Install
Via User mode
(Local UI)
Install distributed
application
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
System Option
Install
Via User mode
(Local UI)
System Option
Manual Install
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
MEAP Application
Manual Install
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
F-2-538
Using Updater function from Remote UI

Upon the following operations done, Updater functions are suspended from Remote UI for
certain duration.
When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Portal] or [Log Out] button in the setting of
Remote Login Service via SMS
When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Portal] button in the setting of not to use
Remote Login Service via SMS.
When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Log out from SMS] or [To Remote UI]
button.
Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function
Firmware update will be triggered only after the following jobs are completed.
This is the Updater-specific specification.
2-314
2
Job/Function
type
COPY
PRINT
FAX
I-FAX Receipt
Report Print
SEND
Receiving
Wait for EOJ
(end of job)
Wait for EOJ
Cancel
processing to
trigger update *
-
Printing
Queued print
jobs
2-315
Sending
Queued send
jobs
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
Wait for EOJ

-
Wait for EOJ

-
Cancel
Cancel
processing to processing to
trigger update * trigger update *
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
T-2-149
*The data are guaranteed even if cut off in the middle of a job.It becomes the recovery object
after the device reboot and carry out send / reception again.
Even during transfer, Pull SCAN job processing is cancelled soon after scanning is
completed.
Firmware update is cancelled if the jobs are not completed within 10 minutes. If this occurs,
the error code, 8x001106, will be returned (different numbers will be shown for x depending
on the execution modes).
Firmware update is executed if the jobs stated above are not in the queue.
Follow the shutdown sequence to reboot the device after the firmware is updated.
2-315
Technology > Preparation
2-316
Preparation
Overview of Preparation
The following should be prepared before using Updater.
Enabling [Install Application/

Options] Button of User Mode
LMS-linked Installation
LMA-linked installation via Local UI
LMS-linked installation via Remote UI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Setting Sales Companys HQ
COPIER >
FUNCTION
Service Mode > INSTALL
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

CDSUGW
CDS-CTL
UGW-linked
Download and
Update
UGW-linked
Download
Manual
Download and
Update
Manual
Download and
Update via
Local UI
Manual
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Special
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Scheduled
update via
Local CDS
Network Settings
T-2-151
For updating of firmware
Installation
Method
Installation Method
When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Companys
HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is
CDS-FIRM
Enabling
Setting
[Update
Sales
Network Enabling
Firmware]
Companys Settings UGW Link
Button of User
HQ
Mode
LOCLFIRM
LCDSFLG
Enabling
[Manual
Update]
Button of
User Mode
(Remote UI)
Enabling
[Local CDS]
changed properly, the desired firmware may not be able to be selected.

Market
Canada
Latin America
Hong Kong
Default Setting of Sales

Company's HQ
US
US/SG
SG
Setting of Sales Company's

HQ after Change
CA
LA
HK
T-2-152
Go to the following screen to change the setting of Sales Company's HQ.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Service
Technician
Setting of Device Service Mode

(Level 1)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL
NOTE:
The list below shows the setting of Sales Companys HQ for CDS-CTS by market.
Check and adhere to the appropriate setting for your market.
<List of Sales Companys HQ and the settings for CDS-CTL>
Japan = JP
USA = US
Singapore = SG
Europe = NL
Korea = KR
China = CN
Hong Kong = HK
Australia = AU
Canada = CA
Latin America= LA
T-2-150
For Install of Application
2-316
2-317
Network Settings
[COPIER ] > [ OPTION ] > [ FNC-SW ]
Connecting to External Network
CDS-FIRM
The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection

method. Refer to user manual of the device for details.
LCDSFLG
NOTE:
See User Manual for how to connect the device to the external network.
Before using UGW link or User mode, see the sections below to prepare as required.
"Enabling UGW Link"
"Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode"
"Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode"
CDS-UGW
External Network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
CDS Local
CDS
1
1
To set whether to permit update of the firmware by user

(administrator).
When "1: Enabled" is set, Updater can be activated from the user
mode.
0 to 1
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Whether to display or hide the screen for setting the server to be
0
connected
0: Hide
1: Display
To set whether to permit update of the firmware from the UGW server. 1
When "1: Enabled" is set, Updater accepts the operation from the
UGW server in cooperation with CDS.
0 to 1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
T-2-153
Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server
Connection to the local CDS

When updating firmware using iW EMC + Device Firmware Update Plug-in (DFU Plug-in),
start service mode and enable the following setting.
This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server.
[COPIER] > [OPTION] > [FNC-SW] > [CDS-FIRM]
2. Press [Updater] button.
[COPIER ] > [ OPTION ] > [ FNC-SW ] > [ LCDSFLG]

Then, disable the following setting.
[COPIER] > [OPTION] > [FNC-SW] > [CDS-UGW]
F-2-540
F-2-539
2-317
2-318
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.
5. Ensure to enter https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif in the field beside the

[Delivery Server URL] button.
If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL]
button to show the virtual keypad. Check the URL and enter the correct one.
Delivery Server CDS
F-2-541
4. Press [Settings] button.
F-2-543
Delivery Server Local CDS
F-2-542
F-2-544
2-318
2-319
Note:
For the URL of the L-CDS server, enter the address beginning with "htts://" specified in
L-CDS. If the port number has not been specified, 443 is internally added as the port
number.
To display the button of the local CDS, execute Settings/Registration > Management
Settings > License/Other > Register/Update Software. It is not displayed in service mode.
6. Press [OK] to set the entered items. Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully
set.
Communication Test
This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution
server and/or the file server.
Note:
CDS and RDS are another servers.You need the communication test of CDS by all
means even if You succeed in a communication test of the RDS.
F-2-546
4. Press [Test Communication] button.

F-2-547
F-2-545
2-319
2-320
Enabling UGW Link
5. Press [Yes] button.
When installing the firmware in the method of UGW-linked Download and Update or UGWlinked Download, the following should be set before actually using UGW link.
Service Technician
Setting of Device
Service Mode
(Level 1)
Setting of UGW
WebPortal
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW

(0 -> 1)
In [Customer Management] screen, set [Do not

distribute firmware] to [Distribute firmware].
See "Analysis>Firmware Distribution
Setting of Authorities on
Sales Company's HQ
Information" to grant the appropriate authorities
UGW WebPortal
to each account.
NOTE:
F-2-548
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server
(to execute the communication test to the distribution server).
Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are
downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).
See imageWARE Remote Operators Manual / e-Maintenance Business Operation

Manual for how to operate UGW WebPortal.
[Distribute Firmware] should be set on [Customer Management] screen for staff in charge
of setting for [Enter customer information] or [Command for firmware distribution] in order
to allow them to select the desired device on [Firmware Distribution Information] screen.
If [Distribute Firmware] is not shown on [Customer Management] screen of UGW
WebPortal, appropriate authorities may not be set to each account in Firmware
Distribution Information. Contact the Sales Company HQ concerned for confirmation.
6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.
F-2-549
2-320
2-321
Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode
Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode
To allow users to install firmware using Updater, the setting of firmware installation should be
To allow users to install applications using Updater, the setting of application installation
set to ON for users in advance.
should be set to ON for users in advance.
Service
Technician

(Level 1)
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-FIRM

(0 -> 1)
User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is not enabled (CDS-FIRM(0)):
F-2-550
User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is enabled (CDS-FIRM(1)):
F-2-551
Service
Technician
Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-MEAP

(Level 1)
(0 -> 1)
User Mode screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled (CDS-MEAP(0)):
F-2-552
User Mode screen of Updater when the setting is enabled (CDS-MEAP(1)):
F-2-553
2-321
2-322
Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI)

To allow users to install firmware from Updater using the file on Local PCs, the setting of
firmware installation should be set to ON for users in advance.
Service
Technician
Enabling [Scheduled Update] Button of User Mode

Service
Technician
Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-LVUP

(Level 1)
(0 -> 1)
Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >LOCLFIRM

(Level 1)
(0 -> 1)
Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled (LOCLFIRM (0)):
F-2-554
Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is enabled (LOCLFIRM (1)):

F-2-556
F-2-555
Note:
In order to use manual update of the remote UI, firmware for manual update is required.
Since firmware update is not supposed to be done by users at this point, we have no
plan to provide dedicated firmware. Just in case it becomes necessary to support such
update on the host machine side, the default value of LOCLFIRM in service mode is set
to "1". On the RUI, the setting of manual update can be made in the following location.
RUI > Settings/Registration > License/Other > Register/Update Software > Update
Firmware > Manual Update
F-2-557
2-322
2-323
F-2-558
F-2-559
2-323
Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Various Setting
System Management Operations
2-324
Various Setting
Setting URL of Distribution Server
This section describes how to set URL of the distribution server.
F-2-561
5. Press [Delivery Server URL] to show the virtual keypad. Enter the URL.
[Delivery Server URL]:
Enter the "https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif"
F-2-560
F-2-562
2-324
2-325
Setting Log Level
[Delivery Server Local CDS]
This section describes how to set system log levels.

F-2-563
Note:
number.
Settings > License/Other > Register/Update Software. It is not displayed in service
mode.
The URL setting of the local CDS server can be made through the following 2 methods:
- Manual input on this screen
- Distribute the setting information from Device Firmware Update Plug-in (DFU Plug-in),
and remotely make the setting.
F-2-564
4.
Press [Settings] button.
set.
F-2-565
2-325
Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs
2-326
Displaying Logs
5. Select a log level from [Log Level] dropdown list.
Update Logs
This section describes how to confirm System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and
Firmware Update Logs.
F-2-566
[Log Level]:
Select one of 5 levels ranging from [0] to [4].
See the table below for logs output in each level.
Log Level
Trace
Information
Yes
Yes
Yes
0
1
2
3
4
Log Output
Important Message Ordinary Error
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
System Error
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-154
NOTE:
This list shows the contents of the Log Output.
Log Output
Trace
Information
Important Message
Ordinary Error
System Error
Description
F-2-567
Detailed logs for debug

Logs related to operations done on the system
Update logs output by firmware type
Installation logs by MEAP application
Logs related to enabled functions by system option
Logs for ordinary errors
Logs for internal system errors
6. Press [OK] button to set the selected log level. Now the log level is successfully set.
2-326
4. Press [Select Log Display] button.
2-327
6. System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs are shown.
F-2-568
5. Press [Display Update Logs] button.
F-2-570
F-2-569
2-327
System Logs
2-328
5. Press [Display System Logs] button.
This section describes how to confirm System Logs.

F-2-573
6. Updater internal logs are displayed.

F-2-571
4. Press [Select Log Display] button.
F-2-574
F-2-572
2-328
Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Communication Test
NOTE:
See the section of "Debug Logs" under Version Upgrade via CDS, Version Upgrade
of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual for more detailed information.
2-329
Communication Test
F-2-575
2-329
2-330
F-2-578
F-2-576

Caution:
Carry out the communication test with both Embedded RDS and CDS.
F-2-577
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server (to
execute the communication test to the distribution server).
2-330
Technology > Maintenance
Maintenance
Upgrading Updater
The firmware installed in the device should be also upgraded when upgrading Updater. See
2-331
How to Replace Controller Boards
The steps are different depending on which of 2 controller boards are to be replaced.
Main Controller Board PCB 1
No steps follow.
the section of Version upgrade , Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual for how to
update firmware.
Main Controller Board PCB 2 (including SRAM)
The setting information and logs (update logs/system logs) are inherited in the upgraded
The network and service mode setting should be set again after initialization. See
version.
"Preparation" in chapter 2 of this manual for details.
Formatting Hard Disk
How to Replace Devices
Since Updater is a MEAP application, its contents can be temporarily saved in the MEAP
All settings should be set again because no data are inherited. See "Preparation" in chapter 2
application storage area on PC via SST during formatting or replacing HDD. See MEAP
of this manual for details.
Service Manual for further information.

The settings initialized in format or replacement should be restored. See "Preparation" in
chapter 2 of this manual for details.
NOTE:
When formatting or replacing HDD, distribution schedule, downloaded firmware (not
updated yet) and logs (update/system logs) will be deleted.
Technology > Maintenance
2-331
Technology > Maintenance > FAQ > FAQ on Installing Firmware
2-332
FAQ
No.4
Q: In the course of UGW-linked download, what will happen if the user downloads the
FAQ on Installing Firmware
firmware before the service technician update the firmware downloaded with UGW-linked
download before?
No.1
A: The previously downloaded firmware in the method of UGW-linked download will be
Q: Is it also possible to downgrade firmware with using CDS?
overridden by the subsequently downloaded one.
A: Firmware can be downgraded in some methods shown in the table below.
This is because only one downloaded firmware can be held on the device.
If download and update are performed consecutively, firmware cant be downgraded.

Distribution Method
The firmware downloaded in the method of Service mode-linked download and UGWlinked download can be checked/deleted from User mode, but cannot be updated, so it
Downgrade Possibility
UGW-linked Download and Update

UGW-linked Download
Manual Download and Update(Timing to Apply : Manual)
Manual Download and Update(Timing to Apply : Automatic)
cannot be updated by the user unnoticed by the service technician.
No
Yes
Yes
No
No.5
Q: What happens if the user registers another distribution schedule when the distribution
T-2-155
schedule has been set in manual download and update?

A: The distribution schedule subsequently registered by the user will override the existing
No.2
Q: When installing firmware, does it take less time in manual download and update
compared to update via SST?
A: It depends on the number of devices to update firmware.
schedule. This is because only one distribution schedule can be held. Any existing
distribution schedule is deleted and the newly registered distribution schedule is made
valid.
When updating the firmware on a device, it takes more time in manual download and
update compared to update via SST (It depend on network environment.).
No.6
As for the time to update firmware to multiple devices, manual download and update
Q: How is an individual response edition of firmware distributed?
takes less time compared to update via SST because updating the firmware to multiple
A: Any individual response edition of firmware can be installed in all the methods provided by
devices can be executed simultaneously.
service technicians. Before installing the individual response edition, ensure to obtain the
ID and password separately.
No.3
Q: How can we confirm that the firmware is properly updated after UGW-linked download
and update done?
A: You can confirm this in E-mail or the Device List on UGW-linked screen.
E-mail to notify firmware update will be sent from CDS server to the addresses set as
No.7
Q: If the device is down during firmware update, can the device be started using the older
firmware version?
A: No, it is impossible to start the device using older versions. If this occurs, the service
destinations at the time of distribution setting to notify update completion.
technician in charge should reinstall the firmware via SST. See "Troubleshooting on
On UGW-linked screen, search the device of your interest on [Select Device] screen to find
Firmware Installation" in chapter 6 of this manual for details.
the distribution status per device as shown in the search result.

No.8
Q: If the device is down during firmware download, is it possible to download the firmware
again?
A: Firmware cannot be downloaded again automatically. Instead, the error is notified in E-mail.
The user should register the firmware distribution schedule again accordingly.
Technology > Maintenance > FAQ > FAQ on Installing Firmware
2-332
Technology > Maintenance > FAQ > FAQ on the Local CDS Operation Environment
2-333
FAQ on the Local CDS Operation Environment
No.9
Q: Can we cancel the operation during firmware download?
FAQ on the Number of Devices That Can Be Managed
A: Yes. [Cancel] button is shown.
Q: How many devices can be managed by 1 set of DFU Plug-in + Local CSD?
A: Up to 1000 devices can be registered. However, only up to 5 updaters can access the
local CSD at a time.
FAQ on Firmware Distribution Task

Q: If the version of the firmware on the local CDS is the same with or older
than the firmware on the device, what will occur when firmware update is
performed? (Will an error occur because firmware to be distributed does not
exist?)
A: The firmware will not be updated, and the result will be "normally completed".
FAQ on Firmware Update Process

Q: Won't timer shutdown occur during a firmware update process?
A: Updater deactivates the timer shutdown function at the start of a firmware update
process. Therefore shutdown will not occur during update.
F-2-579
No.10
Q: E-mail is sent to users to notify update completion. Can service technicians also receive
such a notification?
A: Yes. The notification E-mail is also set for the service technician in charge if the user enters
his/her E-mail address at the time of firmware distribution setting.
Multiple E-mail addresses can be entered in the field.Delimit each E-mail address with ,
(comma) or ; (semicolon) when you enter multiple E-mail addresses in the field.
Operation during Firmware Update

Q: Can the following operations be performed during device firmware update?
Automatic timer shutdown
Shutdown from the local UI
Reboot from the remote UI
Switching between authentication applications from SMS
A: Updater deactivates the following functions during device firmware update.
Timer shutdown
Shutdown from the local UI
No.11
Q: How long does the firmware update take?
A: Approx. 30 min. However, this does not include the download time. Download time relies
Reboot from the remote UI

Access to SMS
on the network environment.
Technology > Maintenance > FAQ > FAQ on the Local CDS Operation Environment
2-333
Technology > Maintenance > FAQ > FAQ on General Matters of Updater
2-334
FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option
FAQ on General Matters of Updater
No.1
No.1
Q: What happens if a MEAP application is installed in the system with insufficient HDD free
Q: What preparation is needed in each installation method?

A: See the table below for preparation required in each installation method.
space?
A: An error message is shown. Upon starting installation, the MEAP application checks the
required space against free space to judge installation availability.
No.2
Q: Can we cancel the operation during installation of MEAP application?
For updating firmware

COPIER >
FUNCTION
No.3
A: The device is not automatically restarted. Users should restart the device manually.
CDSUGW
CDS-CTL
A: Yes: [Cancel] button is shown.
Q: Is the device automatically restarted after the system option is enabled?
Installation
Method
UGW-linked
Download and
Update
UGW-linked
Download
Manual
Download and
Update
Manual
Download and
Update via
Local UI
Manual
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Special
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Scheduled
update via
Local CDS
CDS-FIRM
Enabling
Setting
[Update
Sales
Network Enabling
Firmware]
Button of User
HQ
Mode
LOCLFIRM
LCDSFLG
Enabling
[Manual
Update]
Button of
User Mode
(Remote UI)
Enabling
[Local CDS]
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-156
For install Application
2-334
2-335
Installation Method
Network Settings

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-157
No.2
Q: How can operations using Updater be masked on the users' side?
A: Be sure to perform the following from the service mode.
Masking Firmware Installation
Setting Device Service Mode
(Level 1)
(Level 1)
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-FIRM

(1 -> 0)
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >LOCLFIRM
(1 -> 0)
Masking Application Installation

(Level 1)
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-MEAP

(1 -> 0)
No.3
Q: Can the communication be cancelled during the communication test?
A: Yes. During the communication test, Cancel button is displayed.
2-335
Periodic service
Periodic service
of
Replacement
consumables
replaced
Periodically
parts
parts
Consumable
maintenance
Periodical
Periodic service > Periodically replaced parts > Host machine
Replacement of consumables
Periodically replaced parts
IR-ADV C9280 PRO/C7280i/C9270 PRO(200V)/

C7270(200V)/C7270i Series
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
Toner Cartridge (Bk)
Toner Cartridge (C)
Toner Cartridge (M)
Toner Cartridge (Y)
Q'ty
1
1
1
1
T-3-1
IR-ADV C9270 PRO(100V)/C7270(100V,120V)/C7260/

C7260i Series
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
Toner Cartridge (Bk)
Toner Cartridge (C)
Toner Cartridge (M)
Toner Cartridge (Y)
3-2
Q'ty
1
1
1
1
Host machine
No.
Parts name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Toner Filter
Ozone Filter
Dustproof Filter
Charging Wire Cleaner 1
Charging Wire Cleaner 2
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner 1
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner 2
Primary Etching Grid
Grid Cleaning Pad
Parts number Q'ty

FL3-7553
FL3-4101
FL2-0439
FM0-0892
FM0-0862
FL2-8915
FL2-7750
FL3-7560
FL2-8807
FL2-7750
FL3-7560
FC8-2295
FL3-4090
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Estimated life
500,000 pages
500,000 pages
500,000 pages
1,400,000 pages
1,400,000 pages
150,000 pages
150,000 pages
150,000 pages
150,000 pages
150,000 pages
150,000 pages
150,000 pages
150,000 pages
T-3-3
T-3-2
Periodic service > Periodically replaced parts > Host machine
3-2
Periodic service > Consumable parts > Host machine
3-3
Consumable parts
A* : imaga RUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO/C7280i

B* : imaga RUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270/C7270i
C* : imaga RUNNER ADVANCE C7260 /C7260i
Host machine
No.
Parts name
1
2
3
4
5
Developing Assembly (Bk)

Developing Assembly (Y)
Developing Assembly (M)
Developing Assembly (C)
Cleaner Blade (Bk)
Cleaner Scoop-up Sheet (Bk)
Edge Scraper 1 (Bk)
Edge Scraper 2 (Bk)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
ITB
ITB Cleaning Blade
Primary Transfer Roller (Y/M/C/Bk)
ITB Inner Surface Scraper
Fixing Film Unit
Pressure Roller
Fixing Web
Fixing Heat Soaking Roller
Bearing for Heat Soaking Roller
Pickup Roller (Left/Right Deck)
Feed Roller (Left/Right Deck)
Separation Roller (Left/Right Deck)
Pickup Roller (Cassette)
Feed Roller (Cassette)
Separation Roller (Cassette)
Feed Roller (Multi-purpose Tray)
Separation Roller (Multi-purpose Tray)
Series
A*
B*
C*
A*
B*
C*
A*
B*
C*
A*
B*
C*
Parts number Q'ty

FM0-2709
FM0-2706
FM0-2707
FM0-2708
FC8-2281
FL2-8652
FL2-8653
FL2-8654
FM4-6624
FL3-4920
FC0-2331
FC7-9325
FL3-8693
FM3-9841
FL3-9149
FM0-0413
FM0-0387
FC0-8030
FC0-7967
XG9-0810
FC5-2524
FC5-2526
FC5-2528
FC5-2524
FC5-2526
FC5-2528
FB1-8581
FC6-6661
FM0-4545
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 ea.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1 ea.
1 ea.
1 ea.
1 ea.
1 ea.
1 ea.
1
1
1
Estimated life
500,000 pages
500,000 pages
500,000 pages
500,000 pages
530,000 pages
550,000 pages
500,000 pages
530,000 pages
550,000 pages
500,000 pages
530,000 pages
550,000 pages
500,000 pages
530,000 pages
550,000 pages
500,000 pages
550,000 pages
200,000 pages
550,000 pages
550,000 pages
550,000 pages
550,000 pages
550,000 pages
300,000 pages
300,000 pages
300,000 pages
300,000 pages
300,000 pages
500,000 sheets
500,000 sheets
500,000 sheets
500,000 sheets
500,000 sheets
500,000 sheets
120,000 sheets
120,000 sheets
Change alarm lights
at 50,000 pages
(200,000 images)
T-3-4
Periodic service > Consumable parts > Host machine
3-3
Periodic service > Consumable parts > Options > Staple Finisher-L1
3-4
Options
Staple Finisher-L1
No.
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-F1

No.
Parts name
Parts number Q'ty
Estimated life
Pickup Roller
FC8-5577
80,000 sheets
2
3
4
5
6
Separation Roller
Retard Roller
Dust Collecting Sheet
Dust Collecting Sheet Type E
Stamp
FL2-9608
FB2-7777
FC8-5633
FC8-5727
F26-7610
1
1
2
8
1
80,000 sheets
80,000 sheets
80,000 sheets
80,000 sheets
7,000 sheets
Remarks
Replaced based
on the number of
actually fed paper
T-3-5
Paper Deck Unit-C1

No.
1
2
3
Parts name
Pickup Roller
Separation Roller
Feed Roller
Parts number Q'ty

FF5-7829
FF5-7830
FF6-1975
1
1
1
Estimated life
Remarks
250,000 sheets
250,000 sheets
250,000 sheets
Parts name
Parts number Q'ty
1
2
3
Stapler
Saddle Stapler
Delivery Static Eliminator (L)
FM2-0665
FL2-0846
FC5-3667
1
1
1
Delivery Static Eliminator (R)
FC5-5571
Inlet Static Eliminator
FL2-0822
Swing Middle Static Eliminator
4F3-0929
Buffer Roller
FC5-3442
Return Roller (Rear)
4A3-0950
Return Roller (Front)
4A3-0951
Estimated life
Remarks
500,000 sheets
100,000 sheets
1,000,000
sheets
1,000,000
sheets
1,000,000
sheets
1,000,000
sheets
1,000,000
sheets
1,000,000
sheets
1,000,000
sheets
T-3-9
T-3-6
POD Deck Lite-A1

No.
1
2
3
Parts name
Pickup Roller
Separation Roller
Feed Roller
Parts number Q'ty

FF5-7829
FF5-7830
FF6-1975
1
1
2
Estimated life
Remarks
500,000 sheets
500,000 sheets
500,000 sheets
T-3-7
Multi Deck-A1
No.
Parts name
Parts number Q'ty
1
2
3
5
Pickup Roller
Separation Roller
Feed Roller
Pickup Clutch
FF5-7829
FB5-6586
FF6-1975
FH6-5145
3
3
3
6
Pickup Roller Release Solenoid
FH6-5146
Estimated life
Remarks
500,000 sheets
500,000 sheets
500,000 sheets
4,000,000
pages
4,000,000
pages
T-3-8
Periodic service > Consumable parts > Options > Staple Finisher-L1
3-4
Periodic service > Periodical maintenance > ADF
3-5
Periodical maintenance
ADF
Symbols : Cleaning : Lubrication : Adjustment : Inspection
No. Location for maintenance Number of
Interval
Description
locations
Printer engine
Interval
Description
locations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Developing Assembly Cover

(C/M/Y)
Developing Assembly Cover
(Bk)
Transparency Sensor
Post-secondary Transfer
Sensor
Registration Sensor
Paper Width Sensor
ITB Drive Roller
ITB Steering Roller
Post Upper Duct
Shield Plate (Primary
Charging Assembly)
Shield Plate (Pre-transfer
Charging Assembly)
Developing Lower Toner
Tray
Catch Sheet
Drum Heater
1 ea.
150K
150K
1
1
1
150K
550K
550K
1
4
1
1
1
1
550K
550K
550K
550K
150K
150K
150K
500K
1 ea.
1
150K
500K
Remarks
Specified in the
number of sheets on
a A4 size conversion
basis
T-3-10
Reader
Interval
Description
locations
1
Surface of the Original

Glass (Large)
Whenever
needed
Surface/rear surface
of the Original Glass
(Small)
Scanner Rail
Whenever
needed
Whenever
needed
Remarks
Including the position
of the White Plate on
the back surface of the
glass
Post-separation Sensor
Post-separation Sensor 2
Post-separation Sensor 3
Lead Sensor
Registration Sensor
Delivery Sensor
Registration Roller
Lead Roller 1
Lead Roller 2
10
Lead Roller 3
11
Pullout Roller
12
Feed Roller
13
Delivery Roller
14
Rollers/Slave Rollers
15
Scrapers
16
ADF height adjustment
Remarks
160K sheets
or 12 months
160K sheets
or 12 months
Scanner Sensor only
Cleaned based
on the number of
actually fed paper
160K sheets
or 12 months
160K sheets
or 12 months
160K sheets
or 12 months
160K sheets
or 12 months
80K sheets or
6 months
80K sheets or
6 months
80K sheets or
6 months
80K sheets or
6 months
80K sheets or
6 months
80K sheets or
6 months
80K sheets or
6 months
80K sheets or
6 months
80K sheets or
6 months
80K sheets or
6 months
Adjustment
T-3-12
T-3-11
Periodic service > Periodical maintenance > ADF
3-5
of Parts
List
Controller System
Main
Exposure System
Laser
Formation System
Image
System
Fixing
Feed System
Pickup
Auxiliary System
External
Options
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover
List of Parts
4-2
Key No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
List of External / Internal Cover

[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[6]
[20]
[19]
[7]
[14]
Reference
(Refer to page 4-345)
T-4-1
[8]
[18]
Name
Left Middle Cover
Left Upper Cover
Box Upper Cover
Upper Cover
Upper Middle Cover
Upper Right Cover
Front Upper Cover
Front Cover
Deck Right Cover
Cassette Front Cover
Upper Left Cover
Deck Left Cover
Left Lower Cover 2
Handle Cover
Left Lower Cover 1
Reverse Door Cover
Reverse Door Face Cover
Left Lower Cover 3
Box Left Cover
Box Left Connector Cover
[9]
[17]
[16]
[10]
[15]
[14]
[11]
[13]
[12]
F-4-1
4-2
[3]
Key No..
[4]
[2]
4-3
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[5]
[17]
[6]
[16]
[7]
[12]
Name
Right Upper Cover 1
Right Middle Cover
Right Upper Cover 2
Box Right Cover
Box Right Connector Cover
Rear Upper Cover
Noise Reduction Cover
Rear Lower Cover
HDD Cover
Waste Toner Container Cover
Right Lower Cover 3
Handle Cover
Vertical Path Cover
Right Lower Cover 1
Right Lower Cover 2
Multi-purpose Tray
Multi-purpose Tray Cover
Reference
T-4-2
[15]
[8]
[14]
[13]
[9]
[12]
[11]
[10]
F-4-2
4-3
4-4
Key No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[6]
[14]
Name
Toner Container Replacement Cover (Y)
Toner Container Replacement Cover (M)
Toner Container Replacement Cover (C)
Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover
Toner Container Replacement Cover (Bk)
Front Inner Handle Right Cover
ITB Inner Right Cover
Fixing Feed Right Upper Inner Cover
Fixing Feed Right Lower Inner Cover
Process Unit Inner Cover
ITB Inner Middle Cover
Fixing Feed Left Inner Cover
ITB Inner Left Cover
Front Inner Handle Left Cover
Reference
T-4-3
[13]
[7]
[12]
[9]
[8]
[10]
[11]
F-4-3
4-4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-5
List of Main Unit

[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[12]
[13]
[10]
[11]
[9]
[8]
[7]
F-4-4
4-5
Key No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
Name
Hopper Unit (Bk)
Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)
Laser Scanner Unit (Y)
Laser Scanner Unit (M)
Laser Scanner Unit (C)
Laser Scanner Unit (Bk)
Process Unit (Y)
Process Unit (M)
Process Unit (C)
Drum Unit (Bk)
4-6
Reference
T-4-4
4-6
4-7
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[3]
[9]
[7]
[10]
F-4-5
4-7
Key No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
Name
ITB Unit
Fixing Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Registration Unit
Secondary Transfer Outer Unit
Pre-Fixing Feed Belt Unit
Left Deck Pickup Unit
Right Deck Pickup Unit
Cassette 3 Pickup Unit
4-8
Reference
T-4-5
4-8
4-9
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
F-4-6
Key No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Name
Reverse Delivery Unit
Flat Control Panel Unit
Upright Control Panel Unit
Vertical Path Unit
Reference
T-4-6
4-9
4-10
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-7
4-10
Key No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Name
Vertical Path Drive Unit
Cassette Drive Unit
Deck Drive Unit
Multi Pickup Drive Unit
Drum Drive Unit (Bk)
Process Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)
4-11
Reference
T-4-7
4-11
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4-12
List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
[1]
[2]
[6]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[7]
[3]
[5]
[8]
[6]
F-4-8
4-12
Key No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Name
Multi-purpose Tray Roller
Main Unit
Reference
4-13
Adjustment during parts replacemen

T-4-8
4-13
4-14
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[6]
[9]
[7]
[11]
[2]
[10]
[8]
[12]
[13]
[14]
F-4-9
4-14
4
Key No.
Name
Main Unit
Reference
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]

Edge Scraper 1 (Bk)
Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk)
Edge Scraper 2 (Bk)
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder
Drum Unit (Bk)

Drum Unit (Bk)
Drum Unit (Bk)
Drum Unit (Bk)
Drum Unit (Bk)
Drum Unit (Bk)

[10]
[11]
[12]
Grid Plate
Grid Cleaning Pad


[13]
[14]
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider

Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder


4-15

When Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-185)
When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-204)
When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit (Refer to page 4-203)
When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire (Refer to page 4-200)
Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-199)
When Replacing the Grid Plate (Refer to page 4-192)
When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-204)
When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire (Refer to page 4-213)
Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-212)
T-4-9
4-15
4-16
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-4-10
Key No.
Name
Main Unit
Reference
[1]
Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)
Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)
[2]
Product Configuration

When Replacing the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-248)
Cleaning the Toner Catch Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-247)
When Replacement the Developing Assembly (Refer to page 4-237)
T-4-10
4-16
4-17
[1]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[3]
F-4-11
Key No.
Name
Main Unit
Reference
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

ITB Cleaning Blade
ITB
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit

[5]
ITB Inside Scraper
ITB Unit

When Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller (Refer to page 4-159)
After Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit (Refer to page 4-144)
Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
Cleaning when replacing the ITB (Refer to page 4-156)
T-4-11
4-17
4-18
[5]
[4]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[6]
[3]
F-4-12
Key No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Name
Fixing Pressure Roller Unit
Fixing Film Unit
Ball Bearing
Fixing Web
Main Unit
Fixing Unit
Fixing Unit
Fixing Unit
Fixing Unit
Fixing Unit
Reference

T-4-12
4-18
4-19
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
F-4-13
Key No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Name
Ozone Filter
Primary Charging Dustproof Filter
Fixing Dustproof Filter
Main Unit
Reference

T-4-13
4-19
4-20
[2]
[1]
[6]
[9]
[5]
[7]
[8]
[4]
[3]
[10]
4-20
Key No.
Name
Main Unit
Reference
[1]
ITB Driver Roller
ITB Unit
[2]
ITB Steering Roller
ITB Unit
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]

Transparency Sensor
Registration Sensor
Registration Unit
Registration Unit
Registration Unit
Registration Unit
Registration Unit
Registration Unit
Pre-Fixing Paper Feed Unit

4-21

Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit
T-4-14
4-21
4-22
[1]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[7]
[8]
4-22
4
Key No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Name
Drum Sliding Shaft Support
Pre-transfer Upper Duct
Toner Catch Tray (Bk)
Primary Charging Shield Plate
Pre-transfer Shield Plate
Sleeve Cover (Bk)
Sleeve Cover (Y)/(M)/(C)
Toner Catch Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C)
Main Unit
Drum Unit (Bk)
Drum Unit (Bk)
Reference
4-23

T-4-15
4-23
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid
4-24
List of Clutch / Solenoid
[A]
SL1
[C]
[A]
SL5
[C]
[B]
[D]
[D]
[E]
SL7
[B]
SL6
[E]
SL8
F-4-14
No.
SL1
SL6
SL5
SL7
SL8
Name
Main Unit
ITB Unit
Reference

T-4-16
4-24
4-25
[B]
SL4
[A]
[B]
[A]
No.
SL9
SL2
SL4
SL2
SL9
Name
Remote Shut down Solenoid
Main Unit
Reverse Delivery Unit
Reference

T-4-17
4-25
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-26
List of Motor
M29
M27
M28
M26
F-4-15
No.
M26
M27
M28
M29
Name
Developing Stirring Motor (Y)
Developing Stirring Motor (C)
Developing Stirring Motor (M)
Developing Stirring Motor (Bk)
Main Unit
Reference
-

T-4-18
4-26
4-27
[A]
M83
M82
(Bk)
M81
M86
M80
(C)
M85
(M)
M84
(Y)
M6
[A]
M7
[B]
[C]
M16
M13
M10
M15
M9
M12
[B]
[C]
F-4-16
4-27
4
No.
M6
M7
M9
M10
M12
M13
M15
M16
M80
M81
M82
M83
M84
M85
M86
Name
Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (Bk)
Toner Container Drive Motor (Bk)
Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (Y)
Toner Container Drive Motor (Y)
Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (M)
Toner Container Drive Motor (M)
Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (C)
Toner Container Drive Motor (C)
Laser Scanner Motor (Y)
Laser Scanner Motor (M)
Laser Scanner Motor (C)
Laser Scanner Motor (Bk)
Skew Correction Motor (Y)
Skew Correction Motor (M)
Skew Correction Motor (C)
Main Unit
[B] Hopper Unit (Bk)
[B] Hopper Unit (Bk)
[C] Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)
[A] Laser Scanner Unit (Y)
[A] Laser Scanner Unit (M)
[A] Laser Scanner Unit (C)
[A] Laser Scanner Unit (Bk)
4-28
Reference

When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-130)
T-4-19
4-28
4-29
[C]
M37
[A]
[A]
M1
[C]
[D]
M2
[B]
[B]
[D]
M54
M38
M4
M5
M3
F-4-17
4-29
4
No.
M37
M38
M54
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
Name
Delivery Motor
Reverse Motor
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
ITB Drive Motor
Steering Drive Motor
Main Unit
[A] Reverse Delivery Unit
[C] Primary Charging Assembly
[B] Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
[D] ITB Unit
[D] ITB Unit
[D] ITB Unit
4-30
Reference

T-4-20
4-30
4-31
[A]
M57
M34
M56
M55
M35
[B]
M48
[C]
M31
[B]
[D]
[A]
[D]
[C]
M32
F-4-18
4-31
4
No.
Name
M48
M55
M56
M57
M31
M34
M35
M32
Fixing Motor
Web Motor
Core Shutter Motor
Reciprocation Motor
Secondary Transfer Roller Detachment Motor
Registration Motor
Duplex Left Motor
Main Unit
[A] Fixing Unit
[A] Fixing Unit
[A] Fixing Unit
[A] Fixing Unit
[B] Registration Unit
[C] Pre-Fixing Paper Feed Unit
[D] Fixing Feed Unit
4-32
Reference

T-4-21
4-32
4-33
M18
M24
M22
M30
M20
M19
M25
[A]
M23
M21
[B]
[F]
[A]
[F]
[B]
M36
[E]
[E]
[C]
M40
M43
[C]
[D]
M39
M41
M44
M42
M45
[D]
F-4-19
4-33
4
No.
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M30
M36
M39
M40
M41
M42
M43
M44
M45
Name
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Bk)
Drum Motor (Bk)
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Y)
Drum Motor (Y)
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (M)
Drum Motor (M)
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (C)
Drum Motor (C)
Drum Cleaning and Waste Toner Feed Drive Motor
Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor
4-34
Main Unit
[A] Drum Drive Unit (Bk)

[B] Process Drive Unit (Y)
[B] Process Drive Unit (Y)
[B] Process Drive Unit (M)
[B] Process Drive Unit (M)
[B] Process Drive Unit (C)
[B] Process Drive Unit (C)
[F] Multi Pickup Drive Unit
[C] Vertical Path Drive Unit
[E] Deck Drive Unit
[E] Deck Drive Unit
[D] Cassette Drive Unit
[D] Caseette Drive Unit
Reference
-

T-4-22
4-34
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Fan
4-35
List of Fan
FM3
FM22
FM2
FM18
FM4
FM19
FM5
FM20
FM1
FM6
FM9
FM7
FM8
F-4-20
4-35
No.
FM1
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
FM6
FM7
FM8
FM9
FM18
FM19
FM20
FM22
Name
Color Cleaning Fan
Fixing Heat Fan
IH Power Supply Fan
Power Supply Fan 1
Power Supply Fan 2
Hopper Cooling Fan
4-36
Main Unit
Reference
-

T-4-23
4-36
4-37
FM16
FM27
[B]
FM15
[A]
[A]
[B]
FM10
FM23
FM12
FM24
FM11
FM13
F-4-21
4-37
4
No.
FM10
FM11
FM12
FM13
FM23
FM24
FM15
FM16
FM27
Name
Delivery Heat Fan 1
Delivery Heat Fan 2
Delivery Heat Fan 3
Delivery Heat Fan 4
Anti-adhesion Fan 1
Anti-adhesion Fan 2
Main Unit
[B] Pre-Fixing Paper Feed Unit
4-38
Reference

T-4-24
4-38
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-39
List of Sensor
PS112
TS9
PS41
PS42
PS43
PS46
PS45
PS80
PS44
PS48
PS47
PS35
F-4-22
4-39
4
No.
PS35
PS41
PS42
PS43
PS44
PS45
PS46
PS47
PS48
PS80
PS112
TS9
Name
Front Cover Sensor
Waste Toner Battele Set Sensor
Waste Toner Full Sensor
Main Unit
4-40
Reference

T-4-25
4-40
4-41
[A]
PS97
PS96
PS100
PS29
PS30
PS99
PS28
PS90
PS70
PS102
PS75
PS95
PS98
PS73
PS91
PS94
PS23
PS22
PS110
[B]
[C]
[D]
[B]
PS27
[C]
PS26
[A]
[D]
PS25
PS24
F-4-23
4-41
4
No.
PS70
PS73
PS75
PS98
PS99
PS100
PS102
PS110
PS22
PS23
PS28
PS29
PS30
PS90
PS91
PS94
PS95
PS96
PS97
PS24
PS25
PS26
PS27
Name
Fixing Inlet Sensor
Fixing Pressure Release Sensor
Core HP Sensor
Fixing Uunifiform Roller HP Sensor
Web Level Sensor
Half Pressure Position Sensor
Secondary Transfer Roller Detachment HP Sensor
Registration Sensor
Transparency Sensor
Loop Sensor 1
Loop Sensor 2
Duplex Sensor 1
Duplex Sensor 2
Duplex Sensor 3
Duplex Sensor 4
4-42
Main Unit
[A] Fixing Unit

[A] Fixing Unit
[A] Fixing Unit
[A] Fixing Unit
[A] Fixing Unit
[A] Fixing Unit
[A] Fixing Unit
[A] Fixing Unit
[C] Secondary Transfer Unit
Reference

T-4-26
4-42
PS8
4-43
PS84
[A]
PS9
PS81
PS83
PS17
PS82
PS14
TS5
[D]
[B]
[E]
TS8
TS7
PS11
TS6
[C]
PS7
PS18
PS103
PS15
TS1
PS12
PS16
PS6
(Bk)
PS13
TS4
PS10
PS104
PS93
TS3
(Y) / (M) / (C)
TS2
[G]
PS50
PS52
PS49
[B]
[A]
PS51
[E]
[D]
[C]
PS92
[F]
[G]
PS53
[H]
[F]
PS55
PS56
PS60
PS62
PS59
PS58
PS57
PS54
[H]
[I]
PS61
[I]
PS63
PS65
PS67
PS64
PS66
PS68
F-4-24
4-43
4
No.
PS6
PS7
PS8
PS9
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS13
PS14
PS15
PS16
PS17
PS18
PS81
PS82
PS83
PS84
TS5
TS6
TS7
TS8
PS92
PS93
PS103
PS104
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
PS49
PS50
PS51
PS52
PS53
PS54
PS55
PS56
PS57
PS58
PS59
PS60
PS61
PS62
PS63
PS64
Name
Toner Supply Cover Sensor
Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (Bk)
Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (Bk)
Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (Bk)
Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (Y)
Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (Y)
Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (Y)
Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (M)
Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (M)
Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (M)
Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (C)
Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (C)
Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (C)
Toner Container Phase Sensor (Y)
Toner Container Phase Sensor (M)
Toner Container Phase Sensor (C)
Toner Container Phase Sensor (Bk)
Hopper Toner Level Sensor (Bk)
Hopper Toner Level Sensor (Y)
Hopper Toner Level Sensor (M)
Hopper Toner Level Sensor (C)
Primary Wire HP Sensor
Pre-transfer Charging Wire HP Sensor
Primary Charging Wire Rotation Position Sensor
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Rotary Position Sensor
Toner Density Sensor (Bk)
Toner Density Sensor (Y)
Toner Density Sensor (M)
Toner Density Sensor (C)
4-44
Main Unit
[A] Hopper Unit (Y)

[A] Hopper Unit (Bk)
[A] Hopper Unit (Y)
[A] Hopper Unit (Y)
[A] Hopper Unit (Y)
[A] Hopper Unit (M)
[A] Hopper Unit (M)
[A] Hopper Unit (M)
[A] Hopper Unit (C)
[A] Hopper Unit (C)
[A] Hopper Unit (C)
[A] Hopper Unit (Y)
[A] Hopper Unit (M)
[A] Hopper Unit (C)
[A] Hopper Unit (Y)
[A] Hopper Unit (M)
[A] Hopper Unit (C)
[E] Primary Charging Assembly
[D] Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
[E] Primary Charging Assembly
[D] Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
[B] Drum Unit (Bk)
[C] Process Unit (Y)
[C] Process Unit (M)
[C] Process Unit (C)
[G] Right Deck Pickup Unit
[F] Left Deck Pickup Unit
[H] Cassette 3 Pickup Unit
[I] Cassette 4 Pickup Unit
Reference

-
4-44
4
No.
PS65
PS66
PS67
PS68
Name
4-45
Main Unit

Reference

T-4-27
4-45
4-46
PS20
[B]
[A]
PS21
PS19
PS2
PS5
PS4
PS3
PS38
PS79
PS37
[D]
[C]
PS111
PS101
PS31
PS33
PS32
[B]
PS34
[A]
PS36
PS40
PS39
[D]
[C]
F-4-25
4-46
4
No.
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS19
PS20
PS21
PS37
PS38
PS79
PS31
PS32
PS33
PS34
PS36
PS101
PS111
PS39
PS40
Name
ITB Displacement Sensor
Steering Drive HP Sensor
Primary Transfer Roller Detachment HP Sensor
ITB HP Sensor
Registration Patch Sensor (Rear)
Patch Sensor
Reverse Sensor
Reverse Roller Detachment HP Sensor
Main Unit
[A] ITB Unit
[A] ITB Unit
[A] ITB Unit
[A] ITB Unit
[A] ITB Unit
[A] ITB Unit
[A] ITB Unit
[B] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit
[C] Reverse Delivery Unit
[D] Vertical Path Unit
[D] Vertical Path Unit
4-47
Reference

T-4-28
4-47
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Lamp / Heater, others
4-48
Lamp / Heater, others
THM6
THM5
H6
ENV1
ELB2
ELB1,ELB3
IL1 IL2
F-4-26
4-48
4
No.
H6
ELB1
ELB2
ELB3
IL1
IL2
ENV1
THM5
THM6
Name
Cassette Heater
Leakage Breaker 1 (100V)
Inlet
Inlet
Environment Sensor
Drum Thermopile
Drum Thermistor
Main Unit
Drum Unit (Bk)
Drum Unit (Bk)
4-49
Reference

T-4-29
4-49
4-50
[A]
[B]
H1
LED4
LED3
LED2
[A]
[B]
LED1
[C]
[C]
VR1
[D]
H11
H10
[D]
H4
THM15
THM14
THM13
THM11
THM12
TP2
THM16
F-4-27
4-50
4
No.
H1
LED2
LED3
LED4
H10
H11
LED1
VR1
THM11
THM12
THM13
THM14
THM15
THM16
TP2
H4
Name
Drum Heater (Bk)
Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Y)
Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M)
Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C)
Drum Heater (Y)
Drum Heater (M)
Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk)
ITB Unit Varistor
Main Thermistor
Thermistor (Front)
Sub Thermistor 1
Sub Thermistor 2
Thermistor (Rear)
Pressure RollerThermistor
Fixing Thermal Switch
IH Coil
Main Unit
[A] Drum Unit (Bk)
[B] Process Unit (Y)
[B] Process Unit (M)
[B] Process Unit (C)
[C] ITB Unit
[C] ITB Unit
[C] ITB Unit
[C] ITB Unit
[D] Fixing Unit
[D] Fixing Unit
[D] Fixing Unit
[D] Fixing Unit
[D] Fixing Unit
[D] Fixing Unit
[D] Fixing Unit
[D] Fixing Unit
4-51
Reference


T-4-30
4-51
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Switch
4-52
List of Switch
SW9
SW18
SW10
SW14
SW15
SW7
SW1
SW16 SW2
SW17
SW12
SW13
F-4-28
4-52
4
No.
SW1
SW2
SW7
SW9
SW10
SW12
SW13
SW14
SW15
SW16
SW17
SW18
Name
Front Door Switch 1
Front Door Switch 2
Fixing Feed Unit Switch
Key Switch
Waste Toner Screw Lock Detection Switch
Environment Switch
Main Switch
4-53
Main Unit
Reference
-

T-4-31
4-53
4-54
[B]
SW3
[B]
[A]
[A]
SW5
F-4-29
No.
SW5
SW3
Name
Delivery Door Switch
Multi-purpose Tray Unit Switch
Main Unit
Reference

T-4-32
4-54
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-55
List of PCB
[A]
[A]
UN15
UN14
[B]
UN67
UN66
[B]
F-4-30
No.
UN14
UN15
UN66
UN67
Name
Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y)/(M)
Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (C)/(Bk)
Secondary Transfer High Voltage Contact Resistance
Secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage Contact Resistance
Main Unit
[A] Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)
[A] Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)
[B] Secondary Transfer Unit
[B] Secondary Transfer Unit
Reference

T-4-33
4-55
4-56
UN107
[A]
UN105
[B]
UN103
UN65
UN108
UN101
UN106
UN64
UN63
(Bk)
UN28
UN62
UN104
(C)
UN102
(M)
UN17
UN16
(Y)
[C]
[A]
UN49
UN48
UN5
[B]
[C]
F-4-31
4-56
4
No.
UN101
UN102
UN103
UN104
UN105
UN106
UN107
UN108
UN16
UN17
UN28
UN62
UN63
UN64
UN65
UN5
UN48
UN49
Name
Laser Driver PCB (Y)
BD PCB (Y)
Laser Driver PCB (M)
BD PCB (M)
Laser Driver PCB (C)
BD PCB (C)
Laser Driver PCB (Bk)
BD PCB (Bk)
ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1
ITB Relay PCB
Primary Transfer High Voltage Contact Resistance (Y)
Primary Transfer High Voltage Contact Resistance (M)
Primary Transfer High Voltage Contact Resistance (C)
Primary Transfer High Voltage Contact Resistance (Bk)
Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB
Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage PCB
Main Unit
[B] ITB Unit
[B] ITB Unit
[B] ITB Unitt
[B] ITB Unit
[B] ITB Unit
[B] ITB Unit
[B] ITB Unit
[C] Fixing Feed Unit
4-57
Reference

T-4-34
4-57
4-58
UN201
UN202
UN200
[C]
[A]
UN207
UN205
UN206
UN26
[C]
[B]
[B]
[A]
UN110
UN112
UN111
UN113
F-4-32
4-58
4
No.
UN26
UN110
UN111
UN112
UN113
UN200
UN201
UN202
UN205
UN206
UN207
Name
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB
Ten Key PCB
CPU PCB
Sub Key PCB
Volume PCB
TALLY PCB
CPU PCB
Ten Key PCB
Volume PCB
Sub Key PCB
LED Driver PCB
Main Unit
[A] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit
[B] Flat Control Panel Unit
[C] Upright Control Panel Unit
4-59
Reference

T-4-35
4-59
4-60
UN29
UN6
UN58
UN55
UN57
UN56
UN51
UN39
UN52
UN40
UN61
UN54
UN53
UN4
UN37
UN60
UN50
UN43
UN59
UN33
UN34
UN30
UN80
UN38
UN8,9,10
UN7
UN11,12
UN31
UN35
F-4-33
4-60
4
No.
UN6
UN29
UN51
UN52
UN53
UN54
UN55
UN56
UN57
UN58
UN4
UN7
UN8
UN9
UN10
UN11
UN12
UN30
UN31
UN33
UN34
UN35
UN37
UN38
UN50
UN80
UN39
UN40
UN59
UN60
UN61
UN43
Name
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Potential Control PCB
Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (Bk)
Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (Y)
Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (M)
Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (C)
Developing Toner Collection High Voltage Contact Resistance (Bk)
Developing Toner Collection High Voltage Contact Resistance (Y)
Developing Toner Collection High Voltage Contact Resistance (M)
Developing Toner Collection High Voltage Contact Resistance (C)
Relay PCB
AC Driver PCB (100V)
Drum Heater Driver PCB (100V)
Drum Heater Driver PCB (200V)
IH Power Supply PCB
All-night Power Supply PCB
DC Power Supply PCB (12V)
DC Power Supply PCB (24VA)
Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk)
Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Color)
Pre-primary Transfer Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk)
ECO-ID PCB
Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk)
Developing High Voltage PCB (CL)
Primary Charging High Voltage Contact Resistance (Y)
Primary Charging High Voltage Contact Resistance (M)
Primary Charging High Voltage Contact Resistance (C)
Pre-transfer PCB
4-61
Main Unit
Reference
-

T-4-36
4-61
4-62
UN115
UN83
UN100
UN116
UN2
UN99
F-4-34
4-62
4
No.
UN2
UN83
UN100
UN115
UN116
UN99
Name
DC Controller PCB
Riser PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Power Supply Relay PCB
Main Unit
4-63
Reference
-

T-4-37
4-63
4-64
[A]
[B]
UN19
UN18
UN25
UN24
UN23
UN22
UN21
[A]
UN20
[B]
F-4-35
4-64
4
No.
UN18
UN19
UN20
UN21
UN22
UN23
UN24
UN25
Name
Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1
Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1
Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1
Drum Speed Detection PCB (M )2
Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1
Main Unit
4-65
Reference

T-4-38
4-65
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-66
List of Connectors
24
30
35
37
38
36
27
26
31
25
16
22
8
7
2
1
3 4
15
13
6
18
19 20
28
11
14
34
32
29
33
5
10
17
9
12
23
21
F-4-36
4-66
4
KeyNo.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
13
14
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
20
20
Jack No.
J1200
J1201
J1210
J1211
J1212
J1214
J1220
J1221
J1222
J1223
J1224
J1225
J1226
J1226
J1227
J1227
J1228
J1230
J1231
J1240
J1241
J1242
J1242
J1242
Symbol
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
Name
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
Relay Connector
KeyNo.
21
22
J9002
J9005
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
J8023
J8223
J8227
J3030
31
32
33
J8240
J8010
J8010
J8011
J8011
J8011
J8050
J8050
J8050 J8047
J8050 J8047
J8050
34
35
35
36
37
38
4-67
Jack No.
J1817
J5600
J9007
J9006
J5501
J5502
J1511
J1400
J1805
J1901
J3045
J3051
J3570
J1401
J2700
J2700
J7318
J7319
J7518
Symbol
UN7
UN99
UN80
SW9
UN100
UN100
UN5
UN4
UN7
UN6
UN40
UN38
UN43
UN4
UN28
UN28
UN16
UN17
M3
Name
REMARKS
Relay PCB
RS232C I/F
ECO-ID PCB
Key Switch
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Relay PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Buffer Driver
To finisher
Primary Transfer PCB
Multi Deck
ITB Relay PCB
ITB Relay PCB
ITB Drive Motor
T-4-39
4-67
4-68
18
15
9
10
22
16
13 11
19
12
23
14
8
7
20
21
6
5
17
F-4-37
4-68
4
KeyNo.
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
Jack No.
J1243
J1243
J1243
J1243
J1244
J1244
J1244
J1244
J1244
J1244
J1244
J1244
J1244
J1244
J1245
J1245
J1245
J1245
J1245
J1245
Symbol
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
Name
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
Relay Connector
J8038
J8038
J8038
J8038
J8085
J8085
J8086
J8080
J8093
J8093
J8085
J8085
J8086
J3031
J3031
J3031
J3031
J8087
J8088
J8089
J8117
J8028
J8029
J8030
J8015
J8087
J8088
J8089
J7130
J7131
J7132
J8002
J8002
J8002
J8002
J8002
J8002
J80009
J80009
J80009
J80009
J8009
J8009
J80011
J80011
J80010
J80010
KeyNo.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Jack No.
J7152
J7156
J7157
J7158
J7133
J7134
J7135
J7146
J7533
J7534
J7547
J7548
J7549
J8094
J10021
J10022
J10023
J10024
J7147
J7148
4-69
Symbol
M29
M28
M27
M26
TS2
TS3
TS4
TS1
UN14
UN15
LED2
LED3
LED4
PS80
PS92
PS103
PS93
PS104
M1
M2
Name
REMARKS

Toner Density Sensor (Y)
Toner Density Sensor (M)
Toner Density Sensor (C)
Toner Density Sensor (Bk)
Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y)/(M)
Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (C)/(Bk)
Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Y)
Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M)
Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C)
Front Cover Sensor
Primary Charging Wire HP Sensor
Primary Charging Wire Rotary Position Sensor
Pre-transfer Charging Wire HP Sensor
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Rotary Position Sensor
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
T-4-40
4-69
4-70
21
29
28
30
22
23
14
13
35
16
34
18
33
26
24
11
12
19
15
20
17
31
27
25
10
8
9
36
1
3
F-4-38
4-70
4
KeyNo.
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
Jack No.
J1246
J1246
J1246
J1246
J1246
J1247
J1247
J1247
J1247
J1247
J1247
J1247
J1247
J1247
J1247
J1248
J1248
J1248
J1248
J1248
J1248
J1248
J1248
J1248
J1248
J1248
J1249
J1249
J1249
J1249
J1251
Symbol
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
Name
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
Relay Connector
J8107
J8106
J8106
J8107
J8106
J8106
J8107
J8107
J8106
J8107
J8040
J8108
J8040
J8108
J8108
J8108
J8040
J8040
J8040
J8040
J8108
J7197
J7198
J7199
J7105
J7104
J7100
J7101
J7103
J7102
J7107
J7106
J7135
KeyNo.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
4-71
Jack No.
J7122
J7125
J7128
J7137
J7138
J10031
J7100
J7104
J7105
J7121
J7123
J7124
J7126
J7418
J7419
J10025
J10026
J10028
J10033
J7127
J7129
J7136
J7139
J71750
J7417
J7420
J7111
J71970
J71980
J71990
J7520
Symbol
PS10
PS13
PS16
PS6
PS7
M12
M9
M10
M13
TS6
PS81
TS7
PS82
PS12
PS15
M7
M16
M6
M15
TS8
PS83
TS5
PS84
PS8
PS9
PS18
FM3
PS17
PS14
PS11
FM6
Name
REMARKS
Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (Y)

Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (M)
Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (C)
Toner Supply Cover Sensor
Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (Bk)
Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (M)
Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (Y)
Toner Container Drive Motor (Y)
Toner Container Drive Motor (M)
Hopper Toner Level Sensor (Y)
Toner Container Phase Sensor (Y)
Hopper Toner Level Sensor (M)
Toner Container Phase Sensor (M)
Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (Y)
Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (M)
Toner Container Drive Motor (Bk)
Toner Container Drive Motor (C)
Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (Bk)
Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (C)
Hopper Toner Level Sensor (C)
Toner Container Phase Sensor (C)
Hopper Toner Level Sensor (Bk)
Toner Container Phase Sensor (Bk)
Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (Bk)
Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (Bk)
Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (C)
Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (C)
Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (M)
Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (Y)
Fixing Heat Fan
T-4-41
4-71
4-72
29
17
42
8
25
10
28
26
20
24
27
21
11
22
13 15 12
16
37
44
43
32
39
40
23
14
38
18
19
41
30
31
34
35
3
1
6
33
36
F-4-39
4-72
4
KeyNo.
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Jack No.
J1402
J1402
J1402
J1402
J1403
J1403
J1403
J1403
J1403
J1403
J1404
J1404
J1404
J1404
J1404
J1404
J1405
J1405
J1405
J1405
J1405
J1406
J1406
J1406
J1407
J1407
J1407
J1407
J1407
J1408
J1408
J1408
J1408
J1408
J1408
J1408
J1408
Symbol
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
Name
Relay Connector
J8144
J8144
J8146
J8146
J8063
J8063
J8063
J8063
J8063
J8063
J8141
J8043
J8141
J8141
J8043
J8043
J8062 J7000
J8062 J7002
J8062
J8062
J8062 J8036
J7001
J7527
J8060
J8060
J8060
J8060
J8060
J8060
J8060
J8060
J8113
J8105
J8105
J8113
J8113 J8114
J8113 J8114
KeyNo.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
4-73
Jack No.
J7033
J7034
J7035
J7036
J7060
J7061
J7062
J7063
J7064
J7065
J7019
J7021
J7038
J7039
J7040
J7041
J7000
J7002
J7008
J7030
J7540
J8116
J7001
J7527
J7003
J7004
J7005
J7006
J7007
J7023
J7024
J7025
J7026
J7028
J7029
J7161
J7541
Symbol
PS41
PS42
PS43
PS44
PS54
PS55
PS56
PS57
PS58
SL6
SW14
SW16
PS45
PS46
PS47
PS48
M38
M37
PS101
M54
PS111
SW10
M36
M39
M31
M42
M43
M44
M45
PS31
PS32
PS33
PS34
PS36
SL2
FM10
FM11
Name
REMARKS

Reverse Motor
Delivery Motor
Reverse Roller HP Sensor
Outer Delivery OHP Sensor
Waste Toner Screw Lock Detection Switch
Secondary Transfer Roller Detachment Motor
Reverse Sensor
Delivery Heat Fan 1
Delivery Heat Fan 2
T-4-42
4-73
4-74
22
20
19
21
15
14
41
16
26
27
30
31
33
34
32
37
13
28
47
29
36
40
23
38
18
43
17
25
39
44
48
35
46
24
42
49
50
2
11
10
3
12
8
9
45
F-4-40
4-74
4
KeyNo.
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
10
11
11
12
12
Jack No.
J1409
J1409
J1409
J1409
J1409
J1409
J1410
J1410
J1410
J1410
J1411
J1411
J1412
J1412
J1412
J1412
J1412
J1412
J1414
J1414
J1414
J1414
J1415
J1416
J1416
J1416
J1416
J1416
J1416
J1417
J1417
J1417
J1450
J1460
J1470
J1470
J1499
J1499
Symbol
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
Name
Relay Connector
J2633
J2633
J2633
J2633
J2633
J2633
J8059
J8059
J8059
J8059
J8055
J8055
J2635
J2635
J2635
J2635
J2635
J2635
J8104
J8104
J8104
J8104
J8023
J2636
J2636
J2636
J2636
J2636
J2636
J8090
J8061
J8061
J8000
J898
J899
J7525
J7526
J8110
J8110
J8244
J8244
J8068
J8075
KeyNo.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
4-75
Jack No.
J7054
J7055
J7056
J7057
J7058
J7059
J7015
J7016
J7017
J7018
J7020
J7022
J7042
J7043
J7044
J7045
J7046
J7047
J7542
J7543
J7545
J7546
J1510
J7048
J7049
J7050
J7051
J7052
J7053
J7027
J7031
J7037
J1821
J7108
J8981
J8980
J7525
J7526
Symbol
PS49
PS50
PS51
PS52
PS53
SL5
PS37
PS38
SL4
UN26
SW15
SW17
PS59
PS60
PS61
PS62
PS63
SL7
FM12
FM13
FM23
FM24
UN5
PS64
PS65
PS66
PS67
PS68
SL8
PS35
PS39
PS40
UN7
ENV1
TS9
PS112
M40
M41
Name
REMARKS

Delivery Heat Fan 3
Delivery Heat Fan 4
Anti-adhesion Fan 1
Anti-adhesion Fan 2
Relay PCB
Environment Sensor
Waste Toner Full Sensor
T-4-43
4-75
44 43
46
47
16
28
17
18
23
36
48
29
27
22
21
42
4-76
40
41
39
13
20
38
32
45
34
24
11
35
10
12
8
9
30
19
15
26
25
14
33
37
31
F-4-41
4-76
4
KeyNo.
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
5
6
6
6
7
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
Jack No.
J1500
J1501
J1501
J1501
J1501
J1501
J1501
J1502
J1502
J1502
J1502
J1503
J1503
J1504
J1505
J1505
J1505
J1506
J1507
J1508
J1508
J1508
J1508
J1508
J1508
J1508
J1509
J1509
J1512
J1512
J1512
J1512
J1513
J1513
J1513
J1513
Symbol
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
Name
Relay Connector
J8098
J8142
J7202
J8102
J8102
J8102
J8102
J8037
J8037
J8033
J8091
J8092
J18138
J18004
J18004
J18138
J18004
J18004
J18006
J18006
J18006
J18006
J8023
KeyNo.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
4-77
Jack No.
J1816
J7200
J7201
J7208
J7209
J7210
J17205
J7214
J7215
J17224
J17225
J7230
J7236
J7235
J7211
J7212
J7213
J7203
J7217
J8101
J17206
J17218
J17220
J17229
J18007
J18033
J3062
J3540
J18
J19
J20
J21
J8039
J10011
J17219
J17223
Symbol
UN7
M32
M35
PS25
PS26
PS27
M57
PS22
PS23
PS90
PS91
FM15
FM27
FM16
PS28
PS29
PS30
M34
M48
PS24
M56
PS98
PS73
PS75
M55
PS110
UN48
UN49
PS94
PS95
PS96
PS97
THM16
PS100
PS99
PS70
Name
REMARKS
Relay PCB
Duplex Left Motor
Duplex Sensor 2
Duplex Sensor 3
Duplex Sensor 4
Reciprocation Motor
Secondary Transfer Roller Detachment HP Sensor
Loop Sensor 1
Loop Sensor 2
Registration Sensor
Transparency Sensor
Registration Motor
Fixing Motor
Duplex Sensor 1
Core Shutter Motor
Core HP Sensor
Fixing Pressure Release Sensor
Web Motor
Half Pressure Position Sensor
Pressure Roller Thermistor
Fixing Uunifiform Roller HP Sensor
Fixing Inlet Sensor
T-4-44
4-77
4-78
43
32
11
29
8
39
1
10
33
34
37
28
36
30
31
40
42
41
38
44
35
23
27
21
26
15
17
24
19
25
20
14
22
16
13
18
12
F-4-42
4-78
4
KeyNo.
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
4
4
4
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
Jack No.
J1900
J1902
J1902
J1902
J1902
J1902
J1902
J1903
J1904
J1904
J1904
J1905
J1905
J1906
J1906
J1906
J1907
J1907
J1907
J1907
J1907
J1907
J1907
J1908
J1908
J1908
J1909
J1910
J1910
J1910
J1910
J1910
J1914
J1914
Symbol
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
Name
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Relay Connector
J8019
J8020
J8020
J8020
J8019
J8019
J8021
J8021
J8021
J8034
J8034
J8034
J8035
J8035
J8035
J8035
J8035
J8035
J8035
J8017
J8017
J8176
J7159
J7408
J7410
J8133
KeyNo.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
J7515
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
4-79
Jack No.
J1815
J7300
J7302
J7314
J7315
J7316
J7317
J7306
J7304
J7312
J7313
J7310
J7311
J7535
J7536
J7537
J7140
J7142
J7408
J7409
J7410
J7411
J7412
J3530
J7032
J7109
J7112
J7116
J7149
J7160
J7231
J7538
J7539
Symbol
UN7
M21
M23
UN22
UN23
UN20
UN21
M19
M25
UN24
UN25
UN18
UN19
M20
M22
M24
SL1
LED1
PS19
PS19
PS20
PS20
PS21
UN29
PS79
FM2
FM5
FM18
FM4
FM1
FM22
M18
M30
Name
REMARKS
Relay PCB
Drum Motor (Y)
Drum Motor (M)
Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1
Drum Speed Detection PCB (M )2
Drum Motor (Bk)
Drum Motor (C)
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Y)
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (M)
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (C)
Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk)
Patch Sensor
To Paper Deck
Color Cleaning Fan
Hopper Cooling Fan
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Bk)
Drum Cleaning and Waste Toner Feed Drive Motor
T-4-45
4-79
4-80
18
19
23
20
22
21
3
30
5
9
6
4
F-4-43
4-80
4-81
46
33
28
24
45
25
39
26
43
44
40
31
32
34
29
27
37
35
38
41
42
13
8
11
16
36
7
14
12
15
17
10
F-4-44
4-81
4
KeyNo.
1
2
3
4
5
5
5
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
13
13
14
15
16
16
17
17
17
Jack No.
J1801
J1802
J1803
J1804
J1807
J1807
J1807
J1809
J1809
J1810
J1810
J1810
J1810
J1810
J1810
J1811
J1811
J1811
J1811
J1812
J1813
J1813
J1813
J1813
J1813
J1814
J1814
J1814
J1814
J1815
J1816
J1816
J1819
J1821
J1830
J1830
J1850
J1850
J1850
Symbol
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
UN7
Name
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay Connector
J8170
J8170
J8170
J8170
J8170
J8170
J8001
J8001
J8001
J8001
J8001
J8001 J7499
J1821 J8103 J8082

J1821 J8103 J8082
J1821
J8005
J8122 J8001 J8025
J8238
J8165
J8165
J8024
J8207
J8205
J8184 J7515
J8023 J8099
J8023 J8099
J8239
J8229
J8235
J8235
J8234
KeyNo. Jack No.

18
19
20
21
22
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
25
26
27
28
46
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
J201
J202A
J202B
J691
J811
J811
J811
J2202
J2202
J7404
J7404
J8003
J8003
J8003
J180330
J104
J1002
J1001
J9001
J501
J8237
J8057
J1012
J18230
J3011
J3021
J3041
J3545
J3541
J7612
J7400
J7401
J8236
J8236
J8056
Symbol
UN33
UN34
UN35
UN31
UN8
UN9
UN10
UN11
UN12
THM11
THM12
THM13
THM14
THM15
PS102
UN83
UN111
UN201
UN30
TP2
SW5
SW7
SW18
SL9
UN37
UN38
UN40
UN50
UN49
M48
FM9
FM8
SW1
SW2
SW3
4-82
Name
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
Drum Heater Driver PCB
Main Thermistor
Front Thermistor
Sub Thermistor 1
Sub Thermistor 2
Rear Thermistor
Web Level Sensor
Riser PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
USB Device Port
IH Power Supply PCB
Fixing Thermal Switch
Main Switch
Remote Shutdown Solenoid
To Paper Deck
Fixing Motor
To Color Image Reader
Buffer Driver
Power Supply Fan 2
Power Supply Fan 1
Front Door Switch 1
Front Door Switch 2
Multi-purpose Tray Unit Switch
REMARKS
100V
120V
200V
100/120V
200V

[A] Upright Control Panel Unit
T-4-46
4-82
14
4-83
13
15
10
18
19
17
4
5
3
8
12
2
20
16
11
21
22
F-4-45
4-83
4
KeyNo.
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
5
6
7
7
8
8
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
5
6
7
7
8
8
8
9
10
12
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
5
6
7
Jack No.
J801
J803
J803
J805
J805
J806
J808
J808
J809
J812
J812
J813
J813
J813
J814
J815
J816
J820
J801
J803
J803
J805
J805
J806
J808
J808
J809
J812
J812
J813
J813
J813
J814
J815
J820
J801
J803
J803
J805
J805
J806
J808
J808
J809
J812
Symbol
UN8
UN8
UN8
UN8
UN8
UN8
UN8
UN8
UN8
UN8
UN8
UN8
UN8
UN8
UN8
UN8
UN8
UN8
UN9
UN9
UN9
UN9
UN9
UN9
UN9
UN9
UN9
UN9
UN9
UN9
UN9
UN9
UN9
UN9
UN9
UN10
UN10
UN10
UN10
UN10
UN10
UN10
UN10
UN10
UN10
Name
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
Relay Connector
4-84
KeyNo.
J8083 J8084
J8083 J8084
13
14
J8126
J8079 J8081
J8109 J8233
15
J8120
J8123
J8129
J8129
J8129
16
17
J8228
J8190
J8191
J8192
18
19
20
21
21
22
J8083 J8084
J8083 J8084
13
14
J8126
J8079 J8081
J8109 J8233
15
J8120
J8123
J8129
J8129
J8129
16
17
J8228
J8190
J8191
J8192
18
19
20
21
21
22
J8083 J8084
J8083 J8084
13
14
J8126
J8079 J8081
J8109 J8233
15
J8120
16
17
Jack No.
J7
J601
J8130
J500
J503
J101A
J102A
J102B
J2200
J2200
J681
J7
J601
J8130
J500
J503
J101A
J102A
J102B
J2200
J2200
J681
J7
J601
J8130
J500
J503
Symbol
ELB1
SW12
SW13
H6
UN30
UN30
UN33
UN34
UN35
UN11
UN11
ELB1
UN31
ELB2
SW12
SW13
H6
UN30
UN30
UN33
UN34
UN35
UN11
UN11
UN31
ELB3
SW12
SW13
H6
UN30
UN30
Name
Leakage Breaker 1
Modular PCB (1 line)
Environment Switch
Cassette Heater
To Deck Heater
IH Power Supply PCB
IH Power Supply PCB
To finisher
Leakage Breaker 1
Leakage Breaker 2
Environment Switch
Cassette Heater
To Deck Heater
IH Power Supply PCB
IH Power Supply PCB
To finisher
Leakage Breaker 3
Environment Switch
Cassette Heater
To Deck Heater
IH Power Supply PCB
IH Power Supply PCB
REMARKS
100V
100V
100V
100V
100V
100V
100V
100V
100V
100V
100V
100V
100V
100V
100V
100V
100V ONLY
100V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
120V
200V
200V
200V
200V
200V
200V
200V
200V
200V
200V
4-84
4
KeyNo.
7
8
8
8
9
10
12
Jack No.
J812
J813
J813
J813
J814
J815
J820
Symbol
UN10
UN10
UN10
UN10
UN10
UN10
UN10
Name
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
Relay Connector
J8123
J8129
J8129
J8129
J8228
J8190
J8191
J8192
4-85
KeyNo.
18
19
20
21
21
22
Jack No.
J101A
J102A
J102B
J2200
J2200
J681
Symbol
UN33
UN34
UN35
UN12
UN12
UN31
Name
To finisher
REMARKS
200V
200V
200V
200V
200V
200V
200V
T-4-47
4-85
4-86
20
25
18
19
26
17
23
6
7
21
22
24
27
12
11
29
13
28
9
10
15
14
16
2
1
3
F-4-46
4-86
4
KeyNo.
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Jack No.
J2201
J2201
J2204
J2204
J2204
J2204
J2202
J2202
J2202
J2202
J2202
J2202
J2701
J2701
J2701
J2701
J2702
J2703
J2704
J3531
J510
J510
J521
J3010
J3012
J3022
J3050
J3322
J3522
Symbol
UN11
UN12
UN11
UN12
UN11
UN12
UN11
UN12
UN11
UN12
UN11
UN12
UN28
UN28
UN28
UN28
UN28
UN28
UN28
UN29
UN30
UN30
UN30
UN37
UN37
UN38
UN38
UN38
UN38
Name
ITB Relay PCB
ITB Relay PCB
ITB Relay PCB
ITB Relay PCB
ITB Relay PCB
ITB Relay PCB
ITB Relay PCB
IH Power Supply PCB
IH Power Supply PCB
IH Power Supply PCB
Relay Connector
J8111
J8111
J8189
J8189
J8189
J8189
J8018
J8018
J8018
J8018
J8018
J8018
J8050
J8050
J8050
J8050
J8058
J8058
J8058
J8058
J80110 J8050
J80110 J8050
J7114
J8044
J8045
J8046
4-87
KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
J8026
J8027
28
14
29
J8051
J8051
J8052
J8052
J7519
J7519
J8032
J8032
J7113
J7114
J7414
J7416
J7415
J7528
J8073
J7403
J3050
J3544
-
H1
H1
H10
H10
H11
H11
THM5
THM5
THM6
THM6
PS4
M5
M4
PS3
PS2
PS5
H4
H4
FM7
UN38
UN59
UN50
UN60
UN61
Name
Drum Heater (Bk)
Drum Heater (Bk)
Drum Heater (Y)
Drum Heater (Y)
Drum Heater (M)
Drum Heater (M)
Drum Thermopile
Drum Thermopile
Drum Thermistor
Drum Thermistor
Primary Transfer Roller Detachment HP Sensor
Steering Drive HP Sensor
ITB HP Sensor
Potential Sensor
IH Coil
IH Coil
IH Power Supply Fan
Primary Charging High Voltage Contact Resistance (Y)
Primary Charging High Voltage Contact Resistance (M)
Primary Charging High Voltage Contact Resistance (C)
REMARKS
100/120V
200V
100/120V
200V
100/120V
200V
100/120V
200V
100/120V
200V
100/120V
200V
T-4-48
4-87
2
12
11
14
26
13
28
16
4-88
5
15
4
18
17
8
[A]
62
56 54
60
57
9
61
64
59
65
55
58
63
[A]
10
31
29
37
30
45
32
41
44
33
40
47
43
46
42
39
36
[B]
38
34
35
[B]
7
27
23
51
49
20
21
50
48
25
19
52
22
53
24
F-4-47
4-88
4
Name
1
2
J3040
J3044
UN39
UN39

J3042
UN40
J3342
UN40
J3542
4-89
Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol
Name
26
J3046
-
UN40
UN55
J8135
UN56
J8136
UN57
UN40
J8137
UN58
UN48
J8042
UN66
J3061
UN48
J3541
UN49
J35420
UN49
UN67
J35470
UN50
J35480
UN50
Post-charging transformer
UN51
Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High

J8042
Voltage PCB
Pre-primary Transfer Charging High Voltage PCB J3547
(Bk)
Pre-primary Transfer Charging High Voltage PCB
(Bk)
Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (Bk) J8134

Developing Toner Collection High Voltage
Contact Resistance (Bk)
Contact Resistance (Y)
Contact Resistance (M)
Contact Resistance (C)
Secondary Transfer High Voltage Contact
Resistance
Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination
High Voltage PCB
Secondary Transfer Static Elimination High
Voltage Contact Resistance
Post-charging transformer
UN55
UN52
Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (Y)
UN56
UN53
Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (M)
UN57
UN54
Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (C)
UN58
J5601
J5505
J5506
J5507
J5508
J5509
J5509
J5509
J5509
J5510
J5510
J5510
J5510
J5511
J5511
J5511
J5511
J5512
J5512
UN99
UN100
UN100
UN100
UN100
UN100
UN100
UN100
UN100
UN100
UN100
UN100
UN100
UN100
UN100
UN100
UN100
UN100
UN100

Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Interface PCB
J5500
J5100Y
J5100M
J5100C
J5100K
J5101Y
J7530Y
J7531Y
J7532Y
J5101M
J7530M
J7531M
J7532M
J5101C
J7530C
J7531C
J7532C
J5101K
J7530K
UN100
UN101
UN103
UN105
UN107
UN101
UN102
M84
M80
UN103
UN104
M85
M81
UN105
UN106
M86
M82
UN107
UN108

Laser Interface PCB
BD PCB (Y)
Skew Correction Motor (Y)
Laser Scanner Motor (Y)
BD PCB (M)
Skew Correction Motor (M)
Laser Scanner Motor (M)
BD PCB (C)
Skew Correction Motor (C)
Laser Scanner Motor (C)
BD PCB (Bk)
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
27
J8070
J8070
J8070
J8076
J8076
J8076
J8064
J8064
J8064
J8066
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
REMARKS
4-89

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
54
54
55
56
57
58
59
59
J5512
J2
J3001
J3002
J1003
J1005
J1007
J4002
UN201
UN201
UN201
UN201
UN201
UN201
UN201
UN201
-
UN100
UN109
UN110
UN110
UN111
UN111
UN111
UN112
J1002
J1002
J1003
J1004
J1005
J1007
J1008
J1008
-
Name
Laser Interface PCB
LCD
Ten Key PCB
Ten Key PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
Sub Key PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
LCD
4-90
Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol

J8066
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
60
61
62
63
64
65
J7532K
J1006
J1009
J1008
J4001
J1
J5001
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J501
J502
M83
UN111
UN111
UN111
UN112
UN113
UN200
UN206
UN202
UN205
UN207
UN207
Name
Laser Scanner Motor (Bk)
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
Ten Key PCB
Transparent touch panel
LCD
Volume PCB
TALLY PCB
Sub Key PCB
Transparent touch panel
Ten Key PCB
LCD
Volume PCB
LED Driver PCB
LED Driver PCB
REMARKS
T-4-49
4-90
4-91
15
16
11
13
9
20
14
5
16
12
8
10
24
23
21
19
18
17
22
25
F-4-48
4-91
4
KeyNo.
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
16
16
17
18
18
18
19
20
21
22
Jack No.
J101
J103
J105
J105
J107
J107
J108
J111
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J11
J13
J13
J15
J15
J19
J20
J20
J20
J21
J22
J40
J1025
Symbol
UN83
UN83
UN83
UN83
UN83
UN83
UN83
UN83
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
UN115
Name
Relay Connector
Riser PCB
Riser PCB
Riser PCB
Riser PCB
Riser PCB
Riser PCB
Riser PCB
Riser PCB
4-92
KeyNo.
23
24
25
Jack No.
J14
J17
J7544
-
Symbol
UN116
UN115
HDD0
HDD1
HDD0
HDD1
FM20
FM19
-
Name
Standard HDD
Removable HDD
Standard HDD
Removable HDD
CPU
USB(H)
DEVICE PORT HUB
ETHERNET
TOPAZ
SATA FLASH
VOICE GUIDANCE
VOICE OPERATION
DEBUG SERIAL1
CPLD WR
CARD READER IF KIT
RS-CONV
COIN VENDER
CC-VI I/F CABLE
POSTPONE I/F
USB(H)
YON-RISER
REMARKS
OPTION
OPTION B
OPTION A
OPTION A
OPTION B
OPTION C
OPTION
OPTION
T-4-50
4-92
4-93
28
11
12
10
2
9
8
7
4
6 5
15
26
16
23
18
30
25
17
29
27
13
22
14
24
31,32
19,20,21
32
F-4-49
4-93
4
KeyNo.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
18
19
20
21
Jack No.
J13
J15
J16
J17
J18
J20
J21
J23
J24
J1000
J1010
J1010
J3003
J103
J104
J105
J106
J107
J109
J109
J204
J802
J804
-
Symbol
UN116
UN116
UN116
UN116
UN116
UN116
UN116
UN116
UN116
UN116
UN116
UN116
UN116
-
Name
G3 FAX PCB
G3 FAX PCB
G3 FAX PCB
G3 FAX PCB
G3 FAX PCB
G3 FAX PCB
G3 FAX PCB
G3 FAX Control PCB
G3 FAX Control PCB
G3 FAX Control PCB
Relay Connector
4-94
KeyNo.
22
23
J8132
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
32
Jack No.
J403
J8
J4
J303
J301
J208
J2121
J205
J302
J604
J504
J504
-
Symbol
SP1
-
Name
DDR2 DIMM (512MB)
USB(D)
G3 FAX Control PCB
G3 FAX PCB
FRAM COUNTER
JTAG
ICE
DEBUG SERIAL
DEBUSSY-A
MINERVA
GIOVANNI-A
EFI CONTROLLER
Reader Controller PCB
Pseudo CI PCB
Pseudo CI PCB
G3 FAX Control PCB
Speaker
G3 FAX Control PCB
Pseudo CI PCB
HANDSET-G2
REMARKS
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
T-4-51
4-94
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Flat Control Panel > Procedure (Copier Model)
Main Controller System
4-95
2) Remove the Control Panel Right Cover [1].

1 Screw [2]
Removing the Flat Control Panel
[2]
Preparation (Copier Model)

1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover(Refer to page 4-339).
3) Close the Front Cover.
4) Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-341).
5) Close the Multi-purpose Tray Cover.
6) Remove the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
[1]
Procedure (Copier Model)

1) Remove the Upper Right Cover 2 [1].
F-4-51
1 Screw [2]
3) Remove the Control Panel Left Cover [1].
2 Protrusions [3]
2 Screws [2]
[1]
[1]
x2
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
F-4-50
F-4-52
4-95
4) Move the Control Panel Plate [1].
4-96
6) Free the Control Panel Cable [1] and the Power Supply Cable [2] from the Edge Saddle [3]
1 Screw [2]
and the Wire Saddle [4], and disconnect the connector [5] of the Power Supply Cable.
[3]
[1]
[1]
x2
[4]
[2]
[5]
[2]
F-4-55
F-4-53
5) Remove the 4 screws [2] securing the Flat Control Panel [1], and move the Flat Control
Panel aside. (The removed screws will be used when installing the Upper Front Cover
(Middle).)
7) Lift up the Flat Control Panel [1] in the direction of the arrow, and disconnect the Control
Panel Cable [2].
1 Wire Saddle [3]
1 Connector [4]
[2]
[1]
x4
[4]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-4-54
F-4-56
4-96
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Flat Control Panel > Procedure (Printer Model)
4-97
Preparation (Printer Model)
8) Disconnect the USB Cable [1].

2 Screws [2]
9) Free the cable from the USB Cable Guide [A], and remove the Flat Control Panel [3].

3) Remove the Box Right Cover (Refer to page 4-342).
4) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
x2
[3]
[2]
Procedure (Printer Model)

1 Screw [2]
2 Protrusions [3]
[1]
[A]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-57
[2]
[3]
F-4-58
4-97
2) Free the Control Panel Cable [2] and the Power Supply Cable [3] from the 3 Wire Saddles
[1].
4-98
4) Open the Upper Front Cover [1].

5) Remove the Control Panel Right Cover [2].
1 Screw [3]
NOTE:
This step is for allowing extra cable to make it easier to remove the Printer Cover.
[3]
[2]
x3
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
F-4-59
F-4-61
3) Remove the Printer Cover [1].
6) Remove the Control Panel Left Cover [1].
4 Screws [2]
2 Screws [2]
[1]
[1]
x4
x2
[2]
[2]
F-4-60
F-4-62
4-98
7) Remove the 4 screws [2] of the Flat Control Panel [1].
4-99
9) Lift up the Flat Control Panel [1] in the direction of the arrow, and disconnect the Control
[2]
Panel Cable [2].
[2]
1 Wire Saddle [3]

1 Connector [4]
x4
[1]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-63
8) Free the Control Panel Cable [1] and the Power Supply Cable [2] from the Edge Saddle [3]
and the Wire Saddle [4], and disconnect the connector [5].
F-4-65
10) Disconnect the USB Cable [1].
[3]
[5]
2 Screws [2]
x2
11) Free the cable from the USB Cable Guide [A], and remove the Flat Control Panel [3].
[4]
[3]
x2
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-64
[A]
[1]
[2]
F-4-66
4-99
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Upright Control Panel > Procedure
Removing the Upright Control Panel
4-100
[1]
Procedure
[B]
1) Remove the Joint Cover R [1].

2 Rubber Caps [2]
2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8) [3]
CAUTION:
When assembling, be sure to pass the Power Supply Cable [4] through the groove [A]
of the Joint Cover R.
[1]
[2]
F-4-68
[3]
3) Disconnect the Control Panel Cable [1].
x2
1 Connector [2]
1 Reuse Band [3]
CAUTION:
[2]
When assembling, pay attention to the following points.

Do not route the Control Panel Cable clockwise.
After the cable has been secured, cut off the excess length of the Reuse Band.
[A]
[4]
Be sure to store the slack [A] of the Control Panel Cable inside the cover.
[3]
F-4-67
2) Remove the Joint Cover L [1].
[3]
[1]
CAUTION:
When assembling, be sure to pass the Control Panel Cable [2] through the groove [B]
of the Joint Cover L.
[A]
[2]
F-4-69
4-100
4-101
4) Disconnect the Power Supply Cable [1].
5) Remove the Upright Control Panel [1].
1 Connector [2]
4 Screws (TP; M4x8) [2]
1 Screw (TP; M4x8) [3]
2 Protrusions [3]
1 Cable Clamp [4]
2 Bosses [4]
1 Reuse Band [5]

NOTE:
When installing, be sure to tighten the screws from the upper part.
CAUTION:
When installing, pay attention to the following points.
[1]
Do not route the Power Supply Cable clockwise.
[3]
[4]
When routing the Power Supply Cable, put the cable below the Cable Clamp inside
the black guide.
[4]
x4
[4]
[3]
[2]
[2]
F-4-71
CAUTION:
[5]
When installing, be sure that the Flexible Cable [2] is not trapped by the Panel Base [1].
[1]
F-4-70
[2]
[1]
F-4-72
4-101
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Upright Control Panel Arm Unit > Procedure
Removing the Upright Control Panel Arm Unit

Preparation
4-102

1 Screw [2]

[1]

Procedure
1) Remove the Base Cover (Front) [1] and the Base Cover (Rear) [2].
2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8) [3]
[2]
x2
F-4-74
3) Disconnect the Control Panel Cable [1].

8 Wire Saddles [2]
1 Edge Saddle [3]
2 Reuse Bands [4]
1 Connector [5]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
x11
[3]
F-4-73
[1]
[2]
[4]
[2]
[4]
[5]
F-4-75
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Upright Control Panel Arm Unit > Procedure
4-102
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the HDD > Procedure
4-103
Removing the HDD

1 Wire Saddle [2]
Procedure
1 Screw [3]
1 Cable Clamp [4]
1) Push the [A] part to open the HDD Cover.
1 Connector [5]
[3]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[A]
x2
[4]
F-4-78
F-4-76
5) Remove the Upright Arm [1] from the Frame Base [2].
1 Screw
2 Screws [3]
x2
2) Open the HDD Cap.
[1]
[3]
F-4-79
[2]
F-4-77
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the HDD > Procedure
4-103
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 > Disassembling Procedure
4-104
Removing the Main Controller PCB 1
3) Turn the HDD Fixation Plate toward the front.

1 Screw
Preparation
Disassembling Procedure
1) Disconnect the USB Cable [1] and the Control Panel Cable [2].
x2
[1]
F-4-80
4) Remove the HDD.
[2]
2 Connectors
x2
F-4-82
2) Remove the 2 screws [1].
x2
F-4-81
[1]
F-4-83
4-104
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 > Assembling Procedure
4-105
Assembling Procedure
CAUTION:
When replacing the Boards installed on the Main Controller PCB 1, remove Main
Controller PCB 1 and place it on a flat surface for the work.
CAUTION:
When replacing the PCB, transfer any optional PCBs installed on the old Main
Controller PCB 1 to the new PCB.
When assembling, install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to
trap the cables.
1) Release the 2 Lock Levers [1] in the direction of the arrows, and uniformly push in the Main
Controller PCB 1 [2] with both hands until it stops.
F-4-84
3) Remove the Main Controller PCB 1 [3] while holding the grip [1] and keeping the harness [2]
[1]
away from the PCB.

[2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-86
[3]
F-4-85
4-105
2) Turn over the 2 Lock Levers [1], and push in and secure the Main Controller PCB 1 [2].
2 Screws [3] (Removed in step 2. Install the lower one first and then the upper one.)
[3]
4-106

Preparation
1) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
x2
1) Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable [1], and release the 2 Lock Levers [2].
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-87
[2]
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform the work in the order from (1) to (4) in the figure because the Inner
Connector of the Main Controller PCB 1 may not be connected.
F-4-88
2) Remove the Main Controller PCB 2 [2] while holding the grip [1].
2 Screws [3]
x2
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-89
4-106
4-107
2) Turn over the 2 Lock Levers [1], and push in and secure the Main Controller PCB 2 [2].
2 Screws [3] (Removed in step 2. Install the lower one first and then the upper one.)
CAUTION:
When replacing the PCB, transfer any optional PCBs installed on the old Main
Controller PCB 2 to the new PCB.
x2
When assembling, install the Main Controller PCB 2 while paying attention not to
trap the cables.
[2]
1) Release the 2 Lock Levers [1] in the direction of the arrows, and uniformly push in the Main
[1]
Controller PCB 2 [2] with both hands until it stops.
[3]
F-4-91
[2]
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform the work in the order from (1) to (4) in the figure because the
connector of the Main Controller PCB 2 may not be connected.
[1]
F-4-90
4-107
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Open the Controller Box > Procedure
Open the Controller Box
4-108
2) Open the HDD Cover [1], remove the screw [2], and open the Controller Box Unit [3].
Preparation
CAUTION:
Do not install/remove the Controller Cover [4] while the Controller Box Unit [3] is open.

Procedure
[4]
1) Remove the 3 screws [1] from the Controller Box Unit.
[3]
[1]
x3
F-4-93
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-92
F-4-94
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Open the Controller Box > Procedure
4-108
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the DC Controller PCB > Procedure
Removing the DC Controller PCB
4-109
2) Remove the DC Controller PCB [1].

27 Connectors [2]
Preparation
8 Screws [3]
[3]
x27
3) Open the Controller Box (Refer to page 4-108).
[1]
Procedure
x8
1) Remove the DC Controller Cover [1].

4 Screws [2] (to loosen)
[2]
[2]
[3]
[3]
F-4-96
[1]
[2]
F-4-95
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the DC Controller PCB > Procedure
4-109
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Laser Interface PCB > Procedure
Removing the Laser Interface PCB
4-110
2) Disconnect the 7 connectors [1], and disconnect the 4 Small Gauge Coaxial Cable
Connectors [2] by pulling the tag horizontally.
Preparation
CAUTION:
The Small Gauge Coaxial Cable Connectors cannot be pulled out upward. They need
to be pulled out toward the front.

Procedure
[2]
[1]
F-4-98
[2]
[2]
F-4-97
x11
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-4-99
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Laser Interface PCB > Procedure
4-110
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Drum ITB Driver PCB > Procedure
4-111
Removing the Drum ITB Driver PCB
3) Remove the Laser Interface PCB [1].

6 Screws [2]
Preparation
1 Connector [3]
[2]

x6
Procedure
1) Remove the Duct [1].
[2]
3 Screws (RS) [2]

[1]
[3]
1 Screw (P Tightening) [3]
x4
[2]
F-4-100
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
F-4-101
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Drum ITB Driver PCB > Procedure
4-111
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Developing High Voltage PCB Unit > Procedure
4-112
Removing the Developing High Voltage PCB Unit
2) Remove the Drum ITB Driver PCB [1].

12 Connectors [2]
Preparation
6 Screws [3]
[3]
[3]

x12
Procedure
x6
[1]
1) Free the 4 harnesses [1].

5 Wire Saddles [2]
[2]
6 Harness Guides [3]

4 Connectors [4]
2 Grounding Wires [5]
1 Screw [6]
[3]
[4] [1]
[4] [1]
[4] [1]
[4] [1]
[2]
F-4-102
x4
x14
[5]
[6]
[3]
F-4-103
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Developing High Voltage PCB Unit > Procedure
4-112
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Power Supply Box > Procedure
4-113
Removing the Main Power Supply Box
2) Remove the Developing High Voltage PCB Unit [1].

2 Connectors [2]
Preparation
2 Wire Saddles [3]

2 Screws [4]
1) Remove the Lower Rear Cover (Refer to page 4-346).

[4]
Procedure
x2
x2
x2
1) Remove the Fan Duct [1].
[2]
1 Connector [2]
2 Screws [3]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-104
x2
[2]
[3]
F-4-105
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Power Supply Box > Procedure
4-113
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the AC Driver Box > Procedure
2) Open the 20 Wire Saddles [1], and disconnect the 20 connectors [2] of the Relay PCB Unit.
Removing the AC Driver Box

Preparation
[2]
x13
4-114
x4
x9
[2]
2) Remove the Lower Left Cover 3 (Refer to page 4-345).
Procedure
x6
1) Remove the Fixing Heat Fan Unit [1].
[1]
1 Connector [2]
[2]
1 Guide [3]
1 Screw (black, RS) [4]
[1]
2 Screws (P Tightening) [5]

[4]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[2]
x3
x3
x5
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-106
3) Remove the Main Power Supply Box [1].

3 Screws [2]
F-4-108
[2]
x3
[1]
[2]
F-4-107
4-114
2) Open the 6 Wire Saddles [1], and disconnect the 14 connectors [2].
4-115
3) Remove the AC Driver Box [1].

1 Connector [2]
4 Screws [3]
x5
[3]
[2]
x4
[2]
[1]
[3]
x2
x4
[2]
[3]
F-4-110
x3
x6
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-109
4-115
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the AC Driver Box > Installing the Fixing Heat Fan Unit
Installing the Fixing Heat Fan Unit
4-116
2) Install the Fan Duct 2 [1] to the host machine.

2 Screws [2]
NOTE:
The following procedure shows the procedure for installing the Fixing Heat Fan Unit to
the host machine.
[1]
x2
1) Disassemble the Fixing Heat Fan Unit.
[2]
1 Fan Duct 1 [1]

4 Claws [2]
1 Fixing Heat Fan [3]
4 Screws [4]
1 Fan Duct 2 [5]
[4]
[5]
x4
[1]
F-4-112
[3]
3) Install the Fixing Heat Fan [1].

4 Screws (TP) [2]
[2]
x4
1 Screw (black, RS) [3]
[2]
1 Harness Guide [4]

1 Connector [5]
[2]
x5
[4]
[1]
F-4-111
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[2]
F-4-113
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the AC Driver Box > Installing the Fixing Heat Fan Unit
4-116
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the IH Power Supply PCB Box > Procedure
4-117
Removing the IH Power Supply PCB Box
4) Install the Fan Duct 1 [1].

4 Claws [2]
Preparation
[1]
x4
Procedure
1) Remove the Fan Duct [1].
[2]
[2]
1 Connector [2]
2 Screws [3]
[3]
[1]
x2
F-4-114
[2]
[3]
F-4-115
2) Remove the IH Power Supply PCB Box [1].

3 Connectors [2]
2 Wire Saddles [3]
1 Screw [4]
[1]
x3
[4]
[2]
x2
[2]
[3]
[2]
F-4-116
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the IH Power Supply PCB Box > Procedure
4-117
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB Box > Procedure
Removing the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB Box

Preparation
4-118
3) Remove the Fixation Plate [1].

1 Screw [2]

2) Remove the Waste Toner Container (Refer to page 4-277).
Procedure
1) Remove the Handle Cover [1].
1 Claw [2]
[1]
1 Hook [3]
[2]
[2]
F-4-119
4) Remove the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB Box [1].

4 Screws [2]
[1]
7 Wire Saddles [3]

1 Fasten Terminal [4]
[3]
11 Connectors [5]
CAUTION:
F-4-117
During disassembly/assembly work, be careful not to hit the Waste Toner Full Sensor [1]
against the plate [2].
2) Remove the Lower Right Cover 3 [1].

2 Screws [2]
[1]
[2]
x2
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-120
F-4-118
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB Box > Procedure
4-118
4
[2]
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB Unit > Procedure
[3]
4-119
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB

Unit
[4]
Preparation
x4
x2

3) Remove the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB Box (Refer to page 4-118).
x7
[5]
x10
[1]
Procedure
1) Shift the Pickup Feed Driver PCB Unit [1].
[5]
3 Connectors [2]
3 Wire Saddles [3]
4 Screws [4]
[2]
[2]
F-4-121
[3]
x3
[2]
[4]
x3
x4
[1]
[4]
[2]
[4]
[4]
F-4-122
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB Unit > Procedure
4-119
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Pickup Feed Driver PCB Unit > Procedure
4-120
Removing the Pickup Feed Driver PCB Unit
2) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB Unit [1].

4 Connectors [2]
Preparation
2 Wire Saddles [3]

1 Screw [5] (to loosen)
1 Screw [6]
[6]
[4]
Procedure
[2]
x4
1) Open the 15 Wire Saddles [1] and disconnect the 21 connectors [2].
[2]
x6
x15
[3]
[2]
x21
[5]
[1]
[1]
F-4-123
CAUTION:
When assembling, be sure to secure the harness [1] with the 4 Harness Guides [2]
inside the PCB.
[2]
F-4-125
2) Remove the Pickup Feed Driver PCB Unit [1].

4 Screws [2]
[2]
x4
[1]
x4
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-124
[2]
F-4-126
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Pickup Feed Driver PCB Unit > Procedure
4-120
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Environment Sensor > Procedure
Removing the Environment Sensor
4-121
2) Remove the Environment Sensor [1].

1 Connector [2]
Preparation
1 Claw [3]
1) Pull out the Cassette 3, the Cassette 4 and the Right Deck.
[1]
Procedure
1) Remove the Sensor Cover [1].
3 Screws [2]
[2]
x3
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-4-127
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Environment Sensor > Procedure
F-4-128
4-121
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB > Procedure
Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB

Preparation
4-122
2) Remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB [1].

2 Connectors [2]
1 Fasten Terminal [3]
6 PCB Spacers [4]

2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
3) Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit (Refer to page 4-168).
x3
4) Remove the Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-334).
[1]
[4]
[4]
[3]
[4]
Procedure
1) Remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB Cover [1].
4 Claws [2]
[2]
[4]
[2]
x4
[2]
F-4-130
[2]
[1]
F-4-129
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB > Procedure
4-122
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage PCB > Procedure
Removing the Post-secondary Transfer Static

Elimination High Voltage PCB
4-123
2) Remove the Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage PCB [1].
3 Connectors [2]
3 PCB Spacers [3]
Preparation
[2]
x3

[1]
4) Remove the Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-334).
[2]
[3]
Procedure
[3]
1)Remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB Cover [1].

4 Claws [2]
[2]
F-4-132
x4
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-131
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage PCB > Procedure
4-123
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Fixing Feed Driver PCB > Procedure
Removing the Fixing Feed Driver PCB
4-124
2) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Lower Inner Cover [1].

2 Screws [2]
Preparation
1 Knob [3]

x2
Procedure
1) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Upper Inner Cover [1].
[1]
[3]
1 Screw [2]
2 Hooks [3]
[2]
[2]
F-4-134
3) Remove the Fixing Feed Driver PCB [1].

14 Connectors [2]
6 Screws [3]
[3]
[3]
[1]
x14
[3]
F-4-133
x6
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-135
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Fixing Feed Driver PCB > Procedure
4-124
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Primary Transfer PCB > Procedure
4-125
Removing the Primary Transfer PCB

Preparation
CAUTION:
When delivery system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the host
machine.
1) Remove the Upper Left Cover (Refer to page 4-344).
2) Remove the Left Middle Cover (Refer to page 4-345).
Procedure
1) Remove the Primary Transfer PCB [1].
2 Wire Saddles [2]
4 Terminals [3]
1 Connector [4]
4 Screws [5]
[5]
x5
x2
x4
[3]
[2]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[5]
F-4-136
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Primary Transfer PCB > Procedure
4-125
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Cleaning the Dustproof Glass > Procedure
4-126
2) Insert the Dustproof Glass cleaning tool [1] into a cleaning hole [2] and clean the Dustproof
Glass on the top side.
Cleaning the Dustproof Glass
CAUTION:
Push the Dustproof Glass cleaning tool until it stops, and then pull it out.
Preparation
Push and pull the tool at least one time.

2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
[2]
Procedure
1) Remove the Dustproof Glass cleaning tool [1] from the backside of the Toner Container
Replacement Unit Inner Cover.
[1]
[1]
F-4-138
3) Pull out the Dustproof Glass [1], and clean both sides of the Dustproof Glass with lint-free
paper [2] moistened with alcohol.
[2]
F-4-137
[1]
[1]
F-4-139
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Cleaning the Dustproof Glass > Procedure
4-126
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Preparation
4-127
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit
CAUTION:
When installing the Dustproof Glass, insert it into the mounting hole [1] with the mark
"UP" [A] upward.
Preparation
CAUTION:
When the delivery system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the
host machine.
[1]

4)Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-341).
5) Close the Multi-purpose Tray Cover .
[A]
NOTE:
F-4-140
Be sure to refer to the correct step according to the following instruction since the
step differs between the copier model and the printer model.
For copier model, refer to step 7-1.
For printer model, refer to step 7-2.
7-1) Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit (for copier model) (Refer to page 4-352).
7-2) Removing the Printer Upper Cover (for printer model) (Refer to page 4-358).
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Preparation
4-127
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure
Procedure
4-128
CAUTION:
The Small Gauge Coaxial Cable Connector [1] cannot be pulled out upward (in the
direction toward the harness). Do not pull it upward or the cable will be broken.
NOTE:
This procedure shows the steps to be taken in the case of Laser Scanner Unit (Y).
Disassemble and assemble the Laser Scanner Units (M), (C), and (Bk) in the same
way.
1) Remove the Top Plate Cover [1].
[1]
3 Screws [2]
4 Protrusions [3]
[1]
[3]
x3
F-4-142
2) Pull the connector [1] and the tag [2] horizontally to disconnect the Small Gauge Coaxial
Cable Connector [3].
[2]
F-4-141
[3]
x2
[2]
[1]
F-4-143
4-128
3) Move the Laser Scanner Unit [1].
NOTE:
The number of Wire Saddles differ depending on the Laser Scanner Units (Y), (M), (C),
and (Bk). Follow the instruction shown below.
3 Stepped Screws [2]

3 Washers [3]
3 Springs [4]
In the cases of Laser Scanner Units (Y), (M), and (C), refer to step 4-1.
In the case of Laser Scanner Unit (Bk), refer to step 4-2.
1 Guide [5]
x3
[2]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[4]
4-129
[3]
4-1) Remove the Laser Scanner Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) [1].

2 Wire Saddles [2]
[3]
1 Connector [3]
[4]
[4]
[3]
x2
[1]
[2]
[1]
[5]
F-4-145
4-2) Remove the Laser Scanner Unit (Bk) [1].

1 Wire Saddle [2]
F-4-144
1 Connector [3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-4-146
4-129
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure
4-130
When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit

Preparation
1) Remove the Buffer Path Unit (Refer to page 4-361).
2) Remove the DADF Unit and the Reader Unit (Refer to page 4-352).
3) Remove the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-127).
Procedure
Before removing the Laser Scanner Unit
1) Adjust the initial position of the Skew Correction Motor.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER > LD-ADJ-Y/M/C)
After replacing the Laser Scanner Unit
1) Execute color displacement correction.
(Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Correct
Color Mismatch)
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure
4-130
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Open the Process Unit Inner Cover. > Procedure
4-131
2) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to release the
pressure.
Open the Process Unit Inner Cover.

Preparation
Procedure
CAUTION:
[1]
When releasing pressure of the ITB Unit, execute the Adjustment when Installing/
Removing the ITB Unit.
F-4-148
3) Remove the Front Inner Handle Left Cover [1].
1) Remove the ITB Inner Middle Cover [1].
1 Screw [2]
2 Hooks [3]
2 Hooks [3]
4) Remove the Front Inner Handle Right Cover [4].

2 Hooks [6]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[2]
F-4-147
[4]
[1]
F-4-149
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Open the Process Unit Inner Cover. > Procedure
4-131
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Closing the Process Unit Inner Cover > Procedure
5) Turn the 2 handles (right and left) [1] downward, and pull out the Process Unit Inner Cover [2]
until it stops and move downward to open it.
4-132
Closing the Process Unit Inner Cover

Procedure
1) Hold the 2 handles (right and left) [1] and raise the Process Unit Inner Cover [2].
2) Push the Process Unit Inner Cover [2] to the rear side, and push on the 2 Stopper Plates [A]
[2]
of the right and left hooks to the 2 end faces (right and left) [B] of the Hinge Shaft Holder.
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-150
[1]
[2]
[B]
[A]
[1]
F-4-151
3) Raise the 2 handles (right and left) [1] at a 90-degree angle further and close the Process
Unit Inner Cover.
[1]
[1]
F-4-152
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Closing the Process Unit Inner Cover > Procedure
4-132
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit > Procedure
4-133
CAUTION:
Be sure that the 2 hooks (right and left) [1] of the Process Unit Inner Cover are hooked
and locked to the 2 Hinge Shafts [2] at the right and left sides of the host machine.
Procedure
CAUTION:
If the ITB Pressure Release Lever [1] is turned to release the pressured, perform this
procedure to make adjustment.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-153
4) Install the Front Inner Handle Left Cover.

5) Install the Front Inner Handle Right Cover.
6) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever to apply pressure.
CAUTION:
F-4-154
1) Execute the ITB edge profile/Steering Roller neutral position measurement mode.
(COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT-ITB)
2) From the user mode:
Execute Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto
7) Install the ITB Inner Middle Cover.
Correct Color Mismatch.
8) Install the Upper Front Cover.

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit > Procedure
4-133
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Pulling out the ITB Unit > Procedure
Pulling out the ITB Unit
4-134
2) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to release the
pressure.
Preparation
[1]
Procedure
CAUTION:
If you have operated the ITB Pressure Release Lever to install or remove the ITB
Unit, execute the adjustment when installing/removing the ITB Unit.
Be careful not to touch the ITB with fingers or damage it. (Otherwise failure may
occur in the output image.)
1) Remove the ITB Inner Middle Cover [1].
F-4-156
1 Screw [2]
3) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the ITB Frame.
2 Hooks [3]
x2
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
F-4-157
F-4-155
4-134
4-135
4) Hold the handle [1] to pull out the Fixing Feed Unit [2].
6) Hold the handle [1] to pull out the ITB Unit [2].
5) Press the 2 Release Springs [3] at both sides of the rail to release the locks, and further
pull out the Fixing Feed Unit [2] until it stops.
pull out the ITB Unit [2] until it stops.

[3]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[1]
F-4-158
F-4-160
CAUTION:
When pulling out the Fixing Feed Unit [1], pulling it out beyond the rear end [A] of the
Release Springs [2] on the rear side may cause falling of the Fixing Feed Unit.
[A]
[2]
[A]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-159
4-135
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Unit > Procedure
Removing the ITB Unit
4-136
1) Move the ITB Unit [1] to the rear side to remove the 2 Fixation Pins [A] of the Secondary
Transfer Outer Unit.
Preparation
[1]
[A]
2) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
Procedure
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the ITB with fingers or damage it.
(Otherwise failure may occur in the output image.)
Place the ITB Unit on a sheet of paper, etc.
Support the ITB Unit at the 3 locations: the lower left [A] of the ITB Unit Front Plate,
the foot [B] of the ITB, and molded area [C] of the Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper
Guide.
F-4-162
2) Hold the 2 handles [1] to remove the ITB Unit [2] by lifting upward.
[1]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[2]
F-4-161
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Unit > Procedure
[1]
F-4-163
4-136
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB Unit > Procedure
Removing the ITB Frame
4-137
Installing the ITB Unit
Preparation
Procedure
1) Push in the ITB Frame [1] and align the side [A] of the ITB Pressure Release Lever [2] with
the side [B] of the cover [3] of the Fixing Feed Unit.
3) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136).
Procedure
[2]
1) Press the 2 Release Springs [1] at both sides of the rail to release the locks, and pull out
the ITB Frame [2].
[1]
[A]
[B]
[3]
F-4-166
CAUTION:
F-4-164
CAUTION:
Put the 2 rails [2] pulled out back in the host machine as needed.
If their positions are not aligned, the ITB Unit [1] may become on top of the Secondary
Transfer Unit [2], and the ITB [3] may be damaged when storing the ITB Unit [1] in the
host machine.
2 Rail Lock Levers [1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-167
F-4-165
4-137
2) Hold the 2 handles [1], and align the right edge [A] and left edge [B] of the ITB Unit Front
Plate with the 2 marks [2] on the ITB Frame to place the ITB Unit [3] horizontally.
[1]
3) Check that the groove [A] of the ITB Frame and the leading edge [B] of the ITB Pressure
Arm are aligned in a straight line (2 locations).
[2]
[1]
4-138
NOTE:
If the 2 leading edges [B] of the ITB Pressure Arm are not engaged with the groove
[A] of the ITB Frame, the pressure will not be transmitted to the ITB Unit after putting it
back.
[A]
[B]
[3]
[2]
F-4-168
CAUTION:
[B]
After placing on the ITB Frame, check that the right edge [A] of the ITB Unit Front
Plate is located to the right of the bended part [B] of the plate on the right side of the
ITB Frame.
Check that the bended part [C] on the left edge of the ITB Unit Front Plate is on top
of the bended part [D] of the plate on the left side of the ITB Frame.
[A]
F-4-170
4) Put the handle [1] of the ITB Unit back.

[1]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
F-4-171
F-4-169
4-138
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Storing the ITB Unit > Procedure
Storing the ITB Unit
4-139
1) Put the ITB Unit [1] back in the host machine.
Procedure
CAUTION:
If you have operated the ITB Pressure Release Lever to install or remove the ITB
Unit, execute the adjustment when Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB
Unit.
When putting the ITB Unit back in the host machine, be sure that the ITB Pressure
Release Lever is released (horizontal) and then push in the unit.
(If the unit is pushed in while the ITB Pressure Release Lever is in the engaged state
(not horizontal), pressure will not be applied to the ITB Unit even by turning the ITB
Pressure Release Lever.
When the host machine operates in this state, the belt displacement error E075
occurs.)
[1]
F-4-173
2) Secure the ITB Unit [1] with the 2 screws [2], and turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever [3]
in the direction of the arrow to apply pressure.
CAUTION:
Tighten the 2 screws of the ITB Frame to secure the ITB Unit, and then turn the ITB
Pressure Release Lever.
(If pressure is not applied at the proper position, the ITB Unit may be pushed up in the
host machine, causing damage to the ITB.)
[2]
x2
F-4-172
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-4-174
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Storing the ITB Unit > Procedure
4-139
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit > Procedure
4-140
Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit
3) Put the Fixing Feed Unit [1] back in the host machine.
Preparation
Procedure
CAUTION:
When replacing this part, execute the actions After Replacing the ITB Cleaning
Blade Unit.
[1]
Be careful not to touch the ITB with fingers or damage it.

F-4-175
4) Install the ITB Inner Middle Cover [1].

1 Screw [2]
Because there is toner on the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit [1], be sure to place it on a
sheet of paper [2], etc.
2 Hooks [3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-177
[3]
F-4-176
4-140
1) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit [1].
4-141
[2]
2 Screws [2]
2 Bosses [3]
[1]
CAUTION:
[3]
When disassembling/assembling, be sure to remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit [1]
before removing the ITB Cleaning Unit [2] to prevent the ITB Cleaning Blade from
being damaged.
[1]
x2
[2]
[2]
[3]
F-4-180
F-4-178
Be sure to tilt the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit not to contact with the ITB in order to
prevent the ITB Cleaning Blade [1] and the ITB [2] from being damaged when
disassembling/assembling.
[1]
[2]
F-4-179
4-141
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade > Procedure
Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade
4-142
1) Remove the 2 springs [2] from the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit [1].
[2]
Preparation
4) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit (Refer to page 4-140).
[2]
Procedure
[1]
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the [A] part of the ITB Cleaning Blade.
F-4-182
2) Change the direction of the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit [1].
[A]
F-4-181
F-4-183
4-142
3) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade [2] from the ITB Cleaning Unit [1].
4-143
CAUTION:
1 Stepped Screw [3]

1 Wave Washer [4]
At installation, be sure to align the 2 holes [1] of the IITB Cleaning Blade Unit with the 2
bosses [2] of the spacer.
1 Spacer [5]
CAUTION:
Be sure to hold the plate [A] of the Side Seal when removing the ITB Cleaning Blade.
[A]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-186
F-4-184
4) Remove the 2 Side Seals [2] from the ITB Cleaning Blade [1].
[3]
[2]
[4]
[2]
[3]
x2
[1]
[1]
[3]
[5]
F-4-185
[2]
F-4-187
4-143
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > After Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit > Procedure
4-144
After Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit
CAUTION:
Procedure
At installation, be sure to place the 2 Side Seals [1] inwards.
1) After installing the ITB Cleaning Unit to the ITB Unit, apply lubricant [1] (FY9-6007-000) to
[1]
the application area [A] on the ITB surface in the longitudinal direction [B] (1 reciprocation).
x2
(Execute this step without the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit being installed.)
CAUTION:
Target application area is to be the area surrounded by the application width as shown
below.
[1]
F-4-188
Be sure that there is the clearance [A] between the ITB Cleaning Blade and the plate
of the Side Seal.
Application area
Application width in the longitudinal direction [B] is shorter than the width of the
Primary Transfer Roller (Y) [2].
Be careful not to apply lubricant to the outside of the Primary Transfer Roller (Y) [2]
width.
Target: Between the point approx. 35 mm inside the ITB Unit Rear Plate [3] and the
point approx. 35 mm inside the ITB Unit Front Plate [4].
The application width in the belt's rotation direction is between the Primary Transfer
Roller (Y) [2] and the ITB Driver Roller [5].
Target: Between the point of the Primary Transfer Roller (Y) [2] Shaft Support (Front/
Rear) Cover edge [C] and the point approx. 45 mm below the edge.
CAUTION:
Points to Note when Applying Lubricant (FY9-6007-000) [1]
Be careful not to apply lubricant to the outside of the application width in the
longitudinal direction [B].
[A]
[A]
When lubricant [1] is applied outside the application area, be sure to wipe with lintfree paper.
F-4-189
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > After Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit > Procedure
4-144
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit > Procedure
4-145
Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit
approx 35mm
Preparation
[4]
[3]

[B]
[2]
[C]
Procedure
[C]
CAUTION:
Because there is toner on the ITB Cleaning Unit [1], be sure to place it on a sheet of
paper [2], etc.
approx 45mm [5]
[1]
[A]
approx 45mm
[2]
F-4-190
2) Rotate the ITB Drive Motor [1] with hand counterclockwise, and then rotate the ITB until the
lubricant [2] applied to the ITB is hidden in the Scoop-up Sheet [3] of the ITB Cleaning Unit.
(The applied lubricant [2] passes through the Scoop-up Sheet [3] of the ITB Cleaning Unit.)
CAUTION:
Be sure to turn the ITB Drive Motor [1] counterclockwise only and be careful not to turn
it clockwise.
[1]
[2]
F-4-192
[3]
[1]
3) Install the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit to the ITB Unit.
F-4-191
4-145
CAUTION:
4-146
CAUTION:
Do not turn the ITB Cleaning Unit [1] upside down to prevent toner from scattering
around.
Do not touch the Scoop-up Sheet [1] directly with hand.

If there is folding line on the Scoop-up Sheet, failure may occur in the output image.
[1]
[1]
F-4-195
F-4-193
When installing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit, check that waste toner is not
accumulated on the back side of the Scoop-up Sheet [1] of the ITB Cleaning Unit.
If there is waste toner, gently tap the unit to drop it to the screw.
When disassembling/assembling, be sure to remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit [1]
before removing the ITB Cleaning Unit [2] to prevent the ITB Cleaning Blade from
being damaged.
[1]
[1]
F-4-194
[2]
F-4-196
4-146
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Procedure
4-147
Removing the ITB
1) Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit [1].

2 Screws [2]
Preparation
3 Bosses [3]
[3]
[3]
x2
[2]
[1]

5) Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit (Refer to page 4-145).
Procedure
[3]
[2]
CAUTION:
F-4-197
When replacing this part, execute the Cleaning when replacing the ITB.
Be careful not to touch any part of the ITB other than the specified part with finger or
damage the ITB.
Do not touch the surfaces of the ITB Drive Roller [1], Secondary Transfer Inner
Roller [2], ITB Steering Roller [3], and Primary Transfer Roller (Y/M/C/Bk) [4].
(Otherwise, it may cause image failure.)
Be sure not to damage the ITB Retainer Sheet [5].
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
F-4-198
4-147
4-148
1) Turn the ITB Unit Front Plate [1] downward, and stand the ITB Unit [2] vertically.
[3]
[2]
x2
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-199
2) Remove the Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper Guide [1] in the direction of the arrow.
2 Screws [2]
2 Bosses [3]
2 Protrusions [4]
[4]
NOTE:
One of the screws [2] tightens the grounding together.
[1]
F-4-200
NOTE:
When installing the Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper Guide [1], align it with the 2 bosses
[2], and then insert the 2 protrusions [3] of the Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper Guide in
the ITB Unit to make the work easy.
x2
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-201
4-148
3) Remove the ITB Unit Right Rear Small Plate [1].
4-149
5) Turn the ITB Tension Lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to release the pressure applied
1 Screw [2]
on the ITB [2].
2 Bosses [3]
1 Hook [4]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-204
6) Place the ITB Unit [1] vertically, and turn the handle [2] toward the Rear Plate of the ITB
[4]
Unit.
[3]
F-4-202
4) Place the ITB Unit [1] sideways to change its orientation.
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-205
F-4-203
4-149
4-150
When removing the ITB using the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet
CAUTION:
7-1) Insert the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet [1] included in the package between the ITB [3]
The ITB is thinner than the existing ones, so it can be easily bent.
Be sure to handle it with care not to bend when working.
and the ITB Unit, with the folded slant area [A] of the sheet coming on the upper side of the
ITB Drive Roller [2].
Be sure to hold within 10mm from both edges of the ITB.

It is for not to touch the image area of the ITB.
[1]
Be sure to place the ITB on a sheet of paper.
10mm
[A]
[2]
[3]
10mm
F-4-207
F-4-206
7-2) Hold the edge [A] of the ITB, and remove the ITB [1] while paying attention not to
damage it.
NOTE:
If the ITB of the service parts is available for the purpose of replacement, use the
ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet included in the package to prevent the ITB from being
damaged.
If the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet is used: perform steps 7-1 through 7-3.
If the ITB of the service parts is not available, use 2 sheets of A3 paper instead of the ITB
Installation Auxiliary Sheet.
If 2 sheets of A3 paper are used: perform steps 8-1 through 8-3.
[A]
[1]
F-4-208
4-150
7-3) Remove the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet [1].
4-151
8-2) Hold the edge [A] of the ITB, and remove the ITB [1] while paying attention not to
damage it.
[1]
[A]
[1]
F-4-209
F-4-211
When removing the ITB using the 2 sheets of A3 paper

8-1) Insert the 2 sheets of A3 paper [1] between the ITB and the ITB Unit to wrap around the
8-3) Remove the 2 sheets of A3 paper [1] and the 4 tapes [2] from the ITB Front Plate.
2 ends [A] of the ITB Unit, and then use the tapes [2] to secure them to the ITB Front Plate.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[A]
[2]
[A]
[1]
F-4-210
F-4-212
4-151
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB > Procedure
Installing the ITB
4-152
CAUTION:
Procedure
When installing the ITB to the ITB Unit, be sure that the pressure applied to the ITB is
released.
CAUTION:
The ITB is thinner than the existing ones, so it can be easily bent.
Be sure to handle it with care not to bend when working.
Be sure to hold within 10mm from both edges of the ITB.
It is for not to touch the image area of the ITB.
Be sure to place the ITB on a sheet of paper.
10mm
10mm
F-4-213
Do not touch the surfaces of the ITB Drive Roller [1], Secondary Transfer Inner
Roller [2], ITB Steering Roller [3], and Primary Transfer Roller (Y/M/C/Bk) [4].
(Otherwise, it may cause image failure.)
Be sure not to damage the ITB Retainer Sheet [5].
F-4-215
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
F-4-214
4-152
1) Turn the ITB Unit Front Plate [1] downward, and stand the ITB Unit [2].
4-153
2-2) Hold the edge [A] of the ITB to place the white sheet [1] on top of it, and install while
paying attention not to damage the ITB [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[A]
[2]
F-4-216
F-4-218
NOTE:
If the ITB of the service parts is available for the purpose of replacement, use the
ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet included in the package to prevent the ITB from being
damaged.
If the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet is used: perform steps 2-1 through 2-3.
If the ITB of the service parts is not available, use 2 sheets of A3 paper instead of the ITB
Installation Auxiliary Sheet.
If 2 sheets of A3 paper are used: perform steps 3-1 through 3-3.
2-3) Remove the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet [1].
When using the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet

2-1) Insert the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet [2] included in the package with the folded slant
[1]
area [A] of the sheet coming on the upper side of the ITB Drive Roller [1].
F-4-219
[A]
[2]
[1]
F-4-217
4-153
When using the 2 sheets of A3 paper
4-154
3-3) Remove the 2 sheets of A3 paper [1] and the tapes [2] from the ITB Front Plate.
3-1) Use the 4 tapes [2] to secure the 2 sheets of A3 paper [1] to the ITB Front Plate to wrap
[1]
around the 2 ends [A] of the ITB Unit.
[2]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[A]
[1]
F-4-222
[A]
F-4-220
[1]
3-2) Hold the edge [A] of the ITB to place the white sheet [1] inside the ITB on the top, and
install while paying attention not to damage the ITB [2].
[1]
F-4-223
[A]
[2]
F-4-221
4-154
5) Align the center of the ITB [2] with the center [A] of the left and right rollers [1] of the ITB
4-155
6) Turn the ITB Tension Lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to apply tension to the ITB [2].
Unit.
CAUTION:
[1]
[2]
To avoid applying tension quickly, hold the ITB Tension Lever and the Stopper Cam
at the rear side with both hands and then turn them slowly.
After applying tension to the ITB with the ITB Tension Lever, be sure to hook the
Stopper Cam to the shaft at the rear side of the ITB Unit to lock it.
At this time, be sure that a click sound is heard.
[A]
[1]
F-4-224
CAUTION
Install the ITB [1], and place the ITB Retainer Sheet [2] of the Front Plate on top of
the ITB while paying attention not to fold it.
Be sure to place the leading edge of the ITB Position Flag [3] on top of the ITB [1].
F-4-226
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-227
F-4-225
4-155
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning when replacing the ITB > Procedure
Cleaning when replacing the ITB
4-156
2) Clean the whole circumference [A] of the surface of the ITB Steering Roller with lint-free
paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
Preparation
[A]

6) Remove the ITB (Refer to page 4-147).
[1]
Procedure
1) While rotating the Drive Motor [2] in the direction of the arrow, clean the whole
circumference [A] of the surface of the Drive Roller with lint-free paper [1] moistened with
alcohol.
F-4-229
3) Clean the whole circumference [A] of the surface of the Pre-secondary Transfer Idler Roller
with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[A]
[A]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-228
F-4-230
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning when replacing the ITB > Procedure
4-156
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Transfer Roller > Procedure
4) Clean the soiling adhered at the hole [A] of the HP Sensor PCB [2] with a blower [1].
4-157
Removing the Primary Transfer Roller

Preparation
[A]
[1]

Procedure
[2]
CAUTION:
F-4-231
5) While pushing down the Flag [1], clean the soiling adhered at the Edge Sensor [3] with a
blower [2].
When replacing this part, execute the actions to be taken When Replacing the
Primary Transfer Roller.
Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.
NOTE:
This procedure indicates the location of the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk).
Be sure to perform the same procedure for the Primary Transfer Roller (Y), (M), and (C).
[3]

[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-232
F-4-233
4-157
2) Open the Shaft Support Cover (Front) [2] and the Shaft Support Cover (Rear) [3] by
4-158
4) Remove the Primary Transfer Roller [1] in the direction of the arrow.
releasing them from the protrusions [1].

[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
F-4-234
3) Release the rear shaft of the Primary Transfer Roller by holding the shaft [1] of the Primary
F-4-236
Transfer Roller and pushing down the Shaft Support [2] at the rear side.
CAUTION:
Be sure to push the shafts [1] at front and rear sides of the Primary Transfer Roller into
the Shaft Support [2] from above.
[1]
If no click sound is heard at this time, reinstall the roller.
[1]
[2]
F-4-235
[2]
F-4-237
4-158
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller > Procedure
When Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller

Procedure
4-159
Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller

Preparation
1) Execute the primary transfer ATVC.

(COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > 1ATVC-EX)

Procedure
CAUTION:
1) Remove the Bearing Cover [1].
2 Screws [2]
2 Bosses [3]
x2
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-238
4-159
2) Remove the bearing [1] and the Secondary Transfer Roller [2] in the direction of the arrow.
CAUTION:
Be sure not to deform the Grounding Spring [1].
4-160
NOTE:
If replacement is not required, there is no need to remove the bearing [1] at the
lower side.
If it is removed, place it in the Bearing Holder [2].
Be sure to keep the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller [2] from coming in contact with
the Grounding Spring [1] to prevent it from being damaged.
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-241
3) Remove the bearing [2] from the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller [1].
[2]
F-4-239
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-242
F-4-240
4-160
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Inner Scraper Holder > Procedure
Removing the ITB Inner Scraper Holder
4-161
1) Place the ITB Unit [1] sideways.
Preparation
[1]

Procedure
CAUTION:
F-4-244
2) Remove the ITB Inner Scraper Holder [1].
Do not touch or bend the 2 sheets [1] in the ITB Inner Scraper Holder.
2 Screws [2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
x2
[1]
F-4-243
F-4-245
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Inner Scraper Holder > Procedure
4-161
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Heater Unit > Procedure
Cleaning the ITB Inner Scraper
4-162
Removing the Drum Heater Unit
Preparation
Preparation
Procedure
Procedure
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
If the ITB Inner Scraper is soiled when the ITB is removed, be sure to perform the
following procedure to clean it.
1) Clean the leading edge of the ITB Inner Scraper [2] with lint-free paper moistened with
Because the Drum Heater is hot, be sure to perform disassembly/assembly after it is

cooled down.
alcohol [1].
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-247
F-4-246
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Heater Unit > Procedure
4-162
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Motor > Procedure
4-163
Removing the ITB Motor
2) Remove the Drum Heater (M) Unit [1].

1 Wire Saddle [2]
Preparation
1 Connector [3]
2 Screws [4]

[4]
Procedure
[3]
1) Remove the ITB Motor [1].
[2]
1 Connector [2]
4 Screws [3]
[3]
x2
[1]
F-4-248
3) Remove the Drum Heater (Y) Unit [1].

1 Wire Saddle [2]
[2]
x4
2 Connectors [3]
3 Spacers [4]
[1]
x2
[3]
[4]
F-4-250
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
F-4-249
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Motor > Procedure
4-163
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Patch Sensor Unit > Procedure
Removing the Patch Sensor Unit
4-164
Procedure
Preparation
CAUTION:
When replacing this part, execute the actions to be taken When Replacing the Patch
Sensor Unit.
2) Remove the Multi Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-341).

1) Disconnect the connector [1].
1 Edge Saddle [2]
6) Put the ITB Frame [1] and the Fixing Feed Unit [2] back in the host machine.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-252
F-4-251

8) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
(Perform steps 3 through 5.)
9) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
10)Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
11) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).
4-164
4-165
2) While inserting the connector [1] in the host machine, remove the Patch Sensor Unit [2].
1 Screw [3]
CAUTION:
If the 2 Positioning Pins [1] of the rear side are removed when removing the Patch
Sensor Unit, the Patch Sensor Unit may fall off inside the host machine. Therefore,
firmly support the unit during the work.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-253
F-4-254
4-165
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Patch Sensor Unit > Procedure
When Replacing the Patch Sensor Unit
NOTE:
Patch Sensor Unit installation method
1) Pass the connector [1] through the hole [A] of the plate.
2) Hook the plate [B] of the Patch Sensor Unit to the 2 protrusions [2] of the host
machine and then fit the Positioning Pins [3] of the rear side to the 2 holes [4] of the
Rear Plate.
Procedure
1) Enter the alpha value of the Patch Sensor.
(COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > ALF-C)
1 Screw [5]
[B]
4-166
2) Adjust the light intensity of the Patch Sensor.

[3]
[4]
[4]
[2]
(COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > PT-LPADJ)
[5]
[1]
[A]
F-4-255
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Patch Sensor Unit > Procedure
4-166
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Patch Sensor Unit > Procedure
Cleaning the Patch Sensor Unit
4-167
Procedure
1) Open the Shutter [1] and clean the surface [A] of the Patch Sensor with tightly-wrung cotton
Preparation
swab [2] moistened with water in the single direction.
After cleaning, check that there is no soiling caused by toner on the surface [A] of the
sensor.

CAUTION:
Do not use alcohol because it causes melting and clouding of the sensor window.
Do not dry wipe the sensor window because it is charged to attract toner.
[A]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-256

10) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
[A]
[2]
[A]
[2]

12) Remove the Patch Sensor Unit (Refer to page 4-164).
F-4-257
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Patch Sensor Unit > Procedure
4-167
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit > Procedure
Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit

Preparation
4-168
2) Lift the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit [1] vertically to remove it.
2 Connectors [2]
2 Stepped Screws [3]

[3]
Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller when
1 Screw [2]
2 Hooks [3]
x2
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-4-259
[3]
[1]
F-4-258
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit > Procedure
4-168
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator > Procedure
4-169
Removing the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator
CAUTION:
When installing the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit to the Fixing Feed Unit, be sure to do
so after releasing the pressure applied on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
(Otherwise, the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller may be deformed, or the ITB may be
damaged.)
How to release the pressure applied on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
The pressure on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller [3] can be released by turning the
gear [1] and changing the direction of the cam [2].
Be sure to keep the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller lowered.
Preparation
Procedure
CAUTION:
[1]
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller when
[3]
1) Remove the Secondary Transfer Guide [1].

1 Screw (with washer) [2]
1 Protrusion [3]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-4-261
F-4-260
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator > Procedure
4-169
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller > Procedure
4-170
Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
CAUTION:
Preparation
Be sure not to deform the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator [1].

Be sure not to deform the Grounding Spring [2].

[1]
[2]
4) Remove the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator (Refer to page 4-169).
Procedure
CAUTION:
F-4-262
2) Hold the protrusions [A] (front and rear) to remove the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator
If the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller is soiled when replacing it, Cleaning the
Secondary Transfer Outer Unit and Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Static
Eliminator Unit.
[1].
1) Remove the 2 E-rings [1] at the front and rear sides.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[A]
F-4-263
F-4-264
4-170
2) While pressing the Secondary Transfer Holder [1], remove the 2 arms [2] one by one.
4-171
4) Remove the 2 Secondary Transfer Holders (with springs) [2] from the Secondary Transfer
Outer Roller [1].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-267
CAUTION:
F-4-265
3) Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller [1] and the 2 Secondary Transfer Holders (with
springs) [2].
When assembling, be sure to install with the groove [1] of the Secondary Transfer Outer
Roller facing the rear side of the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit.
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-266
F-4-268
4-171
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit > Procedure
Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Unit

Preparation
4-172
Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit

Preparation

5) Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller (Refer to page 4-170).
Procedure
1) Clean paper dust accumulated at the back side [A] of the Secondary Transfer Static
Eliminator Unit with dry lint-free paper [1].
Procedure
1) Clean paper dust accumulated at the groove [A] of the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit with
dry lint-free paper [1].
[A]
[A]
[1]
[1]
F-4-269
F-4-270
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit > Procedure
4-172
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Rail > Procedure
Removing the Primary Charging Rail
4-173
Procedure
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].
Preparation
5 Wire Saddles [2]
1 Edge Saddle [3]

x5
[2]
x2
[1]
[3]
F-4-272
2) Put the removed harness [1] inside the host machine.

[1]
[2]
F-4-271
[1]

11) Remove the Developing Assembly (Bk) (Refer to page 4-232).
F-4-273
4-173
3) Remove the Primary Charging Rail [1].
NOTE:
When installing, insert the Primary Charging Rail [1] at the angle as shown in the figure,
and then insert the 2 bosses [2] in the boss holes [3] of the host machine.
2 Wire Saddles [2]

1 Harness Guide [3]
1 Screw [4]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[1]
x3
4-174
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2]
F-4-276
F-4-274
CAUTION:
Install the wiring [1] of the Potential Control PCB Unit along the Harness Guide [A] of
the Primary Charging Rail.
[1]
[1]
[A]
[A]
F-4-275
4-174
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Thermopile > Procedure
Removing the Drum Thermopile
4-175
Procedure
1) Remove the Drum Thermopile [2] from the Primary Charging Rail [1].
Preparation
1 Guide [3]
1 Connector [4]
2 Screws [5]

[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
x2
[2]
[5]
F-4-278
[1]
[2]
F-4-277

13) Remove the Primary Charging Rail (Refer to page 4-173).
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Thermopile > Procedure
4-175
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit
(including Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB) > Procedure
4-176
Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit

(including Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB)
Preparation
Procedure
CAUTION:
When replacing this part, execute the actions to be taken When Replacing the Potential
Sensor and Potential Control PCB.

NOTE:
If the Potential Sensor is replaced, also replace the harness connected to the Potential
Sensor and the Potential Control PCB as a Potential Control PCB Unit.

1) Remove the harness [1] connected to the Potential Sensor, Potential Sensor Protection
Sheet [2], and Potential Sensor [3].
2 Wire Saddles [4]
1 Screw [6]
[1]
[2]
[1]
x4
[3]
[2]
F-4-279
7) Remove the Upper Front Cove (Refer to page 4-339)r.
[5]

[6]
[4]
F-4-280
4-176
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit
(including Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB) > Procedure
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB > Procedure
CAUTION:
When installing, remove the release paper, and align the Potential Sensor Protection
Sheet with the marking line [A] to affix it (be sure that the gap [B] between the marking
line and the release paper is less than 0.5 mm).
4-177
When Replacing the Potential Sensor and Potential

Control PCB
Procedure
NOTE:
When replacing the Potential Sensor, replace the Potential Control PCB Unit (including
the Potential Sensor, harness and Potential Control PCB).
1) Install the Primary Charging Rail [1] with the Potential Sensor removed to the host
machine.
1 Screw [2]
[B]
[2]
[A]
F-4-281
2) Remove the Potential Control PCB [1].

1 Connector [2]
1 Screw [3]
5 PCB Supports [4]
[1]
[4]
F-4-283
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
F-4-282
4-177
NOTE:
When installing, insert the Primary Charging Rail [1] at the angle as shown in the figure,
and then insert the 2 bosses [2] in the boss holes [3] of the host machine.
4-178
5) Install a new Potential Control PCB [1].

1 Connector [2]
1 Screw [3]
5 PCB Supports [4]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-284
[3]
[4]
2) Install the ITB Unit to the host machine.

3) Connect a new cable [3] to the connector [2] of a new Potential Sensor [1].
4) Install the Potential Sensor [1] to the 2 pin electrodes [4] for checking the Potential Sensor.
1 Connector [2]
F-4-286
6) Pass the harness [1] of the Primary Charging Rail and the electrode for checking the
Potential Sensor from the Edge Saddle [2] of the Right Side Plate of the host machine, and
connect the 5 Wire Saddles [3] and the 2 connectors [4].
1 Screw [5]
CAUTION:
x2
Secure the screw firmly so that the Potential Sensor is not removed.
[1]
[3]
[4]
x5
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
F-4-287
[4]
[4]
[2]
F-4-285
4-178
7) Place the electrode [1] for checking the Potential Sensor on the Process Unit Inner Cover [2],
4-179
11) Use a dedicated tool [1] to deactivate the Front Door Switch.
and use the Electrode Clip [3] to pinch the plate of the hinge to ground.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the electrode for checking the Potential Sensor.
[1]
F-4-289
12) When the screen [A] displays [READY] in the service mode, adjust the Potential Sensor.
[3]
[2]
Service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > OFST
[1]
Display
< DPC
F-4-288
8) Close the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit.
I/O
Adjust
>
Function
<1/ 2>
Option
<READY
Test
>
Counter
<LEVEL 1 >
DPC
OFST
DRM-RSET
CAUTION:
OFST-Y
Be careful not to trap the cable.
OFST-M
OFST-C
DRMRSETY
10) Disable the warm-up rotation in service mode immediately after turning ON the main
DRMRSETM
power switch.
Set the service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF to 1.
OK
F-4-290
4-179
13) Press [OK] on the indicator and the display changes from [ACTIVE] to [OK!].
Display
<
I/O
DPC
Adjust
>
Function
<1/ 2>
Option
<WAITING >
Test
Counter
<LEVEL 1 >
DPC
OFST
Display
I/O
< DPC
Adjust
>
Function
<1/ 2>
Option
<READY
CAUTION:
Test
>
Counter
<LEVEL 1 >
DPC
ACTIVE
OFST
DRM-RSET
DRM-RSET
OFST-Y
OFST-Y
OFST-M
OFST-M
OFST-C
OFST-C
DRMRSETY
DRMRSETY
DRMRSETM
4-180
OK!
When installing, remove the release paper, and align the Potential Sensor Protection
Sheet with the marking line [A] to affix it (be sure that the gap [B] between the marking
line and the release paper is less than 0.5 mm).
DRMRSETM
OK
F-4-291
14) Enable the warm-up rotation in the service mode.

[B]
15) Turn OFF the main power switch.
[A]
F-4-293
16) Install a new Potential Sensor [1] to the Primary Charging Rail.
1 Harness [2]
18) Install the Primary Charging Rail to the host machine.
2 Wire Saddles [3]
19) Install the removed parts in reverse order.

1 Screw [5]
17) Install a new Potential Sensor Protection Sheet [6].
[2]
[1]
[6]
[4]
x4
[5]
[3]
F-4-292
4-180
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Thermistor > Procedure
Removing the Drum Thermistor
4-181
Procedure
1) Remove the Drum Thermistor [1].
Preparation
1 Connector [2]
1 Wire Saddle [3]
1 Harness Guide [4]

[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-295
[1]
[2]
F-4-294

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Thermistor > Procedure
4-181
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly
Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y)/(M) and (C)/(Bk) > Procedure
4-182
Removing the Developing Assembly

Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y)/(M) and (C)/(Bk)
Preparation
Procedure
NOTE:
The 2 Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCBs for (Y)/(M) [1] and (C)/
(Bk) [2] are installed.
This procedure explains how to remove the Developing Assembly Inner Temperature
Detection PCB (C)/(Bk).
Be sure to perform the same procedure to remove the Developing Assembly Inner
Temperature Detection PCB (Y)/(M).
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-297
F-4-296

7) Remove the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-239).
4-182
4-183
1) Remove the Thermistor Holder [1].
3) Remove the Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB [1].
1 Claw [2]
2 Claws [2]
1 Protrusion [3]
[2]
1 Wire Saddle [4]
x2
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-300
[4]
[1]
F-4-298
[1]
F-4-299
4-183
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Assembly > Procedure
Removing the Primary Charging Assembly
4-184
Preparation
[1]
x2

Procedure
CAUTION:
Primary Charging Assembly.
Do not touch the surface [1] of the Grid Plate. Otherwise functional failure may occur.
Do not place the side with the Grid down when placing the Primary Charging
Assembly.
F-4-302
2) While pressing down the claw [1], pull out the Primary Charging Assembly [2] horizontally.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-303
F-4-301
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Assembly > Procedure
4-184
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly > Procedure
4-185
When Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly
CAUTION:
Procedure
When installing, align the 2 rails [1] of the Primary Charging Assembly with the 2
protrusions [A] of the Primary Charging Assembly, and then install it horizontally.
1) Output a Bk halftone image using the service mode.

(TEST > PG > TYPE: 5 )
(TEST > PG > COLOR-Y/M/C: 0)
[1]
(TEST > PG > COLOR-K: 1)

2) If there is density difference between the front and the rear side of the test print image,
[A]
refer to step 4 to adjust if the front side is dark, or refer to step 3 if the rear side is dark.
[1]
If the density is even, execute step 6 and later.

3) Move the Shutter Arm [1] and the Cleaning Pad Arm [2].
2 Screws [3]
[A]
[3]
F-4-304
[1]
[2]
F-4-305
4) Adjust the Primary Charging Assembly (if the front side of the test print image is dark).
NOTE:
If the front side of the test print image is dark [1], execute steps from 4-1 to 4-3 as shown
below until the density becomes even. When the density becomes even, execute step 6
and later.
If the adjustment screw is turned counterclockwise, the Charging Wire goes down (gap
between the Grid and the Charging Wire becomes narrow). As a result, the density of
output image becomes light. If the adjustment screw is turned clockwise, the Charging
Wire goes up (gap between the Grid and the Charging Wire becomes wide). As a result,
the density of output image becomes dark.
4-185
4-186
5) Adjust the Primary Charging Assembly (if the rear side of the test print image is dark).
[A]
[B]
NOTE:
If the rear side of the test print image is dark [2], execute steps from 5-1 to 5-3 as shown
below until the density becomes even. When the density becomes even, execute steps 6
and later.
If the adjustment screw is turned counterclockwise, the Charging Wire goes down (gap
between the Grid and the Charging Wire becomes narrow). As a result, the density of
output image becomes light.
If the adjustment screw is turned clockwise, the Charging Wire goes up (gap between
the Grid and the Charging Wire becomes wide). As a result, the density of output image
becomes dark.
[A]
[B]
F-4-306
4-1) Rotate the Resin Screws [A] a full turn counterclockwise.

While referring to the Removing the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the host
machine, output a test print and check the image.
4-2) If the front side of the test print image is still dark, further rotate the Resin Screw [A] a full
turn counterclockwise.
4-3) If the front side of the test print image is still dark, rotate the Resin Screw [B] a half turn
clockwise.
F-4-307
4-186
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Assembly Shutter Unit > Procedure
5-1) Rotate the Resin Screw [B] a full turn counterclockwise.

5-2) If the rear side of the test print image is still dark, further rotate the Resin Screw [B] a full
turn counterclockwise.
5-3) If the rear side of the test print image is still dark, rotate the Resin Screw [A] a half turn
4-187
Removing the Primary Charging Assembly Shutter Unit

Preparation
Procedure
clockwise.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface [A] of the Grid when disassembling/assembling.
6) Clean the Charging Wire using the service mode.

(FUNCTION > CLAENING > WIRE-CLN) Time required: Approx. 30 sec.
[A]
7) Execute the potential control using the service mode.

(COPIER > FUNCTION >DPC >DPC) Time required: Approx. 30 sec.
8) Execute the uneven density correction using the user mode.
(Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Correct
Shading)
F-4-308
4-187
1) Loosen the 2 screws [3] of the Shutter Arm [1] and the Cleaning Pad Arm [2].
4-188
3) Remove the Shutter Sheet Installation Fixtures [2] from the Shutter Arm [1].
2 Claws [3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-4-309
2) Move the Shutter Arm [1] and the Cleaning Pad Arm [2] until they stop.
[2]
[1]
F-4-311
F-4-310
CAUTION:
When installing the Shutter Sheet Installation Fixture, check that the Shutter Arm is
engaged with the claw properly.
(Move the Shutter Sheet installation Fixture to the right and left to check that it does not
come off.)
4-188
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Grid Plate > Procedure
4-189
Removing the Grid Plate
4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Shutter Unit [1].

3 Claws [2]
Preparation
2 Bosses [3]
[2]
[1]
x3

[3]
[2]
[3]
Procedure
CAUTION:
Primary Charging Assembly.
[2]
Do not touch the surface [A] of the Grid when disassembling/assembling.

F-4-312
5) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor [2] from the Primary Charging
Assembly Shutter Unit [1].
[A]
1 Connector [3]
2 Claws [4]
[1]
x2
[3]
[4]
[2]
F-4-314
[4]
F-4-313
4-189
1) Loosen the 2 screws [3] of the Shutter Arm [1] and the Cleaning Pad Arm [2].
4-190
3) Remove the Shutter Sheet Installation Fixtures [2] from the Shutter Slider [1].
2 Claws [3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-4-315
2) Move the Shutter Arm [1] and the Cleaning Pad Arm [2] until they stop.
[2]
[1]
F-4-317
F-4-316
CAUTION:
When installing the Shutter Sheet Installation Fixture, check that the Shutter Arm is
engaged with the claw properly.
(Move the Shutter Sheet installation Fixture to the right and left to check that it does not
come off.)
4-190
4) Press the lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to remove the Grid Plate [2].
4-191
CAUTION:
2 Claws [3]
Point to Note When Installing the Grid Plate

The Grid Plate [1] has a front side and a rear side. Therefore, install it in the correct
direction.
Be sure that the Grid Plate [1] is not placed on the protrusions [2] of the Primary
Charging Assembly when installing it.
After installing the Grid Plate [1] on the Primary Charging Assembly, check that the
protrusions [2] are fitted in the holes [A] of the Grid.
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
x2
[A]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-318
[1]
F-4-319
4-191
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Grid Cleaning Pad > Procedure
When Replacing the Grid Plate

Procedure
4-192
Removing the Grid Cleaning Pad

Preparation
1) Clean the Charging Wire.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-EX)

2) Execute the potential control.

(COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC)

5) Remove the Grid Plate (Refer to page 4-189).
Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not touch the Primary Charging Wire [1] when disassembling/assembling.
[1]
F-4-320
4-192
1) Move the Cleaning Pad Arm [1] to the center of the Primary Charging Assembly [2].
4-193
3) Remove the Grid Cleaning Pad [1] in the direction of the arrow.
2 Protrusions [2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-321
F-4-323
CAUTION:
After the work, return the Cleaning Pad Arm to the front.
This is to shorten the Cleaning Pad Arm detection time after the power is turned ON.
2) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate (L) [1] and the Primary Charging
Assembly Rear Cover [2].
2 Screws [3]
[3]
x2
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-322
4-193
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder > Procedure
Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad

Holder
Preparation
4-194
CAUTION:
Push in the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder [1] until it is secured to the 2
claws [2].
[1]

6) Remove the Grid Cleaning Pad (Refer to page 4-192).
Procedure
[2]
CAUTION:
F-4-325
Do not damage the Primary Charging Wire when disassembling/assembling.

1) Use your fingers to pinch and remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder [1].
[1]
F-4-324
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder > Procedure
4-194
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire
Cleaning Pad Slider > Procedure
Removing the Primary Charging Wire

Cleaning Pad Slider
4-195
CAUTION:
Push the Charging Wire [3] against the 2 pads [2] of the Primary Charging Wire
Cleaning Pad Slider [1] to install.
Preparation
[1]

7) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder (Refer to page 4-194).
Procedure
[2]
CAUTION:
[3]
F-4-327
Do not damage the Primary Charging Wire when disassembling/assembling.

1) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider [1].
[1]
F-4-326
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire
Cleaning Pad Slider > Procedure
4-195
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire > Disassembling Procedure
Replacing the Primary Charging Wire
4-196
1) Use tweezers to hold the leading edge [A] of the spring [1] to remove it from the hook [2].
2) Remove the Primary Charging Wire [3] from the groove [B] in the direction of the arrow.
Preparation
[A]

[2]

[1]
8) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider (Refer to page 4-195).
[B]
[3]
CAUTION:
When replacing this part, Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly and execute the
actions to be taken When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire.
In the case of replacing the Charging Wire on a Charging Wire basis, be sure to use
the dedicated Charging Wire Tension Spring (97-5527) [A].
Do not use the spring [B] attached to the Charging Wire.
F-4-329
[A]
[B]
F-4-328
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire > Disassembling Procedure
4-196
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire > Assembling Procedure
3) Remove the Charging Wire [1] from the groove [A] in the direction of the arrow.
4) Remove the block [2] with tweezers by pulling it upward, and then remove Primary
Charging Wire Unit [3].
4-197
CAUTION:
Do not touch the new Charging Wire with hand.
Otherwise functional failure may occur.
1) Untie approx. 5 cm of the new Charging Wire [2] from the 0.06 mm (wire-diameter)
[2]
Charging Wire Reel [1] to make a 3-mm-diameter ring at the block [A].
[3]
[1]
NOTE:
When creating the ring, wrap the Charging Wire [2] around the block [A] to make a full
round, and then turn the block [3] for 6 times or more to twist the Charging Wire [2] for a
length of 4 mm.
[A]
2) Cut the Charging Wire [2] to leave an edge of 1.5 mm or less with nippers.
[A]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-331
3) Insert the block [1] into the groove [A] of the Primary Charging Assembly.
F-4-330
4) Pass the Charging Wire [2] through the lower part [B] of the groove.
5) Cut off the old Charging Wire from the block with nippers.
[A]
[1]
[B]
[2]
F-4-332
4-197
5) After hooking the Charging Wire [1] to the charging wire positioning part [A] at the rear
side of the Primary Charging Assembly, hook the Charging Wire Tension Spring [2] to the
[A]
8) Clean the Charging Wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
9) Assemble the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider and the Primary Charging Wire
Cleaning Pad Holder in reverse order.
Charging Wire [1] at the position shown in the figure below and twist with it.
[2]
4-198
[1]
(REAR)
(FRONT)
F-4-333
6) Cut off extra length of the Charging Wire with nippers.

7) Pass the Charging Wire [1] through the lower part [A] of the groove, and then use tweezers
to hold the leading edge of the spring [2] and attach it to the hook [3].
CAUTION:
The groove used for hooking the Charging Wire must be at the position shown in the
figure (the side for installing the Grid).
[3]
[2]
[A]
[1]
[1]
F-4-334
CAUTION:
After hooking the Charging Wire, be sure that it is not broken or twisted.
4-198
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly > Procedure
Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly

Preparation
4-199
2) Clean both sides of the Shield Plate (Right) [1] removed from the Primary Charging
Assembly with lint-free paper [2] moistened with alcohol.

8) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider (Refer to page 4-195).
[2]
9) Replace the Primary Charging Wire (Refer to page 4-196).
[1]
Procedure
1) Clean the Inner Shield Plate [1] of the Primary Charging Assembly with lint-free paper [2]
F-4-336
moistened with alcohol.
[1]
[2]
F-4-335
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly > Procedure
4-199
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit > Disassembling Procedure
When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire

Procedure
4-200
Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit

Preparation



CAUTION:
When replacing this part, Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly and execute the
actions to be taken When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire.
1) Use tweezers to hold the leading edge [A] of the spring [1] to remove it from the hook [2].
2) Remove the Primary Charging Wire [3] from the groove [B] in the direction of the arrow.
4-200
4-201
4) Remove the Charging Wire [1] from the groove [A] in the direction of the arrow.
5) Remove the block [2] with tweezers by pulling it upward, and then remove Primary
Charging Wire Unit [3].
[A]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[B]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[A]
F-4-337
3) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad [2] from the Cleaning Pad Arm [1].
F-4-339
[2]
[1]
F-4-338
4-201
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit > Assembling Procedure
4-202
3) Install the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad [2] to the Cleaning Pad Arm [1].
[2]
CAUTION:
When replacing, do not touch the new Primary Charging Wire [1] directly with hand.
[1]
F-4-342
4) Pass the Charging Wire [1] through the lower part [A] of the groove, and then use tweezers
to hold the leading edge of the spring [2] and attach it to the hook [3].
[1]
CAUTION:
F-4-340
1) Insert the block [1] into the groove [A] of the Primary Charging Assembly.
The groove used for hooking the Charging Wire must be at the position shown in the
figure (the side for installing the Grid).
2) Pass the Charging Wire [2] through the lower part [B] of the groove.
[A]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[B]
[2]
[A]
[1]
F-4-341
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit > Assembling Procedure
[1]
F-4-343
4-202
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly > Procedure
When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit

Procedure
4-203
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly

Preparation

2) Execute the potential control.Z

Procedure
CAUTION:
When replacing this part, execute the actions to be taken When Replacing the Pretransfer Charging Assembly.
x2
[1]
F-4-344
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly > Procedure
4-203
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly > Procedure
4-204
When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
2) While pressing down the claw [1], pull out the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly [2]
horizontally.
Procedure
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-345
CAUTION:
When installing, align the rail [1] of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly with the
protrusion [A] of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly, and then install it horizontally.
[A]
[1]
F-4-346
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly > Procedure
4-204
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Shutter Unit > Procedure
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly

Shutter Unit
Preparation
4-205
1) Remove the Shutter Sheet Holder [2] from the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad
Slider [1].
1 Hook [3]
CAUTION:

Because the Shutter Sheet is taken up when the Shutter Sheet Holder [2] is removed
from the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider [1], attach the hook [3] of the
removed Shutter Sheet Holder to the [A] part of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Shutter in advance.
Procedure
[2]
CAUTION:
[3]
Do not touch the Charging Wire with hand.

[2]
[1]
[3]
[A]
F-4-347
4-205
2) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit [1].
4-206
4) Remove the Post Charging Wire HP Sensor [2] from the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
2 Connectors [2]
Shutter Unit [1].
1 Guide [3]
2 Claws [3]
3 Claws [4]
2 Hooks [4]
2 Bosses [5]
x2
[4]
[2]
x2
x2
[4]
[5]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[5]
F-4-350
F-4-348
3) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor [2] from the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly Shutter Unit [1].
2 Claws [3]
[1]
x2
[3]
[2]
[3]
F-4-349
4-206
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder and the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider > Pro
4-207
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad

Holder and the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning
Pad Slider
Preparation
1) Remove the Shutter Sheet Holder [2] from the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad
Slider [1].
1 Hook [3]
CAUTION:
Because the Shutter Sheet is taken up when the Shutter Sheet Holder [2] is removed
from the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider [1], attach the hook [3] of the
removed Shutter Sheet Holder to the [A] part of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Shutter in advance.

[2]
Procedure
[3]
CAUTION:
Do not touch the Charging Wire with hand.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[A]
F-4-351
2) Move the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider [1] to the cut-off [A] of the Shield
Plate at the front side.
4-207
4-208
NOTE:
When assembling the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Cover, insert the protrusion [1]
of one side and bend the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Cover, and then insert the
protrusion [2] of the opposite side to install.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[A]
F-4-352
3) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Cover (Front) [1] and Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly Cover (Rear) [2].
F-4-354
4) Use tweezers to hold the leading edge [A] of the spring to remove it from the hook [1].
CAUTION:
[1]
When disassembling/assembling the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder

and the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider, do not damage the Charging
Wire.
[2]
[1]
[A]
F-4-353
F-4-355
4-208
4-209
5) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder and the Pre-transfer
Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider [2] from the Cleaning Pad Arm [1].
CAUTION:
When assembling, push in the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder [1]
until it is secured to the 2 claws [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-356
6) Use your fingers to pinch and then remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad
Holder [1] and the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider [2].
F-4-358
When assembling, push the Charging Wire [3] against the 2 pads [2] of the Pretransfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider [1] to install.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-357
[3]
F-4-359
4-209
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire > Assembling Procedure
Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire

Preparation
4-210
CAUTION:
In the case of replacing the Charging Wire on a Charging Wire basis, be sure to use
the dedicated Charging Wire Tension Spring (97-5527) [A].

Do not use the spring [B] attached to the Charging Wire.
Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider (Refer to page 4-207).
CAUTION:
When replacing this part, Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly and execute the
actions to be taken When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire.
[A]
1) Cut off the old Charging Wire [1] from the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly with nippers.
[B]
F-4-361
1) Untie approx. 5 cm of the Charging Wire [2] from the 0.06 mm (wire-diameter) Charging
Wire Reel [1] to make a 2-mm-diameter ring [3] at the edge.
[1]
NOTE:
The ring [3] can be easily made by the following procedure: Wrap the Charging Wire
[2] around the Hex Key [4] to make a full round, and then turn the Hex Key [4] for 3 to 4
times to twist the Charging Wire [2].
[4]
[3]
F-4-360
[1]
[2]
F-4-362
4-210
2) Cut off the edge (extra wire) [A] of the twisted Charging Wire with nippers.
[3]
4-211
4) On the front side of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly, hook the Charging Wire Tension
Spring [1] to the Charging Wire [2] at the position [A] shown in the figure below to twist with
2.
it.
5) Cut off extra length of the Charging Wire [B] with nippers.
[2]
[B]
[A]
[2]
[A]
[1]
F-4-363
3) Attach the ring [1] of the Charging Wire to the hook [2], and then pass it through the groove
[1]
[A] of the rear side and the groove [B] of the sponge.
F-4-365
6) Clean the Charging Wire [2] with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[1]
[B]
[A]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-364
F-4-366
4-211
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly > Procedure
7) Use tweezers to hold the leading edge [A] of the spring to attach it to the hook [1].
4-212
Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly

Preparation
Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider (Refer to page 4-207).
[1]
6) Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire (Refer to page 4-210).
Procedure
[A]
F-4-367
8) Assemble the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider and the Pre-transfer
1) Clean the Upper Duct [1] of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly with lint-free paper [2]
Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder in reverse order.
[1]
F-4-368
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly > Procedure
4-212
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire > Procedure
2) Clean the Inner Shield Plate [1] of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly with lint-free paper [2]
4-213
When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire

Procedure
[1]
[2]
F-4-369
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire > Procedure
4-213
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit (Bk) > Procedure
Removing the Drum Unit (Bk)
4-214
1) Raise the Lock Release Lever [1] to release the lock of the Black Developing Assembly
Preparation: Removing the Toner Container Manually
Pressure Lever [2].

[2]
[2]

Procedure
[1]
CAUTION:
When handling the Drum Unit (Bk), be sure to follow the points to note below.
When handling the Drum Unit (Bk) [1], place it on a sheet of paper [2], etc.
After removing the Drum Unit (Bk), be sure to block light to the drum.
Cover with the Drum Protection Sheet [3] or wrap 5 or more papers [3] around the
drum to block light.
[3]
F-4-371
2) Pull out the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] until it stops to release the
pressure applied on the Developing Assembly (Bk).
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-372
F-4-370
Do not place the Drum (Bk) in a location where is exposed to direct rays of the sun
(e.g. near the window).
Do not store in a location with high/low temperature/humidity, or in a location where
temperature or humidity is dramatically changed.
Do not store in a dusty area or in a location full of ammonia gas or organic solvent
gas.
4-214
4-215
4) Remove the Drum Shaft Cap [1].
CAUTION:
1 Screw [2]
When installing, push in the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] until it stops.
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-375
F-4-373

[1]
x2
F-4-374
4-215
CAUTION:
4-216
CAUTION:
When installing the Drum Shaft Cap [1], be sure to install it in the phase where the
hole [A] of the Drum Shaft Cap is aligned with the leading edge [B] of the Drum Drive
Shaft [2], and at the same time the protrusion [C] of the Drum Shaft Cap is aligned
with the groove [D] of the Drum Flange.
If the phase is mismatched, hook the protrusion of the Drum Shaft Cap to the groove
of the Drum Flange, and then rotate the Drum Flange [3] counterclockwise so that
the phase is matched.
When tightening the screw of the Drum Shaft Cap, tighten the screw while pushing
the Drum Shaft Cap against the rear side, until it is no longer easy to turn the
screwdriver so that it does not cause the drum to rotate clockwise together.
After tightening the screw, check that the end face [A] of the Drum Shaft Cap touches
the drum.
[A]
[A]
[A]
[1]
[3]
[B]
[2]
[B]
[D]
[C]
F-4-376
F-4-377
4-216
5) Hold the handle [A] to pull out the Drum Unit (Bk) [1] for about 30 cm.
4-217
CAUTION:
When installing/removing, do not touch the surface of the Photosensitive Drum.
30
cm
[A]
[1]
F-4-378
6) Hold the front upper part [A] and the left side [B] of the Drum Unit (Bk) and remove it.
F-4-380
[A]
[B]
F-4-379
4-217
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit > Procedure
4-218
Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit
CAUTION:
When installing the Drum Unit (Bk) [1], place the lower right side of the Drum Unit (Bk)
on the guide [A] of the Process Unit Inner Cover, then check that the Drum Unit (Bk) [1]
is placed on the guide [B], and then push it in slowly and horizontally.
Preparation
[B]

Procedure
CAUTION:
Because there is toner on the Drum Cleaning Unit [1], be sure to turn it over and then
place it on a sheet of paper [2], etc.
[2]
[1]
[A]
[1]
F-4-381
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit > Procedure
F-4-382
4-218
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) and
the Side Seal (Front)/(Rear) > Procedure
4-219
Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) and

the Side Seal (Front)/(Rear)
1) Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit [1].

6 Screws [2]
2 Bosses [3]
Preparation
[2]
x6
[1]
[3]
[2]

7) Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit (Refer to page 4-218).
[3]
F-4-383
Procedure
CAUTION:
Because there is toner on the Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) [1], Blade Spacer [2], and the
Side Seal (Front)/(Rear) [3], be sure to place them on a sheet of paper [4], etc.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-384
4-219
1) Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade Cover [1].
4-220
2) Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) [1], Blade Spacer [2], and Side Seal (Front)/(Rear) [3]
2 Screws [2]
from the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit.

3 Screws [4]
CAUTION:
When disassembling/assembling the Drum Cleaning Blade Cover [1], do not bend the
sheet [2].
x3
[3]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-387
CAUTION:
When assembling the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit, be sure to pay attention to the
direction of installing the Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) [1], Blade Spacer [2], and Side Seal
(Front)/(Rear) [3].
F-4-385
x2
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
F-4-386
[1]
F-4-388
4-220
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum (Bk) > Procedure
Removing the Drum (Bk)
4-221
CAUTION:
Preparation
Cover the drum [1] with 5 or more papers or the Lightproof Sheet [2].

Procedure
[2]
CAUTION:
When replacing this part, Cleaning the Patch Sensor Unit and execute the actions to
be taken When Replacing the Drum (Bk).
When installing/removing, do not touch the surface of the Photosensitive Drum.
An illustration from a new photo.
[A]
[1]
F-4-390
NOTE:
If there is abnormal noise from the drum (Bk), apply Barrierta to the circumference of the
3 Slip Rings [1] of the Sliding Assembly of the drum.
(Apply 1 rice-grain sized, 2 rice-grain sized, and 3 rice-grain sized Barrierta from the
innermost side (in order of increasing diameter).)
[1]
F-4-389
F-4-391
4-221
1) Remove the Drum Shaft Bearing (Front) [1] and Drum Shaft Bearing (Rear) [2].
4-222
2) Remove the SD Spacer (Front) [1] and SD Spacer (Rear) [2].
2 Screws [3] for each
x2
[2]
[3]
[2]
x2
[3]
[1]
[1]
F-4-393
F-4-392
4-222
3) Move the Drum (Bk) [1] in the direction of the arrow by about 5.0 mm, and then remove the
Drum Sliding Assembly [2].
ap
CAUTION:
When installing a new drum (Bk), be sure to remove the Lightproof Sheet [3] after
installing the drum [1] to the Drum Unit Frame [2].
pr
ox
4-223
5.
0m
m
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-394
4) Pull out horizontally the Drum Shaft [1] on the front side from the groove [A] of the Drum
Unit Frame, and then remove the Drum (Bk) [2] in the direction of the arrow.
[2]
F-4-396
In addition, be sure to rotate the drum [2] counterclockwise when removing the
Lightproof Sheet [1].
(If the drum is rotated clockwise, the Scoop-up Sheet [3] may be everted.)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[A]
F-4-395
F-4-397
4-223
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Toner Catch Tray (Bk) > Procedure
4-224
Cleaning the Toner Catch Tray (Bk)

Preparation
[4]

Procedure
CAUTION:
Because there is toner on the Toner Catch Tray (Bk) [1], be sure to place it on a sheet of
paper [2], etc.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-4-399
2) Remove soiling accumulated at the [A] part of the Toner Catch Tray (Bk) with lint-free paper
[A]
[1]
F-4-398
1) Remove the Toner Catch Tray (Bk) [1].

1 Screw [2]
1 Boss [3]
1 Claw [4]
F-4-400
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Toner Catch Tray (Bk) > Procedure
4-224
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) > Procedure
When Replacing the Drum (Bk)

Procedure
4-225
Removing the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk)

Preparation
1) Disable the warm-up rotation control.

(COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF)

2) Turn OFF the main power, and replace the Drum (Bk).
3) Turn ON the main power.
4) Execute the drum replacement mode forcibly.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DRMRSETK)

5) Enable the warm-up rotation control.

8) Remove the Drum (Bk) (Refer to page 4-221).
6) Execute Settings/Registration > Adjustment /Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto
Adjust Gradation > Full Adjustment.
Procedure
CAUTION:
Because there is toner on the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Plate [1] and the Drum Cleaning
Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) [2], be sure to place them on a sheet of paper [3], etc.
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-401
4-225
1) Move the Drum Unit (Bk) [1] in the direction of the arrow.
4-226
CAUTION:
When disassembling/assembling the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk), perform
the operation in the order below, because the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) [1]
needs to overlap the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) [2] and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) [3] in the
correct order.
[1]
When disassembling:
Remove the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) [1] first, before the Edge Scraper 1
(Bk) [2] and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) [3].
When assembling:
Install the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) [1] last, after the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk)
[2] and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) [3].
F-4-402
2) Remove the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Plate [1].

1 Screw [2]
1 Protrusion [3]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-403
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-404
4-226
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) and
the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) > Procedure
4-227
Removing the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) and

the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk)
3) Remove the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) [1].

2 Screws [2]
Preparation
x2

[1]

[2]
9) Remove the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) (Refer to page 4-225).
F-4-405
Procedure
CAUTION:
Because there is toner on the Drum Sliding Shaft Support [1], the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) [2]
and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) [3], place them on a sheet of paper [4], etc.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4]
F-4-406
4-227
4-228
1) Move the Drum Unit (Bk) [1] in the direction of the arrow.
CAUTION:
When disassembling/assembling the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk), perform
the operation in the order below, because the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) [1]
needs to overlap the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) [2] and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) [3] in the
correct order.
[1]
When disassembling:
Remove the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) [1] first, before the Edge Scraper 1
(Bk) [2] and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) [3].
When assembling:
Install the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) [1] last, after the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk)
[2] and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) [3].
F-4-408
2) Remove the Drum Sliding Shaft Support [1] at the rear side.
2 Screws [2]
x2
[3]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-409
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-407
4-228
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Fur Brush > Procedure
Removing the Drum Fur Brush
3) Remove the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) [1] and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) [2].
2 Screws [3]
Preparation
[3]
[3]
4-229

[1]

[2]
9) Remove the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) (Refer to page 4-225).
10) Remove the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) (Refer to page 4-227).
Procedure
CAUTION:
Because there is toner on the Drum Fur Brush [1] and the Felt Seal [2], place them on a
sheet of paper [3], etc.
[3]
F-4-410
[2]
[1]
F-4-411
4-229
1) Remove the E-ring [1] and the 2 gears [2].
4-230
3) Remove the E-ring [1], washer [2], and Ball Bearing [3].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-412
2) Remove the Brush Plate [1].
F-4-414
4) Remove the E-ring [1] to move the Drum Fur Brush [2].
5) Remove the gear [3] and the Ball Bearing [4].
1 Screw [2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[4]
F-4-413
[3]
[1]
F-4-415
4-230
6) Remove the Drum Fur Brush [1] and the 2 Felt Seals [2] in the direction of the arrow.
[2]
CAUTION:
[2]
[1]
4-231
When installing the Drum Fur Brush [1], install it with the shaft [A] on the rear side.
[1]
[2]
[2]
When installing the 2 Felt Seals [2], install it with the long side [B] up.
[B]
[2]
[2]
F-4-416
7) Remove the 2 Felt Seals [2] from the Drum Fur Brush [1].
[B]
[2]
[A]
[2]
[1]
F-4-417
[1]
F-4-418
4-231
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly (Bk) > Procedure
Removing the Developing Assembly (Bk)

Preparation
4-232
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface [A] of the Developing Cylinder.

Procedure
CAUTION:
Be sure to place the Developing Assembly (Bk) [1] on a sheet of paper [2], etc.
[A]
[2]
F-4-420
[1]
F-4-419
4-232
4-233
1) Raise the Lock Release Lever [1] to release the Black Developing Assembly Pressure
Lever [2].
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-422
4) Free the harness from the guide [A], and hold the handle [B] to pull out the Developing
Assembly (Bk) [1] for approx. 100 mm.
1 Connector [2]
[A]
[2]
F-4-421
2) Pull out the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] until it stops to release the
pressure applied on the Developing Assembly (Bk).
3) Turn the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] in the direction of the arrow.
10 cm
[1]
[B]
F-4-423
4-233
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the Developing Assembly (Bk) > Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Bk)
5) Hold the front upper part and the left side of the Developing Assembly (Bk) and remove it
horizontally.
4-234
Installing the Developing Assembly (Bk)

Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Bk)
CAUTION:
If the Developing Assembly is tilted inside the host machine, the Developing Assembly
and the drum may come into contact causing damage to the drum. Therefore, be sure to
install or remove it horizontally.
CAUTION:
When taking out a Developing Assembly, do not tilt it or shake it strongly.
Otherwise, toner may scatter.
1) Unpack the Developing Assembly, and remove the packaging material.
CAUTION:
Do not remove the tape [A] of the Supply Mouth until just before installing it in the
host machine.
Do not remove tapes [B] and [C].
Be sure to remove tapes [B] and [C] after the Sleeve Seal because the roller is fixed
so that it cannot move when removing the Sleeve Seal.
Be sure that there is no foreign matter (metal pieces in particular) on your hand when
touching the Developing Assembly. (If any foreign matters get onto the cylinder of the
Developing Assembly, it may cause image failure.)
F-4-424
After unpacking, do not work with the Supply Mouth facing down to avoid any risk of
toner spilling out.
Packing
Material
[B]
[C]
[A]
F-4-425
Supply Mouth
F-4-426
4-234
2) Remove the Sleeve Seal from the Developing Assembly (Bk).
4-235
4) Make the gear of the Sleeve rotate a full turn or 1.5 turns in the direction of the arrow
(clockwise).
CAUTION:
When removing the Sleeve Seal, be careful not to make any crease in the seal.
Otherwise, the Toner Blocking Sheet may be caught and damaged by the crease.
CAUTION:
Do not turn the Developing Sleeve in the reverse direction.
If you rotate it in the reverse direction, toner clots on the Sleeve may damage the Toner
Blocking Sheet on the cylinder.
Black Developing Assembly
NOTE:
Toner clots are removed by rotating the cylinder in the direction of the arrow (clockwise).
Sleeve Seal
F-4-427
3) Remove tape [B] and tape [C] securing the roller.

Gear
F-4-429
[B]
[C]
F-4-428
4-235
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the Developing Assembly (Bk) > Procedure
5) Remove the tape [A] and the packaging material of the Supply Mouth.
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove the packaging material of the Supply Mouth.
4-236
Procedure
CAUTION:
When replacing this part, execute the When Replacement the Developing Assembly
and Cleaning the Developing Assembly Toner Blocking Sheet (Bk).
1) Align the rail [A] of the Developing Assembly (Bk) with the rail receptacle [B] of the host
machine, and then insert the Developing Assembly (Bk) horizontally about 2/3 of its length.
[B]
[A]
[A]
Toner Mouth Packing
F-4-430
F-4-431
2) Press the handle [A] of the Developing Assembly (Bk) with your finger to align the 2
Positioning Pins [1] with the 2 boss holes [2], and push the assembly until it stops.
[1]
[2]
[2]
[A]
F-4-432
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the Developing Assembly (Bk) > Procedure
4-236
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacement the Developing Assembly > Procedure
3) Secure the harness using the Harness Guide and the Reuse Band, and connect the
connector.
4-237
When Replacement the Developing Assembly

Procedure
2) Execute the initial installation mode of the Developing Assembly.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y/M/C/K)
x3

Connector
Harness Guide
Reuse Band
Harness
Guide
F-4-433
4) Turn the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] counterclockwise, and push in the
Developing Assembly (Bk) to apply pressure.
[1]
F-4-434
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacement the Developing Assembly > Procedure
4-237
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Developing Assembly Sleeve Cover (Bk)/
Developing Assembly Toner Blocking Sheet (Bk) > Procedure
4-238
Cleaning the Developing Assembly Sleeve Cover (Bk)/

Developing Assembly Toner Blocking Sheet (Bk)
2) Clean the inner surface [A] of the Toner Blocking Sheet [1] of the Developing Assembly with
lint-free paper.
CAUTION:
Preparation
When cleaning, do not touch the surface [2] of the Developing Cylinder.
Check that the developer is not placed on the Toner Blocking Sheet before returning
it to the host machine.

[A]
Procedure
[1]
[1]
CAUTION:
Clean the following parts at work intervals of 150,000 sheets, or as needed basis when
soiling is remarkable.
[2]
1) Clean the Sleeve Cover (Bk) [1] of the Developing Assembly with lint-free paper.
F-4-436
[1]
F-4-435
4-238
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Developing Assembly Sleeve Cover (Bk)/
Developing Assembly Toner Blocking Sheet (Bk) > Procedure
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
Removing the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)
4-239
CAUTION:
Preparation
When handling the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) [1], place it on a sheet of paper [2] and
cover it with the Drum Protection Sheet, or wrap 5 or more papers [3] around it to
block light.

[2]
Procedure
CAUTION:
When replacing this part, Cleaning the Toner Catch Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C) and execute
the actions to be taken When Replacing the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) and the When
Replacement the Developing Assembly.
CAUTION:
[3]
[1]
F-4-438
When handling the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C), be sure to follow the points to note below.
Do not touch the surface [A] of the Photosensitive Drum.
Do not place the Drum in a location where is exposed to direct rays of the sun (e.g.
near the window).
gas.
[A]
F-4-437
4-239
NOTE:
This procedure explains the case for the Process Unit (Y) [1].
Be sure to perform the same procedure for the Process Unit (M) [2]/(C) [3].
4-240
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and hook the handle [2] of the Drum Cartridge with your
index finger to pull out the Process Unit [3] for about 200 mm.
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-439
20 c
[3]
F-4-440
4-240
2) Hold the front upper part and the left side of the Process Unit [1] and pull it out horizontally.
CAUTION:
If the Process Unit [1] is tilted inside the host machine, it may damage the ITB.
Therefore, hold it horizontally when pulling out/pushing in.
4-241
CAUTION:
When installing, place the left side [A] of the Process Unit on the guide [1] of the
Process Unit Inner Cover, and align the lower right side [B] of the Process Unit with the
guide [2] of the Process Unit Inner Cover. Then push it in horizontally.
[1]
F-4-441
[1]
[A]
[1]
[B]
[2]
F-4-443
F-4-442
4-241
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)
from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
NOTE:
The following shows the guides [1] and [2] on the Process Unit Inner Cover for (Y), (M),
and (C).
4-242
Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)

from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)
Preparation
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]

Procedure
CAUTION:
F-4-444
Because there is toner on the Developing Assembly [1] and the Drum Unit [2], be sure
to place them on a sheet of paper [3], etc.
To prevent the sensitivity of the Photosensitive Drum from deteriorating, note the
following points.
Do not touch the surface [A] of the Photosensitive Drum.
To prevent the Photosensitive Drum from exposure to light for a long time, cover it
with 5 or more papers [4] or the Lightproof Sheet [4].
[A]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
F-4-445
4-242
CAUTION:
4-243
CAUTION:
Do not place the Process Unit and the Drum in a location where is exposed to direct
rays of the sun (e.g. near the window).
When connecting the Developing Assembly and the Drum Unit, move the lock [B] of the
Connecting Arm to the position where the lines [A] of the Connecting Arm can be seen,
and then lock it.
gas.
[B]
[B]
1) While pressing the locks [1] of the Connecting Arms, release the 2 Connecting Arms [2] to
open them, and separate the Developing Assembly [3] and the Drum Unit [4].
1 Connector [6]
[1]
[A]
[A]
F-4-447
[2]
[1]
[4]
x2
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
F-4-446
4-243
from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Y)
4-244
Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)

and Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)
CAUTION:
A Developing Assembly (for color use) is specified with color.
Supply Mouth
Packing
Material
When taking out a Developing Assembly (for color use), do not tilt it or shake it
strongly.
Otherwise, toner may scatter.
When replacing the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C), Cleaning the Developing Assembly Toner
Blocking Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C) and execute the actions to be taken When Replacing the
Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C).
[B]
[C]
[A]
F-4-448
1) Unpack the Developing Assembly, and remove the packaging material.
2) Remove the Sleeve Seal from the Developing Assembly.

CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Do not remove the tape [A] of the Supply Mouth until just before installing it in the
host machine.
Do not remove tapes [B] and [C].

Be sure to remove tapes [B] and [C] after the Sleeve Seal because the roller is fixed
so that it cannot move when removing the Sleeve Seal.
Be sure that there is no foreign matter (metal pieces in particular) on your hand when
touching the Developing Assembly. (If any foreign matters get onto the cylinder of the
Developing Assembly, it may cause image failure.)
Color Developing Assembly
After unpacking, do not work with the Supply Mouth facing down to avoid any risk of
toner spilling out.
Sleeve Seal
F-4-449
4-244
4-245
3) Remove tape [B] and tape [C] securing the roller.
5) Take out the Drum Unit from the packaging box.

6) Unpack the Drum Unit, and remove the packaging material.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the Photosensitive Drum.
During work, cover it with the Protection Sheet.
Protection Sheet
[B]
[C]
F-4-450
Packing
Material
4) Make the coupling of the Sleeve rotate a full turn or 1.5 turns in the direction of the arrow
(clockwise).
CAUTION:
If you rotate it in the reverse direction, toner clots on the Sleeve may damage the Toner
F-4-452
7) Pull the 2 spacers in the direction of the arrow to remove them from the Drum Unit.
Spacer
NOTE:
Toner clots are removed by rotating the cylinder in the direction of the arrow (clockwise).
Packing
Material
F-4-453
Coupling
F-4-451
4-245
4-246
8) Release the lock of the Fixation Lever of the Drum Unit to lift up the Fixation Lever.
CAUTION:
Check to see whether the lock is securely in place or the grooves as shown in the figure
are visible. (If the lock is not completely secure when the Process Unit is introduced into
the host machine, it may not be possible to remove it from the host machine.)
Lock
Lock
Fixing Lever
F-4-454
9) Insert the 2 protrusions of the Developing Assembly into the Drum Unit (yellow) to join
the Developing Assembly and the Drum Unit, and then turn over the Fixation Lever in the
Groove
direction of the arrow to assemble the Process Unit.

F-4-456
Fixation Lever
Fixation Lever
10) Secure the harness using the Harness Guide and the Reuse Band, and connect the
Slot
connector.
Protrusion
Slot
x4
Protrusion
Connector
Harness Guide
Reuse Band
Color Developing
Assembly
Harness Guide
F-4-457
Color Drum Unit
F-4-455
4-246
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Toner Catch Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
11) Remove the tape [A] and the packaging material of the Supply Mouth.
4-247
Cleaning the Toner Catch Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C)

Preparation
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove the packaging material of the Supply Mouth.

5) Separate the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C) from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to
page 4-242).
[A]
Procedure
1) Remove soiling at the surface [A] of the Sleeve Cover, as well as the front side [B] and the
Toner Mouth Packing
back side [C] of the Toner Catch Sheet of the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C) with dry lintfree paper.
[1]
[A]
F-4-458
[B]
[1]
[1]
[C]
F-4-459
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Toner Catch Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
4-247
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
4-248
When Replacing the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)
CAUTION:
Procedure
Do not touch the surface of the sleeve [A] with the lint-free paper or finger.

2) Turn OFF the main power, and replace the Drum Unit.
3) Turn ON the main power.
4) Execute the drum replacement mode forcibly.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DRMRSETY/M/C)
[A]

6) Execute Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto
Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust.
F-4-460
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
4-248
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Container Manually > Procedure
Cleaning the Developing Assembly

Toner Blocking Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C)
4-249
Removing the Toner Container Manually

Preparation
Preparation
1) Open the Upper Front Cover.


5) Separate the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C) from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to
Procedure
page 4-242).
NOTE:
This procedure explains how to remove the Toner Container (Bk).
Be sure to perform the same procedure for the Toner Container (Y)/(M)/(C).
Procedure
1) Clean the inner surface [A] of the Toner Blocking Sheet [1] of the Developing Assembly with
[Bk]
[C]
[M]
[Y]
lint-free paper.
CAUTION:
When cleaning, do not touch the surface [2] of the Developing Cylinder.
Check that the developer is not placed on the Toner Blocking Sheet before returning
it to the host machine.
[A]
[1]
[1]
F-4-462
[2]
F-4-461
4-249
1) Remove the Toner Container Removing Tool [1].
4-250
3) Rotate the Toner Container Removing Tool [1] counterclockwise to set the Toner Container
1 Screw [2]
to "unlocked state".
Unlocked state refers to the following condition:
(1) The Toner Replacement Small Door [2] at the front side opens.
[1]
(2) A click sound is heard.
[2]
(3) After that, the pin pops out to its maximum (approx. 1 cm).
1 cm
Toner Replacement Small Door opens
F-4-463
Locked
2) nsert the Toner Container Removing Tool [2] into the Toner Container Lock Shaft [1].
[2]
Unlocked
[1]
F-4-465
[1]
F-4-464
[2]
F-4-466
4-250
NOTE: Unlocked state of the Toner Container

Normally, the Toner Container is "locked" so that it cannot be taken out.
To manually take out the Toner Container, you need to rotate the Lock Shaft
counterclockwise to set it to the "unlocked state".
The Toner Container is in the "unlocked state" when the pin pops out to its maximum at
this moment.
Because the Lock Shaft cannot be rotated reversely, if you miss the "unlocked state"
once, wait for the next turn when the pin pops out to its maximum, which indicates the
next "unlocked state".
4-251
1 cm
1-roundtrip
Toner Replacement Small Door opens
Unlocked
Locked
Locked
1 cm
1 cm
1-roundtrip
2-roundtrip
Unlocked
Locked
F-4-467
4-251
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Tray (Bk) > Procedure
4-252
Removing the Hopper Tray (Bk)
4) Take out the Toner Container [1].
Preparation
1) Remove the Toner Container (Bk).
NOTE:
Before turning OFF the power of the host machine, use the Control Panel to remove the
Toner Container of the corresponding color.
If the power of the host machine is already turned OFF, see the procedure on manually
removing the Toner Container to remove the Toner Container of the corresponding color.
3) Remove the Front Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
[1]
F-4-468

CAUTION:
Even when the Toner Container is "locked", you can install it and close the Toner
Replacement Small Door.
Procedure
1) Free the harness [1].
In this case, toner is not supplied from the Toner Container and "Remaining Toner Error
Message" appears.
1 Connector [2]
When this happens, remove and then install the Toner Container again.
1 Reuse Band [4]
1 Harness Guide [3]
[4]
[1]
x2
[3]
[2]
F-4-469
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Tray (Bk) > Procedure
4-252
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Tray (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
2) Free the 2 harnesses [1] from the 2 guides [2], and disconnect the 2 connectors [3] and the
2 Relay Connectors [4].
4-253
Removing the Hopper Tray (Y)/(M)/(C)

Preparation
1) Remove the Toner Container (Y)/(M)/(C).
x2
[2]
NOTE:
removing the Toner Container to remove the Toner Container of the corresponding color.
[1]
[3]
x2

[4]

F-4-470
3) Remove the Hopper Tray (Bk) [1] while bending it.

2 Screws [2]
Procedure
NOTE:
This procedure explains how to remove the Hopper Tray (Y).
Be sure to perform the same procedure for the Hopper Tray (M)/(C).
x2
[1]
[C]
[2]
[M]
F-4-471
[Y]
F-4-472
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Tray (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
4-253
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) > Preparation
4-254
Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Bk)

1 Wire Saddle [2]
Preparation

1 Connector [4]
1 Harness Guide [5]

[1]

[2]

x2
[3]
8) Push in the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] to apply pressure.
[5]
[4]
F-4-473
3) Remove the Hopper Tray (Y) [1] while bending it.

1 Screw [2]
2 Bosses [3]
[1]
F-4-475
9) Close the Process Unit Inner Cover [1].
[1]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2]
F-4-474
F-4-476
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) > Preparation
4-254
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) > Assembling Procedure
4-255

NOTE:
Because the positioning of the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) is necessary for installation, tighten
the screws according to the following order.
1) Remove the Flywheel [1].
1) Install the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) [1], and tighten the 3 screws [3] temporarily.
3 Screws [2]
2 Connectors [2]
x3
x2
x3
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
F-4-477
2) Remove the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) [1].
[2]
F-4-479
2) Install the Drum Cap [1].
2 Connectors [2]
1 Screw [2]
3 Screws [3]
x2
[1]
x3
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
F-4-478
F-4-480
4-255
4-256
5) Install the Flywheel [1].

3 Screws [2]
[1]
x3
[2]
F-4-481
4) Install the Front Inner Handle Left Cover [1] and the Front Inner Handle Right Cover [2] in
[1]
the direction of the arrows, and tighten a screw [3] for each of them.
[2]
F-4-483
6) Finally, push the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) [1] against the Rear Plate, and fully tighten the 3
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
screws [2].
[1]
F-4-482
[2]
[2]
F-4-484
7) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover, and remove the Drum Cap installed in step 2.]
4-256
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Disassembling Procedure
Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)
4-257
Preparation
NOTE:
This procedure explains how to remove the Drum Drive Unit (C).
Be sure to perform the same procedure for the Drum Drive Unit (M)/(Y).

[1]
[C]
[M]
[Y]
F-4-486
1) Remove the Waste Toner Container Cover [1].

F-4-485

1 Finger Screw [2] (to loosen)

2 Hooks [3]

[2]
[3]
[1]
F-4-487
4-257
4) Remove the Right Middle Cover [1].
1 Claw [2]
2 Screws [2]
4-258
1 Hook [3]
[2]
x2
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-4-490
F-4-488
3) Remove the Lower Right Cover 3 [1].
5) Remove the Flywheel [1].

3 Screws [2]
2 Screws [2]
NOTE:
When removing the Drum Drive Unit (M)/(Y), there is no need to remove the Flywheel.
[2]
[1]
x2
[1]
x3
[2]
[2]
F-4-489
[2]
F-4-491
4-258
4-259
3 Screws (RS) [2]

1 Screw (Tapping) [3]
NOTE:
When removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y), there is no need to remove the Duct.
NOTE:
When removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y) [1], remove the Wire Saddle [2] and the Relay
Connector [3].
[1]
[2]
x4
[2]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2]
F-4-494
[2]
F-4-492
7) Tilt the PCB Mounting Base [1] forward.

2 Screws [2]
2 Connectors [3]
NOTE:
When removing the Drum Drive Unit (M)/(Y), there is no need to tilt the PCB Mounting
Base forward.
[3]
x2
[3]
[1]
x2
F-4-495
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-493
4-259
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Assembling Procedure
9) Remove the Drum Drive Unit (C) [1].

3 Screws [2]
NOTE:
Because the positioning of the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) is necessary for installation,
tighten the screws according to the following order.
[1]
x3
4-260
[2]
1) Install the Drum Drive Unit (C) [1], and tighten the 3 screws [2] temporarily.
[1]
x3
[2]
[2]
F-4-496
[2]
F-4-497

[1]
F-4-498
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Assembling Procedure
4-260
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk) > Preparation
3) Install the Front Inner Handle Left Cover [1] and the Front Inner Handle Right Cover [2] in
the direction of the arrows, and tighten a screw [3] for each of them.
[3]
[1]
[2]
4-261
Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk)

Preparation
[3]

NOTE:
removing the Toner Container to remove the Toner Container of the corresponding
color.
F-4-499
4) Finally, push the Drum Drive Unit (C) [1] against the Rear Plate, and fully tighten the 3
screws [2].

[1]

[2]
[2]
F-4-500
[1]
F-4-501
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk) > Preparation
4-261
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk) > Disassembling Procedure
4-262

[1]
CAUTION:
Place the Hopper Unit (Bk) [1] on a sheet of paper [2], etc. when disassembling/
assembling.
[1]
F-4-502

16) Remove the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-254).
[2]
F-4-503
1) Pull the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] toward the front to release the
pressure.
[1]
F-4-504
4-262
4) Remove the Fan Unit [1].
3 Screws (RS) [2]
2 Screws [2]
4-263
[1]
[2]
x2
[2]
x4
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
F-4-507
F-4-505
5) While opening the upper part of the Hopper Shield [1], pull it forward to remove it.
1 Claw [2]
1 Hook [3]
2 Connectors [2]
3 Wire Saddles [3]
[2]
1 Reuse Band [4]

1 Edge Saddle [5]
[2]
x2
[5]
x5
[3]
[1]
F-4-508
[1]
[4]
[3]
F-4-506
4-263
6) Remove the Rail Cover (Front) [1] and the spring [2].
8) Remove the Hopper Unit (Bk) [1].
1 Screw [3]
1 Screw [2]
4-264
1 Stepped Screw [3]

CAUTION:
Be sure to hold the Rail Cover (Front) [1] not to drop the spring [2] when removing it.
CAUTION:
When removing the Hopper Unit (Bk), be sure not to spill toner [2] from the Toner
Supply Mouth [1].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-509
7) Remove the screw [1] of the pipe and the Rail Cover (Rear) [2].
[1]
[2]
F-4-511
[2]
[2]
x2
F-4-510
[3]
[1]
F-4-512
4-264
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk) > Assembling Procedure
4-265
2) Install the Hopper Unit (Bk) [1].

3 Bosses [2]
1 Stepped Screw [3]
CAUTION:
1 Screw [4]
When assembling the Hopper Unit (Bk), pull out the Small Door Open/Close Shaft [1] at
the front side of the host machine by approx. 50 mm, and then install the Hopper Unit
(Bk).
[4]
[2]
x2
5
cm
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-515
3) Match the phase of the tooth [A] of the Rail Cover (Rear) [1] with the tooth [B] of the gear [2],
F-4-513
and then push in the Rail Cover (Rear) [1] until it stops.
[1]
NOTE:
When assembling the Hopper Unit (Bk), use the following procedure to match the
phase of the gear.
[1]
1) Be sure that the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] is pulled to the front.
[A]
[B]
[2]
[2]
F-4-516
[1]
F-4-514
4-265
4) Align the line [A] on the pipe of the Hopper Unit (Bk) with the line [B] on the Toner Supply
Mouth, and then use the screw [1] to secure it.
4-266
5) Install the Rail Cover (Front) [1].

1 Spring [2]
1 Screw [3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[A]
[B]
F-4-517
F-4-519
CAUTION:
6) Install the Hopper Shield, Fan Unit, harness, and duct.
Be sure that the Rail Cover (Rear) [1] touches the plate [2] on the rear side.
Be sure to rotate the Toner Supply Mouth in the direction of the arrow until it stops so
that the line [A] on the pipe of the Hopper Unit (Bk) is aligned with the line [B] on the
Toner Supply Mouth.
[2]
[A]
[1]
[B]
F-4-518
4-266
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)
4-267
Preparation
[1]
1) Remove the Toner Container (Y)/(M)/(C).

NOTE:
Toner Container (Y)/(M)/(C).
removing the Toner Container to remove the Toner Container (Y)/(M)/(C).
F-4-521
14) Remove the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-257).
15) Remove the Developing Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-276).
Procedure
CAUTION:
Place the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) [1] on a sheet of paper [2], etc. when disassembling/
assembling.
[1]
[1]
F-4-520
[2]
F-4-522
4-267
1) Close the Controller Box [1].
4-268
3) Open the Controller Box [1].

CAUTION:
2 Connectors [3]
3 Wire Saddles [4]
When closing the Controller Box, be careful not to trap the harness.
1 Reuse Band [5]

1 Edge Saddle [6]
[1]
[1]
x2
[5]
[3]
[3]
x5
[6]
[2]
[4]
F-4-523
2) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C).
F-4-525
5) Remove the Fan Unit [1].

2 Screws [2]
x2
[2]
x2
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-524
F-4-526
4-268
6) While opening the upper part of the Hopper Shield [1], pull it forward to remove it.
4-269
8) Remove the screw [1] of the pipe and the Rail Cover (Rear) [2].
1 Claw [2]
1 Hook [3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
F-4-529
[3]
[1]
F-4-527
7) Remove the Rail Cover (Front) [1] and the spring [2].
[2]
1 Screw [3]
CAUTION:
Be sure to hold the Rail Cover (Front) [1] not to drop the spring [2] when removing it.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-530
F-4-528
4-269
10) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] and remove the 2 Wire Saddles [2].
12) Remove the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) [1].

1 Wire Saddle [2]
[1]
x3
4-270
3 Screws [3]
[2]
4 Bosses [4]
1 Hook [5]
x2
[2]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[1]
x3
[4]
[4]
F-4-531
11) Remove the Hopper Cooling Suction Fan [1].

1 Connector [2]
[3]
1 Claw [3]
F-4-533
[1]
CAUTION:
When disassembling/assembling the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C), pay attention to the
following points.
[3]
When removing, be sure to avoid the contact with the gear [1] of the Hopper Unit (Bk).
[2]
F-4-532
[1]
F-4-534
4-270
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Assembling Procedure
4-271
CAUTION:
Do not spill toner [2] from the Toner Supply Mouth [1].
CAUTION:
[1]
When assembling the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C), pull out the 3 Small Door Open/Close
Shafts [1] at the front side of the host machine by approx. 50 mm, and then install the
Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C).
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
5c
[1]
F-4-535
Do not hook the harness [1] at the upper part of the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) to the
guides [A].
[A]
F-4-537
NOTE:
When assembling the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C), use the following procedure to match
the phase of the gear.
1) Be sure that the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] is pulled to the front.
[1]
F-4-536
[1]
F-4-538
4-271
2) Install the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) [1].
4-272
4) Align the line [A] on the pipe of the Hopper Unit (Bk) with the line [B] on the Toner Supply
Mouth, and then use the screw [1] to secure it.
1 Hook [2]
4 Bosses [3]
[1]
3 Screws [4]
1 Wire Saddle [5]
[5]
x3
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[A]
[B]
[3]
F-4-541
CAUTION:
[4]
F-4-539
3) Match the phase of the tooth [A] of the Rail Cover (Rear) [1] with the tooth [B] of the gear [2],
and then push in the Rail Cover (Rear) [1] until it stops.
Be sure that the Rail Cover (Rear) [1] touches the plate [2] on the rear side.
Be sure to rotate the Toner Supply Mouth in the direction of the arrow until it stops so
that the line [A] on the pipe of the Hopper Unit (Bk) is aligned with the line [B] on the
Toner Supply Mouth.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[A]
[B]
[2]
[2]
[A]
[B]
F-4-540
F-4-542
4-272
5) Install the Rail Cover (Front) [1].
4-273
7) Install the 3 connectors [1] and the 2 Wire Saddles [2].
1 Spring [2]
[1]
1 Screw [3]
x3
[2]
[1]
[2]
x2
[3]
[1]
F-4-545
8) Install the DC Controller Cover [1].

F-4-543
4 Screws [2]
6) Install the Hopper Cooling Suction Fan [1].
[2]
1 Connector [2]
1 Claw [3]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-4-546
[2]
F-4-544
4-273
9) Install the Hopper Shield [1].
11) Connect the harness [2].
1 Claw [2]
2 Connectors [3]
1 Hook [3]
3 Wire Saddles [4]
4-274
1 Reuse Band [5]
[2]
1 Edge Saddle [6]

[5]
[3]
[6]
[2]
x2
x5
[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
F-4-547
10) Install the Fan Unit [1].

2 Screws [2]
F-4-549
12) Close the Controller Box [1].

[2]
CAUTION:
x2
When closing the Controller Box, be careful not to trap the harness.
13) Install the 2 screws [1] of the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C).
x2
[2]
[1]
F-4-548
[1]
F-4-550
14) Open the Controller Box.
4-274
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit (Bk) > Procedure
Removing the Developing Drive Unit (Bk)
4-275
Preparation
[1]

NOTE:
removing the Toner Container to remove the Toner Container of the corresponding
color.
F-4-552
15) Remove the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-254).
16) Remove the Hopper Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-254).
Procedure
3 Connectors [2]
5 Wire Saddles [3]
1 Edge Saddle [4]
[1]
x3
[1]
F-4-551
x6
[3]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[2]
F-4-553
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit (Bk) > Procedure
4-275
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Preparation
4-276
Removing the Developing Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)
2) Remove the Developing Drive Unit (Bk) [1].

1 Timing Belt [2]
Preparation
5 Screws [3]
[3]
[1]

x5
[3]

[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-554
CAUTION:
When assembling the Developing Drive Unit (Bk), be sure to hook the leading edge [A]
of the spring to the groove [B] of the Developing Drive Unit (Bk).
F-4-556

10) Remove the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-257).
[B]
[A]
F-4-555
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Preparation
4-276
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Container > Procedure
4-277
Removing the Waste Toner Container
Procedure
1) Remove the Developing Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) [1].
Procedure
1 Connector [2]
1) Remove the Waste Toner Container Cover [1].
5 Screws [3]
[3]
[3]
1 Finger Screw [2]
[3]
2 Hooks [3]
x5
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
F-4-557
[3]
[1]
F-4-558
2) Pull out the Waste Toner Container [1].
[1]
F-4-559
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Container > Procedure
4-277
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Preparation
4-278
3) Take out the lid [1] from the Lid Storage of the host machine and use it to cover the old
Waste Toner Container [2].
[1]
[1]
Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner

Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed)
Preparation
CAUTION:
When delivery system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the host
machine.

[2]
[2]

F-4-560
NOTE:
Set the lid [1] of a new Waste Toner Container to the Lid Storage [2] of the host machine.
[1]
5) Remove the Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-330).

7) Remove the Reverse Unit (Refer to page 4-331).
10) Remove the ITB Frame (Refer to page 4-137).
11) Put the ITB Slide Rail back in the host machine.
12) Remove the Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285).
13) Remove the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-310).
[2]
14) Store the Fixing Feed Unit Rail.

15) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-325).
F-4-561

24) Remove the Patch Sensor Unit (Refer to page 4-164).
4-278
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Preparation
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Procedure
4-279
Procedure
CAUTION:
When disassembling/assembling the Waste Toner Secondary Feed Unit and the
Waste Toner Primary Feed Unit, prepare a dedicated vacuum cleaner for toner
because the toner may scatter around.
Because the toner may spill out from the 8 Toner Collection Mouths [A] of the Waste
Toner Secondary Feed Unit [1] and Waste Toner Primary Feed Unit [2], place them
on a sheet of paper [3], etc. when disassembling/assembling.
[A]
[1]
[A]
[2]
F-4-562

[1]
[1]
[A]
[A]
[3]
F-4-564
F-4-563

4-279
4-280
1) Insert a sheet of paper to the clearance at the lower side of the Pre-transfer Charging High
Voltage PCB (Bk) [2] to prevent the spring to be removed in step 3 from falling to the back
4) To avoid toner from spilling out, cover the Toner Collection Mouth [1] of the Waste Toner
Secondary Feed Unit with a tape [2] measuring approx. 5 cm x 5 cm.
side of the Pickup Feed Driver PCB [1].

[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
m
50
50 mm
[1]
F-4-567
F-4-565
2) Place a sheet of paper [1] on the Waste Toner Bottle Base because toner may spill out.
3) Remove the Waste Toner Cap Base [2].
5) Remove the Front Door Switch Cover [1].

2 Screws [2]
4 Protrusions [3]
[1]
1 Spring [4]
x2
[2]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[3]
F-4-568
[1]
F-4-566
4-280
4-281
6) Place a sheet of paper [1] inside the host machine.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
When assembling, align the positioning boss of the Fixing Upper Duct with the hole of
the host machine to install.
Be sure to place a sheet of paper [1] inside the host machine during work.
This is to prevent the screws from falling off and becoming missing.
8) Remove the ITB Pressure Plate (Rear left) [1].
This is because toner may spill out when the Waste Toner Secondary Feed Unit is
removed.
1 Screw [2]
[1]
F-4-571
[1]
7) Remove the Fixing Upper Duct [1].
[2]
9) Remove the ITB Drawer Base [1].
F-4-569
4 Connectors [2]
2 Screws [3]
1 Screw [2]
1 Boss [3]
[2]
1 Protrusion [4]
[1]
[4]
[3]
x4
[3]
[2]
x2
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-4-572
F-4-570
4-281
4-282
10) Remove the Waste Toner Gear Cover [1].
12) Remove the Waste Toner Secondary Feed Unit [1].
1 Screw [2]
CAUTION:
[1]
When installing/removing the Waste Toner Secondary Feed Unit [1], be careful not to
spill toner.
[2]
F-4-573
11) Remove the Waste Toner Drive Gear Unit (2) [1].
1 Screw (RS M3) [2]
[1]
2 Screws (RS M4) [3]
[1]
F-4-575
[3]
[1]
CAUTION:
[2]
x4
Be careful not to lose the bushing [2] and the gear [3] of the Waste Toner Secondary
Feed Unit [1] when disassembling/assembling.
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
F-4-574
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-576
4-282
4-283
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
When installing the Waste Toner Secondary Feed Unit, go through the following steps.
1) While the gear (white) [1] of the Waste Toner Secondary Feed Unit is at upper side,
see the clearance between the gear (white) and the case to check whether the
Shaft Support (8 mm diameter) [2] does not project approx. 1 mm from the case.
If operating the machine while the Shaft Support (8 mm diameter) is projected from
the case, sliding resistance between the end of the screw and the case is increased
which may cause occurrence of E00013-0001. To prevent it occurs, perform steps 2
and 3.
2) Remove the gear (white) [1] and the Parallel Pin [2], and hold and then turn the
projection (turning stopper) [4] of the bushing (8 mm diameter) [3] to fit to the groove
[5] of the case.
[1]
[2]
[3]
1mm
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
F-4-578
3) Reinstall the Parallel Pin and the gear (white), and check that the bushing (8 mm
diameter) does not project from the case by seeing from end-on again.
F-4-577
4-283
4-284
13) Remove the Waste Toner Primary Feed Unit [1].

2 Bosses [2]
1 Screw [3]
CAUTION:
When installing/removing the Waste Toner Primary Feed Unit [1], be careful not to spill
toner.
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-579
CAUTION:
When assembling, insert the leading edge into the U-shaped Plate [1], and fit the 2
Positioning Bosses [2] to the holes of the host machine to install it firmly into place.
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-580
4-284
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Unit > Procedure
Fixing System
4-285
2) Remove the Fixing Feed Left Inner Cover [1].

1 Screw [2]
1 Boss [3]
Removing the Fixing Unit
1 Hook [4]
Preparation
Procedure
[1]
CAUTION:
Because the Fixing Unit is hot, be sure to perform disassembly/assembly after it is
cooled down.
[4]
[3]
[2]
F-4-582
1 Screw [2]
2 Hooks [3]
[2]
[3]
NOTE:
The Fixing Feed Right Upper Inner Cover [1] can be installed easily by fitting the hook [2]
into the groove [3] of the Fixing Feed Unit in advance.
[1]
[2]
F-4-581
[3]
[1]
F-4-583
4-285
3)Remove the Fixing Unit [1].
4-286
CAUTION:
5 Connectors [2]
Be sure to install the Fixing Fee Unit by fitting the 2 protrusions [A] of the Fixing
Feed Unit to the 2 Positioning Holes [B] of the Fixing Unit.
[3]
Do not hit the Fixing Unit against the Harness Guide [C] when removing/installing.
[B]
[A]
[3]
[2]
[A]
x5
[C]
[2]
[B]
[2]
[1]
F-4-584
F-4-585
4-286
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Web Unit > Procedure
Removing the Fixing Web Unit
4-287
2) While holding the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit [1], remove the Fixing Web Unit [2].
Preparation
CAUTION:

Be careful not to damage the surface of the Fixing Pressure Roller [1] and the Fixing
Heat Soaking Roller [2] when disassembling/assembling.
Procedure
1) Open the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit [1].
[1]
[2]
F-4-587
[1]
F-4-586
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-588
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Web Unit > Procedure
4-287
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Replacing the Fixing Web > Disassembling Procedure
Replacing the Fixing Web
4-288
1) Remove the Fixing Web Guide [1].

1 Screw [2]
Preparation
[2]

3) Remove the Fixing Web Unit (Refer to page 4-287).
[1]
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the Fixing Web Roller when replacing.
F-4-590
2) Turn the bushing [1], hold the Fixing Web Retainer Plate [2], and then remove the Fixing
Web (roll-out side) [3].
3) Remove the bushing [1].
F-4-589
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-591
4-288
4) Turn over the Fixing Web Unit [1].
4-289
5) Turn the bushing [1], and remove the Fixing Web (take-up side) [2].
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-4-592
CAUTION:
When turning over the Fixing Web Unit, be careful not to damage the Fixing Web Level
Detection Flag [1].
[2]
F-4-594
[1]
F-4-593
4-289
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Replacing the Fixing Web > Assembling Procedure
4-290
1) Align the cut-off [A] of the Fixing Web (take-up side) with the Pin [1] to install the Fixing
Web (take-up side) [2].
1 Bushing [3]
CAUTION:
Because the Fixing Web needs to follow the direction to take up, be sure to install it in
the direction as shown in the figure below.
[1]
Fixing Web (take-up side) [1]

Fixing Web (roll-out side) [2]
[A]
[1]
[2]
F-4-595
[2]
[3]
F-4-596
2) Turn over the Fixing Web Unit [1].
[1]
F-4-597
4-290
3) Hold the Fixing Web Retainer Plate [1], and install the Fixing Web (roll-out side) [2] by
aligning it with the boss [3].
4-291
4) Make sure that there is no extra slack of the Fixing Web [2] by turning the gear [1] of the
Fixing Web (take-up side) in the direction of the arrow.
1 Bushing [4]
[2]
CAUTION:
Be sure to place the Fixing Web Level Detection Flag [1] inside the Fixing Web [2].
[1]
[1]
F-4-600
5) Install the Fixing Web Guide [1].

1 Screw [2]
[2]
[2]
F-4-598
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-4-601
[4]
[1]
F-4-599
4-291
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Web Roller > Procedure
Removing the Fixing Web Roller
4-292
2) Turn the bushing [1], hold the Fixing Web Retainer Plate [2], and then remove the Fixing
Web Roller (roll-out side) [3].
Preparation

3) Remove the Fixing Web Unit (Refer to page 4-287).
Procedure
CAUTION:
1) Remove the Fixing Web Guide [1].
[1]
[3]
1 Screw [2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-603
F-4-602
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Web Roller > Procedure
4-292
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit > Procedure
4-293
Removing the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit
4) Remove the Fixing Web Roller [1].

2 Springs [2]
Preparation
2 E-rings [3]
2 Bushings [4]

[2]
[2]
Procedure
1) Remove the Fixing Upper Cover [1].
1 Stepped Screw [2]
[4]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[3]
x2
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-604
F-4-605
4-293
4-294
3) Remove the edge [1] of the spring on the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit from the hook [2] of the
1 Connector [2]
Fixing Rear Plate.
3 Wire Saddles [3]

2 Reuse Bands [4]
4 Edge Saddles [5]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
x9
[3]
[5]
[1]
[5]
[3]
[4]
F-4-606
F-4-607
4-294
4) Open the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit [1], and remove the edge [2] of the spring on the Fixing
Inner Delivery Unit from the hook [3] of the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit.
4-295
5) While lifting the Fixing Unit [1], align the D-cut [A] on the shaft with the hooks [B] of the
Fixing Inner Delivery Unit to remove the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit [2].
[2]
[3]
[B]
[A]
[A]
[B]
[1]
[1]
F-4-608
[2]
F-4-609
4-295
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing IH Unit > Procedure
Removing the Fixing IH Unit
4-296
2) Remove the Fixing Upper Cover [1].

1 Stepped Screw [2]
Preparation
[3]
[2]
x2
Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface [1] of the Fixing Film Unit when disassembling/assembling.
[1]
F-4-612
3) Remove the Fixing IH Drawer Connector Base [1].

1 Screw [2]
2 High Voltage Harnesses [4]
[1]
1 Harness Guide [5]

F-4-610
[4]
[5]
1) Open the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-613
[1]
F-4-611
4-296
4) Open the Fixing Pressure Arm [1].
NOTE:
When removing the screws [2] securing the Fixing Pressure Arm [1] while in the
engaged state, it causes a gap [C] between the Fixing Pressure Arm [1] and the Fixing
Front/Rear Plate [3].
Pressure is applied when securing the Fixing Pressure Arm [1] with the screws [2].
Therefore, be sure to tighten one side (1) temporarily, then securely tighten the other
side (2), and finally securely tighten the temporarily-tightened side (3).
2 Screws [2]
[2]
[2]
x2
4-297
[2]
[1]
[1]
[C]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-614
NOTE:
When opening/closing the Fixing Pressure Arm, there are 2 types of the states as
shown in the figure below: the engaged state [A] and the disengaged state [B].
[A]
[B]
[1]
[2]
x2
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-616
F-4-615
4-297
4-298
5) Remove the Fixing IH Unit [1].
CAUTION:
4 Connectors [2]
When tightening the screws [2], be sure that there is no gap [C] between the Fixing
Pressure Arm [1] and the Fixing Front/Rear Plate [3].
CAUTION:
Be sure that the screws [2] are securely tightened.
Be sure to turn over the removed Fixing IH Unit [1] when placing it.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[C]
[3]
[3]
F-4-618
F-4-617
x3
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-619
4-298
CAUTION:
4-299
CAUTION:
When installing the Fixing IH Unit [1], be sure to align the [A] parts of the Fixing Front
When securing the Fixing Pressure Arm, be sure to check the height of the Fixing IH
Plate/Fixing Rear Plate with the guides [B] of the Fixing IH Unit.
Unit [1] and the Fixing Front Plate/Fixing Rear Plate [2].
[2]
[2]
[A]
[B]
[1]
[1]
[A]
[B]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-620
F-4-621
4-299
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Film Unit > Procedure
Removing the Fixing Film Unit
4-300
2) Remove the Separation Plate [2] from the Fixing Film Unit [1].
2 Springs [3]
Preparation
[3]
[3]

3) Remove the Fixing IH Unit (Refer to page 4-296).
Procedure
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the Fixing Film Unit when disassembling/assembling.
Be sure to Cleaning the Fixing Unit when removing the Fixing Film Unit.
[2]
1) Remove the Fixing Film Unit [1].

2 Springs [2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-623
[1]
F-4-622
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Film Unit > Procedure
4-300
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit > Procedure
4-301
Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit
CAUTION:
When installing the Fixing Film Unit, align the protrusions [B] of the Fixing IH Unit into
the guides [A] of the Fixing Film Unit.
Preparation
[A]
Procedure
[A]
CAUTION:
[B]

[B]
1) Open the Fixing Inlet Guide [1].
[1]
F-4-624
F-4-625
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit > Procedure
4-301
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Heat Soaking Roller/Bearing > Procedure
2) Remove the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit [1] by wrapping a sheet of paper [2] around it.
4-302
Removing the Fixing Heat Soaking Roller/Bearing

Preparation
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the gear [3] of the Fixing Roller Unit when installing/removing.

4) Remove the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit. (Refer to page 4-301)
5) Remove the Fixing Web Unit (Refer to page 4-287)..
Procedure
[3]
CAUTION:
[2]
1) Remove the Fixing Heat Soaking Roller [1] by wrapping a sheet of paper [2] around it.
[1]
F-4-626
3) Remove the gear [2] from the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit [1].
1 E-ring [3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-628
F-4-627
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Heat Soaking Roller/Bearing > Procedure
4-302
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Thermistor > Procedure
4-303
Removing the Fixing Thermistor
2) Remove the 2 bearings [2] from the Fixing Heat Soaking Roller [1].
Preparation
[2]

[1]
[2]
F-4-629
Procedure
1) Open the guide [1], free the harness from the Reuse Band [2] and the Edge Saddle [3], and
remove the 2 screws [4].
[4]
x2
[1]
[3]
x2
[2]
F-4-630
4-303
2) Close the guide [1] and move the Fixing Inlet Guide [2].
4-304
3) Remove the Fixing Thermistor [1].

1 Screw [2]
Guide [A]
1 Connector [3]
[1]
[2]
[A]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-4-632
F-4-631
4-304
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Motor > Procedure
Removing the Fixing Motor
4-305
NOTE:
The Fixing Feed Right Upper Inner Cover [1] can be installed easily by fitting the hook [2]
into the groove [3] of the Fixing Feed Unit in advance.
Preparation
Procedure
1) Remove the Fixing Feed Left Inner Cover [1].
1 Screw [2]
1 Boss [3]
1 Hook [4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-4-634
[1]
2) Remove the Fixing Drive Motor [1].

2 Connectors [2]
4 Screws [3]
[4]
[3]
1 Hook [4]
[2]
[2]
F-4-633
x2
[4]
[1]
x4
[3]
F-4-635
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Motor > Procedure
4-305
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Cleaning the Fixing Unit > Procedure
Cleaning the Fixing Unit
4-306
2) Clean the Slide Shaft [A] of the Fixing IH Unit, the [B] part of the IH Unit, and the [C] part of
the slider with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
Preparation
[1]
[B]

4) Remove the Fixing Film Unit (Refer to page 4-300).
Procedure
1) Remove the Core Shutter Motor [1] from the Fixing IH Unit.
2 Screws [2]
[A]
x2
[C]
F-4-637
3) Move the slider [2] by rotating the Slide Shaft [1] of the Fixing IH Unit, and clean the [A] part
being hidden with lint-free paper [3] moistened with alcohol.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-4-636
[A]
F-4-638
4-306
4) Rotate the Slide Shaft [1] of the Fixing IH Unit, and move the slider [2] somewhere between
4-307
5) Clean the Separation Plate [1] with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol [2].
the hole [A] and the protrusion [B].

CAUTION:
Then, install the Core Shutter Motor [3].

2 Screws [4]
When cleaning the Separation Plate [1], be careful not to deform it because it is thin.
x2
[2]
[B]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[A]
[B]
[A]
F-4-641
[1]
[2]
F-4-639
CAUTION:
If it is installed while the slider [2] is too near the center or too near the edges, E840
may occur. As a result of that, reassembling will be needed.
[2]
[2]
F-4-640
4-307
4-308
6) Clean the paper feed side [A] of the Fixing Inlet Guide with lint-free paper [1] moistened
with alcohol.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the Fixing Pressure Roller [2] when cleaning.
Be careful not to damage the Sensor Flag [3] when cleaning.
[2]
[A]
[3]
[1]
F-4-642

Install the Fixing Film Unit.
Install the Fixing IH Unit.
Put the Fixing Feed Unit back in the host machine.
Close the Front Cover.
4-308
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. > Procedure
Pickup Feed System
4-309
NOTE:
Perform step 2 as necessary when installing/removing the units (Fixing Unit [1],
Secondary Transfer Outer Unit [2], Pre-fixing Feed Belt Unit [3], Registration Unit [4],
etc.) installed in the Fixing Feed Unit.
Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.
[1]
Preparation
[3]
[2]
[4]
Procedure
1) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit [1].
[1]
F-4-644
F-4-643
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. > Procedure
4-309
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Fixing Feed Unit > Procedure
pull out the Fixing Feed Unit [2] until it stops.
4-310
Removing the Fixing Feed Unit

Preparation
CAUTION:
[A]
Procedure
[1]
[2]
1) Remove the red screw [1] securing the Fixing Feed Unit Rail.
[A]
[2]
[1]
F-4-645
[1]
[1]
F-4-647
[1]
[2]
F-4-646
4-310
2) Push the 2 Release Springs [2] on the rear side of both sides of the Fixing Feed Unit [1]
to release the locks, and then pull out the Fixing Feed Unit [1] to the rear end [A] of the
4-311
3) Hold the bottom side [A] on the rear side of the Fixing Feed Unit and the bottom side [B] on
its front side, and remove the Fixing Feed Unit [1] by pulling it out toward the front.
Release Spring on the rear side.

CAUTION:
[A]
[2]
[1]
[A]
[1]
[A]
[2]
[B]
F-4-650
[1]
CAUTION:
2 Rail Lock Levers [2]
F-4-648
[1]
[1]
[A]
[2]
F-4-651
[2]
F-4-649
4-311
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Roller > Procedure
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Roller
4-312
5) Remove the Resin Ring [1], and remove the Feed Roller [2].
Procedure
CAUTION:
1) Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit [1].
2) Release the claw [2] to remove the gear [3].
[1]
3) Release the claw [4] to remove the Shaft Support [5].
[2]
x2
F-4-654
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
F-4-652
4) Remove the Feed Upper Cover [1].
[1]
F-4-653
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Roller > Procedure
4-312
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller > Procedure
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller

Preparation
4-313
2) While holding the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller [1], remove the Paper Guide
(Center) [2].
2 Hooks [3]
2 Claws [4]
1) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller (Refer to page 4-312).
Procedure
[3]
x2
[4]
CAUTION:
1) Remove the Paper Guide (Front) [1] and the Paper Guide (Rear) [2].
4 Claws [3]
[2]
4 Hooks [4]
[1]
F-4-656
NOTE:
When installing the Paper Guide (Center), pressing down the Separation Roller makes
the work easy.
3) Remove the Separation Roller [1].
1 Claw [2]
[1]
[3]
x4
[3]
[4]
[2]
[2]
[4]
F-4-657
[1]
F-4-655
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller > Procedure
4-313
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Deck > Procedure
Removing the Right Deck
4-314
CAUTION:
Preparation
At installation, be sure to align the 4 pins [1] of the rail with the 4 grooves [A] of the
Right Deck.
[A]
Procedure
[A]
1) Pull out the Right Deck [1].

2) Remove the Right Deck [1].
2 Screws [2]
[1]
[A]
x2
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-4-659
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-658
[1]
F-4-660
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Deck > Procedure
4-314
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup/Right Deck Feed/Right Deck Separation Roller > Procedure
Removing the Right Deck Pickup/Right Deck Feed/

4-315
Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller

3) Remove the Stopper Spring [1].
4) Remove the Right Deck Pickup Roller [2].
1 Hook [3]
Preparation
CAUTION:
When pickup system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the host
machine.
2) Remove the Right Deck (Refer to page 4-314).
[2]
[3]
[1]
Procedure
CAUTION:
F-4-662

CAUTION:
Be sure to install it with the protrusions [1] of the Pickup Roller facing the rear side of
the host machine.
1) Store the 2 rails [1] of the Right Deck in the host machine.
2) Open the Vertical Path Unit [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-661
F-4-663
4-315
Removing the Right Deck Feed Roller
7) Remove the Right Deck Separation Roller [1].
5) Remove the Right Deck Feed Roller [1].
1 Resin Ring [2]
4-316
1 Resin Ring [2]

[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-666
F-4-664
Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller

6) Remove the Feed Guide [1] while pressing the [A] part.
2 Bosses [2]
[1]
[2]
[A]
[2]
F-4-665
4-316
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck > Procedure
Removing the Left Deck
4-317
CAUTION:
Preparation
Left Deck.
[A]
Procedure
1) Pull out the Left Deck [1].
2) Remove the Left Deck [1].
2 Screws [2]
[A]
[1]
x2
[1]
[A]
[1]
[1]
F-4-668
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-667
[1]
F-4-669
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck > Procedure
4-317
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup/Left Deck Feed/Left Deck Separation Roller > Procedure
Removing the Left Deck Pickup/Left Deck Feed/Left

Deck Separation Roller
4-318
Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller

4) Remove the Left Deck Pickup Roller [2].
1 Hook [3]
Preparation
3) Remove the Left Deck (Refer to page 4-317).
Procedure
[1]
CAUTION:
[2]
[3]
1) Store the 4 rails [1] of the Right and Left Decks in the host machine.
F-4-671
CAUTION:
[2]
the host machine.
[1]
F-4-670
[1]
F-4-672
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup/Left Deck Feed/Left Deck Separation Roller > Procedure
4-318
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 3 > Procedure
4-319
Removing the Cassette 3
Removing the Left Deck Feed Roller

5) Remove the Left Deck Feed Roller [1].
Preparation
1 Resin Ring [2]
1) Pull out the Cassette 3.
Procedure
1) Remove the Cassette 3 [1].
4 Screws [2]
[2]
[2]
x4
[1]
F-4-673
Removing the Left Deck Separation Roller

6) Remove the Left Deck Separation Roller [1].
1 Resin Ring [2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-675
[1]
F-4-674
4-319
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller > Procedure
CAUTION:
cassette.
4-320
Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup/Feed/Separation

Roller
Preparation
[1]
CAUTION:
[1]
[A]
machine.
2) Remove the Cassette 3 (Refer to page 4-319).
Procedure
[1]
CAUTION:
F-4-676

1) Store the 2 rails [1] of the Cassette 3 in the host machine.
[1]

[2]
[1]
F-4-677
F-4-678
4-320
Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup Roller
Removing the Cassette 3 Feed Roller
5) Remove the Cassette 3 Feed Roller [1].
4) Remove the Cassette 3 Pickup Roller [2].
1 Resin Ring [2]
4-321
1 Hook [3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-681
F-4-679
Removing the Cassette 3 Separation Roller

CAUTION:
2 Bosses [2]
the host machine.
[2]
[1]
[A]
[2]
[1]
F-4-682
F-4-680
4-321
4-322
Removing the Cassette 4
7) Remove the Cassette 3 Separation Roller [1].

1 Resin Ring [2]
Preparation
[2]
[1]
Procedure
1) Remove the Cassette 4 [1].
4 Screws [2]
x4
[2]
F-4-683
[2]
[1]
F-4-684
4-322
CAUTION:
cassette.
Removing the Cassette 4 Pickup/Feed/Separation

Roller
Preparation
CAUTION:
[1]
[A]
4-323
machine.
[1]

Procedure
[1]
CAUTION:
F-4-685
Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling..

1) Store the 2 rails [1] of the Cassette 4 in the host machine.
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-686
F-4-687
4-323
Removing the Cassette 4 Pickup Roller
Removing the Cassette 4 Feed Roller
5) Remove the Cassette 4 Feed Roller [1].
4) Remove the Cassette 4 Pickup Roller [2].
1 Resin Ring [2]
4-324
1 Hook [3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
F-4-690
F-4-688
Removing the Cassette 4 Separation Roller

CAUTION:
2 Bosses [2]
the host machine.
[2]
[1]
[A]
[2]
[1]
F-4-691
F-4-689
4-324
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Procedure
4-325
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit
7) Remove the Cassette 4 Separation Roller [1].

1 Resin Ring [2]
Procedure
[2]
1) Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit [1].
[1]
2) Remove the Stepped Screw [2] and store the slider [3] in the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup
Unit [1].
3) Remove the Connector Cover [4].
1 Screw [5]
[2]
[3]
x2
[4]
F-4-692
[1]
[5]
F-4-693
4) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit [1].

1 Connector [2]
1 Reuse Band [3]
2 Hinge Pins [4]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-694
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Procedure
4-325
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup Unit, Cassette 4 Pickup Unit, and Right Deck Pickup Unit > Procedure
Removing the Vertical Path Unit
4-326
Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup Unit, Cassette 4

Pickup Unit, and Right Deck Pickup Unit
Preparation
Preparation
CAUTION:
machine.
Procedure
CAUTION:
machine.
1) Remove the Vertical Path Unit (Refer to page 4-326).
2) Pull out the Cassette 3, the Cassette 4 and the Right Deck.
Procedure
[1]
NOTE:
This procedure explains the case for Cassette 3 Pickup Unit.
Perform the same procedure also for the Cassette 4 Pickup Unit and Right Deck Pickup
Unit.
CAUTION:
2) Remove the Vertical Path Unit [1].
F-4-695
1 Screw [2]
2 Hinge Pins [2]

[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-696
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup Unit, Cassette 4 Pickup Unit, and Right Deck Pickup Unit > Procedure
F-4-697
4-326
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Uni > Procedure
4-327
Removing the Left Deck Pickup Uni

[1]
Preparation
Procedure
CAUTION:
F-4-698
3) Remove the Pickup Unit [1].

1 Screw [2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-700
[2]
F-4-699
4-327
2) Remove the Pickup Unit Fixation Plate (Upper) [1] and the Pickup Unit Fixation Plate (Right)
[2].
2 Screws [3]
4-328
CAUTION:
When installing the Left Deck Pickup Unit, align the bosses [2], [3] and [4] of the Left
Deck Pickup Unit [1] with the grooves [A] and [B], and the hole [C] of the host machine.
1 Protector [4]
CAUTION:
[4]
When removing the Fixation Plate, hold the Pickup Unit to prevent it from falling down.
[3]
[2]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[1]
x2
[3]
[1]
[4]
F-4-703
[2]
F-4-701
3) Holding the [A] part and the [B] part of the Pickup Unit, remove the Pickup Unit [1].
[1]
F-4-702
4-328
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Heater Unit > Procedure
4-329
Removing the Cassette Heater Unit
CAUTION:
Preparation
When securing the Left Deck Pickup Unit, perform the following steps.
1) Install the Left Deck Pickup Unit [1] to the host machine.
2) Install the Protector [2] and the Pickup Unit Fixation Plate (Right) [3] with the screw [4].
3) Install the Pickup Unit Fixation Plate (Upper) [5] with the screw [6].

If the Pickup Unit Fixing Plate (Upper) [5] is installed first, the Left Deck Pickup Unit may
not be secured properly, resulting in jam.
[6]
[5]
Procedure
1 Claw [2]
2 Protrusions [3]
x2
[1]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
F-4-704
F-4-705
[1]
F-4-706
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Heater Unit > Procedure
4-329
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Delivery Unit > Procedure
4-330
Removing the Delivery Unit
3) Remove the Cassette Heater Unit [1].

2 Screws [2]
Preparation
2 Bosses [3]
2 Protrusions [4]
2 Holes [5]
CAUTION:
host machine.
CAUTION:
At assembly, align the 2 protrusions [4] with the 2 holes [5] of the Rear Plate.
When securing the Cassette Heater Unit, secure it with the 2 screws [2] with the 2
bosses [3] in the correct positions.

[4]
[3]
[5]
[4]
Procedure
[1]
x2
1) Open the Delivery Unit [1], and remove the Connector Cover [2].
1 Screw [3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-707
[2]
[3]
F-4-708
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Delivery Unit > Procedure
4-330
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Reverse Unit > Procedure
4-331
Removing the Reverse Unit

1 Reuse Band [2]
Preparation
[1]
CAUTION:
host machine.
[2]
4) Remove the Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-330).

F-4-709
3) Remove the Delivery Unit [1].
Procedure
2 Pins [2]
2) Use a flat-blade screwdriver [1], etc. to release the claw [2] and remove the Handle Cover [3].
1 Hook [4]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[4]
F-4-710
F-4-711
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Reverse Unit > Procedure
4-331
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Pre-fixing Feed Belt Unit > Procedure
4-332
Removing the Pre-fixing Feed Belt Unit
3) Remove the Lower Left Cover [1].

4 Screws [2]
Preparation
[1]
x4

Procedure
[2]
1) Remove the Fixing Feed Belt Unit [1].

[2]
3 Connectors [2]
2 Screws (RS) [3]
[3]
x2
F-4-712
4) Store the Cassette 4.
[1]
5) Remove the Reverse Unit [1].
x3
3 Connectors [2]
2 Wire Saddles [3]
[2]
[3]
1 Edge Saddle [4]
[2]
6 Screws [5]
2 Hooks [6]
[2]
x6
[1]
[3]
x3
[4]
x3
[2]
[6]
[2]
F-4-714
[6]
[5]
[5]
F-4-713
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Pre-fixing Feed Belt Unit > Procedure
4-332
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Post-secondary Transfer Sensor and the Pre-fixing Feed Belt > Procedure
Cleaning the Post-secondary Transfer Sensor and the

4-333
2) Clean the surface [A] of the Fixing Feed Belt [1] with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Move the lint-free paper in the direction of [B] to wipe it.
Rotate the Belt Roller [2] in the direction of [C] to clean the whole circumference of the
surface [A] of the belt.
Preparation
CAUTION:
Do not move the Fixing Feed Belt [1] toward the front/rear.
3)Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit (Refer to page 4-168).
[1]
Procedure
1) Use a blower to clean the soiling on the surface of the Post-secondary Transfer Sensor
from the hole [A] of the Guide.
[A]
F-4-716
F-4-715
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Post-secondary Transfer Sensor and the Pre-fixing Feed Belt > Procedure
4-333
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit > Procedure
Removing the Registration Unit
[A]
Preparation
[2]
[A]
4-334

[B]
Procedure
[C]
1) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Lower Inner Cover [1].

2 Screws [2]
1 Knob [3]
x2
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-717
F-4-718
2) Open the Edge Saddle [1], and disconnect the connector [2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-719
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit > Procedure
4-334
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Transparency Sensor/
Registration Sensor / Original Size Sensor > Procedure
4-335
Cleaning the Transparency Sensor/

Registration Sensor / Original Size Sensor
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] and remove the 2 Reuse Bands [2].
[2]
Preparation
x2

x2
Procedure
1) Open the Upper Cover [1] of the Registration Unit, and direct the edge of the blower toward
the hole [A] of the Guide to clean the soiling on the Transparency Sensor [2].
[1]
F-4-720
4)Remove the Registration Unit [1].
[1]
[2]
4 Screws [2]
[2]
[A]
[1]
[2]
x4
F-4-722
F-4-721
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Transparency Sensor/
Registration Sensor / Original Size Sensor > Procedure
4-335
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit > Procedure
2) Direct the edge of the blower toward the hole [A] of the guide to clean the soiling on the
Registration Sensor [1].
4-336
Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit

Preparation
[A]

Procedure
1) Remove the Cassette Size Detection Unit [1].
1 Connector [2]
[1]
4 Screws [3]
[3]
F-4-723
3) Direct the edge of the blower toward the 4 holes [A] of the guide to clean the soiling on the
Original Size Sensor [1].
[1]
[A]
x4
[A]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-725
[1]
F-4-724
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit > Procedure
4-336
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Paper Level Detection Unit > Procedure
Removing the Cassette 3 and 4 Paper Level Detection

Units
Preparation
4-337
Removing the Right Deck Paper Level Detection Unit

Preparation
2) Pull out the Right Deck.
4) Remove the Vertical Path Unit (Refer to page 4-326).
5) Remove the Right Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326).
Procedure
Procedure
1) Remove the Cassette 3 Paper Level Detection Unit [1] and the Cassette 4 Paper Level
Detection Unit [2].
1) Remove the Right Deck Paper Level Detection Unit [1].

1 Connector [2]
2 Screws [3]
2 Connectors [3]
1 Hook [4]
2 Screws [4] (to remove)

[4]
[4]
[3]
[1]
x2
[2]
[3]
x2
[4]
[5]
x2
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
F-4-726
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Paper Level Detection Unit > Procedure
F-4-727
4-337
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Paper Level Detection Unit > Procedure
4-338
Removing the Left Deck Paper Level Detection Unit

Preparation
2) Pull out the Right Deck.
4) Pull out the Left Deck.
6) Remove the Left Deck Pickup Unit(Refer to page 4-327).
Procedure
1) Remove the Left Deck Paper Level Detection Unit [1].
1 Connector [2]
2 Screws [3]
1 Hook [4]
[2]
[4]
[3]
x2
[1]
[3]
F-4-728
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Paper Level Detection Unit > Procedure
4-338
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover > Procedure
External Auxiliary System
4-339
Removing the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner

Cover
Removing the Upper Front Cover
Preparation
Preparation

Procedure
Procedure
1) Remove the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover [1].
1) Remove the Upper Front Cover [1].
4 Screws [2]
2 Hinge Pins
2 Claws [3]
4 Protrusions [4]
[2]
[1]
[2]
x4
x2
[3]
[4]
[2]
[2]
F-4-730
[1]
F-4-729
4-339
CAUTION:
4-340
CAUTION:
When installing, be sure to install the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover
[2] after tilting the 4 Parallel Pins [1] of the Inner Door Link Shaft at an angle of
approx. 45 degrees.
If the Toner Container (Bk) is not installed, be sure to install the Toner Container
Replacement Unit Inner Cover [2] while opening the Lock Lever [1] of the Toner
Container (Bk).
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
45
[2]
F-4-731
When installing the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover [1], be sure to
prevent the cover from interfering with and damaging the 4 Toner Insertion Inlet
Cover Open/Close Sensors [2] and the 4 Grounding Wires [3] on the upper side of
the sensors.
[2],[3]
F-4-733
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-732
4-340
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Multi Unit Inner Cover > Procedure
Removing the Upper Right Cover 1
4-341
Removing the Multi Unit Inner Cover
Procedure
Preparation
1) Open the Multi-purpose Tray Cover [1].
Procedure

1 Rubber Cap [3]
1) Remove the link [1] of the Multi-purpose Tray Cover.
2 Screws [4]
1 Stepped Screw [2]
4 Hooks [5]
[5]
x2
[4]
[2]
1 Screw [4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
x2
[4]
[3]
[4]
[1]
F-4-734
F-4-735
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Multi Unit Inner Cover > Procedure
4-341
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Box Right Cover > Procedure
4-342
Removing the Box Right Cover
2) Remove the Multi Door Switch Cover [1].

1 Screw [2]
Procedure
2 Protrusions [3]
1) Push [A] part to open the HDD Cover [1].

[2]
[1]
[1]
[A]
[3]
[3]
F-4-736
3) Remove the Multi Unit Inner Cover [1].

F-4-738
2 Relay Connectors [2]
2) Remove the Box Right Cover [1].
1 Screw [3]
2 Screws [2]
1 Protrusion [4]
[4]
x2
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-4-739
F-4-737
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Box Right Cover > Procedure
4-342
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Box Upper Cover > Procedure
Removing the Box Left Cover
4-343
Removing the Box Upper Cover
Procedure
Preparation
1) Remove the Box Left Cover [1].
2 Screws [2]
Procedure
1) Remove the screw [1] of the Box Right Cover, and remove the Box Upper Cover [2].
x2
2 Screws [3]
1 Protrusion [4]
[1]
x3
[2]
[2]
[4]
F-4-740
[3]
[1]
F-4-741
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Box Upper Cover > Procedure
4-343
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Upper Left Cover > Procedure
4-344
Removing the Upper Left Cover
CAUTION:
When installing, be sure to put the protrusion [1] and the rib [2] of the Box Upper Cover
inside the Box Right Cover [3].
Preparation
CAUTION:
host machine.
x2
[1]
Procedure
1) Remove the Upper Left Cover [1].
[2]
3 Screws [2]
4 Protrusions [3]
[3]
[1]
F-4-742
[3]
x3
[2]
F-4-743
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Upper Left Cover > Procedure
4-344
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Lower Left Cover 3 > Procedure
Removing the Left Middle Cover
4-345
Removing the Lower Left Cover 3
Preparation
Preparation
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
host machine.
host machine.
Procedure
Procedure
1)Remove the Left Middle Cover [1].
1 Claw [2]
2 Screws [2]
1 Hook [3]
[1]
x2
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
F-4-744
F-4-745
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Lower Left Cover 3 > Procedure
4-345
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Lower Rear Cover > Procedure
4-346
Removing the Lower Rear Cover
2) Remove the Lower Left Cover 3 [1].

5 Screws [2]
Procedure
1) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the Lower Left Cover.
x5
x2
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-746
F-4-747
2) Remove the Lower Rear Cover [1].

2 Screws [2]
[2]
x2
[1]
[3]
F-4-748
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Lower Rear Cover > Procedure
4-346
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Fixing Dustproof Filter and the Ozone Filter > Procedure
CAUTION:
When disassembling/assembling, do not deform the Grounding Plate [1].
4-347
Removing the Fixing Dustproof Filter and the Ozone

Filter
Procedure
[1]
1) Remove the Noise Reduction Duct Filter Unit [2] while pressing the 2 claws [2] on both
sides.
x2
[1]
F-4-749
When assembling, be sure to insert the edge [A] of the Lower Left Cover in the
groove [B] of the Lower Rear Cover.
[1]
[1]
[B]
[2]
[A]
F-4-751
2) Remove the Fixing Dustproof Filter [1].
[1]
F-4-750
F-4-752
4-347
3) Remove the 2 Ozone Filters [2] from the Filter Case [1].
4-348
CAUTION:
[1]
Be sure to pay attention to the direction of installing the filters.

Be sure to install the Fixing Dustproof Filter with its sponge [1] on the lower side and
the rib [2] on the rear side.
Be sure to install the Ozone Filter with its sponge [3] on the upper side.
[2]
F-4-753
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-754
4-348
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Primary Charging Dustproof Filter > Procedure
4-349
Removing the Primary Charging Dustproof Filter

Procedure
1) Open the Multi-purpose Tray Cover [1].
2) Remove the Filter Cover [2].
1 Screw [3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-4-755
3) Hold the grip [A] to remove the Primary Charging Dustproof Filter [1].
[1]
[A]
F-4-756
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Primary Charging Dustproof Filter > Procedure
4-349
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit > Procedure
Options
4-350
3) Remove the Inner Plate [1].

4 Screws [2]
1 Wire Saddle [3]
Removing the DADF Unit
[2]
Procedure
1) Open the DADF [1].
[3]
[1]
x4
[2]
[1]
F-4-759

1 Edge Saddle [2]
1 Connector [3]
2 Flat Cables [4]
F-4-757
2) Remove the PCB Cover [1].
[1]
2 Screws [2]
[2]
x2
x3
[2]
[3]
[4]
F-4-760
[1]
F-4-758
4-350
5) Remove the DADF [1].
4-351
CAUTION:
4 Screws [2]
Be careful not to damage the Reader Communication Cable Guide [1] of the removed
DADF.
[1]
[2]
x4
[2]
[1]
F-4-761
CAUTION:
F-4-763
Be careful not to damage the white sheet [1] of the removed DADF.
[1]
F-4-762
4-351
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure
Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit
4-352
1) Disconnect the Reader Power Supply Cable [1].

2 Connectors [2]
Preparation
1 Wire Saddle [3]

1 Screw [4]
1 Round Shape Terminal [5]
CAUTION:
host machine.
1 Toothed Washer [6]
[4]

[5]

x2
[6]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Procedure
CAUTION:
Because the weight of the equipment is approx. 40 kg, be sure to work with 2 or
more people when lifting it up/down. Also, be sure to lift the equipment horizontally.
To prevent deformation of the bottom of the Reader Unit, be sure that the Reader
Support Plate [B] is installed when placing it on the floor.
[2]
F-4-765
2) Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable [1].

1 Wire Saddle [2]
2 Connectors [3]
[3]
[B]
x2
[B]
F-4-764
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-766
4-352
NOTE:
Be sure to refer to the correct steps according to the following instruction since the
steps differ between the Upright Control Panel model and the Flat Control Panel model.
4-353
4-2) Remove the Upper Right Cover 2 [1] (Flat Control Panel model).
1 Screw [2]
1 Protrusion [3]
For Upright Control Panel model, refer to steps 3, 4-1, and 5-1.
For Flat Control Panel model, refer to steps 4-2, and 5-2.
[1]
3) Remove the Base Cover (Front) [1] and the Base Cover (Rear) [2] (Upright Control Panel
model).
[2]
2 Screws [3]
x2
[3]
F-4-769
5-1) Remove the Reader Fixation Plate (R) [1] (Upright Control Panel model).
1 Screw [2]
2 Bosses [3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-4-767
4-1) Remove the Upper Right Cover 2 [1] (Upright Control Panel model).
1 Screw [2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
F-4-770
F-4-768
4-353
5-2) Open the Wire Saddle [1], lift the Control Panel Cable [2] and the Power Supply Cable [3],
and then remove the Reader Fixation Plate (R) [4] (Flat Control Panel model).
4-354
7) Open the DADF, and remove the Left Upper Small Cover.
1 Claw [2]
1 Screw [5]
1 Hook [3]
2 Bosses [6]
[4]
[1]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[6]
F-4-773
F-4-771
6) Remove the Reader Fixation Plate (L) [1].
8) Install the Scanner System Fixation Tool [1] that has been kept in a safe place since
installation.
1 Screw [2]
2 Bosses [3]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2]
F-4-774
F-4-772
4-354
4-355
9) Close the DADF.
12) Install the Reader Support Plate [A].
10) Remove the Reader Support Plate [1].
2 Screws [1]
1 Screw [2]
[2]
x2
[A]
[1]
[1]
F-4-777
F-4-775
11) Remove the Reader Support Plate [A] from the Reader Support Plate [B].
2 Screws [1]
[1]
x2
[A]
[B]
F-4-776
4-355
13) Lift up the DADF + Reader Unit slightly with a screwdriver by applying the principle of
leverage, and remove the 4 Rubber Plates [1] from the host machine (printer).
4-356
CAUTION:
Because the weight of the equipment is approx. 40 kg, be sure to work with 2 or
more people when lifting it up/down. Also, be sure to lift the equipment horizontally.
CAUTION:
When attempting to lift up the DADF + Reader Unit fully without first removing the 4
Rubber Plates, force is generated when the Rubber Plates are removed, which may
cause the DADF + Reader Unit to fall.
To make the work easier, remove the Rubber Plates in the front side first.
When lifting up/down the DADF + Reader Unit, be careful not to get the cables and
fingers caught.
CAUTION:
Do not use a long screwdriver. Otherwise, it may be bent.
Points to note when installing/removing the DADF + Reader Unit

Do not trap the Reader Power Supply Cable [2] and the Reader Communication
Cable [3].
Be careful not to break the 2 Dust Collection Cups [4].
Be careful not to break the Wire Saddle [5].
[4]
[5]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-4-778
F-4-779
4-356
14) Remove the DADF + Reader Unit [1] from the 2 pins [2] of the host machine, and place it
temporarily while being shifted for approx. 45 mm toward left side of the host machine.
4-357
15) Install the Reader Support Plate [B].

1 Screw [1]
CAUTION:
When lifting down the DADF + Reader Unit from the host machine, be sure to install the
Reader Support Plate [B] to the DADF + Reader Unit before lifting it down. This is to
prevent deformation of the bottom of the Reader Unit.
[2]
[A]
[1]
[B]
[1]
[B]
45mm
F-4-781
F-4-780
CAUTION:
When lifting up/down the DADF + Reader Unit, be sure to hold the position [A] shown in
the figure.
[A]
[A]
F-4-782
4-357
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the the Printer Cover > Procedure
16) Lift the DADF + Reader Unit [1] with 2 or more people, and remove it by passing over the
front side of the host machine.
4-358
Removing the the Printer Cover

Preparation
CAUTION:
Because the center of gravity of the equipment is at the rear, be careful not to drop it
when lifting it.
CAUTION:
host machine.
[1]
Procedure
1) Open the Multi-purpose Tray Cover.
2) Remove the Right Upper Cover 1.
1 Rubber Cap
2 Screws
4 Protrusions
Protrusion
x2
F-4-783
NOTE:
Installation to the host machine
Place the DADF + Reader Unit temporarily on the floor with the 2 pins [1] of the host
machine and the 2 holes of the DADF + Reader Unit located as shown in the figure.
Then, place the DADF + Reader Unit on the host machine from the front side of the
machine.
F-4-785
3) Close the Multi-purp.
[2]
[1]
F-4-784
4-358
4-359
4) Remove the Right Upper Cover 2.
6) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit.
1 Screw
2 Screws
2 Protrusions
x2
Protrusion
Protrusion
F-4-788
F-4-786
5) Push [A] area to open the HDD Cover.
7) Remove the Box Left Cover.

2 Screws
x2
[A]
F-4-787
F-4-789
4-359
8)Remove the Box Upper Cover.
4-360
10) Free the Control Panel Cable and the Power Supply Cable from the 3 Wire Saddles.
2 Screws
NOTE:
Allow flexibility of the cables so that the Printer Cover can be easily removed.
x2
Power Supply
Cable
Control Panel
Cable
x3
F-4-790
Wire Saddle
9) Remove the Left Upper Cover.

3 Screws
F-4-792
4 Protrusions
11) Remove the Printer Cover.
Protrusion
4 Screws
x3
x4
F-4-791
F-4-793
4-360
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the Buffer Path Unit > Procedure
Removing the Buffer Path Unit
4-361
3) Disconnect the Buffer Cable [1].

1 Wire Saddle [2]
Preparation
NOTE:
When removing the Buffer Path Unit from the host machine, be sure to remove the
delivery system options in advance.
[1]
Procedure
1) Open the Buffer Front Cover [1], and remove the Hinge Shaft [2].
[2]
[1]
F-4-796
4) Remove the Buffer Left Lower Cover [1].
[2]
4 Screws [2]
2 Protrusions [3]
[3]
x4
[2]
F-4-794
2)Turn the Jam Removal Lever [1], and push it against the grove [A].
[2]
[A]
[1]
F-4-797
[1]
F-4-795
4-361
4-362
5) Remove the Connecting Harness Cover [1] from the host machine.
8) Remove the Connecting Harness Stopping Plate [1].
1 Claw [2]
2 Screws [2]
2 Protrusions [3]
6) Disconnect the Buffer Cable [4] from the groove [A] of the Connecting Harness Cover.
[1]
x2
[2]
[3]
[2]
[A]
[1]
[4]
F-4-800
F-4-798
7) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] from the host machine.
CAUTION:
Do not place the unit on the floor while being tilted; otherwise the [C] part may be
deformed.
x3
[1]
[C]
F-4-799
F-4-801
4-362
4-363
9) Remove the 4 shafts [A] of the Buffer Path Unit from the 4 U-shaped grooves [B] of the host
CAUTION:
machine, and remove the Buffer Path Unit [1].
Do not hold the area inside the dotted line of the figure; otherwise the Paper Path Guide
may be deformed.
1 Screw [2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-802
[B]
[A]
[B]
[A]
[1]
F-4-803
4-363
4-364
10) Remove the Delivery Outlet Upper Guide [1].
CAUTION:
1 Screw [2]
3 Hooks [3]
When placing the Buffer Path Unit horizontally

Be sure to hold the frame [D] and the frame [E] of the Buffer Path Unit [1]. Be sure to
avoid the harness [2] when holding the frame [E]; otherwise the harness [2] may get
damaged.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-4-805
11) Remove the Cover Support Plate (Front) [1] and the Cover Support Plate (Rear) [2].
2 Screws [3]
2 Hooks [4]
[E]
[1]
x2
[D]
x2
[4]
[1]
[2]
F-4-804
[3]
F-4-806
4-364
4-365
12) Remove the Buffer Mounting Plate (Front) [1] and the Buffer Mounting Plate (Rear) [2].
4 Screws [3]
x4
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-4-807
4-365
Adjustment
Overview
replacing parts
When
clearing RAM
When
Adjustment
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Main Controller
Overview
In this chapter, measures of adjustment when replacing parts in servicing operation are
Main Controller
mentioned. Parts to be replaced are categorized into 5 blocks based on their related
technology as shown below.
Main Controller System

Fixing System
5-2
HDD
(Refer to page 5-2)
(Refer to page 5-4)
(Refer to page 5-4)
DC Controller PCB
(Refer to page 5-5)
TPM PCB
(Refer to page 5-5)
Laser Scanner Unit
(Refer to page 5-5)
(Refer to page 5-6)
Grid Plate
(Refer to page 5-6)
(Refer to page 5-6)
Pre-Primary Transfer Charging Wire

Pre-Primary Transfer Charging Assembly
Drum Unit
(Refer to page 5-7)

(Refer to page 5-7)
(Refer to page 5-7)
Developing Assembly
(Refer to page 5-7)
Potential Sensor
(Refer to page 5-8)
ITB Cleaning Blade Unit
ITB
Patch Sensor Unit
Fixing assembly
Fixing Film Unit
Fixing Web
HDD
How to Replace see Chapter 4, "Removing the HDD."
the Parts
T-5-1
5-2
5
Before
Replacing
1) Backup of data
Remote UI
Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Back Up
Target data:
Mail Box
Memory RX Inbox
Confidential Fax Inbox
Advanced Box
Form for Composition
*Cannot back up Advanced Box data to the SMB server when an optional HDD
(except 160 GB) is installed.
2)Export of settings
Remote UI
Target data:
Settings/Registration Basic Information
Forwarding Settings
Box Settings
Department ID Management Settings
Main Menu Settings
Web Access Settings
Favorite Settings
Address Book
User Access Control for Advanced Box
Quick Menu Settings
MEAP Application Setting Information
User Setting Information
iW Function Flow Settings
Service Mode Settings
*When exporting "Service Mode Settings", select Copier > Option > USER >
SMD-EXPT > 1.
SMD-EXPT cannot be exported, therefore the settings need to be made every
time the HDD is replaced.
3)Backup of MEAP
Target data:
SST(Meapback)
MEAP application(SMS)
User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication
user authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H)
*Meapback.bin can be restored after replacement or initialization of the HDD.
[CAUTION]
When the following service mode is executed, Meapback.bin cannot be
restored.
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > CHK-TYPE > 7
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > HD-CLEAR
4) TPM
Check User TMP back up.
5-3
Aftter
Replacement
1) Format the HDD.

1-1) Start the machine in safe mode (turn ON the main power switch while
simultaneously pressing 2+8 keys).
1-2) Execute Formatting All Partitions using SST.
2) Download the system software
2-1) Download the system software (system/LANG/RUI, etc.) using SST.
3) Initialize the key/certificate/CA certificate.
(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY
4)Turn OFF and then ON the power
5) Restore the backup data.
5-1) Backup of data
Remote UI
Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Restore
5-2) Export of settings
Remote UI
5-3) Backup of MEAP
SST(Meapback)
5-4) TPM
TPM setup
Backup data of the TPM key can be used only when replacing the TPM PCB.
When replacing the HDD, perform backup with TPM [ON] again.
5-5) Service mode setting values (DC-CON)
Since the backup data cannot be saved to a location outside of the device, it is
recommended to perform backup again after replacing the HDD.
When the DC Controller PCB needs to be replaced, in order to update the data
to the latest one, perform backup again immediately before replacing the PCB.
5-6) Service mode setting values (R-CON)
Since the backup data cannot be saved to a location outside of the device, it is
recommended to perform backup again after replacing the HDD.
When the Reader Controller PCB needs to be replaced, in order to update the
data to the latest one, perform backup again immediately before replacing the
PCB.
6) When an encryption key/certificate/CA certificate has been generated or added
by the user, ask the user to execute regeneration.
7) Execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust). Settings/Registration mode:
Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation
5-3
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Main Controller > Main controller PCB 2
When using
the Card
Reader and
imageWARE
Accounting
Manager
1) Go to COPIER > FUNCTION> INSTALL > CARD and enter the numerical value
of the leading card which is used for Department ID.
Then, press OK button. (e.g.: If No.1 to No.1000 cards are used for
Department ID, enter 1 of the leading card.)
2) After turning OFF and ON the main power switch, perform the following
operations from Settings/Registration mode.
In Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management >
Page Totals, be sure that ID00000001 to ID00001000 are created.
Set the following: Preferences > Network > TCP / IP Settings > IPv4 Settings>IP
Address Settings > IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask
In Management Settings > User Management> System Manager Information
Settings> System Manager ID and System PIN, register any number for them.
Then, turn OFF and ON the main power switch.
If System Manager ID and System PIN are not registered, card registration
to device cannot be executed for the imageWARE Accounting Manager setting
operation.
3) Download the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager to the Main Body
again.
4) After downloading is completed, go to Management Settings > User
Management > Department ID Management > Page Totals. Be sure that only
the downloaded card ID is displayed.
5) Print using the user card registered from imageWARE Accounting Manager.
Be sure that the card information used for the target devices of imageWARE
Accounting Manager is collected.
Points to Note when Using the System Software-installed HDD When using the
HDD which was installed the system software of the other machine (different serial
number), be sure to format the HDD after the installation.
If the HDD is not formatted, the operation cannot be guaranteed.
Points to note
Use of an HDD in which the system software of another machine (a machine of a
when using
different serial number) is installed for a troubleshooting is possible if it is an HDD
an HDD with
of a model of iR-ADV C5255 series and later. However, be sure to format it after
system software installing it. Operation is not guaranteed if it is continued to be used as is.
already installed In addition, an HDD used in iR-ADV C5255 series and later cannot be accessed
from a PC due to enhanced security.

How to Replace see Chapter 4, "Removing the Main Controller PCB 2."
the Parts
Before
Be sure to gain agreement from the user in advance to execute the following work.
Replacement
1)Backup the Settings/Registration data
Data in SRAM on the Main Controller PCB 2 can be backed up to a USB memory
device or an HDD from download mode.
* However, if the HDD Encryption Board is installed, backup to an HDD is not
possible. It is therefore recommended to perform backup to an USB memory
device.
Operation method:
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
then,
Download Menu > Backup > SRAM(HDD/USB)
Note:
Download Menu is not intended for the "Settings/Registration > Paper Type
Management Settings".
You need back up from:
Remote UI
At replacement Replace the part from the old PCB to the new PCB.
Option SDRAMs
Bypass PCB
Memory PCB
Aftter
Replacement
T-5-2
Points to Note
How to Replace see Chapter 4, "Removing the Main Controller PCB 1."
the Parts
Operation at
Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB
Replacement
Flash PCB
TPM PCB
Restrictions
Resetting/registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is

replaced.
5-4
T-5-3
1. Specify and register the data again of the Main Controller PCB 2.
1) While pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch.
2) The restore of backup data:
When Download Menu is displayed, connect USB memory to the main body.
Download Menu 2 > Restore
3) Specify and register the data again.
Import from:
Remote UI
4) When an encryption key/certificate/CA certificate has been generated or added
by the user, ask the user to execute reinstallation.
If mismatch between the box management information included in the SRAM
data and box data on the HDD occurs, which is caused by starting the machine
normally without restoring SRAM data after replacing the Main Controller 2 PCB,
the box management information is initialized. As a result, box documents on the
HDD are deleted.
Therefore, be sure to back up the box documents on remote UI.
Do not transfer the following parts to another machine (a machine of a different
serial number).
The machine will not start up normally, and may become unrecoverable in some
cases.
Main Controller PCB 2 (with the Memory PCB unremoved)
Memory PCB
T-5-4
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Main Controller > Main controller PCB 2
5-4
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Laser Exposure System > Laser Scanner Unit
5-5
DC controller PCB
How to Replace see Chapter 4, "Removing the DC Controller PCB."
the Parts
Before
Backup of DC Controller PCB SRAM
Replacing
ACTIVE is displayed and then OK! is displayed about 2 minutes later.
Turn OFF the main power when the above work is complete.
Aftter Replacing Restoration of DC Controller PCB SRAM
ACTIVE is displayed at execution and then OK! is displayed about 2 minutes
later. Restoration is complete.
Prohibited
When replacing the DC Controller PCB, be sure to use a new one. Do not use
Operation
the DC Controller PCB which was used with another machine.
Laser Scanner Unit

Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Laser Scanner Unit."
replacement
Procedure of
1) Execute the initial position adjustment of the Skew Correction Motor.
adjustment
(COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER > LD-ADJ-Y/M/C)
2) Execute the color displacement correction.
(Additional Functions (Setup/Register) > Adjustment/Maintenance > Image
Adjustment > Color Displacement Correction)
T-5-7
T-5-5
TPM PCB
How to Replace see Chapter 2, "TPM PCB."
the Parts
* Be sure to perform the installation work by referring to the procedure above.
T-5-6
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Laser Exposure System > Laser Scanner Unit
5-5
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Primary Charging Assembly
Procedure of
adjustment
5-6
3) Adjust the Primary Charging Assembly (in the case of dark image at the front
side on the test print).
NOTE :
In the case of dark image at the front side of the test print [1],
execute step 3-1) through 3-3) below until the density gets even.
Then, if there is no density unevenness, execute the work in
step 5) and later.
Turning the adjustment screw counterclockwise moves down the
Charging Wire (the gap between the grid and the charging wire
gets narrower), resulting in lighter output image density. Turning
the adjustment screw clockwise moves up the Charging Wire
(the gap between the grid and the charging wire gets wider),
resulting in darker output image density.
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Replacing the Primary Charging Wire."

replacement
Procedure of
1) Execute cleaning of the Charging Wire.
adjustment
T-5-8
Grid Plate
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Grid Plate."
replacement
Procedure of
adjustment
(COPIERER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIR E-EX)
2) Execute the Potential Control.
[A]
[B]
T-5-9

Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly."
replacement
Procedure of
1) Output the Bk halftone image in Service Mode.
(TEST > PG > TYPE: 5)
adjustment
(TEST > PG > COLOR-Y/M/C: 0)
(TEST > PG > COLOR-K: 1)
2) In the case of density difference between the front and the rear on the test
print image with the dark image on the front side of the test print, go to step
3-1) to make adjustments. With the dark image on the rear side of the test
print, go to step 4-1) to make adjustments. If there is no density unevenness,
execute the work in step 5) and later.
3-1) Turn the plastic screw [A] counterclockwise to make a full round. Refer to
the replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly to install the
Primary Charging Assembly to the Host Machine, and then output the test
print to check the image.
3-2) If the image at the front side of test print image is still dark, turn the
plastic screw [A] counterclockwise to make another full round. Refer to the
replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly to install the
3-3) If the image at the front side of the test print is still dark, turn the plastic
screw [B] clockwise to make a half round. Refer to the replacement
procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly to install the Primary Charging
Assembly to the Host Machine, and then output the test print to check the
image.
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Primary Charging Assembly
5-6
5
Procedure of
adjustment
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Developing Assembly
4) Adjust the Primary Charging Assembly (in the case of dark image at the rear
side on the test print).
Procedure of
adjustment
NOTE :
In the case of dark image at the rear side of the test print [2],
execute step 4-1) through 4-3) below until the density gets even.
Then, if there is no density unevenness, execute the work in
step 5) and later.
Turning the adjustment screw counterclockwise moves down the
Charging Wire (the gap between the grid and the charging wire
gets narrower), resulting in lighter output image density. Turning
the adjustment screw clockwise moves up the Charging Wire
(the gap between the grid and the charging wire gets wider),
resulting in darker output image density.
5-7
5) Execute cleaning of the Charging wire in Service Mode (FUNCTION >
CLAENING > WIRE-CLN) Duration: approx. 30 sec.
6) Execute the potential control in Service Mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC
> DPC) Duration: approx. 30 sec.
7) Execute the density unevenness correction in User Mode
Execute Density Unevenness Correction ([Setting/Register)] > [Adjustment/
Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Correct shading])
T-5-10
Pre-Primary Transfer Charging Wire

Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire."
replacement
Procedure of
adjustment
T-5-11
Pre-Primary Transfer Charging Assembly
[A]
[B]
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly."

replacement
Procedure of
adjustment
T-5-12
Drum Unit
4-1) Turn the plastic screw [B] counterclockwise to make a full round. Refer to
the replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly to install the
4-2) If the image at the rear side of the test print is still dark, turn the plastic
screw [B] counterclockwise to make another full round. Refer to the
replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly to install the
4-3) If the image at the rear side of the test print is still dark, turn the plastic
screw [A] clockwise to make a half turn. Refer to the replacement procedure
of the Primary Charging Assembly to install the Primary Charging Assembly
to the Host Machine, and then output the test print to check the image.
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Drum (Bk)."

replacement
see Chapter 4, "Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C) from the
Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)."
Procedure of
1) Disable (OFF) the warm-up rotation. (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>AINRadjustment
OFF)
2) Turn OFF the main power switch. (Replace the Drum.)
4) Forcible execution of Drum replacement mode
(COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DRMRSETY/M/C/K)
5) Enable (ON) the warm-up rotation. (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>AINROFF)
T-5-13
Developing Assembly
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Developing Assembly (Bk)."
replacement
see Chapter 4, "Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C) from the
Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)."
Procedure of
1) Disable (OFF) the warm-up rotation. (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>AINRadjustment
OFF)
2) Execution of initial installation mode for Developing Assembly
(COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-Y/M/C/K
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Developing Assembly
T-5-14
5-7
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Potential Sensor
Potential Sensor
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit (including Potential
replacement
Sensor and Potential Control PCB)."
Procedure of
1) Install the Primary Charging Rail [1] with the Potential Sensor removed to
adjustment
the host machine.
1 Screw [2]
Procedure of
adjustment
5-8
3) Connect a new cable [3] to the connector [2] of a new Potential Sensor [1].
4) Install the Potential Sensor [1] to the 2 pin electrodes [4] for checking the
Potential Sensor.
1 Connector [2]
1 Screw [5]
CAUTION:
Secure the screw firmly so that the Potential Sensor is not
removed.
[2]
[1]
[5]
[1]
[3]
F-5-1
NOTE:
When installing, insert the Primary Charging Rail [1] at the angle
as shown in the figure, and then insert the 2 bosses [2] in the boss
holes [3] of the host machine.
[4]
[2]
[4]
[1]
5) Install a new Potential Control PCB [1].

1 Connector [2]
1 Screw [3]
5 PCB Supports [4]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[2]
F-5-2
2) Install the ITB Unit to the host machine.
[1]
NOTE:
Purpose to remove the ITB Unit in this procedure is to prevent the
ITB from a damage caused by dropping a part.
T-5-15
[2]
[4]
[3]
T-5-16
5-8
5
Procedure of
adjustment
6) Pass the harness [1] of the Primary Charging Rail and the electrode for
checking the Potential Sensor from the Edge Saddle [2] of the Right Side
Plate of the host machine, and connect the 5 Wire Saddles [3] and the 2
connectors [4].
x2
[3]
Procedure of
adjustment
[4]
5-9
8) Close the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to trap the cable.

10) Disable the warm-up rotation in service mode immediately after turning ON
the main power switch.
x5
11) Use a dedicated tool [1] to deactivate the Front Door Switch.
[1]
[2]
[4]
7) Place the electrode [1] for checking the Potential Sensor on the Process Unit
Inner Cover [2], and use the Electrode Clip [3] to pinch the plate of the hinge
to ground.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the electrode for checking the Potential
Sensor.
[1]
12) When the screen [A] displays [READY] in the service mode, adjust the
Potential Sensor.
Service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > OFST
Display
< DPC
I/O
Adjust
>
Function
<1/ 2>
Option
<READY
Test
>
Counter
<LEVEL 1 >
DPC
OFST
DRM-RSET
OFST-Y
[3]
[2]
OFST-M
OFST-C
[1]
DRMRSETY
DRMRSETM
T-5-17
OK
T-5-18
5-9
5
Procedure of
adjustment
13) Press [OK] on the indicator and the display changes from [ACTIVE] to [OK!].
Display
<
I/O
DPC
Adjust
>
Function
<1/ 2>
Option
Test
<WAITING >
Counter
<LEVEL 1 >
DPC
OFST
Display
<
I/O
DPC
Adjust
>
Function
<1/ 2>
Option
<READY
Test
>
Counter
5-10
Procedure of
adjustment
CAUTION:
<LEVEL 1 >
When installing, remove the release paper, and align the Potential
Sensor Protection Sheet with the marking line [A] to affix it (be sure
that the gap [B] between the marking line and the release paper is
less than 0.5 mm).
DPC
ACTIVE
OFST
DRM-RSET
DRM-RSET
OFST-Y
OFST-Y
OFST-M
OFST-M
OFST-C
OFST-C
DRMRSETY
DRMRSETY
DRMRSETM
OK!
DRMRSETM
OK
1
F-5-3
14) Enable the warm-up rotation in the service mode.

16) Install a new Potential Sensor [1] to the Primary Charging Rail.
1 Harness [2]
2 Wire Saddles [3]
1 Screw [5]
17) Install a new Potential Sensor Protection Sheet [6].
[B]
[A]
F-5-5
18) Install the Primary Charging Rail to the host machine.

T-5-20
[2]
[1]
[6]
[4]
x4
[5]
[3]
F-5-4
T-5-19
5-10
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > ITB Cleaning Blade Unit
ITB Cleaning Blade Unit
Procedure of
adjustment
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit."
replacement
5-11
CAUTION:
Points to Note when Applying Lubricant (FY9-6007-000) [1]
CAUTION:
Replacing the ITB Cleaning Unit, ITB, Primary Transfer Roller,
Secondary Transfer Inner Roller, etc. is accompanied by removal of
the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit, so be sure to see this procedure and
make an adjustment "After Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit".
Be careful not to apply lubricant to the outside of the application

width in the longitudinal direction [B].
When lubricant [1] is applied outside the application area, be
sure to wipe with lint-free paper.
approx 35mm
Procedure of
adjustment
1) After installing the ITB Cleaning Unit to the ITB Unit, apply lubricant [1]
[4]
[3]
(FY9-6007-000) to the application area [A] on the ITB surface in the

[B]
longitudinal direction [B] (1 reciprocation).
[2]
(Execute this step without the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit being installed.)
CAUTION:
[C]
[C]
Target application area is to be the area surrounded by the

application width as shown below.
Application area
Application width in the longitudinal direction [B] is shorter than
the width of the Primary Transfer Roller (Y) [2].
Be careful not to apply lubricant to the outside of the Primary
Transfer Roller (Y) [2] width.
approx 45mm [5]
[1]
[A]
approx 45mm
T-5-22
Target: Between the point approx. 35 mm inside the ITB Unit

Rear Plate [3] and the point approx. 35 mm inside the ITB Unit
Front Plate [4].
The application width in the belt's rotation direction is between
the Primary Transfer Roller (Y) [2] and the ITB Driver Roller [5].
Target: Between the point of the Primary Transfer Roller (Y)
[2] Shaft Support (Front/Rear) Cover edge [C] and the point
approx. 45 mm below the edge.
T-5-21
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > ITB Cleaning Blade Unit
5-11
5
Procedure of
adjustment
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Patch Sensor Unit
2) Rotate the ITB Drive Motor [1] with hand counterclockwise, and then rotate
the ITB until the lubricant [2] applied to the ITB is hidden in the Scoop-up
Sheet [3] of the ITB Cleaning Unit.
(The applied lubricant [2] passes through the Scoop-up Sheet [3] of the ITB
Cleaning Unit.)
5-12
ITB
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the ITB Unit."
replacement
Procedure of
CAUTION:
adjustment
CAUTION:
Be sure to execute Operation after ITB replacement when

releasing the ITB pressure.
Be sure to turn the ITB Drive Motor [1] counterclockwise only and
be careful not to turn it clockwise.
T-5-24

Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Primary Transfer Roller."
replacement
Procedure of
1) Execute the Primary Transfer ATVC.
adjustment
(COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P> 1ATVC-EX)
[2]
T-5-25
Patch Sensor Unit

Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Patch Sensor Unit."
replacement
Procedure of
1) Enter the Patch Sensor Alpha Value.
adjustment
(COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > ALF-C)
[3]
[1]
2) Adjust the Patch Sensor Light Intensity.

(COPIER > FUNCTION >MISC-P > PT-LPADJ)
3) Install the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit to the ITB Unit.
T-5-26
T-5-23
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Patch Sensor Unit
5-12
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Fixing System > Fixing Web Unit
Fixing System

Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit."
replacement
Procedure of
1) Clear the counter.
adjustment
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-L (Lv1)
Fixing assembly
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Fixing Unit."
replacement
Procedure of
adjustment
COPIER > COUNTER > FIXING > FX-CNT (Lv1)
NOTE:
When the foregoing counter clear is executed, the following item is
cleared.
NOTE:
cleared.

5-13
COPIER> DISPLAY> FIXING> KIN-HP

COPIER> DISPLAY> FIXING> CORE-DST
COPIER> DISPLAY> FIXING> RCPR-HP
COPIER> DISPLAY> FIXING> PRS-HP
COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING > FX-L-TM1~8 (Lv2)
T-5-29

Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Fixing Heat Soaking Roller/Bearing."
replacement
Procedure of
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-KIN (Lv1)
adjustment
COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U (Lv1)

COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-L (Lv1)
COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-KIN (Lv1)
COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-WEB (Lv1)
NOTE:
cleared.
T-5-27
Fixing Film Unit
COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING > KIN-TM1~8 (Lv2)
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Fixing Film Unit."

replacement
Procedure of
adjustment
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-BLT-U (Lv1)
T-5-30
Fixing Web Unit
NOTE:
cleared.
COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING > BLT-TM1~8(Lv2)
COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING > BLT2-TM1~8(Lv2)
COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING > BLT-TM(Lv2)
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Replacing the Fixing Web."

replacement
Procedure of
adjustment
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-WEB1~4 (Lv1)
COPIER > COUNTER > MISC > FX-WEB (Lv1)
T-5-31
T-5-28
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Fixing System > Fixing Web Unit
5-13
Adjustment > When clearing RAM > DC controller PCB
5-14
When clearing RAM

DC controller PCB
How to Replace see Chapter 4, "Removing the DC Controller PCB."
the Parts
Before
Replacing
ACTIVE is displayed and then OK! is displayed about 2 minutes later.
Turn OFF the main power when the above work is complete.
Aftter Replacing Restoration of DC Controller PCB SRAM
ACTIVE is displayed at execution and then OK! is displayed about 2 minutes
later. Restoration is complete.
Prohibited
When replacing the DC Controller PCB, be sure to use a new one. Do not use
Operation
the DC Controller PCB which was used with another machine.
T-5-32
Adjustment > When clearing RAM > DC controller PCB
5-14
Troubleshooting
Initial Checks
Making
Print
Test
Faults
Image
Code
Error
Code
Alarm
upgrade
Version
Self Diagnosis
Controller
log
Debug
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > List of Initial Check Items
6-2
Making Initial Checks

List of Initial Check Items
Item
Site Environment
Checking the Paper

Checking the
Placement of Paper
Checking the
Durables
Checking the
Periodically
Replaced Parts
No.
Detail
Check
1
2
The voltage of the power supply is as rated (10%).

The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near
a water faucet, water boiler, humidifi er), and it is not in a cold
place. The machine is not near a source of fire or dust.
3 The site is not subject to ammonium gas.
4 The site is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise,
provide curtains.)
5 The site is well ventilated, and the floor keeps the machine
level.
6 The machine's power plug remains connected to the power
outlet.
7 The paper is of a recommended type.
8 The paper is not moist. Try paper fresh out of package.
9 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the
paper is not in excess of a specific level.
10 If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed
in the correct orientation in the manual feed tray.
11 Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end
of its life.
12 Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically
replaced parts table, and replace any part that has reached the
time of replacement.
T-6-1
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > List of Initial Check Items
6-2
Troubleshooting > Test Print > Selecting Test Print TYPE
6-3
Test Print
Overview
This machine has several test print types shown in the table below. A circle in each image check item shows the availability to check the different type of image faults. If the faulty image shown in
the output does not appear in the appropriate test print type, the cause may lie in PDL input or the reader
Items
PG TYPE
0
1 to 3
4
5
6
10
12
14
TYPE Pattern
Normal copy / print

(For R&D)
16-Gradation
Full Area Half Tone
Grid
MCYBk Horizontal Line
64-Gradation
Full Color 16-gradation
Gradation
Fogging
Yes
Transfer
Fault
Black line
Yes
Yes
Yes
White line
Yes
Yes
Uneven
Density
Uneven
Color
Density at
Right Angle
the Front / displacement
Rear
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Straight
Lines
Yes
Yes
Originator
------Main controller
Main controller
Main controller
Main controller
Main controller
Main controller
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
T-6-2
Selecting Test Print TYPE

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Set the copy count, paper size, and pickup mode (single-sided or double-sided).
Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > TEST > PG.
Make the following selections: COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE.
Enter the appropriate TYPE No. using the keypad, and press the OK key.
Set the density using DENS-K (valid only if TYPE=5).
Set the image mode by TXPH
Press the start key.
6-3
Troubleshooting > Test Print > Selecting Test Print TYPE
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to check test print > Full Area Half Tone (TYPE=5)
6-4
Full Area Half Tone (TYPE=5)
How to check test print
This test print can mainly check transfer failure, black line, white line, and pitch unevenness.
16-Gradation (TYPE=4)
This test print can mainly check gradation performance, image fogging, white line, and density
unevenness at the rear/front.
16-Gradation
COLOR-M=1, COLOR-Y/C/K=0
F-6-2
F-6-1
(1) Gradation
If there is no 16-step density gradation, it may be caused by fault of drum unit or laser
scanning system.
(2) Foggy image
If there is foggy image only at the white area as shown in the figure below, it may be
caused by fault of drum unit or laser scanning system.
(3) Vertical white/black line
If there is white line in the image, it may be caused by fault of developing system.
(4) Density unevenness at the rear/front
If there is density unevenness at the rear/front, it may be caused by fault of drum unit,
laser scanning system or transfer unit.
NOTE:
Output by every developing color is available by specifying the developing color COLOR-Y/
M/C/K in the following service mode: COPIER>TEST>PG
In the case of changing density of the test print, execute followings in service mode for
density setting: TEST>PG>DENS-Y/M/C/K
(1) Transfer failure

If there is transfer failure, it may be caused by fault of transfer (intermediate transfer/
secondary transfer) unit.
(2) Horizontal unevenness
If there is horizontal unevenness, it may be caused by fault of photosensitive drum drive
unit, drum ITB motor, or drum unit.
(3) Vertical unevenness
If there is vertical unevenness, it may be caused by soiled LDE lens, fault of drum unit, or
deterioration of intermediate transfer belt.
6-4
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to check test print > Full Area Half Tone (TYPE=5)
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to check test print > MCYBk Horizontal Line (TYPE=10)
6-5
Grid (TYPE=6)
MCYBk Horizontal Line (TYPE=10)
This test print can mainly check color displacement, right angle accuracy and linearity.
This test print can mainly check the dark area density of each color, balance among each
color and white line by developing.
F-6-3
(1) Color displacement

If there is color displacement, it may be caused by fault of each laser scanning system,
transfer (intermediate transfer/secondary transfer) unit or photosensitive drum drive unit.
(2) Right angle accuracy and linearity
If there is fault of right angle accuracy or linearity, it may be caused by fault of laser
scanning system, or defective shape of registration (upper/lower) roller or the secondary
transfer outer roller.
F-6-4
(1) Solid density of each color and balance among each color.
Density is not extremely light.
In the case of light density with a certain color, it may be caused by the developer of the
color in question, or fault of primary transfer roller, laser scanning system or high voltage
system.
(2) White/black line
If there is white/black line with a certain color, it may be caused by fault of the drum unit
of the color in question, or soiled laser light path.
(3) Density unevenness at the rear/front
If there is density unevenness with a certain color, it may be caused by fault of drum unit,
laser scanning system or transfer (intermediate transfer/secondary transfer) unit.
If there is density unevenness with all colors, it may be caused by deterioration of
intermediate transfer unit.
6-5
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to check test print > MCYBk Horizontal Line (TYPE=10)
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to check test print > Full Color 16-gradation (TYPE=14)
6-6
64-Gradation (TYPE=12)
Full Color 16-gradation (TYPE=14)
YMCBk64 gradation test print can mainly check gradation performance of each color (YMBCk)
at one time.
Full color 16-gradation test print can mainly check gray balance, gradation performance of
each color (YMCBk) and foggy image.
Light Areas
White Area
F-6-5
White Area
F-6-6
(1) Gray balance

Check to see if the output comes with even density of each color at gray scale area.
(2) Gradation performance
Check gradation performance and density difference of each color (YMCBk)
(3) Foggy image
If there is foggy image at the white area, it may be caused by fault of developing system
or photosensitive drum, or correction fault of laser scanning system.
6-6
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to check test print > Full Color 16-gradation (TYPE=14)
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Developing Sleeve Ghost
Image Faults
6-7
6) Adjust the upper limit of the density correction of the Toner Density Sensor for the color
with which the phenomenon occurs.
Select COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > HLMT-PT* (corresponding color) (Level 2), and set the
Developing Sleeve Ghost
setting value to -1. (Default: 0)
[Location of Failure]
7) Execute step 3 through 5.
Developing Sleeve
If the phenomenon is disappeared, finish the work.

If the phenomenon is not disappeared, select COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > HLMT-PT*
[Cause]
It is caused by increase of the low tribo toner adhered on the Sleeve due to low transition of
toner charge (tribo).
(corresponding color) (Level 2) and set the setting value to -2. Then execute step 2 through 5.
If the phenomenon still appears, execute step 8.
8) Select COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > P-TG-* / HLMT-PT* (corresponding color) (Level 2),
[Occurrence Condition]
and return the setting value to the default 0. Then, replace the Developing Assembly.
At end of life of the Developer
NOTE:
To make the T/D ration in the Developing Assembly to the set value, the toner should
be consumed; therefore, it is required to execute step 3..
[Field Remedy]
Solve the phenomenon by reducing the T/D ratio in the Developing Assembly with service
mode.
1) Adjust the target value of ATR patch density for the color with which the phenomenon
occurs.
Select COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > P-TG-* (corresponding color) (Level 2), and set the
setting value to -1. (Default: 0)
[Points to Note about Field Remedy]

As the setting value of COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > P-TG-*/HLMT-PT* become smaller,
carrier adhesion tends to be occurred (A phenomenon that carrier is developed.)
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

3) Print 50-sheet of image with 10% image ratio for 4 times. (e.g, COPIER > TEST > PG >
TYPE: 16, COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-* (corresponding color): 1)
4) Execute the Full Adjust by selecting Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance >
Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust.
5) Print the original with which the phenomenon occurred, and check if the phenomenon is
disappeared.
If the phenomenon is disappeared, finish the work.
If the phenomenon is not disappeared, select COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > P-TG-*
(corresponding color) (Level 2) and set the setting value to -2. Then execute step 2 through 5.
If the phenomenon still appears, execute step 6 and later steps.
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Developing Sleeve Ghost
6-7
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Uneven vertical lines on a halftone image due to the soiled Charging Roller
6-8
Uneven vertical lines on a halftone image due to the

soiled Charging Roller
[Sample Image]
Soiled Charging Roller
[Cause]
Soiled Charging Roller caused by degradation of cleaning performance due to durability of
the Cleaning Roller.
At end of life of the Drum Unit
[Field Remedy]
1) Replace the Drum Unit for the corresponding color with which the uneven vertical lines
occur.
None.
[Sample Image]
F-6-7
F-6-8
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Uneven vertical lines on a halftone image due to the soiled Charging Roller
6-8
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Toner Drops in the Developing Assembly
Toner Drops in the Developing Assembly
6-9
[Sample Image]
Developing Assembly (Toner Blocking Plastic Film)
[Cause]
Due to dropping the toner accumulated on the Developing Assembly Upper Cover (the Toner
Blocking Plastic Film) onto the drum.
It tends to occur with the following conditions: a high temperature/high humidity environment,
and high average image Duty.
[Field Remedy]
1) Clean inside of the Toner Blocking Plastic Film in the Developing Assembly with lint-free
paper.
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Sleeve when cleaning.
F-6-10
Be careful not to leave toner on the urethane sheet.

Toner Blocking Plastic Film
Surface Of The Sleeve

F-6-9
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Toner Drops in the Developing Assembly
6-9
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Transfer failure on the trailing edge of the 2nd side of coated paper
Transfer failure on the trailing edge of the 2nd side of

coated paper
Secondary Transfer Assembly
6-10
NOTE:
1. The setting of Tail End White Patch Correction can be changed only for the paper
that is duplicated and then registered.
2. With Tail End White Patch Correction, the Secondary Transfer bias is adjusted.
Changing the value in a positive direction: increase the Secondary Transfer bias
Changing the value in a negative direction: decrease the Secondary Transfer bias
[Cause]
It is due to the occurrence of gap voltage between the ITB and a paper at the Secondary
Transfer nip due to upward curl on the trailing edge of the 2nd side.
At duplex printing with coated paper from the Multi-purpose Tray

None.
[Sample Image]
[Field Remedy]
1. Ask user to use papers to which curl straightening is performed. (For the details, refer to
the Users Manual).
[For curled papers, be sure to flatten them before use. (Degree of curl: paper: 10mm or less,
heavy paper: 5mm or less) Paper may not be fed depending on the paper quality.]
If the phenomenon still occurs, execute the following.
2. Adjust the Secondary Transfer bias by selecting User Mode > Tail End White Patch
Correction.
1)Select COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> IMAC-ADJ, and set the item to 1.
2)Select Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Type Management
Settings, and select the corresponding paper (with which the phenomenon occurred).
NOTE:
To select Paper Type Management Settings, it is required to login to System
Management Mode.
F-6-11
3)Select Details/ Edit > Tail End White Patch Correction > Back Side.
Correction level: increase the value in stages until the white patch disappeared.
Degree of correction: enter the range where the white patch occurs. (Distance from the
trailing edge: mm)
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Transfer failure on the trailing edge of the 2nd side of coated paper
6-10
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Calibration for color difference on front and back sides
Calibration for color difference on front and back sides

When significant color difference appears between the scanned images by Front Side
Scanner Unit and by the Back Side Scanner Unit, execute the adjustment.
NOTE:
This adjustment is only effective for the models that are equipped with the 2 Scanner
Units (inside the Reader and inside the DADF).
1) Check that A4 paper (plain) is set to the deck or the cassette.
6-11
CAUTION:
Make sure to place the correction chart in the indicated direction in step 4) and 5).
If placing it in a wrong direction, NG! is displayed in each service mode and retry is
required.
NOTE:
Even though the correction chart is placed correctly in step 4) and 5), NG! may be
displayed. So repeat the steps several times.
2) Output a correction chart from (Lv.1) COPIER > TEST > PG.
<Setting>
TXPH=1 (low screen ruling), THRU=0 (Pascal gamma applied), TYPE=58
4) Place the outputted correction chart on the Original Pickup Tray with face-up, select the
following item and press OK key.
NOTE:
Before outputting a correction chart, it is recommended to print out the documents with
high screen ruling to stabilize the engine.
3) Display the screen of (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R and specify the reference
1PSCLB_A (Execution of DADF 2-sides color difference correction (front side))

CAUTION:
Make sure to place the correction chart with the printed side facing-up and also the
corner blue patch is positioned in the front left.
side in the following item.

1PCLBSET (Setting of the reference side for DADF 2-sides color difference correction)
<Setting value>
0: None (default), 1: Adjust the back side to the front, 2: Adjust the front side to the back
CAUTION:
It is not possible to execute the adjustment when 0 is specified in this setting.
If adjustment is not made, be sure to set this item to "0".
F-6-12
NOTE:
When exiting the MISC-R screen during scanning, the scanned value is cleared.
6-11
5) Place the outputted correction chart on the Original Pickup Tray with face-down, select the
following item and press OK key.
6-12
7) Depending on the correction result, execute the step a to c as necessary.

a. When resetting the correction result.
1PSCLB_B (Execution of DADF 2-sided color difference correction (back side))
Specify 0 in the following item and turn OFF/ON the power.

1PCLBSET (Setting of reference side for DADF 2-sides color difference correction)
CAUTION:
Make sure to place the correction chart with the printed side facing-down and also the
corner blue patch is positioned in the rear left.
b. If the color that was not displaced before correction is displaced and wants to correct.
Specify 1 in the following item and return to the step 3).
1PCLBUDR (Setting of DADF 2-sides color correction lower limit level)
<Setting value>
0: OFF (default), 1: ON
c. If there is a color that is extremely displaced after correction.
Specify 1 or 2 in the following item and return to the step 3).
1PCLBOVR (Setting of DADF 2-sides color correction upper limit level)
<Setting value>
0: No control amount (default), 1: Control amount low, 2: Control amount high
F-6-13
NOTE:
When exiting the MISC-R screen during scanning, the scanned value is cleared and
processing will be canceled.
6) Make sure that OK! is displayed on 1PSCLB_A & 1PSCLB_B and turn OFF/ON the
power.
6-12
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Vertical Lines
Vertical Lines
1. Analysis Case
a. Cause
Dust is adhered on the following places.
Copyboard Glass/Stream Reading Glass/Reading Glass
6-13
NOTE: Cleaning the Scanner Unit Reflection Light Inlet
If dust larger than 1mm adheres on the Scanner Unit Reflection Light Inlet, it may block
the light path.
Because dust is more likely to adhere to near the sheet affixed to cover the light source
of the Scanner Unit, inspect visually and remove the dust.
Predict the location of dust from the location of vertical lines on the copied image.
- Reader
Standard White Plate

Turndown Mirror
Scanner Unit Reflection Light Inlet
b. Field Remedy
Clean the Copyboard Glass/Stream Reading Glass/Reading Glass.
Scanner Unit
Reflection Light
Inlet
Clean the Standard White Plate with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
F-6-14
Dry wipe the Scanner Unit Reflection Light Inlet with lint-free paper.
If dust is not removed even cleaning the Scanner Unit Reflection Light Inlet with lint-free
- DADF
paper, remove the dust with tweezers.

Clean the Turndown Mirror.
Scanner Unit
Reflection Light
Inlet
F-6-15
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Vertical Lines
6-13
Troubleshooting > Error Code > E021-xxx due to mismatched phase between the screw of color Developing Assembly and coupling of main body
Error Code
6-14
By rotating it in the reverse direction, toner clots on the Sleeve may damage the Toner
E021-xxx due to mismatched phase between the screw

of color Developing Assembly and coupling of main
body
Screw of color Developing Assembly (and coupling of main body)
[Cause]
Mismatched phase between the screw of color Developing Assembly and coupling of main
body
[Condition]
Mismatched phase between the screw of color Developing Assembly and coupling of main
body
[Field Remedy]
In case of E201, be sure to perform the following procedures in order to match the phase
between the screw of color Developing Assembly and coupling of main body.
1) Remove the color Developing Assembly where the error occurs and make the coupling of
the Sleeve rotate 1/4 turn in the direction of the arrow (clockwise).
Color Developing
Assembly
Coupling
[Points to note about field remedy]
F-6-16
Troubleshooting > Error Code > E021-xxx due to mismatched phase between the screw of color Developing Assembly and coupling of main body
6-14
Troubleshooting > Alarm Code > How to clear 04-3043, 04-3143 and 04-3243:
Alarm Code
6-15
How to clear 04-3043, 04-3143 and 04-3243:
How to clear 04-3042, 04-3142 and 04-3242:

When the Lifter Plate of the Multi Deck is at the upper limit position (when the Lifter Upper
Limit Sensor is ON) for some reasons, the Lifter Plate does not restore even after stopping
the lifting operation of the Lifter Plate, and turning OFF and then ON the power supply.
Move down the Lifter Plate from the upper limit position, according to the procedure shown
below.
When the Lifter Plate of the Multi Deck is at the lower limit position (when the Lifter Lower
Limit Sensor is ON) for some reasons, the Lifter Plate does not restore even after stopping
the lifting operation of the Lifter Plate, and turning OFF and then ON the power supply.
Move up the Lifter Plate from the lower limit position, according to the procedure shown
below.
[Field Remedy]
1) Turn OFF the power supply of the main body.
2) Remove the Rear Cover of the Multi Deck.
[Field Remedy]
3) While closing the receptacle where the lifter does not operate, turn the belt of the Lifter
1) Turn OFF the power supply of the main body.
Motor clockwise until the shaft of the Lifter Motor revolves 5 times.
2) Remove the Rear Cover of the Multi Deck.

3) While closing the receptacle where the Lifter Plate does not operate, turn the belt of the
The Lifter Motor is released from the lower limit position.
Lifter Motor counter-clockwise until the shaft of the Lifter Motor revolves 5 times.
The Lifter Motor is released from the upper limit position.
Lifter Motor Shaft
Lifter Motor Shaft
F-6-18
4) Turn ON the power supply of the main body.

F-6-17
The Lifter Plate can operate now.
4) Turn ON the power supply of the main body.

The Lifter Plate can operate now.
Troubleshooting > Alarm Code > How to clear 04-3043, 04-3143 and 04-3243:
6-15
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade
6-16
Version upgrade
Overview
Overview of Version Upgrade
The system software version is upgraded in 2 steps, downloading and writing the new version of the system software.
Downloading System Software

This machine supports the following 3 downloading methods.
1. Download via the service support tool (hereinafter SST)
Connect this machine to the PC by the cross cable to download the system software using SST installed in the PC.
2. Download using the USB memory storage device
Insert the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the machine and download the system software stored in the device.
3. Download via Contents Delivery System (hereinafter CDS)
Access to CDS via Internet to download the system software directly to the machine.
SST
System Software
System CD
System Software
Host Machine
Download mode
Normal mode
/(Safe mode)
Copy the
System Software
Write the
system software
Restart
Automatically restarted
USB menu
USB memory
storage device
System Software
Temporary Memory Space
Activate the machine with the

new system software version
Done
CDS
System Software
Updater
F-6-19
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade
6-16
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Writing System Software
6-17
Writing System Software

The system software downloaded in either of the above-mentioned methods is stored in the temporary memory space.
After the system software is successfully downloaded, restart the machine to write the software in the machine.
In case the main power switch is turned OFF during the writing process, the machine may not be started.
This machine supports the remote version upgrade via CDS. When upgrading the system software via CDS, the warning message is shown on the control panel to alert the user not to turn OFF the
power switch.
F-6-20
When the system software is successfully written, the machine is automatically restarted to activate the downloaded system software.
If any error occurs during the writing process, the error code, E753-0001, is shown.
The name of the system software component is shown to the left of the error log message, version up..error. Check the name if the software is for the option not attached to the machine. If so,
turn OFF / ON the machine to recover the error (see Troubleshooting for details).
Log
version up...
error massage
Error
massage
F-6-21
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Writing System Software
6-17
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Download Mode
6-18
Download Mode
When the version is upgraded via SST or with the USB memory storage device storage device, start the machine in Download mode. This machine has the following 2 Download modes similarly with
other iR-series models.
Normal mode(recommend):
Start from Copier > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > Download.
Conventionally, the main power switch of this machine was turned ON while pressing 1 and 7 keys. However, the procedure above automatically assigns a static IP address and enables the
download same as before.
You can obtain the version information and avoid unnecessary download and errors.
NOTE :
When entering Download mode, be sure to go into Service mode after all items of main menu have been displayed.
This machine reads the version information of system software when it starts. You must start Download mode after the version information has been obtained.
Safe mode:
Press 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad when turning on the power.
* Be sure to use "Single mode" when using SST. SST "Assist mode" cannot be used in safe mode. Any mode can be used when using USB.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Download Mode
6-18
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > System Software Components
6-19
System Software Components

The table below shows the system software components for this machine.
Software to be upgraded
Host Machine
Main Controller
Language Module
Remote UI Contents
RUI portal
Accessibility
UI-BOX
UI-COPY
UI-Intro
UI-SEND
MEAP Libraly
Paper Type Information File
Service Mode Contents
DC Controller
Box Checker
WebDAV Contents
Custom Menu Application
Error Recovery System
Job Hold Application
NLS Application
Image Analysis Board
WDS-SCAN (JAVA UI)
Key/Certificatefor Encrypted Communication
ADF Controller
Finisher Controller
ADF
Staple Finisher L1/Saddle
Stitch Finisher L1
Staple Finisher K1/Saddle Finisher Controller
Stitch Finisher K1
Interface Conttroller
Extensions System Option
Display on SST
Registered name
Name of system
of product
software
iAC7260
iAXXXX
DADF-R1
FIN_L1
FIN_K1
Voice Synthesis Dictionary

Voice Recognition Dictionary
Resources for Web Browser
OCR Libraly
G3FAX
PUI_B1
iAC7260
iAXXXX
iAC7260
SYSTEM
LANGUAGE
RUI
RPTL
ACSBT
BOX
COPY
INTRO
SEND
MEAP
MEDIA
SMCNT
DCON
BCT
WEBDAV
CSTMN
ERS
HOLD
NLS
TSP
WSDS
KEY
RCOND
FIN_CON
SDL_CON
FIN_CON
SLD_CON
FLD_CON
IST_CON
TRM_CON
PUI_CON
TTS
ASR
BROWSER
CDICT
G3CCB
G3CCM
How to upgrade versions

Remarks
SST USB memory Others
Staple Finisher L1/Saddle Stitch Finisher L1

Staple Finisher K1/Saddle Stitch Finisher K1
T-6-3
This machine holds the increased number of system software components compared to conventional iR machines to meet vastly extended functionality.
6-19
6-20
The Image Reader for this machine consists of 2-sided Single Pass and 2-sided Double Pass, requiring specific system software for each.
The name of the system software for the 2-sided Single Pass Image Reader (Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1): RCOND
The name of the system software for the 2-sided Double Pass Image Reader (Color Image Reader Unit B1): RCONS
The finisher for this machine supports version upgrade via the host machine in any of the above-mentioned methods, i.e., via SST, USB memory storage device storage device or CDS. Note that the
External 2-hole Puncher B1 does not support version upgrade via the host machine. To upgrade versions, connect the option with the PC using the downloader PCB to download the system software
via SST.
6-20
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Note on Download Process
6-21
Note on Download Process

CAUTION: Never turn OFF the power during the download / writing process.
Turning off the power during the download / writing process may cause a failure of machine start-up at power-on.
If this occurs, start the machine in Safe mode (by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad).
When the machine is successfully started in Safe mode, execute formatting of BOOTDEV partition, retry downloading the system software.
CAUTION:
Be sure to use normal mode when using download mode except in a case where it is not possible to start this machine and enter service mode.
In safe mode, version information of SYSTEM, MEAPCONT, LANGUAGE, RUI, and SDICT can be obtained, but version information of other system software such as DCON and RCON cannot
be obtained. Therefore the following points to note are required when downloading in safe mode.
[RCON]
The version is not upgraded except in a case where Single mode of SST is used or when "Overwrite all" of USB download menu is used.
[DCON and others]
The following symptoms occur when SST (Single mode) or USB download menu (Auto) is used.
- The time for download/write becomes longer because the software is overwritten even when system software of the same version is being written.
- A confirmation message is not displayed when a lower version is going to be downloaded.
CAUTION: error code E753-0001

When an error occurs during writing process of the system software downloaded using SST or USB memory, error code E753-0001 is displayed.
Check if the target option is properly installed and see if the software to download is for the correct target option, and then execute downloading again.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Note on Download Process
6-21
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview
Version Upgrade via SST
6-22

System software is saved in the temporary storage area on HDD after downloaded with SST.
Overview
The system software can be downloaded either of the two modes below via SST.
Assist mode (recommended)
Restart the machine after download so that it will be written to the system area, and the flash
ROM.
After the writing has been completed normally, this machine automatically restarts with the
Single mode
new system software.
Assist mode provides the following features.
Attached option types are automatically recognized.
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
The new versions of the system software for attached option types are automatically
searched.
- - Download Mode - - iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete

iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
The set of system software with interactive behavior confirmed is automatically

downloaded.
HDD
The accessories attached to the host machine are automatically recognized to download
System
Software
the system software for each accessory.
System
Software
Temporary
memory space
This machine holds a number of system software components that mutually interacts
during operation. Behaviors of such system software should be confirmed when these are
downloaded as the set. Thus, Assist mode is basically recommended to download the system
software for this machine.
2) OFF/ON
NOTE :
Use Single mode only when any of the following conditions is met.
When downloading some the system software components, i.e. DCON, RCON or options.
When reloading the system software after HDD is formatted.
3) The system software is written

<<<<< download shell >>>>>
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
+++ Switch OFF the power then ON. +++
HDD
System
Software
Temporary
memory space
System
memory area
4) OFF/ON
FLASH
ROM
5) Start with the new version.
F-6-22
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview
6-22
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software
Copying System Software
6-23
5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click Search button.
System CD to SST
Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST.
NOTE:
The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity.
If the above is the case, decompress the file before copying it to SST.
Preparation
Requirements:
PC with SST Ver.4.41 or later installed
The system CD for this machine
F-6-24
Steps to copy the system software
6) The system software stored in the system CD is listed.
1) Start the PC
Uncheck the box(es) for unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software and click Copy
2) Set the system CD in the PC
button.
3) Start SST
4) Click Register Firmware button.
F-6-25
F-6-23
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software
6-23
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection
7) The message is shown when the system software is successfully copied. Click OK button.
6-24
Connection
The following IP address is automatically set for this machine at start-up in Download mode.
IP address:172.16.1.100
Subnet mask:255.255.255.0
When the PC with SST installed is connected to this machine, change the PC network
address to the following.
IP address:172.16.1.160
Subnet mask:255.255.255.0
Default gateway: arbitrary
CAUTION:
F-6-26
If the PC has the connection to the network, the settings changed to the abovementioned may cause network failures due to redundant IP addresses, etc. Ensure that
the PC is disconnected from the network when you change the PC network settings.
Alternatively use the cross cable to connect the PC to this machine.
Preparation
Requirements
PC with SST Ver. 4.41 or later installed and the system software for this machine is stored
Cross cable
10Base-T : Category 3 or 5
100Base-T : Category 5
1000Base-T : Enhanced Category 5 (CAT5e) or later
CAUTION:
Disconnect USB memory storage device storage devices if connected.
Communication to SST is disabled in this machine if any USB memory storage device
storage device is recognized. SST and the USB memory storage device storage device
cannot be used concurrently.
6-24
6-25
4) Check the IP address of the PC.

Go to Start menu to select Program > Accessory > Command Prompt.
Type IPCONFIG and press [Return] to see the network settings of the PC.
If any discrepancies from the description in the figure below are found, change the network
settings of the PC.
F-6-28
CAUTION:
IP address172.16.1.160
Subnet mask255.255.255.0
IP address172.16.1.100
Subnet mask255.255.255.0
Cross cable
10Base-TCategory 3, 5 or later
100Base-TXCategory 5 or later
1000Base-TX Category 5 (CAT5e) or later
The network settings are not shown with IPCONFIG if the PC is disconnected from
the network. To check the settings, connect the PC to this machine at power-on by the
cross cable.
F-6-27
Steps
1) Use the cross cable to connect the machine to the PC with SST installed.
2) Turn on the main power switch of this machine.
3) Enter Service mode to start the machine in Download mode.
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD and press [OK].
6-25
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
Downloading System Software (Assist mode)

1) Start this machine and enter Download mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM >
6-26
NOTE:
If the PC in Assist mode is connected to the machine in Safe mode,
DOWNLOAD).
2) Connect the PC to this machine and start SST.
3) Click Start Assist mode button.
Skip this step when starting SST in Assist mode.
F-6-30
only the system software of SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MEAPCONT and SDICT can
acquire version information.
F-6-29
If the upgraded set of the system software is stored in SST, the new set is automatically
4) Click Start button
selected.
NOTE:
If no upgrade is stored, the existing system software set is unchanged. At any rate, any
versions of the system software can be downloaded by manual selection.
F-6-31
When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted to initiate the writing
process.The machine may repeat restarting several times depending on option configuration.
Upon the system software written, the machine is restarted again and the main menu is
displayed.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
6-26
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)
6-27
Downloading System Software (Single mode)
NOTE: Download Confirmation Message Modes

Download is confirmed in any of the three message modes.
The following is the sample steps to download DCON (the other components of the system
Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions
Upgraded versions are downloaded without message.
Skip download of the existing versions.
Confirm whether to download downgraded versions.
Confirm whether to download the existing versions / downgraded versions
Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions.
Overwrite all versions
Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are
downloaded without message.
software can be downloaded similarly).

1) Start the machine in an appropriate Download mode.
2) Connect the PC to this machine to start SST.
3) Select the model to be connected and Single, check the network settings. Click Start
button.
By default, Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded
versions is selected.
5) Click"Next"button.
F-6-33
F-6-32
6) Disconnect the cross cable from the machine.

7) Enter Service mode to check the system software versions.
8) Click"OK"button.
The main menu is displayed.
6-27
NOTE:
The following device information is shown at the right top of SST screen.
6-28
NOTE: Download Confirmation Message Modes

Download is confirmed in any of the three message modes.
IP address
Model name
Download mode
Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions
Skip download of the existing versions.
Confirm whether to download the existing versions / downgraded versions
Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions.
Overwrite all versions.
Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are
downloaded without message.
By default, Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded
5) When download is completed, click OK button.
F-6-34
4) Select the DCON version to be downloaded and click Start button.

Multiple files can be selected in this step.
F-6-36
The main menu is displayed.
F-6-35
6-28
NOTE:
If it is before restarting the machine, the downloaded system software can be deleted
not written on HDD or Flash ROM.
1) Click Clear button.
6-29
6) Click Shutdown / Restart button.
Clear button
F-6-40
7) Click Restart button.

F-6-37
2) Click Execute Clear button.
The system software, which is stored in the temporary memory space of HDD, is deleted.
F-6-41
The machine is restarted.

The downloaded system software is written on HDD or Flash ROM.
F-6-38
3) ClickOKbutton.
8) Click"OK"button.
9) Enter Service mode to check the versions.
Return to the previous screen.
F-6-39
6-29
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
Formatting HDD
When executing format BOOTDEV
Overview
This machine probides the following two types of HDD Formatting.
Execute format BOOTDEV
ALL:to format the whole HDD
6-30
When executing format ALL
startup in normal mode
Execute format ALL
Automatically restart
When HDD set as the service parts (the new HDD) is mounted
When clearing the system software and data completely from HDD and reloading the
system software.
Once Format ALL is executed in your machine, all the user data and MEAP applications
held in HDD will be cleared. Ensure to gain an agreement from the user before formatting.
Select download mode

([1]: Upgrade (AUTO)is recommended)

Download the system software

for the main controller
Writing process
Writing process
Start in the new version

of the system software

BOOTDEV: to format the system software storage area on HDD.

When clearing the system software storage area and reloading the system software
HDD needs not to be formatted at version upgrade.
HDD can be formatted only in Single mode.
After HDD is formatted, the machine cannot be started before the system software is
downloaded.
After Format ALL is executed, the machine is automatically restarted to reflect formatting
to HDD. At this time, the machine automatically starts in Download mode. For BOOTDEV
format, the machine is ready to download the system software without restarting.
After formatting, enter either Assist mode(recommended) or Single mode to download the
system software.
F-6-42
6-30
Steps of Formatting
When executing format ALL startup in normal mode

1) Enter Download mode. (Enter Safe mode when you mount the new HDD or when the
machine is unable to start normally due to HDD failures, etc.)
Execute format ALL
Execute format ALL
6-31
2) Connect the PC to the machine to start SST.
3) Select the model to be connected and single. Check the network settings and click Start
button.
Select Download mode

(preferably in assist mode)
Select Download mode

(preferably in assist mode)

Writing process
Writing process
F-6-44
4) ClickFormat HDDbutton
Start in Download mode

of Normal mode
Start in Download mode

of Normal mode
Download the system software for

DCON/RCON/option
Since there is no system software

to be downloaded,
the shutdown sequence is executed
restart the machine manually

Writing process
Start in the same version
F-6-45

F-6-43
6-31
5) Select "BOOTDEV" or "ALL" to click "Start".
6-32
7) Download the system software in any Download mode (Assist mode recommended). See
the steps to download the system software for details.
F-6-46
6) Click "Execute Format" button.
F-6-48
CAUTION:
After HDD is formatted, ensure to download the system software. If the system software
is not downloaded, E602 error is triggered at power-on.
CAUTION:
Restarting takes more time after HDD is formatted and the system software is
downloaded (to write the downloaded software).
Down time may be approx. 5 minutes in maximum to proceed the writing process.
Never turn OFF the machine while Starting screen is shown.
F-6-47
HDD is formatted.
6-32
Mounting New HDD
6-33
When the new HDD is mounted, the machine cannot be started in the normal procedure.
After HDD set as the service parts is mounted, the new HDD should be formatted initially. In
this case, the message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted.
Start the machine in Safe mode as Download mode. When gaining connection to SST, the
message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted.
The figure below shows the abbreviated steps.
Replacing HDDs
Start the machine in Safe mode

(by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad)
Connect to SST
F-6-50
Click "Yes" and the message is shown, confirming whether to format HDD.
Confirm that the new HDD is successfully mounted
Format HDD (Format ALL)
Follow the steps as described in Format ALL section.

F-6-49
F-6-51
Click Initialize button to initialize HDD (Format ALL). Follow the steps described in Format
ALL section to download the system software.
6-33
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
Backup
Overview
At the time of replacing controller PCBs, the backup function enables to save data held in the
PCB to migrate them to the new PCB.
Backup data
NOTE:
Before replacing the Reader Controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode.
The backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This
enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Reader
Controller PCB.
Before replacing the DC controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode. The
backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This
enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Controller
PCB.
Backup via SST

Backup data RAM
MEAP applications
For investigation in Dev
Service Print
6-34
Downloaded/Uploaded file names

SramImg.bin(to be uploaded / downloaded)
MeapBack.bin(to be uploaded / downloaded)
Sublog.bin((Downloadable))
The text file of the contents which You output to paper with a service
mode(Downloadable).
Before replacing the Main Controller PCB 2, upload SramImg.bin. By downloading

SramImg.bin after replacement, the new Main Controller PCB 2 inherits the data
including Service mode stored in the old PCB
T-6-4
Backup RAM holds the data from Backup RAM of the Main Controller PCB 2.
(Because setting data of service mode for the parts counter and the Main Controller are
stored, be sure to back up the data when replacing the Main Controller PCB and the DC
Controller PCB.)
MeapBack holds MEAP applications and their data stored in HDD
Store Meapbackup.bin; and "Settings/Registration > Data Management> Initialize All

Data/Setings"; Restore it; even if it, cannot log in to SMS.
Restore Meapbackup.bin which backed up after "Initialize All Data/Setings"; store it.
Backup via Service mode

Backup data
Backup of Reader
Controller PCB
Backup of DC Controller
PCB
Service mode
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMBUP (Backup)
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMRES (Restore)
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMBUP (Backup)
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMRES (Restore)
T-6-5
Data is stored in HDD.
6-34
Steps to Upload Data
6-35
Listed below are the sample steps to upload MeapBack.

1) Enter Download mode.
CAUTION:
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of
debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation
to determine the cause.
2) Connect the PC to the machine to start SST.

3) Select the model to be connected and Single. Check the network settings and click Start.
The backup data can be downloaded only on the machine from which the data were
uploaded.
This machine does not use SramRCON and SramDcon
iR ADVNCE C5051 Series

Service PC
SST
iR ---System
F-6-53
Upload/Download
4) Click Upload Data button.
MeapBack
/ SramImg.bin

SRAM
HDD
SramImg.bin
Meapback.bin
Main controller
F-6-52
F-6-54
6-35
6-36
Steps to Download Data
5) Select MeapBack.bin to click Start button.
CAUTION:
The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data were
uploaded
Store Meapbackup.bin; and "Settings/Registration > Data Management> Initialize All
Data/Setings"; Restore it; even if it, cannot log in to SMS. Restore Meapbackup.bin
which backed up after "Initialize All Data/Setings"; store it.
Listed below were the sample steps to download MeapBack.

1) Enter Download mode
F-6-55
6) Enter the file name to be saved and comments when necessary. Click Save button.
2) Connect the PC to the machine and start SST.

3) Select the model to be connected and Single. Check the network setting and click Start
button.
F-6-56
F-6-57
7) Click OK button.
6-36
6-37
4) Click Download Data button.
F-6-58
5) Select the data to be downloaded and click Start button.
F-6-59
6) When the data are successfully downloaded, click OK button.

7) Restart the machine
6-37
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory storage device Storage Device
6-38
Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device

Copy the system software from SST to the USB memory storage device storage device.
Right after download from the USB memory storage device storage device, the system
Relation between SST and USB memory storage device
software is stored in the temporary memory space in HDD.

The system software is written in the system memory area, Boot area and Flash ROM upon
Storage Device
When using the USB memory storage device storage device for version upgrade, the system
software should be copied to the USB memory storage device storage device. By inserting
the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the machine, the system
the machine restarted.

When the writing process is successfully completed, the machine is automatically restarted
with the new version of the system software.
Tasks in the customer site
software can be upgraded.

The figure below shows the relation between SST and USB memory storage device storage
device.
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
iR ----
PC
- - Download Mode - - iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete

iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
Task in the office

USB memory
storage device
System
Software
System
Software
SST
System software
SST
System
Software
Temporary
memory space
Copying the system software
Copying the System Software
USB memory
storage device
HDD
2) OFF/ON
3) The system software is written
Downloading the
system software
HDD
<<<<< download shell >>>>>

[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
+++ Switch OFF the power then ON. +++
HDD
System
Software
Temporary
memory space
Flash ROM
System software
System
memory area
F-6-60
4) OFF/ON
When downloading the system software, enter any of Download modes below.
Normal mode (recommended)
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > Download in Service mode and press [OK].
Safe mode (only when any system error occurs or the machine is unable to start normally;
FLASH
ROM
5) Start with the new version.
turn ON the main power switch by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric
keypad)
F-6-61
6-38
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory storage device Storage Device
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
Copying System Software
6-39
5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click Search button.
System CD to SST
Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST.
NOTE:
The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity.
If the above is the case, decompress the file before copying it to SST.
Preparation
Requirements:
PC with SST Ver. 4.41 or later installed
The system CD for this machine
F-6-63
6) The list of the system software components stored in the system CD is shown on the
screen.
1) Start the PC.
Uncheck the box(es) of unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software component(s) and
2) Set the system CD to the PC.
click Copy button.
3) Start SST.
4) Click Register Firmware button.
F-6-64
F-6-62
6-39
7) The message is shown when the system software is copied. Click OK button.
6-40
SST to USB memory Storage Device

Copy the system software stored in SST to the USB memory storage device storage device.
Preparation
Requirements:
PC with SST Ver. 4.41 or later installed
USB memory storage device (*)
Requirements for USB memory storage device:
Interface: USB 1.1 or later (USB 2.0 is recommended)
Memory capacity: 1GB or more is recommended (the total file size of the system software
is approx. 500MB).
Format: FAT (FAT 16), FAT32 (NTFS and HFS are not supported). The memory is formatted
in a partition (multiple partitions are not supported)
F-6-65
Unavailable USB memory: memory that is protected by a password or the encryption

technology.
1) Start the PC.
2) Insert the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the PC.
3) Start SST.
6-40
4) Click the USB icon shown in "Select the target" Screen.
6-41
6) Select Series and Version (the System Version).
F-6-66
5) Select the drive (removable disk) where the USB memory storage device storage device is
inserted.
F-6-68
NOTE:
The signs shown in the field of Firmware registration static indicate the following:
Y: Stored in SST
N: Not stored in SST
F-6-67
6-41
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Connection
7) Click Start button.

Start copying the system software to the USB memory storage device storage device.
6-42
Connection
CAUTION:
This machine does not communicate with SST once it recognizes a USB memory
storage device; therefore, SST and a USB memory storage device cannot be used at
the same time.
Preparation
Item to prepare: a USB memory storage device, which the system software for this machine
is stored.
Procedure
1) If a cross cable is connected to this machine, remove the cross cable.
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
F-6-69
NOTE:
When the accessory configuration is known for the machine where the system software
is to be downloaded, uncheck the boxes of unnecessary accessories. E753-0001 is
triggered if the software for an unnecessary accessory is downloaded. (If this occurred,
turn OFF/ON the power to recover the error.)
8) Click OK when the system software is successfully copied in the USB memory storage
device storage device.
USB memory
USB port
F-6-71
F-6-70
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Connection
6-42
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software
6-43
Upgrading System Software
3) Switch to the download mode to use.

In the case of normal mode (Recommended)
Select the following in Service Mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD;
Menu/Function Overview
and then press [OK].
[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[7]: Clear downloaded files
[8]: download Menu 2
[9]: Other Menu
In the case of safe mode (This mode should not be used as general rule. To be used only
when normal startup fails, such as a system error, etc.)
While pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch.
Once this machine recognizes the USB memory storage device, the following menu is
displayed on the Control Panel.

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
[Reset]: Shutdown
F-6-73

[1]: Upgrade(Auto)
To download/write the system software (automatic)
To download the system software (confirmation)
[Reset]: Shutdown

F-6-72
To download the system software (overwriting)

[4]: Format HDD
To format the HDD/BOOTDEV partition
CAUTION:
Depending on the manufacturer or the model, this machine may not recognize the USB
memory storage device.
[5]: Backup
Collection of debug Log or Service Print(Because You are for R&D review, do not use it
other than the following.)
This machine retries the detection of a USB memory storage device for up to 60
seconds after power-ON. The above menu is not displayed if the recognition of a USB
memory storage device is failed within the time period.
In such a case, use another USB memory storage device.
[8]: Download Menu 2
To clear the system software immediately after downloading (before writing)

To move to Download Menu 2
[9]: Other Menu
Others (e.g.: version information)
[Reset]: Shutdown
To execute shutdown sequence
Press the key on the Control Panel to select/execute the functions.
6-43
Points to Note When Operating/Using System Software

NOTE:
The following download method is recommended to execute normal download of the
system software (any download work other than downloading after replacing/formatting
the HDD):
Download mode --- Normal mode
Download menu --- [1]: Upgrade (Auto)
6-44
CAUTION: Note when the power is turned OFF

Be sure to execute shutdown sequence to quit download mode.
Pressing the [Reset] key and then the [0] key on the menu screen executes the
shutdown sequence.
Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
CAUTION: Prohibition to turn OFF the power during downloading/writing

Do not turn OFF the power during downloading or writing of the system software;
otherwise, this machine may not be started even if the power is turned ON.
If the machine fails to be started even if the power is turned ON, start the machine in
safe mode (pressing 2 + 8 keys).
When the machine can be started in safe mode, be sure to download the system
software once again.
If the machine fails to be started, replace the HDD and then download the system
software.
F-6-74
6-44
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)
Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)

[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the
USB memory storage device to download only the system software with newer version in the
USB memory storage device to the temporary storage area of the HDD.
In safe mode, only the following system software can retrieve the version information (the
version is compared).
SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MERAPCONT, SDICT
As for system software of the host machine whose version information cannot be obtained,
the software for RCON is not downloaded, but other software are downloaded.
For the system software of the option that is not connected, it is handled as follows:
<In the case of startup in normal mode (Recommended)>
When Download Mode Version (to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the
download mode) is before 00.36
All the system software including the one of the non-connecting option is to be
downloaded as well (E753 is displayed).
download mode) is 00.36:
For the Finisher that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
G3CCB/G3CCM is to be downloaded even if Super G3FAX Board AE1 is not
6-45
Operation procedure
1) Enter download mode.
3) Press the key on the Control Panel.
[1] -> [0]: To execute downloading/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
[Reset]: Shutdown
F-6-75
During downloading, download status is displayed on the Control Panel.
installed (E753 is displayed).

download mode) is 00.40 or later:
For the option that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
<In the case of startup in safe mode>
The system software of the options which are not connected are not downloaded.
After downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to write the
downloaded system software to the HDD system area/flash ROM.
F-6-76
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)
6-45
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation)
Once downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to start writing to the
HDD system area/flash ROM.
The screen shows the countdown once writing process is properly complete.
6-46
Downloading System Software (Confirmation)

The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the
USB memory storage device to download the system software with newer version in the USB
memory storage device to the temporary storage area of the HDD.
When the system software version in the USB memory storage device is the same or older, a
confirmation message is displayed on the Control Panel so that the user can select whether
to overwrite or not.
In safe mode, only the following system software can retrieve the version information (the
version is compared).
SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MERAPCONT, SDICT
As for system software of the host machine whose version information cannot be obtained,
the software for RCON is not downloaded, but other software are downloaded.
For the system software of the option that is not connected, it is handled as follows:
F-6-77
Once the countdown shows 0, this machine is automatically restarted.

4) When the main menu is displayed, press the removal key at the lower right on the touch
<In the case of startup in normal mode (Recommended)>

download mode) is before 00.36:
panel and select removal of the memory media, and then remove the USB memory storage
All the system software including the one of the non-connecting option is to be
device.
downloaded as well (E753 is displayed).
CAUTION:
After HDD formatting and downloading, this machine takes a long time (for writing the
software).
This machine, in some cases, stays in standby screen up to 10 min during writing. At
this time, do not turn off the main power switch.
download mode) is 00.36:
For the Finisher that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
G3CCB/G3CCM is to be downloaded even if Super G3FAX Board AE1 is not
installed (E753 is displayed).
download mode) is 00.40 or later:
For the option that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
<In the case of startup in safe mode>
The system software of the options which are not connected are not downloaded.
Unlike menu [1], this machine is not automatically started despite completion of downloading.
By manually turning OFF/ON the power, the system software is written at the time of startup.
In this case, starting the machine in safe mode deletes the downloaded system software
saved in the temporary storage area; therefore, do not press the numeric keys (2 + 8), but
execute normal startup to execute writing.
6-46
6-47
Operation procedure
Once downloading is complete, a message is displayed to encourage pressing the Reset
key.


------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
F-6-80
4) Press the Reset key.
/[2] has been selected. Execute?/

- (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys F-6-78
Shutdown sequence is executed.

5) Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
6) Remove the USB memory storage device.
7) Ensure the LED at the lower right on the Control Panel is turned OFF, and turn ON the
Main Power Switch.
NOTE:
When the system software version in the USB memory storage device is the same or
older than the system software in the HDD, a message is displayed in each case to
confirm whether to overwrite or not.
Press the key on the Control Panel.
[0]: To overwrite/Any key other than [0]: Not to overwrite
Writing to the HDD system area/flash ROM is started after the startup. The screen shows
the countdown once the writing process is properly completed.
The screen shows the countdown once the writing process is properly completed. This
machine is restarted with the downloaded system software at the count of 0.
F-6-79
6-47
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Overwriting)
Downloading System Software (Overwriting)
6-48
CAUTION:

Regardless of the system software version in the host machine, all the system software in the
USB memory storage device is downloaded.
Regardless of the system software version in the host machine, all the system software in the
USB memory storage device is downloaded.
Unlike menu [1], this machine is not automatically started despite completion of downloading.
By manually turning OFF/ON the power, the system software is written at the time of startup.
In this case, starting the machine in safe mode deletes the downloaded system software
saved in the temporary storage area; therefore, do not press the numeric keys (2 + 8), but
execute normal startup to execute writing.
In overwriting download mode of the USB memory storage device, all the system
software stored in the USB memory storage device is downloaded as well. Therefore,
be sure to keep the following in mind: If the USB memory storage device includes the
system software of non-connecting option, E753-0001 is displayed when the writing
process is completed.
In the case of an error in downloading of the non-connecting option, the machine can
be recovered by turning OFF/ON the power.
To prevent such error, uncheck the applicable system software so that the system
software of the non-connecting option is not downloaded when downloading the system
software from SST to USB.
Operation procedure
key.


------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
F-6-82
4) Press the Reset key.

Shutdown sequence is executed.
5) Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
7) After checking that the LED is turned OFF at the lower right on the Control Panel, turn ON
the Main Power Switch.
Writing to the HDD system area/flash ROM is started after the startup. The screen shows
the countdown once the writing process is properly complete.
When the countdown shows 0, this machine is restarted with the downloaded system
software.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Overwriting)
6-48
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD
Formatting HDD
HDD Format Overview

The following 2 types of formatting methods are available with this machine:
Execute format BOOTDEV
ALL: To initialize the entire HDD
6-49
startup in normal mode
Execute format ALL
In the case of installing the HDD provided as a service part (a new HDD).
In the case of cleaning the entire software and data in the HDD to reinstall the system
software.
All the user data and MEAP application in the HDD is deleted when executing Format ALL
with the machine in use; therefore, be sure to obtain agreement from the user to execute



Writing process
Writing process


Format ALL.
BOOTDEV: to format the system software storage area on HDD.

In the case of normal upgrading by cleaning the storage area of the system software
User data will not be deleted.
To reinstall the system software, HDD formatting is not required.
After formatting, this machine cannot be started unless the system software is downloaded.
When Format ALL is executed, initialization process is reflected to the HDD so that this
machine is automatically restarted to automatically enter download mode. In the case of
formatting BOOTDEV, the machine is not automatically restarted, but the system software
can be downloaded.
After formatting is executed, be sure to download the system software by [1]: Upgrade
(AUTO) in main menu.
F-6-83
6-49
[4]: Format HDD
6-50
This mode executes formatting of BOOTDEV partition or the entire HDD.
[1] -> [0]: To execute formatting BOOTDEV/Any key other than [0]: To return to the menu
Operation procedure
[2] -> [0]: To execute formatting the entire HDD/Any key other than [0]: To return to the
screen.
menu screen.
[C]: To return to the menu screen.

[4] -> [0]: To execute formating /Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
F-6-85

key.
5) Press any key to return to the menu screen.
6) Download the system software.
Refer to Separate Download for details.
6-50
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Download Menu 2
Backup
Clearing Download File
[5]: Backup
6-51
This menu clears the system software stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD.
CAUTION:
This function is used to clear the downloaded file without writing it after downloading the
This function includes R&D review.
system software in menu [2] or [3].
Do not usually use it other than the following function.
Operation procedure
The USB memory collecting log uses the USB memory where You registered a system
software for this Host machine with by SST.
1) After downloading by menu [2] or [3], press the Reset key to execute shutdown sequence,
and then turn OFF the main power once the screen display disappears.
2) Start the machine in safe mode (while pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the
Main Power Switch).
Operation procedure
If the system software is stored in the HDD temporary storage area when starting the
machine in safe mode, the system software is deleted. In such a case, the following message
is displayed on the touch panel.

[5] -> [0]: To execute formating /Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.
4) SRAM backup of Main Controller PCB 2
All downloaded file is deleted.

3) Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
[1] Sublog -> Collect debugging log.

[4] ServicePrint -> Save the service data which P-PRINT or etc. output to paper with a text
format.
[[[[[ Backup Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]]
[1]: Sublog
[4]: ServicePrint
[5]: Netcap
[C]: Return to Main Menu
Download Menu 2
[8]: Download Menu 2
[1]: Service Mode Password Clear
[[[[[ download Menu 2nd (USB) ]]]]]]

------------------------------------
[1]: Service Mode Password Clear

F-6-86
F-6-87
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Download Menu 2
6-51
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Troubleshooting > Error Code: E753-0001
6-52
Troubleshooting
Other Menu
[9]: Other Menu
Error Code: E753-0001
This mode displays other menu.
Cause
In the case of an error during writing process of the system software or in the case of writing
Operation procedure
the system software of the option that is not installed, an error is determined to display E753-
0001.

[9] -> [0]: To display other menu/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.
Remedy
The result of writing process is displayed at the upper side of E753-0001 error display.
Be sure to check the system software with the error (error or NG) displayed.
[1]: Version Information
Check if the target option is properly installed and see if the software to download is for the
This mode displays the version of download mode.
correct target option, and then execute downloading again.

Upgrading by SST
Be sure to use Assist mode as a general rule because the system software of the nonconnecting option is not to be downloaded in Assist mode.
In Single mode, it is available to download the system software of the option that is not
installed.
In the case of downloading the Finishers system software, make the download mode of
the Host Machine in normal mode and connect to SST, and then download just the system
software of the Finisher with the version information displayed at the right side of the SST
screen.
In the case that Super G3FAX Board AE1 is not installed or in the case of download mode
in safe mode, G3CCB/G3CCM is not displayed on the list of downloadable system software.
F-6-88
Press any key to return to the main menu.
NOTE:
Image Reader has 2 types of system software: RCOND and RCONS.
Downloading both RCOND and RCONS results in writing of only the system software
that complies with the Image Reader installed in the Host Machine. When downloading
the system software that does not comply with the Image Reader installed in the Host
Machine, it results in skipping of writing process (it will not be an error).
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Troubleshooting > Error Code: E753-0001
6-52
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Overview
6-53
Version Upgrade via CDS

Overview
Among the 4 methods in which service technicians provide firmware install services, the
following 3 methods are available using Updater functions.
a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update)
b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
d: Local CDS Download and Update (iW EMC + DFU Plug-in)
e: Update via SST
: User operation
Firmware
Market Release
Automatic update
e
b
c
Distribution
Setting to UGW
(UGW-linked)*1
Automatic download
Firmware acquisition
Register the
firmware in the LCDS

Download
Via Service mode
(Local UI)
Scheduled download

Download
Via User mode
(Local UI)

Download
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
Download via SST
Executing the task

from Device
Firmware Update
Apply (Update)
Via Service mode
(Local UI)
Scheduled update
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Local UI)
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
Update via SST
Automatic update
F-6-89
*1: Schedules for UGW-linked distribution are maintained on CDS.

NOTE:
See User Manual of the device for how to connect the device to the external network.
When needed, perform the communication test before actual download to check if the
communication with the distribution server is normal.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Overview
6-53
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation
Preparation
For Install of Application
Overview of Preparation
The following should be prepared before using Updater.
For updating of firmware
COPIER >
FUNCTION
UGW-linked
Download and
Update
UGW-linked
Download
Manual
Download and
Update
Manual
Download and
Update via
Local UI
Manual
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Special
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Scheduled
update via
Local CDS
Installation Method
Network Settings

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-6-7

CDSUGW
CDS-CTL
Installation
Method
6-54
CDS-FIRM
LOCLFIRM
Enabling
Enabling
Setting
[Manual
[Update
Network Enabling
Sales
Update]
Firmware]
Button of
Button of User
HQ
User Mode
Mode
(Remote UI)
LCDSFLG
Setting Sales Companys HQ

When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Companys
HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is
Enabling
[Local CDS]
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
changed properly, the desired firmware may not be able to be selected.

Market
Canada
Latin America
Hong Kong
Default Setting of Sales

Company's HQ
US
US/SG
SG
Setting of Sales Company's

HQ after Change
CA
LA
HK
T-6-8
Go to the following screen to change the setting of Sales Company's HQ.

Service
Technician

(Level 1)
NOTE:
The list below shows the setting of Sales Companys HQ for CDS-CTS by market.
Check and adhere to the appropriate setting for your market.
<List of Sales Companys HQ and the settings for CDS-CTL>
Japan = JP
USA = US
Singapore = SG
Europe = NL
Korea = KR
China = CN
Hong Kong = HK
Australia = AU
Canada = CA
Latin America= LA
T-6-6
6-54
Network Settings
6-55
1.Connecting to External Network

The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection
method. Refer to user manual of the device for details.
NOTE:
See User Manual for how to connect the device to the external network.
Before using UGW link or User mode, see the sections below to prepare as required.
"Enabling UGW Link"
"Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode"
"Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode"
NOTE:
External Network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
2.Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server

This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server.
F-6-91

F-6-92
F-6-90
6-55
5. Ensure to enter https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif in the field beside the

[Delivery Server URL] button.
If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL]
button to show the virtual keypad. Check the URL and enter the correct one.
Delivery Server CDS
6-56
Note:
number.
Settings > License/Other > Register/Update Software. It is not displayed in service
mode.
set.
3.Communication Test
F-6-93
Delivery Server Local CDS
F-6-95
F-6-94
6-56
6-57
F-6-98
F-6-96
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server
(to execute the communication test to the distribution server).
F-6-97
F-6-99
6-57
6-58
Enabling UGW Link

When installing the firmware in the method of UGW-linked Download and Update or UGWlinked Download, the following should be set before actually using UGW link.
Service Technician
Setting of Device
Service Mode
(Level 1)
Setting of UGW
WebPortal
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW

(0 -> 1)
In [Customer Management] screen, set [Do not

distribute firmware] to [Distribute firmware].
See "Analysis>Firmware Distribution
Setting of Authorities on
Sales Company's HQ
Information" to grant the appropriate authorities
UGW WebPortal
to each account.
NOTE:
See imageWARE Remote Operators Manual / e-Maintenance Business Operation

Manual for how to operate UGW WebPortal.
[Distribute Firmware] should be set on [Customer Management] screen for staff in charge
of setting for [Enter customer information] or [Command for firmware distribution] in order
to allow them to select the desired device on [Firmware Distribution Information] screen.
When using the Device Firmware Update Plug-in and Local CDS, it is necessary to
disable "UGW linkage".
6-58
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update)

See the figure below for the operational flow of UGW-linked Download and Update.
b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)

See the figure below for the operational flow of UGW-linked download.
STEP 1
STEP 1
STEP 2
Scheduling
via UGW
Scheduling
via UGW
Update using
Updater
F-6-100
STEP1: Scheduling via UGW
6-59
F-6-101
STEP 1: Scheduling via UGW
The firmware distribution schedule to the certain device should be set on UGW.
The firmware distribution schedule to the certain device should be set on UGW.
See UGW-linked Download and Update in chapter 5 of Operation Manual of Content
See UGW-linked Download in Operation Manual of Content Delivery System (for Firmware
Delivery System V1.0 for Firmware Distribution for details.
Distribution) for details.
The device checks the schedule concerned every 12 hours on UGW. This allows the device
to register the firmware distribution setting, enabling automatic firmware download and
update.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
The firmware downloaded by scheduling via UGW can be checked/deleted from User
mode, but cannot be updated. If a user download the other firmware, the firmware
downloaded with "UGW-linked Download" is overwritten.
[Devices without Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function]

Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue. Ensure to notify users of this
before you start updating. It is recommended to perform firmware update during nonbusiness hours.
[Devices with Wait for EOJ Function]
Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the
queue.
-Print
-Scan
-Fax (except I-FAX; this function is enabled for I-FAX only during Print/Scan operation)
See Chapter 1 Limitations and Cautions of this manual for more detailed information.
NOTE:
To contacts registered for E-mail notification on UGW, the E-mail is sent from UGW
upon completing firmware update.
6-59
STEP 2: Update using Updater
6-60
3. Press [Update Firmware] button.
The firmware downloaded on the device can be updated using Updater functions.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
F-6-103
4. Press [Apply Firmware] button.
F-6-102
F-6-104
6-60
5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button.
6-61
CAUTION:
queue.
-Print
-Scan
F-6-105
6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the
firmware is successfully applied.
NOTE:
To contacts registered for E-mail notification on UGW, the E-mail is sent from UGW
upon completing firmware update.
7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware.

1). Press [Check Counter Key] button on the control panel.
2). Press [Check Device Configuration] button.
3). Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to [Controller Version].
Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of Manual Download and Update.
6-61
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service
6-62
Mode)
The figure below shows the operational flow of Manual Download and Update.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Download using
Updater
Update using
Updater
F-6-106
STEP 1: Download using Updater

The firmware can be downloaded from CDS to the device using Updater.
F-6-108
4. Confirm the firmware to be updated in either of the following 2 ways.

To update to the official edition, press [Confirm Applicable Firmware] button and go to Step 6.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User mode)] on the control panel.
To update to the individual response edition, press [Special Firmware] and go to Step 5.

F-6-109
F-6-107
6-62
5. [Special Firmware] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button.
6-63
6. [New Firmware] screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Next] button.
F-6-110
F-6-111
[Retrieval ID]:
[Version]:
Enter numeric up to 8 characters.
The current firmware version is shown.
[Password]:
[Applicable Firmware]:
Enter numeric up to 8 characters.
Select the firmware applicable to the device from the dropdown list.
[Additional Languages]:
If there are any additional languages, they are displayed.
More than 1 language can be selected, and it is possible to add another language when
upgrading the firmware.
Up to 8 languages can be added, including Japanese and English. The languages already
registered in the device are always selected, and SST is used to delete an unnecessary
language from the device.
[Release Note]:
If any release note is published, the contents are shown here.
NOTE:
To update to the individual response edition, the firmware corresponding to the ID and
password that you input is displayed in [Applicable Firmware].
6-63
7. [Delivery Settings] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button.
6-64
[E-mail]:
E-mails concerning update statuses are sent from the device to the contact registered here.
Enter the E-mail address of the service technician in charge.
Enter 1-byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 64 characters.
[Comments]:
Enter the comment in 1-byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 128 characters.
Enter the comment to be automatically included in E-mail. Model Name in the comment will
be helpful to identify the device relevant to the E-mail.
NOTE:
[Timing to Apply]
For firmware versions with no remote update permission, [Auto] cannot be selected in
[Timing to Apply]
[Updated Module Only]
For firmware versions with difference-only delivery disabled, only [OFF] can be
F-6-112
[Delivery Time]:
Press either [Now] or [Set Time] button.
selected in [Updated Module Only].

[E-mail]
To send E-mails to multiple destinations, each E-mail address should be delimited with
[Now]:
The firmware is downloaded immediately after distribution schedule is set.
[Set Time]:
Be sure to specify the date (within 30 days) and time. The firmware is downloaded on
the specified date and time.
Enter the date and time using the numeric keypad in the format of yyyy/mm/dd
hh:mm:ss
[Timing to Apply]:
Press either [Auto] or [Manual] button.
comma (,) or semi-colon (;).

For E-mail addresses entered in this field, a notification E-mail is sent at the following
timing.
-Distribution Set
-Distribution Started
-Distribution Finished
-Update Started
-Update Finished
-Error Occurred
[Auto]:
The firmware is applied automatically upon firmware downloaded.
[Manual]:
The firmware is automatically downloaded. Go to [Apply Firmware] to set up for
updating the downloaded firmware.
[Updated Module Only]:
Press either [On] or [Off] button.
[On]:
Only difference between the current and new firmware is downloaded.
[Off]:
The firmware to be applied is wholly downloaded.
6-64
8. Confirm Export Criteria screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Accept]
button.
6-65
When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and
[Manual], respectively:
Confirm the firmware and press [OK] button. Now STEP 1 is successfully completed.
F-6-113
9. One of the screens below is shown according to the setting.

When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and
[Auto], respectively:
F-6-115
When Distribution Time is set to [Set Time] in Distribution Setting:

Confirm the distribution schedule and press [OK] button. Now STEP 1 is successfully
completed.
Firmware is downloaded and updated automatically to the device. The device is

automatically restarted upon update completed. Now STEP 1 is successfully completed.
F-6-116
F-6-114
6-65
STEP 2: Update using Updater
6-66
The firmware downloaded to the device can be updated using Updater functions.
When Timing to Apply is set to [Auto] in Distribution Setting in STEP 1, the firmware is
updated automatically. Only when Timing to Apply is set to [Manual], follow the steps below to
update the firmware.
F-6-118
F-6-117
F-6-119
6-66
6-67

Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of Manual Download and Update.
CAUTION:
F-6-120
queue.
-Print
-Scan
6-67
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule
Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule
6-68
4. Press [Delete Scheduled Delivery] button.
This section describes how to delete firmware distribution schedule set by Updater.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] button at a time on the control panel.
F-6-122
5. Confirm the contents of the distribution schedule and press [Yes] button.
F-6-121
F-6-123
6. Confirm the result of deletion shown on the screen and press [OK] button. Now the
firmware distribution schedule is successfully deleted.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule
6-68
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)
Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)
6-69
This section describes how to update the downloaded firmware.

F-6-125
F-6-124
F-6-126
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)
6-69
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Downloaded Firmware
6-70
4. Press [Delete Firmware] button.

Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method.
Deleting Downloaded Firmware

This section describes how to delete the downloaded firmware using Updater.
2). Press [2] and [8] button at a time on the control panel.
F-6-128
5. Confirm the downloaded firmware to be deleted and press [Yes] button.

F-6-129
6. Confirm the result of deletion and press [OK] button. Now the downloaded firmware is
successfully deleted.
F-6-127
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Downloaded Firmware
6-70
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation
Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation
6-71
No.2
Symptom: Firmware download is aborted during operation using Updater functions.
No.1
Cause: The network cable is disconnected or the power went off due to blackout and the like.
Symptom: I cant find the firmware to be updated using Updater.
Action: Retry download. Firmware under download is cancelled upon aborted.
Cause: Preparation has not been properly done.

Action: Confirm the setting of Sales Companys HQ bellow.
No.3
Setting of Device [SERVICE MODE] (Level1)
Symptom: Firmware update is aborted during operation using Updater functions and the
device cannot be started.

Cause: The power went off due to blackout and the like.
Action: Service technicians should follow the steps below via SST.
1. Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time to start the device.
1) Turn on the power and hold down [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
2) [Download Mode] is shown on Local UI.
If the operation above does not trigger the download mode, BOOT (Flash Memory,
service parts) should be replaced (takes up to 1 minute for rewriting).
If the operation above successfully triggers the download mode, go to the next steps
below.
2. Via SST, format the HDD of BOOT Dev only.
F-6-130
Cause: The version currently in use is not available for update.

Action: Download the release note from CDS separately to upgrade to the version available
for update.
3. Via SST, install the firmware in the device.
Cause: You try to download firmware from User mode.You can download only the latest
version of firmware from User mode.
Action: Download from Service mode.
<User Mode>
<Service Mode>
F-6-131
F-6-132
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation
6-71
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Information required for Reports
No.4
Symptom: Firmware has not been downloaded according to the distribution schedule.
Cause: Other firmware distribution schedule is set.Since only 1 distribution schedule is held,
the registered schedule may be overridden by the new firmware distribution schedule.
Action: Once the schedule is overridden, the firmware cannot be downloaded. Distribution
should be rescheduled for the firmware.
6-72
Information required for Reports

Information required for Service Technicians to Obtain on Site
Update Logs
System Logs (Log Level: 4)
Information to Report
Cause: At the scheduled distribution date and time, the firmware registered was not found on
Symptom occurred
CDS.
Location of the device
Action: Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware.
Date and Time that symptom occurred

Steps taken for reproduction
Cause: After distribution is scheduled, device is updated to other version of firmware via SST.
Firmware / Application you tried to install
(Status of the firmware in the device is changed.)
Occurrence frequency
Model dependency (if the same symptom occurred in other models)

Dependency on firmware/MEAP application/system option
Cause: The power of the device was off at scheduled date and time.
Conditions of symptom occurrence

Model
Firmware version installed on the device
Cause: The network between the updater and the CDS server has stopped.
List of MEAP applications installed on the device
Remedy: Conduct a communication test and check the state of network.
Network setting information of the device
There are some cases where the network is stopped only at night, during which update is
Service mode setting information
performed. If the communication test ended in success, check the state of network during the
period when update is scheduled.
No.5
Symptom: The firmware presumed to be downloaded to the device cannot be found.
Cause: Since only 1 firmware can be held on the device, the firmware previously downloaded
was overridden by the newly downloaded one.
Action: Retry the firmware download.
Setting of device service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL
(Level 1)
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-UGW
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-MEAP
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > LOCLFIRM
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-LVUP
* As many as the items listed above should be obtained on site. More information provided
will be helpful for investigation.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Information required for Reports
6-72
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Debug Logs
Debug Logs
6-73
NOTE:
See "Setting Log Level" in chapter 2 for details of changing Log Level
Obtaining Log Files

Updater log files can be obtained by copy & paste from remote UI.
This procedure is shown below.
4. If the value of CDS-MEAP or CDS-FIRM was changed in the service mode, return to the
1. Check that the CDS-MEAP or CDS-FIRM is enabled in the service mode. If they are not
enabled, change the value to 1 and then restart the device.
original value and then restart the device to enable this setting.
Obtaining the log files is completed.
Service mode (Level1) > Mode List

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-MEAP: 1
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM: 1
2. Log in the remote UI (URL: http://<devices IP address or host name>) using the system
administrator right.
3. From Display Logs/Communication Test screen, obtain System Logs (log level 4) and
Update Logs by copy & paste.
Top page (Remote UI) > [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/
Others] > [Register/Update Software] > Display Logs/Communication Test
F-6-133
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Debug Logs
6-73
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages
6-74
Error Messages
Error messages displayed in LUI on a device are shown below. As to error codes, see the next list.
No.
1
Messages
An error occurred with the delivery
server.
Contact your sales representative.
Error Code: [xxx]
Delivery server is stopped.
Wait a while and then try to perform
the operation again.
Check the following URL for details.
<Stopped Delivery Server URL>
Failed to connect to delivery server.
Check the delivery server and
network.
Timing of display
Remedy
System error occurred in server.
Obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version Upgradeof
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales
company.
In communicating with
the delivery server.
Delivery server stopped.
Check the delivery server stop information. After the delivery server starts, perform the
operation from this application.
When the delivery server stop information is not available, contact the sales company's
Support Department.
Communication error due to incorrect settings of

CDS URL.
Excluding delivery server stop, communication
error to the delivery server occurred.
Set correct CDS URL in the Updater settings.
Error due to the application (NLM)
Obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgradeof
company.
Download was stopped because an

error occurred with the file server.
Check the network.
At the time of file

download
Downloaded files are invalid. Check

the network.
At the time of file

download
Failed to retrieve information of special Acquisition of applicable

firmware.
firmware information
Check the retrieval ID and password.
Scheduled delivery information of

Acquisition of applicable
firmware does not exist.
firmware information
Check it because it may already have
been deleted.
Failed to apply firmware.
Firmware application
error
Cause
Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence.
If the network environment of the device is correct, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version
Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this
manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company.
Communication error to the delivery server
Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence.
occurred.
The received file is broken.
After checking the network environment of the device, re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
No information exists about firmware for special
Enter the correct firmware ID or Password applicable to the firmware information.
firmware retrieval ID or Password is invalid.
sales company.
Delivery information with specified delivery ID does Register the delivery schedule again. If this occurs at the time of canceling file download,
not exist.
deleting downloaded firmware or deleting scheduled delivery, no remedy is required.
6-74
6
No.
9
Messages
Delivery Server : Connect Failed
File Server : Retrieve Failed
Error Code: [xxxx]
10 Delivery Server : Connect OK

File Server : Retrieve Failed
Error Code: [xxxx]
Timing of display
Cause
6-75
Remedy
Communication test,
In the communication test, failed to connect to the
etc. (communication test delivery server.
result dialogue)
In SOAP communication, failed to success after 1
min retry.
ID and Password required for proxy to connect to
the internet are not configured in device.
Check the network environment of the device, and re-execute the job.
sales company.
Set proxy and restart the communication test.
sales company.
The access to the network is limited.
Set the user environment to make the access to the following domain available.
https://device.cdsknn.net/
http://cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net/
sales company.
Contact Field Support Group in the sale company.
After confirmation that the delivery server has been restored, restart the communication
test.
sales company again.
Delivery Server : Connect Due to no return of data for the communication
Check the network environment of the device and re-execute the job.
OK
test, time-out (in HTTP communication, no
File Server : Retrieve
response for 1min) occurred. After that, retried but Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
Failed
failed to connect to server.
sales company.
Error Code: [XXXX]
The network cable was disconnected during data Reconnect the network cable and then restart the communication test.
download in the communication test.
sales company.
The file server stopped during data download in
Contact the sales company's Support Department.
the communication test.
After confirmation that the delivery server has been restored, restart the communication
test.
sales company again.
Hash value in the communication test file is
Check the network environment and re-execute the job.
incorrect.
sales company.
6-75
6
No.
Messages
11 An error occurred.
Error Code: [xxx]
Timing of display
Cause
communication test, etc. The max value (space/file) was exceeded and new
(main screen)
log was not accepted.
Normally an old log file is deleted before the max
value (space/file) is exceeded, but error may occur
due to other element (e.g. I/O error).
6-76
Remedy
Check if the log file exceeded the max value.

<Update log>
Max space: 128KB/file
Max file number: 4
<System log>
Max space: 512KB/file
Max file number: 4
sales company.
Notice of version
Failed to acquire version information of device
Re-execute the job.
information (main screen) due to no CDS registration of firmware version of If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
device.
sales company.
At the time of notifying version information, failed to Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence.
connect to the delivery server.
No return of notifying version information
Network cable was disconnected during notice of Re-connect the network cable and re-execute the job.
version information.
sales company.
Failed to send notice of version information since Re-execute the job.
the main power was turned OFF and then ON
during the sending.
sales company.
Server stopped at the time of sending notice of
Check the network environment of the device and re-execute the job.
version information.
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of sending
notice of version information.
company.
6-76
6
No.
Messages
11 An error occurred.
Error Code: [xxx]
Timing of display
UGW linkage (main
screen)
On-site (error dialogue)
Immediate download
(error dialogue)
Manual update (error

dialogue)
Automatic update (error

dialogue)
Deletion of downloaded
firmware
Cause
6-77
Remedy
UGW linkage was turned ON when eRDS was

OFF.
For a device using eRDS, turn ON the eRDS. For a device not using eRDS, turn OFF
the UGW linkage.
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of acquiring Re-execute the job.
delivery information.
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of acquiring Re-execute the job.
applicable firmware information.
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of sending
Re-execute the job.
approval information.
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of delivery
Re-execute the job.
order
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of requesting Re-execute the job.
firmware delivery information.
sales company.
During the download, all space in the storage disk After adding vacant space of the storage disk, re-execute the job.
was occupied. (DiskFull)
sales company.
At the end of receipt, an internal error occurred.
Re-execute the job.
sales company.
At the update start, an internal error occurred.
Re-execute the job.
sales company
At the update start, an internal error occurred.
Re-execute the job.
sales company.
At the time of notifying cancellation, an internal
Re-execute the job.
error occurred.
sales company.
6-77
6
No.
Messages
12 An error occurred. Check the Update

Firmware screen.
Timing of display
UGW linkage (main
screen)
Immediate download
(main screen)
Manual update (main

screen)
Automatic update (main
screen)
Cause
6-78
Remedy
eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to connect

to server.
Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause,
resend the order from the eRDS.
sales company.
After confirming restoration of the delivery server, re-execute the job.
sales company.
Scheduled date and time acquired from the
Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
delivery server was before current time (15 or more If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
min had passed.)
sales company.
Scheduled data and time acquired from the
delivery server did not exist.
sales company.
At the time of immediate download, turned OFF
Re-execute the job.
and then ON the power of device main body.
sales company.
Updated version was different from the ordered
Re-execute the job.
version.
sales company.
After the update, failed to connect to the delivery
Check the network environment and re-execute the job.
server.
sales company.
After the update, delivery server stopped.
Contact the sales company's Support Department. After confirming restoration of the
delivery server, re-execute the job.
sales company.
After the update, the network cable was
Re-connect the network cable and re-execute the job.
disconnected.
sales company.
After the update, server returned an error.
company.
After the update, an internal error occurred.
sales company.
6-78
6
No.
Messages
Timing of display
13 Delivery Error
Error Code: [xxx]
UGW linkage (Update

Firmware screen)
14 Delivery Error
Delivery Time
Delivery Firmware Label
Delivery Firmware version
Error Code: [ xxx ]
UGW linkage (Update

Firmware screen)
15 Applicable firmware is not registered.
On-site (error dialogue)
16 Restart failed.
Turn the main power OFF and ON.
Manual update (error

dialogue)
Immediate download
(Update Firmware
screen)
Automatic update (error

dialogue)
17 Specify [E-Mail Address] with up to 64

characters.
18 The following characters cannot be
used for the [E-Mail Address]:
,:;()[]<>\
19 Specify [Comments] with up to 128
characters.
20 The [Delivery Server URL] is incorrect.
At the time of periodical

update setting
At the time of periodical
update setting
Cause
6-79
Remedy
eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to connect

to the server.
Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause,
resend the order from the eRDS.
sales company.
The delivery server stopped.
Contact the sales company's Support Department. After confirming restoration of the
delivery server, re-execute the job.
sales company.
The scheduled data and time acquired from
delivery server does not exist.
sales company.
The scheduled date and time acquired from
delivery server was before current time (15 or more If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
min had passed).
sales company.
At the time of immediate download, turned OFF
Re-execute the job.
and then ON the power of device main body.
sales company.
At the user site, no latest firmware exists.
This means the current firmware is the latest, so this error has no impact.
But when the latest firmware to be retrieved must exist e.g. released new firmware
information has been notified, contact Field Support Group in the sales company.
No applicable firmware exists on CDS, so the
service person can't select any applicable firmware.
An error occurred at the time of the device restart. After turning OFF and then ON the main power of the device, re-execute the job.
sales company.
An error occurred at the time of the device restart. After turning OFF and then ON the main power of the device, re-execute the job.
sales company.
The specified E-mail address exceeded 64
Specify E-mail address within 64 characters.
characters.
The E-mail address was including the characters Do not specify E-mail address with characters which cannot be used.
which could not be used.
At the time of periodical Comments exceeded 128 characters.

update setting
In setting with the deliver The specified deliver server URL is wrong.
server URL.
Specify comments within 128 characters.

Enter the right URL(https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif)
T-6-9
6-79
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > How to read an error code
6-80
Error Code
The following shows the error codes displayed on CDS error dialogs and the Control Panel of the device (local UI) and explanation of those error codes.
How to read an error code
84014206
Local UI
Error Message dialogue
Code
Value
The rst digit

Error eld
The second digit
Operator
Error
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Not dened.
CDS server
Updater
UGW
Service person
IT administrator (User)
Scheduled Update
The 3rd - 4th digits

Method category
The 5th digit
Category code
XX
Method
The 6 - 8th digits

Description code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
000-
Contents
Category code
See Error code list
F-6-134
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > How to read an error code
6-80
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed
6-81
List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed

In the list shown below, error codes which are likely to be displayed are classified into two groups:
Error codes caused by the CDS server (error codes starting with "81")
Error codes caused by the device (error codes starting with "82" to "86")
When an error code is displayed, check this list first. If it is not in this list, see "Error Code".
Error codes caused by the CDS server (error codes starting with "81")
Error
Code (hex
number)
Description
Error codes starting with "81": CDS server

81021008 As to the device serial number in the data entry items, there is no applicable device code product
81040002 In a string type of a data entry item, digit number and/or character type is/are set against the regulations
81040002 is displayed in the following cases:
81041012
81060002
81081014
81091001
8106100A
The number of digits of the registration ID or password is not 8.

The registration ID or password includes characters other than single-byte numeric characters.
Device is "Not applicable to CDS" (Firmware distribution)
* It occurs only when a device that can access CDS is managed.
In a string type of a data entry item, digit number and/or character type is/are set against the regulations
The number of digits or type of characters used for Firm Type, Firmware Version, Firmware Group Version, or
Firmware Label does not meet the specified number of digits or type of characters.
The character string of Firmware Group Version (firmGroupVersion) includes characters other than numeric
values.
The number of digits of E-mail Address mailAddress) is larger than 128.
Characters other than single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols are used for E-mail Address
(mailAddress).
An invalid e-mail address was input (The domain name is missing, .(dot) was input instead of , (comma), etc.)
When confirmation of the firmware distribution settings ended in time-out.
CDS was not accessed within 30 minutes after the distribution time. The device has been turned OFF, the
network has been disconnected, etc.
The firmware information of the device at the time of execution of distribution differs from the firmware
information of the device at the time of registration of the distribution schedule.
The firmware was upgraded without using CDS when distribution schedule for the device that supports the
UGW-linked function had been registered.
As a result, the firmware information of the CDS server at the time of execution of distribution differs from the
firmware information of the CDS server at the time of registration of the distribution schedule.
When the remote update setting for the firmware to be updated was disabled after distribution schedule was
registered using auto update.
The delivery status is Applying
After the firmware was updated and when an update completion notification has not been sent to CDS,
distribution of the firmware was attempted again before update time-out is processed in CDS.
Remedy
Check registration of LMS. (CINC)

When 81040002 is displayed:
Enter the correct ID and password for Special Firmware. (User)
Register the device as a CDS device.

When 81060002 is displayed due to an error in Firm Type, Firmware Version, or
Firmware Group Version, register the correct firmware again.(CINC)
When 81060002 is displayed due to an invalid e-mail address, register the correct
e-mail address. (User)
Search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the firmware.
If distribution of the firmware is necessary, search the applicable firmware again, and
perform distribution of the firmware.
After 2 hours and 30 minutes have passed since the failed attempt to distribute
the firmware, search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the
firmware.
6-81
6
Error
Code (hex
number)
Description
8108100D The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed

8108100D: When the distribution status was not correct, schedule information was checked with CDS. (CDS has
not been notified of the status change due to a network
810A1015 When firmware distribution time-out occurs.
A reception completion notification was not sent to CDS within 24 hours after the start of the distribution. The
device has been turned OFF, the network has been disconnected, etc.
810B1010 The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/Distributing/Applying/Finished/Failed
810B1010: An update start notification was sent to CDS with an invalid status. (The CDS server failed to receive
the status change due to a network error, etc.)
810C1016 Firmware update time-out occurred.
An update completion notification had not been sent to CDS even after 2 hours since the start of the update.
6-82
Remedy
Check the device to see if the update has been completed. When the update has
ended in failure, execute the operation again if there is no problem with the device.
T-6-10
Error codes caused by the device (error codes starting with "82" to "86")
Error
Code (hex
number)
Description
Error codes starting with "82": Updater

82001106 Another job existed immediately before the firmware update processing.
82005202 Failed to connect to the server
82005203 Failed to find the server
82005204 An input/output error occurred during the connecting process to the server
82005205 Failed to read a HTTP response
82005206
82005300
82005304
82005308
82005309
Error in a HTTP response

Codes other than the following "3xx" definition
Failed to receive the data
Invalid hash code of the download file
The proxy authentication method is not supported, or access to the CDS file server is not permitted.
82007502 The scheduled distribution had not been executed even after a certain period of time due to the power of the
device being OFF at the scheduled time or other reasons.
82095206 Error in a HTTP response
Remedy
Start the operation again after terminating the job of the device
Check the network environment of the device (check for any problem in the DNS
server), and start the operation again.
Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the
operation again.
Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication
test. If any problem was found, check the network environment.
Check the network environment.
Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings and network environment.
Check the network environment of the device, and start the operation again.
Check the proxy authentication method being used, change the setting to use a
supported proxy authentication, and then start the operation again.
Check that access to the following URL is permitted.
device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https)
cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol: http)
Scheduled deliveries not executed within the defined period of time are abandoned,
so register a scheduled delivery again.
When setting the date and time of the scheduled delivery, be sure to designate a time
when the device is ON.
6-82
6
Error
Code (hex
number)
Description
82095300 Codes other than the following "3xx" definition

82095309 The proxy authentication method is not supported, or access to the CDS file server is not permitted.
Error codes starting with "84": Service person

84005202 Failed to connect to the server
84005206
84005300
84005304
84005308
84005309


Error codes starting with "85" :IT administrator (User)

6-83
Remedy
Check the network environment of the device (check for any problem in the DNS
operation again.
operation again.
operation again.
6-83
Error
Code (hex
number)
85005206
85005300
85005308
85005309
Description


850C1104 Session time-out excluding after application inquiry (after issuing delivery ID)
Error codes starting with "86": Scheduled Update
86005206
86005300
86005304
86005305

86005308 Invalid hash code of the download file


6-84
Remedy

operation again.
Start the operation again from the beginning
operation again.
Check that no problem is found in the HDD.
When this error occurs again, contact Support Group of sales companies.
operation again.
T-6-11
6-84
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
6-85
Error Code
The error code list is shown below. Remedy are error codes of "-", and for all the error codes out of the list, contact Field Support Group in the sales company.
Error Code (hex number)
The first
The
The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th
digit Error second - 4th digits digit
digits
field
digit
Method Category Description
Operator category
code
code
8
8
8
8
8
8
Error
0
1
1
1
1
002
003
004
Description
Not defined.
CDS server
x
x Relating method code
x
x 0
Not categorized
x
x 0
001
No value is set in a mandatory data entry item
Remedy
Contact the support department of the

sales company.
In a string type of a data entry item, digit number and/or character type When 81040002 is displayed:
is/are set against the regulations
Enter the correct ID and password for
Special Firmware. (User)
The number of digits of the registration ID or password is not 8.
The registration ID or password includes characters other than
When 81060002 is displayed due to an
single-byte numeric characters.
error in Firm Type, Firmware Version, or
Firmware Group Version:
Register the correct firmware again.
The number of digits or type of characters used for Firm Type,
(CINC)
Firmware Version, Firmware Group Version, or Firmware Label does
not meet the specified number of digits or type of characters.
When 81060002 is displayed due to an
The character string of Firmware Group Version (firmGroupVersion) invalid e-mail address: - Register the
includes characters other than numeric values.
correct e-mail address. (User)
The number of digits of E-mail Address (mailAddress) is larger than
128.
Characters other than single-byte alphanumeric characters and
symbols are used for E-mail Address (mailAddress).
An invalid e-mail address was input (The domain name is missing, .
(dot) was input instead of , (comma), etc.)
In an data entry item, the value is set against the regulations
(E.g. the set value is other than "Operator: 4. Service person, 5. User") sales company.
No applicable delivery information exists
sales company.
Cause of error
CDS Local UP CDS file Network
delivery CDS DATER server
server server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-85

The first
The
digits
field
digit
Operator category
code
code
8
8
1
1
x
x
x
x
Operation
001
Description
Inconsistency between the current firmware component in the data

entry item and delivery information (E.g. the conditions for automatic
update are not met. The settings of a mandatory additional set are
invalid)
6-86
Remedy
If distribution of the firmware is necessary,

search the applicable firmware again,
and perform distribution of the firmware.
Cause of error
server server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

A cancellation notification was sent to CDS when the distribution
status was not correct. (CDS has not received the status change due
to a network failure, etc.)
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009

The firmware information of the device at the time of execution of
distribution differs from the firmware information of the device at the
time of registration of the distribution schedule.
The firmware was upgraded without using CDS when distribution
schedule for the device that supports the UGW-linked function
had been registered. As a result, the firmware information of the
CDS server at the time of execution of distribution differs from the
firmware information of the CDS server at the time of registration of
the distribution schedule.
When the remote update setting for the firmware to be updated
was disabled after distribution schedule was registered using auto
update.
In a notice of delivery-allowed information, an install-set was release to Contact the support department of the
the market, but the market release was stopped during the delivery
sales company.
No mail template file exists
sales company.
The device serial number in the data entry item differs from that in
delivery information
sales company.
User is selected as Operator in the data entry items and the retrieval Contact the support department of the
type is other than the latest
sales company.
The retrieval type in the data entry item is special and registration
ID and individual Password are not set (* Operator did not enter
sales company.
registration ID and individual Password)
The retrieval type in the data entry item is special and Operator is not Contact the support department of the
Service person
sales company.
As to the device serial number in the data entry items, there is no
Check registration of LMS. (CINC)
applicable device code product
The retrieval type in the data entry items is special and there are no
Enter correct ID and the password.
basic-set applicable to the registration ID and Password (* When
wrong registration ID or Password was entered by an operator)
6-86

The first
The
digits
field
digit
Operator category
code
code
8
00A
00B
00C
00D
00E
00F
010
011
012
013
014
015
Description
6-87
Remedy
The delivery status is Applying

After the firmware was updated and when an update completion
notification has not been sent to CDS, distribution of the firmware was
attempted again before update time-out is processed in CDS.
Cause of error
server server
After 2 hours and 30 minutes have

passed since the failed attempt to
distribute the firmware, search the
applicable firmware again, and perform
distribution of the firmware.
No approval information exists about EULA or the export criteria when Contact the support department of the
the delivery is determined
sales company.
The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed Search the applicable firmware again,
When the distribution status was not correct, distribution information
was obtained from CDS. (CDS has not been notified of the status
change due to a network failure, etc.)
The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed Search the applicable firmware again,
8108100D: When the distribution status was not correct, schedule
information was checked with CDS. (CDS has not been notified of the
status change due to a network
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/Distributed/Applying/

Finished/Failed
The delivery code is other than Distributing.
(Firmware distribution)
The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/Distributing/Applying/
Finished/Failed
810B1010: An update start notification was sent to CDS with an invalid
status. (The CDS server failed to receive the status change due to a
network error, etc.)
The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

sales company.
sales company.
Search the applicable firmware again,

sales company.
Register the device as a CDS device.
Device is "Not applicable to CDS"

* It occurs only when a device that can access CDS is managed.
When the specified distribution time was within the time frame of CDS Contact the support department of the
distribution stop.
sales company.
When confirmation of the firmware distribution settings ended in time- Search the applicable firmware again,
out.
CDS was not accessed within 30 minutes after the distribution time.
The device has been turned OFF, the network has been disconnected,
etc.
When firmware distribution time-out occurs.
Search the applicable firmware again,
A reception completion notification was not sent to CDS within 24 hours and perform distribution of the firmware.
after the start of the distribution. The device has been turned OFF, the
network has been disconnected, etc.
6-87

The first
The
digits
field
digit
Operator category
code
code
8
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
8
8
1
1
x
x
x
x
2
2
I/O
Description
Remedy
Firmware update time-out occurred.

Check the device to see if the update has
An update completion notification had not been sent to CDS even after been completed. When the update has
2 hours since the start of the update.
ended in failure, execute the operation
again if there is no problem with the
device.
When the firmware distribution information notification showed an error Contact the support department of the
in processing the distribution information.
sales company.
When the firmware distribution information notification showed an error Contact the support department of the
sales company.
in processing the scheduled update information.
When the status of the scheduled update information is "Set",
sales company.
"Finished", or "Failed".
When the status of the scheduled update information is "Waiting to
sales company.
Transmit" or "New".
When the status of the scheduled update information is "Set".
sales company.
The scheduled update setting information differs between the input
sales company.
information and the distribution information.
When the distribution status is "Cancel".
sales company.
001
The specified license access number does not exist in LMS
002
The specified license access number has been deauthorized
003
004
005
006
007
The package product of the entered license access number doesn't

include MEAP application/System Option
The sales company for the MEAP application isn't identical with the
sale company for the package product
The number of licenses to be issued will exceed the limit number
allowed to register
As for System Option for the same function, the license keys were
issued more than the defined number of times for the same device
serial number
No device product exists applicable to the optional product
008
009
00A
00B
00C
6-88

sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.

sales company.
No product exists applicable to the device serial number
sales company.
The product of the entered license access number cannot be used with Contact the support department of the
this device because the settings of the sales company are incorrect
sales company.
No product linked to the license access number is registered in CDS Contact the support department of the
for delivery
sales company.
Although the product linked to the license access number is registered Contact the support department of the
in CDS for delivery, the delivery is stopped now
sales company.
No existence of optional product applicable to the device serial number. Contact the support department of the
sales company.
Cause of error
server server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-88

The first
The
digits
field
digit
Operator category
code
code
8
00D
00E
010
011
012
013
8
8
1
1
x
x
x
x
F
F
000
001
003
007
008
009
00F
010
011
012
Description
The license access number has been registered for another device
6-89
Remedy

sales company.
For the device product applicable to the device serial number, no
available software (MEAP application, System Option) exists
sales company.
LMS system error
* In support of multi-manifest, when the MFP/SFP section value shows sales company.
any value other than 0 or 1, LMS returns an error code "-215" to
CDS.
LMS system error
* In the case of failure in collection of manifest in support of multisales company.
manifest, LMS returns an error code "-999" to CDS.
License cannot be issued for the upgrade product.
Since the configuration has been changed in the upgrade product,
sales company.
there are no applications and options for which a license can be
issued.
Not registered in CSA
CSA associated with the license access number does not include any sales company.
products associated with the group ID.
L-CDS
Unclassified
sales company.
Communication test information not registered
Download file information for communication test does not exist.
sales company.
Firmware information not registered
Firmware information corresponding to the target device serial number sales company.
does not exist.
Invalid firmware version
The firmware version at the time of registration of the distribution
sales company.
schedule differs from the current firmware version.
Invalid firmware information
Firmware information to be distributed does not exist.
sales company.
Forcible termination
Distribution information is forcibly terminated from the server UI.
sales company.
Invalid distribution status
Distribution status of the server is in a condition where a requested
sales company.
method from the client cannot be accepted.
Invalid parameter
Requested parameter from the client is not correct.
sales company.
Version information not registered
Version information corresponding to the specified serial number has sales company.
not been registered.
Distribution time-out
Distribution has not been completed even after a certain period of time sales company.
from the start of the distribution.
Cause of error
server server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-89

The first
The
digits
field
digit
Operator category
code
code
8
013
FFE
FFF
Description
Unable to judge the necessity of distribution

Version information from a device has not been registered in the local
CDS.
Since the local CDS does not know the version information of the
device, it cannot respond to the distribution request from updater. As a
result of that, an error occurred when the request has been made.
DB error
General error to access DB.
DB error
Internal error other than error to access DB (file I/O, etc.).
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
2~6
2~6
2~6
2~6
2~6
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
2~6
002
2~6
101
2~6
102
2~6
103
2~6
104
8
8
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
1
1
105
106
2~6
201
2~6
202
2~6
203
2~6
204
L-CDS update process for a model that does not support L-CDS
2~6
301
Security Token verification error
2~6
302
Privilege check error
2~6
303
Parameter error
Relating method code

0
Not cartelized
0
000
Not defined
0
100
Unknown error
1
Operation
1
001
Processing exclusively
6-90
Remedy
Cause of error
server server

sales company.
Yes

sales company.
sales company.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Normally not indicated

Normally not indicated
Start the operation again after terminating

other Updater operations being executed
simultaneously
Stopped
Restart the device, and start the
operation again.
Failed to process preparation for use
sales company.
Failed to process use end
sales company.
Time out during restart of readiness preparation
sales company.
Start the operation again from the
Session time-out excluding after application inquiry (after issuing
delivery ID)
beginning
CDS URL is not set
Set CDS URL
Start the operation again after terminating
Another job existed immediately before the firmware update
the job of the device
processing.
Specifying of an iR option for a model that does not support iR options Contact the support department of the
sales company.
Specifying of scheduled update for a model that does not support
sales company.
scheduled update
Firmware processing for a model that does not support firmware
sales company.
processing
sales company.
sales company.
Perform the authentication as a correct
user.
sales company.
6-90

The first
The
digits
field
digit
Operator category
code
code
Description
2~6
304
There is no distribution information from the server.
2~6
305
Version notification is not required.
8
8
8
2~6
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
x
x
306
Connection server information mismatch error
1xx
An internal error about file operation
2~6
2xx
An internal error about xML file operation
2~6
301
Failed to output the license file
2~6
400
2~6
401
Failure in creation of an auto shutdown stop file
2~6
402
Failure in deletion of the auto shutdown stop file
8
8
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
Device
1xx
2~6
2xx
An internal error in IMI
2~6
3xx
An internal error in SMS
2~6
4xx
An internal error in NLM
2~6
5xx
Configuration Service property setting error
2~6
6xx
An internal error related to APL_CDS partition
2~6
7xx
DCM-related service error
8
8
2~6
2~6
x
x
2~6
2~6
103
The function type is not matched
2~6
104
An invalid SOAP response error
2~6
201
An internal error about application information
1
2
I/O
An internal error in CPCA
SOAP communication
101
The processing thread stopped
102
Processing SOAP communication now
6-91
Remedy
Cause of error
server server

sales company.
sales company.
Check the connection server settings.
Yes

sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
When this problem recurs, contact
the support department of the sales
company.
sales company.
6-91

The first
The
digits
field
digit
Operator category
code
code
Description
2~6
202
config.xml is NOT FOUND
2~6
203
type.xml is NOT FOUND
2~6
204
An error in binding type.xml
2~6
205
An error in creating a service tab
2~6
206
A runtime error in performing the web method
2~6
207
An unknown host error in performing the web method
2~6
301
The delivery server is stopped
2~6
302
<In the case of scheduled update>

In response to a download start notification sent from the device, the
distribution server returned an error and stopped the operation of the
device within a certain period of time before the distribution server
maintenance time.
<In the case of distribution executed by specifying the date and time>
The firmware version of the device at the time when the distribution
settings were specified and the version at the time immediately before
update are different.
8
8
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
5
5
HTTP communication
101
Specified Hash Algorithm is unknown
2~6
102
Download file URL is invalid
2~6
103
No network cable connection (device side)
2~6
201
Invalid HTTP request
2~6
202
Failed to connect to the server
6-92
Remedy

sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
Check the network environment of the
device and start the operation again
Check if the URL settings of the
CDS server are correct, and start the
operation again after resetting
sales company.
<In the case of scheduled update>
Specify the distribution settings again,
making sure that the distribution server
maintenance time and the scheduled
update time do not overlap.
Cause of error
server server
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
<In the case of distribution executed by

specifying the date and time>
Specify the distribution settings again,
making sure that the firmware version of
device at the time when the distribution
settings are specified and the version at
the time immediately before update are
the same.
sales company.
Check the URL setting of CDS server,
reset the setting, and then start the
operation again.
device, and start the operation again.
sales company.
device (check for any problem in the DNS
6-92

The first
The
digits
field
digit
Operator category
code
code
Description
2~6
203
Failed to find the server
2~6
204
2~6
205
An input/output error occurred during the connecting process to the

server
Failed to read a HTTP response
8
8
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
5
5
206
207

Generation of secure socket failed.
2~6
208
Certificate check error
2~6
209
Connection time-out
2~6
300
2~6
301
Failed to retrieve the data stream
2~6
302
Failed to create the file object for receipt
2~6
303
Failed to create the data stream of the file for receipt
2~6
304
2~6
305
An error about reserving the file data for receipt
2~6
306
Failed to close the data stream
2~6
307
Failed to close the file data for receipt
2~6
308
2~6
309
The proxy authentication method is not supported, or access to the

CDS file server is not permitted.
6-93
Remedy

device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start
the operation again.
Check that no problem is found in
the two items displayed during the
communication test. If any problem was
found, check the network environment.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
Check that no problem is found in the
proxy settings and network environment.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
Check that no problem is found in the
HDD.
When this error occurs again, contact
Support Group of sales companies.
sales company.
sales company.
Check the proxy authentication method
being used, change the setting to use a
supported proxy authentication, and then
start the operation again.
Check that access to the following URL is
permitted.
cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol:
http)
Cause of error
server server
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-93

The first
The
digits
field
digit
Operator category
code
code
Description
8
8
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
6
6
Socket communication
101
Failed to connect the eRDS
2~6
102
No response from eRDS
2~6
103
No notice of start from the eRDS
2~6
104
Error of socket reading
2~6
105
Socket communication time-out
8
8
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
7
7
2~6
03x
2~6
1xx
2~6
2xx
2~6
301
2~6
302
2~6
303
2~6
304
2~6
305
2~6
306
2~6
401
2~6
501
2~6
502
Other internal codes

002
One of installation, start or authorization failed
(When installation or authorization failed, it is regarded as an error) *
6-94
Remedy

sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
sales company.
An internal error in processing the installation

sales company.
An error by using invalid API
sales company.
An internal error in SMS
sales company.
No existence of delivery ID
sales company.
Invalid delivery ID
sales company.
The updated firmware information is not identical with the firmware
information after activation of the Updater
sales company.
The process of firmware download is incomplete
It occurs when the power of the device is turned OFF during download. sales company.
The update process is incomplete
The power was turned OFF after completion of download and before sales company.
start of update processing.
The installment process is incomplete
sales company.
Failed to retrieve delivery information
sales company.
Failed to execute the delivery process
sales company.
The scheduled distribution had not been executed even after a
Scheduled deliveries not executed
certain period of time due to the power of the device being OFF at the within the defined period of time are
scheduled time or other reasons.
abandoned, so register a scheduled
delivery again.
When setting the date and time of the
scheduled delivery, be sure to designate
a time when the device is ON
Cause of error
server server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-94

The first
The
digits
field
digit
Operator category
code
code
8
8
Description
2~6
2~6
x
x
x
x
A
A
Internal Module
xxx
Communication error in the internal module
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
I/O
200
201
202
203
Device
303
304
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
Restart of the device failed.
409
Application of the firmware failed.
8
8
x
x
x
x
x
x
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Remedy
Cause of error
server server

sales company.
Yes
An error occurred in the CDS server.

sales company.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Restart of the device failed.
Restart the device, and perform the

operation again.
When this problem recurs, obtain the
Updater log, and contact the support
department of the sales company.
Obtain the Updater log, and contact
company.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Application of the firmware failed.
SOAP communication
104
An error occurred in the CDS server.
207
6-95
An error occurred in the CDS server due to an unknown host error at

execution of Web method.
Restart the device, and perform the

operation again.
When this problem recurs, obtain the
Updater log, and contact the support
department of the sales company.
Obtain the Updater log, and contact
company.
sales company.
device, and then check that the URL
setting of the CDS server is correct, and
perform the operation again.
6-95

The first
The
digits
field
digit
Operator category
code
code
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Description
6-96
Remedy
HTTP communication
101
Download was canceled due to an error that occurred in the file server. Check the network environment.
201
When there is no problem with the
202
network environment, collect the Updater
203
log, and contact the support department
204
of the sales company.
205
206
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
309
308
An error occurred in the CDS server due to an invalid hash code of

download file.
Check the network environment, and

perform the operation again.
When there is no problem with the
network environment, collect the Updater
log, and contact the support department
* Not displayed on a device UI
Cause of error
server server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-6-12
6-96
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function
6-97
Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function

Codes displayed as eRDS errors when the UGW-linked function is used
The first The second The 3rd - 4th The 5th digit The 6 - 8th digits
digit Error
digit
digits Method Category
Description
field
Operator
category
code
code
Error
x
Unclassified
000
002
101
303
304
706
707
708
709
Description
Remedy
An unexpected error occurred in the device.
Restart the device, and perform the operation again.

When this problem recurs, the firmware of the device
needs to be reinstalled (upgraded).
A time-out error occurred due to no response from Obtain the sublog, and contact the support department
Updater within the specified time (3 seconds).
Processing in the device (event processing)
failed. Restart the device, and perform the
operation again.
Queue could not be sent due to failure of
processing in the device (event processing).
An error occurred in control of synchronization or Wait for a while, and perform a communication test
interruption processing between processes being again.
handled in parallel.
Communication with Updater failed.
Restart the device, and perform the operation again
after checking that Updater has been started.
When this problem recurs, obtain the sublog, and
contact the support department of the sales company.
At the time of firmware update, the Tracking
Obtain the sublog, and contact the support department
ID ordered by UGW and the one to which the
Updater responded did not match.
Cause of error
CDS
UP CDS file Network
delivery DATER server
server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-6-13
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function
6-97
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them
6-98
Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them
Scenes Where an Error Occurs
When an error code not included in the error code list is displayed, one of the errors shown in the following scenes may have occurred.
Content
Communication test, etc. (main screen)

Version information notification (main screen)
Log could not be written due to maximum value (capacity/the number of files) being exceeded.
Retrieval of device version information ended in failure because the firmware version of the device was not registered in CDS.
Connection to the delivery server failed at the time of notification of version information.
The network cable was disconnected during notification of version information.
Notification of version information ended in failure because the device was restarted during notification of version information.
UGW linkage was turned ON while eRDS was OFF.
An internal error occurred when obtaining the applicable firmware information.
An internal error occurred at the time of request of firmware delivery information.
Free space in the storage destination disk ran out during download. (DiskFull)
An internal error occurred at start of update.
An internal error occurred at the time of cancellation notification.
UGW linkage (main screen)

On-site (error dialog)
Immediate download (error dialog)
Manual/auto update (error dialog)
Deletion of downloaded firmware
T-6-14
Remedy
Check that the log files shown below do not exceed the maximum values.
When this problem recurs, obtain the log, and contact the support department of the sales company.
Logs and maximum capacity / number
Log name
Update log
System log
Maximum capacity
Maximum number of files
128KB/ file
512KB/ file
4
4
T-6-15
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them
6-98
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview
Controller Self Diagnosis
6-99
Overview
Two types of error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine, and stored in the locations
Controller Self Diagnosis
shown below.
HDD
Introduction
Operation of the (2 types of) error diagnosis tools added to the main body and remedy for
errors are described. These tools can reduce time to determine cause of errors occurred in
field and improve the accuracy of specifying error locations.
This manual can be applied when the main body is placed in the following conditions.
The main body does not boot. (In such a case that the Control Panel is not displayed or the
progress bar does not work, etc.)
An error is suspected to have occurred in the Main Controller PCB 1/2 and other related
PCBs (child PCBs such as SDRAM or TPM mounted in the Main Controller PCB 1/2).
Flash PCB
Controller system
failure diagnosis
tool
PCBs and units diagnosed by each tool are as follow:
Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool

Main Controller PCB 1 side <Main Controller PCB 1, SDRAM, FLASH Memory PCB>
Control Panel
All-night Power Supply, Non-all-night Power Supply
Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool

Main Controller PCB 1 side <Main Controller PCB 1, SDRAM, TPM PCB>
Main Controller PCB 2 side <Main Controller PCB 2, SDRAM (M0*, M1), SDRAM (P),
Memory PCB, Open I/F PCB (option)>
F-6-135
Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the red frame (solid line)
in the figure. Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the
blue frame (dotted line).
Rizer PCB / HDD
Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool
* SDRAM (M0) is an option.
Supply, and Non-all-night Power Supply, and notifies the result by the number of light-out and
This tool automatically checks the Control Panel, Main Controller PCB 1, All-night Power
blinking interval of the lamp on the Control Panel.
This tool is installed in the ROM of Main Controller PCB 1.
Therefore, regardless the version of MN-CNT, this tool can be used even when an error
occurs in child PCBs or when the Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool cannot be booted.
Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool

This tool automatically checks the Main Controller PCB 1/2, child PCBs mounted on the Main
Controller PCB 1/2, and HDD, and display the result on the Control Panel.
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview
6-99
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Layout Drawing
Layout Drawing
6-100

SDRAM
Layout Drawing of PCBs Subject to Diagnosis
BAT

F-6-137

F-6-136
DDR2-SDRAM(M0)
J13
DDR2-SDRAM(M1)
DDR2-SDRAM(P)
BAT
F-6-138
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Layout Drawing
6-100
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Basic Flowchart
Basic Flowchart
6-101
Basic Check Items

1. Check if the Leakage Breaker is turned OFF.
Basic Check Items
2. Check if the Power Supply Plug is disconnected.
Check all of the items shown below.
3. Check if the Connection Cable between the Main Controller PCB 1 and Control Panel is
disconnected.
4. Check if the Connection Main Controller PCB 1 and Main Controller PCB 2 definitely?
Turn O N the m ain power s witc h.
5. Check if the Connection An All-night Power Supply. Change Non-all-night Power Supply if
not recovered.
Does the Pow er Supply LED

on the Control Panel light up?
No
Ex ec ute bas ic c hec k.
Yes
No
Is the Control Panel dis play ed?
Ex ec ute Boot Sy s tem Error

Diagnos is Tool.
Yes
No
Does the main body boot c orrec tly ?
Ex ec ute Controller Sy s tem Error

Diagnos is Tool.
Yes
Take an ac tion appropriate f or
the error.
F-6-139
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Basic Flowchart
6-101
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Boot System Error Diagnosis
6-102
Operation
Operations of the two diagnosis tools are explained below.
Use each tool according to the following purposes.
When the main body does not boot (the Control Panel is not displayed): Execute Boot
System Error Diagnosis.
When an error is suspected to have occurred in the Main Controller PCB 1/2 or child PCBs
mounted on the Main Controller PCB 1/2: Execute Controller System Error Diagnosis.
Boot System Error Diagnosis

Boot Method
Main Power
Supply Switch
1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the Control Panel Energy Saver
Switch.
Note:
At the time of high-speed start ON, you cannot use it.
F-6-141
2) Right after the Main Power Supply Lamp lights up once, it lights out instantly, and diagnosis
Perform OFF/ON of the breaker once.
starts.
(When the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out, you can release your finger from the Control
Panel Switch.)
Upright Control Panel
Control Panel (Flat)

F-6-142
Diagnosis Time
Diagnosis is completed in approx. 1 minuites.
<When the diagnosis result is normal>
After the Main Power Supply Lamp repeatedly lights out 4 times, it lights up and the diagnosis
is completed.
After completion of the diagnosis, this machine executes normal boot sequence.
F-6-140
6-102
6-103
Error Diagnosis
<Boot System Error Diagnosis Table>
The error locations are identified according to the following table.
F-6-143
<When an error is detected by diagnosis>

The Main Power Supply Lamp repeats high-speed blinking after completion of a check in
which an error is detected. (See *1.)
For example, when an error is detected in Check 2, the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out
twice and repeats high-speed blinking (ON/OFF in 0.3 seconds interval).
When an error is detected, be sure to count the number of times the Main Power Supply
Lamp lights out.
For detailed results, see Error Diagnosis
F-6-144
Board
*1: When an error is detected, there is a possibility that the Main Power Supply Lamp may
not perform high-speed blinking but perform other operation (continuous light-up, light-out). In
this case, remove and then install the Main Controller PCB 1.
If the error is not resolved, execute the remedy of the Check No. which is not completed
normally. (For details, see Error Diagnosis.)
*2: Although diagnosis time for Check 3, and Check 4 is longer than that of other Checks, it is
Board
correct operation.
F-6-145
6-103
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis
6-104
Controller System Error Diagnosis

Boot Method
1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys 2 and 4
simultaneously.
F-6-148
F-6-146
NOTE:
When this tool is not installed correctly, the following regular screen is displayed.
In this case, perform the following remedy.
Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch again, and execute step 1 and 2 shown
above.
If this tool still does not boot, it means that BCT is deleted. So, install BCT.
If BCT is not installed correctly, --.-- is displayed in Service
Mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>BCT) in the main body.
Main Power
Supply Switch
F-6-147
2) Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen
appears on the Control Panel.
F-6-149
6-104
Diagnosis Time
6-105
<Controller System Error Diagnosis Table>
Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes.
The error locations are identified according to the following table.
The result is displayed on the Control Panel.
Test Name
<When the diagnosis result is normal>
F-6-150
<When an error is detected by diagnosis>

Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result. In detailed information, the name
of the test where an error was detected is indicated.
Description
SN-1 IA-DDR2 Check an error

SDRAM
between the
Main Controller
PCB 1 and
SDRAM on the
Main Controller
PCB 1
SN-2 SM BUS Check an
IA DIMM1
SM bus error
in SDRAM
(outside) on the
Main Controller
PCB 1
SN-4 SM BUS Check an SM
IA Clock Gen bus error in
Clock Generator
on the Main
Controller PCB
1
SN-5 SM BUS Check an SM
SOC DIMM1 bus error in the
Main Controller
PCB 1 and the
Main Controller
PCB 2
Assumed Error
Location
Main Controller
PCB 1
SDRAM on Main
Controller PCB 1
Main Controller
1. Replace the Main Controller
PCB 1
PCB 1.
SDRAM (outside)
on Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1

PCB 1.
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM on Main
Controller PCB 2
1. Check the connection of the

Main Controller PCB 1, and the
Main Controller PCB 2.
2. Check the installation of SDRAM
(M1) on the Main Controller PCB 2.
3. Replace SDRAM (M1) on the
PCB 2.
PCB 1.
Main Controller PCB 1, and the
PCB 1.
PCB 2.
PCB 1.
F-6-151
The following screen is an enlarged view of the detailed information indicated above.
[no] means that optional PCBs are not mounted.
SN-6 PCI
Config
Maestro
Check a PCI
bus error in the
Main Controller
PCB 1 and the
Main Controller
PCB 2
SN-7 PCI
Config LANC
Check a LAN
Main Controller
chip error on the PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1
When [no] is displayed although an optional PCB is mounted, it means that an error has been
occurring.
[NG] means that an error occurred to PCBs mounted as standard.
Error
Code

PCB 1.
<How to view the error result>

Explanation of the detailed error information is described.
Remedy
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM on Main
Controller PCB 2
6-105
6
Test Name
SN-8 PCI
Config PCIBridge
SN-9 CPLD
SN-10 LANC
SPI
SN-11 RTC
CHECK
SN-12 TPM
SN-13
DDR2
SDRAM
Description
Check a PCI
bus error
between the
Main Controller
PCB 1
Check failure
of CPLD chip
on the Main
Controller PCB
1
Check failure
of LANC SPI
on the Main
Controller PCB
1
Check failure
of RTC on the
Main Controller
PCB 1
Check failure of
the TPM PCB
on the Main
Controller PCB
1
* TPM PCB is
not installed
in products
for China. So,
the diagnosis
results NG.
Check an
error between
SDRAMs on the
Main Controller
PCB 2
Assumed Error
Location
Remedy
Error
Code
Main Controller
PCB 1
1. Check the installation between

the Main Controller PCB 1.
PCB 1.
Main Controller
PCB 1

PCB 1.
Main Controller
PCB 1

PCB 1.
Test Name
SN-15
P-DDR2
SDRAM
SN-16
GOR(R)DDR2
SDRAM
SN-17
S-SDRAM
Main Controller
PCB 1

PCB 1.
Main Controller
PCB 1
TPM PCB
1. Check the installation of the

TPM PCB.
2. Replace the TPM PCB.
PCB 1.
E746
SN-18
GORDDR2
SDRAM
SN-19
GU BUS
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM (M0) on
Main Controller
PCB 2
SN-14 FLASH Check failure

Main Controller
ROM
of CPU ROM
PCB 2
(IC60) on the
Main Controller
PCB 2
1. Check the installation of SDRAM (M0) on the Main Controller PCB 2.

2. Replace SDRAM (M0) on the
PCB 2.
PCB 2.
Description
Check an error
between the
Main Controller
PCB 2 and
SDRAM (P)
on the Main
Controller PCB
2
Check failure of
Rchip SDRAM
on the Main
Controller PCB
2
Check failure of
Schip SDRAM
on the Main
Controller PCB
2
Check failure of
Ochip SDRAM
on the Open I/F
PCB
Check a
GUBUS error
on the Main
Controller PCB
2
Assumed Error
Location
6-106
Remedy
Error
Code
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM (P)
Open I/F PCB
Bypass board

bypass board /Open I/F board.
PCB 2.
E747
E748
Main Controller
PCB 2
Open I/F PCB
Bypass board

bypass board /Open I/F board.
PCB 2.
E747
E748
Main Controller
PCB 2

PCB 2.
E747
E748
E732
Main Controller
PCB 2
Open I/F PCB

Open I/F PCB.
2. Replace the Open I/F PCB.
PCB 2.
E747
E748
Main Controller
PCB 2
Open I/F PCB
Bypass PCB
SN-20 FRAM Check failure

Main Controller
between the
PCB 2
Main Controller Memory PCB
PCB 2 and the
Memory PCB
Supplementary Information: If
the Open I/F PCB is not installed,
[no] is displayed for the diagnosis
result.
E747
Open I/F PCB or the Bypass I/F
E748
PCB on the Main Controller PCB 2.
2. Replace the Open I/F PCB or
the Bypass I/F PCB on the Main
Controller PCB 2.
PCB 2.
1. Check the installation of
E355
the Memory PCB on the Main
Controller PCB 2.
2. Replace the Memory PCB on
the Main Controller PCB 2.
PCB 2.
6-106
6
Test Name
Description
SN-21 SRAM Check failure

of SDRAM
and battery
exhaustion
on the Main
Controller PCB
2
SN-22 JUST Check ROM
ROM READ READ on the
Main Controller
PCB 2
SN-23 HDD
Check an HDD
I/F error
SN-24
S-SRI
Check an SRI
bus
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Restrictions
Assumed Error
Location
Remedy
6-107
Error
Code
Main Controller
PCB 2

PCB 2.
E246
E350
E355
Main Controller
PCB 2

PCB 2.
Main Controller
PCB 2
HDD Cable
HDD
1. Check the cable connection of the HDD.

2. Check the connection between
the Main Controller PCB 2 and the
3. Replace the HDD.
Main Controller
1. Check the Image Processing
PCB 2
Sub PCB connection
Image Processing 2. Replace the Image Processing
Sub PCB
Sub PCB
PCB 2.
T-6-16
Restrictions
<Boot System Error Diagnosis>
If an error cannot be resolved by executing remedy according to the error diagnosis table
described above, consider boot failure of the main power supply and take appropriate
actions.
<Controller System Error Diagnosis>

Regarding the diagnosis for the test names (SN-1, 2, 7, 15, 21, 24), if an error occurs in the
diagnosis under the test names, this diagnosis tool will not boot.
When no PCBs are installed on the Main Controller PCB 1/2, the following judgment results
are displayed.
Standard PCB: [NG]
Optional PCB: [OK]
However, [no] is displayed in detailed error information for optional PCBs.
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Restrictions
6-107
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Checking the lighting of the LED4 RED on the Main Controller 2
6-108
Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs
Checking the lighting of the LED4 RED on the Main Controller 2
You may be able to determine the remedies against Main Controller-related troubles by
checking the lighting status of LEDs on the PCB.
Check the lighting of the LED on

the Main Controller PCB 2
Location of LEDs
LED4 is lit.
No
Yes
LED1 Green
LED 4 Red
Normal operation
LED9 Green
LED16 Green
- Check for any blown-out fuse of the Relay Board

- Check whether the connector (on the Main
Controller PCB 2 side) is securely connected
F-6-153
Riser PCB

F-6-152
Preconditions
Check whether the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller PCB 2 are properly
inserted.
Check whether the connectors are securely connected. LEDs are not lit when the contaction
is poor. (Power-on is not possible)
When the LED of the Control Panel main power is not lit, check the connection of cables (such
as UI Cable).
6-108
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Checking the lighting of the LED4 RED on the Main Controller 2
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1
6-109
Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1

Main Controller PCB 1 - LED9, LED16
Flash PCB - LED1
Check the lighting of the LDEs on

the Main Controller PCB 1
LED16 is lit.
Yes
No
LED9 is lit.
Yes
LED1 of the Flash
PCB is lit.
Yes
No
No
Normal startup
Yes
No
- Check for any blown-out fuse of the Relay Board

- Check whether the connector (on the Main
Controller PCB 1 side) is securely connected
- Replace the Main Controller PCB
Determine the faulty PCB by the error code (E602-0001) after

removing the Main Controller PCB 2 and turning ON the power.
- No error code is displayed => Replace the Main Controller PCB 1
- Error code (E602-0001) is displayed => Replace the Main Controller
PCB 2
- Check for poor connection of the FLASH PCB connector

- Replace the FLASH PCB / Main Controller PCB 1
- In the case of startup failure (error code cannot be displayed)
although the LED is lit, replace the FLASH PCB
Replace the
FLASH PCB
Normal operation
F-6-154
6-109
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Overview > Function Overview
Debug log
6-110
Types of Logs
There are continuous logs, event logs, and manual logs.
Type
Scope of Application
Size of logs
Collecting method
Setting
Event log
Purpose
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of debug log
by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to determine the
cause.
Overview
Function Overview
Debug log is an integrated log for failure analysis that gathers logs prepared by the software
modules in the device for debug purpose.
In the case of a field failure that is hard to be reproduced, this measure is intended to improve
Automatically recorded in accordance Less than 500MB Service mode Lev2: COPIER
with the conditions specified in
> FUNCTION > SYSTEM >
DEBUG-1.
DEBUG-1 > 3 (default)
3: Exception + E code + Reboot
Make movement same as 3
even if you change setting of it.
Manual log Perform the following procedure.
n/a
1. Hold down the [Counter] button (10
seconds or longer).
2. Press 1 on the numeric keypad.
While logs are being obtained, the
screen is locked. It takes approx. 3
minutes before obtaining the logs is
completed and the user can work on
the screen.
efficiency in failure analysis and reduce the time for failure support by collecting debug log at
the user site (which was created immediately after the failure) and sending it to the R&D.
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of firmware
debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to
determine the cause.
Effective Instances of Collecting Debug Log

The error occurs only at the customer site and cannot be reproduced by the sales company
T-6-17
Conditions of Log Collection

Logs can be collected on a PCB-by-PCB basis. (SUBLOG, SUBLOG_RCON, SUBLOG_
DCON)
Location
File name
or the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up.

When the error frequency is low.
When the error is suspected of links with firmware rather than a mechanical/electrical
Automatic collection
Manual collection
Logs generated Event log

while the host When an event has
machine is
occurred
being operated.
Manual log
Yes
Main Controller
SUBLOG
Yes
* Collection of Sublog is not necessary when the reproduction procedure is identified and
Reader Controller
SUBLOG_RCON
No
Yes
Yes
the error can be reproduced by the sales company HQ or the Canon staff who is in charge
DC Controller
SUBLOG_DCON
No
Yes
Yes
failure.
Yes
of quality follow-up.
T-6-18
Collection of Logs
Connect SST or a USB memory device,
and select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK to collect logs.
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Overview > Function Overview
6-110
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)
Description of Log to be Collected
6-111
Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)
When operation from the Control Panel or an event log (exceptional operation, error code, or
NOTE:
When the data is sent to the USB memory device:
USB memory where the system software for this machine has been registered using
the SST.
reboot) occurs, the number of logs increases.

Logs are stored from the latest one, and the latest file is always stored.
Logs earlier than those logs are overwritten and deleted from the oldest log.
When collecting logs from the machine, the log file in the machine is deleted.
Note:
The number of files stored differs depending on the model and situation.
1) Lev1 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK

Connect the USB memory device to the machine.
2) [5] Execute [BACKUP].
Previous time
Delete
Delete Delete
10
This time
10
F-6-155
Collecting System Information

Collection Destination
To retrieve debug log to an external location from the device, use a USB memory device, FTP
server or SST (Ver. 4.63 or later).

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
- (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys -
Collection Method
Retrieve debug log from the machine by any of the following methods.
Make the machine recognize the USB memory device. Select the following in service mode
Lev1: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; and click OK.
Use SST on a PC with the network cable connected to transfer the debug log.
Transfer the debug log to a USB memory device that stores the system of the machine.
File Name of Sublog

Whether the file is new or old can be judged by the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
SUBLOG04_0014_0515204388.Z
Layer number
mmddhhmm
Sequence number
F-6-157
3) [1] Execute [Sublog].
[[[[[ Backup Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]]
[1]: Sublog
[4]: ServicePrint
[5]: Netcap
[6]: SRAM(HDD)
[7]: SRAM(USB)
F-6-156
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)
F-6-158
6-111
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:
When the data is sent to the USB memory device

A folder of the year, month, day, hour, and minute is created in the USB memory device. The
log file is saved in the folder.
6-112
Uploading Data by SST

The following shows a method to collect a log by connecting a PC with SST (Ver. 4.63 or
later) running to the machine.
Example: Folder 201205241821
Preconditions:
In addition to continuous logs, obtained manual logs (holding down the counter + 1, 2, and 3
keys) and event logs (DEBUG-1) are stored in the machine.
A PC where SST is running is connected to the machine, and the machine is in download
mode.
Note:
Executing a log collection by SST deletes logs in the machine.
1. Start SST (Ver. 4.63 or later) and select iRC5051 from Model List. Press the Start button.
F-6-160
F-6-159
6-112
2. Press the Upload Data button.
6-113
4. Press the "Save" button.
F-6-161
3. Select the data to be uploaded, then click [Start] button.
F-6-163
5. Check that the data storage is completed and click the "OK" button.
When there is no log in the machine, it results in blank option items for "data to upload".
When the file name is longer than the frame, it displays that it is a log in the comment
column just below.
It is displayed as "log" in the figure below.
Note:
The log is not stored when You cancel it before pushing the Start button.
It is deleted from the main body.
F-6-164
F-6-162
6-113
6-114
6. Check that the log is stored in the specified location in the PC.
In the initial setting:
Windows(C:) > ServData > iAxxxx(Model) > JWH00003(Serial number) >
20120524192934-Log(yymmddhhmm)
F-6-165
6-114
Troubleshooting > Debug log > When to Obtain Logs
When to Obtain Logs
6-115
Checking the name of the log file
The assumed procedure to be taken when a request for log collection has been received is
shown below.
Check the date of the file whose name begins with SUBLOG00_00. It is highly possible that
files of around the date and time the symptom occurred contain information recorded at the
time when the failure occurred.
Preconditions
When the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up determines the need for an
analysis of debug log by the R&D department, log collection is requested via sales company
HQ. Logs are used to determine the cause.
Anticipated log collection procedure

1. Contact the user to identify the date and time the failure to be analyzed occurred. ( The
date and time of occurrence is used to judge whether it is included in the dates and times of
SUBLOG00_0014_0515204388.Z
Log classification
mmddhhmm
Sequence number
the obtained log files. The date and time of occurrence needs to be informed together with
F-6-166
the obtained logs. The information is necessary in order to shorten the time required for the
An example of log acquisition when the occurrence date has been specified
analysis. If multiple failures have occurred, the dates and times of those failures need to be
An example of a failure which occurred around 20:38 on October 3:
informed. If the exact date and time is not clear, just a rough idea will do. )
Around 20:38 on October 3
2. At the users site, enter download mode and obtain logs.

3. Check that files of around the specified date are included in the logs.
4. If the symptom can be reproduced, reproduce it.
5. Press the counter + 1, 2, and 3 keys to obtain logs.
6. Collect all the obtained logs.
It is highly possible that logs recorded

The time when the status is assumed
The time when the symptom is
at the time when the symptom
to have changed from normal operation
assumed to have occurred.
occurred are included.
to occurrence of the symptom
SUBLOG00_0024_1003193499.Z
19:34 on October 3
SUBLOG00_0025_1003205099.Z
20:50 on October 3
F-6-167
NOTE:
Prepare a USB memory device of 2 GB or more in capacity as the USB memory device
used for log collection. It is necessary in order to secure enough capacity when logs are
obtained multiple times.
As for the collected logs, all the logs moved to the USB memory device should be sent.
The logs are directly saved to the HDD. It is assumed that logs of a day (if various
operations are continuously performed) or logs of approx. 30 days (in the case of common
use) can be stored. In the case of logs within the foregoing assumed storage period, it is
rare that the logs are overwritten and need to be collected again.
6-115
6-116
NOTE:
If the obtained log file name contains "SHT", it means that the log was recorded at the
time of shutdown.
Example:
SUBLOG00_0001_0918140788SHT.TXT
When checking the occurrence date and time with the user, if the performed operations
include turning OFF the power, use the file name "SHT" as a clue for identifying the date
and time.
If the number of seconds is expressed as "99 + three-digit number", the number shows
the cause which triggered the log acquisition (e.g. acquisition due to an error code
E[three-digit number]).
Example:
When an error code E747 occurred
SUBLOG00_0001_0918140799747.TXT
When checking the occurrence date and time with the user, if an error code has occurred,
use E[three-digit number] as a clue for identifying the date and time.
6-116
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection
Network Packet Capture
6-117
Overall flow
1) Enable network capture
Overview
2) Start the network capture function
The network capture function is an embedded function of the machine.The network data
sent to and received from the machine can be collected (captured) without using any special
equipment.
Until now, in the case of network failures that could not be solved at the first visit, the service
technician collected packet at the second visit to solve it.
By providing this function, investigation to determine the cause is available before the second
visit to take some measures. Also, service technicians can reproduce the symptoms of
network failure and collect network packet to bring it back to the office.
The network capture data can be collected using SST/USB memory.
There is no need to prepare dedicated equipments (PC, HUB, cable, packet capture software,
etc.) that have been needed before.
3) Overwrite function
4) Encryption function
5) Start/stop network capture
6) Stop the network capture function
7) Disable network capture
Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection

Enable network capture
To enable this function, the following 2 steps need to be executed.
Enabling the license of network capture
Enabling user mode > Network > Store Network Packet Log
Because this function is able to acquire the customer information such as print data, it is not
The following effects can be expected thanks to the embedded feature.

The packet in customer environment can be collected by remote operation.
Packet collection can be continued when the symptom is not reproduced during the visit.
standard function.You make it valid as free license option after obtaining permission from
the customer.Then it displays "OFF/ON" in the user mode, you obtain permission from the
customer again and let the customer change it to ON.
For network failures on iR-ADV collaboration (a function to communicate between

machines across a network), packet collection for both sides becomes easy.
Caution:
The network capture function may fail to collect a part of packet in a high-loaded
network environment.
The network capture function of the machine is more prone to failures in collecting
packet than when using a PC to do so.
When collecting packet due to trouble of print data, etc., a case is assumed in which
it is impossible to judge whether it is a failure in the print data or a failure in collecting
packet.
To check whether packet is failed to be collected by the network capture function of the
machine, there may be a case where user is requested to collect packet using a PC.
F-6-168
Changing it to "ON" in user mode, it is displayed in Service Mode.
6-117
Start the network capture function
6-118
The following shows the machine behavior when the HDD space reaches full.
Select the following: Service Mode(level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > CAPOFFON > "1".
When the overwriting setting is ON

The oldest packet file is deleted. The oldest file is determined by the last update time of the
file (not by the date and time attached to the file).
When the HDD space reaches full during packet collection, the oldest file is deleted to
continue collecting packet data to the currently-stored file.
CAPSTATE of capturing continues to be "RUNNING".
When the overwriting setting is OFF
Capturing is stopped.
CAPSTATE of capturing becomes "HDDFULL". Note that STT-STP remains as start state
(1). Capturing is started again by changing the value from STT-STP (0) to STT-STP (1).
If the HDDFULL state is cleared when starting capturing again, capturing is started.
CAPSTATE of capturing becomes "RUNNING".
F-6-169
*1: ON (enabled) The capture function is available.
If the HDDFULL state is not cleared, starting data capturing results in an error.
CAPSTATE of capturing remains as "HDDFULL".
Overwrite function
When a command of stopping data capturing is given during the "HDDFULL" state,
Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > OVERWRIT > 1
CAPSTATE of capturing remains as "STOP".
Encryption function
Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > ENCDATA >2.
0: Data is encrypted at data extraction (factory setting value).
1: Data is not encrypted at data extraction.
2: Two types of files (one in encrypted format and another in clear text format) are extracted
at data extraction.
F-6-170
Note:
When the HDD space becomes full after starting the capture, the oldest file is deleted
and the captured data continues to be saved; therefore, it is necessary to set "1:
Overwrite" in advance.
6-118
6-119
Start/stop network capture

1) Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > STT-STP > 1.
2) To stop capturing, set "0".
F-6-171
Note:
When collecting data using SST, the above service mode setting is not reflected and
both files in encrypted format and clear text format are always collected.
F-6-172
"RUNNING" is displayed for the item CAPSTATE during packet collection.

STOP is displayed at the time of shipment or at completion of packet collection, and
When the encryption setting is enabled, the extension of the extracted packet data is XXX.
HDDFULL is displayed when 1GB of data (the upper limit for packet collection) is collected.
can.
When the encryption setting is disabled, the extension of the extracted packet data is XXX.
cap.
This setting applies only when using USB memory for data extraction.
Stop the network capture function

Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > CAPOFFON > 0.
This setting is ignored when using SST for data collection because both files in encrypted
format and clear text format are extracted.
F-6-173
6-119
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Other functions
6-120
Other functions
Caution:
Be sure to stop the network capture function after collecting network packet capture
data.
Payload discard function

Payload is customer data. Data is collected including payload by default. To prevent leak
of customers' information or large volume of network packet, the network packet can be
collected while payload is discarded.
0: OFF (disabled) The capture function is not available. At the time of shipment.
1: ON (enabled) The capture function is available.
Service Mode(Level 2) Copier>Test>NET-CAP>PAYLOAD

0: Payload is not discarded (factory setting value)
Disable network capture
1: Payload is discarded
1) Select the following: Service Mode(Lv2) Copier > Option > LCNS-TR > ST-NCAPT > 0,
and click OK.
2) Select the following in user mode: Network > Store Network Packet Log > OFF.
F-6-175
F-6-174
Filter function
Caution:
Be sure to disable the network capture function once analysis of network failure is
complete. It is required to disable and transfer the license; however, the further step,
LMS license transfer, is not required.
Filtering setting is available.

Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > SIMPFILT
0: Filtering is performed. All the data is collected (factory default setting).
1: Only the packet data where the machine's MAC address is included in the destination
address or sender's address of Ether header is captured.
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > Other functions
6-120
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > SST Network Packet File Collection
6-121
Delete files
Delete all the network capture data stored on the HDD.
Select Service Mode(level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > FILE-CLR, and then click the OK
button.
F-6-176
Collection function at startup

Setting this service mode automatically starts collecting packet data if the condition of
network capture operation is satisfied when the main power of the host machine is turned
ON. Completion of packet data collection needs to be executed manually.
Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > PONSTART
F-6-178
SST Network Packet File Collection

Overview
0: Data is not automatically collected at startup (factory setting value).
Collect the network capture data that has been stored in the machine using SST.
1: Data is automatically collected at startup.
It is possible to use files in clear text format for in-house analysis by using free software,
such as Wireshark. Note that only Canon Inc. can analyze encrypted files. In the case of
failure in solving problems, send encrypted files to Canon Inc.
When using SST for collecting data, the setting of encryption function in Service Mode(level
2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > ENCDATA is disabled and files in clear text format/encrypted
format can be always collected.
Preparation
PC with SST (V4.62 or later) registered
(The system software of the corresponding model must have been registered with SST.)
Overflow
F-6-177
1) Connect the machine to SST

2) Upload data
3) Collect the network capture data
6-121
Starting the Machine and SST

1) Start the machine using the 2 and 8 keys, and connect SST in Single mode.
2) Click the "Start" button.
6-122
Note:
When using SST to collect data, you can select both files in encrypted format and clear
text format.
3) Select a model to connect and "Single", check the network settings, and then click the
"Start" button.
Collect the network capture data

1) In the case of the default installation destination for SST, click the folder with the name of
the serial number of the machine stored in C drive > ServData > target model (e.g.: iAC5255)
on the PC.
2) Three types of files are collected; a file in clear text format (xxx.cap), a file in encrypted
format (xxx.can), and a list of collected network capture files (ufset.txt).
F-6-181
F-6-179
Upload data
1) Click the [Upload Data] button on SST.
2) When a list of packet files stored in the device appears, select target data files to upload.
F-6-182
3) Use free software to analyze the collected network packet capture data in clear text format
(xxx.cap).
Note:
When the analysis work fails, send the file in encrypted format (xxx.can) to Canon Inc.
F-6-180
6-122
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Network Packet Capture > USB Network Packet File Collection
USB Network Packet File Collection
6-123
Select Backup
1) When Download Menu (USB) appears, select [5]: Backup.
Overview
Collect the network capture data that has been stored in the machine using a USB memory.
It is possible to use files in clear text format for in-house analysis by using free software,
such as Wireshark. Note that only Canon Inc. can analyze encrypted files. In the case of
failure in solving problems, send encrypted files to Canon Inc.
Preparation
USB memory
Store in advance the system software of the machine to connect to.
For the system software, it is fine to store just one of the system software of the machine
(LANG, etc). There is no need to store the full set.
Overall flow
1) Enter download mode
F-6-184
2) Select Backup
2) Select - (OK): 0.
3) Transfer the network capture data
3) When Backup Menu (USB) appears, select [5]: Netcap.
4) Collect the network capture data
Enter Download Mode

1) Connect the USB memory to the USB port.
2) Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD, and then press [OK].
3) When the machine recognizes the USB memory, download Menu (USB) appears on the
Control Panel.
F-6-185
4) Select - (OK): 0.
F-6-183
6-123
6-124
Transfer the network capture data

1) Store all the network capture data stored in the machine on the USB memory.
F-6-186
2) When ---Please hit any key--- appears, press any key.

3) Press the [C] key to return to the download Menu (HDD).
4) Press the [Reset] key to shut down the machine.
Collect the network capture data

1) Check that the network capture files are stored on the USB memory.
2) Two types of files are collected; a file in clear text format (xxx.cap) and a file in encrypted
format (xxx.can).
F-6-187
3) Use free software to analyze the collected network packet capture data in clear text format
(xxx.cap).
Note:
When the analysis work fails, send the file in encrypted format (xxx.can) to Canon Inc.
6-124
Error Code
View
Over
Code
Error
Code
Jam
Code
Alarm
Error Code
Error Code > Over View > Outline > Measures for E747
Over View
7-2
Location Code
When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code.
Outline
In the jam display screen, the P row corresponds to the pickup position code.
Outline
This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the
product. These are classified into 3 codes as follows.
Code type
Error code
Jam code
Alarm code
Explanation
Reference
This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine.

This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine.
This code is displayed when a function of the machine is
malfunctioned.
p. 7-3
p. 7-128
p. 7-144
Error code notation
T-7-1
An error code is shown in 7-digit [E000XXX] on the display on the operation panel.
However, [000] in 2 to 4 digit is not used. Thus, an error code is described as [EXXX] using
5 to 7 digit in the service manual. (e.g.: E012 = E000012)
Location Code
Pickup position
Pickup position code
At Finisher jam/At error avoidance jam/At ADF jam without pickup

operation (at SEND, Inbox, etc.)
Right deck
Left deck
Cassette 3
Cassette4
Multi-purpose Tray
Side Paper Deck
Duplex (At duplex printing, jam occurs after paper passes through
the Duplex Paper Sensor (PS24).)
Upper deck
Middle deck
Lower deck
Document Insertion Unit
Upper tray
Lower tray
Document Insertion / Folding Unit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
F0
11
12
13
2A
2B
28
T-7-3
Error code and jam code include the location information.
Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON
Location information is displayed as 2-digit numbers as follows.
Execution of clearing MN-COM deletes all data in Address Book, Forwarding Settings,
In the jam display screen, the L row corresponds to the location code.
DISPLAY>JAM
DISPLAY>ERR
Settings/Registration (Preferences), Adjustment/Maintenance, Function Settings, Set
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9075 PRO/9065 PRO
00
Color Image Reader Unit - A1(Reader+DADF)

Multi Color Image Reader - A1(Reader+DADF)
POD Deck Light - A1
Paper Deck Unit - A1
Multi Deck - A1
Buffer Path Unit - F1
Insertion Unit -H1
Insertion Unit -J1
/ Professional Puncher Integration Unit - B1
External 2(2/3,2/4,4)-hole Puncher - A1
Saddle Finisher - A1/Staple Finisher - A1
Saddle Finisher - B1/Staple Finisher - B1
Inner Trimmer - A1
01
Main Controller = 00
Printer engine = 05
04
When clearing MN-CON while any login application other than Default Authentication is,
00
00
00
00
02
02
02
02
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
02
02
02
02
02
05
05
05
05
05
Device
ask user to back up the data and get approval for this operation.
error such as not displayed login screen occurred. In this case, access SMS once and
switch login application to Default Authentication to recover to the normal status.
Points to Note When Clearing HDD

As a remedy for error codes (E602-XXXX, E611-0000), HDD partition is selected and the
target partition may be cleared.
When clearing partition, be sure to check which data will be deleted by referring Detail of
HDD partition and explain to the user before starting work.
Measures for E747

There are many detail codes in E747. Since these detail codes are for R&D use, remedy to
be performed in the field is the same, except for E747-1201 and E747-FF01. Because of that,
errors other than the 2 errors mentioned above are described as E747-XXXX, and common
T-7-2
Destination, Management Settings, TPM Settings, etc. Before execution of this operation,
remedy is described.
Error Code > Over View > Outline > Measures for E747
7-2
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
Error Code
Error Code Details
7-3
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E001
-0001
-05
E001
-0002
-05
E000 to E015
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E000
-0001
-05
Items
Description
Title
Fixing Film temperature rise is insufficient at power ON.
Description Fixing main thermistor (THM1-1) temperature does not
of detection reach 50 degrees Celsius within 20 seconds after startup
of fixing film temperature control.
Measures Check if the detection temperature of the thermistor is
risen in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG>
FIX-xx).
A. In case that either one of the thermistor detection
temperature is risen
A-1. Replace the fixing film unit
A-2. Faulty drawer connector -> Clean the drawer
connector or replace the fixing drawer cable
B. In case that neither of them are not risen
B-1. Check the connection of the fixing thermistor (to
see if the connection of the drawer is faulty, the
connector is physically removed or
disconnected) -> replace the fixing film unit
B-2. Check the connection of the IH power
connector (to see if the connector is physically
removed or disconnected, or the cable is
caught)
B-3. Replace the IH power unit
B-4. Replace the DC controller PCB
NOTE:
After performing the above remedy work, go through
the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION>
CLEAR> ERR
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Abnormal temperature rise of fixing main thermistor

Fixing main thermistor (THM1) sensed an abnormal high
temperature. (ASIC detection)
Check the detection temperature of the fixing main
thermistor (THM1) in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY>
ANALOG> FIX-UC).
A. In case that the detection temperature is 250 degC
A-1. The cable of the fixing main thermistor is
caught -> replace the fixing film unit
B. In case that the detection temperature is other than
250 degC
NOTE:
CLEAR> ERR
Title
Abnormal temperature rise of fixing subthermistor 1
(THM3)
Description Fixing subthermistor 1 (THM3) sensed an abnormal high
of detection temperature. (ASIC detection)
Measures Check the detection temperature of the fixing sub
thermistor 1 (THM3) in service mode (COPIER>
DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-UE).
A-1. The cable of the fixing sub thermistor 1 is
250 degC
B-1. Location of the fixing main thermistor is
inappropriate -> replace the fixing film unit
NOTE:
CLEAR> ERR
7-3
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E001
-0003
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E001
-0011
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
Abnormal temperature rise of fixing subthermistor 2
(THM4)
Fixing subthermistor 2 (THM4) sensed an abnormal high
temperature. (ASIC detection)
Check the detection temperature of the fixing sub
DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-UE2).
caught ->replace the fixing film unit
250 degC
NOTE:
CLEAR> ERR
Fixing main thermistor abnormal temperature rise
Fixing main thermistor (THM1) detected abnormal high
temperature. (software detection)
Check the detection temperature of the fixing main
thermistor (THM1) in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY>
ANALOG> FIX-UC).
A-1. The cable of the fixing main thermistor is
250 degC
NOTE:
CLEAR> ERR
7-4
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E001
-0012
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E001
-0013
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
Fixing sub thermistor 1 (THM3) abnormal temperature
rise
Fixing sub thermistor 1 (THM3) detected abnormal high
DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-UE).
250 degC
NOTE:
CLEAR> ERR
Fixing sub thermistor 2 (THM4) abnormal temperature
rise
Fixing sub thermistor 2 (THM4) detected abnormal high
DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-UE2).
250 degC
NOTE:
CLEAR> ERR
7-4
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E001
-0014
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
E001
-0015
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
Description
Abnormal temperature rise of Fixing Edge Rear
Thermistor (THM5)
The Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor (THM5) detected
abnormal high temperature (software detection).
Check the detected temperature of the Fixing Edge Rear
Thermistor (THM5) in service mode (COPIER > DISPLAY
> ANALOG > FIX-UE).
A. When the detected temperature was 260 deg C or
higher
A-1. Cable of the Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor is
caught. -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit.
B. When the detected temperature was lower than 260
deg C
B-1. The Fixing Main Thermistor is not securely
attached. -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit.
B-2. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
NOTE:
After performing the remedy work above, go through
the following to clear the error: COPIER > FUNCTION >
CLEAR > ERR.
Abnormal Temperature Rise of Fixing Edge Front
Thermistor (THM2)
The Fixing Edge Front Thermistor (THM2) detected
abnormal high temperature (software detection).
Check the detected temperature of the Fixing Edge Front
Thermistor (THM2) in service mode (COPIER > DISPLAY
> ANALOG > FIX-UE2)
A. When the detected temperature was 260 deg C or
higher
A-1. Cable of the Fixing Edge Front Thermistor is
caught. -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit.
B. When the detected temperature was lower than 260
deg C
B-1. The Fixing Main Thermistor is not securely
attached. -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit.
B-2. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
NOTE:
CLEAR > ERR.
7-5
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E003
-0001
-05
E004
-0201
-05
Items
Description
Title
Fixing Film abnormally low temperature
Description After standby, fixing main thermistor (THM1) detected
of detection less or equal to 110 degrees Celsius in succession for 1
second.
Measures 1. Check the rear louver. (If the rear of the machine is
close to the wall, temperature of the power supply area
may rise)
2. Check the detection temperature of the thermistor in
service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIXxx).
A. In case that either one of the thermistor detection
temperature is risen
A-1. Check the fixing film unit (to see if the

location of the thermistor is inappropriate or

the thermistor failure) -> replace the fixing

film unit
A-2. Faulty drawer connector -> clean the drawer

connector or replace the fixing drawer cable
B. In case that neither of them are not risen
B-1. Check the connection of the fixing thermistor

(to see if the connection of the drawer is

faulty, the connector is physically removed

or disconnected) -> replace the fixing film

unit
B-2. Check the connection of the IH power

connector (to see if the connector is

physically removed or disconnected, or the

cable is caught)
B-3. Replace the IH power unit
NOTE:
CLEAR> ERR
Title
Fixing Film temperature difference error 1
Description Difference of detected temperature between the fixing
of detection subthermistor 2 (THM4) and the fixing subthermistor 1
(THM3) is bigger than the rated value.
Measures 1. Fixing main /sub thermistor (THM1-1/2/3) connector
disconnetion (pinching wire, broken wire) -> replace
the fixing film unit
2. Check the rotation of the fixing motor (to see if the
connector is physically removed or disconnected) ->
replace the fixing motor or the harness
3. Faulty drawer connector -> clean the drawer connector
or replace the fixing drawer cable
4. Replace the DC controller PCB
7-5
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E004
-0202
E004
E004
E004
-0203
-0214
-0215
-05
-05
-05
-05
Items
Description
Title
of detection main thermistor (THM1) and the fixing subthermistor 1
(THM3) are bigger than the rated value.
Title
of detection main thermistor (THM1) and the fixing subthermistor 2
(THM1) are bigger than the rated value.
Title
Description Temperature difference between the Fixing Edge Front
of detection Thermistor (THM2) and the Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor
(THM5) is 50 deg C or greater.
Remedy
1. Replace the Fixing Film Unit.
2. Replace the Fixing Motor/Harness.
3. Clean the Drawer Connector/Replace the Fixing
Drawer Harness.
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
Title
Fixing Film displacement error
Description Temperature difference between the Fixing Edge Front
of detection Thermistor (THM2) and the Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor
(THM5) was 20 deg C or greater when checking
operation of the Fixing Film.
Remedy
Replace the Fixing Film Unit.
7-6
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E004
-0301
-05
E004
-0401
-05
E004
-0501
-05
E004
-0502
-05
E004
-0702
-05
Items
Description
Title
IH overcurrent detection error
Description Detected an overcurrent on IH power supply board.
of detection
Measures 1. Faulty fixing film unit -> replace the fixing film unit
2. Faulty fixing IH unit -> replace the fixing IH unit
3. Faulty IH power PCB -> replace the IH power PCB
Title
12V failure error
Description Detected abnormality on the 12V power supply line.
of detection
Measures 1. Check the Fixing Film -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit
when it is damaged.
2. Check connection of the Fixing Thermoswitch (TP2) (to
see if Thermoswitch is being turned OFF/open circuit).
-> Replace the Fixing Film Unit.
3. Replace the Relay PCB.
5. Replace the IH power supply.
NOTE:
CLEAR > ERR.
Title
Connection error of Fixing Main Thermistor or Fixing
Edge Front Thermistor
Description Connection detection signal for the Fixing Main
of detection Thermistor or Fixing Edge Front Thermistor could not be
detected.
Measures 1. Check connection of the Fixing Film Unit. -> Replace
the Fixing Film Unit when it is damaged.
2. Failure in Drawer Connector. -> Clean the Drawer
Connector/Replace the Fixing Drawer Harness.
Title
Connection error of Fixing Sub Thermistor 1/2 or Fixing
Edge Rear Thermistor
Description Connection detection signal for Fixing Sub Thermistor 1/2
of detection or Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor could not be detected.
Measures 1. Check connection of the Fixing Film Unit. -> Replace
the Fixing Film Unit when it is damaged.
2. Failure in Drawer Connector. -> Clean the Drawer
Connector/Replace the Fixing Drawer Harness.
Title
IH power supply relay abnormality
Description Voltage shows abnormal value even with the relay-off
of detection
Measures IH power supply replacement
7-6
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E005
-0000
-05
E006
-0001
-05
E006
-0002
-05
E008
-0002
-05
Items
Description
Title
Fixing Web level absence error
Description The count exceeded 60,000 (using A4/Letter size
of detection or smaller paper) after the Fixing Web Level Sensor
detected absence of the web.
Remedy
1. Check the Fixing Web.
2. When the Fixing Web is replaced, execute the
following to clear the counter value: COPIER >
COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-WEB1 to 4, or COPIER>
COUNTER>MISC>FX-WEB. Then, turn OFF and then
ON the main power.
3. Check the Sensor Harness.
4. Replace the Web Level Sensor (PS102).
5. Replace the Torsion Spring.
6. Replace the Level Detection Arm.
7. Replace the Web Sensor Support Plate.
Title
Fixing Feed drawer connection error
Description Fixing Feed drawer connector is abnormal (Sensor
of detection cannot detect)
Measures 1. Fixing Feed drawer connector has connection failure
2. Wire harness failure
3. Sensor failure
Title
Fixing Feed drawer connection error
Description Fixing feed knob of fixing drawer is abnormal (Sensor
of detection cannot detect)
Measures 1. Fixing feed knob of fixing drawer has connection failure
2. Wire harness failure
3. Sensor failure
Title
Fixing Film Unit life detection error
Description Total rotation time of the Fixing Film reached 5206 hours.
of detection
Measures 1. Life of the Fixing Film Unit -> Replace the Fixing Film
Unit.
2. When the Fixing Film Unit is replaced, turn OFF and
then ON the main power after executing the following:
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-BLT-U.
7-7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E008
-0003
-05
E009
-0500
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Fixing Film Unit life detection error

Count of the number of fed sheets through the Fixing
Film reached approx. 360,000 sheets (A4/LTR).
1. Life of the Fixing Film Unit -> Replace the Fixing Film
Unit.
2. When the Fixing Film Unit is replaced, turn OFF and
then ON the main power after executing the following:
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-BLT-U.
NOTE:
Only applicable under the following condition: OPTION
> IMG-FIX > FX-ERRSW = 1. The print counter setting
value can be changed by selecting the following: OPTION
> IMG-FIX > FX-U-ERR.
Title
Pressure unit pressure release HP search error
Description Home position for engagement/disengagement of the
of detection Fixing Assembly could not be detected.
Measures 1. Check connectors of the Fixing Motor (M48), Pressure
Roller HP Sensor (PS73) and Semi-pressure Sensor
(PS102).
2. Check harness of the corresponding parts. -> Replace
the harness when it is disconnected.
3. Check the Fixing Pressure Release Drive System
Gear. -> Replace the gear when it is damaged.
4. Replace the Pressure Roller HP Sensor (PS73) and
Semi-pressure Sensor (PS102).
5. Replace the Fixing Motor (M48).
6. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB.
7-7
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-0101
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 signal error

(Controller Version 2x.xx or later)
B. Drum motor (Y) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx)
Description A. This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection
of detection PCB (Y) 1/2 signal error is detected.
B. The lock signal for the drum motor (Y) (M21) cannot be
detected within a specified period.
Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking
(shorting))
Drum (unit) not inserted
Drum unit failure
Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.)
Measures A:
A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed
Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 (UN20/21). (Sensor side)
Sensor side: J7316, J7317, J8019
A-2. Check that the Encoder Wheel of the Drum Speed
Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 is properly installed.
A-3. Check the connection of the Drum ITB Driver PCB
(UN6).
PCB side: J1902
A-4. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2
to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 and
Encoder Wheel.
A-5. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2.
A-6. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB.
B:
B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (Y)
(M21) and the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6).
(Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking
(shorting)))
Motor side: J7300/J8019, PCB side: J1902
B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed
detection PCB (Y) (UN20/21) and the drum ITB
driver PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking
(Breaking (shorting)))
Motor side: J7316/J7317/J8019, PCB side: J1902
B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (Y).
B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be
overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.)
B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB.
NOTE:
In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is
not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when
dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed
detection PCB.
7-8
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-0102
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1 signal error

B. Drum motor (Y) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx)
Description A. The signal is not detected for 80msec or more.
of detection B. Lock signal of Drum motor (Y) (M21) cannot be
detected for the specified period of time after first
detection
(shorting))
Drum unit failure
Measures A:
A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection
PCB (Y) 1 (UN20).
Sensor side: J7316, J8016PCB side:J1910
A-2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1 to
clean.
A-3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1.
A-4. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection
PCB (Y) 1 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if its
disconnected.)
A-5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
B:
B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (Y)
(shorting)))
detection PCB (Y) (UN20/21) and the drum ITB
B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (Y).
NOTE:
detection PCB.
7-8
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-0103
-05
E012
-0104
-05
E012
-0105
-05
E012
-0106
-05
Items
Description
Title
Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 2 signal error
Description The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more.
of detection
Measures 1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection
PCB (Y) 2 (UN21).
2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 2 to
clean.
3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 2.
4. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection
PCB (Y) 2 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if its
disconnected.)
5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
Title
Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) Encoder Wheel error
Description This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection PCB
of detection (Y) Encoder Wheel error is detected.
Measures 1. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) to clean
the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 (UN20/21) and
Encoder Wheel.
2. Replace the Encoder Wheel.
3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2.
Title
Drum Motor (Y) control error
Description Unstable rotation of the Drum Motor (Y)
of detection
Measures 1. Check if the Drum Unit (Y) is installed.
2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) to clean
the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 (UN20/21) and
Encoder Wheel.
3. Remove and then reinstall the Process Unit (Bk).
4. Replace the Drum Unit (Y).
Title
Drum Motor (Y) rotation error
Description The Drum Motor (Y) is not rotating at the specified speed,
of detection or it is stopped.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the Drum Motor and
Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
Sensor side: J7300, J8019PCB side: J1902
2. Check the ITB. Check to see if the ITB is displaced or
ripped. Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced.
3. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade.
7-9
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-0201
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2 signal error

B. Drum motor (M) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx)
of detection PCB (M) 1/2 signal error is detected.
B. The lock signal for the drum motor (M) (M23) cannot
be detected within a specified period.
(shorting))
Drum unit failure
Measures A:
PCB (M) 1/2 (UN22/23). (Sensor side)
Detection PCB (M) 1/2 is properly installed.
(UN6).
PCB side: J1910
A-4. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2
to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2 and
Encoder Wheel.
A-5. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2.
B:
B-1. Check the connection of the drum motor (M) (M23).
(shorting)))
detection PCB (M) (UN22/23) and the drum ITB
driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector,
Breaking (Breaking (shorting)))
B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (M).
NOTE:
detection PCB.
7-9
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-0202
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1 signal error

B. Drum motor (M) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx)
Description A. The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more.
of detection B. Lock signal of Drum motor (M) (M23) cannot be
detection
(shorting))
Drum unit failure
Measures A:
PCB (M) 1 (UN22).
A-2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1 to
clean.
A-4. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1.
PCB (M) 1 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if its
disconnected.)
B:
B-1. Check the connection of the drum motor (M) (M23).
(shorting)))
detection PCB (M) (UN22/23) and the drum ITB
driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector,
B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (M).
NOTE:
detection PCB.
7-10
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-0203
-05
E012
-0204
-05
E012
-0205
-05
E012
-0206
-05
Items
Description
Title
Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 2 signal error
of detection
PCB (M) 2 (UN23).
2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 2 to
clean.
4. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 2.
PCB (M) 2 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if its
disconnected.)
Title
Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) Encoder Wheel error
of detection (M) Encoder Wheel error is detected.
Measures 1. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) to clean
the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2 (UN22/23) and
Encoder Wheel.
3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2.
Title
Drum Motor (M) control error
Description Unstable rotation of the Drum Motor (M)
of detection
Measures 1. Check if the Drum Unit (M) is installed.
2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) to clean
the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2 (UN22/23) and
Encoder Wheel.
4. Replace the Drum Unit (M).
Title
Drum Motor (M) rotation error
Description The Drum Motor (M) is not rotating at the specified
of detection speed, or it is stopped.
4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB.
7-10
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-0301
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2 signal error

B. Drum motor (C) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx)
of detection PCB (C) 1/2 signal error is detected.
B. The lock signal for the drum motor (C) (M25) cannot be
(shorting))
Drum unit failure
Measures A:
PCB (C) 1/2 (UN24/25). (Sensor side)
Detection PCB (C) 1/2 is properly installed.
(UN6).
PCB side: J1910
A-4. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2 to
clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/ and
Encoder Wheel.
A-5. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2.
B:
B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (C)
(shorting)))
detection PCB (C) (UN24/23) and the drum ITB
B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (C).
NOTE:
detection PCB.
7-11
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-0302
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1 signal error

B. Drum motor (C) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx)
of detection B. Lock signal of Drum motor (C) (M25) cannot be
detection
(shorting))
Drum unit failure
Measures A:
PCB (C) 1 (UN24).
Sensor side: J7312, J7313, J8021PCB side:J1904
A-2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1 to
clean.
A-3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1.
PCB (C) 1 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if its
disconnected.)
B:
B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (C)
(shorting)))
detection PCB (C) (UN24/23) and the drum ITB
B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (C).
NOTE:
detection PCB.
7-11
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-0303
-05
E012
-0304
-05
E012
-0305
-05
E012
-0306
-05
Items
Description
Title
Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 2 signal error
of detection
PCB (C) 2 (UN25).
2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 2 to
clean.
3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 2.
PCB (C) 2 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if its
disconnected.)
Title
Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) Encoder Wheel error
of detection (C) Encoder Wheel error is detected.
Measures 1. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2
to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2
(UN24/25) and Encoder Wheel.
3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2.
Title
Drum Motor (C) control error
Description Unstable rotation of the Drum Motor (C)
of detection
Measures 1. Check if the Drum Unit (C) is installed.
2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2
to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2
4. Replace the Drum Unit (C).
Title
Drum Motor (C) rotation error
Description The Drum Motor (C) is not rotating at the specified speed,
of detection or it is stopped.
7-12
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-0401
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 signal error

B. Drum motor (Bk) error (Prior to Controller Version
1x.xx)
of detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 signal error is detected.
B. The lock signal for the drum motor (Bk) (M19) cannot
be detected within a specified period.
(shorting))
Drum unit failure
Measures A:
PCB (Bk) 1/2 (UN18/19). (Sensor side)
Sensor side: J7310, J7311
Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 is properly installed.
(UN6).
PCB side: J1905
A-4. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2
to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2
and Encoder Wheel.
A-5. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2.
B:
B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (Bk)
(shorting)))
Motor side: J7306, PCB side: J1903
detection PCB (Bk) (UN18/19) and the drum ITB
B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (Bk).
B-4. Replace the drum cleaning unit and the drum unit.
(Drum drive may be overloaded due to peeling of
the blade, etc.)
NOTE:
detection PCB.
7-12
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-0402
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1 signal error

B. Drum motor (Bk) error (Prior to Controller Version
1x.xx)
of detection B. Lock signal of Drum motor (Bk) (M19) cannot be
detection
(shorting))
Drum unit failure
Measures A:
PCB (Bk) 1 (UN18).
Sensor side: J7310PCB side: J1905
A-2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1 to
clean.
A-3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1.
PCB (Bk) 1 (UN18) is faulty. (Replace the Harness if
its disconnected.)
B:
B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (Bk)
(shorting)))
detection PCB (Bk) (UN18/19) and the drum ITB
B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (Bk).
B-4. Replace the drum cleaning unit and the drum unit.
(Drum drive may be overloaded due to peeling of
the blade, etc.)
NOTE:
detection PCB.
7-13
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-0403
-05
E012
-0404
-05
E012
-0405
-05
E012
-0406
-05
Items
Description
Title
Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 2 signal error
of detection
PCB (Bk) 2 (UN19).
2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 2 to
clean.
4. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 2.
PCB (Bk) 2 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if its
disconnected.)
Title
Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) Encoder Wheel error
of detection (Bk) Encoder Wheel error is detected.
Measures 1. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) to clean
the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 (UN18/19)
and Encoder Wheel.
3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2.
Title
Drum Motor (Bk) control error
Description Unstable rotation of the Drum Motor (Bk)
of detection
Measures 1. Check if the Drum Unit (Bk) is installed.
2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) to clean
the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 (UN18/19)
and Encoder Wheel.
4. Replace the Drum Unit (Bk).
Title
Drum Motor (Bk) rotation error
Description The Drum Motor (Bk) is not rotating at the specified
of detection speed, or it is stopped.
7-13
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-0501
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17)

signal error
B. ITB drive motor error
Description A. This error occurs when the ITB Drive Roller Speed
of detection Detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17)signal error is detected.
B. The lock signal for the ITB drive motor (M3) cannot be
(shorting))
Drum (unit) Y/M/C/K not inserted
Peeling of the ITB cleaning blade
Encoder Y/M/C/K failure (This occurs in rare cases.)
7-14
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-0501
-05
Items
Measures
Description
A:
A-1. Check the connection of the ITB Drive Roller Speed
Detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17). (Sensor side)
A-2. Check that the Encoder Wheel of the ITB Drive
Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2 is properly installed.
A-3. Check the connection of the DC controller PCB.
PCB side: J1912
A-4. Manually turn the Rotor of the ITB Drive Motor
(M3) clockwise and check that the ITB Rotation
Sensor Encoder Wheel rotates. If the Encoder
Wheel does not rotate, replace the Drum Drive Unit.
A-5. Take out the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB
1/2 to clean the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection
PCB 1/2 and Encoder Wheel.
A-6. Replace the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB
1/2.
A-7. Replace the DC controller PCB.
B:
B-1. Check the connection between the ITB driver motor
(M3) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the
connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting)))
Motor side: J7518, J8011,J8050, PCB side: J1242
B-2. Check the connection of the ITB drive roller speed
detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17). (Connection of the
Motor side: J7318, J7319, J8047, J8050 PCB side:
J1242
B-3. Reinstall the 4 color drum units. (If the drum unit is
not installed properly, more load is applied to ITB
drive.)
overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) There
may be cause in each color.
B-5. Replace the DC controller PCB.
NOTE:
detection PCB.
7-14
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-0502
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1 signal error

B. ITB drive motor error
Description A. The signal is not detected for 80msec or more.
of detection B. Lock signal of ITB drive motor (M3) cannot be detected
for the specified period of time after first detection
(shorting))
Drum (unit) Y/M/C/K not inserted
Peeling of the ITB cleaning blade
Encoder Y/M/C/K failure (This occurs in rare cases.)
Measures A:
A-1. Check the connection of the ITB Drive Roller Speed
Detection PCB 1 (UN16).
A-2. Take out the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB
1 to clean.
A-3. Replace the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1.
A-4. Check if the Harness of the ITB Drive Roller Speed
Detection PCB 1 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if
its disconnected.)
A-5. Replace the DC controller PCB.
B:
B-1. Check the connection between the ITB driver motor
(M3) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the
Motor side: J7518, J8050 PCB side: J1242
B-2. Check the connection of the ITB drive roller speed
detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17). (Connection of the
Motor side: J7318, J7319, J8047, J8050 PCB side:
J1242
B-3. Reinstall the 4 color drum units. (If the drum unit is
not installed properly, more load is applied to ITB
drive.)
overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) There
may be cause in each color.
B-5. Replace the DC controller PCB.
NOTE:
detection PCB.
7-15
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-0503
-05
E012
-0504
-05
E012
-0505
-05
E012
-0506
-05
Items
Description
Title
ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 2 signal error
of detection
Measures 1. Check the connection of the ITB Drive Roller Speed
Detection PCB 2 (UN17).
Sensor side:J7319, J8047PCB side: J1242
2. Take out the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 2
to clean.
3. Replace the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 2.
4. Check if the Harness of the ITB Drive Roller Speed
Detection PCB 2 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if its
disconnected.)
5. Replace the DC controller PCB.
Title
ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB Encoder Wheel
error
of detection (Bk) Encoder Wheel error is detected.
Measures 1. Take out the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB to
clean the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2
3. Replace the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB
1/2.
Title
ITB Drive Motor control error
Description Unstable rotation of the ITB Drive Motor
of detection
Measures 1. Check if the ITB (Unit) is installed.
2. Take out the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB to
clean the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2
4. Replace the ITB Unit.
Title
ITB Drive Motor rotation error
Description ITB Drive Motor is not rotating at the specified speed, or
of detection it is stopped.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the ITB Drive Motor
and DC controller PCB.
Sensor side: J7518, J8047, J8050PCB side: J1912,
J8011
7-15
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E012
-2000
-05
E012
-3000
-05
E012
-3001
-05
E012
-3002
-05
Items
Description
Title
Rotation error of Drum Motor (Y/M/C/Bk) (M21/23/25/19)

and ITB Drive Motor
Description Simultaneous rotation error in all Motors
of detection
Measures 1. Check the connection of the Drum ITB Driver PCB.
PCB side: J1902 to J1904
2. Check the connection of the Relay PCB.
PCB side: J1805
3. Check the Interlock Switch.
4. Check if the Harness of the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6)
is faulty.
Title
Error in Drum Speed Detection PCB (UN18 to 25) of all
colors
Description This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection
of detection PCB (UN18 to 25) error is detected for all colors
simultaneously.
Measures 1. Check the connection of the Drum ITB Driver PCB.
PCB side: J1902, J1904, J1905
2. Check if the Harness of the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6)
is faulty.
Title
Control error of Drum Motor (Y/M/C/Bk) (M21/23/25/19)
Description This error occurs when the Drum Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
of detection (M21/23/25/19) control error is detected for all colors
simultaneously.
Measures 1. Check the Process Unit (to see if the Connector is
physically removed).
2. Check the Drum Unit (to see if the Connector is
physically removed).
Title
Rotation error of Drum Motor (Y/M/C/Bk) (M21/23/25/19)
Description All of the Drum Motors (Y/M/C/Bk) (M21/23/25/19) are
of detection not rotating at the specified speed, or they are stopped.
Measures Check the connector of the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
PCB side: J1902 to J1904
7-16
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E013
-0001
-05
E013
-0003
-05
Items
Description
Title
Waste toner feed screw lock detection error
Description When the waste toner pipe screw lock SW (SW10)
of detection detected the lock status for 500 msec (100 msec x 5
times) consecutively
Measures Pull out the Waste Toner Container. If it is full of toner,
go to Step 1, 2, and 5.
If the Waste Toner Container is not full of toner, go to
Step 1, 2, and 4.
If the Waste Toner Container is not full and the Waste
Toner Pipe is not clogged with toner, go to Step 3 and 4.
1. Remove the toner in the Waste Toner Pipe.
2. Replace the Waste Toner Full Sensor and the Waste
Toner Container.
3. Replace the Waste Toner Screw Lock Detection Switch
(SW10).
4. Replace the Waste Toner Drive Unit.
5. Reduce the value of timing setting for waste toner full
alert display (COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> WT-FL-LM)
by 1.
Title
Waste toner full sensor error
Description Output of the waste toner full sensor cannot be detected.
of detection
Measures Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power
Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart
and check the power output before the machine detects
the error to determine whether the cause of the error is
power supply.
If there is no power output, power supply is the cause. If
there is power output, factor other than power supply can
be the cause of the error.
1. Check the connection between the Waste Toner
Full Sensor (TS9) and thePickup feed drive PCB.
(shorting)), Wire caught by parts)
Sensor side: J8981, PCB side: J898, J1470
2. Check the connection of the 24 V Power Supply
connector.
3. Replace the Waste Toner Full Sensor.
4. Replace the 24 V Power Supply.
7-16
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E014
-0001
E014
E015
Items
Description
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
-0002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
-0001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Fixing motor error (At start-up)

Locking was not released within 3 seconds after the fixing
motor was turned on.
Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 38 V Power
power supply.
If there is no power output, power supply is the cause.
If there is power output, factor other than power supply
can be the cause of the error.
1. Check the fixing unit drive gear -> replace the gear
2. Replace the fixing motor (M48)
3. Replace the pckup feed drive PCB.
4. Check the connection of the 38 V Power Supply
connector.
5. Replace the 38 V Power Supply.
Fixing motor error (At regular rotation)
Locking was released for 1 second consecutively after
the fixing motor (M48) was locked.
1. Check the fixing unit drive gear -> replace the gear
2. Replace the fixing motor (M48)
3. Replace the pickup feed drive PCB.
Decurler incoming amount control error 1
Change of the decurler HP sensor 1 (PS88) cannot be
detected even when a specified period of time elapsed
after driving of the decurler incoming amount adjustment
motor 1 (M50) started.
1. Failure of the decurler HP sensor 1 (PS88)
2. Failure of the decurler incoming amount adjustment
motor 1 (M50)
3. Failure of the buffer driver PCB (UN150)
Decurler incoming amount control error 2
Change of the decurler HP sensor 2 (PS89) cannot be
detected even when a specified period of time elapsed
after driving of the decurler incoming amount adjustment
motor 2 (M53) started.
1. Failure of the decurler HP sensor 2 (PS89)
2. Failure of the decurler incoming amount adjustment
motor 2 (M53)
3. Failure of the buffer driver PCB (UN150)
Measures
E015
-0002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
7-17
T-7-4
7-17
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
E020
Detailed Occurance
E code
code
area
E020
E020
-0080
-0081
-05
-05
Items
Description
Title
ITB base light intensity upper limit error
Description When executing ITB base correction, the average value
of detection of P wave light intensity detected/calculated is more than
900.
Measures When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS>
P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of
P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is
applied to the patch sensor.
This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value
of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small
(2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking
occurred.
1. Clean the patch sensor (PS21).
2. Check the connection between the patch sensor and
the Drum ITB driver PCB(UN6). (Connector, Shorting)
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907
3. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter.
4. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB.
If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt
is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB
cleaning blade at the same time.
5. Replace the patch sensor unit.
Title
ITB base light intensity lower limit error
Description When executing ITB base correction, the average value
of detection of P wave light intensity detected/calculated is less than
300.
occurred.
the Drum ITB driver PCB. (UN6. (Connector, Shorting)
7-18
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0082
-05
E020
-0120
-05
Items
Description
Title
Patch sensor light intensity correction error
Description When executing correction of patch sensor light intensity,
of detection the P wave output is not more than 500 and less than
900.
occurred.
the Drum ITB driver PCB. (Connector, Shorting)
Initial installation toner density sensor (Y) output lower
Title
limit error
Description When executing the developing assembly initial
of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL>
INISET-Y), the output level does not reach 128 even
when control voltage of the toner density sensor reached
255 or more.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density
sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector,
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
2. Check whether the toner density sensor is not
disconnected or Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) occurs.
3. Replace the developing assembly.
7-18
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0124
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation patch (Y) density lower limit error
INISET-Y), the ATR patch detection value (SigD) is less
than 79.
occurred.
1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum
unit are properly installed.
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Breaking
(shorting))
5. Clean or replace the ITB.
Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it
is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode
(COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLTCLN).
If it is assumed that this error occurred due to
scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB.
7-19
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0130
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation toner density sensor (Y) output upper

limit error
Description When executing developing assembly initial installation
of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y),
the output level does not reach 128 even when control
voltage of the toner density sensor became less than 55.
Shorting)
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner
density sensor occurs or not.
7-19
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0134
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation patch (Y) density upper limit error
of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y), the
ATR patch output (SigD) is more than 970.
occurred.
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting)
7-20
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0136
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation patch (Y) sampling error
of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y), the
variation before average patch P wave light intensity is
more than 100.
occurred.
7-20
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0190
-05
Items
Description
Title
Patch (Y) density lower limit error
Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is less than 79.
of detection
occurred.
NOTE:
This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in
the developing assembly. In this case, check the supplyrelated parts in the developing assembly.
7-21
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0191
-05
E020
-01A0
-05
Items
Description
Title
Patch (Y) density upper limit error
Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is more than 970.
of detection
COPIER> DISPLAY > DENS >P-SENS-P is small,
there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the
patch sensor.
occurred.
NOTE:
Title
Toner density sensor (Y) output lower limit error
Description The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than
of detection 43.
Breaking (shorting))
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
7-21
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-01A2
-05
E020
-01C2
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Toner density sensor (Y) output upper limit error

The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than
247.
1. Check the connection between the toner density
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
Title
Patch (Y) sampling error
Description The variation before average patch P wave light intensity
of detection is more than 100.
Measures 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum
(shorting))
Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty,
perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER>
FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT-CLN).
6. Replace the developing assembly. (Check whether
there is not uneven coating on the developing sleeve.)
7-22
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0220
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation toner density sensor (M) output lower

limit error
INISET-M), the output level does not reach 128 even
255 or more.
Breaking (Breaking (shorting))
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
7-22
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0224
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation patch (M) density lower limit error
INISET-M), the ATR patch detection value (SigD) is less
than 79.
occurred.
(shorting))
7-23
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0230
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation toner density sensor (M) output upper

limit error
of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M),
Shorting)
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
7-23
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0234
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation patch (M) density upper limit error
of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M), the
Measures When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS>PLED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of
occurred.
7-24
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0236
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation patch (M) sampling error
of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M), the
more than 100.
occurred.
7-24
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0290
-05
Items
Description
Title
Patch (M) density lower limit error
of detection
occurred.
NOTE:
7-25
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0291
-05
E020
-02A0
-05
Items
Description
Title
Patch (M) density upper limit error
of detection
occurred.
NOTE:
Title
Toner density sensor (M) output lower limit error
of detection 43.
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
7-25
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-02A2
-05
E020
-02C2
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Toner density sensor (M) output upper limit error

247.
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
Title
Patch (M) sampling error
(shorting))
7-26
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0320
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation toner density sensor (C) output lower

limit error
INISET-C), the output level does not reach 128 even
255 or more.
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
7-26
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0324
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation patch (C) density lower limit error
INISET-C), the ATR patch detection value (SigD) is less
than 79.
occurred.
7-27
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0330
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation toner density sensor (C) output upper

limit error
of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C),
Shorting)
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
7-27
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0334
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation patch (C) density upper limit error
of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C), the
occurred.
7-28
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0336
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation patch (C) sampling error
of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C), the
more than 100.
Measures When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS>PLED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of
occurred.
7-28
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0390
-05
Items
Description
Title
Patch (C) density lower limit error
of detection
occurred.
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21) .
NOTE:
7-29
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0391
-05
E020
-03A0
-05
Items
Description
Title
Patch (C) density upper limit error
of detection
occurred.
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21) .
NOTE:
Title
Toner density sensor (C) output lower limit error
of detection 43.
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
7-29
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-03A2
-05
E020
-03C2
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Toner density sensor (C) output upper limit error

247.
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
Title
Patch (C) sampling error
(shorting))
7-30
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0420
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation toner density sensor (Bk) output lower

limit error
INISET-K), the output level does not reach 128 even
255 or more.
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
2. Check whether disconnection or Breaking (Breaking
(shorting)) of the toner density sensor occurs or not.
7-30
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0424
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation patch (Bk) density lower limit error
INISET-K), the ATR patch detection value (SigD) is less
than 79.
occurred.
7-31
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0430
-05
Items
Description
Title
Upper limit error for output of Toner Density Sensor (Bk)

at initial installation
Description When executing the initial installation mode of the
of detection Developing Assembly (COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
> INISET-K), output failed to reach 128 although the
control voltage value of the Toner Density Sensor
reached 55 or smaller.
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
2. Check whether disconnection or Breaking (Breaking
(shorting)) of the toner density sensor occurs or not.
7-31
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0434
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation patch (Bk) density upper limit error
of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K), the
occurred.
7-32
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0436
-05
Items
Description
Title
Initial installation patch (K) sampling error
of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K), the
more than 100.
occurred.
7-32
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0490
-05
Items
Description
Title
Patch (Bk) density lower limit error
of detection
occurred.
NOTE:
7-33
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-0491
-05
E020
-04A0
-05
Items
Description
Title
Patch (Bk) density upper limit error
of detection
occurred.
NOTE:
Title
Toner density sensor (Bk) output lower limit error
of detection 43.
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
7-33
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E020
-04A2
E020
-04C2
-05
-05
Items
7-34
E021 to E077
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Toner density sensor (Bk) output upper limit error

247.
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
Title
Patch (Bk) sampling error
(shorting))
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E021
-0101
-05
E021
-0102
-05
Items
Description
Title
Developing sleeve drive motor (Y) error
Description The lock signal of the developing sleeve drive motor (Y)
of detection (M20) cannot be detected within a specified period.
Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting)
Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve
overloaded)
Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6)
Failure of the developing sleeve motor
Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve
drive motor (Y) (UN20) and the Drum ITB driver
PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking
(shorting))
2. Replace the developing assembly (Y).
3. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6).
4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (Y).
Title
Developing sleeve drive motor (Y) error
Description Lock signal of Developing sleeve drive motor (Y) (M20)
of detection cannot be detected for the specified period of time after
first detection
overloaded)
drive motor (Y) (M20) and the Drum ITB driver PCB
(UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking
(shorting))
4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (Y).
T-7-5
7-34
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E021
-0201
-05
E021
-0202
-05
Items
Description
Title
Developing sleeve drive motor (M) error
Description The lock signal of the developing sleeve drive motor (M)
overloaded)
drive motor (M) (M22) and the Drum ITB driver
(shorting))
2. Replace the developing assembly (M).
4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (M).
Title
Developing sleeve drive motor (M) error
Description Lock signal of Developing sleeve drive motor (M) (M22)
first detection
overloaded)
drive motor (M) (M22) and the Drum ITB driver
(shorting))
2. Replace the developing assembly (M).
4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (M).
7-35
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E021
-0301
-05
E021
-0302
-05
Items
Description
Title
Developing sleeve drive motor (C) error
Description The lock signal of the developing sleeve drive motor (C)
overloaded)
drive motor (C) (M24) and the Drum ITB driver PCB
(shorting))
2. Replace the developing assembly (C).
3. Replace the DC controller interface PCB.
4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (C).
Title
Developing sleeve drive motor (C) error
Description Lock signal of Developing sleeve drive motor (C) (M24)
first detection
overloaded)
drive motor (C) (M24) and the Drum ITB driver PCB
(shorting))
4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (C).
7-35
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E021
-0401
-05
E021
-0402
-05
Items
Description
Title
Developing sleeve drive motor (Bk) error
Description The lock signal of the developing sleeve drive motor (Bk)
overloaded)
drive motor (Bk) (M18) and the Drum ITB driver
(shorting))
2. Replace the developing assembly (Bk).
4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (Bk).
Title
Developing sleeve drive motor (Bk) error
Description Lock signal of Developing sleeve drive motor (Bk) (M18)
first detection
overloaded)
Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6).
drive motor (Bk) (M18) and the Drum ITB driver
(shorting))
4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (Bk).
7-36
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E022
-0001
-05
Items
Description
Title
Drum cleaning / waste toner feed drive motor error
Description The lock signal of the drum cleaning/waste toner feed
of detection drive motor (M30) cannot be detected within a specified
period.
Failure of the drum cleaning unit (Overload)
Failure of the waste toner feed screw (Overload)
Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6).
Failure of the drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive
motor
Measures 1. Check the connection between the drum cleaning/
waste toner feed drive motor and the Drum ITB driver
(shorting))
2. Clean the screw in the drum cleaning unit (Bk), or
replace the unit.
Remove toner clog with the feed screw.
3. Clean the waste toner feed pipe unit, or replace the
unit.
5. Replace the drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive
motor.
7-36
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E022
-0002
E023
-0101
-05
-05
Items
Description
Title
Drum cleaning / waste toner feed drive motor error
Description Lock signal of Drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive
of detection motor (M30) cannot be detected for the specified period
of time after first detection
Failure of the drum cleaning unit (Overload)
Failure of the waste toner feed screw (Overload)
Failure of the drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive
motor
Measures 1. Check the connection between the drum cleaning/
waste toner feed drive motor and the Drum ITB driver
(shorting))
2. Clean the screw in the drum cleaning unit (Bk), or
replace the unit.
3. Clean the waste toner feed pipe unit, or replace the
unit.
5. Replace the drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive
motor.
Title
Developing stirring motor (Y) error
Description The lock signal of the developing stirring motor (Y) (M26)
of detection cannot be detected within a specified period.
overloaded)
Failure of the DC controller PCB
Contact failure of the drawer connector
Failure of the developing stirring motor
Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring
motor (Y) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of
the connector, Breaking (shorting))
4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031).
5. Replace the developing stirring motor (Y).
7-37
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E023
-0102
-05
E023
-0201
-05
Items
Description
Title
Developing stirring motor (Y) error
Description Lock signal of Developing stirring motor (Y) (M26)cannot
of detection be detected for the specified period of time after first
detection
overloaded)
motor (Y) and the DC controller interface PCB (UN2).
(Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting))
5. Replace the developing stirring motor (Y).
Title
Developing stirring motor (M) error
Description The lock signal of the developing stirring motor (M) (M28)
overloaded)
motor (M) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of
Motor side: J8031 PCB side: J1243
5. Replace the developing stirring motor (M).
7-37
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E023
-0202
-05
E023
-0301
-05
Items
Description
Title
Developing stirring motor (M) error
Description Lock signal of Developing stirring motor (M) (M28) cannot
detection
overloaded)
motor (M) and the DC controller interface PCB (UN2).
(Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting))
5. Replace the developing stirring motor (M).
Title
Developing stirring motor (C) error
Description The lock signal of the developing stirring motor (C) (M27)
overloaded)
motor (C) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of
5. Replace the developing stirring motor (C).
7-38
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E023
-0302
-05
E023
-0401
-05
Items
Description
Title
Developing stirring motor (C) error
Description Lock signal of Developing stirring motor (C) (M27) cannot
detection
overloaded)
motor (C) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of
5. Replace the developing stirring motor (C).
Title
Developing stirring motor (Bk) error
Description The lock signal of the developing stirring motor (Bk) (M29)
overloaded)
motor (Bk) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of
5. Replace the developing stirring motor (Bk).
7-38
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E023
-0402
E025
-0102
-05
-05
Items
Description
Title
Developing stirring motor (Bk) error
Description Lock signal of Developing stirring motor (Bk) (M29)
first detection
overloaded)
motor (Bk) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of
3. Replace the DC controller interface PCB.
5. Replace the developing stirring motor (Bk).
Title
Block supply timeout (Y) error
Description The toner supply screw rotation sensor cannot detect
of detection rotation of the screw.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the hopper/stirring
supply motor (M9) and the DC controller PCB.
2. Check the connection between the toner feed screw
rotation sensor (PS12) and the DC controller PCB.
3. Replace the hopper/stirring supply motor.
4. Clean and replace the toner feed screw rotation
sensor.
5. Replace the toner supply pipe unit.
6. Replace the hopper unit.
CAUTION:
Remedies 5 and 6 are taken when the motor is
overloaded due to toner adhesion in the unit or gear
interlocking failure, etc. Since it is difficult to identify the
cause, it is recommended to replace the unit.
7-39
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-0110
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E025
-0120
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
Toner container sealing/release holder shift cam HP
sensor timeout (Y) error
HP sensor of release holder shift cam cannot detect
within specified period of time.
1. Check the connection of the toner container drive
motor (M10) harness. (Check whether the wire is not
caught by parts.) Check the connection with the DC
controller PCB.
Motor side: J7100 PCB side: J1247
2. Check the connection between the release holder shift
cam HP sensor (PS8) and the DC controller PCB.
3. Replace the toner container drive motor.
4. Clean and replace the release holder shift cam HP
sensor.
CAUTION:
As for Remedy 5, since it is difficult to identify the cause,
it is recommended to replace the unit.
NOTE:
CLEAR> ERR
Toner container/toner container inserting inlet phase (Y)
error
When the power was turned on, it was detected that the
toner container cap was opened (the release holder shift
cam phase sensor was protected against light) AND the
toner container inserting inlet cover was opened (the
toner container inserting inlet cover open/close sensor
was transmissive).
1. Close the toner container inserting inlet cover and turn
OFF/ON the power.
2. Check the connection between the toner container
inserting inlet cover open/close sensor (PS10) and
the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector,
Breaking, Wire caught by parts)
Sensor side: J7122, PCB side: J2146
cam phase sensor (PS81) and the DC controller PCB.
(Connection of the connector, Breaking, Wire caught
by parts)
Sensor side: J7123,J8106, PCB side: J1247
4. Replace the toner container inserting inlet cover open/
close sensor.
7-39
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-01A0
-05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Y Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor

(PS11)
Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift
of detection Cam HP Sensor status (ON -> OFF) when opening the
cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be
judged.
Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to
mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at
the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side.
1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is
soiled and the installation of the sensor.
2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container
Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER>
I/O> DC-CON> P036 bit12) to see that the output
value of the sensor is changed.
Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it,
repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the
screen until the value is changed.
If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed
when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be
sure to perform step 4 and later steps.
2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit,
check the drive system such as gears.
If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit
and then perform step 4 and later steps.
2-2. When the output value of the sensor is not
changed although the Hopper Unit is driven,
check the Sensor Harness (to see if the
harness is caught, disconnected or physically
removed).
If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After
checking the output value in step 2, perform
step 4 and later steps.
3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing
parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform
4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER>
FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and
then ON the main power.
5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner
Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/
Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check
that toner replacement can be performed normally.
7-40
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-01B0
-05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Y Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor

(PS11)
of detection Cam HP Sensor status (OFF -> ON) when closing the
judged.
removed).
7-40
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-01C0
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Error in Y Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (PS10)

Unable to detect opening of the Toner Insertion Inlet
Cover when removing the Toner Container.
Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to link
mechanism to open the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover or
problem at the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor side.
1. Perform the user mode (Adjustment/Maintenance>
Replace Specified Toner) to check if the Toner Insertion
Inlet Cover opens normally (damage, slide of shaft
area, etc.).
2. Check if the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is
3. Check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON>
P035 bit7) to see that the output value of the Toner
Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is changed normally when
opening/closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover.
If it is normal, the value becomes 0 by driving the
Hopper Unit with the Toner Container Removing Tool
and opening the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover. When
closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover by hand, it
becomes 1.
3-1. When the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover is not opened
although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the drive
system from upstream (Hopper Unit -> link mechanism
of Hopper Tray -> Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Unit).
If it is damaged, replace the damaged part and then
perform step 5 and later steps.
3-2. When the output value is not changed normally
although the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover can be
opened/closed, check the Sensor Harness (to see
if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically
removed, *including the Relay Connector).
checking the output value in step 3, perform step 5 and
later steps.
7-41
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-0202
-05
E025
-0210
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Block supply timeout (M) error

The toner supply screw rotation sensor cannot detect
rotation of the screw.
1. Check the connection between the hopper/stirring
rotation sensor (PS15) and the hopper driver PCB.
sensor.
CAUTION:
Title
sensor timeout (M) error
Description HP sensor of release holder shift cam cannot detect
of detection within specified period of time.
Measures 1. Check the connection of the toner container drive
controller PCB.
Motor side: J7101,J8107, PCB side: J1247
Sensor side: J7198 PCB side: J1249
sensor.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
CLEAR> ERR
7-41
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-0220
-05
Items
Description
Title
Toner container/toner container inserting inlet phase (M)

error
Description When the power was turned on, it was detected that the
of detection toner container cap was opened (the release holder shift
was transmissive).
Measures 1. Close the toner container inserting inlet cover and turn
OFF/ON the power.
Breaking, Wire caught by parts)
cam phase sensor (PS82) and the hopper driver PCB.
(Connection of the connector, Breaking, Wire caught
by parts)
close sensor.
7-42
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-02A0
-05
Items
Description
Title
Error in M Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor

(PS14)
judged.
I/O> DC-CON> P036 bit11) to see that the output value
of the sensor is changed.
2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit, check
the drive system such as gears.
If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit and then
2-2 When the output value of the sensor is not changed
although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the Sensor
Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected
or physically removed).
later steps.
7-42
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-02B0
-05
Items
Description
Title
Error in M Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor

(PS14)
judged.
2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit, check
the drive system such as gears.
If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit and then
2-2. When the output value of the sensor is not changed
although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the Sensor
Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected
or physically removed).
later steps.
7-43
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-02C0
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Error in M Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (PS13)

area, etc.).
becomes 1.
3-1. When the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover is not
opened although the Hopper Unit is driven,
check the drive system from upstream (Hopper
Unit -> link mechanism of Hopper Tray -> Toner
Insertion Inlet Cover Unit).
If it is damaged, replace the damaged part and
then perform step 5 and later steps.
although the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover can
be opened/closed, check the Sensor Harness
(to see if the harness is caught, disconnected
or physically removed, *including the Relay
Connector).
7-43
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-0302
-05
E025
-0310
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Block supply timeout (C) error

sensor.
CAUTION:
Title
sensor timeout (C) error
controller PCB.
SinceMotor side: J7102,J8108 PCB side: J1248
SinceSensor side: J7197, PCB side: J1249
sensor.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
CLEAR> ERR
7-44
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-0320
-05
Items
Description
Title
Toner container/toner container inserting inlet phase (C)

error
was transmissive).
OFF/ON the power.
Shorting, Wire caught by parts)
(Connection of the connector, Shorting, Wire caught by
parts)
close sensor.
7-44
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-03A0
-05
Items
Description
Title
Error in C Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor

(PS17)
judged.
removed).
7-45
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-03B0
-05
Items
Description
Title
Error in C Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor

(PS17)
judged.
removed).
7-45
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-03C0
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Error in C Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (PS16)

area, etc.).
becomes 1.
Connector).
7-46
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-0402
-05
E025
-0410
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Block supply timeout (Bk) error

sensor.
CAUTION:
Title
sensor timeout (Bk) error
controller PCB.
sensor.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
CLEAR> ERR
7-46
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-0420
-05
Items
Description
Title
Toner container/toner container inserting inlet phase (Bk)

error
was transmissive).
OFF/ON the power.
parts)
close sensor.
7-47
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-04A0
-05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Bk Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor

(PS8)
judged.
removed).
7-47
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-04B0
-05
Items
Description
Title
Error in Bk Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor

(PS8)
judged.
check the Sensor
Harness (to see if the harness is caught,
disconnected or physically removed).
7-48
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E025
-04C0
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Error in Bk Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (PS7)

area, etc.).
becomes 1.
Connector).
7-48
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E056
-0001
-05
E056
-0002
-05
E060
-0001
-05
Items
Description
Title
Reverse Roller disengagement home position error
Description At initial operation, the Reverse Roller Disengagement
of detection HP Sensor (PS101) failed to detect home position despite
an operation of the Reverse Disengagement Motor (M54).
Remedy
1. Replace the Reverse Disengagement Motor.
2. Check the mechanism to detect home position for
disengagement of the Reverse Roller.
3. Replace the Reverse Roller Disengagement HP
Sensor.
Title
Reverse Roller operation error
Description During printing, the Reverse Roller Disengagement HP
of detection Sensor (PS101) failed to detect change in the detection
flag despite an operation of the Reverse Disengagement
Motor (M54).
Remedy
1. Replace the Reverse Disengagement Motor.
2. Check the mechanism to detect home position for
disengagement of the Reverse Roller.
3. Replace the Reverse Roller Disengagement HP
Sensor.
Title
Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP open error
Description The Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92)
of detection detected that the shutter was open although it was moved
to the close position.
Remedy
1. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire
Cleaning Motor (M1).
2. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
(M1).
Shutter HP Sensor (PS92).
4. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor
(PS92).
5. Check shutter mechanism of the Primary Charging
Assembly.
6. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly.
7-49
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E060
-0002
-05
E060
-0011
-05
E060
-0012
-05
Items
Description
Title
Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP close error
of detection detected that the shutter was closed although it was
moved to the open position.
Remedy
(M1).
(PS92).
Assembly.
Title
Primary Charging Wire Shutter error 1 when cleaning the
of detection failed to be detected although 10 seconds have passed
since the Primary Charging Wire Shutter started its
operation.
Remedy
(PS92).
Assembly.
Title
of detection remained to be detected although 10 seconds have
passed since the Primary Charging Wire Shutter started
its operation.
Remedy
(PS92).
Assembly.
7-49
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E060
-0023
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
E061
-0001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E061
-0002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
Error in the Primary Charging Wire Shutter position
during rotation of the Bk Drum
Faulty position of the Primary Charging Wire Shutter was
detected while the Bk Drum was rotating.
(M1).
(PS92).
Assembly.
Primary charging bias (Bk) lower limit error
At initial rotation, the drum surface potential Vd at
potential control is less than 30 V.
Primary charging bias (Bk) is not properly applied.
The drum does not rotate correctly.
1. Check whether the primary charging assembly is
properly installed or connected. (Connection of the
connector, Shorting, Wire caught by parts)
2. Check whether the primary charging high-voltage PCB
(Bk) is properly installed or connected. (Connection of
the connector, Shorting, Wire caught by parts)
3. Check whether the drum motor (Bk) is properly
installed or connected. (Connection of the connector,
4. Replace the parts.
Primary charging assembly
Primary charging high-voltage PCB (Bk)
Drum/ITB drive motor
DC controller interface PCB
DC controller PCB
Potential sensor offset adjustment error
When the result of potential sensor offset adjustment is
more than +/-30 V.
1. Check whether the potential sensor offset adjustment
tool is properly installed.
2. Replace the potential sensor.
7-50
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E061
-0003
-05
E061
-0004
-05
E064
-1101
-05
E064
-1103
-05
Items
Description
Title
Potential control Vd failure
Description At the time of measurement of Vd at potential control,
of detection the value is more than +50 V or less than -200 V against
Vgrid.
Drum cleaning pre-exposure is not performed correctly.
Primary charging is not performed correctly.
The drum is reaching the end of life.
Measures 1. Check the connection of the drum cleaning preexposure LED.
2. Check the connection of the primary charging
assembly.
Check whether the grid plate is properly installed.
Check whether the shield plate is not soiled by toner.
-> Clean the shield plate.
Check whether disconnection of the connector or
shorting does not occur or the wire is not caught by
parts.
Drum cleaning pre-exposure LED
Primary charging assembly
Drum (Checking can be performed by COPIER>
DISPLAY>DPOT>D-CONT-K. Estimated life is 150,000
or less.)
Title
Laser power shortage error
Description At the time of measurement of 8 bright section potential
of detection VI at potential control, the grid bias Vgrid is more than
100 V at least at one point.
Dirt is applied to the dust prevention glass.
Laser is not applied correctly.
Measures 1. Clean the dust prevention glass.
2. Check the connection of the laser scanner unit.
parts)
Laser scanner unit (Bk)
Laser interface PCB
Title
Primary charging DC bias (Y) output error
Description The primary charging DC bias (Y) output showed an
of detection abnormal value.
Remedy
Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C).
Title
Developing DC bias (Y) output error
Description The developing DC bias (Y) output showed an abnormal
of detection value.
Remedy
Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C).
7-50
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E064
-2201
-05
E064
-2203
-05
E064
-3301
-05
E064
-3303
-05
E064
-4403
-05
E064
-1000
E064
E066
-1001
-0001
Items
Description
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
Title
-05
Description
of detection
Remedy
Title
Primary charging DC bias (M) output error

The primary charging DC bias (M) output showed an
abnormal value.
Developing DC bias (M) output error
The developing DC bias (M) output showed an abnormal
value.
Primary charging DC bias (C) output error
The primary charging DC bias (C) output showed an
abnormal value.
Developing DC bias (C) output error
The developing DC bias (C) output showed an abnormal
value.
Developing DC bias (Bk) output error
The developing DC bias (Bk) output showed an abnormal
value.
Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk).
No output of reference signal for primary charging DC
bias (Y/M/C)
No output of reference signal for primary charging DC
bias (Y/M/C).
No output of reference signal for developing DC bias (Y/
M/C/Bk)
No output of reference signal for developing DC bias (Y/
M/C/Bk).
Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C, Bk).
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP open error
The Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor
(PS93) detected that the shutter was open although it
was moved to the close position.
1. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
2. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning
Motor (M2).
4. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP
Sensor (PS93).
5. Check shutter mechanism of the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly.
6. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
-05
Description
of detection
Remedy
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
7-51
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E066
-0002
-05
E066
-0011
-05
E066
-0012
-05
Items
Description
Title
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP close error
Description The Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor
of detection (PS93) detected that the shutter was closed although it
was moved to the open position.
Remedy
Motor (M2).
Sensor (PS93).
Assembly.
Title
of detection (PS93) failed to be detected although 10 seconds have
passed since the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter
started its operation.
Remedy
Sensor (PS93).
Assembly.
Title
of detection (PS93) remained to be detected although 10 seconds
have passed since the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
Shutter started its operation.
Remedy
Sensor (PS93).
Assembly.
7-51
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E066
-0023
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
E073
-0001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
Error in the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter position
during rotation of the Bk Drum
Faulty position of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter
was detected while the Bk Drum was rotating.
Motor (M2).
Sensor (PS93).
Assembly.
Host machine interlock failure
Interlock at 24 V cannot be detected in the condition
where all of the front cover, left lower cover, and manual
feed cover are closed.
1. Check whether shorting does not occur to the harness
of the interlock group. If it occurs, replace the harness.
2. Replace the relay board. (Blowout at the relay PCB
(UN7))
3. Replace the interlock switch.
Front door open/close switch 1 (SW1)
Front door open/close switch 2 (SW2)
Manual feeding unit open/close switch (SW3)
Paper delivery door open/close switch (SW4)
7-52
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E074
-0001
-05
E075
-0000
-05
E075
-0001
-05
Items
Description
Title
Primary transfer roller detachment/attachment error
Description The primary transfer roller attachment/detachment HP
of detection sensor (PS4) cannot detect the home position within a
specified period.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the primary transfer
roller detachment HP sensor (PS4) and the ITB relay
PCB (UN28). (Connector, Breaking (shorting))
2. Check the connection between the ITB relay PCB and
the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (shorting))
ITB relay PCB: J2700, J8050 DC controller PCB:
J1241, J8010
3. Replace the primary transfer roller detachment HP
sensor.
4. Check the link parts of the primary transfer roller
(pressure release lever, link, cam).
If foreign matters are found, remove them. If they are
soiled with toner, etc., perform cleaning (when the
parts do not move smoothly due to dirt).
5. Check whether the gear is not damaged.
If it is damaged, replace the attachment/detachment
drive unit (FM3-4905).
Title
Steering HP error
Description The home position of the steering roller cannot be
of detection detected. It cannot move from the home position.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the steering drive
HP sensor (PS3) and the ITB relay PCB (UN28).
(Connector, Breaking (shorting))
2. Check the connection between the steering drive motor
(M4) and the ITB relay PCB. (Connector, Breaking
(shorting))
Steering drive HP sensor
Steering drive motor
Title
ITB displacement sensor lower limit error
Description The output value of the ITB displacement sensor (PS2)
of detection continues to be the lower limit value.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the ITB displacement
sensor (PS2) and the ITB relay PCB (UN28).
(Connector, Breaking (shorting))
2. Clean the ITB displacement sensor.
7-52
7
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E075
-0002
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
ITB displacement sensor upper limit error

The output value of the ITB displacement sensor (PS2)
continues to be the upper limit value.
1. Check whether the ITB displacement sensor (PS2) and
the ITB displacement sensor flag are installed properly.
Isnt the ITB displacement sensor flag inserted under
the ITB?
Is the ITB displacement sensor installed correctly?
Replace the ITB displacement sensor flag (if the flag is
damaged).
Replace the ITB displacement sensor.
Replace the ITB. (Replace the ITB of which edge is
damaged.)
Replace the steering control mechanism parts.
(Pressure spring removed from the steering arm, etc.)
7-53
E code
Detailed Occurance
code
area
E077
-0001
-05
Items
Description
Title
Secondary transfer external roller detachment/attachment

error
Description The secondary transfer roller attachment/detachment HP
of detection sensor (PS22) cannot detect the home position within a
specified period.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the secondary transfer
roller attachment/detachment HP sensor (PS22) and
the fixing feed driver (UN5). (Connector, Breaking
(shorting))
Sensor side: J7214, J8102 PCB side: 1509
2. Check the connection between the fixing feed driver
and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Shorting)
Fixing feed driver: J1510 DC controller PCB: J1215
3. Check the connection between the secondary transfer
roller detachment motor (M31) and the pickup feed
driver PCB (UN4). (Connector, Breaking (shorting))
Motor side: J7003 DC controller interface side: 1409
4. Check the connection between the pickup feed driver
PCB and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking
(shorting))
Pickup feed driver PCB: J1401 DC controller PCB:
J1215
5. Check the installation condition of the detachment
mechanism assemblies (cam, arm, secondary transfer
external roller holder).
Check the condition of the attachment/detachment cam
mechanism assembly.
6. Replace the secondary transfer roller attachment/
detachment HP sensor.
7. Check the drive gear. -> Replace the gear.
8. Replace the secondary transfer roller detachment
motor.
9. Replace the drive unit.
T-7-6
7-53
E100 to E197
E Detailed Occurance
code code
area
E100 -0101
E100 -0201
-05
-05
Items
Description
Laser scanner motor BD (Y) error

The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal
and PLOCK signal during BD rotation.
1. Check that the cover is closed.
2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB,
DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB
(UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector
connection, open circuit, the caught cable).
Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201,
Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser
Interface PCB: J5500
3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit
and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open
circuit/the caught cable).
Laser Scanner Unit: J8070, J5509, Laser Interface
PCB: J5101Y
4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB.
6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB.
Title
Laser scanner motor BD (M) error
Description The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal
of detection and PLOCK signal during BD rotation.
Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed.
PCB: J5101M
7-54
code code
area
E100 -0301
-05
E100 -0401
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Laser scanner motor BD (C) error

and PLOCK signal during BD rotation.
PCB: J5101C
Laser scanner motor BD (Bk) error
Title
of detection and PLOCK signal during BD rotation.
PCB: J5101K
7-54
7
code code
area
E102 -0101
-05
E102 -0201
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Laser scanner unit (Y) EEPROM error

Laser scanner unit EEPROM failure / Failure of the data
written in the laser scanner unit EEPROM was detected.
PCB: J5101Y
Laser scanner unit (M) EEPROM error
Title
Description Laser scanner unit EEPROM failure / Failure of the data
of detection written in the laser scanner unit EEPROM was detected.
PCB: J5101M
7-55
code code
area
E102 -0301
-05
E102 -0401
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Laser scanner unit (C) EEPROM error

Laser scanner unit EEPROM failure / Failure of the data
written in the laser scanner unit EEPROM was detected.
PCB: J5101C
Laser scanner unit (Bk) EEPROM error
Title
Description Laser scanner unit EEPROM failure / Failure of the data
of detection written in the laser scanner unit EEPROM was detected.
PCB: J5101K
7-55
7
code code
area
E110 -0101
-05
E110 -0201
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Laser scanner motor (Y) error

during FG rotation.
PCB: J5101Y
Title
Laser scanner motor (M) error
of detection during FG rotation.
PCB: J5101M
7-56
code code
area
Items
Description
Laser scanner motor (C) error
during FG rotation.
PCB: J5101C
Laser scanner motor (Bk) error
during FG rotation.
PCB: J5101K
Serial communication error
Ex serial communication error with the Fixing Feed Driver
PCB.
1. Check the connection between the Fixing Feed Driver
PCB (J1511) and the DC Controller PCB (J1222).
E110 -0301
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E110 -0401
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0000
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
7-56
7
code code
area
Items
Description
PCB.
Ex serial communication error with the Pickup Feed
Driver PCB.
1. Check connection between the Pickup Feed Driver
3. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB.
Driver PCB.
Ex serial communication error with the DC Controller
PCB.
1. Check connection of the DC Controller PCB (J1210).
Ex serial communication error with the DC Controller
PCB.
Ex serial communication error with the Buffer Path Unit.
E197 -0001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0003
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0004
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0006
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0007
E197 -0008
-05
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures 1. Check the connection between the Buffer Driver PCB
and the DC Controller PCB (J1226).
3. Replace the Buffer Driver PCB.
Title
Description Ex serial communication error with the Multi Deck.
of detection
7-57
code code
area
E197 -0009
-05
E197 -000a
-05
E197 -0010
-05
E197 -0011
-05
E197 -0012
-05
E197 -0013
-05
Items
Description
Title
of detection
Title
of detection
Title
Description Communication error between the VIDEO Board and the
of detection scanner (Y)
Measures 1. Check the harness between the scanner and the
VIDEO Board.
2. Replace the Scanner Board.
3. Replace the VIDEO Board.
Title
of detection scanner (M)
VIDEO Board.
Title
of detection scanner (C)
VIDEO Board.
Title
of detection scanner (Bk)
VIDEO Board.
7-57
7
code code
area
Items
Description
HOB serial communication (= register serial
communication) error with the DC Controller PCB.
HOB serial communication error in the Drum ITB Driver
PCB.
1. Check the connection between the Drum ITB Driver
HOB serial communication error with the Laser Interface
PCB.
1. Check the connection between the Laser Interface
PCB.
HOB serial communication (= register serial
communication) timeout error with the DC Controller
PCB.
HOB serial communication error in the Drum ITB Driver
PCB.
1. Check the connection between the Drum ITB Driver
PCB.
E197 -0020
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0021
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0022
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0023
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0030
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0031
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0032
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
7-58
code code
area
Items
Description
PCB.
Communication error due to poor contact of Drawer
Connector with the Fixing Feed Driver PCB.
Replace the PCB and the harness.
PCB.
2. Replace the DC ControllerPCB.
PCB.
2. Replace the DC ControllerPCB.
Driver PCB.
Driver PCB.
Ex serial communication error with the Buffer Path Unit.
E197 -0033
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0040
-05
E197 -0050
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0051
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0052
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0053
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E197 -0057
-05
Title
Description
of detection
(J1401) and the DC Controller PCB (J1226).
7-58
7
code code
area
E197 -0100
-05
E197 -0101
-05
E197 -0102
-05
E197 -0103
-05
E197 -1000
E197 -1001
E197 -1002
-05
-05
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Detection
description
Description
Serial communication error in ASIC
7-59
code code
area
Laser Interface PCB

Laser Interface PCB

Communication error between the DC Controller PCB
(UN2) and the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB
(UN37, 38)
Remedy
1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB
(UN37, 38).
2. Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB
(UN37, 38).
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2).
Title
Detection
description (UN2) and the Developing High Voltage PCB
Remedy
(UN2) and the Developing High Voltage PCB.
2. Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB.
Title
Detection
description (UN2) and the High Voltage PCBs
Remedy
(UN37, 38).
(UN2) and the Developing High Voltage PCB.
3. Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB.
4. Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB.
Description
(UN2) and the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5)
(UN2) and the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5).
2. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5).
(UN2) and the Pickup Driver PCB (UN4)
(UN2) and the Pickup Driver PCB (UN4).
2. Replace the Pickup Driver PCB (UN4).
(UN2) and the Drum Driver PCB (UN6)
(UN2) and the Drum Driver PCB (UN6).
2. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN6).
(UN2) and the Relay PCB (UN7)
(UN2) and the Relay PCB (UN7).
2. Replace the Relay PCB (UN7).
(UN2) and the Buffer Driver PCB (UN150)
(UN2) and the Buffer Driver PCB (UN150).
2. Replace the Buffer Driver PCB (UN150).
(UN2) and the other Driver PCB
(UN2) and other Driver PCB.
E197 -2000
-05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E197 -2001
-05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E197 -2002
-05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E197 -2003
-05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E197 -2004
-05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E197 -2005
-05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Laser Interface PCB

Laser Interface PCB
Items
7-59
7
code code
area
E198 -0001
-05
Items
7-60
Description
Title
DC Controller PCB IC error
Detection
The fuse of the DC Controller PCB has melted.
description
Remedy
[CAUTION] The fuse (FU1) has melted, therefore the
whole DC Controller PCB (UN2) needs to be replaced.
1. Check the following harnesses connected with the
DC Controller PCB. -> Replace the harness if it is
disconnected.
- Between J1222 and the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5)
J1511
- Between J1223 and the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (UN4)
J1400
- Between J1225 and the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6)
J1901
- Between J1226 and the Buffer Driver PCB (UN150)
J2102
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. (For details, refer to
Chapter 6 of the Service Manual.)
T-7-7
7-60
E202 to E280
code code
area
Items
Description
Scanner home position error
Failure of detection of the home position of the optical
unit for front side (outward)
1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the
optical home position sensor (SR2)
2. Damage to the optical home position sensor
3. Damage to the optical motor (M1)
4. Damage to the reader controller PCB (PCB1)
Failure of detection of the home position of the optical
unit for front side (homeward)
Faulty position of the Scanner Unit (Paper Front) at the
start of a reading job
Glass home position error
Failure of detection of the glass home position (outward)
E202 -0001
-04
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E202 -0002
-04
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E202 -0003
-04
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E202 -0101
-04
E202 -0102
-04
code code
area
E227 -0001
-04
E227 -0002
-04
Title
Description
of detection
Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the
glass movement home position sensor (SR11)
2. Damage to the glass movement home position sensor
3. Damage to the glass movement motor (M9)
4. Damage to the DADF driver PCB (PCB1)
Title
Glass home position error
Description Failure of detection of the glass home position
of detection (homeward)
glass movement home position sensor (SR11)
2. Damage to the glass movement home position sensor
3. Damage to the glass movement motor (M9)
4. Damage to the DADF driver PCB (PCB1)
7-61
Items
Description
Title
Power supply (24 V) error
Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of power-on.
of detection
power supply.
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer,
and check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Check the 24 V port of the Reader Controller PCB and
DADF Driver PCB.
4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer
side.
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver
PCB.
Title
Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of job start.
of detection
power supply.
DADF Driver PCB.
side.
PCB.
7-61
7
code code
area
E227 -0003
-04
E227 -0004
-04
Items
Description
Title
Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of job completion.
of detection
power supply.
DADF Driver PCB.
side.
PCB.
Title
Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of load drive.
of detection
power supply.
DADF Driver PCB.
side.
PCB.
7-62
code code
area
E227 -0101
-04
E227 -0102
-04
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures

The 24 V port is turned off at the time of power-on at
DADF.
power supply.
DADF Driver PCB.
side.
PCB.
Title
Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of job start at
of detection DADF.
power supply.
DADF Driver PCB.
side.
PCB.
7-62
7
code code
area
E227 -0103
-04
E246 -0001
-00
E246 -0002
-00
E246 -0003
-00
E246 -0005
-00
E247 -0001
-00
E247 -0002
-00
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures

The 24 V port is turned off at the time of job completion
at DADF.
power supply.
DADF Driver PCB.
side.
PCB.
Title
System error
Description --of detection
Measures Contact each sale company bases
Title
System error
Title
System error
Title
System error
Title
System error
Title
System error
7-63
code code
area
E247 -0003
-00
E247 -0004
-00
E248 -0001
-04
E248 -0002
-04
E248 -0003
-04
E260 -0000
-05
E260 -0001
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
Description
System error
--Contact each sale company bases
System error
EEPROM error
Failure of power-on at EEPROM for the reader controller
PCB (PCB1)
Replace the reader controller PCB (PCB1)
EEPROM error
Failure of writing at EEPROM for the reader controller
PCB (PCB1)
EEPROM error
Failure of reading after writing at EEPROM for the reader
controller PCB (PCB1)
Power supply (24VA/24VB) error
24V power (+24VA, +24VB) was not supplied.
1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of harness with

the corresponding PCB.
Check connectors and harnesses between the
following: AC Driver PCB, Relay PCB, DC Power
Supply PCB (24VA), DC Power Supply PCB (24VB).
2. Failure of PCB.
Replace the following: AC Driver PCB, Relay PCB, DC
Power Supply PCB (24VA), DC Power Supply PCB
(24VB).
Title
Power supply (24VA) error
Description 24V power (+24VA) was not supplied.
of detection
Remedy
Supply PCB (24VA).
2. Failure of PCB.
Power Supply PCB (24VA).
7-63
7
code code
area
E260 -0002
-05
E260 -0003
-05
E270 -0001
-04
E270 -0002
-04
Items
Description
Title
Power supply (24VB) error
Description 24V power (+24VB) was not supplied.
of detection
Remedy
Supply PCB (24VB).
2. Failure of PCB.
Power Supply PCB (24VB).
Title
DC Controller PCB 5V error
Description An error in the 5V output from the DC Controller PCB
of detection was detected.
Measures Replace the DC Controller PCB.
Title
Failure of the front side vertical direction synchronization
signal
Description The vertical direction synchronization signal (VSYNC)
of detection was not sent from the CMOS PCB (front side optical unit)
correctly, and an image failure occurred or the operation
stopped in failure.
optical unit (reader)
reader controller PCB (PCB1)
3. Failure of the optical unit (reader)
4. Failure of the reader controller PCB
Title
Failure of the horizontal/vertical direction synchronization
signal
Description The vertical direction synchronization signal (VSYNC)
of detection was not sent due to a failure of the horizontal direction
synchronization signal (HSYNC), and an image failure
occurred or the operation stopped in failure.
optical unit (reader/DADF)
3. Failure of the optical unit (reader/DADF)
7-64
code code
area
E270 -0101
-04
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E280 -0001
-04
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E280 -0002
-04
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
Failure of the backside vertical scanning direction
synchronization signal
The vertical direction synchronization signal (VSYNC)
was not sent from the CMOS PCB (backside optical unit)
correctly, and an image failure occurred or the operation
stopped in failure.
optical unit (DADF)
3. Failure of the optical unit (DADF)
Communication error between Reader Controller PCB
(PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader)
Within the specified period of time, communication
between the Reader Controller PCB and Scanner Unit
(Paper Front) was not started.
1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner
Unit (Paper Front) (Reader). Connect the connector/
Replace the harness.
2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader
Controller PCB (PCB1). Connect the connector/
3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Reader).
4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
Harness disconnection between Reader Controller PCB
(PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader)
(PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader).
7-64
7
code code
area
E280 -0101
-04
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E280 -0102
-04
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
7-65
E301 to E490
Description
(PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader)
Within the specified period of time, communication
between the Reader Controller PCB and Scanner Unit
(Paper Back) was not started.
Unit (Paper Back) (Reader) Connect the connector/
3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Reader).
(PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader)
(PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader).
code code
area
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Front side light intensity failure

The light intensity amount at front side shading is less
than the standard level.
Replace the optical unit (reader)
Backside light intensity failure
The light intensity amount at backside shading is less
than the standard level.
Replace the optical unit (DADF)
Front side white shading failure
Shading RAM access failure occurred, or the shading
value is less than or more than the specified level.
3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader).
Error in paper front black shading
Shading RAM access error, or the shading value was
either below or higher than the specified level.
3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader).
Backside white shading failure
Shading RAM access failure occurred, or the shading
value is less than or more than the specified level.
3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader).
E301 -0001
-04
E301 -0101
-04
E302 -0001
-04
E302 -0002
-04
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E302 -0101
-04
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
T-7-8
Items
7-65
7
code code
area
E302 -0102
E315 -000e
E350 -0000
E350 -0001
-04
-00
-00
-00
E350 -0002
-00
E350 -0003
-00
E350 -3000
-00
E351 -0000
-00
E354 -0001
-00
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Error in paper back black shading

Shading RAM access error, or the shading value was
either below or higher than the specified level.
3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader).
Title
Error in the soft decode
Description JBIG decode error
of detection
Measures Replace the main controller PCB
Title
System error
Title
System error
Title
System error
Title
System error
Title
System error
Title
System error
Title
System error
7-66
code code
area
E354 -0002
-00
E355 -0001
-00
E355 -0002
-00
E355 -0003
-00
E355 -0004
-00
E400 -0001
-04
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E400 -0002
-04
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E400 -0003
-04
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
Description
System error
System error
System error
System error
System error
and DADF
A check error occurred at the time of communication
between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF.
1. Failure of the connection between the DADF driver
PCB (PCB1) and the reader controller PCB (PCB1)
2. Failure of the DADF driver PCB
Failure of communication between the reader controller
PCB (PCB1) and the DADF
A reception error occurred in communication between the
reader controller PCB and the DADF.
1. Failure of the connection between the DADF driver
PCB (PCB1) and the reader controller PCB (PCB1)
2. Failure of the DADF driver PCB
and DADF
and DADF.
1. Check connection between the DADF Driver PCB and
the Reader Controller PCB (connector connection/open
2. Replace the DADF Driver PCB.
7-66
7
code code
area
E401 -0001
E401 -0002
E407 -0001
E407 -0002
-04
-04
-04
-04
Items
Description
Title
Pickup roller unit up/down failure
Description Even when the pickup roller unit up/down motor (M10)
of detection is driven, the level of the pickup roller unit up/down
home position sensor (SR12) does not change within a
specified period.
pickup roller unit up/down home position sensor (SR12)
pickup roller unit up/down motor (M10)
3. Failure of the pickup roller unit up/down home position
sensor
4. Failure of the pickup roller unit up/down motor
Title
Pickup roller unit up/down failure
Description Even when the pickup roller unit up/down motor (M10)
of detection is driven, the level of the pickup roller unit up/down
home position sensor (SR12) does not change within a
specified period.
pickup roller unit up/down home position sensor (SR12)
pickup roller unit up/down motor (M10)
3. Failure of the pickup roller unit up/down home position
sensor
4. Failure of the pickup roller unit up/down motor
Title
Failure of the tray up/down motor (M8)
Description Even when the tray up/down motor (M8) is driven, the
of detection tray home position sensor (SR13) is not turned ON or
OFF within a specified period.
tray home position sensor (SR13)
tray up/down motor (M8)
3. Failure of the tray home position sensor
4. Failure of the tray up/down motor
Title
Failure of the tray up/down motor (M8)
Description Even when the tray up/down motor (M8) is driven, the
of detection paper surface sensor (SR6) is not turned ON within a
specified period.
paper surface sensor (SR6)
tray up/down motor (M8)
3. Failure of the paper surface sensor
4. Failure of the tray up/down motor
7-67
code code
area
E412 -0001
-04
E412 -0002
-04
E412 -0003
-04
E412 -0004
-04
E412 -0005
-04
E412 -0006
-04
Items
Description
Title
Failure in drive of the Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (Reader

Assembly)
Description The Scanner Unit Cooling Fan was not driven.
of detection
Remedy
1. Disconnect and then connect the connector.
2. Check if there is open circuit.
3. Replace the corresponding fan.
Title
Failure to stop Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (Reader
Assembly)
Description The Scanner Unit Cooling Fan was not stopped.
of detection
Remedy
Title
Failure in drive of the DADF Cooling Fan 3
Description DADF Cooling Fan 3 was not driven.
of detection
Remedy
Title
Failure to stop DADF Cooling Fan 3
Description DADF Cooling Fan 3 was not stopped.
of detection
Remedy
Title
Failure in drive of the DADF Cooling Fan 1 or 2
Description DADF Cooling Fan 1 or 2 was not driven.
of detection
Remedy
Title
Failure to stop DADF Cooling Fan 1 or 2
Description DADF Cooling Fan 1 or 2 was not stopped.
of detection
Remedy
7-67
7
code code
area
E413 -0001
E413 -0002
-04
-04
E413 -0011
-04
E413 -0012
-04
Items
Description
Title
Failure of the DADF detachment motor 1 (M6)
Description Even when the DADF detachment motor 1 (M6) is driven,
of detection the DADF detachment home position sensor 1 (SR15) is
not turned ON within a specified period.
detachment home position sensor 1 (SR15)
detachment motor 1 (M6)
3. Failure of the detachment home position sensor 1
4. Failure of the detachment motor 1
5. Failure of the DADF driver PCB (PCB1)
Title
not turned OFF within a specified period.
Title
not turned ON within a specified period.
Title
not turned OFF within a specified period.
7-68
code code
area
E423 -0001
-04
E423 -0002
-04
E490 -0001
-04
Items
Description
Title
DADF SDRAM error
Description SDRAM access error
of detection
Measures Failure of the SDRAM (video image memory) located on
the reader controller PCB (PCB1)
Title
DADF SDRAM error
Description SDRAM Verify error
of detection
Measures Failure of the SDRAM (video image memory) located on
the reader controller PCB (PCB1)
Title
DADF model mismatch error
Description DADF that is not supported is installed.
of detection
Measures 1. DADF of a different model is installed.
2. Failure of the reader controller PCB (PCB1)
3. Failure of the DC controller PCB
4. Failure of the main controller PCB
T-7-9
7-68
E500 to E551
code code
area
E500 -0000
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E503 -0001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
A. Error in IPC communication(Finisher-K1)
B. Communication error(Finisher-L1)
A. Communication failed between the host machine and
the finisher
B. The communication with the connected device is
interrupted.
A:
A-1. IPC cable is disconnected.
A-2. IPC cable is faulty.
A-3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
A-4. The host machine controller PCB is faulty.
B:
B-1. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B-2. The connected device DC controller PCB is faulty.
A. Communication error with insertion unit (Document
Insertion Unitr-J1,Paper Folding Unit-G1)
B. Error in communication between the finisher - saddle
stitcher (Finisher-K1)
A. Communication failed, or the communication line has
been interrupted for a specified period of time.
B. Communication failed between the finisher and the
saddle stitcher
A:
A-1. DC controller PCB is faulty
A-2. Disconnection of communication cable
A-3. Connector on the DC controller PCB is
disconnected
B:
B-1. The connector on the wiring between the finisher
controller PCB and the saddle stitcher controller
PCB is disconnected.
B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
and the saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
7-69
code code
area
E503 -0002
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E503 -0003
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
A. Error in communication between the finisher - saddle
stitcher (Finisher-K1)
B. Error in communication between the finisher - saddle
stitcher (Finisher-L1)
A. Communication failed between the finisher and the
saddle stitcher
B. The communication with the saddle stitcher is
interrupted.
A:
A-1. The connector on the wiring between the finisher
controller PCB and the saddle stitcher controller
A-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
and the saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
A-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
B:
and saddle controller PCB is faulty.
A. Communication error between the integration unit professional puncher
B. Communication error (Finisher-L1)
A. Communication failed between the integration unit professional puncher
B. The communication with the puncher unit is interrupted.
A:
A-1. Connector on the integration unit controller PCB is
disconnected.
A-2. Connector on the professional puncher controller
A-3. The integration unit controller PCB is faulty.
A-4. The professional puncher controller PCB is faulty.
B:
and host machine DC controller PCB is faulty.
B-2. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
B-4. The connected device DC controller PCB is faulty.
7-69
7
code code
area
E503 -0004
E503 -0021
E503 -0022
E503 -0061
-05
-05
-05
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Inserter communication error (Finisher-L1)

B. Paper Folding Inserter Unit / Inserter Unit
Communication error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The communication with the inserter or the folder is
of detection interrupted.
B. Communication failed for 3 consecutive times, or the
communication line has been interrupted for a specified
period of time.
Measures A:
A-1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
and the connected device controller PCB is faulty.
A-3. The connected device controller PCB is faulty.
B:
B-1. Controller PCB is faulty.
B-2. Disconnection of communication cable
B-3. DC controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Error in communication between the finisher - inserter
(Finisher-K1)
Description Communication failed between finisher - insertion unit
of detection
Measures 1. The connector on the cable between the finisher and
the insertion unit is disconnected.
2. The cable between the finisher and the insertion unit is
faulty.
3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
4. The insertion unit controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Error in communication between the finisher - inserter
(Finisher-K1)
Description Communication failed between finisher - insertion unit
of detection
the insertion unit is disconnected.
2. The cable between the finisher and the insertion unit is
faulty.
Title
Error in communication between the finisher - paper
folding unit (Finisher-K1)
Description Communication failed between the finisher - paper folding
of detection unit
the paper folding unit is disconnected.
2. The cable between the finisher and the paper folding
unit is faulty.
4. The paper folding unit controller PCB is faulty.
7-70
code code
area
E503 -0062
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E503 -0081
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E503 -0082
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E505 -0001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
Error in communication between the finisher - paper
folding unit (Finisher-K1)
Communication failed between the finisher - paper folding
unit
1. The connector on the cable between the finisher and
the paper folding unit is disconnected.
2. The cable between the finisher and the paper folding
unit is faulty.
Error in communication between the saddle stitcher trimmer (Finisher-K1)
Communication failed between the saddle stitcher trimmer
1. The connector on the wiring between the saddle
stitcher and the trimmer is disconnected.
2. The wiring between the saddle stitcher and the trimmer
is faulty.
3. The trimmer controller PCB is faulty.
4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Error in communication between the saddle stitcher trimmer (Finisher-K1)
Communication failed between the saddle stitcher trimmer
1. The connector on the wiring between the saddle
stitcher and the trimmer is disconnected.
2. The wiring between the saddle stitcher and the trimmer
is faulty.
3. The trimmer controller PCB is faulty.
A. Backup data error (failed data reading) (Document
Insertion Unit-J1/Paper Folding Unit-G1)
B. EEPRAM error (Finisher-K1/L1)
A. Data failed to be read properly
B. Reading/writing error of EEPROM on the finisher
controller PCB (The checksum for the EEPROM data
has an error.)
A. DC controller PCB is faulty.
B. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
7-70
7
code code
area
E505 -0002
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E505 -0003
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E505 -0005
-05
E509 -0001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
A. Backup data error (failed data writing) (Document
Insertion Unit-J1/Paper Folding Unit-G1)
B. EEPROM error (External 2 Hole Puncher-A1)
A. Data failed to be written properly
B. The checksum for the EEPROM data has an error.
A. DC controller PCB is faulty
B. Punch controller PCB is faulty
A. Insertion unit back-up RAM error (Finisher-K1)
B. Reading/writing error of EEPROM (Document Folding
Insertion Unit / Insertion Unit -H1)
A. Reading/writing error of EEPROM on the insertion unit
controller PCB.
B. Reading/writing error of EEPROM
A. The insertion unit controller PCB is faulty.
B. DC controller PCB is faulty
Paper folding unit backup RAM error
Reading/writing error of EEPROM on the paper folding
unit controller PCB
The paper folding unit controller PCB is faulty.
Mismatched connection code between the host machine
and Finisher (Finisher-K1/L1)
A wrong host machine has been connected.
code code
area
E514 -8001
Description
of detection
Remedy
1. Connection with a wrong host machine.
2. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB.
7-71
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Error in the gripper base motor (Finisher-K1)

B. Rear end assist home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The gripper does not come off the gripper base rear
of detection sensor when the gripper base motor has been driven
for 3 seconds.
B. The stapler does not leave the rear end assist home
position when the rear end assist motor has been
driven for 3 seconds.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the gripper base rear sensor
(S117) or the gripper base motor (M116) are
disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the gripper base rear sensor or the
gripper base motor are faulty.
A-3. The gripper base rear sensor is faulty.
A-4. The gripper base motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The rear end assist home position sensor (PI109)
is faulty.
and rear end assist motor is faulty.
B-3. The end assist mechanism is faulty.
B-4. The rear end assist motor (M109) is faulty.
7-71
7
code code
area
E514 -8002
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E514 -8003
E514 -8004
-05
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
A. Error in the gripper base motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Rear end assist home position error (Finisher-L1)
A. The gripper base rear sensor dose not detect the
gripper when the gripper base motor has been driven
for 3 seconds.
B. The stapler does not return to the rear end assist home
position when the rear end assist motor has been
A:
A-1. The connector of the gripper base rear sensor
(S117) or the gripper base motor (M116) are
disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the gripper base rear sensor or the
gripper base motor are faulty.
A-3. The gripper base rear sensor is faulty.
A-4. The gripper base motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The rear end assist home position sensor (PI109)
is faulty.
and rear end assist motor is faulty.
B-3. The end assist mechanism is faulty.
B-4. The rear end assist motor (M109) is faulty.
Error in the gripper motor (Finisher-A1)
The gripper does not come off the gripper HP sensor
when the gripper motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
1. The connector of the gripper HP sensor (S140) or the
gripper motor (M117) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the gripper HP sensor) or the gripper
motor are faulty.
3. The gripper HP sensor is faulty.
4. The gripper motor is faulty.
Error in the gripper motor (Finisher-K1)
The gripper HP sensor does not detect the gripper when
the gripper motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
1. The connector of the gripper HP sensor (S140) or the
gripper motor (M117) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the gripper HP sensor or the gripper
motor are faulty.
3. The gripper HP sensor is faulty.
7-72
code code
area
Items
Description
The gripper does not come off the position sensor when
the gripper motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
1. The connector of the gripper position sensor (S115) or
the gripper motor (M117) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the gripper position sensor or the gripper
motor are faulty.
3. The gripper position sensor is faulty.
The gripper position sensor does not detect the gripper
when the gripper motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
1. The connector of the gripper position sensor (S115) or
the gripper motor (M117) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the gripper position sensor or the gripper
motor are faulty.
3. The gripper position sensor is faulty.
Error in folding feed motor lock (Document Insertion
Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit)
The fold transport motor (M5/M11) lock signal has been
detected for more than the specified period of time.
1. Connector of Folding feed motor (M5/M11) is
disconnected.
2. Folding feed motor is faulty.
Gear change home position error (Finisher-L1)
The gear change home position sensor does not turn ON
when the gear change motor has been driven for 387
pulses.
1. The gear change home position sensor (PI117) is
faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and
gear change motor is faulty.
3. The gear change mechanism is faulty.
4. The gear change motor (M110) is faulty.
E514 -8005
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E514 -8006
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E518 -8001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E519 -0002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
7-72
7
code code
area
E519 -8001
-05
E530 -8000
-05
E530 -8001
-05
Items
Description
Title
Gear change home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description The gear change home position sensor does not turn
of detection OFF when the gear change motor has been driven for
387 pulses.
Measures 1. The gear change home position sensor (PI117) is
faulty.
gear change motor is faulty.
3. The gear change mechanism is faulty.
4. The gear change motor (M110) is faulty.
Title
Error in the front or rear alignment motor
Description The front or rear alignment motor operate abnormally
of detection during initialization.
Measures 1. The connector of the front/rear alignment HP sensor
(S108/S109) or the front/rear alignment motor (M108/
M109) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the front/rear alignment HP sensor or the
front/rear alignment motor are faulty.
3. The front/rear alignment HP sensor is faulty.
4. The front/rear alignment motor is faulty.
Title
A. Error in the front alignment motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Front aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The front alignment plate does not come off the front
of detection alignment HP sensor when the front alignment motor
has been driven for 4 seconds.
B. The aligning plate does not leave the aligning plate
front home position sensor when the alignment plate
front motor has been driven for 4 seconds.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the front alignment HP sensor
(S108) or the front alignment motor (M108) are
disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the front alignment HP sensor or the
front alignment motor are faulty.
A-3. The front alignment HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The front alignment motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The front aligning plate home position sensor
(PI106) is faulty.
and front aligning plate motor is faulty.
B-3. The front aligning plate is faulty.
B-4. The front aligning plate motor (M103) is faulty.
7-73
code code
area
E530 -8002
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E531 -8001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
A. Error in the front alignment motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Front aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1)
A. The front alignment HP sensor does not detect the
front alignment plate when the front alignment motor
B. The aligning plate does not return to aligning plate front
home position sensor when the alignment plate front
motor has been driven for 4 seconds.
A:
A-1. The connector of the front alignment HP sensor
(S108) or the front alignment motor (M108) are
disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the front alignment HP sensor or the
front alignment motor are faulty.
A-3. The front alignment HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The front alignment motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The front aligning plate home position sensor
(PI106) is faulty.
and front aligning plate motor is faulty.
B-3. The front aligning plate is faulty.
B-4. The front aligning plate motor (M103) is faulty.
A. Error in the staple motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Staple home position error (Finisher-L1)
A. The staple unit does not come off the staple HP sensor
when the staple motor has been driven for 0.4 second.
B. The stapler does not leave the staple home position
A:
A-1. The connector of the staple unit is disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the staple unit is faulty.
A-3. The staple unit is faulty.
B:
and stapler is faulty.
B-2. The stapler is faulty.
7-73
7
code code
area
E531 -8002
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E532 -8000
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
B. Staple home position error (Finisher-L1)
A. The staple HP sensor does nor detect the staple unit
B. The stapler does not return to the staple home position
A:
A-1. The connector of the staple unit is disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the staple unit is faulty.
A-3. The staple unit is faulty.
B:
and stapler is faulty.
B-2. The stapler is faulty.
Error in the staple shift motor
The staple shift motor operate abnormally during
initialization.
1. The connector of the stapler shift HP sensor (S107) or
the staple shift motor (M107) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the stapler shift HP sensor or the staple
shift motor are faulty.
3. The stapler shift HP sensor is faulty.
4. The staple shift motor is faulty.
7-74
code code
area
E532 -8001
-05
Items
Description
Title

B. Stapler shift home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The staple unit does not come off the stapler shift HP
of detection sensor when the staple shift motor has been driven for
5 seconds.
B. The stapler does not leave the stapler shift home
position when the stapler shift motor has been driven
for 5 seconds.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the stapler shift HP sensor (S107)
or the staple shift motor (M107) are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the stapler shift HP sensor or the
staple shift motor are faulty.
A-3. The stapler shift HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The staple shift motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The stapler drive home position sensor (PI110) is
faulty.
and stapler shift motor is faulty.
B-3. The stapler shift base is faulty.
B-4. The stapler shift motor (M105) is faulty.
B-5. The finisher controller
7-74
7
code code
area
E532 -8002
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E535 -0001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E535 -0002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
A. Error in the stapler shift motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Stapler shift home position error (Finisher-L1)
A. The stapler shift HP sensor does not detect the staple
unit when the staple shift motor has been driven for 5
seconds.
B. The stapler does not leave the stapler shift home
position when the stapler shift motor has been driven
for 5 seconds.
A:
A-1. The connector of the stapler shift HP sensor (S107)
or the staple shift motor (M107) are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the stapler shift HP sensor or the
staple shift motor are faulty.
A-3. The stapler shift HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The staple shift motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The stapler drive home position sensor (PI110) is
faulty.
and stapler shift motor is faulty.
B-3. The stapler shift base is faulty.
B-4. The stapler shift motor (M105) is faulty.
B-5. The finisher controller
Error in the swing guide motor (Finisher-K1)
The swing guide does not come off the swing guide HP
sensor when the swing guide motor has been driven for 3
seconds.
1. The connector of the swing guide HP sensor (S110) or
the swing guide motor (M110) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the swing guide HP sensor or the swing
guide motor are faulty.
3. The swing guide HP sensor is faulty.
4. The swing guide motor is faulty.
The swing guide HP sensor does not detect the swing
guide when the swing guide motor has been driven for 3
seconds.
1. The connector of the swing guide HP sensor (S110) or
the swing guide motor (M110) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the swing guide HP sensor or the swing
guide motor are faulty.
3. The swing guide HP sensor is faulty.
7-75
code code
area
E535 -0003
-05
E535 -0004
-05
E535 -8001
-05
E535 -8002
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description The swing guide height detection sensor failed to be ON
of detection even though specified period of time has passed when
lowering the swing guide.
Measures 1. The connector of the swing guide height detection
sensor (S118) or the swing guide motor (M110) are
disconnected.
2. The wiring of the swing guide height detection sensor
or the swing guide motor are faulty.
3. The swing guide height detection sensor is faulty.
Title
Description The swing guide height detection sensor failed to be OFF
of detection even though specified period of time has passed when
raising the swing unit.
Measures 1. The connector of the swing guide height detection
sensor (S118) or the swing guide motor (M110) are
disconnected.
2. The wiring of the swing guide height detection sensor
or the swing guide motor are faulty.
3. The swing guide height detection sensor is faulty.
Title
Swing home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description The stapler does not leave the swing home position when
of detection the swing motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
Measures 1. The swing home position sensor (PI105) is faulty.
swing motor is faulty.
3. The swing mechanism is faulty.
4. The swing motor (M106) is faulty.
Title
Swing home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description The stapler does not return to the swing home position
of detection when the swing motor has bee driven for 3 seconds.
Measures 1. The swing home position sensor (PI105) is faulty.
swing motor is faulty.
3. The swing mechanism is faulty.
4. The swing motor (M106) is faulty.
7-75
7
code code
area
E537 -8001
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Error in the rear alignment motor (Finisher-K1)

B. Rear aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The rear alignment plate does not come off the rear
of detection alignment HP sensor when the rear alignment motor
rear home position sensor when the alignment plate
rear motor has been driven for 4 seconds.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the rear alignment HP sensor
(S109) or the rear alignment motor (M109) are
disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the rear alignment HP sensor or the
rear alignment motor are faulty.
A-3. The rear alignment HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The rear alignment motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The aligning plate rear home position sensor
(PI107) is faulty.
and aligning plate rear motor is faulty.
B-3. The rear aligning plate is faulty.
B-4. The rear aligning plate motor (M104) is faulty.
7-76
code code
area
E537 -8002
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Error in the rear alignment motor (Finisher-K1)

B. Rear aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The rear alignment HP sensor does not detect the rear
of detection alignment plate when the rear alignment motor has
been driven for 4 seconds.
rear home position sensor when the alignment plate
rear motor has been driven for 4 seconds.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the rear alignment HP sensor
(S109) or the rear alignment motor (M109) are
disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the rear alignment HP sensor or the
rear alignment motor are faulty.
A-3. The rear alignment HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The rear alignment motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The aligning plate rear home position sensor
(PI107) is faulty.
and aligning plate rear motor is faulty.
B-3. The rear aligning plate is faulty.
B-4. The rear aligning plate motor (M104) is faulty.
7-76
7
code code
area
E540 -8001
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Tray 1 time-out error (Finisher-A1)

B. Upper tray time-out error (Finisher-B1)
Description A. The tray 1 does not return to home position when the
of detection tray 1 shift motor has been driven for 20 seconds.
The tray 1 does not come off the tray 1 area sensor at
the same area when the tray 1 shift motor has been
B. If the tray does not return to home position when the
tray 1 shift motor is driven for the specified period of
time.
If the tray does not move to other area when tray 1
shift motor is driven for the specified period of time.
Measures A:
A-1. The connectors of the tray 1 area sensors (S122/
S123/S124) or the tray 1 shift motor (M105) are
disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the tray 1 area sensors or the tray 1
A-3. The tray 1 area sensors is faulty.
A-4. The tray 1 shift motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
and tray 1 shift motor is faulty.
B-3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
B-4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty.
7-77
code code
area
E540 -8002
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E540 -8003
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
A. Tray 1 area error (Finisher-K1)
B. Upper tray time out error (Finisher-L1)
A. The tray 1 detects the discontinuous area with the tray
1 area sensors.
B. The dangerous area is reached before the tray 1 paper
surface sensor detects paper surface during the paper
surface detection operation.
A discontinuous area is detected during tray operation.
A:
disconnected.
B:
A. Error in the tray 1 lower safety switch (Finisher-K1)
B. Swing guide switch/Staple safety switch error
(Finisher-L1)
A. The tray 1 lower safety switch is turned ON while the
tray 1 operates.
B. The swing guide switch or staple safety switch is
activated while the tray is operating.
A:
A-1. The connector of the tray 1 lower safety
switch (SW110) or the tray 1 shift motor (M105)
are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the tray 1 lower safety switch or the
tray 1 shift motor are faulty.
A-3. The tray 1 lower safety switch is faulty.
B:
7-77
7
code code
area
Items
Description
The tray 1 closing detect switch error (Finisher-L1)
The FIG input cannot be detected when the tray 1 shift
motor has been driven for 0.2 second.
1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray
1 shift motor is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty.
The tray 1 shift motor speed error (Finisher-L1)
The lock detection signal turns OFF for 200 mseconds
after the lock detection signal turned ON 150 mseconds.
The tray 1 shift motor acceleration error (Finisher-L1)
The lock detection signal does not turn ON when the tray
1 shift motor has been driven for 1 second.
The tray 1 shift motor error (Finisher-L1)
The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the
tray 1 shift motor is at a stop.
E540 -8004
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E540 -8005
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E540 -8006
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E540 -8007
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
7-78
code code
area
E540 -8013
-05
E542 -8001
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Error in the swing guide safety switch

The swing guide safety switch is turned ON while the tray
1 operates.
1. The connector of the swing guide safety switch (front/
rear) (SW102/SW104) or the staple position switch
(SW103) are disconnected.
2. The connector of the swing guide solenoid (SL101) or
the tray 1 shift motor (M105) are disconnected.
3. The wiring of the swing guide safety switch (front/rear)
or the staple position switch are faulty.
4. The wiring of the swing guide solenoid or the tray 1
5. The swing guide safety switch (front/rear) is faulty.
6. The staple position switch is faulty.
7. The swing guide solenoid is faulty.
8. The tray 1 shift motor is faulty.
Title
A. Tray 2 time-out error (Finisher-K1)
Description A. The tray 2 does not return to home position when the
of detection tray 2 shift motor has been driven for 20 seconds.
B. If the tray does not return to home position when the
tray 1 shift motor is driven for 25 seconds.
If the tray does not move to other area when tray 2
shift motor is driven for 5 seconds.
Measures A:
disconnected.
B:
7-78
7
code code
area
E542 -8002
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E542 -8003
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
A. Tray 2 area error (Finisher-K1)
A. The tray 2 does not return to home position when the
tray 2 shift motor has been driven for 20 seconds.
B. The upper limit area is reached before the tray 2 paper
surface sensor 1 detects the paper surface during
paper surface detection operation.
A discontinuous area is detected during tray operation.
The area beyond the the tray 2 paper surface sensor
2 is reached before the tray 2 paper surface sensor 2
detects the paper surface during evacuation operation.
A:
disconnected.
B:
Error in the tray 1 lower safety switch (Finisher-K1)
The tray 1 lower safety switch is turned ON while the tray
2 operates.
1. The connector of the tray 1 lower safety switch (SW110)
or the tray 2 shift motor (M217) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the tray 1 lower safety switch or the tray
2 shift motor are faulty.
3. The tray 1 lower safety switch is faulty.
7-79
code code
area
Items
Description
The tray 2 shift motor clock error (Finisher-L1)
The FG input cannot be detected when the tray 2 shift
1. The Tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
4. The Tray 2 shift motor (M108) is faulty.
The tray 2 shift motor speed error (Finisher-L1)
The lock detection signal turns OFF for 200 mseconds
after the lock detection signal turned ON 150 mseconds.
The tray 2 shift motor acceleration error (Finisher-L1)
The lock detection signal does not turn ON when the tray
2 shift motor has been driven for 1 second.
The tray 2 shift motor error (Finisher-L1)
The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the
tray 2 shift motor is at a stop.
E542 -8004
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E542 -8005
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E542 -8006
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E542 -8007
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
7-79
7
code code
area
E542 -8013
-05
E551 -0001
-05
E551 -0002
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Error in the swing guide safety switch

The swing guide safety switch (front/rear) is turned ON
while the tray 2 operates.
1. The connector of the swing guide safety switch (front/
rear) (SW102/SW104) or the staple position switch
(SW103) are disconnected.
2. The connector of the swing guide solenoid (SL101) or
the tray 2 shift motor (M217) are disconnected.
3. The wiring of the swing guide safety switch (front/rear)
or the staple position switch are faulty.
4. The wiring of the swing guide solenoid or the tray 2
5. The swing guide safety switch (front/rear) is faulty.
6. The staple position switch is faulty.
7. The swing guide solenoid is faulty.
Title
A. Error in power supply fan (Document Insertion Unit)
B. Error in power supply fan (FAN101) (Finisher)
Description A. The lock signal ON is detected while the fan operation.
of detection B. The lock signal is detected 1.2 seconds or more while
the fan operation.
Measures A:
A-1. Power supply fan is faulty.
A-2. Connector of the power supply fan is disconnected
B:
B-1. The connector of the power supply fan (FAN101)
is disconnected.
B-2. The wiring of the power supply fan is faulty.
B-3. The power supply fan is faulty.
Title
A. Error in power supply fan (Paper Folding Unit)
B. Error in power supply fan (FAN101) (Finisher)
Description The lock status is released when the fan stops.
of detection
Measures A:
A-1. Connector of the power supply fan is
disconnected.
A-2. Power supply fan is faulty.
B:
B-1. The connector of the power supply fan (FAN101)
is disconnected.
B-2. The wiring of the power supply fan is faulty.
B-3. The power supply fan is faulty.
7-80
code code
area
E551 -0011
-05
E551 -0021
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Error in the power supply fan of the insertion unit

The loch signal is detected for the specified period of
times while the fan operates.
1. The connector of the fan (F1) is disconnected.
2. The wiring of the fan is faulty.
3. The fan is faulty.
Title
Error in the fan of the paper folding unit
Description The loch signal is detected for the specified period of
of detection times while the fan operates.
Measures 1. The connector of the fan (F1) is disconnected.
2. The wiring of the fan is faulty.
3. The fan is faulty.
T-7-10
7-80
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
E562 to E5F9
code code
area
E562 -8001
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E562 -8002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E562 -8003
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E562 -8004
E568 -8001
-05
-05
Title
Description
Error in slowing timing sensor (Paper folding unit
(Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit)
The receiving-light intensity failed to be within the
threshold although the emitting-light intensity is adjusted
to be within the threshold when adjusting the sensor.
1. Connector of the slowing timing sensor (S24/S30) is
disconnected.
2. Slowing timing sensor is faulty.
Error in the disengagement timing sensor of paper folding
unit (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit)
The disengagement timing sensor (S21) adjustment
failed.
1. Connector of the disengagement timing sensor (S21)
is disconnected.
2. Disengagement timing sensor is faulty.
Error in the folding position accuracy sensor (Document
Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit)
The folding position accuracy sensor (S23) adjustment
failed.
1. Connector of the folding position accuracy sensor (S23)
is disconnected.
2. Folding position accuracy sensor is faulty.
Error in the upper stopper HP sensor (Document Insertion
Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit)
The upper stopper HP sensor (S16) adjustment failed.
Description
of detection
Measures 1. Connector of the upper stopper HP sensor (S16) is
disconnected.
2. Upper stopper HP sensor is faulty.
Title
Error in the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor
(Finisher-K1)
Description The disengage roller does not come off the feed roller
of detection separation HP sensor when the feed roller disengage/
buffer flapper motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
Measures 1. The connector of the feed roller separation HP sensor
(S111) or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor
(M119) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the feed roller separation HP sensor
or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor are
faulty.
3. The feed roller separation HP sensor is faulty.
4. The feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor is faulty.
7-81
code code
area
E568 -8002
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E568 -8003
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E568 -8004
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
(Finisher-K1)
The feed roller separation HP sensor does not detect the
disengage roller when the feed roller disengage/buffer
flapper motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
1. The connector of the feed roller separation HP sensor
(S111) or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor
2. The wiring of the feed roller separation HP sensor
or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor are
faulty.
3. The feed roller separation HP sensor is faulty.
(Finisher-K1)
The buffer flapper does not come off the buffer flapper
HP sensor when the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper
1. The connector of the buffer flapper HP sensor (S142)
or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor (M119)
are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the buffer flapper HP sensor or the feed
roller disengage/buffer flapper motor are faulty.
3. The buffer flapper HP sensor is faulty.
(Finisher-K1)
The buffer flapper HP sensor does not detect the buffer
flapper when the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper
1. The connector of the buffer flapper HP sensor (S142)
or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor (M119)
are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the buffer flapper HP sensor or the feed
roller disengage/buffer flapper motor are faulty.
3. The buffer flapper HP sensor is faulty.
7-81
7
code code
area
E569 -8001
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E569 -8002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E56A -8001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
Upper stopper motor of paper folding unit failed to go
through HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper
Folding Unit)
The upper stopper HP sensor (S16) failed to be OFF
despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that the
upper stopper motor started to be driven while the upper
stopper HP sensor was ON.
1. Connector of the upper stopper motor (M7) is
disconnected.
2. Upper stopper motor is faulty.
3. Connector of the upper stopper HP sensor (S16) is
disconnected.
Upper stopper motor of paper folding unit failed to return
to HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding
Unit)
The upper stopper HP sensor (S16) failed to be ON
upper stopper motor started to be driven while the upper
stopper HP sensor was OFF.
1. Connector of the upper stopper motor (M7) is
disconnected.
2. Upper stopper motor is faulty.
3. Connector of the upper stopper HP sensor (S16) is
disconnected.
C-fold stopper motor of paper folding unit failed to go
through HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper
Folding Unit)
The C-fold stopper motor HP sensor (S17) failed to be
OFF despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that
the C-fold stopper motor started to be driven while the
C-fold stopper motor HP sensor was ON.
1. Connector of the C-fold stopper motor (M8) is
disconnected.
2. C-fold stopper motor is faulty.
3. Connector of the C-fold stopper HP sensor (S17) is
disconnected.
4. C-fold stopper HP sensor is faulty.
7-82
code code
area
E56A -8002
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E56B -8001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E56B -8002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
C-fold stopper motor of paper folding unit failed to return
to HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding
Unit)
The C-fold stopper motor HP sensor (S17) failed to be
ON despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that
the C-fold stopper motor started to be driven while the
C-fold stopper motor HP sensor was OFF.
1. Connector of the C-fold stopper motor (M8) is
disconnected.
2. C-fold stopper motor is faulty.
3. Connector of the C-fold stopper HP sensor (S17) is
disconnected.
4. C-fold stopper HP sensor is faulty.
Folding belt motor of paper folding unit failed to go
through HP (Document InsertionFolding Unit/Paper
Folding Unit)
During initialization or at paper delivery to the Folding
upper tray, the Folding belt HP sensor has not turned
OFF within the specified pulse.
1. Connector of the Folding belt motor is disconnected.
2. Folding belt motor is faulty.
3. Connector of the Folding belt motor HP sensor is
disconnected.
4. Folding belt motor HP sensor is faulty.
Folding tray motor of paper folding unit failed to return to
HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit)
During initialization or at paper delivery to the Folding
upper tray, the Folding tray motor HP sensor has not
turned ON within the specified pulse.
1. Connector of the folding tray motor (M6) is
disconnected.
2. Folding tray motor is faulty.
3. Connector of the folding tray motor HP sensor (S19) is
disconnected.
4. Folding tray motor HP sensor is faulty.
7-82
7
code code
area
E56D -8001
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E56D -8002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E56E -8001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
Error in the stacking tray paper retainer motor
(Finisher-K1)
The stacking tray paper retainer does not come off the
stacking tray paper retainer HP sensor when the stacking
tray paper retainer motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
1. The connector of the stacking tray paper retainer HP
sensor (S114) or the stacking tray paper retainer motor
2. The wiring of the stacking tray paper retainer HP
sensor or the stacking tray paper retainer motor are
faulty.
3. The stacking tray paper retainer HP sensor is faulty.
4. The stacking tray paper retainer motor is faulty.
Error in the stacking tray paper retainer motor
(Finisher-K1)
The stacking tray paper retainer HP sensor does not
detect the stacking tray paper retainer when the stacking
tray paper retainer motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
1. The connector of the stacking tray paper retainer HP
sensor (S114) or the stacking tray paper retainer motor
2. The wiring of the stacking tray paper retainer HP
sensor or the stacking tray paper retainer motor are
faulty.
3. The stacking tray paper retainer HP sensor is faulty.
4. The stacking tray paper retainer motor is faulty.
Lead-edge retaining guide motor of paper folding unit
failed to go through HP (Paper Folding Unit)
The lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor failed to be
OFF despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that
the lead-edge retaining guide motor started to be driven
while the lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor was ON.
1. Connector of the lead-edge retaining guide motor (M10)
is disconnected.
2. Lead-edge retaining guide motor is faulty.
3. Connector of the lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor
(S25) is disconnected.
4. Lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor is faulty.
7-83
code code
area
E56E -8002
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E578 -8001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E578 -8002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
Lead-edge retaining guide motor of paper folding unit
failed to return to HP (Paper Folding Unit)
The lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor failed to be ON
lead-edge retaining guide motor started to be driven while
the lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor was OFF.
1. Connector of the lead-edge retaining guide motor (M10)
is disconnected.
2. Lead-edge retaining guide motor is faulty.
3. Connector of the lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor
(S25) is disconnected.
4. Lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor is faulty.
Error in the paper return guide motor (Finisher-K1)
The paper return guide does not come off the paper
return guide HP sensor when the paper return guide
1. The connector of the paper return guide HP sensor
(S112) or the paper return guide motor (M112) are
disconnected.
2. The wiring of the paper return guide HP sensor or the
paper return guide motor are faulty.
3. The paper return guide HP sensor is faulty.
4. The paper return guide motor is faulty.
Error in the paper return guide motor (Finisher-K1)
The paper return guide HP sensor does not detect the
paper return guide when the paper return guide motor
1. The connector of the paper return guide HP sensor
(S112) or the paper return guide motor (M112) are
disconnected.
2. The wiring of the paper return guide HP sensor or the
paper return guide motor are faulty.
3. The paper return guide HP sensor is faulty.
4. The paper return guide motor is faulty.
7-83
7
code code
area
E57B -8001
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E57B -8002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E57C -8001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
Error in the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor
(Finisher-K1)
The paper trailing edge pushing guide does not come off
the paper trailing edge pushing guide HP sensor when
the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor has been
1. The connector of the paper trailing edge pushing guide
HP sensor (S113) or the paper trailing edge pushing
guide motor (M113) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the paper trailing edge pushing guide HP
sensor or the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor
are faulty.
3. The paper trailing edge pushing guide HP sensor is
faulty.
4. The paper trailing edge pushing guide motor is faulty.
Error in the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor
(Finisher-K1)
The paper trailing edge pushing guide HP sensor does
not detect the paper trailing edge pushing guide when the
paper trailing edge pushing guide motor has been driven
for 3 seconds.
1. The connector of the paper trailing edge pushing guide
HP sensor (S113) or the paper trailing edge pushing
guide motor (M113) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the paper trailing edge pushing guide HP
sensor or the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor
are faulty.
3. The paper trailing edge pushing guide HP sensor is
faulty.
4. The paper trailing edge pushing guide motor is faulty.
Error in the processing tray paper retainer motor
(Finisher-K1)
The paper retainer does not come off the paper retainer
HP sensor when the processing tray paper retainer motor
1. The connector of the paper retainer HP sensor (S135)
or the processing tray paper retainer motor (M118) are
disconnected.
2. The wiring of the paper retainer HP sensor or the
processing tray paper retainer motor are faulty.
3. The paper retainer HP sensor is faulty.
4. The processing tray paper retainer motor is faulty.
7-84
code code
area
E57C -8002
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E583 -8001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E583 -8002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
Error in the processing tray paper retainer motor
(Finisher-K1)
The paper retainer HP sensor does not detect the paper
retainer when the processing tray paper retainer motor
1. The connector of the paper retainer HP sensor (S135)
or the processing tray paper retainer motor (M118) are
disconnected.
2. The wiring of the paper retainer HP sensor or the
processing tray paper retainer motor are faulty.
3. The paper retainer HP sensor is faulty.
4. The processing tray paper retainer motor is faulty.
Error in the tray auxiliary guide motor (Finisher-K1)
The tray auxiliary guide does not come off the tray
auxiliary guide front/rear HP sensors when the tray
auxiliary guide motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
1. The connector of the tray auxiliary guide front HP
sensor (S137) or the tray auxiliary guide rear HP
sensor (S136) are disconnected.
2. The connector of the tray auxiliary guide motor (M120)
is disconnected.
3. The wiring of the tray auxiliary guide front HP sensor or
the tray auxiliary guide rear HP sensor are faulty.
4. The wiring of the tray auxiliary guide motor is faulty.
5. The tray auxiliary guide front HP sensor is faulty.
6. The tray auxiliary guide rear HP sensor is faulty.
7. The tray auxiliary guide motor is faulty.
Error in the tray auxiliary guide motor (Finisher-K1)
The tray auxiliary guide front/rear HP sensors does nor
detect the tray auxiliary guide when the tray auxiliary
guide motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
1. The connector of the tray auxiliary guide front HP
sensor (S137) or the tray auxiliary guide rear HP
sensor (S136) are disconnected.
2. The connector of the tray auxiliary guide motor (M120)
is disconnected.
3. The wiring of the tray auxiliary guide front HP sensor or
the tray auxiliary guide rear HP sensor are faulty.
4. The wiring of the tray auxiliary guide motor is faulty.
5. The tray auxiliary guide front HP sensor is faulty.
6. The tray auxiliary guide rear HP sensor is faulty.
7. The tray auxiliary guide motor is faulty.
7-84
7
code code
area
E584 -8001
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Error in the stack delivery lower/shutter motor

(Finisher-K1)
B. Shutter home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The shutter does not come off the shutter HP sensor
of detection when the stack delivery lower/shutter motor has been
B. The shutter does not leave the shutter home position
when the stack ejection motor has been driven for 3
seconds.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the shutter HP sensor (S106)
or the stack delivery lower/shutter motor (M122)
are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the shutter HP sensor or the stack
delivery lower/shutter motor are faulty.
A-3. The shutter HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The stack delivery lower/shutter motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The shutter home position sensor (PI113) is faulty.
and stack ejection motor, and between the finisher
controller PCB and shutter clutch is faulty.
B-3. The shutter mechanism is faulty.
B-4. The stack ejection motor (M102)/the shutter clutch
(CL101)/the stack ejection lower roller clutch
(CL102) are faulty.
7-85
code code
area
E584 -8002
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E584 -8003
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
A. Error in the stack delivery lower/shutter motor
(Finisher-K1)
B. Shutter home position error (Finisher-L1)
A. The shutter HP sensor does not detect the shutter
when the stack delivery lower/shutter motor has been
B. The shutter does not return to the shutter home
position when the stack ejection motor has been driven
for 3 seconds.
A:
A-1. The connector of the shutter HP sensor (S106)
or the stack delivery lower/shutter motor (M122)
are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the shutter HP sensor or the stack
delivery lower/shutter motor are faulty.
A-3. The shutter HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The stack delivery lower/shutter motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The shutter home position sensor (PI113) is faulty.
and stack ejection motor, and between the finisher
controller PCB and shutter clutch is faulty.
B-3. The shutter mechanism is faulty.
B-4. The stack ejection motor (M102)/the shutter clutch
(CL101)/the stack ejection lower roller clutch
(CL102) are faulty.
Error in the stack delivery lower/shutter motor
(Finisher-K1)
The shutter does not come off the shutter close detection
sensor when the stack delivery lower/shutter motor has
1. The connector of the shutter close detection sensor
(S148)/the stack delivery lower/shutter motor (M122)
are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the shutter close detection sensor / the
stack delivery lower/shutter motor are faulty.
3. The shutter close detection sensor is faulty.
4. The stack delivery lower/shutter motor is faulty.
7-85
7
code code
area
E584 -8004
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E590 -8001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
Error in the stack delivery lower/shutter motor
(Finisher-K1)
The shutter close detection sensor does not detect the
shutter when the stack delivery lower/shutter motor has
1. The connector of the shutter close detection sensor
(S148)/the stack delivery lower/shutter motor (M122)
are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the shutter close detection sensor / the
stack delivery lower/shutter motor are faulty.
3. The shutter close detection sensor is faulty.
4. The stack delivery lower/shutter motor is faulty.
A. Error in the Punch motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Punch home position error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
A. During initialization, the punch HP sensor does not
detect the puncher when the punch motor has been
driven for 0.5 second after the puncher has come off
the punch HP sensor.
After initialization, the punch motor does not return to
home position.
B. The puncher does not detect the punch home position
sensor when the puncher motor has been driven for
200 msec.
A:
A-1. The connector of the punch HP sensor
(S104) or the punch motor clock sensor (S105)
are disconnected.
A-2. The connector of the punch motor (M102) is
disconnected.
A-3. The wiring of the punch HP sensor or the punch
motor clock sensor are faulty.
A-4. The wiring of the punch motor is faulty.
A-5. The punch HP sensor is faulty.
A-6. The punch motor clock sensor is faulty.
A-7. The punch motor is faulty.
A-8. The puncher driver PCB (PCB1) is faulty.
B:
B-1. The punch home position sensor (PI63) and
punch motor clock sensor (PI62) is faulty.
B-2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and
sensor is faulty.
B-3. The punch mechanism is faulty.
B-4. The punch motor (M61) is faulty.
7-86
code code
area
E590 -8002
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Error in the Punch motor (Finisher-K1)

B. Punch home position error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
Description A. The puncher does not come off the punch HP sensor
of detection when the punch motor has been driven for 0.2 second.
The puncher does not come off the punch HP sensor
during initialization.
B. After the motor has been stopped at time of punch
motor initialization, the puncher does not detect punch
home position sensor.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the punch HP sensor (S104) or
the punch motor clock sensor (S105) are
disconnected.
A-2. The connector of the punch motor (M102) is
disconnected.
A-3. The wiring of the punch HP sensor or the punch
motor clock sensor are faulty.
A-4. The wiring of the punch motor is faulty.
A-5. The punch HP sensor is faulty.
A-6. The punch motor clock sensor is faulty.
A-7. The punch motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The punch home position sensor (PI63) and
punch motor clock sensor (PI62) is faulty.
sensor is faulty.
B-3. The punch mechanism is faulty.
B-4. The punch motor (M61) is faulty.
7-86
7
code code
area
E590 -8003
-05
E591 -0001
-05
E591 -0002
-05
E591 -8001
-05
Items
Description
Title
Error in the Punch motor (Finisher-K1)
Description The puncher does not come off the punch HP sensor
of detection when the punch motor has been driven for 0.2 second.
The puncher does not come off the punch HP sensor
during initialization.
Measures 1. The connector of the punch HP sensor (S104)/the
punch motor clock sensor (S105) are disconnected.
2. The connector of the punch motor (M102) is
disconnected.
3. The wiring of the punch HP sensor or the punch motor
clock sensor are faulty.
4. The wiring of the punch motor is faulty.
5. The punch HP sensor is faulty.
6. The punch motor clock sensor is faulty.
7. The punch motor is faulty.
8. The puncher driver PCB (PCB1) is faulty.
Title
Upper limit error with Punch Waste Sensor (Puncher
Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
Description The light-receiving voltage was 3.0V or less despite
of detection increase in sensor light-emission.
Remedy
1. Failure of Punch Waste Sensor (PCB2).
2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1).
Title
Lower limit error with Punch Waste Sensor (Puncher
Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
Description The light-receiving voltage was 2.0V or more despite
of detection reduction in sensor light-emission.
Remedy
1. Failure of Punch Waste Sensor (PCB2).
Title
Scrap full detection error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
Description The voltage of the light received is 3.0 V or less even
of detection when the light emitting duty of the scrap full detector
sensor has been increased to 66 % or more.
Measures 1. The wiring between the scrap full detector PCB and
punch controller PCB is faulty.
2. The scrap full detector PCB is faulty.
3. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
7-87
code code
area
E591 -8002
-05
E592 -0003
-05
E592 -0004
-05
E592 -0005
-05
E592 -0006
-05
Items
Description
Title
Scrap full detection error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even
of detection when the light emitting duty of the scrap full detector
sensor has been decreased to 0 %.
Measures 1. The scrap full detector PCB is faulty.
Title
Upper limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor
(B5R) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR5) was 2.5V or less
of detection despite increase in sensor light-emission (LED5).
Remedy
1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/
PCB4)
Title
Lower limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor
(B5R) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR5) was 2.0V or more
of detection despite reduction in sensor light-emission (LED5).
Remedy
PCB4)
Title
(A4R) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR1) was 2.5V or less
of detection despite increase in sensor light-emission (LED1).
Remedy
PCB4)
Title
(A4R) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR1) was 2.0V or more
of detection despite reduction in sensor light-emission (LED1).
Remedy
PCB4)
7-87
7
code code
area
E592 -0007
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
E592 -0008
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
E592 -0009
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
E592 -000A
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
E592 -000B
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
Description
(B4) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
The light-receiving voltage (PTR2) was 2.5V or less
despite increase in sensor light-emission (LED2).
PCB4)
(B4) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
The light-receiving voltage (PTR2) was 2.0V or more
despite reduction in sensor light-emission (LED2).
PCB4)
(LDR) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
PCB4)
(LDR) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
PCB4)
(A3) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
PCB4)
7-88
code code
area
E592 -000C
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
E592 -8001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E592 -8002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E592 -8003
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E592 -8004
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
(A3) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
PCB4)
Trailing edge sensor error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even
when the light emitting duty of the trailing edge sensor
(LED5, PTR5) has been increased to 66 % or more.
1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB
and punch controller PCB is faulty.
2. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty.
Trailing edge sensor error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even
when the light emitting duty of the trailing edge sensor
has been decreased to 0 %.
1. The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty.
Horizontal registration sensor 1 error (External 2 Hole
Puncher)
when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration
sensor 1 (LED1, PTR1) has been increased to 66 % or
more.
Puncher)
sensor 1 (LED1, PTR1) has been decreased to 0 %.
7-88
7
code code
area
E592 -8005
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E592 -8006
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E592 -8007
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E592 -8008
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
Puncher)
more.
Puncher)
1. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty.
Puncher)
more.
Puncher)
1) The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty.
2) The punch controller PCB is faulty.
3) The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
7-89
code code
area
E592 -8009
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E592 -800A
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
Puncher)
more.
Puncher)
7-89
7
code code
area
E593 -8001
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Error in the punch slide motor (Finisher-K1)

B. Horizontal registration home position error (External 2
Hole Puncher)
Description A. The punch unit does not come off the horizontal
of detection registration HP sensor when the punch slide motor has
been driven for 0.68 second.
B. At time of horizontal registration motor initialization, the
punch slide unit does not leave the horizontal home
position sensor even when it has been driven for 9
mm.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the horizontal registration HP
sensor (S101) or the punch slide motor (M101)
are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the horizontal registration HP sensor
or the punch slide motor are faulty.
A-3. The horizontal registration HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The punch slide motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The horizontal registration home position (PI61) is
faulty.
sensor is faulty.
B-3. The horizontal registration mechanism is faulty.
B-4. The horizontal registration motor (M62) is faulty.
code code
area
E593 -8002
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E5A3 -0001
7-90
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
A. Error in the punch slide motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Horizontal registration home position error (External 2
Hole Puncher)
A. The horizontal registration HP sensor does not detect
the punch unit when the punch slide motor has been
driven for 3.3 seconds.
B. At time of horizontal registration motor initialization,
the punch slide unit does not return to the horizontal
registration home position sensor even when the unit
has been driven for 37 mm.
A:
A-1. The connector of the horizontal registration HP
sensor (S101) or the punch slide motor (M101)
are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the horizontal registration HP sensor
or the punch slide motor are faulty.
A-3. The horizontal registration HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The punch slide motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The horizontal registration home position (PI61) is
faulty.
sensor is faulty.
B-3. The horizontal registration mechanism is faulty.
B-4. The horizontal registration motor (M62) is faulty.
Error in the registration motor (Finisher-K1)
The registration HP sensor does not turn ON when the
registration motor has been driven for 2.933 seconds.
1. The connector of the registration HP sensor (S105) or
the registration motor (M102) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the registration HP sensor/the registration
motor are faulty.
3. The registration HP sensor is faulty.
4. The registration motor is faulty.
5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty.
7-90
7
code code
area
E5A3 -0002
-05
E5A4 -8001
-05
E5A4 -8002
-05
E5AA -8001
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Error in the registration motor (Finisher-K1)

The registration HP sensor does not turn OFF when the
registration motor has been driven for 0.67 msecond.
1. The connector of the registration HP sensor (S105) or
the registration motor (M102) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the registration HP sensor/the registration
motor are faulty.
3. The registration HP sensor is faulty.
4. The registration motor is faulty.
Title
Error in the press motor (Finisher-K1)
Description The press motor HP sensor does not turn ON when the
of detection press motor has been driven for 0.926 second.
Measures 1. The connector of the press motor HP sensor (S106) or
the press motor (M105) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the press motor HP sensor/the press
motor are faulty.
3. The press motor HP sensor is faulty.
4. The press motor is faulty.
Title
Error in the press motor (Finisher-K1)
Description The press motor HP sensor does not turn OFF.
of detection
Measures 1. The connector of the press motor HP sensor (S106) or
the press motor (M105) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the press motor HP sensor/the press
motor are faulty.
3. The press motor HP sensor is faulty.
4. The press motor is faulty.
Title
Error in the cutter motor (Finisher-K1)
Description The home position of the trimming blade is not detected
of detection when the cutter motor has been driven for 5 sec.
Measures 1. The connector of the cutter motor clock sensor (S108)
or the cutter motor (M106) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the cutter motor clock sensor/the cutter
motor are faulty.
3. The cutter motor clock sensor is faulty.
4. The cutter motor is faulty.
7-91
code code
area
E5AA -8002
-05
E5AA -8003
-05
E5AE -8000
-05
E5BA -8001
-05
Items
Description
Title
Error in the cutter motor (Finisher-K1)
Description The cutter motor clock sensor does not come off the
of detection home position of the trimming blade when the cutter
motor are faulty.
Title
Cutter motor clock error (Finisher-K1)
Description The cutter motor clock sensor does not detect the motor
of detection clock when the cutter motor has been driven for 0.625
second.
motor are faulty.
Title
Trimmer stationary paper error
Description The inlet sensor detects the stationary paper after
of detection performing the paper delivery operation.
Measures 1. The paper has jammed in the trimmer.
2. The connector of the inlet sensor (S101) is
disconnected.
3. The wire of the inlet sensor is faulty.
4. The inlet sensor is faulty.
Title
Error in the front estrangement motor (Finisher-K1)
Description The front estrangement motor HP sensor does not turn
of detection ON when the front estrangement motor has been driven
for 0.191 second.
Measures 1. The connector of the front estrangement motor HP
sensor (S102) or the front estrangement motor (M103)
are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the front estrangement motor HP sensor/
the front estrangement motor are faulty.
3. The front estrangement motor HP sensor is faulty.
4. The front estrangement motor is faulty.
7-91
7
code code
area
E5BA -8002
E5BA -8011
E5BA -8012
E5BB -8001
-05
-05
-05
-05
Items
Description
Title
Error in the front estrangement motor (Finisher-K1)
Description The front estrangement motor HP sensor does not turn
of detection OFF when the front estrangement motor has been driven
for 0.724 second after the front estrangement motor HP
sensor has turned ON.
Measures 1. The connector of the front estrangement motor HP
sensor (S102) or the front estrangement motor (M103)
are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the front estrangement motor HP sensor/
the front estrangement motor are faulty.
3. The front estrangement motor HP sensor is faulty.
4. The front estrangement motor is faulty.
Title
Error in the rear estrangement motor (Finisher-K1)
Description The rear estrangement motor HP sensor does not turn
of detection ON when the rear estrangement motor has been driven
for 0.18 second.
Measures 1. The connector of the rear estrangement motor HP
sensor (S104) or the rear estrangement motor (M104)
are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the rear estrangement motor HP sensor/
the rear estrangement motor are faulty.
3. The rear estrangement motor HP sensor is faulty.
4. The rear estrangement motor is faulty.
Title
Error in the rear estrangement motor (Finisher-K1)
Description The rear estrangement motor HP sensor does not turn
of detection OFF when the rear estrangement motor has been driven
for 0.537 second.
Measures 1. The connector of the rear estrangement motor HP
sensor (S104) or the rear estrangement motor (M104)
are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the rear estrangement motor HP sensor/
the rear estrangement motor are faulty.
3. The rear estrangement motor HP sensor is faulty.
4. The rear estrangement motor is faulty.
Title
Error in the waste paper full sensor (Finisher-K1)
Description The A/D input value does not enter into the D/A output
of detection upper limit of the waste paper full sensor.
Measures 1. The connector of the waste paper full sensor (emitting/
receiving) (S011) is disconnected.
2. The wire of the waste paper full sensor is faulty.
3. The waste paper full sensor is faulty.
7-92
code code
area
Items
Description
Error in the waste paper full sensor (Finisher-K1)
The A/D input value does not enter into the D/A output
lower limit of the waste paper full sensor.
1. The connector of the waste paper full sensor (emitting/
receiving) (S011) is disconnected.
2. The wire of the waste paper full sensor is faulty.
3. The waste paper full sensor is faulty.
Tray lift motor of paper folding unit failed to go through
HP (Document Insertion Unit)
The paper feed sensor (S3) did not turned ON when the
inserter paper feed tray moved up.
1. Connector of the motor (M2) is disconnected
2. Upper stopper motor is faulty
3. Connector of the Paper feed sensor (S3) is
disconnected
4. Paper feed sensor is faulty
Tray lift motor of paper folding unit failed to return to HP
(Document Insertion Unit)
During initialization or lowering of the inserter paper feed
tray, the tray lower limit sensor (S5) has not turned ON
within the specified pulses.
1. The connector of the tray lift motor (M2) is
disconnected.
2. The tray lift motor is faulty.
3. The connector of the tray lower limit sensor (S5) is
disconnected.
4. The tray lower limit sensor is faulty.
Tray lift motor of paper folding unit failed to go through
HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit)
The paper feed sensor (S3) did not turned ON when the
inserter paper feed tray moved up.
disconnected.
3. The connector of the paper feed sensor (S3) is
disconnected.
4. The Paper feed sensor is faulty.
E5BB -8002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E5E1 -0001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E5E1 -0002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E5E1 -8001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
7-92
7
code code
area
E5E1 -8002
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E5F0 -8001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
Tray lift motor of paper folding unit failed to return to HP
(Document Insertion Folding Unit)
During initialization or lowering of the inserter paper feed
tray, the tray lower limit sensor (S5) has not turned ON
within the specified pulses.
disconnected.
3. The connector of the tray lower limit sensor (S5) is
disconnected.
4. The tray lower limit sensor is faulty.
A. Error in the saddle lead edge stopper motor
(Finisher-K1)
B. Paper positioning plate home position error
(Finisher-L1)
A: The saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor does not
detect the saddle lead edge stopper when the saddle
lead edge stopper has been moved for 182 mm by
saddle lead edge stopper motor.
B: The paper positioning plate home position sensor does
not turn ON when the paper positioning plate motor
has been driven for 1500 pulses.
A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle lead edge stopper HP
sensor (S205) or the saddle lead edge stopper
motor (M203) are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the saddle lead edge stopper HP
sensor/the saddle lead edge stopper motor are
faulty.
A-3. The saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The saddle lead edge stopper motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The paper positioning plate home position sensor
(PI7) is faulty.
B-2. The positioning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
B-3. The paper positioning plate motor (M4) is faulty.
7-93
code code
area
E5F0 -8002
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Error in the saddle lead edge stopper motor

(Finisher-K1)
B. Paper positioning plate home position error
(Finisher-L1)
Description A. The saddle lead edge stopper does not come off the
of detection saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor when the saddle
lead edge stopper motor has been driven for 50 pulses.
B. The paper positioning plate home position sensor does
not turn OFF when the paper positioning plate motor
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle lead edge stopper HP
sensor (S205) or the saddle lead edge stopper
A-2. The wiring of the saddle lead edge stopper HP
sensor/the saddle lead edge stopper motor are
faulty.
A-3. The saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The saddle lead edge stopper motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The paper positioning plate home position sensor
(PI7) is faulty.
B-2. The positioning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
B-3. The paper positioning plate motor (M4) is faulty.
7-93
7
code code
area
E5F1 -8001
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Saddle folder/feeder motor clock error (Finisher-K1)

B. Paper folding motor clock error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The drive speed of the saddle folder/feeder motor is
of detection less than 5 mm/sec.
B. The feed speed of the paper fold roller reaches 5 mm/
sec or less.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle folder/feeder motor
sensor (S214) or the saddle folder/feeder motor
A-2. The wiring of the saddle folder/feeder motor
sensor or the saddle folder/feeder motor are
faulty.
A-3. The saddle folder/feeder motor sensor is faulty.
A-4. The saddle folder/feeder motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and
paper folding home position sensor (PI21) is
faulty.
B-2. The paper folding roller drive mechanism is faulty.
B-3. The paper folding motor (M2) is faulty.
7-94
code code
area
E5F1 -8002
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E5F2 -8001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
A. Error in the saddle folder/feeder motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Paper fold home position error (Finisher-L1)
A. The saddle folder HP sensor does not detect the home
position of the paper fold roller during initialization.
B. The status of the paper fold home position sensor does
not change when the paper fold motor has been driven
for 3 seconds.
A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle folder HP sensor
(S229) or the saddle folder/feeder motor (M206)
are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the saddle folder HP sensor/the
saddle folder/feeder motor are faulty.
A-3. The saddle folder HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The saddle folder/feeder motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and
paper folding home position sensor (PI21) is
faulty.
B-2. The paper folding roller drive mechanism is faulty.
B-3. The paper folding motor (M2) is faulty.
A. Error in the saddle roller guide motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Guide home position error (Finisher-L1)
A. The saddle roller guide HP sensor does not detect the
saddle roller guide when the saddle roller guide has
been moved for 20 mm by saddle roller guide motor.
B. The guide home position sensor does not turn ON
when the guide motor has been driven for 700 pulses.
A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle roller guide HP
sensor (S207) or the saddle roller guide motor
A-2. The wiring of the saddle roller guide HP sensor/
the saddle roller guide motor are faulty.
A-3. The saddle roller guide HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The saddle roller guide motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The guide home position sensor (PI13) is faulty.
B-2. The guide plate drive mechanism is faulty.
B-3. The guide Motor (M3) is faulty.
7-94
7
code code
area
E5F2 -8002
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Error in the saddle roller guide motor (Finisher-K1)

B. Guide home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The saddle roller guide does not come off the saddle
of detection roller guide HP sensor when the saddle roller guide
motor has been driven for 50 pulses.
B. The guide home position sensor does not turn OFF
when the guide motor has been driven for 50 pulses.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle roller guide HP
sensor (S207) or the saddle roller guide motor
A-2. The wiring of the saddle roller guide HP sensor/
the saddle roller guide motor are faulty.
A-3. The saddle roller guide HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The saddle roller guide motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The guide home position sensor (PI13) is faulty.
B-2. The guide plate drive mechanism is faulty.
B-3. The guide Motor (M3) is faulty.
7-95
code code
area
E5F3 -8001
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Error in the saddle alignment guide motor (Finisher-K1)

B. Aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The saddle alignment plate HP sensor does not detect
of detection the saddle alignment guide when the saddle alignment
guide has been moved for 177 mm by saddle
alignment guide motor.
B. The aligning plate home position sensor does not turn
ON when the aligning plate motor has been driven for
500 pulses.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle alignment plate HP
sensor (S206) or the saddle alignment guide
A-2. The wiring of the saddle alignment plate HP
sensor/the saddle alignment guide motor are
faulty.
A-3. The saddle alignment plate HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The saddle alignment guide motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The aligning plate home position sensor (PI5) is
faulty.
B-2. The aligning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
B-3. The aligning motor (M5) is faulty.
7-95
7
code code
area
E5F3 -8002
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Error in the saddle alignment guide motor (Finisher-K1)

B. Aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The saddle alignment guide does not come off the
of detection saddle alignment plate HP sensor when the saddle
alignment guide motor has been driven for 50 pulses.
B. The aligning plate home position sensor does not turn
OFF when the aligning plate motor has been driven for
50 pulses.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle alignment plate HP
sensor (S206) or the saddle alignment guide
A-2. The wiring of the saddle alignment plate HP
sensor/the saddle alignment guide motor are
faulty.
A-3. The saddle alignment plate HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The saddle alignment guide motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The aligning plate home position sensor (PI5) is
faulty.
B-2. The aligning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
B-3. The aligning motor (M5) is faulty.
7-96
code code
area
E5F4 -8001
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E5F4 -8002
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
A. Error in the saddle stitcher motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Stitcher (rear) home position error (Finisher-L1)
A. The saddle stitcher HP sensor does not detect the
saddle stitcher unit when the saddle stitcher motor has
B. The stitching home position sensor does not turn ON
when the stitch motor (rear) has been driven backward
for 0.5 second.
A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle stitcher HP sensor
(S223) or the saddle stitcher motor (M209) are
disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the saddle stitcher HP sensor/the
saddle stitcher motor are faulty.
A-3. The saddle stitcher HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The saddle stitcher motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The stitcher home position sensor (rear) (SW5) is
faulty.
B-2. The stitcher (rear) is faulty.
A. Error in the saddle stitcher motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Stitcher (rear) home position error (Finisher-L1)
A. The saddle stitcher unit does not come off the saddle
stitcher HP sensor when the saddle stitcher motor has
B. The stitching home position sensor does not turn OFF
when the stitch motor (rear) has been driven forward
for 0.5 second.
A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle stitcher HP sensor
(S223) or the saddle stitcher motor (M209) are
disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the saddle stitcher HP sensor/the
saddle stitcher motor are faulty.
A-3. The saddle stitcher HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The saddle stitcher motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The stitcher home position sensor (rear) (SW5) is
faulty.
B-2. The stitcher (rear) is faulty.
7-96
7
code code
area
E5F5 -8001
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Error in the saddle trailing edge retainer motor

(Finisher-K1)
B. Stitcher (front) home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor does
of detection not detect the saddle trailing edge retainer when the
saddle trailing edge retainer has been moved for 96
mm by saddle trailing edge retainer motor.
B. The stitching home position sensor does not turn ON
when the stitch motor (front) has been driven forward
for 0.5 second.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle trailing edge retainer
move HP sensor (S219) or the saddle trailing
edge retainer motor (M210) are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the saddle trailing edge retainer
move HP sensor/the saddle trailing edge retainer
motor are faulty.
A-3. The saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor
is faulty.
A-4. The saddle trailing edge retainer motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The stitcher home position sensor (front) (SW7) is
faulty.
B-2. The stitcher (front) is faulty.
7-97
code code
area
E5F5 -8002
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Error in the saddle trailing edge retainer motor

(Finisher-K1)
B. Stitcher (front) home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The saddle trailing edge retainer does not come off the
of detection saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor when the
saddle trailing edge retainer motor has been driven for
50 pulses.
B. The stitching home position sensor does not turn OFF
when the stitch motor (front) has been driven backward
for 0.5 second.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle trailing edge retainer
move HP sensor (S219) or the saddle trailing
edge retainer motor (M210) are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the saddle trailing edge retainer
move HP sensor/the saddle trailing edge retainer
motor are faulty.
A-3. The saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor
is faulty.
A-4. The saddle trailing edge retainer motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The stitcher home position sensor (front) (SW7) is
faulty.
B-2. The stitcher (front) is faulty.
7-97
7
code code
area
E5F6 -8001
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Error in the saddle paper push-on plate motor

(Finisher-K1)
B. Paper pushing plate home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor does not
of detection detect the saddle paper push-on plate when the saddle
paper push-on plate motor has been driven for 0.5
second.
B. The paper pushing plate home position sensor does
not turn ON when the paper pushing plate motor has
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle paper push-on plate
HP sensor (S218) or the saddle paper push-on
plate motor (M205) are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the saddle paper push-on plate HP
sensor/the saddle paper push-on plate motor are
faulty.
A-3. The saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor is
faulty.
A-4. The saddle paper push-on plate motor is faulty.
B:
B-1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor
(PI14), paper pushing plate top position sensor
(PI15), and paper pushing plate motor clock
sensor (PI1) is faulty.
B-2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is
faulty.
B-3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8)
7-98
code code
area
E5F6 -8002
-05
Items
Description
Title
A. Error in the saddle paper push-on plate motor

(Finisher-K1)
B. Paper pushing plate home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The saddle paper push-on plate does not come off
of detection the saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor when the
saddle paper push-on plate motor has been driven for
0.15 second.
B. The paper pushing plate home position sensor does
not turn OFF when the paper pushing plate motor has
been driven for 150 msecond.
Measures A:
HP sensor (S218) or the saddle paper push-on
A-2. The wiring of the saddle paper push-on plate HP
sensor/the saddle paper push-on plate motor are
faulty.
A-3. The saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor is
faulty.
B:
faulty.
B-3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8)
7-98
7
code code
area
E5F6 -8003
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E5F6 -8004
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
A. Saddle paper push-on plate motor clock error
(Finisher-K1)
B. Paper pushing plate motor clock error (Finisher-L1)
A. The drive speed of the saddle paper push-on plate
motor is less than 6 clocks.
B. The number of pulses detected by the paper pushing
plate motor clock sensor is 6 pulses or less.
A:
motor sensor (S213) or the saddle paper push-on
A-2. The wiring of the saddle paper push-on plate
motor sensor/the saddle paper push-on plate
motor are faulty.
A-3. The saddle paper push-on plate motor sensor is
faulty.
B:
faulty.
B-3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty.
Pushing position error (Finisher-L1)
The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor
does not turn ON when the paper pushing plate motor
has been driven for 0.1 second.
1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14)/
paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15)/paper
pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) are faulty.
2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty.
7-99
code code
area
E5F6 -8005
-05
E5F7 -8001
-05
E5F7 -8002
-05
Items
Description
Title
Pushing position error (Finisher-L1)
Description The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor
of detection does not turn OFF when the paper pushing plate motor
has been driven for 0.5 second.
Measures 1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14)/
paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15)/paper
pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) are faulty.
2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty.
Title
Error in the saddle trailing edge retainer motor
(Finisher-K1)
Description The saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor does not
of detection detect the saddle trailing edge retainer when the saddle
trailing edge retainer motor has been driven for 80 pulses.
Measures 1. The connector of the saddle trailing edge retainer
HP sensor (S221) or the saddle trailing edge retainer
2. The wiring of the saddle trailing edge retainer HP
sensor/the saddle trailing edge retainer motor are
faulty.
3. The saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor is faulty.
4. The saddle trailing edge retainer motor is faulty.
Title
Error in the saddle trailing edge retainer motor
(Finisher-K1)
Description The saddle trailing edge retainer does not come off the
of detection saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor when the saddle
trailing edge retainer motor has been driven for 50 pulses.
Measures 1. The connector of the saddle trailing edge retainer
HP sensor (S221) or the saddle trailing edge retainer
2. The wiring of the saddle trailing edge retainer HP
sensor/the saddle trailing edge retainer motor are
faulty.
3. The saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor is faulty.
4. The saddle trailing edge retainer motor is faulty.
7-99
7
code code
area
E5F8 -8001
-05
E5F8 -8002
-05
E5F9 -8001
-05
Items
Description
Title
Error in the saddle tapping motor (Finisher-K1)
Description The saddle paper tapping HP sensor does not detect the
of detection saddle tapping plate when the saddle tapping motor has
been driven for 50 pulses.
Measures 1. The connector of the saddle paper tapping HP sensor
(S215) or the saddle tapping motor (M213) are
disconnected.
2. The wiring of the saddle paper tapping HP sensor/the
saddle tapping motor are faulty.
3. The saddle paper tapping HP sensor is faulty.
4. The saddle tapping motor is faulty.
Title
Error in the saddle tapping motor (Finisher-K1)
Description The saddle tapping plate does not come off the saddle
of detection paper tapping HP sensor when the saddle tapping motor
Measures 1. The connector of the saddle paper tapping HP sensor
(S215) or the saddle tapping motor (M213) are
disconnected.
2. The wiring of the saddle paper tapping HP sensor/the
saddle tapping motor are faulty.
3. The saddle paper tapping HP sensor is faulty.
4. The saddle tapping motor is faulty.
Title
Error in the saddle lead-in roller disengage motor
(Finisher-K1)
Description The saddle lead-in roller HP sensor does not detect
of detection the saddle lead-in roller when the saddle lead-in roller
disengage motor has been driven for 50 pulses.
Measures 1. The connector of the saddle lead-in roller HP sensor
(S222) or the saddle lead-in roller disengage motor
2. The wiring of the saddle lead-in roller HP sensor/the
saddle lead-in roller disengage motor are faulty.
3. The saddle lead-in roller HP sensor is faulty.
4. The saddle lead-in roller disengage motor is faulty.
7-100
code code
area
E5F9 -8002
-05
Items
Description
Title
Error in the saddle lead-in roller disengage motor

(Finisher-K1)
Description The saddle lead-in roller does not come off the saddle
of detection lead-in roller HP sensor when the saddle lead-in roller
disengage motor has been driven for 50 pulses.
Measures 1. The connector of the saddle lead-in roller HP sensor
(S222) or the saddle lead-in roller disengage motor
2. The wiring of the saddle lead-in roller HP sensor/the
saddle lead-in roller disengage motor are faulty.
3. The saddle lead-in roller HP sensor is faulty.
4. The saddle lead-in roller disengage motor is faulty.
T-7-11
7-100
E602
code code
area
E602 -0001
-00
E602 -0002
-00
Items
Description
code code
area
E602 -0003
Title
Error in HDD
Description HDD failed to be recognized. Startup partition
(BOOTDEV) failed to be found at startup.
Remedy
1. Turn OFF the main switch and check connection of
HDD cable, and then turn ON the main switch.
2. If the Encryption Board has been installed, there may
be an Encryption Board failure. In this case, disconnect
the signal cable connecting to the Encryption
Board and directly connect to the HDD. (It cannot
be connected from the back side. Open the Main
Controller Cover, and connect by going over the Main
Controller PCB 1.) After connecting, power on by the
safe mode. If the machine starts normally, replace the
Encryption Board as the Encryption Board had failed.
3. Be sure that HDD spins stably (no problem in drive
sound) and 5V/12V power is supplied when the main
power is turned ON. (If the drive sound is abnormal,
replace the HDD.)
4. Replace the HDD and reinstall the system. (In the case
of using a USB memory device, insert a USB memory
device where the system software has been registered
to the slot of the host machine, and then execute main
menu [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all).)
5. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no system for the main CPU
Remedy
1. Start in Safe Mode, then perform overall format
using SST or USB memory and reinstall the system,
and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Switch.
(Prepare the USB memory which system software was
registered. Insert the USB memory to the equipment.
Execute [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite All) in the main
menu.)
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can
be caused by failure with HDD; therefore, replace the
HDD and reinstall the system.
7-101
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort was detected with BootDevice
Remedy
1. Execute detection and recovery of WriteAbortSector
<In the case of display of B/W E-code>
1-1. Perform the following steps because Service
Mode is not available.
1-2. Turn OFF the power. Then, while pressing 1+9
keys, turn ON the power. WriteAbortSector
recovery routine is automatically started which
makes the screen black.
1-3. After a while, progress is displayed because the
process takes time (40 to 50 min.). The process is
complete when the screen turns white.
<In the case of official display of wrench-mark>
1-1. Set as follows: CHK-TYPE=0; and execute
HD-CHECK (40 to 50 min.), and then turn OFF
and then ON the main switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
up in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST
or USB memory and reinstall the system, and then turn
OFF and then ON the main switch.
3. If no improvement is found despite the above
measures, it can be caused by failure with HDD;
therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.
7-101
7
code code
area
E602 -0006
-00
E602 -0007
-00
E602 -0009
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no system for the sub CPU
Remedy
Reinstall the system software. For details, see Chapter 6:
Upgrading.
For your reference, the method using USB memory is
described below.
1. Prepare the USB memory which system software was
registered.
2. Execute the following service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD to enter
the download mode. (When it is not operated normally,
start the safe mode.)
3. Insert the USB memory to the equipment.
4. Execute [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite All) in the main menu.
(Be sure to download SYSTEM, LANGUAGE and
RUI.)
5. System software is downloaded and the machine
restarts automatically. At this time, if the machine
restarts with the safe mode, E753 might occurs.
Check the log. In case of the system software of the
options which are not connected, turn OFF and then
ON the power supply to restore. (For details, see the
description for E753.)
code code
area
E602 -0010
-00
E602 -0011
-00
E602 -0012
-00
If the measures above do not solve the problem, replace

the HDD and download the system software with the
foregoing method.
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no ICCProfile
Remedy
1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the system using
SST; and then turn OFF and then ON the main power
switch.
be caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace
the HDD and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no Font file in /BOOTDEV/BOOT
Remedy
switch.
7-102
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no Chinese, Korean, and Taiwan font files
Remedy
switch.
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no Chinese, Korean, and Taiwan font files
Remedy
switch.
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no file in which the Web browser refers to
Remedy
1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the Web browser
using SST, and then turn OFF and then ON the main
power switch.
7-102
7
code code
area
E602 -0101
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of image data (Inbox, etc.) (at
startup)
Remedy
When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then
ON the power, ask the followings to user.
A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although
data is deleted
B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility
that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may
not be able to be protected in the worst case.)
7-103
code code
area
E602 -0111
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of image data (Inbox, etc.) (after
startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition)
2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHKTYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CHECK, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Back up necessary data.
turn OFF and then ON the power.(Deletion of the
corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some
cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.
Note:
7-103
7
code code
area
E602 -0201
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in management data area of image (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
7-104
code code
area
E602 -0211
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in management data area of image (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
Note:
7-104
7
code code
area
E602 -0301
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Storage area of image data (temporary data) (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
code code
area
E602 -0311
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
7-105
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Storage area of image data (temporary data) (after
startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
7-105
7
code code
area
E602 -0401
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in thumbnail area (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
7-106
code code
area
E602 -0411
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in thumbnail area (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
Note:
7-106
7
code code
area
E602 -0501
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of universal data (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
7-107
code code
area
E602 -0511
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of universal data (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
Note:
7-107
7
code code
area
E602 -0601
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of universal data (temporary data) (at
startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
7-108
code code
area
E602 -0611
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of universal data (temporary data)
(after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
Note:
7-108
7
code code
area
E602 -0701
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of fax (temporary data) (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
code code
area
E602 -0711
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
7-109
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of fax (temporary data) (after
startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
7-109
7
code code
area
E602 -0801
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of PSS (temporary data) (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
code code
area
E602 -0811
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
7-110
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of PSS (temporary data) (after
startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
7-110
7
code code
area
E602 -0901
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of PDL-related file (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
7-111
code code
area
E602 -0911
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of PDL-related file (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
Note:
7-111
7
code code
area
E602 -1001
-00
E602 -1011
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of firmware (BOOTDEV) (at startup)
Remedy
If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON
the power,
1. Format the BOOTDEV using SST or USB, and
download the firmware.
2. Replace the HDD.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of firmware (BOOTDEV) (after
startup)
Remedy
the power,
1. Format the BOOTDEV using SST or USB, and
download the firmware.
2. Replace the HDD.
7-112
code code
area
E602 -1101
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in MEAP area (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
Enter CHK-TYPE=11, execute HD-CHECK, and
then turn OFF and then ON the power.
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
7-112
7
code code
area
E602 -1111
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in MEAP area (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
code code
area
E602 -1201
-00
E602 -1211
-00
E602 -1301
-00
E602 -1311
-00
Note:
7-113
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in Send area (at startup)
Remedy
the power,
3. Format the all using SST or USB, and download the
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in Send area (after startup)
Remedy
the power,
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in MEAP area (at startup)
Remedy
the power,
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in MEAP area (after startup)
Remedy
the power,
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
7-113
7
code code
area
E602 -1401
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of system log (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
7-114
code code
area
E602 -1411
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of system log (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
Note:
7-114
7
code code
area
E602 -1501
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in Advanced Box area (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
7-115
code code
area
E602 -1511
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in Advanced Box area (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
Note:
7-115
7
code code
area
E602 -1601
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in CDS area (at startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
7-116
code code
area
E602 -1611
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in CDS area (after startup)
Remedy
data is deleted
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
Note:
7-116
7
code code
area
E602 -2000
-00
E602 -4000
-00
E602 -4001
-00
E602 -FF01
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD Encryption Board
Description Authentication error between the host machine and the
Encryption Board.
Remedy
1. After checking connection of the Encryption Board,
disconnect and connect the connector and, turn OFF
and then ON the power.
2. Execute the key clear procedure.
code code
area
E602 -FF11
* Key clear: system recovery procedure

1. Execute the key clear procedure with SST.
As a result, the disk becomes unformatted disk.
Thus, it is necessary to execute step 2.
E602-0001 will be indicated if activating the
machine with the unformatted disk.
2. Execute HDD format and system reinstallation with
SST.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Unable to mount the Linux system.
Remedy
1. Check the cable and the power connector.
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or
USB memory and reinstall the system, and then turn
OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and
reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description No Linux system start script.
Remedy
1. Check the cable and the power connector.
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or
USB memory and reinstall the system, and then turn
OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and
reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description HDD error (unidentified) (at startup)
Remedy
2. Disconnect and then connect the HDD connector.
3. Format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
7-117
-00
Items
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description HDD error (unidentified) (after startup)
Remedy
2. Disconnect and then connect the HDD connector.
3. Format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
T-7-12
7-117
E604 to E753
code code
area
E604 -1024
-00
E611 -0000
-00
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E613 -1536
E615 -0001
E674 -0001
E674 -0004
E674 -0008
-00
-00
-00
-00
-00
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
7-118
code code
area
E674 -000C
-00
E674 -0010
-00
E674 -0011
-00
E674 -0030
-00
E677 -0001
-00
E677 -0003
-00
E677 -0004
-00
E677 -0010
-00
E677 -0080
-00
Lack of memory
Lack of memory (1,024MB required)
Add the DDR2-SDRAM
Re-reboot due to failures such as SRAM damage when
executing the power shutdown safeguard transmission
job
SRAM data is damaged and stored job data cannot be
read. If this causes the repeated reboot execution after
recovery from power shutdown, a transmission is also
repeated. Therefore E code is displayed.
Execute SRAM clear and delete power shutdown
safeguard job
Bildspeicher ist fehlerhaft oder nicht ausreichend
Kein verfgbarer Speicher auf seiten des Hauptcontroller
PCB 2
Ein 1536MB Speicher auf seiten des Hauptcontroller
PCB 2 erstellen
Self test error of encryption module
A self test of the Ipsec Board was conducted, and an
error was detected.
1. Upgrade the system after HDD format.
2. Replace the HDD.
FAX is abnormal
Communication error with the FAX board
Title
Description
of detection
Measures 1. Cable connection check
2. FAX board replacement
3. Main controller board replacement
Title
FAX is abnormal
Description Modem IC access is abnormal
of detection
Title
FAX is abnormal
Description Port IC access is abnormal
of detection
Items
Description
Title
FAX is abnormal
Description Modem IC/ port IC access is abnormal
of detection
Title
FAX is abnormal
Description FAX is abnormal
of detection
Measures Main controller board replacement
Title
FAX is abnormal
Description FAX is abnormal
of detection
Measures Main controller board replacement
Title
FAX is abnormal
Description Check sum error
of detection
Measures System software download for 2 line FAX
Title
Print server failure
Description Abnormality detected on the exhaust fan operation of
of detection printer server
Measures 1. Check supplying power to the exhaust fan
2. Exhaust fan replacement
Title
Description Abnormality is detected during configuration check in
of detection start up
2. Reinstallation system
Title
Description Abnormality detected on the CPU fan operation of printer
of detection server
Measures 1. Check supplying power to the CPU fan
2. CPU fan replacement
Title
Description Unsupported print server is connected
of detection
Measures Change for regular print server
Title
Description Communication error in start-up
of detection
2. Reinstallation system
7-118
7
code code
area
E710 -0001
-00
E711 -0001
-00
E711 -0001
-05
E713 -0001
-05
E717 -0001
-00
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Printer IPC error

In case that IPC communication IC in the printer engine
detected a failure when turning power ON
Check the cable.
IPC communication is abnormal
When 4 or more error occurrence is set to the error
register in IPC chip within 1.5 seconds.
Check the cable.
IPC communication failure
Occurrence of an error was set in the error resistor of the
IPC chip more than four times in 1.5 seconds.
Check the cable.
Finisher communication error
Communication failed between the finisher and the host
machine.
1. Check the cable connection.
2. Replace the finisher controller circuit PCB.
3. Replace the DC controller circuit PCB.
Communication with the NE controller is abnormal
Error in the NE controller start
When the NE controller which should have been
connected is not connected before the power off at power
supply time to turn on
Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION>
CLEAR> ERR after cable check
Communication with the NE controller is abnormal
IPC error in the NE controller operation
In the case of the errors that disconnection of IPC, or IPC
communication is unrecoverable.
Coin vendor failure
Error in the Coin vendor start
When the Coin vendor which should have been
connected is not connected before the power off at power
supply time to turn on
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E717 -0002
-00
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
E719 -0001
-00
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
7-119
code code
area
E719 -0002
-00
E719 -0003
-00
E719 -0011
-00
E719 -0012
-00
E719 -0031
-00
E719 -0032
-00
Items
Description
Title
Coin vendor failure
Description IPC error in the Coin vendor operation
of detection In the case of the errors that disconnection of IPC, or IPC
communication is unrecoverable.
In the case of connection failure detection for a signal of
paper pickup/delivery
In the case of the detection of improper connection
Measures Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION>
Title
Coin vendor failure
Description In the case of communication error with the Coin vendor
of detection during the unit price acquisition in startup
Title
Error in the card reader startup
Description When the card reader, which should have been
of detection connected before the power off, is not connected at
power ON.
Title
IPC error in the card reader operation
Description In the case of the errors that disconnection of IPC, or IPC
of detection communication is unrecoverable.
Title
Communication error in the card reader (a serial number)
startup
Description In case a communication with card reader cannot start in
of detection startup
Measures 1. Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION>
CLEAR> ERR after cable connection check for card
reader (Connector connection, pinching wire)
2. Execute the following service mode after card reader
removal, and re-install card reader.
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> CARD
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR
Title
Communication error after the card reader (a serial
number) startup
Description Communicate with card reader is succeeded in the
of detection startup, but it became impossible.
CLEAR> ERR after cable connection check for card
reader (Connector connection, pinching wire)
7-119
7
code code
area
E720 -0001
-05
E720 -0002
-05
E720 -0003
-05
E720 -0004
-05
E720 -0005
-05
E720 -0006
-05
E730 -1001
-00
E730 -100A
-00
Items
Description
Title
Model mismatch error
Description An accessory that is not supported is connected.
of detection
Measures Check the configuration of accessories.
Staple Finisher-K1 is connected with iR ADV C9280.
Title
of detection
Staple Finisher-K1 is connected with iR ADV C9270.
Title
of detection
A wrong Finisher is connected.
Title
Description A Finisher that is not supported is connected.
of detection
A Finisher that is not supported is connected to the host
machine.
Title
Different model error
Description A wrong accessory is connected.
of detection
Remedy
Check the configuration of accessories.
Title
Different model error
Description A wrong accessory is connected.
of detection
Remedy
Check the configuration of accessories.
Title
PDL software failure
Description Initialization error
of detection
Measures 1. PDL reset processing
2. Power cycle (Power OFF/ON)
Title
Description In case system fatal error such as initialization failure
of detection occurs
7-120
code code
area
E730 -A006
-00
E730 -A007
-00
E730 -B013
-00
E730 -C000
-00
E730 -C001
-00
E731 -3000
-00
E731 -3001
-00
E731 -3002
-00
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures

No response from PDL. In the case of no response from
PDL due to Subbootable failure or no existence.
1. PDL reset processing
3. Main controller board connection check
4. Re-installation of firmware
Title
Description In case of discrepancy of the version between the control
of detection software in main unit and PDL control software.
3. System full-format and installation
Title
Description Font data is damaged
of detection
Measures 1. Power cycle (Power OFF/ON)
2. System re-installation
3. System full-format and installation
Title
Description Memory acquisition error in the initialization
of detection
Measures 1. System full-format and installation
2. Main controller board 1 replacement
Title
Description HDD access error
of detection
Measures 1. System full-format and installation
2. HDD replacement
3. Main controller board 1 replacement
Title
Image processing module failure
Description Image processing module failure
of detection
Measures Main controller board 2 replacement
Title
of detection
Title
of detection
7-120
7
code code
area
E731 -3015
-00
E732 -0000
-00
E732 -0001
E732 -8888
-00
-00
E732 -9999
-00
E733 -0000
-00
E733 -0001
-00
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
7-121
code code
area
E733 -0002
-00
E733 -0010
-00
E733 -0020
-00
E733 -0021
-00
E743 -0000
-04
E743 -0003
-04
Main controller board 2 replacement

Reader communication is abnormal
Negotiation failure
1. Connected connector check with the reader

2. Power supply check for the reader (check if
initialization is executed in startup)
3. Replacement of the reader controller board and main
controller board
Title
Reader communication is abnormal
Description Communication error
of detection
Measures 1. Connected connector check with the reader
2. Power supply check for the reader (check if
initialization is executed in startup)
3. Replacement of the reader controller board and main
controller board
Title
Error in the reader type
Description When a scanner for the different model is detected during
of detection the communication with the reader.
Measures Replace to the proper reader.
Title
The Reader detection
Description In case of first detection of the reader on printer model
of detection (Please power cycle message is only displayed on the
user screen instead of an error code. Service mode>
DISPLAY> ERR is recorded in error log.)
Measures --Title
Printer communication is abnormal
Description Cannot communicate with a printer in startup
of detection
Measures --Title
Description Failure of communication between the controller and DC
of detection controller
Measures 1. Connected connector check with the printer
2. The power supply check (check if initialization is
executed in startup) of the printer
3. Replacement of DC controller or main controller board
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Printer communication error

An error occurred to detect printer vertical synchronous
signal.
1. Check the connection to the printer. Connect the
connector/replace the harness.
2. Check the power of the printer (check if the initialization
operation is executed at startup).
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB/Main Controller PCB.
Title
Description Printer vertical synchronizing signal detection failure
of detection
Title
of detection
Title
of detection
Title
DDI communication error
Description The reader controller PCB detected a failure in
of detection communication between the main controller PCB and the
reader controller PCB.
Measures 1. Failure of the connection between the main controller
PCB and the reader controller PCB
Title
7-121
7
code code
area
E743 -0004
E744 -0001
-04
-00
E744 -0002
-00
E744 -0003
-00
E744 -0004
-00
E744 -1000
-00
E744 -2000
-00
E746 -0021
-00
E746 -0022
-00
Items
Description
Title
Title
Language file /BootROM is abnormal
Description In case of discrepancy in the version between Bootable
of detection and the language in the HDD
Measures Download the language file of correct version
Title
Description When Size of the language in the HDD is too big
of detection
Title
Description When a language to switch, which stated in Config.txt, is
of detection not found in the HDD.
Title
Description When cannot switch to the language in the HDD
of detection
Title
Description In case wrong Boot ROM (for different model) is installed
of detection
Measures Replace with the Boot ROM for correct model
Title
Description When engine ID in Soft ID is invalid
of detection
Measures Replace with the Soft ID for correct model
Title
Image analysis board self-check failure detection
Description Image analysis board self-check failure detection
of detection
Measures 1. Connection check of the image analysis board
2. Image analysis board replacement
Title
Image analysis board version is invalid
Description Image analysis board version is invalid
of detection
Measures 1. Upgrading of the image analysis board software
7-122
code code
area
E746 -0023
-00
E746 -0024
-00
E746 -0031
-00
E746 -0032
-00
E746 -0033
-00
E746 -0034
-00
E746 -0035
-00
E747 -7f00
-00
Items
Description
Title
No response from image analysis board
Description No response from image analysis board
of detection
Title
Image analysis board operation abnormality
Description Image analysis board operation abnormality
of detection
Title
Hardware error (TPM)
Description Hardware error (TPM)
of detection
Measures 1. TPM board non-installation
2. Installation of TPM board from other units
3. TPM chip broken
Title
The error that system restoration is impossible occurred
(TPM)
Description The error that system restoration is impossible occurred
of detection (TPM)
Measures The location of the security information in HDD/SRAM is
unidentified
Execute Initialization of all data / setting
Title
Error occurred; but possible for system restoration (TPM)
Description Error occurred; but possible for system restoration (TPM)
of detection
Measures Discrepancy of the key
Execute the re-store of the TPM key
Title
Error occurred; but possible for automatic system
restoration (TPM)
Description Error occurred; but possible for automatic system
of detection restoration (TPM)
Measures Discrepancy of the key occurred. But restoration is
possible when reboot.
Power cycle (Power OFF/ON)
Title
TPM version error
Description TPM which cannot be used in this machine was installed.
of detection
Measures Install the supported TPM.
Title
Bypass board is not connected
Description Bypass board is not connected
of detection
Measures Bypass board is not connected
7-122
7
code code
area
E747 -ff01
-00
E747 -xxxx
-00
E748 -2010
-00
E748 -2011
-00
E748 -2012
-00
E748 -2021
-00
E748 -2022
-00
E748 -2023
-00
E748 -2024
-00
E748 -2025
-00
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Description
DDR - SDRAM (P) is not connected
7-123
code code
area
E748 -2026
-00

Image processing IC failure
Image processing IC failure
E748 -4xxx
-00
Main controller board 2 replacement

Flash board error
---
E748 -9000
-00
Contact each sale company bases

Flash board error
---
E749 -0006
-06
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Main Controller PCB 2 access error

Disconnection of the Image Processing Sub PCB was
detected.
Remove and then install the Image Processing Sub PCB.
Main controller board 2 errors
Main controller board 2 errors
Contact each sale company bases

Flash board error
Main controller board 2 access errors
Main controller board 1/2 removing and inserting,

replacement
Title
Description Main controller board 2 access errors
of detection
Measures Main controller board 1/2 removing and inserting,
replacement
Title
of detection
Measures DDR2-SDRAM (M0/M1/P) removing and inserting,
replacement
Title
of detection
Measures Main controller board 1/2 removing and inserting,
replacement
Title
Main Controller PCB 2 access error
Description Disconnection of the Bypass PCB was detected.
of detection
Measures Remove and then install the Bypass PCB.
Measures
E753 -0001
-00
Main controller board replacement

System error
Restart direction due to configuration change.
The option such as the Finisher and Paper Deck was
installed or removed when all of following conditions were
met and the machine configuration is changed when the
main power switch is turned ON.
Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy
Settings > Quick Startup at Power-on > ON
The Main Power Switch is turned OFF
The power plug of the machine is connected to the
output.
The breaker is ON
It is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the main
power.
CAUTION
This machine provides power to some PCBs even when
in the main power OFF status.
The power supply is not completely OFF by just turning
OFF the main power switch and therefore, the machine
is unable to detect a configuration change.
When disconnecting and then connecting a connector,
always disconnect the power plug or turn the breaker
OFF.
Refer to the Service Manual > Chapter 2 > External and
Controls > Quick Startup for details.
Title
Error in Finisher Boot software
Description The Boot software has not been written in ROM of the
of detection finisher controller.
Measures 1. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
2. The host machine controller PCB is faulty.
T-7-13
7-123
E804 to E991
code code
area
E804 -0000
E804 -0001
E804 -0002
E804 -0003
E804 -0004
-00
-05
-05
-05
-05
E804 -0005
-05
E804 -0006
-05
E804 -0007
-05
Items
Description
Title
Power supply cooling fan (FM3) error
Description When detect a failure of the power supply cooling fan
of detection
Measures 1. Connector disconnection
2. Power supply cooling fan failure
Title
Fan error
Description A failure was detected at the pre-fixing feed suction fan
of detection (FM1).
Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector.
2. Replace the pre-fixing feed suction fan (FM1).
Title
Fan error
Description A failure was detected at the primary charging suction fan
of detection (FM2).
2. Replace the primary charging suction fan (FM2).
Title
Fan error
Description A failure was detected at the primary charging suction fan
of detection (FM3).
2. Replace the primary charging suction fan (FM3).
Title
Fan error
Description A failure was detected at the developing/pre-transfer
of detection charging fan (FM4).
2. Replace the developing/pre-transfer charging fan
(FM4).
Title
Fan error
Description A failure was detected at the color cleaning fan (FM5).
of detection
2. Replace the color cleaning fan (FM5).
Title
Fan error
Description A failure was detected at the fixing heat fan (FM6).
of detection
2. Replace the fixing heat fan (FM6).
Title
Fan error
Description A failure was detected at the IH power supply fan (FM7).
of detection
2. Replace the IH power supply fan (FM7).
7-124
code code
area
E804 -0010
-05
E804 -0011
-05
E804 -0012
-05
E804 -0013
-05
E804 -0015
-05
E804 -0016
-05
E804 -0017
-05
E804 -0018
-05
Items
Description
Title
Fan error
Description A failure was detected at the delivery heat fan 1 (FM10).
of detection
2. Replace the delivery heat fan 1 (FM10).
Title
Fan error
of detection
Title
Fan error
of detection
Title
Fan error
of detection
Title
Fan error
Description Error in Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan (Front) (FM15)
of detection
Measures 1. Check connection of the connector.
2. Replace the Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan (Front)
(FM15).
Title
Fan error
Description Error in Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM16)
of detection
2. Replace the Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan (Rear)
(FM16).
Title
Fan error
Description Error in Fixing Feed Cooling Fan (Front) (FM27)
of detection
2. Replace the Fixing Feed Cooling Fan (Front) (FM27).
Title
Fan error
Description A failure was detected at the hopper cooling fan (FM18).
of detection
2. Replace the hopper cooling fan (FM18).
7-124
7
code code
area
E804 -0022
-05
E804 -0023
-05
E804 -0024
-05
E804 -0030
-05
E804 -0031
-05
E804 -0032
-05
E840 -0001
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Fan error
A failure was detected at the hopper cooling suction fan
(FM22).
1. Check the connection of the connector.
2. Replace the hopper cooling suction fan (FM22).
Title
Fan error
Description A failure was detected at the anti-adhesion fan 1 (FM23).
of detection
2. Replace the anti-adhesion fan 1 (FM23).
Title
Fan error
Description A failure was detected at the anti-adhesion fan 2 (FM24).
of detection
2. Replace the anti-adhesion fan 2 (FM24).
Title
Fan error
Description A failure was detected at the decurler suction fan (FM30).
of detection
2. Replace the decurler suction fan (FM30).
Title
Fan error
Description A failure was detected at the decurler side exhaust fan
of detection (FM31).
2. Replace the decurler side exhaust fan (FM31).
Title
Fan error
Description A failure was detected at the decurler lower side exhaust
of detection fan (FM32).
2. Replace the decurler lower side exhaust fan (FM32).
Title
Fixing Core/Shield Plate HP error
Description At the Fixing Core/Shield Plate home position detection
of detection operation, move from inside the home position range to
outside the range is not completed after the specified
period of time has passed.
Remedy
1. Check the connection of connectors of the Core
Shutter Motor (M56) and Core HP Sensor (PS98).
2. Check the harness of the target parts. -> Replace the
harness if it is disconnected.
3. Replace the Core Shutter Motor (M56) and Core HP
Sensor (PS98).
4. Clean the IH Unit. (Refer to the Service Manual.)
5. Replace the IH Unit.
7-125
code code
area
E840 -0002
-05
E840 -0011
-05
E840 -0012
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description At the Fixing Core/Shield Plate home position detection
of detection operation, move from outside the home position range
to inside the range is not completed after the specified
period of time has passed.
Remedy
1. Check the connection of connectors of the Core
Shutter Motor (M56) and Core HP Sensor (PS98).
harness if it is disconnected.
Sensor (PS98).
4. Check the Fixing Film Unit. -> Replace the unit if it is
damaged.
Title
Description At the Fixing Core/Shield Plate move operation during a
of detection job, move from inside the home position range to outside
the range is not completed after the specified period of
time has passed.
Remedy
harness if it is 1disconnected.
Sensor (PS98).
Title
Description At the Fixing Core/Shield Plate move operation during a
of detection job, move from outside the home position range to inside
the range is not completed after the specified period of
time has passed.
Remedy
harness if it is 1disconnected.
Sensor (PS98).
3. Check the Fixing Film Unit. -> Replace the unit if it is
damaged.
7-125
7
code code
area
E840 -0215
-05
Items
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
E841 -0001
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Remedy
Description
Fixing Core/Shield Plate HP error due to displacement of
the Fixing Film
Home position of the Fixing Core/Shield Plate could not
be detected due to displacement of the Fixing Film.
1. Check connection of the connectors of Core Shutter
Motor (M56) and Core Shift HP Sensor (PS98).
2. Check harness of the corresponding parts. Replace
3. Check the Fixing Film Unit. Replace the Fixing Film
Unit when it is damaged.
4. Replace the Core Shift Motor (M56) and Core Shift HP
Sensor (PS98).
NOTE:
CLEAR> ERR.
Fixing Assembly reciprocation operation error
Home position could not be detected although 5 seconds
have passed since the reciprocation operation of the
Fixing Assembly started.
1. Check connection of the connectors of the
Reciprocation Motor (M57) and the Fixing
Reciprocation HP Sensor (PS100).
2. Check harness of the corresponding parts. => Replace
3. Replace the Reciprocation Motor (M57) and the Fixing
Reciprocation HP Sensor (PS100).
4. Check the Fixing Drive Gear.=>Replace the gear when
it is damaged.
6. Replace the Fixing Unit. (Contact the sales company)
7-126
code code
area
E842 -0001
-05
E843 -0001
-05
E880 -0001
-00
E880 -0004
-00
E880 -0005
-00
Items
Description
Title
Heat Soaking Roller HP error
Description Home position could not be detected although 10
of detection seconds have passed since engagement/disengagement
of the Heat Soaking Roller started.
Remedy
1. Check connection of the connectors of the Heat
Soaking Roller disengagement or engagement Motor
(M55) and the Heat Soaking Roller HP Sensor (PS99).
2. Check harness of the corresponding parts. => Replace
3. Replace the Heat Soaking Roller disengagement or
engagemen Motor (M55) and the Heat Soaking Roller
HP Sensor (PS99).
4. Check the Fixing Drive Gear.=>Replace the gear when
it is damaged.
6. Replace the Fixing Unit. (Contact the sales company)
Title
Disconnection of the power supply plug for fixing
Description The product has two plugs, and the plug used to supply
of detection power to the fixing assembly was disconnected. When
this error occurs, a message indicating that the plug is
disconnected is displayed.
Measures Check the power supply plug for fixing.
Title
Controller fan1 (FM19) Error
of detection
2. Controller fan 1 (FM19) failure
Title
Controller fan2 (FM20) error
of detection
2. Controller fan 2 (FM20) failure
Title
HDD cooling fan (FM21) error
of detection
2. HDD cooling fan (FM21) failure
7-126
7
code code
area
E881 -0001
-00
Items
Description
Title
CPU abnormal temperature rising error
Description It was detected that CPU was 100 deg C or more.
of detection
Remedy
When it is detected that the temperature of the CPU is
100 deg C or more, forcible shutdown is executed. After
that, the error is recorded in the error log.
If the error occurred during a service visit and then
occurred again:
Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
E905 -0001
E905 -0002
E905 -0003
-05
-05
-05
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
If the error does not occur during a service visit but is

found in the log:
1. Check the space behind the host machine.
If the space behind the host machine is less than 10
cm, ask the user to secure enough space.
2. Clean the inlet on the rear of the host machine.
Remove dust.
POD deck light air assist fan error
Even when the maximum LOW interval was passed,
there was no change in the signal.
1. Failure of the shutter
2. Failure of the swing sensor (PS11)
3. Failure of the swing motor (M3)
4. Failure of the deck controller PCB (UN1)
POD deck pickup motor cooling fan error
The pickup motor cooling fan is not placed at LOCK ON
status.
1. Check the connector of the pickup motor cooling fan
(FM4).
2. Replace the pickup motor cooling fan.
3. Replace the deck controller PCB.
POD deck pickup motor cooling fan error
The pickup motor cooling fan is not placed at LOCK OFF
status.
1. Check the connector of the pickup motor cooling fan
(FM4).
2. Replace the pickup motor cooling fan.
3. Replace the deck controller PCB.
7-127
code code
area
E906 -0001
-05
E906 -0002
-05
E991 -0000
-05
E996 -0071
-05
Items
Description
Title
Description
of detection
Measures
POD deck light air heater high temperature error

A temperature over 120 degreeC was detected for 1
second consecutively.
1. Failure of the environment sensor (SR1)
2. Failure of the warm air fan (FAN1)
3. Failure of the cool air fan (FAN2)
4. Failure of the additional fan (FAN3)
5. Failure of the air heater (H1)
Title
POD deck light air heater low temperature error
Description The heater is not placed in the Ready status even when
of detection a specified period of time has elapsed.
Measures 1. Failure of the environment sensor (SR1)
2. Failure of the warm air fan (FAN1)
3. Failure of the cool air fan (FAN2)
4. Failure of the additional fan (FAN3)
5. Failure of the air heater (H1)
Title
Backup RAM error
Description SRAM in the DCON detected data error.
of detection
Measures Replace the DCON PCB
Title
Error avoidance jam (DADF)
Description Error avoidance jam occurred.(DADF)
of detection
Remedy
Depending on the setting of JM-ERR-R in service mode,
010071 jam is displayed as an error.
Collect log and contact to the sales companies.
To cancel the setting, select COPIER> OPTION> FNCSW> J M-ERR-R, and set JM-ERR-R to 0.
T-7-14
7-127
Error Code > Jam Code > Jam Type
7-128
Jam Code
Jam Type
Jam types are shown below.
Type
DELAY
STNRY
OVERLAP
TIMING NG
OHP NG
ADF OP
COVER OP
RESIDUAL
PICKUP NG
POWER ON
DOOR OP
SEQ NG
DELAY ESC
OTH JAM
STNRY ESC
STP
SDL STP
INIT ROT
UP DEVICE
OTHER
ERROR
RETRY ERR
STOP
ROT
PROGRAM
TIME OUT
PUNCH
MEDIA NG
Meaning
Delay jam
Stationary jam
Double feed detection
Timing error
Incorrect paper
ADF open
Cover open
Residual jam
Pickup error
Power ON
Door open
Sequence jam
Delay jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray
Other jams
Stationary jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray
Staple
Saddle stitch staple
Residual (at initial rotation)
Upper stream device jam
Others
Error
Retry error
Press Stop key
Keeps rotating
Program
Time-out
Punch
Misprint
T-7-15
Error Code > Jam Code > Jam Type
7-128
Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit
Main Unit
PS75
PS70
PS23
PS111
PS29
PS31
PS28
PS30
PS32
PS27
PS33
PS53
PS24
PS49
PS34
PS25
PS54
PS58
PS26
PS40
PS63
PS59
PS68
PS64
7-129
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
Sensor Name / Description
Sensor ID
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
0101
0102
0103
0104
0105
0106
0107
0108
0109
010A
010B
010C
010D
010E
0110
0111
0112
0113
0114
0115
0116
0117
0118
0119
0130
0191
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
OTHER
PS49
PS54
PS59
PS64
PS53
PS58
PS40
PS63
PS68
PS30
PS29
PS28
PS23
PS70
PS75
PS31
PS32
PS33
PS34
PS35
PS24
PS25
PS26
PS27
PS111
OTHER
00
0192
OTHER
00
0193
OTHER
00
0194
OTHER

Transparency Sensor
Registration Sensor
Fixing Inlet Sensor
Reverse Sensor
Duplex Sensor 1
Duplex Sensor 2
Duplex Sensor 3
Duplex Sensor 4
Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing
and image formation timing at Right Deck
pickup (Check the feed path from the Right
Deck Pickup Assembly to the Registration
Assembly.)
and image formation timing at Left Deck
pickup (Check the feed path from the Left
Deck Pickup Assembly to the Registration
Assembly.)
and image formation timing at Cassette
3 pickup (Check the feed path from
the Cassette 3 Pickup Assembly to the
Registration Assembly.)
and image formation timing at Cassette
4 pickup (Check the feed path from
the Cassette 4 Pickup Assembly to the
Registration Assembly.)
PS35
F-7-1
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
7-129
7-130
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
Sensor ID
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
Sensor ID
00
0195
OTHER
OTHER
00
0196
OTHER
00
0197
OTHER
00
0198
OTHER
00
0199
OTHER
00
019A
OTHER
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
0201
0202
0203
0204
0205
0206
0207
0208
0209
020A
020B
020C
020D
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY

and image formation timing at Option
Deck pickup (Check the feed path from
the Option Deck Pickup Assembly to
the Registration Assembly of the host
machine.)
and image formation timing at Multipurpose Tray pickup (Check the feed
path from the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup
Assembly to the Registration Assembly.)
and image formation timing at Multi Deck
Upper Deck pickup (Check the feed path
from the Upper Deck Pickup Assembly of
the Multi Deck to the Registration Assembly
of the host machine.)
Middle Deck pickup (Check the feed path
from the Middle Deck Pickup Assembly of
Lower Deck pickup (Check the feed path
from the Lower Deck Pickup Assembly of
and image formation timing at 2-sided
printing (Check the feed path around
the Registration Assembly of the host
machine.)
Transparency Sensor
Registration Sensor
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
020E
0210
0211
0212
0213
0214
0215
0216
0217
0218
0219
0230
0A01
0A02
0A03
0A04
0A05
0A06
0A07
0A08
0A09
0A0A
0A0B
0A0C
0A0D
0A0E
0A10
0A11
0A12
0A13
0A14
0A15
0A16
0A17
0A18
0A19
0A30
0B00
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
OTHER
PS70
PS75
PS31
PS32
PS33
PS34
PS35
PS24
PS25
PS26
PS27
PS111
PS49
PS54
PS59
PS64
PS53
PS58
PS40
PS63
PS68
PS30
PS29
PS28
PS23
PS70
PS75
PS31
PS32
PS33
PS34
PS35
PS24
PS25
PS26
PS27
PS111
PS112
00
00
00
00
00
00
0B01
0B02
0B03
0B04
0B05
0B06
COVER OP
COVER OP
COVER OP
COVER OP
COVER OP
COVER OP
Fixing Inlet Sensor

Reverse Sensor
Duplex Sensor 1
Duplex Sensor 2
Duplex Sensor 3
Duplex Sensor 4
Transparency Sensor
Registration Sensor
Fixing Inlet Sensor
Reverse Sensor
Duplex Sensor 1
Duplex Sensor 2
Duplex Sensor 3
Duplex Sensor 4
Waste Toner Container Sensor (Check that
the Waste Toner Container is installed.)
Front Cover Sensor
Buffer Front Cover Sensor
Deck Left Front Cover Sensor
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
PS49
PS54
PS59
PS64
PS53
PS58
PS40
PS63
PS68
PS30
PS29
PS28
PS23
PS80
PS79
PS39
PS36
PS87
S006
7-130
7
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
00
0C00
ERROR*1
00
0CA0
ERROR*1
00
0CA2
ERROR*1
00
0CA3
ERROR*1
00
0CA4
ERROR*1
00
0CA5
ERROR*1
00
0CA6
ERROR*1
00
0CA7
ERROR*1
00
0CA8
ERROR*1
00
0CA9
ERROR*1
00
00
0CAF
0CF1
OTHER
ERROR*1
00
00
0D91
0D92
MEDIA NG
MEDIA NG
00
0D93
MEDIA NG
00
1E00
OTHER

Recovered by opening and closing the
Door
Door
Door
Door
Door
Door
Door
Door
Door
Door
Door
Misprint (paper length is short)
Misprint (Although transparency setting is
set, paper other than transparency is fed)
Misprint (Although transparency setting is
not set, transparency is fed)
7-131
Sensor ID
------------------------------------LENGTH NG
OHP NG
MEDIA NG
OTHER
T-7-16
*1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
power supply.
If the same jam is detected regardless of the operation above, the error code is displayed.
The error that a machine detected is either following items.
E012, E021, E074, E100, E197, E733, E808
7-131
Error Code > Jam Code > Duplex Color Image Reader-F1
Duplex Color Image Reader-F1

PCB3
SR4
PCB2
SR12
SR10
7-132
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
0049
0050
0051
0052
0071
0073
0074
0075
0090
0091
0092
0093
0094
0095
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
SEQ NG*2
ERROR*1
ERROR*1
ERROR*1
ADF OP
ADF OP
COVER OP
COVER OP
RESIDUAL
PICKUP NG
01
0096
LIMITED
FUNCTION

Lead sensor 2
Lead sensor 2
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Disengaging HP sensor 1
Disengaging HP sensor 2
Pickup roller unit lifter HP sensor
DADF open/closed sensor 1/2
DADF open/closed sensor 1/2
Cover open/closed sensor
Cover open/closed sensor
All feed type sensor
Post-separation sensor 1/2/3
Sensor ID
SR5
SR5
PCB5
PCB5
SR15
SR16
SR12
SR1, SR3
SR1, SR3
SR10
SR10
SR2, SR3,
PCB2
-
T-7-17
power supply.
If the same jam is detected although the above operation is performed, an error code will
be notified.
PCB4
SR15
SR5
SR16
PCB5
SR3
SR2
power supply.
F-7-2
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY

Post-separation sensor 3
Delay detection sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Lead sensor 1
Lead sensor 1
Lead sensor 2
Lead sensor 2
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Lead sensor 1
Lead sensor 1
Sensor ID
PCB2
PCB2
SR4
SR4
PCB3
PCB3
PCB4
PCB4
SR5
SR5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB2
SR4
SR4
PCB3
PCB3
PCB4
PCB4
If it is not recovered by the above operation, it is considered an error near the target sensor.
Disconnect and then connect the connectors around the target sensor, check if the cable is
open circuit, and replace the sensor.
Error Code > Jam Code > Duplex Color Image Reader-F1
7-132
Error Code > Jam Code > POD Deck Light A1
7-133
Paper Deck Unit C1

PS1
POD Deck Light A1

PS6
PS6
PS1
F-7-3
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
00
00
00
00
00
00
011A
011B
021A
021B
0A1A
0A1B
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
POWER ON
POWER ON

deck pickup sensor
deck feed sensor
deck pickup feed sensor
deck feed sensor
deck pickup feed sensor
deck feed sensor
F-7-4
Sensor ID
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
PS6
PS1
PS6
PS1
PS6
PS1
00
00
00
00
00
00
011A
011B
021A
021B
0A1A
0A1B
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
POWER ON
POWER ON
T-7-18
Error Code > Jam Code > POD Deck Light A1

Deck pickup sensor
Deck pull-out sensor
Deck pickup sensor
Deck pickup sensor
Sensor ID
PS1
PS6
PS1
PS6
PS1
PS6
T-7-19
7-133
Error Code > Jam Code > Multi-drawer Paper Deck A1
Multi-drawer Paper Deck A1

S001
S102
S101
S202
S201
S002
S003
S009
S005
S010
S004
S302
S301
F-7-5
7-134
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
011E
011F
0120
0121
0122
0123
0124
0125
0126
0127
0129
021E
021F
0220
0221
0222
0223
0224
0225
0226
0227
0229
0A1E
0A1F
0A20
0A21
0A22
0A23
0A24
0A25
0A26
0A27
0A29
2828
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
OVERLAP

Upper deck pickup sensor
Upper deck pull-out sensor
Middle deck pickup sensor
Middle deck pull-out sensor
Lower deck pickup sensor
Lower deck pull-out sensor
Lower deck feed sensor
Vertical path upper sensor
Vertical path middle sensor
Vertical path lower sensor
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Double feeding sensor
Sensor ID
S101
S102
S201
S202
S301
S302
S004
S001
S002
S003
S005
S101
S102
S201
S202
S301
S302
S004
S001
S002
S003
S005
S101
S102
S201
S202
S301
S302
S004
S001
S002
S003
S005
S009, S010
T-7-20
Error Code > Jam Code > Multi-drawer Paper Deck A1
7-134
Error Code > Jam Code > Buffer Path Unit - J1
Buffer Path Unit - J1
7-135
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
00
00
00
00
00
00
011C
011D
021C
021D
0A1C
0A1D
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
RESIDUAL
RESIDUAL

Buffer Sensor 1
Buffer Sensor 2
Buffer Sensor 1
Buffer Sensor 2
Buffer Sensor 1
Buffer Sensor 2
Sensor ID
PS85
PS86
PS85
PS86
PS85
PS86
T-7-21
PS86
PS85
F-7-6
Error Code > Jam Code > Buffer Path Unit - J1
7-135
Error Code > Jam Code > Insertion Unit -H1
Insertion Unit -H1
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
02
02
02
10E0
10E2
10E4
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
02
02
10E5
10E6
02
02
10E7
10E8
02
02
02
11F0
11F2
11F4
SW1
02
02
11F5
11F6
S16
02
02
02
02
11F7
11F8
13CD
14CC
02
1FC0
02
1FC1
02
02
02
1FC2
1FC3
1FCE
02
1FCF
S3
S7
S8
SW2
S9
S19
S12
S18
S17
S20
S21
7-136
F-7-7
Entrance sensor
Entrance sensor, Delivery sensor 2
Upper tray registration sensor, Lower tray
registration sensor
DELAY
Middle feed sensor
DELAY
Middle feed sensor, Reverse entrance
sensor
DELAY
Reverse sensor, Reverse entrance sensor
DELAY
Reverse timing sensor, Reverse entrance
sensor
STNRY
Entrance sensor
STNRY
Delivery sensor 2
STNRY
Upper tray registration sensor, Lower tray
registration sensor
STNRY
Middle feed sensor
STNRY
Middle feed sensor, Reverse entrance
sensor
STNRY
Reverse sensor
STNRY
Reverse timing sensor
POWER ON Power ON jam
COVER OP Front upper cover open/close switch,
Upper cover open/close switch, Inserter
open/close sensor
TIME OUT Failed to detect OFF of EntryStart although
a specified period of time has passed after
replying ON of EntryStartAck
TIME OUT Failed to detect ON of EjectStartAck
although a specified period of time has
passed after notifying ON of EjectStart
Failed to detect OFF of EjectStartAck
passed after notifying OFF of EjectStart
OTHER
Upper tray empty sensor
OTHER
Lower tray empty sensor
ERROR*1 Recovered by opening and closing the
Door
STOP
Press Stop key
Sensor ID
S20
S20, S21
S3, S7
S8
S8, S18
S17, S18
S16, S18
S20
S21
S3, S7
S8
S8, S18
S17
S16
SW1, SW2,
S19
-
S9
S12
-
T-7-22
power supply.
be notified.
Error Code > Jam Code > Insertion Unit -H1
7-136
Error Code > Jam Code > Professional Puncher - C1/Professional Puncher Integration Unit - B1
Professional Puncher - C1/Professional Puncher

Integration Unit - B1
S2
S8
S1
RS5
S7
RS1
S6
RS2
RS4
S3
PS7
S5
S4
RS3
7-137
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
Type
Sensor ID
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
1051
1052
1055
1057
1059
1152
1154
1156
1158
115A
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1370
1472
1F5E
1F5F
1F71
1F73
1F74
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
POWER ON
DOOR OP
TIMING NG
OTHER
RESIDUAL
TIMING NG
ERROR
RS1
RS2
RS3
RS4
RS5
RS1
RS2
RS3
RS4
RS5
S1
S8
S7
S2
S3
S4
S5, S6
PS6
RS3
PS7
-
02
1F75
ERROR
02
02
1F76
1F77
OTHER
TIMING NG
02
02
1F78
1F79
TIME OUT
SEQ NG
02
02
02
1F7A
1F7B
1F7F
TIMING NG
UP DEVICE
STOP
bypass 1 sensor
reverse path 1 sensor
bypass 2 sensor
bypass 1 sensor
bypass 2 sensor
Bypass 1 Sensor
Bypass 2 Sensor
Bypass 3 Sensor
Punch Path 1 Sensor
Punch Path 2 Sensor
Punch Path 3 Sensor
Punch Path 4 Sensor, Punch Path 5 Sensor
Power ON jam
front cover sensor
reverse flapper HP sensor
Idle rotation jam
Jam during receipt from upstream installation
Failure of a receiving/sending signal from the
upstream unit (only when connected to the
finisher)
Failure of a receiving/sending signal from the
downstream unit (only when connected to the
finisher)
Punch Die comes off
The paper doesnt come from puncher after the
specified time
Time out jam
Abnormality during receipt from upstream
installation
Early arrival jam
Jam caused by other installation
Press Stop key (only if the finisher is
connected)
F-7-8
T-7-23
Error Code > Jam Code > Professional Puncher - C1/Professional Puncher Integration Unit - B1
7-137
Error Code > Jam Code > Insertion Unit -J1
Insertion Unit -J1

S2
S4
S1
7-138
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
10B1
10B2
10B3
10B4
11C1
11C2
11C3
11C4
1FD1
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
OTHER
02
1FD7
02
1FD8
S12
SW1
S10
S11
Paper registration sensor

Reverse entrance sensor
Reverse sensor
Reverse sensor
No papers at the time of Inserter Tray
pickup. Tray paper sensor 1, Tray paper
sensor 2
POWER ON Paper registration sensor, Reverse sensor,
Reverse timing sensor, Reverse entrance
sensor
DOOR OP Front upper cover open/close sensor,
Inserter open/close sensor, Top cover
open/close sensor
Sensor ID
S4
S12
S10
S11
S4
S12
S10
S11
S7,S8
S4,S10,S11,
S12
SW1,S1,S2
T-7-24
F-7-9
Error Code > Jam Code > Insertion Unit -J1
7-138
Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Unit - G1
SW1
S21
S20
S30
S31
S33
S32
7-139
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
10E1
10E3
10E9
10EA
10EB
10EC
10ED
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
10EE
1FDF
11F1
11F3
11F9
11FA
11FB
11FC
11FD
11FE
1FD0
02
13DD
02
02
02
14DC
1FDE
1FD1
S22
S27
F-7-10
Entrance sensor
Entrance sensor, Delivery sensor 2
Entrance sensor, Slowdown timing sensor
Release timing sensor
Fold position sensor
Upper stopper paper sensor
Delivery sensor 1, Upper stopper paper
sensor
DELAY
Fold tray paper sensor
STOP
Press Stop key
STNRY
Entrance sensor
STNRY
Delivery sensor 2
STNRY
Slowdown timing sensor
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
Upper stopper paper sensor
STNRY
Delivery sensor 1
STNRY
Fold tray paper sensor
TIME OUT Failed to detect OFF of EntryStart although
a specified period of time has passed after
replying ON of EntryStartAck
POWER ON Detected presence of paper at power-on/
at initialization/at warm-up rotation by any
sensors on the feed path
COVER OP Front upper cover switch
ERROR*1 Detected error (E569/E56A/E56B/E56E)
TIME OUT Failed to detect ON of EjectStartAck
passed after notifying ON of EjectStart
Failed to detect OFF of EjectStartAck
passed after notifying OFF of EjectStart
Sensor ID
S20
S20, S21
S20, S30
S31
S32
S33
S22, S33
S27
S20
S21
S30
S31
S32
S33
S22
S27
-
SW1
-
T-7-25
power supply.
be notified.
Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Unit - G1
7-139
Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1

S4
S1
S12
S2
SW1
S10
S25
S11
S24
S22
S23
S21
S15
S18
7-140
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
10B1
10B2
10B3
10B4
10B5
10B6
10B7
10B8
10B9
10BA
10BB
11C1
11C2
11C3
11C4
11C5
11C6
11C7
11C8
11C9
11CA
11CB
1FD1
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
OTHER
02
13D7
02
14D8
F-7-11

Reverse sensor
Upper stopper sensor
Delivery sensor
C fold delivery sensor
C fold tray empty sensor
Reverse sensor
Upper stopper sensor
Delivery sensor
C fold delivery sensor
C fold tray empty sensor
No papers at the time of Inserter Tray
pickup
POWER ON Detected presence of paper at power-on
by any sensors on the feed path
COVER OP Front upper cover open/close sensor,
Inserter open/close sensor, Top cover
open/close sensor
Sensor ID
S4
S12
S10
S11
S24
S21
S23
S22
S25
S15
S18
S4
S12
S10
S11
S24
S21
S23
S22
S25
S15
S18
SW1, S1, S2
T-7-26
Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1
7-140
Error Code > Jam Code > External Hole Puncher - A1
External Hole Puncher - A1

PI63
7-141
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
02
02
02
02
1012
1122
1F44
1F45
DELAY
STNRY
PUNCH
POWER ON

Trailing edge sensor
Punch home position sensor
Sensor ID
LED5, PTR5
LED5, PTR5
PI63
LED5, PTR5
T-7-27
LED5,PTR5
F-7-12
Error Code > Jam Code > External Hole Puncher - A1
7-141
Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-K1/Booklet Finisher-K1
Staple Finisher-K1/Booklet Finisher-K1

S104
S102
S101
S129
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
0CAF
1011
1012
1091
1092
1093
1094
1096
1121
1122
112E
112F
OTHER
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
OTH JAM
ERROR*1
02
02
02
02
02
11A1
11A2
11A3
11A4
11AF
02
02
02
1205
1307
1387
02
138A
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
1408
1488
148B
1506
1586
1F45
1F4F
02
1F8F
S201
S131
S223
S203
S226
S227
F-7-13
7-142

Inlet sensor
Feed path senor
Saddle delivery sensor 1
Saddle inlet sensor
Trimmer inlet sensor
Saddle vertical path sensor
Inlet sensor
Feed path senor
Finisher Sequence Error janm
Detected error(E514/E530/E532/E535/
E537
/E540/E542/E568/E56D/E578/E57B/E57C
/E583/E584) during paper feed
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
Saddle inlet sensor
STNRY
Trimmer inlet sensor
ERROR*1 Detected error (E5A3/E5A4/E5AA/E5BA/
E5BA) during paper feed
TIMING
Inlet sensor
POWER ON Inlet sensor, Feed path senor
POWER ON Saddle inlet sensor, Saddle vertical path
sensor, Saddle delivery sensor 1, Saddle
delivery sensor 2
POWER ON Detected presence of paper at power-on
/after opening and then closing the door by
any sensors on the feed path
DOOR OP Front door sensor
STP
Staple hp sensor
SDL STP
Saddle stitcher hp senso
PUNCH
Punch hp sensor
ERROR*1 Detected Punch Motor error/Punch Slide
Motor error during paper feed
ERROR*1 Detected error (E5F0/E5F1/E5F2/E5F3/
E5F4
/E5F5/E5F6/E5F7/E5F8/E5F9) during
paper feed
Sensor ID
S101
S102
S226
S227
S201
S101
S203
S101
S102
-
S226
S227
S201
S101
S101
S101, S102
S201, S203,
S226, S227
-
S129
S129
S129
S131
S223
S104
-
T-7-28
power supply.
be notified.
Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-K1/Booklet Finisher-K1
7-142
Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-L1/Booklet Finisher-L1
Staple Finisher-L1/Booklet Finisher-L1
ACC ID
Jam Code
Type
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
0CAF
1011
1013
1014
1091
1092
1093
109F
1121
1123
1124
112E
112F
OTHER
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
OTHER
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
OTH JAM
ERROR*1
02
11A1
02
02
02
11A2
11A3
1307
02
1387
02
1408
SW7
02
02
02
1488
1506
1586
PI17
02
1F8F
PI118
PI102
PI104
MSW101
PI103
PI50
PI22
PI18
PI9
PI19
PI20
SW5
PI11
7-143
F-7-14
Sensor ID

---Inlet sensor
PI103
Escape tray path sensor
PI118
Delivery sensor
PI104
No.1 paper sensor
PI18
Delivery sensor
PI11
Saddle inlet sensor
PI22
Saddle time out
Inlet sensor
PI103
Escape tray path sensor
PI118
Delivery sensor
PI104
Finisher Sequence Error janm
Detected error (E540/E514/E519/E530
/E532/E535/E537/E540/E542/E584)
STNRY
No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor,
PI18, PI19,
No.3 paper sensor
PI20
STNRY
Delivery sensor,Vertical path paper sensor
PI11, PI17
STNRY
Saddle inlet sensor
PI22
POWER ON Inlet sensor, Delivery sensor, Escape tray PI103, PI104,
path sensor
PI118
POWER ON Delivery sensor,Vertical path paper sensor, PI11, PI17,
No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor,
PI18, PI19,
No.3 paper sensor, Saddle inlet sensor
PI20, PI22
COVER OP Front cover sensor, Front cover switch
PI102,
MSW101
COVER OP Inlet cover sensor, Front cover sensor
PI9, PI102
STP
Staple home position sensor
PI50
SDL STP
Stitcher HP sensor (front), Stitcher HP
SW5, SW7
sensor (rear)
ERROR*1 Detected error (E5F0/E5F1/E5F2/E5F3/
E5F6)
T-7-29
power supply.
be notified.
Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-L1/Booklet Finisher-L1
7-143
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
Alarm Code
Alarm Code Details
Alarm
Code
Level
Title
00-0246
00-0247
02-0025
04-0031
Error code display

(4-digit)
Error code display
(4-digit)
Insufficient LED
light intensity error
in Scanner Unit for
reading the front side
(DADF)
Right deck lifter error
04-0131
Left deck lifter error
04-0231
Cassette 3 lifter error
04-0331
Cassette 4 lifter error
04-0431
Option deck lifter

error
04-3039
Upper multi-cassette
deck lifter error
04-3040
deck lifter lower limit
sensor error
A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
7-144
Alarm
Code
Level
Title
04-3041
04-3042
Movement: The upper deck lifter motor (M101) stops. The

upper deck is not used.
Measures: Check the motor ,sensor and wire
Movement: The lifter moves down to the lower limit position.
The upper deck is not used.
04-3043
04-3044
04-3045
04-3053
04-3055
04-3060
04-3061
04-3062
deck paper surface
sensor error
The upper limit of the
upper multi-cassette
deck lifter upper limit
sensor has been
exceeded.
The lower limit of the
upper multi-cassette
sensor has been
exceeded.
The upper limit of
the value of counting
the paper remaining
on the upper multicassette deck has
been exceeded.
value of counting
the paper remaining
on the upper multicassette deck has
been exceeded.
Reaching the life
of the upper multicassette deck left
separation fan /
Failure of the fan
Reaching the life
of the upper multicassette deck right
separation fan /
Failure of the fan
Error in home position
detection with Multi
Deck Upper Deck
Swing Motor
Error in Multi Deck
Upper Deck Power
Supply Fan
Multi Deck Upper
Deck Air Heater high
temperature error
Soft counter PCB cannot write normally

Soft counter PCB cannot restore data
The light intensity is insufficient at LED light-on.
Movement: The right deck pickup motor (M43) stops. The

right deck is not used.
Cause: The right deck lifter does not move up. A failure
occurred in the right deck paper surface sensor (PS52).
Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.
Movement: The left deck pickup motor (M42) stops. The left
deck is not used.
Cause: The left deck lifter does not move up. A failure
occurred in the left deck paper surface sensor (PS57).
Movement: The cassette 3 pickup motor (M44) stops. The
cassette 3 is not used.
Cause: The cassette 3 lifter does not move up. A failure
occurred in the cassette 3 paper surface sensor (PS62).
Movement: The cassette 4 pickup motor (M45) stops. The
cassette 4 is not used.
Cause: The cassette 4 lifter does not move up. A failure
occurred in the cassette 4 paper surface sensor (PS67).
Movement: The option deck lifter motor stops. Option deck is
not used.
Cause: The option deck lifter does not move up. A failure
occurred in the Option deck paper surface sensor.
Movement: The lifter moves up to the lower limit position.

The upper deck is not used.


Movement: The fan stops.The air floatation fan stops.Not

use the corresponding receptacle (handle as there is no
paper)
paper)
An error in the Swing Motor was detected.
Multi Deck Fan failed to rotate.
Air Heater detected abnormal high temperature.
7-144
7
Alarm
Code
Level
Title
04-3063
04-3064
04-3139
Multi Deck Upper

Deck Air Heater low
temperature error
Multi Deck Upper
Deck Pickup Motor
error
Middle multi-cassette
deck lifter error
04-3140
04-3141
04-3142
04-3143
04-3144
04-3145
04-3153
04-3155
sensor error
deck paper surface
sensor error
middle multi-cassette
sensor has been
exceeded.
middle multi-cassette
sensor has been
exceeded.
The upper limit of
the paper remaining
on the middle multicassette deck has
been exceeded.
value of counting
the paper remaining
on the middle multicassette deck has
been exceeded.
Reaching the life
of the middle multicassette deck left
separation fan /
Failure of the fan
Reaching the life
of the middle multicassette deck right
separation fan /
Failure of the fan

Air Heater detected abnormal low temperature.
Deck Pickup Motor failed to rotate.
Movement: The middle deck lifter motor (M201) stops. The

middle deck is not used.
The middle deck is not used.



7-145
Alarm
Code
Level
Title
04-3160
04-3161
04-3162
04-3163
04-3164
04-3239

Deck Middle Deck
Swing Motor
Error in Multi Deck
Middle Deck Power
Supply Fan
Multi Deck Middle
temperature error
Multi Deck Middle
Deck Air Heater low
temperature error
Multi Deck Middle
Deck Pickup Motor
error
Lower multi-cassette
deck lifter error
04-3240
04-3241
04-3242
04-3243
04-3244
04-3245

paper)
paper)
sensor error
deck paper surface
sensor error
lower multi-cassette
sensor has been
exceeded.
lower multi-cassette
sensor has been
exceeded.
The upper limit of
the paper remaining
on the lower multicassette deck has
been exceeded.
value of counting
the paper remaining
on the lower multicassette deck has
been exceeded.

Movement: The lower deck lifter motor (M301) stops. The

lower deck is not used.

The lower deck is not used.


7-145
Alarm
Code
Level
Title
04-3253
Reaching the life

of the lower multicassette deck left
separation fan /
Failure of the fan
Reaching the life
of the lower multicassette deck right
separation fan /
Failure of the fan
Deck Lower Deck
Swing Motor
Error in Multi Deck
Lower Deck Power
Supply Fan
Multi Deck Lower
temperature error
Multi Deck Lower
Deck Air Heater low
temperature error
Multi Deck Lower
Deck Pickup Motor
error
OHT sensor (PS29)
adjustment failure

paper)
04-3255
04-3260
04-3261
04-3262
04-3263
04-3264
04-9090
06-0002
06-0003
06-0010
06-0011
10-0001
10-0002
7-146
Alarm
Code
Level
Title
10-0003
10-0004
10-0017
10-0018
10-0019
10-0020
10-0022
10-0100
11-0001
11-0010
31-0006
31-0008
33-0010
33-0011
33-0023
33-0025
Toner low(M)(This
alarm code issued by
RDS.)
Toner low(Ye)(This
RDS.)
Toner (Y) prior
delivery alarm
Toner (M) prior
delivery alarm
Toner (C) prior
delivery alarm
Toner (BK) prior
delivery alarm
Patch detection light
intensity abnormal
change alarm
Toner bottle change
notification alarm
Waste Toner
Container full level
alarm (waste toner
full)
Waste Toner
Container near full
level alarm (waste
toner near full)
HDD failure when
equipped with the
mirroring function
HDD abnormality
of S.M.A.R.T. value
alarm
Stream reading fan
alarm
Alarm for delivery fan
heat dischare failure
Optical unit (DADF)
cooling fan alarm
Optical unit (reader)
cooling fan alarm

paper)
Movement: OHT detection cannot be performed.

Cause: An adjustment of the OHT sensor (PS29) failed at
initial rotation.
Measures: Re-adjust during pre-rotation.
Fixing Film life alarm Total number of sheets fed through the Fixing Film Unit
1
exceeded the specified number.
Fixing Web absence Fixing Web level is low. (Fixing Web Sensor detected low
notice alarm
web level.)
Fixing reciprocation Home position could not be detected despite a reciprocation
drive alarm
drive operation of Fixing Assembly.
Fixing Film life alarm Rotation time of the Fixing Film Unit exceeded the specified
2
time.
Toner low(Bk)(This
RDS.)
Toner low(Cy)(This
RDS.)
Full level of the Waste Toner Container was detected.
Near full level alert of the Waste Toner Container was

detected.
HDD failure when equipped with the mirroring function
A failure occurred in the fan at the time of job completion.
A failure occurred in the fan during job operation.

A failure occurred in the fan during job operation.
7-146
7
Alarm
Code
Level
34-0001
Title
Image position
correction patch
detection alarm 1

Movement: None
Cause: The detection data of the average value of the image
position correction patch pattern has exceeded the permitted
range.
Scraches on the ITB
Failure of the photosensitive drum
Noise due to contact failure of the ITB guide (The ITB unit
is not installed correctly.)
Measures:
1. Check whether the color image is formed correctly for 4
colors.
a. Perform test print in the following condition.
COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE: 5
Output one sheet for each color in the paper of LTR/A4/A3
size (more than 290mm in a horizontal scanning direction).
b. Check the following points.
Check whether the image is formed in the printing field
except a margin. Check whether the image density is not
low.
Check whether an unexpected image is not formed.
If a correct image is not formed, check the following
points.
Developing assembly: Check whether dirt is not applied to
the developing.
Drum: Check whether dirt is not applied to the drum.
Check whether there are no scratches on the drum.
ITB cleaning unit: Check whether an ITB cleaning failure
has not occurred. (Check whether the previous image
does not remain.)
Check whether there are a lot of scratches or dents on the
ITB or not.
Based on the checking results and frequency of
occurrence of the alarm, make a judgment of whether or
not to replace the corresponding parts.
7-147
Alarm
Code
Level
34-0002
Title
Image position
correction patch
detection alarm 2

Movement: None
Cause: The image position correction patch pattern cannot
be detected at all.
Failure of the patch sensor
Failure of the shutter
Image failure
1. Check whether the color image is formed correctly for 4
colors.
Check whether the image is formed in the printing field
except a margin. Check whether the image density is not
low.
Check whether an unexpected image is not formed.
If a correct image is not formed, take measures to be taken
for prevention of an image failure. (Check the developing
assembly and drum unit.)
Developing assembly: Check whether dirt is not applied to
the developing.
Drum: Check whether dirt is not applied to the drum.
Check whether there are no scratches on the drum.
ITB cleaning unit: Check whether an ITB cleaning failure
has not occurred. (Check whether the previous image
does not remain.)
Check whether there are a lot of scratches or dents on the
ITB or not.
Based on the checking results and frequency of
occurrence of the alarm, make a judgment of whether or
not to replace the corresponding parts.
2. Damage or dirt of/on the patch sensor
a. Check whether the shutter of the patch sensor operates
correctly.
b. Check whether dirt is not applied to the patch sensor.
If dirt is applied, clean the sensor surface with alcohol. After
cleaning, execute patch light intensity correction and base
correction (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>PT-LPADJ).
c. If the problem is not eliminated even after cleaning,
replace the registration patch sensor unit.
d. Check whether shorting has occurred to the patch sensor
harness.
If it occurred, replace both of the harness and the DC
controller interface PCB. (It is necessary to replace the
PCB because the DC controller interface PCB burns when
shorting occurs.)
7-147
7
Alarm
Code
Level
Title
34-0003
34-0004
An attempt to read
10 sets of auto
registration patterns
has failed, ending in
a time-out condition.
Image position
correction patch
correction alarm 1

The registration sensor is faulty, the registration sensor
cleaning member is blocking the registration sensor, or no
image has been drawn on the belt.
Movement: None
Cause: The correction amount of the skew correction motor
has exceeded the limit.
Failure of the laser scanner unit
Failure of installation of the laser scanner unit
Incorrect detection by the registration sensor (Scratches
on the belt)
Measures:
1. Check whether a color image is formed correctly for 4
colors.
Check whether there is color displacement in a horizontal
scanning direction based on the Bk standard, and check
whether there is a color which is extremely displaced.
Replace the laser scanner unit for the color in which
significant color displacement occurred.
2. Check whether there are a lot of scratches or dents on the
ITB or not. If there are a lot of them and this alarm occurs
frequently, replace the ITB.
7-148
Alarm
Code
Level
34-0005
Title
Image position
correction patch
correction alarm 2

Movement: None
Cause: The vertical scanning direction writing correction
limiter has been exceeded.
on the belt)
Patch image failure
Measures:
colors.
Output more than 2 sheets of A3-size paper consecutively.
Or, output 4 sheets of A4-size paper consecutively.
Check whether an unexpected image is not formed. (Color
displacement in a vertical scanning direction)
If a correct image is not formed, take measures to be
taken for prevention of an image failure. (Check the
developing assembly and drum unit.)
7-148
7
Alarm
Code
Level
34-0006
Title
Image position
correction patch
correction alarm 3

Movement: None
Cause:
The horizontal scanning direction magnification correction
limiter has been exceeded.
on the belt)
Patch image failure
Measures:
colors.
Reinstall the laser scanner unit where significant color
displacement occurred. If the problem cannot be still
eliminated, replace the unit.
taken for prevention of an image failure. (Replace the
drum unit, etc.)
7-149
Alarm
Code
Level
34-0007
Image position
correction patch
correction alarm 4
34-0010
34-1001
37-0001
37-0002
37-0003
37-0004
37-0005
37-0006
37-0007
37-1000
37-2000
38-0001
38-0002
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
ITB home position

error
ITB Steering Motor
retry error
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
Title

Movement: None
Cause:
The horizontal scanning direction writing correction limiter
has been exceeded.
on the belt)
Patch image failure
Measures:
colors.
Reinstall the laser scanner unit where significant color
displacement occurred. If the problem cannot be still
eliminated, replace the unit.
taken for prevention of an image failure. (Replace the
drum unit, etc.)
An error was detected at ITB home position.
Retry occurred when detecting home position of the ITB
Steering Motor.
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
For R&D
7-149
Alarm
Code
Level
Title
50-0007
A failure of lack of light intensity occurred when adjusting the

output of the post-separation sensor 3.
50-0008
50-0009
50-0010
Lack of light intensity

in the post-separation
sensor 3
in the read sensor 1
in the delivery sensor
A separation
alarm occurred
consecutively.
in the registration
sensor
Insufficient LED
light intensity error
in Scanner Unit for
reading the back side
(DADF)
Memory overflow
Font memory
overflow
Micromemory
overflow
Image memory
overflow
Pattern memory
overflow
Hard disk error
Detect operation
abnormality for the
HDD access request
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
50-0013
50-0014
70-1
70-2
3
3
70-3
70-4
70-5
70-6
70-7
3
2
73-0004
73-0006
73-0007
73-0008
73-0009
73-0010
73-0011
73-0012
73-0013
73-0014
73-0015
73-0016
73-0017
73-0018
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3

output of the read sensor 1.
output of the delivery sensor.
A failure occurred.

output of the registration sensor.
7-150
Alarm
Code
Level
73-0019
73-0020
73-0021
73-0022
73-0023
73-0024
73-0025
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
73-0026
75-0001
3
3
75-0002
75-9101
LIPS
Error occurred in
external controller
Error occurred due to
invalid SVG analysis
from external
controller
Failure in transfer of
video data from an
external controller
75-9102
video data from an
external controller
75-9103
video data from an
external controller
75-9104
video data from an
external controller
75-9105
video data from an
external controller
75-9106
video data from an
external controller
Light intensity was insufficient at LED lighting.
Overflow of work memory for translator

Error in configuration acquisition/management
Memory management error in LIPS
File management error in LIPS
Reception data management error
Page control error
Macro management error
Color management error
Layout control error
Font management error
Letter drawing error
Graphic drawing error
Image drawing error
Display error to LCD
Title

Text mode command error layer error
Vector mode command error layer error
Utility execution control error
Database management error in LIPS
Menu control error in LIPS
Boot error in LIPS
When the graphic library is in use for image processing, if
the memory allocation is failed.
Data format error of image mode
-
When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of

the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
7-150
7
Alarm
Code
Level
75-9107
video data from an
external controller
75-9108
video data from an
external controller
75-9109
video data from an
external controller
75-9110
video data from an
external controller
75-9111
video data from an
external controller
75-9112
video data from an
external controller
75-9113
video data from an
external controller
75-9114
video data from an
external controller
75-9115
video data from an
external controller
Title

to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
7-151
Alarm
Code
Level
75-9116
video data from an
external controller
75-9117
video data from an
external controller
75-9118
video data from an
external controller
75-9119
video data from an
external controller
75-9120
video data from an
external controller
75-910A
video data from an
external controller
75-910B
video data from an
external controller
75-910C
video data from an
external controller
75-910D
video data from an
external controller
Title

to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
7-151
7
Alarm
Code
Level
75-910E
video data from an
external controller
75-910F
video data from an
external controller
75-911A
video data from an
external controller
75-911B
video data from an
external controller
75-911C
video data from an
external controller
75-911D
video data from an
external controller
75-911E
video data from an
external controller
75-911F
video data from an
external controller
75-B101
video data from an
external controller
Title

to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
7-152
Alarm
Code
Level
75-B102
video data from an
external controller
75-B103
video data from an
external controller
75-B104
video data from an
external controller
75-B105
video data from an
external controller
75-B106
video data from an
external controller
75-B107
video data from an
external controller
75-B108
video data from an
external controller
75-B109
video data from an
external controller
75-B10A
video data from an
external controller
Title

to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
7-152
7
Alarm
Code
Level
75-B10B
video data from an
external controller
75B10C
video data from an
external controller
75B10D
video data from an
external controller
75-B10E
video data from an
external controller
75-B10F
video data from an
external controller
75-B110
video data from an
external controller
75-B111
video data from an
external controller
75-B112
video data from an
external controller
75-B113
video data from an
external controller
Title

to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
7-153
Alarm
Code
Level
75-B114
video data from an
external controller
75-B115
video data from an
external controller
75-B116
video data from an
external controller
75-B117
video data from an
external controller
75-B118
video data from an
external controller
75-B119
video data from an
external controller
75-B11A
video data from an
external controller
75-B11B
video data from an
external controller
75-B11C
video data from an
external controller
Title

to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
7-153
7
Alarm
Code
Level
75-B11D
video data from an
external controller
75-B11E
video data from an
external controller
75-B11F
video data from an
external controller
75-B120
video data from an
external controller
76-0001
76-0002
3
3
Font
Font
76-0003
76-0004
76-0005
76-0006
76-0007
2
2
2
2
2
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
76-0008
Font
77-0001
77-0002
77-0003
77-0005
77-0006
78-0003
78-0005
79-0001
2
2
2
2
1
3
1
3
79-0002
79-0003
79-0004
PDL
PDL
PDL
PDL
PDL
GL
GL
In-house developed
PCL
In-house developed
PCL
In-house developed
PCL
In-house developed
PCL
Title
7-154
Alarm
Code
Level

to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
to be taken.
No memory for internal font
Fails to assure the work area to analyze the font that is
downloaded at Resource Download.
Fails to access the file that stores the font.
Fails to allocate the FM work memory.
Fails to analyze the internal font.
Alignment of font data is wrong.
Failed to allocate work memory with scaler. There are 3
types depending on where to occur
Failed to allocate work memory with scaler. There are 3
types depending on where to occur
Fails to allocate the memory
Failure of rendering
DGL entry invalid
Other errors
DLG memory insufficient
GL entry invalid
System memory full
A PCL initialization error
80-0001
80-0003
80-0010
80-0011
80-0015
80-0016
80-0018
80-0019
81-0001
81-0002
81-0003
81-0004
81-0005
82-0001
83-0001
83-0002
83-0003
83-0004
83-0005
83-0006
83-0007
83-0008
83-0009
83-0010
83-0011
83-0012
83-0013
83-0014
83-0015
83-0016
83-0017
83-0018
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
3
3
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
3
1
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
Imaging
Imaging
Imaging
Imaging
Imaging
RIP
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
84-0001
84-0002
84-0003
84-0004
3
3
3
A PCL processing error
84-0005
84-0006
84-0007
84-0008
3
3
3
3
XPS memory full

error
XPS spool full error
XPS print range error
XPS document data
error
XPS page data error
XPS image data error
XPS font data error
XPS non-support
image error

Download overflow
Title

Admin error
DataArea error
Graphics error
Char error
Print data cannot process this version.
Syntax error
In case of invalid data format in BDL custom mode.
Fails to allocate the memory
Failure of rendering
Imaging initialization error
Imaging processing error
H/W Dart hangup by the DisplayList injustice
PDF data error
PDF compression analysis error
PDF page compression error
PDF data processing error
PDF memory full
PDF temporary file error
PDF color analysis error
PDF data reading error
PDF output selection error
PDF process file error
PDF access error
PDF analysis access error
PDF font error
PDF rendering error
PDF data decode error
PDF print range error
PDF error
PDF analysis error
There is un-supported transparent object
-
7-154
7
Alarm
Code
Level
84-0009
85-0001
3
3
XPS rendering error

Scanning input
timeout error
85-0002
Scanning input
encode error
85-0003
Scanning input
encode error 2
85-0004
Scanning input
VSync error
85-0005
Scanning input
HSync error
85-0006
85-0007
85-0008
Image processing
timeout error
Image processing
transfer error
Illegal packet error
85-0009
Title
Process instruction
error
7-155

Remove and place the document, decrease the sharpness
level, and perform printing again.
If this alarm occurs frequently, check the connection of the
DDIS video cable, replace the reader, and replace the video
controller 2.
controller 2.
controller 2.
controller 2.
controller 2.
When an error retry failed three times, E747-6xxx/7xxx is
displayed.
When an error retry failed three times, E747-6xxx/8xxx is
displayed.
When an error retry failed three times, E747-3xxx is
displayed.
When an error retry failed three times, E747-3xxx is
displayed.
T-7-30
7-155
Service Mode
Overview
COPIER
FEEDER
SORTER
BOARD
Service Mode
Service Mode > Overview > Service mode item explanations
Overview
8-2
Service mode item explanations
Instructions on how to use service mode items can be found within the service mode itself.
The information explains what items have been added or changed from previous models.
Explanatory texts for the initial window, main items, sub items and minor items can be
displayed.
Select the desired initial window, main item, sub item or minor item, then pres [i] (Information
button) to display an explanatory text (hereafter, service mode contents) on the selected item.
Entering Service Mode
E.g., COPIER > DISPLAY > Version window
Contact the sales company for the method to enter service mode.
Service Mode Menu

TOP Screen
1) Press [i]
2) Minor item titles

are displayed.
4) A detailed explanation on the

item will be displayed (usage
scenarios, instructions,
settings range, etc.).
F-8-1
"MODELIST"
"MODELIST CLASSIC"
A brand new additional mode in the host machine.

A function that can be used as a reference on
how to use each item in Service Mode is installed.
The new function, which will be described later, is
available in MODELIST Mode.
This mode is same as the old machine. The new
function, which will be described later, is not
available in the MODELIST CLASSIC Mode.
3) Select the desired
minor item and
press [i]
If " MODELIST " or " MODELIST CLASSIC " is pressed, the screen will switch to initial screen for
each mode.
The service mode contents can be displayed in J/E/F/I/G/S languages.
F-8-2
Service mode contents, like system software, can be upgraded by SST.
Service Mode > Overview > Service mode item explanations
8-2
Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description
I/O information enhancement
8-3
Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description
On the COPIER > I/O, the mode to confirm input output signal of electrical parts used (sensor,
The detail description of each code can be viewed on the error code and alarm code
motor, fan, etc), makes it easier to look for the intended electrical part.
occurrence record screen.
And the screen will also display the input output signal.
ERROR CODE : COPIER > DISPLAY >ERR
Device classification
Electrical parts
classification
1) Press the button.

Which button to press, will depend on which
electrical parts intended and its device
classification. For instance, if the host
machine uses paper pass detection sensor,
then press the button on the "COPIER" and
"P-Sensor" position.
2) Then the selected electrical

parts classification's mark,
name, port number and 0/1
content will appear.
F-8-4
ALARM CODE : COPIER > DISPLAY >ERR
3) If the "i" button is pressed,

the screen displaying the
electrical parts array will appear.
F-8-3
F-8-5
Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description
8-3
Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes
COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation
8-4
Security features
On the current machine, there are extremely many items in the COPIER > OPTION > BODY (in
To prevent unauthorized access to Service Mode, Password set is enabled.
related to host machine specification), that it is difficult to reach the intended item.
In order to reach the intended item in shorter time, all items inside the BODY is classified to
15 categories.
Classification
Function switching
Related service modes

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW (Level1)
Name
FNC-SW
Set password type for transition to service mode.
Description
Language, cassette, paper size type, NAVI/
DA connection, count-up spec., document size
detection, dirt detection level
Display switching/ display timing
DSPLY-SW
UI (User Interface) display related
Image related (fixing)
IMG-FIX
Fixing related
Image related (transfer)
IMG-TR
Primary transfer, secondary transfer, ITB
Image related (developing)
IMG-DEV
Developer related
<Setting range>
0: No password (default)
1: Service engineer
2: System administrator and Service engineer.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD (Level2)
Password for service engineer for transition to service mode.
<Setting range>
Image related (laser/ latent image) IMG-LSR
Laser, latent image related
Image related (reader/ ADF)
IMG-RDR
Reader, ADF image related
Image related (controller, other

general items)
IMG-MCON MN-CON image related, and image related items

other than those referred to above.
Image quality/ copy speed
IMG-SPD
Cleaning
CLEANING Cleaning of charging unit, drum, transfer roller,

ITB, etc.
Environment settings
ENV-SET
Temperature, humidity, environmental heater,

condensation, log acquisition
Paper feed (pickup, delivery)
FEED-SW
Stack performance, motor speed adjustment,

delivery functions, etc.
Noise reduction
SOUND
Noise related
Network
NETWORK
Network settings, IFAX, SEND, E-RDS, etc.
Customization
CUSTOM
Customization
To reinforce the security, change the password from a default.
Power down sequence
******** (eight digit numeral) [default: 11111111]

After the above setting, to enter Service Mode, enter password screen will appear.
T-8-1
Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes
8-4
Service Mode > Overview > Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)
1) Additional Functions > System Settings > System Manager Settings > enter System
Manager ID > enter System Password Settings > press OK button.
8-5
Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)

Switching screens between level 1 and 2 has been made easier.
When level 1 screen is displayed, press <LEVEL 1> in the right upper side of the screen, and
it will switch to level 2.
System
Manager
ID
System
Password
F-8-6
2) After entering the password for service technician (Service mode: COPIER > Option >
FNC-SW > SM-PSWD), press OK button.
SM-PSWD
F-8-7
NOTE :
If Service Engineers password is forgotten, password function is cancelable by using
Service Support Tool (SST).
F-8-8
Service Mode > Overview > Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)
8-5
Service Mode > Overview > Back-up of service mode
Language switch
8-6
Back-up of service mode
The language of the explanatory text displayed in the Service Mode can be switched by
In factory setting, adjustments are made for each machine, and adjustment values are written
performing the below languange switch operation in User Mode
in the service label.
The explanatory text can be displayed by installing the Service Mode Content (SCMNT) in
When you replaced the DC controller PCB, or executed the RAM clear function, adjustment
HDD.
values for ADJUST or OPTION return to default. Therefore, when you made adjustments and
Service Mode Content (SCMNT) can be installed and upgraded on SST.
changed values of the Service Mode in the field, be sure to write down the changed values in
Additional Functions > Common Settings > Language Switch
the service label. When there is no relevant field in the service label, write down the values in
a blank field.
Settings/Registration
<Language/Keybord Switch>
Service Label
Language
English
Japanese
French
German
Italian
Dutch
1/1
Keyboard Layout
F-8-10
Set
English(USA)Layout
Cancel
OK
F-8-9
NOTE :
If the Service Mode Content (SMCNT) of the concerned language is not installed,
English explanatory text will be displayed.
If English-language Service Mode Content (SMCNT) is not installed either, explanatory
text can't be displayed.
Service Mode > Overview > Back-up of service mode
8-6
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
COPIER
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
DISPLAY
VERSION
DC-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
R-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PANEL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ECO
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FEEDER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SORTER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
NIB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PS/PCL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SDL-STCH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-7
Display of DCON firmware version

To display the firmware version of DC Controller PCB.
When upgrading the firmware
00.01 to 99.99
Display of RCON firmware version
To display the firmware version of Reader Controller PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl Control Panel CPU PCB ROM version
To display the ROM version of Control Panel CPU PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ECO-ID PCB ROM version
To display the ROM version of ECO-ID PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of DADF Driver PCB ROM version
To display the firmware version of DADF Driver PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of FIN-CONT firmware version
To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of network software version
To display the version of the network software.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of PS/PCL function version
Display of PS/PCL function version
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Saddle Sttch Ctrollr PCB ROM ver
To display the ROM version of the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
OP-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
MN-CONT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
RUI
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PUNCH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-JP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of Option Controller PCB ROM ver

To display the ROM ver of Option Controller PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of MNCON firmware version
To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of remote UI version
To display the version of remote UI.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Puncher Unit version
To display the version of Puncher Unit.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of English language file version
To display the version of English language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of French language file version
To display the version of French language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of German language file version
To display the version of German language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Italian language file version
To display the version of Italian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Japanese language file ver
To display the version of Japanese language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Czech language file version
To display the version of Czech language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Danish language file version
To display the version of Danish language file.
00.01 to 99.99
8-7

LANG-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of Greek language file version

To display the version of Greek language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Spanish language file version
To display the version of Spanish language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Estonian language file ver
To display the version of Estonian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Finnish language file version
To display the version of Finnish language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Hungarian language file ver
To display the version of Hungarian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Korean language file version
To display the version of Korean language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Dutch language file version
To display the version of Dutch language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Norwegian language file ver
To display the version of Norwegian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Polish language file version
To display the version of Polish language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Portuguese language file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Russian language file version
To display the version of Russian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
8-8
LANG-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ECO-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GDI-UFR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of Slovenian language file ver

To display the version of Slovenian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Swedish language file version
To display the version of Swedish language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Chinese language file ver: trad
To display the version of Chinese language file (traditional).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Chinese language file ver: smpl
To display the version of Chinese language file (simplified).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ECO-ID code
To display the ECO-ID code.
ASCII character string (12 digits)
Display of UFR function version
To display the version of UFR function.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Bulgarian language file ver
To display the version of Bulgarian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Croatian language file ver
To display the version of Croatian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Romanian language file ver
To display the version of Romanian language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Slovak language file version
To display the version of Slovak language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Turkish language file version
To display the version of Turkish language file.
00.01 to 99.99
8-8

MEAP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
OCR-CN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
OCR-JP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
OCR-KR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
OCR-TW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOOTROM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TTS-JA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TTS-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TTS-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display of MEAP contents version

To display the version of MEAP contents in HDD.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Chinese OCR: simplified
To display the version of Chinese OCR (simplified).
--.-- is displayed when no file is found.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Japanese OCR version
To display the version of Japanese OCR.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Korean OCR version
To display the version of Korean OCR.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Chinese OCR ver: traditional
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOOTROM version
To display the version of BOOTROM.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl Japanese voice dictionary version
To display the version of Japanese voice dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of English voice dictionary version
To display the version of English voice dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Italian voice dictionary version
To display the version of Italian voice dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
TTS-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TTS-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TTS-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
WEB-BRWS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
HELP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Supplement/memo
LANG-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
WEBDAV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TIMESTMP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-9
Dspl of French voice dictionary version

To display the version of French voice dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Spanish voice dictionary version
To display the version of Spanish voice dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of German voice dictionary version
To display the version of German voice dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Web browser version
To display the version of Web browser.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Easy NAVI version
To display the version of Easy NAVI file.
Version should be displayed for Easy NAVI function because it is an
external file.
Version should be displayed for EASY NAVI function because it is an
external file.
00.01 to 99.99
EASY NAVI function is equipped as standard instead of the
conventional HELP function.
Display of Catalan language file version
To display the version of Catalan language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of WebDAV version
To display the version of WebDAV file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of timestamp version
To display the version of Time Stamp file.
00.01 to 99.99
8-9

ASR-JA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ASR-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
MEDIA-JA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-EN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-DE
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-IT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-FR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of Japanese ASR dictionary version

To display the version of Japanese automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
ASR: Automatic Speech Recognition
Dspl of English ASR dictionary version
To display the version of English automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Japanese media information ver
To display the version of Japanese media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl English media information version
To display the version of English media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of German media information version
To display the version of German media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl Italian media information version
To display the version of Italian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of French media information version
To display the version of French media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Chinese media info ver: smpl
To display the version of Chinese media information (simplified).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Slovak media information version
To display the version of Slovak media information.
00.01 to 99.99
8-10
MEDIA-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-ES
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl Turkish media information version

To display the version of Turkish media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Czech media information version
To display the version of Czech media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Greek media information version
To display the version of Greek media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl Spanish media information version
To display the version of Spanish media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Estonian media information ver
To display the version of Estonian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl Finnish media information version
To display the version of Finnish media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Hungarian media information ver
To display the version of Hungarian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Korean media information version
To display the version of Korean media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Dutch media information version
To display the version of Dutch media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Norwegian media information ver
To display the version of Norwegian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Polish media information version
To display the version of Polish media information.
00.01 to 99.99
8-10

MEDIA-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ECO2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dspl of Portuguese media information ver

To display the version of Portuguese media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl Russian media information version
To display the version of Russian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Slovenian media information ver
To display the version of Slovenian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl Swedish media information version
To display the version of Swedish media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Chinese media info version:trad
To display the version of Chinese media information (traditional).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Bulgarian media information ver
To display the version of Bulgarian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Croatian media information ver
To display the version of Croatian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Romanian media information ver
To display the version of Romanian media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl Catalan media information version
To display the version of Catalan media information.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of ECO-ID PCB ROM ver (paper back)
To display the ROM version of ECO-ID PCB (for paper back) when
the 1-path DADF is connected.
--.-- is displayed when the 1-path DADF is not connected.
ECO2 00.01 to 99.99
8-11
FAX1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FAX2/3/4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
IOCS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SYSTEM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ROOT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TRIM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FOLD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
INS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PUNCH-IF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-JP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display of 1-line FAX PCB ROM version

To display the ROM version of 1-line FAX PCB.
NULL is displayed if the PCB is not connected.
Dspl of 2/3/4-line FAX PCB ROM version
To display the ROM version of 2/3/4-line FAX PCB.
NULL is displayed if the PCB is not connected.
Display of BIOS version
To display the BIOS version.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl Linux kernel/tool/driver/file ver
To display the version of Linux kernel/tool/driver/file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ROOT version
To display the ROOT version.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Trimmer ROM version
To display the ROM version of Trimmer.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Paper Folding Unit ROM version
To display the ROM version of Paper Folding Unit.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Inserter ROM version
To display the ROM version of Inserter.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Multi-hole Puncher IFU ROM ver
To display the ROM version of Interface Unit for Multi-hole Puncher.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of service mode Japanese file ver
To display the version of Japanese language file in service mode.
00.01 to 99.99
8-11

S-LNG-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-GR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-SP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
UI-RES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPY-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SEND-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOX-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
RPTL-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dspl service mode English file version

To display the version of English language file in service mode.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of service mode French file version
To display the version of French language file in service mode.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl service mode Italian file version
To display the version of Italian language file in service mode.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of service mode German file version
To display the version of German language file in service mode.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl service mode Spanish file version
To display the version of Spanish language file in service mode.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UI resource file version
To display the UIRES version.
UIRES consists of the resource file which is necessary to display the
native screen (top screen and software keyboard screen) of UI.
When checking the version at the time of downloading UIRES to
MFP
00.01 to 99.99
Display of COPY (JAVA UI) version
To display the version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of SEND (JAVA UI) version
To display the version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX (JAVA UI) version
To display the version of BOX application (JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of RUI portal version
To display the RUI portal version.
00.01 to 99.99
8-12
INTRO-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TSP-JLK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPY-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPY-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPY-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPY-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPY-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of useful func introduce appli ver

To display the version of Introduction to Useful Features application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Image Data Analyzer PCB version
To display the version of Image Data Analyzer PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli French file version
To display the French language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Italian file version
To display the Italian language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli German file version
To display the German language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Spanish file version
To display the Spanish language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl COPY appli Chinese file ver: smpl
To display the simplified Chinese language file version of COPY
application (JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Chinese file ver:trad
To display the traditional Chinese language file version of COPY
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Korean file version
To display the Korean language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-12

COPY-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of COPY appli Czech file version

To display the Czech language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Danish file version
To display the Danish language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Greek file version
To display the Greek language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Estonian file version
To display the Estonian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Finnish file version
To display the Finnish language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl COPY appli Hungarian file version
To display the Hungarian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Dutch file version
To display the Dutch language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl COPY appli Norwegian file version
To display the Norwegian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Polish file version
To display the Polish language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-13
COPY-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of COPY appli Portuguese file ver

To display the Portuguese language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Russian file version
To display the Russian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl COPY appli Slovenian file version
To display the Slovenian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Swedish file version
To display the Swedish language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Indonesian file ver
To display the Indonesian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl COPY appli Bulgarian file version
To display the Bulgarian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Croatian file version
To display the Croatian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Romanian file version
To display the Romanian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Slovak file version
To display the Slovak language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-13

COPY-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SEND-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SEND-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SEND-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SEND-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of COPY appli Turkish file version

To display the Turkish language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Catalan file version
To display the Catalan language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Thai file version
To display the Thai language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Vietnamese file ver
To display the Vietnamese language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli French file version
To display the French language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Italian file version
To display the Italian language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli German file version
To display the German language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Spanish file version
To display the Spanish language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl SEND appli Chinese file ver: smpl
To display the simplified Chinese language file version of SEND
00.01 to 99.99
8-14
SEND-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of SEND appli Chinese file ver:trad

To display the traditional Chinese language file version of SEND
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Korean file version
To display the Korean language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Czech file version
To display the Czech language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Danish file version
To display the Danish language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Greek file version
To display the Greek language file version of the SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Estonian file version
To display the Estonian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Finnish file version
To display the Finnish language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl SEND appli Hungarian file version
To display the Hungarian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Dutch file version
To display the Dutch language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-14

SEND-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dsp SEND appli Norwegian file version

To display the Norwegian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Polish file version
To display the Polish language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Portuguese file ver
To display the Portuguese language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Russian file version
To display the Russian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl SEND appli Slovenian file version
To display the Slovenian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Swedish file version
To display the Swedish language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Indonesian file ver
To display the Indonesian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl SEND appli Bulgarian file version
To display the Bulgarian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Croatian file version
To display the Croatian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-15
SEND-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
INTRO-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
INTRO-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dspl of SEND appli Romanian file version

To display the Romanian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Slovak file version
To display the Slovak language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Turkish file version
To display the Turkish language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Catalan file version
To display the Catalan language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Thai file version
To display the Thai language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Vietnamese file ver
To display the Vietnamese language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful func intro French file ver
To display the version of French language file of Introduction to
Useful Features application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful func intro Italian file ver
To display the version of Italian language file of Introduction to Useful
Features application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful func intro German file ver
To display the version of German language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
8-15

INTRO-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
INTRO-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl useful func intro Spanish file ver

To display the version of Spanish language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Useful func intro Chinese file ver: smpl
To display the version of simplified Chinese language file of
Introduction to Useful Features application.
00.01 to 99.99
Useful func intro Chinese file ver: trad
To display the version of traditional Chinese language file of
Introduction to Useful Features application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful func intro Korean file ver
To display the version of Korean language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of useful func intro Czech file ver
To display the version of Czech language file of Introduction to Useful
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful func intro Danish file ver
To display the version of Danish language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of useful func intro Greek file ver
To display the version of Greek language file of Introduction to Useful
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful func intro Estonian file ver
To display the version of Estonian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful func intro Finnish file ver
To display the version of Finnish language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
8-16
INTRO-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl usful func intro Hungarian file ver

To display the version of Hungarian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of useful func intro Dutch file ver
To display the version of Dutch language file of Introduction to Useful
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl usful func intro Norwegian file ver
To display the version of Norwegian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of usful func intro Polish file ver
To display the version of Polish language file of Introduction to Useful
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl usful func intro Portuguese filever
To display the version of Portuguese language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful func intro Russian file ver
To display the version of Russian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl usful func intro Slovenian file ver
To display the version of Slovenian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful func intro Swedish file ver
To display the version of Swedish language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of useful func intro Indon file ver
To display the version of Indonesian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
8-16

INTRO-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dspl usful func intro Bulgarian file ver

To display the version of Bulgarian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful func intro Croatian file ver
To display the version of Croatian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful func intro Romanian file ver
To display the version of Romanian language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of usful func intro Slovak file ver
To display the version of Slovak language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful func intro Turkish file ver
To display the version of Turkish language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful func intro Catalan file ver
To display the version of Catalan language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful func intro Thai file version
To display the version of Thai language file of Introduction to Useful
00.01 to 99.99
Useful func intro Vietnamese file ver
To display the version of Vietnamese language file of Introduction to
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu French file version
To display the version of French language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-17
CSTMN-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CSTMN-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CSTMN-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CSTMN-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of custom menu Italian file version

To display the version of Italian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu German file version
To display the version of German language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Spanish file version
To display the version of Spanish language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl custom menu Chinese file ver: smpl
To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for custom
menu application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl custom menu Chinese file ver: trad
To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for custom
menu application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Korean file version
To display the version of Korean language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Czech file version
To display the version of Czech language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Danish file version
To display the version of Danish language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Greek file version
To display the version of Greek language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-17

CSTMN-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl custom menu Estonian file version

To display the version of Estonian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Finnish file version
To display the version of Finnish language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Hungarian file ver
To display the version of Hungarian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Dutch file version
To display the version of Dutch language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Norwegian file ver
To display the version of Norwegian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Polish file version
To display the version of Polish language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Portuguese file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Russian file version
To display the version of Russian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Slovenian file ver
To display the version of Slovenian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-18
CSTMN-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of custom menu Swedish file version

To display the version of Swedish language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Indonesian file ver
To display the version of Indonesian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Bulgarian file ver
To display the version of Bulgarian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl custom menu Croatian file version
To display the version of Croatian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl custom menu Romanian file version
To display the version of Romanian language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Slovak file version
To display the version of Slovak language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Turkish file version
To display the version of Turkish language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Catalan file version
To display the version of Catalan language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Thai file version
To display the version of Thai language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-18

CSTMN-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ACSBT-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ACSBT-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ACSBT-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ACSBT-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of custom menu Vietnamese file ver

To display the version of Vietnamese language file for custom menu
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl accessibility French file version
To display the version of French language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Italian file ver
To display the version of Italian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl accessibility German file version
To display the version of German language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Spanish file ver
To display the version of Spanish language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl accessibility Chinese file ver:smpl
To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for
Accessibility application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl accessibility Chinese file ver:trad
To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for
Accessibility application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl accessibility Korean file version
To display the version of Korean language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Czech file version
To display the version of Czech language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-19
ACSBT-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl accessibility Danish file version

To display the version of Danish language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Greek file version
To display the version of Greek language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Estonian file ver
To display the version of Estonian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Finnish file ver
To display the version of Finnish language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Hungarian file ver
To display the version of Hungarian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Dutch file version
To display the version of Dutch language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Norwegian file ver
To display the version of Norwegian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl accessibility Polish file version
To display the version of Polish language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl accessibility Portuguese file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-19

ACSBT-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of accessibility Russian file ver

To display the version of Russian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Slovenian file ver
To display the version of Slovenian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Swedish file ver
To display the version of Swedish language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl accessibility Indonesian file ver
To display the version of Indonesian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Bulgarian file ver
To display the version of Bulgarian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Croatian file ver
To display the version of Croatian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Romanian file ver
To display the version of Romanian language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl accessibility Slovak file version
To display the version of Slovak language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Turkish file ver
To display the version of Turkish language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-20
ACSBT-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
Dspl of accessibility Catalan file ver

To display the version of Catalan language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Thai file version
To display the version of Thai language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl accessibility Vietnamese file ver
To display the version of Vietnamese language file for Accessibility
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS French file version
To display the version of French language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
ERS: Error Recovery System
Display of ERS Italian file version
To display the version of Italian language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS German file version
To display the version of German language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Spanish file version
To display the version of Spanish language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Chinese file ver:smpl
To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for ERS
application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-20

ERS-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
Display of ERS Chinese file ver:trad

To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for ERS
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Korean file version
To display the version of Korean language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Czech file version
To display the version of Czech language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Danish file version
To display the version of Danish language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Greek file version
To display the version of Greek language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Estonian file version
To display the version of Estonian language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Finnish file version
To display the version of Finnish language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Hungarian file version
To display the version of Hungarian language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-21
ERS-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
Display of ERS Dutch file version

To display the version of Dutch language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Norwegian file version
To display the version of Norwegian language file for ERS
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Polish file version
To display the version of Polish language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Portuguese file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file for ERS
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Russian file version
To display the version of Russian language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Slovenian file version
To display the version of Slovenian language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Swedish file version
To display the version of Swedish language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Indonesian file ver
To display the version of Indonesian language file for ERS
application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-21

ERS-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ERS-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display of ERS Bulgarian file version

To display the version of Bulgarian language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Croatian file version
To display the version of Croatian language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Romanian file version
To display the version of Romanian language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Slovak file version
To display the version of Slovak language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Turkish file version
To display the version of Turkish language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Catalan file version
To display the version of Catalan language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Thai file version
To display the version of Thai language file for ERS application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Vietnamese file version
To display the version of Vietnamese language file for ERS
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC French file version
To display the version of French language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-22
NLS-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
NLS-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
NLS-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
NLS-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of UAC Italian file version

To display the version of Italian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC German file version
To display the version of German language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Spanish file version
To display the version of Spanish language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Chinese file ver:smpl
To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for UAC
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Chinese file ver:trad
To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for UAC
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Korean file version
To display the version of Korean language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Czech file version
To display the version of Czech language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Danish file version
To display the version of Danish language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Greek file version
To display the version of Greek language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Estonian file version
To display the version of Estonian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-22

NLS-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of UAC Finnish file version

To display the version of Finnish language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Hungarian file version
To display the version of Hungarian language file for UAC
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Dutch file version
To display the version of Dutch language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Norwegian file version
To display the version of Norwegian language file for UAC
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Polish file version
To display the version of Polish language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Portuguese file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file for UAC
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Russian file version
To display the version of Russian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Slovenian file version
To display the version of Slovenian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Swedish file version
To display the version of Swedish language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Indonesian file ver
To display the version of Indonesian language file for UAC
application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-23
NLS-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ROM-Y
Lv.2 Details
Display of UAC Bulgarian file version

To display the version of Bulgarian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Croatian file version
To display the version of Croatian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Romanian file version
To display the version of Romanian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Slovak file version
To display the version of Slovak language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Turkish file version
To display the version of Turkish language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Catalan file version
To display the version of Catalan language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Y-clr Laser Scanner version
To display the lot No., unit version and EEPROM version written in
EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit (Y).
Use case
When checking the lot No. or EEPROM version of Laser Scanner
Unit
Adj/set/operate method N/A (display only)
Lot No.: 4 digits (decimal notation), unit version: 1 digit (hexadecimal
notation), EEPROM version: 1 digit (hexadecimal notation)
ROM-M
Display of M-clr Laser Scanner version
Lv.2 Details
EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit (M).
Use case
Unit
8-23

ROM-C
Lv.2 Details
Display of C-clr Laser Scanner version

EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit (C).
Use case
Unit
ROM-K
Display of Bk-clr Laser Scanner version
Lv.2 Details
EEPROM of Laser Scanner Unit (Bk).
Use case
Unit
BCT
Display of self diagnosis tool version
Lv.1 Details
To display the version of self diagnosis tool.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
ASR-ES
Dspl of Spanish ASR dictionary version
Lv.1 Details
To display the version of Spanish automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
Supplement/memo
ASR-FR
Dspl of French ASR dictionary version
Lv.1 Details
To display the version of French automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
Supplement/memo
ASR-IT
Dspl of Italian ASR dictionary version
Lv.1 Details
To display the version of Italian automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
Supplement/memo
ASR-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
LANG-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOX-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOX-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOX-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOX-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
8-24
Dspl of German ASR dictionary version

To display the version of German automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Thai language file version
To display the version of Thai language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Vietnamese language file ver
To display the version of Vietnamese language file.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli French file version
To display the version of French language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Italian file version
To display the version of Italian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli German file version
To display the version of German language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Spanish file version
To display the version of Spanish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Chinese file ver:smpl
To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for BOX
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Chinese file ver:trad
To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for BOX
00.01 to 99.99
8-24

BOX-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of BOX appli Korean file version

To display the version of Korean language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Czech file version
To display the version of Czech language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Danish file version
To display the version of Danish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Greek file version
To display the version of Greek language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Estonian file version
To display the version of Estonian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Finnish file version
To display the version of Finnish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Hungarian file version
To display the version of Hungarian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Dutch file version
To display the version of Dutch language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Norwegian file version
To display the version of Norwegian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-25
BOX-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of BOX appli Polish file version

To display the version of Polish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Portuguese file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file for BOX
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Russian file version
To display the version of Russian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Slovenian file version
To display the version of Slovenian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Swedish file version
To display the version of Swedish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Indonesian file ver
To display the version of Indonesian language file for BOX
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Bulgarian file version
To display the version of Bulgarian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Croatian file version
To display the version of Croatian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Romanian file version
To display the version of Romanian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-25

BOX-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
HOLD-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
HOLD-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
HOLD-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display of BOX appli Slovak file version

To display the version of Slovak language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Turkish file version
To display the version of Turkish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Catalan file version
To display the version of Catalan language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Thai file version
To display the version of Thai language file for BOX application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl BOX appli Vietnamese file version
To display the version of Vietnamese language file for BOX
00.01 to 99.99
Display of job hold application version
To display the version of the job hold application (JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold French file version
To display the French language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Italian file version
To display the Italian language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold German file version
To display the German language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-26
HOLD-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
HOLD-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of job hold Spanish file version

To display the Spanish language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Job hold Chinese file version: smpl
To display the simplified Chinese language file version of job hold
00.01 to 99.99
Job hold Chinese file version: trad
To display the traditional Chinese language file version of job hold
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Korean file version
To display the Korean language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Czech file version
To display the Czech language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Danish file version
To display the Danish language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Greek file version
To display the Greek language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Estonian file version
To display the Estonian language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Finnish file version
To display the Finnish language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-26

HOLD-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of job hold Hungarian file version

To display the Hungarian language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Dutch file version
To display the Dutch language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Norwegian file version
To display the Norwegian language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Polish file version
To display the Polish language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Portuguese file version
To display the Portuguese language file version of job hold
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Russian file version
To display the Russian language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Slovenian file version
To display the Slovenian language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Swedish file version
To display the Swedish language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Indonesian file version
To display the Indonesian language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-27
HOLD-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
HOLD-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
WSDS-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dspl of job hold Bulgarian file version

To display the Bulgarian language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Croatian file version
To display the Croatian language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Romanian file version
To display the Romanian language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Slovak file version
To display the Slovak language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Turkish file version
To display the Turkish language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Catalan file version
To display the Catalan language file version of job hold application
(JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Thai file version
To display the Thai language file version of job hold application (JAVA
UI).
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of job hold Vietnamese file version
To display the Vietnamese language file version of job hold
00.01 to 99.99
Display of WSD-SCAN (JAVA UI) version
To display the version of WSD-SCAN application (JAVA UI).
00.01 to 99.99
8-27

NLS-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of UAC Thai file version

To display the version of Thai language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Vietnamese file version
To display the version of Vietnamese language file for UAC
application.
00.00 to 99.99
Display of RUI portal Czech file version
To display the Czech language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Danish file version
To display the Danish language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Display of RUI portal Greek file version
To display the Greek language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Estonian file version
To display the Estonian language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Finnish file version
To display the Finnish language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Hungarian file ver
To display the Hungarian language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Display of RUI portal Dutch file version
To display the Dutch language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Norwegian file ver
To display the Norwegian language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Polish file version
To display the Polish language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
8-28
RPTL-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of RUI portal Portuguese file ver

To display the Portuguese language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Russian file version
To display the Russian language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Slovenian file ver
To display the Slovenian language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Swedish file version
To display the Swedish language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Indonesian file ver
To display the Indonesian language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Bulgarian file ver
To display the Bulgarian language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Croatian file version
To display the Croatian language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Romanian file version
To display the Romanian language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Slovak file version
To display the Slovak language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Turkish file version
To display the Turkish language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Catalan file version
To display the Catalan language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
8-28
8-29

RPTL-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
RPTL-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of RUI portal Thai file version

To display the Thai language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
Dspl of RUI portal Vietnamese file ver
To display the Vietnamese language file version of the RUI portal.
00.00 to 99.99
T-8-2
8-29
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS
USER
ACC-STS
COPIER > DISPLAY > USER
SPDTYPE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BRWS-STS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
8-30
COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS
Dspl of Ctrollr Board engine speed type

To display the engine speed type (ppm) of Controller Board.
When checking the engine speed type of Controller Board
55 to 75
Display of service browser ON/OFF
To display whether the service browser can be used.
If the value is 1, [Service Browser] button is displayed on the service
mode initial screen.
The value of BRWS-STS switches whenever COPIER> FUNCTION>
INSTALL> BRWS-ACT is executed, but ON/OFF of service browser
is enabled after reboot. If the service browser does not start even
though the value of BRWS-STS is 1, turn OFF/ON the main power
switch.
When checking the usage status of service browser
The value of BRWS-STS is linked with COPIER> FUNCTION>
INSTALL> BRWS-ACT, but the service browser cannot start even
though 1 is displayed unless the main power switch is turned OFF/
ON.
0 to 2
0: OFF (Only at the time of factory shipment, not connected to the
UGW server), 1: ON (Available), 2: OFF (Not available)
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> BRWS-ACT
FEEDER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SORTER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DECK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
T-8-3
CARD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
RAM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display of DADF connection state

To display the connection state of DADF.
When checking the connection between the machine and DADF
0 to 1
0: Not connected, 1: Connected
Connect state of Finisher-related option
To display the connecting state of Finisher-related options.
When checking the connection of Finisher-related options
Left column (connecting state of Finisher-related options): 1 to 5
1: Without Saddle
2: With Saddle, without Folding Unit
3: With Saddle and Inserter, without Folding Unit
4: With Saddle and Folding Unit, without Inserter
5: With Saddle, Inserter and Folding Unit
Right column (connecting state of Finisher-belonged Inserter): 0 to 4
0: no hole, 1: 2-hole, 2: 2/3-hole, 3: 4-hole, 4: 4-hole (SW)
Dspl of Paper Deck connection state
To display the connection state of the Paper Deck.
When checking the connection between the machine and the Paper
Decks
0 to 8
0: Not connected
1: Connected (small) (Display is hidden on this machine.)
2: Connected (large)
3: POD Deck Lite (with Multi-purpose Tray)
4: POD Deck Lite (without Multi-purpose Tray )
5: Multi-purpose Tray only
6: POD deck
7: 2-POD deck connected
8: 3-POD deck connected (Display is hidden on this machine.)
Dspl of connection state of Card Reader
To display the connecting state of Card Reader.
When checking the connection between the machine and the Card
Reader
0 to 1
0: No card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected. (Copy is
not available.)
1: Card Reader is not connected, or card is inserted while the Card
Reader is connected. (Copy is available.)
Display of MNCON PCB memory capacity
To display the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB.
When checking the memory capacity of the machine
Numeric value
8-30

COINROBO
Lv.1 Details
Use case
NIB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
NETWARE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SEND
Lv.1 Details
Use case
HDD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PCI1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dspl of Coin Manager connection state

To display the connecting state of the Coin Manager.
When checking the connection between the machine and the Coin
Manager
0 to 1
0: Not connected, 1: Connected
Display of Network PCB connection state
To display the connection state of the Network PCB.
When checking the connection between the machine and the
Network PCB
0 to 3
0: Not connected, 1: Ethernet PCB connected, 2: Token Ring PCB
connected, 3: Ethernet PCB + Token Ring PCB connected
Install state dspl of NetWare firmware
To display the installation state of NetWare firmware.
When checking whether NetWare firmware is installed to the
machine
0 to 1
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Display of SEND support PCB existence
To display whether there is a PCB to support SEND function.
SEND function can be used only when the PCB is mounted.
When checking the connection between the machine and the PCB
that supports SEND function
0 to 1
Display of HDD model name
To display the model name of HDD.
When checking the model name of HDD used on the machine
Character string
Display of PCI1-connected PCB name
To display the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI1.
When checking the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI1
-: No PCB connected
Voice Board: Voice PCB
3DES Board: Encryption PCB
1Gbit-Board: Giga Ethernet PCB
8-31
PCI2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PCI3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
IA-RAM
Lv.1 Details
Use case

When checking name of the PCB that is connected to PCI2
-: No PCB connected
iSLOT: iSLOT Wireless LAN PCB
Voice Board R: Voice Recognition PCB (Display is hidden on this
machine.)
When checking name of the PCB that is connected to PCI3
-: No PCB connected
iSLOT: iSLOT Wireless LAN PCB
Voice Board R: Voice Recognition PCB (Display is hidden on this
machine.)
Display of MNCON PCB memory(IA) capacity
To display the memory (IA) capacity of the Main Controller PCB.
When checking the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB
T-8-4
8-31
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG
ANALOG
COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG

TEMP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Appropriate target value
HUM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
ABS-HUM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
DR-TEMP
FIX-UC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
FIX-UE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
FIX-LC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
8-32
Display of outside temperature

To display the temperature outside the machine.
This is measured by the Environment Sensor that measures the
outside air.
When checking the temperature outside the machine
0 to 60
deg C
20 to 27
Display of outside humidity
To display the humidity outside the machine.
outside air.
When checking the humidity outside the machine
0 to 100
%
30 to 70
Display of outside moisture amount
To display the absolute moisture amount outside the machine.
outside air.
When checking the moisture amount outside the machine
0 to 100
g/m3
0 to 22
[For R&D]
Dspl of Fixing Film center temperature
To display the center temperature of the Fixing Film detected by the
Fixing Main Thermistor.
When checking the temperature at the center of Fixing Film
0 to 999
deg C
Dspl Fixing Film rear edge temperature
To display the rear edge temperature of the Fixing Film detected by
the Fixing Sub Thermistor 1.
When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Film
0 to 999
deg C
Dspl of Pressure Roller center temperature
To display the center temperature of the Pressure Roller detected by
the Pressure Main Thermistor.
When checking the temperature at the center of the Pressure Roller
deg C
At standby: 90 to 140
At print: 70 to 150 (differs depending on modes)
FIX-UE2
Lv.1 Details
Dspl of Fixing Rollerfront edge temp

To display the front edge temperature of the Fixing Film detected by
the Fixing Sub Thermistor 2.
Use case
When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Film
0 to 999
Unit
deg C
DR-TEMPL
[For R&D]
DEVHUM1
Dspl of Y/M color Dev Assy humidity
Lv.2 Details
To display the humidity of the Y and M Developing Assembly
detected by the Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection
PCB (Y/M).
Use case
When a failure occurs on the developing contrast
0 to 100
Unit
%
Appropriate target value 5 to 80
DEVHUM2
Dspl C color Developing Assy humidity
Lv.2 Details
To display the humidity of the C Developing Assembly detected by
the Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (C/Bk).
Use case
0 to 100
Unit
%
DEVTEMP2
Dspl of C color Developing Assy temp
Lv.2 Details
To display the temperature of the C Developing Assembly detected
by the Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (C/
Bk).
Use case
0 to 100
Unit
deg C
COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> DEVHUM1, DEVHUM2,
DEVTEMP1
PDK-TEMP
Dspl of POD Deck compartment temp
Lv.1 Details
To display the compartment temperature of POD Deck Lite.
It may be out of order if the indicated temperature is greatly different
from the machine right after power-on.
0 to 60
Unit
deg C
COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> TEMP, PDK-HUM
PDK-HUM
Dspl of POD Deck compartment humidity
Lv.1 Details
To display the compartment humidity of POD Deck Lite.
It may be out of order if the indicated humidity is greatly different
0 to 100
Unit
%
COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> HUM, PDK-TEMP
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG
8-32
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS

MDK-TEMP
Lv.1 Details
Dspl of Multi Deck compartment temp

To display the compartment temperature of the Multi Deck.
It may be out of order if the indicated temperature is greatly different
0 to 60
Unit
deg C
COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> TEMP, MDK-HUM
MDK-HUM
Dspl of POD Deck compartment humidity
Lv.1 Details
To display the compartment humidity of the Multi Deck.
It may be out of order if the indicated humidity is greatly different
0 to 100
Unit
%
COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> HUM, MDK-TEMP
DEVTEMP1
Dspl of Y/M Developing Assy temperature
Lv.2 Details
To display the temperature of the Y and M Developing Assembly
detected by the Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection
PCB (Y/M).
Use case
0 to 100
Unit
deg C
COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> DEVHUM1, DEVHUM2,
DEVTEMP2
FX-MTR
Display of Fixing Motor current value
Lv.1 Details
To display the real-time current value of the Fixing Motor.
Use case
When checking the life of the Pressure Roller
Unit
mA
FIX-UC2
Fixing Thermistor output temperature
Lv.1 Details
To display the output temperature of the Fixing Thermistor (Fixing
Center Thermistor 1).
Use case
When checking the output temperature of the Fixing Center
Thermistor 1
0 to 999
Unit
deg C
FIX-UC3
Fixing Thermistor output temperature
Lv.1 Details
To display the output temperature of the Fixing Thermistor (Fixing
Center Thermistor 2).
Use case
When checking the output temperature of the Fixing Center
Thermistor 2
0 to 999
Unit
deg C
8-33
CST-STS
COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS
WIDTH-MF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl Multi-purpose Tray ppr width size

To display the paper width size set on the Multi-purpose Tray.
When checking the paper width side set on the Multi-purpose Tray
Numeric value
T-8-6
T-8-5
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS
8-33
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS
HV-STS
COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS

PRI-GRID
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
PRE-TR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
1ATVC-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
1ATVC-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
1ATVC-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
8-34
Display of primary charging current

To display the current that is Applied to the Primacy Charging
Assembly At the latest.
The result set in COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> PRIMARY is
reflected.
When checking ON/OFF of potential control
-1200 to 0
uA
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> PRIMARY
Dspl of pre-transfer charge DC current
To display the DC component of current that is Applied to the
Pretransfer
Charging Assembly At the latest
The result set in COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> PRE-TR is reflected.
For checking
-650 to 0
uA
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> PRE-TR
Dspl pry trns paper interval current (Y)
To display the decuple value of the paper interval current lastly
flown on the Y Primary Transfer Roller by the primary transfer paper
interval ATVC control.
When estimating the life of Primary Transfer Roller based on the
displayed value
0 to 900
uA
Dspl pry trns paper interval current (M)
flown on the M Primary Transfer Roller by the primary transfer paper
displayed value
0 to 900
uA
Dspl pry trns paper interval current (C)
flown on the C Primary Transfer Roller by the primary transfer paper
displayed value
0 to 900
uA
1ATVC-K4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
1ATVC-K1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
2EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
PR-GRI-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
2ATVC-F1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Dspl pry trns ppr intvl crrnt (Bk):clr

To display the decuple value of the paper interval current lastly flown
on the Bk Primary Transfer Roller by the primary transfer paper
interval ATVC control At full-color jobs.
displayed value
0 to 900
uA
Dspl pry trams ppr intvl crrnt (Bk):B&W
To display the decuple value of the paper interval current lastly flown
on the Bk Primary Transfer Roller by the primary transfer paper
interval ATVC control At B&W jobs.
displayed value
0 to 900
uA
Dspl Sec Transfer Static Eliminator V
To display the voltage which is Applied to the Secondary Transfer
Static Eliminator At the latest.
For checking
-4000 to 0
V
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> 2EL
Dspl Prmry Charging Assy grid voltage
To display the grid voltage of the Primary Charging Assembly.
Check that the value is in the range of Bk Drum surface potential Vd
+ 0 to 200V.
Values out of the tolerable range may indicate failures of the Primary
Charging Assembly or the Photosensitive Drum.
When checking the grid voltage of the Primary Charging Assembly
0 to 1200
V
COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> DPOT-K
Sec Trns ATVC target current:clr,1/1 SPD
To display the decuple value of the target current At full-color 1/1
speed derived from the latest secondary transfer Full ATVC control.
When judging whether the secondary transfer is appropriately set At
image failure
The correct value is not shown unless paper feed has triggered the
secondary transfer ATVC control After power-off/on.
-70 to 0
uA
8-34

PRIACV-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
PRIACV-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
PRIACV-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
2ATVC-M1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Discharge current ctrl setting voltg (Y)

To display the AC voltage setting value to be Applied to the Y
Charging Roller At 1/1 speed derived from the latest discharge
current control.
When checking the voltage value (Y) for discharge current control
0 to 3000
V
COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRIACV-M, PRIACV-C, PRIACI-Y,
PRIACI-M, PRIACI-C, PRISMP-Y, PRISMP-M, PRISMP-C
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> DISCHG
Discharge current ctrl setting voltg (Y)
To display the AC voltage setting value to be Applied to the M
current control.
When checking the voltage value (M) for discharge current control
0 to 3000
V
COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRIACV-Y, PRIACV-C, PRIACI-Y,
Discharge current ctrl setting voltg (C)
To display the AC voltage setting value to be Applied to the C
current control.
When checking the voltage value (C) for discharge current control
0 to 3000
V
COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRIACV-Y, PRIACV-M, PRIACI-Y,
Sec Trns ATVC target current:B&W,1/1 SPD
To display the decuple value of the target current At B&W 1/1 speed
derived from the latest secondary transfer Full ATVC control.
image failure
Number
uA
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> 2TR-TGT1 to 8, TR-PPR1 to 8
8-35
2ATVC-F2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
2ATVC-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
2ATVC-F3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
2ATVC-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit

image failure
Number
uA
image failure
Number
uA
image failure
Number
uA
image failure
Number
uA
8-35

PRIACI-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
PRIACI-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
PRIACI-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
PRISMP-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Discharge current ctrl set current (Y)

To display the AC current setting value to be Applied to the Y
current control.
When checking the current value (Y) for discharge current control
0 to 5000
uA
COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRIMACV-Y, PRIMACV-M,
PRIMACV-C, PRIACI-M, PRIACI-C, PRISMP-Y, PRISMP-M,
PRISMP-C
Discharge current ctrl set current (M)
To display the AC current setting value to be Applied to the M
current control.
When checking the current value (M) for discharge current control
0 to 5000
uA
PRIMACV-C, PRIACI-Y, PRIACI-C, PRISMP-Y, PRISMP-M,
PRISMP-C
Discharge current ctrl set current (C)
To display the AC current setting value to be Applied to the C
current control.
When checking the current value (C) for discharge current control
0 to 5000
uA
PRIMACV-C, PRIACI-Y, PRIACI-M, PRISMP-Y, PRISMP-M,
PRISMP-C
Discharge current ctrl sampling point(Y)
To display the AC current value flown on the Y Charging Roller when
the certain voltage is Applied by the latest discharge current control.
AC current/current to be Applied At 1/1 speed is derived from 6
sampling results.
When checking the sampling results of discharge current control
0 to 5000
uA
COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRISMP-M, PRISMP-C,
PRIMACV-Y, PRIMACV-M, PRIMACV-C, PRIACI-Y, PRIACI-M,
PRIACI-C
8-36
PRISMP-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
PRISMP-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Discharge current ctrl sampling point(M)

sampling results.
0 to 5000
uA
COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRISMP-Y, PRISMP-C, PRIMACV-Y,
PRIMACV-M, PRIMACV-C, PRIACI-Y, PRIACI-M, PRIACI-C
Discharge current ctrl sampling point(C)
sampling results.
0 to 5000
uA
COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRISMP-Y, PRISMP-M, PRIMACV-Y,
PRIMACV-M, PRIMACV-C, PRIACI-Y, PRIACI-M, PRIACI-C
T-8-7
8-36
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD
CCD
COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD

TARGET-B
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TARGET-G
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TARGET-R
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-OB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-OG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
8-37
Shading target value (B)

To display the shading target value of Blue.
Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or FFFF (maximum) is
considered a failure of the Reader Controller PCB.
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
- At scanned image failure
0 to FFFF
512 to 2047
Shading target value (G)
To display the target value of Green.
0 to FFFF
512 to 2047
Shading target value (R)
To display the shading target value of Red.
0 to FFFF
512 to 2047
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(B): frt
To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit
on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the
Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB.
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(G): frt
To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered
bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front).
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
GAIN-OR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-EB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-EG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-ER
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LAMP-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(R): frt

To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(B):frt
To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(G):frt
To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered
bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front).
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(R):frt
To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(B&W): front
To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit
(paper front) in B&W scanning mode.
When image failure occurs at front side scanning in black mode
0 to FFFF
100 to 275
LED cannot be replaced individually. Replace the Scanner Unit.
8-37
8-38

LAMP-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
LAMP2-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
LAMP2-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
OFST-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OFST-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OFST2-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-BW1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(color): frt

(paper front) in color scanning mode.
When image failure occurs at front side scanning in color mode
0 to FFFF
100 to 275
Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(B&W): back
(paper back) in B&W scanning mode.
When image failure occurs at back side scanning in black mode.
0 to FFFF
100 to 275
Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(color): back
(paper back) in color scanning mode.
When image failure occurs at back side scanning in color mode
0 to FFFF
100 to 275
Img Sensor offset value (B&W) [Front]
To display the CMOS Sensor offset value at B&W scanning.
0 to FFFF
0 to 116
Img Sensor offset value (color) [Front]
To display the CMOS Sensor offset value at color scanning.
When image failure occurs at front side scanning in color mode
0 to FFFF
0 to 116
Img Sensor offset value (B&W) [Back]
To display the CMOS Sensor offset value at B&W scanning.
0 to FFFF
0 to 116
Img Sensor gain level adj VL1(B&W): frt
To display the CMOS Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 1 of
Scanner Unit (paper front).
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
GAIN-BW2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-BW3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-BW4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2BW1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2BW2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2BW3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2BW4
Lv.2 Details
Use case

0 to FFFF
0 to 143
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
Img Sensor gain level adj VL1(B&W): Back
Scanner Unit (paper back).
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
8-38

GAIN2-OR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2-OG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2-OB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2-ER
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2-EG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(R): bck

To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit
on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper back).
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(G): bck
To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered
bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper back).
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(B): bck
To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(R):bck
To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(G):bck
To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered
bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper back).
0 to FFFF
0 to 143
8-39
GAIN2-EB
Lv.2 Details
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(B):bck

To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit
Use case
0 to FFFF
OFST2-CL
Img Sensor offset value (color) [Back]
Lv.2 Details
To display the CMOS Sensor offset value at color scanning.
Use case
When image failure occurs at back side scanning in color mode
0 to FFFF
T-8-8
8-39
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT
DPOT
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT

DPOT-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
VCONT-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
VBACK-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
2TR-PPR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
8-40
Display of Bk Drum surface potential

To display the current surface potential Vd on the Bk Photosensitive
Drum that is specified as a result of the potential control.
The value after the calculation of potential offset is displayed.
If the offset value is not adjusted, negative value may be detected
during printing.
When the density failure or foggy image occurs, check whether the
surface potential of the Drum is the factor.
- To update the display, be sure to move to a different screen, and
then move back to display it again. (The potential at the moment of
showing this screen is displayed.)
- If the value is out of range (-30 to 30), there is a possibility of
Potential Sensor disconnection.
-1100 to 0
V
Dspl of Bk contrast potential setting VL
To display the current setting value of Bk contrast potential Vcont.
When checking contrast potential
0 to 800
V
Dspl of Bk fogging removal potntl set VL
To display the current setting value of Bk fogging removal potential
Vback (difference between the developing DC bias and the charging
potential).
The fogging correction value is set based on this value and the value
set in user mode (Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality>
Correct Color Cast).
When checking the setting value of fogging removal potential at
image failure such as fogging
Fogging occurred in the normal use range of 150 to 250V is judged
as an error on the high voltage or the Potential Sensor.
0 to 300
V
Dspl of sec trns ATVC ppr allotted voltg
To display the paper allotted voltage set by the latest secondary
transfer Full ATVC control.
The appropriate range may be exceeded due to wrong media setting.
When transfer failure occurs on certain media
0 to 5000
V
2TR-BASE
Lv.2 Details
Dspl of sec transfer ATVC base voltage

To display the base voltage set by the latest secondary transfer Full
ATVC control.
The appropriate range may be exceeded due to wrong media setting.
Use case
When transfer failure occurs on certain media
0 to 6000
Unit
V
1TR-DC-Y
Dspl of primary transfer voltage (Y)
Lv.2 Details
To display the voltage lastly applied to the Primary Transfer Roller (Y).
Use case
When transfer failure occurs due to the primary transfer
0 to 5000
Unit
V
1TR-DC-M
Dspl of primary transfer voltage (M)
Lv.2 Details
To display the voltage lastly applied to the Primary Transfer Roller (M).
Use case
0 to 5000
Unit
V
1TR-DC-C
Dspl of primary transfer voltage (C)
Lv.2 Details
To display the voltage lastly applied to the Primary Transfer Roller (C).
Use case
0 to 5000
Unit
V
1TR-DC-K
Dspl of primary transfer voltage (Bk)
Lv.2 Details
To display the voltage lastly applied to the Primary Transfer Roller
(Bk).
Use case
0 to 5000
Unit
V
CHG-AC-Y
Display of primary charging AC bias (Y)
Lv.2 Details
To display the primary charging AC bias lastly applied to the Primary
Charging Roller (Y).
Use case
When an image failure occurs due to charging failure
0 to 3000
Unit
V
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI > CHACOUTM
CHG-AC-M
Display of primary charge AC current (M)
Lv.2 Details
To display the primary charging AC current lastly flown with the AC
voltage applied on the Charging Roller (M).
Use case
0 to 3000
Unit
V
8-40
8-41

CHG-AC-C
Lv.2 Details
Display of primary charging AC bias (C)

To display the primary charging AC bias lastly applied to the Primary
Charging Roller (C).
Use case
0 to 3000
Unit
V
LPWR-Y
Display of laser power (Y)
Lv.2 Details
To display Y laser power determined by D-max control.
FF display with low image density is considered that the
Photosensitive Drum may be near the end of life.
Use case
When the image density is low
00 to FF (hexadecimal)
LPWR-M
Display of laser power (M)
Lv.2 Details
To display M laser power determined by D-max control.
Use case
LPWR-C
Display of laser power (C)
Lv.2 Details
To display C laser power determined by D-max control.
Use case
LPWR-K
Display of laser power (Bk)
Lv.2 Details
To display Bk laser power determined by potential control.
Photosensitive Drum may be nearly the end of life.
Use case
PVCONT-Y
Dspl of target patch contrast potntl (Y)
Lv.2 Details
To display the target Y patch contrast potential.
Check the target patch contrast potential to check whether the toner
supply control is properly executed at image density failure.
Investigate the other possible factors if the value is within the defined
range.
Use case
- When analyzing the cause of the image density failure
- When analyzing the cause of a problem
Caution
Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the
Quality Support Division.
0 to 255
Unit
V
PVCONT-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
PVCONT-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
PVCONT-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Dspl of target patch contrast potntl (M)

To display the target M patch contrast potential.
range.
0 to 255
V
Dspl of target patch contrast potntl (C)
To display the target C patch contrast potential.
range.
0 to 255
V
Dspl target patch contrast potntl (Bk)
To display the target Bk patch contrast potential.
range.
0 to 255
V
8-41
8-42

P-LPW-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
D-CONT-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
D-CONT-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
D-CONT-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Display of Bk patch target laser power

To display the laser power to be used as a target Bk patch contrast
potential.
Check the laser power to be used as a target patch contrast potential
to check whether the toner supply control is properly executed at
image density failure.
range.
Display of Y Drum total charging time
To display the total charging time (charging counter) for the Drum
Unit (Y).
The counter can be reset in COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC>
DRMRSETY.
When checking if the high voltage is properly set
0 to 1000000
msec
COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> D-CONT-M, D-CONT-C, D-CONT-K
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETY
Display of M Drum total charging time
Unit (M).
DRMRSETM.
0 to 1000000
msec
COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> D-CONT-Y, D-CONT-C, D-CONT-K
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETM
Display of C Drum total charging time
Unit (C).
DRMRSETC.
0 to 1000000
msec
COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> D-CONT-Y, D-CONT-M, D-CONT-K
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETC
D-CONT-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
LS-PWM-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
LS-PWM-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
LS-PWM-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
LS-PWM-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
CHG-DCY2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Display of Bk Drum total charging time

(Bk).
DRMRSETK.
0 to 1000000
msec
COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> D-CONT-Y, D-CONT-M, D-CONT-C
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETK
Display of Y-color PWM setting value
To display the PWM value set for Y.
When checking the current PWM setting
0 to 100
%
COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> LS-PWM-M, LS-PWM-C, LS-PWM-K
Display of M-color PWM setting value
To display the PWM value set for M.
0 to 100
%
COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> LS-PWM-Y, LS-PWM-C, LS-PWM-K
Display of C-color PWM setting value
To display the PWM value set for C.
0 to 100
%
COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> LS-PWM-Y, LS-PWM-M, LS-PWM-K
Display of Nk-color PWM setting value
To display the PWM value set for BkY.
0 to 100
%
COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> LS-PWM-Y, LS-PWM-M, LS-PWM-C
Dspl pry chg DC voltg (Y):1/2, 1/3 SPD
To display the primary charging DC voltage lastly applied to the
Charging Roller (Y) at 1/2 and 1/3 speed.
When checking
0 to 1000
V
8-42
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS
DENS

CHG-DCM2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
CHG-DCC2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
LPGAIN-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
LPGAIN-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
LPGAIN-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
8-43
Dspl pry chg DC voltg (M):1/2, 1/3 SPD

Charging Roller (M) at 1/2 and 1/3 speed.
When checking
0 to 1000
V
Dspl pry chg DC voltg (C):1/2, 1/3 SPD
Charging Roller (C) at 1/2 and 1/3 speed.
When checking
0 to 1000
V
Dspl of Y-color laser power gain value
To display the gain value of Y laser power by D-max control.
When checking D-max control results
-1000 to 1000
%
Dspl of M-color laser power gain value
To display gain value of M laser power by D-max control.
-1000 to 1000
%
Dspl of C-color laser power gain value
To display gain value of C laser power by D-max control.
-1000 to 1000
%
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS

DENS-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
DENS-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
DENS-C
Lv.1 Details
T-8-9
Use case
Unit
Dspl of Y developer density change ratio

To display the difference between Y-color developer density and the
target value in % (percentage).
Intolerable difference will trigger E020. This may be caused by
deterioration of the developer, failure/disconnection of the Toner
Density Sensor or error in toner supply system.
The value is updated upon print operation after power-on.
- When the density varies dramatically
- When the density is unstable even after gradation correction
-8 to 8
%
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-Y
Dspl of M developer density change ratio
To display difference between M-color developer density and the
-8 to 8
%
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-M
Dspl of C developer density change ratio
To display difference between C-color developer density and the
-8 to 8
%
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-C
8-43
8-44

DENS-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
DENS-S-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
DENS-S-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
DENS-S-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
DENS-S-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
D-Y-TRGT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Dspl Bk developer density change ratio

To display difference between Bk-color developer density and the
-8 to 8
%
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> SGNL-K
Dspl of ATR control patch density (Y)
To display Y patch image density created by ATR control.
When analyzing the cause of a problem
0 to 1023
Dspl of ATR control patch density (M)
To display M patch image density created by ATR control.
0 to 1023
Dspl of ATR control patch density (C)
To display C patch image density created by ATR control.
0 to 1023
Dspl of ATR control patch density (Bk)
To display Bk patch image density created by ATR control.
0 to 1023
Dspl of ATR ctrl Y patch target density
To display the target density for Y patch image created by ATR
control.
0 to 1023
D-M-TRGT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
D-C-TRGT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
REF-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
REF-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
REF-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
REF-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SGNL-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dspl of ATR ctrl M patch target density

To display the target density for M patch image created by ATR
control.
0 to 1023
Dspl of ATR ctrl C patch target density
To display the target density for C patch image created by ATR
control.
0 to 1023
Dspl of Y developer density target value
To display the developer density target value for the ATR Sensor (Y).
0 to 255
50 to 200
Dspl of M developer density target value
To display the developer density target value for the ATR Sensor (M).
0 to 255
50 to 200
Dspl of C developer density target value
To display the developer density target value for the ATR Sensor (C).
0 to 255
50 to 200
Dspl Bk developer density target value
To display the developer density target value for the ATR Sensor (Bk).
0 to 255
50 to 200
Display of Y-color developer density
To display the measured value of Y-color developer density.
The density is measured with the ATR Sensor (Y) for each job.
0 to 255
20 to 230
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-Y
8-44
8-45

SGNL-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SGNL-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SGNL-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
P-SENS-P
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DEV-DC-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
DEV-DC-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Display of M-color developer density

To display the measured value of M-color developer density.
The density is measured with the Toner Density Sensor (M) for each
job.
0 to 255
Display of C-color developer density
To display the measured value of C-color developer density.
The density is measured with the Toner Density Sensor (C) for each
job.
0 to 255
Display of Bk-color developer density
To display the measured value of Bk-color developer density.
The density is measured with the Toner Density Sensor (Bk) for each
job.
0 to 255
Dspl base intnsty at ATR ctrl (P-wave)
To display the light intensity (P-wave) reflected from the background
(ITB) at ATR control.
Intolerable values may be caused by Patch Sensor disconnection,
LED failure, soiled Sensor surface, Shutter failure, Registration
Patch Shutter Open/Close Solenoid failure, insufficient ITB cleaning,
etc.
When checking the failure of Patch Sensor/ITB at low density,
fogging deterioration or E020 display
0 to 1023
Dspl of developing DC voltage (Y)
To display the latest Y developing DC voltage Vdc.
- When image failure occurs due to carrier adherence
- When fogging occurs
- When fogging is deteriorated
0 to 1023
V
Dspl of developing DC voltage (M)
To display the latest M developing DC voltage Vdc.
0 to 1023
V
DEV-DC-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
DEV-DC-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
D-K-TRGT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
D-CRNT-P
Lv.2 Details
Use case
D-CRNT-S
Lv.2 Details
Use case
P-SENS-S
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DENS-Y-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of developing DC voltage (C)

To display the latest C developing DC voltage Vdc.
0 to 1023
V
Dspl of developing DC voltage (Bk)
To display the latest Bk developing DC voltage Vdc.
0 to 1023
V
Dspl of ATR ctrl Bk patch target density
To display the Bk patch image target density created by ATR control.
0 to 1023
Dspl of ATR ctrl dark current (P-wave)
To display the dark current value (P-wave) measured at ATR control.
When checking the Patch Sensor
0 to 1023
Dspl of ATR ctrl dark current (S-wave)
To display the dark current value (S-wave) measured at ATR control.
0 to 1023
Dspl base intnsty at ATR ctrl (S-wave)
To display the light intensity (S-wave) reflected from the background
(ITB) at ATR control.
Intolerable values may be caused by insufficient ITB cleaning, etc.
When checking ITB failure at low density or fogging deterioration
0 to 1023
Dspl of ATR ctrl Y-clr TD ratio history
To display the latest 8 Y-toner density log data (T/D ratio) detected
by the Toner Density Sensor at ATR control.
Sharp change in values may indicate Toner Density Sensor
disconnection/failure, whereas gradual change in values may
indicate failure in toner supply system.
When checking toner density in the Developing Assembly at low
density or fogging deterioration
0 to 255
8-45
8-46

DENS-M-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DENS-C-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DS-S-Y-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
DS-S-M-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Dspl of ATR ctrl M-clr TD ratio history

To display the latest 8 M-toner density log data (T/D ratio) detected
0 to 255
Dspl of ATR ctrl C-clr TD ratio history
To display the latest 8 C-toner density log data (T/D ratio) detected
0 to 255
Dspl Y-clr patch image density history
To display the latest 8 Y-patch image density log data.
It is the reference for judging the cause at E020 occurrence, etc.
Sharp change in values may indicate the failure in Patch Sensor,
Shutter or laser, whereas gradual change may indicate failure in
toner supply system.
This is particularly caused by Patch Sensor.
When analyzing the cause of E020
0 to 1023
Dspl M-clr patch image density history
To display the latest 8 M-patch image density log data.
0 to 1023
DS-S-C-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
DS-S-K-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
P-LED-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SPL-LG-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SPL-LG-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl C-clr patch image density history

To display the latest 8 C-patch image density log data.
0 to 1023
Dspl Bk-clr patch image density history
To display the latest 8 Bk-patch image density log data.
0 to 1023
Dspl of Patch Sensor LED light intensity
To display the Patch Sensor LED intensity.
The stain on Sensor window or soiled ITB (ITB cleaning failure) is
suspected if the background light intensity (P-wave) is too low even
with sufficient LED intensity and PT-LPADJ execution will not correct
the problem.
Number
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-SENS-P
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> PT-LPADJ
Display of Y toner supply history
To display the latest 8 Y-toner supply log data.
Each data represents the number of toner blocks supplied per paper.
When checking toner supply status at E020 occurrence, low density
or fogging deterioration
0 to 5
Display of M toner supply history
To display the latest 8 M-toner supply log data.
0 to 5
8-46
8-47

SPL-LG-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DENS-K-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SPL-LG-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CONT-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
CONT-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
CONT-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Display of C toner supply history

To display the latest 8 C-toner supply log data.
0 to 5
Dspl of ATR ctrl Bk-clr TD ratio history
To display the latest 8 Bk-toner density log data (TD ratio) detected
by the ATR Sensor at ATR control.
Sharp change in values may indicate the ATR Sensor disconnection/
failure, whereas gradual change in values may indicate failure in
0 to 255
Display of Bk toner supply history
To display the latest 8 Bk-toner supply log data.
When checking the toner supply status at low density or fogging
deterioration
0 to 10
Dspl Toner Density Sensor (M) ctrl voltg
To display the density detection control voltage of the Toner Density
Sensor (M).
When checking before clearing RAM data
0 to 255
V
COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> CONT-M
Dspl Toner Density Sensor (Y) ctrl volt
Sensor (Y).
0 to 255
V
COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> CONT-Y
Dspl Toner Density Sensor (C) ctrl voltg
Sensor (C).
0 to 255
V
COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> CONT-C
CONT-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Dspl Toner Density Sensor (Bk) ctrl V

Sensor (Bk).
0 to 255
V
COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> CONT-K
T-8-10
8-47
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING
FIXING
COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING

FX-MTR2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
FX-MTR3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
8-48
Dspl Fix Motor crrnt VLlog at 321mm/sec

To display the maximum Fixing Motor current values at process
speed of 321mm/sec.
Display an alarm (06-0004) when the value is 2.30 (2.3A) and higher,
and display an error (E008-001) when the value is 2.60 (2.6A) and
higher.
When investigating the drive torque at the Pressure Roller
replacement or error occurrence
- Display unit for process speed of 321mm/sec differs from other
process speeds.
- Press the Clear key at FX-BLT-L when replacing the Pressure
Roller Unit. For other than the replacement, execute FX-L-CLR to
reset.
0 to 24
A
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> FX-L-CLR
COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-L
Dspl Fix Motor crrnt VL history: 280mm/s
To display the maximum and latest Fixing Motor current values at
process speed of 280mm/sec.
Display an alarm (06-0004) when the value is 200 (2.0 A) and higher,
and display an error (E008-001) when the value is 220 (2.2 A) and
higher.
Press the Clear key at FX-BLT-L when replacing the Pressure Roller
Unit.
For other than the replacement, execute FX-L-CLR to reset.
0 to 500, 0 to 500
mA
FX-MTR4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
FX-MTR5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
FX-MTR6
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit

process speed of 160 mm/sec.
higher.
Unit.
0 to 500, 0 to 500
mA
higher.
Unit.
0 to 500, 0 to 500
mA
higher.
Unit.
0 to 500, 0 to 500
mA
8-48

FX-MTR7
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
FX-MTR8
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
FX-U-TM1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit

higher.
Unit.
0 to 500, 0 to 500
mA
higher.
Unit.
0 to 500, 0 to 500
mA
Dspl Fix Film Uni STBY total run time
To display the total value of Fixing Rollers STBY-equivalent running
time at all process speeds.
Display an alarm at 50400000 seconds (14000 hours), and display
an error (E008-002) at 54000000 seconds (15000 hours).
STBY-equivalent running time is proportional to the rotations.
When checking the use history at the Fixing Roller replacement or
error occurrence
When replacing the Fixing Roller, press the Clear key at FX-BLT-U to
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U
8-49
FX-U-TM2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
FX-U-TM3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
FX-U-TM4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
FX-U-TM5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Dspl Fix Roller running time: 321mm/s

To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed
of 321mm/sec.
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
of 280 mm/sec.
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
of 160 mm/sec.
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
of 140 mm/sec.
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
8-49

FX-U-TM6
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
FX-U-TM7
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
FX-U-TM8
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
FX-L-TM1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit

of 107 mm/sec
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
of 93 mm/sec.
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
of 32 mm/sec.
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
Dspl PressFilmUni STBY total run time
To display the total value of Pressure Rollers STBY-equivalent
running time at all process speeds.
STBY-equivalent running time is proportional to the rotations.
error occurrence
When replacing the Pressure Roller, press the Clear key at FXBLT-L
to reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
8-50
FX-L-TM2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
FX-L-TM3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
FX-L-TM4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
FX-L-TM5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Dspl Press Roller running time:321mm/s

To display the running time of the Pressure Roller at process
speed of 321mm/sec.
error occurrence
to reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
speed of 280 mm/sec.
error occurrence
to reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
error occurrence
to reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
error occurrence
to reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
8-50

FX-L-TM6
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
FX-L-TM7
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
FX-L-TM8
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
BLT-TM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution

When checking the use history at the Pressure Roller replacement
or error occurrence
error occurrence
to reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
speed of 93 mm/sec.
error occurrence
to reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
speed of 50 mm/sec.
error occurrence
to reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
Dspl Fix Roller STBY total running time
To display the total value of Fixing Rollers 50 mm/s-equivalent
running time at all process speeds.
Display an alarm at 13050000 seconds (3625 hours), and display an
error (E008-002) at 15000000 seconds (4167 hours).
Running time is proportional to the rotations.
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
8-51
BLT-TM1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
BLT-TM2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
BLT-TM3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
BLT-TM4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Fix Rol STBY total run time: pressured

running time at all process speeds when pressure is applied to the
roller.
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
Dspl Fix Rol run time:pressured, 321mm/s
To display the running time of the Fixing Roller at process speed of
321mm/sec when pressure is applied to the roller.
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
280 mm/sec when pressure is applied to the roller.
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
8-51

BLT-TM5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
BLT-TM6
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
BLT-TM7
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
BLT-TM8
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit

error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
8-52
BLT2-TM1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
BLT2-TM2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
BLT2-TM3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
BLT2-TM4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Fix Rol STBY total run time: press<100%

running time at all process speeds when some pressure is applied
to the roller.
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
Dspl Fix Rol run time:press<100%,321mm/s
321mm/sec when some pressure is applied to the roller.
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
280 mm/sec when some pressure is applied to the roller.
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
8-52

BLT2-TM5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
BLT2-TM6
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
BLT2-TM7
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
BLT2-TM8
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit

error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
Dspl Fix Rol run time:press<100%, 93mm/s
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
Dspl Fix Rol run time:press<100%, 50mm/s
error occurrence
reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
8-53
KIN-TM1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
KIN-TM2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
KIN-TM3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
KIN-TM4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Dspl Heat Soaking Roll 321mm/s run time

To display the total value of Heat Soaking Rollers 321mm/
s-equivalent running time at all process speeds.
Running time is proportional to the rotations.
When checking the use history at the Heat Soaking Roller
When replacing the Heat Soaking Roller, press the Clear key at FXUH-RL to reset.
0 to 4294967295
sec
COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-UH-RL
Dspl Heat Soaking Roll run time:321mm/s
To display the running time of the Heat Soaking Roller at process
speed of 321mm/sec.
0 to 4294967295
sec
0 to 4294967295
sec
0 to 4294967295
8-53

KIN-TM5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
KIN-TM6
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
KIN-TM7
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
KIN-TM8
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit

0 to 4294967295
sec
0 to 4294967295
sec
speed of 93 mm/sec.
0 to 4294967295
sec
speed of 50 mm/sec.
0 to 4294967295
sec
8-54
KIN-HP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
RCPR-HP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
PRS-HP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
CORE-DST
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Dspl Heat Soaking Roll eng/diseng times

To display the number of times the Heat Soaking Roller Engagement/
Disengagement HP Sensor turns ON.
The counter value is reset by pressing the Clear key. (It is also
cleared by clearing FX-CNT.)
When checking the use history at the error occurrence
The counter value is also cleared by clearing FX-CNT.
0 to 4294967295
time
COPIER> COUNTER> FIXING> FX-CNT
Display of reciprocation HP times
To display the number of times the Reciprocation HP Sensor turns
ON.
0 to 4294967295
time
Dspl Film engagement/disengagement times
To display the number of times the Film Engagement HP Sensor
turns ON.
0 to 4294967295
time
Copper Shield Plate shift amount
To display the total shift amount of the Copper Shield Plate.
0 to 4294967295
mm
T-8-11
8-54
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC
SENSOR
8-55
MISC
COPIER > DISPLAY > SENSOR
W-TNR-1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC
Status dspl of Waste Toner Full Sensor

To display the output value and the judgment value of the Waste
Toner Full Sensor of the Waste Toner Container.
The value in the left shows the current output value.
The value in the right shows the threshold value (depending on the
adjustment result) to determine full level.
- When checking the sensor
- When checking clogging of waste toner
0 to 1023
T-8-12
ENV-TR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
LPOWER-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
LPOWER-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
LPOWER-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
LPOWER-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Display of Developing Assmbly temperature.

To display the Developing Assmbly temperature.
When checking the temperature of Assmbly temperature.
0 to 100
Degree C
Display of laser light intensity (Y)
To display the Y laser intensity in real-time.
When analyzing the cause of the image density failure
00 to FF
50 to FF
Display of laser light intensity (M)
To display the M laser intensity in real-time.
00 to FF
50 to FF
Display of laser light intensity (C)
To display the C laser intensity in real-time.
00 to FF
50 to FF
Display of laser light intensity (Bk)
To display the Bk laser intensity in real-time.
00 to FF
50 to FF
T-8-13
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC
8-55
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C
HT-C
COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C

TGT-A-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-A-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-A-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-A-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
8-56
Dspl ARCDAT screen A Y-color target VL

To display the Y-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
When hue variation occurs and the value shown is not in the
tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the
target value). Check the Patch Sensor if not alleviated.
When hue variation occurs
0 to 1023
0 to 700
Dsp ARCDAT screen A M-color target VL
To display the M-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
Dspl ARCDAT screen A C-color target VL
To display the C-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
Dspl of ARCDAT screen A Bk-clr target VL
To display the Bk-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
Dspl ARCDAT screen B Y-color target VL
To display the Y-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
TGT-B-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-C-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-C-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl ARCDAT screen B M-color target VL

To display the M-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
Dspl ARCDAT screen B C-color target VL
To display the C-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
Dspl of ARCDAT screen B Bk-clr target VL
To display the Bk-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
Dspl ARCDAT screen C Y-color target VL
To display the Y-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
Dspl ARCDAT screen C M-color target VL
To display the M-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
8-56
8-57

TGT-C-C
Lv.2 Details
Dspl ARCDAT screen C C-color target VL

To display the C-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
Use case
0 to 1023
TGT-C-K
Dspl of ARCDAT screen C Bk-clr target VL
Lv.2 Details
To display the Bk-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
Use case
0 to 1023
SUM-A-Y
Dspl ARCDAT screen A Y-color ctrl differ
Lv.2 Details
To display Y-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control.
target value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
SUM-A-M
Dspl ARCDAT screen A M-color ctrl differ
Lv.2 Details
To display M-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
SUM-A-C
Dspl ARCDAT screen A C-color ctrl differ
Lv.2 Details
To display C-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
SUM-A-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl ARCDAT scrn A Bk-color ctrl differ

To display Bk-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT
control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT screen B Y-color ctrl differ
To display Y-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT screen B M-color ctrl differ
To display M-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT screen B C-color ctrl differ
To display C-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT scrn B Bk-color ctrl differ
To display Bk-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT
control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
8-57
8-58

SUM-C-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-C-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-C-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-C-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-A-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-A-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl ARCDAT screen C Y-color ctrl differ

To display Y-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT screen C M-color ctrl differ
To display M-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT screen C C-color ctrl differ
To display C-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT scrn C Bk-color ctrl differ
To display Bk-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT
control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT screen A Y-patch current VL
To display the current Y-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
tolerable range, check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer.
0 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT screen A M-patch current VL
To display the current M-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
SGNL-A-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-A-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-B-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-B-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-B-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-B-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-C-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl ARCDAT screen A C-patch current VL

To display the current C-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT screen A Bk-patch current VL
To display the current Bk-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT screen B Y-patch current VL
To display the current Y-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT screen B M-patch current VL
To display the current M-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT screen B C-patch current VL
To display the current C-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT screen B Bk-patch current VL
To display the current Bk-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT screen C Y-patch current VL
To display the current Y-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
8-58
8-59

SGNL-C-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-C-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGNL-C-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLTA-A-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLTA-A-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLTA-A-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl ARCDAT screen C M-patch current VL

To display the current M-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT screen C Bk-patch current VL
To display the current Bk-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dspl ARCDAT screen C C-patch current VL
To display the current C-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
0 to 1023
Dspl of ARCDAT screen A Y-density differ
To display the difference between the Y-patch target value and the
current value of screen A in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dspl of ARCDAT screen A M-density differ
To display the difference between the M-patch target value and the
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dspl of ARCDAT screen A C-density differ
To display the difference between the C-patch target value and the
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
DLTA-A-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLTA-B-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLTA-B-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLTA-B-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLTA-B-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of ARCDAT scrn A Bk-density differ

To display the difference between the Bk-patch target value and the
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dspl of ARCDAT screen B Y-density differ
current value of screen B in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dspl of ARCDAT screen B M-density differ
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dspl of ARCDAT screen B C-density differ
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
Dspl of ARCDAT scrn B Bk-density differ
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
8-59
8-60

DLTA-C-Y
Lv.2 Details
Dspl of ARCDAT screen C Y-density differ

current value of screen C in ARCDAT control.
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
DLTA-C-M
Dspl of ARCDAT screen C M-density differ
Lv.2 Details
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
DLTA-C-C
Dspl of ARCDAT screen C C-density differ
Lv.2 Details
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
DLTA-C-K
Dspl of ARCDAT scrn C Bk-density differ
Lv.2 Details
alleviated.
Use case
-1023 to 1023
TGT-A-Y2
ARCDAT scrn A Y-color target VL(1/2 SPD)
Lv.2 Details
To display the Y-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at
1/2 speed.
Use case
When checking ARCDAT control operation
Caution
0 to 1023
TGT-A-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
TGT-A-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
TGT-A-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
TGT-A-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-A-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-A-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrn A M-color target VL(1/2 SPD)

To display the M-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at
1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn A C-color target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the C-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at
1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn A Bk-clr target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the Bk-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn A Y-color target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the Y-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at
1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn A M-color target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the M-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at
1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn A C-color target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the C-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control at
1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
8-60
8-61

TGT-A-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-B-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
TGT-B-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
ARCDAT scrn A Bk-clr target VL(1/3 SPD)

To display the Bk-patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn B Y-color target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the Y-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at
1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn B M-color target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the M-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at
1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn B C-color target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the C-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at
1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn B Bk-clr target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the Bk-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn B Y-color target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the Y-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at
1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn B M-color target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the M-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at
1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
TGT-B-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
TGT-B-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
TGT-C-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
TGT-C-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
TGT-C-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
ARCDAT scrn B C-color target VL(1/2 SPD)

To display the C-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control at
1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn B Bk-clr target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the Bk-patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn C Y-color target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the Y-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at
1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn C M-color target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the M-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn C C-color target VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the C-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at
1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
8-61
8-62

TGT-C-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
TGT-C-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-C-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-C-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TGT-C-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-A-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
ARCDAT scrn C Bk-clr target VL(1/2 SPD)

To display the Bk-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn C Y-color target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the Y-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at
1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn C M-color target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the M-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn C C-color target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the C-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control at
1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn C Bk-clr target VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the Bk-patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
0 to 700
ARCDAT scrn A Y-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD)
To display Y-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
tolerable range, execute auto gradation adjustment (reset the target
value). Check the Patch Sensor or replace the developer if not
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
SUM-A-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SUM-A-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SUM-A-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SUM-B-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
ARCDAT scrn A M-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD)

To display M-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn A C-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD)
To display C-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD)
To display Bk-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn B Y-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD)
To display Y-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
8-62
8-63

SUM-B-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SUM-B-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SUM-B-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SUM-C-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
ARCDAT scrn B M-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD)

To display M-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn B C-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD)
To display C-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD)
To display Bk-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn C Y-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD)
To display Y-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
SUM-C-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SUM-C-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SUM-C-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
DLT-A-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
ARCDAT scrn C M-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD)

To display M-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn C C-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD)
To display C-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/2 SPD)
To display Bk-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn A Y-density differ (1/2 SPD)
To display the difference between Y-patch target value and the
current value of screen A in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed.
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
8-63
8-64

DLT-A-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
DLT-A-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
DLT-A-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
DLT-B-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
ARCDAT scrn A M-density differ (1/2 SPD)

To display the difference between M-patch target value and the
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn A C-density differ (1/2 SPD)
To display the difference between C-patch target value and the
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn A Bk-density differ(1/2 SPD)
To display the difference between Bk-patch target value and the
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn B Y-density differ (1/2 SPD)
current value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
DLT-B-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
DLT-B-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
DLT-B-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
DLT-C-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
ARCDAT scrn B M-density differ (1/2 SPD)

current value of screen B in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed.
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn B C-density differ (1/2 SPD)
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn B Bk-density differ(1/2 SPD)
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn C Y-density differ (1/2 SPD)
current value of screen C in ARCDAT control at 1/2 speed.
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
8-64
8-65

DLT-C-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
DLT-C-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
DLT-C-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SGL-A-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
ARCDAT scrn C M-density differ (1/2 SPD)

corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn C C-density differ (1/2 SPD)
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn C Bk-density differ(1/2 SPD)
corrected.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA Y-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current Y-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
SGL-A-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SGL-A-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SGL-A-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SGL-B-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SGL-B-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
ARCDAT scrnA M-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)

To display the current M-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA C-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current C-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA Bk ptch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current Bk-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB Y-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current Y-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB M-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current M-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
8-65
8-66

SGL-B-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SGL-B-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SGL-C-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SGL-C-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SGL-C-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
ARCDAT scrnB C-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)

To display the current C-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB Bkpatch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current Bk-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC Y-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current Y-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC M-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current M-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC C-patch current VL(1/2 SPD)
To display the current C-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
SGL-C-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
SUM-A-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-A-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-A-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-A-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrnC Bkpatch current VL(1/2 SPD)

To display the current Bk-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/2 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA Y-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)
To display Y-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA M-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)
To display M-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA C-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)
To display C-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/3 SPD)
To display Bk-patch control difference of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
8-66
8-67

SUM-B-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-B-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-C-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrnB Y-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)

To display Y-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB M-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)
To display M-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB C-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)
To display C-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/3 SPD)
To display Bk-patch control difference of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC Y-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)
To display Y-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
SUM-C-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-C-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SUM-C-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-A-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-A-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrnC M-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)

To display M-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC C-clr ctrl differ (1/3 SPD)
To display C-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC Bk-clr ctrl differ(1/3 SPD)
To display Bk-patch control difference of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn A Y-density differ (1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn A M-density differ (1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
8-67
8-68

DLT-A-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-A-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-B-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-B-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-B-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrn A C-density differ (1/3 SPD)

alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn A Bk-density differ(1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn B Y-density differ (1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn B M-density differ (1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn B C-density differ (1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
DLT-B-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-C-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-C-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-C-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DLT-C-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrn B Bk-density differ(1/3 SPD)

alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn C Y-density differ (1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn C M-density differ (1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn C C-density differ (1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
ARCDAT scrn C Bk-density differ(1/3 SPD)
alleviated.
-1023 to 1023
8-68
8-69

SGL-A-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-A-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-A-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-A-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-B-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-B-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrnA Y-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)

To display the current Y-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA M-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA C-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the current C-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnA Bkpatch current VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the current Bk-patch value of screen A in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB Y-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the current Y-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB M-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the current M-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
SGL-B-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-B-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-C-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-C-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-C-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SGL-C-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ARCDAT scrnB C-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)

To display the current C-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnB Bkpatch current VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the current Bk-patch value of screen B in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC Y-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the current Y-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC M-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the current M-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC C-patch current VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the current C-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
ARCDAT scrnC Bkpatch current VL(1/3 SPD)
To display the current Bk-patch value of screen C in ARCDAT control
at 1/3 speed.
0 to 1023
T-8-14
8-69
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)
I/O (I/O display mode)

Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to
Address
bit
P003
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
For R&D use
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Duplex Left Motor Current
Switch I1
14
13
12
11
10
Not used
Duplex Left Motor Enable
Registration Motor Enable
Registration Motor_MD
Registration Motor Rotation
Direction
Registration Motor I1
Registration Motor I0
P056)
Address
bit
P001
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P002
Name
Symbol
Remarks
Not used
Not used
For R&D use
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
For R&D use
Not used
For R&D use
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
For R&D use
For R&D use
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
P004
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
For R&D use

For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
Paper Loop Detect Sensor 2
Paper Loop Detect Sensor 1
Secondary Transfer End
Sensor
Symbol
8-70
Remarks
M23
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
0/1: Drive current 1.3 A
1/1: Drive current 0 A
M23
M34
M34
M34
0: 2phase, 1: 1-2phase
0:CCW, 1:CW
M34
M34
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
PS91
PS90
PS23
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
8-70
8
Address
bit
P005
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
For R&D use

For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
Duplex Sensor 4
Duplex Sensor 3
Duplex Sensor 2
Duplex Sensor 1
Recipro Motor I1
Recipro Motor I0
5
4
3
2
1
For R&D use

Recipro Motor Enable
For R&D use
Fixing Motor_LOCK
Duplex Left Motor Phase
Pattern Switch
Duplex Left Motor I0
For R&D use
For R&D use
Core Movement Motor Rotation
Direction
Core Movement Motor I1
Core Movement Motor I0
P006
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
For R&D use

Core Movement Motor Enable
Inner Delivery Sensor
Half Press Sensor
Pre-fixing Feed Motor Phase
Pattern Switch
Pre-fixing Feed Motor I1
Pre-fixing Feed Motor I0
For R&D use

Pre-fixing Feed Motor Enable
Pressure Roller Engagement/
Disengagement HP Sensor
Core Movement HP Sensor
Symbol
Remarks
Address
bit
P007
15
14
PS27
PS26
PS25
PS24
M53
M53
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
M53
1:Enable
M48
M32
0: Lock, 1: Error
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
M32
M56
0:CCW, 1:CW
M35
M35
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
M35
PS75
PS102
M35
1:Enable
1: Paper presence
1:Harf Press
M35
M35
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
M35
PS73
1:Enable
1:HP
PS98
1:HP
P008
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Heat Soaking Roller
Engagement/Disgag\ement
Motor Phase Pattern Switch
Heat Soaking Roller
Motor Rotation Direction
Heat Soaking Roller
Motor I1
Heat Soaking Roller
Motor I0
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
Kona Watch Dock Pulse
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
Fixing Unit Enter Sensor
Heat Soaking Roller HP
Sensor
For R&D use
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Reverse Vertical Path Sensor
3
2
PV REQ
Registration Sensor
Not used
Not used
Not used
Resipro HP Sensor
Motor Enable
Symbol
Remarks
M48
M48
0: CCW, 1:CW
M48
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
0/1: Drive current 0.5A
M48
8-71
PS70
PS99
1: Paper presence
1:HP
PS35
1: Paper presence
PS34
1: Paper presence
PS28
PS30
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
PS100
M55
1: HP
1:Enable
8-71
8
Address
bit
P009
15
14
13
12
Name
Symbol
11
10
9
8

Right Deck Limit Sensor
Right Deck Feed Sensor
Right Deck Paper Height
Sensor
Left Deck Limit Sensor
Left Deck Feed Sensor
PS58
PS56
PS55
PS54
PS57
6
5
Color Toner Sensor ON

Waste Toner Bottle
Detection Sensor
Not used
Outer Delivery Transparency
Sensor
Secondary Transfer
Motor I1
Secondary Transfer
Motor I0
For R&D use
4
3
2
PS51
PS50
PS49
PS52
Remarks
1: Paper presence
1:Limit
1: Paper presence
0: Paper surface reaches to the
upper limit, 1: Up
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1:Limit
upper limit, 1: Up
0: High voltage remote ON
1: High voltage remote OFF
0:Sensor OFF, 1:Sensor OFF
0:Bottle Non-wearing, 1:Bottle
Wearing
Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P010
15
SW15
0: ON, 1: OFF
SW15
0: ON, 1: OFF
SW14
0: ON, 1: OFF
SW14
0: ON, 1: OFF
SW14
0: ON, 1: OFF
SW14
0: ON, 1: OFF
PS43
0: ON, 1: OFF
PS44
0: ON, 1: OFF
PS41
0: ON, 1: OFF
PS42
0: ON, 1: OFF
PS45
0: ON, 1: OFF
PS46
0: ON, 1: OFF
PS47
0: ON, 1: OFF
PS48
0: ON, 1: OFF
Upper Cassette Size Detection

Sensor 2 SW2
Sensor 2 SW1
Sensor 1 SW4
Sensor 1 SW3
Sensor 1 SW2
Sensor 1 SW1
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor
1
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor
2
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor
1
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor
2
Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor
1
2
1
2
Right Lower Cover Sensor
PS39
0:Open
Left Lower Cover Sensor
PS36
0:Open
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
PS111
M31
M31
0:Transparency
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
6
5
4
3
2
8-72
Remarks
8-72
8
Address
bit
Name
P011
15
14
Not used
Waste Toner Screw Lock
Sensor
Reverse Roller Disengagement
Motor Enable
Motor I1
Motor I0
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Not used
Down Cassette Size Detection
Sensor 2 SW4
Sensor 2 SW3
Sensor 2 SW2
Sensor 2 SW1
Sensor 1 SW4
Sensor 1 SW3
Sensor 1 SW2
Sensor 1 SW1
Sensor 2 SW4
Sensor 2 SW3
Symbol
SW10
Remarks
0:Lock
bit
P012
15
14
M54
1: Enable
M54
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
M54
Address
13
12
11
10
SW17
0: ON, 1: OFF
SW17
0: ON, 1: OFF
SW17
0: ON, 1: OFF
SW17
0: ON, 1: OFF
8
7
6
5
SW16
0: ON, 1: OFF
SW16
0: ON, 1: OFF
4
3
2
1
SW16
0: ON, 1: OFF
SW16
0: ON, 1: OFF
SW15
0: ON, 1: OFF
SW15
0: ON, 1: OFF
Name
Delivery Anti-adhesion Fan 2
Lock
Half Speed
Full Speed
Lock
Kona Watch Dock Pulse
Half Speed
Full Speed
Cassette 4 Limit Sensor
Cassette 4 Feed Sensor
Cassette 4 Paper Height
Senso
Cassette 3 Limit Sensor
Cassette 3 Feed Sensor
Cassette 3 Paper Height
Senso
Not used
Symbol
8-73
Remarks
FM11
1: Lock, 1:Error
FM11
1: ON
FM11
1: ON
FM10
1: Lock, 1:Error
FM10
1: ON
FM10
1: ON
PS66
PS65
PS64
PS67
1: Paper presence
0: Normal, 1: Upper limit
1: Paper presence
upper limit, 1: Up
1: Paper presence
0: Normal, 1: Upper limit
1: Paper presence
upper limit, 1: Up
PS61
PS60
PS59
PS62
8-73
8
Address
bit
Name
P013
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Lock
Half Speed
Full Speed
HP Sensor
Engagement/Disengagement
Motor Enable
Engagement/Disengagement
HP Sensor
Not used
Lock
Half Speed
Full Speed
8
7
6
5
3
2
1
0
Symbol
Remarks
FM13
1: Lock, 1:Error
FM13
1:ON
FM13
1:ON
PS101
1:HP
bit
P014
15
Cassette 3 Pickup Motor I0
14
13
12
For R&D use

For R&D use
Multi Inside Board Solenoid
ON
Left Deck Pickup Motor Enable
Rotation Direction
Left Deck Pickup Motor I1
Left Deck Pickup Motor I0
11
10
9
8
M31
1:Enable
PS22
1:HP
FM12
1: Lock, 1:Error
FM12
1:ON
FM12
1:ON
Address
7
6
5
4
Name
2
1
Not used
Not used
Enable
Rotation Direction
Right Deck Pickup Motor I1
Right Deck Pickup Motor I0
Not used
Symbol
8-74
Remarks
M44
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
SL4
1:ON
M42
M42
1:Enable
0:CCW, 1:CW
M42
M42
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
PS63
1: Paper presence
M43
1:Enable
M43
0:CCW, 1:CW
M43
M43
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
8-74
8
Address
bit
P015
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Delivery Motor Phase Pattern
Switch
Delivery Motor I1
Delivery Motor I0
Not used
Reverse Sensor
multi Paper Sensor
Enable
Rotation Direction
Not used
Duplex Sensor 1
Enable
Rotation Direction
Symbol
Remarks
M37
M37
M37
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
PS32
PS37
M45
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1:Enable
M45
0:CCW, 1CW
M45
M45
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
PS24
PS31
M44
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1:Enable
M44
0:CCW, 1CW
Address
bit
Name
P016
15
14
For R&D use

Enable
Pattern Switch
I1
I0
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
Not used
PVREQ
Reverse Motor Enable
Reverse Motor Pattern Switch
Reverse Motor Rotation
Direction
Reverse Motor I1
Reverse Motor I0
3
2
1
0
For R&D use

Registration Sensor
Delivery Motor Enable
Symbol
8-75
Remarks
M40
1:Enable
M40
M40
M40
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
M38
M38
M38
1:Enable
0:CCW, 1CW
M38
M38
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
PS28
PS30
M37
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1:Enable
M44
8-75
Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P017
15

Enable
Pattern Switch
Cassette Vertical Path Motor I1
Cassette Vertical Path Motor I0
M39
1:Enable
M39
M39
M39
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
For R&D use

Enable
Pattern Switch
I1
I0
Not used
For R&D use
For R&D use
3
For R&D use
Remarks
Address
bit
P018
15
14
13
12
11
10
PS53
PS40
M41
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1:Enable
M41
M41
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
M41
5
4
PS35
1: Paper presence
P019
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Option Cooling Fan2 Lock
Option Cooling Fan2 Full
Speed
Option Cooling Fan2 Half
Speed
Option Cooling Fan1 Lock
Option Cooling Fan1 Full
Speed
Option Cooling Fan1 Half
Speed
1
2
Pre-registration Multipurpose
Tray Drive Motor Enable
Tray Drive Motor Pattern
Switch
Tray Drive Motor I1
Tray Drive Motor I0
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
5V Remote
Option Cooling Fan Connection
Detection
Symbol
8-76
Remarks
FM24
FM24
1: Lock, 1:Error
1: ON
FM24
1: ON
FM23
FM23
1: Lock, 1:Error
1: ON
FM23
1: ON
PS33
1: Paper presence
PS34
1: Paper presence
M36
1: Enable
M36
M36
M36
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
PS68
1: Paper presence
0: Fan connection
8-76
8
Address
bit
P020
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Not used
Pre-exposure LED Error(Bk)
Pre-exposure LED Bit0(Bk)
Pre-exposure LED Bit1(Bk)
Pre-exposure LED ON(Bk)

Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Symbol
UN29
UN29
UN29
Remarks
0: Error
Change the current amount of BK
pre-exposure
bit0/bit1
0/0: 125mA (forbid setting)
0/1: 120mA (forbid setting)
1/0: 80mA
1/1: 40mA
UN29
Address
bit
P021
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
8-77
Remarks
Post Developing Fan Full

FM4
1: ON
Speed (BK)
FM22 1: Lock, 1:Error
Lock
FM22 1: ON
Half Speed
FM22 1: ON
Full Speed
Hopper Cooling Exhaust Fan
FM18 1: Lock, 1:Error
Lock
FM18 1: ON
Half Speed
FM18 1: ON
Full Speed
Registration Detection Reset
PS19,20 0: Reset
Patch Sensor LED ON
PS21 1: ON
Registration Detection LED ON PS19,20 1: ON
For R&D use
For R&D use
Multi-purpose Tray Door
PS79 0: OPEN, 1: CLOSE
Sensor
FM2
1: Lock, 1:Error
Lock
FM2
1: ON
Half Speed
FM2
1: ON
Full Speed
8-77
8
Address
bit
Name
P022
15
14
For R&D use

Developing Sleeve Drive Motor
(Y) CW
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
Registration Sensor
Lock Detection
Half Speed
Full Speed
Cl Cleaner Fan Lock Detection
Cl Cleaner Fan Half Speed
Cl Cleaner Fan Full Speed
Post Developing Fan Lock
Detection
Post Developing Fan Half
Speed
12V Power Supply Fan Full
Speed
24V Power Supply Fan Full
Speed
24V Pickup SW
24V Finisher SW
24V Fixing Feed Unit SW
24VB Power Supply Remote
24VA Power Supply Remote
KONA Communication monitor
control
5V Photo Interrupter Power
Supply
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P023
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
M20
Remarks
Address
bit
P024
15
1: CW
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
PS28
PS30
FM1
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: Lock, 1:Error
FM1
1: ON
FM1
1: ON
FM5
FM5
FM5
FM4
1: Lock, 1:Error
1: ON
1: ON
1: Lock, 1:Error
5
4
3
2
1
FM4
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
P025
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Drum Heater connector
disconnection
Drum Heater Limit 46 degree
C
Drum Heater RL Reset
Drum Heater RL Set
Caset Heater Triac ON
Not used
Fixing Feed Knob SW
Not used
24VB Power Supply Failure
Detection
24VA Power Supply Failure
Detection
AC Driver PCB Location 1
AC Driver PCB Location 0
Not used
IH Fan Lock
IH Power Supply Fan Full
Speed
IH Power Supply Fan Half
Speed
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Fixing Web Level Sensor
For R&D use
For R&D use
Symbol
8-78
Remarks
1: connector disconnection
1: Limit 46 degree C
1: Reset
1: Set
1: ON
0: CLOSE, 1: OPEN
1: Error
1: Error
1: Lock, 1:Error
1: ON
1: ON
1: No Web
8-78
8
Address
bit
P030
15
Multi Deck Reset
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
Multi Deck Connect

Not used
Not used
Error Detection
Jam Detection
ITOP Signal
Bideo Board Reset cancellation
Bideo Board Ready Signal
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Fixing Feed Drawer Connect
ITB Unit Identification
9
8
7
6
5
4
For R&D use

Finisher Download
Finisher Reset
Finisher Mode Signal
Finisher Remote
Lock Detection
Half Speed
Full Speed
For R&D use
Multi Deck Remote
P031
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
Remarks
0: Clear Multi Deck RESET
1: Multi Deck RESET
0: Open, 1: Connect
Address
bit
Name
P032
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
For R&D use

Multi Deck AD chip select
For R&D use
For R&D use
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
12V Power Supply of Driver
PCB
5V Power Supply of Driver
PCB
3.3V Power Supply of High
Voltage
Buffer Driver PCB connection
detection
Not used
Not used
Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan Lock
Detection
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Front Door Sensor
CW
CW
CW
CW
Not used
1: Error
1: Jam
1: Ready
6
5
4
-
3
2
1
0: Open, 1: Connect
0: IR-ADV C9200/7200 series
1: IR-ADV C9000/7000 series
FM3
1: Downloade
1: Reset
1: Enable (Connecting X4/5)
1: ON
0: Error, 1: Lock
FM3
1: ON
FM3
1: ON
1: ON
P033
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
8-79
Remarks
0: Normal, 1: Power Down

0: Not connect 1: Connect
0: Error, 1: Lock
0: Open, 1: Close
PS80
M29
0: CW, 1:CCW (original turn)
M27
M28
M26
8-79
Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P034
15
Toner Cartridge Drive Motor (Y)

CW
Toner Cartridge Drive Motor
(M) CW
Toner Cartridge Drive Motor (C)
CW
Toner Cartridge Drive Motor
(Bk) CW
Pre-exposure LED ON (C)
Pre-exposure LED ON (M)
Pre-exposure LED ON (Y)
Pre-exposure Error Detection
(C)
(M)
(Y)
Toner Cartridge inner door
Sensor (C)
Post-wire Cleaning Motor ON
Post-wire Cleaning Motor
Rotation Direction
M10
0: CCW, 1: CW
M13
0: CCW, 1: CW
M16
0: CCW, 1: CW
M7
0: CCW, 1: CW
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Steering Motor Enable

Primary Transfer Engagemant/
Disengagement Motor Enable
Post-Shutter HP
Remarks
bit
Name
Symbol
P035
15
14
13
12
Cam Phase Sensor (M)

Cam Phase Sensor (C)
Cam Phase Sensor (Bk)
Hopper Level Detection Sensor
(Y)
(M)
(C)
(Bk)
Toner Cartridge door Sensor
Sensor (Y)
Sensor (M)
For R&D use
Toner Container inner door
Sensor (Bk)
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
KONA 1 Live
5V RMT
Toner Cartridge Reciprocation
Cam HP Sensor (Y)
Cam HP Sensor (M)
Cam HP Sensor (C)
Cam HP Sensor (Bk)
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
Cam Phase Sensor (Y)
PS82
PS83
PS84
TS6
0: Absence, 1: Presence
TS7
TS8
TS5
11
10
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED4
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: Error
LED3
1: Error
LED2
1: Error
PS16
0: Open, 1: Close
9
8
7
6
0: Motor Stop, 1: Moter Drive

0: CCW (From this side to the
depths)
1: CW
1: Enable
1: Enable
1: Close
Address
5
4
P036
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-80
Remarks
PS6
PS10
0: Close, 1: Open
0: Close, 1: Open
PS13
0: Close, 1: Open
PS7
0: Close, 1: Open
PS11
1: ON
1: ON
1: HP
PS14
1: HP
PS17
1: HP
PS8
1: HP
8-80
8
Address
bit
Name
P037
15
Steering Motor Phase Pattern

Switch
Steering Motor Phase Rotation
Direction
Steering Motor I1
Steering Motor I0
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
Remarks
0: CCW, 1: CW
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
For R&D use

For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
Post Charging shutter Rotation
Direction
Primary Charging Shutter
Rotation Direction
Not used
Not used
Address
bit
Name
P038
15
14
13
12
11
Not used
ITB Steering HP Sensor
ITB HP Sensor
Hopper Screw Motor Rotation
Detection (Bk)
Hopper Screw Motor Rotation
Detection (Y,M,C)
Primary Charging Shutter HP
Sensor
For R&D use
Pre-transfer Engagement/
Disengagement Motor Pattern
Switch
Disengagement Motor Rotation
Direction
Disengagement Motor I1
Disengagement Motor I0
10
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
1
0
For R&D use

Disengagement Motor HP
Sensor
Post Charging Wire Cleaning
Motor ON
Post Charging Wire Cleaning
Motor Rotation Direction
Symbol
PS5
8-81
Remarks
1: HP
1: HP
1: ON
0: CCW
0: CCW
1: Close
0: CCW, 1: CW
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
0: Pre-transfer Engagement
1: Pre-transfer Disengagement
0: Motor Stop
1: Motor turn
0: CCW (From this side to the
depths)
1: CW
8-81
8
Address
bit
P039
15
14
Not used
Fixing Motor Gain
M48
13
Fixing Motor Rotation Direction
M48
12
11
10
9
Fixing Motor ON
Not used
Not used
Fixing Feed Cooling Fan Full
Speed (Center)
Fixing Feed Cooling Fan Half
Speed (Center)
Heat Soaking Roller Cooling
Fan 1 Full Speed
Fan 1 Half Speed
Fan 2 Full Speed
Fan 2 Half Speed
Transparency Sensor ON
Transparency Sensor Gain 1
Transparency Sensor Gain 2
5V Remote
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
High Voltage Remote
Secondary Transfer High
Voltage CV ON
Voltage minus ON
Voltage Constant Current ON
Voltage Static Elimination High
Voltage DC ON
M48
8
7
6
5
4
P040
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
Remarks
0: High Speed Gain (More than
1700rpm)
0: CW (Fixing drive)
1: CCW (Engagement/
Disengagement)
0: ON
FM27
1: ON
FM27
1: ON
FM15
1: ON
FM15
1: ON
FM16
1: ON
FM16
1: ON
PS29
PS29
PS29
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P041
15
14
13
12
11
Paper Width Size Detection 1

Fixing Feed Cooling Fan Lock
(Center)
Fan 1 Lock
Fan 2 Lock
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
PS94
PS95
PS96
PS97
FM27
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
0: Lock, 1: Error
FM15
0: Lock, 1: Error
FM16
0: Lock, 1: Error
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-82
Remarks
T-8-15
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
8-82
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_Main Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016)
Host Machine_Main Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016)

Address
bit
P001
8-15
6-7
4-5
3
P002
P003
P004
P005
8-9
0-7
14-15
13
12
11
P006
Name
Not used
Reserve
For R&D use
ZIFO,FIFO PCB Presence/
Absence
2
ZIFO,FIFO PCB Presence/
Absence
1
Debug SRAM PCB Presence/
Absence
0
For R&D use
9-15 Not used
0-8 For R&D use
4-15 Not used
0-3 For R&D use
15 Main Controller PCB 2 Version bit3
11 Orfeo-A/ Orfeo-B PCB Detection
10 Orfeo-A/ Orfeo-B PCB Detection
For R&D use

Not used
For R&D use
Not used
Clear reset of image process chip

SCPRDY (Controller reception is
available)
9-10 For R&D use
8
Not used
5-7 For R&D use
4
Not used
2-3 For R&D use
1
Not used
0
For R&D use
1-15 Not used
0
Image Analysis PCB power state
Symbol
-
Remarks
Address
P007
bit11,bit10
0,0: Short
0,1: Orfeo-B
1,0: Orfeo-A
1,1: OPEN
-
1: Wake
0: Movement is possible
0: Abnormal, 1: Normal
Name
P008
P009
P010
P011
P012
P013
P014
P015
P016
12
11
10
9
8
0-7
0-15
0-15
0-15
0-15
0-15
0-15
bit3,bit2
0,1: ZIFO BOARD
1,0: FIFO BOARD
1,1: NO BOARD
bit
8-15 Reserve
7
Reader Controller PCB power
output state
6
PRTS (Controller reception is
available)
5
PCTS (Printer reception is
available)
4
PCPRDY (Controller reception is
available)
3
PPRDY (Printer power ON)
2
Reserve
1
Reserve
0
Printer DCON reset state
0-15 Not used
0-1 Not used
13-15 For R&D use
Not used
Riser PCB Version bit3
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
8-83
Symbol
Remarks
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_Main Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016)
T-8-16
8-83
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Reader / ADF (R-CON>P001 to P006)
Reader / ADF (R-CON>P001 to P006)

Address
bit
P001
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
Not used
For R&D use
24V Power Supply Monitor
Not used
Board Test
For R&D use
ADF Glass HP Sensor
Not used
Not used
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
HP Sensor
For R&D use
For R&D use
Original Size Sensor ON
Not used
For R&D use
For R&D use
DF Type
SR11
SR2
-
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
For R&D use

Not used
Watchdog Signal
For R&D use
For R&D use
Not used
For R&D use
For R&D use
Scanner Motor Reset
Scanner Motor Enable
ADF ConnectionDetection
For R&D use
M1
M1
FC2
FC1
-
P002
P003
P004
Name
Symbol
Remarks
0: ON, 1:OFF
0: ON, 1:OFF
0: PCB check, 1: Normal start-up
0: ON, 1:OFF
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: Reverse duplex
1: 1-path duplex
0: Reset
0: Enable
0: Original presence
0: Unconnected, 1: Connected
Address
bit
P005
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
P006
3
2
1
0
Name
Not used
For R&D use
For R&D use
Not used
FAN Lock Signal
FAN ON Signal
DF Cover Sensor 1
DF Cover Sensor 2
Scanner Motor Direction
Not used
For R&D use
ADF Glass HP Sensor
ADF Delay Sensor
ADF Post-separation Sensor 3
ADF Delivery Sensor

ADF Read Sensor 2
ADF Read Sensor 1
ADF Registration Sensor
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Reader / ADF (R-CON>P001 to P006)
8-84
Symbol
FM2
FM2
SR1
SR3
-
SR11
SR4
SR2
SR3
PCB2
PCB5
SR5
PCB4
PCB3
Remarks
1: Failure
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: Open, 1: Close
0: Open, 1: Close
0: Back scan, 1: Scan
0: ON, 1:OFF
0: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
T-8-17
8-84
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > ADF(FEEDER>P001 to P008)
ADF(FEEDER>P001 to P008)
Address
bit
P001
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P002
P003
P004
Name
Symbol
Remarks
Not used
Not used
DADF Fan Alarm
LTR-R/LGL Identification Sensor
AB/Inch Identification Sensor
Tray Sensor
Tray HP Sensor
Paper Surface Sensor
Not used
Cover Sensor
Original Sensor
Not used
Post-separation 3 Sensor
Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP
Sensor
0
Scanner Unit Cooling Fan Alarm
8-15 Not used
7
Disengagement HP Sensor 2
6
For R&D use
SR8
SR7
SR9
SR13
SR6
SR10
SR1
PCB2
SR3
SR2
SR12
0: Power supply
0: Failure
1: Paper presence
1: A4R, STMTR, B6R
0: Open, 1: Close
1: HP (lower limit)
1: Paper surface detection
0: Open
1: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
1: HP (Escape)
FM3
SR16
-
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SR15
SR20
SR19
SR18
SR17
M8
SL2
-
0: Failure
1: HP (Disengagement)
1: 1-path duplex, 0: Reverse
duplex
1: HP (Disengagement)
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: ON
1: Up, 0: Down
1: ON
1: ON
For R&D use

Disengagement HP Sensor 1
Not used
Not used
Not used
Delivery LED 1
Not used
Not used
Tray Lifting Motor Direction
Stamp Solenoid
Original LED
Address
bit
P005
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Tray Lifting Motor Enable
Not used
Not used
Not used
Disengagement Motor 1 Enable
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Disengagement Motor 2 Enable
Not used
Not used
Not used
Glass Shift Motor Enable
Not used
Not used
Glass Shift Motor Direction
M8
M6
M7
M9
M9
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
Feed Fan ON
Not used
Pickup Motor Enable
Feed Motor Enable
registration Motor Enable
Read Motor Enable
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Pickup Roller Unit Lifting Motor
Enable
Back Side FAN ON
Not used
Delivery Motor Enable
Delivery Motor Direction
FM1
M1
M2
M3
M4
FM10
1: Enable
1: Enable
1: Enable
1: Enable
0: Readin direction
1: Shading direction
1: ON
1: Enable
1: Enable
1: Enable
1: Enable
1: Enable
FM2
M5
M5
1: ON
1: Enable
-
P006
P007
P008
3
2
1
0
Name
8-85
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > ADF(FEEDER>P001 to P008)
Symbol
Remarks
T-8-18
8-85
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Deck Unit (DC-CON>P048 to P050)
Paper Deck Unit (DC-CON>P048 to P050)

Address
bit
P048
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P049
Name
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Deck Main Motor Hold
Deck Open Solenoid
Deck Lifter Motor
Deck Lifter Motor ON Signal
Deck Main Motor ON Signal
Not used
Not used
Deck Pickup Clutch ON Signal
Not used
Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid
Deck Open Indicator
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Symbol
M1
SL2
M2
M2
M1
CL2
SL1
LED100
-
Remarks
0: Open, 1: Close
0: Up, 1:Down
0: OFF, 1:ON
0: OFF, 1:ON
0: OFF, 1:ON
0: OFF, 1:ON
-
Name
8-86
Address
bit
Symbol
Remarks
P050
15
14
13
12
11
For R&D
not used
For R&D
For R&D
Deck Open Sensor
PS9
10
Deck Set Sensor
PS5
9
8
Deck Lifter Lower Limit Detecting Switch

Deck Paper Level Sensor
SW2
PS8
Deck Paper Supply Position Sensor
PS7
6
5
M1
SL1
Deck Main Motor Lock Signal

Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid
ON Signal
Deck Pickup Sensor
0: Connected
1: unconnected
0: Paper Present, 1: Paper
Absent
0: ON, 1: OFF
Absent
Absent
0: ON, 1: OFF
PS6
Deck Feed Sensor
PS1
2
1
Deck Lifter Position Sensor

Deck Paper Sensor
PS4
PS2
Deck Open Detecting Switch
SW1
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Deck Unit (DC-CON>P048 to P050)

Absent
Absent
0: ON, 1: OFF
Absent
0: Open, 1: close
T-8-19
8-86
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > POD Deck Lite (DC-CON>P054 to P057)
POD Deck Lite (DC-CON>P054 to P057)

Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P054
15
14
13
12
11
10
M2
PS9
PS5
Fix to 0
1: Error, 0: Normal
Fix to 0
Fix to 1
1: Close, 0: Open
1: Open, 0: Close
SW2
1: Normal, 0: Abnormal
Large Deck ID
Deck Lifter Motor Error
Deck Lite ID
Deck Lite ID
Deck Receptacle Left Open Sensor
Deck Engagement/Disengagement
Sensor
Deck Lifter Lower Limit Detection
Switch
Deck Paper Level Sensor
PS8
Deck Supply Position Sensor
PS7
PS10
5
4
Deck Receptacle Right Open

Sensor
5V Detection
Deck Pullout Sensor
1: Paper absence, 0: Paper

presence
presence
1: Close, 0: Open
Deck Pickup Sensor
PS1
Deck Lifter Position Sensor
PS4
Deck Paper Sensor
PS2
Receptacle Open Switch
SW3
PS6
Remarks
1: 5V OFF, 0: 5V ON
1: Paper presence, 0: Paper
absence
1: Paper presence, 0: Paper
absence
presence
presence
1: ON, 0: OFF
Address
bit
P055
15
14
13
12
11
10
Not used
Heater Error 1
Heater Ready
POD Deck Detection
Motor Cooling Fan Error
Deck Foreign Matter Sensor
FAN4
PS13
Paper Level Sensor
PS12
Hot Air Fan/Cold Air Fan/Expansion FAN1,

Fan/Swing Motor Error, Receptacle FAN2,
Load Error
FAN3,
M3
Temperature DATA [3]
Humidity DATA [3]
Humidity DATA [2]
Humidity DATA [1]
Humidity DATA [0]
BANK-RX1
BANK-RX0
BANK-TX
Deck Pickup Clutch ON
CL1
Hot Air Fan OFF
FAN1
Air Heater ON
H1
Open/Close Solenoid ON
SL2,
SL3
Lifter DOWN/UP
Deck Lifter Motor ON
M2
Cold Fan OFF
FAN2
Cassette Heater ON
H2, H3
Motor Cooling Fan
FAN4
Deck Pickup Motor Current 1
M1
Deck Pickup Motor Current 0
M1
Deck Pickup Solenoid ON
SL1
Indication LED ON
-
P056
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
8-87
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > POD Deck Lite (DC-CON>P054 to P057)
Symbol
Remarks
1: Normal, 0: Error
1: Ready, 0: Not ready
1: Detect, 0: Not detect
1: Normal, 0: Error
1: Foreign matter absence, 0:
Foreign matter presence
presence
1: Normal, 0: Error
1: bit3=1, 0: bit3=0
1: bit2=1, 0: bit2=0
1: bit1=1, 0: bit1=0
1: bit0=1, 0: bit0=0
1: bit3=1, 0: bit3=0
1: bit2=1, 0: bit2=0
1: bit1=1, 0: bit1=0
1: bit0=1, 0: bit0=0
Auto at bank switching
Auto at bank switching
Fix to 1
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: OFF, 0: ON
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: Down, 0: Up
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: ON, 0: OFF
1: OFF, 0: ON
1: OFF, 0: ON
8-87
8
Address
bit
P057
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Multi Deck Unit (DC-CON>P042 to P053)
Remarks
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Expansion Fan OFF
Not used
Air Heater Control Signal
FAN3
H1
1: OFF, 0: ON
0 (0,0): 60 degC, 3 (1,1): 90 degC
Swing Control Signal
M3
0 (0,0): 250 pps, 3 (1,1): 850 pps
Fan Control Signal
FAN1,
FAN2,
FAN3
0 (0,0): 26V, 3 (1,1): 13.5V
Multi Deck Unit (DC-CON>P042 to P053)

Address
bit
P042
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
T-8-20
P043
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-88
Name
Symbol
Not use
Middle Deck Pull-out Sensor
S202
S003
S002
Not use
Not use
Lower Deck Pull-out Sensor
S302
S004
Upper Deck Swing HP Sensor
S116
Not use
Not use
Upper Deck Lifter Lower Limit
S112
sensor
Not use
Upper Deck Pull-out Sensor
S102
Vertical Path Upper Sensor
S001
S002
Not use
Upper Deck Lifter HP Sensor
S111
Upper Deck Paper Presence/
S103
Absence Sensor
Upper Deck Paper Surface Sensor S104
Upper Deck Foreign Substance
S106
Sensor 2
Upper Deck Foreign Substance
S106
Sensor 1
Upper Deck Lifter Upper Limit
S105
Sensor
Upper Deck Pickup Sensor
S101
Not use
Not use
Deck Pickup Motor ERR
M001
Upper Deck Safety Switch
S108
Upper Deck Air Heater Unit ERR
HT101
Upper Deck Air Heater Unit
READY
Upper Deck Night Flotation Fan
ERR
Upper Deck Left Flotation Fan
ERR
Remarks
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
0: Paper
0: Paper
0: Paper
0: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
0: Paper
0: Paper
0: Paper
Reserve
0: Paper
0: Paper
1: Paper
0: Error
1: Open, 0: Close
0: High Temperature
1: Normal Temperature
HT101 0: Low Temperature
1: Blast temperature
FAN102 0: Error
FAN101 0: Error
8-88
8
Address
bit
P044
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
P045
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
Remarks
Not use
Not use
Upper Deck Lifter Motor-I1
M101 Reserve
Upper Deck Lifter Motor-I0
M101
Middle Deck Lifter Motor-I1
M201 Reserve
Middle Deck Lifter Motor-I0
M201
Lower Deck Lifter Motor-I1
M301 Reserve
Lower Deck Lifter Motor-I0
M301
Not use
Not use
Horizontal Path Feed Motor-I1
M004 Reserve
Horizontal Path Feed Motor-I0
M004
Vertical Path Lower Feed Motor-I1 M003 Reserve
Vertical Path Lower Feed Motor-I0 M003
Vertical Path Upper Feed Motor-I1 M002 Reserve
Vertical Path Upper Feed Motor-I0 M002
Lower Deck Pickup Roller Release SL301 1: ON
Solenoid
Middle Deck Pickup Roller Release SL201 1: ON
Solenoid
Upper Deck Pickup Roller Release SL101 1: ON
Solenoid
Deck Pickup Motor CLK
M001 Lower Deck Swing Motor -CLK
M302 Middle Deck Swing Motor-CLK
M202 Upper Deck Swing Motor-CLK
M102 Upper Deck Lifter Motor-CLK
M101 Middle Deck Lifter Motor-CLK
M201 Lower Deck Lifter Motor-CLK
M301 Not use
Horizontal Path Feed Motor-CLK
M004 Vertical path Lower Feed MotorM003 CLK
Vertical Path Upper Feed MotorM002 CLK
24V4 ON
1: ON
Lifter EN Rock Clear
0: Clear
Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P046
15
14
13
Not use
Lower Deck Lifter HP Sensor
Lower Deck Paper Presence/
Absence Sensor
Lower Deck Paper Surface Sensor
Lower Deck Foreign Substance
Sensor2
Lower Deck Foreign Substance
Sensor1
Lower Deck Lifter Upper Limit
Sensor
Lower Deck Pickup Sensor
Middle Deck Swing HP Sensor
Not use
Not use
Middle Deck Lifter Lower Limit
Sensor
Not use
Not use
Not use
Not use
Not use
Middle Deck Lifter HP Sensor
Middle Deck Paper Presence/
Absence Sensor
Middle Deck Paper Surface Sensor
Middle Deck Foreign Substance
Sensor 2
Middle Deck Foreign Substance
Sensor 1
Middle Deck Lifter Upper Limit
Sensor
Middle Deck Pickup Sensor
Lower Deck Swing HP Sensor
Not use
Not use
Lower Deck Lifter Lower Limit
Sensor
Not use
Delivery Sensor
S211
S303
0: Paper
0: Paper
S304
S306
0: Paper
Reserve
S306
0: Paper
S305
0: Paperr
S301
S216
S212
1: paper
0: Paper
0: Paper
0: Paper
0: Paper
S311
S203
0: Paper
0: Paper
S204
S206
0: Paper
Reserve
S206
0: Paper
S205
0: Paper
S201
S316
S312
1: Paper
0: Paper
0: Paper
0: Paper
0: Paper
S003
S004
S005
0: Paper
0: Paper
0: Paper
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
P047
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-89
Remarks
8-89
8
Address
bit
P048
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
P049
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
Remarks
Middle Deck Right Flotation Fan

FAN202 1: ON
EN
Middle Deck Left Flotation Fan EN FAN201 1: ON
Middle Deck Air Heater Unit ON
HT201 1: +5V A1T2 ON
SEL
Middle Deck Air Heater Unit ON
HT201 1: ON
Middle Deck Air Heater Unit BIT1
HT201 1: BIT1 Select
Middle Deck Air Heater Unit BIT0
Middle Deck Swing Motor DIR
M202 1: CW,0:CCW
Middle Deck Swing Motor EN
M202 1: ON
Motor Drivers Reset
0: Reset
Horizontal , Lower Deck Vertical
0: ON
Path Lower Feed EN
Horizontal Path Right Feed MODE
1: 1-2 phase both edges
0: W1-2 phase both edges
Not use
1: BIT1 Select
Power Supply ON LED
1: ON
Not use
1: ON
Not use
Not use
*STANDBY
0: STANDBY, Door type +Non 5V
ON/OFF
+24V2 ON
1: +24V2 ON
Middle Deck LED
1: ON
Middle Deck Open/Close Solenoid SL202 0: deck open
Middle Deck Pull-out Clutch
CL202 1: Connect
Middle Deck Pickup Clutch
CL201 1: Connect
Middle Deck Lifter Motor CWB
M201 0: CCW, 1: CW
Middle Deck Lifter Motor EN
M201 0: ON
Upper Deck Right Flotation Fan
FAN102 1: ON
EN
Upper Deck Left Flotation Fan EN FAN101 1: ON
Upper Deck Air Heater Unit ON/
HT101 1: +5V A1T1 ON
OFF SEL
Upper Deck Air Heater Unit ON
HT101 1: ON
Upper Deck Air Heater Unit BIT1
Upper Deck Air Heater Unit BIT0
Upper Deck Swing Motor DIR
M102 1: CW,0: CCW
Upper Deck Swing Motor EN
M102 1: ON
Address
bit
P050
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Not use
Not use
Lower Deck Air Heater Unit
Connect Detection
Middle Deck Air Heater Unit
Connect Detection
Upper Deck Air Heater Unit
Connect Detection
Cassette Heater (Lower Deck)
Connect Detection
Cassette Heater (Middle Deck)
Connect Detection
Not use
Not use
Not use
Not use
Middle Deck Safety Switch
Middle Deck Air Heater Unit ERR
Middle Deck Air Heater Unit
READY
Middle Deck Right Flotation Fan
ERR
Middle Deck Left Flotation Fan
ERR
8-90
Symbol
Remarks
HT301 0: Connect
HT201 0: Connect
HT101 0: Connect
CHT301 CHT201 S208
HT201
1: Open, 0: Close
0: High Temperature
FAN202 0: Error
FAN201 0: Error
8-90
8
Address
bit
P051
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
Remarks
Lower Deck Safety Switch

S308 1: ON
Middle Deck Safety Switch
S208 1: ON
Upper Deck Safety Switch
S108 1: ON
Not use
Not use
0: Error
Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 EER FAN001 0: Error
Deck Left Front Cover Open/Close S006 1: Close, 0: Open,
Sensor
Deck Left Front Cover Safety
S007 1: +24V 4Energization Detection
Switch
0: Door close , Energization;0
Double Feed Detection Signal
0: Double Feed
Double Feeding Sensor
S009 GND Detection, Connect:0
Double Feeding Sensor
S010 GND Detection, Connect:0
Lower Deck Safety Switch
S308 1: Open, 0: Close
Lower Deck Air Heater Unit ERR
HT301 0: High Temperature
Lower Deck Air Heater Unit
READY
Lower Deck Right Flotation Fan
FAN302 0: Error
ERR
Lower Deck Left Flotation Fan
FAN301 0: Error
ERR
Address
bit
Name
P052
15
Lower Deck Right Flotation Fan

EN
Lower Deck Left Flotation Fan EN
Lower Deck Air Heater Unit ON/
OFF SEL
Lower Deck Air Heater Unit ON
Lower Deck Air Heater Unit BIT1
Lower Deck Air Heater Unit BIT0
Lower Deck Swing Motor DIR
Lower Deck Swing Motor EN
Vertical Path Lower Feed MODE
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
3
2
P053
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-91
Symbol
Remarks
FAN302 1: ON
FAN301 1: ON
HT301 1: +5V A1T3 ON
HT301
HT301
HT301
M302
M302
-
1: ON
1: BIT1 Select
1: BIT0 Select
1: CW,0:CCW
1: ON
0: W1-2 phase both edges
1: 1-2 phase both edges
Vertical Path Lower Feed CWB
0: CCW, 1:CW
Right Flotation Fan BIT1
FAN102, 1: Select BIT1
FAN202,
FAN302
Right Flotation Fan BIT0
FAN202,
FAN302
Not use
1: BIT2 Select
Left Flotation Fan BIT1
FAN201,
FAN301
Left Flotation Fan BIT0
FAN201,
FAN301
Vertical Path Upper Feed EN
0: ON
AD HUM/TMP Switch
1: Humidity, 0: Temperature
+24V3 ON
1: +24V3 ON
Lower Deck LED
1: ON
Lower Deck Open/Close Solenoid SL302 0: Deck open
Lower Deck Pull-out Clutch
CL302 1: Connect
Lower Deck Pickup Clutch
CL301 1: Connect
Lower Deck Lifter Motor CWB
M301 1: CW, 0: CCW
Lower Deck Lifter Motor EN
M301 0: ON
Deck Pickup Motor EN
M001 1: ON
+24V1 ON
1: 24V1 ON
Upper Deck LED
1: ON
Upper Deck Open/Close Solenoid SL102 0: Deck open
Upper Deck Pull-out Clutch
CL102 1: Connect
Upper Deck Pickup Clutch
CL101 1: Connect
Upper Deck Lifter Motor CWB
M101 1: CW,0:CCW
Upper Deck Lifter Motor EN
M101 0: ON
T-8-21
8-91
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Buffer Path Unit (DC-CON>P026 to P029)
Buffer Path Unit (DC-CON>P026 to P029)

Address
bit
P026
15
Decurler Compression Distance

Adjustment Motor 2 I0
M53
14
13
12
11
For R&D use

For R&D use
For R&D use
Adjustment Motor 1 Enable
Adjustment Motor 1 Rotation
Direction
M50
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
1: Enable
M50
0: CW, 1: CCW
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Symbol
M50
M50
-
Remarks
Address
bit
P027
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
-
5
4
3
2
1
0
P028
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
8-92
Symbol
Remarks
Decurler Feed Motor 2 Pattern

Switch
Decurler Feed Motor 2 I1
M52
M52
M52
For R&D use

For R&D use
For R&D use
Decurler Feed Motor 1 Enable
Decurler Feed Motor 1 Pattern
Switch
M51
M51
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
1: Enable
For R&D use

For R&D use
For R&D use
Adjustment Motor 2 Enable
Adjustment Motor 2 Rotation
Direction
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
Buffer Interlock Loop Detection
Buffer Door Sensor
Adjustment Cam HP Sensor 2
Adjustment Cam HP Sensor 1
Jam Sensor 2
Jam Sensor 1
Not used
Not used
Not used
Decurler Feed Motor 2 Enable
M53
I1/I0
0/0: HOLD_OFF
1: Enable
M53
0: CCW, 1CW
M53
PS87
PS89
0: Close
0: Close
1: HP
PS88
1: HP
PS86
PS85
M52
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: Enable
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Buffer Path Unit (DC-CON>P026 to P029)
M51
M51
8-92
8
Address
bit
Name
P029
15
14
13
12
11
Not used
Not used
Not used
Decurler Lower Exhaust Fan Lock
Decurler Lower Exhaust Fan Half
Speed
Decurler Lower Exhaust Fan Full
Speed
Decurler Side Exhaust Fan Lock
Decurler Side Exhaust Fan Half
Speed
Decurler Side Exhaust Fan Full
Speed
Decurler Suction Fan Lock
Decurler Suction Fan Half Speed
Decurler Suction Fan Full Speed
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher K1/Staple Finisher K1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)
8-93
Booklet Finisher K1/Staple Finisher K1 (SORTER>P001 to
Remarks
P024)
FM32
FM32
0: Lock, 1: Error
1: ON
FM32
1: ON
FM31
FM31
0: Lock, 1: Error
1: ON
FM31
1: ON
FM30
FM30
FM30
0: Lock, 1: Error
1: ON
1: ON
T-8-22
Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P001
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
Horizontal Registration HP Sensor

Punch 2-/3-hole Encoder
Punch 2-/3-hole Sensor
Punch Position Sensor
Buffer Feed Motor Rotation Signal
Swing Guide Motor Clock Signal
Swing Guide Motor Rotation Signal
Inlet Sensor
Swing Guide Height Detection
Sensor
Feed Path Senor
Inlet Feed Motor
Inlet Feed Motor
Stack Delivery Lower/Shutter
Motor Rotation
Motor Clock
DA Converter 1 Clock Signal
DA Converter 1 Data Output Signal
DA Converter 1 Chip Select Signal
Buffer Feed Motor Clock Signal
Stacking Tray Paper Retainer
Position Sensor
Stacking Tray Paper Retainer Rear
HP Sensor
Tray Auxiliary Guide Rear HP
Sensor
Rear Alignment HP Sensor
Stacking Tray Paper Retainer Front
HP Sensor
Stacking Tray Paper Retainer Front
HP Sensor
Front Alignment HP Sensor
Staple HP Sensor
S101
S103
S102
M102
M110
M110
S101
S118
1: Home Position
1: Home Position
1: Home Position
0: CCW, 1: CW
0: CW, 1: CCW
0: Paper, 1: No paper
1: Detected
S102
M200
M200
M122
0: No paper, 1: Paper
0: CW, 1: CCW
0: CW, 1: CCW
M122
S149
1: Home
S138
1: Home
S136
0: Home
S109
S139
1: Home
1: Home
S137
0: Home
S108
S131
1: Home
1: Home
P002
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Remarks
8-93
8
Address
bit
P003
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P004
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
Remarks
Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor Lock

M120 Signal
M114 Motor Clock Signal
DA Converter 2 Clock Signal
DA Converter 2 Data Output Signal
DA Converter 2 Chip Select Signal
Processing Tray Paper Sensor
S103 1: Detected
Stacking Tray Paper Retainer HP
S114 1: Home
Sensor
EXIO1 Chip Select
Tray Paper Surface Sens ON
PBA600 0: Light, 1: Charge
DA converter 2 data input signal
Staple Alignment Interference
S128 1: Detedted
Sensor
Staple Edging Sensor
S132 1: Detedted
Staple Sensor
S133 1: Detedted
Staple Cartridge Sensor
S134 0: 50staples, 1: 100staples
-
Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P005
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Tray Paper Surface Sensor 3

Gripper Base Rear Sensor
Gripper Base Front Sensor
Gripper Position Sensor
Gripper HP Sensor
EXIO2 chip select
Display LED2
Display LED1
Saddle Stitcher Motor CCW Signal
PBA700
PBA700
PBA700
PBA700
S117
S116
S115
S140
M209
Saddle Stitcher Motor ON Signal
M209
Saddle Stitcher Motor CW Signal
M209
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Punch E2 Data Input Signal

Punch DA Data Input Signal
Punch E2 Ship Select
E2 Chip Select
Punch DA Clock Output Signal
Punch DA Data Output Signal
E2 Data Input Signal
Punch DA Chip Select
Front Alignment Motor Rotation
Front Alignment Motor CLK
-
P006
8-94
Remarks
1: Front
1: Rear
0: Front, 1: Rear
1: Home
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
(ON,CW,CCW)
1,1,0: CW 1,0,1: CCW
0,1,1: Brake 0,0,0: Free
(ON,CW,CCW)
1,1,0: CW 1,0,1: CCW
0,1,1: Brake 0,0,0: Free
(ON,CW,CCW)
1,1,0: CW 1,0,1: CCW
0,1,1: Brake 0,0,0: Free
0: CW, 1: CCW
-
8-94
8
Address
bit
P007
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P008
Name
Rear Alignment Motor CLK
Rear Alignment Motor Rotation
Gripper Base Motor CLK
Gripper Base Motor DIR
Gripper Motor CLK
Gripper Motor DIR
Tray 2 Shift Motor ENBL
Tray 2 Shift Motor CLK
Tray 2 Shift Motor CW
Tray 2 Shift Motor CUR
Symbol
M109
M109
M116
M116
M117
M117
M217
M217
M217
M217
Remarks
0: CW, 1: CCW
0: CW, 1: CCW
0: CW, 1: CCW
0: Enable
0: CW, 1: CCW
0: OFF, 1: ON
Address
bit
P009
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P010
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
8-95
Remarks
Tray 2 Area Sensor 3

S127 0: No paper, 1: Paper
Tray 2 Paper Sensor
Tray 1 Shift Motor ENBL
M105 0: Enable
Tray 1 Shift Motor CLK
M105 Tray 1 Shift Motor CW
M105 0: CW, 1: CCW
Tray 1 Shift Motor CUR
M105 0: OFF, 1: ON
Stapler Shift HP Sensor
S107 1: Home
Escape Tray Paper Sensor
S130 1: Detected
Tray 1 Paper Sensor
Tray 1 Shift Motor
M105 0: No paper, 1: Paper
Tray 2 Shift Motor Alarm
M217 0: No paper, 1: Paper
Buffer Flapper HP Sensor
S142 1: Home
Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor
S143 1: Detected
Swing Guide HP Sensor
S110 1: Home
Shutter Close Detection Sensor
S148 Shutter HP Sensor
S106 0: Home
Paper Trailing Edge Pushing Guide S113 1: Home
HP Sensor
M122 0: OFF, 1:ON
Motor
Shutter Clutch
CL102 0: OFF, 1:ON
Swing Guide Solenoid
SL101 0: OFF, 1:ON
Front Door Sensor
S129 0:open/1:close
Paper Return Guide HP Sensor
S112 1: Home
Paper Retainer HP Sensor
S135 1: Home
Feed Roller Separation HP Sensor S111 1: Home
8-95
Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P011
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
Stapler Shift Motor CLK

Stapler Shift Motor DIR
Paper Trailing Edge Pushing Guide
Motor CLK
Paper Trailing Edge Pushing Guide
Motor DIR
Paper Return Guide Roller Motor
CLK
Paper Return Guide Roller Motor
DIR
Saddle Roller Guide Motor DIR
Feed Roller Disengage/Buffer
Flapper Motor DIR
Processing Tray Paper Retainer
Motor CLK
Processing Tray Paper Retainer
Motor DIR
Paper Return Guide Motor CLK
Paper Return Guide Motor DIR
M107
M107
M113
0: CCW, 1: CW
-
M113
0: CCW, 1: CW
M121
M121
0: CCW, 1: CW
M204
M119
0: CCW, 1: CW
M118
M118
0: CCW, 1: CW
M112
M112
0: CCW, 1: CW
P012
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Remarks
Address
bit
P013
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P014
Name
Punch Slide Motor CW
Punch Slide Motor CLK
Inserter Connection
IF Connection
Punch Connection
Punch Motor CCW
Punch Motor CW
Punch Motor ON
Power Supply Fan ON Signal
Inserter Eject Start Ack
Inserter Entry Start
IF Unit Ejection Start Ack
IF Unit Entry Start
Fold Eject Ack
Fold Entry Start
Power Supply Fan Alarm
Inserter Eject Start
Inserter Entry Start Ack
IF Unit Ejection Start
IF Unit Entry Start Ack
Fold Eject Start
Fold Entry Ack
Symbol
M101
M101
M102
M102
M102
FAN101
FAN101
-
8-96
Remarks
0: CCW, 1: CW
0: Connected
0: Connected
0: Connectecd
0: CCW, 1: CW
0: CCW, 1: CW
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
8-96
8
Address
bit
P015
15
14
13
12
Saddle Connection
Staple Position Switch
Swing Guide Safety Switch
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
Front Door Switch

24V1-DETECT
24V-DETECT
Relay ON Signal
Feed Motor/Buffer Feed Motor
Stepping Change
Stack Delivery Upper Motor
Stepping Change
Motor Rotation Signal
Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor Rotation
Signal
Push Switch (-)
Push Switch (+)
Dip Switch 4
Dip Switch 3
Dip Switch 2
Dip Switch 1
P016
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
SW103
SW102/
SW104
SW101
M101/
M102
M101/
M102
M114
Remarks
0: Connected
0: Close, 1: Open
0: Close, 1: Open
Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P017
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
Punch Slide Motor Standby Signal

Punch Slide Motor Enable Signal
DipSW Input 2
DipSW Input 1
Saddle Delivery Tray Paper Sensor
Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer
Move HP Sensor
Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer HP
Sensor
Saddle Lead Edge Stopper Motor
CLK
Saddle Lead Edge Stopper
Solenoid
Saddle Alignment Roller Disengage
Solenoid (Upper)
Saddle Alignment Roller Disengage
Solenoid (Lower)
Saddle Inlet Flapper Solenoid
S228
S219
0: Stanfby, 1: Ready
0: Enable, 1: Disenable
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
1: Paper
1: Home
S221
1: Home
M203
0: Close, 1: Open
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: 2W12phase, 1:1 2phase
0: 2W12phase, 1: 12phase
0: CW, 1: CCW
M120
0: CCW, 1: CW
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
8-97
P018
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Remarks
SL205 SL203 1: ON
SL204 1: ON
SL206 -
8-97
Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P019
15
Saddle Trailing Edge Moving Motor

Rotation
Saddle Trailing Edge Moving Motor
CLK
Motor Rotation
Motor CLK
Saddle Alignment Guide Motor
Rotation
Saddle Alignment Guide Motor
CLK
Saddle Lead-in Roller HP Sensor
Saddle Folder HP Sensor
Staple HP Sensor
Saddle Paper Push-on Plate HP
Sensor
Saddle Vertical Path Sensor
Saddle Delivery Sensor 1
Saddle Paper Push-on Plate Motor
Sensor
Saddle Folder/Feeder Motor
Sensor
Saddle Alignment Plate HP Sensor
Saddle Lead Edge Stopper HP
Sensor
PWM
Trimmer Connection Detection
Saddle Stitcher Staple Sensor 2
Saddle Stitcher Staple Sensor 1
Saddle Roller Guide HP Sensor
Saddle Delivery Sensor 2
Saddle Paper Tapping HP Sensor
Saddle Inlet Sensor
M211
1: CW, 0: CCW
M211
M210
1: CW, 0: CCW
M210
M202
0: CW, 1: CCW
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P020
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Remarks
Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P021
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Saddle Stitcher Motor CCW Signal

Saddle Stitcher Motor CW Signal
Saddle Stitcher Motor ON Signal
Inserter Lock Power Source
Detection
Saddle Roller Guide Motor rotation
Saddle Roller Guide Motor CLK
rRotation
CLK
Inlet Feed Motor Standby
Inlet Feed Motor Output Enable
Saddle Alignment Roller Motor
Rotation
Saddle Alignment Roller Motor
CLK
Inlet Feed Motor Rotation
Inlet Feed Motor Clock
Saddle Feed Motor Rotation
Saddle Feed Motor Clock
Inlet Feed Motor Stepping
Saddle Feed Motor Stepping
Saddle Lead-in Roller Disengage
Motor Rotation
Saddle Lead-in Roller Disengage
Motor CLK
Saddle Folder/Feeder Motor CW
Saddle Folder/Feeder Motor CCW
CW
CCW
Chip Select For DAC
Data In For DAC
Data Out For DAC
Clock For DAC
M209
M209
M209
-
0: CW, 1: CCW
0: CCW, 1: CW
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: Detected 24V
M204
M204
-
1: CW, 0: CCW
1: CW, 0: CCW
7
6
5
M202
S222
S229
S131
S218
1: Home
1: Home
S203
S226
S213
1: Detected
1: Paper
0: ON, 1: OFF
S206
S205
1: Home
1: Home
M205
S225
S224
S207
S227
S215
S201
1: Home
S214
0: Connected
1: Detedted
1: Detedted
1: Home
1: Paper
1: Home
1: Paper
8-98
3
2
1
0
P022
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Remarks
M212
0: Standby
0: Enable
1: CW, 0: CCW
M212
M214
1: CW, 0: CCW
1: CW, 0: CCW
0: Half-step
0: Half-step
1: CW, 0: CCW
M214
M206
M206
M205
1: CW
1: CCW
1: CW
M205
1: CCW
0: ENABLE
-
8-98
8
Address
bit
P023
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P024
Name
LED PCB
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Trimmer A1 (SORTER>P024 to P028)
Symbol
-
Trimmer A1 (SORTER>P024 to P028)
Remarks
1:LED ON
-
Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P024
Feed Motor Current Value Setting

D/A Output
Waste Paper Full Sensor D/A
Output
Waste Paper Full Sensor A/D Input
Push Switch
Press Motor HP Sensor
M101
S011
S011
S011
S106
Inlet Sensor
Waste Paper Box Detection Sensor
Rear Estrangement Motor HP
Sensor
Front Estrangement Motor HP
Sensor
Paper Delivery Sensor
DIPSW-1
DIPSW-2
DIPSW-3
DIPSW-4
Press Motor CW/CCW Switching
Signal
Press Motor Standby Signal
Press Motor Output Permission
Signal
Press Motor Drive Clock Output
Feed Motor CW/CCW Switching
Signal
Feed Motor Standby Signal
Feed Motor Output Permission
Signal
Feed Motor Drive Clock Signal
S101
S109
S104
M105
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: Feed Position
1: Release Position
1: Paper
1: Waste Paper
0: Release Position
1: Feed Position
0: Feed Position
1: Release position
1: Paper
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: Release, 1: Touch
M105
M105
0: Standby, 1: Ready
0: Permission, 1: Prohibition
M105
M101
0: Entrance, 1: Delivery
M101
M101
M101
6
5
4
3
P025
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
T-8-23
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-99
S102
Remarks
8-99
8
Address
bit
P026
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
P027
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
Remarks
Registration Motor Permission

M102 0: Permission, 1: Prohibition
Signal
Cutter Motor Encoder Lock
Registration Motor Drive Clock
M102 Output
Registration Motor Standby Signal M102 0: Standby, 1: Ready
Registration Motor CW/CCW
M102 1: Registration Completion
Switching Signal
Registration HP Sensor
S105 1: Registration Completion
Registration Motor Current Setting M102 PWM Output
24V Detection Signal
0:24V Detection
Rear Estrangement Motor Drive
M104 Clock Output
Front Estrangement Motor Standby M103 0: Standby, 1: Ready
Motor
Front Estrangement Motor CW/
M103 0: CW, 1: CCW
CCW Switching Signal
Front Estrangement Motor Current M103 Setting PWM Output
Rear Estrangement Motor Current
M104 Setting PWM Output
Press Motor Current Setting PWM
M105 Output
Front Estrangement Motor Output
M103 0: Rermission, 1: prohibition
Permission Signal
Front Estrangement Motor Drive
M103 Clock Output
5V Shutdown Signal
1: Shutdown
Paddle Solenoid ON Signal
SL102 0: ON, 1: OFF
Stopper Solenoid ON Signal
SL101 0: ON, 1: OFF
Rear Estrangement Motor Output
Permission Signal
Address
bit
P028
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
8-100
Symbol
LED on PCB
Cutter Motor CCW Signal
M106
Cutter Motor CW Signal
M106
Cutter Motor ON/OFF Output
M106
M104
Rear Estrangement Motor CW/
CCW Witching Signal
Front Estrangement Motor Standby M103
Signal
Stopper Solenoid/Paddle Solenoid SL101/
Drive PWM Output
SL102
Remarks
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: CW, 1: CCW
0: CCW, 1: CW
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: Release, 1: Touch
T-8-24
8-100
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Unit G1 (SORTER>P028 to P037)
Paper Folding Unit G1 (SORTER>P028 to P037)

Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P028
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
Upper Stopper Paper Sensor

Fold Position Accuracy Sensor
Separation Timing Sensor
Speed Down Timing Sensor
Paper Delivery Start Response
Paper Delivery Start Request
Rotation Direction Of Fold Position
Adjustment Motor
Rotation Direction Of Fold Position
Adjustment Motor CLK
Saddle Folder/Feeder Motor CLK
C-fold Stopper Solenoid
Separation Solenoid
Fold Tray Branch Flapper Solenoid
Exit Motor Phase Switching 2
Exit Motor 2CLK
Upper Stopper Paper Sensor AD
Fold Position Accuracy Sensor AD
Separation Timing Sensor AD
Speed Down Timing Sensor AD
Fold Tray Branch Flapper Solenoid
Flash Write Communication
Received
Flash Write Communication Send
S33
S32
S31
S30
M15
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: CW, 1: CCW
M15
P029
14
P030
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
M11
SOL5
SOL3
SOL2
M13
M14
M13
S33
S32
S31
S30
SOL4
-
Remarks
0: PWM, 1: PWM
0: PWM, 1: PWM
0: PWM, 1: PWM
0: ON, 1: OFF
P31=0,P32=0:2Phase
P31=1,P32=0:1-2Phase
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
0: PWM, 1: PWM
-
8-101
Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P031
15
14
13
EEPROM/IO DO Signal
C-fold Tray Motor CLK
Lead Edge Holding Guide Motor
CLK
Rotation Direction Of Lead Edge
Holding Guide Motor
C-fold Stopper Adjustment Motor
CLK
Rotation Direction Of C-fold
Stopper Adjustment Motor
Upper Stopper Motor
Rotation Direction Of Upper
Stopper Motor
External DAC CS Signal
EEPROM CS Signal
EEPROM/DA/IO/ DI Signal
EEPROM/DA/IO/ CLK Signal
PM Motor Output Enable
External I/O Address Bus3
Fold Position Adjustment Clutch
(Negative)
Fold Position Adjustment Clutch
(Positive)
PM Motor Chip Enable
Exit Motor 1 Enable
Brushless Motor Enable
HB Motor Enable
Entrance Motor Phase Switching 2
Entrance Motor Switching 2
M7
M10
0: Data bit0, 1: Data bit1

-
M10
0: CW, 1: CCW
M9
M9
0: CW, 1: CCW
M8
M8
0: CW, 1: CCW
CL4
1: OFF, 0: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
CL3
0: OFF, 1: ON
M14
M12
M5
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
PH0=0,PH1=0:2Phase excitation
PH0=1,PH1=0:1-2Phase excitation
12
11
10
9
8
P032
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Remarks
8-101
8
Address
bit
P033
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P034
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Paper Delivery Start
Current
Upper Stopper Motor Current
Current
Lead Edge Holding Guide Motor
Current
External I/O Data Bus 6
External I/O Data Bus5
-
Symbol
Remarks
M7
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: PWM, 1: PWM
M8
M9
0: PWM, 1: PWM
0: PWM, 1: PWM
M10
0: PWM, 1: PWM
8-102
Address
bit
Name
Symbol
P035
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Fold Unit Pull-out Sensor

Fold Tray Paper Sensor
Fold Tray Full Sensor
Fold Tray HP Sensor
Delivery 1 Sensor
2nd Fold Push-on Stopper HP
Sensor
C-fold Stopper HP Sensor
Lead Edge Holding Guide HP
Sensor
Power Supply Fan Lock Detection
Signal 3
Delivery 2 Sensor
Inlet Sensor
Front Upper Cover Sensor
Brushless Motor Lock Detection
Signal
DSW8
DSW7
DSW6
DSW5
DSW4
DSW3
DSW2
DSW1
S29
S27
S26
S28
S22
S23
0: Close, 1: Open
1: Paper
1: Paper
0: HP outside, 1: HP input
1: Paper
S24
S25
1
0
P036
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Remarks
F1
0: Normal, 1: Lock
S21
S20
-
1: Paper
1: Paper
0: Close, 1: Open
0: Close, 1: Open
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
8-102
8
Address
bit
P037
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Wire-speed Sorting Identification
Signal
PCB Identification Signal2
PCB Identification Signal1
PSW2
PSW1
Fan 2 Enable
PCB LED2
PCB LED1
Symbol
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter H1 (SORTER>P038 to P047)
Inserter H1 (SORTER>P038 to P047)
Remarks
0: Low speed machine
1: High speed machine
BIT2=1,BIT3=0:insetion
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
T-8-25
8-103
Address
bit
P038
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P039
Name
Name
Paper Delivery Start Request
Inlet Motor CLK
Lower Tray Document Set LED
Exit Motor1CLK
Upper Tray Document Set LED
Exit Motor 2 CLK
-
Symbol
M5
S10
S13
-
Remarks
Remarks
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
P31=0,P32=0:2Phase
P31=1,P32=0:1-2Phase
P31=1,P32=0:1-2 phase
-
8-103
8
Address
bit
P040
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P041
Name
Reserve Solenoid
Upper Tray Registration Sensor
Lower Tray Registration Sensor
EEPROM/IO DO Signal
EEPROM CS Signal
EEPROM/DA/IO/ DI Signal
EEPROM/DA/IO/ CLK Signal
PMmotoroutput Enable
Upper Tray Registration Clutch
Lower Tray Registration Clutch
Reserve Unit Motor Rotation
Direction
Reserve Unit Motor Phase
Switching1
Symbol
SOL1
S3
S7
CL1
CL2
M6
M6
Remarks
0: PWM, 1: PWM
0: Data bit 0, 1: Data bit 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: CCW, 1: CW
0: 2Phase, 1: 1-2phase
Address
bit
P042
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P043
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
PM Motor Chip Enable
Exit Motor 1 Enable
Brushless Motor Enable
HB Motor Enable
Inlet Motor Phase Switching 2
Inlet Motor Phase Switching 1
Paper Delivery Start
Drive Switching Motor Rotation
Direction
Drive Switching Motor CLK
Lower Tray Lift Motor Rotation
Direction
Lower Tray Lift Motor CLK
Upper Tray Lift Motor Rotation
Direction
Upper Tray Lift Motor CLK
Pickup Motor Rotation Direction
Upper Tray Lift Motor Current
Lower Tray Lift Motor Current
Drive Switching Motor Current
Reserve Unit Motor CLK
Pickup Motor CLK
8-104
Symbol
Remarks
M5
M5
M4
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
PH0=0,PH1=0: 2Phase
PH0=1,PH1=0: 1-2Phase
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: CW, 1: CCW
M4
M3
0: CW, 1: CCW
M3
M2
0: CW, 1: CCW
M2
M1
M2
M3
M4
M6
M1
0: CCW, 1: CW
0: PWM, 1: PWM
0: PWM, 1: PWM
0: PWM, 1: PWM
-
8-104
8
Address
bit
Symbol
Remarks
Address
bit
P044
15
Lower Tray Pick Sensor
S6
P046
14
13
12
11
10
Lower Tray Last Paper Sensor 2

Lower Tray Last Paper Sensor 1
Lower Tray Empty Sensor
Upper Tray Lower Limit Sensor
Upper Tray Pick Sensor
S15
S14
S12
S4
S2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Upper Tray Last Paper Sensor1

Upper Tray Empty Sensor
Reserve Timing Sensor
Reserve Sensor
Reserve Inlet Sensor
Intermediate Feed Sensor
Drive Switching Sensor
Unit Open/Close Sensor
Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor
Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor
Power Supply Lock Detect Signal 3
Delivery 2 Sensor
Inlet Sensor
Front Upper Cover Sensor
Brushless Motor Lock Detection
Signal
S11
S9
S16
S17
S18
S8
S1
S19
SW2
S5
F1
S21
S20
SW1
-
0: Outside pick position, 1: Pick

position
0:outside lower limit/1:lower limit
0: Outside pick position, 1: Pick
position
0: Outside HP, 1: Inside HP
0: Close, 1: Open
0: Close, 1: Open
0: Outside lower limit 1: Lower limit
0: Normal, 1: Lock
0: Close, 1: Open
0: Normal, 1: lock
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
P045
Name
P047
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Name
DSW8
DSW7
DSW6
DSW5
DSW4
DSW3
DSW2
DSW1
Wire-speed Sorting Identification
Signal
PCB Identification Signal 2
PSW2
PSW1
F an 2 Enable
PCB LED2
PCB LED1
8-105
Symbol
F1
-
Remarks
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: Low speed machine, 1: High
speed machine
BIT2=1,BIT3=0: Insetion
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
T-8-26
8-105
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Booklet Finisher L1/Staple Finisher L1 (SORTER>P001 to P040)
Puncher Unit BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1 (SORTER>P058 to P059)

Address
bit
P058
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
P059
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Delivery Sensor
Path Switching Motor HP Sensor
Integration Unit Reverse Path 3
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Integration Unit Bypass 1 Sensor
P-puncher Bypass 8 Sensor
Puncher Die Detect HP Sensor
Puncher Die Sensor 7
-
Symbol
Booklet Finisher L1/Staple Finisher L1 (SORTER>P001 to
Remarks
PS5
PS7
RS4
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
RS3
1: Paper
RS2
1: Paper
RS1
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
-
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: Paper
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
1: ON
-
8-106
P040)
Addres
bit
Description
Symbol
P001
8-15
7
6
5
Not used
Punch Serial Communication
Escape Feed Motor Clock Signal
Folding Serial Communication
(RxD)
Folding Serial Communication
(TxD)
Front Cover Sensor
Saddle Unit Connection Detection
M112
-
4
3
2
1
P002
P003

(RxD)
0
Punch Serial Communication (TxD)
8-15 Not used
7
6
Not used
5
Not used
4
Not used
3
Inserter Communication (IN)
2
Tray Motor Clock Signal
1
Not used
0
Swing Motor Clock Signal
8-15 Not used
7
Punch Feed Motor Phase B* Signal
6
Punch Feed Motor Phase A* Signal
5
Punch Feed Motor Phase B Signal
4
Punch Feed Motor Phase A Signal
3
Feed Motor Phase B* Signal
2
Feed Motor Phase A* Signal
1
Feed Motor Phase B Signal
0
Feed Motor Phase A Signal
Remarks
0: OFF, 1: ON
-
PI102 0: Close, 1: Open

0: Saddle present, 1: Saddle
absent
M106
M63
M63
M63
M63
M101
M101
M101
M101
0: OFF, 1: ON
-
T-8-27
8-106
8
Addres
P004
P005
P006
P007
bit
Description
8-15 Not used

7
PSW2 On The Finisher Controller
PCB
6
PCB
5
Stack Ejection Motor Clock Signal
4
Tray 2 Shift Motor FG Signal
3
Tray 1 Shift Motor FG Signal
2
Feed Motor Clock Signal
1
Punch Feed Motor Clock Signal
0
Punch Paper Trailing Edge
Detection
8-15 Not used
7
Not used
6
Not used
5
Tray Motor Clock Signal
4
Saddle Serial Signal
3
Saddle Serial Signal
2
PWM Output For Solenoid
1
For R&D
0
For R&D
8-15 Not used
7
Not used
6
Not used
5
Expansion I/O Read Signal
4
For R&D
3
Expansion I/O Write Signal
2
For R&D
1
For R&D
0
PCB
8-15 Not used
7
Not used
6
Not useN
5
Not used
4
Not used
3
Tray 1 Shift Motor Lock Detection
2
Chip Select 2
1
Chip Select 1
0
Front Cover Sensor
Symbol
Remarks
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
M102
M108
M107
M101
M63
M107
PI102
0: Not Detected, 1: Detected

0: ON, 1: OFF
0: OFF, 1: Lock Detectioon
0: Close, 1: Open
Addres
bit
P008
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
P009
P010
Description
Not used
Tray 2 Shift Area Sensor 1
Inlet Sensor
Swing Guide HP Sensor
Download Mode
Not used
Not used
Not used
Tray 1 Paper Sensor
Host Machine Software IPC
Communication (RxD)
5
Host Machine Software IPC
Communication (TxD)
4
3
2
1
Tray 2 Shift Motor Lock Detection
0
Tray 2 Paper Sensor
8-15 Not used
7
DIPSW1-8 On The Finisher
Controller PCB
6
Controller PCB
5
Controller PCB
4
Controller PCB
3
Controller PCB
2
Controller PCB
1
Controller PCB
0
Controller PCB
8-107
Symbol
Remarks
PI103
PI105
PI111
-
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: Paper present, 1: Paper absent
0: Besides HP, 1: HP
0: OFF, 1: ON
-
M108
PI112
-
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: OFF, 1: Lock detectioon
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
8-107
8
Addres
bit
P011
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
P012
P013
Description
Symbol
Remarks
Not used
EEPROM Clock Signal
EEPROM Enable Signal
0: OFF, 1: ON
EEPROM Output Signal
0: OFF, 1: ON
Not used
M110 Gear Change Motor Electric
Current Change I1
2
Gear Change Motor Electric
M110 Current Change I0
1
Gear Change Motor Phase B
M110 Signal
0
Gear Change Motor Phase A
M110 Signal
8-15 Not used
7
Swing Height Sensor
6
Gear Change Home Position
PI117 0: HP, 1: Besides HP
Sensor
5
Not used
4
Rear End Assist HP Sensor
3
Processing Tray Sensor
PI108 0: Paper present, 1: Paper absent
2
Rear Aligning Plate HP Sensor
1
Front Aligning Plate HP Sensor
PI106 0: HP/1: Besides HP
0
EEPROM Input Signal
8-15 Not used
7
Tray 2 Shift Motor ON Signal
M108 0: OFF, 1: ON
6
Tray 2 Shift Motor CW/CCW Signal M108 0: CW, 1: CCW
5
Feed Roller Separation Solenoid
SL101 0: OFF, 1: ON
4
Punch Feed Motor Standby
M63 0: Standby, 1: Drive
3
Punch Feed Motor Electric Current
M63 Change I0
2
Punch Feed Motor Electric Current
M63 Change I1
1
Feed Motor Electric Current
M101 Change I0
0
M101 Change I1
Addres
P014
P015
P016
bit
Description
8-15 Not used

7
Tray 1 Shift Motor Enable Signal
6
Tray 1 Shift Motor CW/CCW
Signal
5
Tray 1 Shift Motor ON Signal
4
Rear End Assist Motor Enable
Signal
3
Rear End Assist Motor eElectric
Current Change I1
2
Rear End Assist Motor Electric
Current Change I0
1
Rear End Assist Motor Directiojn
Change
0
Inserter Serial Communication
(OUT)
8-15 Not used
7
Staple Motor Direction Change CW
Signal
6
Staple Motor Direction Change
CCW Signal
5
Stapler Shift Motor Enable Signal
4
Stack Ejection Motor Electric
Current Change I0
3
Stack Ejection Motor Electric
Current Change I1
2
Stack Ejection Motor Torque
Terminal
1
Swing Motor Electric Current
Change
0
Swing Motor Direction Change
8-15 Not used
7
Not used
6
Rear Aligning Plate Motor Direction
Change
5
Rear Aligning Plate Motor Clock
Signal
4
Rear Aligning Plate Motor Electric
Current Change I0
3
Not used
2
Front Aligning Plate Motor Electric
Current Change I0
1
Front Aligning Plate Motor Direction
Change
0
Front Aligning Plate Motor Clock
Signal
Symbol
8-108
Remarks
M107
M107
0: Standby, 1: Drive
0: CW, 1: CCW
M107
M109
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: Standby, 1: drive
M109
M109
M109
0: CW, 1: CCW
0: OFF, 1: ON
M41
M41
M105
M102
0: Drive, 1: Standby
-
M102
M102
0: 71%, 1: 100%
M106
0: High, 1: Low
M106
M104
0: CW, 1: CCW
0: CW, 1: CCW
M104
M104
0: High, 1: Low
M103
0: High, 1: Low
M103
0: CW, 1: CCW
M103
8-108
8
Addres
bit
P017
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
P018
P019
P020
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
Description
Not used
Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor 1
Tray 1 Paper Surface Sensor
Shutter HP Sensor
Stapler Shift HP Sensor
Stapler Alignment Interference
Sensor
Stapler Needle Presence
Stapler READY
Stapler HP Detection
Not used
Stapler Shift Motor
Buffer Roller Separation Solenoid
Shutter Clutch
Stack Ejection Lower Roller Clutch
Buffer Rear End Holding Solenoid
1st Delivery Roller Separation
Solenoid
1
Stapler Shift Motor Electric Current
Change I1
0
Stapler Shift Motor Electric Current
Change I0
8-15 Not used
7
Inserter Unit Connection Detection
6
fFeed Path Sensor
5
Swing Guide Switch Signal
4
Staple Safety Switch Signal
3
Not used
2
Not used
1
Not used
0
Stapler Shift Motor Lock Signal
8-15 Not used
7
Not used
6
Not used
5
Not used
4
Not used
3
Escape Feed Motor Phase B*
Signal
2
Escape Feed Motor Phase A*
Signal
1
Escape Feed Motor Phase B
Signal
0
Escape Feed Motor Phase A
Signal
Symbol
Remarks
Addres
bit
PI115
PI114
PI113
PI110
PI116

0: HP, 1: Besides HP
0: Interference, 1: Not interference
P021
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
M105
SL102
CL101
CL102
SL104
SL103
0: Needle present, 1: Needle

absent
0: Besides HP, 1:HP
0: CCW, 1: CW
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
M105
M105
PI104
MS102
MS104
M105
M112
P023
0: Connected, 1: Unconnected
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
-
M112
M112
M112
P022
P024
Description
Symbol
8-109
Remarks
Not used
Puncher Unit Connection Detection
Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor 2
Not used
Not used
Not used
Escape Tray Full Sensor
Escape Door Sensor
Escape Tray Path Sensor
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
For Host Machine Download
0: OFF, 1: ON
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Motor Enable Signal
0: OFF, 1: ON
(OUT)
4
Not used
3
Escape Solenoid
SL105 0: OFF, 1: ON
2
Escape Feed Motor Standby Signal M112 0: Standby, 1: Drive
1
Escape Feed Motor Electric
0
Escape Feed Motor Electric
8-15 Not used
7
Not used
6
Not used
5
Not used
4
Not used
3
Stack Ejection Motor Phase B*
M102 Signal
2
Stack Ejection Motor Phase A*
M102 Signal
1
Stack Ejection Motor Phase B
M102 Signal
0
Stack Ejection Motor Phase A
M102 Signal
8-109
8
Addres
bit
P025
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P026
P027
P028
Description
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
For Host Machine Download
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Symbol
-
Remarks
0: OFF, 1: ON
-
Addres
bit
P029
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
P030
P031
P032
Description
Not used
Alignment Plate HP Sensor
Not used
Not used
Not used
Saddle Staple Unit Connection
Detection
2
Vertical Path Paper Sensor
1
Not used
0
Not used
8-15 Not used
7
Not used
6
5
Paper Folding Motor PWM Signal
4
Solenoid PWM Signal
3
Stitcher HP Sensor (Rear)
2
Stitcher HP Sensor (Front)
1
Paper Pushing Plate Top Position
Sensor
0
Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor
8-15 Not used
7
Guide Motor Phase B Signal
6
Guide Motor Phase A Signal
5
Alignment Motor B Signal
4
Alignment Motor A Signal
3
Not used
2
Paper Positioning Plate Motor
Phase B Signal
1
Paper Positioning Plate Motor
Phase A Signal
0
Feed Motor CW/CCW Signal
8-15 Not used
7
Saddle Rear Staple Electric
Current Detection (AD)
6
Saddle Front Staple Electric
Current Detection (AD)
5
Not used
4
Not used
3
2
Paper Folding Motor Clock Sensor
1
Paper pushing Plate Motor Clock
Sensor
0
Not used
Symbol
PI5
PI17
M1
M2
SW5
SW7
PI15
PI14
M3
M3
M5
M5
M4
8-110
Remarks
0: Paper absent, 1: Paper present
0: bBesides HP, 1: HP
0: Top position, 1: Besides top
position
-
M4
M1
-
0: CCW, 1: CW
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
M1
PI4
PI1
8-110
8
Addres
bit
P033
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
P034
P035
P036
Description
Not used
Not used
Not used
No.2 Paper Deflecting Solenoid
No.1 Paper Deflecting Solenoid
Saddle Inlet Solenoid
Paper Folding HP Sensor
For R&D
For R&D
Not used
Not used
PSW1 On The Saddle Controller
PCB
5
Not used
4
Power ON Signal
3
Guide Motor I0
2
Feed Motor Enable
1
Change I1
0
Change I0
8-15 Not used
7
Not used
6
Not used
5
Not used
4
Not used
3
Stitcher Motor (Rear) CW Signal
2
Not used
1
Staple Sensor (Rear)
0
24V Detection
8-15 Not used
7
Not used
6
Feed plate Contact Solenoid
5
Paper Folding Motor RV
4
Paper Positioning Plate Motor I0
3
Alignment Motor I0
2
Paper Positioning Plate Paper
Sensor
1
Paper Positioning Plate HP Sensor
0
Tray Paper Sensor
Symbol
Remarks
SL2
SL1
SL5
PI21
-
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
M3
M1
M1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
-
M1
M6
SW4
SL4
M2
M4
M5
PI8
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
PI7
PI6
Addres
P037
P038
P039
bit
Description
8-15 Not used

7
Paper Pushing Plate Motor EN
Signal
6
Paper Pushing Plate Motor FWD
Signal
5
Paper Pushing Plate Motor RV
Signal
4
Paper Folding Motor FWD Signal
3
Not used
2
For R&D
1
For R&D
0
For R&D
8-15 Not used
7
Stitcher Motor (Rear) CCW Signal
6
Saddle Software IPC
Communication
5
Saddle Software IPC
Communication
4
Stitcher Motor (Front) CW Signal
3
Stitcher Motor (Front) CCW Signal
2
Staple Sensor (Front)
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Not used
Nnot used
Not used
SW504-8 On The Saddle Controller
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
Symbol
8-111
Remarks
M8
0: ON, 1: OFF
M8
0: OFF, 1: ON
M8
0: OFF, 1: ON
M2
M6
-
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: ON, 1: OFF
-
M7
M7
SW6
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: Needle absent, 1: Needle
present
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
8-111
8
Addres
bit
P040
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
Not used
Saddle Inlet Sensor
Guide HP Sensor
Crescent Roller Phase Sensor
Delivery Sensor
Inlet Cover Sensor
Saddle Trailing Edge Sensor 3
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > External Punch A1 (SORTER>SORTER>P041 to P046)
Symbol
Remarks
PI22
PI13
PI12
PI11
PI9
-
0: Paper absent, 1: Paper present

0: Colse, 1: Open
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
External Punch A1 (SORTER>SORTER>P041 to P046)

Address
bit
P041
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
T-8-28
P042
P043
P044
8-112
Name
Not used
Punch Home Position Sensor
Punch Motor Clock Sensor
Trailing Edge Detection Snsor
Punch OUT Signal

Not used
SW601-3 On The Punch Controller
PCB
1
PCB
0
PCB
8-15 Not used
7
Not used
6
Not used
5
Not used
4
Not used
3
Not used
2
Punch TxD
1
Punch RxD
0
Punch In
8-15 Not used
7
Punch Motor CW Signal
6
Punch Motor CCW Signal
5
Horizontal Registration Motor
4
Horizontal Registration Home
Position Sensor
3
EEPROM CS
2
EEPROM CLK
1
EEPROM DataOut
0
EEPROM DataIn
8-15 Not used
7
Not used
6
Sensor PWM Signal
5
Electric Current Setting
4
Not used
3
Not used
2
Not used
1
Not used
0
Not used
Symbol
Remarks
PI63
PI62
LED5,
PT5
-
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
M61
M61
M62
PI61
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: Desides standby, 1: Drive
M62
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: Drive electric current
1: Maintenance electric current
-
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > External Punch A1 (SORTER>SORTER>P041 to P046)
8-112
8
Address
P045
P046
bit
Name
8-15 Not used

7
SW602 On The Punch Controller
PCB
6
SW603 On The Punch Controller
PCB
5
for R&D
4
Not used
3
LED602 On The Punch Controller
PCB
2
Phase B Signal
1
Phase A Signal
0
LED601 On The Punch Controller
PCB
8-15 Not used
7
Horizontal Registration Sensor 1
On The LED PCB
6
Scrap Full Detector PCB
5
4
3
2
1
0
Upper Door Switch

Front Door Switch
On The LED PCB
On The LED PCB
On The LED PCB
Trailing Edge Sensor On The LED
PCB
Symbol
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter J1 / Paper Folding Inserter Unit G1 (SORTER>P047 to P061)
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: ON, 1: OFF
0: OFF, 1: ON
M62
M62
LED1,
PT1
LED2,
PT2
LED3,
PT3
LED4,
PT4
LED5,
PT5
Inserter J1 / Paper Folding Inserter Unit G1 (SORTER>P047 to
Remarks
P061)
0: Phase B* ON
1: Phase B ON
0: Phase A* ON
1: Phase A ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
Address
bit
P047
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
P048
0: Paper present
1: Paper absent
0: Paper present
1: Paper absent
0: Open, 1: Close
0: Open, 1: Close
0: Paper present
1: Paper absent
0: Paper present
1: Paper absent
0: Paper present
1: Paper absent
0: Paper present
1: Paper absent
P049
T-8-29
P050
8-113
Name
Not used
Reserve Unit Motor *B
Reserve Unit Motor *A
Reserve Unit Motor
Reserve Unit Motor A
Straight Path Feed Motor (IN) *B
Straight Path Feed Motor (IN) *A
Straight Path Feed Motor (IN) B
Straight Path Feed Motor (IN) A
Not used
DA Converter Cssignal
C Fold Flapper Solenoid
Fold Transport Motor Clock Signal
Straight Path Feed Motor (IN) *B
Straight Path Feed Motor (IN) *A
Straight Path Feed Motor (IN) B
Straight Path Feed Motor (IN) A
Not used
Front upper Cover Open/Close
Sensor
6
Top Cover Open/Close Sensor
5
Slowdown Timing Sensor
4
3
2
Interface Fin Data Enable Signal
1
0
8-15 Not used
7
Through Pass /IN_Motor Driver
Current
6
Paper Feed Motor Driver Current
5
C Fold Paper Full Sensor
4
Upper Stopper Path Sensor AD
3
Fold Position Sensor AD
2
Release Timing Sensor AD
1
Slowdown Timing Sensor AD
0
Tray Paper Width Senor AD
Symbol
Remarks
M3
M3
M3
M3
M9
M9
M9
M9
SL5
M5
M4
M4
M4
M4
SW1
1: Active
1: Active
1: Active
1: Active
1: Active
1: Active
1: Active
1: Active
1: Absorption
1: Active
1: Active
1: Active
1: Active
1: Active
S2
S24
-
0: Open
1: Paper on
PF3098 1: H 2: L
PF4154 1: L 2: L
Analog input
S20
S22
S23
S21
S24
S9
Analog input
0: Full
Analog input
Analog input
Analog input
Analog input
Analog input
8-113
8
Address
bit
P051
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
P052
P053
P054
Name
Not used
Not used
Folding Unit Sensor
By Borah Motor Driver_Standby
Signal
5
Reverse Solenoid_PWM
4
Straight Path Flapper Solenoid
PWM
3
Skew Sorrection Pressure Solenoid
PWM
2
Skew Correction Release Solenoid
PWM
1
PCB LED2
0
PCB LED1
8-15 Not used
7
6
DSW5
5
DSW6
4
DSW7
3
Upper Stopper Motor B PHASE
2
Upper Stopper Motor A PHASE
1
Upper Stopper Motor B ENABLE
0
Upper Stopper Motor A ENABLE
8-15 Not used
7
Tray Lift Motor Driver Current
6
Reverse Unit Motor Driver Current
5
Inserter Open/Close Sensor
4
Tray Paper Sensor 2
3
Tray Paper Sensor 1
2
Paper Feed Sensor
1
Tray Lower Limit Sensor
0
Paper Set Sensor
Symbol
Remarks
S14
-
1: No unit
1: Movement is possible L:stop
SL1
SL2
PWM
PWM
SL4
PWM
SL3
PWM
M7
M7
M7
M7
S1
S8
S7
S3
S5
S6
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: OUT*X, 1: OUTX
0: OUT*X, 1: OUTX
0: OFF, 1: Output
0: OFF, 1: Output
Analog output
Analog output
1: Open
0: Paper on
0: Paper on
0: ON
1: Lower limit
1: Empty
Address
bit
P055
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
P056
P057
P058
Name
Not used
C Fold Tray Motor B PHASE
C Fold Tray Motor A PHASE
C Fold Tray Motor B ENABL
C Fold Tray Motor A ENABL
C Fold Stopper Motor B PHASE
C Fold Stopper Motor A PHASE
C Fold Stopper Motor B ENABL
C Fold Stopper Motor A ENABL
Not used
Fold Position Adjustment Motor *B
Fold Position Adjustment Motor *A
Fold Position Adjustment Motor B
Fold Position Adjustment Motor A
Reverse Sensor
C Fold Stopper Sensor
C Fold Tray Motor Sensor
C Fold Tray Empty Sensor
Not used
C Fold Stopper Solenoid
C Fold Guide Solenoid
EEPROM/DA Converter CLK
Signal
4
EEPROM CS Signal
3
Tray Lift Motor B PHASE
2
Tray Lift Motor A PHASE
1
Tray Lift Motor B ENABLE
0
Tray Lift Motor A ENABLE
8-15 Not used
7
EEPROM/DA Converter Disignal
6
Fold Transport Motor ON/OFF
Signal
5
4
Fold Adjustment Regi Clutch BACK
3
Fold Adjustment Regi Clutch FEED
2
Paper Set LED
1
0
Interface Ins Data Enable Signal
Symbol
Remarks
M6
M6
M6
M6
M8
M8
M8
M8
M10
M10
M10
M10
S10
S17
S19
S18
SL7
SL6
-
0: OUT *X, 1: OUT X

0: OUT *X, 1: OUT X
0: OFF, 1: Output
0: OFF, 1: Output
1: Active
1: Active
1: Active
1: Active
1: Paper on
1: Home
1: Home
0: Paper on
1: Absorption
1: Absorption
-
M2
M2
M2
M2
M5
0: OUT *X, 1: OUT X

0: OUT *X, 1: OUT X
0: OFF, 1: Output
0: OFF, 1: Output
1: Absorption
8-114
1: ON
1: Absorption
1: Absorption
1: ON
-
8-114
8
Address
bit
P059
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P060
P061
Name
Not used
Fold Transport Motor Lock Signal
Delivery Sensor
Upper Stopper Sensor
Upper Stopper Path Sensor
Paper Feed Motor *B
Paper Feed Motor *A
Paper Feed Motor B
Paper Feed Motor A
Not used
DSW8
DSW4
DSW3
DSW2
Reverse Entrance Sensor
DSW1
Reverse Timing Sensor
Paper Registration Sensor
Not used
PSW 2
PSW 1
Delivery Sensor
Fold Position Sensor
Release Timing Sensor
Symbol
S25
S16
S22
M1
M1
M1
M1
S12
S11
S4
S25
S23
S21
8-115
Remarks
1: Lock
1: Paper on
1: Paper on
1: Paper on
1: Active
1: Active
1: Active
1: Active
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: Paper on
0: ON
1: Paper on
0: Paper on
0: ON
0: ON
1: Paper on
1: Paper on
1: Paper on
T-8-30
8-115
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
ADJUST
8-116
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
ADJ-Y-DF
Lv.1 Details
ADJ-XY
ADJ-X
Lv.1 Details
Adj of img pstn in book mode: vert scan

To adjust the image reading start position (image lead edge position)
in vertical scanning direction.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter
the value of service label.
When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the
smaller value.
When out of original area is copied, set the larger value.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the
trailing edge side by 0.1mm.
Use case
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution
Do not use this at the normal service.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
ADJ-Y
Adj of img pstn in book mode: horz scan
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning
direction.
When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the
smaller value.
When out of original area is copied, set the larger value.
rear side by 0.1mm.
Use case
Caution
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
service label.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
Adj img pstn in DADF mode:horz scan[Frt]

To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning
direction at DADF reading.
rear side by 0.1mm.
Use case
Caution
service label.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
STRD-POS
Adj read pstn in DADF mode: front side
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the reading position at DADF reading (front side).
Use case
Caution
service label.
-100 to 100
Unit
mm
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STRD-POS
ADJ-X-MG
Adj img ratio in book mod:vert scan[frt]
Lv.1 Details
To make a fine adjustment of image magnification in vertical
scanning direction at copyboard reading.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image magnification changes
by 0.01%.
+: Enlarge
-: Reduce
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-50 to 50
Unit
%
Default value
0
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
8-116
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

ADJY-DF2
Lv.1 Details
Adj img pstn in DADF mode:horz scan[bck]

To adjust the image position of back side in horizontal scanning
direction at simultaneous duplex reading.
rear side by 0.1mm.
Use case
Caution
service label.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
ADJ-Y-MG
Fine adj img ratio:book, horz scan
Lv.1 Details
To make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in horizontal
scanning direction at copyboard reading.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the backup value.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image magnification ratio
changes by 0.1%.
+: Enlarge
-: Reduce
Use case
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Default value
0
T-8-31
8-117
CCD
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
W-PLT-X
Lv.1 Details
White level data(X) entry of white plate

the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass,
enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass.
Use case
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass
Caution
1 to 9999
Default value
8271
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z, BW-TGT
W-PLT-Y
White level data(Y) entry of white plate
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
service label.
1 to 9999
Default value
8735
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Z, BW-TGT
W-PLT-Z
White level data(Z) entry of white plate
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
service label.
1 to 9999
Default value
9418
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, BW-TGT
8-117

SH-TRGT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Shading target value (B&W)

To set the B&W shading target value in copyboard reading mode.
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
Caution
service label.
1 to 2047
Default value
1126
100-RG
Img Sensr RG color displace crrct VL:Frt
Lv.1 Details
To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning
direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper front).
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-256 to 256
Unit
line
Default value
0
100-GB
Img Sensr GB color displace crrct VL:Frt
Lv.1 Details
To correct the color displacement (G and B lines) in vertical scanning
direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper front).
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-256 to 256
Unit
line
Default value
0
8-118
DFTAR-R
Lv.1 Details
Shading target value (R) [Front side]

When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of
service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper front),
execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and
write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
Use case
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper front)
1to 2047
Default value
1159
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2
DFTAR-G
Shading target value (G) [Front side]
Lv.1 Details
service label.
Use case
1to 2047
Default value
1189
DFTAR-B
Shading target value (B) [Front side]
Lv.1 Details
service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit
(paper front), execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1,
DF-WLVL2 and write the value which is automatically set in the
service label.
Use case
1to 2047
Default value
1209
8-118
8-119

MTF2-M1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Default value
MTF2-M2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF value 1 setting: horz scan [Front]

Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
20 to 80
50
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
MTF2-M6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
MTF value 1 setting: vert scan [Front]
20 to 80
50
8-119
8-120

MTF2-S2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
MTF2-S7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
100DF2GB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value

20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
Img Sns GB clr displc crrct VL:bck,DRead
To correct the color displacement (G and B lines) in vertical scanning
direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper back).
-256 to 256
line
0
8-120
8-121

100DF2RG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
DFCH2R2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH2R10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH2B2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Img Sns RG clr displc crrct VL:bck,DRead

To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning
direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper back).
-256 to 256
line
0
Complex chart No.2 data (R) [Front side]
To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Red data (for paper
front) of No.2 image in DADF complex chart.
1 to 2550
2000
Complex chart No.10 data(R) [Front side]
0 to 2550
0
Complex chart No.2 data (B) [Front side]
To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Blue data (for paper
1 to 2550
2000
DFCH2B10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH2G2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH2G10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
CCD-CHNG
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Complex chart No.10 data(B) [Front side]

0 to 2550
0
Complex chart No.2 data (G) [Front side]
To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Green data (for paper
1 to 2550
2000
Complex chart No.10 data(G) [Front side]
0 to 2550
0
Scanner Unit(ppr frt) rplce flag setting
To set the calculation mode of MTF filter coefficient that is used at
the replacement of Scanner Unit (paper front).
When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper front), enter 1. When
replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the
value of service label.
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper front)
0 to 1
0: Data at factory shipment is used.
1: Data at factory shipment is not used. (Scanner Unit (paper front) is
already replaced.)
0
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTFMCL, MTFSCL, MTFMBW,
MTFSBW
8-121
8-122

MTF-M1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF value 1 setting: horz scan [Back]

20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
MTF-M6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
MTF value 1 setting: vert scan [Back]
20 to 80
50
8-122
8-123

MTF-S2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
MTF-S7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH-R2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
20 to 80
50
Complex chart No.2 data (R) [Back side]
back) of No.2 image in DADF complex chart.
1 to 2550
2000
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10,
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR
8-123
8-124

DFCH-R10
Lv.1 Details
Complex chart No.10 data (R) [Back side]

Use case
0 to 2550
Default value
0
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
DFCH-B2
Complex chart No.2 data (B) [Back side]
Lv.1 Details
Use case
1 to 2550
Default value
2000
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
DFCH-B10
Complex chart No.10 data (B) [Back side]
Lv.1 Details
Use case
0 to 2550
Default value
0
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
DFCH-G2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH-G10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Complex chart No.2 data (G) [Back side]

1 to 2550
2000
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
Complex chart No.10 data (G) [Back side]
0 to 2550
0
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
8-124
8-125

MTF2-M12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
MTF-M11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
8-125

DFCH2K2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH2K10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH-K2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH-K10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) [Front]

To derive the front/back side linearity, set the B&W data (for paper
1 to 2550
2000
Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) [Front]
0 to 2550
0
Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) [Back]
1 to 2550
2000
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2,
DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10, DFCH-K10
Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) [Back]
0 to 2550
0
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2,
DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10, DFCH-K2
8-126
DFTAR-BW
Lv.1 Details
Shading target value (B&W) [Front side]

service label.
Use case
700 to 1400
Default value
1209
DFTBK-G
Shading target value (G) [Back side]
Lv.1 Details
service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper back),
Use case
- When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper back)
700 to 1400
Default value
1136
DFTBK-B
Shading target value (B) [Back side]
Lv.1 Details
service label.
Use case
700 to 1400
Default value
1126
8-126
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG

DFTBK-R
Lv.1 Details
Shading target value (R) [Back side]

service label.
Use case
700 to 1400
Default value
1156
CCD-CHG2
Scanner Unit(paper back) rplce flag set
Lv.1 Details
To set the calculation mode of MTF filter coefficient that is used at
the replacement of Scanner Unit (paper back).
When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper back), enter 1. When
replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the
Use case
0 to 1
0: Data at factory shipment is used.
1: Data at factory shipment is not used. (Scanner Unit (paper back)
is already replaced.)
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF2MCL, MTF2SCL, MTF2MBW,
MTF2SBW
DFTBK-BW
Shading target value (B&W) [Back side]
Lv.1 Details
service label.
Use case
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper back)
700 to 1400
Default value
1126
T-8-32
8-127
IMG-REG
COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG
REG-H-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
REG-H-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
REG-H-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
REG-HS-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Adj Y color write start pstn: horz scan

To adjust the write start position of Y-color image in the horizontal
scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel.
When Y-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction
occurs
Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
-128 to 127
0
Adj C-color write start pstn: horz scan
To adjust the write start position of C-color image in the horizontal
When C-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction
occurs
press OK key.
-128 to 127
0
Adj Bk-color write start pstn: horz scan
To adjust the write start position of Bk-color image in the horizontal
When Bk-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction
occurs
press OK key.
-128 to 127
0
Adj Y color write start pstn: horz scan
To adjust the write start position of yellow color image in the
horizontal scanning direction in smaller increments than 1 pixel.
When Y-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction
occurs (smaller than 1 pixel)
press OK key.
-5 to 5 (At the processing speed of 280 mm/sec)
0
8-127

REG-HS-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
REG-V-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
REG-V-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
REG-V-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Fine adj C write start pstn: horz scan

To adjust the write start position of cyan color image in the horizontal
scanning direction in smaller increments than 1 pixel.
When C-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction
press OK key.
0
Adj Y color write start pstn: vert scan
To adjust the write start position of Y-color image in the vertical
When Y-color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs
press OK key.
-128 to 127
0
Adj C-color write start pstn: vert scan
To adjust the write start position of C-color image in the vertical
When C-color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs
press OK key.
-128 to 127
0
Adj Bk-color write start pstn: vert scan
To adjust the write start position of Bk-color image in the vertical
When Bk-color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs
press OK key.
-128 to 127
0
8-128
REG-H-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
REG-V-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
REG-VS-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
REG-VS-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
Adj M-color write start pstn: horz scan

To adjust the write start position of M-color image in the horizontal
When M-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction
occurs
press OK key.
-128 to 127
0
Adj M-color write start pstn: vert scan
To adjust the write start position of M-color image in the vertical
When M-color displacement in the vertical scanning direction occurs
press OK key.
-128 to 127
0
Fine adj Y write start pstn: vert scan
To adjust the write start position of yellow color image in the vertical
scanning direction in the unit of 1/8 pixel.
When magenta color displacement in the vertical scanning direction
press OK key.
-7 to 7
pixel
0
Fine adj M write start pstn: vert scan
To adjust the write start position of magenta color image in the
vertical scanning direction in the unit of 1/8 pixel.
press OK key.
-7 to 7
pixel
0
8-128

REG-VS-C
Lv.1 Details
Fine adj C write start pstn: vert scan

To adjust the write start position of cyan color image in the vertical
scanning direction in the unit of 1/8 pixel.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-7 to 7
Unit
pixel
Default value
0
MAG-H-K
Adj of Bk color magnification: horz scan
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the standard magnification of Bk color in horizontal
scanning direction.
Other colors are adjusted by auto registration.
All correction values registered in the media list are proportionally
changed.
Use case
When adjusting the standard magnification due to environmental
change, etc.
press OK key.
Caution
-100 to 100
Unit
pixel
Default value
0
REG-HS-M
Fine adj M write start pstn: horz scan
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the write start position of M-color image in the horizontal
scanning direction in smaller increments than 1 pixel.
Use case
When M-color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction
press OK key.
Caution
Default value
0
8-129
MAG-V
Lv.1 Details
Adj of Bk color magnification: vert scan

To adjust the standard magnification of Bk color in vertical scanning
direction by changing the Polygon Mirror speed.
Other colors are adjusted by auto registration.
All correction values registered in the media list are proportionally
changed.
Use case
When adjusting the standard magnification due to environmental
change, etc.
press OK key.
Caution
-100 to 100
Unit
%
Default value
0
LSR-H-1
Laser emit position horz scan offset 1
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the laser emitting position (the horizontal scanning
direction).
Use case
When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit
When re-entering the value at the time of DC Controller PCB
replacement/RAM clear
press OK key.
Caution
-50 to 60
Unit
mm
Default value
0
LSR-H-2
Laser emit position horz scan offset 2
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the laser emitting position (the horizontal scanning
direction).
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-50 to 60
Unit
mm
Default value
0
8-129
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS

LSR-V-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
LSR-V-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
LSR-V-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
LSR-V-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
Laser emit pstn vertical scan offset (Y)

To adjust the laser emitting position (the vertical scanning direction).
press OK key.
-14 to 14
mm
0
Laser emit pstn vertical scan offset (M)
press OK key.
-14 to 14
mm
0
Laser emit pstn vertical scan offset (C)
press OK key.
-14 to 14
mm
0
Laser emit pstn vertical scan offset (K)
press OK key.
-14 to 14
mm
0
T-8-33
8-130
DENS
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS
REF-Y
Lv.1 Details
Y toner dens target VL entry

To enter the target value of the Toner Density Sensor (Y) of ATR
control after RAM clear.
Use case
When checking the value before RAM clear and re-entering it after
RAM clear
Caution
0 to 255
Default value
0
REF-M
M toner dens target VL entry
Lv.1 Details
To enter the target value of the Toner Density Sensor (M) of ATR
Use case
RAM clear
0 to 255
Default value
0
REF-C
C toner dens target VL entry
Lv.1 Details
To enter the target value of the Toner Density Sensor (C) of ATR
Use case
RAM clear
0 to 255
Default value
0
SIGG-Y
Adj of Y color ATR patch dens target VL
Lv.1 Details
To enter the Y color ATR patch density target value which is set at
Developing Assembly INIT.
After the entry, write the value in the service label.
Use case
0 to 1023
Default value
0
SIGG-M
Adj of M color ATR patch dens target VL
Lv.1 Details
To enter the M color ATR patch density target value which is set at
Use case
0 to 1023
Default value
0
8-130

SIGG-C
Lv.1 Details
Adj of C color ATR patch dens target VL

To enter the C color ATR patch density target value which is set at
Use case
0 to 1023
Default value
0
SIGG-K
Adj of Bk color ATR patch dens target VL
Lv.1 Details
To enter the Bk color ATR patch density target value which is set at
Use case
0 to 1023
Default value
0
HLMT-PTY
Toner Dens Sensr(Y) dens crrct upr limit
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the upper limit of the target density (T/D ratio) adjustment
on the Toner Density Sensor (Y).
Density failures and carrier adherence are alleviated when the upper
limit is smaller, and fogging and scattering are alleviated when it is
larger.
The value is returned to 0 if COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL>
INISET-Y/-4 is executed upon replacement of the developer.
Use case
- When adjusting the toner density (T/D ratio) upon occurrence of
density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, and scattering, etc.
Caution
- Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the
- Do not use the setting value 11.
-2 to 2
-2: +2.0%, -1: +1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: -1.0%, 2: -2.0%
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y/-4
Supplement/memo
Toner dropping: A symptom that toner drops from the Developing
Assembly
8-131
HLMT-PTM
Lv.2 Details
Toner Dens Sensr(M) dens crrct upr limit

on the Toner Density Sensor (M).
larger.
INISET-M/-4 is executed upon replacement of the developer.
Use case
Caution
-2 to 2
-2: +2.0%, -1: +1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: -1.0%, 2: -2.0%
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M/-4
Supplement/memo
Unit
HLMT-PTC
Toner Dens Sensr(C) dens crrct upr limit
Lv.2 Details
on the Toner Density Sensor (C).
larger.
INISET-C/-4 is executed upon replacement of the developer.
Use case
Caution
-2 to 2
-2: +2.0%, -1: +1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: -1.0%, 2: -2.0%
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C/-4
Supplement/memo
Unit
8-131

LLMT-PTY
Lv.2 Details
Toner Dens Sensr(Y)dens crrct lowr limit

To adjust the lower limit of the target density (T/D ratio) adjustment of
the Toner Density Sensor (Y).
If the lower limit is smaller, the density increase can be prevented in
the case of high duty because QM down of developer is restrained,
but carrier adherence gets worse.
INISET-Y/-4 is executed upon replacement of the Developing
Assembly.
Use case
-2 to 2
-2: +2.0%, -1: +1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: -1.0%, 2: -2.0%
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y/-4
LLMT-PTM
Toner Dens Sensr(M)dens crrct lowr limit
Lv.2 Details
the Toner Density Sensor (M).
INISET-M/-4 is executed upon replacement of the Developing
Assembly.
Use case
-2 to 2
-2: +2.0%, -1: +1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: -1.0%, 2: -2.0%
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M/-4
8-132
LLMT-PTC
Lv.2 Details
Toner Dens Sensr(C)dens crrct lowr limit

the Toner Density Sensor (C).
INISET-C/-4 is executed upon replacement of the Developing
Assembly.
Use case
-2 to 2
-2: +2.0%, -1: +1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: -1.0%, 2: -2.0%
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C/-4
DMAX-Y
Adj D-max ctrl Y color dens target VL
Lv.2 Details
An image failure might occur because the density target value of the
D-max control becomes out of the setting table due to environment
change.
Adjust the offset of the yellow density target value of D-max control.
The offset is reset when D-max control (Full Adjust) is executed.
Use case
When an image failure occurs due to environment change
Caution
-30 to 30
Default value
0
DMAX-M
Adj D-max ctrl M color dens target VL
Lv.2 Details
change.
Adjust the offset of the magenta density target value of D-max
control.
Use case
Caution
-30 to 30
Default value
0
8-132

DMAX-C
Lv.2 Details
Adj D-max ctrl C color dens target VL

change.
Adjust the offset of the cyan density target value of D-max control.
Use case
Caution
-30 to 30
Default value
0
P-TG-Y
Adj of Y color ATR patch dens target VL
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for Y.
When the target value determined upon initialization is changed, the
T/D ratio is also changed.
Fogging and density increase are alleviated when the value is
smaller, and carrier adherence is alleviated when it is larger.
Use case
When density failures, fogging, carrier adherence, etc. occur
press OK key.
3) Make 50 prints of approx. 10% image ratio (e.g. COPIER> TEST>
PG> TYPE: 16) 4 times.
4) Execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment.
Caution
Execute the auto gradation adjustment first to increase the density. If
you adjust the offset of the target value, fogging might get worse.
-2 to 2
-2: -0.5%, -1: -1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: +0.5%, 2: +1.0%
Default value
0
8-133
P-TG-M
Lv.2 Details
Adj of M color ATR patch dens target VL

To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for M.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-2 to 2
-2: -0.5%, -1: -1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: +0.5%, 2: +1.0%
Default value
0
P-TG-C
Adj of C color ATR patch dens target VL
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for C.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-2 to 2
-2: -0.5%, -1: -1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: +0.5%, 2: +1.0%
Default value
0
8-133

P-TG-K
Lv.2 Details
Adj of Bk color ATR patch dens target VL

To adjust the offset of the ATR patch target value for Bk.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-2 to 2
-2: -0.5%, -1: -1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: +0.5%, 2: +1.0%
Default value
0
ALF-C
Adjustment of Patch Sensor alpha value
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the coefficient alpha value of the Patch Sensor.
The value multiplied by 1000 is displayed on the screen.
When replacing the Patch Sensor/clearing RAM data, enter the value
of service label.
Use case
- When clearing RAM data
- When replacing the Patch Sensor
0 to 2047
Default value
1200
Supplement/memo
alpha value: Ratio of P wave and S wave
P-K-Y
Adj Y color ptch dens convs coeffct k
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the yellow patch density conversion coefficient k value of
the Patch Sensor.
Use case
When the Patch Sensor fails to read the density
0 to 255
Default value
170
P-K-M
Adj M color ptch dens convs coeffct k
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the magenta patch density conversion coefficient k value of
the Patch Sensor.
Use case
0 to 255
Default value
170
8-134
P-K-C
Lv.2 Details
Adj C color ptch dens convs coeffct k

To adjust the cyan patch density conversion coefficient k value of the
Patch Sensor.
Use case
0 to 255
Default value
170
P-K-K
Adj Bk color ptch dens convs coeffct k
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the black patch density conversion coefficient k value of
the Patch Sensor.
Use case
0 to 255
Default value
170
HLMT-PTK
Toner Dens Sensr(Bk)dens crrct upr limit
Lv.2 Details
of the Toner Density Sensor (Bk).
larger.
INISET-K/-4 is executed upon replacement of the developer.
Use case
Caution
-2 to 2
-2: -0.5%, -1: -1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: +0.5%, 2: +1.0%
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K/-4
Supplement/memo
Unit
8-134
8-135

LLMT-PTK
Lv.2 Details
Tonr Dens Sensr(Bk)dens crrct lowr limit

the Toner Density Sensor (Bk).
INISET-K/-4 is executed upon replacement of the Developing
Assembly.
Use case
-2 to 2
-2: -0.5%, -1: -1.0%, 0: +/-0%, 1: +0.5%, 2: +1.0%
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K/-4
REF-K
Bk toner dens target VL entry
Lv.1 Details
To enter the target value of the Toner Density Sensor (Bk) of ATR
Use case
RAM clear
Caution
0 to 255
Default value
90(RAM clear)
DMLMT-HY
Y toner charging DC voltage upper limit
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage upper limit for Y in
D-max control.
Use case
When a failure occurs due to limiter of D-max control
press OK key.
2) Execute quick adjustment of auto gradation adjustment.
Caution
-1500 to 1500
Unit
V
Default value
0
DMLMT-HM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
DMLMT-HC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
DMLMT-LY
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
DMLMT-LM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
M toner charging DC voltage upper limit

To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage upper limit for M in
D-max control.
1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
-1500 to 1500
V
0
C toner charging DC voltage upper limit
To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage upper limit for C in
D-max control.
press OK key.
-1500 to 1500
V
0
Y toner charging DC voltage lower limit
To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage lower limit for Y in
D-max control.
press OK key.
-300 to 300
V
0
M toner charging DC voltage lower limit
To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage lower limit for M in
D-max control.
press OK key.
-300 to 300
V
0
8-135

DMLMT-LC
Lv.2 Details
C toner charging DC voltage lower limit

To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage lower limit for C in
D-max control.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-300 to 300
Unit
V
Default value
0
CONT-Y
Toner Density Sensor (Y) control voltage
Lv.1 Details
To enter the density detection control voltage of the Toner Density
Sensor (Y).
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the
Use case
When the backup data is cleared by RAM clear, etc.
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
CONT-M
Toner Density Sensor (M) control voltage
Lv.1 Details
Sensor (M).
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
8-136
CONT-C
Lv.1 Details
Toner Density Sensor (C) control voltage

Sensor (C).
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
CONT-K
Toner Density Sensor(Bk) control voltage
Lv.1 Details
Sensor (Bk).
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
T-8-34
8-136
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK
BLANK
COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK

COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK
BLANK-T
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
BLANK-L
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
BLANK-R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
BLANK-B
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
8-137
Adjustment of leading edge margin

To adjust the margin on the leading edge of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the
center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0423 mm).
- When reducing the margin upon users request
- When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation
Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0 to 1000
29
Adjustment of left edge margin
To adjust the margin on the left edge of paper.
0 to 1000
29
Adjustment of right edge margin
To adjust the margin on the right edge of paper.
0 to 1000
29
Adjustment of trailing edge margin
To adjust the margin on the trailing edge of paper.
0 to 1000
29
BLANK-T2
Lv.2 Details
Adj of leading edge margin: Thin paper

To adjust the margin on the leading edge of thin paper.
Use case
press OK key.
0 to 1000
Default value
0
BLANK-B2
Adj of trailing edge margin: Thin paper
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the margin on the trailing edge of thin paper.
Use case
press OK key.
0 to 1000
Unit
pixel
Default value
0
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK
T-8-35
8-137
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT
V-CONT
8-138
COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT

VCONT-K
Lv.2 Details
Adj of Bk color contrast potential

To adjust the offset of the contrast potential Vcont for Bk.
As the value is incremented by 1, the contrast potential changes by
10V.
+: Image becomes darker.
-: Image becomes lighter.
When the value is too large, paper winds around the Fixing Film or a
transfer failure occurs.
In principle, the adjustment of the density should be performed in
Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Density Adjustment
Mode.
Use case
When adjusting the density of D-max control in the case that an
image density failure occurs
press OK key.
3) Execute COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DPC
4) Execute Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust.
Caution
Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly.
-20 to 20
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VCONT-Y, VCONT-M, VCONT-C
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DPC
VBACK-Y
Adj Y color fogging removal potential
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Y.
As the value is incremented by 1, the fogging removal potential
changes by 10 V.
+: Reduction of fogging, increase of carrier adhesion, and increase
of white spots at the edge
-: Increase of fogging, reduction of carrier adhesion, and reduction
Use case
At the occurrence of Y fogging
press OK key.
Caution
-5 to 5
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-M, VBACK-C, VBACK-K
VBACK-M
Lv.2 Details
Adj M color fogging removal potential

To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for M.
changes by 10 V.
Use case
At the occurrence of M fogging
press OK key.
Caution
-5 to 5
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-Y, VBACK-C, VBACK-K
VBACK-C
Adj C color fogging removal potential
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for C.
changes by 10 V.
Use case
At the occurrence of C fogging
press OK key.
Caution
-5 to 5
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-Y, VBACK-M, VBACK-K
Related user mode
Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust
Gradation > Full Adjust
Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Correct Color Cast
8-138

VBACK-K
Lv.2 Details
Adj Bk color fogging removal potential

To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Bk.
changes by 10 V.
Use case
At the occurrence of Bk fogging
press OK key.
Caution
-5 to 5
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK-Y, VBACK-M, VBACK-C
COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> VBACK-K
Related user mode
EPOTOFST
Manual entry of Potential Sensor offset
Lv.1 Details
To set the offset auto adjustment value of Potential Sensor manually.
As the value is incremented by 1, the offset value changes by 1V.
+: Identified as the lower potential than the detected one
-: Identified as the higher potential than the detected one
Use case
When an error is displayed by executing OFST (auto offset
adjustment) at the replacement of Potential Sensor (When the value
out of specified range is set due to Potential Sensor disconnection/
connection failure/installation failure), restore to the factory setting
values.
1) To stop the error, set 0 (V) in EPOTOFST.
2) Check around the Potential Sensor.
If there is an error, address it and if not, go to the step 3).
3) Enter the value of service label.
4) If image fogging or the like occurs, increase the value by 10V
increment.
press OK key.
Caution
-100 to 100
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> OFST
8-139
PT-VCT-Y
Lv.2 Details
Adj Y ATR patch target contrast potntl

To adjust the Y patch target contrast potential for ATR patch.
As the value is incremented by 1, the target contrast potential
changes by 1 V.
+: Potential is increased.
-: Potential is decreased.
Use case
press OK key.
-40 to 50
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> PT-VCT-M, PT-VCT-C, PT-VCT-K
PT-VCT-M
Adj M ATR patch target contrast potntl
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the M patch target contrast potential for ATR patch.
changes by 1 V.
Use case
press OK key.
-40 to 50
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> PT-VCT-Y, PT-VCT-C, PT-VCT-K
8-139

PT-VCT-C
Lv.2 Details
Adj C ATR patch target contrast potntl

To adjust the C patch target contrast potential for ATR patch.
changes by 1 V.
Use case
press OK key.
-40 to 50
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> PT-VCT-Y, PT-VCT-M, PT-VCT-K
PT-VCT-K
Adj Bk ATR patch target contrast potntl
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the Bk patch target contrast potential for ATR patch.
changes by 1 V.
Use case
press OK key.
-40 to 50
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> PT-VCT-Y, PT-VCT-M, PT-VCT-C
8-140
VDGAIN-Y
Lv.2 Details
Adj of Y color charging DC voltage

To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage Vd for Y.
As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage changes by 10 V.
Increase the gain when the density is low and decrease the gain
when the density is high or an spotted image occurs.
Use case
- At the occurrence of an image density failure
- At the occurrence of a spotted image
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VDGAIN-M, VDGAIN-C
VDGAIN-M
Adj of M color charging DC voltage
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage Vd for M.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VDGAIN-Y, VDGAIN-C
VDGAIN-C
Adj of C color charging DC voltage
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the charging DC voltage Vd for C.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VDGAIN-Y, VDGAIN-M
8-140

LPGAIN-Y
Lv.2 Details
Adjustment of Y color laser power

To adjust the offset of the laser power for Y.
As the value is incremented by 1, the laser power changes by 4 Hex.
when the density is high or a spotted image occurs.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-30 to 30
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> LPGAIN-M, LPGAIN-C
LPGAIN-M
Adjustment of M color laser power
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the laser power for M.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-30 to 30
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> LPGAIN-Y, LPGAIN-C
LPGAIN-C
Adjustment of C color laser power
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the laser power for C.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-30 to 30
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> LPGAIN-Y, LPGAIN-M
8-141
VBACK2-Y
Lv.2 Details
Adj Y fogging removal potential: 1/2SPD

To adjust the fogging removal potential Vback for Y at 1/2 speed.
+: Fogging is alleviated, but white/black spots are increased due to
carrier adherence.
-: White/black spots are alleviated, but fogging is increased.
Use case
When any image failure occurs at 1/2 speed
press OK key.
Caution
-5 to 5
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK2-M, VBACK2-C, VBACK2-K
Related user mode
VBACK2-M
Adj M fogging removal potential: 1/2SPD
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the fogging removal potential Vback for M at 1/2 speed.
carrier adherence.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-5 to 5
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK2-Y, VBACK2-C, VBACK2-K
Related user mode
8-141

VBACK2-C
Lv.2 Details
Adj C fogging removal potential: 1/2SPD

To adjust the fogging removal potential Vback for C at 1/2 speed.
carrier adherence.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-5 to 5
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK2-Y, VBACK2-M, VBACK2-K
Related user mode
VBACK2-K
Adj Bk fogging removal potential: 1/2SPD
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the fogging removal potential Vback for Bk at 1/2 speed.
carrier adherence.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-5 to 5
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK2-Y, VBACK2-M, VBACK2-C
Related user mode
8-142
VBACK3-Y
Lv.2 Details
Adj Y fogging removal potential: 1/3SPD

To adjust the fogging removal potential Vback for Y at 1/3 speed.
carrier adherence.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-5 to 5
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK3-M, VBACK3-C, VBACK3-K
Related user mode
VBACK3-M
Adj M fogging removal potential: 1/3SPD
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the fogging removal potential Vback for M at 1/3 speed.
carrier adherence.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-5 to 5
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK3-Y, VBACK3-C, VBACK3-K
Related user mode
8-142
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL

VBACK3-C
Lv.2 Details
Adj C fogging removal potential: 1/3SPD

To adjust the fogging removal potential Vback for C at 1/3 speed.
carrier adherence.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-5 to 5
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK3-Y, VBACK3-M, VBACK3-K
Related user mode
VBACK3-K
Adj Bk fogging removal potential: 1/3SPD
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the fogging removal potential Vback for Bk at 1/3 speed.
carrier adherence.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-5 to 5
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VBACK3-Y, VBACK3-M, VBACK3-C
Related user mode
T-8-36
8-143
PASCAL
COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL
OFST-P-Y
Lv.1 Details
Y density adj at test print reading

To adjust the offset of Y-color test print reading signal at auto
gradation adjustment (full adjustment).
As the value is larger, the image after adjustment gets darker.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-128 to 128
Default value
According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment
OFST-P-M
M density adj at test print reading
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the offset of M-color test print reading signal at auto
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-128 to 128
Default value
OFST-P-C
C density adj at test print reading
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the offset of C-color test print reading signal at auto
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-128 to 128
Default value
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL
8-143
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR
COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL

OFST-P-K
Lv.1 Details
Bk density adj at test print reading

To adjust the offset of Bk-color test print reading signal at auto
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-128 to 128
Default value
T-8-37
8-144
COLOR
COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR
ADJ-Y
Lv.1 Details
Y color balance adjustment

To adjust the default value of the color balance for Y when the
density of Y varies between machines.
As the value is larger, the image gets darker. If the value is too large,
a transfer failure and/or a fixing failure occurs.
Use case
Upon users request (to alleviate the variation of the density between
machines)
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
ADJ-M
M-color balance adjustment
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the default value of the color balance for M when the
density of M varies between machines.
Use case
machines)
press OK key.
-8 to 8
Default value
0
ADJ-C
C-color balance adjustment
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the default value of the color balance for C when the
density of C varies between machines.
Use case
machines)
press OK key.
-8 to 8
Default value
0
8-144

ADJ-K
Lv.1 Details
Bk-color balance adjustment

To adjust the default value of the color balance for Bk when the
density of Bk varies between machines.
Use case
machines)
press OK key.
-8 to 8
Default value
0
OFST-Y
Adj of Y bright area dens&color balance
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the bright area density and color balance of Y.
As the value is larger, the image gets darker.
Lower the value when the background cannot be read correctly
because the density of a document is dark and increase the value
when the density of a document is light.
Lower the value when removal of the background is not performed
correctly and a fogging-like image appears.
This setting is linked with Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image
Quality> Correct Density, Correct Shading, Auto Correct Color
Mismatch in user mode.
Use case
- When the background of a document cannot be read correctly
- When removal of the background cannot be performed correctly
and a fogging-like image appears
press OK key.
-32 to 32
Default value
0
8-145
OFST-M
Lv.1 Details
Adj of M bright area dens&color balance

To adjust the bright area density and color balance of M.
Use case
press OK key.
-32 to 32
Default value
0
OFST-C
Adj of C bright area dens&color balance
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the bright area density and color balance of C.
Use case
press OK key.
-32 to 32
Default value
0
8-145

OFST-K
Lv.1 Details
Adj Bk bright area dens&color balance

To adjust the bright area density and color balance of Bk.
Use case
press OK key.
-32 to 32
Default value
0
LD-OFS-Y
Color balance adj of Y low dens area
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Y.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
LD-OFS-M
Color balance adj of M low dens area
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the color balance of the low density area of M.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
8-146
LD-OFS-C
Lv.2 Details
Color balance adj of C low dens area

To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
LD-OFS-K
Color balance adj of Bk low dens area
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
MD-OFS-Y
Color balance adj of Y mid dens area
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Y.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
8-146

MD-OFS-M
Lv.2 Details
Color balance adj of M mid dens area

To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of M.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
MD-OFS-C
Color balance adj of C mid dens area
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of C.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
MD-OFS-K
Color balance adj of Bk mid dens area
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
8-147
HD-OFS-Y
Lv.2 Details
Color balance adj of Y high dens area

To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
HD-OFS-M
Color balance adj of M high dens area
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the color balance of the high density area of M.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
HD-OFS-C
Color balance adj of C high dens area
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the color balance of the high density area of C.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
8-147

HD-OFS-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PL-OFS-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PL-OFS-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PL-OFS-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Color balance adj of Bk high dens area

To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of Y low dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Y at PDL print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of M low dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the low density area of M at PDL print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of C low dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C at PDL print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
8-148
PL-OFS-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PM-OFS-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PM-OFS-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PM-OFS-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Clr blnce adj of Bk low dens area:PDL

To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk at PDL print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of Y mid dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Y at PDL
print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of M mid dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of M at PDL
print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of C mid dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of C at PDL
print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
8-148

PM-OFS-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PH-OFS-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PH-OFS-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PH-OFS-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Clr blnce adj of Bk mid dens area:PDL

To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk at PDL
print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of Y high dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y at PDL print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of M high dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the high density area of M at PDL print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
Clr blnce adj of C high dens area:PDL
To adjust the color balance of the high density area of C at PDL print.
press OK key.
-8 to 8
0
8-149
PH-OFS-K
Lv.2 Details
Clr blnce adj of Bk high dens area:PDL

To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk at PDL
print.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-8 to 8
Default value
0
T-8-38
8-149
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI
HV-PRI
8-150
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI

PRIMARY
Lv.1 Details
Adjustment of primary charging current

To adjust the offset of primary charging current for the Primary
Charging Assembly.
As the value is incremented by 1, the current is increased by 50 uA.
Use case
- When the output difference from the initial value is large due to the
Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage Transformer
- When changing the primary charging current and then checking
the high voltage output
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 6
Unit
uA
Default value
0
DIS-TGY
Discharge current ctrl Y offset adj
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the target current for Y upon discharge current
control for plain paper.
Use case
When an image failure (sand-like image) occurs
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 15
Unit
uA
Default value
0
DIS-TGM
Discharge current ctrl M offset adj
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the target current for M upon discharge current
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-10 to 15
Unit
uA
Default value
0
DIS-TGC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
DIS-TGY2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
DIS-TGM2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
DIS-TGC2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
PRI-GAIN
PRI-OFST
Discharge current ctrl C offset adj

To adjust the offset of the target current for C upon discharge current
press OK key.
-10 to 15
uA
0
Discharge current ctrl Y offset adj
To adjust the offset of the target current for Y upon discharge current
press OK key.
-20 to 20
uA
0
Discharge current ctrl M offset adj
To adjust the offset of the target current for M upon discharge current
press OK key.
-20 to 20
uA
0
Discharge current ctrl C offset adj
To adjust the offset of the target current for C upon discharge current
press OK key.
-20 to 20
uA
0
[Not used]
[Not used]
8-150

OFSTAC-Y
Lv.1 Details
Adj of Y color charging AC voltage

To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for Y.
As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage value is increased by
20 Vpp.
Increase the value when the density is low and decrease the value
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
- Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly.
- If the value is too large, the life of the Photosensitive Drum
becomes shorter.
-20 to 20
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTAC-M, OFSTAC-C
OFSTAC-M
Adj of M color charging AC voltage
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for M.
20 Vpp.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
becomes shorter.
-20 to 20
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTAC-Y, OFSTAC-C
8-151
OFSTAC-C
Lv.1 Details
Adj of C color charging AC voltage

To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for C.
20 Vpp.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
becomes shorter.
-20 to 20
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTAC-Y, OFSTAC-M
OFSTACY2
Adjust Y charge AC voltage (1/2 speed)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for Y at 1/2 speed.
As the value is incremented by 1, the offset is increased by 20 Vpp.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTACM2, OFSTACC2
OFSTACM2
Adjust M charge AC voltage (1/2 speed)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for M at 1/2 speed.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTACY2, OFSTACC2
8-151

OFSTACC2
Lv.1 Details
Adjust C charge AC voltage (1/2 speed)

To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for C at 1/2 speed.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTACY2, OFSTACM2
OFSTACY3
Adjust Y charge AC voltage (1/3 speed)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for Y at 1/3 speed.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTACM3, OFSTACC3
OFSTACM3
Adjust M charge AC voltage (1/3 speed)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for M at 1/3 speed.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTACY3, OFSTACC3
8-152
OFSTACC3
Lv.1 Details
Adjust C charge AC voltage (1/3 speed)

To adjust the offset of the charge AC voltage for C at 1/3 speed.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
V
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> OFSTACY3, OFSTACM3
PRI-FREQ
Adjustment of YMC charging AC frequency
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the charge AC frequency for Y, M and C.
This mode is effective when horizontal lines or fogging occurs. As the
value is smaller, moire is likely to occur.
Use case
At a charge failure
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the items.
Caution
- Do not use this at the normal service.
- Be sure to perform discharge current control (COPIER>
FUNCTION> MISC-P> DISCHG) after the execution.
0 to 2
0: 2.3kHz
1: 2.0kHz
2: 1.8kHz
Default value
0
DHT-ON
Forcible ON of Drum Heater (Bk)
Lv.2 Details
To forcibly turn ON the Drum Heater (Bk) regardless of the
environment when the power is turned ON.
Use case
When the density of Bk gets lower at the end of the continuous print
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 1
Default value
0
T-8-39
8-152
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR
HV-TR
8-153
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

PRE-TR
Lv.1 Details
Set Pre-transfer charge current adj VL

To set the output adjustment value of pre-transfer charging current.
When the toner scattering occurs at the image end side, decrease
the value.
As the value is increased by 1, the current is increased by 5 uA.
Use case
- When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
- When an image failure occurs (leopard patterns on Bk solid image)
press OK key.
Caution
-30 to 40
Unit
uA
Default value
0
2TR-TGT1
Sec trns indiv set target currnt: set 1
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the target current of secondary transfer for setting 1.
Setting 1 is the combination condition of environment, paper type
(paper weight), color mode and feed side that are set in TR-ENV1,
TR-PPR1, TR-CLR1 and TR-DUP1. When this condition is satisfied,
the target current that is set here is applied to the Secondary
Transfer Outer Roller.
When low-voltage mottled image or toner scattering on solid image
occurs, increase the current.
When high-voltage mottled image or density loss due to excessive
transfer occurs, decrease the current.
As the value is incremented by 1, the current changes by 2 uA.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
When an image failure occurs on all paper types (mottled image,
density loss due to excessive transfer, toner scattering on solid
image, etc.)
press OK key.
Caution
Increase/decrease the value by 1 while checking the symptom each
time.
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV1, TR-PPR1, TR-CLR1,
TRDUP1, 2TR-SHR1
2TR-TGT2
Lv.2 Details

+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
image, etc.)
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
TRDUP2, 2TR-SHR2
8-153
8-154

2TR-TGT3
Lv.2 Details

+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
image, etc.)
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
TRDUP3, 2TR-SHR3
2TR-TGT4
Lv.2 Details

+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
image, etc.)
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
TRDUP4, 2TR-SHR4
8-154
8-155

2TR-TGT5
Lv.2 Details

+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
image, etc.)
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
TRDUP5, 2TR-SHR5
2TR-TGT6
Lv.2 Details

+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
image, etc.)
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
TRDUP6, 2TR-SHR6
8-155
8-156

2TR-TGT7
Lv.2 Details

+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
image, etc.)
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
TRDUP7, 2TR-SHR7
2TR-TGT8
Lv.2 Details

+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
image, etc.)
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
TRDUP8, 2TR-SHR8
8-156

2TR-SHR1
Lv.2 Details
Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 1

To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 1.
the paper allotted voltage that is set here is applied to the Secondary
As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage changes by 100V.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
When an image failure that differs due to the paper type occurs
(mottled image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering
on solid image)
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-10 to 10
Unit
V
Default value
0
TRDUP1, 2TR-TGT1
2TR-SHR2
Lv.2 Details
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-10 to 10
Unit
V
Default value
0
TRDUP2, 2TR-TGT2
8-157
2TR-SHR3
Lv.2 Details

+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-10 to 10
Unit
V
Default value
0
TRDUP3, 2TR-TGT3
2TR-SHR4
Lv.2 Details
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-10 to 10
Unit
V
Default value
0
TRDUP4, 2TR-TGT4
8-157

2TR-SHR5
Lv.2 Details

+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-10 to 10
Unit
V
Default value
0
TRDUP5, 2TR-TGT5
2TR-SHR6
Lv.2 Details
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-10 to 10
Unit
V
Default value
0
TRDUP6, 2TR-TGT6
8-158
2TR-SHR7
Lv.2 Details

+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-10 to 10
Unit
V
Default value
0
TRDUP7, 2TR-TGT7
2TR-SHR8
Lv.2 Details
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
Caution
time.
-10 to 10
Unit
V
Default value
0
TRDUP8, 2TR-TGT8
8-158
8-159

TR-PPR1
Lv.2 Details
Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 1

To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 1.
the target current that is set in 2TR-TGT1 and paper allotted voltage
that is set in 2TR-SHR1 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer
Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 13
1: Plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2)
2: Recycled paper (64 to 105 g/m2)
3: Thin paper (52 to 63 g/m2)
4: Heavy paper (106 to 220 g/m2)
6: Coated paper (106 to 220 g/m2)
8: Transparency
9: Textured paper
10, 11: Not used
12: Postcard
13: Labels
Default value
1
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV1, TR-CLR1, TR-DUP1,
2TRTGT1, 2TR-SHR1
TR-PPR2
Lv.2 Details

Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 13
8: Transparency
9: Textured paper
10, 11: Not used
12: Postcard
13: Labels
Default value
1
2TRTGT2, 2TR-SHR2
8-159
8-160

TR-PPR3
Lv.2 Details

Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 13
8: Transparency
9: Textured paper
10, 11: Not used
12: Postcard
13: Labels
Default value
1
2TRTGT3, 2TR-SHR3
TR-PPR4
Lv.2 Details

Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 13
8: Transparency
9: Textured paper
10, 11: Not used
12: Postcard
13: Labels
Default value
1
2TRTGT4, 2TR-SHR4
8-160
8-161

TR-PPR5
Lv.2 Details

Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 13
8: Transparency
9: Textured paper
10, 11: Not used
12: Postcard
13: Labels
Default value
1
TR-PPR6
Lv.2 Details

Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 13
8: Transparency
9: Textured paper
10, 11: Not used
12: Postcard
13: Labels
Default value
1
2TRTGT6, 2TR-SHR6
8-161
8-162

TR-PPR7
Lv.2 Details

Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 13
8: Transparency
9: Textured paper
10, 11: Not used
12: Postcard
13: Labels
Default value
1
2TRTGT7, 2TR-SHR7
TR-PPR8
Lv.2 Details

Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 13
8: Transparency
9: Textured paper
10, 11: Not used
12: Postcard
13: Labels
Default value
1
2TRTGT8, 2TR-SHR8
8-162

TR-ENV1
Lv.2 Details
Sec trns indiv setting environment:set 1

To set the environment (absolute moisture amount) for setting 1.
Roller.
Use case
When an image failure that differs due to the environment occurs
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 3
1: Low humidity (Absolute moisture amount: 5.8g/m3 and less)
2: Normal humidity (5.9 to 15g/m3)
3: High humidity (15.1g/m3 and more)
Default value
2
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-PPR1, TR-CLR1, TR-DUP1,
2TRTGT1, 2TR-SHR1
TR-ENV2
Lv.2 Details
Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 3
Default value
2
2TRTGT2, 2TR-SHR2
8-163
TR-ENV3
Lv.2 Details

Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 3
Default value
2
2TRTGT3, 2TR-SHR3
TR-ENV4
Lv.2 Details
Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 3
Default value
2
2TRTGT4, 2TR-SHR4
8-163

TR-ENV5
Lv.2 Details

Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 3
Default value
2
2TRTGT5, 2TR-SHR5
TR-ENV6
Lv.2 Details
Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 3
Default value
2
2TRTGT6, 2TR-SHR6
8-164
TR-ENV7
Lv.2 Details

Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 3
Default value
2
2TRTGT7, 2TR-SHR7
TR-ENV8
Lv.2 Details
Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 3
Default value
2
2TRTGT8, 2TR-SHR8
8-164

TR-CLR1
Lv.2 Details
Sec trns indiv setting color mode: set 1

To set B&W/color for setting 1.
Roller.
Use case
When an image failure that differs due to the color mode occurs
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 2
1: B&W mode, 2: Color mode
Default value
1
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-ENV1, TR-PPR1, TR-DUP1,
2TRTGT1, 2TR-SHR1
TR-CLR2
Lv.2 Details
Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 2
Default value
1
2TRTGT2, 2TR-SHR2
8-165
TR-CLR3
Lv.2 Details

Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 2
Default value
1
2TRTGT3, 2TR-SHR3
TR-CLR4
Lv.2 Details
Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 2
Default value
1
2TRTGT4, 2TR-SHR4
8-165

TR-CLR5
Lv.2 Details

Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 2
Default value
1
2TRTGT5, 2TR-SHR5
TR-CLR6
Lv.2 Details
Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 2
Default value
1
2TRTGT6, 2TR-SHR6
8-166
TR-CLR7
Lv.2 Details

Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 2
Default value
1
2TRTGT7, 2TR-SHR7
TR-CLR8
Lv.2 Details
Roller.
Use case
on solid image)
press OK key.
1 to 2
Default value
1
2TRTGT8, 2TR-SHR8
8-166

TR-DUP1
Lv.2 Details
Sec trns indiv setting feed side: set 1

To set the feed side for setting 1.
that is set in 2TR-TGT1 are applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer
Roller.
Use case
When an image failure that differs on the 1st/2nd side occurs (mottled
image/density loss due to excessive transfer/toner scattering on solid
image)
press OK key.
1 to 4
1: 1-sided, 2: Auto 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 2-sided, 4: POD
Deck Lite
Default value
1
2TRTGT1, 2TR-SHR1
TR-DUP2
Lv.2 Details
Roller.
Use case
image)
press OK key.
1 to 4
Deck Lite
Default value
1
2TRTGT2, 2TR-SHR2
8-167
TR-DUP3
Lv.2 Details

Roller.
Use case
image)
press OK key.
1 to 4
Deck Lite
Default value
1
2TRTGT3, 2TR-SHR3
TR-DUP4
Lv.2 Details
Roller.
Use case
image)
press OK key.
1 to 4
Deck Lite
Default value
1
2TRTGT4, 2TR-SHR4
8-167

TR-DUP5
Lv.2 Details

Roller.
Use case
image)
press OK key.
1 to 4
Deck Lite
Default value
1
2TRTGT5, 2TR-SHR5
TR-DUP6
Lv.2 Details
Roller.
Use case
image)
press OK key.
1 to 4
Deck Lite
Default value
1
2TRTGT6, 2TR-SHR6
8-168
TR-DUP7
Lv.2 Details

Roller.
Use case
image)
press OK key.
1 to 4
Deck Lite
Default value
1
2TRTGT7, 2TR-SHR7
TR-DUP8
Lv.2 Details
Roller.
Use case
image)
press OK key.
1 to 4
Deck Lite
Default value
1
2TRTGT8, 2TR-SHR8
8-168

1TR-TGY
Lv.2 Details
Adj of prmry trns ATVC Y target current

To adjust the offset of the target current for Y upon primary transfer
ATVC control.
As the value is incremented by 1, the offset is increased by 0.5 uA.
Increase the value if spots (white spots), leopard pattern image or
mottled image occurs.
Decrease the value if white dots occur.
Use case
When an image failure due to the primary transfer occurs
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
1TR-TGM
Adj of prmry trns ATVC M target current
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the target current for M upon primary transfer
ATVC control.
Use case
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
1TR-TGC
Adj of prmry trns ATVC C target current
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the target current for C upon primary transfer
ATVC control.
Use case
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
8-169
1TR-TGK1
Lv.2 Details
Prmry trns ATVC Bk target current (B&W)

To adjust the offset of the target current for Bk upon primary transfer
ATVC control.
Use case
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Unit
uA
Default value
0
1TR-TGK4
Prmry trns ATVC Bk target current(color)
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the target current for Bk upon primary transfer
ATVC control in color mode.
Use case
press OK key.
-5 to 5
Unit
uA
Default value
0
8-169

2EL
Lv.2 Details
Set of Sec Trns Static Eliminator bias

To adjust the application voltage of the Secondary Transfer Static
Eliminator.
As the value is incremented by 1, the voltage is increased by 500V.
When the Static Eliminator trace (crows footprint image) occurs,
increase the value.
When the Static Eliminator trace (water-drop image) and separation
failure occur, decrease the value.
If the voltage after the adjustment is out of -4000 to 0V, it is forcibly
set to the upper/lower limit value.
Use case
When an image failure due to the Secondary Transfer Static
Eliminator occurs (related with Static Eliminator trace and separation
failure)
press OK key.
Caution
If the value is set too high, the Static Eliminator trace occurs again.
-8 to 6
Unit
V
Default value
0
POSTSW-K
Pre-trns charging assembly ON/OFF
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
Use case
When an image is smeared by the Drum
Caution
When 0 is set, black mottled image and/or leopard patterns (horizontal
long lines) might occur.
0 to 1
0:OFF,1:ON
Default value
1
2TC-I11
[Not used (for expansion)]
2ELSW
Sec Trns Static Eliminator bias ON/OFF
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator bias.
Use case
When stain on the back of paper occurs at secondary transfer
0 to 1
0:OFF,1:ON
Default value
1
COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> 2EL
8-170
1TR-TGY2
Lv.2 Details
Adj Y Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed

To adjust the offset of the target current value for Y upon primary
transfer ATVC control at 1/2 speed.
Increase the value when spots, mottled image, or image failure due
to insufficient transfer current occurs.
Decrease the value when image fogging due to transfer memory or
drum memory due to strong transfer current occurs.
Use case
When an image failure due to inappropriate primary transfer current
setting occurs
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Default value
0
1TR-TGM2
Adj M Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the target current value for M upon primary
Use case
setting occurs
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Default value
0
1TR-TGC2
Adj C Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the target current value for C upon primary
Use case
setting occurs
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Default value
0
8-170

1TR-TK12
Lv.2 Details
Adj Bk Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed

To adjust the offset of the target current value for pure black upon
primary transfer ATVC control at 1/2 speed.
Use case
setting occurs
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Default value
0
1TR-TGY3
Adj Y Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/3 speed
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the target current value for Y upon primary
Use case
setting occurs
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Default value
0
1TR-TGM3
Adj M Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/3 speed
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the target current value for M upon primary
Use case
setting occurs
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Default value
0
8-171
1TR-TGC3
Lv.2 Details
Adj C Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/3 speed

To adjust the offset of the target current value for C upon primary
Use case
setting occurs
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Default value
0
1TR-TK13
Adj Bk Pry Trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/3 speed
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the target current value for pure black upon
Use case
setting occurs
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Default value
0
1TR-TK42
Adj clr Bk Pry Trn ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2SPD
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset of the target current value for Bk (color) upon
As the value is incremented by 1, the offset is increased by 2 micro A.
Increase the value if spots (white spots), leopard pattern image
occurs.
Decrease the value if mottled image due to paper surface nature
occurs when paper type is heavy paper 1/2.
Use case
setting occurs
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
uA
Default value
0
8-171
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

1TR-TK43
Lv.2 Details
Adj clr Bk Pry Trn ATVC tgt crrnt:1/3SPD

To adjust the offset of the target current value for Bk (color) upon
Use case
setting occurs
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Default value
0
T-8-40
8-172
FEED-ADJ
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
REGIST
Lv.1 Details
Adj of rgst start timing: Plain paper

To adjust the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor in the case of
plain paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the leading edge of
paper is increased by 0.1 mm.
+: Top margin becomes smaller. (An image moves upward.)
-: Top margin becomes larger. (An image moves downward.)
Use case
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
ADJ-C1
Right Deck write start pstn in horz scan
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning
direction when feeding paper from the Right Deck (paper width is
within 320 mm.)
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of
+: Left margin becomes larger (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller (An image moves to the left.)
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
If the paper width is larger than 320 mm, execute mechanical
adjustment.
-100 to 100
Unit
mm
Default value
0
8-172

ADJ-C2
Lv.1 Details
Left deck write start pstn in horz scan

direction when feeding paper from the Left Deck (paper width is
within 320 mm.)
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
If the paper width exceeds 320 mm, execute mechanical adjustment.
-100 to 100
Unit
mm
Default value
0
ADJ-C3
Cassette 3 write start pstn in horz scan
Lv.1 Details
direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 3 (paper width is
within 320 mm.)
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-100 to 100
Unit
mm
Default value
0
8-173
ADJ-C4
Lv.1 Details
Cassette 4 write start pstn in horz scan

direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 4 (paper width is
within 320 mm.)
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-100 to 100
Unit
mm
Default value
0
ADJ-MF
Write start pstn in horz scan: MP tray
Lv.1 Details
direction when feeding paper from the Multi-purpose Tray (paper
width is within 320 mm.)
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-100 to 100
Unit
mm
Default value
0
8-173

ADJ-DK
Lv.1 Details
Write start pstn in horz scan:Deck/POD D

direction when feeding paper from the Paper Deck/ POD Deck Lite
(paper width is within 320 mm.)
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-100 to 100
Unit
mm
Default value
0
ADJ-REFE
Write start pstn in horz scan: 2nd side
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the
horizontal scanning direction.
The image write start position is set in the relative amount against
the first side regardless of the paper pickup cassette/tray/deck.
Use case
press OK key.
-100 to 100
Unit
mm
Default value
0
REG-THCK
Rgst start timing adj: Heavy, 1/2 speed
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the
Registration Motor when feeding heavy paper.
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
-20
8-174
REG-DUP1
Lv.1 Details
Rgst start timing adj: Plain, 2nd side

Registration Motor when feeding the second side of plain paper.
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
-10
REG-DUP2
Rgst start timing adj: Heavy, 2nd side
Lv.1 Details
Registration Motor when feeding the second side of heavy paper.
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
-10
LP-FEED1
Cassette pre-rgst arch amount: Plain
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain
paper from the cassette.
As the value is incremented by 1, the pre-registration arch amount
changes by 0.1 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
8-174

LP-FEED2
Lv.1 Details
Casstt pre-rgst arch amount:Heavy/Transp

To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding heavy
paper/transparency from the cassette.
changes by 0.1 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
LP-MULT1
MP Tray pre-rgst arch amount: Plain
Lv.1 Details
paper from the Multi-purpose Tray.
changes by 0.1 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
LP-MULT2
MP Tray pre-rgst arch amount:Heavy/Trans
Lv.1 Details
paper/transparency from the Multi-purpose Tray.
changes 0.1 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
8-175
LP-DUP1
Lv.1 Details
Duplex pre-rgst arch amount: Plain

paper in duplex mode.
changes by 0.1 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
LP-DUP2
Duplex pre-rgst arch amount:Hvy/Transp
Lv.1 Details
paper/transparency in duplex mode.
changes by 0.1 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
8-175

PFIX-FAN
Lv.2 Details
Pre-fix Feed Attraction Fan amount set

To adjust the suction feeding capability of the Pre-fixing Feed Unit by
setting the airflow amount of the Pre-fixing Feed Attraction Fan (FM1).
Heavy paper of small irregular size can be fed when full speed is set,
but noise becomes larger. Noise is alleviated when half speed is set,
but a jam might occur unless an upward curl is added to postcards
and B5-size heavy papers before they reach the Pre-fixing Feed
Unit.
When 0 is set, the fan rotates at full speed in case that postcards/
envelopes of 200mm or shorter in feed direction and 106g/m2 or
more are fed at 1/2 speed or 1/3 speed. The fan rotates at half speed
in other cases.
Cases of full speed: postcard/2 on 1 postcard/4 on 1 postcard,
Catalog Globe No.8 (envelope)
When 1 is set, the fan rotates at full speed if the following conditions
are satisfied, and rotates at half speed in other cases.
- The paper weight set in user mode (Settings/Registration>
Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Type Management Settings) is
104/149/179/219/255/299g/m2.*
- The length in feed direction is 200mm or shorter.
When 2 is set, the fan always rotates at half speed.
Use case
Upon users request (alleviation of noise/feeding of small-size heavy
paper)
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution
- When full speed is set, noise becomes larger.
- When half speed is set, a jam might occur unless an upward curl is
added to paper depending on the paper type.
0 to 2
0: Full speed for postcard/2 on 1 postcard/4 on 1 postcard; Half
speed for other papers
1: Full speed for paper of 200mm or shorter in feed direction and a
specific paper weight*; Half speed for other papers
2: Half speed
Default value
0
Related user mode
Settings/Registration> Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Type
Management Settings
Supplement/memo
* The paper weight (B) that serves as the condition for the fan to
rotate at full speed is set according to the paper weight classification
(A) of the paper used.
A: 91 to 105g/m2 => B: 104g/m2
A: 106 to 150 g/m2 => B: 149 g/m2
A: 151 to 180 g/m2 => B: 179 g/m2
A: 181 to 220 g/m2 => B: 219 g/m2
A: 221 to 256 g/m2 => B: 255 g/m2
A: 257 to 300 g/m2 => B: 299 g/m2
8-176
ADJ-MDK1
Lv.1 Details
Write pstn in horz scan:Multi Deck(Upr)

direction when feeding paper from the Multi Deck (Upper) (paper
paper is increased by 0.1mm.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-100 to 100
Unit
mm
Default value
0
ADJ-MDK2
Write pstn in horz scan:Multi Deck(Mid)
Lv.1 Details
direction when feeding paper from the Multi Deck (Middle) (paper
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-100 to 100
Unit
mm
Default value
0
8-176

ADJ-MDK3
Lv.1 Details
Write pstn in horz scan:Multi Deck(Lowr)

direction when feeding paper from the Multi Deck (Lower) (paper
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-100 to 100
Unit
mm
Default value
0
REG-H2
Rgst start timing adj: Heavy,1/3 speed
Lv.1 Details
Registration Motor when feeding heavy paper at 1/3 speed.
+: Top margin becomes smaller (An image moves upward.)
-: Left margin becomes larger (An image moves downward.)
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
REG-S
Rgst start timing adj:Coated, 1/3,1/2SPD
Lv.1 Details
Registration Motor in the case of slow feeding of coated paper at 1/3
speed in iR-ADV C9xxx.
When Productivity Priority mode is selected in user mode, timing to
turn ON at 1/2 speed is changed and the margin is adjusted.
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
Related user mode
Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Coated Productivity/
Image Quality Priority
8-177
REG-MF
Lv.1 Details
Rgst start timing adj: MP Tray, Plain

Registration Motor when feeding plain paper from the Multi-purpose
Tray.
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
REG-MFH1
Rgst start tmg adj: MP Tray,Hvy,1/2 SPD
Lv.1 Details
Registration Motor when feeding heavy paper at 1/2 speed from the
Multi-purpose Tray.
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
REG-MFH2
Rgst start tmg adj: MP Tray,Hvy,1/3 SPD
Lv.1 Details
Registration Motor when feeding heavy paper at 1/3 speed from the
Multi-purpose Tray.
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
8-177

REG-MFS
Lv.1 Details
Rgst start tmg:MP Tray,Coated,1/3,1/2SPD

Registration Motor when feeding coated paper at 1/3 speed from the
Multi-purpose Tray in iR-ADV C9xxx.
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
Related user mode
PFIX-SPD
Adj of Pre-fix Feed Motor speed
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the speed of the Pre-fixing Feed Motor.
As the value is incremented by 1, the speed is increased by 0.1%.
+: The speed is increased.
-: The speed is decreased.
Increase the value (speed) if a jam occurs as the result that the
trailing edge of thin paper or recycled paper winds around the
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
If the value is too large, the arch between the pre-fixing feed and
fixing processes becomes too large, and consequently an image
failure and/or jam might occur.
Use case
When the trailing edge of thin paper or recycled paper winds around
the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller, and a jam occurs
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
%
Default value
0
8-178
EXT-SPD
Lv.2 Details
Adj of Delivery Motor speed

To adjust the speed of the Delivery Motor.
The rotation speed of the Outer Delivery Roller changes in the case
of the straight delivery and duplex mode.
As the value is incremented by 1, the speed is increased by 0.5%.
If the value is too large, paper is pulled by both the delivery side and
fixing side, and consequently noise might occur and/or the motor
might become out of sync.
If the value is too small, arch is created between the Outer Delivery
Roller and Fixing Assembly, and consequently a jam due to paper
bending might occur.
Use case
- When uneven gloss occurs
- When noise is generated from the Outer Delivery Drive Assembly
press OK key.
-5 to 5
Unit
%
Default value
0
8-178

TBLT-SPD
Lv.1 Details
Fine adjustment of ITB speed

To make a fine adjustment of the ITB speed to alleviate blur image
(random uneven pitch).
When the speed is changed, image magnification in the vertical
scanning direction is changed.
As the value is incremented by 1, speed of the ITB Drive Motor is
increased by 0.025%.
Increase the speed (1 to 4) when blur image occurs.
The adjustment result is reflected to 1/1 speed, 1/2 speed, and 1/3
speed.
Use case
When blur image (random uneven pitch) occurs
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (1 to 4; switch negative/positive by -/+ key)
and press OK key.
2) Output an halftone image.
If blur image is alleviated, execute step 3 and later. If not, change the
setting value to 5 to 8, and check again.
3) As needed, change the magnification in the vertical scanning
direction in Fine Adjust Zoom in user mode.
4) As needed, change the leading edge margin with REGIST in
service mode.
5) Adjust the color displacement in the vertical scanning direction in
Auto Correct Color Mismatch in user mode.
Caution
- The operation is enabled when the setting value of COPIER >
OPTION > IMG-TR > ITB-TYPE is 1.
- If the setting value is out of the range between -4 and 0, banding of
other pitch might get worse.
- After execution, check magnification in the vertical scanning
direction and leading edge margin, and then execute auto
registration.
-30 to 30(-30 to -9,9 to 30:Not used)
Unit
%
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-TR> ITB-TYPE
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> REGIST
Related user mode
Preferences > Paper Settings > Set Paper Type Management >
Details/Edit > Adjust Image Position > Fine Adjust Zoom
Adjustment/ Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Correct Color
Mismatch
8-179
REG-DUPS
Lv.1 Details
Rgst start tmg: Coated(2nd), 1/3 ,1/2SPD

Registration Motor when feeding coated paper at 1/3 speed.
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
Related user mode
T-8-41
8-179
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ
8-180
COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ

MF-A4R
Lv.1 Details
Adj of MP Tray A4R paper width

To adjust the width of A4R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.
When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB
or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST>
A4R.
Use case
- When registering a new value
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4R
MF-A6R
Adj of MP Tray A6R paper width
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the width of A6R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.
A6R.
Use case
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
MF-A4
Lv.1 Details
Adj of MP Tray A4 paper width

To adjust the width of A4 paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.
A4.
Use case
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4
MDK1-A4
Adj of Multi Deck (Upper) A4 paper width
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the width of A4 size paper in the Multi Deck (Upper).
When replacing the Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new
value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4.
Use case
- When the Paper Width Detection PCB is replaced or a new value
is registered
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
8-180

MDK1-A5R
Lv.1 Details
Adj of Multi Deck(Upper) A5R paper width

To adjust the width of A5R size paper in the Multi Deck (Upper).
value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A5R.
Use case
is registered
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
MDK2-A4
Adj of Multi Deck (Mid) A4 paper width
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the width of A4 size paper in the Multi Deck (Middle).
Use case
is registered
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
8-181
MDK2-A5R
Lv.1 Details
Adj of Multi Deck (Mid) A5R paper width

To adjust the width of A5R size paper in the Multi Deck (Middle).
Use case
is registered
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
MDK3-A4
Adj of Multi Deck (Lower) A4 paper width
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the width of A4 size paper in the Multi Deck (Lower).
Use case
is registered
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
8-181
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC

MDK3-A5R
Lv.1 Details
Adj of Multi Deck(Lower) A5R paper width

To adjust the width of A5R size paper in the Multi Deck (Lower).
Use case
is registered
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
T-8-42
8-182
MISC
COPIER > ADJUST > MISC
SEG-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Set criteria for text/photo: front side

To set the judgment level of text/photo original in Text/Photo/Map
mode.
As the value is larger, the original is more likely judged as a photo
document, and as the value is smaller, the original is more likely
judged as a text document.
Use case
mode.
As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a
photo document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to
be detected as a text document.
press OK key.
Caution
Do not use this at the normal service. Take necessary action in
accordance with the instructions from the QA Center.
-4 to 4
Default value
0
K-ADJ
Set criteria for black text: front side
Lv.1 Details
To set the judgment level of black characters at text processing.
As the value is larger, the text tends to be judged as black.
Use case
When preferring the text to be judged as black
press OK key.
-3 to 3
Default value
0
ACS-ADJ
Set criteria for B&W/color in ACS:front
Lv.1 Details
To set the judgment level of B&W/color original in ACS mode.
B&W document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to
be detected as a color document.
Use case
When adjusting the color recognition level in ACS mode
press OK key.
-3 to 3
Default value
0
8-182

ACS-EN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
ACS-CNT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
ACS-EN2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
ACS-CNT2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Set judgment area in ACS mode:front

To set the judgment area in ACS mode.
As the value is larger, the judgment area is widened.
When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode
press OK key.
-2 to 2
1
Set jdgmt pixel count area in ACS:front
To set the area where the pixel is counted to judge the color
presence in ACS mode.
When adjusting the area where the pixel is counted to judge the
color presence in ACS mode
press OK key.
-2 to 2
0
Set ACS mode jdgmt area in DADF mode
To set the judgment area in ACS mode at DADF reading.
When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode at DADF reading
press OK key.
-2 to 2
1
Set ACS jdgmt pixel count area in DADF
presence in ACS mode at DADF reading.
When adjusting the area where the pixel is counted to judge the
color presence in ACS mode at DADF reading
press OK key.
-2 to 2
0
8-183
WT-ER-LV
Lv.1 Details
Setting of Drum Cleaning Motor speed

To set the speed of Drum Cleaning and Waste Toner Feed Drive
Motor (M30).
When 10mm uneven pitch occurs, accelerate the speed.
Use case
When 10mm uneven pitch occurs
press OK key.
Caution
Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from
the Quality Support Division.
0 to 3
0: 120%, 1: 150%, 2: 160%, 3: 170%
Default value
0
REOS-PG
Set Reos processing coeffct at 1200dpi
Lv.2 Details
To set an optimal processing coefficient for 1200dpi print.
Print PG of the type 55 in COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE, check the
images in the 4 areas of this PG, and specify the number of the area
in which the character proportion and line width become optimum in
the case of PDL1200 dpi setting.
After the setting is done, output the vertical and horizontal patterns
with 3 dots and 10 spaces, which are the same as the PG above,
in 1200 dpi, and confirm that the result is the same as the specified
area.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value and press OK key.
0 to 4
Default value
2
COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE
SEG-ADJ3
Set criteria for text/photo: back side
Lv.1 Details
mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path).
As the value is larger, the original is more likely judged as a photo
document, and as the value is smaller, the original is more likely
judged as a text document.
Use case
When adjusting the classification level of text and photo in Text/
Photo/Map mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path)
press OK key.
-4 to 4
Default value
0
8-183

K-ADJ3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
ACS-ADJ3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
ACS-EN3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
ACS-CNT3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Set Bk text jdgmt stdrd: back side

To set the judgment level of black characters at text processing (back
side at duplex reading with 1 path).
As the value is increased, the text tends to be detected as black.
When preferring the text to be judged as black (back side at duplex
reading with 1 path)
press OK key.
-3 to 3
0
Set criteria for B&W/color in ACS:back
To set the judgment level of B&W/color original in ACS mode (back
side at duplex reading with 1 path).
B&W document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to
be detected as a color document.
When adjusting the color recognition level in ACS mode (back side
at duplex reading with 1 path)
press OK key.
-3 to 3
0
Set judgment area in ACS mode:back
To set the judgment area in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading
with 1 path).
When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode (back side at duplex
reading with 1 path)
press OK key.
-2 to 2
1
Set jdgmt pixel count area in ACS:back
presence in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path).
When adjusting the area where the pixel is counted to judge the color
presence in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path)
press OK key.
-2 to 2
0
8-184
SH-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Adjustment of sharpness: front side

To adjust the sharpness of the images which are set in the user
mode.
- Image to be read in the copyboard reading mode
- Image on the first side of a document to be read in the reversepath duplex stream reading mode
- Image on the first side of a document to be read in the 1-path
duplex stream reading mode
As the value is larger, the image gets sharper. If the value is too
large, moire is likely to occur in an output image of COPY and SEND.
To match the image quality with that of the second side in the 1-path
duplex stream reading mode, decrease the value when moire on
the first side is stronger than the second side and increase the value
when it is weaker.
Use case
When moire frequently occurs on images of COPY and SEND output
press OK key.
-3 to 3
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> SH-ADJ2
SH-ADJ2
Adjustment of sharpness: back side
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the sharpness of images on the second side of a
document, which is set in the user mode, in the 1-path duplex stream
reading mode.
As the value is larger, the image gets sharper. If the value is too
large, moire is likely to occur in an output image of COPY and SEND.
To match the image quality with that of the second side in the 1-path
duplex stream reading mode, decrease the value when moire on the
first side is stronger than the second side, and increase the value
when it is weaker.
Use case
When moire frequently occurs on images of COPY and SEND output
press OK key.
-3 to 3
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> SH-ADJ
T-8-43
8-184
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED
EXP-LED
8-185
COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED
COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED

PR-EXP-Y
Lv.2 Details
Setting of Y Pre-exposure LED current

To set the current of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Y).
Increase the value when taking a measure for drum ghost.
Decrease the value when potential is not applied well.
Use case
- When drum ghost is significant (drum pitch is not correct)
- When potential is not applied well
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
mA
Default value
0
PR-EXP-M
Setting of M Pre-exposure LED current
Lv.2 Details
To set the current of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M).
Use case
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
mA
Default value
0
PR-EXP-C
Setting of C Pre-exposure LED current
Lv.2 Details
To set the current of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C).
Use case
Caution
-10 to 10
Unit
mA
Default value
0
PR-EXP-K
Lv.2 Details
Setting of Bk Pre-exposure LED current

To set the current of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk).
Use case
Caution
0 to 2
0: 40 mA, 1: 80 mA, 2: 80 mA
Unit
mA
Default value
0
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED
T-8-44
8-185
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
FUNCTION
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

STIR-4
Lv.1 Details
INSTALL
STIR-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Required time
STIR-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Required time
STIR-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Required time
STIR-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Required time
8-186
Stirring of Y color developer

To stir developer in the Y Developing Assembly.
- At installation of the machine
- When an image failure occurs
Select the item, and then press OK key.
During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
0
60sec
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-M, STIR-C, STIR-K, STIR-4
Stirring of M color developer
To stir developer in the M Developing Assembly.
0
60sec
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y, STIR-C, STIR-K, STIR-4
Stirring of C color developer
To stir developer in the C Developing Assembly.
0
60sec
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y, STIR-M, STIR-K, STIR-4
Stirring of Bk color developer
To stir developer in the Bk Developing Assembly.
0
60sec
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y, STIR-M, STIR-C, STIR-4
Use case
Default value
Required time
SPLY-H-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SPLY-H-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SPLY-H-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SPLY-H-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Stirring of all color developer

To stir developer in the Developing Assemblies of 4 colors (Y/M/C/
Bk).
0
60sec
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STIR-Y, STIR-M, STIR-C, STIR-K
Supply of Y toner to Supply Screw
Supply Y color toner from the Hopper to the Supply Screw.
- At installation
- When replacing the Hopper
1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Press OK key to stop operation.
0
Supply of M toner to Supply Screw
Supply M color toner from the Hopper to the Supply Screw.
- At installation
0
Supply of C toner to Supply Screw
Supply C color toner from the Hopper to the Supply Screw.
- At installation
0
Supply of Bk toner to Supply Screw
Supply Bk color toner from the Hopper to the Supply Screw.
- At installation
0
8-186

SPLY-H-4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
STRD-POS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
CARD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
KEY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Supply of 4 colors toner to Supply Screw

Supply 4 colors (Y/M/C/Bk) toner from the Hopper to the Supply
Screw.
- At installation
0
Scan position auto adj in DADF mode
To adjust the DADF scanning position automatically.
At DADF installation/uninstallation
1) Close the DADF.
The operation automatically stops after the adjustment.
3) Write the value displayed by COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRDPOS in the service label.
Write the adjusted value in the service label.
At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS
Card number setting
To set the card number to be used for Card Reader.
A series of numbers from the entered number to the number of cards
specified by CARD-RNG can be used.
- At installation of the Card Reader
- After replacing the HDD
1) Enter the number, and then press OK key.
The card management information (department ID and password) is
initialized.
0 to 2001
0
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CARD-RNG (LEVEL2)
ON/OFF of management key function
To set whether to enable or disable the management key function.
At installation
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
8-187
INISET-Y
Lv.1 Details
Exe of Y Dev Assy initial install mode

To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of
the Y Developing Assembly.
1. Patch light intensity correction
2. Background correction
3. Potential control
4. Idle rotation of the Developing Assembly
5. Initialization of the Toner Density Sensor
6. Initialization of the Patch Sensor
7. Counter reset of the Developing Assembly
After execution, the AINR-OFF setting automatically returns to 0:
OFF.
Use case
When replacing the Y Developing Assembly
Caution
- When installing the machine or replacing the Developing Assembly
of other color, do not use this item. .
- Execute this item after setting AINR-OFF to 1: ON.
During operation: xxx second (remaining time), At normal termination:
OK, At abnormal termination: NG
Default value
0
Required time
155sec
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M, INISET-C, INISET-K,
INISET-4, AINR-OFF
INISET-M
Exe of M Dev Assy initial install mode
Lv.1 Details
the M Developing Assembly.
OFF.
Use case
When replacing the M Developing Assembly
Caution
Default value
0
Required time
155sec
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y, INISET-C, INISET-K,
INISET-4, AINR-OFF
8-187

INISET-C
Lv.1 Details
Exe of C Dev Assy initial install mode

the C Developing Assembly.
OFF.
Use case
When replacing the C Developing Assembly
Caution
Default value
0
Required time
155sec
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y, INISET-M, INISET-K,
INISET-4, AINR-OFF
AINR-OFF
ON/OFF of warm-up rotation deactivation
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF to disable execution of warm-up rotation.
Warm-up rotation can be omitted when turning OFF/ON the power to
check the image, etc. after the adjustment of warm-up rotation, etc.
This mode is executed when warm-up rotation is not needed.
Use case
- At installation
- When replacing the Developing Assembly
Caution
Be sure to enable the operation (cancel disabling) before the
machine is used by the user. The operation is automatically enabled
by executing INISET-Y/M/C/K/4.
0: OFF (warm-up rotation enabled), 1: ON (warm-up rotation
disabled)
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y, INISET-M, INISET-C,
INISET-K, INISET-4
8-188
E-RDS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Set use/no use of Embedded-RDS function

To set whether to use the Embedded-RDS function.
When using Embedded-RDS
Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and
RGW-ADR as a set.
0 to 1
0: Not used, 1: Used (All the counter information is sent.)
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COMLOG, RGW-ADR
Supplement/memo
Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the
device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales companys
server via SOAP protocol
RGW-PORT
Set port number of Sales Cos server
Lv.1 Details
To set the port number of the sales companys server to be used for
Embedded-RDS.
Use case
Caution
RGW-ADR as a set.
1 to 65535
Default value
443
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, COM-TEST, COM-LOG,
RGW-ADR
Supplement/memo
COM-TEST
Dspl connect result w/ Sales Cos server
Lv.1 Details
To display the result of the connection test with the sales companys
server.
Use case
Caution
RGW-ADR as a set.
During operation: ACTIVE, When connection is completed: OK,
When connection is failed: NG
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-LOG,
RGW-ADR
Supplement/memo
8-188

COM-LOG
Lv.1 Details
Dspl connect error w/ Sales Cos server

To display error information when the connection with the sales
companys server failed.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method Display only
Caution
RGW-ADR as a set.
Year, date, time, error code, error detail information (maximum 128
characters)
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST,
RGW-ADR
Supplement/memo
RGW-ADR
URL setting of Sales Companys server
Lv.1 Details
To set the URL of the sales companys server to be used for
Embedded-RDS.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the URL.
2) Enter the URL, and then press OK key.
Caution
- Do not use Shift-JIS character strings.
- Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and
RGW-ADR as a set.
URL
Default value
https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST,
COM-LOG
Supplement/memo
CNT-DATE
Set counter send start date to SC server
Lv.1 Details
To set the year, month, date, hour and minute to send counter
information to the sales companys server.
This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended
function is available.
Use case
When the Embedded-RDS third-party expanded function is available
YYYYMMDDHHMM (12 digits)
YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date, HH: Hour, MM: Minute
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-189
CNT-INTV
Lv.1 Details
Set counter send interval to SC server

To set the interval of sending counter information to the sales
companys server in a unit of one hour.
This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended
function is available.
Use case
- When restarting potential control after execution of COPIER>
OPTION> IMG-FIX> PO-CNT
- When the D-max control condition is changed
1 to 168 (=1 week)
Default value
24
Supplement/memo
INISET-4
All color Dev Assy initial instal mode
Lv.1 Details
the Developing Assemblies of 4 colors (Y, M, C, Bk).
OFF.
Use case
- At installation
- When replacing the Developing Assemblies of all colors
Caution
- Use this item only when replacing Developing Assemblies of 4
colors simultaneously.
Required time
155sec
INISET-K, AINR-OFF
8-189

INISET-K
Lv.1 Details
Exe of Bk Dev Assy initial instal mode

the Bk Developing Assembly.
OFF.
Use case
When replacing the Bk Developing Assembly
Caution
Required time
155sec
INISET-4, AINR-OFF
INIT-ITB
Creation of ITB edge profile
Lv.1 Details
To create the initial ITB edge profile to be used for the ITB
displacement correction control.
The initial ITB edge profile is created after neutral position of the
Steering Roller is determined by the ITB displacement correction
control.
Use case
When replacing the ITB
During operation: ACTIVE, When the operation finished normally:
OK
Default value
0
Required time
3min
8-190
BRWS-ACT
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF of service browser

To set ON/OFF of service browser.
ON/OFF of service browser switches whenever the main power
switch is turned OFF/ON after execution.
If connection with the UGW server is successful, OK! is displayed.
If NG! is displayed, execute a communication test using COMTEST.
The setting is enabled after reboot. Whether the service browser is
ON or OFF can be checked in COPIER> DISPLAY> USER> BRWSSTS (1: ON, 2: OFF).
Use case
- When using the service browser
- At operation check
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution
After execution, turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After reboot,
be sure to check the usage status in COPIER> DISPLAY> USER>
BRWS-STS.
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> COM-TEST
COPIER> DISPLAY> USER> BRWS-STS
CDS-CTL
Set country/area when using CDS
Lv.1 Details
To set country/area to enable CDS.
Use case
When enabling CDS
Country/area set in COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG, CA
(Canada), LA (Latin America) and HK (Hong Kong)
Default value
The value differs according to the location.
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG
Supplement/memo
CDS: Contents Delivery System
TD-AD-Y
Setting of Y-toner density
Lv.1 Details
To set toner density of the Y Developing Assembly to optimal value
at that time.
Use case
When replacing to a new Y Developing Assembly
Caution
Use this item only when replacing the Developing Assembly.
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> TD-AD-M, TD-AD-C, TD-AD-K, TD-AD-4C
TD-AD-M
Setting of M-toner density
Lv.1 Details
To set toner density of the M Developing Assembly to optimal value
at that time.
Use case
When replacing to a new M Developing Assembly
Caution
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> TD-AD-Y, TD-AD-C, TD-AD-K, TD-AD-4C
8-190
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD

TD-AD-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
TD-AD-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
TD-AD-4C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
HD-CRYP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BIT-SVC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Setting of C-toner density

To set toner density of the C Developing Assembly to optimal value
at that time.
When replacing to a new C Developing Assembly
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> TD-AD-Y, TD-AD-M, TD-AD-K, TD-AD-4C
Setting of Bk-toner density
To set toner density of the Bk Developing Assembly to optimal value
at that time.
When replacing to a new Bk Developing Assembly
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> TD-AD-Y, TD-AD-M, TD-AD-C, TD-AD-4C
Setting of all color toner density
To set toner density of the Developing Assemblies of all colors to
10%.
When replacing to a new Developing Assemblies for all colors
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> TD-AD-Y, TD-AD-M, TD-AD-C, TD-AD-K
Exe HDD Encrypt Board ini install mod
the HDD Encryption Board.
By turning OFF the main power switch after execution, the HDD
Encryption Board can be installed.
At installation of the HDD Encryption Board
OFF/ON of Web Service of eRDS
To switch ON/OFF of the Web Service function of eRDS.
When OFF is selected, authentication information cannot be
obtained from eRDS.
Upon users request
0:OFF, 1:ON
1
8-191
CCD
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
DF-WLVL1
Lv.1 Details
White level adj in book mode: color

To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by
setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard
Glass.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass.
Caution
Be sure to execute DF-WLVL2 in a row.
OK!
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL2
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTBK-R, DFTBK-G, DFTBK-B
DF-WLVL2
White level adj in DADF mode: color
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the white level for DADF scanning automatically by setting
the paper which is usually used by the user on the DADF.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the DADF.
Caution
Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL1.
OK!
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B,
DFTAR2-R, DFTAR2-G, DFTAR2-B, DFTAR-BW, DFTAR2BW,
DFTBK-R, DFTBK-G, DFTBK-B
T-8-45
8-191

DF-LNR
Lv.1 Details
Deriving of DADF front/back linearity

To derive the front/back side linearity characteristics in the use of
DADF based on the scanning data of the DADF complex chart (No. 2,
No. 10).
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the value of the readers service label. (under COPIER>
ADJUST> CCD)
DFCH-R2, DFCH-G2, DFCH-B2, DFCH-K2,
DFCH-R10, DFCH-G10, DFCH-B10, DFCH-K10,
DFCH2R2, DFCH2G2, DFCH2B2, DFCH2K2,
DFCH2R10, DFCH2G10, DFCH2B10, DFCH2K10
OK!
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-G2, DFCH-B2,
DFCH-K2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-G10, DFCH-B10, DFCH-K10,
DFCH2R2, DFCH2G2, DFCH2B2, DFCH2K2, DFCH2R10,
DFCH2G10, DFCH2B10, DFCH2K10
MTF-CLC
Deriving of MTF filter coefficient
Lv.1 Details
To derive the MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the
MTF value of the DADF complex chart.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the value of the readers service label. (under COPIER>
ADJUST> CCD)
MTF-MXX, SXX, MTR2-MXX, SXX
OK!
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF-M1 to M12, MTF-S1 to S12,
MTF2-M1 to M12, MTF2-S1 to S12
DF-WLVL3
White level adj in book mode (B&W)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by
setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard
Glass.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass.
Caution
Be sure to execute DF-WLVL4 in a row.
OK!
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTBK-BW
8-192
DF-WLVL4
Lv.1 Details
White level adj in DADF mode (B&W)

To adjust the white level for DADF scanning automatically by setting
the paper which is usually used by the user on the DADF.
Use case
Caution
Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL3.
OK!
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z
BW-TGT
Set of B&W shading target value
Lv.1 Details
After the white level data (X/Y/Z) for the Standard White Plate is set,
read the Standard White Plate and set the black and white shading
target value.
Use case
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit
Caution
Be sure to execute this item after execution of COPIER> ADJUST>
CCD>W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z.
1 to 2047
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z
T-8-46
8-192
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC
LASER
8-193
DPC
COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER
COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC
LD-ADJ-Y
Lv.2 Details
Restore Y Skew Crrct Motor initial pstn

When Y-color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger
than estimation, the Skew Correction Motor (Y) is locked, and color
displacement cannot be corrected even when color displacement
correction control is executed. This item places the Skew Correction
Motor (Y) to the center position in such cases.
Use case
When replacing the Laser Scanner Unit to identify the failure position
Default value
0
Required time
10sec
LD-ADJ-M
Restore M Skew Crrct Motor initial pstn
Lv.2 Details
When M-color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger
than estimation, the Skew Correction Motor (M) is locked, and color
Motor (M) to the center position in such cases.
Use case
Default value
0
Required time
10sec
LD-ADJ-C
Restore C Skew Crrct Motor initial pstn
Lv.2 Details
When C-color skew volume in vertical scanning direction is larger
than estimation, the Skew Correction Motor (C) is locked, and color
Motor (C) to the center position in such cases.
Use case
Default value
0
Required time
10sec
DPC
Lv.1 Details
Execution of potential control

To execute potential control for the Photosensitive Drum manually. (It
is usually executed automatically.)
When this item is executed, the same condition is set for
development of plain paper and coated paper.
Use case
When checking potential control operation
Caution
Since the same condition is set for development of plain paper and
coated paper groups, be sure to execute D-max control for both
groups after execution of this item.
Default value
0
Required time
30sec
OFST
Potential adjustment of Potential Sensor
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the detection potential offset value of the Potential Sensor
automatically.
Use case
- When replacing the Photosensitive Sensor
- At diagnosis for a failure of the Photosensitive Sensor
Caution
An error is displayed when disconnection/connection failure/
installation failure occurs to the Potential Sensor at the time of
replacement. In this case, manually set the value to 0 by EPOTOFST
and then make an adjustment.
Default value
0
Required time
4sec
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> EPOTOFST
T-8-47
8-193

DRM-RSET
Lv.1 Details
Exe of all color Drums replacement mode

When replacement of Drum Unit is completed within 30 minutes,
warm-up rotation may not be executed at power-off/on because of
high fixing temperature. In such cases, drum potential becomes
unstable, causing an image failure to occur. To prevent this symptom,
this item forcibly executes the same operation as warm-up rotation.
At this time, laser power values, etc., that were corrected according
to drum counter for all colors, total charging time, target Vd values
for potential control and drum durability are reset.
Use case
When replacing the Drum Units for all colors
When the drum replacement mode is enabled, it becomes disabled
automatically after execution.
Caution
Be sure to execute this item after replacement of the Drum Units for
all colors.
0 to 1
0: Disabled (Not executed), 1: Enabled (Executed)
Default value
0
Required time
2min
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRMRSETY, DRMRSETM,
DRMRSETC, DRMRSETK
DRMRSETY
Forcible exe of Y Drum replacement mode
Lv.1 Details
to Y drum counter, total charging time, target Vd values for potential
control and drum durability are reset.
Use case
- When detection of the Drum Unit replacement has failed
- When the Drum Unit used in other machine for a while is used as a
dummy unit
Caution
Use a Drum Unit that is not close to the end of life as a dummy unit.
When using a Drum Unit that is close to the end of life, it affects the
life of developer, etc.
0 to 1
Default value
0
Required time
2min
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRM-RSET, DRMRSETM,
DRMRSETC, DRMRSETK
8-194
DRMRSETM
Lv.1 Details
Forcible exe of M Drum replacement mode

to M drum counter, total charging time, target Vd values for potential
Use case
dummy unit
Caution
0 to 1
Default value
0
Required time
2min
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> DRM-RSET, DRMRSETY,
DRMRSETC, DRMRSETK
8-194

DRMRSETC
Lv.1 Details
8-195
Forcible exe of C Drum replacement mode

to C drum counter, total charging time, target Vd values for potential
Use case
dummy unit
Caution
0 to 1
Default value
0
Required time
2min
DRMRSETM, DRMRSETK
DRMRSETK
Lv.1 Details
Forcible exe of Bk Drum replacement mode

When replacement of Drum is completed within 30 minutes, warmup rotation may not be executed at power-off/on because of high
fixing temperature. In such cases, drum potential becomes unstable,
causing an image failure to occur. To prevent this symptom, this
item forcibly executes the same operation as warm-up rotation. At
this time, laser power values, etc., that were corrected according to
Bk drum counter, total charging time, target Vd values for potential
Use case
dummy unit
Caution
Use a Drum that is not close to the end of life as a dummy unit.
When using a Drum that is close to the end of life, it affects the life of
developer, etc.
0 to 1
Default value
0
Required time
2min
DRMRSETM, DRMRSETC
T-8-48
8-195
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CST
CST
8-196
COPIER > FUNCTION > CST

MF-A4R
Lv.1 Details
Reg Multi-purpose Tray A4R stdrd width

To register the standard value of A4R paper width (210mm) on the
Multi-purpose Tray.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R.
Use case
- When the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB is
replaced or a new value is registered
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4R paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so
that it fits the paper width.
The value is registered after automatic adjustment.
Caution
After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST>
CST-ADJ> MF-A4R, and write it down on the service label.
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R
MF-A6R
Reg Multi-purpose Tray A6R stdrd width
Lv.1 Details
To register the standard value of A6R paper width (105 mm) on the
Multi-purpose Tray.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A6R.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A6R paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so
Caution
CST-ADJ> MF-A6R, and write it down on the service label.
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A6R
MF-A4
Reg Multi-purpose Tray A4 standard width
Lv.1 Details
To register the standard value of A4 paper width (297 mm) on the
Multi-purpose Tray.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4 paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so that
it fits the paper width.
Caution
CST-ADJ> MF-A4, and write it down on the service label.
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4
MDK1-A4
Lv.1 Details
Reg Multi Deck (Upper) A4 standard width

Multi Deck (Upper).
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ>
MDK1-A4.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4 paper on the Multi Deck (Upper), and set the guide so that
Caution
CST-ADJ> MDK1-A4, and write it down on the service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK1-A4
MDK1-A5R
Reg Multi Deck (Upper) A5R stdrd width
Lv.1 Details
To register the standard value of A5R paper width (148.5 mm) on the
Multi Deck (Upper).
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK1A5R.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A5R paper on the Multi Deck (Upper), and set the guide so
Caution
CST-ADJ> MDK1-A5R, and write it down on the service label.
0 to 255
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MDK1-A5R
MDK2-A4
Reg Multi Deck (Middle) A4 stdrd width
Lv.1 Details
Multi Deck (Middle).
MDK2-A4.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4 paper on the Multi Deck (Middle), and set the guide so that
Caution
0 to 255
Default value
0
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CST
8-196
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING

MDK2-A5R
Lv.1 Details
Reg Multi Deck (Middle) A5R stdrd width

Multi Deck (Middle).
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A5R paper on the Multi Deck (Middle), and set the guide so
Caution
0 to 255
Default value
0
MDK3-A4
Reg Multi Deck (Lower) A4 standard width
Lv.1 Details
Multi Deck (Lower).
MDK3-A4.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4 paper on the Multi Deck (Lower), and set the guide so that
Caution
0 to 255
Default value
0
MDK3-A5R
Reg Multi Deck (Lower) A5R stdrd width
Lv.1 Details
Multi Deck (Lower).
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A5R paper on the Multi Deck (Lower), and set the guide so
Caution
0 to 255
Default value
0
8-197
CLEANING
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING
TBLT-CLN
Lv.1 Details
ITB cleaning
To execute three idle rotations of the ITB and clean the ITB.
The Process Unit forms toner patch on the ITB with 100mm interval
(for 2 rotations) by doing the operation that is the same at image
formation.
The Primary Transfer Roller comes into contact with the ITB, but the
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller is disengaged.
This mode is stopped when the last toner patch passes through the
ITB Cleaning Unit.
Use case
- When image failure occurs periodically due to the assumption of
soiled ITB
- When contacting with the ITB at the time of periodical replacement,
etc.
0 to 1
0: Stop cleaning, 1: Execute cleaning
WIRE-CLN
Cleaning of Charge Wire(1-reciprocation)
Lv.1 Details
To clean the Charging Wire of the Primary Charging Wire/Pretransfer Charging Wire simultaneously (1 reciprocation).
Use case
- When replacing the Primary Charging Assembly/Pre-transfer
charging assembly
- When replacing the Charging Wire
- When vertical lines occur on an image
TB-INSD
Cleaning inside ITB
Lv.1 Details
To execute two idle rotations of the ITB and clean inside of the ITB
and Primary Transfer Roller.
Both the Primary Transfer Roller and the Secondary Transfer Outer
Roller are engaged with ITB.
Positive/reverse bias secondary transfer high voltage is alternately
applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
After the two idle rotations of the ITB, operation stops.
Use case
- When image failure occurs periodically due to the assumption of
inside ITB or Primary Transfer Roller soiling
- When contacting with the inside of ITB at the time of periodical
replacement
T-8-49
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING
8-197
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING

BK-BNDEX
Lv.1 Details
Toner supply to Photosensitive Drum

To form the toner band on the Photosensitive Drum, and collect it
with the Drum Cleaning Blade to decrease friction between the two.
All Photosensitive Drums and the ITB perform idle rotation, and stop
after toner cleaning.
Use case
When image smear occurs due to the Drum Cleaning Blade
WIRE-EX
Cleaning of Charge Wire(5-reciprocation)
Lv.1 Details
To clean the Primary Charging Wire and the Pre-transfer Charging
Wire simultaneously (5 reciprocations).
Polish new Charging Wires to remove foreign matters or protrusions.
Use case
- When replacing the Primary Charging Assembly/Pre-transfer
Charging Assembly
- When replacing the Charging Wire
- When vertical lines occur on an image
2TR-CLN
Clean of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
Lv.1 Details
To clean paper dust adhered on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
Both the Primary Transfer Roller and the Secondary Transfer Outer
Roller are engaged to the ITB.
The Process Unit does operation that is the same at image
formation. It forms 4 toner bands which the 4 colors are laid on top of
another on the ITB.
The base voltage (Vb) calculated with the Secondary Transfer ATVC
control is applied to the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller until the
toner bands pass through, so that toner is adhered on the Secondary
After the toner bands passed, Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
cleaning control is executed (positive/reverse bias is applied every 2
rotations of the roller). Toner is adhered on the ITB.
When the toner adhered on the ITB passed through the ITB Cleaning
Unit, the operation is stopped.
Use case
- When the backside of the paper is soiled by the Secondary Transfer
Outer Roller
- When contacting with the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller at the
time of jam processing, etc.
0 to 1
0: Stop cleaning, 1: Execute cleaning
8-198
FIXING
COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING
NIP-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Check of fixing nip width

To check whether the fixing nip width is appropriate by printing.
If it is not appropriate, a fixing failure may occur.
Use case
- When replacing the fixing-related parts (fixing Roller, Pressure
Roller)
- When a fixing failure occurs
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4/LTR plain paper (75 to 90g/m2) on the main unit deck.
2) Select the cassette, and then press OK key.
Printing is started, and a sheet is automatically stopped at the fixing
nip (10 seconds) and then is automatically delivered.
3) Measure the nip width.
Default value
0
CORE-CHK
Oprtn chck:Copper Shield Plt, Core shift
Lv.1 Details
To execute cleaning of the Copper Shield Plate, and check the
operation of it.
Use case
When checking the Copper Shield Plate control
Default value
0
T-8-51
T-8-50
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING
8-198
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK
PANEL
PART-CHK
COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL
LCD-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LED-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LED-OFF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
KEY-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TOUCHCHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-199
COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK
Check of LCD Panel dot missing

To check whether there is a missing dot on the LCD Panel of the
Control Panel.
When replacing the LCD Panel
2) Check that the LCD Panel lights up in the order of white, black,
red, green and blue.
3) Press STOP key to terminate checking.
Check of Control Panel LED
To check whether the LED on the Control Panel lights up.
2) Check that the LED lights up in the order.
3) Use LED-OFF to terminate checking.
Termination of Control Panel LED check
To terminate the check of LED on the Control Panel.
During execution of LED-CHK
Check of key input
To check the key input on the Control Panel.
1) Select the item and press the key on the Control Panel.
2) Check that the input value is displayed.
3) Cancel the selection to terminate checking.
Adj of coordinate pstn of Touch Panel
To adjust the coordinate position on the Touch Panel of the Control
Panel.
2) Press the nine + keys in sequence.
CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Specification of operation Clutch

To specify the Transfer Cleaning Clutch (CL1) to operate.
When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation
1, and then press OK key.
1 to 7
1: Deck Pickup Clutch (CL1)
2: Multi Deck (Upper) Pickup Clutch (CL2)
3: Multi Deck (Upper) Pullout Clutch (CL5)
4: Multi Deck (Middle) Pickup Clutch (CL3)
5: Multi Deck (Middle) Pullout Clutch (CL6)
6: Multi Deck (Lower) Pickup Clutch (CL4)
7: Multi Deck (Lower) Pullout Clutch (CL7)
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL-ON
CL-ON
Operation check of Clutch
Lv.1 Details
To start operation check of the Transfer Cleaning Clutch (CL1).
During operation, ON/OFF is repeated with an interval of 3 seconds.
Use case
When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation
Adj/set/operate method 1) Drive the ITB and Drum (COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK>
MTR > 13)
3) Check the gear of the Transfer Cleaning Assembly.
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> MAIN-DRV
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL
Supplement/memo
Remove the Inner Cover so that the Clutch can be checked visually.
T-8-52
8-199

FAN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Specification of operation Fan

To specify the Fan to operate.
When replacing the Fan/checking the operation
Enter the value, and then press OK key.
1 to 23
1: Pre-fixing Feed Suction Fan (FM1)
2: Primary Charging Suction Fan (FM2)
3: Primary Charging Exhaust Fan (FM3)
4: Developing/Pre-transfer Charging Fan (FM4)
5: Color Cleaning Fan (FM5)
6: Fixing Heat Fan (FM6)
7: IH Power Supply Fan (FM7)
8: Power Supply Fan 1 (FM8)
9: Power Supply Fan (FM9)
10: Delivery Heat Fan 1 (FM10)
14: Pressure Roller Cooling Fan (Front) (FM15)
15: Pressure Roller Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM16)
16: Hopper Cooling Fan (FM18)
17: Hopper Cooling Suction Fan (FM22)
18: Anti-adhesion Fan 1 (FM23)
19: Anti-adhesion Fan 2 (FM24)
20: Decurler Suction Fan (FM30)
21: Decurler Side Exhaust Fan (FM31)
22: Decurler Lower Exhaust Fan (FM32)
23:Pre-Fixing Feed cooling Fan (FM27)
Default value
1
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FAN-ON
FAN-ON
Operation check of Fan
Lv.1 Details
To start operation check of the Fan specified by FAN.
Use case
When replacing the Fan/checking the operation
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> FAN
8-200
MTR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Specification of operation Motor

To specify the Motor to operate.
When replacing the Motor/checking the operation
1 to 21
1: Duplex Left Motor (M32)
2: Left Deck Vertical Path Motor (M41)
3: Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor (M36)
4: Registration Motor (M34)
5: Pre-fixing Feed Motor (M35)
6: Delivery Motor (M37)
7: Reverse Motor (M38)
8: Left Deck Pickup Motor (M42)
9: Right Deck Pickup Motor (M43)
10: Cassette 3 Pickup Motor (M44)
11: Cassette 4 Pickup Motor (M45)
12: Deck Pickup Motor (M1)
13: Decurler Feeding Motor 1 (M51)
14: Decurler Feeding Motor 2 (M52)
15: Cassette Vertical Path Motor (M39)
16: Right Deck Vertical Path Motor (M40)
17: Left Deck Vertical Path Motor (M41)
18: Vertical Path Upper Feed Motor (M002)
19: Vertical Path Lower Feed Motor (M003)
20: Horizontal Path Feed Motor (M004)
21: Deck Pickup Motor (M001)
Default value
1
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR-ON
MTR-ON
Operation check of Motor
Lv.1 Details
To start operation check of the motor specified by MTR.
The operation automatically stops after operation of 5 seconds.
Use case
When replacing the Motor/checking the operation
Caution
While the Toner Container Drive Motor is active, be sure to remove
the Toner Container. Otherwise, toner leakage may occur in the
machine.
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR
8-200
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

SL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Specification of operation solenoid

To specify the Solenoid to operate.
When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation
1 to 10
1: Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL2)
2: Not Used
3: Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid (SL4)
4: Right Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL5)
5: Left Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL6)
6: Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid (SL7)
7: Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid (SL8)
8: Multi Deck (Upper) Pickup Solenoid (SL9)
9: Multi Deck (Middle) Pickup Solenoid (SL10)
10: Multi Deck (Lower) Pickup Solenoid (SL11)
Default value
1
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL-ON
SL-ON
Operation check of solenoid
Lv.1 Details
To start operation check of the solenoid specified by SL.
The operation stops after ON for 0.5 sec => OFF for 10 sec => ON
for 0.5 sec => OFF for 10 sec => ON for 0.5 sec.
Use case
When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL
T-8-53
CLEAR
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
ERR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DC-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
R-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
JAM-HIST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
ERR-HIST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
PWD-CLR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
8-201
Clear of error code

To clear error codes (E000, E001, E002, E003, E717, E719).
At error occurrence
0
RAM clear of DC Controller PCB
To clear the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB.
When clearing RAM data of the DC Controller PCB
- Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before
execution. After execution, enter necessary setting value.
- The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned
OFF/ON.
0
RAM clear of Reader Controller PCB
To clear the RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB.
When clearing RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB
- Before execution of this item, be sure to output the service mode
setting values by P-PRINT. After execution, enter necessary setting
values.
OFF/ON.
None
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
Clear of jam log
To clear the jam log.
When clearing the jam log
0
Clear of error code log
To clear the error code log.
When clearing the error code log
0
Clear of system administrator password
To clear the password of the system administrator set in the user
mode.
When clearing the password of the system administrator
0
8-201

ADRS-BK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Clear of address book

To clear the address book data.
When clearing the address book data
Caution
The address book data is cleared after the main power switch is
turned OFF/ON.
CNT-MCON
Clear of Main Controller service counter
Lv.1 Details
To clear the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB.
Use case
When clearing the service counter counted by the Main Controller
PCB
None
COPIER> COUNTER
CNT-DCON
Clear of DC Controller service counter
Lv.1 Details
To clear the service counter (FIN-STPR, FIN-PDDL, SADDLE, STPL)
counted by the DC Controller PCB.
Use case
When clearing the service counter counted by the DC Controller
PCB
Default value
0
COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-2> FIN-STPR, FIN-PDDL, SADDLE,
STPL
OPTION
Clear of service mode setting VL(OPTION)
Lv.1 Details
To return the value specified in service mode (OPTION) to the default
value (value at the time of RAM clear).
Caution
- This item is executed for the data on the Main Controller PCB, DC
Controller PCB and Reader Controller PCB.
Default value
0
8-202
MMI
Lv.1 Details
Clear of user mode setting value

To clear the Settings/Registration setting values.
Preferences (Excluding values for Paper Type Management
Settings)
Function Settings
Destination Settings (Excluding values for Address Lists)
Management Settings (Excluding values for Department ID
Management)
Use case
When clearing various setting values of user mode
Caution
The setting value is cleared after the main power switch is turned
OFF/ON.
Default value
0
MN-CON
RAM clear of MNCON PCB SRAM Board
Lv.1 Details
To clear the RAM data of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board.
All data on the SRAM Board is initialized.
Use case
When clearing RAM data of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board
The machine is automatically rebooted.
Caution
- Forwarding Settings, Settings/Registration (Preferences),
Adjustment/Maintenance, Function Settings, Set Destination,
Management Settings, TPM Settings, etc. are deleted.
- Inform the user that all images in Inbox will be deleted and get
approval for it.
- Since the file management information is initialized, images on the
HDD cannot be read.
OFF/ON.
- If MN-CON is executed while a login application other than Default
Authentication is activated, any symptom occurs. (e.g. The login
screen is not displayed.) In this case, switch the login application to
Default Authentication once so that it returns to normal state.
CARD
Clear of card ID-related data
Lv.1 Details
To clear the data related to the card ID (department).
Use case
When clearing the data related to the card ID
Caution
The data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
8-202

W-TN-CLR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Clear of waste toner full alarm & error

To clear the Waste Toner Container full alarm/error.
The counter value is automatically cleared by replacing the Waste
Toner Container
with a new one when the Waste Toner Container full alarm/error
occurs.
Default value
0
CA-KEY
Deletion of CA certificate and key pair
Lv.2 Details
To simultaneously delete the CA certificate and key pair which are
additionally registered by the user.
Use case
When a service person replaces/discards the device
2) Check that OK is displayed.
Caution
- Unless this item is executed at the time of replacement/discard
of the device, the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally
registered by the user remain in the HDD, which is a problem in
terms of security.
- Do not execute this item carelessly because the CA certificate
and key pair which are additionally registered are deleted. If they
are deleted mistakenly, they need to be again registered by the
user. If no CA certificate and key pair are additionally registered,
the machine condition becomes the same as the one at the time of
factory shipment.
- When NG is displayed in 2), there is a possibility that deletion was
not executed. In this case, surely execute the deletion by initializing
the HDD, etc.
ERDS-DAT
Initialization of E-RDS SRAM data
Lv.1 Details
To initialize the SCM value of the Embedded-RDS stored in the
SRAM. SCM values are ON/OFF of E-RDS, servers port number,
servers SOAP URL, and communication schedule with the server
(how often the data is acquired), etc.
The value set by COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGWPORT, RGW-ADR, COM-LOG is cleared.
Use case
When clearing the setting values of RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR, and
COM-LOG
Caution
The method of using the SRAM in E-RDS differs depending on the
Bootable version. Therefore, unless the SRAM data is cleared at the
time of version upgrade, data inconsistency occurs.
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR,
COM-LOG
8-203
KEY-CLR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
USBM-CLR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
JV-CACHE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FXTX-CLR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-CLR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
FIN-MCON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Encrypt key clear of HDD Encrypt Board

To clear the encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board (Security
Kit) for replacement.
Processing is executed at the time of installation of the Encryption
Board, and a new encryption key is generated.
When replacing the encryption key for the HDD Encryption Board
2) Check that OK is displayed.
Since all data in the HDD becomes unavailable when executing this
item, be sure to initialize the HDD after turning OFF/ON the main
power switch.
Initialize USB MEAP priority rgst info
To initialize the registered ID data retained in the OS field by calling
the API provided by the OS.
When a failure occurs in USB MEAP priority registration
Cache clear of JAVA application
To clear the cache information used by JAVA application.
When initializing the JAVA application
Clearing fax job information
To clear fax job information stored on SRAM.
Use this mode to restore from E611-0001.
When E611-0001 occurs
Uninstallation of language files
To uninstall the language files other than Japanese and English files.
After execution, the machine automatically reboots.
When installing a new language file while there are 7 installed
language files
2) Select the firmware in which the necessary language is included
by SST, and perform downloading.
Screen is displayed in English after the execution, so switch the
language.
Clearing Finisher info in controller
To clear the Finisher information which the Main Controller retains.
After execution, set the Delivery Tray again in user mode (Settings/
Registration> Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings>
Output Tray Settings).
When switching to another type of Finisher in the field
T-8-54
8-203
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R
MISC-R
8-204
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R

SCANLAMP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
1PSCLB-A
Lv.1 Details
Light-up check of LED

Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Correct Color Mismatch.
When replacing the LED
DADF 2 faces color differ crrct (front)
To acquire scanning data on the front side in order to correct the
color difference between the front and back side at the time of duplex
stream reading.
A significant color difference may occur between the front and back
side of the image scanned on DADF caused by variations in the light
source of the lamp and changes in durability. Such a color difference
is corrected by executing 1PSCLB-B following 1PSCLB-A.
Use case
When a significant color difference occurs between the front and
back side caused by variations in the light source of the lamp and
changes in durability
Caution
Be sure not to turn OFF/ON the power after OK is displayed by
1PSCLB-A.
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> 1PSCLB-B
1PSCLB-B
DADF 2 faces color differ crrct (back)
Lv.1 Details
To acquire scanning data on the back side in order to correct the
color difference between the front and back side at the time of duplex
stream reading.
A significant color difference may occur between the front and back
side of the image scanned on DADF caused by variations in the light
source of the lamp and changes in durability. Such a color difference
is corrected by executing 1PSCLB-B following 1PSCLB-A.
Use case
When a significant color difference occurs between the front and
back side caused by variations in the light source of the lamp and
changes in durability
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set the document used by 1PSCLB-A on DADF, so that the front
side is faced down and the cyan image is placed at the left rear side.
Caution
Be sure not to turn OFF/ON the power after OK is displayed by
1PSCLB-A.
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> 1PSCLB-A
1PCLBSET
Lv.1 Details
DADF 2 faces color differ crrct ref side

To set which side of the front or back side should be the reference
side when correcting a color difference at the time of duplex stream
reading.
The correction result is reflected after executing the following
operation: specify the reference side, execute a series of color
difference correction processing, and then turn OFF/ON the power.
Use case
Before starting correction of color difference in DADF duplex printing
0 to 2
0: N/A, 1: Front side, 2: Back side
Default value
0
1PCLBUDR
DADF 2 faces clr differ crrct lowr limit
Lv.1 Details
Colors which do not need to be corrected are sometimes corrected
as a result of correction of color difference in duplex stream reading.
To keep colors which do not need to be corrected, the correction
amount is adjusted so that the effect of correction is weakened.
The result is reflected when correction of color difference is executed
again after the setting is made.
When 1: ON is specified, unnecessary correction is not executed,
but an expected effect may not be obtained for other colors.
Use case
If the color difference occurs on the colors which didnt have any
difference before correction, adjust the correction amount before
executing the color difference correction again.
Caution
Expected correction result may not be obtained.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
1PCLBOVR
DADF 2 faces clr differ crrct upr limit
Lv.1 Details
Excessive correction is sometimes made when correcting color
difference in duplex stream reading.
To control excessive correction, adjust the correction amount to
weaken the effect of correction.
The result is reflected when correction of color difference is executed
again after the setting is made.
When 1: Weak control or 2: Strong control is specified, excessive
correction is not made, but an expected effect may not be obtained
for other colors.
Use case
If the color difference occurs on the colors which didnt have any
difference before correction, adjust the correction amount before
executing the color difference correction again.
Caution
Expected correction result may not be obtained.
0 to 2
0: No control, 1: Weak control, 2: Strong control
Default value
0
8-204

CLM-PLTN
Lv.1 Details
Sampling of color copyboard read MTF VL

The MTF value for the Reader Unit is sometimes displaced from the
factory setting value depending on the condition at transportation/
storage. If the machine is installed without correcting the value, it
may cause an image failure such as moire. Therefore, it is necessary
to readjust the MTF value by reading the MTF adjustment chart at
installation.
When color copyboard reading is performed, the controller performs
sampling of the MTF value. This value is set in COPIER> ADJUST>
CCD> MTF2-Mx, MTF2-Sx.
Use case
At installation
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set the MTF chart on the Copyboard Glass.
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-M1 to 12, MTF2-S1 to 12
BWM-PLTN
Sampling of B&W copyboard read MTF value
Lv.1 Details
installation.
When B&W copyboard reading is performed, the controller performs
sampling of the MTF value. This value is set in COPIER> ADJUST>
CCD> MTF2-Mx, MTF2-Sx.
Use case
At installation
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set the MTF chart on the Copyboard Glass.
CLM-DF1
Sampling of clr front stream read MTF VL
Lv.1 Details
installation.
When color front side stream reading is performed, the controller
performs sampling of the MTF value. This value is set in COPIER>
ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-Mx, MTF2-Sx.
Use case
At installation
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set the MTF chart on the ADF.
3) Perform color front side stream reading with the MTF chart set on
the ADF. (CLM-DF1)
8-205
BWM-DF1
Lv.1 Details
Sampling of B&W front stream read MTF VL

installation.
When B&W front side stream reading is performed, the controller
performs sampling of the MTF value. This value is set in COPIER>
ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-Mx, MTF2-Sx.
Use case
At installation
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set the MTF chart on the ADF.
3) Perform B&W front side stream reading with the MTF chart set on
the ADF. (BWM-DF1)
CLPLT-EN
Color copyboard read MTF VL initial set
Lv.1 Details
To return the MTF value for color copyboard reading to the factory
setting value.
Since overwriting is performed with the backup data retained in the
Reader Controller PCB, the MTF value obtained by sampling of the
MTF chart becomes disabled.
When CLM-PLTN is executed, the value is automatically set to 1.
When the value is set to 0, the value adjusted with CLM-PLTN
becomes disabled and returned to the factory setting value.
Use case
When returning the MTF value to the initial setting value upon users
request in case that a sufficient quality level cannot be obtained on
the front side of a color image even performing a fine adjustment
with CLM-TGT after adjusting the MTF value with CLM-PLTN.
0 to 1
0: Factory setting value, 1: Adjustment value at installation
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> CLM-PLTN, CLM-TGT
8-205

BWPLT-EN
Lv.1 Details
B&W copyboard read MTF value initial set

To return the MTF value for B&W copyboard reading to the factory
setting value.
When BWM-PLTN is executed, the value is automatically set to 1.
When the value is set to 0, the value adjusted with BWM-PLTN
Use case
the front side of a B&W image even performing a fine adjustment
with BWM-TGT after adjusting the MTF value with BWM-PLTN.
0 to 1
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> BWM-PLTN, BWM-TGT
CLDF1-EN
Clr front stream read MTF VL initial set
Lv.1 Details
To return the MTF value for color front side stream reading to the
factory setting value.
When CLM-DF1 is executed, the value is automatically set to 1.
When the value is set to 0, the value adjusted with CLM-DF1
Use case
the front side of a color image even performing a fine adjustment
with CLM-TGT after adjusting the MTF value with CLM-DF1.
0 to 1
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> CLM-DF1, CLM-TGT
8-206
BWDF1-EN
Lv.1 Details
B&W front stream read MTF VL initial set

To return the MTF value for B&W front side stream reading to the
factory setting value.
When BWM-DF1 is executed, the value is automatically set to 1.
When the value is set to 0, the value adjusted with BWM-DF1
Use case
the front side of a B&W image even performing a fine adjustment
with BWM-TGT after adjusting the MTF value with BWM-DF1.
0 to 1
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> BWM-DF1, BWM-TGT
CLM-TGT
Fine adjustment of color MTF value
Lv.1 Details
To perform the filter processing inside of the Reader Controller so
that the MTF value measured by CLM-PLTN/CLM-DF1/CLM-DF2
becomes 55% or lower of the value.
When 1 is specified, the MTF correction filter is calculated again,
and the MTF value becomes 50% or lower of the value (the image
becomes foggy). The backup MTF filter correction coefficient is
updated.
Use case
When decreasing the MTF value (to make the image foggy) upon
users request (moire, incorrect judgment)
0 to 1
0: 55%
1: 50% (The image becomes foggy.)
Default value
0
8-206
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P

BWM-TGT
Lv.1 Details
Fine adjustment of B&W MTF value

To perform the filter processing inside of the Reader Controller so
that the MTF value measured by BWM-PLTN/BWM-DF1/BWM-DF2
becomes 55% or lower of the value.
When 1 is specified, the MTF correction filter is calculated again,
and the MTF value becomes 50% or lower of the value (the image
becomes foggy). The backup MTF filter correction coefficient is
updated.
Use case
When decreasing the MTF value (to make the image foggy) upon
users request (moire, incorrect judgment)
0 to 1
0: 55%
1: 50% (The image becomes foggy.)
Default value
0
SCANLMP2
Light-up check of LED Lamp Unit: back
Lv.1 Details
To light up the LED Lamp Unit for back side, which is placed in the
ADF, and check whether there is a missing block or no lighting in
LED.
Use case
When replacing the LED Lamp Unit for back side
RD-SHPOS
Shift to fixed pstn of Reader Scan Unit
Lv.2 Details
To move the Reader Scanner Unit to the position where it is fixed
when moving.
When moving the Reader after installation, the Reader Scanner
Unit may move and get damage. By moving the Scanner Unit to
the specified position and securing it in place with a screw before
moving, damage can be prevented.
Use case
When moving the Reader after installation
Caution
When the machine is moved after Reader is installed, be sure to shift
the Scanner Unit to the specific position to be fixed and then tighten
the screws. If the Scanner Unit is not fixed, it might cause damage
when the machine is moved.
T-8-55
MISC-P
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
P-PRINT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
MAIN-DRV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
HIST-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
TRS-DATA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
USER-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
LBL-PRNT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
8-207
Output of service mode setting value

To print the service mode setting value.
Before executing the CLEAR service mode, etc.
1) Place paper in Cassette 1.
Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper.
Adj of user mode Drum cleaning time
To adjust the duration to execute cleaning of the Photosensitive
Drum to be performed by the user mode.
The Photosensitive Drum and ITB perform idle rotation for the
specified period of time without high voltage applied.
- Upon users request
- When image smear occurs
press OK key.
When the period is too long, flip occurs on the Drum Cleaning Blade
or the blade is getting close to the end of life.
sec
Output of jam and error log
To print the jam log and error log.
When printing the jam/error log
Moving memory reception data to Inbox
To move the data received in memory to Inbox.
When moving the data received in memory to Inbox
Output of user mode list
To print the user mode list.
When printing the user mode list
Output of service label
To print the service label.
When printing the service label
8-207

PRE-EXP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
D-PRINT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
1ATVC-EX
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ENV-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
ITB-ROT
1TR-ROT
ATR-EX
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Light-up of Pre-exposure LED

To light up the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Y/M/C/Bk).
Open the Front Cover, and check that the LEDs light up visually. It
automatically stops after all light up.
When checking that the Pre-exposure LEDs light up
Drum memory may occur, so be sure not to execute this item
frequently.
Output of service mode (DISPLAY)
To output items displayed by DISPLAY in the service mode .
Items output by P-PRINT, LBL-PRNT and HIST-PRT, and ALARM
are excluded.
When printing the print job log with detailed information
Execute of primary transfer ATVC control
To execute the primary transfer ATVC control to optimize the primary
transfer voltage.
- At occurrence of the primary transfer failure
- When replacing the Primary Transfer Roller and ITB
Temp&hmdy/surface temp of Fix Roll
To output data of the temperature and humidity inside the machine/
surface temperature of the Fixing Roller as a log.
When figuring out the past temperature inside the machine/fixing
temperature information at problem analysis
Execution of ATR contro
To execute the ATR control for all colors.
- At occurrence of E020
- At operation check
INTR-EX
Lv.2 Details
Use case
PJH-P-1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
PJH-P-2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
PT-LPADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
AT-IMG-X
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-208
Execution of warm-up rotation

To execute the regular warm-up rotation performed first time for the
day excluding the Photosensitive Drum idle rotation and Charging
Wire cleaning.
- When restarting potential control after execution of COPIER>
OPTION> IMG-FIX> PO-CNT
- When the D-max control condition is changed
Detail info of print job log: 100 jobs
To print the print job history for the latest 100 jobs with detailed
information.
In the case of less than 100 jobs, the history of all print jobs is
printed.
Detail info of print job log: all jobs
To print the history of all print jobs stored in the machine with detailed
information (for maximum 5000 jobs).
The difference between PJH-P-1 and this item is only the number of
jobs printed.
Adj of Patch Sensor light intensity
To execute correction of patch intensity and correction of
background
When replacing the Patch Sensor
COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-SENS-P, P-SENS-S, P-LED-DA
COPIER> ADJUST> DENS> ALF-C
Exe image position correction control
To execute a series of operation of image position correction control
at parts replacement.
Image position correction control is usually executed by the printer
engine at the specified timing according to operating condition and
environmental variation.
This service mode is linked with following user mode: Adjustment/
Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Correct Color Mismatch.
- When removing the Drum Unit
- When releasing the ITB pressure
8-208
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM

WTN-OFST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
USBH-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
DISCHG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SPIT-EX
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DRUM-TH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj of Waste Toner Full Sensor

To adjust offset of Waste Toner Full Sensor.
- When replacing the Waste Toner Full Sensor
- When replacing the DC Controller PCB
Output of USB device information report
To output information of the connected USB device in the form of a
report.
Execution of discharge current control
To execute the discharging current control.
When image failure occurs due to uneven YMC discharge.
COPIER> DISPLAY> HV-STS> PRISMP-Y, PRISMP-M, PRISMP-C,
PRIMACV-Y, PRIMACV-M, PRIMACV-C, PRIACI-Y, PRIACI-M,
PRIACI-C
Execution of toner ejection
To supply new toner by ejecting the toner in the Developing
Assembly.
Use this mode when the image density is low or coarseness occurs
on halftone image after the machine is left for a long time.
When the image density is low or coarseness occurs on halftone
image after the machine is not used for a long time (e.g. summer
vacation)
Drum Thermopile operation check
To check if the Drum Thermopile detects the surface temperature of
the Drum correctly.
The operation status and the surface temperature are displayed.
When replacing the Drum Thermopile
FX-HPRS
Lv.2 Details
Set Fixing Roll position: transportation

To secure the Fixing Roller in the position to prevent it from being
damaged at transportation.
Use case
At transportation
SYSTEM
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
DOWNLOAD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
CHK-TYPE
Lv.1 Details
Use case

Supplement/memo
HD-CHECK
Lv.1 Details
Caution
HD-CLEAR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
T-8-56
8-209
Shift to download mode

To make the machine enter the download mode and wait for a
command.
Perform downloading by SST or USB.
At upgrade
2) Perform downloading by SST or USB.
Do not turn OFF/ON the power of the device during downloading.
HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK exe partition No.
To specify the partition number of the HDD to execute HD-CLEAR/
HD-CHECK.
When executing HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK
0 to 65535
0: Entire HDD
1,2,3,4: Image data storage area
5: Universal file storage area
6,7,8: Universal file storage area (temporary file)
9: PDL file storage area
10: Program file storage area
11: MEAP application
12: Address book/transfer setting
13: MEAP stored data
14: System log storage area
15: Advanced Box area
16: Delivery server area
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> HD-CLEAR, HD-CHECK
Universal file: Management information of user setting data, various
log data, PDL spool data, and image data, etc.
Entire HDD check and recovery
To check the entire HDD and execute recovery processing.
Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE.
During operation: %, When operation finished normally: OK!
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE
Initialization of specified partition
To initialize the HDD partition specified by CHK-TYPE.
When initializing the HDD partition
Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE.
First 2 digits: Progress ratio (%, Returns to 00 at termination)
Last 2 digits: Result at termination (00: Normally finished, Others:
Abnormally finished)
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE
8-209

DEBUG-1
Lv.2 Details
8-210
Setting of log type and save timing

To set the types of logs to be stored and the timing to store logs in
the HDD.
Logs are used to analyze the cause of a problem.
Use case
Caution
Do not use this at the normal service. Change the setting value in
accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division.
0 to 3
0: Save PLOG at detection of Reboot/Exception
1: Save PLOG at detection of Reboot/Exception/Encode
2: Save SUBLOG at detection of Reboot/Exception/Encode
3: Save SUBLOG in overwrite mode at detection of Reboot/
Exception/Encode
Default value
3
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DEBUG-2(LEVEL2)
Supplement/memo
PLOG can be printed by COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM>
DEBUG-2.
SUBLOG cannot be printed. (It should be uploaded from SST.)
DEBUG-2
Output of log saved on HDD
Lv.2 Details
To print the PLOG saved in HDD by COPIER> FUNCTION>
SYSTEM> DEBUG-1. (A4: Approx. 20 sheets)
SUBLOG is not printed. It should be uploaded from SST or USB.
Use case
When printing PLOG
Caution
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DEBUG-1(LEVEL2)
CDS-UPDT
[Not used]
DSRAMBUP
Lv.2 Details
To back up the setting data in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB.
Use case
When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the
time of problem occurrence
Caution
During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic
adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period
of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and the old
data is deleted.
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES
DSRAMRES
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
RSRAMBUP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
RSRAMRES
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
REBOOT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
DELLNGFL
R-REBOOT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Restore of DC Controller PCB SRAM

To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of
the DC Controller PCB.
When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the
data is deleted.
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
Backup of Reader Controller PCB SRAM
To back up the setting data in SRAM of the Reader Controller PCB.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the
data is deleted.
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES
Restore of Reader Controller PCB SRAM
To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of
the Reader Controller PCB.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the
data is deleted.
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
Reboot of host machine
To reboot the host machine.
For customization
None
[Not used]
Reboot of host machine: remote
To reboot the host machine by remote control via RUI.
When rebooting the host machine by remote control
T-8-57
8-210
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
OPTION
8-211
DH-SW
Lv.2 Details
FNC-SW
PO-CNT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ON/OFF of potential control function

To set ON/OFF of potential control function.
When replacing the Potential Sensor
Caution
Be sure to set the value back to 1 (ON) after servicing.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
MODEL-SZ
Fixed magnifictn & DADF orgnl dtct size
Lv.1 Details
To set the fixed magnification ratio display and the original detection
size with DADF.
It is set automatically at the time of installation of the Reader
according to the location.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 3
0: AB configuration (6R5E) for Japan, 1: Inch configuration (5R4E)
for North/Middle/South America, 2: A configuration (3R3E) for
Europe, 3: AB/Inch configuration (6R5E) for Asia, Oceania, South
America
Default value
SCANSLCT
ON/OFF of scan area calculate function
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of the function to calculate scanning area from the
specified paper size.
When the paper size is larger than the original size, selecting ON
reduces productivity because the scanning area gets larger.
Use case
When matching the scanning area with the paper size
0 to 1
0: OFF (calculated from the detected original size)
1: ON (calculated from the specified paper size)
Default value
0
ON/OFF of auto D-half control

To set ON/OFF of auto D-half control.
Execution interval can be set by COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX>
INTROT-2.
Use case
- When D-half-related failure occurs/when identifying the cause of
D-half-related failure
Caution
Be sure to set the value back to 1 (ON) after servicing.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> DH-TMG
SENS-CNF
Setting of original detection size
Lv.2 Details
To set original detection size according to AB configuration/Inch
configuration/A configuration.
Select 1 (Inch configuration) for Inch configuration machine or 2 (A
configuration) for A configuration machine.
Use case
0 to 1
0: AB configuration, 1: Inch configuration
Default value
0
CONFIG
Set country/regn/lang/location/ppr size
Lv.1 Details
To set the country/region, language, location, paper size
configuration for multiple system software in HDD.
Use case
Upon users request
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the setting item.
2) Switch with +/- key, and then press OK key.
XX YY.ZZ.AA
XX: Country/region
JP: Japan, US: USA, GB: Great Britain, FR: France, DE: Germany,
IT: Italy, AU: Australia, SG: Singapore, NL: Netherlands, KR: Korea,
CN: China, TW: Taiwan, ES: Spain, SE: Sweden, PT: Portugal, NO:
Norway, DK: Denmark, FI: Finland, PL: Poland, HU: Hungary, CZ:
Czech Republic, SI: Slovenia, GR: Greece, EE: Estonia, RU: Russia,
SK: Slovakia, RO: Romania, HR: Croatia, BG: Bulgaria, TR: Turkey,
TH: Thailand, VN: Vietnam
YY: Language (Fixed; e.g. ja: Japanese)
ZZ: Location (Fixed; e.g. 00: CANON)
AA: Paper size configuration
(00: AB configuration, 01: Inch configuration, 02: A configuration, 03:
Inch/AB configuration)
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ
8-211

W/SCNR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
ORG-LGL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
ORG-LTR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
ORG-B5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Setting of Reader Unit installation

To set installation of the Reader Unit.
1 (Installed) is automatically selected once the Reader Unit is
detected at the start of the machine.
When installing/removing the Reader Unit
0 to 1
According to the setting at shipment
Special paper size set in DADF mode: LGL
To set the size of special paper (LGL configuration) that cannot be
recognized in DADF stream reading mode.
- When picking up special paper size original from DADF
0 to 10
0: LEGAL-R, 1: FOOLSCAP-R, 2: OFICIO-R, 3: FOLIO-R, 4:
Australian FOOLSCAP-R, 5: Ecuador OFICIO-R, 6: Bolivia
OFICIO-R, 7: Argentine OFICIO-R, 8: Argentine LEGAL-R, 9:
Government LEGAL-R, 10: Mexico OFICIO-R
0
Special paper size set in DADF mode: LTR
To set the size of special paper (LTR configuration) that cannot be
recognized in DADF stream reading mode.
0 to 3
0: LETTER, 1: EXECUTIVE, 2: Argentine LETTER, 3: Government
LETTER
0
Special paper size set in DADF mode: B5
To set the size of special paper (B5) that cannot be recognized in
DADF stream reading mode.
0 to 1
0: B5, 1: Korean government office paper
0
8-212
INTROT-1
Lv.1 Details
Set ini/last rotation auto adj exe intvl

To set the paper interval to execute process auto adjustment (ACR
toner ejection control) at initial/last rotation.
As the value is incremented by 1, the interval is increased by 1
sheet.
Use case
When matching the use environment of the user
Caution
Increasing the number of sheets (widening the interval) causes
higher frequency of image failure.
50 to 1000
Unit
sheet
Default value
100
INTROT-2
Set of last rotation auto adj exe intvl
Lv.1 Details
To set the paper interval to execute auto adjustment (D-max control,
D-half control) at last rotation.
As the value is incremented by 1, the paper interval is increased by 1
sheet. When 0 is specified, the control is not executed.
Use case
When matching the use environment of the user
Caution
Increasing the number of sheets (widening the interval) causes
higher frequency of image failure.
0 to 20000
0: No control
Unit
sheet
Default value
15000
COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> W-CLN-P
INTROT-T
Clr displace crrct:horz scan after start
Lv.1 Details
Color displacement may occur right after starting a job (1 to 5 sheets)
due to the ITB Unit specific variation.
When the setting value is changed, write start position of each color
is adjusted according to the color displacement correction level only
right after starting a job (1 to 5 sheets), so color displacement can be
corrected.
Use case
When color displacement in the horizontal scanning direction occurs
Caution
Do not use the setting value 4 to 10. Use 0 to 3 in the normal
operation.
0 to 10
0: Color displacement correction level 0
4 to 10: Not used
Default value
2
8-212

MODELSZ2
Lv.2 Details
Ppr size dtct global support in bookmode

To set ON/OFF for global support of document size detection in
copyboard reading mode.
Use case
Upon users request (mixed media original with AB/Inch
configuration)
Caution
- The Document Size Sensor (Photo Sensor) is additionally required
to correctly detect the document size when the original consists of
mixed media (AB/Inch configuration).
0 to 1
0: Detected with detection size according to location, 1: Detected
with AB/Inch mixed media.
Default value
0
SVMD-ENT
Setting of entry method to service mode
Lv.2 Details
To set the way to get in service mode to prevent information leak.
Use case
As needed
0 to 1
0: [Settings/Registration] - Pressing [2] and [8] at the same time [Settings/Registration]
1: [Settings/Registration] - Pressing [4] and [9] at the same time [Settings/Registration]
Default value
0
FXWRNLVL
Set No.of fed sht FxBltUnt warn dspl lvl
Lv.2 Details
To set the threshold value for the number of fed sheets to display the
life alarm message of Fixing Belt Unit.
Use case
When switching the warning level of the Fixing Belt Unit
0 to 3
0: Error display threshold value
1: The value 20,000 smaller than the error display threshold value
Default value
2
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> FX-U-ERR
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> FXMSGSW2
CKT-LANG
[Not used]
8-213
KSIZE-SW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Set of Chinese paper (K-size) support

To set to detect/display the Chinese paper (K size paper: 8K, 16K).
When using K-size paper
Caution
Go through the following: COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > MODELSZ; and if MODEL-SZ is 0: AB configuration, this mode is enabled.
0 to 1
0: Not supported, 1: Supported
Default value
JP:0, USA:0, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:1, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ
Supplement/memo
8K paper: 270 x 390 mm, 16K paper: 270 x 195 mm
ORG-A4R
Special paper size set in DADF mode: A4R
Lv.2 Details
To set the size of special paper (A4R) that cannot be recognized in
DADF stream reading mode.
When picking up A4R size original from the DADF of the Inch/AB
configuration models, the size is converted into the specified size so
that an image can be formed properly.
Use case
0 to 1
0: A4R, 1: FOLIO-R
Default value
0
PDF-RDCT
PDF reduction set at forwarding
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to reduce the image for transmission when converting
the image received by IFAX into PDF for e-mail/file transmission.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: With the current setting, 1: Image reduction
Default value
0
8-213

REBOOTSW
Lv.2 Details
Restart setting at E240 error occurrence

To set whether to reboot in the case of E240 error.
In the case of E240 error, the machine is automatically rebooted due
to the possibility of continuous operation of the drive system while
the spooled print job is cleared.
Print job can be obtained if selecting the setting not to reboot.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
- Be sure to get approval from the user by telling the possibility of
continuous operation of the drive system in the case of E240 error.
0 to 1
0: Rebooted, 1: Not rebooted
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
E240 error: Communication error between the Main Controller and
the DC Controller.
SJB-UNW
Reserve upper limit of secure print job
Lv.2 Details
To set the upper limit for the number of reserved jobs in secure print
job.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: 50 jobs, 1: 90 jobs
Default value
0
WEBV-SW
ON/OFF of WebDAV function
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of WebDAV function.
OFF setting can reduce memory use of the machine. In addition, the
following WebDAV-related items are hidden in user mode.
- Settings/Registration> Set Destination> Register Destinations>
Register New Dest.> File> Protocol> WebDAV
- Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Send> Common
Settings> Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX
Use case
When reducing memory use of the machine
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value
0
Related user mode
Settings/Registration> Set Destination> Register Destinations>
Register New Dest.> File> Protocol> WebDAV
Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Send> Common Settings>
Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX
Supplement/memo
WebDAV function is equipped as standard with the machine.
8-214
CARD-RNG
Lv.2 Details
Card number setting (department number)

To set the number of cards (departments) that can be used with the
Card Reader.
Use case
When setting the number of cards (departments)
1 to 1000
Default value
1000
COMP-PRT
Img proc memory allocate at job conflict
Lv.2 Details
When making 2 or more composition prints (page number, number
of copies, stamp, date, booklet, watermark), memory for image
processing is allotted preferentially to print jobs.
Meanwhile, memory for image processing of scan/send and PDL
input becomes insufficient depending on the options and document
size, and these jobs might be unprocessed until composition prints
are finished.
If these jobs are interfered each other, image processing can be put
forward little by little by allotting memory equally to each job.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Print priority, 1: Equal allocation
Default value
0
ARCDT-SW
ON/OFF of ARCDAT control
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of ARCDAT control.
When 1: OFF is set, the result of ARCDAT control is not reflected to
LUT.
When the hue variation occurs in the case of failure value displayed
in COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C, turn OFF the ARCDAT control once
and check the hue.
If hue variation is alleviated, analyze the cause of ARCDAT control
error (developer, Patch Sensor, etc.).
Use case
Caution
Be sure to set 0: ON again when ARCDAT control recovers.
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value
0
COPIER> DISPLAY> HT-C
8-214

SJOB-CL
Lv.1 Details
Set of scan job canceling by logout

To set whether to cancel the scan job in operation by logout of the
user.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
The job with scanning completed cannot be canceled.
0 to 1
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
Scan job: A job after the scanning operation is completed.
USB-RCNT
Auto connect set at USB device disconnct
Lv.2 Details
To set to enable/disable automatic connection when the USB device
is disconnected.
With the setting to disable automatic connection, USB device cannot
be used if disconnecting and then connecting the USB device. To
enable connection again, the power needs to be turned OFF/ON.
With the setting to enable automatic connection, reconnection is
made after disconnecting, and then connecting the USB device.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
With the setting to enable automatic connection, disconnecting of 1
area makes automatic connection of all USB devices if there is USB
hub.
0 to 1
0: No automatic connection, 1: Automatic connection
Default value
0
UNLMTBND
Over 400 binders print job support set
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to support print job that exceeds 400 binders.
With the setting to support, the machine makes prints by sharing
binders according to job attribution.
Select 1: Not supported if the user does not print job* with large
quantity of binders.
Use case
When supporting print job that exceeds 400 binders
0 to 1
0: Automatic setting (When the print server is not connected: not
supported; When the print server is connected: supported)
1: Not supported
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
* : A job that requires finishing (such as stapling) in one job. Does not
apply in the case of executing finishing with multiple sets of output.
8-215
MIBCOUNT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MEAP-PRI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
CNTR-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
W/RAID
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Scope range set of Charge Counter MIB

To set the range of counter information that can be obtained as MIB
(Management Information Base).
For customization
0 to 2
0: All charge counters are obtained, 1: Only the displayed counter* is
obtained, 2: All charge counters are not obtained
*: Counter specified by the following: COPIER> OPTION> USER>
COUNTER 1 to 6
0
COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER1 to 6
Setting of MEAP task priority
Selecting 1: ON increases MEAP task priority.
When improving processing performance of MEAP
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
1
Init of parts counter replacement timing
To return the estimated life of parts counter to the initial value.
Upon users request
1) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
0: Returned to the initial value
0
Set of HDD Mirroring Kit installation
To set installation condition of HDD Mirroring Kit.
Select 1: Installed when installing the HDD Mirroring Kit. Select 0:
Not installed when removing the HDD Mirroring Kit.
When installing/removing HDD Mirroring Kit
0 to 1
0
8-215

PSWD-SW
Lv.1 Details
Password type set to enter service mode

To set the type of password that is required to enter when getting into
service mode.
2 types are available: one for service technician and the other for
system administrator + service technician.
When selecting the type for system administrator + service
technician, enter the password for service technician after the
password entry by the users system administrator.
Use case
Upon request from the user who concerns security
0 to 2
0: No password, 1: Service technician, 2: System administrator +
service technician
Default value
0
SM-PSWD
Password setting for service technician
Lv.2 Details
To set password for service technician that is used when getting into
service mode.
Use case
When password is required to get into service mode
Caution
Be sure to select 1 or 2 for PSWD-SW in advance.
1 to 99999999
Default value
11111111
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> PSWD-SW
RPT2SIDE
Set of report 1-sided/2-sided output
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to use 1-sided or 2-sided for report output of service
mode.
Use case
When making 2-sided report output to reduce the number of output
pages
0 to 1
0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided
Default value
1
8-216
BRWS-FAV
Lv.2 Details
Set of service browser favorite register

To set whether to allow registration of favorites in the browser for
service.
When 1 is set, favorites in the browser for service can be edited, and
any URLs can be accessed.
Use case
When service engineers edit favorites in the browser for service
0 to 1
Default value
0
PSCL-MS
Set of auto gradation adjustment: Heavy
Lv.1 Details
To set at which speed (1/1 speed, 1/2 speed, or 1/3 speed) PASCAL
control and D-half control are executed at auto gradation adjustment.
When 2 is set, it is executed only for the lastly used speed only. The
time required for auto gradation adjustment is short, but switching
to another speed takes time. This is suitable for the users who
frequently use a specific paper type.
When 3 is set, it is executed for all speeds. The time required for
auto gradation adjustment is long (approx. 3 minutes), but switching
to another speed is quick. This is suitable for the users who use
various paper types.
Use case
When setting the speed according to the materials used by the user
2 to 3
2: Lastly used speed, 3: All speeds
Default value
2
DMX-DISP
ON/OFF auto grdtn adj D-max PASCAL ctrl
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to execute D-max PASCAL control at full adjustment
of auto gradation adjustment.
When 0 is set, D-max PASCAL control and PASCAL control are
executed. Four A4-size sheets are used for test prints (one for D-max
PASCAL control and three for PASCAL control).
When 1 is set, PASCAL control (gradation adjustment) only is
executed. Three A4-size sheets are used for test prints (for PASCAL
control).
Use case
When making the setting according to the usage of the user
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value
0
8-216

STND-PNL
Lv.2 Details
Set of 3-D Control Panel installation

To set whether the 3-D Control Panel is installed.
When the 3-D Control Panel is installed, set 1: Installed.
Use case
At installation of the 3-D Control Panel
0 to 1
Default value
0
INVALPDL
Disabling PDL license
Lv.1 Details
To disable the registered PDL license.
When 1: Disabled is set, PDL is disabled even if a PDL license
is registered. This is set to the machines installed at convenience
stores, which do not allow PDL to be used.
Use case
When prohibiting the use of PDL
0 to 1
0: Registered PDL license is enabled, 1: Disabled
Default value
0
IMGCNTPR
Setting of image quality mode
Lv.1 Details
To set the image quality mode.
The counter priority mode is applied when 1 is set, and the image
quality priority mode is applied when 0 is set.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Image quality priority mode, 1: Counter priority mode
Default value
JP:1, USA: 0, EUR: 1, AU: 1, CN: 1, KR 1, TW: 1, ASIA: 1
CDS-FIRM
Set to allow firmware update by admin
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to perform firmware
update linked with CDS and collection of log files.
When 1 is set, Deliver Update is added to remote UI, and Firmware
Update is added to the Register/Update Software menu of local UI.
Log files can be collected from remote UI.
Use case
When allowing the administrator to update the firmware and collect
log files
Caution
Do not use it for purposes other than collecting log files. In Japan,
the firmware cannot be updated by user. Be sure to return the value
to 0 after use.
0 to 1
Default value
EUR: 1, Other: 0
Supplement/memo
CDS: Content Delivery System
8-217
CDS-MEAP
Lv.1 Details
Set to allow MEAP installation by admin

To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to install MEAP
applications and enable iR options from CDS.
When 1: Enabled is set, Updater can be activated from the user
mode.
Use case
When allowing the administrator to install MEAP applications and
enable iR options from CDS
0 to 1
Default value
1
Supplement/memo
CDS-UGW
Set to allow firmware update from UGW
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to permit update of the firmware from the UGW
server.
When 1: Enabled is set, Updater accepts the operation from the
UGW server in cooperation with CDS.
Use case
When allowing update of the firmware from the UGW server
0 to 1
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
LOCLFIRM
Set to allow firmware update by file
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to update the
firmware from the remote UI using a local file.
This update is executed as a measure for vulnerability in emergency
situations.
Use case
When prohibiting the administrator to update the firmware using a file
0 to 1
Default value
1
RSHDW-SW
ON/OFF of remote shutdown
Lv.1 Details
A shared multi-function machine is not likely to be shut down at
power failure. Set ON/OFF of the remote shutdown function to
prevent accident.
When 1: ON is set, the machine can be shut down from the remote
shutdown menu displayed in the remote UI.
Use case
When preventing an accident at specified power-off time.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
8-217

T1HP-POS
Lv.1 Details
Set pry-trns diseng/eng pstn:initial VL

To set the engagement or disengagement position as the home
position of the Primary Transfer Rollers (Y, M, C).
When 0: Engagement position is set, the Primary Transfer Rollers
of 4 colors engage the ITB in the initial state.
When 1: Disengagement position is set, the Primary Transfer Roller
of Bk only engages the ITB in the initial state.
Set 0: Engagement position if you give priority to the first copy time
in the color mode.
Set 1: Disengagement position if you give priority to the first copy
time in the B&W mode.
Use case
Upon users request (Frequency to use color/B&W)
0 to 1
0: Engagement position, 1: Disengagement position
Default value
0
MC-FANSW
Set of Controller Cooling Fan control
Lv.1 Details
To set full speed/half speed to fan control of the Controller Cooling
Fan 1 and 2.
When 1: Full speed is set, the heat exhaust efficiency is enhanced.
Use case
- When HDD damage occurs multiple times
- When the machine is installed in a high temperature environment in
which HDD damage is likely to occur
0 to 1
0: Half speed, 1: Full speed
Default value
0
8-218
OP-FAN
Lv.2 Details
Setting of Anti-adhesion Fan airflow

In the normal sequence, the Anti-adhesion Fan is set to OFF for the
reverse delivery, and 1/1 speed for the straight delivery or 2-sided
delivery.
Set the airflow of the Anti-adhesion Fan when the delivery adhesion
occurs or the delivery stackability decreases.
Set to 1 (1/2 speed) or 2 (1/1 speed) when the delivery adhesion
occurs at the time of the reverse delivery.
Set to 1 (1/2 speed) or 3 (OFF) when the delivery stackability
decreases at the time of the straight delivery or the 2-sided delivery.
Use case
- When the delivery adhesion occurs at the time of the reverse
delivery
- When the delivery stackability is low at the time of the straight
delivery or the 2-sided delivery
press OK key.
Caution
- When changing the value from 3 to 1 or 2, the delivery stackability
decreases.
- When changing the value from 2 to 1 or 3, the delivery adhesion
may deteriorate.
0 to 3
0: Normal sequence, 1: 1/2 speed, 2: 1/1 speed, 3: OFF
Default value
0
BXNUPLOG
ON/OFF of Nup log at Inbox print
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to keep Nup log at Inbox print.
Use case
When keeping Nup log at Inbox print
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
BUSI-SW
Setting of customized function
Lv.1 Details
To set the function in accordance with the customized specification.
Use case
When installing the customized machine
0 to 1
0: Standard, 1: Customization
Default value
0
8-218

SDLMTWRN
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF cpcty warn dspl: E-mail/I-Fax TX

To set whether to display the warning message when sending data
that exceeds the upper limit value for the transmission data size via
E-mail/I-Fax.
Use case
For customization
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
Related user mode
Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Maximum Data
Size for Sending
JLK-PWSC
ON/OFF of PCAM password auth doc scan
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to scan the PCAM password authentication document
with the MEAP application.
Use case
When scanning the PCAM password authentication document
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
FAX-INT
Set FAX RX print interruption oprtn mode
Lv.2 Details
To set the mode performing interruption operation of FAX reception
print automatically.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Normal, 1: Interruption operation mode
Default value
0
8-219
PDL-Z-LG
Lv.1 Details
Setting of drawing algorithm

To switch the drawing algorithm of the iR C series and the iR-ADV C
series to obtain output the user expects.
When 0 is set, image is output as displayed on the screen by the
new algorithm adopted from the iR-ADV C Series. Pseudo outline
(boundary for processing divided graphics separately) occurred with
the iR C series does not occur. However, when PDL job with special
data structure is sent, output the user expects may not be obtained.
When 1 is set, the drawing algorithm adopted by the conventional iR
C series is used. Output equivalent to that of the iR C Series can be
obtained; however, drawing-related phenomenon occurred with the
series occurs.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
Do not use setting value 2 and 3.
0 to 3
0: Drawing algorithm of iR-ADV C series, 1: Drawing algorithm of the
conventional iR C series, 2, 3: For R&D use
Default value
0
CDS-LVUP
Set to allow CDS periodical update
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to use the periodical
update function linked with CDS.
When 1 is set, the periodical update function can be used from user
mode.
Use case
When allowing the user to use the periodical update function
Caution
Do not set 1 in Japan. The firmware cannot be updated by user.
0 to 1
Default value
Supplement/memo
8-219

AMSOFFSW
Lv.1 Details
Disabling AMS mode

Normally, AMS mode is automatically enabled when the following 2
conditions are satisfied.
- AMS license which is an iR option is installed.
- AMS-supported Login application is activated.
When disabling AMS mode, set 1.
For North/Middle/South America and for Europe, the default is 1.
When enabling AMS mode, set 0.
Use case
- When disabling AMS mode
- When enabling AMS mode (for North/Middle/South America and for
Europe)
Adj/set/operate method 1) Check that ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is displayed in
Check Counter > Check Device Configuration. (If it is displayed, it
means that AMS mode is enabled.)
4) Check that ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is not displayed
in Check Counter > Check Device Configuration. (If it is not
displayed, it means that AMS mode is disabled.)
0 to 1
0: AMS mode enabled, 1: AMS mode disabled
Default value
JP: 0, USA: 1, EUR: 1, AU: 0, CN: 0, KR: 0, TW: 0, ASIA: 0
COPIER> OPTION> LCNS-TR> ST-AMS
Related user mode
Settings/Registration > Management Settings > License/Other > Use
ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Supplement/memo
AMS: Access Management System
When the device is in AMS mode, ACCESS MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM is displayed in Check Counter > Check Device
Configuration.
UA-OFFSW
ON/OFF of unified auth function
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of the Unified Authentication function.
Set the value to 0 when not preferring to use the Unified
Authentication function because of security concern.
Use case
Upon users request (not to use the Unified Authentication function)
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value
0
8-220
MIB-NVTA
Lv.1 Details
RFC-compatible character stringMIB write

As default, MIB object which NVT-ASCII can be written exists in
order to link with LUI entry value. This violates RFC order, so a
problem like garbled 2-byte characters may occur in the SNMP
monitoring system, such as the 3rd vendors MPS.
Whether non-RFC-compatible character strings are written in MIB
can be set using this mode.
When 1 is set, only the character strings which are strictly compatible
with RFC are written. (Writing operation is executed from the SNMP
manager.) LUI is not linked.
Use case
Upon users request (operation with RFC-compatible system)
0 to 3
0: Compatible in a conventional manner, 1: RFC-compatible, 2 to 3:
Not used
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
RFC: Document of internet-related technical standards
NVT-ASCII: Network Virtual Terminal-ASCII
MIB-EXT
ON/OFF of link with Ex-Cont on network
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to link with External Controller on network (HewlettPackard Co.).
Use case
When linking with External Controller of Hewlett-Packard Co.
0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: ON, 2: Not used
Default value
0
SVC-RUI
Enabling of RUI function for servicing
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to enable the RUI function for servicing (not provided
to end users).
When 0 is set, the RUI function is disabled.
When setting the value other than 0, RUI function is enabled. The
value entered becomes password to use the RUI function.
Use case
When preferring to use the import function of background image file
of main menu
0 to 65535
Default value
0
8-220

LCDSFLG
Lv.1 Details
Enabling of local CDS server

To set whether to use the local CDS server.
When CDSFIRM is 1, this setting is enabled.
Use case
When using the local CDS server
Caution
When CDSFIRM is 1, this setting is enabled.
0 to 1
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM
Related user mode
Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software>
Software Management Setting> Setting
Supplement/memo
When local CDS is used, iW EMC/MC device firmware update plugin is required.
STNDBY-B
Setting of standby mode
Lv.1 Details
To set the continu of standby mode
In standby mode, the Fixing Roller is heated and rotated while it is
in the contact state at waiting time so it is possible to output with the
minimum FCOT.
Use case
Upon users request (FCOT)
Caution
By setting a value other than 0 when the machine is not frequently
used, the life may become shorter than the estimated life.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: Continu the standby mode
Default value
0
STNDBY-A
Setting of operation at sleep
Lv.1 Details
To set the sleep operation when pressing the Control Panel Power
Switch.
Normally, the entire machine shifts to sleep mode.
When 1 is set, only the LCD backlight is turned off.
Use case
Upon users request (FCOT)
Caution
By setting 1 when the machine is not frequently used, the life may
become shorter than the estimated life.
0 to 1
0: The entire machine is in sleep mode, 1: Only the LDC backligh is
turned off
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > STNDBY-B
8-221
BXSHIFT
Lv.1 Details
Setting of binding at 0mm binding margin

To set whether to judge the job as a job without binding when
storing a PDL job in Inbox while the binding margin is set to 0.
By setting the binding margin to 0 mm while 0 is set, the job is
processed as without binding. Booklet in Options on the Inbox
screen can be also used.When 1 is set, it is judged as with
binding even the binding margin is 0 mm so Booklet, which has an
exclusive relationship with binding, cannot be used.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Without binding, 1: With binding
Default value
0
STRT-SEQ
Set of image quality control at startup
Lv.1 Details
To set the threshold value for image quality control to be executed at
startup when there is any changes in an environment.
+: Likely to execute image quality control
-: Less likely to execute image quality control
Use case
When prioritizing productivity over image quality stability, or when
prioritizing image quality stability over productivity
Caution
Do not set -3 without permission from the QA Center. Otherwise, a
fixing failure may occur.
-4 to 4
-4: Not used, -3: 30-second startup (not execute image quality
control), -2: Lowest threshold value, -1: Low threshold value, 0:
Default, 1: Moderate threshold value, 2: High threshold value, 3:
Highest threshold value, 4: Execute image quality control every time
Default value
0
8-221

ENV-SEQ
Lv.1 Details
Set image auto adj at environment change

To set auto adjustment of image which is executed according to the
environment changes.
Use case
prioritizing image quality stability over FCOT
Caution
When 5 is set, a fixing failure may occur.
0 to 5
0: Execute control due to environment change
1: Execute control even environment change is small
2: Execute control only when environment change is very large
3: Execute control other than image adjustment due to environment
change (execute color displacement correction)
4: Execute control other than image adjustment and color
displacement correction due to environment change (without using
toner)
5: Not execute control
Default value
0
HOME-SW
Set screen displayed with Main Menu key
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display the main menu screen or the screen
registered as the startup screen when pressing Main Menu key.
Use case
Upon users request (to change the startup screen)
0 to 1
0: Main Menu screen, 1: Screen registered as the startup screen
Default value
0
NO-LGOUT
Display/hide of logout button
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display or hide [Logout] button.
When 0 is set, [Logout] button is displayed on the screen, and logout
with the ID key is enabled. (Normal)
When 1 is set, [Logout] button is not displayed, and logout with the
ID key is disabled.
Use case
Upon users request (for customization, etc.)
0 to 1
0: Display, 1: Hide
Default value
0
8-222
T-DLV-BK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Set of Bk-toner level displaying alarm

To set the Bk-toner level to display absence of toner message.
When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the
usage status
press OK key.
Caution
Since toner level is calculated based on the developing supply count,
some errors may occur.
0 to 40
Unit
%
Default value
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-CL
T-DLV-CL
Set Y/M/C-toner level displaying alarm
Lv.2 Details
To set the Y/M/C-toner level to display absence of toner message.
Use case
When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the
usage status
press OK key.
Caution
Since toner level is calculated based on the developing supply count,
some errors may occur.
0 to 40
Unit
%
Default value
5
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-BK
JM-ERR-D
Handling 0CAx jam as an error: DCON
Lv.2 Details
To display 0CAF jam as the error E996-0CAF.
By handling the jam as an error, the machine stops, so that loss of
the log can be prevented.
Be sure to enable the service mode at the users site where 0CAF
jam occurs.
After that, if the error E996-0CAF occurs, the log which has been
backed up can be obtained.
Use case
When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0CAF jam
0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > JM-ERR-R
8-222

JM-ERR-R
Lv.2 Details
Handling 0071 jam as an error: RCON

To display 0071 jam as the error E996-0071.
By handling the jam as an error, the machine stops, so that loss of
the log can be prevented.
Be sure to enable the service mode at the users site where 0CAx
jam occurs.
After that, if the error E996-0CAx occurs, the log which has been
backed up can be obtained.
Use case
When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0071 jam
0 to 1
0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > JM-ERR-D
LOW-SEQ
Setting of low speed control
Lv.1 Details
To set the low speed control.
Use case
prioritizing image quality stability over productivity and FCOT
0 to 5
0: Not execute low speed control, 1: Image quality top priority, 2 to 5:
Not used
Default value
0
TMP-C4-1
Adj of initial rotation temp: coat ppr4
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the initial rotation temperature (Print 0) when using coated
paper 4.
As the value is incremented by 1, the temperature changes by 5 deg
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Set a negative value when wrinkles occur, and set a positive value
when a fixing failure occurs.
Use case
When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, or an image
failure occurs
Caution
When -2 or less is set, a fixing failure may occur.
-4 to 4
-4: -20 deg C, -3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1:
+5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C, 3: +15 deg C, 4: +20 deg C
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-223
DSC-RPT
Lv.2 Details
Prevention of low temperature fogging

To shift to low temperature (10 deg C or lower) fogging prevention
mode.
Setting the setting value to 1 is effective for preventing fogging, but
moire may occur.
Use case
When fogging occurred at a low temperature (10 deg C or lower)
Caution
When the setting value is set to 1, moire may occur at a low
temperature (10 deg C or lower).
0 to 1
0: Normal, 1: Low temperature fogging prevention mode
Default value
0
ASLPMAX
Set auto sleep shift time maximum value
Lv.1 Details
Set auto sleep shift time maximum value
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: 4 hours
1: 60 minutes
Default value
JP:0 USA:0 EUR:1 AU:0 CN:0 KR:0 TW:0 ASIA:0
T-8-58
8-223
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW
DSPLY-SW
8-224
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

UI-COPY
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/hide of copy screen

To set whether to display or hide the copy function.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
UI-BOX
Display/hide of Inbox screen
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the Inbox function.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: No Inbox function (Storing is not available even with PDL to
Inbox.)
1: Inbox function is active
2: Inbox function is active (with limitation; Storing is available with
PDL to Inbox despite no display on the Control Panel/remote UI)
Default value
1
Related user mode
Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings>
Mail Box
The setting value is changed to 2 when turning OFF the foregoing
user mode, and the value is changed to 1 when turning ON the mode
at power-off/on.
As the setting value of this service mode is changed, the setting
value of the foregoing user mode is also changed.
UI-SEND
Display/hide of send screen
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the SEND function.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
UI-FAX
Display/hide of FAX screen
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the FAX function.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
NWERR-SW
Lv.2 Details
OFF/ON of network-related error display

To set OFF/ON of network-related error message display.
When setting 0: OFF while the machine is not connected to
network, the error message Check the network connection. is not
displayed.
Use case
When using the machine as a copy machine
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1: Normal model, 0: Self-copy model
UISW-DSP
ON/OFF of user screen switch display
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of the switch to change the standard screen and
simple screen for the users.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
T-CRG-SW
ON/OFF of Toner Cntner rplce user mode
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the Toner Container replacement
screen in user mode.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
Related user mode
Adjustment/Maintenance> Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner
8-224

FXMSG-SW
Lv.2 Details
ON/OFF of Fixing Assy rplce warning dis

To set whether to display the warning prompting to replace the Fixing
Assembly on the Control Panel when the Fixing Assembly reaches
its life.
Criteria for judging the life differ, depending on the setting value of
FXMSGSW2.
FXMSGSW2 = 0: Fixing Assembly Motor current value + Fixing
Roller rotation time
FXMSGSW2 = 1: Items above + Total number of sheets fed on
Fixing Roller
Use case
When displaying the Fixing Assembly replacement message
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> FXMSGSW2
COPIER> DISPLAY> ALARM-2
COPIER> DISPLAY> FIXING>FX-MTR2 to 8, FX-U-TM1
COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT
ANIM-SW
Not Used
UI-PRINT
Display/hide of print job screen
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the print job screen.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
IMGC-ADJ
Dis/hide of img adj item in user mode
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display or hide the item relating to image
adjustment in user mode.
When selecting 1: Display, detailed image adjustment procedure
will be displayed only for the duplicated paper specified with the
following settings: Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Type
Management Settings.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
Related user mode
Preferences> Paper Settings> Set Paper Type Management
8-225
UI-RSCAN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
UI-EPRNT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
UI-WEB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
UI-HOLD
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
Display/hide of remote scan screen

To set whether to display or hide the remote scan screen on the
Control Panel.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
1
Display/hide of extended print screen
To set whether to display or hide the extended print screen (print
screen for print server).
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
1
Display/hide of Web browser screen
To set whether to display or hide the Web browser screen.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
1
Display/hide of hold job screen
To set whether to display the hold job screen on the Control Panel.
Upon users request
0 to 3
0: Hide (when POD function is OFF and JAL is OFF)
1: Display (when POD function is ON and JAL is OFF)
2: Hide (when POD function is OFF and JAL is ON)
3: Hide (when POD function is ON and JAL is ON)
1
POD function: JDF + HOLD functions
JAL function: A function to save the print result as a thumbnail.
8-225

TNR-WARN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ON/OFF of toner warning display

To set ON/OFF of toner warning display.
When preferring to hide the alarm until the toner runs out
0 to 1
0: Display, 1: Hide
Default value
1
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> T-LW-LVL
RMT-CNSL
ON/OFF of MEAP console screen
Lv.1 Details
Selecting 1: ON enables to obtain log for Function Composer on
console screen.
Use case
When obtaining log for Function Composer
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
UI-SBOX
ON/OFF of Advanced Box screen display
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel.
Use case
When not displaying the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
EUR: 0, Other: 1
Related user mode
Advanced Box / Network
at power-off/on.
UI-MEM
ON/OFF of memory media screen display
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of the memory media screen display on the Control
Panel.
Use case
When not displaying the memory media screen on the Control Panel
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
Related user mode
Memory Media
at power-off/on.
8-226
UI-NAVI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dis/hide of Tutorial
To set whether to display or hide Tutorial in the main menu.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
FCOT-DSP
ON/OFF of FCOT priority mode in usermode
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display Color/Black Priority for First Print Time in
the user mode.
When 1 is set, the home position of the Primary Transfer Rollers for Y,
M, C can be switched. (Equivalent to COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW>
T1HP-POS.)
Use case
When setting Color/Black Priority for First Print Time in the user
mode
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> T1HP-POS
Related user mode
Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Color/Black Priority for
First Print Time
FXMSGSW2
ON/OFF of Fix Belt Uni life criteria
Lv.2 Details
To set whether the total number of sheets fed on Fixing Roller is
included as one of the criteria for judging the message indication of
the Fixing Assembly replacement.
When FXMSG-SW is 1, this setting is enabled.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> FXMSG-SW
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> FXWRNLVL
SLS-PTH
[Not used]
UI-CUSTM
ON/OFF of custom menu screen display
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of the custom menu screen display on the Control
Panel.
Use case
When not displaying the custom menu screen on the Control Panel
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
8-226

CNTCNFSW
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF of Counter Check screen display

To set whether to display the Counter Check screen.
When 1 is set, the Counter Check screen can be displayed. The
setting value automatically returns to 0 (OFF) when the screen is
closed.
Use case
When checking the counter at servicing
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>BUSI-SW
SCT-BTN
Set No. of shortcut buttons upper limit
Lv.1 Details
To set an upper limit on the number of shortcut buttons that appear
at the top of the Control Panel screen.
The settings for shortcut buttons are made in Setting of Buttons at
the Top of the Screen which is displayed by pressing the advanced
menu button on the Main Menu screen.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
When 1 is set, the number of shortcut buttons increases from 2 to 4.
However, the buttons become smaller in width, and the number of
characters that can be displayed decreases.
The character strings displayed are specified by the MEAP
application allocated to the shortcut button, and may not be fully
displayed in some cases. In this case, a measure such as decreasing
the number of characters on the MEAP application side needs to be
taken.
0 to 1
0: 2 buttons, 1: 4 buttons
Default value
0
USER-DSP
Display/hide of login user name
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display the name of the user who logs in to the
machine on the screen of the Control Panel (upper left area).
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: Hide, 1: Display(User define), 2:Display(User name)
Default value
0
8-227
SDTM-DSP
Lv.1 Details
Display/hide of auto shutdown shift time

To set whether to display or hide auto shutdown shift time menu in
user mode.
Use case
When displaying or hiding auto shutdown shift time menu
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
Related user mode
Settings/Registration> Preferences> Time/Energy Settings> Auto
Shutdown Time
PRCLNSW
Fixing Pressure Roll clean mssg dspl sw
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display the message prompting to clean the Fixing
Pressure Roller.
The timing to display the message can be adjusted in
COPIER>OPTION>CLEANING>PR-CLN.
Use case
When a soiled image occurs because toner adheres to the Fixing
Pressure Roller
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> PR-CLN
T-8-59
8-227
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX
IMG-FIX
8-228
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

FX-WUT
Lv.2 Details
Set of Fixing Assembly warm-up time

To set the warm-up time of the Fixing Assembly, which is performed
first time for the day.
Use 0: Initial value in the normal operation.
Extend the time as needed when a fixing failure occurs first time for
the day.
Use case
- When a fixing failure occurs first time for the day
- In the environment of 15 deg C or lower
- When using media out of the specifications
0 to 4
0: Initial value, 1: Initial value + 30 seconds, 2: Initial value + 60
seconds, 3: Initial value + 120 seconds, 4: Initial value + 180
seconds
Unit
sec
Default value
0
TMP-P1-1
Adj of Plain ppr 1 print temperature 1
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the print temperature 1 for Plain 1.
Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs, and set a negative
value when a separation failure or wrinkles occur.
When an image failure occurs, adjust appropriately.
Use 0 (initial value) in the normal operation.
Use case
When a fixing failure, a separation failure, wrinkles or an image
failure occurs
Caution
When -3 or less is set, a fixing failure might occur.
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-P1-2
Lv.2 Details
Plain ppr1ini rotn temp, print temp 2&3

To adjust the initial ration temperature and print temperature 2 and 3
for Plain 1.
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-P2-1
Adj of plain ppr 2 print temperature 1
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the print temperature 1 for Plain 2.
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-P2-2
Plain ppr2 ini rotn temp, print temp 2&3
Lv.2 Details
for Plain 2.
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-228

TMP-H1-1
Lv.2 Details
Adj of heavy ppr 1 print temperature 1

To adjust the print temperature 1 for Heavy 1.
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-H1-2
Heavy ppr1 ini rotn temp, print temp 2&3
Lv.2 Details
for Heavy 1.
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-H2-1
Lv.2 Details
Set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs.
In addition, use this mode when an image failure or deterioration of
gloss occurs.
Use case
When a fixing failure, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss
occurs
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-229
TMP-H2-2
Lv.2 Details

To adjust the initial rotation temperature, print temperature 2 and 3
for Heavy 2.
gloss occurs.
Use case
occurs
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-H3-1
Lv.2 Details
gloss occurs.
Use case
occurs
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-H3-2
Lv.2 Details
for Heavy 3.
gloss occurs.
Use case
occurs
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-229

TMP-H4-1
Lv.2 Details

gloss occurs.
Use case
occurs
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-H4-2
Lv.2 Details
for Heavy 4.
gloss occurs.
Use case
occurs
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-C1
Coat ppr1 ini rotn temp, print temp 1-3
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the initial rotation temperature and print temperature 1 to 3
for Coated 1 which paper weight is customized to 106 to 128g/m2.
Set a negative value when wrinkles occur.
gloss occurs.
Use case
When wrinkles, an image failure, or deterioration of gloss occurs
-2 to 2
-2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +5 deg C, 2: +10 deg C
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-230
TMP-C2
Lv.2 Details

To adjust the initial rotation temperature, print temperature 1 to 3 for
Coated 2.
gloss occurs.
Use case
occurs
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-C3
Lv.2 Details
Coated 3.
gloss occurs.
Use case
occurs
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-C4
Lv.2 Details
Coated 4.
gloss occurs.
Use case
occurs
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-230

TMP-THIN
Lv.2 Details
Thin ppr ini rotn temp, print temp 1-3

Thin Paper.
Set a negative value when wrinkles or separation failure occurs, and
set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs.
gloss occurs.
Use case
When wrinkles, a separation failure, a fixing failure, an image failure,
or deterioration of gloss occurs
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-OHT
Transp ini rotn temp, print temp 1-3
Lv.2 Details
Transparency.
gloss occurs.
Use case
occurs
-2 to 2
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-231
DWN-TMP
Lv.2 Details
Adj of down sequence temp threshold VL

To adjust the threshold value of the temperature at which the
machine goes into the down sequence.
As the value is smaller, the machine is less likely to enter the down
sequence.
When -4 is set, the down sequence actually becomes OFF.
Use case
When making adjustments according to the environment and media.
Conditions in which the machine is likely to go into the down
sequence (the center temperature is likely to be lowered): 500 sheets
or more of continuous prints in small size, LL or lower temperature
environment, input voltage lower than the rated voltage
-3 to 3
-3: -9 deg C, -2: -6 deg C, -1: -3 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +3 deg C, 2:
+6 deg C, 3: +9 deg C
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-R1-1
Adj rcycl paper 1 print temperature 1
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the print temperature 1 for Recycled 1.
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-231

TMP-R2-1
Lv.2 Details
Adj rcycl paper 2 print temperature 1

To adjust the print temperature 1 for Recycled 2.
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-R1-2
Adj rcycl1 ini rotn temp, print temp 2&3
Lv.2 Details
for Recycled 1.
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-R2-2
Adj rcycl2 ini rotn temp, print temp 2&3
Lv.2 Details
for Recycled 2.
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-232
FX-ERRSW
Lv.2 Details
ON/OFF of Fixing Roller life judgment

To set whether to judge the life of the Fixing Roller using the number
of fed sheets.
The number of fed sheets is counted by COPIER> COUNTER>
DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U.
When 1 is set, FX-U-ERR (error display) is enabled.
Use case
When enabling the judgment of the Fixing Roller life
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> FX-U-ERR
FX-U-ERR
Set Fix Roller life error thresholdVL
Lv.2 Details
To set the threshold value for the number of fed sheets which an
error indicating that the Fixing Roller reaches its life is displayed
when the life of the Fixing Roller is judged by the number of fed
sheets.
The number of fed sheets is counted by COPIER> COUNTER>
DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U.
When FX-ERRSW is 1, this setting is enabled.
Use case
When enabling the judgment of the Fixing Roller life
1 to 4
1: 250 K, 2: 300 K, 3: 350 K, 4: 400 K
Default value
3
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> FX-ERRSW
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> FXWRNLVL
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> FXMSG-SW, FXMSGSW2
LOW-NS
ON/OFF of silent mode at shift to copy
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to activate the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan (FM6) in
silent mode when shifting from standby mode to copy mode.
When shifting from standby mode to copy mode, noise occurs
because the rotation speed of the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan is
switched from 40% to 70%.
When 1 is set, the noise is alleviated by changing the timing of
switching the fan rotation speed (silent mode).
Use case
Upon users request (alleviation of noise when shifting to copy mode)
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
8-232

FX-WAIT
Lv.2 Details
Change of fixing initial rotation time

To set the initial rotation time according to the temperature condition
of the Fixing Assembly.
When 0 is set, initial rotation starts once a job is received.
When setting a value other than 0, a job is stopped until difference
of detected temperatures of the Fixing Main Thermistor and the Sub
Thermistor falls within the certain range. If it does not fall within the
range after 60 seconds have passed, a job is started.
Use case
When wrinkles or warp on the trailing edge occurs
Caution
With this setting, initial rotation time becomes longer.
0 to 3
0: Not execute initial rotation
1: Stop a job until temperature difference between the edge and
center becomes within 5 deg C
Default value
0
TMPC1A-2
Adj coated ppr 1A print fix ctrl temp
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the print fixing control temperature (Print 1 to 5) when using
coated paper 1A.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
When wrinkles, a fixing failure, a separation failure, an image failure,
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-233
TMPC1B-2
Lv.2 Details
Adj coated ppr 1B print fix ctrl temp

coated paper 1B.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMPC1C-2
Adj coated ppr 1C print fix ctrl temp
Lv.2 Details
coated paper 1C.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-233

TMP-C2-1
Lv.2 Details

To adjust the initial rotation temperature (Print0) when using coated
paper 2.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-C2-2
Adj coated ppr 2 print fix ctrl temp
Lv.2 Details
coated paper 2.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-234
TMP-C3-1
Lv.2 Details

paper 3.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMP-C3-2
Lv.2 Details
coated paper 3.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-234

TMP-C4-2
Lv.2 Details

coated paper 4.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMPC5A-1
Adj of initial rotation temp: coat ppr5A
Lv.2 Details
paper 5A.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-235
TMPC5A-2
Lv.2 Details
Adj coated ppr 5A print fix ctrl temp

coated paper 5A.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMPC5B-1
Adj of initial rotation temp: coat ppr5B
Lv.2 Details
paper 5B.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-235

TMPC5B-2
Lv.2 Details
Adj coated ppr 5B print fix ctrl temp

coated paper 5B.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMPC5C-1
Adj of initial rotation temp: coat ppr5C
Lv.2 Details
paper 5C.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-236
TMPC5C-2
Lv.2 Details
Adj coated ppr 5C print fix ctrl temp

coated paper 5C.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMPOHT-1
Adj initial rotation temp: transparency
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the initial rotation temperature (Print 0) when using
transparency.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-236

TMPOHT-2
Lv.2 Details
Adj transparency print fix ctrl temp

transparency.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
FX-CU-P1
Adj Copper Shield Plate shft pstn: pln 1
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the shift position of the Copper Shield Plate when using
plain paper 1.
The setting is applied to all paper sizes.
Use case
When overheating, wrinkles, or an image failure occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
-4 to -3: -6 mm, -2: -3 mm, -1: -1 mm, 0: 0 mm, 1: +1 mm, 2: +3 mm,
3 to 4: +6 mm
Unit
mm
Default value
0
FX-CU-P2
Adj Copper Shield Plate shft pstn: pln 2
Lv.2 Details
plain paper 2.
Use case
Caution
-4 to 4
-4 to -3: -6 mm, -2: -3 mm, -1: -1 mm, 0: 0 mm, 1: +1 mm, 2: +3 mm,
3 to 4: +6 mm
Unit
mm
Default value
0
8-237
FX-CU-R1
Lv.2 Details
Adj Copper Shield Plate shft pstn:rcycl1

recycled paper 1.
Use case
Caution
-4 to 4
-4 to -3: -6 mm, -2: -3 mm, -1: -1 mm, 0: 0 mm, 1: +1 mm, 2: +3 mm,
3 to 4: +6 mm
Unit
mm
Default value
0
FX-CU-R2
Adj Copper Shield Plate shft pstn:rcycl2
Lv.2 Details
recycled paper 2.
Use case
Caution
-4 to 4
-4 to -3: -6 mm, -2: -3 mm, -1: -1 mm, 0: 0 mm, 1: +1 mm, 2: +3 mm,
3 to 4: +6 mm
Unit
mm
Default value
0
FX-CU-TN
Adj Copper Shield Plate shft pstn: thin
Lv.2 Details
thin paper.
Use case
Caution
-4 to 4
-4 to -3: -6 mm, -2: -3 mm, -1: -1 mm, 0: 0 mm, 1: +1 mm, 2: +3 mm,
3 to 4: +6 mm
Unit
mm
Default value
0
8-237

FX-CU-OT
Lv.2 Details
Cu Plt shft pstn:excpt pln1/2,rcycl1,thn

paper other than plain paper 1, plain paper 2, recycled paper 1, and
thin paper.
Use case
Caution
-4 to 4
-4 to -3: -6 mm, -2: -3 mm, -1: -1 mm, 0: 0 mm, 1: +1 mm, 2: +3 mm,
3 to 4: +6 mm
Unit
mm
Default value
0
WEB-PRS
Set Heat Soaking Roller engagement tmg
Lv.2 Details
To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which the Heat
Soaking Roller is engaged.
While it is in engagement state, the Edge Fan is turned ON.
Use case
When overheating occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
-4: Not used, -3: 0 sheet, -2: 5 sheets, -1: 15 sheets, 0: 27 sheets, 1:
55 sheets, 2: 90 sheets, 3: 150 sheets, 4:Not used
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
WEB-TMP
Adj Heat Soaking Roller eng threshold VL
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the threshold value of the edge temperature of the Fixing
Roller to which the Heat Soaking Roller is engaged.
When the detected temperature of the Fixing Sub Thermistor
exceeds the threshold, the Heat Soaking Roller is engaged.
Use case
-4 to 4
+5 deg C, 2 to 4: +10 deg C
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-238
EF-TMP11
Lv.2 Details
Set Edge Fan ON condition: initial rotn

To set the condition to turn ON/OFF the Edge Fan at initial rotation.
becomes higher than that of the Fixing Main Thermistor for a certain
level, the Edge Fan is turned ON. At this time, the Heat Soaking
Roller is not engaged.
When the temperature difference becomes a certain level or below,
the Edge Fan is turned OFF.
Use case
When overheating, warp, or an image failure occurs
Caution
With this setting, a fixing failure may occur.
0 to 3
0: OFF
1: ON when the temperature difference is 25 deg C or more, and
OFF when the temperature difference is 20 deg C or less
OFF when the temperature difference is 10 deg C or less
3: ON when the temperature difference is 5 deg C or more, and OFF
when the temperature difference is 0 deg C or less
Default value
0
EF-TMP21
Edg Fan ON cndtn:nrrw ppr outpt,temp dif
Lv.2 Details
To set the condition to turn ON/OFF the Edge Fan when outputting
paper which width is 215.9 mm or less.
level, the Edge Fan is turned ON.
When the temperature difference becomes below a certain level, the
Edge Fan is turned OFF.
Use case
Caution
-2 to 2
-2: ON when the temperature difference is 15 deg C or more, and
OFF when the temperature difference is less than 10 deg C
-1: ON when the temperature difference is 20 deg C or more, and
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-238

EF-TMP22
Lv.2 Details
Edg Fan ON cndtn:nrrw ppr outpt,edg temp

paper which width is 215.9 mm or less.
becomes a certain level or higher, the Edge Fan is turned ON.
When the detected temperature becomes below a certain level, the
Use case
Caution
-1 to 1
-1: ON when the detected temperature is 220 deg C or higher, and
OFF when the detected temperature is lower than 210 deg C
0: ON when the detected temperature is 230 deg C or higher, and
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
EF-TMP23
Edg Fan ON cndtn:wide ppr outpt,edg temp
Lv.2 Details
paper which width is larger than 215.9 mm.
becomes a certain level or higher, the Edge Fan is turned ON.
When the detected temperature becomes below a certain level, the
Use case
Caution
-1 to 10
-1: ON when the detected temperature is 230 deg C or higher, and
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
DWN-TMP2
Adj Thrmstr temp threshold: dwn seq shft
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the threshold value of the detected temperature of the
Thermistor to shift to down sequence.
The setting is applied regardless of paper type or paper size.
Use case
Caution
-3 to 3
-3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0 to 3: 0 deg C
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-239
IHOFFTMP
Lv.2 Details
Adj Thrmstr temp threshold: IH power OFF

Thermistor to turn OFF the IH.
Use case
Caution
-3 to 3
-3: -15 deg C, -2: -10 deg C, -1: -5 deg C, 0 to 3: 0 deg C
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
FX-L-CHG
Adj of target temp: pressure temperature
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the target temperature according to the pressure
temperature.
Use case
When a mottled image (color unevenness) occurs
Caution
-3 to 3
-3: -9 deg C, -2: -6 deg C, -1: -3 deg C, 0: 0 deg C, 1: +3 deg C, 2:
+6 deg C, 3: +9 deg C
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
WEB-FEED
Adjustment of Fixing Web feed amount
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the feed amount of the Fixing Web in pulse.
Increase the value when soiled back, offset, or web chattering
occurs.
Use case
When soiled back, offset, or web chattering occurs
Caution
As the value is larger, the Fixing Web consumption is increased. As
the value is decreased, soiled back, offset, or web chattering may
occur.
-3 to 3
-3: -30 pulses, -2: -20 pulses, -1: -10 pulses, 0: 0 pulse, 1: +10
pulses, 2: +20 pulses, 3: +30 pulses
Default value
0
8-239

COL-SHRT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
COL-LONG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
FX-MIX1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
FX-MIX2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Stby temp thrshld:s-ppr,lst rtn,prdctvty

Fixing Sub Thermistor to receive a new job at last rotation of a job
using small size paper in productivity priority mode.
When changing the waiting time after feeding small size paper
-4 to 4
+5 deg C, 2 to 4: +10 deg C
deg C
0
Stby temp thrshld: s-ppr,lst rtn,quality
Fixing Sub Thermistor to receive a new job at last rotation of a job
using small size paper in quality priority mode.
When changing the waiting time after feeding small size paper
-4 to 4
+5 deg C, 2 to 4: +10 deg C
deg C
0
Set prdctvty/qlty prrty: 1/1SPD, mix ppr
To set whether productivity priority mode or quality priority mode is to
be prioritized at 1/1 speed when papers are mixed.
When changing whether productivity priority mode or quality priority
mode is to be prioritized while papers are mixed
0 to 2
0: def, 1: Productivity priority mode, 2: Quality priority mode
0
0 to 2
0
8-240
FX-MIX3
Lv.2 Details

Use case
0 to 2
Default value
0
CF-TMP11
Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ini rotn, temp dif
Lv.2 Details
To set the condition to turn ON/OFF the Center Fan at initial rotation.
When the detected temperature of the Fixing Main Thermistor
becomes higher than that of the Fixing Sub Thermistor for a certain
level, the Center Fan is turned ON.
the Center Fan is turned OFF.
Use case
-2 to 3
-2: Default value -10 deg C
0: Default value
1: Default value +5 deg C
Default value
0
CF-TMP12
Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ini rotn, transp
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to turn ON the Center Fan for transparency at initial
rotation.
When 1 is set, the Center Fan is turned ON. When the difference
of the detected temperatures of the Fixing Main Thermistor and the
Sub Thermistor is within a certain range, or it is switched to primary
temperature control, it is turned OFF.
Use case
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
8-240

CF-TMP13
Lv.2 Details
Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ini rotn, all ppr

To set whether to turn ON the Center Fan for all paper types at initial
rotation.
When 0 is set, it is turned ON only for thin paper, plain paper 1, and
recycled paper 1.
When 1 is set, it is turned ON for all paper types.
When the difference of the detected temperatures of the Fixing Main
Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor is within a certain range, or it is
switched to primary temperature control, it is turned OFF.
Use case
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
CF-TMP14
Adj fix ctrl temp: ini rotn, Ctr Fan ON
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the fixing control temperature to turn ON the Center Fan at
initial rotation.
Use case
When a fixing failure occurs
Caution
0 to 2
0: -10 deg C, 1: -5 deg C, 2: 0 deg C
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-241
CF-TMP21
Lv.2 Details
Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ppr feed, temp dif

To set the condition to turn ON/OFF the Center Fan when paper is
fed.
level, the Center Fan is turned OFF.
the Center Fan is turned ON.
Use case
-3 to 6
When the value obtained by subtracting the detected value of the
Center Thermistor from the detected value of the Edge Thermistor
becomes the following value, the fan is turned ON/OFF.
0: Default value
Default value
0
CF-TMP22
Adj fix ctrl temp: ppr feed, Ctr Fan ON
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the fixing control temperature to turn ON the Center Fan
when paper is fed.
Use case
When uneven gloss occurs
-2 to 0
-2: -20 deg C, -1: -10 deg C, 0: 0 deg C
Default value
0
CF-TMP23
Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ppr feed, thin ppr
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to turn ON the Center Fan when feeding thin paper.
When 0 is set, it is turned OFF after a specified number of sheets
according to the paper width is fed.
When 1 is set, it is turned ON while paper is fed. When the difference
Thermistor becomes a certain level or below, it is turned OFF.
Use case
When wrinkles or warp on the trailing edge occurs(E339S)
-1 to 1
-1: OFF, 0: OFF after feeding a specified number of sheets, 1: ON
Default value
0
8-241

CF-TMP24
Lv.2 Details
Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ppr feed, plain 1

To set whether to turn ON the Center Fan when feeding plain paper 1.
Use case
-1 to 1
Default value
0
CF-TMP25
Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ppr feed, rcycl 1
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to turn ON the Center Fan when feeding recycled
paper 1.
Use case
-1 to 1
Default value
0
CF-TMP26
Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ppr feed, transp
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to turn ON the Center Fan when feeding
transparency.
When -1 is set, it is turned OFF.
When 0 is set, it is turned ON/OFF according to the setting for each
paper size.
When 1 is set, it is turned ON. When the difference of detected
temperatures of the Fixing Main Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor
becomes a certain level or below, it is turned OFF.
Use case
-1 to 1
-1: OFF
0: Based on the setting for each paper size
1: ON (Based on CF-TMP21)
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > CF-TMP21
8-242
CF-TMP27
Lv.2 Details
Set Ctr Fan ON cndtn: ppr feed, all ppr

To set whether to turn ON the Center Fan when feeding all paper
size.
When 0 is set, it is turned OFF
When 0 is set, it is turned ON/OFF according to the setting for each
paper size.
When 1 is set, it is turned ON. When the difference of detected
temperatures of the Fixing Main Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor
becomes a certain level or below, it is turned OFF.
Use case
-1 to 1
-1: OFF
0: Based on the setting for each paper size
1: ON (Based on CF-TMP21)
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > CF-TMP21
FX-CU-13
Set heat generation wid: 1st/2nd fed sht
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to set the heat generation width to 13 inches for the
first 2 fed sheets.
When 1 is set, heat is produced for the width of the paper to be fed
first.
Use case
Caution
By setting 1, waiting time may occur when papers are mixed.
0 to 1
0: 13 inches for the first 2 fed sheets, 1: Width of the first sheet to be
fed
Default value
0
FIX-MODE
Set plain paper 1print fix ctrl temp
Lv.1 Details
To set the print fixing control temperature when using plain paper 1.
When 0 is set, normal fixing temperature control mode is applied.
When a fixing failure occurs, set 1.
Use case
When a fixing failure occurs on plain paper 1
Caution
By setting 1, waiting time may occur when papers are mixed.
0 to 2
0: Normal fixing temperature control mode, 1: Increase the control
temperature 0 to 16 deg C higher than normal (depending on the
environment temperature), 2: Not used
Default value
0
8-242

FIX-RCPR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
FX-MIX4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
FX-MIX5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
FX-MIX6
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Set Fixing Assembly reciprocation ctrl

To set the details of the reciprocation control for the Fixing Assembly.
When -1 is set, reciprocation is not executed.
When 1 is set, reciprocation speed (shift amount per fed sheet) is
changed.
When alleviating the degree of scratches caused by paper edge
-1 to 1
-1: Reciprocation OFF, 0: Reciprocation ON, 1: Change the
reciprocation speed
pulse
0
Adj min wait: 1/1SPD, mix ppr, prdctvty
To adjust the minimum waiting time required for switching paper size
at 1/1 speed when papers which widths are different are mixed in
productivity priority mode.
When the uneven gloss occurs, increase the value.
When changing the waiting time
As the waiting time is shortened, warp may get worse.
-2 to 2
-2: x1/2 , -1: x2/3, 0: def, 1: x1.5, 2: x2
0
Adj min wait: 1/1SPD, mix ppr, quality
quality priority mode.
-2 to 2
-2: x1/2 , -1: x2/3, 0: def, 1: x1.5, 2: x2
0
Adj min wait: 1/2SPD, mix ppr, prdctvty
productivity priority mode.
-2 to 2
-2: x1/2 , -1: x2/3, 0: def, 1: x1.5, 2: x2
0
8-243
FX-MIX7
Lv.2 Details
Adj min wait: 1/2SPD, mix ppr, quality

quality priority mode.
Use case
Caution
-2 to 2
-2: x1/2 , -1: x2/3, 0: def, 1: x1.5, 2: x2
Default value
0
WEB-AFT
Setting of web feed interval
Lv.1 Details
To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which the web feed
operation is executed.
If more than the specified number of sheets are fed for a job which
requires web cleaning, the soiled web part is fed to bring out clean
surface of the web.
As the value is smaller, the web feed operation is executed
frequently.
Use case
When a soiled image occurs
-3 to 0
-3: 500 sheets, -2: 1000 sheets, -1: 1500 sheets, 0: 2000 sheets
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
KIN-SW1
Heat Soak Rol eng/diseng ctrl: 52-81g/m2
Lv.2 Details
To switch engagement/disengagement control of the Heat Soaking
Roller when using 52 to 81g/m2 size paper.
Use case
When leading edge of the 1st side of 2-sided is soiled for width of a
full turn of the Pressure Roller
Caution
In the case of users who perform continuous feeding frequently, the
life of the Fixing Belt may be shortened.
0: Engage/disengage the Heat Soaking Roller according to the
number fed sheets
1: Not engage the Heat Soaking Roller only at 1-sided feed
2: Always not engage the Heat Soaking Roller
Default value
0
8-243

KIN-SW2
Lv.2 Details
Heat Soak Rol eng/diseng ctrl:82-105g/m2

Roller when using 82 to 105g/m2 size paper.
Use case
Caution
number fed sheets
Default value
0
KIN-SW3
Heat Soak Rol eng/diseng ctrl:=/>106g/m2
Lv.2 Details
Roller when using 106g/m2 size paper or larger.
Use case
Caution
number fed sheets
Default value
0
TMPC1A-1
Adj of initial rotation temp: coat ppr1A
Lv.2 Details
paper 1A.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-244
TMPC1B-1
Lv.2 Details
Adj of initial rotation temp: coat ppr1B

paper 1B.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
TMPC1C-1
Adj of initial rotation temp: coat ppr1C
Lv.2 Details
paper 1C.
C.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
occurs
Caution
-4 to 4
Unit
deg C
Default value
0
8-244
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR

TMP-THN2
Lv.2 Details
Thin ppr ini rotn temp, print temp 1-3

Thin Paper.
Set a negative value when wrinkles or separation failure occurs, and
set a positive value when a fixing failure occurs.
gloss occurs.
Use case
When wrinkles, a separation failure, a fixing failure, an image failure,
-4 to 4
Default value
0
EF-AFT1
Set edge cooling mode shift temp:lst rtn
Lv.2 Details
To set the temperature to shift to edge cooling mode at last rotation.
When either the Edge Thermistor F or R detects the specified
temperature, the machine enters edge cooling mode.
Normally, when either of the Edge Thermistors detects 0: 180 deg C,
the machine enters edge cooling mode.
Use case
When a failure (wrinkle, crepe mark, paper curl with a coated paper)
occurs
This service mode is suitable for the users who make a small
quantity of prints at a time.
-2 to 4
Temperature to shit to cooling mode at last rotation.
-2: 160 deg C, -1: 170 deg C, 0: 180 deg C, 1: 190 deg C, 2: 200 deg
C, 3: 210 deg C, 4: 220 deg C
Default value
0
EF-AFT2
No. of sht for edg cool mod shft:lst rtn
Lv.2 Details
To set the number of sheets to shift to edge cooling mode at last
rotation. When it reaches the specified number, the machine enters
edge cooling mode.
Normally, when the number of sheets in a stack exceeds 0: 50
sheets, the machine enters edge cooling mode.
Use case
When a failure (wrinkle, crepe mark, paper curl with a coated paper)
occurs
This service mode is suitable for the users who make a large quantity
of prints at a time.
-1 to 5
Number of sheets to shift to edge cooling mode.
-1: 25 sheets, 0: 50 sheets, 1: 100 sheets, 2: 150 sheets, 3: 200
sheets, 4: 250 sheets, 5: 300 sheets
Default value
0
8-245
IMG-TR
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR
2TR-RVON
Lv.2 Details
ON/OFF end edge white spot crrct scrn

To set whether to display the screen to set ON/OFF of the paper
trailing edge weak bias in user mode.
When 1 is set, trailing edge white spot correction screen is displayed
in user mode. If ON is set in this screen, weak bias is applied to
the paper trailing edge, and white spots at the trailing edge are
alleviated.
Use case
Upon users request (when white spots occur at the trailing edge)
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1:ON
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> IMGC-ADJ
Related user mode
Adjustment/ Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Tail End White
Patch Correct
TR-BND1
Set ITB toner band dens: Bk plain color
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the density of ITB band in single Bk color mode.
As the value is increased, toner consumption can be reduced, but
the ITB Cleaning Blade might be flipped.
Use case
When preferring to reduce toner consumption
Caution
If the value is too large, the ITB Cleaning Blade might be flipped by
friction.
0 to 2
0: Darker
1: Normal
2: Lighter
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-TR> TR-BND2, TRCLN1-P, TRCLN2-P
TR-BND2
Set ITB toner band length:Bk plain color
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the length of ITB band in single Bk color mode.
As the value is increased, an image failure due to the ITB Cleaning
Blade can be alleviated, but toner consumption is increased.
Use case
When an image failure occurs
Caution
As the value is increased, toner consumption is increased.
0 to 2
0: 10 mm, 1: 100 mm, 2: 210 mm
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-TR> TR-BND1, TRCLN1-P, TRCLN2-P
T-8-60
8-245

TRCLN1-P
Lv.2 Details
Set ITB toner supply intvl: Bk pln color

To set the intervals at which a toner band is formed on the ITB at last
rotation in single Bk color mode.
Decrease the setting value when an image failure due to the ITB
Cleaning Blade occurs.
Use case
Caution
friction.
0 to 1000
Unit
sheet
Default value
70
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-TR> TR-BND1, TR-BND2, TRCLN2-P
TRCLN2-P
Set of ITB toner supply intvl: ppr intvl
Lv.2 Details
To set the intervals of toner supply at paper intervals in single Bk
color mode.
Use case
Caution
friction.
0 to 1000
Unit
sheet
Default value
200
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-TR> TR-BND1, TR-BND2, TRCLN1-P
ITB-TYPE
[Not used]
TR-BND3
Setting of ITB toner band length: color
Lv.2 Details
To set the length of toner band to be formed on the ITB at color.
As the value is increased, an image failure due to the ITB Cleaning
Blade can be alleviated, but toner consumption is increased.
Use case
Caution
friction.
0 to 2
0: 10 mm, 1: 100 mm, 2: 210 mm
Default value
0
8-246
TR-BND4
Lv.2 Details
Setting of ITB toner band density: color

To set the density of toner band to be formed on the ITB at color.
As the value is increased, toner consumption can be reduced, but
the ITB Cleaning Blade might be flipped.
Use case
When preferring to reduce toner consumption
Caution
As the value is increased, toner consumption is increased.
0 to 2
0: Darker
1: Normal
2: Lighter
Default value
0
TRCLN3-P
Set ITB tonr supply intvl:clr, last rotn
Lv.2 Details
To set the interval at which a toner band is formed on the ITB at last
rotation at color.
Use case
Caution
friction.
0 to 1000
Unit
sheet
Default value
70
TRCLN4-P
Set ITB tonr supply intvl:clr, ppr intvl
Lv.2 Details
To set the interval at which a toner band is formed on the ITB at
paper interval at color.
Use case
Caution
friction.
0 to 1000
Unit
sheet
Default value
200
T-8-61
8-246
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV
IMG-DEV
8-247
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV

AUTO-DH
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF of Drum clean at warm-up rotation

To set OFF/ON of the Photosensitive Drum cleaning at warm-up
rotations.
When setting 1: ON, set the cleaning time in increments of 1
second with D-CLN-TM.
Use case
When image smear occurs in an HH environment
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> D-CLN-TM
DEVL-VTH
Set low duty toner ejectn image duty VL
Lv.2 Details
To set the threshold value of the image duty, which is the condition to
perform the low duty toner ejection sequence.
When any of the average image duty of 4 colors indicates the
threshold value or below, low duty toner ejection sequence is
executed at the paper interval calculated by dividing the value
specified in DEVL-PTH by the value of threshold value - average
image duty value.
There are 5 selections for setting value and they changes
automatically depending on the inside temperature.
As the value is larger, coarseness is decreased, but productivity is
lowered and toner consumption is increased.
As the value is smaller, productivity and toner consumption are
improved, but coarseness is worsened.
Use case
While printing low duty (low image ratio) images,
- When graininess (coarseness) occurs
- When low productivity or high toner consumption is pointed out by
the user
Caution
1 to 5
The value differs depending on the inside temperature. (Following
indicates the case of below 40 deg C, 40 deg C or higher and below
42 deg C, 42 deg C or higher from the left.)
1: 1.5%, 3%, 5%
2: 2%, 3%, 5%
3: 3%, 4%, 5%
4: 5%, 5%, 10%
5: 1%, 2%, 3%
Default value
2
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> DEVL-PTH
INTPPR-1
Lv.2 Details
Set Wire clean interval in ppr interval

To set the paper interval for automatic cleaning of the Primary
Charging Wire and Pre-transfer Charging Wire.
Use case
- When decreasing downtime
0 to 9999
Unit
sheet
Default value
4000
DEVL-PTH
Set low duty toner ejectn img duty ttlVL
Lv.1 Details
To set the total value of the image duty, which is the condition to
perform the low duty toner ejection sequence.
When any of the average image duty of 4 colors indicates the
threshold value or below, low duty toner ejection sequence is
executed at the paper interval calculated by dividing the total value
by the value of threshold value - average image duty value. (The
value specified in DEVL-VTH is used as a threshold value.)
Use case
While printing low duty (low image ratio) images,
- When graininess (coarseness) occurs
- When low productivity or high toner consumption is pointed out by
the user
Caution
0 to 4
0: 50 %, 1: 100 %, 2: 150 %, 3: 200 %, 4: 250 %
Default value
1
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> DEVL-VTH
CDEV-IDL
ON/OFF Dev Assy(YMCBk) first idle rotn
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of idle rotation of the Y, M, C, Bk Developing
Assemblies to be performed first time for the day.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
PCHINT-1
ATR patch ppr interval adj (1st limit)
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the paper interval which patch detection is performed by
ATR control. (1st limit)
0 to 4
0: 25 sheets, 1: 50 sheets, 2: 100 sheets, 3: 150 sheets, 4: 200
sheets
Default value
1
8-247

PCHINT-2
Lv.2 Details
ATR patch ppr interval adj (2nd limit)

To adjust the paper interval which patch detection is performed by
ATR control. (2nd limit)
0 to 4
0: 100 sheets, 1: 200 sheets, 2: 300 sheets, 3: 400 sheets, 4: 500
sheets
Default value
1
8-248
PCHINT-V
Lv.2 Details
Adj ATR patch VD counter total VL intvl

To adjust the interval calculated by the total video counter value at
which the patch detection is performed in ATR control and weighting
at high duty.
If any of the average image duty of 4 colors indicates the threshold
value or higher, the patch detection of ATR control is executed at the
paper interval calculated by dividing the total standard value by the
average image duty value.
Patch detection is normally executed at the paper interval per 200
sheets; however, if the foregoing condition is satisfied, detection will
be executed even though it does not reach the specified number of
sheet.
When the negative value is specified, weighting (6.5 times) is applied
to the video counter total value only if a new Toner Container is set
and also in case of high duty (threshold value: 80% or higher). As the
value is incremented by 1, the total standard value of video counter
is increased by 1000%.
When 0 or higher value is specified, weighting is always applied
when the duty value indicates the threshold value or higher.
Combination of threshold value and weighting differs depending on
the setting value. Total standard value of video counter is fixed to
6000%.
-10 to 10
-10: Total standard value 10000 %, -9: 9000 %, -8: 8000 %, -7: 7000
%, -6: 6000 %, -5: 5000 %, -4: 4000 %, -3: 3000 %, -2: 2000 %, -1:
1000 %
0: Threshold value 80 %, weighting 6.5 times
1: 60 %, 6.5 times
2: 40 %, 6.5 times
3: 20 %, 6.5 times
4: 80 %, 8 times
5: 60 %, 8 times
6: 40 %, 8 times
7: 20 %, 8 times
8: 80 %, 10 times
9: 60 %, 10 times
10: 40 %, 10 times
Default value
-6
8-248

ADJ-VPP
Lv.2 Details
Adj of developing AC bias Vpp

To adjust Vpp of the developing AC bias.
Ring marks and uneven sleeve pitch are alleviated when the value
is decreased in the - direction, and white spots are alleviated when
the value is increased in the + direction. When the value is set to 0,
Vpp is controlled at low speed according to the life of Developing
Assembly (in the number of sheets). Other than 0 setting, Vpp is
controlled regardless of the life.
Use case
When image failures (ring marks, white spots) occur
Caution
When the value is decreased too much in the - direction, density
might be lowered.
-4 to 2
-4: 1.3 kV
-3: 1.4 kV
-2: 1.5 kV
-1: 1.6 kV (1/1 speed), 1.3 kV (1/2, 1/3 speed)
0: 1.6 kV (1/1 speed), 1.4 to 1.6 kV (1/2, 1/3 speed, durability control)
1: 1.6 kV (1/1 speed), 1.5 kV (1/2, 1/3 speed)
2: 1.6 kV
Default value
0
DMX-OF-Y
Adjustment of Y-color D-max setting
Lv.2 Details
To adjust D-max control setting in the case where density of solid
area on Y-color image is not appropriate even when auto gradation
adjustment is executed.
when the density is high.
Use case
When density of solid area on an image is not appropriate even
performing auto gradation adjustment
press OK key.
3) Execute auto gradation adjustment.
Caution
Be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) after
the setting is done.
-3 to 3
Default value
0
8-249
DMX-OF-M
Lv.2 Details
Adjustment of M-color D-max setting

area on M-color image is not appropriate even when auto gradation
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-3 to 3
Default value
0
DMX-OF-C
Adjustment of C-color D-max setting
Lv.2 Details
area on C-color image is not appropriate even when auto gradation
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-3 to 3
Default value
0
8-249

DMX-OF-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
SLS-TM-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
SLS-TM-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
SLS-TM-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Adjustment of Bk-color D-max setting

area on Bk-color image is not appropriate even when auto gradation
press OK key.
-3 to 3
0
Adj Y developer ejectn time:continuous
In case of many continuous jobs, the developer might increase or
decrease too much.
To keep the proper developer amount, adjust the time which Y-color
developer is forcibly ejected.
When the developer increases or decreases too much at continuous
jobs
0 to 10
0
Adj M developer ejectn time:continuous
decrease too much.
To keep the proper developer amount, adjust the time which M-color
jobs
0 to 10
0
Adj C developer ejectn time:continuous
decrease too much.
To keep the proper developer amount, adjust the time which C-color
jobs
0 to 10
0
8-250
SLS-TM-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
2S-SS-3C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
2S-SS-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
3S-SS-3C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Adj Bk developer ejectn time:continuous

decrease too much.
To keep the proper developer amount, adjust the time which Bk-color
jobs
0 to 10
0
Adj YMC developer ejectn block: 1/2 SPD
When processing many jobs at 1/2 speed (heavy paper), the
developer might increase or decrease too much.
To keep the proper developer amount, adjust the number of supply
blocks until transition to YMC-color developer forcible ejection.
When the developer increases or decreases too much due to
frequent use of 1/2 speed (heavy paper)
0 to 5
0
Adj Bk developer ejectn block: 1/2 SPD
blocks until transition to Bk-color developer forcible ejection.
0 to 5
0
Adj YMC developer ejectn block: 1/3 SPD
blocks until transition to YMC-color developer forcible ejection.
0 to 5
0
8-250
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR

3S-SS-K
Lv.2 Details
Adj Bk developer ejectn block: 1/3 SPD

blocks until transition to Bk-color developer forcible ejection.
Use case
0 to 5
Default value
0
BKDH
Set of Drum Heater control
Lv.2 Details
To set the contents of the Drum Heater control according to the
humidity.
Use case
When it is a high humidity environment and the machine is used
frequently
Caution
Be sure to turn ON the Environment Heater Switch.
0 to 2
0: Normal, 1: Turn ON the Drum Heater while the shutter is open in
all environments, 2: Heater control in a high humidity environment
Default value
0
8-251
IMG-LSR
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR
PRI-FAN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Setting of Primary Charge Fan ON timing

To set the timing to forcibly turn ON the Primary Charging Suction
Fan, Primary Charging Exhaust Fan and Developing/Pre-transfer
Charging Fan.
When 1 is set, they are always turned ON by full speed and when 2
is set, they are always turned ON by half speed during power-ON.
When image is smeared by the drum
0 to 2
0: Release forcible turn ON, 1: Always ON by full speed, 2: Always
ON by half speed
0
T-8-63
T-8-62
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR
8-251
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR
IMG-RDR
8-252
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR

DFDST-L1
Lv.1 Details
DADF mode dust dtct level adj: ppr intvl

To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control
that is executed at paper interval in DADF mode.
Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning
instruction at the time of dust detection. As the value is smaller, the
dust is less detected.
Increase the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger,
the small dust is more likely detected.
Use case
- When black line occurs due to dust
Caution
When increasing the value too much, the cleaning instruction screen
may appear too often since even small dust that will not be appeared
on the image can be detected.
When reducing the value too much, black lines may appear on the
image.
0 to 255
0: OFF
Default value
200
Supplement/memo
Black lines can appear on the image if there is dust. With dust
detection correction control, the image is corrected to prevent black
lines once dust is detected.
DFDST-L2
DADF mode dust dtct level adj: after job
Lv.1 Details
that is executed after the job is completed in DADF mode.
Use case
- When black line occurs due to dust
Caution
image.
0 to 255
0: OFF
Default value
200
Supplement/memo
Black lines can appear on the image if there is dust. With dust
detection correction control, the image is corrected to prevent black
lines once dust is detected.
DF2DSTL1
Lv.1 Details
DADF dust dtct lvl adj at ppr intvl:bck

that is executed at paper interval by the Scanner Unit (paper back) in
DADF mode.
Use case
- When black line appears due to dust
Caution
image.
0 to 255
0: OFF
Default value
200
DF2DSTL2
Adj DADF dust dtct level at job end:bck
Lv.1 Details
that is executed by the Scanner Unit (paper back) after the job is
completed in DADF mode.
Decrease the value when black lines appear. As the value is larger,
Use case
- When black line appears due to dust
Caution
image.
0 to 255
0: OFF
Default value
200
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR
T-8-64
8-252
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON
IMG-MCON
8-253
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON

PASCAL
Lv.1 Details
Use/no use of auto gradation adj data

To set to use/not to use the gradation adjustment data gamma LUT
that is generated by auto gradation adjustment (full/quick adjustment)
control.
Selection is available as to whether to use gamma LUT at the time of
image formation.
Use case
When PASCAL-related failure occurs/when identifying the cause of
PASCAL-related failure
0 to 3
0: Initial LUT is used. (Auto gradation adjustment is not used.)
1: Auto gradation adjustment is used.
2 to 3: Not used
Default value
1
SCR-SLCT
Halftone process in Photo Printout mode
Lv.2 Details
To set halftone process (error diffusion, screen 2 types) in Photo
Printout mode when making a copy.
Change the setting if the copy image has a problem with the initial
setting (Low screen ruling).
Select 0 (error diffusion) in the case of moire (suitable for character
reproduction).
Select 2 (High screen ruling) in the case of rough dots.
Use case
When moire image or rough dots occurs on copy image
0 to 2
0: Error diffusion, 1: Low screen ruling, 2: High screen ruling
Default value
1
Related user mode
Function Settings> Copy> Photo Printout Mode
TMC-SLCT
Setting of error diffusion coefficient
Lv.2 Details
To set coefficient to be used for error diffusion process.
Specify according to the level of granularity and dot stability.
0 to 2
0: Small granularity/low dot stability
1: Small granularity/low dot stability (color mode), Large granularity/
high dot stability (black mode)
2: Large granularity/high dot stability
Default value
2
PRN-FLG
Lv.2 Details
Select of image area flag (PDL image)

To set the image area flag for the image processing which is
performed when a PDL image fails to be compressed at a specified
compression rate.
If an image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate,
the following operations are performed as default:
- Processing to prioritize reproduction of text
- Replacing Bk-color to black plain color
Set 1 when moire occurs or jaggy is significant.
Set 2 when not preferring to replace Bk color with single Bk color.
Use case
- When moire occurs or jaggy is significant in case of printing an
image containing many halftone dots or photos
- When avoiding to replace Bk-color with single black color
Caution
This setting trades off with reproducibility of text.
0 to 2
0: High screen ruling, gray compensation LUT
1: Error diffusion, gray compensation LUT
2: High screen ruling, normal LUT
Default value
0
SCN-FLG
Select of image area flag (copy image)
Lv.2 Details
To set the image area flag for the image processing which is
performed when a scanned image fails to be compressed at a
specified compression rate.
If an image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate,
processing to prioritize reproduction of text is performed by default.
Set 1 when an image contains many halftone photo images.
Set 2 when an image contains many printed photos.
Use case
When copying an image which contains many halftone dots and
photos
Caution
This setting trades off with reproducibility of text.
0 to 2
0: Text
1: Halftone photo image
2: Printed photos
Default value
8-253

TNR-DWN
Lv.2 Details
Set of toner deposit amount reduction

To reduce the toner deposit amount when toner scatters or paper
winds around the Fixing Assembly in the case of full color.
When 1 is set, blur of images is decreased, but the hue is changed.
Use case
When an image is blurred due to toner scattering, etc. in the case of
full color
0 to 2
0: Standard
1: Reduce toner amount both for 1-sided and 2-sided modes
2: Standard for 1-sided mode and reduce toner amount for both
sides in 2-sided mode
Default value
0
TMIC-BK
ON/OFF of TMIC Bk_LUT end edge correct
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of the trailing edge adjustment of Bk_LUT for PDL
and for copy which are used by TMIC.
When the trailing edge adjustment is set to ON, the density of the
high density area becomes high, and consequently text and thin
lines become clear. While an image becomes clear, the hue of the
gradation area of photos, etc. is changed.
Use case
When thin lines are partly missing or characters are faded
0 to 3
0: ON for PDL, OFF for copy
1: OFF for PDL, OFF for copy
2: ON for PDL, ON for copy
3: OFF for PDL, ON for copy
Default value
2
DH-MODE
Set ptch data at Dhalf except full crrct
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to use the high-density patch data that has been
scanned by D-half control of full correction at the time of D-half
control other than full correction.
0 to 1
0: Used, 1: Not used
Default value
0
DH-TMG
Set auto D-max/half control exe interval
Lv.2 Details
To set the paper interval to execute auto D-max/D-half control.
D-max/D-half control is executed at the time of warm-up rotations
after completion of job with specified number of sheets.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 15000
Unit
sheet
Default value
1000
8-254
MIX-FLG
Lv.2 Details
Set img processing at img composition

To set the image processing which is performed when an image
fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate by the Main
Controller upon image composition.
Use case
When an image processing failure occurs
0 to 3
0: Equivalent to PDL text mode (Black text is reproduced with 4
colors. Error diffused image. The hue of the photo area is more vivid
than that of 2.)
1: Equivalent to PDL photo mode (Black text is reproduced with 4
colors. Screen processed image.)
2: Equivalent to scanned text mode (Black text is reproduced with
a single Bk color. Error diffused image. The hue of the photo area
might be different from that of 0.)
3: Equivalent to scanned photo mode (Black text is reproduced with
a single Bk color. Screen processed image.)
Default value
0
REPORT-Z
Set of image processing at report print
Lv.1 Details
To set the image processing which is performed when printing a
report.
Use case
When there is a request for image improvement
0 to 3
than that of 2.)
Default value
0
8-254

IFXEML-Z
Lv.1 Details
Set img proc at clr iFAX,mail recv print

To set the image processing which is performed when printing color
iFAX or received e-mail.
Use case
0 to 3
than that of 2.)
Default value
0
BMLNKS-Z
Set img proc at BMLinkS reception print
Lv.1 Details
To set the image processing which is performed when printing
received BMLinkS.
Use case
0 to 3
than that of 2.)
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
BMLinkS (Business Machine Linkage Service): An integrated
network OA device interface
8-255
REDU-CNT
Lv.2 Details
Set toner deposit amount limt at clr adj

To set whether to limit the toner deposit amount at color adjustment
(color balance, fine adjustment of density).
When 0 is set, the color adjustment value is reflected to an image
precisely, but toner scattering in the Transfer Assembly and Fixing
Assembly might occur, and paper might wind around the Fixing
Assembly.
Use case
- When reflecting the color adjustment value to an image precisely
Caution
When 0 is set, toner scattering in the Transfer Assembly and Fixing
Assembly might occur, and paper might wind around the Fixing
Assembly.
0 to 1
0: Toner deposit amount is not limited.
1: Toner deposit amount is limited to the specified amount.
Default value
1
VP-ART
Setting of line art processing
Lv.2 Details
To set outline processing for line art on scalable PDF.
In the outline processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the
field which is recognized as line art, and is converted into vector
data.
Specify whether to convert the binary image outline into vector data
or to recognize it as one line (as a thin line). For the thin line, the line
width can be specified.
Change this value when you want to obtain an output of a wide-width
line as one line rather than as an outline (when you want to prioritize
edit operation as a line rather than image quality).
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 99
Default value
1
8-255

VP-TXT
Lv.2 Details
Set of character vectorization process

To set vectorization processing for text on scalable PDF.
In the vectorization processing, a binary image outline is extracted
in the field which is recognized as text, and is converted into vector
data.
In regular vectorization, function approximation is not used for small
text not to change the image quality.
When the value is changed, function approximation processing is
executed for small text, which realizes smooth text although the
image quality is changed.
Change this value when you want to prioritize smoothness in small
text.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 99
Default value
1
PASCL-TY
Set of paper type for auto gradation adj
Lv.2 Details
Auto gradation adjustment is normally executed with the
recommended paper specified for each location. However, if you
want to change the paper type, use this setting to change the paper
type.
Use case
When executing the auto gradation adjustment using a paper other
than the recommended paper type
Caution
Do not change the setting in the normal operation.
1 to 3
1: CS-814 (Except for USA and Europe. Mainly for Japan)
2: Hammermill (For USA)
3: Mondi (For Europe)
Default value
AST-SEL
Adj of advanced smoothing effect
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the smoothing effect which is set in the advanced
smoothing UI.
Set 3 if the effect is not improved by selecting High on the UI.
Set 0 if too much effect is obtained even though Low is set.
Use case
When image failures (jaggy, moire) occur
0 to 3
Default value
2
Supplement/memo
AST: Advanced Smoozing Technology
8-256
REGM-SEL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
ERS-SEL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Related user mode
L-PWR-SW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
SCR-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Adj of fine-line density correction

To adjust the fine line and text density which is set in user mode (fine
density correction).
Set 4 if density is too low even though +2 is set in user mode and set
0 if density is too high even though -2 is set in user mode.
When line and text adjusted by fine line density adjustment is too
dark or too light in the case of 1200 dpi print
0 to 4
2
REGM-SEL: REos GaMma SELect
Effective Resolution System Proc mthd
To set the processing method of Effective Resolution System for
images and texts.
Select one of 1 to 7 when moire (a symptom of hue changing
depending on the location) occurs on a patterned image with 1200
dpi.
When moire occurs on a patterned image with 1200 dpi
0 to 7
0
Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Printer> Printer Settings>
Settings> Print Quality> Resolution> Superfine
Adjustment of thin line width
To adjust the line width of thin lines.
As the value is larger, lines become thicker.
When enhancing the reproducibility of thin lines
2) Execute Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust).
0 to 3
0: No adjustment, 1: 10 %, 2: 20 %, 3: 30 %
0
Set of low screen ruling dither
To set the dithering method for low screen ruling.
When changing the value, confirm the change by setting 1: Low
screen ruling in COPIER> TEST> PG> TXPH.
Upon users request (Dot dithering is used)
0 to 1
0: Line dithering, 1: Dot dithering
0
COPIER> TEST> PG> TXPH
8-256

PRESTART
Lv.2 Details
Setting to extend initial rotation time

To set whether to extend the time from start of initial rotation to image
formation.
When hue is not stable at the start of printing, engine can be stable
by extending the initial rotation time.
Use case
When hue is not stable at the time of printing in first few sheets
2) Turn OFF and then ON the main power supply.
0 to 5
Unit
sec
Default value
0
CL-RDCTN
High compress PDF TX clr reduct mode
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to execute the color reduction processing mode at
high compression PDF (text mode) transmission.
Set 1 when image quality is deteriorated at high compression PDF
(text mode) transmission. Image quality is improved by executing the
color reduction processing mode.
Use case
Upon users request (improvement of image quality)
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
PSCL-TBL
Set auto gradation adjustment parameters
Lv.1 Details
To set the parameters of auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment).
When 0 is set, the parameters are optimized for GF-C081 (81 g/m2)
standard paper (Canon-recommended paper).
When 1 is set, the parameters are optimized for 64 g/m2 paper.
Use case
When paper arc occurs on 64 g/m2 paper at auto gradation
adjustment
Caution
0 to 3
0: Standard paper (81 g/m2), 1: Plain paper (other than 81 g/m2), 2
to 3: Not used
Default value
0
8-257
BGE-OFS
Lv.2 Details
Fine adj of background adjustment level

To make a fine adjustment of the background adjustment (background
removal) level which can be set manually.
Break up the adjustment values into smaller ones when user does
not satisfy with the default adjustment values.
Use case
When color fogging occurs on the output image when copying
yellowed blank paper as an original
press OK key.
Caution
Since the background color is set to be washed out with this mode,
not only the background of yellowed blank paper, but also other light
colors (light blue, etc.) are washed out.
-15 to 15
Default value
0
Related user mode
Copy> Options> Density> Background Density
T-8-65
8-257
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD
IMG-SPD
8-258
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD

ARC-INT1
Lv.2 Details
Set of ARCDAT interruption interval

To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which ARCDAT
control is executed.
When the number of sheets reaches the specified value, ARCDAT
control is executed by interrupting an ongoing job.
If the value is too large, the density of image becomes different
before and after the interruption.
If the value is too small, the productivity is lowered.
Actual setting value is calculated by dividing the entry value by 0.9
and rounding up after the decimal points. (e.g.: If an entry value is
100, setting value will be 122.)
Use case
Upon users request
10 to 1000
Unit
sheet
Default value
100
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-SPD> ARC-INT2
ARC-INT2
Set ARCDAT exe interval: last rotation
Lv.2 Details
To set the number of sheets which ARCDAT control is not executed,
from the start of a job.
ARCDAT control which is supposed to be executed during the
specified number of sheets is executed at last rotation of the previous
job. Since the number of interruptions during a job is reduced, the
productivity is enhanced.
However, the number of times of ARCDAT control executed at last
rotation might be increased depending on the print conditions.
Actual setting value is calculated by dividing the entry value by 0.9
and rounding up after the decimal points. (e.g.: If an entry value is
25, setting value will be 28.)
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
Do not set a larger value than ARC-INT1.
5 to 1000
Unit
sheet
Default value
25
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-SPD> ARC-INT1
CHG-INT
Lv.2 Details
Set dischg crrnt ctrl intvl: last rotn

To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which discharge
current control for Y, M, and C is executed at last rotation.
When the number of sheets reaches the specified value, discharge
current control is executed at last rotation of the job.
If the value is too large, Y, M, C image failure occurs before and after
the execution.
If the value is too small, the productivity is lowered.
0 to 10000
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
COAT-SW
Setting of coated paper feeding speed
Lv.1 Details
To set the feeding speed (1/3, 1/2 speed) for coated paper (105g/m2
or more)
1/3 speed: Proper gloss mode (22ppm)
1/2 speed: High productivity mode (35ppm)
Use case
When improving productivity in printing on coated paper
0 to 1
0: 1/3 speed, 1: 1/2 speed
Default value
0
TAB-SW
ON/OFF of cleaning at tab paper feeding
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to clean when tab paper is fed.
When printing an image on a whole tab area of tab paper, the
backside of the succeeding paper is soiled.
When 1 is set, cleaning is executed every time a tab paper is fed.
Soiled backside can be prevented, but productivity decreases.
Use case
- When the backside of the succeeding paper to tab paper is soiled
- Upon users request (to improve quality)
Caution
Be sure to get approval from the user in advance by telling that
0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: ON, 2: Not used
Default value
0
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD
T-8-66
8-258
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING
CLEANING
8-259
COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING

W-CLN-P
Lv.2 Details
Set last rotation simple wire cln intvl

To set the paper interval for automatic cleaning of the Primary
Charging Wire.
The Primary Charging Wire is cleaned (1 reciprocation) at the time
of last rotation after completion of job with every specified number of
sheets.
The operation is enabled when the setting value of COPIER>
OPTION> CLEANING> W-CLN-PH is 1: ON.
Use case
Upon users request
50 to 10000
Unit
sheet
Default value
2000
COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> W-CLN-PH
W-CLN-T
Set of Pre-trns Chg Wire auto cln intvl
Lv.2 Details
To set the paper interval for automatic cleaning of the Pre-transfer
Charging Wire.
Cleaning is executed at the time of last rotation after completion of
job with every specified number of sheets.
The operation is enabled when the setting value of COPIER>
OPTION> CLEANING> W-CLN-PH is 1: ON.
Use case
Upon users request
50 to 10000
Unit
sheet
Default value
2000
COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> W-CLN-PH
D-CLN-TM
Set of warm-up rotation Drum clean time
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the time for cleaning the surface of the Photosensitive
Drum which is performed at warm-up rotations.
This item is enabled when AUTO-DH is 1: ON.
Use case
When image smear occurs in a HH environment
1 to 300
Unit
sec
Default value
1
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> AUTO-DH
OHP-PTH
Lv.2 Details
Set of ITB clean transp threshold value

When a large number of transparencies is fed, surface active agent
which coats the surface of an transparency adheres to the ITB, and
consequently the transfer efficiency is lowered, causing an image
failure. After feeding a certain number of transparencies, a patch
is formed on the ITB, and the ITB Cleaning Blade scrapes it off
together with surface active agent.
This setting is used to set the threshold value for the number of fed
transparency which is the condition to execute ITB cleaning.
Use case
When an image failure occurs due to lowering of the transfer
efficiency
0 to 100
0: Not executed
Unit
sheet
Default value
15
W-CLN-PH
ON/OFF of Charging Wire auto cleaning
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of automatic cleaning of the Primary Charging Wire
and Pre-transfer Charging Wire.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> W-CLN-P, W-CLN-T
CORE-CLN
Set Copper Shield Plt Shaft clean intvl
Lv.2 Details
To set the number of sheets as the intervals (frequency) to clean the
Shift Shaft of the Copper Shield Plate.
When 0 is set, cleaning is executed every 1000 sheets.
Decrease the value if Copper Shield Plate shift error occurs
frequently.
When 2 is set, cleaning is not executed.
Use case
When Copper Shield Plate shift error occurs frequently
Caution
As the value is decreased (frequency of cleaning is increased), last
rotation time may be increased.
-2 to 2
-2: 250 sheets, -1: 500 sheets, 0: 1000 sheets, 1: 2000 sheets, 2:
Cleaning is not executed
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING
8-259
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET

WEB-CLN
Lv.2 Details
Setting of Fixing Web cleaning interval

To set the number of sheets as the intervals (frequency) to execute
cleaning with the Fixing Web.
When 0 is set, cleaning is executed every 100 sheets.
When 4 is set, it is not executed.
Use case
When soiled paper edge or lines on the paper edge occurs frequently
Caution
As the value is decreased (frequency of cleaning is increased), the
Fixing Web consumption is increased.
-3 to 4
-3: 25 sheets, -2: 50 sheets, -1: 75 sheets, 0: 100 sheets, 1: 150
sheets, 2: 200 sheets, 3: 300 sheets, 4: Cleaning is not executed
Default value
0
PR-CLN
Set Fix Pressure Roll clean dspl condtn
Lv.2 Details
To set the conditions to display the message prompting to clean the
Fixing Pressure Roller.
When the number of continuous 1-sided prints (total value for this
mode) exceeds the setting value while COPIER>OPTION>DSPLYSW>PRCLNSW is set to ON, the message prompting to execute
cleaning is displayed.
By executing a 2-sided job or cleaning, the total value for this mode
is reset.
Use case
When a soiled image occurs because toner adheres to the Fixing
Pressure Roller
1 to 50
1: 1,000 sheets, 2: 2,000 sheets (default), ..., 50: 50,000 sheets
Default value
2
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> PRCLNSW
ENV-SET
COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET
ENVP-INT
Lv.1 Details
Temp, humid &Fix Roll temp log get cycle

To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside
the machine and the surface temperature of the Fixing Roller.
As the value is incremented by 1, the cycle is increased by 1 minute.
Obtained log can be displayed by selecting the following: COPIER >
DISPLAY > ENVRNT.
Use case
At problem analysis
0 to 480
Unit
min
Default value
60
COPIER> DISPLAY> ENVRNT
DRY-CISU
ON/OFF of condensation prevention mode
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of condensation mode.
When droplets are appeared on the Scanner Unit due to
condensation and image failure or E225 occurs, set 1: ON.
By selecting 1, the Scanner Unit (paper front) stops the fan for
15 seconds and the Scanner Unit (paper back) lights LED for 30
seconds from the next startup.
Use case
When droplets appear on the Scanner Unit due to condensation and
image failure or E225 occurs
0 to 1
0: OFF (Normal mode), 1: ON (Anti-condensation mode)
Default value
0
T-8-67
8-260
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET
T-8-68
8-260
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW
FEED-SW
8-261
COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

EVLP-SPD
Lv.1 Details
Envelope feeding speed setting

To set the envelope feeding speed.
By feeding an envelop at 1/2 speed (default) in the case of a high
humidity environment, the glue flap may adhere at the time of fixing.
As a result of that, the envelop may not be opened.
By setting to 1/1 speed, adhesion can be prevented, but fixing might
be deteriorated in a low humidity environment.
Use case
When a glue flap of envelope adheres
Caution
The fixing is deteriorated by setting 1/1 speed in a low humidity
environment.
0 to 5
0: 0 %, 1: +2 %, 3: +6 %, 4: +8 %, 5: +10 %
Default value
0
DK5-REST
Adj paper level for Multi Deck (Upper)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the threshold value for paper level to be determined as no
paper in Multi Deck (Upper).
When the setting value is increased for the case that too many
sheets are remained in the Deck, paper can be used almost to the
limit.
As the value is incremented by 1, the paper level decreases by
approx. 20 sheets.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
The number of remaining papers varies according to the air-floatation
condition.
0 to 5
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK6-REST, DK7-REST
DK6-REST
Adj paper level for Multi Deck (Middle)
Lv.1 Details
paper in Multi Deck (Middle).
limit.
approx. 20 sheets.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
condition.
0 to 5
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
DK7-REST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
REG-SPD2
Lv.2 Details
Unit
Default value
REG-SPD3
Lv.2 Details
Unit
Default value
Adj paper level for Multi Deck (Lower)

paper in Multi Deck (Lower).
limit.
approx. 20 sheets.
Upon users request
condition.
0 to 5
sheet
0
Speed adj of Rgst Roller: 1/2 speed
To adjust the Registration Roller speed when 1/2 speed is set for
heavy paper/transparency, etc.
Increase the value if the image at the leading edge of paper shrinks
in the feeding direction, and decrease the value if it expands.
Decrease the value if wavy-line image occurs.
If these symptoms are not alleviated after adjustment is made,
replace the Registration Roller.
-30 to 30
%
0
COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> REG-SPD, REG-SPD3
Speed adj of Rgst Roller: 1/3 speed
heavy paper/coated paper, etc.
-30 to 30
%
0
COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> REG-SPD, REG-SPD2
8-261

REG-SPD
Lv.2 Details
Speed adj of Rgst Roller: plain paper

plain paper, etc.
-30 to 30
Unit
%
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> REG-SPD2, REG-SPD3
INSRT-SW
Insert ppr presence/absence jdgmt ON/OFF
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of paper presence/absence judgment of the Inserter.
When 1 is set, a job is started before the Inserter starts paper
detections so productivity is improved..
Use case
Upon users request (improvement of productivity when using the
Inserter)
Caution
If there is no insertion sheet in the Inserter while 1 is set, pages will
be out of order. Consequently, a lot of papers being fed from the host
machine will be handled as jam papers.
0 to 1
0: ON (starting pickup after confirming the presence of papers)
1: OFF (starting pickup without judging paper presence and absence)
Default value
0
8-262
PINT-REG
Lv.2 Details
Set ppr intvl img pstn crrct frequency

To set the paper interval for executing the paper interval image
position correction control.
As the paper interval is larger (low frequency of execution), color
displacement tends to occur.
This control is executed at warm-up rotation to be performed first
time for the day and after jam processing regardless the setting
value.
Use case
Upon users request (shortening the time required for paper interval
control)
Caution
When increasing the paper interval, confirm the tolerance of color
displacement with the user.
0 to 5
0: 1000 images*
1: 600 images* or when the temperature of the Developing Assembly
changes by 2 deg C or more
2: 1000 images* or when the temperature of the Developing
Assembly changes by 2 deg C or more
3: 1000 images* and when the temperature of the Laser Scanner
changes by 3 deg C or more or when the temperature of the
Developing Assembly changes by 2 deg C or more
4: 2000 images*
5: No correction
* The number of images differs depending on the process speed.
0
ON/OFF of Left Deck Pickup Rol last rotn
To set whether to execute last rotation of the Pickup Roller on the
Left Deck for 50 msec after completion of job.
As the usage is extended, a part of the Separation Roller engaged
with the Pickup Roller becomes worn and the roller stops rotation.
As a result of that, jam may occur. By rotating the Pickup Roller after
completion of job, it can reduce wear of the Separation Roller.
Use case
- When frequency of use is relatively low
- When pickup jam tends to occur
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-TURN, DK3-TURN, DK4TURN, DK5-TURN, DK6-TURN, DK7-TURN
Default value
DK2-TURN
Lv.1 Details
8-262

DK3-TURN
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF of Cassette3 Pickup Rol last rotn

Cassette 3 for 50 msec after completion of job.
Use case
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
DK4-TURN
ON/OFF of Cassette4 Pickup Rol last rotn
Lv.1 Details
Cassette 4 for 50 msec after completion of job.
Use case
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
8-263
DK1-TURN
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF Right Deck Pickup Roll last rotn

Right Deck for 50 msec after completion of job.
Use case
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
DK5-TURN
ON/OFF M-Deck (upr) Pickup Rol last rotn
Lv.1 Details
Multi Deck (Upper) for 50 msec after completion of job.
Use case
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
8-263

DK6-TURN
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF M-Deck (Mid) Pickup Rol last rotn

Multi Deck (Middle) for 50 msec after completion of job.
As the usage is extended, part of the Separation Roller engaged with
the Pickup Roller become worn and the roller stops the rotation. As
a result of that, jam may occur. By rotating the Pickup Roller after
Use case
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
DK7-TURN
ON/OFF M-Deck (Low) Pickup Rol last rotn
Lv.1 Details
Multi Deck (Lower) for 50 msec after completion of job.
Use case
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
8-264
DK1-AIR
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF of PDF Deck Lite air assist

To set ON/OFF of the POD Deck Lite air assist.
In the initial settings, the air assist is OFF for plain paper or heavy
paper, and ON for coated paper, texture paper, heavy paper 2 to 5,
OHT, etc.
When a jam or double feed error frequently occurs with plain paper,
etc., set the value to 1. When the transfer performance is low with
coated paper, texture paper, etc., set the value to 2.
Use case
- When a jam or double feed error frequently occurs with plain paper
or heavy paper 1
- When the transfer performance is low with coated paper, texture
paper, etc.
0 to 2
0: Initial setting, 1: ON, 2: OFF
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK2-AIR, DK3-AIR, DK4-AIR
DK2-AIR
ON/OFF of Multi Deck (Upper) air assist
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of the POD Deck (Upper) air assist.
OHT, etc.
Use case
or heavy paper 1
paper, etc.
0 to 2
Default value
0
8-264

DK3-AIR
Lv.1 Details
8-265
ON/OFF of Multi Deck (Middle) air assist

To set ON/OFF of the POD Deck (Middle) air assist.
OHT, etc.
Use case
or heavy paper 1
paper, etc.
0 to 2
Default value
0
DK4-AIR
ON/OFF of Multi Deck (Lower) air assist
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of the POD Deck (Lower) air assist.
OHT, etc.
Use case
or heavy paper 1
paper, etc.
0 to 2
Default value
0
TFL-RTC
Lv.1 Details
Set delvry dest at rcvry after tray full

To select the delivery destination for a job with multiple pages after
recovering the Delivery Tray that reaches the full level.
When 0 (default) is set, a job is output from the delivery destination
again from which the last job was delivered.
When 1 is set, a job is output from the delivery destination which
priority is set as high at Output Tray Settings in user mode.
Use case
When changing the delivery tray
0 to 1
0: Output from the tray from which the last job was output.
1: Output from the delivery destination which priority is high among
the delivery trays.
Default value
0
Related user mode
Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray
Settings
D-MXDSZ
Prdctvty prrty mod in media mix: 2-sided
Lv.1 Details
At a 2-sided job in media mixed situation, productivity is reduced
because paper circulation inside of the machine is stopped.
When 1 (productivity priority mode) is set, productivity improves
because paper circulation is not stopped.
Use case
Upon users request (Improving productivity in media mixed situation
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press OK key.
0 to 1
0: Normal mode, 1: Productivity priority mode
Default value
0
USZ-FEED
ON/OFF Job set/ppr source ppr size chck
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to check if the paper size set for the job matches the
paper size set on the paper source.
When 1 is set, papers are picked up without checking even user
defined size papers that differ from the job setting size are set on a
paper source.
Use case
When forcibly picking up papers even the paper size setting differs
between a job and a paper source
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
T-8-69
8-265
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK
NETWORK
COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

RAW-DATA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
IFAX-LIM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
SMTPTXPN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
SMTPRXPN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
8-266
Setting of received data print mode

To set print mode for the received image data.
This item is used to identify the cause whether its due to image data
or image processing in the case of problem with received image.
When a problem with received image occurs
Be sure to set the value back to 0: Normal print operation after
recovering from the trouble.
0 to 1
0: Normal print operation, 1: Print with original data without image
processing
0
No. of max print lines at IFAX reception
To set the maximum number of lines for e-mail text to be printed
when receiving IFAX.
Setting of this item can prevent endless printing of the attached file
data in the case of receiving an error e-mail or failure in interpretation
of the context.
Selecting 0 prints the header/footer in 1 sheet when receiving e-mail
text without attached file.
When preventing endless print in the case of failure in reception
0 to 999
0: E-mail text not printed, 999: Unlimited
500
Setting of SMTP TX port number
To set SMTP transmission port number.
Upon users request
0 to 65535
25
Setting of SMTP reception port number
To set SMTP reception port number.
Upon users request
0 to 65535
25
POP3PN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Setting of POP3 reception port number

To set POP3 reception port number.
Upon users request
0 to 65535
Default value
110
FTPTXPN
Specification of SEND port (FTP) number
Lv.2 Details
To specify address port (FTP) number for SEND.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 65535
Default value
21
STS-PORT
ON/OFF of TOT sync status comctn port
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF for Inquiry/Response (sync)-mode status
communication port with T.O.T.
Select 1: ON in the case of connecting the PC and the machine
with the crossover cable while Service NAVI is used.
Use case
When the Service NAVI is used
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> CMD-PORT
Supplement/memo
T.O.T: TUIF over TCP. Communication protocol to be used for
communication with the built-in application (UI) and the internal
application such as COPY/ SEND/ BOX, etc. (Canons own protocol).
CMD-PORT
ON/OFF TOTasync command comctn port
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF for asynchronous command communication port with
T.O.T.
Select 1: ON in the case of connecting the PC and the machine
with the crossover cable while Service NAVI is used.
Use case
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> STS-PORT
Supplement/memo
T.O.T: TUIF over TCP. Communication protocol to be used for
communication with the built-in application (UI) and the internal
application such as COPY/ SEND/ BOX, etc. (Canons own protocol).
8-266

NS-CMD5
Lv.2 Details
Limit CRAM-MD5 auth method at SMTP auth

To restrict use of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at the time of
SMTP authentication.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication
function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used
for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this
protocol executes authentication of the user account and the
password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail
transmission only when its authenticated.
NS-GSAPI
Limit GSSAPI auth method at SMTP auth
Lv.2 Details
To restrict use of GSSAPI authentication method at the time of SMTP
authentication.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
NS-NTLM
Limit NTLM auth method at SMTP auth
Lv.2 Details
To restrict use of NTLM authentication method at the time of SMTP
authentication.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-267
NS-PLNWS
Lv.2 Details
Limit plaintext auth at SMTP auth encry

To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext
authentication, at the time of SMTP authentication under the
environment where the communication packet is encrypted.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
NS-PLN
Limit plaintext auth at SMTPauth noencry
Lv.2 Details
To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext
authentication, at the time of SMTP authentication under the
environment where the communication packet is not encrypted.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
Default value
0
NS-LGN
Limit LOGIN authentication at SMTP auth
Lv.2 Details
To restrict use of LOGIN authentication at the time of SMTP
authentication.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-267

MEAP-PN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
CHNG-STS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
CHNG-CMD
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MEAP-SSL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
LPD-PORT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
HTTP port No.setting of MEAP application

To set HTTP port number of MEAP application.
Upon users request
Do not specify port 8080 when the print server is connected.
Otherwise, you cannot browse the device RUI in which MEAP
authentication application is running (Port 8080 is reserved for
redirection of EFI Controller to the iR side.)
1 to 65535
8000
Set of TOT status connection port number
To set the port number for status connection with T.O.T.
1 to 65535
20010
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> STS-PORT
Set of TOT command connection port No.
To set the port number for command connection with T.O.T.
1 to 65535
20000
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> CMD-PORT
HTTPS port setting of MEAP
To set the port of HTTPS server in the case of using SSL with HTTP
of MEAP.
When setting HTTPS port for MEAP
0 to 65535
8443
Setting of LPD port number
To set the LPD port number.
Upon users request
1 to 65535
515
LPD port: Network port for TCP/IP communication when making
prints through network.
8-268
WUEV-SW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
WUEV-INT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
WUEV-POT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
WUEV-RTR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Setting of sleep notification execution

To set whether to notify the sleep mode to the application
(imageWARE, etc) on the network when shifting to/recovering from
the sleep mode.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Notified, 1: Not notified
0
Setting of sleep notification interval
To set the interval of sleep notification.
Upon users request
This is active when COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW is
set to 0: Notified.
60 to 65535
sec
600
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW
Port number setting for sleep notice
To set port number of the PC to notify the sleep mode.
Upon users request
set to 0: Notified.
1 to 65535
11427
Setting of sleep notification range
To set the number of available routers to the target for sleep
notification.
Upon users request
set to 0: Notified.
0 to 254
3
8-268

WUEN-LIV
Lv.2 Details
Recovery time setting after sleep notice

To set the time from the sleep start from network without job
assignment until the mode is shifted to the sleep mode.
Use case
When setting the startup time after sleep notification
1 to 600
Unit
sec
Default value
15
DHCP-12
ON/OFF of DHCP-option 12 request
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of inquiry on the host name (Option 12) which uses
Option 55 of DHCP.
Selecting OFF can prevent DHCP packet from including Option 12 or
Option 81 under the packet-monitoring network environment.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
Supplement/memo
DHCP:Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DHCP-81
ON/OFF IPaddress dynamic chng in DHCP-81
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF for dynamic change of IP address by Option 81 of
DHCP.
Selecting OFF can prevent DHCP packet from including Option 12 or
Option 81 under the packet-monitoring network environment.
Selecting ON enables dynamic change of IP address by Option 81 of
DHCP in the case that the dynamic DNS setting is ON in user mode.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
Be sure to set ON for the dynamic DNS setting in user mode to
enable dynamic change of IP address.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
Supplement/memo
DHCP:Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
8-269
IFX-CHIG
Lv.1 Details
Set operation by IFAX recv e-mail text

To set the number of characters for the IFAX received e-mail text, so
that the e-mail is not printed/forwarded when the characters in the
text is less than the number of specified characters.
This machine can output blank paper because some senders send
e-mail text consisting of linefeed codes only. In such case, specify 2
(number of characters) so that there will be no output of blank paper.
In the case of specifying any number other than 0, header/footer is
printed/forwarded in 1 sheet only if the e-mail (body) text is less than
the specified value while no TIFF file is attached.
As the value is incremented by 1, the number of target characters in
e-mail body text is increased by 1 character.
Use case
When reducing printouts of blank paper due to e-mail received by
IFAX
Caution
Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that there will be no
print of e-mail (body) text if the number of characters is less than the
specified value.
0 to 999
0: E-mail text is not ignored.
Unit
char
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
1 Japanese Kanji character is calculated as 2 bytes, and the control
codes (such as linefeed code, etc) are included in the number of
characters.
DNSTRANS
Setting of DNS transfer priority
Lv.1 Details
To set priority order of the protocol (IPv4/IPv6) to be used for DNS
query.
In the case of using both IPv6 and IPv4 while the DNS server
supports IPv4, it takes time because of timeout when executing DNS
query with priority on IPv6. The time can be shortened by placing
priority on IPv4.
Use case
When it takes time to execute DNS query with priority on IPv6
because the DNS server supports IPv4
0 to 1
0: IPv4, 1: IPv6
Default value
1
8-269

PROXYRES
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
WOLTRANS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
802XTOUT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
IKERETRY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
Setting of proxy response to Windows

To set whether to provide proxy response or return the device status
when an inquiry is received via Windows while the device is in sleep
mode.
When executing status response for query from Windows correctly
0 to 1
0: No proxy response, 1: Proxy response
1
Setting of sleep recovery protocol
To set the protocol for recovery from sleep mode according to the
value of WOL (Wake On LAN) trans.
Reception of a specific network packet is one of the requirements for
the device to recover from sleep mode.
When the number of network protocols supported by the device
increases, the types of network packets which activate recovery from
sleep mode vary. However, there is a possibility that the existing
network protocol is actually used.
Select the type of network packet which activates recovery from
sleep mode according to the environment where the device is used.
When selecting protocol for sleep recovery
1 to 3
1: WSD and SNMP, 2: WSD and CPCA, 3: CPCA and SNMP
1
Set of IEEE802.1X authentication timeout
To set timeout value for IEEE802.1X authentication.
If the device executes 802.1X authentication, change the wait time
for response from the authentication server.
When response from the authentication server is slow/fast
10 to 120
sec
30
Setting of IKE retry times
To set the number of retries in the case of no response from the
communication target at the time of IKE packet transmission.
Upon users request
0 to 3
1
IKE: Internet Key Exchange
8-270
SPDALDEL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
NCONF-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
IKEINTVL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
IPSDEBLV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Initialization of SPD value

To initialize all the SPD values that are under management.
SPD values can be initialized without clearing SRAM.
At the time of SPD value mismatch when IPSec Board is added
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
SPD: Database that manages SA (Security Association).
SPD value is managed when IPSec Board is used. Normally, SRAM
needs to be cleared in the case of mismatch in SPD value.
ON/OFF of Network Configurator function
To set ON/OFF of Network Configurator function.
If the user does not use the function, select OFF to prevent remote
attack through network.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
1
Network Configurator function is a function to be used for
communication with NetSpot Device Installer, etc., and the network
setting can be changed from the remote.
Setting of IKE retry interval
To set retry interval in the case of no response from the
communication target at the time of IKE packet transmission.
Upon users request
1 to 10
sec
5
IKE: Internet Key Exchange
Setting of IPSec debug level
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
0 to 10
0
8-270

SP-LINK
Lv.1 Details
Mode setting at 1W sleep

To set the mode to shift to sleep mode
When 0 is set, 10base-T standby is executed, therefore standby
power 1W is realized in sleep mode.
When 1 is set, like existing models, the machine enters sleep mode
after negotiation.
Use case
When shifting to sleep mode after negotiation
0 to 1
0: Shift to sleep mode with 10base-T
1: Shift to sleep mode after negotiation
Default value
0
AFS-JOB
Set of FAX server job reception port
Lv.1 Details
To set the reception port of the fax server to which a fax client sends
jobs.
Use case
When changing the job reception port of the fax server
0 to 65535
Default value
20317
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFC-EVNT
AFC-JOB
Set of FAX client job sending port
Lv.1 Details
To set the port of a fax client from which jobs are sent to the fax
server.
Use case
When changing the job sending port of a fax client
0 to 65535
Default value
20317
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFS-JOB, AFC-EVNT
AFC-EVNT
Set of FAX client event reception port
Lv.1 Details
To set the event notification reception port of a fax client.
Use case
When changing the event notification reception port of a fax client
0 to 65535
Default value
29400
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFS-JOB
8-271
ILOGMODE
Lv.1 Details
Setting of Firewall range

To set all protocols or TCP/UDP/ICMP unicast as the target of
Firewall.
When 0 is set, the machine responds to ARP, ICMP multicast and
broadcast which have no direct relation, and consequently the
number of logs is increased.
When 1 is set, the machine filters TCP, UDP and ICMP unicast only.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 3
0: All protocols support mode
1: TCP/UDP/ICMP unicast support mode
2, 3: Not used
Default value
0
ILOGKEEP
Setting of IP Filter log time
Lv.1 Details
To set the retention time from the log time blocked by IP Filter.
When access is made again from a same address which was
blocked by IP Filter before, if it is within the retention time from the
previous log time, its log is not recorded.
If access is frequently made from a same IP address, the log record
of the UI might be filled with its logs. If the user considers that a
single log for a same IP address is enough, set the longer retention
time.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 48
0: 1 minute (special mode)
1 to 48: 1 hour to 48 hours
Default value
1
IPTBROAD
Set to allow broad/multicast TX
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to send broadcast packets and multicast packets.
Transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets is
permitted without specifying an exception address. It is permitted
within the device even if it is rejected in the default setting of the
IPv4/v6 transmission filter.
Set 1: Disabled when the user does not want to send them.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 5
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled, 2 to 5: Not used
Default value
0
8-271

PFWFTPRT
Lv.1 Details
Set of RST reply at IP filter FTP SEND

When FTP SEND is executed using an IP filter by which packets
from a specific remote PC are rejected, SYN is returned to the port
113 if the PC supports authentication of the FTP port 113. However,
since the IP filter blocks the packets, the block logs are increased
and the performance is lowered.
When 1 is set, RST is returned to the port 113 without blocking
packets.
Use case
When executing FTP SEND against the OS which supports
authentication of the FTP port 113 while the IP filter is enabled
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
IPMTU
Setting of MTU size
Lv.1 Details
To set MTU size of network packet.
This item is used when performing SEND communication between
locations connected with Ethernet in a field environment where MTU
black hole problem occurs.
Use case
When MTU black hole problem occur
Caution
With IPv6, use of MTU which size is less than 1280 bytes is not
recommended by RFC. Therefore, when setting IPv6 to ON and MTU
to 7 or smaller, communication using IPv6 may not be available.
1 to 10
1: 600 bytes, 2: 700 bytes, ..., 9: 1400 bytes, 10: 1500 bytes
Unit
byte
Default value
10
DDNSINTV
Set of DDNS periodical update interval
Lv.1 Details
DNS registration is executed only once at start-up with the current
iR, so the registered contents are deleted in an environment where
the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals.
To set the interval of DDNS periodical update for not deleting the
registered contents.
Use case
When the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals
0 to 48
0: No periodical update, 1: 1-hour interval, 2: 2-hour interval, ..., 47:
47-hour interval, 48: 48-hour interval
Unit
hour
Default value
24
8-272
PRCLTYPE
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Setting of dedicated protocol type

To switch the type of dedicated protocol.
Upon user's request (Assumed to make change from the default
value only for customization.)
0 to 1
0: TYPE 0 (Compatible in conventional manner), 1: TYPE 1
Default value
0
VLAN-SW
Switch for VLAN participation packets
Lv.2 Details
Switch for sending packets for participating dynamic VLAN at startup.
For the packets to be sent, a static IP address is set as the sender.
Use case
When allowing a device whose IP address has not been decided yet
to participate in VLAN by sending packets for participating dynamic
VLAN at startup
0: Packets for participating in dynamic VLAN are not sent.
1: Packets for participating in dynamic VLAN are sent.
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK > VLAN-PKT
Supplement/memo
VLAN: Virtual LAN
A method for realizing grouping of terminals depending on the HUB,
switch connection port, MAC address, protocol, etc.
VLAN-PKT
Set of number of VLAN packets to send
Lv.2 Details
To set the number of packets for participating in VLAN to be sent
from the Main Controller when the LAN cable is connected or when
the device recovers from deep sleep.
Use case
When setting the number of packets to be sent with the setting made
to send packets for participating in VLAN
Caution
This setting is ignored when the setting is made not to send packets
for participating in VLAN (VLAN-SW=0).
0 to 10
VLAN participation packets of three times as much as the setting
value are sent.
Example) Setting value 1
3 (=1*3) sets of VLAN participation packet are sent.
Default value
1
COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK > VLAN-SW
Supplement/memo
VLAN: Virtual LAN
A method for realizing grouping of terminals depending on the HUB,
switch connection port, MAC address, protocol, etc.
8-272
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM

SSLMODE
Lv.2 Details
Setting of HTTP/HTTPS port open/close

To set whether to open or close HTTP/HTTPS port.
When 1 is set, HTTP port is opened whereas HTTPS port is closed.
When 2 is set, HTTP port is closed whereas HTTPS port is opened.
Use case
When limiting the port to open because of security concern
0 to 2
0: Normal, 1: Open HTTP port (80/8000) only, 2: Open HTTPS port
(443/8443) only
Default value
0
SSLSTRNG
Allow weak encryption algorithm for SSL
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to allow using weak encryption algorithm for SSL.
When 1 is set, weak encryption algorithm cannot be used.
Use case
When prohibiting weak encryption algorithm because of security
concern
0 to 1
0: Normal mode, 1: Secure mode ( Not used TLS_RSA_WITH_
RC4_128_SHA, TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5)
Default value
0
T-8-70
CUSTOM
COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM
SC-L-CNT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SCANTYPE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
ABK-TOOL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
DEV-SP1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
8-273
Set large paper jdgmt reference at scan

To set the judgment reference of the scan counter as to which to use
B4 or LTR to determine large size.
The threshold is determined by the combination with the setting of
B4-L-CNT.
SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=0: paper exceeding B4 is determined as
large size, paper with B4 or smaller is determined as small size.
SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=1: paper with B4 or larger is determined as
large size, paper smaller than B4 is determined as small size.
As needed
0 to 1
0: B4 size, 1: LTR size
0
COPIER> OPTION> USER> B4-L-CNT
Switch of DADF + Reader
To switch to a different type DADF + Reader Unit.
At installation
0 to 1
0: Reverse Duplex DADF + Reader, 1: 1-Path Duplex DADF +
Reader
1
Allow access from address book mntc tool
To set whether to accept import from the address book maintenance
tool.
When executing import from the address book maintenance tool
0 to 1
0
Address book maintenance tool: Tool provided from CMJ.
Device special settings 1
To execute the device special settings.
To execute the device special setting.
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
8-273

DEV-SP2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DEV-SP3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DEV-SP4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DEV-SP5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DEV-SP6
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value

00000000 to 11111111
00000000
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
8-274
DEV-SP7
Lv.2 Details
Use case

Caution
00000000 to 11111111
Default value
00000000
DEV-SP8
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
00000000 to 11111111
Default value
00000000
USEUPTNR
Set Toner Container use-up mode
Lv.1 Details
To set rotation operation when Toner Container is used up.
As the value is larger, the time the Toner Container Drive Motor
keeps driving after the Toner Container can be replaced becomes
longer. Toner in the Hopper is used up further, and it becomes
possible to make the time until image formation is stopped
(replacement timing of the Toner Container) longer.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
When the setting value is 1, if the toner consumption is high (at
the time of continuous output of high duty image), toner in the
Hopper may be used up before the replacement timing of the Toner
Container.
0 to 2
0: 50 rotations , 1: OFF, 2: 80 rotations
Default value
0
DFEJCLED
ON/OFF of DADF delivery LED
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to light up the delivery LED of DADF.
Use case
Upon users request (The LED is too bright.)
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value
0
8-274

RDEV-SP1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RDEV-SP2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RDEV-SP3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RDEV-SP4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RDEV-SP5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RCON device special settings 1

For customization, etc.
Use this mode only when specific instructions are given.
00000000 to 11111111
0
00000000 to 11111111
0
00000000 to 11111111
0
00000000 to 11111111
0
00000000 to 11111111
0
8-275
RDEV-SP6
Lv.2 Details
Use case

Caution
00000000 to 11111111
Default value
0
RDEV-SP7
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
00000000 to 11111111
Default value
0
RDEV-SP8
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
00000000 to 11111111
Default value
0
T-8-71
8-275
8-276
8-276
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER
USER
COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPY-LIM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SLEEP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
SIZE-DET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
COUNTER1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
COUNTER2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
8-277
Setting of upper limit for copy

To set the upper limit value for copy.
Upon users request
1 to 9999
999
ON/OFF of auto sleep function
To set ON/OFF of auto sleep function.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
1
The time to shift to the sleep mode can be set in the user mode
(Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Sleep Time).
ON/OFF of original size detect function
To set ON/OFF of original size detection function.
Upon users request (glare of the Scan Lamp, etc)
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1, ON
1
Display of software counter 1
To display counter type for software counter 1 on the Counter Check
screen.
Upon user/dealers request
N/A (Display only)
Display only. No change is available.
0 to 999
0: No registration
Setting of software counter 2
To set counter type for software counter 2 on the Counter Check
screen.
0 to 999
0: No registration
COUNTER3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
COUNTER4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
COUNTER5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
COUNTER6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

screen.
0 to 999
0: No registration
screen.
0 to 999
0: No registration
screen.
0 to 999
0: No registration
0
screen.
0 to 999
0: No registration
0
8-277
8-278

DATE-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Related user mode
MB-CCV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
CONTROL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
B4-L-CNT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Setting of date/time display format

To set date/time display format according to the country or region.
After the display format is set with this mode, the order of date is
reflected to the followings: Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings >
Date/Time Settings, and report output.
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: YYMM/DD, 1: DD/MMYY, 2: MM/DD/YY
Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Date/Time Settings
Control card usage limit for Mail Box
To restrict use of control card for Mail Box.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Unlimited, 1: Limited
1
Charge setting of PDL job
To set charge count transmission of PDL job to the connected charge
management device (Coin Manager or non-Canon-made control
card).
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: No charge, 1: Charge
0
Count setting of B4 size
To set B4 count with software counter 1 to 8 as to whether B4 is
counted as large size or small size.
Selecting 1 counts B4 or larger size paper as large size while paper
smaller than B4 size as small size.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Small size, 1: Large size
0
COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM> SC-L-CNT
TRY-STP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MF-LG-ST
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
CNT-DISP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
COPY-JOB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Set of suspension at full Finisher Tray

To set whether to suspend or continue output when the full Finisher
Tray is detected.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: At detection of full tray, 1: Detection of height only
0
Display/hide of long original mode
To set whether to display or hide the [Long Original] button.
When 1 is set, [Long Original] button is displayed in Copy> Options
screen and the long length paper becomes available.
Upon users request (use of long original or long length paper)
Long length paper is delivered from the Second Delivery Outlet
(excluding delivery from the Inner Finisher).
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Display/hide of serial number
To set whether to display or hide the serial number on the Counter
Check screen.
When setting to display/hide serial number on the Counter Check
screen
0 to 1
0: Display, 1: Hide
0
Setting of copy job reservation
To set whether to allow copy job reservation when the Card Reader/
Coin Manager is used.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
0
8-278

OP-SZ-DT
Lv.2 Details
Default value
NW-SCAN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
INS-C-S
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
HDCR-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
Orgnl size dtct ON/OFF at copyboard open

To set ON/OFF of original size detection while the Copyboard is
opened.
When 0: OFF is set, enter original size manually from the Control
Panel.
When 1: ON is set, original size is detected automatically.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Setting of network scan function usage
To set whether to allow use of network scan function.
Upon users request
- Do not change this mode in Japan.
- For PS/PCL machines for outside Japan, fix the setting value as 1:
Enabled. For others, permit the use.
0 to1
1
Setting of Inserter function expansion
To set whether the Inserter supports covers only or both covers and
insertion sheets.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0:
1
Setting of HDD complete delete method
To set data deletion method of HDD data complete deletion function.
When switching the deletion method in HDD data complete deletion
mode
1 to 4
1: 1-time deletion with 0 data, 2: 1-time deletion with random data, 3:
3-time deletion with random data, 4: DOD (1st time: a series of fixed
values, 2nd time: a series of complement of fixed values, 3rd time:
random data)
1
HDD Initialize All Data/Settings: A function to completely delete
data on HDD by overwriting with 0 (null) data or random data to the
file data when logically deleting file on HDD (deleting management
information data).
8-279
JOB-INVL
Lv.2 Details
Job intvl setting at interruption copy

To set output interval between jobs at the time of interruption copy.
Sorting is difficult after interruption copy because of the continuous
output of the next job. Paper interval becomes longer when starting
pickup for the next job after the last sheet of the previous job is
delivered.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: Continuous output of the interruption copy and the next job
1: Starting pickup for the next job after the interruption copy is
delivered all.
2: Starting pickup for the next job after the previous job is delivered
all. (For all jobs)
Default value
0
LGSW-DSP
ON/OFF of Log display ON/OFF setting
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display Management Settings> Device
Management> Display Log in user mode.
When 1: ON is set, Display Log is displayed in the Device
Management screen. When ON is set, the logs of each job are
displayed in System Status.
When 0: OFF is set, Display Log is not displayed in the Device
Management screen, and the logs of each job are not displayed
either.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Related user mode
Management Settings > Device Management > Display Log
TAB-ROT
Set of landscape img rotn at PDL:tab ppr
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to rotate landscape image by 180 degrees when PDL
print is made on tab paper.
When 1: Rotated is set, image is rotated.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Not rotated, 1: Rotated
Default value
0
8-279

PR-PSESW
Lv.1 Details
Display/hide of output pause button

To set whether to display or hide [Pause Printing] button on the
system status/stop screen.
Use case
- When promptly stopping the print job in operation or under
reservation
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
IDPRN-SW
Charge target job set of dept mngm cntr
Lv.1 Details
To set the job type that advances the department management
counter.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0:
PRINT category: Inbox Print, Report Print, Send Local Print, PDL
Print
COPY category: COPY
1:
PRINT category: Report Print, Send Local Print, PDL Print
COPY category: COPY, Inbox Print
Default value
0
CPRT-DSP
ON/OFF of [Print Charge Log] button
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display the [Print Charge Log] button to print the
charge logs on the charge log screen in user mode.
When 1: ON is set, the button is displayed in Management
Settings> Charge Management> Charge Log Screen.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
Related user mode
Management Settings > Charge Management > Charge Log
8-280
PCL-COPY
Lv.2 Details
Set of PCL COPIES command control method

To set the binder control method of COPIES command with PCL.
Select whether to use the control method of Canon-made PCL or
use the same control method of non-Canon-made PCL.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 65535
0: Control method of Canon-made PCL (following the value of
COPIES command that is specified for each page to control on a
page basis)
1: Control method of non-Canon-made PCL (handling the value of
COPIES command, which is specified for page 1 when collating, as
bind figure while the value of COPIES command for the next page or
later is invalid. Same control applies as Canon-made PCL when not
collating)
2 to 65535: For future use
Default value
0
CNT-SW
Set default dspl items on charge counter
Lv.1 Details
To set default display items of the charge counter on the Counter
Check screen.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
Do not use this mode
0 to 1
0:
Counter 1 - Total 1: 101
Counter 2 - Total (Black 1): 108
Counter 3 - Copy (Full Color + Single Color/1): 232
Counter 4 - Total A (Full Color + Single Color/1): 149
1:
Counter 1 - Total 2: 102
Counter 2 - Copy (Full Color + Single Color/2): 231
Counter 3 - Total A (Full Color + Single Color/2): 148
Counter 4 - Copy (Black 2): 222
Counter 5 - Total A (Black 2): 133
Default value
0
8-280

TAB-ACC
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF of auto cst change for tab ppr

To set to enable/disable auto cassette change when tab paper runs
out.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
Be sure to instruct the user to thoroughly comply the following:
- Use tab paper with the same number of tabs.
- Set tab paper.
Be sure to comply the above; otherwise, proper print is not available
and it can cause soiling inside the machine because of toner.
0 to 1
0: Auto cassette change disabled, 1: Auto cassette change enabled
Default value
1
BCNT-AST
Set of inbox print charge target job
Lv.1 Details
To set the job type that advances the count in inbox print with NE
Controller (ASSIST).
Use case
When switching the job type that is subject to counting of the inbox
print with NE Controller
0 to 1
0: PDL job, 1: Copy job
Default value
0
PRJOB-CP
Set count TX at RX/report print
Lv.2 Details
To set to enable/disable a page-basis count pulse transmission to the
charge management device at the time of reception print or report
print.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: No transmission, 1: Transmission
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
Charging management device: Coin manager, Non-Canon-made
control card
8-281
DFLT-CPY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Setting of color mode for copy

To set the default color mode for copy operation.
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: Based on Auto/ACS/Printer Driver settings, 1: Color mode, 2:
Black mode
Default value
Related user mode
Function Settings> Copy> Select Color Settings for Copy> Use Auto
(Color/Black) Selection
DFLT-BOX
Set of color mode for inbox print
Lv.1 Details
To set the default color mode for inbox print operation.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: Based on Auto/ACS/Printer Driver settings, 1: Color mode, 2:
Black mode
Default value
Related user mode
Function Settings> Copy> Select Color Settings for Copy> Use Auto
(Color/Black) Selection
DOC-REM
Display/hide of original removal message
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display or hide the message to remove original
when scanning with DADF without opening/closing DADF after
scanning with the Copyboard.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
DPT-ID-7
Password entry set at dept ID reg/auth
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to enter a password at the time of registration/
authentication of department ID.
With the setting to require entry, entry of 7-digit password is required
beside department ID.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Department ID only, 1: 7-digit (password) entry
Default value
0
8-281

RUI-RJT
Lv.2 Details
Connct set at invalid auth from remoteUI

To set whether to disconnect HTTP port when the machine receives
invalid authentication from remote UI 3 times.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Continued connection, 1: Disconnected
Default value
0
SND-RATE
Set compress ratio at SEND high compress
Lv.2 Details
To set the compression ratio when the data compression ratio for
SEND (transmission) is set to Compact.
As the value is larger, the compression ratio is higher (the file size
becomes small).
Use case
When making the transmission file size smaller
Caution
As the value is too large, an image is deteriorated.
0 to 2
0: Compression ratio 1/16, 1: Compression ratio 1/20, 2:
Compression ratio 1/24
Default value
0
Related user mode
Function Settings > Send > Common Settings > Data Compression
Ratio
CTM-S06
Set of password delete from export file
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to delete password for file transmission address from
export file.
When 1 is set, the password of file transmission target is deleted at
the time of exporting address book data from remote UI.
Use case
- When preventing information leak
0 to 1
0: Retained, 1: Deleted
Default value
1
8-282
FREG-SW
Lv.2 Details
Dspl/hide of MEAP counter free rgst area

To set whether to display or hide the free register area of MEAP
counter for SEND.
Use case
At problem analysis
Caution
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
Individual count-up (counter advance) of MEAP application is
available in the free register area of MEAP counter.
IFAX-SZL
Setting of IFAX send size limit
Lv.2 Details
To set for restricting data size at the time of IFAX transmission that
does not go through the server.
With the setting to restrict the data size, it is to be #830 error in the
case of sending data that exceeds the upper limit value.
In the case that the data goes through the server, the size of
transmission data is always restricted.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Limited, 1: Unlimited (Restriction applies when data goes through
the server.)
Default value
1
Related user mode
Function Settings > Send > E-Mail/I-Fax Settings > Maximum Data
Size for Sending
Supplement/memo
Specify the upper limit value for transmission data size in user mode.
8-282
8-283

IFAX-PGD
Lv.2 Details
Set page split TX at IFax Simple mode TX

To set whether to allow split-data transmission on a page basis in the
case that the transmission size in I-Fax Simple mode exceeds the
upper limit value.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
In the case to enable split-data transmission, be sure to receive
approval from the user in advance by explaining the following:
- No guarantee for page order on the reception side
- There is a possibility of interruption of other received jobs between
pages.
0 to 1
Default value
0
Related user mode
Function Settings > Send > E-Mail/I-Fax Settings > Maximum Data
Size for Sending
Supplement/memo
Specify the upper limit value for transmission data size in user mode.
MEAPSAFE
Setting of MEAP safe mode
Lv.2 Details
To set safe mode for MEAP platform.
MPSF is displayed on the Control Panel in safe mode.
In safe mode, MEAP application is stopped while just the system
application, which starts with initial state, is activated. This mode
enables obtaining log for cause analysis of MEAP failure.
Use case
Perform system recovery processing when MEAP platform fails to
be activated due to resource conflict between MEAP applications,
service registration or use order.
0 to 1
0: Normal mode, 1: Safe mode
Default value
0
TRAY-FLL
Set of target tray for tray full notice
Lv.2 Details
To set the tray which is the target of an output tray full notification.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: All trays to which paper can be output, 1: All trays which are
specified as the dedicated trays
Default value
0
PRNT-POS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
AFN-PSWD
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
PTJAM-RC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
PDL-NCSW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
ON/OFF of all pauses at error job cancel

To set whether to pause the print operation of following jobs when
a job is canceled due to an error inside the machine (#037, etc.)
except service calls during PDL print.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Access limit setting to user mode
To set whether to enter a password when accessing to the user
mode.
When 1 is set, password entry of system administrator is required
after pressing Settings/Registration key.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Password is not required, 1: Password is required
0
Auto reprint setting at PDL print jam
To set whether to automatically restart printing after clearing jam that
occurs with PDL print.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Not automatically reprinted, 1: Automatically reprinted
1
Card mngm setting for PDL print job
To set to make PDL print job be subject to card management by the
Card Reader.
With the setting to enable this mode, PDL print is available only
when the card ID of the card inserted to the Card Reader matches
the department ID.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: PDL print is available with no card inserted.
1: PDL print is available only when the card ID matches the
department ID in the case that the card is inserted.
0
8-283
8-284

SLP-SLCT
Lv.2 Details
Usage setting of network applications

With the setting to use network-related application, the machine can
be recovered through network because it does not shift to sleep
mode 1.
For this machine to recover from sleep mode 1 through network,
a particular packet needs to be received; however, the existing
network-related application does not send this packet. With the
setting not to use the network-related application, this machine
cannot recover from sleep mode 1 through network when it gets into
sleep mode 1.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
0 to 1
0: Not used (Shift to sleep mode 1 is available.)
1: Used (Shift to sleep mode 1 is not available.)
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
Network-related application: NetSpot Accountant, imageWARE
PS-MODE
Compatible mode setting at PS usage
Lv.2 Details
To set the image processing at PS print.
Although the same line width is set, it may differ depending on the
drawing position.
By selecting 8, line widths which vary depending on the drawing
position can be uniformed.
Use case
At replacement
0 to 65535
0 to 7: Spare
8: Strokeadjustment is enabled.
9 to 65535: Spare
Default value
0
CNCT-RLZ
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
COUNTER7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
COUNTER8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
2C-CT-SW
Lv.2 Details
Default value
Setting of connection serialize function

Connection serialize is a function to assure job grouping function of
imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1.0.
The setting to enable this mode can avoid job rearrangement
because the machine does not receive job data from other
connection until it completes job data reception from the current
connection.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Connection: Connection to be established through network between
multiple hosts (PC, etc).
Job grouping function: A function of imageWARE Output Manager
Select Edition V1.0 to prevent job interruption from other PC by
group job (sending multiple jobs in 1 session at job transmission).
screen.
Upon users request
0 to 999
0: No registration
0
screen.
Upon users request
0 to 999
0: No registration
0
Set of color counter at 2-color mode
To set whether to use the single color counter or full color counter for
count-up in 2-color mode.
0 to 1
0: Single color counter, 1: Full color counter
8-284

JA-FUNC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ON/OFF of job archive function

To set ON/OFF of job archive function.
When setting job archive function
Caution
Changing this mode is not available in service mode, but reference is
available (in service mode).
This mode is available only with the MEAP program that supports job
archive.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
JA-JOB
Setting of job archive target job
Lv.2 Details
To set the job type subject to job archive.
With the job archive function enabled, archive operation is executed
when executing the target job.
Use case
When setting job archive function
Caution
archive.
0: N/A, 3: Limited to FAX/IFAX, 0xFFFFFFFF: All jobs
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > USER > JA-FUNC
JA-RESTR
Setting of job archive limit items
Lv.2 Details
To set restriction items for job archive specification.
With job archive function enabled, follow the setting to execute
operation to restrict specification.
Use case
When setting restriction items for job archive
Caution
archive.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
32 specification restrictions with Bit definition
Bit0: Function to obtain image file (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Bit1: Function to compose form registration (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Bit2: Function to edit document (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > USER > JA-FUNC
8-285
LDAP-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Search condition set for LDAP server

To set the condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server.
When specifying condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP
server
0 to 5
0: Includes the next, 1: Not include the next, 2: Equivalent to the
next, 3: Not equivalent to the next, 4: Starts with the next, 5: Finishes
with the next
Default value
4
Supplement/memo
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol): Registering LDAP
server enables to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server and
the result can be registered in the Address Book, etc. Registration is
available by the following: Set Destination > Register LDAP Server
FROM-OF
Deletion of e-mail senders address
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to delete the senders address (From) at the time of
e-mail transmission.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Retained, 1: Deleted
Default value
0
DOM-ADD
Additional entry of e-mail destn domain
Lv.2 Details
To set to automatically add the domain specified in user mode to the
sending address (To) entered at the time of e-mail transmission.
If specifying xxx.com as a domain in user mode in advance, just
entering aaa enables to display aaa@xxx.com when sending
e-mail.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Not added, 1: Added
Default value
0
8-285

FILE-OF
Lv.1 Details
File send prohibition to entered address

To set to prohibit the file transmission to entered address.
File transmission is not available by entering the address because of
no File display on the transmission screen.
The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be
selected, but even if a job is sent, it is to be a transmission error. (End
code #762 is displayed.)
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
- The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be
selected, but it is to be a transmission error. Therefore, be sure to
receive approval from the user in advance to delete the address. Set
the transmission prohibition after deleting the address.
- When #762 is displayed without executing the procedure above,
explain the user that it is different from the description in the Users
Guide.
0 to 1
Default value
0
MAIL-OF
Mail send prohibition to entered address
Lv.1 Details
To set to prohibit the e-mail transmission to entered address.
E-mail transmission is not available by entering the address because
of no E-Mail display on the transmission screen.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
Guide.
0 to 1
Default value
0
8-286
IFAX-OF
Lv.1 Details
IFAX send prohibition to entered address

To set to prohibit the IFAX transmission to entered address.
I-Fax transmission is not available by entering the address because
of no I-Fax display on the transmission screen.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
Guide.
0 to 1
Default value
0
LDAP-DEF
Initial condtn set of LDAP server search
Lv.1 Details
To set initial condition for search target attribute that is specified at
the time of LDAP server Details search.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 6
0: Name, 1: E-mail, 2: FAX, 3: Organization, 4: Organization unit, 5:
No registration 1 (any setting), 6: No registration 2 (any setting)
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > USER > LDAP-SW
JA-DPI
Display of job archive record resolution
Lv.2 Details
To display the resolution of images for job archives recorded in jobs
other than FAX reception and I-Fax reception, etc.
Only display is available in service mode. The setting is available
only in the MEAP applications which support job archiving.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 3
0: No conversion, 1: 100 x 100 dpi, 2: 200 x 200 dpi, 3: 300 x 300 dpi
Default value
3
8-286

JA-COMPR
Lv.2 Details
Dspl job archive record compress ratio

To display the compression ratio of images for job archives recorded
in jobs other than FAX reception and I-Fax reception, etc.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 5
0: No conversion, 1: Compression ratio 1/4, 2: Compression ratio
1/8, 3: Compression ratio 1/16, 4: Compression ratio 1/32, 5:
Compression ratio 1/64
Default value
3
DK3-ASST
Set of M-Deck(Middle) Air Heater control
Lv.1 Details
To set the condition to turn on the Air Heater at the Multi Deck (Middle)
in accordance with media/environment.
When the media is switched from non-coated paper to coated paper,
pickup operation does not start until the temperature of the Air
Heater reaches the specified temperature; thus, waiting time occurs.
By selecting 1, the Air Heater is ON only for the coated paper.
When the use environment is near the threshold for turning ON/OFF
the Air Heater, switching occurs frequently, which increases the wait
time. By selecting 2, the heater is always ON regardless of media
and environment.
Use case
Upon users request (shorten the wait time)
Caution
When selecting 2, be sure to receive approval from the user in
advance after explaining that there is a possibility that transfer
performance may decrease if humidity decreases.
0 to 2
0: ON/OFF depending on the media/environment condition
1: ON only for the coated paper
2: Always ON (No environment/media-dependant)
Default value
0
8-287
FREE-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Display/hide of charge disable screen

To set whether to display or hide the charge disable screen for
switching between charge and no charge.
The hardware switch for switching charge/no charge in the Coin
Manager enables the mode in which all the services are available
for free (store manager mode) by temporarily releasing the charging
system.
Even without the hardware switch, the mode can be switched with
the software switch when it is set to display the charge disable
screen in Settings/Registration.
Use case
When enabling all the services to be provided for free by temporarily
releasing the charging system
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
TNRB-SW
Display/hide of Toner Container counter
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display the Toner Container counter on the Counter
Check screen.
Use case
When not showing the screen to users
0 to 2
0: Hide, 1: Display (Toner Container counter only), 2: Display (Toner
Container counter + ejection counter)
Default value
CLR-TIM
Set of HDD Encry Kit data delete timing
Lv.2 Details
To set the timing to completely delete the data when HDD Encryption
Kit is used.
Selecting 0 may reduce the job processing speed because page
data that has been already processed is deleted while the other job
is in process, causing overload to CPU and HDD access.
Selecting 1 improves the job processing speed because the process
is executed after a job is completed.
Use case
Upon request to improve the job processing speed
0 to 1
0: During job process, 1: After the job is completed
Default value
0
8-287

JA-FORMT
Lv.2 Details
Display of job archive record format

To display the format of images for job archives recorded in jobs
other than FAX reception and IFAX reception, etc.
Whether the images processed by Packet JPEG are recorded in
Packet JPEG, or converted into Raster JPEG and then recorded is
displayed.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Packet JPEG, 1: Raster JPEG
Default value
0
HDCR-DSW
Dspl/hide of HDD complete delete ON/OFF
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display or hide Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion
in user mode.
With this setting, HDD data complete deletion function is available
with ON/OFF button on the screen.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
Related user mode
Management Settings > Data Management > HDD Data Complete
Deletion > Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion
8-288
DK1-ASST
Lv.1 Details
Set of P-Deck Air Heater control

To set the condition to turn on the Air Heater at the POD Deck Lite in
accordance with media/environment.
and environment.
Use case
Caution
0 to 2
Default value
0
DK4-ASST
Set of M-Deck (Lower) Air Heater control
Lv.1 Details
To set the condition to turn on the Air Heater at the Multi Deck (Lower)
and environment.
Use case
Caution
0 to 2
Default value
0
8-288
8-289

DK2-ASST
Lv.1 Details
Set of M-Deck (Upper) Air Heater control

To set the condition to turn on the Air Heater at the Multi Deck (Upper)
and environment.
Use case
Caution
0 to 2
Default value
0
SNMP-COA
Inside comty name SNMPaccess limit:admin
Lv.2 Details
To restrict SNMP access by the community name (administrator
right) that is kept internally.
This machine internally retains the community name (administrator
right) other than the SNMP community name that is specified in
user mode. Canon-made utility software, such as NetSpot, uses this
community name.
Because of security concern, select 0/1 in the case to restrict SNMP
access with the internal community name.
Use case
When restricting SNMP access with the community name
(administrator right) that is retained internally
0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: Read only, 2: Read/Write
Default value
1
Related user mode
Preferences> Network> SNMP Settings> Community Name 1
Settings
SNMP-COU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Related user mode
BWCL-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
SCALL-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SCALLCMP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Inside comty name SNMP access limit:user

To restrict SNMP access by the community name (user right) that is
kept internally.
This machine internally retains the community name (user right)
other than the SNMP community name that is specified in user
mode. Canon-made utility software, such as NetSpot, uses this
community name.
Because of security concern, select 0/1 in the case to restrict SNMP
access with the internal community name.
When restricting SNMP access with the community name (user right)
that is retained internally
0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: Read only, 2: Read/Write
2
Preferences> Network> SNMP Settings> Community Name 2
Settings
Display/hide of clr/B&W selection screen
To set whether to display the color/B&W selection screen to select
the default of the color mode.
When displaying the color mode default selection screen
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Display/hide of Service Call button
To set whether to display or hide the Service Call button on the
Control Panel.
When the sales company supports service initiated by the Service
Call button
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Set of repair request complete notice
With this setting enabled, a notification of repair completion is sent
to UGW server to clear the repair-request status that is retained
internally.
When service technician uses this mode after completing repair
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
8-289
8-290

USBH-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Display/hide of Use USB Host

To set whether to display Preferences> External Interface> USB
Settings> Use USB Host.
By selecting 1: Display, whether to use USB host on USB Settings
screen can be selected.
Use case
When switching to display or hide Use USB Host on USB Settings
screen
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
Related user mode
Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use USB Host
USBM-DSP
Dspl/hide of USB ex-memory device driver
Lv.2 Details
Settings> Use MEAP Driver for External USB Device.
By selecting 0: Hide, the item is not displayed, and the user
administrator cannot change the setting of the MEAP driver for the
USB external memory device.
Use case
When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of
Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device, set 0 after the specified
setting is completed.
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
Related user mode
Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver
for USB External Device
USBI-DSP
Dspl/hide of USB input device driver set
Lv.2 Details
Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device.
By selecting 0: Hide, the item is not displayed, and the user
administrator cannot change the setting of the MEAP driver for the
USB input device.
Use case
When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of Use
MEAP Driver for USB Input Device, set 0 after the specified setting
is completed.
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
Related user mode
for USB Input Device
CTCHKDSP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
USBB-DSP
Default value
Related user mode
USBR-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Related user mode
POL-SCAN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Display/hide of Print List

To set whether to display or hide Print List on the Counter Check
screen.
Model name, serial number information, counter check date and
counter information can be output as Total Page Count List.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
1
[Not used]
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
for Bluetooth Device
Dspl/hide of USB infrared device driver
To set whether to display Preferences > External Interface > USB
Settings > Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device.
When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of
Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device, set 0 after the specified
setting is completed.
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
for Bluetooth Device
Dspl/hide Rights Management Server set
When 1: Display is set, the Rights Management Server function
screen is displayed.
While the Rights Management Server function is a standard feature,
it is possible to hide if not necessary.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
8-290
8-291

W-TN-DSP
Lv.1 Details
Spec of Waste Toner Cntner rplce display

To display animation showing the restoration procedure when the
Waste Toner Container is full.
When "1" is set, the procedure for replacing the Waste Toner
Container is displayed.
Use case
When displaying the animation showing the procedure for the user to
replace the Waste Toner Container
0 to 1
0: Animation not displayed.Specification for replacement by a service
technician.
1: Animation displayed.Specification for replacement by a user.
Default value
0
JA-SBOX
Setting of linking with Advanced Box:SAM
Lv.2 Details
To set the link with Advanced Box when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, linking with Advanced Box is enabled.
Use case
When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
0 to 1
Default value
0
JA-DFAX
Setting of direct fax transmission: SAM
Lv.2 Details
To set the direct fax transmission when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the direct fax transmission is enabled.
Use case
0 to 1
Default value
0
JA-REP
Setting of TX Report with image: SAM
Lv.2 Details
To set the TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the TX Report with image is enabled.
Use case
0 to 1
Default value
0
JA-FREP
Setting of Fax TX Report with image: SAM
Lv.2 Details
To set the Fax TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the Fax TX Report with image is enabled.
Use case
0 to 1
Default value
0
JA-BOX
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-FORM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-PREV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-PULL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-PDLB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-JOBK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Setting of Inbox document operation: SAM

To set the operation for Inbox document at the time of iW SAM
When 1 is set, the Inbox document can be operated.
0 to 1
0
Setting of image composition: SAM
To set the image composition when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the image composition is enabled.
0 to 1
0
Setting of preview page deletion: SAM
To set whether a page is deleted from the scan preview screen at the
time of iW SAM
When 1 is set, a page is deleted from the scan preview screen.
0 to 1
0
Setting of network scan: SAM
To set the network scan when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the network scan is enabled.
0 to 1
0
Set of printer driver multi box save:SAM
To set whether a document can be simultaneously saved to multiple
Inboxes from the printer driver at the time of iW SAM.
When 1 is set, a document can be saved to multiple Inboxes from
the printer driver.
0 to 1
0
Setting of job merge allowance:SAM
To set whether merging jobs is allowed when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, jobs can be merged.
0 to 1
0
8-291

JA-JDF
Lv.2 Details
Setting of JDF: SAM

To set the use of JDF when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, JDF can be used.
Use case
0 to 1
Default value
0
JA-RUI
Setting of Inbox document access: SAM
Lv.2 Details
To set the Inbox document access from remote UI at the time of iW
SAM
When 1 is set, accessing to the Inbox document from remote UI is
enabled.
Use case
0 to 1
Default value
0
JA-WEB
Setting of Inbox document upload: SAM
Lv.2 Details
To set the Inbox document upload with the Web browser at the time
of iW SAM.
When 1 is set, uploading of the Inbox document with the Web
Browser is enabled.
Use case
0 to 1
Default value
0
CS-ACC
Set paper source switch in color mode
Lv.1 Details
To change Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off in user mode to
switch of paper source in color mode.
When 1 is set, the meaning of ON/OFF of Paper Drawer Auto
Selection On/Off screen changes.
ON: Paper sources that can be selected when color mode is other
than B&W
OFF: Paper sources that can be selected when color mode is B&W
Use case
When switching the paper source in color mode
0 to 1
0: Same as conventional machines, 1: Paper source switch in color
mode
Default value
0
Related user mode
Function Settings > Common > Paper Feed Settings > Paper Drawer
Auto Selection On/Off
8-292
EXP-CRYP
Lv.1 Details
Confdntial encrypt ON/OFF:add book exprt

To set whether to encrypt the confidential part (password part) in the
Address Book when exporting the address book and device settings
via RUI.
When 0 is set, the confidential part in the address book is exported
without encryption.
Use case
When there is a need to export password without encryption because
of operation and tool
Caution
Be sure not to allow the user to execute export without encryption
because of security concern.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
SLEEP1SW
Power supply when shifting to SLEEP1
Lv.1 Details
When shifting to SLEEP1 mode, the power stops to be supplied, so it
takes time to activate after a job is received.
When 1 is set, the power keeps to be supplied even after shifting to
SLEEP1 mode, so the activation of job processing becomes earlier.
Use case
Upon users request (when job processing after shifting to SLEEP1
is slow)
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
CNCL-ATH
ON/OFF of auth at secure job stop
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to conduct authentication when stopping a secure job
in the secure print screen.
When 0 is set, pressing [Stop] button deletes the secure job
immediately.
By setting 1 when user authentication is not conducted, the
authentication screen is displayed and only the jobs which
authentication was succeeded are deleted, so security for the secure
job is enhanced.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
8-292

EZY-SCRP
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF of secure print simple auth

To set whether to conduct secure print simple authentication.
When 1 is set, secured print, encryption secured print and inbox print
are received, but the normal print jobs are canceled.
If the password 3758211 is entered at job sending, authentication
by entering the password on the Control Panel is not required. If the
password is not entered at job sending, authentication by entering
the password on the Control Panel is necessary at job output.
In addition, the following selection is added as auto deletion time of
secure job: 10 minutes, 20 minutes, 30 minutes
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
DMN-MTCH
ON/OFF of secure print domain judgment
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display only the job which matches the domain in
the My Job Status screen of the secure print.
When 1 is set, only the job which matches the user name and
domain name is displayed in the My Job Status screen, so the job
which does not match the domain is not displayed.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
Supplement/memo
The My Job Status screen is displayed when login service is used.
Only the job of user who logs in is displayed.
SMD-EXPT
Setting of export target data: remote UI
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to export service mode data from remote UI.
When 1 is set, service mode data is displayed as the target data
of export on remote UI. When installing more than 1 machine at the
same time, the same service mode data can be registered.
Use case
When installing more than 1 machine at the same time
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
By selecting service mode data as the target data of export on
remote UI after setting SMD-EXPT to 1, service mode data can be
exported from remote UI.
8-293
SNDSTREN
Lv.1 Details
Set of setting delete aftr scan and send

To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the
address after transmission from the Scan and Send screen.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Delete, 1: Retain
Default value
FAXSTREN
Set of setting delete aftr fax transmit
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the
address after transmission from the Fax screen.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Delete, 1: Retain
Default value
T-8-72
8-293
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST
CST
COPIER > OPTION > CST

U1-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
U2-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
U3-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
U4-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
8-294
Dspl/hide of ppr name: ppr size group U1

To set whether to display or hide paper name at paper size group U1
detection.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
detection.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
detection.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
detection.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
P-SZ-C1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Setting of Right Deck paper size

To set the paper size used in the Right Deck.
Upon users request
Caution
Be sure to match with the hardware setting size.
0 to 2
0: A4, 1: B5, 2: LTR
Default value
0
P-SZ-C2
Setting of Left Deck paper size
Lv.1 Details
To set the paper size used in the Left Deck.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
0 to 2
0: A4, 1: B5, 2: LTR
Default value
0
D1-CURL
Set of curl correct at Right Deck pickup
Lv.1 Details
To set the curl correction level for the sheets picked up from the
Right Deck.
As the value is incremented by 1, the curl correction level is
increased.
Regardless of face-up or face-down, increase the value in the case
of upward curl and decrease it in the case of downward curl.
When this setting is made, the same curl correction level is applied
to all media.
This setting is linked with the value specified to the Right Deck in
Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each
Paper Drawer in user mode.
Use case
Upon users request
-10 to 10
Default value
0
Related user mode
Paper Drawer
8-294
8-295

D2-CURL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Related user mode
D3-CURL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Related user mode
Set of curl correct at Left Deck pickup

To set the curl correction level for the sheets picked up from the Left
Deck.
increased.
to all media.
This setting is linked with the value specified to the Left Deck in
Upon users request
-10 to 10
0
Paper Drawer
Set of curl correct at Cassette 3 pickup
To set the curl correction level for the sheets picked up from Cassette
3.
increased.
to all media.
This setting is linked with the value specified to Cassette 3 in
Upon users request
-10 to 10
0
Paper Drawer
D4-CURL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Related user mode
D5-CURL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Related user mode
Set of curl correct at Cassette 4 pickup

To set the curl correction level for the sheets picked up from Cassette
4.
increased.
to all media.
This setting is linked with the value specified to Cassette 4 in
Upon users request
-10 to 10
0
Paper Drawer
Set curl correct at Deck/POD Deck pickup
Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite.
increased.
to all media.
This setting is linked with the value specified to the POD Deck Lite
in Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each
Upon users request
-10 to 10
0
Paper Drawer
8-295

D6-CURL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Related user mode
D7-CURL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Related user mode
Set of curl correct at MP tray pickup

Multi-purpose Tray.
increased.
to all media.
This setting is linked with the value specified to the Paper Deck in
Upon users request
-10 to 10
0
Paper Drawer
Set curl correct at M-Deck (Upr) pickup
To set the curl correction level for the sheets picked up from the Multi
Deck (Upper).
increased.
to all media.
This setting is linked with the value specified to the Multi Deck (Upper)
in Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Action> Correct Curl for Each
Upon users request
-10 to 10
0
Paper Drawer
8-296
D8-CURL
Lv.1 Details
Set curl correct at M-Deck (Mid) pickup

Deck (Middle).
increased.
to all media.
This setting is linked with the value specified to the Multi Deck
(Middle) in Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Action > Correct Curl
for Each Paper Drawer in user mode.
Use case
Upon users request
-10 to 10
Default value
0
Related user mode
Paper Drawer
D9-CURL
Set curl correct at M-Deck (Lowr) pickup
Lv.1 Details
Deck (Lower).
increased.
to all media.
This setting is linked with the value specified to the Multi Deck (Lower)
in Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Action > Correct Curl for Each
Use case
Upon users request
-10 to 10
Default value
0
Related user mode
Paper Drawer
CST3-P1
Setting of Cst3 paper size (A5R/STMTR)
Lv.1 Details
To set the paper size used in Cassette 3.
Use case
When setting the paper size for the Cassette 3
Caution
0 to 1
0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Default value
Related user mode
Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
8-296

CST3-P2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Setting of Cst3 paper size (B5/EXEC)

Caution
0 to 1
0: B5, 1: EXEC
Default value
Related user mode
Preferences> Paper Settings> B5/EXEC Paper Selection
CST4-P1
Setting of Cst4 paper size (A5R/STMTR)
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
0 to 1
0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Default value
Related user mode
CST4-P2
Setting of Cst4 paper size (B5/EXEC)
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
0 to 1
0: B5, 1: EXEC
Default value
Related user mode
CST5-P1
Setting of M-Deck (Upr) paper size
Lv.1 Details
To set the paper size used in the Multi Deck (Upper).
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
0 to 1
0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Default value
Related user mode
8-297
CST5-P2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Setting of M-Deck (Upr) paper size

To set the paper size used in the Multi Deck (Upper).
Upon users request
Caution
0 to 1
0: B5, 1: EXEC
Default value
Related user mode
CST6-P1
Setting of M-Deck (Mid) paper size
Lv.1 Details
To set the paper size used in the Multi Deck (Middle).
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
0 to 1
0: A5R,1: STMTR
Default value
Related user mode
CST6-P2
Setting of M-Deck (Mid) paper size
Lv.1 Details
To set the paper size used in the Multi Deck (Middle).
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
0 to 1
0: B5, 1: EXEC
Default value
Related user mode
CST7-P1
Setting of M-Deck (Lowr) paper size
Lv.1 Details
To set the paper size used in the Multi Deck (Lower).
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
0 to 1
0: A5R,1: STMTR
Default value
Related user mode
8-297
8-298

CST7-P2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Setting of M-Deck (Lowr) paper size

To set the paper size used in the Multi Deck (Lower).
Upon users request
Caution
0 to 1
0: B5, 1: EXEC
Default value
Related user mode
CST3-U1
Set Cst3 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry1
Lv.1 Details
To set the area-specific standard size paper category 1 used in
Cassette 3.
Use case
When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 3
0 to 43
0: Do not use special papers, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGL-R, 24:
FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 28: B-OFI, 29: Not used, 30:
A-LTRR, 31: Not used, 32: G-LTRR, 33: A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35 to 36:
Not used, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41: Not used, 42: FA4, 43 : Not used
Default value
0
CST3-U3
Lv.1 Details
Cassette 3.
Use case
0 to 31
0: Do not use special papers, 1 to 21: Not used, 22: K-LGL, 23 to 28:
Not used, 29: A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR
Default value
0
CST4-U1
Lv.1 Details
Cassette 4.
Use case
0 to 43
Default value
0
CST4-U3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
CST5-U1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
CST5-U3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
CST6-U1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

Cassette 4.
0 to 31
0
MDeck(Upr) special paper category1
To set the special paper category 1 used in the Multi Deck (Upper).
When setting area-specific standard size paper
0 to 43
0
MDeck(Upr) special paper category3
To set the special paper category 3 used in the Multi Deck (Upper).
0 to 31
0
MDeck(Mid) special ppr category1
To set the special paper category 1 used in the Multi Deck (Middle).
0 to 43
0
8-298
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC

CST6-U3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
MDeck(Mid) special ppr category3

To set the special paper category 3 used in the Multi Deck (Middle).
0 to 31
Default value
0
CST7-U1
MDeck(Low) special ppr category1
Lv.1 Details
To set the special paper category 1 used in the Multi Deck (Lower).
Use case
0 to 43
Default value
0
CST7-U3
MDeck(Low) special ppr category3
Lv.1 Details
To set the special paper category 3 used in the Multi Deck (Lower).
Use case
0 to 31
Default value
0
8-299
ACC
COPIER > OPTION > ACC
COIN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
T-8-73
Default value
Setting of charge management

To set charge management method.
At installation of Coin Manager
Following items are automatically specified when changing the value
to 3 (from 0 to 2) when setting 3. The change will not be returned
even if changing back the value to 0 to 2 (from 3) once the mode has
been changed.
- COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL, AFN-PSWD=1
- COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> DA-CNCT=1
- COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX=0
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPv4 Settings> IP
Address Range Settings> RX/Print Range: Permit IPv4 Address=ON
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPv6 Settings> IP
Address Range Settings> RX/Print Range: Permit IPv6 Address=ON
- Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings > FTP Print Settings >
Use FTP Printing=OFF
- Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPP Print Settings=ON
- Preferences> Network> SMB Server Settings> SMB Printer
Settings> Use SMB=ON
- Function Settings> Send> E-mail/I-Fax Settings> Communication
Settings> SMTP Receive, POP=OFF
Following items are automatically specified when changing the value
to 4 (from 0 to 2) when setting 4. The change will not be returned
even if changing back the value to 0 to 2 (from 4) once the mode has
been changed.
- COPIER> OPTION> USER> AFN-PSWD=1
- COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX, UIRSCAN, UI-EPRNT, UI-HOLD=0
- Management Settings> Device Management> Display Log=OFF
0 to 7
0: No charge
1: Charge with Coin Manager
2: Charge with remote counter
3: Charge with DA (only in Japan)
4: Charge with this machine itself
5: New SC mode
6: External charge mode 6
7: External charge mode 7
0
COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> DA-CNCT
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX
8-299

Related user mode
Function Settings > Send > E-Mail/I-Fax Settings > Communication

Settings
Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > FTP
Print Settings
Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > IPP Print
Settings
Supplement/memo
Control card can be used with 0: No charge.
DA: Digital Accessory
DK-P
Setting of Paper Deck paper size
Lv.1 Details
To set the paper size used in the Paper Deck.
0 to 2
0: A4, 1: B5, 2: LTR
Default value
0
CARD-SW
Screen set when Coin Manager connected
Lv.1 Details
To set coin or card that the user is urged to insert on the Control
Panel when the Coin Manager is connected.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 3
0: Coin, 1: Card, 2: Coin and card, 3: Card (for customization)
Default value
0
STPL-LMT
Set number of sheets for saddle stitch
Lv.2 Details
To set the number of sheets for saddle stitch
0 to 3
0: 5 sheets without white band (6 sheets when a cover is included)
1: 10 sheets without white band (11 sheets when a cover is included)
2: 10 sheets with white band (11 sheets when a cover is included)
3: 15 sheets with white band (16 sheets when a cover is included)
Default value
4
SC-TYPE
Set of Coin Manager supported machine
Lv.2 Details
To set the machine that supports the Coin Manager.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
Do not use this setting for the machines other than the ones that
support the Coin Manager.
0 to 1
0: Machine installed in convenience stores, 1: Self-operated copy
machine
Default value
0
8-300
CC-SPSW
Lv.2 Details
Support setting of control card I/F

To set support level for control card (CCIV/CCV) interface.
To keep processing performance of printer engine, select 1: Priority
on speed.
To correctly stop the output by the upper limit number of sheets,
select 2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets.
Use case
Upon users request (when connecting to the external counter
management system using the control card interface)
Caution
With priority on speed, output cannot be correctly stopped by the
upper limit number of sheets.
With priority on the upper limit number of sheets, processing
performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup
location.
0 to 2
0: No support, 1: Priority on speed, 2: Priority on upper limit number
of sheets
Default value
0
UNIT-PRC
Setting of Coin Manager currency unit
Lv.2 Details
To set currency unit to be handled with Coin Manager
Use case
0 to 6
0: Japanese yen, 1: Euro, 2: Pound, 3: Swiss Franc, 4: Dollar, 5: No
currency unit (no fractional unit), 6: No currency unit (with fractional
unit)
Default value
0
DA-PUCT
Set pickup/delivery comctn at DA charge
Lv.2 Details
When a pickup and delivery notification error occurs due to network
failure, etc., the print operation might be done without charging.
This is to set the number of sheets that can be picked up after the
machine receives Ack single from DA.
When the value is decreased, the number of prints to be made
without charging is decreased, but the productivity may decrease.
When the value is increased, the productivity does not decrease, but
the number of prints to be made without charging is increased.
Caution
As the value is smaller, the number of prints to be made without
charging is decreased, but the productivity might be lowered.
2 to 10
Default value
6
Supplement/memo
DA: Digital Accessory
8-300

MIN-PRC
Lv.1 Details
Set of Coin Manager minimum price

To set the minimum amount to be handled with Coin Manager.
Enter 10 when specifying 10 Japanese yen as the minimum amount
to be handled with the Coin Manager that supports Japanese yen.
In the case to specify 1 to 4 (Euro/Pound/Swiss Franc/Dollar) by
going through the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC > UNIT-PRC,
entry is in fractional unit. Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents ($ 0.50).
Use case
Caution
This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER >
OPTION > ACC > COIN.
0 to 9999
Default value
10
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC
Supplement/memo
As for the charging amount, it causes an error if specifying the
value that is smaller than the minimum currency unit with Settings/
Registration mode.
MAX-PRC
Set of Coin Manager maximum price
Lv.1 Details
To set the maximum amount to be handled with Coin Manager.
Enter 8800 when specifying 8800 Japanese yen as the maximum
amount to be handled with the Coin Manager that supports Japanese
yen.
In the case to specify 1 to 4 (Euro/Pound/Swiss Franc/Dollar) by
going through the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC > UNIT-PRC,
entry is in fractional unit. Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents ($ 0.50).
Use case
Caution
This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER >
OPTION > ACC > COIN.
0 to 9999
Default value
8800
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC
Supplement/memo
As for charging amount, it causes an error if specifying the value that
is larger than the maximum currency unit with Settings/Registration
mode.
8-301
MIC-TUN
Lv.1 Details
Manual adj of voice recognize microphone

To manually adjust the voice receiving level (sensitivity) of the
connected voice recognition microphone.
Microphone sensitivity is automatically tuned in user mode; however,
adjust it manually as needed.
Use case
When the sensitivity of microphone is not improved by auto tuning
0 to 255
Default value
128
Related user mode
Preferences > Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings > Tune
Microphone
SRL-SPSW
Setting of Serial I/F Kit support
Lv.1 Details
To set the support level of the Serial Interface Kit.
To keep processing performance of printer engine, select 1: Priority
on speed.
To correctly stop the output by the upper limit number of sheets,
select 2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets.
Use case
At installation of Serial Interface Kit
Caution
With priority on speed, output cannot be correctly stopped by the
upper limit number of sheets.
With priority on the upper limit number of sheets, processing
performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup
location.
0 to 2
0: No support, 1: Priority on speed, 2: Priority on upper limit number
of sheets
Default value
0
PDL-THR
Norm PDL print set: External charge mode
Lv.2 Details
To set the normal PDL print processing when setting external charge
mode 6/7 with COIN.
When 0 is set, a job is canceled. When 1 is set, a job is executed.
Use case
When setting the normal PDL print in external charge mode
0 to 1
0: Cancel, 1: Execute
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN
8-301
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE
INT-FACE

CR-TYPE
Lv.1 Details
Setting of Card Reader

To set the model of the Card Reader.
Set 0 in the case of connecting the Card Reader-C1. It operates
even 0 is set, but recognition rate decreases.
Use case
When connecting the Card Reader-F1
0 to 1
0: Card Reader-F1, 1: Card Reader-C1
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE

IMG-CONT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
T-8-74
Default value
AP-OPT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
AP-ACCNT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
AP-CODE
Lv.2 Details
Default value
NWCT-TM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
8-302
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE
Connection setting of print server

To set connection with print server.
At installation
0 to 5
0: Normal mode (Print server not connected), 1, 2: Not used, 3: Print
server connected, 4, 5: Not used
0
Output set of appli with print server
To set whether to permit output from the application (PrintMe)
equipped with print server.
Upon users request
0 to 2
0
Job dept ID set of appli w/ print server
To set department ID to the print job from the application (PrintMe)
equipped with print server.
Upon users request
0 to 9999999
0
Set output pass code from print server
To set the pass code for output from print server.
0 to 9999999
0
Timeout setting of network connection
To set the time to keep network connection between this machine
and the PC application (keep-alive setting).
As the value is incremented by 1, the time is increased by 1 minute.
When PC application is connected
1 to 5
min
5
Expected PC application: Network print application, E-mail function,
cascade copy, MEAP network application, etc.
8-302
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE

CNT-TYPE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
AUTHMODE
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Display of print server connection

To display an automatically connected print server.
At installation of print server
1 to 999
1
Setting to allow print server connection
To set whether to permit the print server connection prohibited
models to connect the printer server.
When 0: Disabled is set, even if a machine is connected to the print
server, it is not activated correctly and fails to make prints.
When 1: Enabled is set, specific models only can be connected to
the print server.
For customization
0 to 1
0
LCNS-TR
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
ST-SEND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-SEND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
T-8-75
OF-SEND
ST-ENPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-ENPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
OF-ENPDF
8-303
Installation state dspl of SEND function

To display installation state of SEND function when disabling the
function with license transfer.
When checking whether SEND function is installed
1) Select ST-SEND.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is
displayed under TR-SEND.
0 to 1
1
Trns license key dspl of SEND function
To display transfer license key to use SEND function when disabling
the function with license transfer.
- When replacing the HDD
- When replacing the device
1) Select ST-SEND.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SEND.
24 digits
[Not used]
Installation state dspl of encrypted PDF
To display installation state of encrypted PDF transmission function
when disabling the function with license transfer.
When checking whether encrypted PDF transmission function is
installed
1) Select ST-ENPDF.
displayed under TR-ENPDF.
0 to 1
0
Trns license key dspl of encrypted PDF
To display transfer license key to use encrypted PDF transmission
function when disabling the function with license transfer.
1) Select ST-ENPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF.
This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-303

ST-SPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-SPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
OF-SPDF
ST-EXPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-EXPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
OF-EXPDF
Installation state dspl searchable PDF

To display installation state of searchable PDF when disabling the
When checking whether searchable PDF is installed
1) Select ST-SPDF.
displayed under TR-SPDF.
0 to 1
0
Trns license key dspl of searchable PDF
To display transfer license key to use searchable PDF when disabling
1) Select ST-SPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SPDF.
24 digits
[Not used]
Instal state dspl encryPDF+searchblPDF
To display installation state of encrypted PDF + searchable PDF
When checking whether encrypted PDF + searchable PDF are
installed
1) Select ST-EXPDF.
displayed under TR-EXPDF.
0 to 1
0
Trns license key of encryPDF+searchblPDF
To display transfer license key to use encrypted PDF + searchable
PDF when disabling the function with license transfer.
1) Select ST-EXPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-EXPDF.
This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed for Japan.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-304
ST-PDFDR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PDFDR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-PDFDR
ST-SCR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-SCR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
OF-SCR
Install state dspl of direct print PDF

To display installation state of direct print PDF function when
disabling the function with license transfer.
When checking whether direct print PDF function is installed
1) Select ST-PDFDR.
displayed under TR-PDFDR.
0 to 1
0
Trns lcns key dspl of direct print PDF
To display transfer license key to use direct print PDF function when
1) Select ST-PDFDR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PDFDR.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of encry secure print
To display installation state of encrypted secure print when disabling
When checking whether encrypted secure print is installed
1) Select ST-SCR.
displayed under TR-SCR.
0 to 1
0
Trns license key dspl encry secure print
To display transfer license key to use encrypted secure print when
1) Select ST-SCR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCR.
This mode is enabled when there is 3DES+USH-H Board.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-304

ST-BRDIM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-BRDIM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-BRDIM
ST-VNC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-VNC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-VNC
Install state dspl of BarDIMM function

To display installation state of BarDIMM function when disabling the
When checking whether BarDIMM function is installed
1) Select ST-BRDIM.
displayed under TR-BRDIM.
0 to 1
0
Transfer license key dspl BarDIMM func
To display transfer license key to use BarDIMM function when
1) Select ST-BRDIM.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of Remote Oprtr Soft
To display installation state of Remote Operators Software when
When checking whether Remote Operators Software is installed
1) Select ST-VNC.
displayed under TR-VNC.
0 to 1
0
Trns lcns dspl of Remote Operators Softl
To display transfer license key to use Remote Operators Software
1) Select ST-VNC.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-VNC.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-305
ST-WEB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-WEB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-WEB
ST-HRPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-HRPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-HRPDF
Install state dspl Web Access Software

To display installation state of Web Access Software when disabling
When checking whether Web Access Software is installed
1) Select ST-WEB.
displayed under TR-WEB.
0 to 1
0
Trns license key dspl of Web Access Soft
To display transfer license key to use Web Access Software when
1) Select ST-WEB.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WEB.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of high compress PDF
To display installation state of high compression PDF function when
When checking whether high compression PDF function is installed
1) Select ST-HRPDF.
displayed under TR-HRPDF.
0 to 1
0
Trns lcns key dspl of high compress PDF
To display transfer license key to use high compression PDF function
1) Select ST-HRPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HRPDF.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-305

ST-TRSND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-TRSND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-TRSND
ST-WTMRK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-WTMRK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-WTMRK
Install state dspl trial SEND function

To display installation state of trial SEND function when disabling the
When checking whether trial SEND function is installed
1) Select ST-TRSND.
displayed under TR-TRSND.
0 to 1
0
Trns lcns key dspl trial SEND function
To display transfer license key to use trial SEND function when
1) Select ST-TRSND.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TRSND.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of secure watermark
To display installation state of secure watermark function when
When checking whether secure watermark function is installed
1) Select ST-WTMRK.
displayed under TR-WTMRK.
0 to 1
0
Trns license key dspl secure watermark
To display transfer license key to use secure watermark function
1) Select ST-WTMRK.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WTMRK.
24 digits
[Not used]
ST-TSPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-TSPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
OF-TSPDF
ST-USPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-USPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
OF-USPDF
8-306
Install state dspl of time stamp PDF: JP

To display installation state of time stamp PDF transmission function
(JP only) when disabling the function with license transfer.
When checking whether time stamp PDF transmission function (JP
only) is installed
1) Select ST-TSPDF.
displayed under TR-TSPDF.
0 to 1
0
Trns lcns key dspl of time stamp PDF: JP
To display transfer license key to use time stamp PDF transmission
function (JP only) when disabling the function with license transfer.
1) Select ST-TSPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TSPDF.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of dgtl user sign PDF
To display installation state of digital user signature PDF transmission
When checking whether digital user signature PDF transmission
function is installed
1) Select ST-USPDF.
displayed under TR-USPDF.
0 to 1
0
Trns lcns key dspl of dgtl user sign PDF
To display transfer license key to use digital user signature PDF
transmission function when disabling the function with license
transfer.
1) Select ST-USPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-USPDF.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-306

ST-DVPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-DVPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
OF-DVPDF
ST-SCPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-SCPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
OF-SCPDF
Install state dspl of device sign PDF

To display installation state of device signature PDF transmission
When checking whether device signature PDF transmission function
is installed
1) Select ST-DVPDF.
displayed under TR-DVPDF.
0 to 1
0
Trns lcns key dspl of device sign PDF
To display transfer license key to use device signature PDF
transmission function when disabling the function with license
transfer.
1) Select ST-DVPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of Trace & Smooth PDF
To display installation state of Trace & Smooth PDF when disabling
When checking whether Trace & Smooth PDF is installed
1) Select ST-SCPDF.
displayed under TR-SCPDF.
0 to 1
0
Trns license key dspl Trace&Smooth PDF
To display transfer license key to use Trace & Smooth PDF when
1) Select ST-SCPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCPDF.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-307
ST-AMS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-AMS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-AMS
ST-ERDS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
TR-ERDS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
OF-ERDS
Instal state dspl of Access Mngm System

To display installation state of Access Management System when
When checking whether Access Management System is installed
1) Select ST-AMS.
displayed under TR-AMS.
0 to 1
0
Trns lcns key dspl of Access Mngm System
To display transfer license key to use Access Management System
1) Select ST-AMS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AMS.
24 digits
[Not used]
Inst state dspl: monitor service func
To display installation state of monitoring service function when
When checking whether monitoring service function is installed
1) Select ST-ERDS.
displayed under TR-ERDS.
0 to 1
0
Monitoring service function: A function to send charge counter to the
third partys charge server.
Trn lcns key dspl: monitor service func
To display transfer license key to use monitoring service function
1) Select ST-ERDS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS.
24 digits
Monitoring service function: A function to send charge counter to the
third partys charge server.
[Not used]
8-307

ST-PS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-PS
ST-PCL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PCL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-PCL
Install state display of PS function

To display installation state of PS function when disabling the
When checking whether PS function is installed
1) Select ST-PS.
displayed under TR-PS.
0 to 1
0
Transfer license key dspl of PS function
To display transfer license key to use PS function when disabling the
1) Select ST-PS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS.
24 digits
[Not used]
Installation state dspl of PCL function
To display installation state of PCL function when disabling the
When checking whether PCL function is installed
1) Select ST-PCL.
displayed under TR-PCL.
0 to 1
0
Transfer license key dspl PCL function
1) Select ST-PCL.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-308
ST-PSLI5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PSLI5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-PSLI5
ST-LIPS5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-LIPS5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-LIPS5
Installation state display of PS/UFR II

To display installation state of PS/UFR II function when disabling the
When checking whether PS/UFR II is installed
1) Select ST-PSLI5.
displayed under TR-PSLI5.
0 to 1
0
Transfer license key dspl of PS/UFR II
To display transfer license key to use PS/UFR II function when
1) Select ST-PSLI5.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLI5.
24 digits
[Not used]
Installation state display of UFR II
To display installation state of UFR II function when disabling the
When checking whether UFR II function is installed
1) Select ST-LIPS5.
displayed under TR-LIPS5.
0 to 1
0
Transfer lcns key dspl UFR II function
To display transfer license key to use UFR II function when disabling
1) Select ST-LIPS5.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS5.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-308

ST-LIPS4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-LIPS4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-LIPS4
ST-PSPCL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PSPCL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-PSPCL
Install state display of LIPS4 func: JP

To display installation state of LIPS4 function (JP only) when
When checking whether LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed
1) Select ST-LIPS4.
displayed under TR-LIPS4.
0 to 1
0
Trns license key dspl of LIPS4 func: JP
To display transfer license key to use LIPS4 function (JP only) when
1) Select ST-LIPS4.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS4.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of PS/PCL function
To display installation state of PS/PCL function when disabling the
When checking whether PS/PCL function is installed
1) Select ST-PSPCL.
displayed under TR-PSPCL.
0 to 1
0
Transfer license key dspl of PS/PCL func
To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL function when
1) Select ST-PSPCL.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCL.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-309
ST-PCLUF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PCLUF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-PCLUF
ST-PSLIP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PSLIP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-PSLIP
Install state dspl PCL/UFR II function

To display installation state of PCL/UFR II function when disabling
When checking whether PCL/UFR II function is installed
1) Select ST-PCLUF.
displayed under TR-PCLUF.
0 to 1
0
Trns license key dspl of PCL/UFR II func
To display transfer license key to use PCL/UFR II function when
1) Select ST-PCLUF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCLUF.
24 digits
[Not used]
Installation state dspl of PS function
To display installation state of PS function when disabling the
When checking whether PS function is installed
1) Select ST-PSLIP.
displayed under TR-PSLIP.
0 to 1
0
Transfer license key dspl of PS function
1) Select ST-PSLIP.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLIP.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-309

ST-PSPCU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PSPCU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-PSPCU
ST-LXUFR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-LXUFR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-LXUFR
Install state dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func

To display installation state of PS/PCL/UFR II function when disabling
When checking whether PS/PCL/UFR II function is installed
1) Select ST-PSPCU.
displayed under TR-PSPCU.
0 to 1
0
Trns lcns key dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func
To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL/UFR II function when
1) Select ST-PSPCU.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCU.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of UFR II function
To display installation state of UFR II function when disabling the
When checking whether UFR II function is installed
1) Select ST-LXUFR.
displayed under TR-LXUFR.
0 to 1
1
Trns license key dspl of UFR II function
To display transfer license key to use UFR II function when disabling
1) Select ST-LXUFR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LXUFR.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-310
ST-HDCR2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-HDCR2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-HDCR2
ST-JBLK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-JBLK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-JBLK
Install state dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set

To display installation state of HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when
When checking whether HDD Initialize All Data/Settings is installed
1) Select ST-HDCR2.
displayed under TR-HDCR2.
0 to 1
0
Trns lcns key dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set
To display transfer license key to use HDD Initialize All Data/Settings
1) Select ST-HDCR2.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCR2.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of Document Scan Lock
To display installation state of Document Scan Lock when disabling
When checking whether Document Scan Lock is installed
1) Select ST-JBLK.
displayed under TR-JBLK.
0 to 1
0
Trns lcns key dspl of Document Scan Lock
To display transfer license key to use Document Scan Lock when
1) Select ST-JBLK.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-JBLK.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-310

ST-AFAX
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-AFAX
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-AFAX
ST-REPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-REPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-REPDF
Installation state dspl of remote fax

To display installation state of remote fax client function when
When checking whether remote fax client function is installed
1) Select ST-AFAX.
displayed under TR-AFAX.
0 to 1
0
Transfer license key dspl of remote fax
To display transfer license key to use remote fax client function when
1) Select ST-AFAX.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl:reader extensions PDF
To display installation state of reader extensions PDF function when
When checking whether reader extensions PDF function is installed
1) Select ST-REPDF.
displayed under TR-REPDF.
0 to 1
0
Trns lcns key dspl:reader extensions PDF
To display transfer license key to use reader extensions PDF function
1) Select ST-REPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-REPDF.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-311
ST-OOXML
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-OOXML
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-OOXML
ST-XPS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-XPS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-XPS
Install state dspl of Office Open XML

To display installation state of Office Open XML transmission function
When checking whether Office Open XML transmission function is
installed
1) Select ST-OOXML.
displayed under TR-OOXML.
0 to 1
0
Trns lcns key dspl of Office Open XML
To display transfer license key to use Office Open XML when
1) Select ST-OOXML.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OOXML.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install state dspl of direct print XPS
To display installation state of direct print XPS when disabling the
When checking whether direct print XPS is installed
1) Select ST-XPS.
displayed under TR-XPS.
0 to 1
0
Trns lcns key dspl of direct print XPS
To display transfer license key to use direct print XPS when disabling
1) Select ST-XPS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-XPS.
24 digits
[Not used]
8-311

ST-2600
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-2600
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-2600
ST-OPFNT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-OPFNT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OF-OPFNT
Lv.2 Details
Default value
Instal state dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func

To display installation state of security function of IEEE2600.1 when
When checking whether security function of IEEE2600.1 is installed
1) Select ST-2600.
displayed under TR-2600.
0 to 1
0
Trn lcns key dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func
To display transfer license key to use security function of
IEEE2600.1 when disabling the function with license transfer.
1) Select ST-2600.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-2600.
24 digits
[Not used]
Install status display of PCL Font Set
To display the installation status of PCL Font Set when transfer is
disabled
When checking whether PCL option font is installed
1) Select ST-OPFNT.
The transfer license key is displayed under ST-OPFNT.
0 to 1
0
Trns lcns key display of PCL Font Set
To display transfer license key to use PCL Font Set function with
Policy when transfer is disabled.
- When replacing HDD
1) Select TR-OPFNT.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OPFNT.
24 digits
License deactivation of PCL Font Set
To deactivate the license of PCL Font Set when disabling the function
with license transfer.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
8-312
ST-NCAPT
Lv.2 Details
Install state display of NetCap func

To display installation state of network packet capture function when
Use case
When checking whether network packet capture function is installed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-NCAPT.
displayed under TR-NCAPT.
0 to 1
When operation finished normally: OK!
Default value
0
TR-NCAPT
Transfer license key dspl of NetCap func
Lv.2 Details
To display transfer license key to use network packet capture
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-NCAPT.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-NCAPT.
License key (24 characters)
OF-NCAPT
Lcns deactivation of NetCap function
Lv.2 Details
To deactivate the license of network packet capture function when
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
T-8-76
8-312
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG
TEST
8-313
COPIER > TEST > PG
DENS-Y
Lv.1 Details
PG
COPIER > TEST > PG
TYPE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Test print
To execute the test print.
At problem analysis
Test print is executed.
Caution
Be sure to return the value to 0 after the test print output.
0 to 100
0: Image from CCD (Normal print)
1 to 3: For R&D use
4: 16 gradations
5: Whole-area halftone image
6: Grid
7 to 9: For R&D use
10: MCYBk horizontal stripes
11: For R&D use
12: YMCBk 64 gradations
13: For R&D use
14: Full color 16 gradations
15 to 100: For R&D use
Default value
0
TXPH
Setting of test print image mode
Lv.1 Details
To set the image mode at the time of test print output.
This mode is enabled for test print only.
Use case
At problem analysis
0 to 6
0: Error diffusion
1: Low screen ruling (approx. 133 to 190 lines)
2: High screen ruling (approx. 200 to 268 lines)
3: Copy screen (approx. 220 lines)
4: REOS screen (no screen structure)
5 to 6: Not used
THRU
Image correction table use at test print
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to use the image correction table at the time of test
print output.
Use case
At problem analysis
0 to 1
0: Used, 1: Not used
Use case
DENS-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DENS-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DENS-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COLOR-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COLOR-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj of Y-color density at test print

To adjust Y-color density when performing test print (TYPE=5).
At test print (TYPE=5)
0 to 255
Adj of M-color density at test print
To adjust M-color density when performing test print (TYPE=5).
0 to 255
Adj of C-color density at test print
To adjust C-color density when performing test print (TYPE=5).
0 to 255
Adj of Bk-color density at test print
To adjust Bk-color density when performing test print (TYPE=5).
0 to 255
Y-color output setting at test print
To make a setting of Y-color output for test print.
The setting is applied to all types.
When setting COLOR-Y to 1 and other items to 0, a single Y color
is output.
At test print
0 to 1
0: Not output, 1: Output
M-color output setting at test print
To make a setting of M-color output for test print.
When setting COLOR-M to 1 and other items to 0, a single M
color is output.
At test print
0 to 1
8-313
8-314
COPIER > TEST > PG

COLOR-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COLOR-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
F/M-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
PG-PICK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
2-SIDE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
COPIER > TEST > PG
C-color output setting at test print

To make a setting of C-color output for test print.
When setting COLOR-C to 1 and other items to 0, a single C color
is output.
At test print
0 to 1
Bk-color output setting at test print
To make a setting of Bk-color output for test print.
When setting COLOR-K to 1 and other items to 0, a single Bk
color is output.
At test print
0 to 1
Setting of PG full color/mono color
To set for the output in full color/monochrome color with PG.
When separating (identifying) the cause whether its due to color or
monochrome.
0 to 1
0: Full color, 1: Single color
0
Setting of test print paper source
To set the paper source at the time of test print output.
- At problem analysis
- At test print output
1 to 19
1: Right Deck, 2: Left Deck, 3: Cassette3, 4: Cassette4, 5: POD
Deck Lite/Paper Deck, 6 Multi-purpose Tray, 7 to 16: Not used, 17:
Multi Deck (Upper) 18: Multi Deck (Middle), 19: Multi Deck (Lower)
Setting of PG 2-sided mode
To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output.
At problem analysis
0 to 1
0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided
0
PG-QTY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
FINISH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Setting of PG output quantity

To set the number of sheets for PG output.
At problem analysis
1 to 999
sheet
1
Accessory processing function test print
To execute the test print relating to accessory processing function.
When checking operation of accessory processing function
0 to 99
0: N/A
1: Staple (front) *1
2: Staple (2 points) *1
3: Staple (rear) *1
4: Booklet (saddle stitch) *1
5: Z-fold (single sleeve) *1
6: 2-fold *1
7: C-fold *2
8: V-fold *2
9: 4-fold *2
10: Z-fold (out-3-fold) *2
11: Punch (Inner Puncher) *3
12: Multiple-hole punch *4
13: Shift *1
14 to 99: Spare (for future use)
*1 Finisher, *2 Multi-folding machine, *3 Inner Puncher, *4 Multiplehole Puncher
0
COPIER> TEST> PG> PG-QTY
T-8-77
8-314
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NETWORK
NETWORK
8-315
COPIER > TEST > NETWORK
COPIER > TEST > NETWORK

PING
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Network connection check

To check connection between this machine and TCP/IP network.
- When checking network connection at the time of installation
- At network connection failure
Adj/set/operate method 1) Turn OFF the main power switch.
2) Connect the network cable to this machine, and then turn ON the
main power switch.
3) Inform the system administrator at users site that installation of
this machine is complete, and ask for network setting.
4) Ask the system administrator to check the network connection,
and check the remote host address of PING transmission target.
5) Select the item and enter the remote host address, and then press
OK key and Start key.
OK: Connection is normal. Checking procedure is complete.
NG: Connection failed. Go to step 6) if the cable connection is OK. In
case of cable connection failure, connect again and then go to step 5).
6) Select the item and enter loopback address, and then press OK
key and Start key.
OK: TCP/IP setting of this machine is normal. Go to step 7) to check
NIC.
NG: TCP/IP setting of this machine has failure. Go to step 3) to
check the setting again.
7) Select the item and enter the local host address, and then press
OK key.
OK: Network setting of this machine and NIC are normal. Inform the
system administrator that the trouble is due to network environment
and ask for countermeasure.
NG: Connection failure/fault with NIC. Check connection of NIC/
replace NIC.
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
At normal state: OK, At failure occurrence: NG
Supplement/memo
- Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal in network.
- Loopback address: 127.0.0.1. Checking TCP/IP of this machine is
AZ733available because the signal is returned before NIC.
- NIC: Network interface board
- Local host address: IP address of this machine
BML-DISP
Set System Monitor scrn: BMlinks support
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to only display the device configuration in the System
Monitor screen when supporting BMlinks.
When 1 is set, the Status and Log are not displayed.
Use case
When supporting BMlinks
0 to 1
0: Ordinary System Monitor screen
1: Screen in which only the device configuration is displayed
Default value
0
IPV6-ADR
Lv.1 Details
Caution
PING-IP6
Lv.1 Details
IPSECPOL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
IPSECINT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NETWORK
Setting of PING send address (IPv6)

To set the IPv6 address to send PING.
When PING is sent to this address by COPIER> TEST> NETWORK>
PING-IP6, the network connection condition in the IPv6 environment
can be checked.
- Enter a consistent character string as an address of IPv6.
- Enter an address within 39 characters including hexadecimal
numbers (0 to 9, a to f) and a separator (:).
Up to 40 characters including hexadecimal numbers (0 to 9, A to F)
and a separator (:)
COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> PING-IP6
PING transmission to IPv6 address
To send PING to the address specified by IPV6-ADR.
The network connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be
checked.
COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> IPV6-ADR
Polling test of IPSec Encryption Board
To execute polling test of IPSec Encryption Board.
To check whether a hardware failure has occurred.
When checking whether a hardware failure has occurred to the
IPSec Encryption Board
At normal state: OK
At failure occurrence: NG (0: The board cannot be recognized. 1: An
error occurred to the result.)
Interrupt test of IPSec Encryption Board
To execute the interrupt test of IPSec Encryption Board.
To check whether a hardware failure has occurred.
When checking whether a hardware failure has occurred to the
IPSec Encryption Board
At normal state: OK
At failure occurrence: NG (0: The board cannot be recognized. 1: An
error occurred to the result.)
T-8-78
8-315
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP
NET-CAP
COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP

COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP
CAPOFFON
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
STT-STP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
CAPSTATE
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
PONSTART
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
OVERWRIT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
8-316
ON/OFF of NetCap function

To set ON/OFF of network packet capture function.
When switching ON/OFF of network packet capture function
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Start and stop of network packet capture
To start and stop network packet capture.
When starting and stopping network packet capture
0 to 1
0: Stop, 1: Start
0
Status of NetCap function
To display the status of network packet capture function
When displaying the status of network packet capture function
None
0 to 4
0
Start of NetCap function at power-on
To set whether to enable network packet capture function from
power-on.
When switching whether to enable network packet capture function
from power-on
0 to 1
0
Data overwriting control:NetCap function
To set whether to finish capturing or continue overwriting when HDD
becomes full.
When setting whether to finish capturing or continue overwriting
when HDD becomes full
0 to 1
0: No overwriting (finish network packet capture), 1: Overwriting
0
PAYLOAD
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Payload discard: NetCap function

To set whether to discard payload of captured packet.
When setting whether to discard payload of captured packet
0 to 1
0: Save captured packet data as is, 1: Discard payload and save the
packet data
Default value
0
FILE-CLR
Deletion of file: NetCap function
Lv.2 Details
To delete data collected by network packet capture function.
Use case
When deleting data collected by network packet capture function
None
SIMPFILT
Settings of packet data filtering
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to perform filtering when capturing packet data.
When 0 is set, filtering is not performed (All the data are captured.)
When 1 is set, packet data is captured only when the receivers or
senders address coincides with the Mac address of this machine.
Use case
At problem analysis (at packet data analysis)
0 to 2
0: Not filtered,
1: Filtered
2: Not used
ENCDATA
Setting of packet data encryption
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to encrypt the packet data when writing the captured
packet data to the USB memory.
Use case
- At problem analysis (at packet data analysis)
- When improving security of written packet data
Caution
This setting is enabled only when writing data to the USB memory.
Even when the packet data is loaded using SST, the file is specified,
therefore the setting is disabled.
0 to 2
0: Encrypted (encrypted file)
1: Not encrypted (plain text file)
2: Encrypted (encrypted file + plain text file)
Default value
0
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP
T-8-79
8-316
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
COUNTER
COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL

2-SIDE
Lv.1 Details
TOTAL
COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
SERVICE1
Lv.1 Details
SERVICE2
Lv.1 Details
COPY
Lv.1 Details
PDL-PRT
Lv.1 Details
FAX-PRT
Lv.1 Details
BOX-PRT
Lv.1 Details
RPT-PRT
Lv.1 Details
8-317
Service-purposed total counter 1

To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine.
Large size: 1, small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
0 to 99999999
Service-purposed total counter 2
0 to 99999999
Total copy counter
0 to 99999999
PDL print counter
To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine
according to the charge counter at PDL print.
0 to 99999999
FAX reception print counter
according to the charge counter at FAX reception.
0 to 99999999
Inbox print counter
according to the charge counter at Inbox print.
0 to 99999999
Report print counter
according to the charge counter at report print.
0 to 99999999
SCAN
Lv.1 Details
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
2-sided copy/print counter

according to the charge counter at 2-sided copy/print.
0 to 99999999
Scan counter
To count the number of scan operations according to the charge
counter when the scanning operation is complete.
0 to 99999999
T-8-80
8-317
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
PICK-UP
FEEDER
COPIER > COUNTER > PICK-UP
C1
Lv.1 Details
Unit
C2
Lv.1 Details
Unit
C3
Lv.1 Details
Unit
C4
Lv.1 Details
Unit
MF
Lv.1 Details
Unit
DK
Lv.1 Details
Unit
2-SIDE
Lv.1 Details
Unit
D1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
D2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
D3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
8-318
COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
Cassette 1 pickup total counter

Large size: 1, Small size: 1
sheet
sheet
sheet
sheet
Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter
sheet
Deck pickup total counter
sheet
2-sided pickup total counter
sheet
POD Upper Deck pickup total counter
When checking the total counter of POD Upper Deck
sheet
0
POD Middle Deck pickup total counter
When checking the total counter of POD Middle Deck
sheet
0
POD Lower Deck pickup total counter
When checking the total counter of POD Lower Deck
sheet
0
FEED
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
DFOP-CNT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
DADF original pickup total counter

DADF original pickup total counter
When checking the total counter of original pickup by DADF
sheet
DADF hinge open/close counter
DADF hinge open/close counter
When checking the DADF hinge open/close counter
time
T-8-82
T-8-81
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
8-318
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JAM
JAM
COPIER > COUNTER > JAM

COPIER > COUNTER > JAM
TOTAL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
FEEDER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
SORTER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
2-SIDE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
MF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
C1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
C2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
C3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
C4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
DK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
8-319
Printer total jam counter

Printer total jam counter
When checking the total jam counter of printer
time
Feeder total jam counter
Feeder total jam counter
When checking the total jam counter of feeder
time
Finisher total jam counter
Finisher total jam counter
When checking the total jam counter of finisher
time
Duplex Unit jam counter
Duplex Unit jam counter
When checking the jam counter of Duplex Unit
time
Multi-purpose Tray jam counter
Multi-purpose Tray jam counter
When checking the jam counter of Multi-purpose Tray
time
Right Deck jam counter
Right Deck jam counter
When checking the jam counter of machines Right Deck
time
Left Deck jam counter
Left Deck jam counter
When checking the jam counter of machines Left Deck
time
Cassette 3 pickup jam counter
When checking the jam counter of machines Cassette 3
time
When checking the jam counter of machines Cassette 4
time
POD Deck Lite jam counter
POD Deck Lite jam counter
When checking the jam counter of POD Deck Lite
time
MDK1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
MDK2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
MDK3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JAM
Multi Deck (Upper) jam counter

When checking the jam counter of Multi Deck (Upper)
time
0
Multi Deck (Middle) jam counter
When checking the jam counter of Multi Deck (Middle)
time
0
Multi Deck (Lower) jam counter
When checking the jam counter of Multi Deck (Lower)
time
0
T-8-83
8-319
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > MISC
MISC
COPIER > COUNTER > MISC

T-SPLY-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
T-SPLY-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
T-SPLY-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
T-SPLY-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
ALLPW-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
HDD-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
ST-NDL
Lv.1 Details
Unit
Default value
ENT-PTH
Lv.1 Details
Unit
Default value
8-320
Y toner supply counter

Number of Y color toner supply blocks.
Counted for every one rotation of Toner Stirring Screw.
When checking the usage status of toner
block
0
M toner supply counter
Number of M color toner supply blocks.
block
0
C toner supply counter
Number of C color toner supply blocks.
block
0
Bk toner supply counter
Number of Bk color toner supply blocks.
block
0
Number of DCON PCB power-on times
Number of power-on times (Non-all-night Power Unit).
To count up when power is turned ON (Non-all-night Power Unit).
When checking the usage status of the product
time
Number of HDD start-up times
To count up at HDD start-up.
When checking the usage status of the product
time
Staple needle counter
To count the use of the staple needle.
time
0
Entrance paper path counter
Entrance paper path counter
sheet
0
TRAY-CHA
Lv.1 Details
Unit
Default value
PUNCH
Lv.1 Details
Unit
Default value
PUN-CAB
Lv.1 Details
Unit
Default value
PUN-WST
Lv.1 Details
Default value
SADDLE
Lv.1 Details
Unit
Default value
SDL-STPL
Lv.1 Details
Unit
Default value
SDL-NDL
Lv.1 Details
Unit
Default value
ESC-PTH
Lv.1 Details
Unit
Default value
SUC-A-Y
SUC-A-M
SUC-A-C
SUC-A-K
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > MISC
Tray change counter

Tray change counter
time
0
Punch Unit counter
Punch Unit counter
time
0
Punch Unit Cable counter
Punch Unit Cable counter
time
0
Punch waste counter
Punch Unit punch waste counter
0
Saddle paper path counter
Saddle paper path counter
sheet
0
Saddle Staple counter
Saddle Staple Unit counter
time
0
Saddle staple needle counter
Saddle staple needle counter
time
0
Escape paper path counter
Escape paper path counter
sheet
0
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
8-320
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JOB

FX-WEB
Lv.1 Details
Web Level Sensor parts counter

To display the accumulated number of sheets fed through the web (on
a small size conversion basis) after the Web Level Sensor is turned
ON.
1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life value
To reset the number of fed sheets (DRBL-1/FX-WEB1 to 4, MISC/
FX-WEB) by pressing the Clear key. (Use this mode when replacing
the web and Fixing Unit.)
Use case
When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and
then press OK key.
Caution
Clear the counter value after replacement.
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
COPIER> COUNTER>DRBL-1>FIX-WEB
COPIER> DISPLAY> FIXING> FX-WEB-TM1 to 8
8-321
JOB
COPIER > COUNTER > JOB
DVPAPLEN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
DVRUNLEN
Lv.1 Details
T-8-84
Use case
Unit
Default value
Average paper length of job

Average paper length in the period from when the printer engine
starts printing operation to when it stops the operation.
Since the printer engine considers small jobs that are executed
continuously as a large job, the average paper length affects
calculation of the life.
0 to 99999999
mm
0
Average distance of job
Average running distance in the period from when the printer engine
starts printing operation to when it stops the operation.
Since the printer engine considers small jobs that are executed
continuously as a large job, the average running distance affects
calculation of the life.
0 to 99999999
mm
0
T-8-85
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JOB
8-321
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1
PRDC-1
COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1

PRM-WIRE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PRM-GRID
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PO-WIRE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PRM-CLN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
8-322
Primary Charging Wire parts counter

2nd line: Estimated life
To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Grid Plate parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Pre-transfer Charging Wire parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Primary Charge Wire Clean Pad prts cntr
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad 1, 2
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
PO-CLN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PRM-CLN2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PO-CLN2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PO-UNIT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Pre-transfer Chg Wire Cln Pad prts cntr

Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad 1, 2
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Prmry Charge Wire Cleanr Pad2 prts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Pre-trn Chg Wire Clnr Pad2 parts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Pre-transfer Charging Assy parts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-322

PRM-UNIT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
GRID-PAD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
OZ-FIL1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
AR-FIL1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Primary Charging Assembly parts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Grid Cleaning Pad parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Ozone Filter parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Dustproof Filter parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-323
TN-FIL1
Lv.1 Details
Toner Filter parts counter

Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
T-8-86
8-323
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1
DRBL-1
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

TR-BLT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
2TR-ROLL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
TR-STC-H
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
2TR-INRL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
8-324
ITB parts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Sec Transfer Outer Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Sec Transfer Static Eliminator prts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Sec Transfer Inner Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
ITB-BLD1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PT-DRM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
CLN-BLD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DV-UNT-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
ITB Cleaning Blade parts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Bk Photosensitive Drum parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Developing Assembly (C) parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-324

DV-UNT-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DV-UNT-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DV-UNT-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C1-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Developing Assembly (Y) parts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Developing Assembly (M) parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Developing Assembly (Bk) parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Right Deck Pickup Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-325
C1-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
C1-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C2-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C2-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
Right Deck Separation Roller parts cntr

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Right Deck Feed Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Left Deck Pickup Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Left Deck Separation Roller prts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
8-325

C2-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C3-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C3-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C3-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Left Deck Feed Roller parts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Cassette 3 Pickup Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Cassette 3 Separation Roller parts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Cassette 3 Feed Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-326
C4-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C4-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C4-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
M-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
Cassette 4 Pickup Roller parts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Cassette 4 Separation Roller parts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Cassette 4 Feed Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Multi-purpose Tray Sprtn Roll prts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
8-326

M-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roll prts cntr

Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
WST-TNR
Waste Toner Container parts counter
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
image
Default value
0
ITB-SCRP
ITB Inner Scraper Holder parts counter
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
8-327
FX-BLT-U
Lv.1 Details
Fixing Roller parts counter

To display the accumulated number of paper transported through
Fixing Roller on a small size conversion basis.
By pressing Clear key, the accumulated number of paper transported
through Fixing Roller, the running time of the Fixing Roller (FX-U-TM1
to 8), and displacement control steering setting value (FX-U-STR)
are reset.
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
COPIER> DISPLAY> FIXING> BLT-TM, BLT-TM1 to 8, BLT2-TM1 to
8
PT-DR-Y
Y Photosensitive Drum parts counter
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
PT-DR-M
M Photosensitive Drum parts counter
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
8-327

PT-DR-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
1TR-RL-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
1TR-RL-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
1TR-RL-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C Photosensitive Drum parts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Primary Transfer Roller(Y) parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Primary Transfer Roller(M) parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Primary Transfer Roller(C) parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-328
1TR-RL-K
Lv.1 Details
Primary Transfer Roller(Bk) prts counter

Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
SU-SHT-K
Drum Clean Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) prts cntr
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
EDGE-F-K
Edge Scraper (Bk) parts counter
Lv.1 Details
Edge Scraper 1, 2 (Bk)
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
8-328

FX-L
Lv.1 Details
Pressure Roller parts counter

To display the accumulated number of sheets fed through Pressure
Roller on a small size conversion basis.
By pressing Clear key, the accumulated number of sheets fed
through Pressure Roller and the running time of the Pressure Roller
(FX-L-TM1 to 8) are reset.
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
COPIER> DISPLAY> FIXING> FX-L-TM1 to 8
FX-WEB1
Dspl/clear fed sht: Web, s-size convs
Lv.1 Details
To display the accumulated number of sheets fed through the web (on
a small size conversion basis, and including web take-up in cleaning
mode).
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
COPIER> COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB
DRBL-1>FX-WEB1 to 4
8-329
FX-WEB2
Lv.1 Details
Dspl/clear fed sht:web N-SPD,s-siz convs

To display the number of fed sheets (on a small size conversion
basis) when feeding the web at normal speed.
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
DRBL-1>FX-WEB1 to 4
FX-WEB3
Dspl/clear fed sht:web W-SPD,s-siz convs
Lv.1 Details
basis) when feeding the web at double speed.
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
DRBL-1>FX-WEB1 to 4
8-329

FX-WEB4
Lv.1 Details
Dspl/clear fed sht:web clean,s-siz convs

basis) at cleaning operation.
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
DRBL-1>FX-WEB1 to 4
FX-UH-RL
Fixing Heat Soaking Roller parts counter
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
T-8-87
8-330
DRBL-2
DF-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Pickup Roller parts counter: DADF

Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
DF-FD-RL
Feed Roller parts counter: DADF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
DF-SP-RL
Separation Roller parts counter: DADF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
8-330

LNT-TAP1
Lv.1 Details
Dust Removal Sheet 1 counter: DADF

Dust-colleting
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
LNT-TAP2
Dust Removal Sheet 2 counter: DADF
Lv.1 Details
Dust-colleting typeE
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
STAMP
Stamp parts counter: DADF
Lv.1 Details
To display the estimated life and parts counter of DADF stamp.
2nd line: Estimated life to be entered by operator
Use case
At replacement
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
PD-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
PD-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
PD-PU-CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
PD-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
8-331
Pickup Roller parts counter: Deck

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Separation Roller parts counter: Deck
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Upr Deck Pickup Clutch prts cntr:M Deck
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Feed Roller parts counter: Deck
Feed Roller of Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite/Multi Deck (Upper)
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
8-331

PD-PU-SL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
FIN-STPR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
SDL-STPL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
FN-BFFRL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Upr Deck Pickup Solend prts cntr: M Deck

Pickup Roller Release Solenoid
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Stapler parts counter/B1
Stapler Unit
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
time
0
Saddle Stapler parts counter
Saddle Stapler Unit
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
time
0
Buffer Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-332
DL-STC-L
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
DL-STC-R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
ENT-STC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
CENT-STC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Static Eliminator prts cntr/B1

Swing Guide Assembly Static Eliminator (Front/Rear)
Delivery Static Eliminator (Left)
At replacement
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Static Eliminator prts cntr/B1
Feed Guide Assembly Static Eliminator
Delivery Static Eliminator (Right)
At replacement
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Inlet Static Eliminator prts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Swinging Sttc Elim prts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-332

BACK-ROL
Lv.1 Details
Paper Return Roller parts counter

Paper Return Roller (Front/Rear)
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
STK-STC
Stck Delv Rol Sttc Elim prts cntr
Lv.1 Details
Process delivery static eliminator
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
IS-P-RL1
Pickup Roll prts cntr: INS-H1/J1, PF/INS
Lv.1 Details
INS-H1: Upper Tray Pickup Roller
INS-J1, PF/INS: Inserter Pickup Roller
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
8-333
IS-S-RL1
Lv.1 Details
Sprtn Roll prts cntr: INS-H1/J1, PF/INS

INS-H1: Upper Tray Separation Roller
INS-J1, PF/INS: Inserter Separation Roller
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
IS-F-RL1
Feed Roller prts cntr: INS-H1/J1, PF/INS
Lv.1 Details
INS-H1: Upper Tray Feed Roller
INS-J1, PF/INS: Inserter Feed Roller
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
IS-TQLM1
Drv Torq Limt prts cntr:INS-H1/J1,PF/INS
Lv.1 Details
INS-H1: Upper Tray Torque Limiter
INS-J1, PF/INS: Inserter Drive Torque Limiter
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
8-333

IS-P-RL2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
IS-S-RL2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
IS-F-RL2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
IS-TQLM2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
Lowr Tray Pickup Roll prts cntr: INS-H1

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Lower Tray Sprtn Roll parts cntr: INS-H1
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Lower Tray Feed Roller prts cntr: INS-H1
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Lower Tray Torque Limt prts cntr: INS-H1
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
8-334
BEHL-RL
Lv.1 Details
Stck Tray Ppr Rtnr Roll prts cntr

Stacking Tray Paper Retainer Roller
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
IU-ELM
Sttc Elim parts counter: P-Puncher IFU
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
DIESET1
Die set 1 parts counter: P-puncher
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item and press the Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value and
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
Product name of P-Puncher: Professional Puncher-C1
8-334

DIESET2
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-335
DIESET5
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-335

DIESET8
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-336
DIESET11
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET13
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-336

DIESET14
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET15
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET16
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-337
DIESET17
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET18
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET19
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-337

DIESET20
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET21
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET22
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-338
DIESET23
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET24
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET25
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-338

DIESET26
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET27
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET28
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-339
DIESET29
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET30
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET31
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-339

DIESET32
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET33
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET34
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-340
DIESET35
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET36
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET37
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-340

DIESET38
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET39
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET40
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-341
DIESET41
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET42
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET43
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-341

DIESET44
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET45
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET46
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-342
DIESET47
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET48
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET49
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-342

DIESET50
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET51
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET52
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-343
DIESET53
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET54
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET55
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-343

DIESET56
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET57
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET58
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-344
DIESET59
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET60
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET61
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-344

DIESET62
Lv.1 Details

Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET63
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DIESET64
Lv.1 Details
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-345
BEHLTQLM
Lv.1 Details
Tray 1/2 Torque Limt parts cntr

Process Tray Torque Limiter (Tray 1/2 Paper Retainer)
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
SWG-RL
Proc Tray Ppr Rtn Roll prts cntr
Lv.1 Details
Process Tray Paper Return Roller (Front/Rear)
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
SWG-DL-1
Swng Ejectn Roll (F/R) prts cntr
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
8-345

SWG-DL-2
Lv.1 Details
Delivery Upr Roll (Ctr) prts cntr

Swing Guide Delivery Upper Roller (Center)
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
SHT-CL
Swng Guide Electmag Clt prts cntr
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
SHT-TQLM
Shutter Torque Limiter prts cntr
Lv.1 Details
Stack Wall Lower Assembly Torque Limiter (Shutter)
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
SWG-TQLM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
SUB-TQLM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
TRY-TQLM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
TR2-TQLM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
8-346
Process Tray Torq Limt prts cntr

Process Tray Torque Limiter (Process Tray Paper Retainer)
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Sub Guide Torque Limt prts cntr
Process Tray Torque Limiter (Sub Guide)
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Tray 1 Torque Limiter prts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Tray 2 Torque Limiter prts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
8-346

SWG-RB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
TRM-GD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
IS-CL2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
IS-ELM1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
Proc Tray Ppr Rtnr Rubr prts cntr

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Scar Prev Sheet Plate prts cntr: Trimmer
Scar Prevention Sheet (Upper/Lower)
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Lowr Tray Electmag Clt prts cntr: INS-H1
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
time
0
Thru Fd Inlt Sttc Elim prts cntr: INS-H1
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
8-347
IS-CL1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
IS-RV-SL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
IS-ELM2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
PF-ELM2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
Upr Tray Electmag Clt parts cntr: INS-H1

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
time
0
Reverse Solenoid parts counter: INS-H1
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
time
0
Thru Feed Out Sttc Elim prts cntr:INS-H1
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Thru Feed Out Sttc Elim prts cntr: PFU
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
8-347

PF-CL2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
PF-ELM1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
PF-CL1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
PF-RL-SL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
Pre-fold Lowr Rol Drv Clt2 prts cntr:PFU

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
time
0
Thru Feed Inlet Sttc Elim prts cntr: PFU
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Pre-fold Lowr Rol Drv Clt1 prts cntr:PFU
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
time
0
Fold/Separation Solenoid parts cntr: PFU
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
8-348
PF-FL-SL
Lv.1 Details
Thru/Fold Flapper Solend parts cntr: PFU

Through/Fold Branch Flapper Solenoid
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
PD-PU-R2
Mid Deck Pickup Roll parts cntr: M Deck
Lv.1 Details
Middle Deck Pickup Roller (Front/Rear)
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
PD-SP-R2
Mid Deck Sprtn Roll parts cntr: M Deck
Lv.1 Details
Middle Deck Separation Roller
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
8-348

PD-FD-R2
Lv.1 Details
Mid Deck Feed Roller parts cntr: M Deck

Middle Deck Pickup/Feed Roller
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
PD-PU-C2
Mid Deck Pickup Clutch prts cntr: M Deck
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
time
Default value
0
PD-PU-S2
Mid Deck Pickup Solend prts cntr: M Deck
Lv.1 Details
Middle Deck Pickup Roller Release Solenoid
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
8-349
PD-PU-R3
Lv.1 Details
Lowr Deck Pickup Roll parts cntr: M Deck

Lower Deck Pickup Roller (Front/Rear)
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
PD-SP-R3
Lower Deck Sprtn Roll parts cntr: M Deck
Lv.1 Details
Lower Deck Separation Roller
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
PD-FD-R3
Lower Deck Feed Roller prts cntr: M Deck
Lv.1 Details
Lower Deck Pickup/Feed Roller
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
8-349

PD-PU-C3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
PD-PU-S3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
TRM-CUT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
IS-COLL1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
Lowr Deck Pickup Clutch prts cntr:M Deck

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
time
0
Lowr Deck Pickup Solend prts cntr:M Deck
Lower Deck Pickup Roller Release Solenoid
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
Trimmer Unit trimming counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Horz Fd Drv Roll prts cntr:INS-J1,PF/INS
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
sheet
0
8-350
IS-COLL2
Lv.1 Details
Fold Uni Ppr Fd Drv Rol prts cntr:PF/INS

Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
SWG-SL
Swing Solenoid parts counter
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
T-8-88
8-350
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > V-CNTR
T-CNTR
V-CNTR
COPIER > COUNTER > T-CNTR
YELLOW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
MAGENTA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CYAN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BLACK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-351
COPIER > COUNTER > V-CNTR
Y Toner Container counter

To count up in the unit of 0.1 Y color Toner Container consumed.
When checking the consumption volume of Toner Container
M Toner Container counter
To count up in the unit of 0.1 M color Toner Container consumed.
C Toner Container counter
To count up in the unit of 0.1 C color Toner Container consumed.
Bk Toner Container counter
To count up in the unit of 0.1 Bk color Toner Container consumed.
T-8-89
TOTAL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
YELLOW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
MAGENTA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CYAN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BLACK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Video count total counter

To display distribution of total video count for each color.
Small size: 1, Large size: 1
When checking distribution of video count
Video count Y counter
To display distribution of yellow video count.
Video count M counter
To display distribution of magenta video count.
Video count C counter
To display distribution of cyan video count.
Video count Bk counter
To display distribution of black video count.
T-8-90
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > V-CNTR
8-351
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER
SORTER
COPIER > COUNTER > SORTER

DIESET1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
8-352
Punching tonal on die set 1: P-Puncher

Display the total number of punching performed by the Pro-Puncher
die set 1.
At the time of checking the usage of each die set
time
0
die set 2.
time
0
die set 3.
time
0
die set 4.
time
0
die set 5.
time
0
die set 6.
time
0
DIESET7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo

die set 7.
time
0
die set 8.
time
0
die set 9.
time
0
die set 10.
time
0
die set 11.
time
0
die set 12.
time
0
8-352

DIESET13
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET14
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET15
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET16
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET17
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET18
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo

die set 13.
time
0
die set 14.
time
0
die set 15.
time
0
die set 16.
time
0
die set 17.
time
0
die set 18.
time
0
8-353
DIESET19
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET20
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET21
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET22
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET23
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET24
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo

die set 19.
time
0
die set 20.
time
0
die set 21.
time
0
die set 22.
time
0
die set 23.
time
0
die set 24.
time
0
8-353

DIESET25
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET26
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET27
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET28
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET29
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET30
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo

die set 25.
time
0
die set 26.
time
0
die set 27.
time
0
die set 28.
time
0
die set 29.
time
0
die set 30.
time
0
8-354
DIESET31
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET32
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET33
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET34
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET35
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET36
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo

die set 31.
time
0
die set 32.
time
0
die set 33.
time
0
die set 34.
time
0
die set 35.
time
0
die set 36.
time
0
8-354

DIESET37
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET38
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET39
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET40
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET41
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET42
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo

die set 37.
time
0
die set 38.
time
0
die set 39.
time
0
die set 40.
time
0
die set 41.
time
0
die set 42.
time
0
8-355
DIESET43
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET44
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET45
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET46
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET47
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET48
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo

die set 43.
time
0
die set 44.
time
0
die set 45.
time
0
die set 46.
time
0
die set 47.
time
0
die set 48.
time
0
8-355

DIESET49
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET50
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET51
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET52
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET53
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET54
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo

die set 49.
time
0
die set 50.
time
0
die set 51.
time
0
die set 52.
time
0
die set 53.
time
0
die set 54.
time
0
8-356
DIESET55
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET56
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET57
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET58
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET59
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET60
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo

die set 55.
time
0
die set 56.
time
0
die set 57.
time
0
die set 58.
time
0
die set 59.
time
0
die set 60.
time
0
8-356
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > V2-CNTR

DIESET61
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET62
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET63
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo
DIESET64
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Supplement/memo

die set 61.
time
0
die set 62.
time
0
die set 63.
time
0
die set 64.
time
0
8-357
V2-CNTR
COPIER > COUNTER > V2-CNTR
TOTAL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
YELLOW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
MAGENTA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CYAN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BLACK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Video count total counter

To display distribution of total video count for each color.
Video count Y counter
To display distribution of yellow video count.
Video count M counter
To display distribution of magenta video count.
Video count C counter
To display distribution of cyan video count.
Video count Bk counter
To display distribution of black video count.
T-8-92
T-8-91
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > V2-CNTR
8-357
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > LF
FIXING
8-358
LF
COPIER > COUNTER > FIXING
COPIER > COUNTER > LF
FX-CNT
Lv.1 Details
Fixing Assembly feed counter

To display the accumulated number of paper transported through
Fixing Assembly on a small size conversion basis.
Use case
When checking durability of Fixing Assembly
then press OK key.
Caution
When clearing the counter, press Clear key at FX-BLT-U and FXBLT-L.
Default value
0
COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U, FX-L,FX-KIN,FX-WEB
Y-DRM-LF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
M-DRM-LF
Lv.1 Details
T-8-93
Use case
Unit
Default value
C-DRM-LF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
K-DRM-LF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Display of Drum Unit (Y) life

To display how much the Drum Unit (Y) is close to the end of life in
% (percentage).
When a new part is set, the value becomes 0%.
When checking the life of Drum Unit
0 to 100
%
0
Display of Drum Unit (M) life
To display how much the Drum Unit (M) is close to the end of life in
% (percentage).
0 to 100
%
0
Display of Drum Unit (C) life
To display how much the Drum Unit (C) is close to the end of life in
% (percentage).
0 to 100
%
0
Display of Drum Unit (Bk) life
To display how much the Drum Unit (Bk) is close to the end of life in
% (percentage).
0 to 100
%
0
T-8-94
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > LF
8-358
Service Mode > FEEDER > DISPLAY
FEEDER
FEEDER > DISPLAY

DRSN-RCV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DISPLAY
FEEDER > DISPLAY
FEEDSIZE
Lv.1 Details
TRY-WIDE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
SPSN-LMN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SPSN-RCV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
RDSN-LMN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
RDSN-RCV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DRSN-LMN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-359
Dspl of original size detected by DADF

To display the original size detected by DADF.
Distance of Original Width Detect Slider
To display the distance between the Original Width Detection Sliders.
At original size detection error
Check whether the value matching the slide position is displayed
when the Original Width Slider is moved to the specified size width
position.
0 to approx. 2970
mm
Dspl Post-sprtn Sensr emission voltage
To display the light-emitting voltage value for the Post-separation
Sensor.
When jams frequently occur
N/A (Display only)
0 to 255
Dspl of Post-sprtn Sensr recv voltage
To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Post-separation
Sensor.
Remove and insert the paper at the sensor position, and check the
value at presence/absence of the paper.
0 to 255
Dspl of Lead Sensor emission voltage
To display the light-emitting voltage value for the Lead Sensor.
N/A (Display only)
0 to 255
Display of Lead Sensor reception voltage
To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Lead Sensor.
0 to 255
Dspl of Delivery Sensor emit voltg
To display the light-emitting voltage value for the Delivery Sensor.
N/A (Display only)
0 to 255
Service Mode > FEEDER > DISPLAY
RGSN-LMN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
RGSN-RCV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dspl of Delivery Sensor recv voltg

To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Delivery Sensor.
0 to 255
Display of Rgst Sensor emission voltage
To display the light-emitting voltage value for the Registration Sensor.
0 to 255
Display of Rgst Sensor reception voltage
To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Registration
Sensor.
0 to 1023
T-8-95
8-359
Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST
ADJUST
8-360
FEEDER > ADJUST
LA-SPD2
Lv.1 Details
FEEDER > ADJUST

DOCST
Lv.1 Details
Adj of DADF img lead edge margin: front

To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image for DADF
scanning.
Execute when the output image after DADF installation is displaced.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge
of the image is decreased by 0.1 mm. (The image moves in the
direction of the leading edge of the sheet.)
Use case
- When installing DADF
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
LA-SPEED
Fine adj of DADF image magnifictn: front
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction
for DADF scanning.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1 % in
vertical scanning direction. (The feeding speed increases, and the
image is reduced.)
Use case
press OK key.
-30 to 30
Unit
%
Default value
0
DOCST2
Adj of DADF img lead edge margin: back
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image for DADF
scanning.
Execute when the output image after DADF installation is displaced.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge
of the image is decreased by 0.1 mm. (The image moves in the
direction of the leading edge of the sheet.)
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
Fine adj of DADF image magnifictn: back

To adjust the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction
for DADF scanning.
vertical scanning direction. (The feeding speed increases, and the
image is reduced.)
Use case
press OK key.
-200 to 200
Unit
%
Default value
0
ADJMSCN1
Zoom adj in 2-sided horz scan way: front
Lv.1 Details
To make a fine adjustment of the front side image magnification ratio
in horizontal scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning.
Use case
When a displacement occurs to the front/back side image
magnification ratio at the time of duplex scanning
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Unit
%
Default value
0
ADJMSCN2
Zoom adj in 2-sided horz scan way: back
Lv.1 Details
To make a fine adjustment of the back side image magnification ratio
in horizontal scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning.
Use case
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Unit
%
Default value
0
8-360
8-361
FEEDER > ADJUST

ADJSSCN1
Lv.1 Details
Zoom adj in 2-sided vert scan way: front

To make a fine adjustment of the front side image magnification ratio
in vertical scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning.
vertical scanning direction.
Use case
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Unit
%
Default value
0
ADJSSCN2
Zoom adj in 2-sided vert scan way: back
Lv.1 Details
To make a fine adjustment of the back side image magnification ratio
in vertical scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning.
vertical scanning direction.
Use case
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Unit
%
Default value
0
T-8-96
8-361
Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FEEDER > FUNCTION

TRY-LTRR
Lv.1 Details
FEEDER > FUNCTION

SENS-INT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
MTR-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TRY-A4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TRY-A5R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TRY-LTR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-362
Initialization of DADF Sensors

To initialize DADF Sensors.
When replacing Reader Controller PCB / Post-separation Sensor 1
(SR2) / Post-separation Sensor 2 (SR3) / Post-separation Sensor 3
(PCB2) / Registration Sensor (PCB3) / Lead Sensor 1 (PCB4) / Lead
Sensor 2 (SR5)
None
Specification of DADF Operation Motor
To specify the DADF Motor to operate.
The motor is activated by MTR-ON.
At operation check
0 to 9
0: Pickup Motor (M1), 1: Feed Motor (M2), 2: Registration Motor (M3),
3: Read Motor (M4), 4: Delivery Motor (M5), 5: Disengagement Motor
1 (M6), 6: Disengagement Motor 2 (M7), 7: Tray Lifter Motor (M8), 8:
Glass Shift Motor (M9), 9: Pickup Roller Unit Lifter Motor (M10)
Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: A4
To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 1
for the DADF Tray. (A4)
- When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR)
None
Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 2: A5R
for the DADF Tray. (A5R)
None
Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: LTR
for the DADF Tray. (LTR)
None
Use case
FEED-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case

FAN-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FAN-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref2: LTRR

for the DADF Tray. (LTRR)
None
Specify DADF individual feed mode
To specify the feed mode for DADF.
Feed operation is activated by FEED-ON.
At operation check
0 to 3
0: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation
1: 2-sided pickup/delivery operation
2: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation (with stamp)
3: 2-sided pickup/delivery operation (with stamp)
FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-ON
Specification of DADF Operation Fan
To specify the DADF Fan to operate.
The fan is activated by FAN-ON.
At operation check
0 to 1
0: Motor Driver Cooling Fan (FM1), 1: Read Motor Cooling Fan (FM2)
FEEDER> FUNCTION>FAN-ON
Operation check of DADF Fan
To start operation check of the Fan specified by FAN-CHK.
At operation check
The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically
stops.
2) Press OK key.
The operation check is completed.
Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation
automatically stops after approximately 5 seconds, but is not
completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is not displayed).
None
FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-CHK
8-362
8-363
FEEDER > FUNCTION

SL-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SL-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
MTR-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
ROLL-CLN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FEEDER > FUNCTION
Specification of DADF Operation Solenoid

To specify the DADF solenoid to operate.
The solenoid is activated by SL-ON.
At operation check
0 to 1
0: Disengagement Solenoid (SL1), 1: Stamp Solenoid (SL2)
FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-ON
Operation check of DADF Solenoid
To start operation check of the solenoid specified by SL-CHK.
At operation check
stops.
2) Press OK key.
None
FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-CHK
Operation check of Motor
To start operation check of the motor specified by MTR-CHK.
At operation check
stops.
2) Press OK key.
None
FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-CHK
Rotation of DADF Rollers
To rotate the DADF Rollers for cleaning.
Clean the roller with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while it is
rotating.
At roller cleaning
2) Clean the rotating rollers with lint-free paper moistened with
alcohol.
3) Press OK key.
The rollers stop.
None
FEED-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Operation check of DADF individual feed

To start operation check of the feed mode specified by FEED-CHK.
At operation check
None
FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-CHK
T-8-97
8-363
Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST
SORTER
8-364
SORTER > ADJUST
PF-B4Z1
Lv.1 Details
ADJUST
SORTER > ADJUST
PNCH-HLE
Lv.1 Details
Adj of punch hole pstn from paper edge

Adjust the vertical registration of the paper to be punched.
Incrementing the value by 1 moves the punch hole position toward
the edge.
+: Toward inlet direction
-: Toward delivery direction
Use case
Upon users request
-4 to 2
Unit
mm
Default value
0
PNCH-Y
Adj punch hole side rgst pstn (Booklet)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the punch hole in side registration direction.
As the value is incremented by 1, the punch hole moves by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use case
When the punch hole is misaligned in the side registration direction
press OK key.
-5 to 5
Unit
mm
Default value
0
PF-A3Z1
Adj of A3 Z-fold position (1st): PFU
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the 1st fold position of A3 paper Z-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1 mm.
Use case
When the fold position adjustment in user mode is inadequate
press OK key.
-65 to 65
Unit
mm
Default value
0
PF-A3Z2
Adj of A3 Z-fold position (2nd): PFU
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the 2nd fold position of A3 paper Z-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
Use case
press OK key.
-65 to 65
Unit
mm
Default value
0
Use case
Unit
Default value
PF-B4Z2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PF-A4RZ1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PF-A4RZ2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Adj of B4 Z-fold position (1st): PFU

To adjust the 1st fold position of B4 paper Z-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-65 to 65
mm
0
Adj of B4 Z-fold position (2nd): PFU
To adjust the 2nd fold position of B4 paper Z-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-65 to 65
mm
0
Adj of A4R Z-fold position (1st): PFU
To adjust the 1st fold position of A4R paper Z-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-65 to 65
mm
0
Adj of A4R Z-fold position (2nd): PFU
To adjust the 2nd fold position of A4R paper Z-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-65 to 65
mm
0
8-364
8-365
SORTER > ADJUST

PF-LDRZ1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PF-LDRZ2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PF-LGLZ1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PF-LGLZ2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
SORTER > ADJUST
Adj of LDR Z-fold position (1st): PFU

To adjust the 1st fold position of LDR paper Z-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-65 to 65
mm
0
Adj of LDR Z-fold position (2nd): PFU
To adjust the 2nd fold position of LDR paper Z-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-65 to 65
mm
0
Adj of LGL Z-fold position (1st): PFU
To adjust the 1st fold position of LGL paper Z-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-65 to 65
mm
0
Adj of LGL Z-fold position (2nd): PFU
To adjust the 2nd fold position of LGL paper Z-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-65 to 65
mm
0
PFLTRRZ1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PFLTRRZ2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PF-A4RC1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PF-A4RC2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Adj of LTRR Z-fold position (1st): PFU

To adjust the 1st fold position of LTRR paper Z-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-65 to 65
mm
0
Adj of LTRR Z-fold position (2nd): PFU
To adjust the 2nd fold position of LTRR paper Z-fold position on
Paper Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-65 to 65
mm
0
Adj of A4R C-fold position (1st): PFU
To adjust the 1st fold position of A4R paper C-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-30 to 75
mm
0
Adj of A4R C-fold position (2nd): PFU
To adjust the 2nd fold position of A4R paper C-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-75 to 45
mm
0
8-365
8-366
SORTER > ADJUST

PFLTRRC1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PFLTRRC2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PF-A4R31
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PF-A4R32
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
SORTER > ADJUST
Adj of LTRR C-fold position (1st): PFU

To adjust the 1st fold position of LTRR paper C-fold position on
Paper Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-30 to 75
mm
0
Adj of LTRR C-fold position (2nd): PFU
To adjust the 2nd fold position of LTRR paper C-fold position on
Paper Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-75 to 45
mm
0
Adj of A4R out-3-fold position(1st): PFU
To adjust the 1st fold position of A4R paper out-3-fold position on
Paper Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-65 to 65
mm
0
Adj of A4R out-3-fold position(2nd): PFU
To adjust the 2nd fold position of A4R paper out-3-fold position on
Paper Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-65 to 65
mm
0
PFLTRR31
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PFLTRR32
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PF-A4R41
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PF-A4R42
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Adj of LTRR out-3-fold pstn (1st): PFU

To adjust the 1st fold position of LTRR paper out-3-fold position on
Paper Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-65 to 65
mm
0
Adj of LTRR out-3-fold pstn (2nd): PFU
To adjust the 2nd fold position of LTRR paper out-3-fold position on
Paper Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-65 to 65
mm
0
Adj of A4R 4-fold position (1st): PFU
To adjust the 1st fold position of A4R paper 4-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-75 to 30
mm
0
Adj of A4R 4-fold position (2nd): PFU
To adjust the 2nd fold position of A4R paper 4-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-65 to 65
mm
0
8-366
8-367
SORTER > ADJUST

PFLTRR41
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PFLTRR42
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PF-A4R21
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
PFLTRR21
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
SORTER > ADJUST
Adj of LTRR 4-fold position (1st): PFU

To adjust the 1st fold position of LTRR paper 4-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-75 to 30
mm
0
Adj of LTRR 4-fold position (2nd): PFU
To adjust the 2nd fold position of LTRR paper 4-fold position on
Paper Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-65 to 65
mm
0
Adj of A4R 2-fold position (1st): PFU
To adjust the 1st fold position of A4R paper 2-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-75 to 30
mm
0
Adj of LTRR 2-fold position (1st): PFU
To adjust the 1st fold position of LTRR paper 2-fold position on Paper
Folding Unit.
press OK key.
-75 to 30
mm
0
PRCS-ALG
Lv.1 Details
Adj Process Tray Align Plate width: Bklt

To adjust the width of Alignment Plate on Finisher Process Tray
Assembly.
As the value is incremented by 1, the width of Alignment Plate is
increased by 0.1 mm.
+: Increase (widen)
-: Decrease (narrow)
Use case
When the paper displacement occurs on paper stack
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
STP-F1
Front 1-staple position : Bklt
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the A4R/LGL/LTRR paper front 1-staple position on
Finisher (Fin-K1).
As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1
mm.
+: Toward front
-: Toward rear
To adjust the A4 paper front 1-staple position on Finisher (Fin-L1).
mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use case
Fin-K1: When the A4R/LGL/LTRR paper front staple position is
displaced
Fin-L1: When the A4R/LGL/LTRR paper front staple position is
displaced
Fin-K1: -50 to 50
Fin-L1: -6 to 6
Unit
mm
8-367
8-368
SORTER > ADJUST
SORTER > ADJUST
STP-F2
Lv.1 Details
Front 1-staple position: Bklt

To adjust the A3/B4/A4/B5/LDR/LTR/EXEC/8K/16K paper front
1-staple position on Finisher (Fin-K1).
mm.
+: Toward front
-: Toward rear
To adjust the A4R paper front 1-staple position on Finisher (Fin-L1).
mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use case
Fin-K1: When the A3/B4/A4/B5/LDR/LTR/EXEC/8K/16K paper front
staple position is displaced
Fin-L1: When the A4R paper front staple position is displaced
Fin-K1: -50 to 50
Fin-L1: -6 to 6
Unit
mm
STP-R1
Rear 1-staple position : Bklt
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the A4R/LGL/LTRR paper rear 1-staple position on Finisher
(Fin-K1).
mm.
+: Toward front
-: Toward rear
To adjust the A4 paper rear 1-staple position on Finisher (Fin-L1).
mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use case
Fin-K1: When the A4R/LGL/LTRR paper rear staple position is
displaced
Fin-L1: When the A4 paper rear staple position is displaced
Fin-K1: -50 to 50
Fin-L1: -6 to 6
Unit
mm
STP-R2
Lv.1 Details
Rear 1-staple position : Bklt

To adjust the A3/B4/A4/B5/LDR/LTR/EXEC/8K/16K paper rear
1-staple position on Finisher (Fin-K1).
mm.
+: Toward front
-: Toward rear
To adjust the A4R paper rear 1-staple position on Finisher (Fin-L1).
mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use case
Fin-K1: When the A3/B4/A4/B5/LDR/LTR/EXEC/8K/16K paper rear
staple position is displaced
Fin-L1: When the A4R paper rear staple position is displaced
Fin-K1: -50 to 50
Fin-L1: -6 to 6
Unit
mm
STP-2P
Adj front/rear 2-staple position: Bklt
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the front/rear 2-staple position on Finisher.
mm.
+: Toward front
-: Toward rear
Use case
When the front/rear 2-staple position is displaced
-25 to 25
Unit
mm
Default value
?
BFF-SFT
Paper displace amount on buffer: Bklt
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the paper displacement amount on Finisher Buffer
Assembly.
As the value is incremented by 1, the paper position moves by 0.1
mm.
+:
-:
Use case
When the paper displacement occurs on the 1st to 3rd sheets of the
2nd sets (B5/A4/LTR) and later
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
8-368
8-369
SORTER > ADJUST
SORTER > ADJUST
PNCH-X
Lv.1 Details
Punch hole position in feed way: Bklt

To adjust the punch hole position on Finisher in feed direction.
As the value is incremented by 1, the punch hole moves by 0.1 mm.
+: Toward delivery direction
-: Toward inlet direction
Use case
When the punch hole is displaced in feed direction
-20 to 20
Unit
mm
Default value
0
TRM-RG1
Skew adj (small size): Bklt
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the skew of A4 size or smaller paper stack on Finisher
Trimmer. As the value is incremented by 1, the paper stack stop
position moves by 0.1 mm.
Use case
When the skew occurs on A4 or smaller paper stack
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
TRM-RG2
Skew adj (large size): Bklt
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the skew of paper stack larger than A4 size on Finisher
Trimmer. As the value is incremented by 1, the paper stack stop
position moves by 0.1 mm.
Use case
When the skew occurs on paper stack larger than A4 size
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
TRM-CUT1
Lv.1 Details
Trimming position adj (small size): Bklt

To adjust the trimming position of A4 size or smaller paper stack on
Finisher Trimmer.
As the value is incremented by 1, the paper stack stop position
moves by 0.1 mm.
Use case
When the trimming position is displaced on A4 or smaller paper stack
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
TRM-CUT2
Trimming position adj (large size): Bklt
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the trimming position of the paper stack larger than A4 size
on Finisher Trimmer.
As the value is incremented by 1, the paper stack stop position
moves by 0.1 mm.
Use case
When the trimming position is displaced on the paper stack larger
than A4 size
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
BFF-SFT2
Paper displace amount on buffer: Bklt
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the paper displacement amount on Finisher Buffer
Assembly.
As the value is incremented by 1, the paper position moves by 0.1
mm.
+:
-:
Use case
When the paper displacement occurs on the 2nd to 3rd sheets of the
2nd sets (B5/A4/LTR) and later
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
Default value
0
8-369
8-370
SORTER > ADJUST
SORTER > ADJUST
SDL-STP
Lv.1 Details
Adj of Saddle Stitcher staple position

(Fin-K1) To adjust the staple position of Saddle Stitcher.
As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by
0.1mm.
+: Toward front
-: Toward rear
(Fin-L1) Adjust the staple position for saddle stitching.
Incrementing the value by 1 moves the staple position 0.5 mm
downward.
Use case
When the staple position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced
Fin-K1: -20 to 20
Fin-L1: -3 to 3
Unit
mm
Default value
0
SDL-FLD
Adj of Saddle Stitcher fold position
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the fold position of Saddle Stitcher.
As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by 0.1mm.
Use case
When the fold position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced
-20 to 20
Unit
mm
Default value
0
SDL-ALG
Adj of Saddle Stitcher alignment width
Lv.1 Details
(Fin-K1) To adjust the alignment width of Saddle Stitcher.
As the value is incremented by 1, the alignment width is increased
by mm.
+:
-:
(Fin-L1) Adjust the travel length of the alignment plate for saddle
stitching.
Use case
When the misalignment occurs within a paper stack on the Saddle
Stitcher
Fin-K1: -20 to 20
Fin-L1: 0 to 1
Unit
mm
Default value
0
SDL-RLPT
Lv.1 Details
Adj Sddl Sttch Diseng Roll diseng amount

To adjust the disengagement amount of Saddle Stitcher
Disengagement Roller. As the value is incremented by 1, the
disengagement amount is increased by mm.
+:
-:
Use case
When the feed failure (with thin paper, etc.) occurs on the Saddle
Stitcher
-20 to 20
Unit
mm
Default value
0
SDL-RLFD
Adj Sddl Sttch Diseng Roller feed amount
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the feed amount of Saddle Stitcher Disengagement Roller.
As the value is incremented by 1, the feed amount is increased by
mm.
+:
-:
Use case
When the feed failure (with thin paper, etc.) occurs on the Saddle
Stitcher
-20 to 20
Unit
mm
Default value
0
SDL-RLHD
Adj Sddl Sttch Diseng Roll fold position
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the fold position of Saddle Stitcher Disengagement Roller.
As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by mm.
+:
-:
Use case
To adjust the fold position of Saddle Stitcher Disengagement Roller.
As the value is incremented by 1, the fold position moves by mm.
+:
-:
-20 to 20
Unit
mm
Default value
0
8-370
8-371
SORTER > ADJUST

BFR-UPA4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
BFR-UPB5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
BFR-UPLT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
RTR-DWA4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
SORTER > ADJUST
Adj Swng Roll rising tmg for A4

To adjust the Swing Roller rise timing when A4 size paper is waited
in the buffer path.
As the value is incremented by 1, the rise timing becomes early by 1
msec.
When misalignment occurs in A4 size buffer paper
0 to 50
msec
0
Adj Swng Roll rising tmg for B5
To adjust the Swing Roller rise timing when B5 size paper is waited
in the buffer path.
msec.
When misalignment occurs in B5 size buffer paper
0 to 50
msec
0
Adj Swng Roll rising tmg for LTR
To adjust the Swing Roller rise timing when LTR size paper is waited
in the buffer path.
msec.
When misalignment occurs in LTR size buffer paper
0 to 50
msec
0
Adj Ppr Rtn Roll fall tmg (A4)
To adjust the Paper Return Roller fall timing when A4 size paper is
waited in the buffer path.
As the value is incremented by 1, the fall timing becomes early by 1
msec.
0 to 50
msec
0
RTR-DWB5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
RTR-DWLT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
BF-SB-A4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
BF-SB-B5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Adj Ppr Rtn Roll fall tmg (B5)

To adjust the Paper Return Roller fall timing when B5 size paper is
msec.
0 to 50
msec
0
Adj Ppr Rtn Roll fall tmg (LTR)
To adjust the Paper Return Roller fall timing when LTR size paper is
msec.
0 to 50
msec
0
Adj switchback position for A4
To adjust the paper switchback position when A4 size paper is waited
in the buffer path.
As the value is incremented by 1, the switchback amount is
increased by 1 mm.
0 to 50
mm
0
Adj switchback position for B5
To adjust the paper switchback position when B5 size paper is waited
in the buffer path.
increased by 1 mm.
0 to 50
mm
0
8-371
8-372
SORTER > ADJUST

BF-SB-LT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
RTR-UPA4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
RTR-UPB5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
RTR-UPLT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
SORTER > ADJUST
Adj switchback position for LTR

To adjust the paper switchback position when LTR size paper is
increased by 1 mm.
0 to 50
mm
0
Adj Ppr Rtn Roll rise angle(A4)
To adjust the Paper Return Roller rise angle when processing is
performed to A4 size paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the roller rise angle is increased by
1 degree.
1 to 44
deg C
0
Adj Ppr Rtn Roll rise angle(B5)
performed to B5 size paper.
1 degree.
1 to 44
deg C
0
Adj Ppr Rtn Roll rise angle(LTR)
performed to LTR size paper.
1 degree.
1 to 44
deg C
0
PUNCH-SB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
ST-ALG1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
ST-ALG2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
STP-F3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Adj Punch Unit ppr swback amount

To adjust the paper switchback amount in the high accuracy punch
mode of Finisher.
increased by 1 mm.
When the punch accuracy deteriorates in the paper feed direction
2 to 4
mm
0
Adj Stacker A4 size align pstn
To adjust the A4 size paper alignment position.
As the value is incremented by 1, the travel length of the Alignment
Plate is increased by 0.42 mm.
When misalignment occurs in A4 size paper
press OK key.
-10 to 10
mm
0
Adj Stacker LTR size align pstn
To adjust the LTR size paper alignment position.
As the value is incremented by 1, the travel length of the Alignment
Plate is increased by 0.42 mm.
When misalignment occurs in LTR size paper
press OK key.
-10 to 10
mm
0
Adj A4R frt stpl pstn (<45 deg)
To adjust the one front staple position on the A4R size paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves to the
rear side by 0.49 mm.
When misalignment occurs at the front staple position on A4R size
paper
press OK key.
-6 to 6
mm
0
8-372
8-373
SORTER > ADJUST

STP-F4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
STP-R3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
STP-R4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
SW-UP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
SORTER > ADJUST
Adj LTRR frt stpl pstn (<45 deg)

To adjust the one front staple position on the LTRR size paper.
When misalignment occurs at the front staple position on LTRR size
paper
press OK key.
-6 to 6
mm
0
Adj A4R rear stpl pstn (<45 deg)
To adjust the one rear staple position on the A4R size paper.
When misalignment occurs at the rear staple position on A4R size
paper
press OK key.
-6 to 6
mm
0
Adj LTRRL rear stpl pstn(<45 deg)
To adjust the one rear staple position on the LTRR size paper.
When misalignment occurs at the rear staple position on LTRR size
paper
press OK key.
-6 to 6
mm
0
Adj of Swing Roller falling pstn
To adjust the Swing Roller fall position.
As the value is incremented by 1, the Swing Roller fall position
moves downward by 0.2 mm.
When paper fails to be transported to the Processing Tray and
misalignment occurs
press OK key.
-17 to 33
mm
0
PRCS-RET
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
UP-CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DW-CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
THC-CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Adj Process Tray return amount

To adjust the pull-back amount of the paper on the Processing Tray.
As the value is incremented by 1, the pull-back amount is decreased
by 1.4 mm.
When the paper is bent in the Processing Tray
press OK key.
0 to 5
mm
0
Setting of upward curl prev mode
Set 1 when upward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack
Tray, and paper leaning due to the curl occurs.
When upward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack Tray,
and paper leaning due to the curl occurs
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Setting downward curl prev mode
Set 1 when downward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the
Stack Tray, and paper leaning due to the curl occurs.
When downward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack
Tray, and paper leaning due to the curl occurs
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Setting heavy ppr curl prev mode
Set 1 when upward curl occurs on the heavy paper delivered.
When 1 is set, the amount of Stack Tray descension for stack
delivery increases. The paper surface detection is performed for
every sheet, not for every 5 sheets.
When upward curl occurs on the heavy paper delivered
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
8-373
8-374
SORTER > ADJUST

THC-PUSH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
OFST-STC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
THN-STC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
STP-P-CH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SORTER > ADJUST
Setting heavy ppr out prev mode

Set 1 when the already stacked paper is pushed out at the time of
heavy paper delivery.
When 1 is set, the Stack Tray moves down temporarily before the
heavy paper is delivered to the Processing Tray if the leading sheet
is heavy paper.
When the already stacked paper is pushed out at the time of heavy
paper delivery
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Set poor offset stack prev mode
Set 1 when paper is not appropriately stacked in the small size offset
mode.
When 1 is set, buffer operation is not performed in the small size
offset mode.
When paper is not appropriately stacked in the small size offset
mode
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Set poor thin ppr stack prev mode
Set 1 when thin paper is not appropriately stacked.
When 1 is set, the stacking condition of thin paper improves.
When thin paper is not appropriately stacked
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Set stpl stack displace prev mode
Set 1 when the paper on the top is misaligned in the staple delivery
mode.
When 1 is set, paper stack alignment operation is executed twice
immediately before stapling.
When the paper on the top is misaligned in the staple delivery mode
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
TRY-NIS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
TRY-SU
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
FIN-NIS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
1SHT-SHF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SDL-SWCH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Set tray switch noise reduct mode

Set 1 when the operation noise after switching the Stack Tray is loud.
When 1 is set, the Stack Tray rise operation becomes slow.
When the operation noise after switching the Stack Tray is loud
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Set tray switching speedup mode
Set 1 when the Stack Tray switching time is long.
When 1 is set, the Stack Tray rise speed becomes fast.
When the Stack Tray switching time is long
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Set tray drive noise reduct mode
Set 1 when the Finisher operation noise is loud.
When 1 is set, the initial Finisher operation is minimized.
When the Finisher operation noise is loud
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Set 1-sheet Offset+Collate
Set 1 when enabling Offset and Collate for 1-sheet document.
When enabling Offset and Collate for 1-sheet document
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Sddl stack capacity switch mode
Set 1 when increasing the stacking capacity for saddle stitching.
When 1 is set, the stacking capacity increases over the upper limit.
When increasing the stacking capacity for perfect binding
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
8-374
8-375
SORTER > ADJUST
SORTER > ADJUST
SDL-ALM
Set sddl full stack alarm mode
Lv.1 Details
Set 1 when disabling the stack full alarm for saddle stitching.
Use case
When disabling the stack full alarm for saddle stitching
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
Z-FL-CH
Set Z-fold stapleable quantity
Lv.1 Details
To set the maximum number of stitch pages in Z-fold stapling.
This item is used to prevent missing pages in Z-fold stapling by
decreasing the maximum number of stitch pages.
Use case
When missing pages occurs in Z-fold stapling
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: 10 sheets, 1: 5 sheets
Unit
sheet
Default value
0
THN-STCL
Set Poor Stck of Large/Thin Ppr Prev Mod
Lv.1 Details
Set 1 when large/thin paper is not appropriately stacked.
When 1 is set, the stacking condition of large/thin paper improves.
Use case
When large/thin paper is not appropriately stacked.
Adj/set/operate method After inputting value, press the OK key.
Caution
When 1 is set, the stack delivery speed deceases.
0 to 1
0: Normal, 1: Prevention mode
Default value
0
SW-ADJ
Swing guide height adjustment
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the height of the swing guide.
As the value is changed by 1, the height of swing guide is increased/
decreased by 0.23 mm.
+: increase (high)
-: decrease (low)
Use case
When adjusting the height of the Swing Guide at the time that nip
pressure is high
press OK key.
-10 to 4
Unit
mm
GRP-ALG
Lv.1 Details
Gripper standby position adjustment

To adjust the standby position of the gripper to change the gripping
timing.
As the value is changed by 1, the standby position of gripper is
increased/decreased by 0.12 mm.
+: increase (early)
-: decrease (late)
Use case
When adjusting the timing that the Gripper grabs a paper stack
press OK key.
-40 to 40
Unit
mm
PRTN-ALG
Paper retainer position adjustment
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the fall amount of the paper retainer.
As the value is changed by 1, the fall amount of paper retainer is
increased/decreased by 0.65 degrees.
+: increase (down)
-: decrease (up)
Use case
When adjusting the position where the Paper Retainer comes into
contact with paper
press OK key.
-12 to 12
BFF-SFT3
Ppr shft amnt adjustment-3: buffer path
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the paper dislocation amount (between 3rd sheet and 4th
sheet) of buffer assembly of the finisher.
As the value is changed by 1, the paper dislocation amount is
+:increase
-:decrease
Use case
When the paper displacement occurs on the 3rd and 4th sheets of
the 2nd sets (B5/A4/LTR) and later
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
8-375
8-376
SORTER > ADJUST

BFF-SFT4
Lv.1 Details
Ppr shft amnt adjustment-4: buffer path

To adjust the paper dislocation amount (between 4th sheet and 5th
sheet) of buffer assembly of the finisher.
As the value is changed by 1, the paper dislocation amount is
+:increase
-:decrease
Use case
When the paper displacement occurs on the 4th and 5th sheets of
the 2nd sets (B5/A4/LTR) and later
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
mm
T-8-98
8-376
Service Mode > SORTER > FUNCTION
FUNCTION
SORTER > FUNCTION

VR1-A4
Lv.1 Details
SORTER > FUNCTION

FN-SENS1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FN-SENS2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FIN-BK-R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FIN-BK-W
Lv.1 Details
Use case
VR1-A4R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-377
Adj punched ppr size sensor output: Bklt

To automatically adjust the output of A3/LDR/B4/A4R/B5R Sensors
on the Finisher Punch Unit in order.
- When installing/replacing the Punch Unit
- When replacing the Punch Waste Sensor
- When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB
Adj Punch Waste Sensor output: Booklet
To automatically adjust the output of Punch Waste Sensor on the
Finisher Punch Unit.
- When installing/replacing the Punch Unit
- When replacing the Punch Waste Sensor
- When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB
Controller PCB backup data read: Staple
To read the backup data from Finisher Controller PCB and save to
the hard disk.
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB
In processing: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal
termination: NG
SORTER> FUNCTION> FIN-BK-W
Controller PCB backup data write: Staple
To write the backup data saved on the hard disk to Finisher
Controller PCB.
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB
In processing: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal
termination: NG
SORTER> FUNCTION> FIN-BK-R
Adj Upr Tray width volume (A4R):Inserter
To adjust the paper minimum width (A4R) of Inserter Upper Tray
automatically.
When the size mismatch jam is incorrectly detected at the pickup
from Inserter Upper Tray
1) Set the A4R paper on the Inserter Upper Tray and align it with the
width of Slide Guide.
Use case
VR1-LTRR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
VR1-LTR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
VR2-A4R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
VR2-A4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj Upr Tray width volume (A4):Inserter

To adjust the paper minimum width (A4) of Inserter Upper Tray
automatically.
1) Set the A4 paper on the Inserter Upper Tray and align it with the
Adj Upr Tray width vol (LTRR): Inserter
To adjust the paper minimum width (LTRR) of Inserter Upper Tray
automatically.
1) Set the LTRR paper on the Inserter Upper Tray and align it with
the width of Slide Guide.
Adj Upr Tray width volume (LTR):Inserter
To adjust the paper minimum width (LTR) of Inserter Upper Tray
automatically.
1) Set the LTR paper on the Inserter Upper Tray and align it with the
Adj Lower Tray width vol (A4R): Inserter
To adjust the paper minimum width (A4R) of Inserter Lower Tray
automatically.
from Inserter Lower Tray
1) Set the A4R paper on the Inserter Lower Tray and align it with the
Adj Lower Tray width vol (A4): Inserter
To adjust the paper minimum width (A4) of Inserter Lower Tray
automatically.
1) Set the A4 paper on the Inserter Lower Tray and align it with the
8-377
8-378
SORTER > FUNCTION

VR2-LTRR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
VR2-LTR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FIN-CON
Lv.1 Details
Caution

PF-CON
Lv.1 Details
PF-SENS1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PF-SENS2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SORTER > FUNCTION
Adj Lower Tray width vol (LTRR):Inserter

To adjust the paper minimum width (LTRR) of Inserter Lower Tray
automatically.
1) Set the LTRR paper on the Inserter Lower Tray and align it with
the width of Slide Guide.
Adj Lower Tray width vol (LTR): Inserter
To adjust the paper minimum width (LTR) of Inserter Lower Tray
automatically.
1) Set the LTR paper on the Inserter Lower Tray and align it with the
Controller PCB RAM clear: Booklet
To execute the RAM clear of Finisher Controller PCB to delete all the
adjustment contents and counter information.
execution. After execution, enter the necessary setting values.
- RAM clear is executed After the main power is turned OFF/ON.
Controller PCB RAM clear: PFU
To execute the RAM clear of Inserter/Folder Controller PCB on
Paper Folding Unit to delete all the adjustment contents and counter
information.
Adj Speed Down Timing Sensor output: PFU
To adjust the output of Slowdown Timing Sensor on Paper Folding
Unit automatically.
- When replacing the Slowdown Timing Sensor
- When replacing the Inserter/Folder Controller PCB
Adj Release Timing Sensor output: PFU
To adjust the output of Release Timing Sensor on Paper Folding Unit
automatically.
- When replacing the Release Timing Sensor
PF-SENS3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PF-SENS4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TRM-SENS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
IS-CON
Lv.1 Details
Adj Fold Position Sensor output: PFU

To adjust the output of Fold Position Sensor on Paper Folding Unit
automatically.
- When replacing the Fold Position Sensor
Adj Upper Stopper Path Sensor output:PFU
To adjust the output of Upper Stopper Path Sensor on Paper Folding
Unit automatically.
- When replacing the Upper Stopper Path Sensor
Adj of Trimmer Dust Sensr output:Booklet
To adjust the output of Saddle Dust Sensor on Saddle Unit
automatically.
- When installing the Trimmer
- When replacing the Trimmer Dust Sensor
- When replacing the Saddle Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB RAM clear: Inserter
To execute the RAM clear of Inserter DC Controller PCB to delete all
the adjustment contents and counter information.
T-8-99
8-378
Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION
OPTION
8-379
SORTER > OPTION
TRY-OVER
Lv.1 Details
SORTER > OPTION

BLNK-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Set Sddl Fin fold pstn margin: Staple

To set the margin width of fold position on Saddle Finisher.
When changing the margin width of fold position
0 to 1
0: Normal, 1: Wider
Default value
0
MD-SPRTN
Set restriction at Finisher error:Staple
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to stop the machine when an error occurs at Finisher.
Use case
When preferring to run the machine at Finisher error occurrence
Caution
When 1 is set, staple operation or alignment operation is not
executed. Set 0 normally.
0 to 1
0: Normal, 1: Function restriction
Default value
0
BUFF-SW
ON/OFF of buffer operation
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of the buffer operation during the small size stapling
mode
Use case
When the misalign of paper is caused by the electrostatic charge
between the paper during the the small size stapling mode
Caution
When the buffer operation is set to OFF, productivity decreases.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
This setting can be also made with DIP switch of the Finisher. For
details, refer to the Service Manual for Finisher.
Use case
Caution
Default value
PUCH-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
ALG-IMPR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
BUFF-SW2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Set limit of stack capacity

To set the limit of stack capacity for Z-fold paper and half hold paper.
(Stack over is detected when the paper is stacked over the limit of
stack height.)
If the limit of stack capacity is removed, paper can be stacked
beyond the maximum stack capacity.
When stacking the paper beyond the maximum stack capacity of
tray.
Tell users and get an agreement that when the high density paper is
stacked until the maximum volume, a tray may not be able to move
up.
0 to 1
0: Normal operation, 1: Remove the stack limit
0
High-prdctvty/-accurcy punch mode
To switch the high-productivity punch mode or high-accuracy punch
mode of Finisher.
When switching the high-productivity punch mode or high-accuracy
punch mode
0 to 1
0
Set Finisher alignment mode
To set the special mode for improving the alignment condition.
When using the special mode for improving the alignment condition
0 to 20
0
Setting Finisher buffer operation
To set ON/OFF of buffer operation in the Finisher.
When 1 is set, the alignment condition of the paper delivered from
the lower path may be improved, but productivity decreases.
When misalignment occurs in the buffer paper delivered from the
lower path
When the buffer operation is set to OFF, productivity decreases.
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
0
8-379
8-380
SORTER > OPTION
SORTER > OPTION
1SHT-SRT
Lv.1 Details
Setting of 1-sheet Offset&Collate

To set ON/OFF of Offset&Collate for 1-sheet document.
When 1 is set, Offset&Collate for 1-sheet document is enabled, but
the paper is not appropriately stacked.
Use case
When preferring to execute 1-sheet Offset&Collate with low stacking
condition
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
SD-LMTLS
Set sddl delivery limitless oprtn
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of the Finisher Saddle Assembly limitless delivery
operation.
When 1 is set, stack over does not occur and saddle operation can
be performed continuously, but the stacking condition decreases.
Use case
When preferring to perform saddle operation continuously
Caution
When limitless operation is set to ON, the saddle stacking condition
decreases.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
SD-STCNB
Set sddl delivery stack quantity
Lv.1 Details
To increase the saddle stacking number.
When 1 is set, the saddle stack over count is increased, and the
stacking number increases.
Use case
When preferring to increase the stacking number of the Saddle
Delivery Assembly
0 to 1
Default value
0
BUFF-THK
Lv.1 Details
Set buffer oprtn for heavy paper

To set ON/OFF of buffer operation for heavy paper (181 to 220g/m2).
When 1 is set, productivity of sort and staple mode of Finisher is
improved, but the stacking condition decreases.
Use case
When improving productivity of sort and staple mode for heavy paper
(181 to 220 g/m2)
Caution
When improving productivity, the stacking condition may decrease.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
SORTER> OPTION> PRD-PRTY
PRCS-SP1
Set stacking speed at sort
Lv.1 Details
(Fin-K1) When stacking heavy paper (181g/m2 or more) on the
Finisher Process Tray, the speed is normally decreased.
When 1 is set, the stacking speed at sort mode does not decrease
and productivity is improved, but the stacking condition may
decrease.
(Fin-L1)Setting the feed speed change when transporting paper to
the rear end assist of the processing tray.
Use case
(Fin-K1) When improving productivity of sort mode for heavy paper
(181 g/m2 or more)
(Fin-L1) When the misalign of paper is caused by the poor return
during the sort mode or the stay pull mode.
Caution
0 to 1
0: Speed is decreased, 1: Speed is not decreased
Default value
Fin-K1:0
Fin-L1:1
PRCS-SP2
Set stack SPD at Hvy sort/staple
Lv.1 Details
When stacking heavy paper (181g/m2 or more) on the Finisher
Process Tray, the speed is normally decreased.
When 1 is set, the stacking speed at sort and staple mode does not
decrease and productivity is improved, but the stacking condition
may decrease.
Use case
When improving productivity of sort and staple mode for heavy paper
(181 g/m2 or more)
Caution
0 to 1
Default value
0
8-380
8-381
SORTER > OPTION
SORTER > OPTION
BUFF-MX1
Lv.1 Details
Buffer oprtn at mixed weight sort

To set ON/OFF of buffer operation when mixing papers which
weights are different. When 1 is set, productivity of sort mode of
Finisher is improved, but the stacking condition decreases.
Use case
When improving productivity of sort mode in the case of mixing
papers which weights are different
Caution
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
BUFF-MX2
Buffer at mix weight sort/staple
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of buffer operation when mixing papers which
weights are different.
When 1 is set, productivity of sort and staple mode of Finisher is
improved, but the stacking condition decreases.
Use case
When improving productivity of sort and staple mode in the case of
mixing papers which weights are different
Caution
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
SORTER> OPTION> PRD-PRTY
PRCS-MX1
Set stck SPD at mix ppr type sort
Lv.1 Details
The speed is decreased when stacking papers on the Finisher
Process Tray in the case of mixing papers which the paper types
(paper weight or paper material) differ. When 1 is set, the stacking
speed at sort mode does not decrease and productivity is improved,
but the stacking condition may decrease.
Use case
When improving productivity of sort mode in the case of mixing
papers which the paper types differ
Caution
0 to 1
Default value
0
PRCS-MX2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
BUF-THK1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
PRD-PRTY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SLD-BCK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Stck SPD at mix ppr sort/staple

The speed is decreased when stacking papers on the Finisher
Process Tray in the case of mixing papers which the paper types
(paper weight or paper material) differ. When 1 is set, the stacking
speed at sort and staple mode does not decrease and productivity is
improved, but the stacking condition may decrease.
When improving productivity of sort and staple mode in the case of
mixing papers which paper types differ
0 to 1
0
Set No. of buffer for hvy ppr 1
To set the number of heavy paper 1 (91 to 180g/m2) for buffer. When
1 is set, productivity of staple mode of Finisher is improved.
When prioritizing productivity of staple mode of Finisher using heavy
paper 1
0 to 1
0: 2 sheets, 1: 3 sheets
0
Prdctvty prrty btch at sort/staple
To simultaneously set productivity priority.
When 1 is set, productivity of sort and staple mode of Finishers
corresponding items is improved.
When prioritizing productivity of sort and staple mode of Finisher
0 to 1
0: Normal, 1: Priority on productivity
0
Set bleed-thru improvement mode
When the back of the coated paper as the cover is soiled, set 1/2.
When the backside of the paper is soiled while coated paper is used
as cover
Productivity is improved, but jam or misalignment might occur.
0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: ON (coated paper + recycled paper), 2: ON (coated paper
+ plain paper)
0
8-381
8-382
SORTER > OPTION
SORTER > OPTION
STCR-DWN
Lv.1 Details
Set occasional misalign prev mode

To set ON/OFF of occasional misalignment prevention mode.
When misalignment in feed direction occurs at approx. every 30
sheets for thin/plain paper (105g/m2 and less), set 1.
Use case
When misalignment in feed direction occurs occasionally for thin/
plain paper
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
PRCS-SP3
Chng ppr stck SPD for non-buf mod: Fin
Lv.1 Details
When the value is changed to 1, the paper stack speed becomes
slow in the non-buffer mode.
Use case
When misalignment due to too much paper return (buckling on the
trailing edge) occurs in staple mode for thin/plain paper
Caution
When setting this mode, the feeding speed of non-buffered paper to
the Process Tray is changed, so it may be necessary to readjust the
Process Tray pull-back amount (SORTER> ADJUST> PRCS-RET).
0 to 8
0: 700 mm/sec
1: 650 mm/sec
2: 600 mm/sec
3: 550 mm/sec
4: 500 mm/sec
5: 450 mm/sec
6 to 8: 450 mm/sec
Default value
0
SORTER > ADJUST > PRCS-RET
NSRT-STC
Set poor stack prev mode at non-collate
Lv.1 Details
Set this mode when the stackability at non-collate delivery is low.
With this setting, the stackability at non-collate delivery is improved.
Use case
When the stackability at non-collating is low
0 to 2
0: Deliver printed paper to the Stack Tray in non-collate mode
1: Deliver 2-sided printed paper via the Processing Tray in noncollate mode
2: Deliver 1-sided/2-sided printed paper via the Processing Tray in
non-collate mode
1: ON
Default value
1
THN-TRSW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
THN-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SWGUP-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
CALG-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Narrow width paper jam prevention

Set this mode when a delivery stationary jam occurs at the time of
delivering thin paper (63g/m2 and less) which width direction is 139.6
mm and smaller to the Stacker.
When delivery stationary jam occurs at the time of delivering thin
paper (63g/m2 and less) which width direction is 139.6 mm and
smaller to the First/Second Tray
1) Enter the setting value and press OK key.
0 to 1
0: Deliver to the destination specified on UI
1: Deliver to the Tray on the host machine
0
Switch thin ppr stack cpcty: Stack Tray
When this mode is enabled, stack capacity of the Stack Tray for thin
paper is increased. Stack capacity is changed from the capacity for
large size paper to the capacity for small size paper.
When increasing the stack capacity of the tray for thin paper
1) Enter the setting value and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
ON/OFF of swing unit escape operation
To set ON/OFF of the swing unit escape operation for the 1st sheet
of thin paper
When corner bend occurs on the first sheet while feeding thin paper
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
ON/OFF ctr align oprtn: corner-stpl mode
To set whether to perform center alignment operation in cornerstaple mode.
When switching the alignment position from center to front/rear side
press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF (Center alignment), 1: ON (Front/rear side alignment)
0
T-8-100
8-382
Service Mode > BOARD > OPTION
BOARD
BOARD > OPTION

TR-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OPTION
BOARD > OPTION
MENU-1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MENU-2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MENU-3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MENU-4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
SURF-OFF
Lv.1 Details
Default value
8-383
Hide/dspl of printer setting menu lvl 1

To set whether to display or hide the level 1 of printer setting menu.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
UFR board function ON/OFF
To set ON/OFF of the function according to the SURF board
connection status.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Service Mode > BOARD > OPTION
Default value
Hide/dspl of toner reduction function

To set whether to display or hide the toner reduction function.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
T-8-101
8-383
Installation
to look at this Installation Procedure

How
Before Installation
Checking
the Contents
Checking
Unpacking
Installation
Installation
Installation > Checking Before Installation > Checking the Installation Environment
How to look at this Installation Procedure
9-2
Checking Before Installation

Following shows requirements for the installation site.
Description on the parts included in the package
Therefore, it is desirable to see the installation site in advance before bringing in the machine
to the users site.
The parts with a diagonal line in the contents list will not be used.
Checking Power Supply
In the case of using the components

After unpacking, check the parts included in the package by referring to the illustration of
Components in this Installation Procedure.
1) There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated (+, -10%) for
exclusive use by the machine.
Checking the Installation Environment

1) The environment of the installation site must be in the range as shown below.
Packaged Item
Avoid installation near the faucet, water boiler, humidifier or refrigerator.

Guaranteed range for operation/image, Temperature: 10.0 to 30.0 deg C, Humidity: 20 to
F-9-1
80%
Symbol marks in the illustration
2) It is desirable to hang curtains over the window if the machine is installed near the source
Symbol marks are used in this Installation Procedure for the frequent work/operation.
Check the descriptions below.
Screw
of fire, a dusty area, or a place subject to generation of ammonia gas or direct sunlight.
3) Room odor can be bothering when running the machine for a long time in a poorlyventilated room although the ozone amount generated while running this equipment does
Harness
Connector
not harm human health. Be sure to provide adequate ventilation of the room to keep the
work environment comfortable.
Tighten
Remove
Connect
Disconnect
Secure
Free
Claw
Insert
Remove
Push
Plug in
Turn on
Checking instruction
Check
Visual Check
Sound Check
F-9-2
Installation > Checking Before Installation > Checking the Installation Environment
9-2
Installation > Checking Before Installation > Checking Installation Space
Checking Installation Space
9-3
When the Booklet Finisher-K1, Paper Folding Unit-G1, Professional Puncher Integration
1) The foot of this equipment should be in contact with the floor. This equipment should be
kept on the level.
Unit-B1, Professional Puncher-C1, Document Insertion Unit-H1, Buffer Pass Unit-J1,

Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-F1, and Multi-drawer Paper Deck-A1 are attached.
2
2) The machine must be away from the wall by 100 mm or more to secure a sufficient space
800 mm or more
500 mm or more
to operate the machine.

For iR-ADV C9280 PRO/C9270 Series
500 mm or more
500 mm
or more
3,933 mm
500 mm
or more
100 mm or more
1,524 mm
1,524 mm
When the Copy Tray-P1 and Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-F1 are attached.
F-9-4
2,073 mm
NOTE:
*2 : Make sure to provide at least 100 mm of space if none of the Paper Folding
Unit-G1, Professional Puncher-C1, Document Insertion Unit-H1, or Multi-drawer Paper
Deck-A1 is attached.
500 mm
or more
1,644 mm
500 mm
or more
F-9-3
NOTE:
*1 : Make sure to provide at least 800 mm of space if you attach one or more of the
following: Paper Folding Unit-G1, Professional Puncher-C1, Document Insertion
Unit-H1, or Multi-drawer Paper Deck-A1.
Installation > Checking Before Installation > Checking Installation Space
9-3
Installation > Checking Before Installation > Points to Note at Installation Work
For iR-ADV C7280/C7270/C7260 Series
9-4
3) To install the host machine, install it in a well-ventilated place. Especially when there are
When the Copy Tray-P1 and Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-F1 are attached.
100 mm or more
multiple host machines, be sure to locate the machine where the machine is free from
direct exhaust of other machines. Be sure to keep the machine away from the air-inlet duct
500 mm or more
which is used for ventilation of the room.

4) When it is difficult to secure a space at rear side, install the following spacer to the duct at
bottom of rear side.
1,524 mm
FL2-9160
1,644 mm
500 mm
or more
500 mm
or more
NOTE:
Be sure that the spacer is not overlapped with the [A] area when installing it.
F-9-5
When the Booklet Finisher-L1, External 2/3 Hole Puncher-A1, Buffer Pass Unit-J1, Duplex
Color Image Reader Unit-F1, and POD Deck Lite-A1 are attached.
100 mm or more
500 mm or more
1,524 mm
[A]
F-9-7
Points to Note at Installation Work

Take note of the following points when installing the host machine.
1) Moving the host machine from a cool place to a warm place can generate condensation,
2,554 mm
causing moisture beads on the metal surface. Using the host machine while the machine
500 mm
or more
500 mm
or more
is condensed can cause image failure. Therefore, when moving the machine from a cool
place to a warm place to install, unpack the host machine and leave it for 2 hours or more
F-9-6
before the installation work so that the machine becomes used to the room temperature.
2) Be sure to work with a group of 4 or more people to install the host machine.
CAUTION:
Be sure to first complete the installation of the host machine only, and then perform
checking after power-on.
Installation > Checking Before Installation > Points to Note at Installation Work
9-4
Installation > Checking Before Installation > Order to Install the Host Machine and the Options
Table of options combination
Order to Install the Host Machine and the Options
NOTE:
Following table shows the combination of options to be installed at the right side of the
Host Machine.
Refer to the table below to install the options described in the table. Be sure to check the
combination before the installation work.
Utility Tray
Utility Tray
9-5
Voice Guidance Voice Operation

Kit
Kit
Card Reader
NOTE:
In the case of installing the Host Machine and the other options at the same time, follow
the order as described below to install the options first so that the installation operability
is improved.
1. Checking Before Installation
2. Unpacking
3. IInstalling the Upright Arm (for the models in which the Upright Control Panel is equipped
No
No
Yes
Voice Guidance Kit
No
No
Yes
4. Installation of the Reader Unit or the Printer Cover
Voice Operation Kit
No
No
Yes
5. Installation of the Upright Control Panel (for the models in which the Upright Control Panel
Card Reader
Yes
Yes
Yes
as standard)
is equipped as standard)
T-9-1
Yes: installation is available, No: installation is not available
6. Installation of the Buffer Path Unit (for the models in which the Buffer Path Unit is equipped
as standard)
7. Installation of the Pickup Assembly
8. Installation of the Process Unit
9. Installation of the Black Developing Assembly
10. Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)
11. Installation of the Noise Reduction Cover
12. Securing the Host Machine
13. Preparation for Main Power Connection
14. Turning ON the Main Power
15. Installation of Toner Container
16. Settings at Installation
17. Setting the Deck
18. Setting the Paper Cassette
19. Auto Gradation Adjustment
20. Image Position Adjustment
Installation > Checking Before Installation > Order to Install the Host Machine and the Options
9-5
Installation > Checking Before Installation > Types of the Accessory Box
9-6
Types of the Accessory Box

The Accessory Box packed with the host machine differs depending on the models; thus, be sure to check the contents by referring the following table.
Model
Area
Accessory Box 1
Accessory Box 2
Accessory Box 3
Accessory Box 4
Accessory Box 5
Accessory Box 6
C9280 PRO
USA
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C9280 PRO
Europe
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C9280 PRO
Asia/Oceania
Yes
Yes
C9280 PRO
China
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C9280 PRO
Korea
Yes
Yes
Yes
C9280 PRO
Taiwan
Yes
Yes
C9270 PRO
USA
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C9270 PRO
Asia/Oceania
Yes
Yes
C9270 PRO
China
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C9270 PRO
Taiwan
Yes
Yes
C7280i
Europe
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C7270
USA
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C7270i
Europe
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C7270
Asia/Oceania
Yes
Yes
C7270
Korea
Yes
Yes
Yes
C7260
USA
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C7260i
Europe
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C7260
Asia/Oceania
Yes
Yes
C7260
Korea
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-9-2
Yes: included in the package
Installation > Checking Before Installation > Types of the Accessory Box
9-6
Installation > Checking the Contents
Checking the Contents
9-7
[13] Screw (TP; M4x8) X 4
[14] Rubber Cap X 1
[15] Screw
(RS Tightening black;
M4x12) X 2
[16] Screw
(Binding; M4x10) X 1
[17] Rubber Cap X 2
[18] Joint Cover R X 1
[19] Joint Cover L X 1
[20] Front Base Cover X 1
[21] Rear Base Cover X 1
[22] Cable Clamp X 2
[23] Screw
(P Tightening; M3x8)
X4
Accessory Box 1 (for the models with the Upright Control Panel)
[1] Color Developing
Assembly X 3
[4] Filter X 2
[7] ITB Inner Cover X 1
[10] Reader Fixing Plate R

X1
[2] Black Developing

Assembly X 1
[5] Noise Reduction Cover

X1
[8] Handle Cover X 6
[11] Reader Fixing Plate L

X1
[3] Color Drum Unit X 3
[6] Service Book Holder

X1
[9] Right Rear Cover X 1
[12] Screw
(RS Tightening; M4x8)
X8
F-9-9
F-9-8
NOTE:
[8] : Use the 6 covers when the Buffer Path Unit is not installed. Use 4 of them when it
is installed.
[9], [10], [11], [12], [13], [14] : Use the parts at the installation of the Reader Unit or the
Printer Cover.
9-7
Accessory Box 1 (for the models with the Flat Control Panel)
[1] Color Developing
Assembly X 3
[4] Filter X 2
[2] Black Developing

Assembly X 1
[5] Noise Reduction Cover

X1
9-8
[14] Rubber Cap X 1
[16] Screw
[17] Touch Pen X 1
[3] Color Drum Unit X 3
[6] Service Book Holder

X1
[15] Screw
(RS Tightening black;
M4x12) X 2
F-9-11
[7] ITB Inner Cover X 1
[8] Handle Cover X 6
[9] Right Rear Cover X 1

X1

X1
[12] Screw
X8
NOTE:
[8] : Use the 6 covers when the Buffer Path Unit is not installed. Use 4 of them when it
is installed.
[9], [10], [11], [12], [13], [14] : Use the parts at the installation of the Reader Unit or the
Printer Cover.
F-9-10
9-8
Accessory Box 2
[1] Right Upper Cover 1
X1
[2] Left Upper Cover X 1
9-9
Accessory Box 4 (for the model in which the Buffer Path Unit is
equipped as standard)
[3] Box Upper Cover X 1
[1] Delivery Outlet

Upper Guide X 1
[2] Buffer Front Cover X 1
[3] Cover Support Plate

(Front) X 1
[4] Cover Support Plate

(Rear) X 1
[5] Hinge Shaft X 2
[6] Screw
(RS Tightening; M4x8) X 9
[7] Screw
(P Tightening; M4x10) X 1
[8] Wire Saddle X 1
[4] Front Upper Cover X 1
Two Hinge Shafts

are attached.
F-9-12
NOTE:
[1], [2], [3] : Use the parts at the installation of the Reader Unit or the Printer Cover.
Accessory Box 3 (for the model in which the Buffer Path Unit is
equipped as standard)
[1] Buffer Path Unit X 1
[2] Connecting Harness

Cover X 1
[3] BufferLeft Lower Cover

X1
F-9-14
F-9-13
9-9
Accessory Box 5 (Toner Container)
Upper area of the Host Machine (for the models with the Upright
Control Panel)
iR-ADV C9280 PRO/C9270 PRO

[2] Black Toner Container
X1
[1] Color Toner Container

X3
[1] Upright Control Panel

X1
F-9-15
iR-ADV C7270/C7260
F-9-18
Inside of the Cassette (Lower)
[2] Black Toner Container

X1
[1] Color Toner Container

X3
9-10
[1] Size Plate R X 2
[2] Size Plate L X 2
F-9-16
Accessory Box 6 (only with the products designed for Europe)

[1] Waste Toner Container
X1
F-9-19
USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)
[1] Case Sheet X 1
[2] Cushion X 4
F-9-17
F-9-20
9-10
9-11
CD/Guides
Check the contents against the following.
Europe
USA
C9280 PRO
C7280i
C7270i
C7260i
Asia
Oceania
China
Korea
Taiwan
e-Manual CD
1pc
2pc
2pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
Setup Guide
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
Basic Operation Guide
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
Before Using This Machine
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
AMS KIT Software/Manual CD
1pc
AMS Introduction Booklet
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
iW Management Console CD
2pc
2pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
1pc
Main Unit Warranty
1pc
Chinese Warranty sheet
1pc
Service Log Book
1pc
Guarantee Card
1pc
HDD-related Option Integration Installation Procedure
1pc
Users Guide
UFRII User Software CD
PCL User Software CD
iW Enterprise Management Console CD
T-9-3
9-11
Installation > Unpacking > Unpacking
Unpacking
9-12
3) Hold the handles at the right side of the host machine and lift the host machine to remove
the pad. Put the plastic bag aside in the direction of the arrow.
Unpacking
CAUTION:
Be sure not to lift the host machine too much. Otherwise, it will lose the balance.
CAUTION:
The host machine weights about 220 kg. For safety, be sure to work carefully to move
and install the machine.
Handles
Be sure to work with a group of 4 or more people to install the Host Machine.
NOTE:
The dimension of the Host Machine and the transport container is as shown in the
figure. Be sure to secure a space to unpack, and then start the installation work.
Plastic Bag
1,307 mm
Pads
F-9-22
4) Hold the handles at the left side of the host machine and lift the host machine to remove
the pad and the plastic bag.
1,140 mm
991 mm
CAUTION:
Be sure not to lift the host machine too much. Otherwise, it will lose the balance.
F-9-21
1) Remove the tapes attaching the host machine and the Package Box and bring down the
Handles
Package Box from the pallet.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the Box when removing the tapes.
2) Pull the plastic bag all the way down.
Pads
Plastic Bag
F-9-23
9-12
5) Take out the 2 Slope Plates stored at the right side of the Pallet and remove the 2 pins
which are secured at the back of the Slope Plate with tape.
9-13
8) Install the Handle Cover.

< Model with Buffer Path Unit: Using 4 Handle Covers >
6) Turn around the 2 Slope Plates to install as shown in the figure, and then fit the pin-holes of
the pallet with the pin-holes of the Slope Plates to put the 2 pins into the holes.
4 Protrusions
4 Claws
Model with Buffer Path Unit
Pin
x4
Claw
Slope Plates
Protrusion
F-9-24
F-9-26
7) Hold the handles at the left side of the host machine, and then, while supporting the corner
of the host machine, fit the casters to the center of the Slope Plate to slowly bring the
machine down.
< Model without Buffer Path Unit: Using 6 Handle Covers >
6 Protrusions
6 Claws
Model without Buffer Path Unit
CAUTION:
x6
Be careful not to make the casters off from the Slope Plate.
Claw
Handles
Protrusion
F-9-27
Handles
F-9-25
9-13
Installation > Unpacking > Installing the Upright Arm
9) When not installing the Buffer Path Unit with the model with Buffer Path Unit, remove the
Buffer Mounting Plate (Front) and the Buffer Mounting Plate (Rear), and install the 2 Handle
Cover.
4 Screws
2 Protrusions
9-14
Installing the Upright Arm

NOTE:
Perform the models in which the Upright Control Panel is equipped as standard.
In the case of Upright Control Panel model, be sure to perform the following procedure.
2 Claws
x4
Buffer Mounting
Plate (Front)
1) Put the Upright Arm straight into the round hole of the Frame Base.
Claw
CAUTION:
x2
When installing the Upright Arm, be sure to place the cables as indicated in the
figure below.
Be careful not to get the cable caught when installing the Upright Arm.
Upright Arm
Buffer Mounting
Plate (Rear)
Control Panel
Cable
Protrusion
Frame Base
F-9-28
10)
Remove the tapes to remove the Left Box Cover.
CAUTION:
Because the Left Box Cover is not secured with the screw, be careful not to drop the
Box Cover when removing the tapes.
Power Supply Cable
Tapes
F-9-29
11)
Remove the tapes attached over the outer surface of the host machine.
9-14
2) Bring down the Upright Control Panel together with the cushioning materials from the host
9-15
4) Secure the Control Panel Cable with the reuse band.
machine.
NOTE:
Check that the Control Panel Cable and the Power Supply Cable are secured in place
using the Edge Saddle.
Upright
Control Panel
Edge Saddle
Power Cable
x2
Control Panel Cable

Cushioning
Materials
F-9-30
Reuse Band
3) Align the hole on the Upright Arm and the hole on the Frame Base, and secure the Upright
Arm in place.
F-9-32
2 Screws (TP; M4 x 8)
5) Secure the Power Supply Cable with the cable clamp.
Upright Arm
1 screw (TP: M4x8)
x2
Power Supply
Cable
Frame Base
F-9-31
Cable Clamp
F-9-33
9-15
Installation > Installation > Installation of the Upright Control Panel
Installation
9-16
2) Remove the packing tapes on the Upright Control Panel.
NOTE:
When installing the host machine and Reader Unit or Printer Cover simultaneously, be
sure to install the Reader Unit or Printer Cover after completing "Unpacking > Installing
the Upright Arm".
When installing the Reader Unit, refer to Installation Procedure of the Reader Unit.
When installing the Reader Unit, be sure to execute the following work after the
installation.
In the case of using the machine as a printer model, refer to Installation Procedure of the
Printer Cover-B1.
3) Turn the Panel Base to make the [A] part with protrusion come to the upper side.
[A]
[A]
Installation of the Upright Control Panel

1) Install the Front Base Cover and the Rear Base Cover.
2 Screws (P tightening; M3 x 8)
F-9-35
x2
Front Base Cover
Rear Base Cover

F-9-34
9-16
4) Install the Upright Control Panel to the Upright Arm.
5) Route the Power Supply Cable as shown in the figure and connect the Power Supply
2 Protrusions
Connector.
2 Bosses
6) Fix the cable with the Cable Clamp.
1 Screw (TP; M4 x 8)
NOTE:
When installing the Upright Control Panel, be sure to tighten the upper screw first.
x4
9-17
CAUTION:
Be sure not to route the Power Supply Cable in clockwise direction.
Route the Power Supply Cable at the bottom of the Cable Clamp to place inside the
black guide.
Upright Control
Panel
Protrusion
Boss
Cable
Clamp
Boss
Power Supply
Connector
Upright Arm
F-9-36
Power Supply Cable
CAUTION:
Be careful not to trap the Flexible Cable with the Panel Base.
F-9-38
F-9-37
9-17
7) Route the Control Panel Cable as shown in the figure and connect the Control Panel
9-18
9) Install the Joint Cover L.
Connector.
Joint Cover L
8) Secure the cable with the Reuse Band and cut the extra part.
CAUTION:
Be sure not to route the Power Supply Cable in clockwise direction.
Be sure to store the slack [A] of the Control Panel Cable inside the cover.
Ferrite Core
Reuse Band
Control Panel
Cable
Control Panel Cable
[A]
F-9-41
10)
Install the Joint Cover R.
2 Screws (P tightening; M3 x 8)
2 Rubber Caps
CAUTION:
F-9-39
CAUTION:
Be sure to put the Power Cable through groove on the Joint Cover R.
Check that the tape of the Control Panel Cable is outside the Pipe Cover.
If not, be sure to adjust cable so that the tape can be seen.
Joint Cover R
x2
Groove
Power Supply Cable

F-9-42
Tape
F-9-40
9-18
Installation > Installation > Installation of the Buffer Path Unit > Unpacking
Installation of the Buffer Path Unit
9-19
1) Lift the Buffer Path Unit straight upward, and then place the bottom of the Buffer Path Unit
Unpacking
facing down.
NOTE:
Be sure to open the plastic before starting the work. Holding the Buffer Path Unit while
the plastic is wrapped around can cause the Buffer Path Unit slipped over.
CAUTION:
Do no hold inside the dashed frame as shown in the figure; otherwise, it can cause the
Paper Path Guide deformed.
F-9-45
CAUTION:
Do not move the Buffer Path Unit while
making [A] area as the supporting point
nor place it on the floor while the Unit
is tilted; otherwise, [A] area can be
deformed.
F-9-43
CAUTION:
Be sure to hold Frame [A] and Frame [B] areas of the Buffer Path Unit. Avoid the
harness to hold [B] area; otherwise, the harness can be damaged.
[B]
[A]
F-9-46
Harness
2) Remove the tapes.
[A]
F-9-44
Installation > Installation > Installation of the Buffer Path Unit > Unpacking
9-19
Installation > Installation > Installation of the Buffer Path Unit > Installation Procedure
Installation Procedure
9-20
3) Put the 3 hooks of the Delivery Outlet Upper Guide into the holes of the Reverse Door
Cover, and slide in the direction of the arrow to install the Delivery Outlet Upper Guide.
1) Remove the Left Lower Cover 1.
1 Screw (Binding; M4 x 10)
2 Screws (the removed Left Lower Cover and the screws are not used)
Hook
Hook
x2
Hook
F-9-49
F-9-47
CAUTION:
2) Install the Cover Support Plate (Front) and the Cover Support Plate (Rear).
Before installing the Buffer Path Unit to the Host Machine, check that the Jam Process
Lever is positioned as shown in the figure.
2 Claws
2 Screws (RS tightening; M4 x 8)
Cover Support Plate (Front)
x2
Claw
x2
Cover Support Plate (Rear)
F-9-48
F-9-50
9-20
4) Put the 4 shafts [A] of the Buffer Path Unit into the 4 U-shaped slots [B] on the left side of
the host machine, and install the equipment.
9-21
6) Insert a flat-blade screwdriver, and remove the Connector Cover. (The removed Connector
Cover will not be used.)
1 Claw
CAUTION:
2 Protrusions
Be careful not to come in contact with Delivery Outlet Upper Guide at installation.
Claw
[B]
[A]
[B]
Delivery Outlet
Upper Guide
Protrusion
[A]
F-9-53
7) Install the Connecting Harness Stopping Plate.

2 Screws (RS Tightening; M4 x 8)
F-9-51
5) Shift the Buffer Path Unit in the direction of the arrow, and fix it while pushing it on the
Buffer Mounting Plate (Front).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to trap the harnesses with the Connecting Harness Stopping Plate.
1 Screw (RS tightening; M4 x 8)
x2
F-9-52
F-9-54
9-21
8) Connect the 3 connectors to the host machine.
10)
9-22
Install the Buffer Left Lower Cover.
2 Protrusions
4 Screws (RS tightening; M4 x 8)
Connector
x3
NOTE:
In case of connecting to the downstream equipment, secure the cover at the [A] point
together with the Shunt Cable.
Protrusion
x4
F-9-55
9) Put the Buffer Cable through the groove of the Connecting Harness Cover, and install the
Connecting Harness Cover to the host machine.
2 Protrusions
[A]
1 Claw
F-9-57
11)
Protrusion
Install the Wire Saddle and secure the Buffer Cable with the Wire Saddle.
Claw
Buffer Cable
F-9-56
Wire Saddle
F-9-58
9-22
9
12)
Rotate the Jam Process Lever in counter clockwise direction and make the machine
in paper pass condition shown in the figure below.
15)
9-23
When the Buffer Front Cover is misaligned when viewed from the front, loosen 2
screws [A], and after adjusting the side position of the Front Cover, tighten screws.
Buffer Front
Cover
Jam Process Lever

F-9-59
13)
Align the hinge positions of the Buffer Front Cover and the Buffer Path Unit in 2
places, and insert the Hinge Shaft in the direction of the arrow.
[A]
F-9-61
Hinge Shaft
F-9-60
14)
Close the Buffer Front Cover.
9-23
Installation > Installation > Installation of the Pickup Assembly
Installation of the Pickup Assembly
9-24
6) Loosen the screw to slide the Deck Pressure Plate in the direction of the arrow and check
that the screw is positioned at the engraved mark 1, and then tighten the screw.
1) Remove 2 pieces of shipping tags from Right Lower Cover 3.
Engraved Mark
Deck Pressure
Plate
2) Open the Vertical Path Cover and remove the 2 Pressure Release Spacers at the pickup
slot of each cassette.
Pressure Release
Spacers
Screw
F-9-63
7) Close the Left and the Right Decks.
F-9-62
8) Remove the tape by pulling out the Fixing Feed Unit fully toward the front.
Tape
3) Close the Vertical Path Cover.

5) Press the Release Button, and open the Left/Right Deck.
NOTE:
Be sure to release the Release button slowly because it may not come out if releasing it
abruptly.
Tape
Fixing Feed Unit
F-9-64
9-24
9) Push the 2 Lock Springs of the Rails (both sides) to release the lock and further pull out the
10)
9-25
Open the Inner Delivery Unit.
Fixing Feed Unit until it stops.

CAUTION:
Do not release the Lock Springs at the rear side of the Rails (both sides); otherwise the
Frame of the Fixing Feed Unit can be off.
Inner Delivery Unit

F-9-66
11)
Remove the Fixing Upper Cover.
1 Stepped Screw
1 Screw (W Sems)
W Sems
Lock Spring
x2
Stepped Screw
Lock Spring
F-9-65
Fixing Upper Cover
F-9-67
9-25
9
12)
Installation > Installation > Installation of the Process Unit
Remove the Stepped Screw with the tag. (The removed Stepped Screw will not be
used.)
NOTE:
It is desirable to keep the removed Stepped Screw (M3x18.5) because it may be used
when moving the host machine.
9-26
14)
Install the Fixing Upper Cover. (2 Screws)
15)
Close the Inner Delivery Unit.
16)
Close the Fixing Feed Unit.
Installation of the Process Unit

1) Remove the Left Small Cover and the Right Small Cover of the Process Unit Inner Cover.
2 Screws
4 Protrusions
NOTE:
The 2 screws will not come off from the cover.
Protrusion
Screw
Protrusion
Screw
F-9-68
13)
Remove the 6 Fixation Members.
Left Small Cover
Right Small Cover
NOTE:
It is desirable to keep the Fixation Members because they may be used when moving
the host machine.
Fixation
Member
F-9-70
Fixation Member
F-9-69
9-26
2) Bring down the 2 Levers of the Process Unit Inner Cover to pull out to the front and open
9-27
4) Take out the Developing Assembly (Yellow) from the attached container box.
the Process Unit Inner Cover.

CAUTION:
The color is specified for the Color Developing Assembly.
Do not tilt or shake the Color Developing Assembly strongly when taking it out;
otherwise, the toner can be scattered.
Lever
5) Unpack the Developing Assembly (Yellow) to remove the packing material.

CAUTION:
Be sure not to remove the tape [A] on the Supply Mouth until right before installing to
the host machine.
Be sure not to remove the tape [B] and [C].
Be sure not to remove the tape [B] and [C] because they are fixing the roller in place
to prevent it moving when removing the Sleeve Seal.
F-9-71
3) Remove the tape, and remove the ITB Fixation Member.

NOTE:
It is desirable to keep the Fixation Member because they may be used when moving
the host machine.
When touching the Developing Assembly (Yellow), check that no foreign particle
(especially metal chip) is attached on your hands before starting the work.
(If foreign particle is attached on the Sleeve, it can cause image failure).
After the unpacking work, do not put the Supply Mouth facing down because it can
cause toner leak.
ITB Fixation Member
Supply Mouth
Packing
Material
Tape
[B]
F-9-72
[C]
[A]
F-9-73
9-27
6) Remove the Sleeve Seal from the Developing Assembly (Yellow).
9-28
8) Make the coupling of the Sleeve rotate a full turn or 1.5 turns in the direction of the arrow
(counter clockwise).
CAUTION:
CAUTION:

Color Developing Assembly
NOTE:
Toner clots are removed by rotating the Sleeve in the direction of the arrow (counter
clockwise).
Sleeve Seal
F-9-74
7) Remove the tapes [B] and [C] fixing the Roller.

Coupling
F-9-76
9) Take out the Drum Unit (Yellow) from the attached packing box.
CAUTION:
The color is specified for the Color Drum Unit.
[B]
[C]
F-9-75
9-28
9
10)
Unpack the Drum Unit (Yellow), and remove the packing materials.
12)
9-29
Release the lock of the Fixing Levers of the Color Drum Unit (Yellow) and lift the
Fixing Levers up.

CAUTION:
Do not touch the Photosensitive Drum.
Lock
Be sure not to remove the Protection Sheet during work.
Protection Sheet
Fixing Lever
Packing
Material
F-9-79
F-9-77
11)
Pull the 2 Spacers in the direction of the arrow from the Drum Unit (Yellow) to
remove.
Spacer
Packing
Material
F-9-78
9-29
9
13)
Fit the 2 protrusions on the Developing Assembly (Yellow) into the Drum Unit (Yellow),
and combine the Developing Assembly (Yellow) and the Drum Unit (Yellow). Then, turn the
Fixation Lever in the direction of the arrow and assemble the Process Unit.
9-30
CAUTION:
Check that the lock is engaged and also check that the groove is visible as shown in
the figure. (If installing the Process Unit while the Fixation Lever is not properly locked,
the unit may not be able to be removed from the host machine.)
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the correct color when assembling.
Lock
Fixation Lever
Fixation Lever
Slot
Protrusion
Groove
Slot
F-9-81
Protrusion
14)
Secure the harness using the Harness Guide and the Reuse Band, and connect the
connector.
Color Developing
Assembly
Color Drum Unit

F-9-80
x4
Connector
Harness Guide
Reuse Band
Harness Guide
F-9-82
9-30
9
15)
9-31
Remove the tape [A] on the Supply Mouth and Toner Mouth Packing.
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove the Toner Mouth Packing certainly.
Guide[B]
Guide[A]
[A]
Toner Mouth Packing
Process Unit
F-9-83
16)
Hold the upper front area and the left side of the Process Unit as shown in the figure
F-9-85
and place the rib at the right side of the Process Unit to the guide [A] of the Process Unit
Inner Cover, and then fit the lower left side of the Process Unit to the guide [B] of the
Process Unit Inner Cover to push in horizontally.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the Photosensitive Drum at the lower side with your hand when putting in
the Process Unit.
NOTE:
The guides positions [A] and [B] of the Process Unit Inner Cover differ between the
Process Cartridge (Y) (M) and the Process Cartridge (C).
The positions of guide [A] and [B] are shown in the figure below.
Guide[A]
Yellow
Guide[B]
Yellow
Guide[A]
Magenta
Guide[A]
Cyan
Guide[B]
Magenta
Guide[B]
Cyan
F-9-86
F-9-84
9-31
Installation > Installation > Installation of the Black Developing Assembly
NOTE:
While holding the Process Unit with both hands, insert about 2/3 of it, and then push the
handle of the Process Unit with your finger as shown in the figure to insert all the way
until it stops.
9-32
Installation of the Black Developing Assembly

1) Take out the Black Developing Assembly from the attached packing box.
CAUTION:
Do not tilt or shake the Black Developing Assembly strongly when taking it out;
otherwise, the toner can be scattered.
2) Unpack the Black Developing Assembly and remove the packing material.
CAUTION:
Be sure not to remove the tape [A] on the Supply Mouth until right before installing to
the host machine.
Be sure not to remove the tape [B] and [C].
F-9-87
17)
Be sure not to remove the tape [B] and [C] because they are fixing the roller in place
to prevent it moving when removing the Sleeve Seal.
When touching the Black Developing Assembly, check that no foreign particle
(especially metal chip) is attached on your hands before starting the work.
(If foreign particle is attached on the Sleeve, it can cause image failure)
Connect the Connector.
After the unpacking work, do not put the Supply Mouth facing down because it can
cause toner leak.
Connector
Packing
Material
[B]
[C]
[A]
F-9-88
18)
Repeat the step 4) through 17) and install the Magenta and Cyan Process Units in
the same way.

Supply Mouth
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the correct color to install.
F-9-89
9-32
3) Remove the Sleeve Seal from the Developing Assembly (Black).
9-33
5) Make the Gear of the Sleeve rotate a full turn or 1.5 turns in the direction of the arrow
(counter clockwise).
CAUTION:
CAUTION:

NOTE:
Toner clots are removed by rotating the cylinder in the direction of the arrow (counter
clockwise).
Sleeve Seal
F-9-90
4) Be sure to remove the tape [B] and [C] after removing the Sleeve Seal.
Gear
F-9-92
[B]
[C]
F-9-91
9-33
6) Move the lock of the Developing Assembly Pressure Lever in the direction of the arrow to
release the fixation.
9-34
7) Pull out the Developing Assembly Pressure Lever until it stops to release the pressure.
8) Turn the Developing Assembly Pressure Lever in the direction of the arrow.
Developing Assembly
Pressure Lever
Developing Assembly
Pressure Lever
Lock
F-9-94
9) Remove the tape [A] on the Supply Mouth and Toner Mouth Packing.
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove the Toner Mouth Packing certainly.
F-9-93
[A]
Toner Mouth Packing
F-9-95
9-34
9
10)
Hold the front right side and the left side of the Black Developing Assembly and fit the
rail of the Black Developing Assembly to the rail slot to push in horizontally.
9-35
NOTE:
While holding the Black Developing Assembly with both hands, insert about 2/3 of it,
and then push the handle of the Black Developing Assembly with your finger as shown
in the figure to insert all the way until it stops.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the Developing Sleeve with your hand when inserting the Black
Developing Assembly.
Developing Sleeve
F-9-98
11)
F-9-96
Rail
Rail
Secure the harness using the Harness Guide and the Reuse Band, and connect the
connector.
Rail Slot
x3
Connector

F-9-97
Harness Guide
Reuse Band
Harness
Guide
F-9-99
9-35
9
12)
Turn the Developing Assembly Pressure Lever in the direction of the arrow, and push
13)
9-36
Close the Process Unit Inner Cover.
it in to apply pressure.
CAUTION: How to Close the Process Unit Inner Cover
When closing the Process Unit Inner Cover, go through the following steps 1 through 3.
1. Hold the 2 levers and lift up the levers and Process Unit Inner Cover to the horizontal
level.
2. While keeping the levers horizontally, push the Process Unit Inner Cover to the
rear side. Then, push on the 2 Stopper Plates [A] of the right and left hooks of the
Process Unit Inner Cover to the end faces [B] of the Hinge Shaft Holder at the right
and left sides of the host machine.
F-9-100
[B]
[A]
F-9-101
9-36
If the Process Unit Inner Cover is pushed to the rear side without keeping the levers
horizontally, the 2 Stopper Plates [A] of the hooks run over the inside of the Hinge
Shaft Holder at the right and left sides of the host machine.
Furthermore, if the Process Unit Inner Cover is pushed to the rear side with this
condition, or if the levers are raised at a 90-degree angle and the Process Unit
Inner Cover is closed, the Release Arm inside the Process Unit Inner Cover may get
damage.
14)
9-37
Install the Left Small Cover and the Right Small Cover of the Process Unit Inner
Cover. (Tighten the 2 screws.)
15)
Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to make it engaged,
and then install the ITB Inner Cover.

2 Protrusions
1 Screw (Binding; M4 x 10)
ITB Pressure
Release Lever
[B]
[A]
[B]
ITB Inner Cover
[A]
Protrusion
F-9-102
3. Raise the levers at a 90-degree angle further and close the Process Unit Inner
Cover. The 2 hooks (right and left) of the Process Unit Inner Cover are hooked to the
Hinge Shaft at the right and left sides of the host machine to lock.
F-9-104
16)
Turn the 2 Hinge Shafts in the direction of the arrow to remove from the Front Upper
Cover.
Front Upper Cover
[B]
ITB Pressure
Release Lever
Hinge Shaft
[A]
F-9-105
F-9-103
9-37
9
17)
Installation > Installation > Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)
Fit the Left and Right Hinge holes of the Front Upper Cover with the host machine
and put the Hinge Shaft in the direction of the arrow to turn, and then install the Front
9-38
Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products

designed for Europe)
Upper Cover.
CAUTION:
Front Upper
Cover
Use the Card Reader prepared by each sales company.
Hinge Shaft
2) Remove the Front Upper Cover.

2 Hinge Shafts
Front Upper Cover
Hinge Shaft
F-9-106
18)
Close the Front Upper Cover.
19)
20)
Open the Multi-purpose Tray, and remove the papers.

Paper
F-9-108
Multi-Purpose Tray
F-9-107
9-38
3) Remove the Clear Cover.
9-39
5) Place the Cushions inside the Upper Left Cover.
3 Claws
NOTE:
Adjust the number of cushions to match the thickness of the Card Reader.
x3
Clow
Clow
F-9-109
4) After connecting the Card Reader to the DUH-V3 Board, place the cable inside the cover.
F-9-111
6) Place the Card Reader on the Cushion.
F-9-110
F-9-112
9-39
7) Remove the Device Port Sheet and replace with the Case Sheet. (The removed Device
Port Sheet will not be used.)
9-40
8) Return the Clear Cover.

3 Claws
x3
Clow
Clow
F-9-114
9) Install the Front Upper Cover. (2 Hinge Shafts)

10)
F-9-113
9-40
Installation > Installation > Installation of the Noise Reduction Cover
Installation of the Noise Reduction Cover
9-41
3) Open the 2 Filters included in the package.
1) Remove the Filter from the Filter Case.
CAUTION:
Do not unpack the Filter until just before installing the Filter.
4) Install the 3 Filters to the Filter Case.
Filter
Filter
Filter Case
F-9-115
2) Remove the Filter Case from the Noise Reduction Cover.

Filter
2 Claws
F-9-117
Claw
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the Filters in the correct direction.
UPPER
x2
Noise Reduction
Cover
Filter Case
Filter
Claw
F-9-116
Noise Reduction
Cover
Filter
F-9-118
Installation > Installation > Installation of the Noise Reduction Cover
9-41
Installation > Installation > Securing the Host Machine
9-42
Securing the Host Machine
5) Install the Filter Case to the Noise Reduction Cover.
1) Confirm the position to install the host machine and turn the 2 adjusters with your hand until
they closely contact the floor.
6) Install the Noise Reduction Cover.

3 Protrusions
NOTE:
If you failed to turn the adjusters with your hand, use a screwdriver so that they can be
turned by your hand.
2 Screws (RS tightening Black; M4 x 12)
x2
2) Use a screwdriver to turn the adjusters in the direction of the arrow to make them secured.
NOTE:
Securing of the adjuster is not earthquake resistant.
Protrusion
F-9-119
F-9-120
Installation > Installation > Securing the Host Machine
9-42
Installation > Installation > Preparation for the Main Power Connection
Other Installation Work
9-43
Preparation for the Main Power Connection
1) Open the cap of the Control Panel Right Cover, and store the Touch Pen. (Flat Control
1) Insert the power plug into the outlet.
Panel Model)
NOTE:
For the Upright Control Panel Model, the Touch Pen is stored in the lower right of the
Upright Control Panel.
2) Check that the Leakage Breakers are turned ON.
2) Remove the release paper from the back side of the Service Book Holder, and affix the
holder on the Base Plate of the host machine.
Leakage Breaker
F-9-122
3) Turn ON the Environment Heater Switch and the Cassette Heater Switch in accordance
with the installation environment.
Set the environment switches in accordance with the installation environment.
In the case of high humidity environment, turn ON the Environment Switch.
(The Drum Heater is turned ON regardless of the main switch status.)
F-9-121
Environment
Heater Switch

F-9-123
Installation > Installation > Preparation for the Main Power Connection
9-43
Installation > Installation > Settings at Installation
Turning ON the Main Power
9-44
8) Repeat the procedure from step 5) to 7) to install the Toner Containers in other colors as
well.
NOTE:
If the Reader Unit or the Printer Cover is installed, be sure to refer to "Operation Check"
in the Installation Procedure for the Reader Unit or the Printer Cover.
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the correct color to install.
9) Close the Front Upper Cover.
10)
1) Remove the Protection Sheet on the Control Panel.
After supplying the toner, execute the following Service Mode (level 1).
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > SPLY-H-4
2) Open the Switch Cover and turn ON the main power.

3) When the message appears to prompt a shutdown, turn OFF the main power switch.
NOTE: Turning OFF the Main Power
1) Open the Switch Cover and turn OFF the main power switch.
2) Check that the control panel display and the main power lamp are OFF, and then
Settings at Installation
CAUTION:
Be sure to execute ITB neutral position adjustment.
1) Execute the ITB neutral position adjustment.
Installation of the Toner Container
Service Mode (level 1) > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INIT-ITB
2) Execute the color displacement correction.
Follow the instruction on the UI to install the Toner Container.
[Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment /Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto
Correct Color Mismatch] > [Start]
1) Confirm the instruction for toner replacement and press the button.
3) Set the value of the following Service Mode (level 2) to "1". (only for the models in which
2) Open the Front Upper Cover.

3) Select all colors from the Replacement Required List and press Remove Toner
Container button.
the Upright Control Panel is equipped as standard)

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > STND-PNL
NOTE:
By executing the above service mode, the animation of machine on the Control Panel
screen can be switched from Flat Control Panel to Upright Control Panel.
NOTE:
The Toner Container is not installed when installing the Host Machine.
4) The Replacement Cover is automatically open.
NOTE:
Although a message telling Remove Toner Container is displayed on the UI, ignore
the message because the Toner Container is not installed when installing the Host
Machine.
5) Hold the Toner Container as shown in the figure and shake it for about 10 times.
6) Turn the safety cap of the Toner Container to remove.
7) Set a new Toner Container and close the Replacement Cover.
Installation > Installation > Settings at Installation
9-44
Installation > Installation > Setting the Deck
Setting the Deck
9-45
5) Put the Size Plate L for the paper size in the Right Deck and the Left Deck through the
opening at the handle area.

2) Push the Deck Release Button to pull out the Left and the Right Decks to the front.
3) Remove the 3 screws fixing the Trailing Edge Guide Plate, Left Guide Plate, and Right
Guide Plate in place, and fix each of the guide plates at users desired size.
Left
Guide Plate
x3
Trail Edge
Guide Plate
Screw
Right
Guide Plate
F-9-125

7) Push the Left/Right Deck in.
F-9-124
8) When the size is switched, register paper size for the Front Deck in Service Mode (level 1).
Right Deck : COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C1
4) Put the specified size of papers in the Left/Right Deck.
Left Deck : COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C2

A4 = 0 B5 = 1 LTR = 2
9) Exit from the Service Mode.
Installation > Installation > Setting the Deck
9-45
Installation > Installation > Setting the Paper Cassette
Setting the Paper Cassette
9-46
5) Cut the 2 points of the Size Plate R with nippers.

Cut
1) Push the Cassette Release Button to pull out the Cassette to the front.
2) Hold the Lever of the Side Guide Plate to set the Side Guide Plate to the specified size.
3) Hold the Lever of the Trail Edge Guide Plate to set the Trail Edge Guide Plate to the
specified size.
Side Guide Plate
F-9-128
6) Following the paper size, set the Size Plate R (unused size plates should be put together).
Trail Edge
Guide Plate Lever
Trail Edge
Guide Plate
Side Guide
Plate Lever
Side Guide Plate
F-9-126
4) Set paper and open the cover at the insertion area of the Size Plate.
Paper
F-9-129
7) Close the cover at the insertion area of the Size Plate and push in the Cassette.
8) Set another cassette as well.
Cover
NOTE:
Paper size is set to be automatically recognized.
F-9-127
Installation > Installation > Setting the Paper Cassette
9-46
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)
Auto Gradation Adjustment
9-47
Image Position Adjustment
In the Case of the Machine with the Reader
Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)
Execute the Auto Gradation Adjustment to the following 3 modes: [Plain], [Heavy 1/Heavy 2],
and [Heavy 3/Heavy 4].
CAUTION:
However, when using 2 or more types of paper, it is necessary to execute all the modes
When performing adjustment of cassettes/decks, do not perform adjustment in service

mode.
corresponding to the types of paper.

CAUTION:
When using paper type to which Auto Gradation Adjustment is not executed, image
failure or damage on the host machine may occur.
Adjustment of Cassette/Deck
Print from each cassette/deck, and check that the left edge margin of the image (L1) is within
2.5 +/- 1.5 mm.
In the Case of Plain
If it is not within the range, execute adjustment by following the procedure below.
1) Clean the Copyboard Glass surface of the host machine.

Feeding direction of paper
2) Set A3, A4, 11x17, or LTR size papers in a cassette. (Refer to the cassette settings.)
3) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto
image
L1
Adjust Gradation] > [Plain] > [Full Adjustment].

4) Select the source of paper for test print, and press [OK].
5) From this point on, follow the instruction on UI.
In the Case of Heavy 1/Heavy 2
F-9-130
< In the Case of Right Deck >
1) Clean the Copyboard Glass surface of the host machine.

2) Set heavy papers in a cassette, and select the heavy paper Settings screen.
Adjust Gradation] > [Heavy 1/Heavy 2] > [Full Adjustment].
1) Remove the Handle Cover.

1 Claw
1 Protrusion
Claw
In the Case of Heavy 3/Heavy 4

1) Set heavy papers in a Multi Tray , and select the heavy paper Settings screen.
Adjust Gradation] > [Heavy 3/Heavy 4] > [Full Adjustment].
Protrusion
In the Case of the Machine without the Reader
F-9-131
Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto
Adjust Gradation], and execute the item.
9-47
9-48
NOTE:
If you are concerned with alignment of the Right Deck Cover, adjust the position of the
Right Deck Cover as necessary.
2) Raise the handle, and check the position of the scale marked above the screws.
3) Loosen the 2 screws of the Hook Support Plate.
8) Loosen the 4 screws and adjust the position of the Right Deck Cover by referring to the
Scale
scale.
9) Tighten the 4 screws that were loosened.
Screw
Screw
Screw
F-9-132
4) According to the scale in which the position was checked in step 2, adjust the position of
Screw
the Hook Support Plate.

F-9-134
If the left edge margin is large, move the Hook Support Plate to the rear.
If the left edge margin is small, move the Hook Support Plate to the front.
Hook Support Plate
F-9-133
5) Tighten the 2 screws loosened in step 3.

6) Print from the Right Deck, and check that the left edge margin is within 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm.
9-48
9-49
< In the Case of Left Deck >

2) Remove the Handle Cover.
NOTE:
Only when the Buffer Path Unit is installed, perform steps 1-1) and 1-2).
1 Claw
1 Protrusion
Claw
1-1) Free the Buffer Cable from the Wire Saddle.
Buffer Cable
Protrusion
F-9-137
3) Raise the handle, and check the position of the scale marked above the screw.
Wire Saddle
F-9-135
4) Loosen the 2 screws of the Hook Support Plate.
Scale
1-2) Remove the Buffer Left Lower Cover.

4 Screws
2 Protrusions
Protrusion
Screw
x4
F-9-138
F-9-136
9-49
9-50
< In the Case of Cassette 3, 4 >

the Hook Support Plate.
1) Pull out the Cassette.
If the left edge margin is large, move the Hook Support Plate to the rear.
2) Check the position by the scale of the Cassette Button Link Unit.
If the left edge margin is small, move the Hook Support Plate to the front.
Hook Support Plate
Cassette Button
Link Unit
Scale
F-9-139
F-9-141
7) Print from the Left Deck, and check that the left edge margin is within 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm.
NOTE:
If you are concerned with alignment of the Left Deck Cover, adjust the position of the
Left Deck Cover as necessary.
3) Loosen the 4 screws of the Cassette Button Link Unit.
Cassette Button
Link Unit
9) Loosen the 4 screws and adjust the position of the Left Deck Cover by referring to the
scale.
10)
Tighten the 4 screws that were loosened.

Screw
Screw
Cassette Button
Link Unit
F-9-142
Screw
F-9-140
9-50
the Cassette Button Link Unit.
If the left edge margin is large, move the Cassette Button Link Unit to the front.
If the left edge margin is small, move the Cassette Button Link Unit to the rear.
9-51
NOTE:
If you are concerned with alignment of the Cassette Cover, adjust the right and left
sides of the cover as necessary.
7) Loosen the 4 screws and adjust the position of the Cassette Cover by referring to the scale.
8) When moving the Cassette Button Link Unit, adjust the left side of the Cassette Cover by
shifting it with the same shifting amount of the unit.
Cassette Button
Link Unit
9) Tighten the 4 screws that were loosened.

Scale
Cassette Cover
Cassette Cover
Scale
Scale
F-9-143

6) Print from the Cassette 3 and 4, and check that the left edge margin of the picked up paper
is within 2.5 +/- 1.5 mm.
Cassette Cover
F-9-144
9-51
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)
Adjusting margin of Multi-purpose Pickup Tray
9-52
Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)
Print from the Multi-purpose Pickup Tray, and check that the left edge margin of the image (L1)
NOTE:
By executing the margin adjustment (2nd side) for the Cassette 3, the adjustment is
applied to all source of paper.
Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the left edge margin (L1) is within
image
2.5 +/- 2.0 mm.
L1
image
L1
F-9-145
1) Open the Multi-purpose Pickup Tray.

2) Loosen the screw and adjust the position of the Slide Guide by referring to the scale.
If the left edge margin is small, move the Slide Guide to the front.
F-9-147
If the left edge margin is large, move the Slide Guide to the rear.
1) Change the left edge margin adjustment value for the 2nd side in service mode (level 1).
Scale
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-REFE

As the value is incremented by "1", the left edge margin is increased by 0.1 mm.
2) Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the left edge margin is within 2.5
+/- 2.0 mm.
3) Write the new adjustment value in the service label.
ADJ-REFE
4) Get out from service mode.
Slide Guide
F-9-146
3) Tighten the screw loosened in step 2.

4) Print from the Multi-purpose Pickup Tray, and check that the left edge margin of the image
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)
9-52
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)
Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)
9-53
Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)
NOTE:
By executing the leading edge margin adjustment for the Cassette 3, the adjustment is
NOTE:
By executing the leading edge margin adjustment for the Cassette 3, the adjustment is
Execute printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the leading edge margin (L1) is within 4.0
Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the leading edge margin (L1) on
+1.5/-1.0 mm.
the 2nd side is within 4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm.
L1
L1

image
image
F-9-148
F-9-149
1) Change the leading edge margin adjustment value in service mode (level 1).
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST
1) Change the leading edge margin adjustment value for the 2nd side in service mode (level 1).
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-DUP1
As the value is incremented by "1", the leading edge margin is decreased by 0.1 mm.
2) Print from the Cassette 3, and check that the leading edge margin is within 4.0 + 1.5/ -1.0
mm.
As the value is incremented by "1", the leading edge margin is decreased by 0.1 mm.
2) Perform 2-sided printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the leading edge margin is
within 4.0 + 1.5/ -1.0 mm.
REGIST
REG-DUP1
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)
9-53
Installation > Installation > Checking the Network Connection > Checking by the Remote Host Address
Checking the Network Connection
9-54
Operation Procedure Using Ping
Overview
CAUTION:
If the users network environment is TCP/IP, use the Ping function to check that the network
setting is properly performed.
If the users network environment is IPX/SPX or Apple Talk, there is no need to check the
network environment.
To execute Ping command with the Windows installed PC, set OFF the firewall, or
execute Ping command from the Windows installed PC to the host machine.
1) Select the following: [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP setting]
> [IPv4 setting] > [PING command]
2) Enter the IP address with the numeric keypad on the Control Panel and press Execute
Checking the Network Connection
key. Response from the host is displayed if Ping command is succeeded while no
response from the host is displayed if failed.
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the network cable with Category 5e or higher. In addition, a sealed type
(STP cable) is recommended.
Using the non-shield type can affect the peripheral electrical equipment through the
network cable.
Checking by the Remote Host Address

Using the remote host address to execute Ping can check whether connection to the network
is enabled or not.
Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal connected/running on TCP/IP network
1) Turn OFF the main power switch
environment that connects to this equipment.
2) Connect the network cable to the host machine and turn ON the main power switch.
1) Inform the system administrator about checking of the network connection using Ping.
3) Inform the system administrator at the installation site that installation of the host machine
2) Confirm the remote host address with the system administrator.
is complete, and then, ask for the network setting.
3) Enter the remote host address to Ping.
NOTE:
Network setting cannot be executed unless logging in as an administrator.
Factory default password is as follows.
The network is properly connected if the message say Response from the host.
The network is not properly connected if the message say No response from the
host, therefore, execute the following troubleshooting.
System administration division ID: 7654321

System administration password: 7654321
CAUTION:
To perform the network setting, the following Additional Functions items must be set
ON.
[Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [Change network settings/
check connection]
[Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4
setting] > [Use IPv4]
4) Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Installation > Installation > Checking the Network Connection > Checking by the Remote Host Address
9-54
Installation > Installation > Network Troubleshooting > Checking Network Function on the Main Controller
Network Troubleshooting
9-55
Checking Network Function on the Main Controller

Perform checking by the loopback address.
Checking Connection of the Network Cable

To check whether the network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet Port.
1) Select the following: [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting]
> [IPv4 setting] > [Ping Command]; and enter the IP address, 127.0.0.1 with the numeric
keypad and enter Execute key.
Operation Procedure Using Ping
The network function of the Main Controller is working properly if the message say
1) Ask the network administrator at the users site to write down the IP address of the PC that
is connected to the network.
2) [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4 setting] >
[Ping Command]; and enter the IP address of the PC with the numeric keypad and press
Response from the host.

If the message say No response from the host, the network function of the Main
Controller is faulty.
2) Replace with a Main Controller that works properly, and then check connection.
Execute key.
The network is properly connected if the message say Response from the host.
If the message say No response from the host, check the following.
NOTE:
The IP address of the PC can be checked by the following procedure:
Select the following on a Windows PC: Start > Program > Accessory > Command
Prompt; and enter ipconfig and press Enter key to display information of the IP
address.
Checking the Network Setting of the Host Machine

Check if the IP address specified in the host machine is correct.
> [IPv4 setting] > [IP address setting]; and write down the address in the IP address field.
> [IPv4 setting] > [Ping Command]; and enter the IP address.
The IP address specified in the host machine is correct if the message say Response
from the host.
If the message say No response from the host, check the following.
NOTE:
When setting the address by manually input, set the Subnet Mask by following the
instruction of the administrator.
Installation > Installation > Network Troubleshooting > Checking Network Function on the Main Controller
9-55
Installation > Installation > Settings to enable "Access Management System" (North/Middle/South America and Europe only)
9-56
Settings to enable "Access Management System"

(North/Middle/South America and Europe only)
Be sure to make this setting upon user's request.
The following conditions need to be satisfied to enable Access Management System.
Login application supporting AMS (such as SSO-H) has been started.
Set [Use ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM] to [ON] or set AMSOFFSW in service mode
to "0".
CAUTION:
Be sure that the SSO-H of the login service is already started. If not, "ACCESS
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM" will not be displayed on [Check Device Configuration]
screen even if the setting is changed.
< Checking method >

1) Press Counter Check key, and check the controller version displayed on [Check Device
Configuration] screen.
The version is "1413.XXXX.XXX *" or earlier: Go to "Setting method in service mode"
The version is "1414.XXXX.XXX*" or later: Go to "Setting method from Settings/
Registration"
* "XXXX" differs according to the environment.
< Setting method in service mode >
1) Enter service mode (Level 1), and set the setting value to "0".
- COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > AMSOFFSW
3) Press Counter Check key, and then check that "ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM" is
displayed on [Check Device Configuration] screen.
< Setting method from Settings/Registration >
1) Log in as an administrator.
2) Select Settings/Registration > [Management Settings] > [License/Other] > [Use ACCESS
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM].
3) Select [ON], and then press [OK].
5) Press Counter Check key, and then check that "ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM" is
displayed on [Check Device Configuration] screen.
Installation > Installation > Settings to enable "Access Management System" (North/Middle/South America and Europe only)
9-56
Installation > When moving the host machine to another place after installation, execute the operation shown below. > When moving the machine
9-57
When moving the host machine to another place

after installation, execute the operation shown below.
1 Protrusion
1 Claw
NOTE:
If packing materials such as fixing material which were removed on the installation are
not available, it is recommended to use cushioning materials that matches to them.
When moving the machine to another floor

If you need to relocate the machine (move to another floor, etc) after installation, be sure to
perform the following work in advance.
1) Move the Scanner Unit to the position where it is going to be secured.
Protrusion
Service Mode (Level 2) > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > RD-SHPOS
2) With all the covers of the host machine closed, execute the service mode for putting the
Fixing Roller into a semi-engaged state.
Service Mode (Level 2) > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > FX-HPRS
CAUTION:
Claw
F-9-150
6) Secure the Scanner Unit with the Scanner Fixation Tool that have been kept in a safe place
since image Reader Unit installation.
NOTE:
Be sure to push it in until it clicks.
After execution of this service mode, do not open the covers until the Main Power
Switch is turned OFF.

F-9-151
9-57
9-58
7) Install the Packing Materials that were removed during installation.
11)
12)
Lower lifters inside the Pickup Decks and cassettes.

12-1) Pull out all Pickup Decks and cassettes.
12-1) Confirm that lifters are lowered and close all Pickup Decks and cassettes.
CAUTION:
Make sure to turn the Main Power OFF and then perform these procedures. If the
Main Power is ON, lifters may rise again after closing Pickup Decks and cassettes.
If the machine is moved with lifters raised, the Lifter Drive Gear may be damaged
due to the shaking.
F-9-152
13)
Lift the host machine off the floor by turning the 2 adjusters with a screwdriver.
14)
When moving the machine, grasp the Handles and move the host machine.
NOTE:
When moving the machine, be careful not to bump into the arm of the Upright Control
Panel.
9) Remove the ITB Inner Cover.

1 Screw
2 Protrusions
10)
Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to release the
pressure.
ITB Pressure
Release Lever
ITB Pressure
Release Lever
15)
At reinstallation after moving the machine, remove the installed packaging material.
16)
Remove the Scanner Fixation Tool, and install the Left Upper Small Cover.
17)
Put the ITB Pressure Release Lever back to the original position to apply pressure
and install the ITB Inner Cover. (1 Screw)

ITB Inner Cover
18)
After turning ON the power, execute ITB neutral position adjustment.
Service Mode (Level1) > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INIT-ITB
19)
The paper feed direction may tilt because of the change in floor surface condition;
thus, be sure to execute the image position adjustment.

Refer to the Service Manual > Installation > Image Position Adjustment
Protrusion
F-9-153
9-58
9-59
When moving the machine by truck

If you need to relocate the machine after installation by truck or other means of transportation,
be sure to perform the following work in advance.
5) Secure the Scanner Unit with the Scanner Fixation Tool that have been kept in a safe place
since image Reader Unit installation.
NOTE:
Be sure to push it in until it clicks.
1) Move the Scanner Unit to the position where it is going to be secured.

Service Mode (Level 2) > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > RD-SHPOS

1 Protrusion
1 Claw
F-9-155
6) Install the Packing Materials that were removed during installation.
Protrusion
Claw
F-9-154
F-9-156
9-59
9-60
CAUTION:
If this equipment will be moved in simplified packaging using a truck, it is desirable to

perform the following steps 10 to 20.
It is recommended to attach the Fixation Members that were removed during
installation.
8) Remove the ITB Inner Cover.

1 Screw
2 Protrusions
9) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to release the pressure.
ITB Pressure
Release Lever
ITB Pressure
Release Lever
ITB Inner Cover
10)
Push the 2 Lock Springs of the Rails (both sides) to release the lock and further pull
out the Fixing Feed Unit until it stops.

CAUTION:
Do not release the Lock Springs at the rear side of the Rails (both sides); otherwise the
Frame of the Fixing Feed Unit can be off.
Protrusion
F-9-157
Lock Spring
Lock Spring
F-9-158
9-60
9
11)
9-61
Open the Inner Delivery Unit.
13)
Install the 6 Fixing Members that were removed during installation.
Fixation
Member
Fixation Member
F-9-159
12)
F-9-161
Remove the Fixing Upper Cover.
14)
Install the Stepped Screw (M3x18.5) that was removed during installation.
1 Stepped Screw
1 Screw (W Sems)
W Sems
x2
Stepped Screw
F-9-162
F-9-160
9-61
9
15)
Hold the handle to pull out the ITB Unit.
16)
Install the Fixing Members that were removed during installation.
9-62
22)
Lower lifters inside the Pickup Decks and cassettes.

22-1) Pull out all Pickup Decks and cassettes.
22-1) Confirm that lifters are lowered and close all Pickup Decks and cassettes.
CAUTION:
Make sure to turn the Main Power OFF and then perform these procedures. If the
Main Power is ON, lifters may rise again after closing Pickup Decks and cassettes.
If the machine is moved with lifters raised, the Lifter Drive Gear may be damaged
due to the shaking.
Close the ITB Unit
18)
Install the Fixing Upper Cover. (2 Screws)
19)
Close the Inner Delivery Unit.
When moving the machine, grasp the Handles and move the host machine.
When moving the machine, be careful not to bump into the arm of the Upright
Control Panel.
The Upright Control Panel should be removed and packed when being transported.
NOTE:
If any tag is attached to the Fixation Member, move it to outside the cover and secure
by tape.
20)
Lift the host machine off the floor by turning the 2 adjusters with a screwdriver.
24)
CAUTION:
F-9-163
17)
23)
Close the Fixing Feed Unit
When moving by a truck, it is recommended to tape and secure all movable locations
(all doors and Upright Control Panel Arm).
25)
At reinstallation after moving the machine, remove the installed Fixing Members and
Stepped Screw.
21)
26)
Remove the Scanner Fixation Tool, and install the Left Upper Small Cover.
27)
Put the ITB Pressure Release Lever back to the original position to apply pressure
and install the ITB Inner Cover. (1 Screw)
28)
After turning ON the power, execute ITB neutral position adjustment.
Service Mode (Level1) > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INIT-ITB
29)
The paper feed direction may tilt because of the change in floor surface condition;
thus, be sure to execute the image position adjustment.

Refer to the Service Manual > Installation > Image Position Adjustment
9-62
Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Installation Outline Drawing
Printer Cover-B1
9-63
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

Check that the main power switch is OFF.
1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.

2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned
off, then disconnect the power plug.
NOTE:
For parts not included in the package of this equipment, use parts included in the
package of the host machine.
[1] Printer Cover X 1

X1

X1
[4] Reader Mount X 1
[5] Screw
(P Tightening; M4x10)
X8
[6] Screw
X2
Installation Outline Drawing
F-9-165
F-9-164
Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-63
9
Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Installation Procedure
9-64
2) Free the Control Panel Cable and the Power Supply Cable. (only for the models with the
Flat Control Panel)
1) Remove the Reader Positioning Shaft.
3 Wire Saddles
1 screw (the removed screw is used in step 6.)
NOTE:
Allow flexibility with the cable so that the Printer Cover can be easily installed.
Control Panel Cable
x3
Power Supply Cable
Wire Saddle
F-9-166
F-9-167
9-64
3) Cut the [A] part of the Printer Cover with nippers using the edge [B] as a reference.
9-65
4) Place the Printer Cover, and install the Reader Fixation Plate R and the Rear Fixation Plate
L to the installation position at the rear side.
CAUTION:
2 Bosses each
Be sure to check that there is no burr.
2 Screws (P tightening; M4x10) each

1 Screw (RS tightening; M4x8) each
CAUTION:
[B]
When placing the Printer Cover, be careful not to trap cables at rear side of the host
machine.
Be sure not to get the cables at the right side of the host machine caught. (only for
the models with the Flat Control Panel)
[A]
Boss
F-9-168
Screw
(RS tightening)
Screw
(P tightening)
x6
Reader Fixing Plate L
Reader Fixing Plate R

F-9-169
9-65
5) Install the Reader Fixation Plate R (included with the host machine) and the Reader
Fixation Plate L (included with the host machine) to the installation position at the front side.
2 Bosses each
9-66
6) Install the Reader Positioning Shaft (removed in step 1) and the Reader Mount.
1 screw (the screw removed in step 1)
1 screw (TP; M4x8)
2 Screws (P tightening; M4x10) each

CAUTION:
1 Screw (RS tightening;: M4x8) each (included with the host machine)
Install the cables on rear side of the host machine while paying attention not to trap
them.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to get the cables at the right side of the host machine caught. (only for
the models with the Flat Control Panel)
NOTE:
To use the Reader Positioning Shaft, install it to the position where it is removed in step
1 when installing the Reader Unit.
Boss
x2
Screw
(RS tightening)
Screw
(P tightening)
Reader Mount
x6
Reader
Positioning
Shaft
F-9-171
7) Secure the cables (removed in step 2) with the 3 wire saddles again. (only for the models
with the Flat Control Panel.)
Reader Fixing Plate L
Reader Fixing Plate R

F-9-170
9-66
9-67
8) Install the Left Upper Cover (included with the host machine).
10)
4 Protrusions
1 Protrusion (for the models with the Upright Control Panel)
Install Right Rear Cover (included with the host machine).
3 Screws (RS tightening; M4x8) (included with the host machine)
2 Protrusions (for the models with the Flat Control Panel)

1 Screw (RS tightening; M4x8) (included with the host machine)
Protrusion
Upright Control Panel Model
Protrusion
x3
F-9-172
9) Cut [A] part of Right Rear Cover (included with the host machine) with nippers.
Flat Control Panel Model
(only for the models with the Upright Control Panel.)

[A]
Protrusion
Protrusion
F-9-174
F-9-173
11)
Open the Multi-purpose Tray Cover.
9-67
9
12)
Install Right Upper Cover 1 (included with the host machine).
15)
4 Protrusions
9-68
Pull the Main Controller Right Cover Unit in the direction of the arrow to install the
Box Upper Cover (included with the host machine).
2 Screws (RS tightening; M4x8) (included with the host machine)
1 Protrusion
1 Rubber Cap (included with the host machine)
2 Screws (TP; M4x8) (included with the host machine)
Protrusion
NOTE:
Be sure to put the projection and the rib of the Box Upper Cover inside the Main
Controller Right Cover Unit.
x2
Protrusion
Rib
F-9-175
Main Controller
Right Cover Unit
13)
Close the Multi-purpose Tray Cover.
14)
Remove the screw of the Main Controller Right Cover Unit.
x2
F-9-177
16)
Install the screw, which has been removed in step 14.
F-9-176
9-68
9
17)
Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Operation Check
9-69
Operation Check
Install the Box Left Cover.
2 Screws (TP; M4x8) (included with the host machine)
1) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet.
CAUTION:
When installing the Box Left Cover, be careful not to trap the cables.
3) A message is displayed prompting to check that the Reader Unit Cable is connected
properly.
4) Select "0" for the following service mode (level 1).
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/SCNR
6) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
x2
NOTE:
When installing the host machine and this equipment at the same time, be sure to
perform the procedure from "Installing the Toner Container" in the installation chapter in
the Service Manual.
F-9-178
NOTE:
After completing step 17, execute from "Installation" procedure in the Service Manual.
Installation > Printer Cover-B1 > Operation Check
9-69
Installation > Copy Tray-P1 > Installation procedure
Copy Tray-P1
9-70

[1] Fan Unit X 1
[2] Fan Cover X 1
[3] Copy Tray X 1
[4] Screw
(RS Tightening ; M3X8.5)
X3
F-9-180
Installation procedure
F-9-179
< CD/Guides >
1) Remove the (Small) Reverse Cover(The removed (Small) Reverse Cover is not used).
2 Claws
FCC/IC Sheet

x2
Claw

F-9-181
9-70
2) Free the Harness from the Wire Saddle so that the Connector is free.
9-71
4) Connect the Connector and secure the Harness with the Wire Saddle.
Connector
Wire Saddle
Wire Saddle
Connector
F-9-182
F-9-184
3) Install the Fan Unit.
5) Install the Fan Cover.
2 Bosses
1 Claw
2 Screws (RS tightening; M3 x 8.5)
1 Screw (RS tightening; M3 x 8.5)

Claw
x2
Bosse
F-9-185
F-9-183
9-71
9-72
6) Fit the 3 projections into the holes of the Host Machine to install the Copy Tray.
Projection
F-9-186
7) Insert the power plug to the outlet.

9-72
Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > Installation Procedure
Utility Tray-A2
9-73

[1] Utility Tray Unit X 1
[2] Wire Saddle X 5
[3] Screw (TP; M4x8 ) X 10
Use when insatalling

the USB Keyboard
[4] Keyborad Table Plate

X1
[5] Screw (TP ; M4x14) X 4
[6] Screw (TP ; M4x10) X 2
Use 3 of them
F-9-188
1) Remove the packing tape.
F-9-187
2) Loosen the 2 screws, and move the Utility Tray Mounting Plate in the direction of the arrow
until it stops.
Utillity Tray Mounting Plate

F-9-189
9-73
3) While pulling the [A] part of the Utility Tray, remove the Utility Tray Mounting Plate.
9-74
5) Install the Utility Tray Mounting Plate removed in step 2).

CAUTION:
Be sure not to pull the [A] part of the Utility Tray too much.
[A]
Pull
x3
F-9-190
4) Remove the 3 rubber caps and 1 screw from the Right Upper Cover 1.
F-9-192
6) Open the Multi-purpose Tray Cover.
F-9-191
9-74
Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > When installing the USB Keyboard
9-75
When installing the USB Keyboard
7) Install the Utility Tray.

2 Screws (Use the screws loosened in step 2).
1) Remove the 2 s and install the 5 wire saddles.
2 Screws (tighten) (TP; M4 x 10)
Cap Cover
x2
Hook
Wire Saddle
F-9-194
F-9-193
Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > When installing the USB Keyboard
9-75
Installation > Key Switch Unit-B1 > Installation Procedure
Key Switch Unit-B1

[1] Key
Switch Unit X 1
9-76

[2] Management Key
X 1set
[A]
F-9-195

F-9-197


2 Screws
x2
F-9-198
F-9-196
9-76
9
3) Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate is not used.)
9-77
5) Connect the connector of the Key Switch Unit.
2 Screws (Rmoved screws is step 4) to used).
x2
Connector
F-9-201
F-9-199
6) Cut the face cover area of the Main Controller Right Cover Unit with nippers.
4) Install the Kew Switch Unit.

2 Screws (Use the screw removed in step 3).)
x2
F-9-202
F-9-200
7) Install the Main Controller Right Cover Unit.

9-77
Installation > Key Switch Unit-B1 > Checking After Installation
9-78
Checking After Installation

1) Set the following service mode (level 1) value to 1.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > KEY
3) Make sure that [Set the control key] is displayed.
4) Insert the Control key into the Key Switch Unit and make sure that the machine is ready for
copy.
Installation > Key Switch Unit-B1 > Checking After Installation
9-78
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2
Copy Card Reader-F1
9-79
Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2
Points to Note Before Installation
[1] Card Reader Mounting

Plate x 1
[2] Card Reader Relay

Unit x 1
[3] Connector Cover1 x 1
[4] Connector Cover2 X 1
[5] Card Reader External

Relay Harness X 1
[6] Connector Case X 2
[7] Cord Guide X 1
[8] PCB Spacer X 1
[10] Screw
(RS tight; M4x8) X 1
[12] Screw
(Bindeing; M4x20) X 1
[13] Screw
(TP; M3x6) X 1
The Copy Card Reader Attachment is required for the installation of the equipment.

Copy Card Reader-F1
[1] Card Reader x 1
[2] Screw (RS tight;

M4X10) X 1
[3] Toothed washer x 1
F-9-203
[2] : Not used with the Upright Control Panel.
[11] Screw
(Bindeing; M3x6) X 1
F-9-204
[1], [9], [10] : Not used with the Flat Control Panel.
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2
9-79
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure
9-80

CAUTION:
To install this equipment, refer to the Table of options combination
After Card Reader is installed, get in Service Mode(Level 1) with this equipment:
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD; and then enter the card number to use.
If the card number fails to be entered, the card will not be recognized even if the card
is inserted.
1) Push the [A] part, and open the HDD Cover.
[A]
F-9-205
F-9-206
9-80
9-81
4) Remove 2 Screws. (Removed screws will be reused at, step 10).)
2 Screws (Removed screws will be reused at step 16).)
x2
x2
F-9-209
F-9-207
5) Hold the handle, and remove the Main Controller 1.

3) Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable.
Handle
x2
USB Cable
Control Panel Cable
F-9-210
F-9-208
9-81
CAUTION:
9-82
7) Remove 1 screw, and install the PCB Spacer. (Never reuse the removed screw.)
Place the removed Main Controller 1 so that the protruding fan.

Reason: Because the fan is protruded, it might be damaged when placing it diagonally.
PCB Spacer
F-9-211
6) Remove the Blindfold Cover. (Never reuse the removed Blindfold Cover.)
F-9-213
Face Cover
x2
F-9-212
9-82
9-83
8) Install the Card Reader Relay Unit.
10) Press 2 Lock Levers down to push the Main Controller 1 and secure.
2 Screws (Install the screws, which were removed at step 6) in order of 1.)
2 Screws (Removed screws at step 4): Install in order of bottom and top.)
1 Screw (Binding; M3x6)

CAUTION:
1 Connector
Keep the order of steps 1 thru 4 shown in the figure since there is the case that a
connector of the Main Controller 1 is not connected.
Card Reader
Relay Unit
x3
x2
Lock
Lever
F-9-214
9) Release 2 Lock Levers in the arrow direction, and push the Main Controller 1 all the way in
F-9-216
evenly with both hands.

11) Install the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable.
CAUTION:
12) Remove the 1 Screw. (Removed screw will be used at step 15).)
Install the Main Controller 1 without pinching cables.
x2
Lock
Lever
F-9-215
F-9-217
9-83
9-84
13) Install the Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness.
15) Install the Connector Cover.
1 Connector
1 Screw (reuse the screw removed at step 12).)
F-9-220
F-9-218
14) Install the Connector Cover into the Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness.
16) Put the Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness into the Main Controller Right Cover
Unit, and install.
CAUTION:
2 Screws (reuse the screws removed at step 2).)
Install it so that the Tie-wrap of the Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness can be
inside of the Connector Cover.
x2
Main Controller
Right Cover Unit
Card Reader External
Relay Wire Harness

Relay Wire Harness
F-9-221
Connector Cover
17) Close the HDD Cover.

F-9-219
9-84
18) Remove the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit, and change the position of the cable.
9-85
21) Install the Card Reader.
1 screw
19) Install the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit.
< In the case of the Upright Control Panel model >
1 Screw
21-1) Install the Card Reader Mounting Plate to the Card Reader.
1 Toothed washer
Lower Cover
F-9-222
20) Remove the short connector in the Card Reader. (Never reuse the removed short
F-9-224
connector.)
21-2) Install the Card Reader Unit assembled at step 21-1).

1 Screw (TP; M4 x 12)
F-9-223
F-9-225
9-85
< In the case of the Multi-drawer Paper Deck installed >

CAUTION:
Install it without pinching the Interface Cable of the Multi-drawer Paper Deck.
9-86
NOTE:
Illustrations for steps 22) and 23) use illustrations of the Upright Control Panel model
but procedures are same.
22) Connect the connectors of the Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness and the Card
Reader Unit.
Card Reader
Card Reader Unit.

Relay Wire Harness
Interface Cable
F-9-226
< In the case of the Flat Control Panel Model >
F-9-228
< In the case of the Multi-drawer Paper Deck installed >
21-1) Install the Card Reader.

1 Toothed washer
CAUTION:
IInstall it Like a figure the Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness of the Interface
Cable of the Multi-drawer Paper Deck.

Relay Wire Harness
Interface Cable
F-9-227
F-9-229
9-86
23) Install the Connector Case.
9-87
25) Remove the Cord Guide, and put on a host machine.
CAUTION:
Install so that the Tie-wrap and the Loop of the Card Reader External Relay Wire
Harness can be inside of the Connector Case.
Tie-wrap
Tie-wrap
F-9-232
26) Put the Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness into the Cord Guide, and install the
cover of the Cord Guide.
< In the case of the Upright Control Panel >

F-9-230
24) Remove the Cord Guide Cover.

Cord Guide
HDD Cover
Relay Wire Harness
F-9-233
F-9-231
9-87
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Setting After Installation
9-88
Setting After Installation
< In the case of the Flat Control Panel >
1) Check that Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > OPTION > ACC > CR-TYPE is "0".
NOTE:
The number of card (number of department) can be changed if a request arises from a
user. Make this setting before the step 3).
Cord Guide
Change the setting value in Service Mode (Level2) > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW >
CARD-RNG.
To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
After that, go through the procedure from step 2).
F-9-234
2) Use Service Mode to enter the minimum card number to be used by a user (1 to 2001).
Service Mode (Level 1) : COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD
CAUTION:
Install carefully so that the Ferrite Core of the Card Reader External Relay Wire
Harness does not interfere when opening/closing the HDD Cover.
NOTE:
1000 cards from the inputted number can be used.
3) To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Ferrite Core
4) Insert the card with the registered card No. and make sure that it is in standby.
Ferrite Core
NOTE:
After setting, if a request arises from a user and changing the number of card (number
of department), make a following setting. In that case, the current counter information
by department will be reset.
Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness
Card Reader External Relay Wire Harness

F-9-235
Execute in Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CARD.
Specify the value in Service Mode (level 2) > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CARDRNG.
To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
After that, go through the procedure from step 2).
27) Connect the Power Plug into the outlet.

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Setting After Installation
9-88
Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Checking the Contents
Voice Opearion Kit-C2
9-89
[10] Cable Face Seal X 1
[11] Screw
[13] Screw
[14] Support Plate X 1
[12] Card Spacer X 1

To use the equipment, the Color Image Reader is required.
Refer to "Table of options combination" when installing this equipment before operation.

[1] Speaker Unit X 1
[4] Ring Core X 2
[2] Voice Guidance Board

Unit X 1
[5] Ring Core X 1
[3] DVI Cable X 1
DO not use if included
[15] Screw
(Binding; M4x6) X 1
[16] Screw
[6] Cord Guide X 7
Use 5 of them
F-9-237
[7] Wire Saddle X 3
[8] Screw (Binding; M4x20)

X2
< CD/Guides >

Voice Guidance Kit User Guide
Voice Operation Kit User Guide
Voice Operation Quick Reference Guide
Voice Guidance Guide CD
Voice Operation Kit Manual CD
FCC/IC Sheet
F-9-236
Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Checking the Contents
9-89
Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure
9-90

NOTE:
Explained is the installation method for Upright Control Panel; however, procedure is
the same for Flat Control Panel.
1) Press the [A] area and open the HDD Cover.
[A]
F-9-239
F-9-238
x2
F-9-240
9-90
9-91
CAUTION:
3) Disconnect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable.
Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB on flat surface.

Reason: Since the fan protrudes, if it is placed at a tilt, it may be damaged.
x2
USB Cable
Control Panel Cable
F-9-243
F-9-241
4) Remove the 2 Screws. (Removed screw will be used in step 9).)

5) Hold the handle and remove the Main Controller PCB 1.
x2
Handle
F-9-244
F-9-242
9-91
9-92
CAUTION:
6) Remove the Voice Operation Board Support Plate from the Main Controller PCB 1.
Be careful not to make the cables stuck and install the Main Controller PCB 1.
2 Screws (The removed 2 screws will be used in step 7).)
x2
8) Release the 2 Lock Levers in the direction of the arrow and push Main Controller PCB 1
evenly until it stops with both hands.
Lock
Lever
F-9-245
7) Install the Voice Operation Board Unit to the Main Controller PCB 1.
1 Connector
4 Screws (2 screws removed in step 6)
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
F-9-247
NOTE:
Check that the connector is firmly connected.
x4
Connector
F-9-246
9-92
9-93
9) Tilt the 2 Lock Levers and push the Main Controller PCB 1 further to secure it.
11) Remove the Connector Cover from the Main Controller Right Cover Unit.
2 Screws (screw removed in step 4): install the bottom one first and the upper one.)
Claw in 1 place
Protrusions in 2 places
CAUTION:
Protrusion
x2
Claw
Protrusion
Connector Cover
F-9-249
Lock
Lever
12) Install the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. (2 screws)
F-9-248
13) Remove the 2 rubber caps from the Right Upper Cover 1.
10) Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable.
F-9-250
9-93
9-94
14) Remove the Speaker Unit (Lower) from the Speaker Unit.
16) Align the cut-off with the stay and install the Speaker Unit (upper).
2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 16).)
2 Screws (The screw removed in step 14).)
x2
Speaker Unit
(Lower)
x2
Stay
F-9-251
Cut-off
15) Install the Speaker Unit (Lower).
F-9-253
2 Screws (Binding; M4x20)

17) Remove the cover of the 5 Cord Guides.
x2
F-9-254
F-9-252
9-94
18) Remove the backing paper and install the cord guides in the indicated 5 positions.
9-95
20) Connect the DVI Cable to the Voice Operation Board Unit and the Speaker Unit.
F-9-255
F-9-257
19) Attach the Ring Cores to the both ends of the DVI Cable, and remove the cap.
21) Put the DVI Cable through the Cord Guides, and attach the Cord Guide Covers.
Ring Cores
DVI Cable
Cap
F-9-256
F-9-258

23) Turn ON the Main Power Switch.
9-95
Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Operation Check
9-96

1) Make the following selection: [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] >
[Voice Navigation Settings] > [Use Voice Navigation], and check that [ON] is set.
2) Make the following selection; [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] >
[Voice Navigation Settings] > [Voice Navigation at Startup], and check that [Select Mode at
Startup] is set.
3) Check that [Tune Microphone] is displayed by making the following selection; [Settings/
Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > [Tune
Microphone].
Operation Check
< When Starting to Use >
1) Hold down the Reset Key or Voice Recognition button for more than 3 seconds.
2) With [Voice Navigation] on the Control Panel Screen, select one of [Manual + Vocal Mode /
Vocal Mode / Manual Mode], and press the OK key.
3) When the display on the Panel Screen is framed in red, the Voice Operation Kit becomes
available.
NOTE:
In case [Manual Mode] is selected in <Voice Navigation>, nothing will happen by
pressing the Voice Recognition button.
In case the Voice Operation Kit fails to operate, check the following.
Make the following selection; Service Mode(Level 1) > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION,
and check that TTS-JA/TTS-EN and ASR-JA/ASR-EN are installed correctly.
< When Disusing >
1) Hold down the Reset Key or Voice Recognition button for more than 3 seconds.
Installation > Voice Opearion Kit-C2 > Operation Check
9-96
Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
Voice Guidance Kit-F2
[10] Screw
[11] Screw
[13] Support Plate X 1
[14] Cable Face Seal X 1
9-97
[12] Card Spacer X 1

Color Image Reader is necessary to operate this equipment.
Refer to "Table of options combination" when installing this equipment before operation.

[1] Speaker Unit (Upper)
X1
[2] Speaker Unit (Lower)

X1
[3] Voice Guidance Board

Unit X 1
F-9-260
[4] Speaker Cable X 1
[5] Cord Guide X 7
< CD/Guides >
[6] Ring Core X 2
Voice Guidance Kit Users Guide
Use 4 of them
Voice Guidance Users Guid CD

FCC/IC sheet

[7] Screw
(Binding; M4x6) X 1
[8] Screw

Use 2 of them
F-9-259
Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
9-97
Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure
9-98
x2
F-9-263
F-9-261
NOTE:
Explained is the installation method for Upright Control Panel; however, procedure is
the same for Flat Control Panel.
x2
USB Cable
Control Panel Cable
F-9-264
[A]
F-9-262
9-98
4) Remove the 2 screws (Removed screws will be reused at, step 12).)
9-99
x2
Handle
F-9-267
6) Remove the Voice Operation Board Support Plate from Main Controller PCB 1.
F-9-265
2 Screws (the removed screws are used in step 7).)
CAUTION:
x2
F-9-268
.
F-9-266
9-99
9-100
7) Install the Voice Guidance Board.

1 Connector
4 Screws (the 2 screws removed in step 6) and the 2 screws (TP; M3x6) included in the
package.)
Lock
Lever
NOTE:
Check that the connector is in contact with the base.
x4
F-9-270
CAUTION:
Connector
F-9-269
CAUTION:
Be careful not to make the cables stuck and install the Main Controller PCB 1.
x2
Lock
Lever
F-9-271
9-100
9-101
14) Install the (Lower) Speaker Unit.

11) Remove the Connector Cover from the Main Controller Right Cover Unit.
1 Claw
x2
2 Protrusions
Protrusions
Claw
Protrusions
F-9-274
Connector Cover
15) Install the (Upper) Speaker Unit.

F-9-272
12) Install the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. (2 screws)
13) Remove the 2 Rubber Caps from Right Upper Cover 1.
F-9-275
F-9-273
9-101
16) Remove the Cord Guide Cover.
9-102
18) Install the 2 Ferrite Cores to both edges of the Speaker Cable.
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the Ferrite Core within 50mm from the edge of the Speaker Cable.
F-9-276
17) Remove the Peel-Off Sheet to attach the Cord Guide to the position as shown in the
figure.
50mm
F-9-278
F-9-277
F-9-279
9-102
19) Insert the Speaker Cable to the Voice Guidance Board Unit and the (Upper) Speaker
Unit.
9-103
NOTE:
If the Upright control Panel is not installed, be sure to take up slack of the Speaker
Cabel at [B] area by adjusting its lenght at [A] area.
[A]
[A]
[B]
F-9-280
20) Put the Speaker Cable through the Cord Guide and install the Cord Guide Cover.

22) Turn ON the Main Power Switch.
Cord Guide Cover
F-9-281
9-103
Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Operation Check
9-104

1) [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > and
make sure that [Use Voice Navigation] is [ON].
2) [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > and
make sure that [Voice Guide from Speakers] is displayed.
Operation Check
< When Starting to Use >
1) Press reset key 3 secs or more.
2) Press [Main Menu] in Control Panel.
3) If the display in panel screen is boxed with red frame, Voice Guidance Kit is available.
If Voice Guidance Kit doesnt properly operate, check the below.
Make the following selection; Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION,
and check that TTS-JA/TTS-EN and ASR-JA/ASR-EN are installed correctly.
< When Disusing >
1) Hold down the Reset Key or Voice Recognition button for more than 3 seconds
Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Operation Check
9-104
Installation > Additional Memory Type D (512MB) > Installation Procedure
Additional Memory Type D (512MB)
9-105

[1] Expansion RAM x 1
F-9-283
F-9-282

2 Screws (Rmoved screws is step 8) to used.)
1) Check the memory capacity.

Service Mode(Level 1) > COPIER > DISAPLAY > ACC-STS > RAM
2) Exit the Service Mode.
x2

F-9-284
9-105
2) Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable, and release the 2 Lock Levers.
9-106
4) Install the Expansion RAM on Main Controller PCB 2.

CAUTION:
When installing the Expansion RAM, be careful not to touch the plate..
Reader Communication Cable
Lock Lever
F-9-285
3) Remove the Main Controller PCB 2 while holding the grip.

F-9-287
5) Turn over the 2 Lock Levers, and push in and secure the Main Controller PCB 2.
x2
CAUTION:
Install it without pinching the Cables of the Main Controller PCB 2.
Grip
F-9-286
Lock
Lever
F-9-288
9-106
Installation > Additional Memory Type D (512MB) > Checking After Installation
9-107
6) Turn over the 2 Lock Levers, push the Main Controller 2 in and fix it.
CAUTION:
Reliable work in order from Figure 1 to 4 should be done in case of no connection
regarding Main Controller PCB 2.
x2
Lock
Lever
F-9-289
7) Connect the Reader Communication Cable.

8) Install the Box Left Cover(2 screws).

1) After the Expansion RAM is installed, check that the memory capacity is added.
Service Mode(Level 1) > COPIER > DISAPLAY > ACC-STS > RAM
2) Exit the Service Mode.
Installation > Additional Memory Type D (512MB) > Checking After Installation
9-107
Installation > Reader Heater Unit > Installation Procedule
Reader Heater Unit
9-108
Checking the Contents (Asia only)

Reader Heater Unit-G1
[1] Reader Heater X 1
[2] Flat Screw (M4x4) X 4
[3] Heater Sheet X 1sheet
Use 3 of them
Binding screw can also

be used.
F-9-291
F-9-290
Checking the Parts to be Installed (Except for Asia)
Installation Procedule
1) Open the DADF.
Each parts of the Reader Heater Unit are provided as service parts, order as necessary to
prepare parts below.
NO.
Parts name
Parts Number.
Q'ty
[1]
Reader Heater (200V)
FK2-7164-000
1 pc
[2]
Flat Screw (M4 x4)
XA9-1956-000
4 pc
[3]
Heater Sheet
FC8-6060-000
1 sheet
T-9-4

F-9-292
9-108
2) Remove the right retainer cover.
9-109
4) Remove the copy board glass.
2 Screws
CAUTION:
When removing the copyboard glass, be sure not to get your fingers touched with the
glass surface or the backside of the white plate.
x2
In case the glass is soiled, clean it with lint-free paper.
F-9-293
3) Remove the DF cable cover.

2 Screws
F-9-295
x2
F-9-294
F-9-296
9-109
5) Align the 5 heater sheets in the marking line and put them on.
9-110
7) Pass the connector under the scanner rail.

CAUTION:
Marking Line
Do not scratch surface of the wire and the Scanner Rail.
Wire
Scanner Rail
F-9-297
6) Install the reader heater.

4 Screws (Flat-head; M4 x 4)
F-9-299
(*Binding screw can also be used.)

8) Loosen the screw and shift the harness guide in the direction of the arrow to make a space
CAUTION:
[A] to pass the harness.
Do not scratch the surface of the Guide Shaft.
Hole
[A]
x4
Guide Shaft
F-9-298
Screw
F-9-300
9-110
9) Put the harness along the claws of FFC guide in the 4 places.
9-111
11) Fix the harness with 2 edge saddles.
NOTE:
Make sure to keep the harness tightly put.
Claw of the FFC Guide
Claw of the FFC Guide
x4
Sheet
F-9-303
NOTE:
Check the sheet position.
F-9-301
10) Release the wire saddle and connect the connector.

Wire Saddle
Sheet
F-9-302
Sheet
F-9-304
9-111
9-112
12) Aligning with the boss, tighten the screw that has been loosened in step 8). (2 Screws)
13) Install the removed cover.

Copy board glass
DF cable cover (2 Screws)
Right retainer cover (2 Screws)
14) Clouse the DADF.

15) Turn ON the environment switch.
9-112
Installation > Cassette Heater Unit > Installation Procedule
9-113
Checking the Contents (EUR only)

Cassette Heater Unit-38
[1] Cassette Heater Unit
X1
[2] Screw
(RS tightening: M4x8)
X2
F-9-305
Checking the Parts to be Installed (AUS only)

Prepare the following parts because each part of the Cassette Heater Unit is assigned as
F-9-306
service part.
NO
[1]
[2]
Parts name
Screw (RS tightening; M4x8)
Parts Nanumber
FM3-4855-000
XB3-6400-805
Q'ty
1pc
2pc
T-9-5
2) Pull out the Left Deck to remove.

2 Screws

x2
F-9-307
9-113
3) Put the 2 Rails in.
9-114
F-9-308
F-9-310
4) Pull out the Right Deck to remove the Left Deck in the same way.
8) Remove the Connector Cover.
1 Claw
2 Projections
6) Pull out Cassette 3 to remove.

4 Screws
Claw
x4
Projection
F-9-311
F-9-309
9-114
9) Remove tapes on the Cassette Heater Unit.
9-115
12) Install the Cassette Heater Unit.

2 Screws (RS tightening; M4x8)
10) Fit the projections of the Cassette Heater Unit into the holes of the Host Machine.
x2
Hole
Projection
Projection
F-9-314
F-9-312
13) Installt the Connector.
11) Fit the holes of the Cassette Heater Unit with the bosses of the Host Machine.
CAUTION:
When fitting the Cassette Heater Unit with the bosses, be sure to support the bottom
side with your hand; otherwise, the Unit can fall because the Unit goes off from the
projections.
Connector
F-9-315
Projection
Hole
Projection
14) Install the Connector Cover.
Hole
F-9-313
9-115
15) Pull out the Rails at the installation area of Cassette 3.
20) After having installed Right Deck with 2 screws,close the Right Deck.
16) Fit the 4 pins on the Rails with the grooves of Cassette 3 to place Cassette 3 over the
21) After having installed Left Deck with 2 screws,close the Left Deck.
Rails.
9-116

23) Turn on the environment switch.
Pins
F-9-316
17) After having installed Cassette 3 with 4 screws,close Cassette 3.
18) Pull out the Rails at the installation area of the Right Deck.
19) Fit the 4 pins on the Rails with the grooves of the Right Deck to place the Right Deck over
the Rails.
Pin
F-9-317
9-116
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1

Checking Bundled Components
NOTE:
Every components of the paper deck heater unit (paper deck heater unit-A1)
are supplied as service parts, so have the following parts on hand.
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[12]
[8]
[9]
[11]
[2]
9-117
NO.
[1]
Parts name
Heater Unit (100V)
Parts Number.
FG6-9650-000
Q'ty
1pc.
[2]
Heater Unit (230V)

AC input connector (100V)
FG6-9651-000
FG6-1116-000
1pc.
1pc.
[3]
AC input connector (230V)

Relay harness unit
FG6-1117-000
FG6-2957-000
1pc.
1pc.
[4]
AC cord (100V)
FK3-0630-000
1pc.
[5]
AC cord (230V)
Screw with toothed washer
FK3-0631-000
XB2-7400-607
1pc.
3pcs.
[6]
Cable protection bushing
WT2-5098-000
1pc.
[7]
Power supply label (100V)
FS6-8478-000
1pc.
[8]
Power supply label (230V)

RS-tight screw (M4x8)
FS6-8725-000
XB1-2400-409
1pc.
2pcs.
[9]
Binding screw (M4x4)
XB1-2400-409
1pc.
[10]
Wire saddle
WT2-5730-000
3pcs.
[11]
Cord mount
FC7-5473-000
1pc.
[12]
Screw with flat spring
XB2-8401-007
1pc.
[5]

[5]
[7]
1) Open the Switch Cover and turn OFF the main power switch.
2) Check that both the Control Panel display and the main power lamp are turned off, and
then disconnect the power plug.
[10]
CAUTION:
F-9-318
When installing the heater to the paper deck, take the following precautions.
a. The AC power plug of the host machine must have been removed from the outlet.
b. Install the heater after installing the host machine and paper deck.
c. Use correct screws (length and diameters) at correct positions.
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
9-117
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure
9-118
3) Remove three screws, and then detach the right cover of the paper deck to the direction of
the arrow shown.
1) Disconnect the connector of the paper deck from the host machine.
x3
F-9-321
4) Remove six screws(M3x8: 2pcs, M4x8: 4pcs.), and then detech the rear cover of the paper
F-9-319
2) Release the paper deck from the host machine, and then press down the latch plate of the
deck.
paper deck housing with your finger to open the housing.
x6
F-9-322
F-9-320
9-118
5) Remove three screws and a connector, and then detach the front-upper cover.
9-119
7) Atach the supplied cable protection bushing into the hole on the top panel of the paper
deck.
x3
x1
F-9-323
F-9-325
6) Remove two screws, and then detach the top cover.
x2
F-9-324
9-119
8) Place the heater unit under the top panel of the paper deck, and then take the connector
out from the hole on the top plate.
11)
9-120
Remove screw to remove the blind plate from the power core mount of the papar
deck. (Removed blindfold plate and screw are no longer reused.)
9) Insert two hooks of the heater unit into the holes on the top plate of the paper deck, and
then secure the heater unit to the main body of the paper deck using a screw with toothed
washer.
x1
x1
F-9-326
10)
Attach the heater connector to the panel mount.
F-9-328
12)
Install the supplied AC input connector in two steps ([A] > [B]).
[B]
[A]
F-9-327
x1
F-9-329
9-120
9
13)
Secure the ground cable using the screw with toothed washer.
17)
9-121
Connect the connector at one end of the AC cord to the power cord mount of the
heater.
18)
Remove two screws at the lower right of the back of the host machine to remove the
blind plate. (Removed blindfold plate and screw are no longer reused.)
x1
x2
F-9-330
14)
Using two RS-tight screws (M4X8), install the relay hareness unit to the rear side
panel of the paper deck.

15)
Insert the bind locks of the cable ties in the holes (at [A] shown below) in the rear side
panel to secure the relay harness.

16)
Connect the connector at both ends of the relay harness unit to the heater connector
F-9-332
and AC power connector respectively.
x2
x2
[A]
F-9-331
9-121
9
19)
Insert the AC cord into the hole of the cord mount, and then secure the ground cable
to the cord mount using a screw with toothed washer. Secure the AC cord to the cord
mount using a screw with flat spring.
9-122
20)
Connect the connector of the AC cord to the connector on the host machine.
21)
Hang the left-hand hook, and then secure the cord mount to the host machine using
two binding screws (M4X4).
x2
x1
x2
F-9-334
22)
Install the rear-cover of the host machine using four screws.
x4
F-9-333
F-9-335
9-122
9
23)
Reatach the exterior covers of the paper deck in the following sequence;
[1] Top cover (take care not to have the cables caught) [M4x8: 2pcs.]
26)
9-123
Fix the paper deck cable in the wire saddle and joint the connector to the host
machine.
[2] Front-upper cover (insert the connector) [M4x8: 3pcs]

[3] Rear cover [M3x8: 2pcs, M4x8: 4pcs.]
[4] Right cover [M4x8: 3pcs.]
24)
Close the deck compartment. Manually slide the paper deck to the left place in aside
of the host machine.
25)
Stick the power supply label on the rear panel of the paper deck.
F-9-337
27)
Peel off the blindfold seal at the rear side of the host machine and fit the reuse band
of the AC cable as shown.
F-9-336
F-9-338
9-123
9
28)
Peel off the 3 blindfold seal at the rear side and right side of the host machine, then fit
the 3 wire saddles as shown.

Wire the AC cable as shown in the figure and joint the AC connector to the power cord
mount of the heater.
9-124
CAUTION:
To ensure smooth connection of the heater power connectors, explain to the user that
any obstacle that can prevent the paper deck from opening should not be placed in the
hatched area.
[1]: Host machine
[2]: Paper deck
[A]: Front
x2
[1]
[A]
[2]
F-9-340
x1
F-9-339
9-124
9-125
9-125
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit > Installation Procedule
Paper Deck Heater Unit

Checking the Parts to be Installed
Each part of the Paper Deck Heater Unit for the Paper Deck is supplied as a service part, so
prepare the following parts.
Also, use the appropriate Paper Deck Heater Unit for each country.
[1] Heater Unit x 1
9-126
[2] Middle Deck Cassette

Heater Relay Harness
(750mm) x 1
[3] Lower Deck Cassette

Heater Relay Harness
(405mm) x 1
NOTE:
Following explains installation of the Cassette Heater Unit to the Middle Deck. Same
procedure applies to installation of the Cassette Heater Unit to the Lower Deck.
1) Remove the Deck Rear Right Cover.

[4] Screw
(W SEMS ; M4 x 8) x 1
[5] Wire Saddle

(Small) x 6
8 Screws
[6] Wire Saddle
(Large) x 6
F-9-341
NO.
[1]
Parts name
Parts Number.
Q'ty
Heater Unit (100V)
FM3-3770-000
1 pc
Heater Unit (120V)
FM3-3771-000
1 pc
Heater Unit (230V)
FM3-3772-000
1 pc
[2]
Middle Deck Cassette Heater Relay Harness
FG3-4325-000
1 pc
[3]
Lower Deck Cassette Heater Relay Harness
FG3-4326-000
1 pc
[4]
Wire Saddle (Large)
WT2-5974-000
6 pc
[5]
Wire Saddle (Small)
WT2-5973-000
3 pc
[6]
Screw (W Sems; M4 x8)
FC7-7646-000
1 pc.
x8
F-9-342
T-9-6
9-126
9
2) Remove the Deck Upper Rear Cover.
9-127
4) Open the Middle Deck manually and remove the screw securing the Foreign Matter Sensor
Bracket.
F-9-343
3) Remove the Deck Right Cover.
F-9-345
6 Screws
2 Protrusions
5) While the Sensor Harness is connected, remove the Foreign Matter Sensor Bracket and
the Foreign Matter Sensor Flag.
Bracket
Flag
x6
Protrusion
F-9-346
F-9-344
9-127
6) Fit the 3 claws of the Cassette Heater Unit to the 3 installation holes to install.
9-128
8) Put the Foreign Matter Sensor Flag and the Foreign Matter Sensor Bracket back to the
original position to install.
1 Screw
CAUTION:
Check that the sensor and the connector are securely connected and attached to the
base (check that they are not free).
F-9-347
7) Secure the Cassette Heater Unit with the screw (W SEMS; M4x8).
F-9-349
9) Put the Cassette Heater Harness through the Square Bush at the lower side.
F-9-348
F-9-350
9-128
10) Secure the Cassette Heater Harness to the Wire Saddle and close the Middle Deck.
9-129
NOTE:
When installing the Paper Deck Heater Unit to the Lower Deck, install the 3 (large) Wire
Saddles.
Do not install the (large) Wire Saddles when installing an Option Warm Breeze Heater
Unit at the same time or in the case that the Heater Unit has been already installed.
F-9-351
11) Install the 3 (small) Wire Saddles and the 6 (large) Wire Saddles.
NOTE:
When installing an Option Warm Breeze Heater Unit at the same time or in the case
that the Warm Breeze Heater Unit has been already installed, replace the upper 3 Wire
Saddles with the (large) Wire Saddles.
F-9-353
12) Open the Wire Saddle to take the AC Distribution PCB Harness out.
F-9-354
F-9-352
9-129
9-130
NOTE:
When installing the Paper Deck Heater Unit to the Lower Deck, open the 8 Wire
Saddles.
13) Remove the AC Distribution PCB Cover.

2 Screws
x2
F-9-355
F-9-357
14) Open the 11 Wire Saddles.

15) Connect the 2-pin connector side of the Middle Deck Cassette Heater Relay Harness to
the Cassette Heater Harness.
F-9-356
F-9-358
9-130
16) Secure the Middle Deck Cassette Heater Relay Harness with the 20 Clamps.
9-131
18) Install the AC Distribution PCB Cover(2 Screws).

19) Secure the AC Distribution PCB Harness with the Wire Saddle.
NOTE:
When installing the Paper Deck Heater Unit to the Lower Deck, secure the Lower Deck
Cassette Heater Relay Harness with the 11 Wire Saddles.
20) Install the Deck Right Cover(6 Screws, 2 Protrusions).

21) Install the Deck Upper Rear Cover.
22) Install the Deck Rear Right Cover(8 Screws).
23) Turn on the Environment switch.
F-9-359
17) Install the 5-pin connector side of the Middle Deck Cassette Heater Relay Harness to
CN4 on the AC Distribution PCB.
NOTE:
When installing the Paper Deck Heater Unit to the Lower Deck, install the 4-pin
connector side of the Lower Deck Cassette Heater Relay Harness to CN3 on the SC
Distribution PCB.
F-9-360
9-131
Installation > Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit
NO.

Each part of the Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit for the Paper Deck is supplied as
a service part, so prepare the following parts. Also, use the appropriate Paper Deck Warm
Breeze Heater Unit for each country.
[1] Warm Breeze Heater

Unit x 1
[2] Air Heater PCB x 1
[3] Upper Deck

Air Heater Harness
(1110mm) x 1
Parts name
Parts Number
(100/120V)
9-132
Parts Number
(200/230V)
Q'ty
[1]
Warm Breeze Heater Unit
FM4-1832-000
FM4-1850-000
1 pc.
[2]
Air Heater PCB
FC3-4279-000
FC3-4279-000
1 pc.
[3]
Upper Deck Air Heater Harness (110mm)
FC3-4327-000
FC3-4327-000
1 pc.
[4]
Middle Deck Air Heater Harness (790mm) FC3-4328-000
FC3-4328-000
1 pc.
[5]
Lower Deck Air Heater Harness (435mm)
FC3-4329-000
1 pc.
FC3-4329-000
[6]
PCB Support
VT2-0006-006
VT2-0006-006
2 pc.
[7]
Wire Saddle
WT2-5974-000
WT2-5974-000
6 pc.
[8]
Wire Saddle
WT2-5973-000
WT2-5973-000
6 pc.
[9]
Screw (RS tightening; M4x8)
4A3-3259-000
4A3-3259-000
2 pc.
XB2-4300-605
XB2-4300-605
2 pc.
[10] Screw (W SEMS; M3x6)
T-9-7
[4] Middle Deck

Air Heater Harness
(790mm) x 1
[5] Lower Deck

Air Heater Harness
(435mm) x 1
[6] PCB Support x 2

[7] Wire Saddle (Small)

x6
[8] Wire Saddle (Large)

x6
[9] Screw
(RS tightening; M4x8) x 2
[10] Screw
(W SEM; M3 x 6) x 2
F-9-361
Installation > Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
9-132
Installation > Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit > Installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit
Installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit
9-133
3) Open the Wire Saddle and take the Air Heater AC Harness out, and then close the Wire
NOTE:
Following explains installation of the Heater Unit to the Upper Deck. Same procedure
applies to installation of the Heater Unit to the Middle Deck and the Lower Deck except
some steps.
Saddle. (Air Heater AC Harness is used in step 5).)
1) Remove the Deck Rear Right Cover of the Paper Deck.

8 Screws
2 Protrusions
F-9-364
4) Install the Air Heater PCB.

2 Screws (W SEMS; M3x6)
x8
x2
Protrusion
F-9-362
2) Install the 2 PCB Supports.
F-9-365
F-9-363
9-133
5) Install the Air Heater AC Harness (removed in step 3)) to CN4 on the Air Heater PCB.
9-134
7) Take the AC Distribution PCB out.

1 Wire saddle
F-9-366
F-9-368
6) Install the 6 (small) Wire Saddles and the 6 (large) Wire Saddles.
8) Remove the AC Distribution PCB Cover.
NOTE:
When installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Middle Deck, use the 6 (large) Wire
Saddles only. The 6 (small) Wire Saddles are not used.
When installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Lowe Deck, use the 6 (small) Wire
Saddles and the 6 (large) Wire Saddles.
2 Screws
x2
F-9-369
F-9-367
9-134
9) Open the 16 Wire Saddles.
9-135
11) Secure the Upper Deck Air Heater Harness with the 28 Wire Saddles.
NOTE:
When installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Middle Deck, open the 13 Wire
Saddles.
When installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Lower Deck, open the 9 Wire
Saddles.
NOTE:
When installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Middle Deck, secure the Middle Deck
Air Heater Harness with the19 Wire Saddles.
When installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Lowe Deck, secure the Lower Deck
Air Heater Harness with the 9 Wire Saddles.
F-9-370
F-9-372
10) Install the 4-pin connector side of the Upper Deck Air Heater Harness to CN3 on the Air
Heater PCB.
F-9-371
9-135
12) Install the 6-pin connector side of the Upper Deck Air Heater Harness to CN8 on the AC
Distribution PCB.
9-136
15) Open the Wire Saddle and take Harness 1 (4-pin connector) and Harness 2 (8-pin
connector) out, and then close the Wire Saddle.
NOTE:
When installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Middle Deck, install the 5-pin
connector side of the Middle Deck Air Heater Harness to CN7 on the AC Distribution PCB.
When installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Lowe Deck, install the 4-pin
connector side of the Lower Deck Air Heater Harness to CN6 on the AC Distribution PCB.
x2
Harness 2
Wire Saddle
Wire Saddle
Harness 1
CN6
CN7
F-9-374
CN8
16) Install Harness 1 (4-pin connector) to CN1 and Harness 2 (8-pin connector) to CN2 on
the Air Heater PCB.
F-9-373
x2
13) Install the AC Distribution PCB Cover.

14) Secure the AC Distribution PCB Harness with the Wire Saddle.
CN2
CN1
F-9-375
9-136
17) Bring down the Lock Lever of the Air Heater Cover to remove the Air Heater Cover.
9-137
19) Connect the Connector of the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Connector of the Upper
Deck.
2 Connectors
8 Claws
F-9-376
18) Install the Warm Breeze Heater Unit to the Upper Deck.
2 Screws (RS tightening; M4x8)
F-9-378
20) Install the Air Heater Cover.
x2
21) Install the Deck Rear Right Cover(8 Screws, 2 Protrusions).

22) Turn on the environment switch.
F-9-377
9-137
Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Outline Drawing
Document Scan Lock Kit-B1
9-138

To enable the function of "Image Data Analyzer Board", it is necessary to install the license
which comes with the product.
Be sure to ask users to install the license after the installation.
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the license after installing the Image Data Analyzer Board because
installing the license before installing the Image Data Analyzer Board causes an error.

[1] Image Data Analyzer
Board x 1
[[2] PCB Spacer x 4
[4] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 4
[5] Screw (Binding; M3x4)

x1
Use 2 of them
[3] Image Data Analyzer

Board Support Plate x 1
F-9-380
F-9-379
Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-138
Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Procedule
9-139
3) Remove the Main Controller PCB 2 while holding the grip.

2 Screws

2 Screws
x2
x2
Grip
F-9-383
4) Remove the 4 screws.
F-9-381
3 Screws (TP; M3) (The 2 of the removed screws will be used in step 6, while the remaining
2) Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable, and release the 2 Lock Levers.
screw will not be used.)

1 Screw (with Washer) (The removed screw will not be used.)
x4
With washer Screw
Reader Communication Cable
Lock Lever
F-9-382
F-9-384
9-139
5) Install the 2 PCB Spacers.
9-140
7) Install the Image Analysis Board.

4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
1 Connector
Connector
x4
F-9-385
6) Install the Image Analysis Board Support Plate.
F-9-387
2 Screws (TP; M3) (The screws removed in step 4).)

8) Release the 2 Lock Levers in the direction of the arrows, and uniformly push in the Main
Controller PCB 2 with both hands until it stops.
CAUTION:
x3
Install the Main Controller PCB 2 while paying attention not to trap cables.
Binding
F-9-386
Lock
Lever
F-9-388
9-140
Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Checking after Installation
9-141
9) Turn over the 2 Lock Levers, and push in and secure the Main Controller PCB 2.
2 Screws (Install them in the order from (3) to (4).)
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform the work in the order from (1) to (4) in the figure because the
connector of the Main Controller 2 may not be connected.
x2
Lock
Lever
F-9-389
10) Connect the Reader Communication Cable.

11) Install the Box Left Cover. (2 screws)
Checking after Installation

1) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet.
2)Turn ON the main power switch.
3) Ask users to install license.
4) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
5) Press the counter check key on the Control Panel.
6) Press [Check Device Configuration] key.
7) Check that [Image Data Analyzer Board] is displayed in the options column.
Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Checking after Installation
9-141
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1
Copy Control Interface KIT-A1

[1] CC-VI Cable X 1
9-142
[2] D-SUB Support Plate
X1
[3] Washer (large) X 2
Serial Interface Kit-K1 and Control Interface Kit-A1 cannot be used concurrently.

Serial Intreface KIT-K1
[1] Serial RS Conversion
Board X 1
[2] IA Harness Protection

Sheet X 1
[3] RS Conversion
Cable X 1
[4] Hexagonal Screw X 2
[5] Washer X 2
[6] PCB Spacer X 1
[4] Hexagonal Screw (Washer (Small) ,Nut) X 2
Do not use a Nut
[5] IA Harness Protection
Sheet X 1
F-9-391

F-9-390
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
9-142
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Removing the Main Controller PCB 1
9-143

2 Screws
x2
F-9-394
F-9-392
x2
USB Cable
Control Panel Cable
[A]
F-9-395
F-9-393
9-143
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Removing the Main Controller PCB 1
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Installing the Serial Interface KIT
9-144
CAUTION:
4) Remove the 2 screws.

(The removed screw will be used in step 2 of <Installing Main Controller PCB 1>.)

x2
F-9-398
F-9-396
Installing the Serial Interface KIT

1) Remove the Face Cover from the Main Controller PCB 1. (Removed Face Cover is not
Handle
used.)
2 Screws (Removed screws are not used.)
Face Cover
x2
F-9-397
F-9-399
9-144
9-145
2) Clean the affixing side (Controller Box Frame) of the IA Harness Protection Sheet with lint-
5) Connect the RS Conversion Cable to the Serial RS Conversion Board.
free paper moistened with alcohol.

3) Affix the IA Harness Protection Sheet to the Main Controller PCB 1.
NOTE:
Because the working space is limited, use scale, etc. for cleaning.
After affixing the IA Harness Protection Sheet, be sure to press it with scale, etc. to
prevent coming off.
Screw
Affixing Side
F-9-402
6) Install the Serial RS Conversion Board.

1 Screw (which was removed in the procedure 4).)
2 Washers
2 Hexagonal Screws
1 Connector
F-9-400
4) Remove the 1 screw and install the PCB Spacer. (Removed screw is used in the procedure
6).)
F-9-403
F-9-401
9-145
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Installing the Copy Control Interface KIT
9-146
Installing the Copy Control Interface KIT
4) Put the CC-VI cable through the D-SUB Support Plate.
1) Remove the Face Cover from the Main Controller PCB 1. (Removed Face Cover is not
used.)
CAUTION:
Be sure to install the extruded side of the D-SUB Support Plate to be inside.
2 Screws (Removed screws are not used.)
Inside
Face Cover
x2
D-SUB Support Plate

CC-VI Cable
F-9-406
5) Secure the CC-VI cable to the Main Controller PCB 1.
F-9-404
2 Hexagonal Screws
2) Clean the affixing side (Controller Box Frame) of the IA Harness Protection Sheet with lint-
2 Washers (small)
2 Washers (large)
free paper moistened with alcohol.
1 Connector
3) Affix the IA Harness Protection Sheet to the Main Controller PCB 1.
CC-VI Cable
NOTE:
Because the working space is limited, use scale, etc. for cleaning.
After affixing the IA Harness Protection Sheet, be sure to press it with scale, etc. to
prevent coming off.
x2
Screw
Washers (large)
Affixing Side
Washers (small)
Hexagonal Screw
F-9-407
F-9-405
9-146
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Installing the Copy Control Interface KIT
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Installing the Main Controller PCB 1
9-147
Installing the Main Controller PCB 1
2 Screws (The screws removed in step 4 of Removing Main Controller PCB 1 : install in
CAUTION:
order from bottom to top.)
Install the Main Controller 1 without pinching cables.
CAUTION:
x2
Lock
Lever
Lock Lever
F-9-408
F-9-409

4) Main Controller Right Cover Unit (2 Screw).
6) Connect the power plug to the outlet.
9-147
Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedule > Installing the Main Controller PCB 1
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Checking the Contents > USB Device Port-A2
USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2
Do not use following parts with the machine if they are included.
[1] Case Sheet x1
[2] Case Sheet (EU) x1
(with LED indication) (without LED indication)
Points to Note at Installation
9-148
When installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer, the USB Device Port must be installed
[3] Side Seal x3
A-TYPE: 3 sheets
B-TYPE: 2 sheets
beforehand.
The Multimedia Reader/Writer cannot be used in combination with the Card Reader.
[4] Hook-and-Loop
Fastener x1

USB Device Port-A2
[1] Case Plate X 1
[[2] DUH-V3 Board X 1
[[3] Cusion X 4
F-9-411
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Instruction Sheet
China RoHS Instruction Sheet
[4] Case Sheet X 1
[5] Case Sheet X 1
(with LED indication)
(without LED indication)
[7] USB CONV Cable

X1
[8] Wire Saddle X 4
Use 3 of them
[6] DP USB Cable X 1
[9] Screw
(TP; M3x6) X 3
[10] Screw
(Binding; M4x6) X 2
F-9-410
[3], [5]: Use these when installing the Card Reader (sales company's option).
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Checking the Contents > USB Device Port-A2
9-148
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installation Outline Drawing
Check Items when Turning OFF the Power
Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2
[1] Multimedia Card
Slot X 1
[2] Card Slot X 1
9-149
Check that the main power is OFF.
[3] Card Slot X 1

2) Check that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power are turned off.

[4] USB Cable X 1
[5] Slot Holder X 1
[6] Multimedia Label

X1
[7] Screw
(TP; M3x6) X 4
F-9-413
F-9-412
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Instruction Sheet
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-149
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > Removing the Covers
Installing the USB Device Port
9-150
4) Remove the Upper Left Cover.
Removing the Covers
2 Screws
x2
2 Hinge Shafts
Front Upper Cover
Hinge Shaft
F-9-416
5) Remove the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover.

4 Screws
2 Claws
F-9-414
3) Remove the Upper Right Cover.
x4
1 Screw
x2
Ciow
F-9-417
F-9-415
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > Removing the Covers
9-150
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > In case of Upright Control Panel model
9-151
In case of Upright Control Panel model
3) Install the Case Plate.

1) Remove the Upper Middle Cover.

4 Screws
x4
x2
F-9-420
F-9-418
4) Install the DUH-V3 Board.
2) Remove the screw of the Control Panel Plate, and pull out the Control Panel Plate in the
direction of the arrow. (The removed screw will be used in step 11.)
3 Screws (TP; M3x6)

1 Connector
CAUTION:
Be sure not to pull out the Control Panel Plate toward the front too much. Wire Saddles
may fall.
x3
F-9-421
F-9-419
9-151
9-152
5) Remove the Wire Saddle installed to the rear side of the Control Panel Plate, and install it
6) Install the 3 Wire Saddles to the Control Panel Plate.
to the front side of the plate.

NOTE:
If it is difficult to remove the Wire Saddle, use a pair of needlenose pliers.
Removing the
Wire Saddle
Install the
Wire Saddle
F-9-423
7) Disconnect the USB Cable.

2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 10.)
3 Wire Saddles
1 Edge Saddle
x4
F-9-422
F-9-424
8) Close the Edge Saddle opened in step 7.
9-152
9-153
9) Put the disconnected USB Cable through the Wire Saddle on the rear side, and connect it
to the DUH-V3 Board.
10) Connect the DP USB Cable included in the package, and connect it to the DUH-V3
Board.
2 Wire Saddles
2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 7.)

7 Wire Saddles
x2
x2
F-9-425
x7
F-9-426
9-153
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > In case of Flat Control Panel model
9-154
In case of Flat Control Panel model
11) Return the Control Panel Plate to its original position.

1 Screw (Use the screw removed in step 2.)
1) Install the Case Plate.

x2
F-9-427
F-9-428
12) Install the Upper Middle Cover. (4 screws)

2) Install the DUH-V3 Board.
3 Screws (TP; M3x6)
1 Connector
x3
F-9-429
9-154
9-155
3) Move the Control Panel Plate in the direction of the arrow.
5) Remove the Wire Saddle installed to the rear side of the Control Panel Plate, and install it
1 Screw
to the front side of the plate.

NOTE:
If it is difficult to remove the Wire Saddle, use a pair of needlenose pliers..
Removing the
Wire Saddle
Install the
Wire Saddle
F-9-430
4) Remove the Flat Control Panel.

4 Screws
x4
F-9-432
F-9-431
9-155
9-156
6) Install the Wire Saddles to the Control Panel Plate.
8) Free the USB Cable from the Edge Saddle, and close the Edge Saddle.
3 Wire Saddles
F-9-435
F-9-433
9) Connect the USB Cable to the DUH-V3 Board.

7) Place the Flat Control Panel as shown in the figure, and disconnect the USB Cable.
2 Wire Saddles
2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 11.)

2 Guides
x2
x2
Guid
USB Cable
F-9-434
F-9-436
9-156
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > Installing the Covers
10) Connect the DP USB Cable included in the package, and connect it to the DUH-V3
Board.
9-157
Installing the Covers

1) Install the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover. (4 screws)
4 Wire Saddles
x4
F-9-437
11) Turn the Flat Control Panel in the direction of the arrow, and connect the DP USB Cable.
2 Guides
x2
Guid
DP USB Cable
F-9-438
12) Install the Flat Control Panel. (4 screws)
9-157
CAUTION:
9-158
NOTE:
When installing the Card Reader or Multimedia Reader/Writer simultaneously, it is
efficient to install it before performing the following procedure.
When installing, be sure to install the Toner Replacement Inner Cover while the
4 Parallel Pins of the Inner Door Link Shaft are tilted at an angle of approx. 45
degrees.
3) Install the Upper Left Cover (2 screws).

4) Front Upper Cover (2 Hinge Shafts).
Parallel Pin

6) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.
45 deg
8) Connect the USB memory to the USB Device Port and perform the operation check.
(Refer to steps of "Operation Check".)
F-9-439
When installing, be careful not to damage the 4 groundings on the upper side of the
Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Open/Close Sensor.
Toner Insertion Inlet Cover
Open/Close Sensor
and Grounding
Toner Insertion Inlet Cover

Open/Close Sensor
and Grounding
Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover

F-9-440
2) Install the Upper Middle Cover (1 screw).
9-158
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the Card Reader
Installing the Card Reader
9-159
4) After connecting the Card Reader to the DUH-V3 Board, place the cable inside the cover.

2 Hinge Shafts
Front Upper Cover
Hinge Shaft
F-9-443
5) Place the Cushions inside the Upper Left Cover.

NOTE:
Adjust the number of cushions to match the thickness of the Card Reader.
F-9-441
3) Remove the clear cover.

3 Claws
x3
Clow
F-9-444
Clow
F-9-442
9-159
6) Place the Card Reader on the Cushion.
9-160
8) Return the clear cover.

3 Claws
x3
Clow
Clow
F-9-445
7) Remove the Device Port Sheet and replace with the Case Sheet.
F-9-447
(The removed Device Port Sheet will not be used.)

9) Install the Front Upper Cover. (2 Hinge Shafts)
F-9-446
9-160
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer
Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer
9-161
4) Install the Multimedia Card Slot and the Slot Holder.

4 Screws (TP; M3x6)

2 Hinge Shafts
x4
Front Upper Cover

Hinge Shaft
Multimedia
Card Slot
Slot Holder
F-9-450
5) Connect the USB Cable.
F-9-448
3) Remove the Upper Left Cover.

2 Screws
x2
x2
F-9-451
F-9-449
9-161
6) Turn over the Upper Left Cover, remove the Card Slot from [A], and then attach the Card
Insertion Slot included in the package. (The removed Card Slot will not be used.)
9-162
7) Remove the Clear Cover and the Device Port Sheet of the Upper Left Cover.
3 Claws
2 Screws
x3
x2
[A]
Clow
Device Port
Sheet
Card Slot
[A]
Clow
x2
F-9-453
8) Affix the Multimedia Label to the Device Port Sheet as shown in the figure.
F-9-452
Multimedia Label
F-9-454
9-162
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Operation Check (USB Device Port/Multimedia Reader/Writer)
9-163
Operation Check (USB Device Port/Multimedia Reader/

Writer)
9) Install the Device Port Sheet and the Clear Cover.

3 Claws
NOTE:
Connect a USB memory device to the USB Device Port and perform the operation check.
To the Multimedia Reader/Writer, Memory Media of the SD Card, Memory Stick, and CF
Card can be connected. With one of the 3 types of Memory Media, perform the oepration
check 1 through 3.
When changing the settings upon users request, it is required to log in as a system
manager in accordance with instructions from the user administrator.
x3
1.Writing Check
Device Port
Sheet
Clow
1) Select "1" for the following Service Mode (Level 2) (Default value "0").
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > UI-MEM
2) To make the setting value effective, turn OFF/ON the main power of the Host Machine.
3) Mount the Memory Media to the Multimedia Card Reader/Writer(Check that the Mount
Clow
Mark is indicated in the bottom right.).
F-9-455
10) Return the Upper Left Cover to its original position. (2 Screws)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to trap the USB Cable.
F-9-456
11) Install the Front Upper Cover and close it (2 Hinge Shafts).
12) Connect the power plug to the outlet.
9-163
9-164
4) Make the following selection:[Scan and Store] > [Memory Media] > [Memory Media (A:)]
6) After scanning of the original is completed, press [Start Storing].

Confirm that data is stored in the media and press [Main Menu] on the Control Panel.
F-9-459
F-9-457
5) Set originals to Copyboard, and press the [Scan] button. Then, press the Start button on
the Control Panel.
F-9-458
9-164
9-165
2. Reading Check
7) Make the following selection from Main Menu: [Access Stored Files] > [Memory Media] >
[Memory Media(A:)]
F-9-461
9) Press the [Start Printing] button, and print the file. Then check that the file is printed
F-9-460
correctly.
8) Select the files stored in step 4) to 6), and then press the [Print] button.
F-9-462
9-165
9-166
3.Memory Media Removal
10) Press the [Main Menu] button on the Control Panel.
11) Press the [Mount Mark ] in the bottom right.Then, select the memory media to be
removed, and press the [Remove] button.
F-9-463
F-9-464
9-166
9-167
12) Press the [OK] button. Then, check that the Mount Mark is not indicated in the bottom
right on the Main Menu screen.
F-9-465
9-167
Installation > Combination of HDD Options
9-168
Combination of HDD Options

When installing the HDD options (5 products indicated below), refer to the pages indicated in the following table.
2.5inch/160GB HDD-G1
2.5inch/1TB HDD-L1
Removable HDD Kit-AH1
HDD Mirroring Kit-D2
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C7
CAUTION:
When using the mirroring function, be sure to install 2 HDDs of the same capacity.
The system software needs to be installed after replacing the HDD or after installing the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit.
Reference Pages in the Manual According to Product Combination:

Title
Combination of Product
Reference Pages
TYPE-1
Option HDD (1TB)
p. 9-173 to p. 9-176
TYPE-2
Standard HDD + Removable HDD Kit
p. 9-177 to p. 9-189
TYPE-3
Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit
p. 9-190 to p. 9-204
TYPE-4
Standard HDD + Option HDD (160GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
p. 9-205 to p. 9-218
TYPE-5
2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
p. 9-219 to p. 9-232
TYPE-6
Standard HDD + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
p. 9-233 to p. 9-244
TYPE-7
Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
p. 9-245 to p. 9-258
TYPE-8
Standard HDD + Option HDD (160GB) + Removable HDD Kit

+ HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
p. 9-259 to p. 9-281
TYPE-9
2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
p. 9-282 to p. 9-301
TYPE-10
Standard HDD + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
p. 9-302 to p. 9-321
TYPE-11
Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
p. 9-322 to p. 9-342
Remarks
These types correspond to "CASE8" described in Installation Procedure

included in the package of HDD Data
(In the Case of HDD Data Encryption
& Mirroring Kit-C7.)
T-9-8
Installation > Combination of HDD Options
9-168
Installation > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
*3 Only the following items are backed up.
(When the HDD has been replaced or when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been
Files in Mail Box
9-169
Mail Box Settings (mail box names, passwords, and auto erase times)
Files in Advanced Box
installed)
Before performing work that will result in the loss of data, inform the system administrator of
the inevitable loss, asking him to make a backup or export of important data items.
considerations.
[List of Data that can be backed up]
In this Installation Procedure, a series of backup or export procedures are described for
Data that can be backed up
reference.
[List of Data to be Deleted]
Data to be Deleted
Availability of
Backup
Information registered in the Address Book

Settings made from the Settings/Registration screen
Forwarding Settings
License files for MEAP applications
MEAP applications
Data saved using MEAP applications
Favorite Settings registered in the Copy and Mail Box functions
Data stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box
Scan modes registered in the Send Function
Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send
mode)
Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image
MEAP SMS (Service Management Service) password (the password will
return to its default password if it was changed)
Job logs
User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication
user authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H)
Registration information for the Network Place
Key Pair and Server Certificate
Log information for the IP address/MAC address restriction settings
Password that is protected by TPM
Encryption key that is protected by TPM
Information for Web browser settings
Quick Menu Information
User Information of the Advanced Box
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes *3
No
No
Address Book
Settings/Registration settings
Device Settings (Forwarding Settings, Address
List, Favorite Settings)
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Favorite Settings for Web browser
License files for MEAP applications

Data saved by MEAP applications
Yes
No
Data stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box
No
Yes
SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) user authentication

information
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
Reference
See the "e-Manual > Remote UI".
See the e-Manual > Web Access.

(You can select this if web browser (Option) is
installed.)
For information on downloading license files, see
the "e-Manual > MEAP".
Data saved by MEAP applications may be
able to be backed up, depending on the MEAP
application.
See the documentation included with the MEAP
application.
See the e-Manual > Remote UI "Setting the
Backup Location for Stored Data ".
see the "e-Manual > MEAPI".
T-9-10
CAUTION: Work to Perform After Installing the Kit

When you start using this product, passwords set for Mail Boxes, Confidential Fax
Inboxes, and the Memory RX Inbox are erased. Set these passwords again.
T-9-9
*2 Depending on the MEAP application.
*4 You may not be able to back up, depending on the type of the password.
*5 Only the stored Favorite Settings can be backed up.
Backup or export work must not be performed by the service person because of security
*1 Can only be backed up using the Remote UI.
Forms registered for the Superimpose Image
If you have logged on to the machine using a login service, such as SSO-H (Single
Sign-On H) before using this product, you must select the login service again using
SMS (Service Management Service) after restarting the machine.
For more information on using SMS, see the e-Manual > MEAP.
Installation > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
9-169
Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and Unin
9-170
Making a Backup of the Data (reference only)

The data items that have been backed up may be restored when the this product has been
installed.
These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be performed by the
system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
Procedure for Import/Export ALL of User Settings

Following data can be batch exported.
Address Book
Backup of MEAP Application

When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
the invalid license file.
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
MEAPSMS Administrator Guide
Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of

Disabled License Files and Uninstallation
Settings/Registration settings
Device Settings (Forwarding Settings, Address List, Favorite Settings)
Printer Settings
Paper Information
1) Select the URL given below and access SMS.
http://[IP address of the device]:8000/sms/
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user
to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
CAUTION:
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export ALL] > [Export].
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Check the status of MEAP Application is [Stop],
3) Select items to export.
5) Click on the name of applications to disable.
CAUTION:
6) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable].
When exporting only specific items, this may cause setting information relating to
multiple items to lose its relations and cause setting details to be switched.
In this case, export all related items simultaneously.
8) Return to the MEAP Application Management page and click on the appropriate application
4) Enter the password into [Encryption Password] and click on [Start Exporting].
5) Click [Check Status].
7) Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for disabling the license.

names.
9) Click [License Management] on the Application/License Information page.
10) Click [Download].
6) Check the batch export result.
9-170
Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and Unin
Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
11) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
Set a distinctive name for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which
application. After you download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete].
9-171
Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document

data
Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for license deletion.

12) Return to the MEAP Application Management page, click [Uninstall] button of the
application you want to uninstall. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for uninstallation.
If there are several applications, repeat the procedures 1) to 7).
13) After the use of this product is started, re-install the application using an application file (jar
file) of each application from SMS and the disabled license file (lic file).
User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H

(Single Sign-ON H)
In the case that the MEAP login application has been changed to SSO-H, there is a need to
CAUTION: Backup of "Advanced Box"

When setting a SMB server as a backup destination, Advanced Box data saved in a
large capacity HDD cannot be backed up. The Advanced Box data backed up from the
large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD. Depending on the system
version of the machine, both backup and restoration might not be performed.
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
Specify the backup destination of a document data:
Backup to SMB server
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
Backup to USB HDD
make a backup of the user authentication information.
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
1) Access the URL given below.
which saved data is backed up.
http://[IP address of the device]:8000/sso/

2) Login with the user name and password registered as an administrator in SSO-H.
The default administrator user name and password are as follows:
CAUTION: Data which cannot be backed up
User Name: Administrator
If you back up/restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing the
language displayed on the touch panel display by pressing [Settings/Registration] >
[Preferences] from the control panel of the machine, the stored data may not be backed
up/restored properly. For more information on the data that cannot be backed up, see
Points to Note for Installation.
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click
[Save].
CAUTION:
If the language setting in the common specification settings (Settings/Registration) is
set to ON, 'host address' and 'path to folder' might not be displayed correctly or cannot
be referred.
Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
9-171
Installation > Installation Outline Drawing
9-172
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
CAUTION:
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the

e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
2) Click [Display Backup Data].

3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
[Backup method of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]

1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Backup].
2) Select 'All' or 'Changes' for the backup method.
3) Click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
Mirroring Board or
Encryption Board
HDD
F-9-466
Installation > Installation Outline Drawing
9-172
Installation > [TYPE-1] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD
[TYPE-1]

Option HDD (1TB)

2) Check that the Control Panel Display and the Main Power Lamp are turned OFF, and then

[1] HDD Support Pate X 1
9-173
[2] HDD X 1

[3] Vibration-prevention
Dumper X 4
Assembling the Option HDD
CAUTION:
[4] Spacer X 4
[5] Screw
(W sems; M3x14) X 4
Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.
[6] Screw
(TP; M3x6) X 2
Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.
Make sure that [A] part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of
connector.
[7] Gasket X 1
[A]
Connecter
Label
F-9-467
F-9-468
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
9-173
Installation > [TYPE-1] > Installation Procedure > Procedure to Replace with the HDD
9-174
Procedure to Replace with the HDD
1) Assemble the Option HDD (1TB).

1 HDD Support Plate
1) Push section [A] to open the HDD Cover.
4 Vibration-prevention Dumpers
4 Spacers
1 Option HDD
4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14)
NOTE:
When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD.
HDD
HDD Support Plate

[A]
Vibration-prevention Dumper
F-9-471
F-9-469
Connector
x4
2) Open the HDD Lid.

Option HDD
1 Screw (The removed screws will be used in step 8.)
HDD Support Plate
Spacer
F-9-470
F-9-472
9-174
9-175
5) Insert the assembled Option HDD into the Slot.1 (on the left side).
F-9-473
6) Connect 2 connecters to the Option HDD.

4) Remove the HDD. (The removed HDD will not be used.)
2 Connecters
x2
x2
F-9-475
F-9-474
7) Return the HDD Fixed Plate to its original position. (1 Screw)

8) Close the HDD Lid. (1 Screw)
10)
Connect the power plug to the outlet.
9-175
Installation > [TYPE-1] > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
Installing the System Software Using the SST

The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
9-176
Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system
When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for
auto gradation adjustment.
software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after
Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.
installation of this product. Details follow.

1. Requirements
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine
1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.
2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable.
3) Turn on the PC.
4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).
3. Selecting the System Software
1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used.
2) Start up the SST.
3) Click Register Firmware.
4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click SEARCH.
5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
4. Downloading the System Software
1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen.
2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters
download mode.
3) Select the version to be downloaded and click "Start".
4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted.
5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted.
6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is
automatically restarted.
7) Terminate the SST.
8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.
9-176
Installation > [TYPE-2] > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
[TYPE-2]
[10] Conversion Connector

X2
Removable HDD Kit
9-177
[11] Gasket Cover Plate

X1
[12] Handle Label X 1
[14] R-HDD Label X 1
[15] Screw
(TP Round End; M3x6) X 7
Use 1 of them

[1] HDD Drawer Unit X 1
[2] IV Cable
(A:HDD-Pow1/A:HDD-Sig1)
X1
[3] HDD Lock Pin X 2

[13] Shutdown Caution
Label X 1
Use 5 of them
[4] HDD Lock Spring X 2
[5] HDD Face Plate X 1
[6] HDD Handle X 2

[16] Screw
Use 1 of them
[17] Wire Saddle X 2
Use 2 of them
[7] HDD Connector Plate

X2
Use 1 of them
[8] HDD Cover X 2
Use 1 of them
[9] Connector Fixing

Block X 2
Use 1 of them
F-9-477
< CD/ Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet

F-9-476

9-177
Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD Unit
9-178
Removing the HDD Unit
2 Screws
x2
[A]
F-9-480
4) Remove the Box Upper Cover.
F-9-478
2 Screws

2 Screws
x2
x2
F-9-481
F-9-479
9-178
9-179
5) Remove the Rear Upper Cover.
7) Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable from the HDD.
9 Screws
2 Wire Saddles
2 Connectors
8) Remove 1 screw of the HDD Unit. (The removed screws will be used in Installing the HDD
Unit step 5.)
x9
x2
Wire Saddle
x2
Connector
F-9-482

1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.)
F-9-484
F-9-483
9-179
9) Pull the HDD Unit a little from the host machine, and pull the cable out through the hole [A].
10)
9-180
Remove the HDD Unit from the host machine.
[A]
F-9-485
CAUTION:
F-9-487
11)
Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable of the host machine. (The removed
cables will not be used.)
Be sure not to deform the Grounding Plate.
2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
5 Wire Saddles
Grounding Plate
Connector
x2
x6
Edge Saddle
F-9-486
Wire Saddle
F-9-488
9-180
Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit
Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit
9-181
3) Remove the HDD.
1) Remove the 2 wire saddles. (The removed wire saddles will not be used.)
F-9-491
F-9-489
4) Remove the E ring and the shaft from the HDD Unit, and remove the HDD Fixation Plate.
(The removed E ring, shaft and HDD Fixation Plate will not be used.)

F-9-492
F-9-490
9-181
9-182
5) Remove the Upper Rail from the HDD Unit.
7) Put the 2 HDD Lock Pins and 2 HDD Lock Springs into the holes of the Upper Rail.
Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 8.)
8) Install the Upper Rail to a position shifted toward the HDD Cap.
2 Bosses
x2
x2
Boss
F-9-493
Boss
6) Remove the Leaf Spring from the removed Upper Rail in the order of the arrows in the
F-9-495
figure below. (The removed Leaf Spring will not be used.)

2 Bosses
NOTE:
The position where the Upper Rail is to be installed is different from the position where
it was originally installed. Be careful not to install it to the original position.
2 Arms
Boss
Arm
Boss
Boss
Boss
Turn over
Screw
F-9-494
Upper Rail
F-9-496
9-182
9) Remove the Lower Rail, and then install it to a position shifted toward the HDD Cap.
2 Bosses
10)
9-183
Place it in the position where the edge saddle of HDD Drawer Unit is facing up,
remove the Lower Drawer Cable (The Signal Cable Blue side).
2 Screws
2 Screws
2 Springs
NOTE:
Perform this work with the HDD Unit placed on its side in order to prevent the
Grounding Plate from being deformed.
2 Washers (The removed springs and washers will be used in step 13.)
x2
Lower Rail
Drawer Cable
Edge Saddle
Washer
Spring
Screw
F-9-498
x2
Boss
Boss
11)
Remove the Drawer Cable. (The removed Drawer Cable will not be used.)
2 Screws (Removed screw will be used in step 12.)
x2
x2
F-9-499
Boss
Boss
F-9-497
9-183
9
12)
Install the IV Cable.
14)
9-184
Install the HDD Drawer Unit.
2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)
x2
F-9-500
13)
Install the IV Cable of HDD Drawer Unit.
F-9-502
15)
2 Screws
Install the HDD Face Plate.
2 Springs
2 Washers (Use the parts removed in step 10.)
x2
IV Cable
Washer
Spring
F-9-503
Screw
F-9-501
9-184
Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine
9-185
Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the

Host Machine
1) Disassemble the removed HDD.
NOTE:
Use the parts disassembled in step 1 and parts included in the Removable HDD Kit.
2) Assemble the HDD disassembled in step 1.
4 Screws (W Sems)
1 HDD Support Plate
1 HDD Support Plate
1 HDD Connector Plate (Included in the Removable HDD Kit)

1 HDD
4 Screws (W Sems)
x4
NOTE:
When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD
Connector Plate and HDD.
HDD
HDD Support Plate
HDD
HDD Support Plate
F-9-504
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-506
CAUTION:
HDD

Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw
hole of HDD Support Plate.
Connector
Screw hole
Label
x4
HDD Connector
Plate
Connector
Screw hole
F-9-505
HDD Support Plate

F-9-507
9-185
9-186
3) Install the Conversion Connector.
x2
CAUTION:
Boss
Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion
Connector.
Hole
F-9-510
5) Install the HDD Cover.

1 Claw
1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6)
F-9-508
CAUTION:
4) Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixing Block into the holes of the Conversion Connector
to install, and tighten the screws in the order specified below.
Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP
screw.
2 Screws (P tightening; M3x8)

CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixing Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion
Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
Claw
F-9-511
F-9-509
9-186
Installation > [TYPE-2] > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Unit
9-187
Installing the HDD Unit
6) Install the HDD Handle.

1) Close the 4 wire saddles [A].

2) Install the 2 wire saddles.
CAUTION:
screw.
[A]
x2
F-9-514
3) Insert the HDD Unit until it stops.

F-9-512
7) Affix the HDD No.1 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
8) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,
and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.
NOTE:
The [A] part should be fitted in the cut-off.
4) Install the Gasket Cover Plate on the Gasket.
5) Secure the HDD Unit.
1 Screw (use the screw removed at step 8 of the Removing the HDD Unit)
[A]
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-513
Gasket Cover Plate
F-9-515
9-187
6) Secure the cable (Short) of the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) in place using the Wire
9-188
8) Insert the Removable HDD into the Slot.2 (on the rear side).
Saddle.
7) Connect the 2 connectors of the cable (Long) of Slot.2 (on the rear side), and secure the
cable as shown in the figure.
1 Edge Saddle
2 Wire Saddles
NOTE:
Secure the cable (Long) of the Slot.2 (on the rear side) using the Wire Saddle [A] with
the cable wound 1 time.
F-9-517
9) Affix the Shutdown Caution Label for applicable language to align with the ruled line on the
HDD Lid.
Edge Saddle
x2
Connector
Wire Saddle
[A]
x3
Shutdown Caution Label

F-9-518
Wire Saddle
F-9-516
9-188
9
10)
Close the HDD Lid.
11)
Affix the Handle Label on the Handle part of the HDD Lid.
9-189
Handle Label
F-9-519
12)
Install the removed covers.
Rear Upper Cover (9 Screws)

CAUTION:
When installing the Rear Upper Cover, tighten the screws while the Main Controller
PCB is secured to the host machine.
Box Upper Cover (2 Screws)
Box Left Cover (2 Screws)
CAUTION:
Main Controller Right Cover Unit (2 Screws)
HDD Cover (Close)
13)
Insert the power plug to the outlet.
14)
Turn ON the main power switch.
9-189
Installation > [TYPE-3] > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit
[TYPE-3]
9-190
Removable HDD Kit
Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit
[2] IV Cable
X1
Option HDD (1TB)

[2] HDD X 1
Dumper X 4
[6] HDD Handle X 2
Use 1 of them
[4] Spacer X 4
[5] Screw
(W sems; M3x14) X 4
[6] Screw
(TP; M3x6) X 2
X2
[8] HDD Cover X 2
Use 1 of them
Use 1 of them

Block X 2
Use 1 of them
[7] Gasket X 1
F-9-521
F-9-520
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
9-190
9
X2

X1
9-191
Use 1 of them


Label X 1
[15] Screw
Use 5 of them
[16] Screw
Use 2 of them
[A]
F-9-522
< CD/Guides >
F-9-523
FCC/IC Sheet
9-191
2 Screws
2 Screws
9-192
x2
x2
F-9-526
F-9-524
2 Screws
9 Screws
x9
x2
F-9-525
F-9-527
9-192
9-193

[A]
F-9-530
F-9-528
CAUTION:
2 Wire Saddles
2 Connectors
Unit step 5.)
Grounding Plate
x2
Wire Saddle
x2
Connector
F-9-531
F-9-529
9-193
9
10)
9-194
F-9-532
11)
F-9-534
2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
5 Wire Saddles
Connector
x2
x6
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
F-9-535
F-9-533
9-194
9-195

x2
F-9-536
F-9-538
2 Bosses
2 Arms
Boss
Arm
Boss
Turn over
F-9-537
F-9-539
9-195
9-196
2 Bosses
2 Bosses
2 Screws

NOTE:
x2
Lower Rail
Boss
Boss
F-9-540
NOTE:
x2
Boss
Boss
Boss
Boss
x2
Screw
Upper Rail
F-9-541
Boss
Boss
F-9-542
9-196
9
10)
12)
9-197
2 Screws
2 Springs
x2
x2
Drawer Cable
Edge Saddle
Washer
Spring
F-9-545
Screw
13)
F-9-543
11)
2 Screws
2 Springs
x2
x2
IV Cable
Washer
Spring
Screw
F-9-544
F-9-546
9-197
9
14)
9-198
CAUTION:
Screw hole
Label
Connector
F-9-547
15)
Screw hole
F-9-549
F-9-548
9-198
NOTE:
Use the parts included in the package of the Option HDD and the Removable HDD Kit.
9-199

CAUTION:
Connector.

1 HDD Support Plate
4 Spacers
1 Option HDD
NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate

F-9-552
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-550
Option HDD
Connector
HDD Connector Plate
x4
(Included in Removable
HDD Kit)
HDD Support Plate

Spacer
Vibration-prevention
Damper
F-9-551
9-199
9-200

1 Claw
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
screw.
F-9-553
Claw
F-9-555
x2
Boss
Hole
F-9-554
9-200
9-201

1) Close the 4 wire saddles [A].

2) Install the 2 wire saddles.
CAUTION:
screw.
[A]
x2
F-9-558

F-9-556
NOTE:
[A]
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-557
Gasket Cover Plate
F-9-559
9-201
9-202
Saddle.
7) Connect the 2 connectors of the cable (Long) of Slot.2 (on the rear side), and secure the
cable as shown in the figure.
1 Edge Saddle
2 Wire Saddles
NOTE:
F-9-561
HDD Lid.
Edge Saddle
x2
Connector
Wire Saddle
[A]
x3

F-9-562
Wire Saddle
F-9-560
9-202
Installation > [TYPE-3] > Installing the System Software Using the SST
9-203
10)
Close the HDD Lid.
11)
Handle Label
1. Requirements
1) PC
F-9-563
12)
3) Turn on the PC.

CAUTION:

5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.


CAUTION:

download mode.
HDD Cover (Close)

13)
9-203
9-204

9-204
Installation > [TYPE-4] > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (160GB)
[TYPE-4]
9-205

Option HDD (160GB)
Standard HDD + Option HDD (160GB)

[2] HDD X 1
Dumper X 4
[4] Spacer X 4
[5] Screw
(W sems; M3x14) X 4
[6] Screw
(TP; M3x6) X 2

& Mirroring Kit
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been
opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is
not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that
the user has done so intentionally.
Use 1 of them
[7] Gasket X 1
F-9-564
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
9-205
Installation > [TYPE-4] > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

[1] Signal Cable
(340mm (Red)) x 1
A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434
[4] Power Cable

(430mm) x 1
A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463
[7] LED Board (Large) x 1
[10] STS Cable

(420mm (Light blue)) x 1
A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843
[2] Signal Cable

(450mm (Red)) x 1
A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435
[5] Power Cable

(430mm) x 1
A:HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463
[8] Mirroring Board or

Encryption Board x 1

x5
[14] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 10
[3] Signal Cable

(370mm (Blue)) x 1
[6] Power Cable

(320mm) x 1
[9] LED Cable

(290mm) x 1
A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840
[12] Wire Saddle (Middle)

x1
[15] LED Label (Large) x 1
Use 5 of them
[17] Signal Cable

(80mm (Blue)) x 1
[18] Power Cable

(80mm) x 2
A:HDD-Pow1/2 or FK2-8461
9-206
[16] Signal Cable

(80mm (Red)) x 1
[19] LED Board (Small) x 1
[20] LED Cable

(1200mm) x 1
[21] STS Cable

[22] Edge Saddle x 1
[23] LED Label (Small) x 1
[24] HDD Connection

Plate x 1
[25] Ring Core x 1
Use 4 of them
x1
F-9-566
F-9-565
9-206
9-207
< CD/Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit >

HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation CD
FCC/IC Sheet
< CD/Guides of HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit >

HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C Series User Documentation
HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice

FCC/IC Sheet
Setting Before Turning OFF the Power (HDD Data

Encryption & Mirroring Kit only)
[A]
CAUTION:
Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting.
Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001
(procedure error before installing the HDD Encryption Board)" to occur when turning
ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board.
When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in
which no Encryption Board is installed.
F-9-567

2 Screws
1) Execute the following service mode (level 1).

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP
x2

F-9-568
9-207
2 Screws
9 Screws
9-208
x9
x2
F-9-571
F-9-569
1 Screw (The removed screw is reused at step 4 of Installing the HDD Unit)
2 Screws
x2
F-9-570
F-9-572
9-208
9-209
CAUTION:
2 Wire Saddles
2 Connectors
Unit step 2.)
Grounding Plate
x2
Wire Saddle
x2
Connector
F-9-575
F-9-573
10)
[A]
F-9-576
F-9-574
9-209
9
11)
Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD
9-210
1) Assemble the Option HDD (160GB).

1 HDD Support Plate
2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
4 Spacers
5 Wire Saddles
1 Option HDD
Connector
NOTE:
x2
HDD
HDD Support Plate
x6
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
F-9-579
F-9-577
Connector
Assembling and Installing the Option HDD
Option HDD
CAUTION:
x4
connector.
HDD Support Plate
Spacer
F-9-580
[A]
Connecter
Label
F-9-578
9-210
4) Install the HDD Fixed Plate.
1 Screw (Use the screws removed in step 2.)
9-211
1 Screw (TP; M3x6) (Use the contents included in the Option HDD.)
x2
F-9-581
F-9-582
3) Insert the assembled Option HDD into the Slot.2 (on the right side).
9-211
Installation > [TYPE-4] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board
Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board
9-212
3) Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
1) Install 1 wire saddle (Large), 1 wire saddle (Middle), and 4 wire saddles (Small).
4 screws (TP; M3x6)

CAUTION:
The marks "CHA" and "CHB" on the PCB should be facing the engraved marks "A" and
"B".
Wire Saddle (Small)
Wire Aaddle (Large)

CHB
Wire Saddle (Middle)
CHA
Wire Saddle (Small)
F-9-583
2) Connect the Signal Cable and Power Cable to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
Power Cable (Long) (430mm; A:HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463)
Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441)
Signal Cable (340mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434)
Power Cable (Short) (320mm; A:HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467)
Power Cable (430mm)
CHB
Signal Cable (370mm(Blue))
CHA
Signal Cable (340mm(Red))
x4
B
A
Power Cable (320mm)
x4
F-9-585
F-9-584
9-212
4) Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435), the Power Cable (430mm;
9-213
5) Install the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the LED Board (Large).
A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) and STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig or FM4-0843).
6 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
7 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
LED Cable
Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig or FK2-8435) so that the label
faces up.
LED Board
Push the tag of the Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow or FK2-8463) inward not to
interfere other operations.
Route cables equally to eliminate unnecessary slack.
Since it can be operated without the STS Cable connection, check the connection at
the installation.
F-9-587
6) Insert the LED Board (Large) to the hook part [A] of the host machine to install.
Connector
Wire Saddle
1 Screw (TP; M3x6)

Connector
Wire
Saddle
x6
x8
Edge Saddle
[A]
Power
Cable
Connector
Wire
Saddle
Signal Cable
STS Cable
F-9-586
F-9-588
9-213
7) Connect the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig or FM4-0840) to the Mirroring Board or
Encryption Board.
9-214

NOTE:
The following shows the combination of the HDD and the Mirroring Board or Encryption
Board.
1 Connector
7 Wire Saddles
Connect Slot.1 to CH A (The HDD which originally mounted)

Connect Slot.2 to CH B (New HDD)
CAUTION:
Since it can be operated without the LED Cable connection, check the connection at
the installation.
Signal Cable
(Red)
Signal Cable
(Blue)
LED Cable
Wire Saddle
Slo
Slo
t.1 (
t.2 (
Power Cable
HD
HD
D2)
D1)
CH
CH
Power Cable
x7
Connector
Wire Saddle
F-9-591
Wire Saddle
F-9-589
1) Insert the HDD Unit approx. 2/3 along the rails of the host machine, and pass the Signal
Cable and the Power Cable through the hole [A].
8) Secure the Signal Cable and the Power Cable with the 5 wire saddles.
[A]
Wire Saddle
x4
x5
Power Cable
Signal Cable (Blue)
Signal Cable (Red)
Power Cable
F-9-592
F-9-590
9-214
9-215
2) Install the HDD Unit by inserting it until it stops.
3) Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Cable to the HDD.
Connect the Power Cable (320 mm; A: HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) and the Signal Cable (340
mm (Red); A: HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) to the Slot.1 (on the host machine side).
NOTE:
Connect the Signal Cable (370 mm (Blue); A: HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) and the Power

Cable (430 mm; A: HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463) to the Slot.2 (on the rear side), and secure the
4 cables using the 2 Wire Saddles.
Grounding Plate
Power Cable
(320mm)
x4
Signal Cable
(370mm(Blue))
[A]
x2
Signal Cable
(340mm(Red))
Wire Saddle
Power Cable (430mm)
F-9-594
F-9-593
4) Close the HDD Lid.

F-9-595
9-215
Installation > [TYPE-4] > After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the System Software Using the SST
9-216
5) Affix the LED Label according to align with the ruled line on the HDD Lid.
After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

1. Requirements
1) PC
LED Label

F-9-596

6) Install the removed covers.
3) Turn on the PC.
CAUTION:
5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
CAUTION:

HDD Cover (Close)
download mode.

9-216
Installation > [TYPE-4] > After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the System Software Using the SST
Installation > [TYPE-4] > Setting for Mirroring
9-217
Setting for Mirroring
Checking the Security Version

1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel.
1) Specify the setting for Mirroring.
2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID; select 1 for W/RAID.
3) Make sure that 2.00 or '2.01' is displayed in Canon MFP Security Chip as version
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch to enable the setting value.
information of the security chip.
3) Check that the UI screen is started normally.
When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.
4) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.
The green LED of HDD1 (Slot.1) is flashing.
CAUTION:
The green and red LEDs of HDD2 (Slot.2) are flashing.
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the
version information indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.
CAUTION:
Re-building process starts after setting W/RAID to 1.
When the error indicating the message of Need to replace Hard Disk (Contact with
Service Technician) on the UI occurs, re-execute the re-building process as follows;
Checking the Security Mark

The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the host
machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark
appears when the machine is equipped with an Encryption Board and the board is operating
correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security
mark:
< Confirming the Security Mark >
When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark (
displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
) is
1) Check the lighted Red LED is for the HDD2.

2) Set Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/RAID to 0.
3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting value.
5) Turn OFF/ON e the main power switch of the host machine to enable the setting
value.
The abovementioned procedure is limited only for the re-building process at the initial
installation. The error occurred at re-building process during operation is not targeted.
HDD1(Slot1)
HDD2(Slot2)
F-9-597
9-217
Installation > [TYPE-4] > After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
9-218

When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the
following:
At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that
the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function
becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and
request <Servicing work when a failure occurs>.
Completion of the Installation Work:
Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2.00 or '2.01' is indicated for Canon MFP
Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Version.
Maintenance of the Security Functions:
Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security
functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Mark.

9-218
Installation > [TYPE-5] > Checking the Contents > 2 Option HDDs (1TB)
[TYPE-5]
9-219
2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

& Mirroring Kit
2 Option HDDs (1TB)

[2] HDD X 1
Dumper X 4
[4] Spacer X 4
[5] Screw
(W sems; M3x14) X 4
[6] Screw
(TP; M3x6) X 2
not torn.
Use 1 of them
[7] Gasket X 1
F-9-598
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
9-219

[1] Signal Cable
(340mm (Red)) x 1
[4] Power Cable

(430mm) x 1
[10] STS Cable

[2] Signal Cable

(450mm (Red)) x 1
[5] Power Cable

(430mm) x 1


x5
[14] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 10
[3] Signal Cable

(370mm (Blue)) x 1
[6] Power Cable

(320mm) x 1
[9] LED Cable

(290mm) x 1

x1
Use 5 of them
[17] Signal Cable

(80mm (Blue)) x 1
[18] Power Cable

(80mm) x 2
9-220
[16] Signal Cable

(80mm (Red)) x 1
[20] LED Cable

(1200mm) x 1
[21] STS Cable

[24] HDD Connection

Plate x 1
[25] Ring Core x 1
Use 4 of them
x1
F-9-600
F-9-599
9-220
9-221

FCC/IC Sheet


FCC/IC Sheet

[A]
CAUTION:
F-9-601

2 Screws

x2

F-9-602
9-221
2 Screws
9 Screws
9-222
x9
x2
F-9-605
F-9-603
2 Screws
x2
F-9-604
F-9-606
9-222
9-223
CAUTION:
2 Wire Saddles
2 Connectors
Unit step 2.)
Grounding Plate
x2
Wire Saddle
x2
Connector
F-9-609
F-9-607
10)
[A]
F-9-610
F-9-608
9-223
9
11)
9-224

1 HDD Support Plate
2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
4 Spacers
5 Wire Saddles
1 Option HDD
Connector
NOTE:
x2
HDD
HDD Support Plate
x6
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
F-9-613
F-9-611
Connector
Option HDD
CAUTION:
x4
connector.
HDD Support Plate
Spacer
F-9-614
[A]
2) Assemble the other Option HDD (1TB) in the same way.
Connecter
Label
F-9-612
9-224
3) Turn the HDD Fixation Plate toward the front, and remove the HDD. (The removed HDD
will not be used.)
9-225

1 Screw (TP; M3x6) (Use the contents included in the Option HDD.)
NOTE:
If the Wire Saddles [A] interfere with removal of the HDD, remove the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
x2
[A]
F-9-617
F-9-615
4) Insert the 2 assembled Option HDDs into the slots 1 and 2.

NOTE:
If you have removed the Wire Saddles [A] in the previous step, install the 2 Wire
Saddles [A] after inserting the 2 Option HDDs.
[A]
F-9-616
9-225
9-226
4 screws (TP; M3x6)

CAUTION:
"B".
Wire Saddle (Small)
Wire Aaddle (Large)

CHB
CHA
Wire Saddle (Small)
F-9-618
2) Connect the Signal Cable and Power Cable to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
Power Cable (Long) (430mm; A:HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463)
Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441)
Signal Cable (340mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434)
Power Cable (Short) (320mm; A:HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467)
Power Cable (430mm)
CHB
CHA
x4
B
A
Power Cable (320mm)
x4
F-9-620
F-9-619
9-226
9-227
6 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
7 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
LED Cable
faces up.
LED Board
the installation.
F-9-622
Connector
Wire Saddle
1 Screw (TP; M3x6)

Connector
Wire
Saddle
x6
x8
Edge Saddle
[A]
Power
Cable
Connector
Wire
Saddle
Signal Cable
STS Cable
F-9-621
F-9-623
9-227
Encryption Board.
9-228

NOTE:
Board.
1 Connector
7 Wire Saddles
Connect Slot.1 to CH A (New HDD)

CAUTION:
the installation.
Signal Cable
(Red)
Signal Cable
(Blue)
LED Cable
Wire Saddle
Slo
Slo
t.1 (
t.2 (
Power Cable
HD
HD
D2)
D1)
CH
CH
Power Cable
x7
Connector
Wire Saddle
F-9-626
Wire Saddle
F-9-624
[A]
Wire Saddle
x4
x5
Power Cable
Signal Cable (Blue)
Signal Cable (Red)
Power Cable
F-9-627
F-9-625
9-228
9-229
Connect the Power Cable (320 mm; A: HDD-Pow1 or FK2-8467) and the Signal Cable (340
mm (Red); A: HDD-Sig1 or FK2-8434) to the Slot.1 (on the host machine side).
NOTE:
Connect the Signal Cable (370 mm (Blue); A: HDD-Sig2 or FK2-8441) and the Power

Cable (430 mm; A: HDD-Pow2 or FK2-8463) to the Slot.2 (on the rear side), and secure the
4 cables using the 2 Wire Saddles.
Grounding Plate
Power Cable
(320mm)
x4
Signal Cable
(370mm(Blue))
[A]
x2
Signal Cable
(340mm(Red))
Wire Saddle
Power Cable (430mm)
F-9-629
F-9-628

F-9-630
9-229
9-230

1. Requirements
1) PC
LED Label

F-9-631

3) Turn on the PC.


CAUTION:

5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
CAUTION:
download mode.
HDD Cover (Close)

8)
Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.
9-230
9-231

CAUTION:
CAUTION:
version information (2.00) indicated for 'Canon MFP Security Chip'.

value.
mark:

) is
HDD1(Slot1)
HDD2(Slot2)
F-9-632
9-231
9-232
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the

Work (only when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
has been installed)
following:

9-232
Installation > [TYPE-6] > Checking the Contents
[TYPE-6]
9-233
Standard HDD + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
[1] Signal Cable (340mm

(Red); A:HDD-Sig1) x 1

(Red); A:Cont-Sig) x 1

(Blue); A:HDD-Sig2) x 1
[4] Power Cable (430mm;

A:Cont-Pow) x 1

A:HDD-Pow2) x 1

A:HDD-Pow1) x 1
[8] Encryption Board x 1
[9] LED Cable

(290mm; A:LED-Sig) x 1
[10] STS Cable

(420mm (Light blue);
A:STS-Sig) x 1

x5

x1

& Mirroring Kit
not torn.
Use 4 of them
x1
F-9-633
Installation > [TYPE-6] > Checking the Contents
9-233
9
[14] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 10
9-234
< CD/Guides >


Use 5 of them
FCC/IC Sheet


A:HDD-Pow1/2) x 2
CAUTION:
[20] LED Cable

[21] STS Cable

A:STS-Sig) x 1


[24] HDD Connection

Plate x 1
[25] Ring Core x 1
F-9-634
9-234
9-235

2 Screws

x2
[A]
F-9-637

2 Screws
F-9-635

2 Screws
x2
x2
F-9-638
F-9-636
9-235
9-236
9 Screws
2 Wire Saddles
2 Connectors
Unit step 2.)
x9
x2
Wire Saddle
x2
Connector
F-9-639

F-9-641
[A]
F-9-640
F-9-642
9-236
9
CAUTION:
11)
9-237

2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
5 Wire Saddles
Grounding Plate
Connector
x2
x6
Edge Saddle
F-9-643
Wire Saddle
10)
F-9-645
F-9-644
9-237
Installation > [TYPE-6] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board
Installing the Encryption Board
9-238
3) Install the Encryption Board.
4 screws (TP; M3x6)

CAUTION:
"B".
Wire Saddle (Small)
Wire Aaddle (Large)

CHB
CHA
Wire Saddle (Small)
F-9-646
2) Connect the Signal Cable and Power Cable to the Encryption Board.
Power Cable (Long) (430mm; A:HDD-Pow2)
Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2)
Signal Cable (340mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1)
Power Cable (Short) (320mm; A:HDD-Pow1)
Power Cable (430mm)
CHB
CHA
x4
B
A
Power Cable (320mm)
x4
F-9-648
F-9-647
9-238
4) Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig), the Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow)
9-239
5) Install the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig) to the LED Board (Large).
and STS Cable (420mm (Light blue); A:STS-Sig).

6 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
7 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
LED Cable
Install the Signal Cable (450mm (Red); A:Cont-Sig) so that the label faces up.
Push the tag of the Power Cable (430mm; A:Cont-Pow) inward not to interfere other
operations.
LED Board

the installation.
Connector
Wire Saddle
1 Screw (TP; M3x6)
Connector
Wire
Saddle
x6
x8
F-9-650
Edge Saddle
Power
Cable
[A]
Connector
Wire
Saddle
Signal Cable
STS Cable
F-9-649
F-9-651
9-239
9-240
7) Connect the LED Cable (290mm; A:LED-Sig) to the Encryption Board.

1 Connector
NOTE:
The following shows the combination of the HDD and the Encryption Board.
7 Wire Saddles

No HDD to Slot.2
CAUTION:
the installation.
LED Cable
Signal Cable
(Blue)
Wire Saddle
t.1 (
t.2 (
Power Cable
x7
Slo
Slo
HD
Bla
nk)
D1)
CH
CH
Signal Cable
(Red)
Power Cable
Connector
Wire Saddle
F-9-654
Wire Saddle
F-9-652
[A]
Wire Saddle
x4
x5
Power Cable
Signal Cable (Blue)
Signal Cable (Red)
Power Cable
F-9-655
F-9-653
9-240
9-241
3-2) Fold the Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A: HDD-Sig2) and the Power Cable (430mm;
A: HDD-Pow2), and secure the 4 cables using the 2 Wire Saddles as shown in the
figure.
NOTE:

NOTE:
Secure the cables with the ends of the connectors facing the HDD.
Grounding Plate
x2
[A]
Wire Saddle
Power Cable (430mm)
F-9-656
F-9-658

3-1) Connect the Power Cable (320 mm; A: HDD-Pow1) and the Signal Cable (340 mm
(Red); A: HDD-Sig1) to the Slot.1 (on the host machine side).
x2
Signal Cable
(340mm(Red))
Power Cable (320mm)
F-9-659
F-9-657
9-241
9-242

1. Requirements
1) PC
LED Label

F-9-660

3) Turn on the PC.


CAUTION:

5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
CAUTION:
download mode.
HDD Cover (Close)


9-242
Installation > [TYPE-6] > Checking after Installation
9-243
HDD1(Slot1)
CAUTION:

F-9-661
mark:
) is
9-243
9-244

Work
following:

9-244
Installation > [TYPE-7] > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (1TB)
[TYPE-7]
9-245

Option HDD (1TB)
Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

& Mirroring Kit
[2] HDD X 1
Dumper X 4
[4] Spacer X 4
[5] Screw
(W sems; M3x14) X 4
[6] Screw
(TP; M3x6) X 2
not torn.
[7] Gasket X 1
F-9-662
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
9-245
Installation > [TYPE-7] > Checking the Contents > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit


A:Cont-Pow) x 1
[10] STS Cable

A:STS-Sig) x 1


A:HDD-Pow2) x 1

x5
[14] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 10


A:HDD-Pow1) x 1
[9] LED Cable


x1
9-246



A:HDD-Pow1/2) x 2
[20] LED Cable

[21] STS Cable

A:STS-Sig) x 1
[24] HDD Connection

Plate x 1
[25] Ring Core x 1
Use 5 of them
Use 4 of them
x1
F-9-664
F-9-663
9-246
9-247
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet

CAUTION:
[A]
F-9-665

2 Screws

x2

F-9-666
9-247
2 Screws
9 Screws
9-248
x9
x2
F-9-669
F-9-667
2 Screws
x2
F-9-668
F-9-670
9-248
9-249
CAUTION:
2 Wire Saddles
2 Connectors
Unit step 2.)
Grounding Plate
x2
Wire Saddle
x2
Connector
F-9-673
F-9-671
10)
[A]
F-9-674
F-9-672
9-249
9
11)
9-250

1 HDD Support Plate
2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
4 Spacers
5 Wire Saddles
1 Option HDD
Connector
NOTE:
x2
HDD
HDD Support Plate
x6
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
F-9-677
F-9-675
Connector
Option HDD
CAUTION:
x4
connector.
HDD Support Plate
Spacer
F-9-678
[A]
Connecter
Label
F-9-676
9-250
2) Turn the HDD Fixation Plate toward the front, and remove the HDD. (The removed HDD
will not be used.)
9-251


NOTE:
If the Wire Saddles [A] interfere with removal of the HDD, remove the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
[A]
F-9-681
F-9-679
3) Insert the 2 assembled Option HDDs into the slots 1 and 2.

NOTE:
If you have removed the Wire Saddles [A] in the previous step, install the 2 Wire
Saddles [A] after inserting the 2 Option HDDs.
[A]
F-9-680
9-251
9-252
4 screws (TP; M3x6)

CAUTION:
"B".
Wire Saddle (Small)
Wire Aaddle (Large)

CHB
CHA
Wire Saddle (Small)
F-9-682
2) Connect the Signal Cable and Power Cable to the Encryption Board.
Power Cable (Long) (430mm; A:HDD-Pow2)
Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A:HDD-Sig2)
Signal Cable (340mm (Red); A:HDD-Sig1)
Power Cable (Short) (320mm; A:HDD-Pow1)
Power Cable (430mm)
CHB
CHA
x4
B
A
Power Cable (320mm)
x4
F-9-684
F-9-683
9-252
9-253

6 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
7 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
LED Cable
operations.
LED Board

the installation.
F-9-686
Connector
Wire Saddle
1 Screw (TP; M3x6)

Connector
Wire
Saddle
x6
x8
Edge Saddle
[A]
Power
Cable
Connector
Wire
Saddle
Signal Cable
STS Cable
F-9-685
F-9-687
9-253
9-254

1 Connector
NOTE:
7 Wire Saddles

No HDD to Slot.2
CAUTION:
the installation.
LED Cable
Signal Cable
(Blue)
Wire Saddle
t.1 (
t.2 (
Power Cable
x7
Slo
Slo
HD
Bla
nk)
D1)
CH
CH
Signal Cable
(Red)
Power Cable
Connector
Wire Saddle
F-9-690
Wire Saddle
F-9-688
[A]
Wire Saddle
x4
x5
Power Cable
Signal Cable (Blue)
Signal Cable (Red)
Power Cable
F-9-691
F-9-689
9-254
9-255
3-2) Fold the Signal Cable (370mm (Blue); A: HDD-Sig2) and the Power Cable (430mm;
A: HDD-Pow2), and secure the 4 cables using the 2 Wire Saddles as shown in the
figure.
NOTE:

NOTE:
Secure the cables with the ends of the connectors facing the HDD.
Grounding Plate
x2
[A]
Wire Saddle
Power Cable (430mm)
F-9-692
F-9-694

3-1) Connect the Power Cable (320 mm; A: HDD-Pow1) and the Signal Cable (340 mm
(Red); A: HDD-Sig1) to the Slot.1 (on the host machine side).
x2
Signal Cable
(340mm(Red))
Power Cable (320mm)
F-9-695
F-9-693
9-255
9-256

1. Requirements
1) PC
LED Label

F-9-696

3) Turn on the PC.


CAUTION:

5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
CAUTION:
download mode.
HDD Cover (Close)


9-256
9-257
HDD1(Slot1)
CAUTION:

F-9-697
mark:
) is
9-257
9-258

Work
following:

9-258
[TYPE-8]
9-259

Option HDD (160GB)
Standard HDD + Option HDD (160GB) + Removable HDD Kit

[2] HDD X 1
Dumper X 4
[4] Spacer X 4
[5] Screw
(W sems; M3x14) X 4
[6] Screw
(TP; M3x6) X 2

& Mirroring Kit
not torn.
[7] Gasket X 1
F-9-698
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
9-259
Removable HDD Kit


X2
[2] IV Cable
X1
[8] HDD Cover X 2
9-260

X2

X1

Label X 1
[15] Screw
[16] Screw
[6] HDD Handle X 2

Block X 2
F-9-700
< CD/ Guides >

F-9-699
FCC/IC Sheet
9-260

[1] Signal Cable
(340mm (Red)) x 1
[4] Power Cable

(430mm) x 1
[10] STS Cable

[2] Signal Cable

(450mm (Red)) x 1
[5] Power Cable

(430mm) x 1


x5
[14] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 10
[3] Signal Cable

(370mm (Blue)) x 1
[6] Power Cable

(320mm) x 1
[9] LED Cable

(290mm) x 1
Use 5 of them
[17] Signal Cable

(80mm (Blue)) x 1
[18] Power Cable

(80mm) x 2
9-261
[16] Signal Cable

(80mm (Red)) x 1
[20] LED Cable

(1200mm) x 1
[21] STS Cable

[24] HDD Connection

Plate x 1
[25] Ring Core x 1

x1
Use 4 of them
x1
F-9-702
F-9-701
9-261
9-262

FCC/IC Sheet

FCC/IC Sheet

[A]
CAUTION:
F-9-703

2 Screws

x2

F-9-704
9-262
2 Screws
9 Screws
9-263
x9
x2
F-9-707
F-9-705
2 Screws
x2
F-9-706
F-9-708
9-263
9-264
CAUTION:
2 Wire Saddles
2 Connectors
Unit step 5.)
Grounding Plate
x2
Wire Saddle
x2
Connector
F-9-711
F-9-709
10)
[A]
F-9-712
F-9-710
9-264
9
11)
9-265

2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
5 Wire Saddles
Connector
x2
x6
Edge Saddle
F-9-714
Wire Saddle
F-9-713

F-9-715
9-265
3) Remove the HDD.
9-266

x2
F-9-716
F-9-718
2 Bosses
2 Arms
Boss
Arm
Boss
Turn over
F-9-717
F-9-719
9-266
9-267
2 Bosses
2 Bosses
2 Screws

NOTE:
x2
Lower Rail
Boss
Boss
F-9-720
NOTE:
x2
Boss
Boss
Boss
Boss
x2
Screw
Upper Rail
F-9-721
Boss
Boss
F-9-722
9-267
9
10)
remove the Upper Drawer Cable (The Signal Cable Red side).
12)
9-268
2 Screws
2 Springs
x2
Drawer Cable
x2
Edge Saddle
Washer
Spring
F-9-725
Screw
13)
F-9-723
11)
2 Screws
2 Springs
IV Cable
x2
x2
Washer
Spring
Screw
F-9-726
F-9-724
9-268
9
14)
Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (the First HDD)
9-269
Host Machine (the First HDD)

4 Screws (W Sems)
1 HDD Support Plate
x4
F-9-727
HDD
HDD Support Plate
F-9-728
CAUTION:
Screw hole
Label
Connector
Screw hole
F-9-729
9-269
9-270
NOTE:

CAUTION:
Connector.

1 HDD Support Plate
1 HDD
4 Screws (W Sems)
NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate
F-9-732
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-730
HDD
Connector
x4
HDD Connector
Plate
HDD Support Plate

F-9-731
9-270
9-271

1 Claw
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
screw.
F-9-733
Claw
F-9-735
x2
Boss
CAUTION:
screw.
Hole
x2
F-9-734
F-9-736
9-271
Installation > [TYPE-8] > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD (the Second HDD)
9-272
NOTE:

1) Assemble the Option HDD (160GB).
1 HDD Support Plate
4 Spacers
HDD No.
1 Option HDD
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate
F-9-737
Assembling the Option HDD (the Second HDD)

CAUTION:
HDD Connector Plate
F-9-739
Option HDD
Connector
Screw hole
Label
Connector
HDD Connector Plate
x4
HDD Kit)
HDD Support Plate

Spacer
Screw hole
F-9-738
Damper
F-9-740
9-272
x2
CAUTION:
9-273
Boss
Connector.
Hole
F-9-743

1 Claw
F-9-741
CAUTION:
screw.

CAUTION:
Claw
F-9-744
F-9-742
9-273
9-274

1) Install the 3 wire saddles (Large) (one of them is included in the HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD
Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit, and two of them are included in the Removable HDD Kit),
CAUTION:
screw.
1 wire saddle (Medium), and 4 wire saddles (Small).
Wire Saddle
(Small)
x2
Wire Saddle (Large)
Wire Saddle (Large)

Wire Saddle (Small)
F-9-747
F-9-745
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-746
9-274
9-275
4 screws (TP; M3x6)
6 Connectors
CAUTION:
1 Edge Saddle
"B".
7 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
faces up.
CHB
CHA
the installation.
Connector
Wire Saddle
Connector
Wire
Saddle
x6
x8
x4
Edge Saddle
Power
Cable
Connector
Wire
Saddle
Signal Cable
STS Cable
F-9-749
F-9-748
9-275
9-276
Encryption Board.
1 Connector
7 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
the installation.
LED Cable
LED Board
LED Cable
F-9-750
Wire Saddle
x7
1 Screw (TP; M3x6)
Wire Saddle
[A]
Connector
Wire Saddle
F-9-752
F-9-751
9-276
2) Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Cable to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
NOTE:
Board.

Slo
Slo
t.2 (
t.1 (
HD
HD
D2)
D1)
9-277
CH
CH
Connect the Power Cable (Long) and the Signal Cable (Red)(Long) of the Slot.1 (on the
host machine side) to CH A.
Connect the Power Cable (Short) and the Signal Cable (Blue)(Short) of the Slot.2 (on the
rear side) to CH B.
Power Cable (Short)
Power Cable (Long)

Power Cable (Short)
Signal Cable (Red)(Short)
Signal Cable (Blue)(Long)
Signal Cable
(Blue)(Short)
F-9-753
Signal Cable
(Red)(Long)
1) Insert 2/3 of the HDD Unit along with the rail on the host machine.
Power Cable (Long)
F-9-755
F-9-754
9-277
9-278
6) Secure the cables (Long) of the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) as shown in the figure.
2 Wire Saddles
NOTE:
NOTE:
Secure the cables (Long) of the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) using the Wire
Saddles [A] with the cables wound 1 time.

Wire Saddle
[A]
x2
[A]
Gasket Cover Plate
F-9-757
F-9-756
7) Insert the removable HDD.

CAUTION:
Be sure to insert the HDD No. 1 to the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) and insert the
HDD No. 2 to the Slot.2 (on the rear side).
F-9-758
9-278
HDD Lid.
11)
9-279

CAUTION:
CAUTION:
HDD Cover (Close)

F-9-759

10)
12)
13)
Handle Label
F-9-760
9-279
Installation > [TYPE-8] > After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
9-280


CAUTION:
1. Requirements
1) PC

3) Turn on the PC.
mark:


) is
5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
download mode.
9-280
9-281


following:
CAUTION:

value.
HDD1(Slot1)

HDD2(Slot2)
F-9-761
9-281
[TYPE-9]
9-282

2 Option HDDs (1TB)
2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit

[2] HDD X 1
Dumper X 4
[4] Spacer X 4
[5] Screw
(W sems; M3x14) X 4
[6] Screw
(TP; M3x6) X 2

& Mirroring Kit
not torn.
[7] Gasket X 1
F-9-762
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
9-282
Removable HDD Kit


X2
[2] IV Cable
X1
[8] HDD Cover X 2
9-283

X2

X1

Label X 1
[15] Screw
[16] Screw
[6] HDD Handle X 2

Block X 2
F-9-764
< CD/ Guides >

F-9-763
FCC/IC Sheet
9-283

[1] Signal Cable
(340mm (Red)) x 1
[4] Power Cable

(430mm) x 1
[10] STS Cable

[2] Signal Cable

(450mm (Red)) x 1
[5] Power Cable

(430mm) x 1


x5
[14] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 10
[3] Signal Cable

(370mm (Blue)) x 1
[6] Power Cable

(320mm) x 1
[9] LED Cable

(290mm) x 1
Use 5 of them
[17] Signal Cable

(80mm (Blue)) x 1
[18] Power Cable

(80mm) x 2
9-284
[16] Signal Cable

(80mm (Red)) x 1
[20] LED Cable

(1200mm) x 1
[21] STS Cable

[24] HDD Connection

Plate x 1
[25] Ring Core x 1

x1
Use 4 of them
x1
F-9-766
F-9-765
9-284
9-285

FCC/IC Sheet

FCC/IC Sheet

[A]
CAUTION:
F-9-767

2 Screws

x2

F-9-768
9-285
2 Screws
9 Screws
9-286
x9
x2
F-9-771
F-9-769
2 Screws
x2
F-9-770
F-9-772
9-286
9-287
CAUTION:
2 Wire Saddles
2 Connectors
Unit step 5.)
Grounding Plate
x2
Wire Saddle
x2
Connector
F-9-775
F-9-773
10)
[A]
F-9-776
F-9-774
9-287
9
11)
9-288

2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
5 Wire Saddles
Connector
x2
x6
Edge Saddle
F-9-778
Wire Saddle
F-9-777

F-9-779
9-288
9-289

x2
F-9-780
F-9-782
2 Bosses
2 Arms
Boss
Arm
Boss
Turn over
F-9-781
F-9-783
9-289
9-290
2 Bosses
2 Bosses
2 Screws

NOTE:
x2
Lower Rail
Boss
Boss
F-9-784
NOTE:
x2
Boss
Boss
Boss
Boss
x2
Screw
Upper Rail
F-9-785
Boss
Boss
F-9-786
9-290
9
10)
remove the Upper Drawer Cable (The Signal Cable Red side).
12)
9-291
2 Screws
2 Springs
x2
Drawer Cable
x2
Edge Saddle
Washer
Spring
F-9-789
Screw
13)
F-9-787
11)
2 Screws
2 Springs
IV Cable
x2
x2
Washer
Spring
Screw
F-9-790
F-9-788
9-291
9
14)
9-292
NOTE:

1 HDD Support Plate
4 Spacers
1 Option HDD
NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate
F-9-791

CAUTION:
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-793
Option HDD
Connector
Screw hole
HDD Connector Plate
Label
Connector
x4
HDD Kit)
HDD Support Plate

Spacer
Screw hole
F-9-792
Damper
F-9-794
9-292
x2
CAUTION:
9-293
Boss
Connector.
Hole
F-9-797

1 Claw
F-9-795
CAUTION:
screw.

CAUTION:
Claw
F-9-798
F-9-796
9-293
9-294
8) Assemble the other Option HDD (1TB) in the same way according to steps 1 to 5.

CAUTION:
screw.
10)
Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the
number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.
x2
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-801
F-9-799
1) Install the 3 wire saddles (Large) (one of them is included in the HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD
Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit, and two of them are included in the Removable HDD Kit),
1 wire saddle (Medium), and 4 wire saddles (Small).
Wire Saddle
(Small)
HDD No.
Wire Saddle (Large)
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
Wire Saddle (Large)

Wire Saddle (Small)
F-9-800
F-9-802
9-294
9-295
4 screws (TP; M3x6)
6 Connectors
CAUTION:
1 Edge Saddle
"B".
7 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
faces up.
CHB
CHA
the installation.
Connector
Wire Saddle
Connector
Wire
Saddle
x6
x8
x4
Edge Saddle
Power
Cable
Connector
Wire
Saddle
Signal Cable
STS Cable
F-9-804
F-9-803
9-295
9-296
Encryption Board.
1 Connector
7 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
the installation.
LED Cable
LED Board
LED Cable
F-9-805
Wire Saddle
x7
1 Screw (TP; M3x6)
Wire Saddle
[A]
Connector
Wire Saddle
F-9-807
F-9-806
9-296
Installation > [TYPE-9] > Installation Procedure > Installing the Removable HDD Unit
Installing the Removable HDD Unit
2) Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Cable to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
NOTE:
Board.
Slo
Slo
t.2 (
t.1 (
HD
HD
D2)
D1)
9-297
Connect the Power Cable (Long) and the Signal Cable (Red)(Long) of the Slot.1 (on the
host machine side) to CH A.
Connect the Power Cable (Short) and the Signal Cable (Blue)(Short) of the Slot.2 (on the
rear side) to CH B.
CH
CH
Power Cable (Long)

Power Cable (Short)
Signal Cable (Red)(Short)
Signal Cable (Blue)(Long)
Power Cable (Short)
Signal Cable
(Blue)(Short)
F-9-808
Signal Cable
(Red)(Long)
Power Cable (Long)
F-9-810
F-9-809
9-297
9-298
6) Secure the cables (Long) of the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) as shown in the figure.
2 Wire Saddles
NOTE:
NOTE:
Secure the cables (Long) of the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) using the Wire
Saddles [A] with the cables wound 1 time.

Wire Saddle
[A]
x2
[A]
Gasket Cover Plate
F-9-812
F-9-811
7) Insert the removable HDD.

CAUTION:
Be sure to insert the HDD No. 1 to the Slot.1 (on the host machine side) and insert the
HDD No. 2 to the Slot.2 (on the rear side).
F-9-813
9-298
HDD Lid.
11)
9-299

CAUTION:
CAUTION:
HDD Cover (Close)

F-9-814

10)
12)
13)
Handle Label
F-9-815
9-299

9-300

1. Requirements
1) PC
CAUTION:

3) Turn on the PC.

mark:

5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
) is

download mode.
8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode
9-300
9-301

Work (only when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
has been installed)

following:
CAUTION:

value.
HDD1(Slot1)

HDD2(Slot2)
F-9-816
9-301
[TYPE-10]
9-302
Standard HDD + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

& Mirroring Kit
Removable HDD Kit

[2] IV Cable
X1
not torn.
[6] HDD Handle X 2
Use 1 of them

X2
[8] HDD Cover X 2
Use 1 of them
Use 1 of them

Block X 2
Use 1 of them
F-9-817
9-302
9
X2

X1
Use 1 of them

Label X 1




A:Cont-Pow) x 1

A:HDD-Pow2) x 1

A:HDD-Pow1) x 1
[9] LED Cable

[10] STS Cable

A:STS-Sig) x 1

x5

x1
[15] Screw
Use 5 of them
[16] Screw
9-303
Use 2 of them
F-9-818
< CD/ Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
Use 4 of them
x1
F-9-819
9-303
9
[14] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 10
9-304
< CD/Guides >


Use 5 of them
FCC/IC Sheet


A:HDD-Pow1/2) x 2
CAUTION:
[20] LED Cable

[21] STS Cable

A:STS-Sig) x 1


[24] HDD Connection

Plate x 1
[25] Ring Core x 1
F-9-820
9-304
9-305
2 Screws
x2
[A]
F-9-823
F-9-821
2 Screws

2 Screws
x2
x2
F-9-824
F-9-822
9-305
9-306
9 Screws
2 Wire Saddles
2 Connectors
Unit step 5.)
x9
x2
Wire Saddle
x2
Connector
F-9-825

F-9-827
[A]
F-9-826
F-9-828
9-306
9
CAUTION:
11)
9-307

2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
5 Wire Saddles
Grounding Plate
Connector
x2
x6
Edge Saddle
F-9-829
Wire Saddle
10)
F-9-831
F-9-830
9-307
9-308
3) Remove the HDD.
F-9-834
F-9-832

F-9-835
F-9-833
9-308
9-309
2 Bosses
x2
x2
Boss
F-9-836
Boss
F-9-838

2 Bosses
NOTE:
2 Arms
Boss
Arm
Boss
Boss
Boss
Turn over
Screw
F-9-837
Upper Rail
F-9-839
9-309
2 Bosses
10)
9-310
2 Screws
2 Screws
2 Springs
NOTE:
x2
Lower Rail
Drawer Cable
Edge Saddle
Washer
Spring
Screw
F-9-841
x2
Boss
Boss
11)
x2
x2
F-9-842
Boss
Boss
F-9-840
9-310
9
12)
14)
9-311
x2
F-9-843
13)
F-9-845
15)
2 Screws
2 Springs
x2
IV Cable
Washer
Spring
F-9-846
Screw
F-9-844
9-311
9-312

Host Machine
NOTE:
4 Screws (W Sems)
1 HDD Support Plate
1 HDD Support Plate

1 HDD
4 Screws (W Sems)
x4
NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate
HDD
HDD Support Plate
F-9-847
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-849
CAUTION:
HDD

Connector
Screw hole
Label
x4
HDD Connector
Plate
Connector
Screw hole
F-9-848
HDD Support Plate

F-9-850
9-312
9-313
x2
CAUTION:
Boss
Connector.
Hole
F-9-853

1 Claw
F-9-851
CAUTION:
screw.

CAUTION:
Claw
F-9-854
F-9-852
9-313
9-314

1) Install the 3 wire saddles (Large) (one of them is included in the HDD Data Encryption
& Mirroring Kit, and two of them are included in the Removable HDD Kit), 1 wire saddle
CAUTION:
screw.
(Medium), and 4 wire saddles (Small).
Wire Saddle
(Small)
x2
Wire Saddle (Large)
Wire Saddle (Large)

Wire Saddle (Small)
F-9-857
F-9-855
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-856
9-314
9-315
4 screws (TP; M3x6)

6 Connectors
CAUTION:
1 Edge Saddle
"B".
7 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
operations.
CHB
CHA
the installation.
Connector
Wire Saddle
Connector
Wire
Saddle
x6
x8
x4
Edge Saddle
Power
Cable
Connector
Wire
Saddle
Signal Cable
STS Cable
F-9-859
F-9-858
9-315
9-316

1 Connector
7 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
the installation.
LED Cable
LED Board
LED Cable
F-9-860
Wire Saddle
x7
1 Screw (TP; M3x6)
Wire Saddle
Connector
Wire Saddle
[A]
F-9-862
F-9-861
9-316
9-317
2) Connect the Power Cable (Long) and the Signal Cable (Long) of the Slot.2 (on the rear
side) to CH A on the Encryption Board.
NOTE:
No HDD to Slot.1
Slo
Slo
t.2 (
t.1 (
HD
Bla
D1)
nk)
CH
CH
Power Cable (Short)
Power Cable (Long)
Signal Cable (Short)
Signal Cable (Long)

F-9-863
Power Cable (Long)
Signal Cable (Long)
F-9-865
F-9-864
9-317
9-318
Saddle.
NOTE:
7) Secure the cable (Long) of the Slot.2 (on the rear side) as shown in the figure.
2 Wire Saddles
NOTE:

Wire Saddle
x2
[A]
[A]
Gasket Cover Plate

F-9-866
F-9-867
F-9-868
9-318
HDD Lid.
12)
9-319

CAUTION:
CAUTION:
HDD Cover (Close)

F-9-869
10)
Close the HDD Lid.
11)
13)
Handle Label
F-9-870
9-319
Installation > [TYPE-10] > Checking the Security Mark
9-320

1. Requirements
CAUTION:
1) PC

3) Turn on the PC.


mark:

5) Click REGISTER.

6) Click OK.
) is

download mode.
Installation > [TYPE-10] > Checking the Security Mark
9-320
9-321

Work
following:
HDD1(Slot1)
F-9-871

9-321
[TYPE-11]
9-322
Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

& Mirroring Kit
Option HDD (1TB)

[2] HDD X 1
Dumper X 4
[4] Spacer X 4
[5] Screw
(W sems; M3x14) X 4
[6] Screw
(TP; M3x6) X 2
not torn.
[7] Gasket X 1
F-9-872
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
9-322
Removable HDD Kit


X2
[2] IV Cable
X1

X1
[15] Screw
Use 1 of them

Label X 1
9-323
Use 5 of them
[6] HDD Handle X 2
Use 1 of them
[16] Screw
X2
Use 1 of them
[8] HDD Cover X 2
Use 1 of them

Block X 2
Use 2 of them
Use 1 of them
F-9-874
< CD/ Guides >

F-9-873
FCC/IC Sheet
9-323


A:Cont-Pow) x 1
[10] STS Cable

A:STS-Sig) x 1


A:HDD-Pow2) x 1

x5
[14] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 10

9-324



A:HDD-Pow1/2) x 2
[20] LED Cable

[21] STS Cable

A:STS-Sig) x 1
[24] HDD Connection

Plate x 1
[25] Ring Core x 1
Use 5 of them

A:HDD-Pow1) x 1
[9] LED Cable


x1
Use 4 of them
x1
F-9-876
F-9-875
9-324
9-325
< CD/Guides >


FCC/IC Sheet

CAUTION:
[A]
F-9-877


2 Screws

x2

F-9-878
9-325
2 Screws
9 Screws
9-326
x9
x2
F-9-881
F-9-879
2 Screws
x2
F-9-880
F-9-882
9-326
9-327
CAUTION:
2 Wire Saddles
2 Connectors
Unit step 5.)
Grounding Plate
x2
Wire Saddle
x2
Connector
F-9-885
F-9-883
10)
[A]
F-9-886
F-9-884
9-327
9
11)
9-328

2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
5 Wire Saddles
Connector
x2
x6
Edge Saddle
F-9-888
Wire Saddle
F-9-887

F-9-889
9-328
9-329

x2
F-9-890
F-9-892
2 Bosses
2 Arms
Boss
Arm
Boss
Turn over
F-9-891
F-9-893
9-329
9-330
2 Bosses
2 Bosses
2 Screws

NOTE:
x2
Lower Rail
Boss
Boss
F-9-894
NOTE:
x2
Boss
Boss
Boss
Boss
x2
Screw
Upper Rail
F-9-895
Boss
Boss
F-9-896
9-330
9
10)
12)
9-331
2 Screws
2 Springs
x2
x2
Drawer Cable
Edge Saddle
Washer
Spring
F-9-899
Screw
13)
F-9-897
11)
2 Screws
2 Springs
x2
x2
IV Cable
Washer
Spring
Screw
F-9-898
F-9-900
9-331
9
14)
9-332
CAUTION:
Screw hole
Label
Connector
F-9-901
15)
Screw hole
F-9-903
F-9-902
9-332
NOTE:
9-333

CAUTION:
Connector.

1 HDD Support Plate
4 Spacers
1 Option HDD
NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate

F-9-906
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-904
Option HDD
Connector
HDD Connector Plate
x4
HDD Kit)
HDD Support Plate

Spacer
Damper
F-9-905
9-333
9-334

1 Claw
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
screw.
F-9-907
Claw
F-9-909
x2
Boss
CAUTION:
screw.
Hole
x2
F-9-908
F-9-910
9-334
4 screws (TP; M3x6)
9-335

CAUTION:
"B".
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
CHB
CHA
F-9-911

1) Install the 3 wire saddles (Large) (one of them is included in the HDD Data Encryption
& Mirroring Kit, and two of them are included in the Removable HDD Kit), 1 wire saddle
(Medium), and 4 wire saddles (Small).
x4
Wire Saddle
(Small)
Wire Saddle (Large)
Wire Saddle (Large)

F-9-913

Wire Saddle (Small)
F-9-912
9-335
9-336

6 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
7 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
LED Cable
operations.
LED Board

the installation.
Connector
Wire Saddle
1 Screw (TP; M3x6)
Connector
Wire
Saddle
x6
x8
F-9-915
Edge Saddle
Power
Cable
[A]
Connector
Wire
Saddle
Signal Cable
STS Cable
F-9-914
F-9-916
9-336
9-337

1 Connector
NOTE:
7 Wire Saddles

No HDD to Slot.1
CAUTION:
the installation.
Slo
Slo
t.2 (
t.1 (
LED Cable
HD
Bla
D1)
nk)
CH
CH
Wire Saddle
x7
Power Cable (Long)
Signal Cable (Long)

F-9-918
Connector
Wire Saddle
Wire Saddle
F-9-917
F-9-919
9-337
2) Connect the Power Cable (Long) and the Signal Cable (Long) of the Slot.2 (on the rear
9-338
side) to CH A on the Encryption Board.

NOTE:
Power Cable (Short)
Signal Cable (Short)
[A]
Gasket Cover Plate

F-9-921
Power Cable (Long)

Signal Cable (Long)
F-9-920
9-338
Saddle.
9-339
HDD Lid.
7) Secure the cable (Long) of the Slot.2 (on the rear side) as shown in the figure.
2 Wire Saddles
NOTE:
Wire Saddle
[A]
x2

F-9-924
10)
Close the HDD Lid.
11)
Handle Label
F-9-922
F-9-925
F-9-923
9-339
9
12)
9-340
CAUTION:
1. Requirements
1) PC
CAUTION:

HDD Cover (Close)
3) Turn on the PC.

13)

5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
download mode.
9-340
9-341
HDD1(Slot1)
CAUTION:

F-9-926
mark:
) is
9-341
9-342

Work
following:

9-342
Appendix
Tools
Service
Timing Chart
General
Circuit Diagram
General
of User Mode
List
Data
Backup
of HDD partition
Detail
Counter List
Soft
Removal
Appendix > Service Tools > Special Tools
II
Service Tools
Special Tools
In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine:
Tool No.
Ctgr
Digital multimeter
Tool name
FY9-2002
Door Switch
TKN-0093
Tester extension pin
FY9-3038
Tester extension pin

(L-shaped)
FY9-3039
Appearance
Remarks
Used as a probe extension when making electrical checks.
Use for electrical checks.
II
Tool No.
Ctgr
CA-7 test Sheet
Tool name
FY9-9323
Appearance
Used for adjusting/checking images.
Loupe
CK-0056
Used for checking images.
Cleaning tool
To clean the feed guide- This is not a service tool.- 1 of this are
enclosed at shipment of the host machine.
Tospearl 240
FY9-6007-000
ITB Cleaning Blade Lubricant.
III
Remarks
III
Appendix > Service Tools > Solvents and Oils
Tool name
Tool No.
Ctgr
Electrode for checking potential

sensor
FY9-3059
Appearance
IV
Remarks
Surface potential sensor for zero-level check
Reference: Category
T-10-1
A: Must be kept by each service engineer.

B: Must be kept by each group of about five engineers.
C: Must be kept by each warkshop
Solvents and Oils

Item
Uses
Composition
Remarks
Alcohol
Cleaning; e.g.,
glass, plastic, rubber; external covers.
Fluoride-family hydrocarbon
Alcohol
Surface activating
Water
Do not bring near fire.

Procure locally.
Substitute:
IPA(isopropy alcohol)
Solvent
Cleaning; e.g.,
metal; oil or toner stain.
Fluoride-family hydrocarbon
Chlorine-family hydrocarbon
Alcohol
Do not bring near fire.

Procure locally.
Substitute:MEK
Heat-resisting grease
Lubrication; e.g., fixing drive areas.
Mineral oil-family lithium soap

Molybdenum disulfide
MO-138S
Tool No: CK-0427 (500 g/can)
Mineral oil (paraffin-family)
Tool No: CK-0524 (100 cc)
Lubricating oil
Lubricating oil
Lubrication; e.g., drive areas, friction areas.
Silicone oil
Tool No: CK-0551 (20 g)
Lubricating oil
(EM-50L)
Lubrication; e.g., gears.
Special oil
Special solid lubricating agent
Lithium soap
Tool No: HY9-0007
Lubricating oil
Lubrication; e.g., scanner rail.
Synthetic oil
Synthetic oil
NTN Corporation EU-1
Tool No. : FY9-6028 (50 cc)
Conducting grease
Lubrication; e.g., edge of secondary transfer outer roller, drum heater sliding
area.
Fluorine poly wthyl

Polytetra fluorune ethylene
Tool No: FY9-6008
Conducting grease
Lubrication; e.g., edge of secondary transfer inner roller
poly--olefin
Tool No: FY9-6006

T-10-2
Appendix > Service Tools > Solvents and Oils
IV
Basic sequence at power ON
Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at power ON
Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at power ON
General Timing Chart
Main power ON
WMUP(approx. 30 sec)
Purint Unit
Laser
system
WMUPR *Estimated time differs depending on models
STBY
Laser scanner motor(M8083)

Drum motor(M19/M21/M23/M25)
ITB drive motor(M3)
Cleaning
Pre-exposure LED(LED14)
Primary charging AC bias(Color)
Primary charging DC bias(Color)
Image
formation
system
Grid DC bias(Bk)
Developing AC bias(Color)
Developing DC bias(Color)
Developing stirring motor(M26M29)
Developing sleeve drive motor
(M18/M20/M22/M24)
AC bias(Bk)
DC bias(Bk)
Primary transfer bias
Fixing
system
Pickup/
feed system
Fixing motor(M48)
IH heater/Halogen heater(H5)
tray drive motor
:Standby speed
F-10-1
VI
Printer unit
PSTBY
Flying start
PINTR
PRINT
LSTR *1
Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing <Condition:Full color, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>
Start key ON
PSTBY
Laser scanner motor

(M8083)
PTOP signal
Laser Y ON
Laser M ON
Laser C ON
Laser Bk ON
Drum motor
(M19/M21/M23/M25)
Detachment
Engagement
Detachment
ITB drive motor(M3)

LED(Y)(LED2)
LED(M)(LED3)
LED(C)(LED4)
LED(Bk)(LED1)
Primary charging AC bias(Y)
Primary charging AC bias(M)
Primary charging AC bias(C)
Primary charging DC bias(Y)
Primary charging DC bias(M)
Primary charging DC bias(C)
Grid DC bias(Bk)
Developing AC bias(Y)
Developing AC bias(M)
Developing AC bias(C)
Developing DC bias(Y)
Developing DC bias(M)
Developing DC bias(C)
Developing stirring
motor(Y)(M26)
Developing stirring
motor(M)(M28)
Developing stirring
motor(C)(M27)
Developing stirring
motor(Bk)(M29)
motor(Y)(M20)
motor(M)(M22)
motor(C)(M24)
motor(Bk)(M18)
Primary transfer bias(Y)
Primary transfer bias(M)
Primary transfer bias(C)
ATVC
Secondary transfer
cleaning bias
Positive bias
Negative bias
Positive bias
Negative bias
Positive bias
Negative bias
Fixing
system
Pickup/feed system
Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing <Condition:Full color, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>
Basic sequence at printing <Condition:Full color, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>
Fixing motor(M48)
IH heater
/Halogen heater(H5)
(M44)
(M40)
(M39)
Reverse motor(M38)
Reverse upper wheel
Delivery motor(M37)
:Standby speed
F-10-2
VI
VII
Laser exposure
system
Printer unit
PSTBY
Flying start
PINTR
PRINT
LSTR *1
Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing <Condition:Monochrome, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>
Start key ON
PSTBY
Laser scanner motor

(M8083)
PTOP signal
Laser Bk ON
Detachment
Engagement
Detachment
Drum motor(M19)
ITB drive motor(M3)
LED(Bk)(LED1)
Grid DC bias(Bk)
Developing stirring
motor(M29)
motor(M18)
ATVC
Secondary transfer
cleaning bias
Negative bias
Positive bias
Negative bias
Positive bias
Negative bias
Fixing
system
Pickup/feed system
Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing <Condition:Monochrome, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>
Basic sequence at printing <Condition:Monochrome, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>
Fixing motor(M48)
IH heater
/Halogen heater(H5)
(M44)
(M40)
(M39)
Reverse motor(M38)
Reverse upper wheel
:Standby speed
F-10-3
VII
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > Signal Input/Output List
General Circuit Diagram
Jack No.
J1212
Signal Input/Output List

Jack No.
J1210
Abbreviated Signal Name

E1_HOB_SERIAL_TX1E1_HOB_SERIAL_TX1+
E1_HOB_SERIAL_CLK1+
E1_HOB_SERIAL_CLK1E1_HOB_SERIAL_RX1E1_HOB_SERIAL_RX1+
J1211
DRUM_ITB_RESET
E2_EX_SERIAL_TX1
E2_EX_SERIAL_RX1
E2_EX_SERIAL_CLK1
E2_STM_CLK1_BUF
E2_STM_CLK2_BUF
E2_STM_CLK3_BUF
E2_STM_CLK4_BUF
BUF_CNCT
BUF_RESET
FIN_RMT

E2_EX_SERIAL_TX2E2_EX_SERIAL_TX2+
Signal Name
Drum ITB High Speed Serial Communication
Transmission Signal (Differential -)
Transmission Signal (Differential +)
Drum ITB High Speed Serial Communication Clock
Signal (Differential +)
Drum ITB High Speed Serial Communication Clock
Signal (Differential -)
Reception Signal (Differential -)
Reception Signal (Differential +)
Drum ITB Reset
Buffer Driver High Speed Serial Transmission
Signal
Buffer Driver High Speed Serial Reception Signal
Buffer Driver Restraint Serial Clock Signal
Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 1
Clock
Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 2
Clock
Decurler Feed 1 Motor Clock
Decurler Feed 2 Motor Clock
Buffer Driver Connection Detection Signal
Buffer Driver Reset Signal
Finisher Remote
E2_EX_SERIAL_CLK2+
E2_EX_SERIAL_CLK2E2_EX_SERIAL_RX2E2_EX_SERIAL_RX2+
E2_EX_SERIAL_CLK3+
E2_EX_SERIAL_CLK4+
MDECK_RESET
MDECK_REMOTE
MDECK_AD_CS
MDECK_EEP_ES
MDECK_ADEEP_CLK
MDECK_ADEEP_DOUT
MDECK_ADEEP_DIN
MDECK_CNCT_IN
VIII
Signal Name
Multi Deck High Speed Serial Transmission Signal
2 (Differential -)
2 (Differential +)
Multi Deck High Speed Serial Clock Signal 2
(Differential +)
(Differential -)
Multi Deck High Speed Serial Reception Signal 2
(Differential -)
(Differential +)
3 (Differential -)
3 (Differential +)
(Differential +)
(Differential -)
(Differential -)
(Differential +)
4 (Differential -)
4 (Differential +)
(Differential +)
(Differential -)
(Differential -)
(Differential +)
Multi Deck Reset
Multi Deck Remote (Power Supply Remote)
Multi Deck A/D Chip Selection
Multi Deck EEPROM Chip Selection
Multi Deck A/D, EEPROM Clock
Multi Deck A/D, EEPROM Data Output (Multi Deck
=> DCON)
Multi Deck A/D, EEPROM Data Input (DCON =>
Multi Deck)
Multi Deck Connection Detection
VIII
Jack No.
J1213

DIFF_EX_SERIAL_TX
DIFF_EX_SERIAL_RX
DIFF_EX_SERIAL_CLK
J1214
HOPPER_RESET
E1_EX_SERIAL_RX0E1_EX_SERIAL_RX0+
E1_EX_SERIAL_CLK0+
E1_EX_SERIAL_CLK0UNDER_BLT_COOL_FAN_STS
3.3v_CONNECT_A_IN
E1_PWM0
E1_EX_SERIAL_TX1
E1_EX_SERIAL_RX1
E1_EX_SERIAL_CLK1
OHP_SNS
TEIHAN_RESET
FUSER_BELT_YORI_ERR
Signal Name
Jack No.
Hopper Driver High Speed Serial Communication

Transmission Signal
Reception Signal
Clock Signal
Hopper Driver Reset Signal
Fixing Feed Driver High Speed Serial Reception
Signal 0 (Differential -)
Fixing Feed Driver High Speed Serial Reception
Signal 0 (Differential +)
Fixing Feed Driver High Speed Serial Transmission
Signal 0 (Differential -)
Fixing Feed Driver High Speed Serial Transmission
Signal 0 (Differential +)
Fixing Feed Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal
0 (Differential -)
Fixing Feed Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal
0 (Differential +)
Pressure Belt Cooling Fan (Front)/(Rear) Lower Belt
Cooling Fan Status Signal
Drawer A Connection Detection Signal
Fixing Motor Clock Signal
Fixing Feed Driver PCB/Fixing Feed Driver High
Speed Serial Transmission Signal 1
Speed Serial Reception Signal 1
Speed Serial Clock Signal 1
OHP Sensor Detection Signal
Fixing Feed Driver PCB/Fixing Feed Driver Reset
Signal
Fixing Belt Displacement Error Signal
J1215

E1_EX_SERIAL_TX2
E1_EX_SERIAL_RX2
E1_EX_SERIAL_CLK2
E1_EX_SERIAL_TX3
E1_EX_SERIAL_RX3
E1_EX_SERIAL_CLK3
E1_STM_CLK0
E1_STM_CLK1
E1_STM_CLK2
E1_STM_CLK3
E1_STM_CLK4
E1_STM_CLK5
E1_STM_CLK6
E1_STM_CLK7
E1_STM_CLK8
E1_STM_CLK9
E1_STM_CLK10
WIDTH_OF_PAPER_DTC
MULTI_LAST_PAPER_DTC_SNS
FEED_RESET
E1_PWM1
IX
Signal Name
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Transmission
Signal 2
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Reception Signal 2
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 2
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Transmission
Signal 3
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Reception Signal 3
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 3
Delivery Motor Clock
Reverse Motor Clock
Left Deck Pickup Motor Clock
Right Deck Pickup Motor Clock
Cassette 3 Pickup Motor Clock
Cassette 4 Pickup Motor Clock
Secondary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor
Clock
Clock
Cassette Vertical Path Motor Clock
Right Deck Vertical Path Motor Clock
Left Deck Vertical Path Motor Clock
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection Signal
Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor Detection
Pickup Driver Reset Signal
Delivery Flapper Solenoid PWM Signal
IX
Jack No.
J1220

MOTOR_ID
Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW
Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC
Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC
Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG
M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW
M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC
M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC
M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG
C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW
C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC
C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC
J1223
J1225
C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG
12V-MONI
IH-ERROR
PWM1_OUT
PWM2_OUT
IH_RELAY_ON_2
IH_RELAY_ON_1
IH_VOLTAGE
IH_CURRENT
IH-ENB
2ND_HEAT_CASE_THERM1
2ND_HEAT_CASE_THERM2
2ND_HEAT_FILM_THERM1
2ND_HEAT_FILM_THERM2
IH_MAIN_THERM
IH_SUB1_THERM
IH_SUB2_THERM
IH_THERM_CNCT
UNDER_BELT_YORI_2
UNDER_BELT_YORI_1
2ND_HEAT_SUB2_THERM
2ND_HEAT_SUB1_THERM
2ND_HEAT_THERM_CNCT
Signal Name
Motor ID
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Y) Rotation
Direction Signal
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Y) Acceleration
Signal
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Y) Deceleration
Signal
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Y) FG Signal
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (M) Rotation
Direction Signal
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (M) Acceleration
Signal
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (M) Deceleration
Signal
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (M) FG Signal
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (C) Rotation
Direction Signal
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (C) Acceleration
Signal
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (C) Deceleration
Signal
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (C) FG Signal
IH Power Supply 12V Monitor
IH Power Supply Error Signal
IH Power Supply PWM Output 1
IH Power Supply PWM Output 2
IH Power Supply Relay ON 2
IH Power Supply Relay ON 1
IH Power Supply Voltage Monitor
IH Power Supply Current Monitor
IH Power Supply Enable
Pressure Main Thermistor Case 1 Signal
Pressure Main Thermistor Case 2 Signal
Pressure Main Thermistor Film 1 Signal
Pressure Main Thermistor Film 2 Signal
Fixing Main Thermistor Signal
Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 Signal (Rear)
Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 Signal (Front)
Fixing Thermistor Connection Detection Signal
Pressure Belt Displacement 2 Detection Signal
Pressure Belt Displacement 1Detection Signal
Pressure Sub Thermistor 2 Signal (Front)
Pressure Sub Thermistor 1 Signal (Rear)
Pressure Sub Thermistor Connection Detection
Jack No.
J1226
J1227
J1230
Signal Name
DRUM_SURF_TEMP_LIMIT
Drum Surface Temperature Limit Detection
DRUM_SURF_THP
Drum Surface Temperature
DRUM_HEATER_THM_S_50_LMT Drum Heater (Bk) Thermistor 50 DegC Limit
Detection
DRUM_HEATER_THM_P_42_5_ Drum Heater (Bk) Thermopile 42.5 DegC Detection
DTC
DRUM_HEATER_THM_S_CNCT Drum Heater (Bk) Thermistor Connection Detection
BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Bk) Rotation
Direction Signal
BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Bk) Acceleration
Signal
BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Bk) Deceleration
Signal
BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG
Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Bk) FG Signal
CLN_DRIVE_MTR_CW
Drum Cleaning/Waste Toner Feed Drive Motor
Rotation Direction Signal
CLN_DRIVE_MTR_ACC
Acceleration Signal
CLN_DRIVE_MTR_DEC
Deceleration Signal
CLN_DRIVE_MTR_FG
Drum Cleaning/Waste Toner Feed Drive Motor FG
Signal
GRID_CONT
Grid High Voltage Control
BK_PRIM_CONT
Primary Charging Control (Bk)
HV_PRIM_GRID_ON
Grid High Voltage ON
HV_RMT_PRIM
Primary Charging High Voltage Remote
Jack No.
J1231
J1232
J1233

CMN_CK_25
PR_AC_CLK
AC_VSNS_C
AC_ISNS_C
PR_AC_CONT_C
PR_AC_CC_ON_C
PR_AC_CV_ON_C
PR_DC_CONT_C
PR_DC_ON_C
AC_VSNS_M
AC_ISNS_M
PR_AC_CONT_M
PR_AC_CC_ON_M
PR_AC_CV_ON_M
PR_DC_CONT_M
PR_DC_ON_M
AC_VSNS_Y
AC_ISNS_Y
PR_AC_CONT_Y
PR_AC_CC_ON_Y
PR_AC_CV_ON_Y
PR_DC_CONT_Y
PR_DC_ON_Y
HV_RMT_PRIM
BK_DEV_AC_CONT
BK_DEV_AC_ON
BK_DEV_DC_CONT
BK_DEV_DC_ON
DEV_CLK_B_TO_HV
DEV_CLK_A_TO_HV
Y_DEV_AC_CONT
Y_DEV_AC_ON
Y_DEV_DC_CONT
Y_DEV_DC_ON
HV_RMT_DEV
M_DEV_AC_CONT
M_DEV_AC_ON
M_DEV_DC_CONT
M_DEV_DC_ON
C_DEV_AC_CONT
C_DEV_AC_ON
C_DEV_DC_CONT
C_DEV_DC_ON
Signal Name
Jack No.
Common Clock 25kHz

Primary Charging AC Clock
Primary Charging Voltage Monitor (C)
Primary Charging Current Monitor (C)
Primary Charging AC Control (C)
Primary Charging Current Control ON (C)
Primary Charging Constant Voltage Control ON (C)
Primary Charging DC Control (C)
Primary Charging DC ON (C)
Primary Charging Voltage Monitor (M)
Primary Charging Current Monitor (M)
Primary Charging AC Control (M)
Primary Charging Current Control ON (M)
Primary Charging Constant Voltage Control ON (M)
Primary Charging DC Control (M)
Primary Charging DC ON (M)
Primary Charging Voltage Monitor (Y)
Primary Charging Current Monitor (Y)
Primary Charging AC Control (Y)
Primary Charging Current Control ON (Y)
Primary Charging Constant Voltage Control ON (Y)
Primary Charging DC Control (Y)
Primary Charging DC ON (Y)
Primary Charging High Voltage Remote
Developing High Voltage AC Control (Bk)
Developing High Voltage AC ON (Bk)
Developing High Voltage DC Control (Bk)
Developing High Voltage DC ON (Bk)
Developing High Voltage Clock B
Developing High Voltage Clock A
Developing High Voltage AC Control (Y)
Developing High Voltage AC ON (Y)
Developing High Voltage DC Control (Y)
Developing High Voltage DC ON (Y)
Developing High Voltage Remote
Developing High Voltage AC Control (M)
Developing High Voltage AC ON (M)
Developing High Voltage DC Control (M)
Developing High Voltage DC ON (M)
Developing High Voltage AC Control (C)
Developing High Voltage AC ON (C)
Developing High Voltage DC Control (C)
Developing High Voltage DC ON (C)
J1234
J1235
J1236

M_TR1_VOLTAGE
M_TR1_CURRENT
M_P_CC_CONT
M_P_CV_CONT
M_P_CC_ON
M_P_CV_ON
Y_TR1_VOLTAGE
CMN_CK_70_TO_HV
Y_TR1_CURRENT
Y_P_CC_CONT
Y_P_CV_CONT
Y_P_CC_ON
Y_P_CV_ON
HV_RMT_TR1
BK_TR1_VOLTAGE
BK_TR1_CURRENT
BK_TR1_CONT_N
BK_TR1_CURRENT_CONT
BK_TR1_CONT_P
BK_TR1_CURRENT_SET
BK_TR1_MINUS_SET
BK_TR1_ON
C_TR1_VOLTAGE
C_TR1_CURRENT
C_P_CC_CONT
C_P_CV_CONT
C_P_CC_ON
C_P_CV_ON
HV_RMT_TR1
POST_AC_CLK_B_TO_HV
POST_AC_CLK_A_TO_HV
CMN_CK_25_1TO_HV
HV_DPOST_AC_ON
DPOST_DC_CONT
HV_DPOST_DC_ON
HV_RMT_POST
XI
Signal Name
Primary Transfer Voltage Monitor (M)
Primary Transfer Current Monitor (M)
Primary Transfer Constant Current Control (M)
Primary Transfer Constant Voltage Control (M)
Primary Transfer Constant Current ON (M)
Primary Transfer Constant Voltage ON (M)
Primary Transfer Voltage Monitor (Y)
Common Clock 70kHz
Primary Transfer Current Monitor (Y)
Primary Transfer Constant Current Control (Y)
Primary Transfer Constant Voltage Control (Y)
Primary Transfer Constant Current ON (Y)
Primary Transfer Constant Voltage ON (Y)
Primary Transfer High Voltage Remote
Primary Transfer Voltage Monitor (Bk)
Primary Transfer Current Monitor (Bk)
Primary Transfer Minus Control (Bk)
Primary Transfer Current Control (Bk)
Primary Transfer Plus Control (Bk)
Primary Transfer Current Set (Bk)
Primary Transfer Minus Set (Bk)
Primary Transfer ON (Bk)
Primary Transfer Voltage Monitor (C)
Primary Transfer Current Monitor (C)
Primary Transfer Constant Current Control (C)
Primary Transfer Constant Voltage Control (C)
Primary Transfer Constant Current ON (C)
Primary Transfer Constant Voltage ON (C)
Primary Transfer High Voltage Remote
Pre-primary Transfer High Voltage Clock B
Pre-primary Transfer High Voltage Clock A
Common Clock 25kHz
Drum Post High Voltage AC ON
Drum Post DC Control
Drum Post DC ON
Drum Post High Voltage Remote
XI
Jack No.
J1240

Y_PRE_EXP_LED_ON
Y_TONER_DENS_SNS_CTL
Y_TONER_DENS_SNS_SIG
M_PRE_EXP_LED_ON
M_TONER_DENS_SNS_CTL
M_TONER_DENS_SNS_SIG
C_PRE_EXP_LED_ON
C_TONER_DENS_SNS_CTL
C_TONER_DENS_SNS_SIG
BK_TONER_DENS_SNS_CTL
BK_TONER_DENS_SNS_SIG
J1241
J1242
TR2_CONT_P
TR2_CRNT_CONT
TR2_CONT_N
TR2_REMOVE_DC_CONT
3.3v_CONNECT_B_IN
TR2_CURRENT
TR2_VOLTAGE
CMN_CK_25_1TO_HV
R_LED_ON
FR_DETECT
R_RESET
BR_DETECT
PATCH_LED_ON
PATCH_P
PATCH_S
PATCH_REF
PATCH_SL_ON
BK_PRE_CLN_LED_ON
Signal Name
Jack No.
Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Y) LED ON

Toner Density Sensor Detection Signal (Y) Control
Toner Density Sensor Detection Signal (Y)
Detection Signal
Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M) LED ON
Toner Density Sensor Detection Signal (M) Control
Toner Density Sensor Detection Signal (M)
Detection Signal
Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C) LED ON
Toner Density Sensor Detection Signal (C) Control
Toner Density Sensor Detection Signal (C)
Detection Signal
Toner Density Sensor Detection Signal (Bk) Control
Toner Density Sensor Detection Signal (Bk)
Detection Signal
Secondary Transfer Plus Control
Secondary Transfer Current ON
Secondary Transfer Minus Control
Secondary Transfer Static Elimination DC ON
Secondary Transfer Static Elimination Connection
Detection
Secondary Transfer Current Monitor
Secondary Transfer Voltage Monitor
Secondary Transfer Static Elimination Clock 25kHz
Registration Patch Sensor Detection Signal (Front)
Encoder LED ON
Encoder Detection Signal (Front)
Encoder Reset
Encoder Detection Signal (Front)
Patch Sensor Detection Signal LED ON
Patch Sensor Detection Signal P Wave
Patch Sensor Detection Signal S Wave
Patch Sensor Detection Signal Reference
Registration Patch Shutter Open/Close Solenoid
ON
Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk)/Bk Pre-exposure
LED ON
J1243
J1244
J1246
J1247
XII
Signal Name
HV_ON
+3.3V_ANALOG
BK_POTENTOAL_SNS_ON
BK_POTENTIAL_DETECT
PRIM_IN_FAN_FULL/HALF
Potential Sensor Remote

3.3V Power Supply
Potential Sensor ON
Potential Sensor Detection Signal
Primary Charging Suction Fan Full Speed/Half
Speed
PRIM_IN_FAN_LOCK
Full Speed/Half Speed Lock Signal
HAND_PAPER_FEED_GATE_SNS Multi-purpose Tray Cover Open/Close Sensor
Detection Signal
PRIM_WIRE_CLN_MTR_CW
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor Clockwise
PRIM_WIRE_CLN_MTR_CCW
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor Counter
Clockwise
POST_WIRE_CLN_MTR_CW
Pre-primary Transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
Clockwise
POST_WIRE_CLN_MTR_CCW
Pre-primary Transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
Counter Clockwise
TEIHAN_NOBU_SW
Fixing Feed Unit Open/Close Switch Signal
BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC
Developing Stirring Motor (Bk) Deceleration Signal
BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC
Developing Stirring Motor (Bk) Acceleration Signal
BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG
Developing Stirring Motor (Bk) FG Signal
BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CCW
Developing Stirring Motor (Bk) Rotation Direction
Signal
Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC
Developing Stirring Motor (Y) Deceleration Signal
Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC
Developing Stirring Motor (Y) Acceleration Signal
Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG
Developing Stirring Motor (Y) FG Signal
Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CCW
Developing Stirring Motor (Y) Rotation Direction
Signal
M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC
Developing Stirring Motor (M) Deceleration Signal
M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC
Developing Stirring Motor (M) Acceleration Signal
M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG
Developing Stirring Motor (M) FG Signal
M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CCW
Developing Stirring Motor (M) Rotation Direction
Signal
C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC
Developing Stirring Motor (C) Deceleration Signal
C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC
Developing Stirring Motor (C) Acceleration Signal
C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG
Developing Stirring Motor (C) FG Signal
C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CCW
Developing Stirring Motor (C) Rotation Direction
Signal
1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_HP_ Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor
SNS
Detection Signal
ITB_EDGE_ADC_DOUT2
ITB Displacement Sensor Detection Signal
ITB_EDGE_ADC_DOUT1
ITB_EDGE_SNS_ON
ITB_STEERTNG_HP_SNS
ITB HP Sensor Detection Signal
ITB_HP_SNS
ITB HP Sensor Detection Signal
ITB_ROLLER_TEMP
ITB Roller Temperature (Not used)
XII
Jack No.
J1248
ECO_DOUT
ECO_DIN
ECO_SCK
ECO_CS
ECO_POW
ENV_TEMP
ENV_HUM
1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_
OUT_A
OUT_A*
OUT_B
OUT_B*
STEERING_MTR_OUT_A
STEERING_MTR_OUT_A*
STEERING_MTR_OUT_B
STEERING_MTR_OUT_B*
IPC_RXD
IPC_TXD
FIN_MODE
FIN_RESET
FIN_DOWNLOAD
CHOUHI_CLK
E1_STM_CLK11
CHOUHI_TXEND
J1249
J1250
J1251
Signal Name
ECO ID Data Out
ECO ID Data In
ECO ID Serial Clock
ECO ID Chip Selection
ECO ID Power Supply
Environment Sensor Temperature
Environment Sensor Humidity
Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor A
Jack No.
J1260

DDI_DOWNLOAD
DDI_RESET
DDI_PPRDY
DDI_CPRDY
DDI_LIVEWAKE
DDI_RXD
DDI_TXD
Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor B
PVREQ
REJI_ON_IRQ
E2_HOB_SERIAL_CLK1
Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor B*
E2_HOB_SERIAL_TX1
Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor A*

Steering Drive Motor *
Steering Drive Motor B
Steering Drive Motor B*
Finisher Communication Reception Signal
Finisher Communication Transmission Signal
Finisher Mode Signal
Finisher Reset Signal
Finisher Download Signal
Clock (Option Deck Communication IF)
Deck Pickup Motor Clock
Transmission Completion (Option Deck
Communication IF)
CHOUHI_TXD
Reception Request Signal (Option Deck
Communication IF)
CHOUHI_RXLOAD
Reception Completion (Option Deck Communication
IF)
CHOUHI_RXD
Reception Signal (Option Deck Communication IF)
CHOUHI_TXOUTEN
Output Enable (Option Deck Communication IF)
HOPPER_COOL_ EX_FAN_FULL/ Hopper Cooling Fan Full Speed/Half Speed
HALF
HOPPER_COOL_ EX_FAN_LOCK Hopper Cooling Fan Lock Signal
E2_HOB_SERIAL_RX1
E2_HOB_SERIAL_CLK0
E2_HOB_SERIAL_TX0
E2_HOB_SERIAL_RX0
J1261
J1262
W_TNR_FULL_DTC
DEV_AIR_TEMP1
DEV_AIR_TEMP2
FRONT_DOOR_SNS
XIII
Signal Name
DDI Download Signal
DDI Reset Signal
DDI Printer Power Ready Signal
DDI Controller Power Ready Signal
DDI Live Wake Mode Signal
DDI Communication Reception Signal (Main
Controller => DC Controller)
DDI Communication Transmission Signal (DC
Controller => Main Controller)
PV Request
Registration ON Interruption
Laser Interface PCB High Speed Serial
Communication Clock Signal 1
Communication Transmission Signal 1
Communication Reception Signal 1
Communication Clock Signal 2
Communication Transmission Signal 2
Communication Reception Signal 2
Waste Toner Full Sensor Detection Signal Detection
Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection
PCB (Y/M) Detection Signal
Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection
PCB (C/Bk) Detection Signal
Front Cover Open/Close Sensor Detection Signal
XIII
Jack No.
J1264
J1320
J1330

AC_RL_ON
SEESAW
R_PW_MONI
RMT_RCON
RMT_DCON
RMT_CONT
RMT_SYS
ECO_DOUT
ECO_DIN
ECO_SCK
ECO_CS
ECO_POW
KEY
POWER_FAN_OFF
POWER_FAN_LOCK
INT_DCON
PRST
DCON_LIVE
PCTS
C_THM
M_THM
Y_THM
BK_THM
VIDEO_REDAY
VIDEO_RESET
ITOP
BK_DEV_POST_FAN_ON
BK_DEV_POST_FAN_ERR
CL_CLEANER_FAN_ON
CL_CLEANER_FAN_ERR
PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_FAN_
ON
PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_FAN_
ERR
FIX_EXHAUST_FAN_PWM
FIX_EXHAUST_FAN_ERR
Signal Name
AC Relay ON Signal
Seesaw Signal
Reader Power Monitor
RCON Remote
DCON Remote
Controller Remote
System Remote
ECO ID Data Out
ECO ID Data In
ECO ID Serial Clock
ECO ID Chip Selection
ECO ID Power Supply
Key Switch Signal
Power Supply Fan OFF Signal
Power Supply Fan Lock Signal
DC Controller Initialization signal
Controller Receivable Signal
DC Controller Live signal
Printer Receivable Signal
Scanner Unit (C) Thermistor Detection
Scanner Unit (M) Thermistor Detection
Scanner Unit (Y) Thermistor Detection
Scanner Unit (Bk) Thermistor Detection
Laser Interface PCB Ready Signal
Laser Interface PCB Reset Signal
ITOP Signal
Developing/Pre-transfer Charging Fan Full Speed/
Half Speed
Developing/Pre-transfer Charging Fan Lock Signal
Color Cleaning Fan Full Speed/Half Speed
Color Cleaning Fan Lock Signal
Pre-fixing Feed Attraction Fan ON
Pre-fixing Feed Attraction Fan Lock Signal
Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan PWM Signal
Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan Lock Signal
XIV
Jack No.
Signal Name
J1340
PRIM_EXHAUST_FAN_ON
PRIM_EXHAUST_FAN_ERR
BK_HOPPER_SCREW_M_DRIVE
BK_HOPPER_TONER_SNS
BK_TONER_CRG_SLIDE_HP_
SNS
BK_SCREW_ROLL_DTC_SNS
WAIPER_VCC
BK_WAIPER_M_ON
Y_HOPPER_TONER_SNS
Y_TONER_CRG_SLIDE_HP_SNS
Primary Exhaust Fan Full Speed/Half Speed

Primary Exhaust Fan Lock Signal
Hopper/Stirring Supply Motor (Bk) Drive
Hopper Toner Level Sensor Detection Signal (Bk)
Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor Detection
Signal (Bk)
Toner Feed Screw Rotation Detection
Wiper Rotation Motor Power Supply
Wiper Rotation Motor (Bk) ON
Hopper Toner Level Sensor Detection Signal (Y)
Signal (Y)
Toner Feed Screw Rotation Detection (Y)
Hopper/Stirring Supply Motor (Y) Drive
Wiper Rotation Motor (Y) ON
Hopper Toner Level Sensor Detection Signal (M)
Signal (M)
Toner Feed Screw Rotation Detection
Hopper/Stirring Supply Motor (M) Drive
Wiper Rotation Motor (M) ON
Hopper Toner Level Sensor Detection Signal (C)
Signal (C)
Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor Detection Signal
(C)/C Screw Rotation Detection
Hopper/Stirring Supply Motor (M) Drive
Wiper Rotation Motor (C) ON
Toner Supply Cover Open/Close Sensor Detection
Signal
Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Open/Close
Sensor Detection Signal (Bk)
Sensor Detection Signal (Y)
Sensor Detection Signal (M)
Sensor Detection Signal (C)
J1350
Y_SCREW_ROLL_DTC_SNS
Y_HOPPER_SCREW_M_DRIVE
Y_WAIPER_M_ON
M_HOPPER_TONER_SNS
M_TONER_CRG_SLIDE_HP_SNS
M_SCREW_ROLL_DTC_SNS
M_HOPPER_SCREW_M_DRIVE
M_WAIPER_M_ON
C_HOPPER_TONER_SNS
C_TONER_CRG_SLIDE_HP_SNS
C_SCREW_ROLL_DTC_SNS
J1360
C_HOPPER_SCREW_M_DRIVE
C_WAIPER_M_ON
TONER_CRG_DOOR_SNS
BK_TONER_CRG_IN_DOOR_SNS
Y_TONER_CRG_IN_DOOR_SNS
M_TONER_CRG_IN_DOOR_SNS
C_TONER_CRG_IN_DOOR_SNS
XIV
Jack No.
J1370

Y_TONER_CRG_MTR_CW
Y_TONER_CRG_MTR_CCW
M_TONER_CRG_MTR_CW
M_TONER_CRG_MTR_CCW
C_TONER_CRG_MTR_CW
C_TONER_CRG_MTR_CCW
BK_TONER_CRG_MTR_CW
BK_TONER_CRG_MTR_CCW
BK_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS
J1390
HOPPER_COOL_IN_FAN_FULL/
HALF
HOPPER_COOL_IN_FAN_LOCK
C_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS
M_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS
Y_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS
J1402
J1403
HANTEN_SNS
HANTEN_TATE_PASS1_SNS
LEFTDOWN_DOOR_OPEN_SNS
SOTO_HAISHI_SNS
HAISHI_SL
HAISHI_SETTYAKU_FAN1_ON
HAISHI_SETTYAKU_FAN1_ERR
UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW4
UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW3
UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW2
UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW1
DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW4
DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW3
DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW2
DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW1
Signal Name
Jack No.
Toner Container Drive Motor (Y) Clockwise

Toner Container Drive Motor (Y) Counter Clockwise
Toner Container Drive Motor (M) Clockwise
Toner Container Drive Motor (M) Counter Clockwise
Toner Container Drive Motor (C) Clockwise
Toner Container Drive Motor (C) Counter Clockwise
Toner Container Drive Motor (Bk) Clockwise
Toner Container Drive Motor (Bk) Counter
Clockwise
Release Holder Shift Cam Phase Sensor Detection
Signal (Bk)
Hopper Cooling Fan Full Speed/Half Speed
J1404
UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW4
UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW3
UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW2
UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW1
CASET3_ZANKEN_1_SNS
CASET3_ZANKEN_2_SNS
DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW4
DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW3
DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW2
DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW1
CASET4_ZANKEN_1_SNS
CASET4_ZANKEN_2_SNS
TATE_PASS2_SNS
RIGHTDOWN_DOOR_OPEN_SNS
Hopper Cooling Fan Lock Signal

Signal (C)
Signal (M)
Signal (Y)
Reverse Sensor Detection Signal
Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 1 Detection Signal
Left Lower Cover Open/Close Sensor Detection
Signal
Outer Delivery Sensor Detection Signal
Delivery Heat Exhaust Fan 1 Drive
Delivery Heat Exhaust Fan 1 Lock Signal
Cassette 3 Size Detection 2 Switch 4
J1405
J1406
J1407
J1408
RIGHT_DECK_ZANKEN_1_SNS
RIGHT_DECK_ZANKEN_2_SNS
LEFT_DECK_ZANKEN_1_SNS
LEFT_DECK_ZANKEN_2_SNS
LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_ON
LEFT_DECK_KYUSHI_SNS
LEFT_LIMIT_SNS
LEFT_DECK_PAPER_SNS
LEFT_DECK_H_PAPER_SNS
LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_SNS
CST3_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B
CST3_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B*
CST3_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A*
CST3_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A
XV
Signal Name
Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 Detection Signal
Vertical Path Sensor 2 Detection Signal
Right Lower Cover Open/Close Sensor Detection
Signal
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 Detection Signal
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 Detection Signal
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 Detection Signal
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 Detection Signal
Left Deck Pickup Solenoid ON
Left Deck Pickup Sensor Detection Signal
Left Deck Upper Limit Sensor Detection Signal
Left Deck Paper Sensor Detection Signal
Left Deck Paper Surface Height Sensor Detection
Signal
Left Deck Pullout Sensor Detection Signal
Cassette 3 Pickup Motor B
Cassette 3 Pickup Motor B*
Cassette 3 Pickup Motor A*
Cassette 3 Pickup Motor A
Cassette 4 Pickup Motor B
Cassette 4 Pickup Motor B*
Cassette 4 Pickup Motor A*
Cassette 4 Pickup Motor A
XV
Jack No.
Signal Name
Jack No.
J1409
2ND_TRANS_DESPRTION_MTR_
B
B*
A*
A
RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B
RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B*
RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A*
RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A
LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B
LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B*
LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A*
LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A
RIGHT_TATEPASS_MTR_A
RIGHT_TATEPASS_MTR_ACOM
RIGHT_TATEPASS_MTR_A*
RIGHT_TATEPASS_MTR_B
RIGHT_TATEPASS_MTR_BCOM
RIGHT_TATEPASS_MTR_B*
LEFT_TATEPASS_MTR_A
LEFT_TATEPASS_MTR_ACOM
LEFT_TATEPASS_MTR_A*
LEFT_TATEPASS_MTR_B
LEFT_TATEPASS_MTR_BCOM
LEFT_TATEPASS_MTR_B*
CST_TATEPASS_MTR_A
CST_TATEPASS_MTR_ACOM
CST_TATEPASS_MTR_A*
CST_TATEPASS_MTR_B
CST_TATEPASS_MTR_BCOM
CST_TATEPASS_MTR_B*
Secondary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor B
J1412
J1410
J1411
Secondary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor

B*
Secondary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor A*
Secondary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor A
Right Deck Pickup Motor B
Right Deck Pickup Motor B*
Right Deck Pickup Motor A*
Right Deck Pickup Motor A
Left Deck Pickup Motor B
Left Deck Pickup Motor B*
Left Deck Pickup Motor A*
Left Deck Pickup Motor A
Right Deck Vertical Path Motor A
Right Deck Vertical Path Motor ACOM
Right Deck Vertical Path Motor A*
Right Deck Vertical Path Motor B
Right Deck Vertical Path Motor BCOM
Right Deck Vertical Path Motor B*
Left Deck Vertical Path Motor A
Left Deck Vertical Path Motor ACOM
Left Deck Vertical Path Motor A*
Left Deck Vertical Path Motor B
Left Deck Vertical Path Motor BCOM
Left Deck Vertical Path Motor B*
Cassette Vertical Path Motor A
Cassette Vertical Path Motor ACOM
Cassette Vertical Path Motor A*
Cassette Vertical Path Motor B
Cassette Vertical Path Motor BCOM
Cassette Vertical Path Motor B*
J1413

HANTEN_ROLLER_RIKAN_SL
HANTEN_MTR_A
HANTEN_MTR_ACOM
HANTEN_MTR_A*
HANTEN_MTR_B
HANTEN_MTR_BCOM
HANTEN_MTR_B*
HAISHI_MTR_A
HAISHI_MTR_ACOM
HAISHI_MTR_A*
HAISHI_MTR_B
HAISHI_MTR_BCOM
HAISHI_MTR_B*
REJIMAE_MULTI_MTR_A
REJIMAE_MULTI_MTR_ACOM
REJIMAE_MULTI_MTR_A*
REJIMAE_MULTI_MTR_B
REJIMAE_MULTI_MTR_BCOM
J1414
J1415
REJIMAE_MULTI_MTR_B*
RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_ON
RIGHT_DECK_KYUSHI_SNS
RIGHT_LIMIT_SNS
RIGHT_DECK_PAPER_SNS
RIGHT_DECK_H_PAPER_SNS
TATE_PASS1_SNS
MULTI_PAPER_SNS
MULTI_NAKAITA_SL
MULTI_LAST_PAPER_SNS
WIDTH_OF_PAPER_DTC
J1416
HAI_TRN_ROCK_SW
J1417
CST3_PICK_UP_ON
CST3_KYUSHI_SNS
CST3_LIMIT_SNS
CST3_PAPER_SNS
CST3_H_PAPER_SNS
CST3_TATE_PASS_SNS
XVI
Signal Name
Reverse Upper Roller Disengagement Solenoid ON
Reverse Motor A
Reverse Motor ACOM
Reverse Motor A*
Reverse Motor B
Reverse Motor BCOM
Reverse Motor B*
Delivery Motor A
Delivery Motor ACOM
Delivery Motor A*
Delivery Motor B
Delivery Motor BCOM
Delivery Motor B*
Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor A
ACOM
Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor A*
Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor B
BCOM
Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor B*
Right Deck Pickup Solenoid ON
Right Deck Pickup Sensor Detection Signal
Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor Detection Signal
Right Deck Paper Sensor Detection Signal
Right Deck Paper Surface Height Sensor Detection
Signal
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor Detection Signal/
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Detection Sensor
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid ON
Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor Detection
Signal/Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor
Detection Signal
Waste Toner Screw Lock Detection Switch/Waste
Toner Lock Switch
Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid ON
Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor Detection Signal
Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor Detection Signal
Cassette 3 Paper Sensor Detection Signal
Cassette 3 Paper Surface Height Sensor Detection
Signal
XVI
Jack No.
J1418
J1419
J1503

CST4_PICK_UP_ON
CST4_KYUSHI_SNS
CST4_LIMIT_SNS
CST4_PAPER_SNS
CST4_H_PAPER_SNS
TATE_PASS_SNS
OPTION_COOL_FAN1_ON
OPTION_COOL_FAN1_ERR
OPTION_COOL_FAN2_ON
OPTION_COOL_FAN2_ERR
OPTION_FAN_CNCT
REVERSE_LEFT_MTR_B
REVERSE_LEFT_MTR_B*
REVERSE_LEFT_MTR_A*
REVERSE_LEFT_MTR_A
FUSER_BELT_DESPORTION_
MTR_OUT_B*
MTR_OUT_B
MTR_OUT_A*
MTR_OUT_A
PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_MTR_
OUT_B
OUT_B*
OUT_A*
OUT_A
UNDER_BELT_COOL_FAN1_
FULL/HALF
LOCK
FULL/HALF
LOCK
Signal Name
Jack No.
Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid ON

Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor Detection Signal
Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor Detection Signal
Cassette 4 Paper Sensor Detection Signal
Cassette 4 Paper Surface Height Sensor Detection
Signal
Anti-adhesion Fan 1 Drive
Anti-adhesion Fan 1 Signal
Anti-adhesion Fan 2 Drive
Anti-adhesion Fan 2 Lock Signal
Anti-adhesion Fan 1 Connection Detection Signal
Duplex Left Motor B
Duplex Left Motor B*
Duplex Left Motor A*
Duplex Left Motor A
Fixing Pressure Release Motor B*
J1504
Fixing Pressure Release Motor B

Fixing Pressure Release Motor A*
Fixing Pressure Release Motor A*
Pre-fixing Feed Motor B
Pre-fixing Feed Motor B*
Pre-fixing Feed Motor A*
Pre-fixing Feed Motor A
J1505
J1507

REVERSE_RIGHT_MTR_A
REVERSE_RIGHT_MTR_ACOM
REVERSE_RIGHT_MTR_A*
REVERSE_RIGHT_MTR_B
REVERSE_RIGHT_MTR_BCOM
REVERSE_RIGHT_MTR_B*
REGIST_MTR_A
REGIST_MTR_ACOM
REGIST_MTR_A*
REGIST_MTR_B
REGIST_MTR_BCOM
REGIST_MTR_B*
FUSER_MTR_GAIN_YOBI
FUSER_MTR_FG
FUSER_MTR_CLK
FUSER_MTR_GAIN
FUSER_MTR_LOCK
FUSER_MTR_ON
FUSER_MTR_BRAKE
UNDER_FUSER_BELT_
ALIGHNMENT_MTR_B*
UNDER_FUSER_BELT_
ALIGHNMENT_MTR_B
UNDER_FUSER_BELT_
ALIGHNMENT_MTR_A*
UNDER_FUSER_BELT_
ALIGHNMENT_MTR_A
UNDER_FUSER_BELT_
ALIGHNMENT_MTR_HP_SNS
FUSER_ENTRANCE_SNS
SNS
FUSER_EXIT_SNS
INNER_EXIT_SNS
XVII
Signal Name
Duplex Right Motor A
Duplex Right Motor ACOM
Duplex Right Motor A*
Duplex Right Motor B
Duplex Right Motor BCOM
Duplex Right Motor/Duplex Right Motor B*
Registration Motor A
Registration Motor ACOM
Registration Motor A*
Registration Motor B
Registration Motor BCOM
Registration Motor B*
Fixing Motor Gain Signal (Spare)
Fixing Motor FG Signal
Fixing Motor Clock Signal
Fixing Motor Gain Signal
Fixing Motor Lock Signal
Fixing Motor ON Signal
Fixing Motor Brake Signal
Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor B*
Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor B
Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor A*
Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor A
Fixing Belt HP Sensor Detection Signal
Fixing Inlet Sensor Detection Signal
Fixing Pressure Release Sensor Detection Signal
Fixing Wrap Sensor Detection Signal
Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor Detection Signal
Pressure Belt Cooling Fan (Front) Full Speed/Half

Speed
Pressure Belt Cooling Fan (Front) Lock Signal
Pressure Belt Cooling Fan (Rear) Full Speed/Half
Speed
Pressure Belt Cooling Fan (Rear) Lock Signal
XVII
Jack No.
J1508
UPPER_FUSER_BELT_
ALIGHNMENT_MTR_B*
UPPER_FUSER_BELT_
ALIGHNMENT_MTR_B
UPPER_FUSER_BELT_
ALIGHNMENT_MTR_A*
UPPER_FUSER_BELT_
ALIGHNMENT_MTR_A
UPPER_FUSER_BELT_
ALIGHNMENT_MTR_HP_SNS
UPPER_FUSER_BELT_
ALIGHNMENT_SNS1
UPPER_FUSER_BELT_
ALIGHNMENT_SNS2
2ND_TRANS_DESPORTION_HP_
SNS
2ND_TRANS_END_SNS
OHP_SNS_LED_ON
OHP_SNS
REGI_SNS
VPASS_JOINT_SNS
J3062_CNCT_RTN
J1509
J1511
J1512
TR2_VOLT_DETECT
TR2_CURRENT_DETECT
DA_TR2_CONT_N
DA_TR2_CONT_CURRENT
DA_TR2_CONT_P
TR2_CRNT_ON
TR2_MINUS_ON
TR2_CV_ON
HV_RMT
TR2_24V_RDY
J3540_CNCT_RTN
J1514
TR2_REMOVE_CK_25
DA_TR2_REMOVE_CONT
TR2_REMOVE_DC_ON
HV_RMT
TR2_REMOVE_24V_RDY
REVERSE_LEFT_SNS
REVERSE_CENTER_SNS
REVERSE_RIGHT_SNS
REVERSE_VPASS_SNS
Signal Name
Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor B*
Jack No.
J1805
Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor B

Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor A*
Fixing Belt Displacement Control Motor A
Fixing Belt HP Sensor Detection Signal
Fixing Belt Position Sensor 1 Detection Signal
Fixing Belt Position Sensor 2 Detection Signal
Secondary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP
Sensor Detection Signal
Post-secondary Transfer Sensor Detection Signal
OHP LED ON
OHP Sensor Detection Signal
Registration Sensor Detection Signal
Vertical Path Merging Sensor Detection Signal
Secondary Transfer High Voltage Connection
Detection
Secondary Transfer Voltage Monitor
Secondary Transfer Current Monitor
Secondary Transfer Minus Control
Secondary Transfer Current Control
Secondary Transfer Plus Controller
Secondary Transfer Current ON
Secondary Transfer Minus ON
Secondary Transfer Constant Voltage ON
High Voltage Remote
Secondary Transfer 24V Ready
Secondary Transfer Static Elimination Connection
Detection
Secondary Transfer Static Elimination Clock 25kHz
Secondary Transfer Static Elimination Control
Secondary Transfer Static Elimination DC ON
High Voltage Remote
Secondary Transfer Static Elimination 24V Ready
Duplex Sensor 1 Detection Signal
J1806

IL_LOOP_DTC
IL_ERR_DTC
TEIHAN_POWER_RMT
IH_POWER_RMT
FUSER_M_I_MONITOR
AC_RL_ON
SEESAW
R_PW_MONI
RMT_RCON
RMT_DCON
RMT_CONT
RMT_SYS
IH_POWER_FAN_LOCK
38V_P_COOL_FAN_LOCK
POWER12V_FAN_LOCK
POWER24V_FAN_LOCK
38V_P_COOL_FAN_HALF
38V_P_COOL_FAN_FULL
IH_POWER_FAN_HALF
IH_POWER_FAN_FULL
POWER12V_FAN_HALF
POWER12V_FAN_FULL
POWER24V_FAN_HALF
POWER24V_FAN_FULL
AC_DR_ID_BIT1
AC_DR_ID_BIT0
DRUM_HEAT_TR_ON
CST_HEAT_TR_ON
SUB_TR_ERR_ASIC
SUB_TR_ON
HEATER_ZERO_CROSS
RMT_D0
24VB_RMT
24VA_RMT
XVIII
Signal Name
Interlock Arch Detection Signal
Interlock Error Detection Signal (Not used)
Fixing Feed 24V Power Supply Remote
IH Power Supply Power Supply Remote
Fixing Motor Current Monitor Signal
AC Relay ON Signal
Seesaw Signal
Reader Controller Power Supply Monitor Signal
Reader Controller Power Supply Remote
DC Controller Power Supply Remote (Printer Power
Supply Remote)
Controller Power Supply Remote
System Remote (12V Power Supply Remote)
IH Power Supply Cooling Fan Lock Signal
Power Supply Cooling Fan (38V) Lock Signal
Power Supply Fan 1 Lock Signal
Power Supply Cooling Fan (38V) Half Speed Signal
Power Supply Cooling Fan (38V) Full Speed Signal
IH Power Supply Fan Half Speed Signal
IH Power Supply Cooling Fan Full Speed Signal
Power Supply Fan 1 Half Speed Signal
Power Supply Fan 1 Full Speed Signal
Power Supply Fan 2 Half Speed Signal
Power Supply Fan 2 Full Speed Signal
AC Driver PCB ID Bit 1
Drum Heater Triac ON Signal
Cassette Heater Triac ON Signal
Pressure Heater Triac Error Signal
Pressure Heater Triac ON Signal
Zero Cross Signal
Option Power Supply Remote
24VB Power Supply Remote
24VA Power Supply Remote
XVIII
Jack No.
J1807
J1812
J1830
J1910
J1911

DRUM_HEAT_TR_ON
CST_HEAT_TR_ON
SUB_TR_ERR
SUB_TR_ON
SUB_HEAT_RL_ON
ZERO_CROSS
+3.3V_HIJYOYA
AC_DR_ID_BIT0
AC_DR_ID_BIT1
RMT_SYS
12V_SEESAW
SHUT_OFF
3.3VR_JYOYA
IH_POWER_FAN_LOCK
IH_POWER_FAN_FULL/HALF
12V_TEIHAN
12V_SW_IH
POWER12V_FAN_FULL/OFF
POWER12V_FAN_LOCK
POWER24V_FAN_FULL/HALF
POWER24V_FAN_LOCK
38V_P_COOL_FAN_FULL/HALF
38V_P_COOL_FAN_LOCK
DRM_ENC1_Y
DRM_ENC2_Y
DRM_ENC1_M
DRM_ENC2_M
DRM_ENC1_C
DRM_ENC2_C
DRM_ENC1_K
DRM_ENC2_K
Signal Name
Drum Heater ON Signal
Cassette Heater Triac ON Signal
Pressure Heater Triac Error Signal
Pressure Heater Triac ON Signal
Pressure Heater Relay ON Signal
Zero Cross Signal
3.3V Non-all-night Power Supply
12V Power Supply AC OFF Signal
12V Seesaw Signal
Shut OFF Signal
3.3V All-night Power Supply
IH Power Supply Fan Lock Signal
IH Power Supply Fan Full Speed/Half Speed
12V Power Supply
12V Power Supply (via Fuse PCB)
Power Supply Fan 1 Drive Signal
Power Supply Fan 2 Drive Signal
Power Supply Cooling Fan (38V) Drive Signal
Power Supply Cooling Fan (38V) Lock Signal
Y Drum Encoder Signal 1
Y Drum Encoder Signal 2
M Drum Encoder Signal 1
M Drum Encoder Signal 2
C Drum Encoder Signal 1
C Drum Encoder Signal 2
Bk Drum Encoder Signal 1
Bk Drum Encoder Signal 2
Jack No.
J1920
J1921
J1922
J2202

DRM_DIR_Y_BUF
DRM_ON_Y_BUF
DRM_BREAK_Y_BUF
DRM_FG_Y
DRM_PWM_Y_BUF
DRM_DIR_M_BUF
DRM_ON_M_BUF
DRM_BREAK_M_BUF
DRM_FG_M
DRM_PWM_M_BUF
DRM_DIR_C_BUF
DRM_ON_C_BUF
DRM_BREAK_C_BUF
DRM_FG_C
DRM_PWM_C_BUF
DRM_DIR_K_BUF
DRM_ON_K_BUF
DRM_BREAK_K_BUF
DRM_FG_K
DRM_PWM_K_BUF
ITB_DIR_BUF
ITB_ON_BUF
ITB_BREAK_BUF
ITB_FG_IN
ITB_PWM_BUF
ITB_ENC1
ITB_ENC2
THM_S_CNT
THM_P_42_5_DTC
THM_S_50_LMT
TH_P
TH_S
THM_P_42_5_DTC
XIX
Signal Name
Drum Motor (Y) Rotation Direction Signal
Drum Motor (Y) ON Signal
Drum Motor (Y) Brake Signal
Drum Motor (Y) FG Signal
Drum Motor (Y) PWM Signal
Drum Motor (M) Rotation Direction Signal
Drum Motor (M) ON Signal
Drum Motor (M) Brake Signal
Drum Motor (M) FG Signal
Drum Motor (M) PWM Signal
Drum Motor (C) Rotation Direction Signal
Drum Motor (C) ON Signal
Drum Motor (C) Brake Signal
Drum Motor (C) FG Signal
Drum Motor (C) PWM Signal
Drum Motor (Bk) Rotation Direction Signal
Drum Motor (Bk) ON Signal
Drum Motor (Bk) Brake Signal
Drum Motor (Bk) FG Signal
Drum Motor (Bk) PWM Signal
ITB Drive Motor Rotation Direction Signal
ITB Drive Motor ON Signal
ITB Drive Motor Brake Signal
ITB Drive Motor FG Signal
ITB Drive Motor PWM Signal
ITB Encoder Signal 1
ITB Encoder Signal 2
Drum Heater (Bk) Thermistor Connection Detection
Drum Heater (Bk) Thermopile 42.5 DegC Detection
Drum Heater (Bk) Thermistor 50 DegC Limit
Detection
Drum Surface Temperature Limit Detection
Drum Surface Temperature
Drum Heater (Bk) Thermopile 42.5 DegC Detection
T-10-3
XIX
XX
120V
100V
IL1
Inlet
SOLD6
UN30
J503
Environment Switch
FT13
1
Cassette Heater
Switch
100V All-night
Power Supply PCB
J8123F
UN32
J8123M
SW13
FT18
FT18
J500
1
UN31
FT15
FT14
IH Power Supply PCB
SW12
(W)
SOLD13
SOLD6
SOLD5
(BK)
Leakage
Breaker 3
(W)
SOLD5
(BK)
ELB3
MT53
FT33
FT33
FT1
1
2
3
FT2
FT7
FT8
FT3
1
2
3
ELB2
Leakage
Breaker 2
1
2
3
FT1
J8228M
Inlet
1
2
3
ELB1
Leakage
Breaker 1
FT2
FT4
MT53
FT5
Leakage
Breaker 1
FT6
FT30
3
ELB1
FT31
200V_2
200V
IL2
SOLD13
10
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (1/31)
General Circuit Diagram (1/31)
FT17
J8120M
J8120F
200V All-night
Power Supply PCB
MT4
UN8
UN9
UN10
100V Drum Heater

Driver PCB
J1801
AC_N1
AC_H1
AC_N(W)
J8126F
2
2
3
3
UN35
AC_N(W)
AC_H(BK)
1
5
5
6
6
J8079M
J8079F
1
1
AC_N(W)_200V
AC_H(BK)
AC_N(W)
4
J8130M
DC Power Supply
PCB (24V)
J8189M
1
J8111F
J8081M
To P.10
Deck Heater
2
B-2
2
J8109M
4
4
J8083M
J8083F
J8109F
6
J8130F
J102B
AC_H(BK)
GND
GND
1
J8111M
To P.2
To P.31
C-2
F-6
J8084M
J202B
10
10
MT25
J1802
J8126M
J8192M
N.C
GND
GND
UN12
AC_H2
J8192F
J809
J803
3
J2204
3
AC_H1
AC_H(BK)
AC_N(W)
(J101)
24VA
J202A
24VA
GND
GND
12V
5
UN34
GND
DC Power Supply
PCB (24VA)
RMT_TO_24VA_POWER
12V
GND
12V
GND
J102A
UN33
GND
J201
GND
24VA
AC_H(BK)
AC_N(W)
AC_H(BK)
2
DC Power Supply
PCB (12V)
2
J8191M
NM
J101A (J101)
J8190M
J8191F
GND
24VB
GND
24VB
J8190F
24VB
RMT_TO_24VB_POWER
N.C
GND
200V Drum Heater

Driver PCB
J2201
1
AC_N(W)_100V
AC_H(BK)
J2200
AC_H(BK)
UN11
AC_H(BK)
J8129F
AC_N(W)
AC_N(W)
J8129M
AC_N(W)
AC_H(BK)
J808
J806
3
AC_H2
AC_N2
AC_N2
200V AC Driver PCB
AC_N(W)
J814
AC_N(W)
AC_H(BK)
AC_N(W)
AC_N(W)
AC_H(BK)
AC_H(BK)
AC_H(BK)
120V AC Driver PCB
J815
J812
100V AC Driver PCB
AC_H(BK)
J813
J820
AC_N(W)
IV_TEST(3.3V)
IV_TEST(GND)
IV_TEST(GND)
IV_TEST(GND)
J805
IV_TEST(12V)
UN10
200V AC Driver PCB
IV_TEST(12V)
READER_HEATER_N2
UN9
120V AC Driver PCB
FT45
FT44
READER_HEATER_N1
J801
READER_HEATER_H
UN8
100V AC Driver PCB
AC_N(W)
AC_H(BK)
FT55
AC_N(W)_200V
MT5
FT54
COR9
AC_N(W)_100V
AC_N(W)
J801
AC_H(BK)
AC_N(W)
AC_H(BK)
AC_H(BK)
AC_N(W)
J801
AC_N(W)
N.C
AC_H(BK)
J816
FT16
AC_N(W)
AC_N(W)
AC_H(BK)
AC_N(W)
AC_H(BK)
J681
RMT_TO_12VPOWER
General Circuit Diagram
FT21
MT26
MT47
FT22
FT32
J1803
UN7
H6
Cassette Heater
Relay PCB
H1
Drum Heater (Bk)
10
P.1
F-10-4
XX
XXI
SW7
SW18
Main Switch
SOLD7
1
SOLD15
SL
1
SW2
Front Door Switch 2
Front Door Switch 1
SOLD16
SW1
Remote Shutdown Solenoid
SOLD8
SL9
SW5
SOLD20
SW3
SOLD1
SOLD17
SOLD18
Multi-purpose Tray Unit

Switch
SOLD2
SOLD19
10
J18230L
1
J1012
1
J8057M
J8237M
J8057F
J18230DH
J8236M
J8056F
J18230D
J8237F
J8056M
J8236F
J8024L
E-5
J8024D
10
J1813
J8234M
J8235M
J8235F
J8234F
12V_IL
+24VB
J8238M
12V_IL
12V_IL
TEIHAN_NOBU_SW
J8165F
12V_IL
12V_IL
+12V_ENG1
3.3VR_SEESAW
3.3VR
12V_SW_FROM_FUS
12V_SW_TO_FUS
J8122M
J8024LH
J8238F
12V_IL
J8165M
REMOTE_SL_OFF
To P.6
J1850
UN7
Relay PCB
POWER12V_FAN_FULL/OFF
GND
GND
3.3R
3.3R
N.C.
N.C.
GND
12V_ENG2
3.3VR
AC_RELAY_ON
12V_SEESAW
GND
CST_HEAT_TR_ON
AC_DR_ID_BIT0
AC_DR_ID_BIT1
REG+3.3V
GND
REG+3.3V
GND
DRUM_HEAT_RL_RESET
DRUM_HEAT_RL_SET
N.C
GND
IH_CURRENT
*IH-ON
GND
*IH_RELAY1_ON
IH_VOLTAGE
*IH_RELAY2_ON
GND
*IH_PWM1
*IH_PWM2
GND
GND
+12V_SW_FROM_FUS
IH_POWER_ERR
IH_12V_ERR
GND
+12V_ENG2
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J1819
J1830
4
B-3
To P.1
J8005D
READER_HEATER_N2
READER_HEATER_N1
READER_HEATER_H
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
AC_N(W)
AC_N(W)
AC_H(BK)
GND
24VB_RCON
GND
J1804
3
24VB_RCON
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
12V_RCON
*POWER24V_FAN_LOCK
GND
POWER24V_FAN_FULL/HALF
N.C
IH_POWER_FAN_FULL/HALF
*POWER12V_FAN_LOCK
J1807
3
GND
*IH_POWER_FAN_LOCK
N.C
GND
GND
J1812
J8005LH
2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
J8005L
J7401D
N.C
N.C
J7401DH
J7400D
3
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J811
J501
IH_FAN_LOCK
GND
1
3
J8239M
J7400L
J8233F
6
123
100V All-night
Power Supply PCB
123
READER
UN31
FM8
FM9
Power Supply Fan 1
Power Supply Fan 2
UN32
200V All-night
Power Supply PCB
200V AC Driver PCB
J7403D
J691
UN10
J7403DH
120V AC Driver PCB
1
1
UN9
J521
100V AC Driver PCB
IH Power Supply PCB

2
UN8
UN30
J7400DH
J7401L
IH_FAN_FULL/HALF
J7403L
FM7
IH Power Supply Fan
10
P.2
F-10-5
XXI
XXII
GND
GND
24V_IL
GND
24V_IL
12V_ENG2
GND
J8205F
24V_IL
J8205M
1
J3041
COR6
UN40
J3021
3
24V_IL
GND
12V
J3011
GND
GND
UN38
Primary Charging
High Voltage PCB (Color)
GND
GND
24V_IL
J3545
UN37
Primary Charging
High Voltage PCB (Bk)
24V_IL
Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk)
GND
UN50
24V_IL
24V_IL
10
J8207M
J8207F
J1814
UN7
Relay PCB
J1805
+5V
GND
GND
GND
3.3VR_FUSE
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
L2_KSB_RX_1
L2_KSB_TX_1BUF
GND
POWER12V_FAN_OFF
R_PW_MON
*POWER_FAN_LOCK
3.3VR_SEESAW
GND
RMT_TRIP
RMT_SYS
RMT_RCON
RMT_CONT
GND
RMT_DCON
RMT_QUICK
GND
GND
GND
12V_IL (VIDEO)
GND
12V_ENG1
GND
24VA_IL
24VA_DCON_VIDEO
24VB_IL_KYUSHI
GND
J1817
GND
GND
24VB_KYUSHI_BUFF
24VB_KYUSHI_BUFF
GND
GND
24VB_FIN
24VB_KYUSHI_BUFF
GND
J1821
24VA_DRUM
J1815
24VA_DRUM
C
J8184M
12V
GND
J1200
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J1224
UN2
DC Controller Interface PCB
GND
12V_IL
GND
UN99
Laser Power Supply

Relay PCB
MT41
24V
J1201
J8184F
J5600
GND
1.25V
10 11 12
GND
1.25V
GND
1.5V
GND
3.3V
GND
5V
GND
24V
24VB_3.5KD
J5601
GND
J8229M
1
J1900
UN6
Drum ITB Driver PCB
J7515
To Paper Deck
Decurler pass driver

Finisher sideLattice
To Buffer Pass
J1450
10 11 12
J5500
UN4
UN100
Pickup Feed
Driver PCB
Laser Interface PCB
10
P.3
F-10-6
XXII
4
3
2
1
F
F
J3040
2
1
J30300L
J1227
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
UN2
B19 A19
J1230A
DEV_POR
UN39
Developing
High Voltage
PCB (Bk)
DEV_DC_VSNS_K
DEV_AC_VSNS_K
DEV_DC_PWM_K
DEV_AC_PWM_K
DEV_CK_B_K
13 12 11 10 9
DEV_CK_A_K
DEV_DC_CLK_K
3.3V_VREF
GND
24V
GND
20
N.C
19
L2_M2S_0GND
18
J3046
17
24V
UN40
16
L2_EXCK_0+
GND
L2_M2S_0+
4
3
15
L2_S2M_0GND
L2_EXCK_0-
7
14
8
13
L2_M2S_1GND
L2_S2M_0+
10
9
11
12
L2_EXCK_1+
GND
L2_M2S_1-
13
12
14
L2_EXCK_1-
L2_S2M_1GND
15
16
11
10
24V
GND
+3.3V
17
24V
19
L2_M2S_2GND
L2_S2M_1+
1
18
B20 A20
GND
J3045
3.3V_VREF
DEV_DC_CLK_K
DEV_CK_A_K
DEV_CK_B_K
DEV_AC_PWM_K
J1230B
J1230WH
DEV_DC_PWM_K
DEV_AC_VSNS_K
DEV_DC_VSNS_K
DEV_POR
13 12 11 10 9
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
L2_EXCK_2+
GND
L2_M2S_2+
4
3
J8240B
19
COR7
18
17
J1228
16
L2_S2M_2GND
L2_EXCK_2-
7
6
L2_S2M_2+
MDECK_RESET
GND
10
MDECK_REMOTE
GND
11
12
15
14
*MDECK_EEP_CS
13
N.C
MDECK_ADEEP_CLK
*MDECK_AD_CS
MDECK_ADEEP_DOUT
13
12
UN38
11
10
N.C.
GND
DEV_DC_CLK
DEV_AC_CLKA
14
15
MDECK_ADEEP_DIN
5
16
UN43
MDECK_CNCT_IN
17
DEV_AC_CLKB
J30300D
8
UART_DEV_HV_RX
UART_DEV_HV_TX_BUF
GND
24V
3.3V_ANALOG
Primary Charging
High Voltage PCB (Color)
GND
3.3V
1TR_DC-CLK
DEV_AC_CLKB
DEV_AC_CLKA
DEV_DC_CLK
GND
UART_PRIM_HV_RX
J3051
J30300DH
GND
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1TR_DC-PWM-Y
1TR_DC-V-SNS-Y
1TR_DC-I-SNS-Y
1TR_DC-PWM-M
18
J3570
UART_PRIM_HV_TX_BUF
19
1TR_DC-V-SNS-M
GND
13
1TR_DC-I-SNS-M
UN50
3.3V_ANALOG
11 10 9
GND
Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk)
3.3V
J3544
1TR_DC-PWM-C
13
1TR_DC-V-SNS-C
11
1TR_DC-I-SNS-C
10
1TR_DC-PWM-K
GND
1TR_DC-V-SNS-K
POST_AC_CLK_B_TO_HV
GND(J_CNCT_RTN)
POST_AC_CLK_A_TO_HV
12
DPOST_DC_CONT
HV_DPOST_AC_ON
CMN_CK_25_1TO_HV
1TR_DC-I-SNS-K
GND
HV_DPOST_DC_ON
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3050
B
GND(24V_RDY)
UN37
C
HV_RMT_POST
Primary Charging
GND
D
4
S_GND
3.3V_ANALOG
E
4
GRID_CONT
J_CNCT_RTN
PRIM_CONT
10
8
S_GND
HVRMT
J3010
PRIM_GRID_ON
10
24V_RDY
J_CNCT
XXIII
J8240DWH
J8240A
To Multi-drawer Paper Deck-A1
P.4
F-10-7
XXIII
10
9
2
J9006L
2
J9006
J9006H
1
Key Switch
SW9
J7520L
J7520D
1
1
2
3
2
4
8
5
J7520LH
1
4
1
2
5
4
5
1
J9007
1
7
ECO-ID PCB
UN80
6
2
3
6
5
1
2
3
4
5
8
7
6
6
7
8
J1400
4
3
2
J1221
4
3
2
J1231
10
1
J1401
UN4
4
2
3
4
5
13 12 11 10 9
6
5
4
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FIN_DOWNLOAD
N.C.
12 11 10 9
8
GND
N.C.
To Buffer Driver
FIN_RESET
FIN_MODE
GND
Laser Interface PCB
UN100
FIN_BIT
GND
IPC_TXD
IPC_RXD
*FIN_RMT
BUFFER_CNCT_S2M
GND
L2_KSB_RX_3
L2_KSB_TX_3_BUF
5V_A
GND
12V
J8223DH
GND
BUFFER_CNCT_M2S
ITOP
*VIDEO_RESET
VIDEO_REDAY
GND
BK_THM
Y_THM
M_THM
C_THM
GND
PCTS
DCON_LIVE
PRTS
INT_DCON
*POWER_FAN_LOCK
POWER12V_FAN_OFF
KEY
GND
ECO_POW
ECO_SCL
ECO_SCK
ECO_SDA
ECO_DET
RMT_TRIP
RMT_SYS
RMT_CONT
RMT_DCON
4
3
2
7
6
5
4
3
F
F
To RS232C I/F
To Finisher
J8223D
2
1
J8227DH
J8227D
J5502
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
J1226
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
UN2
J1225
9 10 11 12 13
J1901
UN6
V_PASS_JOINT_SNS
REJI_SNS
L1_KSB_RX_5
L1_KSB_TX_5_BUF
J1223
GND
J1212
RMT_RCON
R_PW_MON
SEESAW
RMT_QUICK
GND
GND
L1_BUSCOM_RX_0
L1_BUSCOM_TX_0_BUF
L1_BUSCOM_CLK_0_BUF
J9005
L1_KSB_RX_4
L1_BUSCOM_RX_1
GND
J9005H
L1_KSB_TX_4_BUF
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
GND
5V_A
GND
12V
GND
3V_ANALOG
N.C.
GND
L1_KSB_RX3-
J1220
L1_KSB_RX3+
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
L1_BUSCOM_TX_1_BUF
L1_BUSCOM_CLK_1_BUF
GND
*REJI_ON_IRQ
*IMG2_PVREQ_IRQ
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
L1_KSB_TX3-
DDI_CMD_TX
GND
DDI_CMD_RX
GND
DDI_LIVEWAKE
DDI_CPRDY
DDI_PPRDY
*DDI_RESET
*DDI_DOWNLOAD
GND
FUNCTION_MODE0
L1_KSB_TX3+
J1251
L1_KSB_TX2_BUF
GND
L1_KSB_RX2
J1211
REJI_ON_IRQ_BUF
3
3
V_PASS_JOINT_SNS
J1214
FUNCTION_MODE1
FUNCTION_MODE2
FUNCTION_MODE3
J5501
REJI_SNS
GND
2
1
5V_A
GND
J1210
12V
ECO_POW
GND
6
GND
ECO_SCL
CP9
CP10
BOOT
GND
ECO_SDA
N.C.
PC_RXD
PC_TXD
FIX_EXHAUST_FAN_ERR
+3.3V_CPU
GND
D
GND
J9002H
J9002
FIX_EXHAUST_FAN_PWM
24V
E
DOWNLOAD_PC
10
KEY
GND
XXIV
123
Drum ITB Driver PCB
Fixing Heat Fan
FM6
P.5
F-10-8
XXIV
XXV
10
Host Machine
UN7
Relay PCB
TH_CNCT2
To P.2
UN30
IH Power Supply PCB
E-9
7
J8170D
J8122F
J510
B1
J8170LH
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
(BK)
A1
TH_CNCT2
GND
TH_REAR
GND
TH_SUB2
GND
TH_SUB1
+3.3V
TH_CNCT1
GND
GND
TH_MAIN
TH_FRONT
+3.3V
+5V
GND
WEB_REMAIN_DTC_SNS
J8170L
10
MT9
J8026D
FT37
1
J8001DA
A10 B10
B2
A2
(W)
(W)
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
(BK)
GND
TH_REAR
GND
TH_SUB2
GND
GND
J1810
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
TH_SUB1
+3.3V
TH_CNCT1
GND
+5V
TH_MAIN
TH_FRONT
GND
+3.3V
WEB_REMAIN_DTC_SNS
10
J8001D
J8001DB
J8027D
1
J8001DWH
J8001LWH
Fixing Unit
A10 B10
J8001LA
FT38
J8001LB
J8001L
MT10
J7499DH
8
TH_CNCT2
GND
TH_REAR
GND
TH_SUB2
GND
TH_SUB1
+3.3V
TH_CNCT1
GND
TH_MAIN
GND
TH_FRONT
5
J7404L
H4
J8025DH
IH Coil
J8025L
J8003D
J7404DH
J8003DH
1
J8003L
MT7
TP
J7499L
10
10
5
6
J8025D
J7404D
J7499D
J8027L
+3.3V
GND
+5V
J8026L
WEB_REMAIN_DTC_SNS 3
TP2
Fixing
Thermal Switch
MT8
J180330
1
1
PS102
Web Level Sensor
THM12
Front
Thermistor
THM11
Main
Thermistor
Thermistor Unit 1
10
THM13
Sub
Thermistor 1
THM14
Sub
Thermistor 2
THM15
Rear
Thermistor
Thermistor Unit 2
P.6
F-10-9
XXV
XXVI
10
F
UN5
2
2
J1509
GND
13 12 11 10 9
J3062
9 10 11 12 13
J18138L
12 11 10 9
PIN9
GND
*HV_RMT
E
GND
*TR2_REMOVE_DC_ON
GND
DA_TR2_REMOVE_CONT
TR2_REMOVE_CLK
GND
*HV_RMT
GND
*TR2_CV_ON
*TR2_MINUS_ON
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
UN48
UN49
Post-secondary Transfer
Static Elimination
High Voltage PCB
FT23
J35420
1
J18006L
9 10 11 12
J3540
Secondary Transfer
High Voltage PCB
J18006DH
1
*TR2_CRNT_ON
DA_TR2_CONT_P
DA_TR2_CONT_CURRENT
PIN28
GND
GND
J18004L
J18006D
J18138DH
1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J18138D
J8101D
Duplex Sensor 1
J18004DH
PS24
J18004D
DA_TR2_CONT_N
GND
PRESS_ROLLER_THM_FILM
+5V
TR2_CURRENT_DETECT
9 10 11 12 13
PRESS_ROLLER_THM_CASE
RECIPRO_HP_SNS
GND
+5V
FUSER_ENTRANCE_SNS
GND
+5V
GND
+5V
REVERSE_1_SNS
GND
+5V
INNER_EXIT_SNS
GND
CORE_MOVE_MTR_A
CORE_MOVE_MTR_B
CORE_MOVE_MTR_A*
CORE_MOVE_MTR_B*
+5V
HALF_PRESS_SNS
GND
UNIFORMALY_HEAT_ROLLER_HP_SNS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
+5V
PRESS_ROLLER_HP_SNS
+5V
GND
GND
CORE_MOVE_HP_SNS
-(GND)
J1513
4
UNIFORM_HEAT_ROLLER_DESORPTION_MTR_A
UNIFORM_HEAT_ROLLER_DESORPTION_MTR_A*
UNIFORM_HEAT_ROLLER_DESORPTION_MTR_B*
UNIFORM_HEAT_ROLLER_DESORPTION_MTR_B
TR2_VOLT_DETECT
J1508
MT28
MT27
J17220
3
3
2
2
J18033
1
1
3
3
2
2
1
1
J17206
J17229
3
3
2
2
J17219
1
1
3
3
2
2
J17223
3
3
2
2
1
1
J10011
3
3
2
2
J8039D
1
1
PS98
Core Shutter Motor
PS99
PS75
PS70
Fixing Heat Soaking Roller Fixing Inlet

Sensor
HP Sensor
Fixing Inner
Delivery Sensor
PS100
Reciprocation
HP Sensor
PRESS_ROLLER_THM_FILM
Rh
MT14
UN67
UN66
Half Pressure
Position Sensor
M56
Core HP Sensor
Fixing Pressure
Release Sensor
PS110
MT13
J8039L
Web Motor
PS73
J8039DH
M55
PRESS_ROLLER_THM_CASE
GND
+5V
GND
RECIPRO_HP_SNS
+5V
FUSER_ENTRANCE_SNS
GND
GND
+5V
INNER_EXIT_SNS
GND
MTR_A
MTR_A*
MTR_B*
MTR_B
+5V
HALF_PRESS_SNS
GND
+5V
PRESS_ROLLER_HP_SNS
GND
+5V
CORE_MOVE_HP_SNS
3
3
Secondary Transfer
High Voltage
Contact Resistance
Secondary Transfer
Static Elimination
High Voltage
Contact Resistance
R2
J17218
GND
MTR_A
2
MTR_A*
3
R1
J8042F
J18007
MTR_B*
+5V
UNIFORMALY_HEAT_ROLLER_HP_SNS
J8042M
MTR_B
Rt
THM16
MT23
MT24
Pressure Roler Thermistor

Thermistor Unit 3

A
10
P.7
F-10-10
XXVI
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
2
J1510
7
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
J1500
N.C
GND
24V
GND
24V
J3541
24V
UN5
5
4
1
2
3
3
2
1
3
2
1
J8099M
J7612
1
Post-secondary
Transfer Static
Elimination
High Voltage PCB
9
8
UN49
3
7
6
FUSER_MTR_FG
GND
1
FUSER_MTR_CLK
J8023D
FUSER_MTR_GAIN
FUSER_MTR_CW
Relay PCB
*FUSER_MTR_LOCK
GND
UN2
J1222
10 11 12
4
5
6
J899D
J899L
J899LH
J8980
PS112
J898D
4
J8981
4
3
2
J898L
2
3
4
3
2
1
UN4
J1470
7
UN7
J898LH
TS9
Waste Toner
Full Sensor
J8023DA
M48
Fixing Motor
M
J8099F
J7217
8
J3061
+5V
LED
VOUT
GND
9 10 11
+5V
W_TONER_CAPACITANCE_SNS
J1415
GND
24VA_12V_FUS_MTR
GND
24V_IL
Host Machine
*FUSER_MTR_ON
24V
GND
24V_IL
J8023LA
GND
24VA_TEIHAN
GND
*PVREQ_TO_TRASPORT_DR
INVERSION_VPASS3_SNS
GND
REVERSE_1_SNS
2ND_DESPORTION_HP_SNS
VPASS_JOINT_SNS
REGI_SNS
GND
J1816
GND
4
GND
24V
2
GND
GND
GND
GND
3.3V
L1_KSB_RX1+
5V
J8023LB
J8098M
GND
J8098F
24V
11
10
GND
PV_REQ
GND
REVERSE_1_SNS
N.C.
12
2ND_TRANS_DESPORTION_HP_SNS 5
VPASS_JOINT_SNS
REGI_SNS
GND
DRAWER_DTC_LOOP
GND
11
GND
8
11 10 9
1
J1511
1
6
2
5
3
4
4
3
A12 B11
2
J8023L
1
J8023DB
A12 B11
5
10
GND
L1_KSB_RX1-
7
9
L1_KSB_RX1+
GND
10
8
8
11
L1_KSB_RX1-
L1_KSB_TX1+
Fixing Feed Side
GND
L1_KSB_TX1-
L1_KSB_TX1+
5V
12 11 10
5
L1_KSB_TX1-
GND
5V
12V
GND
DRAWER_CNCT
9
10
10
2
11
C
1
12V
10
12
B
DRAWER_CNCT
XXVII
Secondary Transfer
High Voltage PCB
UN48
J1507
Fixing Feed /Fixing Motor
P.8
F-10-11
XXVII
XXVIII
J17225
J7211
Original Size
Sensor 1
J7213
9 10 11 12 13
J8092D
GND
N.C
J19
2
2
M34
Registration Motor
J21
1
1
2
4
3
5
4
6
5
7
6
8
10 11
J7203
J20
J1506
J1505
J1502
+5V
J8092LH
4
J8091D
VPASS_JOINT_SNS
13 12 11 10 9
GND
9 10 11 12 13
REGI_SNS
GND
+5V
J8102DH
J8102D
J8092L
PAPER_WIDTH_DTC1_SNS
PAPER_LOOP_DTC2_SNS
+5V
GND
+5V
+5V
PAPER_LOOP_DTC1_SNS
Original Size
Sensor 3
J18
J8091LH
OHP_SNS
GND
GND
GND
+5V
2ND_TRANS_END_SNS
J8091L
OHP_SNS_LED_ON
2
2
N.C
2ND_TRANS_DESPORTION_HP_SNS
GND
J8102L
J7212
3
REGIST_MTR_B
Original Size
Sensor 4
REGIST_MTR_B*
PS96
REGIST_MTR_A*
J17224
REGIST_MTR_A
Original Size
Sensor 2
PS94
PS97
+5V
Registration
Sensor
OHP Sensor
PS95
GND
J7215
J7214
PS30
Loop Sensor 2
PS28
+5V
PS29
GND
Post-secondary
Transfer Sensor
PS91
Loop Sensor 1
PS23
Registration Unit
PS90

Detachment HP Sensor
+5V
PS22
GND
+5V
10
9 10 11 12 13
J1512
UN5
J1504
UNIFIFORM_ROL_COOL_FAN2
J8033D
J8037LH
J7202D
J7202L
M32
M57
Duplex Left Motor
J17205
4
4
1
1
J7201D
Reciprocation Motor
3
3
2
2
J7208
PS25
CT
2
2
J7209
3
3
2
2
J7236D
Duplex Sensor 2
PS26
Duplex Sensor 3
B
3
J7236L
CT
123
Pressure Belt
Cooling Fan (Front)
FM15
J7210
M35
J7230L
J8142LH
J7236DH
J7230DH
J8142L
10
CT
J7230D
J7200
4
J7235L
J8142D
4
J7202LH
J8033LH
J8037L
GND
*LOCK
GND
TRANSPORT_FR_COOL_FAN
GND
UNIFIFORM_ROL_COOL_FAN1
+5V
REVERSE_4_SNS
GND
+5V
REVERSE_3_SNS
GND
+5V
REVERSE_2_SNS
GND
PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_MTR_OUT_B
PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_MTR_OUT_B*
J8037D
*LOCK1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_MTR_OUT_A*
PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_MTR_OUT_A
RECIPRO_MTR_A
RECIPRO_MTR_A*
RECIPRO_MTR_B*
RECIPRO_MTR_B
REVERSE_LEFT_MTR_B
REVERSE_LEFT_MTR_A*
REVERSE_LEFT_MTR_B*
*LOCK2
J1503
J1501
REVERSE_LEFT_MTR_A
123
123
FM27
FM16
Pressure Belt
Cooling Fan (Rear)
PS27
Duplex Sensor 4
Fixing Feed
P.9
F-10-12
XXVIII
4
5
6
7
6
5
4
3
2
J8010LH
J8010D
1
J8011D
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
4
5
6
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
24V
6
5
4
3
2
ITB_1
AC_H(BK)
ITB_2
AC_H(BK)
ITB_2
AC_N(W)
ITB_1
AC_N(W)
10
11
12
1
2
3
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
To P.1
F
F
Host Machine ITB Drawer

UN2
J1242
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
D
D
To P.14
D-2
J8011LH
J80110LH
J80110L
J8189F
A
+3.3V
K1_ENC2_IN_0
GND
+3.3V
K1_ENC1_IN_0
GND
13
B
GND
5V
GND
ITB_PWM_BUF
14
3
3
15
2
2
16
To P.11
17
J8050DA
A20 B20
18
J8050DWH
J8011L
19
FT81
20
MT29
ITB_FG_IN
ITB_BREAK_BUF
ITB_ON_BUF
ITB_DIR_BUF
N.C
STEERING_MTR_OUT_A
STEERING_MTR_OUT_A*
STEERING_MTR_OUT_B*
10
11
12
13
STEERING_MTR_OUT_B
J1241
14
3
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_OUT_A
1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_OUT_A*
9 10 11
1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_OUT_B*
J1240
J8010L
15
6
N.C
E
1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_MTR_OUT_B
GND
*ITB_UNIT_DET
N.C
ITB_STEERTNG_HP_SNS
ITB_EDGE_SNS_ON
16
*ITB_HP_IRQ
N.C
C
5
N.C
N.C
GND
ITB_EDGE_ADC_DIN1
17
8
2
+5V
18
19
20
10
ITB_EDGE_ADC_DIN2
10
1ST_DESPORION_HP_SNS
GND
XXIX
B-5
F-4
J8050D
J8050DB
P.10
F-10-13
XXIX
XXX
10
ITB Unit
A-5
Primary Transfer High Voltage Contact

MT11
16
N_(W)
N_(W)
H_(BK)
J8050LB
20
15
19
14
18
13
17
12
GND
10
11
N_(W)
H_(BK)
H_(BK)
STEERING_MTR_OUT_B*
J8052M
1
J8052F
J8051F
H3
H2
Drum Heater (M)

2
Drum Heater (Y)

2
STEERING_MTR_OUT_B
STEERING_MTR_OUT_A
J8051M
STEERING_MTR_OUT_A*
ITB_ROLLER_TEMP
Primary Transfer High Voltage

ITB_HP_SNS
MT60
ITB_STEERTNG_HP_SNS
MT59
1
ITB_EDGE_SNS_ON
R6
ITB_EDGE_ADC_DOUT1

ITB_EDGE_ADC_DOUT2
MT22
UN65
UN64
MT21
ITB Unit
Varistor
GND
R5
MT61
VR1

MT18
MT20
1
+5V
MT58
J8050LA
R4
UN63

J8050LWH
A20 B20
MT15
N.C
UN62
MT17
MT16
1
H_(BK)
J8050L
FT80
N_(W)
R3
GND
MT19
To P.10
1ST_TRANS_DESPORION_HP_SNS
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
ITB Relay PCB
J2704
3
GND
ITB_HP_SNS
J8045LH
J8045L
J7114L
J8044L
J7518
J7528
J8047D
J8052D
J8052DH
J8047L
J8052L
ITB_PWM_BUF
24V
GND
5V
GND
ITB_FG
ITB_ON_BUF
ITB_BREAK_BUF
J8044LH
1
J7318
1
1
+3.3V
J8044D
J7114LH
ITB_ENC2
J7114D
+3.3V
J8046L
ITB_ENC1
J8047LH
GND
J8045D
GND
J8046D
J8046LH
ITB_DIR_BUF
STEERING_MTR_OUT_B
STEERING_MTR_OUT_B*
STEERING_MTR_OUT_A
STEERING_MTR_OUT_A*
5V
+5V
GND
5V
ITB_STEERTNG_HP_SNS
GND
1ST_TRANS_DESPORTION_HP_SNS
ITB_EDGE_SNS_ON
5V
ITB_EDGE_ADC_DOUT1
ITB_EDGE_ADC_DOUT2
N.C
20
19
18
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
J2701
J2702
J2703
J2700
UN28
GND
J7319
THM
ITB Heater
control thermistor
PS5
M3
ITB Drive Motor
J7416
J7114
3
J7414
PS2
ITB Displacement
Sensor
10
PS4

Detachment HP Sensor
PS3
B*
M4

Detachment Motor
UN17
ITB Drive Roller
Speed Detection
PCB 2
M5
Steering Drive
HP Sensor
UN16
ITB Drive Roller
Speed Detection
PCB 1
J7113
A*
J7415
B*
A*
ITB HP Sensor
P.11
F-10-14
XXX
XXXI
10
Drum Drive Unit (Bk)
Drum Drive Unit(Color)

UN6
Drum ITB Driver PCB

J1905
2
J1903
3
J1904
J1902
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DRM_PWM_M_BUF
24V
GND
5V
GND
DRM_PWM_C_BUF
DRM_FG_C
DRM_BREAK_C_BUF
DRM_ON_C_BUF
DRM_DIR_C_BUF
+3.3V
DRM_ENC2_C
+3.3V
DRM_ENC1_C
GND
24V
GND
5V
GND
GND
24V
GND
5V
DRM_FG_M
GND
DRM_BREAK_M_BUF
DRM_ON_M_BUF
DRM_DIR_M_BUF
DRM_ENC2_M
+3.3V
DRM_ENC1_M
GND
+3.3V
GND
24V
GND
DRM_PWM_Y_BUF
5V
DRM_FG_Y
GND
DRM_BREAK_Y_BUF
DRM_ON_Y_BUF
DRM_ENC2_Y
+3.3V
DRM_ENC1_Y
GND
+3.3V
GND
DRM_PWM_K_BUF
DRM_FG_K
DRM_BREAK_K_BUF
DRM_ON_K_BUF
DRM_DIR_K_BUF
+3.3V
DRM_ENC2_K
GND
+3.3V
DRM_ENC1_K
DRM_DIR_Y_BUF
N.C
GND
J7311
Drum Motor (Bk)
UN18
UN19
Drum Speed Detection

PCB (Bk) 1

PCB (Bk) 2
GND
M19
B
J7310
J7316
UN20
PCB (Y) 1
J7317
UN21
J8021D
J7315
UN22

PCB (M) 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
24V
GND
5V
+3.3V
J7304
9
B
M23
Drum Motor (M)

3
DRM_ENC1_C
GND
24V
GND
J8021L
J7302
9
J7314
5V
GND
DRM_PWM_M_BUF
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DRM_FG_M
DRM_BREAK_M_BUF
DRM_ON_M_BUF
DRM_DIR_M_BUF
M21

PCB (Y) 2
J7300
24V
Drum Motor (Y)

3
+3.3V
J7306
DRM_ENC2_M
J8021DH
+3.3V
J8020L
DRM_ENC1_M
+3.3V
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
GND
DRM_ENC2_Y
GND
DRM_ENC1_Y
GND
DRM_DIR_Y_BUF
N.C
5V
GND
DRM_PWM_Y_BUF
DRM_FG_Y
DRM_BREAK_Y_BUF
J8020DH
1
DRM_ON_Y_BUF
J8019L
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
GND
J8020D
DRM_PWM_C_BUF
DRM_FG_C
DRM_BREAK_C_BUF
DRM_ON_C_BUF
DRM_DIR_C_BUF
+3.3V
DRM_ENC2_C
GND
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
GND
J8019D
J8019DH
+3.3V
UN23

PCB (M) 2
M25
J7312
J7313
Drum Motor (C)

3
UN24
UN25

PCB (C) 1

PCB (C) 2
10
P.12
F-10-15
XXXI
10
9
7
6
5
7
6
5
M20
J7535
Developing Sleeve
Drive Motor (Y)
M
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
J7536
Developing Sleeve
Drive Motor (M)
M22
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
M
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
J7538
CLN_DRIVE_MTR_FG*
CLN_DRIVE_MTR_DEC*
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
M18
M30
Developing Sleeve
Drive Motor (Bk)
Drum Cleaning and
Waste Toner Feed Drive
Motor
J8034D
1
J8034LH
J7539
4
3
J7515A
14 13 12 11 10 9
J8176L
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
8
7
CHOUHI_RXLOAD
4
3
3
2
4
3
2
F
F
3.5K Deck
Drum ITB Driver PCB
UN6
J1909
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
J8176D
1
J8176DH
9 10 11 12 13 14
J7537
A
CHOUHI_TXOUTEN
CHOUHI_RXD
CHOUHI_TXEND
E1_STM_CLK11
CHOUHI_TXD
GND
GND
CHOUHI_CLK
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
GND
J1914
GND
GND
NC
GND
CLN_DRIVE_MTR_FG
CLN_DRIVE_MTR_DEC
CLN_DRIVE_MTR_ACC
GND
+24B
CLN_DRIVE_MTR_ACC*
CLN_DRIVE_MTR_CW
GND
GND
+24B
BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG
CLN_DRIVE_MTR_CW*
BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC
BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC
GND
+24B
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW
GND
J1906
ID_BIT
BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG*
C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG
C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC
C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC
N.C
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC*
BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC*
GND
+24B
GND
+24C
C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW
GND
M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG
M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC
M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC
BK_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW*
ID_BIT
C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG*
C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC*
C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC*
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
GND
GND
+24C
+24A
C_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW*
M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW
ID_BIT
GND
M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG*
Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG
M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC*
Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC
M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC*
Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC
GND
GND
+24A
J8034L
+24A
M_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW*
E
Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW
MOTOR_ID
ID_BIT
Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_FG*
Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_DEC*
Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_ACC*
GND
+24A
10
Y_DEV_SLEEVE_MTR_CW*
ID_BIT
XXXII
To Paper Deck
J7515B
Developing Sleeve
Drive Motor (C)
M24
Developing Drive
A
P.13
F-10-16
XXXII
XXXIII
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
+5V
GND
ITB_THERMISTOR
GND
GND
GND
END9
END8
END7
J8018L
J8017D
J8017LH
2
N.C
END10
9 10 11
END11
SNS_SIG
SNS_VCC
FLG1A
FLG1B
DRV_SIG
J8017L
N.C
N.C
N.C
END12
N.C
J8018D
J8058D
7
J8073
J8035LH
2
J8018DH
J80110D
To P.10
J8058LH
C-3
1
Potential Sensor(Bk)
1
GND
THM_S_50_LMT
THM_S_CNT
THM_P_42_5_DTC
DRUM_HEATER_THM_CNCT
GND
THM_P_42_5_DTC
GND
+5V
GND
PRIM_IN_FAN_LOCK
J8058L
N.C
Potential
Control PCB
RTN_SIG
7
J3530
11 10 9
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
UN12
200V Drum Heater
Driver PCB
UN29
J3531
J8035D
9 10 11 12 13
HAND_PAPER_FEED_GATE_SNS
GND
PRIM_IN_FAN_FULL/HALF
GND
+3.3V_ANALOG
BK_POTENTIAL_DETECT
+24R
BK_POTENTOAL_SNS_ON
HV_ON
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
UN11
E
7
N.C
BK_PRE_CLN_LED_ON
+24R
PATCH_SL_ON
+24R
PATCH_REF
GND
+5V
PATCH_S
PATCH_P
15
PAD26
R_RESET
BR_DETECT
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
R_LED_ON
PAD25
R_RESET
+5V
GND
FR_DETECT
PATCH_LED_ON
14
13
12
11
10
R_LED_ON
+5V
GND
GND
J2202
J1809
J1908
27
100V Drum Heater

Driver PCB
+5V
Relay PCB
Drum ITB Driver PCB
J1907
UN7
UN6
F
THM_P_42_5_DTC
GND
TH_S
TH_P
DRUM_HEATER_LMT
PILE_TEMP
THM_TEMP
10
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
J8035L
Registration Patch
3
J8133D
J8133L
123
J7408
PS19
J7409
Registration
Patch Sensor (Front)
10
J7410
PS20
Registration
Patch Sensor (Rear)
GND
+5V
PATCH_REF
PATCH_S
PATCH_P
PATCH_LEDON
PAD26
R_RESET
+5V
3
J7411
2
2
J7032
J8032L
THM6
PS79
Drum
Thermistor
Multi-purpose
Tray Cover Sensor
2
4
B
THM5
Drum Thermopile
J7140D
J7142D
2
J7142DH
J7140DH
J7519
GND
BR_DETECT
+5V
PAD25
+5V
R_RESET
GND
J7410L
N.C
FR_DETECT
+5V
N.C
J7408L
J7410DH
Primary Charging
Suction Fan
J8032DH
FM2
BK_PRE_CLN_LED_ON
+24R
J7408DH
R_LED_ON
J7410D
+24R
J7408D
PATCH_SL_ON
J8032D
GND
+5V
+5V
1
1
J7109L
GND
J8133DH
J7109DH
THM_P_42_5_DTC
J7109D
GND
R_LED_ON
J7140L
J7142L
J7412
PS21
SL
Patch Sensor
SL1
Registration Patch
Shutter Solenoid
LED1
Cleaning
Pre-exposure
LED (Bk)
P.14
F-10-17
XXXIII
Primary Pre-transfer
Charging Wire
Cleaning Motor
M2
8
1
M
2
SOLD27
J7148DH
POST_WIRE_CLN_MTR_OUT2
J7148D
1
3
2
7
5
1
6
1
7
J10021
1
J80011D
J80011LH
J80011L
3
2
J80010DH
J10022
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
3
6
2
2
1
J7152
J10023
3
2
2
PS92
PS103
PS93
PS104
Primary
Charging Wire
HP Sensor
Primary
Charging Wire Rotary
Position Sensor
Pre-transfer
Charging Wire
HP Sensor
Pre-transfer
Charging Wire
Rotary Position Sensor
5
4
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
J7158
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
J7156
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
M
M
M29
M26
M28
Developing Stirring
Motor (Bk)
Developing Stirring
Motor (Y)
Developing Stirring
Motor (M)
J7157
12
C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CW
J8031LB
11
J8031DB
+24E
10
A13 B12
C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG
A13 B12
GND
*C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC
+24E
*C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC
M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG
M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CW
J8031LA
J8031DA
*M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC
J80009L
*M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC
13
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
GND
12
+24D
Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CW
11
10
Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG
*Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC
J8038L
*Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC
BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CW
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
+24D
NC
J8002LH
GND
J80010L
BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG
J80010D
2
C
*BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC
N.C
9 10 11 12 13
GND
J8009DH
*BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC
+5R
4
2
POST_SHUTTER_ROT_DET
3
3
GND
2
4
+5R
POST_SHUTTER_CLOSE_DET
1
6
GND
7
2
+5R
13 12 11 10 9
PRIM_SHUTTER_ROT_DET
GND
+5R
PRIM_SHUTTER_CLOSE_DET
GND
GND
GND
C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CW
+24E
C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG
*C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC
*C_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC
GND
M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CW
+24E
M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG
*M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC
*M_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC
GND
Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CW
+24D
Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG
*Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC
*Y_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC
GND
BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_CW
+24D
BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_FG
*BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_ACC
*BK_DEV_SCREW_MTR_DEC
N.C.
+5R
POST_SHUTTER_ROT_DET
GND
+5R
POST_SHUTTER_CLOSE_DET
GND
+5R
PRIM_SHUTTER_ROT_DET
GND
+5R
PRIM_SHUTTER_CLOSE_DET
GND
2
1
UN2
J1243
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
J8038D
J8038LH
1
J8002L
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
D
D
J80009D
J80009DH
J8031D
J8031L
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
J7148L
J7147D
6
J7147LH
7
Primary Charging
Wire Cleaning Motor
8
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
SOLD28
J8002D
10
1
4
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
7
11
2
3
12
1
2
2
7
6
1
3
6
5
M1
4
5
4
J7147L
2
4
3
3
2
J8009L
2
1
N.C
F
5
9
1
J8009D
PRIM_WIRE_CLN_MTR_OUT2
J1245
10
10
11
B
10
12
13
XXXIV
M27
Developing Stirring
Motor (C)
J10024
Front Inner Door
Process Unit
P.15
F-10-18
XXXIV
XXXV
10
Process Unit (Drum Cartridge/Developing Assembly)

UN2
J1244
GND
NC
FRONT_DOOR_SNS
3.3V
GND
DEV_AIR_TEMP2
DEV_AIR_TEMP1
GND
+24R
GND
+24R
C_PRE_EXP_LED_REF
C_PRE_EXP_LED_ON
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
+24R
M_PRE_EXP_LED_REF
M_PRE_EXP_LED_ON
GND
+24R
Y_PRE_EXP_LED_REF
Y_PRE_EXP_LED_ON
J8085D
12 11 10 9
J8080D
J8093D
J8086D
J8085LH
J8085L
J8080LH
1
J8086LH
9 10 11 12
J8093LH
J8093L
J8080L
J8086L
J8087D
J8088D
J8087DH
2
J8089D
Y_PRE_EXP_LED_REF
J8117D
J7533
J8117DH
2
J7534
3
J8117L
J8094D
3
4
1
J8029DH
Toner Density
Sensor (Y)
J7548L
Cleaning Pre-exposure
LED (Y)
Toner Density
Sensor (M)
TS4
J7549L
J7135
LED3
J8015D
Front Cover Sensor
J8015L
Toner Density
Sensor (C)
J7146
TS1
Toner Density
Sensor (Bk)
LED4
LED (M)
J7132DH
TS3
LED2

Temperature Detection
PCB (C/Bk)
PS80
J8015DH
C_PRE_EXP_LED_REF
J7134
J7131DH
TS2

Temperature Detection
PCB (Y/M)
UN15
J7132D
2
GND
+24R
J8030L
C_PRE_EXP_LED_ON
GND
GND
M_PRE_EXP_LED_REF
J8029L
+24R
M_PRE_EXP_LED_ON
+24R
J8030DH
GND
J8030D
J7133
+24R
J8029D
J8028DH
J7130DH
J8089L
J7131D
2
J8088L
J8028D
J7130D
10
J7547L
UN14
J8028L
J8089DH
1
J8087L
J8088DH
1
Y_PRE_EXP_LED_ON
LED (C)
P.16
F-10-19
XXXV
XXXVI
Reciprocation Cam HP Sensor (Color)
Hopper Y M
10

UN2
J1247
J1249
9 10 11 12 13
13 12 11 10 9
J7199D
J7197D
9 10 11 12 13
J7199L
9 10 11 12 13
J7198D
J8107L
J7123D
3
3
2
2
J7124
Toner Container
Phase Sensor (Y)
TS6
+5R
J7197L
Hopper Toner
Level Sensor (Y)
3
3
2
2
M10
PS12
Toner Feed
Screw Rotation
Sensor (Y)
M_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT2
1
Toner Container
Drive Motor (Y)
J7104
J7126D
TS7
J7104DH
J7100L
J7105L
J7105D
2
2
1
1
Hopper Toner
Level Sensor (M)
PS11
Toner Container
Reciprocation HP
Sensor (Y)
J71980
3
PS14
Toner Container
Reciprocation HP
Sensor (M)
3
3
2
2
1
1
PS15
M13
Toner Container
Drive Motor (M)
Toner Feed
Screw Rotation
Sensor (M)
M9
PS17
J7111DH
Toner Container
Reciprocation HP
Sensor (C)
J7111L
123
FM3
Primary Charging
Exhaust Fan
J7419
Toner Container
Phase Sensor (M)
J7105DH
PS82
J7111D
M_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CCW
M_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CW
+5R
M_HOPPER_SCREW_ROT_DTC_SNS
GND
+5R
J71970
3
3
J10031L
J7418
M_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS
GND
+5R
1
J7104L
PS81
J7101D
J71990
J7101DH
J7100DH
M_HOPPER_TONER_SNS
GND
Y_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CCW
Y_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CW
J7100D
Y_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT2
+5R
GND
Y_HOPPER_SCREW_ROT_DTC_SNS
+5R
Y_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS
GND
+5R
Y_HOPPER_TONER_SNS
J7121
J7198DH
J7198L
+5R
J8106L
GND
J8107DH
1
J7197DH
J7199DH
J8106DH
C_TONER_CRG_SLIDE_HP_SNS
GND
M_TONER_CRG_SLIDE_HP_SNS
J8107D
PRIM_EXHAUST_FAN_ERR
GND
PRIM_EXHAUST_FAN_ON
+5R
Y_TONER_CRG_SLIDE_HP_SNS
GND
13 12 11 10 9
J8106D
NC
M_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CCW
M_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CW
+5R
M_HOPPER_SCREW_ROT_DTC_SNS
GND
+5R
M_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS
GND
+5R
M_HOPPER_TONER_SNS
Y_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CCW
Y_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CW
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
+5R
Y_HOPPER_SCREW_ROT_DTC_SNS
GND
+5R
+5R
Y_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS
*Y_HOPPER_TONER_SNS
GND
GND
GND
M12
Hopper and Stirring
Supply Motor (M)
Hopper and Stirring

Supply Motor (Y)
10
P.17
F-10-20
XXXVI
XXXVII
10
Hopper C BK
UN2
BK_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT1
BK_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CCW
BK_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CW
+5R
BK_TONER_CRG_SLIDE_HP_SNS
GND
+5R
BK_HOPPER_SCREW_ROT_DTC_SNS
GND
+5R
GND
+5R
*BK_HOPPER_TONER_SNS
GND
C_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CCW
C_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CW
C_TONER_CRG_MTR_OUT2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
+5R
C_HOPPER_SCREW_ROT_DTC_SNS
GND
+5R
C_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS
GND
GND
+5R
*C_HOPPER_TONER_SNS
J1248
D
J8108D
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J7129D
3
3
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
GND
+5R
J7135D
PS83
Hopper Toner
Level Sensor (C)
Toner Container
Phase Sensor (C)
J7420
3
3
2
2
1
1
M16
J10033L
J7417
TS5
J7139D
3
3
2
2
1
1
J71750
M15
J7103D
J10025L
J7107D
J7107DH
3
3
2
2
M7
Toner Container
Drive Motor (Bk)
Toner Container
Reciprocation HP
Sensor (Bk)
J10028L
PS8
Toner Container
Phase Sensor (Bk)
Toner Feed
Screw Rotation
Sensor (Bk)
PS84
J7103DH
1
PS9
Hopper Toner
Level Sensor (Bk)
1
PS18
J7106D
J7106DH
Toner Container
Drive Motor (C)
Toner Feed
Screw Rotation
Sensor (C)
J7136
TS8
J7135DH
J7135L
J10026L
GND
BK_HOPPER_SCREW_ROT_DTC_SNS
GND
J8040L
J7102D
BK
10
J8040D
SOLD26
J7127
J8040LH
J8108L
+5R
9 10 11 12 13
GND
C_HOPPER_SCREW_ROT_DTC_SNS
GND
+5R
C_CAM_PHASE_DTC_SNS
GND
+5R
BK_HOPPER_TONER_SNS
C_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CCW
C_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CW
J7102DH
BK_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CCW
BK_HOPPER_SCREW_M_CW
+5R
+5R
J8108DH
C_HOPPER_TONER_SNS
SOLD25
+5R
13 12 11 10 9
GND
M6
Hopper and Stirring

Supply Motor (Bk)
Hopper and Stirring

Supply Motor (C)
P.18
F-10-21
XXXVII
J7137
10
3
2
1
PS6
Toner Supply
Cover Sensor
9
J7138
3
2
1
3
2
1
PS7
Color Toner Insertion

Inlet Cover Sensor (Bk)
8
J7122
3
3
2
PS10
1

Inlet Cover Sensor (Y)
J7125
7
3
3
2
2
1

Inlet Cover Sensor (M)
PS13
J7128
3
2
1
3
2
1
PS16
J7116D
J7116

Inlet Cover Sensor (C)
3
2
1
2
3
123
J7231
FM18
J7116DH
123
Hopper Cooling Fan
J7231DH
J7231D
3
2
J7149L
1
2
FM4
J7112D
123
Developing and Pre-transfer

Charging Fan
FM22
J7149D
J7149DH
3
J7112DH
3
3
2
1
J7112L
1
123
2
3
J7160L
3
2
F
F
Host Machine Fan

Drum ITB Driver PCB
UN6
J1910
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
D
D
J7159DH
3
A
PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_FAN_ERR
GND
PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_FAN_ON
CL_CLEANER_FAN_ERR
PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_FAN_ERR
GND
PRE_FUSER_DELIVERY_FAN_ON
CL_CLEANER_FAN_ERR
GND
CL_CLEANER_FAN_ON
BK_DEV_POST_FAN_ERR
GND
GND
GND
BK_DEV_POST_FAN_ON
HOPPER_COOL_IN_FAN_FULL/HALF
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
HOPPER_COOL_ EX_FAN_LOCK
J1246
GND
UN2
CL_CLEANER_FAN_ON
E
HOPPER_COOL_ EX_FAN_FULL/HALF
BK_DEV_POST_FAN_ERR
GND
GND
BK_DEV_POST_FAN_ON
GND
HOPPER_COOL_IN_FAN_FULL/HALF
HOPPER_COOL_ EX_FAN_LOCK
HOPPER_COOL_ EX_FAN_FULL/HALF
+5R
GND
+5R
GND
+5R
GND
+5R
GND
+5R
GND
+5R
+5R
GND
+5R
TONER_CRG_DOOR_SNS
GND
GND
+5R
10
GND
+5R
TONER_CRG_DOOR_SNS
GND
XXXVIII
J7159D
1
Pre-fixing Feed
Suction Fan
FM1
Color Cleaning Fan
FM5
A
P.19
F-10-22
XXXVIII
10
4
3
2
1
Cassette 3 Size
Detection Switch 1
SW14
9
J7019
J7038
3
3
2
2
1
J7039
B
3
3
2
2
1
PS46
Cassette 3 Paper
Level Sensor 2
8
J7021
5
4
3
2
Cassette 4 Size
Detection Switch 1
SW16
Cassette 3 Paper
Level Sensor 1
PS45
9 10 11
1
1
1
J7040
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
PS48
Cassette 4 Paper
Level Sensor 2
Cassette 4 Paper
Level Sensor 1
PS47
J7020
2
5
4
GND
J8043L
7
3
2
J8043D
J8043LH
9 10 11
J7022
5
4
3
2
J7527
J7041
SW15
SW17
Cassette 3 Size
Detection Switch 2
Cassette 4 Size
Detection Switch 2
1
2
3
1
4
2
5
3
6
4
7
5
8
6
7
8
J8116D
J8055D
J8116L
J8055L
SOLD10
J7527D
10 11
Cassette Vertical Path

Motor
M39
J7527L
1
2
3
1
4
2
5
3
6
4
3
4
7
5
8
9
10 11
2
1
UN4
F

J1406
9 10 11
J8116LH
2
1
1
1
2
Waste Toner Screw

Lock Detection Switch
SW10
J8055LH
2
SOLD11
Waste Toner
J7001LH
J7001D
Pre-registration Multi-purpose
Tray Drive Motor
A
WASTE_TONER_SW
+12V
PRE_REGI_MULTI_MTR_B*
PRE_REGI_MULTI_MTR_B
PRE_REGI_MULTI_MTR_A*
PRE_REGI_MULTI_MTR_A
9 10 11
CST_VPASS_MTR_B*
J1411
CST_VPASS_MTR_B
CST_VPASS_MTR_A*
CST_VPASS_MTR_A
GND
DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW1
DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW2
GND
DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW3
DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW4
UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW1
UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW2
GND
8
11 10 9
DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW1
7
4
DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW2
DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW3
5
1
3
DOWN_CST_SIZE2_SW4
4
2
N.C
3
3
2
UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW1
UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW3
UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
GND
UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW4
N.C
J1404
UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW3
+5V
CST4_PAPER_VOL_DTC2_SNS
GND
+5V
GND
UPPER_CST_SIZE2_SW4
GND
DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW1
+5V
CASET4_ZANKEN_2_SNS
J8141L
6
GND
9 10 11
7
+5V
CASET4_ZANKEN_1_SNS
DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW2
GND
GND
6
8
DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW1
5
11 10 9
DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW2
J8141D
DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW3
1
1
DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW3
DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW4
DOWN_CST_SIZE1_SW4
+5V
CASET3_ZANKEN_2_SNS
GND
+5V
7
2
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW1
CASET3_ZANKEN_1_SNS
UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW2
GND
10
GND
J8141LH
11 10 9
UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW1
UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW3
UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW2
UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW4
GND
UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW3
UPPER_CST_SIZE1_SW4
XXXIX
J7527DH
J7001L
J7001
M36
B
Pickup Drive Unit
Pickup Sensor
A
P.20
F-10-23
XXXIX
XL
10
F
UN4
J1410
3
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
J1460
+24V
GND
+5V
MULTI_PAPER_SNS
MT67
LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B
LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B*
LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A*
LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A
RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B
RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_B*
RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A*
RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_MTR_A
TR2_DESPRTION_MTR_B
TR2_DESPRTION_MTR_B*
TR2_DESPRTION_MTR_A*
TR2_DESPRTION_MTR_A
LEFT_DECK_VPASS_MTR_B*
LEFT_DECK_VPASS_MTR_B
LEFT_DECK_VPASS_MTR_A*
LEFT_DECK_VPASS_MTR_A
RIGHT_DECK_VPASS_MTR_B*
RIGHT_DECK_VPASS_MTR_B
RIGHT_DECK_VPASS_MTR_A*
9 10 11
J8000D
J8059DH
9 10 11
J8000L
J7526D
J7525DH
1
J7005
4
3
1
4
2
5
3
6
4
7
5
10 11
J7525
J7526
10 11
4
M40
M41
J7003
Secondary Transfer Rolle

Detachment Motor
3
4
J7006
J7015
2
3
J7004
1
2
J7007
J7017D
J7017DH
J7017L
3
1
SL
J7108
J8110L
ENV1
J7016
J7018D
PS38
Multi-purpose Tray
Last Paper Sensor
Multi-purpose Tray
Pickup Solenoid
Pickup Drive Unit
Environment
Sensor
SL4
Multi-purpose Tray
Paper Sensor
M45
M42
PS37
M31
M44
Right Deck Pickup

Motor
+24V
MULTI_NAKAITA_SL
M43
J7526L
J7526DH
J7525L
GND
J7525D
+5V
MULTI_PAPER_SNS
J8110D
J8110DH
J8000LH
J8059L
MT68
J8059D
11 10 9
+3.3V
ENV_HUM
GND
ENV_TEMP
WIDTH_OF_PAPER_DTC
GND
+3.3V
+5V
J1407
MULTI_LAST_PAPER_SNS
GND
MULTI_INSIDE_SL_ON
J1499
RIGHT_DECK_VPASS_MTR_A
UN26
Multi-purpose Tray
Paper Width
Detection PCB
10
P.21
F-10-24
XL
XLI
UN4
J1405
J8060DH
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
J8104L
EJECT_MTR_B*
EJECT_MTR_B
EJECT_MTR_A*
EJECT_MTR_A
INVERSION_MTR_B*
INVERSION_MTR_B
INVERSION_MTR_A
INVERSION_ROLLER_RIKAN_MTR_A
INVERSION_MTR_A*
E
J8062D
J8062DH
1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
INVERSION_ROLLER_RIKAN_MTR_A*
INVERSION_ROLLER_RIKAN_MTR_B
INVERSION_ROLLER_RIKAN_MTR_B*
5V
5V
J8104DH
J8060L
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
13 12 11 10 9
J1420
IVEERSION_ROLLER_RIKAN_HP_SNS
GND
J8104D
OUTSIDE_EJECT_OHP_SNS
*OPTION_FAN_CNCT
GND
9 10 11 12 13
*OPTION_COOL_FAN2_LOCK
GND
GND
OPTION_COOL_FAN2_ON
*OPTION_COOL_FAN1_LOCK
GND
*EJECT_ATTACHMENT_FAN4_LOCK
EJECT_ATTACHMENT_FAN4_ON
GND
GND
EJECT_SL_ON
+24V
+5V
OUTSIDE_EJECT_SNS
GND
+5V
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
+5V
GND
GND
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
J8060D
INVERSION_SNS
J1414
OPTION_COOL_FAN1_ON
J1408
GND
10
J8062L
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
9 10 11 12 13
J8244L
1
J7543L
123
J8105D
J8113D
J8105LH
1
11 10 9
J8113L
J8036LH
J8036L
123
FM12
FM13
Delivery Heat Fan 3
Delivery Heat Fan 4
J8113LH
J8105L
9 10 11
C
J7545D
J7546D
J7545DH
Reverse Detachment
Motor
J7546L
123
J7025
J7026
J7028
J7029D
J7023
J7000D
PS33
PS34
PS36
PS31
SL2
Reverse
Vertical Path
Sensor 1
Reverse
Vertical Path
Sensor 2
Lower Left Cover

Sensor
Outer Delivery
Sensor
Delivery Flapper
Solenoid
FM23
FM24
Anti-adhesion Fan 1
Anti-adhesion Fan 2
Outer Delivery
OHP Sensor
J7008
J7002
1
3
1
4
2
5
3
6
4
7
5
10 11
M37
J7000
3
3
2
2
1
1
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6
Delivery Motor
10 11
M38
Reverse Motor
J7161L
J7541D
J7541DH
J7161DH
J7029L
PS32
Reverse Sensor
Reverse Roler HP Sensor
SL
10
J7000L
PS101
J7161D
EJECT_SL_ON
+24V
+5V
OUTSIDE_EJECT_SNS
GND
J8114L
J7029DH
J7024
J8114LH
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
+5V
INVERSION_SNS
J7002L
J7000LH
123
PS111
6
J7002LH
J7546DH
J7540
J7545L
J7002D
M54
MT74
J8114D
J7030D
HAISHI_MTR_B*
J8036D
J8244LH
J7543DH
J7542L
HAISHI_MTR_B
HAISHI_MTR_A*
HAISHI_MTR_A
J7543D
HANTEN_MTR_B*
HANTEN_MTR_B
J7542DH
HANTEN_MTR_A*
J7542D
HANTEN_MTR_A
J8244D
GND
123
J7541L
123
A
FM10
FM11
Delivery Heat Fan 1
Delivery Heat Fan 2
P.22
F-10-25
XLI
XLII
10
F
UN4

J1402
6
9 10 11 12 13
N.C.
+5V
+5V
GND
LEFT_DECK_PAPER_VOL_DTC2_SNS
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
VPASS2_SNS
GND
E
+5V
GND
GND
RIGHT_DECK_PAPER_VOL_DTC1_SNS
+5V
J1417
J8090D
J8061D
N.C
N.C
J8090DH
J8144D
J8061LH
1
J8090L
J8146D
J8144LH
N.C
J8061L
J8146LH
1
J8146L
N.C
J8144L
J7027
J7037
3
2
2
1
1
PS41
Right Deck Paper

Level Sensor 1
J7034
3
3
2
2
1
1
PS42
Right Deck Paper

Level Sensor 2
J7035
J7036
PS43
Left Deck Paper

Level Sensor 1
PS44
Left Deck Paper

Level Sensor 2
Pickup Sensor
Lower Right Cover

Sensor
Vertical Path
Sensor 2
Vertical Path
PS35
PS39
PS40
10
J7031
J7033
+5V
J8075L
GND
+5V
GND
GND
J8075DH
+5V
J8075D
GND
+5V
J8068L
GND
+5V
J8068LH
1
GND
+5V
GND
J8068D
+5V
VPASS2_SNS
P.23
F-10-26
XLII
XLIII
SL
1
J7053DH
J7048
2
J7053D
+24V
GND
VPASS3_SNS
GND
J7046
+5V
J7045
+5V
GND
J7044
+5V
J7043
GND
GND
J7047D
PS68
Vertical Path
Sensor 4
J7049
J7050
J7051
J7052
+5V
2
2
PS67
Cassette 4
Paper Height
Sensor
GND
3
3
PS66
Cassette 4
Paper Sensor
VPASS4_SNS
1
1
GND
2
2
+5V
3
3
GND
1
1
+5V
2
2
CST3_H_PAPER_SNS
3
3
CST3_PAPER_SNS
1
1
CST3_LIMIT_SNS
2
2
+5V
J7042
1
3
3
CST3_FEED_SNS
J7047DH
+24V
PS65
Cassette 4
Upper Limit
Sensor
J7053L
PS64
Cassette 4
Pickup Sensor
+5V
Vertical Path
Sensor 3
J7047L
1
Cassette 4
Pickup Solenoid
GND
SL8
PS63
Cassette 3
Paper Height
Sensor
Cassette 3
Paper Sensor
CST4_H_PAPER_SNS
Cassette 3
Upper Limit
Sensor
PS62
CST4_FEED_SNS
PS61
+5V
Cassette 3
Pickup Sensor
SL
PS60
GND
PS59
Cassette 3
Pickup Solenoid
CST4_PAPER_SNS
SL7
+5V
CST4_LIMIT_SNS
CST4_PICK_UP_SL_ON
10
CST3_PICK_UP_SL_ON
E
N.C
N.C
E
J2635LA
J2635LWH
J2635LB
J2636LA
J2635LH
J2635DA
J2636DA
J2636LB
J2636LH
N.C
J2635DB
N.C
Cassette 3 Unit
J2636LWH
J2635DWH
J2636DWH
J2636DB
Cassette 4 Unit
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
J1412
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
J1416
UN4

J1403
+5V
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_SNS
C
+5V
+5V
LEFT_DECK_H_PAPER_SNS
GND
LEFT_DECK_PAPER_SNS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
GND
+5V
LEFT_DECK_LIMIT_SNS
GND
+5V
LEFT_DECK_FEED_SNS
GND
+5V
+24V
VPASS1_SNS
RIGHT_DECK_H_PAPER_SNS
+5V
GND
RIGHT_DECK_PAPER_SNS
LEFT_DECK_PICK_UP_SL_ON
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
GND
+5V
GND
+5V
RIGHT_LIMIT_SNS
RIGHT_DECK_FEED_SNS
GND
+5V
+24V
RIGHT_DECK_PICK_UP_SL_ON
Right Deck Unit
GND
GND
J1409
J8063D
J8063DH
2
J8063L
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
N.C
J2633DWH
MT66
J2633DA
J2633DB
J2633LH
J2633LWH
J2633LA
J2633LB
J7063
N.C
J7065D
J7065L
J7059DH
J7059L
SL
SL5
Right Deck
Pickup Solenoid
10
J7054
PS49
Right Deck
Pickup Sensor
J7055
PS50
Right Deck
Upper Limit
Sensor
J7056
PS51
J7057
Right Deck
Paper Sensor
PS52
Right Deck
Paper Height
Sensor
J7058
J7064
3
3
2
2
J7061
3
3
2
2
PS55
SL6
Left Deck
Pickup SolenoidJ7060
PS53
3
3
2
2
1
1
PS54
Left Deck
Pickup Sensor
Left Deck
Upper Limit
Sensor
PS58
Left Deck
Paper Height
Sensor
Vertical Path
Sensor 1
MT65
SL
1
PS57
J7065DH
J7059D
Left Deck
Pullout Sensor
Left Deck Unit
J7062
PS56
Left Deck
Paper Sensor
P.24
F-10-27
XLIII
XLIV
10
HV_TR1(Y)
FT24
UN43
HV_TR1(M)
HV_TR1(C)
FT25
HV_TR1(BK)
FT26
FT27
PIN1
GND
MT30
MT54
MT32
MT31
MT33
10
P.25
F-10-28
XLIV
XLV
10
Developing/Charging/Pre-transfer Charging/Developing Toner Collection High Voltage

MT52
MT48
MT51
UN38
J3522
1
PIN27
UN39
Developing
J3012
1
PIN29
PIN24
GND
GND
GND
PIN19
UN37
FT28
GND
MT12
J3322
J3022
J3044
UN42
UN41
UN40
Developing
High Voltage PCB (C)
Developing
High Voltage PCB (M)
Developing
High Voltage PCB (Y)
J3542
J3342
J3042
J8137F
MT69
J35470
1
2
1
PIN17
PIN14
GND
Developing Toner
Collection
High Voltage
PCB (C)
J3547M
R13
UN56
1
2
1
R14
UN57
Developing
Toner Collection
High Voltage
Contact
Resistance
(M)
Developing
Toner Collection
High Voltage
Contact
Resistance
(Y)
PIN15
PIN12
Developing Toner
Collection
High Voltage
PCB (M)
PIN13
UN52
Developing Toner
Collection
High Voltage
PCB (Y)
MT37
MT7805MC
MT38
UN53
UN54
PIN16
J8135F
J8135M
MT39
Developing
Toner Collection
High Voltage
Contact Resistance
(C)
J8134F
J8134M
UN58
PIN23
4
UN50
J35480
MT40
J8136F
J8136M
MT70
R9
1
Primary Charging
High Voltage
Contact
Resistance
(Y)
UN59
Developing
Toner Collection
High Voltage
Contact Resistance
(Bk)
R15
MT63
UN60
Primary Charging
High Voltage
Contact
Resistance
MT34
(M)
R11
R10
R8
1
UN61
Primary Charging
High Voltage
Contact
Resistance
(C)
MT62
J8137M
UN55
MT35
MT36
MT64
R12
SOLD4
R7 2
SOLD3
MT3212C
MT7805MM
MT3212M
MT7805MY
MT3212Y
B
MT42
PIN10
PIN11
UN51
T_GND
T_DET
T_DRIVE_B
T_POWER
J3547
T_DRIVE_A
Developing Toner
Collection
High Voltage
PCB (Bk)
FT129
FT29
10
MT7805MK
High Voltage
Contact
Post Charging Transformer
MT3212K
P.26
F-10-29
XLV
XLVI
Laser Scanner Unit

2
8
7
5
4
3
GND
Y_E2PROM_CS
J5507
GND
3
2
5
4
3
2
6
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
K_PO_DEC
GND
UN108
BD PCB (Bk)
J7530K
M83
Laser
Scanner
Motor (Bk)
J7532K
J5101K
9
GND
K_AKM_1_CSN
K_AKM_2_CSN
GND
+5V_IL
GND
K_E2PROM_CS
GND
40
3
2
1
K_PO_ACC
GND
N.C
40
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
+24V
40
J5508
K_PO_FG
GND
GND
K_PO_THM
M_E2PROM_CS
GND
GND
K_BD
GND
+5V_IL
M_AKM_2_CSN
M_AKM_1_CSN
GND
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
M_PO_DEC
M_PO_ACC
+24V
M_PO_FG
J5510
J8066L
+5V_IL
J5505
J5512
J8066DH
M_PO_THM
J8076D
N.C
M_MMTR_ON
J8076DH
J5100C
GND
M_MMTR_B*
J8076L
Laser Scanner Unit (C)
+5V_IL
M_MMTR_B
J5101M
4
3
2
1
9
8
GND
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J7532M
Laser
Scanner
Motor (M)
M81
J7531M
J7532C
Y_AKM_2_CSN
UN105
Laser Driver
PCB (C)
40
M_MMTR_A
M_MMTR_A*
Skew
Correction
Motor (M)
GND
M85
Laser
Scanner
Motor (C)
M_BD
N.C
M82
Y_AKM_1_CSN
40
+5V_IL
J7530M
J7531C
UN100
BD PCB (M)
Skew
Correction
Motor (C)
5
3
GND
Laser Interface PCB
UN104
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
J5101C
J8066D
J5100Y
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
Laser Driver
PCB (Y)
GND
GND
C_PO_DEC
UN101
GND
C_PO_ACC
J7530C
M86
+5V_IL
C_E2PROM_CS
+24V
J5101Y
J8070DH
GND
C_PO_FG
GND
C_AKM_2_CSN
C_PO_THM
40
Y_PO_ACC
Y_PO_DEC
+24V
Y_PO_FG
C_AKM_1_CSN
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
5
6
1
7
8
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Y_PO_THM
C_MMTR_ON
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Y_MMTR_B*
Y_MMTR_ON
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Y_MMTR_B
J8070D
J8070L
J7532Y
Laser
Scanner
Motor (Y)
Y_MMTR_A*
C_MMTR_B*
M80
Y_MMTR_A
C_MMTR_B
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J7531Y
GND
C_MMTR_A*
Skew
Correction
Motor (Y)
Y_BD
C_MMTR_A
M84
GND
+5V_IL
GND
J5509
C_BD
J7530Y
N.C
+5V_IL
UN106
BD PCB (C)
J5511
BD PCB (Y)
J8064L
1
Laser Scanner Unit (Y)
UN102
J8064DH
J8064D
10
UN107
Laser Driver
PCB (Bk)
Laser Scanner Unit (Bk)
J5100K
5
4
J5100M
40
10
Laser Scanner Unit (M)
UN103
Laser Driver
PCB (M)
40
J5506
P.27
F-10-30
XLVI
XLVII
UN83
Operation Panel Unit

J104
Relay PCB
J1811
10 11
10 11 12 13 14
N.C
GND
GND
GND
3.3VR
GND
GND
12V_CONTB
12V_CONTA
12V_CONTB
12V_CONTA
UN7
Riser PCB
GND
12V_DEVPO_UI
GND
12V_DEVPO_UI
10
J8121M
J8121F
UN110
KEY PCB
E
J3002
8
Upright
Control
Panel
J3001
7
13 12 11 10 9
E
J8103M
J8103F
N.C
10 9
COR8
9 10
J1008
J1002
9 10 11 12
J1009
UN111
J1006
4
USB DEVICE PORT
J1007
3
J9001
CPU PCB
J1003
GND
12V
J8082F
J8082M
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
J1005
4
GND
GND
FFC
H_LEVEL
HIGHIMPETANCE
GND
RXCLKIN+
RXCLKIN-
GND
RXIN2+
RXIN2-
GND
RXIN1+
GND
GND
RXIN1-
GND
RXIN0+
RXIN0-
GND
GND
+3.3V
J4001
+3.3V
9
VLCD
C
+5V
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
J1
UN112
J4002
LCD
J2
Transparent
Touch Panel
Sub KEY PCB
J5001
UN113
Volume PCB
10
P.28
F-10-31
XLVII
XLVIII
Controller
(OPTION C)
(OPTION B)
(OPTION A)
Dsub
(CMJ ONLY)
9P
COIN_VENDER
10
CARD_READER
RS-CONV
CCM-10/3S
MMC
(OPTION)
9 10 11 12
CARD_READER IF KIT
DEVICE
PORT_HUB
(OPTION)
OR
OR
(OPTION)
CZ 5P
5
CC-VI I/FCABLE
Controller
Cooling Fan 1
11P
9 10 11
CPU
FM19
(OPTION)
SC KIT
VOICE
OPERATION OR
(OPTION)
(OPTION A)
SATA
FLASH
USB(H)
20P
4P
PCI-EX I/F
HDD (Standard)
8P
J7
USB(D)
5P
J15
RJ-45
27P
J6
60P
J4
J115
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
7P
SATA
TOPAZ
1
2
J111
CSR
HDD_STS
SATA OP
J102
J101
10 11
117P
DEBUG
SERIAL
CZ 4P
J14
J23
UN116
Removable HDD
J1010
J24
J1000
J18
140P
60P
75P
40P
GIOVANNI-A
DEBUSSY-A
MINERVA
(GU-SHORT)
(DEBUG SRAM)
SATA
7P
J22
ICE
JTAG
13P
CZ 6P
J21
J20
J1020
MAESTRO-0
J13
200P
J3003
J107
(MDS)
FRAM
COUNTER
(OPTION)
DDR2
DIMM
RCON
ORFEO-A
(OO)
J17
4P
DDI-S I/F
512MB(OPTION)
B
EFI
CONTROLLER
UN83
To P.31
To P.31
C-3
E-9
(OPTION)
Riser PCB
J110A
(EMBEDDED)
AC
(OPTION B)
(OPTION A)
EFI CONTROLLER
J16
USB(D)
OR
J3F
J15
MDR 36P
J105
IVDR
HDD1
DC Controller PCB
N.C
GND
3.3R
GND
GND
GND
GND
12V
12V
12V_CL
12V_CL
UN1
100P
GND
GND
(DEALER ONLY)
(TPM)
Controller
Cooling Fan 2
UN83
J104
10
CSR7P
POSTPONE
I/F
Riser PCB
HDD_SEC_ERR
HDD_PRI_ERR
J7544
J107
FM20
J22
30P
CPLD
WR
SERIAL1
123
J7544DH
SATA POWER
J108
J105
10P
DEBUG
J7544D
1
5V
J103
J8
J19
CZ 4P
GND
J13
GND
30P
J2
MINI_USB
DEBUG
HDD0
4P
J3
J5
117P
12V
(OPTION B)
ETHERNET
4P
9 10 11
UN115
J12
J20
J40
J21
J11
MDR 40P
J1025
7P
MINI-USB 4P
37P
VOICE
GUIDANCE
123
EFI CONTROLLER
OR
(SERVER)
ETHERNET
AC
ETHERNET
P.29
F-10-32
XLVIII
XLIX
10
HDD (Option)
Mirroring Kit(OPTION) +
Mirroring Kit(OPTION) + Removable Kit

RISER
HDD1
RISER
HDD1
J111
Mirroring
PCB
Mirroring
PCB
J107
HDD2
J107
HDD2
J105
J111
J105
J2
J2
LED
BOARD
LED
BOARD
10
P.30
F-10-33
XLIX
10
B-2
FAX BOX
To P.1
1
(2LINE)
(4LINE)
Modular PCB
Modular PCB
J8084F
J601
J7
2Line_L2
B-2
To P.29
FX15 40P
J504(J4)
2Line_L2
3Line_L1
2Line_L1
4Line_L2
2Line_L1
3Line_L2
J604(J4)
J4
4Line_L1
1
2
Modular PCB
Handset
(J2)
J204(J4)
J103(J3)
J8
5
4
J804(J4)
G3 FAX Control PCB
G3 FAX Control PCB
J208(J8)
G3 FAX PCB
12V CI
GND CI
GND L2
12V L2
3
G3 FAX Control PCB

5
J109(J9)
J106(J6)
J802(J2)
J205(J5)
MINI-USB 4P
J403
J8132DH
J8132L
B-2
GND CI
To P.29
J104(J4)
GND
GND
J8132D
CICNT
J105(J5)
J301(J1)
J303(J3)
12V CI
J107(J7)
J302(J2)
Off-hook detect PCB

J2121D
J2121DH
J2121
SP1
Speaker
10
P.31
F-10-34
Appendix > List of User Mode > Device Information Delivery Settings
LI
List of User Mode

Registering device information in your machine enables you to set the machine to deliver the same device information to other machines that are connected to the same network. This enables you to
easily manage multiple machines at the same time.
Your machine is capable of both sending and receiving device information, which can be delivered manually and automatically.
Parent Machine
Child Machines
Child Machines
Child Machines
F-10-35
Appendix > List of User Mode > Device Information Delivery Settings
LI
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Paper Settings
LII
Environment Settings
Paper Settings
* Default Settings
Item
Paper Settings
A5R/STMTR Paper Selection

B5/EXEC Paper Selection
Register Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults

Register Custom Size
Setting Description
Paper Source
Set:Thin, Plain 1*, Plain 2, Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Color, Recycled 1, Recycled 2, PrePunched, Transparency, Tab 1, Tab 2, Bond, Letterhead
A5R, STMTR*
B5, EXEC*
Details/Edit
Name, Category, Basis Weight, Finish, Type, Color, Adjust Creep Correction, Curl
Correction Level, Adjust Image Position, Adj. Secondary Transfer Volt.
Duplicate, Delete
On, Off*
Register(Paper Size/Paper Type)
S1 to S5:
Register/Edit, Rename
Delete
Can be set in Remote

UI
Device Information
DeliveryAvailable
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
T-10-4
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Paper Settings
LII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Display Settings
LIII
Display Settings
* Default Settings
*1
Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use.
Item
Default Screen after Startup/Restoration
Default Screen (Status Monitor/Cancel)
Copy Screen Display Settings*1

Display Fax Function*1
Store Location Display Settings
Language/Keyboard Switch On/Off

Language/Keyboard Switch
Use Keyboard Shift Lock Feature
Display Remaining Paper Message
No. of Copies/Job Duration Status
Display Original Scanning Cleaning Area
Select Paper Screen Priority
mm/Inch Entry Switch
ID/User Name Display On/Off
Display Remaining Toner Error Message
Delete Remaining Toner Error
Edit Puncher Unit Die Name*1
Setting Description
Main Menu*, Quick Menu, Copy*1, Scan and Send, Fax*1, Scan and Store*1, Access
Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox, Hold, Secure Print, Web Access*1, Workflow Composer*1,
Scanner, Print Server*1, Scan Lock Analyzer*1, Tutorial, WSD Scan
Open Status Monitor/Cancel: On, Off*
Default Status Type: Copy*1/Print*, Send, Receive, Store, Consmbls./Others
Status/Log: Job Status*, Log
Details (Copy*1/Print, Job Status): Copy, Print
Details (Send, Job Status): Send, Fax*1
Details (Receive, Job Status): Fax*1, Forward
Details (Copy*1/Print, Log): Copy, Printer, Local Print, Received Job Print, Print Report
Details (Send, Log): Send, Fax*1
Details (Receive, Log): Receive, Fax*1
Regular Copy*, Express Copy
On*, Off
Enable Fax in Scan and Send Function*1: On*, Off
Mail Box: On*, Off
Advanced Box/Network: On*, Off
Memory Media: On, Off*
On, Off*
Language, Keyboard Layout
On, Off*
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
Simple*, Detailed
mm, Inch*
On*, Off
On, Off*
Yes, No
Edit

UI
Device Information
DeliveryAvailable
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
T-10-5
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Display Settings
LIII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Timer/Energy Settings
LIV
Timer/Energy Settings
* Default Settings
*1
It is recommended that you use the default setting for this item.
Item
Adjust Time
Date/Time Settings
Time Format
Quick Startup Settings for Main Power
Auto Reset Time
Restrict Auto Reset Time
Function After Auto Reset
Auto Sleep Time
Sleep Mode Energy Use
Auto Sleep Weekly Timer]
Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings
Setting Description
00:00 to 23:59, in one minute increments
Date and Time Setting (12 digit number)
Time Zone: GMT-12:00 to GMT+12:00 (GMT -05:00*)
Daylight Saving Time: On, Off*
Start Date (Month/Day/Time (0 to 23))
(March, 2nd, Sunday, 2:00*)
End Date (Month/Day/Time (0 to 23))
(November, 1st, Sunday, 2:00)
24 Hour, 12 Hour*
On*, Off
0 min=Off, 10 to 50 seconds in 10 second increments, 1 to 9 minutes in one minute
increments (2 mins*)
On, Off*
Initial Function*, Selected Function
5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 mins, 1 hr, 90 mins, 2, 3, 4 hrs
(5 mins*1)
Low*, High
Sun to Sat, 00:00 to 23:59, in one minute increments
00:00 to 23:59, in one minute increments

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-6
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Timer/Energy Settings
LIV
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
LV
Network
If you are configuring the settings for the first time in "Interface Settings," "TCP/IPv4 Settings," "TCP/IPv6 Settings," or "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and
TCP/IPv6," use the control panel of the machine. After configuring the TCP/IP settings, you can change them using the Remote UI.
If you are using a NetWare or AppleTalk network, you must use the TCP/IP protocol if you want to specify settings using software other than the control
panel of the machine.
* Default Settings
*1
*2
Indicates items that appear only when the PS Printer Kit is activated.
UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes, No
On, Off*
Yes
No
No
Yes
On*, Off
IP Address: 0.0.0.0*
Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0*
Gateway Address: 0.0.0.0*
DHCP: On, Off*
RARP: On, Off*
BOOTP: On, Off*
Acquire Host Name: On*, Off
DNS Dynamic Update: On, Off*
IP Adress: 0.0.0.0*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
On, Off*
Use Stateless Address: On*, Off
Use Manual Address: On, Off*
Manual Address: IPv6 Address (39characters maximum)
Prefix Length: 0 to 128 (64*)
Default Router Address (39 characters maximum)
On, Off*
IPv6 Address: (39characters maximum)
Host Name
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Primary DNS Server: IP Address:0.0.0.0*

Secondary DNS Server: IP Address:0.0.0.0*
Primary DNS Server: IPv6 Address
(39 characters maximum)
Secondary DNS Server: IPv6 Address
(39 characters maximum)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Item
Output Report]
Confirm Network Connection Set. Changes
TCP/IP Settings
IPv4 Settings
Use IPv4
IP Address Settings
DHCP Option Settings

PING Command
IPv6 Settings
Use IPv6
Stateless Address Settings
Manual Address Settings
Use DHCPv6
PING Command
DNS Settings
DNS Server Address Settings
IPv4
IPv6
Setting Description
LV

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No

Register Stateless Address: On, Off*
Register Manual Address: On, Off*
Register Stateless Address: On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
IP Address: 0.0.0.0*
Auto (display only)
(NULL*)
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
On*, Off
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Interval for performing time synchronization (1 to 48 hours) (24hours*)
IP address or host name (NULL*)
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
guest*
7654321*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
guest*
7654321*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Item
DNS Host/Domain Name Settings
IPv4
IPv6
DNS Dynamic Update Settings

IPv4
IPv6
WINS Settings
WINS Resolution
WINS Server Address
Node Type
Scope ID
LPD Print Settings
LPD Print Settings
LPD Banner Page*1
RAW Print Settings
RAW Print Settings
Bidirectional Communication
SNTP Settings
Use SNTP
Polling Interval
NTP Server Address
Check NTP Server
FTP Print Settings
Use FTP printing
User Name
Password
WSD Print Settings
Use WSD
Use WSD Browsing
Use Multicast Discovery
Use FTP PASV Mode
Use FTP PASV Mode
IPP Print Settings
IPP Print Settings
Use SSL
Use Authentication
User Name
Password
Setting Description
Host Name: Canon****** ("******" represents the last six digits of a MAC address.)
Domain Name: (NULL*)
Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4:On, Off*
Host Name: Canon****** ("******" represents the last six digits of a MAC address.)
Domain Name:
LVI
LVI

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
On* Off
default*
On* Off
On, Off*
Settings that use SSL
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date,
Validity End Date, Issuer, Public Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert.
Key and Certificate
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
On, Off*
IP address or FQDN (NULL*)
1to 65535 (80*)
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Allow*/Reject
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
24 characters maximum (NULL*)

Local Address:
All IP Addresses*/IPv4 Address/IPv6 Address/IPv4 Manual Settings/IPv6 Manual
Settings
Remort Address:
All IP Addresses*, All IPv4Address, All IPv6Address, IPv4Manual Settings, IPv6 Manual
Settings
Port:
Specify by Port Number*/Specify by Service Name
IKE mode : Main*/Aggressive
Authentication Method : Pre-Shared Key Method*/Digital sig. Method
Auth./Encryption Algorithm : Auto*/Manual Settings
Validity : Time (1to65535minuites) (480minuites*)
Validity : Size (1to65535 MB) (0 MB*)
PFS : On, Off*
Auth./Encryption Algorithm : Auto*/Manual Settings
Connect. Mode : Transport, display only
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Item
Multicast Discovery Settings
Response
Scope name
Use HTTP
Use WebDAV Server
SSL Settings
Key and Certificate
Set as the Default Key
Certificate Details
Display Use Location
Proxy Settings
Use proxy
Server Address
Port Number
Use Proxy within the Same Domain
Set Authentication
Use Proxy Auth.
User Name
Password
Confirm Dept. ID PIN
IPSec Settings
Use IPSec
Receive Non-policy Packets
Policy On, Off
Reg.
Policy Name
Selector Settings
IKE Settings
IPSec Network Settings
Edit
Setting Description
LVII
LVII

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes, No
Yes
Yes
No
No
On, Off*
Auto Detect*/Ethernet II/Ethernet 802.2/Ethernet 802.3/Ethernet SNAP
Auto (display only)
Auto (display only)
Bindery PServer, R Printer, NDS Pserver*, NPrinter
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
0 to 15 (0*)
1 to 15seconds (5seconds*)
0 to 255 (0*)
1 to 20 KB (20KB*)
Minimize form changes within print queues*, Minimize form changes across print
queues, Change forms as needed, Service only currently mounted form
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
0 to 15 (0*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
0 to 254 (0*)
0 to 255 (0*)
3 to 20KB (20KB*)
Minimize form changes within print queues*, Minimize form changes across print
queues, Change forms as needed, Service only currently mounted form
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
0 to 254 (0*)
Auto (display only)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Phase 2 (display only)
Name (Device Name*)
Zone
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Item
Delete
Print List
NetWare Settings
Use NetWare
Frame Type
IPX External Network Number
Node Number
Print Service
Bindery PServer
Print Server Name
File Server Name
Print Server Password
Printer Number
Polling Interval
Printer Form
Buffer Size
Service Mode
RPrinter
Print Server Name
File Server Name
Printer Number
NDS PServer
Print Server Name
Tree Name
Context Name
Print Server Password
Printer Number
Polling Interval
Printer Form
Buffer Size
Service Mode
NPrinter
Print Server Name
Tree Name
Context Name
Printer Number
Packet Signature
Apple Talk Settings
Use Apple Talk
Phase
Service Name
Zone
Setting Description
LVIII
LVIII

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Both*, Spool, Direct
Yes
No
On, Off*
Servwr Name : Canon****** ("******" represents the last six digits of a MAC address.)
Workgroup Name : (WORKGROUP*)
Comment : (NULL*)
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
(PRINTER*)
Yes
Yes
No
No
On, Off*
NTLMv1 : On, Off*
NTLMv2 : On, Off*
Yes
Yes
No
No
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
Read/Write, Read Only*
Yes
Yes
No
No
On*, Off
(public*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
On, Off*
(public2*)
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On*, Off
User Name, MIB Access Permis. (Read/Write, Read Only), Security Settings (Auth.
Yes/Encry. Yes, Auth. Yes/Encry. No, Auth. No/Encrypt. No), Authent. Algorithm (MD5,
SHA1), Authent. Password, Encryption Algorithm (DES, AES), Encryption Password
User Name, MIB Access Permis. (Read/Write, Read Only), Security Settings (Auth.
Yes/Encry. Yes, Auth. Yes/Encry. No, Auth. No/Encrypt. No), Authent. Algorithm (MD5,
SHA1), Authent. Password, Encryption Algorithm (DES, AES), Encryption Password
-
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Context Name
Context Name
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Item
Print Mode*2
SMB Server Settings
Use SMB Server
Server Name
Workgroup Name
Comment
LM Announce
Set SMB Printer
Use SMB
Printer Name
SMB Auth. Settings
Use SMB Authentication
Authentication Type
SNMP Settings
Use SNMP v. 1
Dedicated Comm. Settings
Dedicated Community
MIB Access Permission
Set Community Name 1
Community Name 1
Community Name
Set Community Name 2
Community Name 2
Community Name
Use SNMP v. 3
User Settings
User On, Off
Register
Details/Edit
Delete
Context Settings
Register
Edit
Delete
Get Printer Mgmt Info from Host
Setting Description
LIX
LIX

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
On*, Off
Half Duplex*/Full Duplex
10 Base-T*, 100 Base-TX, 1000 Base-T
Display only
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
(NULL*)
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No

Key and Certificate
On, Off*
MSCHAPv2*, PAP
On, Off*
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Allow*, Reject
Register (Up to 16 IPv4 addresses), Edit, Delete
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Allow*, Reject
Register (Up to 16 IPv4 addresses), Details/Edit, Delete
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Allow*, Reject
Register (Up to 16 IPv4 addresses), Edit, Delete
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Item
Use Spool Function
Use Spool Function
Startup Settings
Startup Settings
Ethernet Driver Settings
Auto Detect
Communication Mode
Ethernet Type
MAC Address
IEEE802.1X Settings
Use IEEE802.1X
Login Name
Use TLS
Key and Certificate
Certificate Details
Use TTLS
TTLS Settings
Use PEAP
User Name
Password
Same User Name as Login Name
Firewall Settings
IPv4 Address Filter
TX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
IPv4 Address
Prefix Length (0 to 32)
RX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
IPv4 Address
IPv6 Address Filter
TX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
IPv6Address
Setting Description
LX
LX
Item
RX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
IPv6Address
MACAddressFilter
TX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
MACAddress
RX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
MACAddress
IP Address Block Log

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
On, Off*
Allow*, Reject
Register (Up to 16 IPv4 addresses), Details/Edit, Delete
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Allow*, Reject
Register (Up to 100 Mac addresses), Edit, Delete
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
On, Off*
Allow*, Reject
Register (Up to 100 Mac addresses), Edit, Delete
Time, Type, IP Address, Port Number, Result
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Setting Description
LXI
T-10-7
LXI
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Accessibility
LXII
External Interface
* Default Settings
Item
USB Settings
Use as USB Device
Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device
Use MEAP Driver for External USB Device
Setting Description
On*, Off
On, Off*
On, Off*

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-8
Accessibility
* Default Settings
Item
Key Repetition Settings
Reversed Display (Color)
Setting Description
Standard*, Slightly Slow, Slow
On, Off*

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
No
T-10-9
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Accessibility
LXII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality
LXIII
Adjust Image Quality
* Default Settings
Item
Auto Adjust Gradation
Correct Density
Correct Shading
Auto Correct Color Mismatch
Full Color Printing Vividness Settings
Fine Adjust Zoom
Dither Pattern Settings
Setting Description
Full Adjust (Automatic after the machine prints and scans three sets of test pages):
Press [Start Printing]
Quick Adjust: Press [Start]
Black Scan for Copy/Scan and Store (Mail Box), Black Scan for Send/Scan and Store
(Other Than Mail Box),
Color Scan for Send/Scan and Store:
9 levels each (5 levels*)
Densitometer Correction, Visual Correction
Press [Start]
Standard*, Level 1, Level 2
X:- 1.0 % to+ 1.0 % (0.1 % increments) (0%*)
Y:- 1.0 % to+ 1.0 % (0.1 % increments) (0%*)
Pattern 1*, Pattern 2

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
T-10-10
Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality
LXIII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance
LXIV
Adjust Action
* Default Settings
*1
Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use.
UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Press [Start]
-2.0 mm to +2.0 mm, in 0.25 mm increments (0.00 mm*)
4 3/4", 5 11/16"*
Speed Priority, Precision Priority
Color Priority, Black Priority*
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
-2.0 mm to +1.5 mm, 0.5 increments (0.0 mm*)

When the Paper Folding Unit-G1 is attached:
-7.0 mm to +5.0 mm, in 0.5 mm increments (-1.0 mm*)
When the Document Insertion/Folding Unit-G1 is attached:
A: 0.0 mm to +6.0 mm, 0.5 mm increments (0.0 mm*)
B: 0.0 mm to 3.0 mm, 0.5 mm increments (0.0 mm*)
-7.0 mm to +5.0 mm, 0.5 increments (-1.0 mm*)
A: -2.0 mm to +5.0 mm, 0.5 increments (-1.0 mm*)
B: 0.0 mm to +5.0 mm, 0.5 mm increments (1.0 mm*)
Press [Start]
Face Up Output (Reverse): -10 to +10 (0*)
Face Down Output (Normal): -10 to +10 (0*)
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Item
Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning*1
Change Fold/Stitch Position*1
Adjust Saddle Stitch Fold Position*1
Adjust Double Staple Width*1
Finisher Puncher Switch*1
Adjust Trim Width*1
Color/Black Priority for First Print Time
Adjust Fold Position*1
Adjust Z-Fold Position
Adjust C-Fold Position
Adjust Accordion Z-Fold Position

Adjust Double Parallel Fold Position
Adjust Half Fold Position
Adjust Saddle Fold Position
Adjust Paper Deck Plates*1
Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer*1
Setting Description
T-10-11
Maintenance
* Default Settings
*1
Item
Clean Feeder*1
Clean Wire
Clean Roller
Clean Drum
Original Scanning Area Cleaning Method*1
Setting Description
Press [Start]
Press [Start]
Press [Start]
Press [Start]
Displaying cleaning method

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
T-10-12
Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance
LXIV
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common
LXV
Function Settings
Common
* Default Settings
*1
*2
Indicates information that is delivered only if the number of output trays is the same for the machine that is sending device information and the device receiving the information.
*3
Indicates items with no serial number or ID/user name.

Item
Paper Feed Settings

Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off
Optimal Productivity
MP Tray
Other
Copy*1
Paper Drawer Auto Selection Based on Color
Suspended Job Timeout On
Setting Description
Copy*1, Printer, Access Stored File, Receive/Fax*1, Other
On*, Off
On, Off*
On*, Off
Consider Paper Type : On*, Off
Consider Color: On, Off*
Color*, Black
On, Off*
0 to 999 min. (5mins*)
Paper Output Settings

Output Tray Settings*1
If the Staple Finisher -K1/Booklet Finisher-K1 is attached
Tray A
Copy*, Access Stored Files*, Printer*, Receive, Fax, Other
Tray B
Copy, Access Stored Files, Printer, Receive*, Fax*, Other*
Tray C
If the Staple Finisher- L1/Booklet Finisher-L1 is attached
Tray A
Copy, Access Stored Files, Printer, Receive*, Fax*, Other*
Tray B
Tray C
Tray Home Position
Tray A*, Tray B, Tray C, Off
Offset Jobs*1
On*, Off
Job Separator Between Jobs
On, Off*
Change (Select Paper Source)
Job Separator Between Copies
On, Off*
Copies (1 to 9999) (10*), Change (Select Paper Source)
Different Paper Sizes for the Output Tray*1
On*, Off
Unfinished Tab Paper Forced Output
On, Off*
Print Settings
Print Priority
Copy*1
1*, 2, 3
Printer
1, 2*, 3
Access Stored File, Receive/Fax*1, Other
1, 2, 3*
Coated Productivity/Image Quality Priority
Productivity Priority, Quality Priority*
Text/Photo Priority When ACS Is Set to Black
Text Priority*, Photo Priority

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No*2
No*2
No*2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No*2
No*2
No*2
No*2
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LXV
Item
Local Print Default Settings
Select Paper
No. of Prints
Finishing*1
If no finisher is attached.
If the Staple Finisher-K1 is attached.
If the Booklet Finisher-K1 is attached.
If the Staple Finisher-K1 and puncher unit are

attached.
If the Staple Finisher- K1/Booklet Finisher-K1
and Paper Folding Unit-G1 are attached.
If the Staple Finisher- K1/Booklet Finisher-K1,
puncher unit, and Paper Folding Unit-G1 are
attached.
If the Staple Finisher-L1 is attached.
If the Booklet Finisher-L1 is attached.
If the Staple Finisher-L1 and external puncher

are attached.
If the Staple Finisher- L1/Booklet Finisher-L1,
and Document Insertion/Folding Unit-G1 are
attached.
If the Staple Finisher- L1/Booklet Finisher-L1,
external puncher, and Document Insertion/
Folding Unit-G1 are attached.
2-Sided Printing
Delete File After Printing
Merge and Print
Output Report Default Settings
2-Sided Printing
Register Form
Superimpose Image Quality Priority
Register Characters for Page No./Watermark
Setting Description
Auto*, Select Paper Source
1 to 9,999 sets (1set*)
Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order)*, Group (Same Pages), Rotate 90 Degrees, Face
Up/Face Down
Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order)*, Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner: Top Left,
Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right), Offset*, Face Up/Face
Down
Down, Saddle Fold, Adjust Fold Position
Down, Hole Punch
Down, Fold, Adjust Fold Position
Down, Hole Punch, Fold, Adjust Fold Position
Down
Down, Saddle Fold, Adjust Fold Position
Down, Hole Punch
Down, Fold, Adjust Fold Position
Down, Hole Punch, Fold, Adjust Fold Position
On, Off*
On: Book Type*, Calendar Type
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Register, Delete, Check Print, Details
Auto*, Original Priority, Form Priority
Register, Edit, Delete

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LXVI
LXVI

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Date Settings (mm/dd/yyyy, yyyy/mm/dd, dd/mm/yyyy, yyyy.mm.dd, mm.dd.yyyy,
dd.mm.yyyy*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Copy*1 : Do Not Set*, Force Secure Watermark, Forced Doc. Scan Lock
Access Stored Files : Do Not Set*, Force Secure Watermark, Forced Doc. Scan Lock
Printer : Do Not Set*, Force Secure Watermark, Forced Doc. Scan Lock
Copy*1 : Do Not Set*, Force Secure Watermark, Forced Doc. Scan Lock, Sec. Water. +
Scan Lock
Access Stored Files : Do Not Set*, Force Secure Watermark, Forced Doc. Scan Lock,
Sec. Water. + Scan Lock
Printer : Do Not Set*, Force Secure Watermark, Forced Doc. Scan Lock, Sec. Water. +
Scan Lock
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*3
Yes*3
Yes*3
Yes*3
Yes
Yes*3
Yes
Yes*3
Do Not Set*, Driver Secure Watermark, Driver Doc. Scan Lock

Do Not Set*, Driver Secure Watermark, Driver Doc. Scan Lock, Sec. Water. + Scan
Lock
Black, Cyan, Magenta
-7 to +7
(imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO)
Black : 0*, Cyan : 2*, Magenta : 0*
Yes
Yes
Yes*3
Yes*3
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Item
Copy Set Numbering Option Settings
Select Option
ID/User Name
Date
Text
Copy Set Numbering Option Settings
Set Characters
Alignment Settings
Secure Watermark/Document Scan Lock*1
Forced Secure Watermark/Doc. Scan Lock
When Using TL Code:
When Using QR Code:
Printer Driver Watermark/Doc. Scan Lock

When Using TL Code:
When Using QR Code:
Adjust Background/Character Contrast
Sample Print
Relative Contrast
Print Settings
Initialize
Standard Value Set
Setting Description
Align Left*, Align Center, Align Right
-7 to +7
(imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270/C7260)
Black : 1*, Cyan : -1*, Magenta : 1*
1 to 64
LXVII
1 to 64
LXVII
LXVIII

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
1 to 7
Black : 4*, Magenta : 3*
Standard*, Rough
Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right*, Bottom Right
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
When Start Is Pressed*, When Panel Is Touched

From 1st Page*, From Stopped Original
Speed Priority*, Quiet
On*, Off
Speed Priority*, Quality Priority
Select Manually, Use LTRR Format*, Use STMT Format
Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*, Gamma 2.2
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Data Size Priority, Normal*, Quality Priority

On, Off*
100x100 dpi, 200x200 dpi, 300x300 dpi*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
1 to 24 (24 Char*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
Normal*, Moderate, High
Data Size Priority, Normal*, Quality Priority
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Quality Priority, standarad*, Data Size Priority

High, Standard*, Do Not Recognize
On*, Off
On*, Off
Do Not Specify*, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Item
Latent Area Density
Adjust TL Code
Dot Size
Dot Density
Initialize
QR Code Print Position
Scan Settings*1
Timing to Raise Feeder Tray*1
Feeder Jam Recovery Method*1
Scanner Noise Settings*1
Streak Prevention
Black Scan Speed/Image Quality Priority*1
LTRR/STMT Original Detection
Remote Scan Gamma Value
Auto Online
Auto Online
Generate File
High Compression Image Quality Level
Compact PDF Settings for Text Original
Resolution
OCR (Text Searchable) Settings
Smart Scan
No. of OCR File Name Characters
Trace & Smooth Settings*1
Outline Graphics
Graphics Recognition Level
Background Image Level
OOXML Settings
Background Image Level
Color Image Recognition Level
Color Image Line Width Recognition
Include Background Images in Word File*1
Specify Minimum PDF Version
Setting Description
1 to 36
1 to 36
Color: Magenta, Black*
1 to 7
Black : 4*, Magenta : 4*
LXVIII
Item
Format PDF to PDF/A
Optimize PDF for Web
256-bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF*1
Rights Management Server Settings
Document Scan Lock Operational Settings*1

Use Document Scan Lock
Document Scan Lock TL Code Settings
Document Scan Lock QR Code Settings

Set Authentication Method
Info. Used for LDAP Server Authentication
Info. Used for Rights Mgmt. Server Auth.
Info. Used for SMTP Server Authentication
Info. Used for File TX/Browsing Auth.

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
On, Off*
On, Off*
Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent, Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent*
Server URL : (NULL*)
User Name : (NULL*)
Password : (NULL*)
Always Show Auth. Screen: On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Use TL Code*, Use QR Code, Do not use

Scan Job Restriction : On*, Off
Multiple Embedded Information Action : Continue Job, Cancel Job*
Restrict Functions Affecting Doc. Scan Lock : On, Off*
Scan Job Restriction : A Mode (Standard)*, B Mode (Secured), Off
Restrict Functions Affecting Doc. Scan Lock : On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Device Settings*, Device Login Auth. Info., Regist. Info. for Each User
Device Settings*, Regist. Info. for Each User
Device Settings, Regist. Info. for Each User*
Standard*, Device Login Auth. Info., Regist. Info. for Each User
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Setting Description
LXIX
T-10-13
LXIX
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Copy
LXX
Copy
* Default Settings
UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
M1 to M9 : Register, Rename, Delete, Check Content

Register, Initialize
No
No
No
No
Finishing*, Unassigned
2-Sided*, Unassigned
Density* Unassigned
Original Type*, Unassigned
Unassigned*
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No Settings*, Each mode

On*, Off
On, Off*
On*, Off
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Item
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 4
Shortcut 5
Register Options Shortcuts (Express Copy)
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 4
Shortcut 5
Shortcut 6
Auto Collate
Image Orientation Priority
Auto Orientation
Select Color Settings for Copy
Use Auto (Color/Black)
Use Full Color
Setting Description
T-10-14
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Copy
LXX
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer
LXXI
Printer
* Default Settings
*1
Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specified.
Item
Print Report
PCL*1
Configuration Page
Font List
PS
Configuration Page
Font List
RGB Test Print
CMY Test Print
RGB Color Chart
CMYK Color Chart
Printer Settings
Restrict Printer Jobs
When On is selected
PDL Selection (Plug-n-play)
Setting Description
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes, No
Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer)
On, Off*
Select Jobs to Allow: Rsrvd Jobs*, Rsrvd Jobs + Secure Print
UFR II*, PCL5c*1, PCL6*1, PS3*1, Fax*1, UFR II (XPS)

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
T-10-15
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer
LXXI
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
LXXII
Send
* Default Settings
*1
Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional products are available for use.
*2
Indicates item that is not delivered as device information.
Details/Edit, Delete
*3
Indicates items with setting range and default setting that may differ, depending on the region.
*4
Indicates items that may not be displayed on the Settings/Registration screen or that may have different default setting, depending on the region.
*5
Displays according to the number of lines set in [No. of TX Lines].

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes
Yes
No
No
Checking Settings, Location to Register Button : M1 to M18

On, Off*
Name, Comment
Delete, Check Content, Rename (Name, Comment) : M1 to M18
On, Off*
On*, Off
Standard*, One-Touch, Favorite Settings, Address Book
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
2-Sided Original*, Unassigned

Different Size Originals*, Unassigned
For Error Only*, On, Off
On*, Off
On, Off*
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On, Off*
00 : 00 to 23 : 59 (00 : 00*)
On, Off*
Print*, Do Not Print
TX Terminal ID: Print
Print Position: Inside, Outside*
Display Destination Unit Name: On*, Off
Telephone # Mark*1: Fax*, TEL
On*, Off
0 to 5times (3times*)
High Ratio, Normal*, Low Ratio
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Item
Output Report
TX/RX User Data List
Fax User Data List*1
Common Settings
Register Favorite Settings
Show Comment
Button Name, Input Comment
Edit Favorite Settings
Show Comments
Display Confirmation for Favorite Settings
Default Screen
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
TX Report
Report with TX Image
Report with Color TX Image
Communication Management Report
Auto Print (100 Transmissions)
Specify Print Time
Timer Setting
Send/Receive Separate
TX Terminal ID
Delete Failed TX Jobs

Retry Times
Data Compression Ratio
YCbCr TX Gamma Value
Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX
Setting Description
Yes, No
Yes, No
LXXII
LXXIII

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
On, Off*
CN: On, Off*
Yes
Yes
No
No
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Home Folder, Register for Each User*, Use Login Server
Protocol, Host Name, Folder Path
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(NULL*)
Yes
No
On, Off*
On*, Off
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
0 min (Off), 1 to 99 mins (0 mins*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Standard*, APOP, POP AUTH

On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
Always SSL, On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
CN: On, Off*
On, Off*
CN: On, Off*
0 (Off), 1 to 99 MB (3MB*)
(Attached Image*)
On, Off*
On*, Off
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Item
Confirm SSL Certificate for WebDAV TX
Add Items to Verify
Limit New Destination
Fax
E-mail
I-Fax
File
Always Add Device Signature to Send*1
Restrict File Formats
Limit E-Mail to Send to Myself
Restrict File TX to Personal Folder
Personal Folder Specification Method
Home Folder Settings
Use Auth. Info. of Each User
Register Unit Name
SMTP RX
POP
SMTP Server (Server name or IP address)
E-mail Address
POP Server (Server name or IP address)
POP Login Name
POP Password
POP Interval
Authent./Encryption
POP AUTH Method
POP Authentication Before Send
Allow SSL (POP)
SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)
User Name
Password
Allow SSL (SMTPReceive)
Allow SSL (SMTP Send)
Display Auth. Screen When Send
Confirm SSL Certificate for SMTP TX
Add Items to Verify
Confirm SSL Certificate for POP RX
Add Items to Verify
Maximum Data Size for Sending
Default Subject
Specify Authentication User Dest. to Reply
Set Authentication User Dest. to Sender
Allow Unregistered Users to Send E-Mail
Setting Description
LXXIII
LXXIV

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
1 to 99 hrs (24 hrs*)

On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Register, Details/Edit, Delete
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes*2
Yes
Standard*, Address Book

No
No
No
No
Density*, Unassigned
Original Type*, Unassigned
2-Sided Original*, Unassigned
Different Size Originals*, Unassigned
01 to 99 : Register/Edit, Delete
On, Off*
On*, Off
1 to 15sec (2sec*)
On*, Off
1 to 10 times (2times*)
2 to 99 mins (2 mins*)
Error and 1st Page*, All Pages, Off
On*, Off
For Error Only*, On, Off
On*, Off
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On, Off*
00 : 00 to 23 : 59 (00 : 00*)
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
If only the Super G3 FAX Board is installed:

Line 1
If the Super G3 FAX Board and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board are installed:
Line 1, Line 2
If the Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board, and Super G3 3rd/4th Line
Fax Board are installed:
Line 1, Line 2, Line 3, Line 4
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
Pulse, Tone*
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Item
Full Mode TX Timeout
Print MDN/DSN upon Receipt
Use Send via Server
Allow MDN Not via Server
Restrict TX Destination Domain
Restrict Sending to Domains
Permitted Domains
Autocomplete for Entering E-Mail Addresses
Fax Settings*1
Default Screen
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 4
Register Sender Name (TTI)
Use Auth. User Name as Sender Name
ECM TX
Set Pause Time
Auto Redial
Set Details: Redial Times
Set Details: Redial Interval
Set Details: Redial When TX Error
Check Dial Tone Before Sending
Fax TX Report
Report with TX Image
Fax Activity Report
Auto Print (40 Transmissions)
Specify Print Time
Timer Setting
Send/Receive Separate
Set Line
Line 1 to Line 4
Register Unit Telephone Number

Register Unit Name
Select Line Type
Setting Description
LXXIV
Item
Select TX Line
TX Start Speed
PIN Code Access
Confirm Entered Fax Number
Allow Fax Driver TX
Remote Fax TX Settings*1
Remote Fax Server Address
TX Timeout
No. of TX Lines
Select Priority Line
Remote Fax Settings
Use Remote Fax
Setting Description

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes
No
If the Super G3 FAX Board and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board are installed:
Line 1: Priority TX*, Prohibit TX
Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
If the Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board, and Super G3 3rd/4th Line
Fax Board are installed:
Line 1: Priority TX, Prohibit TX*
33600 bps*, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
IP address or host name (48 characters maximum): (NULL*)

1 to 99 hrs (one hour increments) (24hrs*)
1 to 4 Line (1*)
Auto*, Line 1, Line 2*3, Line 3*3, Line 4*3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
LXXV
T-10-16
LXXV
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward
LXXVI
Receive/Forward
* Default Settings
*1
Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional products are available for use.
*2
Indicates items that are not delivered as device information.
*3
Indicates items that are not delivered if a PIN is set.
Receive Method:, E-Mail Priority, Details/Edit, Delete, Print List

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes, No
Yes, No
Yes
Yes
No
No
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On
Reduction Mode: Auto*, Fixed
Reduction %: 75% to 97% (90%*)
Reduction Direction: Vertical & Horizontal, Vertical Only*
On, Off*
Print, Do Not Print*
Always Print*, Store/Print, Off
Receive Method:, Validate/Invalidate, Register (Registered Forwarding Settings),
Delete, Details/Edit, Print List, Forward w/o Conditions, E-Mail Priority
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*2
00 to 49
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
Seven digits maximum: (NULL*)
On, Off*
On, Off*
Everyday (1 to 5), Specify Days (Sun to Sat, 1 to 5), Off*
0 to 99 hrs (24hrs*)
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*3
Yes
Yes*3
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Item
Output Report
Fax User Data List*1
Common Settings
Print on Both Sides
Select Drawer
SwitchA
SwitchB
SwitchC
SwitchD
Reduce Fax RX Size
2 On 1 Log
Received Page Footer
YCbCr RX Gamma Value
Handle Files with Forwarding Errors
Forwarding Settings
Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox
Set/Register Confidential Fax Inboxes
Inbox No.
Register Box Name
PIN
URL Send Settings
Initialize
Memory RX Inbox PIN
Use Fax Memory Lock*1
Use I-Fax Memory Lock
Memory Lock Start Time
Memory Lock End Time
Divided Data RX Timeout
Always Send Notice for RX Errors
Setting Description
LXXVI
LXXVII
Item
Fax Settings*1
ECM RX
Fax RX Report
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report
RX Start Speed
RX Password
Setting Description
On*, Off
For Error Only, On, Off*
On*, Off
33600 bps*, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps
20 digits maximum: (NULL*)

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
T-10-17
LXXVII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Store/Access Files
LXXVIII
Store/Access Files
* Default Settings
*1
Indicates items that are not delivered if a PIN is set.

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Register, Rename, Delete, Check Content (M1 to M9)

No
No
No
No
Register, Rename, Delete, Check Content (M1 to M9)

No
No
No
No
00 to 99
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
0=None, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hrs, 1, 2, 3, 7, 30 days (3 days*)
(NULL*)
On, Off*
-
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes*1
No
No
Yes*1
Yes*1
No
0=None, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hrs, 1, 2, 3, 7, 30 days (3 days*)

On, Off*
No
Yes
No
No
On, Off*
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Off*, By WebDAV, By SMB
Yes
Yes
Basic, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
Yes, No
Yes, No
On*, Off
On, Off*
Dev. Supt. Formats*, Comm. Office Formats, All
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register (Name, Protocol, Location), Details, Delete
Yes
No
On*, Off
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
No
No
Item
Common Settings
Scan and Store Settings
Access Stored Files Settings
Mail Box Settings
Set/Register Mail Boxes
Mail Box No.
Register Box Name
PIN
Time Until File Auto Delete
URL Send Settings
Print upon Storing from Printer Driver
Initialize
Settings for All Mail Boxes
Time Until File Auto Delete
Print When Storing from Printer Driver
Box Security Settings
Limit Box PIN to 7 Digits/Restrict Access
Disp. Print When Storing from Printer Driver
Advanced Box Settings
Open to Public
WebDAV Server Settings
Authentication Type
Use SSL
Allow to Create Personal Space
Delete All Personal Spaces
Initialize Shared Space
Prohibit Writing from External
Authentication Management
File Formats Allowed for Storing
Save Operation Log
Network Settings
Network Place Settings
Protocol for External Reference
SMB
WebDAB
Setting Description
LXXVIII
LXXIX

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
On, Off*
CN: On, Off*
Yes
Yes
No
No
On*, Off
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Item
Confirm SSL Certificate for Network Access
Add Items to Verify
Memory Media Settings
Use Scan/Print Function
Use Scan Function
Use Print Function
Setting Description
T-10-18
LXXIX
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Hold
LXXX
Secure Print
* Default Settings
*1
Item
Simple Authentication Settings

Omit Password
Require Domain Name to Determine My Job
Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs*1
Setting Description
On, Off*
On*, Off
On, Off*

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-19
Hold
* Default Settings
Item
Use Hold Function
Time Until Hold Job Auto Delete
Setting Description
On*, Off
0=Off, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hrs, 1, 2, 3, 7, 30 days (3 days*)

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
No
T-10-20
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Hold
LXXX
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Web Access
LXXXI
Web Access
* Default Settings
UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On, Off*
On*, Off
On, Off*
On, Off*
Std CSS only, Std CSS + Style Attribute, Std CSS + Style Attribute + External Imported
CSS*
CSS1*, CSS2, CSS3
On*, Off
Short, Medium*, Long
URL Use Current Page as Home: (NULL*)
On*, Off
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Show Home Page*, Show Blank Page, Keep Last Page
No
No
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Use Cache: On, Off*
Yes, No
Cookie Handling: Accept*, Block, Prompt
Yes, No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Item
Settings
View Settings
Show Images
Show Animated GIF Images
Enable Table
Fit Web Page Into Screen Size
Use JavaScript
Use Word Wrap
Use Japanese Hyphenation
Format
Standard CSS
Show Flash Contents
Flash Animation Frame Interval
Home Page Settings
Home Page during Startup
Auto Clear Settings
Display during Auto Clear
Security
Use SSL 2.0
Use SSL 3.0
Use TLS 1.0
Certificates Enable/Disable Details
Display Mixed HTTPS/HTTP Pg
Display Server Certificate Auth. Warning
Displ Warning when Entering Secured Page
Displ. Warning when Leaving Secured Page
Cache
Clear Cache
Cookie
Delete Cookies
Privacy Policy and Regulations
Restrict URL Entry
Restrict Add/Edit Favorites
Restrict Editing Home Pages
Restrict Add/Edit Page Memos
Restrict Printing
Restrict File Upload
Restrict History Display
Dept. ID/User Name with History
Full Screen
Setting Description
LXXXI
LXXXII

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
-
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
(NULL*)
On, Off*
(Display Only)
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Item
Hide Buttons in Toolbar
Hide Address in Toolbar
Hide Web Access Button
Restrict Share Device Information
Share Device Information with Following Address
Proxy Settings
Use a proxy server (Display Only)
Proxy Server Address (Display Only)
Port Number (Display Only)
Use proxy auth. (Display Only)
Address Without Using Proxy
Use HTTP1.1 for proxy connection: On, Off
Version
Setting Description
T-10-21
LXXXII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Set Destination > Set Destination
LXXXIII
Set Destination
Set Destination
* Default Settings
*1
Indicates items that are not delivered as device information: Details/Edit, Delete, Search by Name
*2
Indicates items that are not delivered as device information: Edit, Delete
*3
UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Address List 1 to Address List 10, One-Touch

Print List: Yes, No
Register New Dest., Details/Edit, Delete, Search by Name
Address List 1 to Address List 10, Rename
Register/Edit, Delete
Local*, LDAP Server, Remote
PIN: Seven digits maximum (NULL*)
On, Off*
On, Off*
Register, Details/Edit, Delete, Print List
On* Off
Display Name, Attribute Name
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes*1
Yes
Yes*2
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
On, Off*
IP Address or Host Name
15 to 120 sec (30sec*)
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Item
Address Lists
Rename Address List
Register One-Touch
Change Default Display of Address Book
Address Book PIN
Manage Address Book Access Numbers
Include Pswd. When Exporting Address Book
Auto Search When Using LDAP Server
Register/Edit LDAP Search Conditions
Change Default LDAP Search Conditions
Acquire Remote Address Book*3
Acquire Address Book
Remote Address Book Server Address
Communication Timeout
Fax TX Line Auto Select Adjustment
Make Remote Add. Book Open
Make Address Book Open
Setting Description
T-10-22
LXXXIII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Set Destination > Set Destination
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > User Management
LXXXIV
Management Settings
User Management
* Default Settings
UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
7654321*
7654321*
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Register, Edit, Delete, Limit Functions
Clear, Print List, Clear All Totals, Large2 Count Management
On*, Off
On*, Off
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Item
System Manager Information Settings
System Manager ID
System PIN
System Manager
E-Mail Address
Contact Information
Comment
Register PIN
Page Totals
Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs
Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs
Allow Black Copy/Print Jobs
Allow Black Printer Jobs
Setting Description
T-10-23
LXXXIV
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > User Management
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management
LXXXV
Device Management
* Default Settings
*1
UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Model Name*
(NULL*)
No
No
No
No
Auto Search/Register, Reg., Details, Delete, Print List

Auto Search/Register
Search Depth (Router): 1 to 8 (1*)
Display Host Name: On, Off*
Start Auto Search
On, Off*
Network Settings: Include, Exclude
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Network Settings: Include, Exclude
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
Settings/Reg. Value, Dept. ID, Address Book, Web Access Favorites*1, Printer Settings,
Paper Information, Start
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On, Off*
All, Basic Only*
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Item
Device Information Settings
Device Name
Location
Set Auto Delivery

Settings/Registration Value
Dept. ID
Address Book
Web Access Favorites*1
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Workflow Composer*1
Manual Delivery
Dept. ID
Address Book
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Workflow Composer*1
Restore Data
Restrict Receiving for Each Function
Dept. ID
Address Book
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Workflow Composer*1
Set Paper Information
Setting Description
LXXXV
LXXXVI
Item
Communication Log
Limited Functions Mode*1

Finissher Tray A/B/C
Finissher Saddle Stitch Unit
Folding Unit
Finissher Puncher
Limit Functions When Security Key is Off*1
Confirm Device Signature Certificate*1
Confirm User Signature Certificate*1
Generate Key
Key Name
Signature Algorithm
Key Algorithm
When RSA isselected
When ECDSA is selected
Validity Start Date
Validity End Date
Country/Region
State
City
Organization
Organization Unit
Common Name
Generate/Update Device Signature Key
Key and Certificate List
Key and Certificate List for Users*1
Certificate Details
Delete
Key and Certificate List for This Device*1
Certificate Details
Delete
CA Certificate List
Certificate Details
Delete
Setting Description

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Details, Print List, Report Settings

Report Settings
Auto Print (100 transmissions): On*, Off
Specify Print Time: On, Off*
00: 00 to 23:59 (00: 00*)
Separate Report Type: On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Limit Partial Functions*, Limit All Functions
Certificate Details: Verify Cert.
Certificate Details: Verify Cert.
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
(NULL*)
SHA1*, SHA256, SHA384, SHA512
RSA*, ECDSA
Key Length (bit): 512*, 1024, 2048, 4096
Key Type: P256*, P384, P521
Month, Date, Year (01/01/2000 - 12/31/2037) : (NULL*)
Month, Date, Year (01/01/2000 - 12/31/2037) : (NULL*)
Country/Region name and code : United States (US)*
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
(NULL*)
IP address of the machine or FQDN (41 characters maximum) (NULL*)
Yes, No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
-
Yes
No
Yes
No
Key and Certificate
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
-
Yes
No
Yes
No
LXXXVI
LXXXVII

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Serial Number, Expires, Verify CRL

-
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
On*, Off
Off
Obtain Job Log with Management Software: Allow, Do Not Allow*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Item
Cert. Revocation List (CRL)
CRL Details
Delete
Register Key and Certificate
Register
Delete
Register CA Certificate
Register
Delete
Display Job Status Before Authentication
Display Log
Save Audit Log
Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140-2
Setting Description
T-10-24
LXXXVII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Data Management
LXXXVIII
License/Other
* Default Settings
*1
UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
(NULL*)
No
No
Yes, No
On, Off*
On*, Off
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes, No
Install Applications/Options, Software Management Settings
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Item
Register License
MEAP Settings
Print System Information
Use SSL
Remote UI
Use SSL
Use Reference Print*1
Delete Message Board Contents
Register/Update Software
Setting Description
T-10-25
Data Management
* Default Settings
Item
HDD Data Complete Deletion
Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion
Timing of Deletion
Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode
Initialize All Data/Settings
TPM Settings
Setting Description
On, Off*
During Job*, After Job
Once with 0 (Null) Data*, Once with Random Data, 3 Times with Random Data,
DoD Standard
Once with 0 (Null) Data*, Once with Random Data, 3 Times with Random Data,
9 Times with Random Data, DoD Standard
Use TPM: On, Off*
Back Up TPM Key (12 characters maximum for password), Restore TPM Key

UI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
T-10-26
LXXXVIII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Data Management
LXXXIX
Data
Location
Replace
Delete
Backup by User
User function
Replace Replace Replace DC Cont- Reader Replace Initialize
the HDD / the Main the Main roller PCB Cont- the TPM All Data/
All format PCB 1 PCB 2
roller PCB
Settings
PCB
Copy >
Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize
Settings/Registration : Function Settings

Send >
Common
Settings
> Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize
Send
Printer
> Fax
Settings
Settings > Custom
> Change Settings >
Default
Initialize
Settings >
Initialize
Advanced
Box
Settings
> Delete
Personal/
Shared
Space >
Delete All
Function > Function > Function > Function > Function > Function > Yes/ Method
CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR > CLEAR > CLEAR > CLEAR > No
> MN> MMI
DC-CON R-CON
ADRS-BK JV-CASHE
CONT
Address List
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Forwarding Settings
HDD/
Clear
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Preferences
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
*2
Yes
*3
Adjustment/
Maintenance
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Function Settings
SRAM
(MCON2/
DCON)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
*4
Clear
*5
Yes
*6
Set Destination
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Management Settings
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
*7
Printer Settings
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Set Paper Information
HDD
Clear
Settings / Registration
Clear
Backup by Service
Service function
Location
to be
stored
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Yes/No
Method
Location
to be
stored
Back- Reup
store
No
Yes
*1
USB
memory
No
Yes
*1
USB
memory
Yes
Yes
*1
Yes
Yes
*1
SST,
PC
Download Menu
(HDD/USB)
PC
Yes
Yes
*1
PC
Yes
Yes
*1
PC
Yes
Yes
*1
PC
Remote UI
PC
(Export/Import)
Yes
Yes
*1
PC
Yes
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
No
No
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Setting items for each menu in Main Menu (Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox)
Favorite Settings
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
*8
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Yes
Yes
*9
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Default Settings
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
Yes
Yes
*10
*11
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Shortcut settings for

Options
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
Yes
Yes
*10
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Previous Settings
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
Yes
Yes
*10
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Button Size information HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Yes
Yes
*1
*12
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Wallpaper Setting
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Yes
PC
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Restrict Quick Menu
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Yes
*1
*12
Yes
*1
*12
Yes
*1
*12
SST
(Meapback)
Button information in
Quick Menu
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Setting items for Quick Menu
Yes
Yes
Setting items for Main Menu
LXXXIX
Appendix > Backup Data
Backup Data
XC
Location
Replace
Delete
Backup by User
User function
roller PCB
Settings
PCB
Backup by Service
Service function
Copy >
Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize

Send >
Common
Settings
> Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize
Send
Printer
> Fax
Settings
Settings > Custom
> Change Settings >
Default
Initialize
Settings >
Initialize
Advanced
Box
Settings
> Delete
Personal/
Shared
Space >
Delete All
CLEAR
CLEAR
> MN> MMI
DC-CON R-CON
ADRS-BK JV-CASHE
CONT
Location
to be
stored
Back- Reup
store
Yes
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Yes/No
Method
Location
to be
stored
Yes
*1
USB memory
Yes
Yes
*1
USB memory
Yes
Yes
*1
USB memory
Yes
Yes
*1
USB memory
Button settings in Main HDD

Menu
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Button settings on the

top of the screen
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Wallpaper Setting for

Main Menu
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Other settings for Main HDD

Menu
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
User Box specification HDD

settings (Register Box
Name, Password, Time
until Document Auto
Erase, Print uponstoring
from the printer driver)
Clear
Clear
Yes
*13
Remote UI
(Bacup
/Restore)
PC/USB- No
HDD
Yes
*1
USB memory
Image data of User Box, HDD

Confidential Fax Box,
and System Box Image
Data
Clear
Clear
*29
Yes
*13
Remote UI
(Bacup
/Restore)
PC/USB- No
HDD
Yes
*1
USB memory
Data File of Advanced

Box
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
*14
Remote UI
(Bacup
/Restore)
PC/USB- No
HDD
*15
Yes
USB memory
Advanced box account HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
*16
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Yes
Yes
*1
*17
SST
(Meapback),
USB memory
PC
Network place setting

information
HDD
Clear
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
No
Yes
*1
USB memory
HDD
Clear
Clear
Yes
*13
Remote UI
(Bacup
/Restore)
No
No
HDD
Clear
Clear
Yes
*18
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Yes
Yes
*1
SST,
PC
Download Menu
(HDD/USB)
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
Yes
Yes
SST
(Meapback)
PC
License files for MEAP HDD

applications
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
SMS
PC
Yes
Yes
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Data
Box settings
Advanced box settings
Box settings
Image forms stored in
the Form Composition
mode
PC
Web browser settings

Web Access setting
information
MEAP settings
MEAP application
XC
XCI
Location
Replace
Delete
Backup by User
User function
roller PCB
Settings
PCB
Backup by Service
Service function
Copy >
Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize

Send >
Common
Settings
> Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize
Send
Printer
> Fax
Settings
Settings > Custom
> Change Settings >
Default
Initialize
Settings >
Initialize
Advanced
Box
Settings
> Delete
Personal/
Shared
Space >
Delete All
CLEAR
CLEAR
> MN> MMI
DC-CON R-CON
ADRS-BK JV-CASHE
CONT
Location
to be
stored
Back- Reup
store
Yes/No
Method
Location
to be
stored
User authentication
HDD
information registered
in the Local Device
Authentication user
authentication system of
SSO-H (Single Sign-On
H)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
SSO-H
PC
Yes
Yes
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Data saved using MEAP HDD

applications
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
*19
Yes
Yes
SST
(Meapback)
PC
SMS (Service
Management Service)
password of MEAP
Clear
Clear
*20
Clear
No
Yes
Yes
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Unsent documents
(documents waiting
to be sent with the
Delayed Send mode)
SRAM
Clear
(MCON2)
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
No
No
Job logs
HDD
Clear
Clear
No
No
No
Key Pair and Server

HDD
Certificate in Certificate
Settings in TCP/IP
Settings in Network Settings in System Settings
(from the Additional
Functions screen)
Clear
Clear
No
No
No
HDD
(SRAM
(MCON2))
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
Yes
Yes
HDD
Universal data settings

setting values
Clear
No
No
No
SST,
PC
Download Menu
(HDD/USB)
-
Key information to be
used for encryption
when TPM is OFF
SRAM
Clear
(MCON2) *21
Clear
*22
Clear
Clear *22
Clear
*22
No
*23
No
No
Key and settings

information to be used
for encryption when
TPM is ON
SRAM
Clear
(MCON2) *24
HDD
TPM
Board
Clear
*25
Clear
Clear
*26
Clear *25
Clear
*25
Yes
*27
Settings/
USB
Registration memory
Management
Settings >
Data
Managemnet
> TPM Settings
No
No
Service mode setting

values (MN-CON)
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Yes
Yes
SST,
HDD/
Download Menu USB
(HDD/USB)
*29

values (DC-CON)
SRAM
(DC-CON)
Clear
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
COPIER>
OPTION>
USER>
SMD-EXPT >
ON Only
*28
PC
Yes
Yes
COPIER>
FUNCTION>
SYSTEM>
DSRAMBUP
PS font
Service Mode
HDD
XCI
Data
XCII
Location
Replace
Delete
Backup by User
User function

roller PCB
Settings
PCB
Backup by Service
Service function
Copy >
Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize

Send >
Common
Settings
> Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize
Send
Printer
> Fax
Settings
Settings > Custom
> Change Settings >
Default
Initialize
Settings >
Initialize
Advanced
Box
Settings
> Delete
Personal/
Shared
Space >
Delete All
CLEAR
CLEAR
> MN> MMI
DC-CON R-CON
ADRS-BK JV-CASHE
CONT
Location
to be
stored
Back- Reup
store
Yes/No

values (R-CON)
EEPROM (R-CON)
Clear
Clear
Yes
PC
Yes
Yes
Audit Log
HDD
Clear
Clear
No
Yes
Yes
Clear
Method
Location
to be
stored
COPIER>
FUNCTION>
SYSTEM>
RSRAMBUP
SST
(Meapback)
HDD
PC
T-10-27
*1
If there are the backup data which exported in USB memory, Restore is possible in Download Menu (USB).
*2
The following items are Deleted.

Preferences > Paper Settings > Register Envelope Drawer
Preferences > Paper Settings > B5/EXEC Paper Selection
Preferences > Paper Settings > A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
*3
An exclusion item:
Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > [Adjust Time]/[Date/Time Settings]
*4

Function Settings > Common > Paper Feed Settings > Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off
Function Settings > Common > Paper Feed Settings > Feed Method Switch
Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Scanner Noise Settings
Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Timing to Raise Feeder Tray
Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Streak Prevention
*5
*6
The following data are impossible of backup

Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Register Form
Function Settings > Receive/Forward > Common Settings > Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox
*7
The following data are impossible of backup

Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management > Page Totals
*8
Backup is available only "Favorite Settings" in "Scan to Send"
*9
:If start-up in download mode in safe mode is available in the event of an HDD failure, it is assumed that MEAP applications can be backed up using SST in some cases. In that case, the data can be recovered with the information of the MEAP applications maintained by checking that the machine
starts normally after installation of the system after replacement of the HDD, starting the machine in download mode in safe mode, and restoring the backup data.
*10
*11
If there are the backup data which exported in USB memory except a history, Restore is possible in Download Menu (USB).
*12
*13
Login System Administrator and do backup.
*14
IIt is possible only when logging in as an administrator user.

When ON is selected for the authentication management of Advanced Box, Advanced Box account needs to be exported in advance and imported at restoration.
*15
When the optional high-capacity HDD is installed, backup can be done only to USB-HDD.
*16
When ON is selected for the authentication management of Advanced Box, Advanced Box account needs to be exported in advance and imported at restoration.
*17
*18
Only "favorites of web browser" can be backed improves when You perform individual export of RUI.
*19
Only when MEAP applications have a backup function
XCII
Data
*20
Since the password is TPM-encrypted and saved, password backed up after all data/settings have been initialized cannot be restored. When all data/settings have been initialized, initialize the password using a switch license for password initialization.
[Reference] Since TPM encryption key is updated when all data/settings are initialized, the password which was backed up cannot be read.
*21
If the backup key information in the HDD is missing, it is automatically recovered from the key in the SRAM (MCON2).
*22
If the key information in the SRAM (MCON2) is missing, it is automatically recovered from the backup key in the HDD.
*21,22
When You change Main PCB 2 and HDD at the same time, the automatic restoration of the key information is not performed.
*23
No means is available to back up externally.
*24
An error code is displayed when the TPM setting is ON. After all data/settings are initialized after restart, select "ON" for the TPM setting to enable the TPM setting.
*25
If the TPM key information in the SRAM of the HDD or the Main Controller PCB 2 becomes missing, the key information in the SRAM is automatically recovered from the backup of the common key in the HDD. Then the internal state of TPM setting changes to "ON". Note that the TPM setting needs
to be manually changed to "ON" since "OFF" is displayed for UI.
*26
TPM settings becomes "OFF" when all data/settings are initialized.
*27
Backup only against TPM PCB failure is possible. In addition, restoration cannot be done to other machines whose TPM setting is set to "ON".
*28
Backup is possible in SramImg, DSRAMBUP, RSRAMBUP.

When You set it in COPIER>OPTION>USER>SMD-EXPT>ON, a backup/restore is possible in Service Mode Settings from the Remote UI.
There is a backup button on the TOP page of the service mode.
HDD and USB memory can back up Service Mode Settings by backup button.
The contents of Settings/Registration become the object of the collective backup.
The exclusion item refers to "a list of DCM backup exclusion items".
*29
Because clearing MN-CONT changes the memory reception setting to "OFF", the image data saved in the Memory RX Inbox is automatically printed after restart. After a print, it is deleted from a system box.
XCIII
T-10-28
DCM backup exclusion items

Preferences
Paper Settings
Display Settings

Register Envelope Drawer
Register Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults
Erasing the Remaining Toner Error Message
Timer/Energy Settings
Current Time Adjustment
Network
Output Report
TCP/IP Settings
IPSec settings
IEEE802.1X Settings
Accessibility
Adjustment/
Maintenance
Adjust Image Quality

Adjust Action
Function Settings
Maintenance
Common
Printer
Send
Receive/Forward
Store/Access Files
Set Destination
Address Lists
Auto Serarch when using
LDAP Server
Firewall Settings
Voice Navigation Settings
Custom Type > Details/Edit > Change
IP Address Settings (IPv4) > PING Command

IP Address Settings (IPv6) > PING Command
IPP Print Settings
SSL Settings
Confirm Dept. ID PIN
IP Address Block Log

Tune Microphone

Conect Shading
Auto Correct Color Mismatch
Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning
Change Fold/Stitch Position
Paper Feed Settings
Print Settings
Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off

Local Print Default Settings
Form for Superimpose Image
Secure Watermark Settings > Adust Background/Character Contrast
Output Report

Fax User Data List
Output Report
Common Settings
Mail Box Settings
Advanced Box Settings
Network Settings
Forwarding Settings
Settings for All Mail Boxes
Delete All Personal Spaces
XCIII
XCIV
Management
Settings
User Management
Device Management
License/Other
Data Management
Limit Function when Security key is off

Register License
MEAP Settings
Back Up
Restore
Back Up/Restore Log
Initialize All Data/Settings
TPM Settings
Page Totals
Print List
Manual Delivery
Resor Data
Communication Log
Register Destination > Auto Serch/Registor
DCM backup exclusion items
Print System Information

Remote UI On/Off
Delete Massage Board Contents
T-10-29
XCIV
XCV
CHK-TYPE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CHK-TYPE
Group
Partition name
Four same time
FSTDEV
IMG-MNG
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
APL_GEN
TMP_GEN
TMP_FAX
TMP_PSS
PDLDEV
BOOTDEV
APL_MEAP
APL_SEND
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
CRBDEV
APL_CDS
One
Three same time
One
One
One
One
One
One
One
One
Description
HDD Format
Using SST or USB memory
HD-CLEAR
Image data storage area (Box etc)
Management data of image
Image data storage area (for Job archive system)
Thumbnail
Storage area of universal data (Note: For details, see the following list.)
Storage area of universal data (temporary file)
FAX (temporary file)
PSS (temporary file)
PDL-related file storage area (font, registration form, color correction information file for ICCProfile-PDL function)
Firmware storage area (Bootable/MEAP/key/certificate/PDF dictionary/RUI contents/voice dictionary (ICC profile. PS test data.))
MEAP
Address book, Setting for Forwarding
MEAP stored data
System log storage area
Advanced Box area
Area for distribution server
enable
Entering SST menu or USB menu

Select "ALL"
All partition format same time.
Select "BOOTDEV"
Only BOOTDEV is erased.
enable
enable
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
T-10-30
Selecting "CHK-TYPE1" means selecting four partitions.

APL_GEN Details of universal data
Category
Settings / Registration
Setting items for each menu in

Main Menu
Data
Preferences
Function Settings
Set Destination
Management Settings
Printer Settings
Paper Information Settings
Favorite Settings
Default Settings
Shortcut settings for Options
Previous Settings
Category
Setting for Advance Box
Setting for Web Access
Setting for Universal Data
Data
User information of Advanced Box
Registration information of Network Place
Web Access Setting information
Unsent document (which is set timer transmission or reservation transmission)
Job log information
Key and server certificate which are registered in Management Settings>Device
Settings>Certificate Setting
Auto Adjust Gradation setting values
PS font
T-10-31
XCV
Appendix > Detail of HDD partition
Appendix > Detail of HDD partition
Detail of HDD partition
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft counter specifications
Soft Counter List
No.
Soft counter specifications

The numbers entered for software counters are classified as follows:
No.
000 to 099
100 to 199
200 to 299
300 to 399
400 to 499
500 to 599
600 to 699
700 to 799
800 to 899
900 to 999
Counter Details
Remote copy
Total
Copy
Print
Copy and print
Scan
Box
Reception print
Report print
Transmission
T-10-32
Meanings of symbols in tables

L: Large size (larger than B4 size)
S: Small size (smaller than B4 size)
S: Small size (smaller than B4 size)
It can be changed by the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER > B4_L_CNT) so that
the paper larger than B4 size can be counted as large size paper.
Copy: Local copy + remote copy
Copy A: Local copy + remote copy + box print
Print: PDL print + report print + box print
Print A: PDL print + report print
Scan: Black and white scan + color scan
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
071
072
073
074
081
082
083
084
101
102
103
104
105
106
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
XCVI
Counter Details
Remote copy (full color 1)
Remote copy (full color 2)
Remote copy (mono color 1)
Remote copy (mono color 2)
Remote copy (black and white 1)
Remote copy (black and white 2)
Remote copy (full color / large)
Remote copy (full color / small)
Remote copy (mono color / large)
Remote copy (mono color / small)
Remote copy (black and white / large)
Remote copy(black and white / small)
Remote copy (full color + mono color / large)
Remote copy(full color + mono color / small)
Remote copy (full color + mono color 2)
Remote copy(full color + mono color 1)
Remote copy (full color / large / double sided)
Remote copy (full color / small / double sided)
Remote copy (mono color / large / double sided)
Remote copy (mono color / small / double sided)
Remote copy (black and white / large / double sided)
Remote copy (black and white / small / double sided)
Toner bottle black
Toner bottle yellow
Toner bottle magenta
Toner bottle cyan
Toner bottle black + Remove the toner bottle black
Toner bottle yellow + Remove the toner bottle yellow
Toner bottle magenta + Remove the toner bottle magenta
Toner bottle cyan + Remove the toner bottle cyan
Total 1
Total 2
Total(large)
Total (small)
Total (full color2)
Total (full color2)
Total (black and white 1)
Total (black and white 2)
Total (mono color /large)
Total (mono color /small)
Total (black and white /large)
Total (black and white /small)
Total 1(double sided)
Total 2(double sided)
large (double sided)
XCVI
XCVII
No.
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
Counter Details
small (double sided)
Total (mono color 1)
Total (mono color 2)
Total (full color /large )
Total (full color /small)
Total (full color +mono color /large )
Total (full color +mono color /small)
Total (full color +mono color 2)
Total (full color +mono color 1)
Total A1
Total A2
Total A (large)
Total A (small)
Total A (full color 1)
Total A (full color 2)
Total A (black and white 1)
Total A (black and white 2)
Total A (mono color /large)
Total A (mono color /small)
Total A (black and white /large)
Total A (black and white /small)
Total A 1(double sided)
Total A 2(double sided)
large A (double sided)
small A (double sided)
Total A (mono color 1)
Total A (mono color 2)
Total A (full color /large )
Total A (full color /small)
Total A (full color +mono color /large )
Total A (full color +mono color /small)
Total A (full color +mono color 2)
Total A (full color +mono color 1)
Total B1
Total B2
Total B (large)
Total B (small)
Total B (full color 1)
Total B (full color 2)
Total B (black and white 1)
Total B (black and white 2)
Total B (mono color /large)
Total B (mono color /small)
Total B (black and white /large)
Total B (black and white /small)
No.
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
Counter Details
Total B1 (double sided)
Total B2 (double sided)
largeB (double sided)
smallB (double sided)
Total B (mono color 1)
Total B (mono color 2)
Total B (full color /large )
Total B (full color /small)
Total B (full color +mono color /large )
Total B (full color +mono color /small)
Total B (full color +mono color 2)
Total B (full color +mono color 1)
Copy (Total 1)
Copy (Total 2)
Copy (large)
Copy (small)
Copy A (Total 1)
Copy A (Total 2)
Copy A (large)
Copy A (small)
Local copy (Total 1)
Local copy (Total 2)
Local copy (large)
Local copy (small)
Copy (full color 1)
Copy (full color 2)
Copy (mono color 1)
Copy (mono color 2)
Copy (black and white 1)
Copy (black and white 2)
Copy (full color /large)
Copy (full color /small)
Copy (mono color /large)
Copy (mono color /small)
Copy (black and white /large)
Copy (black and white /small)
Copy (full color +mono color /large)
Copy (full color +mono color /small)
Copy (full color +mono color /2)
Copy (full color +mono color /1)
Copy (full color /large/double sided )
Copy (full color /small/double sided )
Copy (mono color /large/double sided )
Copy (mono color /small/double sided )
Copy (black and white /large/double sided )
XCVII
XCVIII
No.
238
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
Counter Details
Copy (black and white /small/double sided )
Copy A (full color 1)
Copy A (full color 2)
Copy A (mono color 1)
Copy A (mono color 2)
Copy A (black and white 1)
Copy A (black and white 2)
Copy A (full color /large)
Copy A (full color /small)
Copy A (mono color /large)
Copy A (mono color /small)
Copy A (black and white /large)
Copy A (black and white /small)
Copy A (full color +mono color /large)
Copy A (full color +mono color /small)
Copy A (full color +mono color 2)
Copy A (full color +mono color 1)
Copy A (full color /large/double sided )
Copy A (full color /small/double sided )
Copy A (mono color /large/double sided )
Copy A (mono color /small/double sided )
Copy A (black and white /large/double sided )
Copy A (black and white /small/double sided )
Local copy (full color 1)
Local copy (full color 2)
Local copy (mono color 1)
Local copy (mono color 2)
Local copy (black and white 1)
Local copy (black and white 2)
Local copy (full color /large)
Local copy (full color /small)
Local copy (mono color /large)
Local copy (mono color /small)
Local copy (black and white /large)
Local copy (black and white /small)
Local copy (full color +mono color /large)
Local copy (full color +mono color /small)
Local copy (full color +mono color 2)
Local copy (full color +mono color 1)
Local copy (full color /large/double sided )
Local copy (full color /small/double sided )
Local copy (mono color /large/double sided )
Local copy (mono color /small/double sided )
Local copy (black and white /large/double sided )
Local copy (black and white /small/double sided )
No.
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
Counter Details
Print (Total 1)
Print (Total 2)
Print (large )
Print (small)
Print A(Total 1)
Print A(Total 2)
Print A(large )
Print A(small)
Print (full color 1)
Print (full color 2)
Print (mono color 1)
Print (mono color 2)
Print (black and white 1)
Print (black and white 2)
Print (full color /large )
Print (full color /small)
Print (mono color /large )
Print (mono color /small)
Print (black and white /large )
Print (black and white /small)
Print (full color +mono color /large )
Print (full color +mono color /small)
Print (full color +mono color /2)
Print (full color +mono color /1)
Print (full color /large /double sided)
Print (full color /small/double sided)
Print (mono color /large /double sided)
Print (mono color /small/double sided)
Print (black and white /large /double sided)
Print (black and white /small/double sided)
PDLPrint (Total 1)
PDLPrint (Total 2)
PDLPrint (large )
PDLPrint (small)
PDLPrint (full color 1)
PDLPrint (full color 2)
PDLPrint (mono color 1)
PDLPrint (mono color 2)
PDLPrint (black and white 1)
PDLPrint (black and white 2)
PDLPrint (full color /large )
PDLPrint (full color /small)
PDLPrint (mono color /large )
PDLPrint (mono color /small)
PDLPrint (black and white /large )
XCVIII
No.
346
351
352
353
354
355
356
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
601
602
603
604
Counter Details
PDLPrint (black and white /small)
PDLPrint (full color /large /double sided)
PDLPrint (full color /small/double sided)
PDLPrint (mono color /large /double sided)
PDLPrint (mono color /small/double sided)
PDLPrint (black and white /large /double sided)
PDLPrint (black and white /small/double sided)
Copy + print (full color /large)
Copy + print (full color /small)
Copy + print (black and white/large)
Copy + print (black and white/small)
Copy + print (black and white2)
Copy + print (black and white1)
Copy + print (full color +mono color /large)
Copy + print (full color +mono color /small)
Copy + print (full color +mono color /2)
Copy + print (full color +mono color /1)
Copy + print (large)
Copy + print (small)
Copy + print (2)
Copy + print (1)
Copy + print (mono color /large)
Copy + print (mono color /small)
Copy + print (full color /large/double sided)
Copy + print (full color /small/double sided)
Copy + print (mono color /large/double sided)
Copy + print (mono color /small/double sided)
Copy + print (black and white/large/double sided)
Copy + print (black and white/small/double sided
Scan (Total 1)
Scan (Total 2)
Scan (large)
Scan (small )
Black and white Scan (Total 1)
Black and white Scan (Total 2)
Black and white Scan (large)
Black and white Scan (small )
Color scan (Total 1)
Color scan (Total 2)
Color scan (large)
Color scan (small )
Box print (Total 1)
Box print (Total 2)
Box print (large)
Box print (small)
No.
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
631
632
633
634
635
636
639
640
641
642
645
646
651
652
655
656
701
702
703
704
705
706
709
XCIX
Counter Details
Box print (full color 1)
Box print (full color 2)
Box print (mono color 1)
Box print (mono color 2)
Box print (black and white 1)
Box print (black and white 2)
Box print (full color /large)
Box print (full color /small)
Box print (mono color /large)
Box print (mono color /small)
Box print (black and white /large)
Box print (black and white /small)
Box print (full color +mono color /large)
Box print (full color +mono color /small)
Box print (full color +mono color 2)
Box print (full color +mono color 1)
Box print (full color /large/double sided )
Box print (full color /small/double sided )
Box print (mono color /large/double sided )
Box print (mono color /small/double sided )
Box print (black and white /large/double sided )
Box print (black and white /small/double sided )
memory media print (Total 1)
memory media print (Total 2)
memory media print(large)
memory media print(small)
memory media print (full color 1)
memory media print (full color 2)
memory media print(black and white 1)
memory media print(black and white 2)
memory media print(full color/large)
memory media print(full color/small)
memory media print(mono color /large)
memory media print(mono color /small)
memory media print(full color /large/double sided)
memory media print(full color /small/double sided)
memory media print(black and white /large/double sided)
memory media print(black and white /small/double sided)
Reception print (Total 1)
Reception print (Total 2)
Reception print(large)
Reception print(small)
Reception print (full color 1)
Reception print (full color 2)
Reception print(black and white 1)
XCIX
No.
710
711
712
715
716
721
722
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
Counter Details
Reception print(black and white 2)
Reception print(full color/large)
Reception print(full color/small)
Reception print(mono color /large)
Reception print(mono color /small)
Reception print(full color /large/double sided)
Reception print(full color /small/double sided)
Reception print(black and white /large/double sided)
Reception print(black and white /small/double sided)
Advanced Box Print (Total 1)
Advanced Box Print (Total 2)
Advanced Box Print(large)
Advanced Box Print(small)
Advanced Box Print (full color 1)
Advanced Box Print (full color 2)
Advanced Box Print(black and white 1)
Advanced Box Print(black and white 2)
Advanced Box Print(full color/large)
Advanced Box Print(full color/small)
Advanced Box Print(mono color /large)
Advanced Box Print(mono color /small)
Advanced Box Print(full color /large/double sided)
Advanced Box Print(full color /small/double sided)
Advanced Box Print(black and white /large/double sided)
Advanced Box Print(black and white /small/double sided)
Network Print(Total 1)
Network Print(Total 2)
Network Print(large)
Network Print(small)
Network Print(full color 1)
Network Print(full color 2)
Network Print(black and white 1)
Network Print(black and white 2)
Network Print(full color/large)
Network Print(full color/small)
Network Print(mono color /large)
Network Print(black and white/small)
Network Print(full color /large/double sided)
Network Print(full color /small/double sided)
Network Print(black and white /large/double sided)
Network Print(black and white /small/double sided)
Mobile Print(Total 1)
Mobile Print(Total 2)
Mobile Print(large)
Mobile Print(small)
No.
Counter Details
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
801
802
803
804
805
806
809
810
811
812
815
816
821
822
825
826
915
916
917
918
921
922
929
930
937
938
939
940
945
946
959
960
961
Mobile Print(full color 1)

Mobile Print(full color 2)
Mobile Print(black and white 1)
Mobile Print(black and white 2)
Mobile Print(full color/large)
Mobile Print(full color/small)
Mobile Print(black and white /large)
Mobile Print(black and white/small)
Mobile Print(full color /large/double sided)
Mobile Print(full color /small/double sided)
Mobile Print(black and white /large/double sided)
Mobile Print(black and white /small/double sided)
Report print (Total 1)
Report print (Total 2)
Report print (large )
Report print (small )
Report print (full color 1)
Report print (full color 2)
Report print (black and white 1)
Report print (black and white 2)
Report print (full color /large )
Report print (full color /small )
Report print (black and white /large )
Report print (black and white /small )
Report print (full color /large /double sided )
Report print (full color /small /double sided )
Report print (black and white /large /double sided )
Report print (black and white /small /double sided )
Transmission scan total 2(color )
Transmission scan total 2(black and white)
Box scan (color )
Box scan (black and white)
Remote scan (color )
Remote scan (black and white)
Transmission scan / E-mail (color )
Transmission scan / E-mail (black and white)
Media Scan (Color)
Media Scan (black and white)
Application Scan(Total 1)
No.
962
963
964
965
CI
Counter Details
Application Black and white Scan(Total 1)
Application Color Scan(Total 1)
SuperBoxLocal Scan (Color)
SuperBoxLocal Scan(Black and white)
T-10-33
CI
Appendix > Removal > Removal > Work Procedure
Removal
CII
Work Procedure
If the user uses MEAP applications, ask the user to uninstall the MEAP applications if
Removal
Overview
User data kept by the machine contains address books and inbox documents that users
can recognize.
By using the copy, print, or send function, there is also information left on the HDD of
necessary.
User data delete procedure

Settings/Registration > System Management > Initialize
Select a deletion mode
If the user has not given any instruction on which item in the deletion mode should be used,
select the default "Once with 0 (Null) Data".
MFPs that is generally not recognizable but can be recovered as documents. (Refer to the
illustration on the next page.)
For security, the user mode is provided to delete data on SRAM and perform overwrite
deletion to render user data on HDD unrecoverable.
User data delete

To delete user data, execute Settings/Registration > System Management > Initialize
All Data/Settings in user mode. Performing Initialize All Data/Settings returns user mode
setting values to their factory defaults.
Usually, one overwrite is enough. Note that increasing the number of overwrite increases
the time required for the deletion operation.
Note:
When you perform Initialize All Data/Settings, license and data of MEAP application are
initialized to the state same as when the HDD is replaced. If MEAP application may be
used by other users after the machine is removed, disable the MEAP application and
uninstall it in advance.
Performing Initialize All Data/Settings does not delete the license of the system option.
F-10-36
Deletion of Service Mode Settings

The user mode setting values may have been changed at the user's request. In that case, the
service mode setting values should be changed back to the default values before removing
the machine.
Note:
When all the data are initialized, the user data on the HDD and the user data on the
SRAM of the Main Controller PCB 2 are deleted. For the items to be deleted, refer to the
backup list.
Performing "Initialize All Data" turns auto gradation adjustment values and TPM settings
to OFF. Therefore, to enable normal operation the next time, the operation performed at
installation is necessary.
Performing Initialize All Data/Settings does not delete the license of the system option.
CII
Report output upon completion of Initialize All Data/Settings
CIII
Limitations
With MN-CONT Ver. 10.23 and later, a report is output after executing Initialize All Data/
The language of the report is only English, and cannot be changed.
Settings. Consider using this report to provide to user as a material to inform of work details
The report is output without fail (a function to select ON/OFF of report output is not provided).
when executing Initialize All Data/Settings upon user's request.
There is no second output of report when the machine is turned ON without paper.
Only the output of this report remains in the job log.
Operation after Initialize All Data/Settings

The machine is started normally at restart after Initialize All Data/Settings without displaying
the message (Turn OFF the main power supply on the right side of the machine) on the
Deletion of Service Mode Setting Values

Service Mode Lev1 > Function> CLEAR > MN-CONT
screen to prompt shutdown

The report is output after startup.
******************************
*** System Information ***
******************************
<< Initialize All Data/Settings Report >>

Serial Number
Device Name
ZZZ99999
iR-ADV 8205 (iA8205)
Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode
Once with Random Data (*1)

F-10-38
The following data stored in the device has been completely erased.
- Data stored in the temporary data area
- User generated data
- Settings under Settings/Registration (restored to factory defaults)
Note:
When MN-CON clear is executed, the address book on the HDD is not deleted. As for
the user data, initialize all the data.
F-10-37
*1 display following one.

"Once with 0 (Null) Data"
"Once with Random Data"
"3 Times with Random Data"
"9 Times with Random Data"
"DoD Standard"
CIII

Ir ADV - C9200 - C7200 - Series ServiceManual EN Rev3 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ir ADV - C9200 - C7200 - Series ServiceManual EN Rev3 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

imageRUNNER ADVANCE

C9280 PRO/C9270 PRO/C7280i/C7270i/

inconsistent with local law.

of the individual companies.

edition of this manual.

consent of Canon Inc.

(C) CANON INC. 2013

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.

represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name

accompanies the symbol, the arrow

indicates the direction of the electric

Insert the claw.

Check the noise.

Use the bundled part.

Disconnect the connector.

Push the part.

In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked

Connect the connector.

Plug the power cable.

Remove the cable/wire

Service Information bulletins.

Set the cable/wire to the

Remove the screw.

Tighten the screw.

About Toner-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0-4

Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery---------------------------------0-5

Product features--------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7

Specifications of main unit-------------------------------------------------------1-10

Name of Parts----------------------------------------------------------------- 1-17

Functional Configuration---------------------------------------------------------- 2-2

Laser Exposure System---------------------------------------------------- 2-60

Image Formation System-------------------------------------------------- 2-72

Fixing System--------------------------------------------------------------- 2-135

Pickup / Feed System----------------------------------------------------- 2-159

Service Work---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-196

External and Controls----------------------------------------------------- 2-197

Embedded RDS------------------------------------------------------------ 2-289

Product Overview---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-289

Periodically replaced parts---------------------------------------------------3-2

Host machine------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-2

Host machine------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-3

Printer engine------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-5

4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning

List of External / Internal Cover------------------------------------------------- 4-2

Main Controller System----------------------------------------------------- 4-95

Removing the Flat Control Panel----------------------------------------------4-95

Laser Exposure System-------------------------------------------------- 4-126

Image Formation System------------------------------------------------ 4-131

Open the Process Unit Inner Cover.---------------------------------------- 4-131

Storing the ITB Unit------------------------------------------------------------- 4-139

When Replacing the Grid Plate---------------------------------------------- 4-192

When Replacing the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)------------------------------- 4-248

Fixing System--------------------------------------------------------------- 4-285

Removing the Fixing Unit------------------------------------------------------ 4-285

Pickup Feed System------------------------------------------------------ 4-309

Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.------------------------------------------------- 4-309

Removing the Left Deck-------------------------------------------------------- 4-317

External Auxiliary System------------------------------------------------ 4-339

Removing the Lower Rear Cover-------------------------------------------- 4-346

Removing the DADF Unit------------------------------------------------------ 4-350

When clearing RAM--------------------------------------------------------- 5-14

List of Initial Check Items--------------------------------------------------------- 6-2